JP2023073335A - game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a game machine capable of increasing a player's interest in a game.

SOLUTION: When identification information for indicating a specific determination result is stopped and displayed on display means for displaying the identification information for indicating the determination result by determination means, a privilege advantageous to a player is imparted by privilege imparting means. Based on the fact that operation means operable by the player is operated, a performance is executed by performance executing means, and determination means that can change the execution timing at which a performance is executed by the performance executing means is provided. Thereby, a player's interest in a game can be increased.

SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 1

COPYRIGHT: (C)2023,JPO&INPIT

Description

The present invention relates to a game machine represented by a pachinko machine.

2. Description of the Related Art Some gaming machines such as pachinko machines have operation means, and there are gaming machines that execute various settings based on the operation result of the operation means. In such a game machine, an attempt was made to improve interest by operating the operating means.

JP 2012-249877 A

However, further enhancement of interest is required.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of a player in playing a game.

In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine of claim 1 comprises a discrimination means capable of performing discrimination, a display means for displaying identification information for indicating the discrimination result by the discrimination means, and a specified an operation means that can be operated by a player, and an operation means that can be operated by a player; It has a performance executing means capable of executing a performance based on the operation of the means, and a determining means capable of varying and determining the execution timing of executing the performance by the performance executing means.

The game machine according to claim 2 is the game machine according to claim 1, wherein the movable means is configured to be movable as the effect, and the movable means is moved in a predetermined movable pattern by the effect executing means. It is configured to be movable.

The game machine according to claim 3 is the game machine according to claim 1 or 2, wherein the notification mode executing means is capable of executing the notification mode in a period from when the operation means is operated until the performance is started. It has

According to the gaming machine of claim 1, there is provided a determination means capable of performing determination, a display means for displaying identification information for indicating the determination result by the determination means, and a specific determination result displayed on the display means. a privilege granting means capable of granting a privilege advantageous to the player when the identification information for indicating is stopped and displayed, an operation means operable by the player, and the operation means operated by the player. It has a performance executing means capable of executing a performance based on the fact, and a determining means capable of varying and determining the execution timing of executing the performance by the performance executing means.

As a result, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

According to the gaming machine of claim 2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine of claim 1, the following effects are achieved. That is, the movable means configured to be movable as the performance, and the movable means are configured to be movable in a predetermined movement pattern by the performance executing means.

As a result, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

According to the gaming machine of claim 3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine of claim 1 or 2, the following effects are achieved. That is, it has a notification mode executing means capable of executing the notification mode during a period from when the operation means is operated until the performance is started.

As a result, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

1 is a front view of a pachinko machine according to a first embodiment; FIG. 1 is a front view of a game board of a pachinko machine; FIG. It is a rear view of the pachinko machine. 1 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a pachinko machine; FIG. It is an exploded front perspective view of the game board and the operation unit. It is an exploded back perspective view of the game board and the operation unit. FIG. 4 is a front view of the operating unit; FIG. 4 is a front view of the operating unit; FIG. 4 is a front view of the operating unit; FIG. 4 is a front view of the operating unit; FIG. 4 is a front view of the operating unit; (a) and (b) are cross-sectional views of the game board and the action unit along line XIIa-XIIa in FIG. 10(a) and 10(b) are cross-sectional views of the game board and the action unit taken along line XIIIa-XIIIa in FIG. 9. FIG. FIG. 10 is a cross-sectional view of the game board and action units taken along line XIV-XIV in FIG. 9; (a) is a rear perspective view of the displacement restricting device, (b) is a front perspective view of the displacement restricting device, and (c) is a front perspective view of the displacement restricting device. It is an exploded rear perspective view of the displacement restricting device. It is an exploded front perspective view of a displacement restricting device. (a) is a rear view of a contact member, (b) is a front view of a guide member, and (c) is a front view of an operating member. 1 is a front perspective view of a pachinko machine; FIG. It is a rear view of a game board and an operation unit. 21(a) and 21(b) are cross-sectional views of the game board and the action unit taken along line XXIa-XXIa of FIG. 20; It is an exploded front perspective view of the game board and the firing effect unit. It is an exploded rear perspective view of the game board and the firing effect unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of the firing effect unit. It is an exploded rear perspective view of the firing effect unit. (a) is a side view of the first light irradiation device as viewed in the direction of arrow R in FIG. 25, and (b) is a side view of the second light irradiation device as viewed in the direction of arrow L in FIG. FIG. 3 is a cross-sectional view of the game board and the firing unit taken along line XXVII-XXVII of FIG. 2; It is a front exploded perspective view of an injection device. It is a front exploded perspective view of an injection device. It is a front exploded perspective view of an injection device. It is a back exploded perspective view of an injection device. It is a back exploded perspective view of an injection device. It is a back exploded perspective view of an injection device. 34(a) is a plan view of the transmission arm member and the lid member as viewed in the direction of arrow XXXIVa in FIG. 28, and FIG. 34(b) is a side view of the transmission arm member and the lid member as viewed in the direction of arrow XXXIVb in FIG. 34(a); and (c) is a partial cross-sectional view of the transmission arm member and the lid member taken along line XXXIVc-XXXIVc of FIG. 34(b). 35(a) is a plan view of the transmission arm member and the lid member as viewed in the direction of arrow XXXIVa in FIG. 28, and (b) is a side view of the transmission arm member and the lid member as viewed in the direction of arrow XXXVb in FIG. 35(a); and (c) is a partial cross-sectional view of the transmission arm member and the lid member taken along line XXXVc-XXXVc of FIG. 35(b). 36(a) is a plan view of the transmission arm member and the lid member as viewed in the direction of arrow XXXIVa in FIG. 28, and FIG. 36(b) is a side view of the transmission arm member and the lid member as viewed in the direction of arrow XXXVIb in FIG. 36(a); and (c) is a partial cross-sectional view of the transmission arm member and the lid member taken along line XXXVIc-XXXVIc of FIG. 36(b). (a) is a plan view of the front transmission member viewed in the direction of arrow XXXVIIa in FIG. 28, and (b) is a plan view of the rear transmission member viewed in the direction of arrow XXXVIIb in FIG. FIG. 29 is a plan view of the injection device as viewed in the direction of arrow XXXVIIa in FIG. 28; FIG. 29 is a plan view of the injection device as viewed in the direction of arrow XXXVIIa in FIG. 28; FIG. 29 is a plan view of the injection device as viewed in the direction of arrow XXXVIIa in FIG. 28; FIG. 29 is a plan view of the injection device as viewed in the direction of arrow XXXVIIa in FIG. 28; 29(a) to (f) are plan views of the linear motion member, the collision member, the contact member, and the front side transmission member as viewed in the direction of arrow XXXVIIa in FIG. 28. FIG. 29(a) to (e) are plan views of the linear motion member, the collision member, the contact member, and the front side transmission member as viewed in the direction of arrow XXXVIIa in FIG. 28. FIG. 29(a) to (f) are plan views of the rear transmission member, the transmission arm member, and the lid member as viewed in the direction of arrow XXXVIIb in FIG. 28. FIG. FIG. 29 is a plan view of the injection device as viewed in the direction of arrow XXXVIIa in FIG. 28; The output state of the detection sensor, the arrangement of the linear motion member, the arrangement of the collision member, the arrangement of the projecting part of the abutment member, and the arrangement of the cylindrical projection of the transmission arm member in accordance with the rotation of the front transmission member and the rear transmission member It is a diagram showing a time-measurement change of. Fig. 10 is a front perspective view of the scaling unit; Fig. 10 is a front perspective view of the scaling unit; FIG. 4 is a rear perspective view of the scaling unit; FIG. 4 is a rear perspective view of the scaling unit; FIG. 4 is a front exploded perspective view of the enlarging/reducing unit; FIG. 4 is a rear exploded perspective view of the enlarging/reducing unit; It is a front exploded perspective view of a production member. It is a rear exploded perspective view of a production member. It is a front view of a function board part. It is a front view of a rotating plate. It is a side view of a rotating plate. (a) is a front perspective view of the telescopic displacement member and the shielding design member, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the telescopic displacement member and the shielding design member. (a) is a front perspective view of the telescopic displacement member and the shielding design member, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the telescopic displacement member and the shielding design member. It is a front view of a function board part. It is a front view of a function board part. It is a front view of a scaling unit. It is a front view of a scaling unit. It is a front view of a scaling unit. FIG. 4 is a rear view of the scaling unit; FIG. 4 is a rear view of the scaling unit; FIG. 4 is a rear view of the scaling unit; It is a front view of a scaling unit. FIG. 4 is a rear view of the scaling unit; It is a front view of a scaling unit. FIG. 4 is a rear view of the scaling unit; (a) and (b) are rear views of the production member. It is a rear view of a production|presentation member. (a) is a back view of the production member, and (b) is a top view of the production member as viewed in the direction of arrow LXXIVb in FIG. 74(a). (a) is a back view of the production member, and (b) is a top view of the production member as viewed in the direction of arrow LXXVb in FIG. 75(a). FIG. 76 is a cross-sectional view of the effect member taken along line LXXVI-LXXVI in FIG. 75; Fig. 2 is a front perspective view of a displacement rotation unit; FIG. 11 is a rear perspective view of the displacement rotation unit; FIG. 3 is a front exploded perspective view of a displacement rotation unit; FIG. 4 is a rear exploded perspective view of the displacement/rotation unit; FIG. 4 is an exploded front perspective view of a lateral slide member; FIG. 4 is an exploded rear perspective view of a lateral slide member; FIG. 8 is a partial cross-sectional view of the displacement rotation unit taken along line LXXXIII-LXXXIII of FIG. 7; It is a perspective view of a wiring arm member. 4 is a perspective view of a path forming member of the wiring guide member; FIG. 86(a) is a side view of the displacement/rotation unit viewed in the direction of arrow L in FIG. 77, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the displacement/rotation unit taken along line LXXXVIb-LXXXVIb of FIG. 86(a). 87(a) is a side view of the displacement/rotation unit viewed in the direction of arrow L in FIG. 77, and (b) is a sectional view of the displacement/rotation unit taken along line LXXXVIIb-LXXXVIIb of FIG. 87(a). 88(a) is a side view of the displacement/rotation unit viewed in the direction of arrow L in FIG. 77, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the displacement/rotation unit taken along line LXXXVIIIb-LXXXVIIIb in FIG. 88(a). 89(a) is a side view of the displacement/rotation unit viewed in the direction of arrow L in FIG. 77, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the displacement/rotation unit taken along line LXXXIXb-LXXXIXb in FIG. 89(a). It is an exploded front perspective view of the game board. It is an exploded rear perspective view of the game board. FIG. 4 is an exploded front perspective view of a center frame, light guide plate rendering means, and decoration means; FIG. 4 is an exploded front perspective view of a center frame, light guide plate rendering means, and decoration means; 4 is an exploded rear perspective view of the center frame, light guide plate rendering means, and decoration means; FIG. 4 is an exploded rear perspective view of the center frame, light guide plate rendering means, and decoration means; FIG. FIG. 3 is a cross-sectional view of the game board and the action unit taken along line XCVI-XCVI in FIG. 2; 3 is a partially enlarged front view of the first decorative member in the range XCVII of FIG. 2; FIG. It is a front view of the game board in the second embodiment. FIG. 11 is a front view of an enlarging/reducing unit in the third embodiment; It is a front view of a rotating plate. The output state of the detection sensor, the arrangement of the linear motion member, the arrangement of the collision member, the arrangement of the protruded portion of the contact member, and the circle of the transmission arm member according to the rotation of the front transmission member and the rear transmission member in the fourth embodiment. It is the figure which showed the chronological change of arrangement|positioning of a columnar protrusion. The output state of the detection sensor, the arrangement of the linear motion member, the arrangement of the collision member, the arrangement of the projecting portion of the contact member, and the circle of the transmission arm member accompanying the rotation of the front transmission member and the rear transmission member in the fifth embodiment. It is the figure which showed the chronological change of arrangement|positioning of a columnar protrusion. FIG. 10 is a cross-sectional view of the game board and the shooting unit in the sixth embodiment taken along line XXVII-XXVII of FIG. 2; It is a rear view of the pachinko machine in 7th Embodiment. FIG. 21 is a front perspective view of a board box in a seventh embodiment; Fig. 2 is a rear perspective view of the board box; (a) is a front view of a board box, and (b) is a side view of the board box. Fig. 4 is a front perspective view of a box cover; It is a back perspective view of a box cover. 109. (a) is a partially enlarged front view of the box cover as viewed in the direction of arrow CXa in FIG. 108, and (b) is a partially enlarged rear view of the box cover as viewed in the direction of arrow CXb in FIG. (a) is a front perspective view of a box base, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the box base. (a) is a front perspective view of the main controller, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the main controller. FIG. 113 is a partially enlarged front perspective view of the main controller in section CXIII of FIG. 112(a); (a) is a front view of the main controller viewed in the direction of arrow CXIVa in FIG. 112(a), and (b) is a side view of the main controller viewed in the direction of arrow CXIVb in FIG. 114(a); 114(c) is a side view of the main controller viewed in the direction of arrow CXIVc in FIG. 114(a). (a) is a partially enlarged front view of the board box with the key operated to the off position, and (b) is a partially enlarged front view of the board box with the key operated to the on position. 115(a) is a partially enlarged side view of the board box viewed in the direction of arrow CXVIa in FIG. 115(a), and (b) is a partially enlarged side view of the board box viewed in the direction of arrow CXVIb in FIG. 115(b). be. 115(a) is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the substrate box along the cutting line CXVIIa-CXVIIa of FIG. 115(a), and (b) is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the substrate box along the cutting line CXVIIb-CXVIIb of FIG. 115(a); It is a diagram. 115(a) is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the substrate box along the cutting line CXVIIIa-CXVIIIa in FIG. 115(a), and (b) is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the substrate box along the cutting line CXVIIIb-CXVIIIb in FIG. 115(a); It is a diagram. 116(a) is a partially enlarged sectional view of the board box taken along the cutting line CXIXa-CXIXa of FIG. 116(a), and (b) is a partially enlarged sectional view of the board box taken along the cutting line CXIXb-CXIXb of FIG. 116(a); It is a diagram. 1 is a front perspective view of a pachinko machine; FIG. 121(a) is a partially enlarged rear view of the board box in the eighth embodiment, and (b) is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the board box taken along the cutting line CXXIb-CXXIb of FIG. 121(a). (a) is a front view of a board box in a ninth embodiment, and (b) is a schematic front view of a pachinko machine. (a) is a front view of a board box in a tenth embodiment, and (b) is a schematic front view of a pachinko machine. It is a front view of the pachinko machine in the first control example. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the first control example. It is an exploded perspective view of a variable winning device. (a) is a La-La sectional view of the variable winning device, (b) is an Lb-Lb sectional view of the variable winning device, and (c) is a top view of the variable winning device. (a) is a rear view of the back cover body showing a state in which the switching member is actuated so that game balls are distributed to the special discharge channel; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a state in which the guide piece of the switching member blocks the opening surface of the entrance of the discharge channel; (a) is a diagram schematically showing area division setting and valid line setting of a display screen, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of an actual display screen. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode of a start screen for repeated button-press effects, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode of a screen for reaching the upper limit of repeated button-press effects. (a) is a view showing an example of the display mode of the button repeated effect result screen No. 1, and (b) is a view showing an example of the display mode of the button repeated effect result screen No. 2. FIG. (a) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode of the continuous button press effect after reaching the upper limit, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode of the follow-up screen during the button repeated effect. It is a figure and (c) is the figure which showed the content of effect setting. (a) is a diagram showing an icon displayable area, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of a suggested mode display screen for icon display effects. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a screen on which the first icon is displayed in the icon display effect, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of the effect result of the icon display effect. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a screen showing another pattern of icon display effect; (a) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode of a button effect start screen, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode of a normal pattern when pressing a button effect. (a) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode of the delay pattern when the button effect is pressed, and (b) is a view showing an example of the display mode of the delay pattern 0.8 seconds after the button effect is pressed. It is a diagram. It is a diagram showing an example of a display mode when the effective period has elapsed during the button effect delay waiting. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a group effect start screen, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of an obtainable character display screen. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a character acquisition screen, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of a group effect end screen. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a last acquisition chance screen, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of a last GET screen. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a battle production start screen, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of a weak attack screen during a battle production. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a strong attack screen during battle production, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of a boss defeat screen during battle production. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a boss escape screen in a battle presentation, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of a co-fighting screen in a battle presentation. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a 14-second pseudo-off effect, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of restart from a pseudo-off stop. It is the timing chart which showed the flow of the button operation content and production|presentation in repeated hit production|presentation. It is the timing chart which showed the flow of each aspect of button production|presentation. It is a timing chart showing the flow of each aspect of the collective production. It is a timing chart showing the flow of the battle production. It is a timing chart showing the flow of pseudo-out performance. FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the game flow of the pachinko machine in the first control example; It is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine in the first control example. 3 is a schematic diagram schematically showing counters and the like provided in a RAM 203 of the main controller 110. FIG. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the ROM of the main controller in the first control example, and (b) schematically shows the configuration of the RAM of the main controller in the first control example. It is a schematic diagram. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a first winning random number table in the first control example, and (b) schematically shows the contents of the first winning type selection table in the first control example. FIG. 10C is a schematic diagram showing a second winning random number table in the first control example; FIG. FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of a variation pattern selection table in the first control example; FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a normal table in the first control example; It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the table for time saving and probability variation in a 1st control example. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the ROM of the audio ramp control device in the first control example, and (b) is the schematic diagram showing the configuration of the RAM of the audio ramp control device in the first control example. 2 is a schematic diagram shown in FIG. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of a variable effect pattern selection table in the first control example, and (b) schematically shows the contents of a normal effect pattern table in the first control example. It is a schematic diagram. FIG. 11 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a time saving/probability variable production pattern table in the first control example; (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of a repeated hit effect selection table in the first control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the upper limit number of times selection table in the first control example. It is a diagram. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the number of times of ending selection table in the first control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the effect result selection table in the first control example. It is a diagram. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of a random display effect selection table in the first control example, and (b) schematically shows the contents of the effect icon storage area in the first control example. FIG. 4C is a schematic diagram, and FIG. 4C is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a display order selection table in the first control example; (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a permutation storage area in the first control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a display mode selection table in the first control example. is. FIG. 10 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a display number selection table in the first control example; It is a schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the delay production|presentation selection table in a 1st control example. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of a group effect selection table in the first control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a character storage area in the first control example. , and (c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the character number selection table in the first control example. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of a battle effect selection table in the first control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the HP selection table in the first control example. and (c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a final remaining HP selection table in the first control example. FIG. 11 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a battle mode selection table in the first control example; 2 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a display control device in a first control example; FIG. (a) to (c) are explanatory diagrams for explaining a power-on image. (a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the rear surface A, and (b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the rear surfaces BD. FIG. 5 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a display data table in the first control example; FIG. 5 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a transfer data table in the first control example; FIG. 10 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a drawing list in the first control example; 7 is a flow chart showing timer interrupt processing executed by the MPU in the main control unit in the first control example; It is the flowchart which showed the special design fluctuation|variation process performed by MPU in the main-control apparatus in the 1st example of control. FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing a game state update process executed by an MPU in the main control device in the first control example; FIG. It is the flowchart which showed the special design fluctuation|variation start processing performed by MPU in the main-control apparatus in the 1st example of control. FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing a starting prize-winning process executed by an MPU in a main controller in the first control example; FIG. 8 is a flowchart showing prefetching processing executed by the MPU in the main controller in the first control example; It is a flow chart showing normal symbol variation processing executed by the MPU in the main control device in the first control example. 4 is a flow chart showing through gate passage processing executed by the MPU in the main controller in the first control example; 4 is a flowchart showing NMI interrupt processing executed by the MPU in the main control unit in the first control example; 7 is a flow chart showing startup processing executed by an MPU in the main controller in the first control example; 7 is a flow chart showing main processing executed by the MPU in the main controller in the first control example; It is the flowchart which showed the jackpot control processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in the 1st example of control. It is the flowchart which showed the big-hit operation|movement setting process performed by MPU in the main-control apparatus in a 1st control example. 4 is a flow chart showing an ending process executed by an MPU in the main controller in the first control example; FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing a winning process executed by an MPU in the main controller in the first control example; FIG. 7 is a flowchart showing abnormality processing executed by the MPU in the main controller in the first control example; FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing startup processing executed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device in the first control example; FIG. 8 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the first control example; 8 is a flowchart showing command determination processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the first control example; 10 is a flow chart showing winning information related processing executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the first control example. It is the flowchart which showed the jackpot related processing performed by MPU in the sound lamp control apparatus in a 1st control example. 8 is a flowchart showing stop processing executed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device in the first control example; 8 is a flowchart showing a variable display setting process executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the first control example; FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing an effect mode setting process executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the first control example; FIG. 9 is a flow chart showing operation effect setting processing executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the first control example; FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing repeated hit effect setting processing executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the first control example; FIG. It is the flowchart which showed the delay production setting process which is executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the first control example. 10 is a flow chart showing battle effect setting processing executed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device in the first control example; FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing a second half battle effect setting process executed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device in the first control example; FIG. It is the flowchart which showed the production|presentation setting processing for time reduction and probability variation performed by MPU in the audio|voice lamp control apparatus in a 1st control example. 10 is a flowchart showing random display effect setting processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the first control example; 10 is a flow chart showing frame button input monitoring/effect processing executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the first control example. It is the flowchart which showed the liquid crystal production|presentation execution management process performed by MPU in the sound lamp control apparatus in a 1st control example. FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing operation effect management processing executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the first control example; FIG. 8 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example; 8 is a flowchart showing boot processing executed by an MPU in the display control device in the first control example; (a) is a flowchart showing command interrupt processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example, (b) is a flow chart executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example; 4 is a flow chart showing V interrupt processing. 8 is a flowchart showing command determination processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example; (a) is a flowchart showing a variation pattern command process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example, (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example 10 is a flowchart showing stop type command processing. 10 is a flow chart showing a display jackpot-related command process executed by an MPU in the display control device in the first control example; (a) is a flowchart showing opening command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example, (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example; FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing round number command processing; FIG. (a) is a flowchart showing ending command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example, (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example; 10 is a flow chart showing V effect command processing. (a) is a flowchart showing rear image change command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example; (b) is a flowchart executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example; 10 is a flow chart showing error command processing performed. 8 is a flowchart showing display setting processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example; 9 is a flowchart showing warning image setting processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example; 8 is a flowchart showing pointer update processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example; (a) is a flowchart showing a transfer setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example, (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example; 10 is a flowchart showing resident image transfer setting processing; 10 is a flowchart showing normal image transfer setting processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example; 8 is a flowchart showing drawing processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example; (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing various devices of a pachinko machine in a second control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of an injection device. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a state in which the effect member is positioned at the operating position, and (b) is a state in which the effect member is positioned at the operating position and the divided motion is executed. FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram schematically showing a state in which the injection device is driven and the granular member is injected. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a state in which the production member moves to the standby position and the granular member returns to the storage area, and (b) is a state in which the rotating member is being driven; 2 is a schematic diagram schematically showing a state in which an injection device is driven and granular members are injected; FIG. FIG. 10 is a schematic diagram schematically showing various devices and effect contents of the pachinko machine in the second control example; FIG. 11 is a timing chart schematically showing states of various devices of the pachinko machine according to the passage of time when a series of accessory effects are executed in the second control example; FIG. FIG. 11 is a timing chart schematically showing the flow of operation control of the launching accessory at the time of start-up in the second control example; FIG. FIG. 11 is a timing chart schematically showing the flow of motion control of a shooting accessory during a series of role presentations in the second control example; FIG. FIG. 11 is a timing chart schematically showing an abnormality determination result during a series of character performances and the flow of performances to be executed in the second control example; FIG. It is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine in the second control example. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the ROM of the audio ramp control device in the second control example, and (b) is the schematic diagram showing the configuration of the RAM of the audio ramp control device in the second control example. 2 is a schematic diagram shown in FIG. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of a role product action table in the second control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of an abnormality determination table in the second control example. is. FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing start-up processing 2 executed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device in the second control example; FIG. 9 is a flow chart showing initial operation processing executed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device in the second control example; FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing main processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the second control example; FIG. FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing effect mode setting processing 2 executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the second control example; FIG. 13 is a flow chart showing character product effect setting processing executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the second control example; 13 is a flow chart showing a role product effect management process executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the second control example; It is the flowchart which showed the abnormality determination processing during the production|presentation performed by MPU in the sound lamp control apparatus in a 2nd control example. It is the flowchart which showed the abnormality determination process during the 2nd production|presentation performed by MPU in a sound lamp control apparatus in a 2nd control example. It is the flowchart which showed the liquid crystal production|presentation execution management process 2 performed by MPU in the sound lamp control apparatus in a 2nd control example. FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing operation effect management processing 2 executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the second control example; FIG. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode of a screen for starting a repeated button-press effect in a first modified example, and (b) is a view showing an example of a display mode of a screen prompting a specific operation during the repeated button-press effect. It is a diagram. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode when a specific operation is performed after reaching the upper limit in the first modification, and (b) is a view showing an example of a display mode when a specific operation is performed before reaching the upper limit. It is a diagram showing. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode immediately before the valid period expires without execution of a specific operation in the first modification, and (b) is a display mode when the valid period ends without execution of a specific operation. It is the figure which showed an example. It is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine in the third control example. 13 is a flowchart showing command determination processing 3 executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the third control example; FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing end command reception processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the third control example; FIG. FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing variable display setting processing 3 executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the third control example; FIG. FIG. 13 is a flow chart showing display variation pattern command setting processing executed by an MPU in the sound lamp control device in the third control example; FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing V interrupt processing 3 executed by the MPU in the display control device in the third control example; 13 is a flowchart showing command determination processing 3 executed by the MPU in the display control device in the third control example; FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing press command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the third control example; FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing timer setting processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the third control example; It is the flowchart which showed the production|presentation timer update process performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in a 3rd control example. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the variation pattern selection 4 table in the fourth control example, and (b) schematically shows the contents of the normal 4 table in the fourth control example It is a schematic diagram, and (c) is a schematic diagram which showed typically 4 tables for time saving and probability variation in a 4th control example. It is the flowchart which showed the special design fluctuation|variation process 4 performed by MPU in the main-control apparatus in the 4th control example. It is the flowchart which showed the special design fluctuation|variation start processing 4 performed by MPU in the main control unit in the 4th control example. It is the flowchart which showed the special design lottery process performed by MPU in the main control unit in the 4th control example. FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing command determination processing 4 executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the fourth control example; FIG. FIG. 14 is a flow chart showing result command processing executed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device in the third control example; FIG. (a) is a diagram showing an example of an obtainable character display screen in a modification of the first control example, and (b) is an obtainable character display screen of a chance UP pattern in a modification of the first control example. It is the figure which showed an example. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an example of an obtainable character display screen of a combination that confirms a big win in a modified example of the first control example; FIG. 11 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of a character storage area in a modified example of the first control example; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing the defined contents of the character lottery table in the modified example of the first control example; It is the figure which showed the defined content of the number lottery table in the modification of the 1st control example. 10 is a flowchart showing battle effect setting processing 5 executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the modified example of the first control example; FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing array setting processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the modified example of the first control example; FIG. FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing number setting processing executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the modified example of the first control example; FIG. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a display mode in a modified example of icon display effect; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing the prescribed contents of an enlargement rate selection table in a modified example of icon display effect; 13 is a flow chart showing a random display effect setting process A executed by an MPU in the sound lamp control device in a modified example of icon display effect; (a) is a diagram showing an example of a demonstration effect state in the modified example of the effect of the projectile accessory. (b) is a diagram showing an example of the end processing of the demonstration effect state in the modified example of the effect of the projectile accessory. (a) is a diagram showing a state in which the projectile accessory is positioned at the reference position in the modification of the performance of the projectile accessory. (b) is a diagram showing a state in which the projectile accessory is positioned at the preparation A position in the modification of the performance of the projectile accessory. (c) is a diagram showing a state in which the projectile accessory is positioned at the preparation B position in the modification of the performance of the projectile accessory. 14 is a flow chart showing a role performance management process B executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the modified example of the performance of the shooting role. It is the flowchart which showed the production|presentation mode setting process B performed by MPU in a sound lamp control apparatus in the production|presentation modification of a shooting accessory.

BEST MODE FOR CARRYING OUT THE INVENTION Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, an embodiment in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko game machine (hereinafter simply referred to as "pachinko machine") 10 will be described as a first embodiment with reference to FIGS. 1 to 97. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of a game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10. FIG.

In the following description, with respect to the pachinko machine 10 in the state shown in FIG. 1, the front side of the paper is defined as the front (front) side, and the back side of the paper is defined as the rear (rear) side. Also, with respect to the pachinko machine 10 in the state shown in FIG. ) side. Further, arrows UD, LR, and FB in the drawing (see, for example, FIG. 2) indicate the up-down direction, left-right direction, and front-rear direction of the pachinko machine 10, respectively.

As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer frame 11 whose outer shell is formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer frame 11 formed in substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11. and an inner frame 12 supported so as to be openable and closable. In order to support the inner frame 12, the outer frame 11 is provided with metal hinges 18 at two upper and lower positions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1). A frame 12 is supported toward the front side so that it can be opened and closed.

A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning slots 63 and 64, etc. is detachably attached to the inner frame 12 from the back side. Balls (game balls) flow down in front of the game board 13 to play a pinball game. The inner frame 12 includes a ball shooting unit 112a (see FIG. 4) that shoots a ball to the front area of the game board 13, and a shooting unit that guides the ball shot from the ball shooting unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13. A rail (not shown) or the like is attached.

On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 covering the front upper side and a lower tray unit 15 covering the lower side are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower tray unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached at two upper and lower positions on the left side of the front view (see FIG. 1). 14 and a lower tray unit 15 are supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side. The locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are respectively released by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

The front frame 14 is assembled with decorative resin parts, electric parts, and the like, and has a window portion 14c having a substantially elliptical opening at its substantially central portion. A glass unit 16 having two sheet glasses is arranged on the back side of the front frame 14, and the front side of the game board 13 can be visually recognized on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.例文帳に追加

The front frame 14 has an upper tray 17 for storing balls projected to the front side and formed in a substantially box-like shape with an open upper surface, and the upper tray 17 discharges prize balls, rental balls, and the like. The bottom surface of the upper tray 17 is inclined downward to the right when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the inclination guides the ball thrown into the upper tray 17 to the ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 4). A frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17 . The frame button 22 is operated by the player when, for example, the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) is changed, or the content of the super ready-to-win effect is changed. be.

The front frame 14 is provided with light-emitting means such as various lamps around its periphery (for example, corner portions). These light emitting means are controlled to change the light emitting mode by lighting or blinking in response to changes in the game state such as when a big win is made or when a predetermined ready-to-win state is reached, and play a role of enhancing the effect during the game. Illuminated portions 29 to 33 containing light emitting means such as LEDs are provided on the periphery of the window portion 14c. In the pachinko machine 10, these electric decoration parts 29 to 33 function as production lamps such as big win lamps, and the respective electric decoration parts 29 to 33 are lit by lighting or blinking of built-in LEDs at the time of a big win or a ready-to-win production. Alternatively, it flashes to indicate that the jackpot is in progress or that the player is in the process of reaching one step before the jackpot. In addition, an indicator lamp 34 is provided at the upper left portion of the front frame 14 when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1). The display lamp 34 has a built-in light emitting means such as an LED and can indicate that prize balls are being paid out and that an error has occurred.

In addition, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized on the lower side of the right electrical decoration part 32, and a pasting space K1 (Fig. 2) can be visually recognized from the front of the pachinko machine 10. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, a plated member 36 made of ABS resin, which is plated with chromium, is attached to the area around the electric decorations 29 to 33 in order to create more splendor.

A ball rental operation unit 40 is arranged below the window portion 14c. The ball rental operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41 , a ball rental button 42 and a return button 43 . When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated with banknotes, cards, etc. inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the balls are released according to the operation. Lending is done. Specifically, the frequency display section 41 is an area in which the balance information of the card or the like is displayed, and the built-in LED is turned on to display the remaining amount in numbers as the balance information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain lending balls based on information recorded on a card or the like (recording medium), and lending balls are supplied to the top tray 17 as long as the card or the like has a balance. be done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of the card or the like inserted in the card unit. A pachinko machine in which balls are directly lent to the upper tray 17 from a ball leasing device or the like without going through the card unit, that is, a so-called cash machine, does not require the ball leasing operation unit 40. A decorative seal or the like may be added to the installation portion to make the parts configuration common. It is possible to achieve commonality between a pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine.

In the lower tray unit 15 positioned below the upper tray 17, a lower tray 50 for storing balls that could not be stored in the upper tray 17 is formed in a substantially box-like shape with an open upper surface. there is On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 is provided which is operated by the player to hit the ball in front of the game board 13. As shown in FIG.

Inside the operating handle 51, there are a touch sensor 51a for permitting the driving of the ball shooting unit 112a, a shooting stop switch 51b for stopping the shooting of the ball during the pressing operation, and a rotation of the operating handle 51. A variable resistor (not shown) for detecting a dynamic operation amount (rotational position) based on a change in electrical resistance is incorporated. When the operating handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes corresponding to the amount of rotation operation. A ball is shot with a strength (shooting intensity) corresponding to , and is hit in front of the game board 13 with a flying distance corresponding to the player's operation. Further, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the firing stop switch 51b are turned off.

A ball extraction lever 52 is provided at the lower front portion of the lower tray 50 for operation when discharging the balls stored in the lower tray 50 downward. The ball extracting lever 52 is always biased to the right, and when it is slid to the left against the bias, the bottom opening formed in the bottom of the lower tray 50 is opened. The ball naturally falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball extracting lever 52 is normally performed with a box (generally called a "senryo box") placed below the lower tray 50 to receive the balls ejected from the lower tray 50 . The operation handle 51 is arranged on the right side of the lower tray 50 as described above, and the ashtray 53 is attached on the left side of the lower tray 50 .

As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 includes a base plate 60 which is cut into a substantially square shape when viewed from the front. , 62, a general prize-winning port 63, a first prize-winning port 64, a second prize-winning port 640, a variable prize-winning device 65, a through gate 67, a variable display device unit 80, etc. 1) is attached to the back side (or front side).

The base plate 60 is formed from a wooden plate member. The general winning port 63, the first winning port 64, the second winning port 640, and the variable display device unit 80 are arranged in through holes (see, for example, FIG. 5) formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and are arranged on the game board. It is fixed by a tapping screw or the like from the front side of 13 . Note that the base plate 60 may be made of a light-transmitting resin material. In this case, it is possible for the player to visually recognize various structures arranged on the back side of the base plate 60 from the front side.

The front central portion of the game board 13 can be viewed from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. As shown in FIG. Mainly referring to FIG. 2, the configuration of the game board 13 will be described below.

In front of the game board 13, an outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially circular arc is planted, and a strip-shaped metal plate is placed inside the outer rail 62 in the same manner as the outer rail 62. An arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed by is erected. The front outer periphery of the game board 13 is surrounded by the inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62, and the front and rear sides are surrounded by the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1). A game area is formed in which a game is played by the behavior of . The game area is the front surface of the game board 13 and is defined by two rails 61 and 62 and a resin outer edge member 73 connecting the rails (a winning opening is provided and a shot is fired). area where the ball flows down).

The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the balls shot from the ball shooting unit 112a (see FIG. 4) to the upper part of the game board 13. As shown in FIG. A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the tip of the inner rail 61 (upper left part in FIG. 2) to prevent the ball once guided to the upper part of the game board 13 from returning into the ball guide passage again. be done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flying portion of the ball. is attenuated and rebounded toward the center.

First pattern display devices 37A and 37B having a plurality of LEDs as light emitting means and a 7-segment display are arranged in the lower left part of the game area when viewed from the front (lower left part in FIG. 2). The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B are for displaying according to each control performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4), and mainly display the game state of the pachinko machine 10. FIG. In this embodiment, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B are configured to be used properly depending on whether the ball has won the first prize winning port 64 or the second prize winning port 640.例文帳に追加Specifically, when the ball enters the first winning hole 64, the first symbol display device 37A operates, while when the ball enters the second winning hole 640, the first The pattern display device 37B is configured to operate.

In addition, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B use LEDs to indicate whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the variable probability, the time saving mode, or the normal state by the lighting state, or indicate whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the changing state by the lighting state. Whether the stop pattern is a pattern corresponding to the probability variable jackpot, a pattern corresponding to the normal jackpot, or a missing pattern is indicated by the lighting state, the number of pending balls is indicated by the lighting state, and a 7-segment display device indicates the round during the jackpot. Display numbers and errors. The plurality of LEDs are configured so that each LED has a different emission color (for example, red, green, and blue), and depending on the combination of the emission colors, it is possible to suggest various game states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs. can.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, a lottery is performed when a prize is won in the first prize winning port 64 and the second prize winning port 640.例文帳に追加In the lottery, the pachinko machine 10 determines whether or not it is a big win (big win lottery), and also determines the kind of big win when it is determined as a big win. As the jackpot type determined here, a 15R probability variable jackpot, a 4R probability variable jackpot, and a 15R normal jackpot are prepared. The first pattern display devices 37A and 37B not only indicate whether or not the result of the lottery is a jackpot as a stop pattern after the end of variation, but also indicate a pattern corresponding to the jackpot type when the jackpot is won. .

Here, the “15R probability variable jackpot” is a probability variable jackpot that shifts to a high probability state after the maximum number of rounds is 15 rounds, and the “4R probability variable jackpot” is a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 4 rounds. It is a variable jackpot that shifts to a high probability state after . In addition, "15R normal jackpot" is a jackpot that shifts to a low probability state after a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 15 rounds, and a time-saving state during a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 fluctuations). be.

In addition, the "high probability state" refers to a state in which the probability of a subsequent jackpot is increased as an added value after the end of the jackpot, a time during so-called probability fluctuation (probability change), in other words, a game that is easy to shift to a special game state It is the state of The high-probability state (during variable probability) in the present embodiment includes a game state in which the probability of winning a second symbol, which will be described later, is increased and the ball is likely to enter the second winning hole 640 . "Low probability state" refers to a state in which the odds are not variable, and the jackpot probability is normal, that is, a state in which the jackpot probability is lower than when the odds are variable. In addition, the time-saving state (during time-saving) of the "low-probability state" is a state in which the jackpot probability is normal, and the jackpot probability remains the same, but only the winning probability of the second symbol is increased, and the second winning port 640 It refers to the state of the game in which the ball is likely to win a prize. On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state, it means that the game is in a state of neither variable probability nor time reduction (state in which neither the jackpot probability nor the second pattern winning probability is increased).

During the probability change or the time reduction, not only the winning probability of the second symbol is increased, but also the time when the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is opened is changed, and the time is longer than during normal. set. When the electric accessory 640a is in the open state (open state), the balls enter the second winning port 640 more than when the electric accessory 640a is in the closed state (closed state). becomes easy. Therefore, during the probability change or the time reduction, the ball is likely to enter the second winning hole 640, and the number of times the big winning lottery is performed can be increased.

The state change between the open state and the closed state of the electric accessory 640a is caused by the opening/closing operation of the opening/closing plate which has a rotating shaft at the lower end and is rotationally displaced in a manner of tilting or standing toward the game area. When the electric accessory 640a is in the open state, the ball is easily guided to the second winning port 640 along the upper surface of the opening/closing plate, and when the electric accessory 640a is in the closed state, the opening/closing plate separates the game area and the second prize winning port 640. By closing the space between the second prize winning port 640 and the second prize winning port 640, it is difficult for the ball to enter the second prize winning port 640.例文帳に追加

In addition, instead of changing the opening time of the electric accessory 640a associated with the second winning opening 640 during the probability change or the time saving, or in addition to changing the opening time, A change may be made to increase the number of times the accessory 640a is released more than during normal times. In addition, the winning probability of the second symbol is not changed during the probability change or the time reduction, and the electric accessory 640a is opened at the time when the electric accessory 640a associated with the second winning opening 640 is opened and once. At least one of the number of times may be changed. In addition, during the probability change or the time reduction, the time for opening the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 and the number of times the electric accessory 640a is opened per time are not changed. Only the winning probability may be changed so as to be increased compared to normal.

The game area is provided with a plurality of general winning holes 63 through which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls win. A variable display device unit 80 is arranged at a position (behind the window portion of the base plate 60) that can be viewed through the central portion of the game area. In the variable display device unit 80, the winning (starting winning) to the first winning port 64 and the second winning port 640 is used as a trigger, and while synchronizing with the variable display on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the third symbol is displayed. It is composed of a third pattern display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply referred to as a "display device") that performs variable display, and an LED that variably displays the second pattern triggered by the passage of the ball through the through gate 67. A second pattern display device (not shown) is provided. A center frame 86 is arranged on the base plate 60 so as to surround the third pattern display device 81 when viewed from the front.

The third pattern display device 81 is composed of a large liquid crystal display with a size of about 9 inches to 19 inches. Three symbol rows, middle and bottom, are displayed. Each pattern row is composed of a plurality of patterns (third patterns), and these third patterns are horizontally scrolled for each pattern row to variably display the third pattern on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81.例文帳に追加It's like In the third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment, the game state is displayed by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B under the control of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4). Decorative display according to the display of the pattern display devices 37A and 37B is performed. Incidentally, instead of the display device, for example, the third symbol display device 81 may be constructed using a reel or the like.

The second pattern display device alternately lights up a symbol "O" and a symbol "X" as a display symbol (second symbol (not shown)) for a predetermined time each time the ball passes through the through gate 67. This is for variable display. In the pachinko machine 10, when it is detected that the ball has passed through the through gate 67, a winning lottery is performed. As a result of the winning lottery, if the winning lottery is won, the second symbol display device stops and displays the symbol "○" after the second symbol is variably displayed. Further, if the result of the winning lottery is a loss, the symbol "x" is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variable display of the third symbol.

In the pachinko machine 10, when the variable display on the second symbol display device stops at a predetermined symbol ("○" symbol in this embodiment), the electric accessory 640a associated with the second winning hole 640 is displayed for a predetermined period of time. is configured to be activated (opened) only.

The time required for the variable display of the second symbol is set so as to be shorter during the variable probability or during the time reduction than during the normal game state. As a result, the variable display of the second symbol is performed in a short time during the probability change and the time reduction, so that more winning lotteries can be performed than during normal times.
Therefore, the chance of winning in the winning lottery increases, so that the player can be given more opportunities to open the electric accessary 640a of the second winning opening 640.例文帳に追加Therefore, it is possible to create a state in which the ball is likely to enter the second winning hole 640 during the probability variation and the time saving.

In addition, during the probability change or the time reduction, other methods such as increasing the winning probability, increasing the opening time or the number of openings of the electric accessory 640a for one hit, etc. When the ball is in a state where it is easy to win a prize, the time required for the variable display of the second symbol may be fixed regardless of the game state. On the other hand, if the time required for the variable display of the second symbol is set shorter than normal during the variable probability or during the time saving, the winning probability may be constant regardless of the game state, and one winning The opening time and the number of openings of the electric accessory 640a may be constant regardless of the game state.

The through gate 67 is assembled to the game board 13 in the area on the right side of the variable display device unit 80, and is configured so that a part of the balls shot to the game board 13 can pass through. When the ball passes through the through gate 67, a winning lottery for the second symbol is performed. After the winning lottery, the variable display is performed on the second symbol display device, and if the result of the winning lottery is a win, the symbol "○" is displayed as a stop symbol of the variable display, and if the result of the winning lottery is a loss. For example, an "x" symbol is displayed as a variable display stop symbol.

The number of times the ball passes through the through gate 67 is suspended up to a total of four times, and the number of suspended balls is displayed by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B described above, and is displayed on the second symbol suspension lamp (not shown). is also displayed. Four second pattern holding lamps are provided for the maximum number of holdings, and are arranged symmetrically below the third pattern display device 81 .

In addition, the variable display of the second pattern is performed by switching lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second pattern display device as in the present embodiment. A part of the pattern display device 81 may be used. Similarly, the lighting of the second symbol reservation lamp may be performed by a part of the third symbol display device 81 .

Also, the maximum number of held balls to pass through the through gate 67 is not limited to four times, and may be set to three times or less, or five times or more (for example, eight times). Also, the number of through gates 67 to be assembled is not limited to one, and may be, for example, two.

Also, the mounting position of the through gate 67 is not limited to the right side of the variable display device unit 80, but may be, for example, the right and left sides of the variable display device unit 80, or the lower side. In addition, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the lighting display may not be performed by the second symbol reservation lamp.

Below the variable display device unit 80, a first winning hole 64 through which balls can win is arranged. When the ball enters the first winning hole 64, a first winning hole switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main controller 110 is caused to turn on the first winning hole switch. (See FIG. 4), a lottery for a big hit is made, and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37A.

On the other hand, on the lower right side of the through gate 67 when viewed from the front, a second winning hole 640 through which a ball can win is arranged. When the ball enters the second winning hole 640, a second winning hole switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main controller 110 is caused to turn on the second winning hole switch. (See FIG. 4), a lottery for a big win is made, and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37B. It should be noted that the arrangement of the second winning openings 640 is not limited to this. For example, it may be below the first prize winning opening 64 when viewed from the front, or it may be on the left side of the left-right center of the game area.

In addition, the first prize winning port 64 and the second prize winning port 640 are also one of the prize winning ports from which five balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls win. In this embodiment, the number of prize balls paid out when the balls enter the first prize winning port 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when the balls enter the second prize winning port 640 are configured to be the same. , the number of prize balls paid out when the balls enter the first prize winning port 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when the balls enter the second prize winning port 640 are different numbers, for example, the number of balls to the first prize winning port 64 The number of prize balls to be paid out when is won may be set to three, and the number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball enters the second prize winning port 640 may be set to be five.

An electric accessory 640a is attached to the second prize winning port 640. - 特許庁This electric accessory 640a is configured to be openable and closable, and normally the electric accessory 640a is in a closed state (reduced state), making it difficult for the ball to enter the second winning opening 640. On the other hand, as a result of the variable display of the second symbol triggered by the passage of the ball through the through gate 67, when the symbol "○" is displayed on the second symbol display device, the electric accessory 640a is in the open state (enlarged state), which makes it easier for the ball to enter the second winning hole 640.例文帳に追加

As described above, during the probability variation and during the time saving, the probability of hitting the second symbol is higher than during normal, and the time required for the variation display of the second symbol is short, so in the variation display of the second symbol "○ ” is more likely to be displayed, and the number of times the electric accessory 640a is in the open state (enlarged state) increases. Furthermore, the time during which the electric accessory 640a is opened is also longer during the variable probability and the shorter working hours than during the normal time. Therefore, it is possible to create a state in which the ball is more likely to enter the second winning hole 640 during the variable probability and the shorter working hours compared to the normal time.

Here, when the ball enters the first prize winning port 64 and when the ball enters the second prize winning port 640, the probability of winning the jackpot is the same in both the low probability state and the high probability state. However, the probability of winning a 15R probability variable jackpot as the type of jackpot selected in the event of a jackpot is higher when the ball enters the second winning port 640 than when the ball enters the first winning port 64. is set. On the other hand, the first prize winning port 64 does not have the electric accessory 640a like the second prize winning port 640, and is in a state where balls can always win prizes.

Therefore, during normal operation, the electric accessory 640a associated with the second winning opening 640 is often closed, and it is difficult to win the second winning opening 640. Therefore, the first winning opening 64 without the electric accessory 640a , so that the ball passes through the left side of the variable display device unit 80 (so-called "left shot"), and by winning in the first prize opening 64, there are many chances of winning a big lottery. It is advantageous for the player to aim to be.

On the other hand, during the probability change or the time reduction, by passing the ball through the through gate 67, the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning port 640 is likely to be in an open state, and the second winning port 640 is in a state where it is easy to win. Therefore, the ball is shot toward the second winning hole 640 so that the ball passes the right side of the variable display device 80 (so-called "right-handed hitting"), passes through the through gate 67, and opens the electric accessory 640a. It is advantageous for the player to aim for a 15R probability variable jackpot by winning the second prize winning port 640 while setting the state.

It should be noted that, unlike the pachinko machine 10 in the present embodiment, when the configuration of the game board 13 is left-right symmetrical, aiming at the first winning hole 64 with "right-handed hitting" or "left-handed hitting" at the second It is also possible to aim at the winning opening 640 . Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment provides the player with information on how to shoot balls according to the game state of the pachinko machine 10 (whether the game is in variable probability, short time, or normal). It is possible to eliminate the need to change the to "left-handed" and "right-handed". Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the annoyance of changing the way the ball is hit.

On the other hand, the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment is configured so that it is not possible to aim at the first winning hole 64 with a "right-handed" shot, and a ball shot with a "left-handed" shot does not pass through the through gate 67. It is configured. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment provides the player with information on how to shoot balls according to the game state of the pachinko machine 10 (whether the game is in variable probability, short time, or normal). can be requested to be changed to "left-handed" and "right-handed." Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game from becoming sluggish by adding the playability of changing the way the ball is hit.

A variable prize winning device 65 (see FIG. 2) is disposed on the right side of the first prize winning port 64, and a specific prize winning port 65a is provided substantially in the center thereof. In the pachinko machine 10, when the jackpot lottery performed due to the winning of the first prize winning port 64 or the second prize winning port 640 results in a jackpot, after a predetermined time (fluctuation time) elapses, the jackpot stop symbol is displayed. The first symbol display device 37A or the first symbol display device 37B is turned on so as to cause the first symbol display device 37A or the first symbol display device 37B to be lit, and the third symbol display device 81 is caused to display the stop symbol corresponding to the big win, thereby indicating the occurrence of the big win. After that, the game state transitions to a special game state (jackpot) in which the balls are likely to win. As this special game state, the specific winning opening 65a which is normally closed is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have passed or until 10 balls have been won).

The specific winning opening 65a is closed after a predetermined period of time has passed, and after the closure, the specific winning opening 65a is opened again for a predetermined period of time. The opening and closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a can be repeated up to 15 times (15 rounds), for example. The state in which this opening and closing operation is performed is one form of a special game state that is advantageous to the player, and the player is given a game value (game value) by paying out a larger amount of prize balls than usual. is done.

Incidentally, the special game state is not limited to the form described above. A large opening that is opened and closed separately from the specific winning opening 65a is provided in the game area, and when the LED corresponding to the big win is lit in the first pattern display devices 37A and 37B, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time, and the A special game is a game state in which a large opening provided separately from the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time and a predetermined number of times when a ball enters the specific winning opening 65a while the specific winning opening 65a is open. You may make it form as a state. In addition, the number of specific winning holes 65a is not limited to one, and one or a plurality of two or more (for example, three) may be arranged. For example, it may be the lower right side of the first prize winning port 64, the lower left side of the first prize winning port 64, the left or right side of the variable display device unit 80, or the upper side.

An affixing space K1 for affixing a certificate stamp, an identification label, or the like is provided at the right corner of the lower side of the game board 13. 35 (see FIG. 1).

The game board 13 is provided with an out port 71 . Balls that flow down the game area and do not win in any of the winning openings 63, 64, 65a, 640 are guided through an out opening 71 to a ball discharge path (not shown). The out ports 71 are arranged in pairs on the left and right sides of the second prize winning port 640 .

The game board 13 is provided with a large number of nails for properly dispersing and adjusting the falling direction of the balls, and various members (accessories) such as windmills.

As shown in FIG. 3, the back side of the pachinko machine 10 is mainly provided with control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 . The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main controller 110), an audio lamp control board (audio lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control device 111), a launch control board (launch control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

The back pack unit 94 includes a back pack 92 forming a protective cover and a dispensing unit 93 as a unit. In addition, each control board has an MPU as a 1-chip microcomputer that manages each control, a port that communicates with various devices, a random number generator that is used for various lotteries, and is used for time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit or the like is mounted as required.

The main control device 110, the sound lamp control device 113, the display control device 114, the payout control device 111, the firing control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. . Each of the board boxes 100 to 104 has a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other to accommodate each controller and each board.

In addition, the board box 100 (main controller 110) and the board box 102 (dispensing control device 111 and firing control device 112) connect the box base and the box cover in an unopenable manner (caulking structure) by a sealing unit (not shown). consolidation). A sealing seal (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover over the box base and the box cover. The sealing seal is made of a brittle material, and if the sealing seal is peeled off in order to open the circuit board boxes 100, 102, or if the circuit board boxes 100, 102 are forcibly opened, the box base and the box cover may be damaged. cut to the side. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether the substrate boxes 100, 102 have been opened.

The dispensing unit 93 includes a tank 130 located at the top of the back pack unit 94 and open upward, a tank rail 131 connected to the lower side of the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a tank rail 131 downstream of the tank rail 131. and a payout device 133 provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132, which pays out balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of a payout motor 216 (see FIG. 4). ing. The tank 130 is successively replenished with balls supplied from the island facilities of the game hall, and a payout device 133 pays out the required number of balls as appropriate. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131 .

The payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the firing control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor control knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erasure switch 122. The state recovery switch 120 is operated to eliminate ball clogging (return to normal state) when a dispensing error such as a ball clogging in the dispensing motor 216 (see FIG. 4) occurs. The operating knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on when the pachinko machine 10 is to be returned to its initial state.

Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. As shown in FIG.

The main control unit 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 storing various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the MPU 201, and a memory for temporarily storing various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 202. A RAM 203 and other various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission/reception circuit are incorporated. In the main control unit 110, the MPU 201 performs main processing of the pachinko machine 10, such as the setting of the jackpot lottery, the display settings of the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B and the third symbol display device 81, and the lottery of the display results of the second symbol display device. to run.

In addition, various commands are transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sub-controllers by the data transmission/reception circuit in order to instruct the sub-controllers such as the payout controller 111 and the sound lamp controller 113 to operate. Such commands are sent in only one direction from the main controller 110 to the sub-controllers.

The RAM 203 stores various areas, counters, flags, contents of internal registers of the MPU 201, return addresses of control programs executed by the MPU 201, etc., and a stack area for storing various flags, counters, I/O, and the like. and a work area (work area) in which values are stored. The RAM 203 is configured to retain (back up) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply 115 even after the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, and all the data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

When power is interrupted due to power failure or the like, the RAM 203 stores the stack pointer and the values of each register at the time of power interruption (including power failure; the same applies hereinafter). On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including when the power is turned on due to the cancellation of the power failure; the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power was cut off based on the information stored in the RAM 203 . Writing to the RAM 203 is executed by the main process (not shown) when the power is turned off, and restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed by the start-up process (not shown) when the power is turned on. The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured to receive a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when power is shut off due to a power failure or the like. , NMI interrupt processing (not shown) is immediately executed as power failure processing.

An input/output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 via a bus line 204 comprising an address bus and a data bus. In the input/output port 205, the payout control device 111, the sound lamp control device 113, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the second symbol display device, the second symbol reservation lamp, and the opening/closing plate of the specific winning opening 65a are arranged in the front-rear direction. A solenoid 209 including a large opening solenoid for driving opening and closing and a solenoid for driving the electric accessory 640a is connected, and the MPU 201 transmits various commands and control signals to these via the input/output port 205. .

The input/output port 205 also includes various switches 208 including a group of switches (not shown) and a group of sensors including a slide position detection sensor S and a rotation position detection sensor R, and a RAM erasure switch circuit 253 provided in the power supply 115, which will be described later. , and the MPU 201 executes various processes based on the signals output from the various switches 208 and the RAM erasing signal SG2 output from the RAM erasing switch circuit 253 .

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and rental balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 212 storing control programs executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 used as a work memory and the like.

The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area for storing the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211, and various flags and counters. , and a work area (work area) in which values such as I/O are stored. The RAM 213 is configured to retain (back up) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply 115 even after the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, and all the data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. As with the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is also configured to receive a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when power is shut off due to a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, NMI interrupt processing (not shown) is immediately executed as power failure processing.

An input/output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 215 is connected to the main controller 110, the dispensing motor 216, the launch controller 112, and the like. Although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected with a prize ball detection switch for detecting paid prize balls. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout controller 111 but not to the main controller 110 .

The shooting control device 112 controls the ball shooting unit 112a so that the shooting strength of the ball corresponds to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 when the main controller 110 issues an instruction to shoot the ball. . The ball shooting unit 112a has a shooting solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the operation is performed on the condition that the shooting stop switch 51b for stopping the shooting of the ball is turned off (not operated). A shooting solenoid is energized corresponding to the amount of rotation operation (rotation position) of the handle 51 , and the ball is shot with strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51 .

The audio lamp control device 113 outputs audio from an audio output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, outputs lighting and extinguishing from a lamp display device (electrical parts 29 to 33, an indicator lamp 34, etc.) 227, and changes production (variation It controls the setting of the display mode of the third pattern display device 81 performed by the display control device 114 such as display) and advance notice effect. The MPU 221, which is an arithmetic device, has a ROM 222 storing control programs executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 used as a work memory and the like.

An input/output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 comprising an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 225 is connected to the main control device 110, the display control device 114, the audio output device 226, the lamp display device 227, the other device 228, the frame button 22, and the like. Other devices 228 include drive motors MT1, MT2, MT3, MT4, MT5, and the like.

Sound lamp control device 113, based on various commands (fluctuation pattern command, stop type command, etc.) received from main control device 110, determines the display mode of third symbol display device 81, and sends the determined display mode to the command The display control device 114 is notified by (display variation pattern command, display stop type command, etc.). In addition, the sound lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, changes the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 or super reach. The display control device 114 is instructed to change the effect contents of the hour. When the stage is changed, a rear image change command including information about the stage after the change is transmitted to the display control device 114 in order to display the rear image corresponding to the stage after the change on the third pattern display device 81. . Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third design, which is the main image to be displayed on the third design display device 81 . The display control device 114 displays various images on the third pattern display device 81 in accordance with commands transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 .

Also, the sound lamp control device 113 receives a command (display command) representing the display content of the third pattern display device 81 from the display control device 114 . In the audio lamp control device 113, based on the display command received from the display control device 114, in accordance with the display content of the third pattern display device 81, output the audio corresponding to the display content from the audio output device 226, Lighting and extinguishing of the lamp display device 227 are controlled in accordance with the display contents.

The display control device 114 is connected to the sound lamp control device 113 and the third pattern display device 81, and based on the command received from the sound lamp control device 113, the third pattern display device 81 changes the third pattern, etc. It controls the display. Further, the display control device 114 appropriately transmits a display command for notifying the display contents of the third pattern display device 81 to the sound lamp control device 113 . The sound lamp control device 113 outputs sound from the sound output device 226 in accordance with the display contents indicated by this display command, so that the display of the third pattern display device 81 and the sound output from the sound output device 226 are matched. be able to.

The power supply device 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to power failure, etc., and a RAM provided with a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3). and an erase switch circuit 253 . The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies necessary operating voltages to the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As an overview, the power supply unit 251 takes in a voltage of 24 volts supplied from the outside, various switches such as the various switches 208, solenoids such as the solenoid 209, a voltage of 12 volts for driving a motor, etc. A voltage of 5 volts for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, etc. are generated, and these 12 volts, 5 volts and backup voltages are supplied to the controllers 110 to 114 and the like as necessary voltages.

The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 at the time of power failure due to power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the voltage of stable DC 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power shutdown, power shutdown) has occurred when this voltage is less than 22 volts. Then, a power failure signal SG1 is output to the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute NMI interrupt processing. It should be noted that even after the stable DC voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts, the power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is the driving voltage of the control system, for a period of time sufficient to execute the NMI interrupt processing. is configured to maintain a normal value. Therefore, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (not shown).

The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the main controller 110 clears the backup data when the RAM erase signal SG2 is input, and controls the payout initialization command for clearing the backup data in the payout control device 111. Send to device 111 .

Next, the structures of the game board 13 and the operation unit 500 will be described. 5 is an exploded front perspective view of the game board 13 and the action unit 500, and FIG. 6 is an exploded rear perspective view of the game board 13 and the action unit 500. FIG. 5 and 6, illustration of the liquid crystal display device (variable display device unit 80) disposed in the opening 511a of the rear case 510 is omitted, and the rear side can be seen through the opening 511a. Further, FIG. 2 will be referred to as needed in the description of FIGS.

The operation unit 500 includes a box-shaped rear case 510 whose front side is opened from a bottom wall portion 511 and an outer wall portion 512 erected from the outer edge of the bottom wall portion 511 . A rectangular opening 511 a is formed in the center of the bottom wall portion 511 of the rear case 510 , so that the rear case 510 is formed in a rectangular frame shape when viewed from the front. The opening 511a is formed in a size corresponding to the outer shape (outer edge) of the display area of the third pattern display device 81 (that is, the display area of the third pattern display device 81 can be divided when viewed from the front).

The back case 510 extends as a plane plate along the back surface of the game board 13 (for example, arranged in parallel) at the front end of the outer wall 512, and faces the game board 13 in the assembled state (see FIG. 2). A support plate portion 513 for supporting is provided.

The support plate portion 513 includes a positioning convex portion 513a that protrudes toward the front side in a shape that can be fitted into a fitting concave portion (not shown) formed in the base plate 60 of the game board 13, and the base plate 60. and a plurality of insertion holes 513b through which fastening screws to be fastened can be inserted.

The rear case 510 is positioned with respect to the base plate 60 by fitting the positioning projections 513a into the fitting recesses of the base plate 60, and the fastening screws are inserted through the insertion holes 513b and screwed into the base plate 60. Since the game board 13 and the action unit 500 can be integrally fixed, the rigidity of the game board 13 and the action unit 500 as a whole can be improved.

The shape of the positioning convex portion 513a is not limited at all, and various aspects are exemplified. For example, the protrusion may have an outer shape slightly smaller than the inner shape (circular or oval in this embodiment) of the fitting recess of the base plate 60, or the fitting gap may be large in consideration of workability during assembly. A protrusion having a shape (smaller outer shape) may be used. Further, when the inner shape of the fitting recess is formed in a rectangular shape, it is naturally assumed that the shape of the positioning protrusion 513a is also formed in a rectangular shape correspondingly.

As described above, the game board 13 has a base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape as viewed from the front, and a large number of nails (not shown) and pinwheels (not shown) for guiding balls, as well as rails 61 and 62 . , the general winning port 63, the first winning port 64, the second winning port 640, the through gate 67, the variable winning device 65, the window portion 60a (see FIG. 90) opened in the base plate 60 can be fitted from the front side. A center frame 86 configured with a shape, a ball flow-down unit 150 configured so that the ball discharged from the game area can flow down, and a granular member 320 (see FIG. 54) is launched toward the front side of the third pattern display device 81. The firing effect unit 300 or the like that can be configured is assembled, and is attached to the inner frame 12 in such a manner that the peripheral portion thereof is arranged opposite to the surface of the inner frame 12 (see FIG. 1) and fixed.

The base plate 60 is formed in a plate shape from a light-transmitting resin material, and is configured so that various structures arranged on the back side of the base plate 60 can be easily viewed by the player from the front side. As a result, regardless of the shape and arrangement of the base plate 60, the structure arranged on the back side thereof can be visually recognized and used for various effects.

For example, even if the ball flow down unit 150 is arranged on the back side of the base plate 60, the back side can be seen through the base plate 60, so the ball flowing down the ball flow down unit 150 can be visually recognized. . In the present embodiment, the ball flow downward unit 150 is designed in consideration of the effects produced by the visually recognized ball, details of which will be described later.

If there is a part that the player does not want to see, it may be dealt with by attaching a seal member with low light transmittance (or no light transmittance).

The center frame 86 is arranged in a through hole formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and fixed to the base plate 60 from the front side of the game board 13 by tapping screws or the like.

The shooting effect unit 300 receives the granular member 320 (see FIG. 54), and the partitioning member 310 that partitions the range in which the granular member 320 can scatter is arranged inside the center frame 86, so that the granular member 320 is placed inside the center frame. It is made possible to shoot toward the inside of 86 . Therefore, the granular members 320 scattered on the front side of the third symbol display device 81 can be effectively recognized by the player who visually recognizes the display of the third symbol display device 81 through the inner window portion of the center frame 86. can. Details of the shooting effect unit 300 will be described later.

The operation unit 500 is arranged on the back side of the game board 13, and various light emitting means and various operation units are arranged inside. That is, the operation unit 500 includes a rear case 510, an enlargement/reduction unit 600 arranged inside the upper part of the rear case 510, and a displacement rotation unit 800 arranged symmetrically on the left and right sides inside the rear case 510. Prepare.

Specifically, the enlargement/reduction unit 600 is arranged above the opening 511a, and the displacement/rotation unit 800 is arranged on the left and right sides of the opening 511a on the bottom wall 511 of the rear case 510, respectively. First, an overview of operation control of the operation unit 500 will be described.

7 to 11 are front views of the operation unit 500 showing an example of operation control of the operation unit 500 in chronological order. 7 shows the enlargement/reduction unit 600 and the displacement rotation unit 800 in the waiting state for effect, and FIG. FIG. 9 shows the enlargement/reduction unit 600 in the enlargement state and the displacement/rotation unit 800 in the waiting state for rendering.

FIG. 10 shows the enlargement/reduction unit 600 in the rendering standby state and the displacement rotation unit 800 in the rendering upper end state. In FIG. The unit 800 is in the lower end state of the production.

As illustrated in FIGS. 7 to 11, the displacement trajectory of the scaling unit 600 and the displacement trajectory of the displacement rotation unit 800 partially overlap when viewed from the front. Therefore, for example, when the displacement/rotation unit 800 is in the rendering upper end state (see FIG. 10), if the enlargement/reduction unit 600 changes state from the rendering standby state, there is a possibility of collision.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the state change of the enlargement/reduction unit 600 from the effect standby state is controlled to be executable on the condition that the displacement rotation unit 800 is in the effect standby state. By controlling the state change from the presentation standby state to be executable on the condition that the enlargement/reduction unit 600 is in the presentation standby state, it is possible to prevent the enlargement/reduction unit 600 and the displacement/rotation unit 800 from overlapping in front view. can be avoided.
Therefore, it is possible to improve the degree of freedom of arrangement of the scaling unit 600 and the displacement/rotation unit 800 (overlapping front and rear positions can be allowed).

As shown in FIGS. 7 to 9, the enlargement/reduction unit 600 is configured such that it can be displaced downward while the effect members 700 are collectively arranged in one place. The components of the production member 700 are separated from each other in the state of being arranged in the state of being arranged, and the operation is controlled so that the area visually recognized in the front view becomes large (see FIG. 9).

After that, the enlargement/reduction unit 600 is controlled so that the production members 700 are assembled again (see FIG. 8), displaced upward while being collectively arranged in one place, and returned to the production standby state shown in FIG.

The state changes shown in FIGS. 10 and 11 are executed when the scaling unit 600 is in the rendering standby state. As shown in FIGS. 7, 10 and 11, the displacement/rotation unit 800 is configured such that the lateral slide member 840 can be displaced from the waiting state for rendering in a direction having not only a vertical component but also a horizontal component.

In this embodiment, the lateral slide member 840 is displaced along a route curve S1 set by a mechanism described later. The route curve S1 includes a common circular arc portion S1a having a circular arc shape centering on each center point C1, and an advancing/retreating route portion S1b extending from the lower end of the common circular arc portion S1a to the left, right, and downward.

In FIG. 10, a pair of left and right horizontal slide members 840 are arranged at the upper end position of the common arc portion S1a, and in FIG. The lateral slide member 840 is arranged at a position above the lower end position of the common circular arc portion S1a.

11, the left lateral slide member 840 is displaced downward and the right lateral slide member 840 is displaced upward. It is possible for the player to visually recognize as if it were rotationally displaced around a center point C1 arranged near the center.

In other words, the horizontal slide member 840 can be visually recognized as a part of the rotating performance body having the same size as the display area of the third pattern display device 81, and the degree of freedom in performance using the horizontal slide member 840 is improved. be able to.

12(a) and 12(b) are cross-sectional views of the game board 13 and the action unit 500 along line XIIa-XIIa in FIG. 7, and FIGS. 14 is a cross-sectional view of the game board 13 and the action unit 500 along the XIIIa-XIIIa line, and FIG. 14 is a cross-sectional view of the game board 13 and the action unit 500 along the XIV-XIV line in FIG.

7 and 9 do not show the game board 13, but FIGS. 12 to 14 show the state where the game board 13 is attached to the front side of the operation unit 500 (see FIG. 2).

12(a) and 13(a) show an example of a state in which the granular member 320 stays downward, and in FIGS. 12(b) and 13(b), the granular member 320 is shot and scattered. An example of such a state is illustrated.

The effect member 700 of the scaling unit 600 is arranged such that the center portion of the collective arrangement is arranged above the partition member 310 of the firing effect unit 300 in the effect standby state shown in FIGS. Most of the display area of the third pattern display device 81 is configured to be visible through 310 .

On the other hand, in the expanded state shown in FIGS. 13(a) and 13(b), the effect member 700 is arranged close behind the partition member 310 of the firing effect unit 300, and is hidden by the effect member 700 (see FIG. 9). ), most of the display area of the third pattern display device 81 is blocked invisibly.

Since the displacement trajectory of the scaling unit 600 does not interfere with the partitioning member 310, regardless of the arrangement of the scaling unit 600, the firing effect unit 300 is operated to execute the action effect of shooting the granular member 320 at the partitioning member 310. It is possible to control

As shown in FIG. 12( a ), the granular member 320 is arranged below the lower edge of the display area of the third pattern display device 81 , and is fired along a route that slopes upward toward the front. , is struck against the front wall portion of the partitioning member 310 and rises while rebounding within the range formed by the partitioning member 310 .

As a result, the granular member 320 can be made to appear to the player as if it is coming toward him or her, so that the player's attention to the presentation using the granular member 320 can be improved.

In addition, by configuring in this way, the range in which the granular members 320 are scattered can be brought closer to the player side, and the configuration members arranged in the game area such as the first winning port 64 (see FIG. 2) can be reduced. It is possible to avoid lowering the degree of freedom of arrangement.

In other words, as a standby position for the granular members 320 fired toward the partitioning member 310 of this embodiment, a position directly below the partitioning member 310 or a position closer to the front can be adopted. However, in this case, since the shooting effect unit 300 is arranged in the space on the back side of the first prize winning port 64, it is possible to secure a space for arranging the guide path for the ball that has entered the first prize winning port 64. It becomes difficult, and it may be necessary to move the position of the first winning hole 64 to deal with it.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the dividing member 310 is arranged at the frontmost position, and the standby position of the granular member 320 is arranged at an oblique rear side. The guide path for the ball can be arranged without any problem, and the situation in which the first prize winning opening 64 cannot be arranged freely can be prevented.

In the state shown in FIG. 12(a), when control is performed to shoot the granular members 320, as shown in FIG. It can be shown to the player together with the display in the display area. As a result, the player can visually recognize a combination of the two-dimensional display and the movement of the granular member 320 that displaces three-dimensionally.

In the state shown in FIG. 13(a), when control is performed to shoot the granular members 320, as shown in FIG. It can be shown to the player together with the change. In this case, for example, by synchronizing the timing of scattering of the granular members 320 with the timing of displacing the rendering members 700 of the scaling unit 600 in a discrete manner, the granular members 320 can be displaced on the front side of the scaling unit 600 whose state changes. It is possible to visually recognize how the particles are scattered, and to strengthen the power of the state change of the enlargement/reduction unit 600.例文帳に追加

Here, a method of switching the display of the third pattern display device 81 together with the state change of the enlarging/reducing unit 600 is also conceivable as a method of producing effects in conjunction with the state change of the enlarging/reducing unit 600 .

However, in a situation where the third pattern display device 81 is arranged on the back side of the scaling unit 600 and most of the display area of the third pattern display device 81 is shielded by the scaling unit 600, as in the present embodiment. , even if the display of the third pattern display device 81 is switched, it is difficult to show the display, and it is difficult to produce it effectively.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the division member 310 that forms the range in which the granular members 320 for effecting movement are scattered in accordance with the state change of the enlargement/reduction unit 600 is provided on the front side of the enlargement/reduction unit 600. Therefore, even in a situation where the enlargement/reduction unit 600 blocks most of the display area of the third pattern display device 81, the granular member 320 is not difficult for the player to see.

Furthermore, by configuring the granular member 320 with a small member, it is possible to prevent the enlarging/reducing unit 600 from becoming difficult to see as compared with the configuration of the granular member 320 with a large member.

Therefore, even in a state where most of the display area of the third pattern display device 81 is blocked by the scaling unit 600, the effect of the scaling unit 600 can be improved.

Also, the effect of visually recognizing the scattering of the granular members 320 in combination with the scaling unit 600 can be used as it is for the effect of visually recognizing the scattering of the granular members 320 in combination with the displacement/rotation unit 800 .

That is, the displacement/rotation unit 800, similarly to the enlargement/reduction unit 600, has a state in which the horizontal slide member 840 is retracted from the display area of the third symbol display device 81 (drawing standby state, see FIG. 7), and a horizontal state. Since the slide member 840 can be changed between the state where the slide member 840 is arranged on the front side of the display area of the third pattern display device 81 (lower end state of production, upper end state of production, see FIGS. 10 and 11), , an effect of visually recognizing the combination of the scattering granular members 320 and the display of the third pattern display device 81, and an effect of visually recognizing the combination of the scattering granular members 320 and the horizontal slide member 840 of the displacement rotation unit 800. be able to.

In this case, it has been explained that the enlargement/reduction unit 600 can effectively produce an effect by scattering the granular members 320 in accordance with the dispersing mode of the production member 700, but the displacement/rotation unit 800 can rotate By scattering the particulate members 320 in accordance with the rotation of the wing-like members 854 disposed in the wing-like members 854, an air flow is generated by the rotation of the wing-like members 854. It can be visually recognized as if it is rotating at high speed), and the presentation effect of the displacement/rotation unit 800 can be improved.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, the scattering of the granular members 320 is visually recognized in combination with the display area of the third pattern display device 81, and is visually recognized in combination with the scaling unit 600 or the displacement rotation unit 800. can be used in combination with

As shown in FIG. 14, the rear end line BL1 of the first light irradiation device 330, which is part of the shooting effect unit 300 and is arranged directly above the horizontal slide member 840 of the displacement rotation unit 800, is shown in FIG. It is arranged on the rear side of the front end line FL1 of the displacement/rotation unit 800 on the cross section. Therefore, depending on the displacement trajectory of the lateral slide member 840 of the displacement/rotation unit 800 (for example, when the lateral slide member 840 continues to displace directly upward from the state shown in FIG. 14), the first light irradiation device 330 and the displacement/rotation unit 800 may collide.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the advancing/retreating path portion S1b is set as a path that can avoid the collision between the firing effect unit 300 and the displacement/rotation unit 800. FIG. That is, by setting the advancing/retreating path portion S1b as a path passing through a gap provided in an oblique direction between the ejection device 400 of the firing effect unit 300 and the first light irradiation device 330, the rear end line BL1 and the front end line FL1 are separated. It is possible to improve the degree of freedom of setting, and it is configured to be capable of upward displacement beyond the first light irradiation device 330 that sets the trailing edge line BL1, so that a large displacement width of the displacement/rotation unit 800 can be ensured. .

As shown in FIG. 13, when the effect member 700 is displaced, the effect member 700 and the partition member 310 are arranged close to each other in the front-rear direction. In the playable state, the effect member 700 and the partitioning member 310 are arranged to the extent that the space can be secured, but the space between the effect member 700 and the partitioning member 310 must be secured until the time of transportation. Nothing to consider. Therefore, during transport, it is desirable to maintain the effect member 700 at the upper end position of the displacement range, and to restrict the partition member 310 and the effect member 700 from being arranged close to each other.

Returning to FIG. 6, description will be made. The motion unit 500 includes a displacement restricting device 180 fastened and fixed to the rear case 510 . The displacement restricting device 180 is configured to be able to change its state by manual operation from the back side of the rear case 510, and in the restricting state, restricts the downward displacement of the enlargement/reduction unit 600 from the presentation standby state.

By adopting the displacement restricting device 180, it is possible to facilitate shipment and transportation of the pachinko machine 10 even when the center opening of the base plate 60 is closed as in the present embodiment.

In detail, conventionally, a means of suppressing the displacement of the movable role by stuffing a cushioning material (cushion member such as cotton) in the range where the movable role is displaced, and removing the cushioning material after arriving at the game hall. This sometimes prevents displacement of the movable accessories during shipment or transportation. However, if the central opening of the base plate 60 is closed as in the present embodiment (see FIG. 12(a)), there is no through-hole for extracting the cushioning material. The cushioning material cannot be removed without disassembling, which may impose a heavy burden on the game hall.

As a countermeasure against this, the displacement forming device 180 is employed in this embodiment. As a result, the state of the displacement regulating device 180 can be changed between a regulated state in which the upward/downward displacement of the enlargement/reduction unit 600 is regulated without releasing the fixation of the game board 13 and the rear case 510, and a regulated state in which the regulation is released. You can switch. Hereinafter, the details of the configuration of the displacement forming device 180 will be described first, and then the details of the state change will be described.

15(a) is a rear perspective view of the displacement restricting device 180, FIG. 15(b) is a front perspective view of the displacement restricting device 180, and FIG. 15(c) is a front perspective view of the displacement restricting device 180. It is a diagram.

15(a) and 15(b) illustrate the displacement restricting device 180 in the restricted state, and FIG. 15(c) illustrates the displacement restricting device 180 in the restricted state. As shown in FIGS. 15(a) to 15(c), the displacement restricting device 180 is switched between the restricted state and the restricted state by the cylindrical portion 183d protruding from the contact member 181. As shown in FIG. In the regulated state of the displacement regulating device 180, the cylindrical portion 183d protrudes to the inside of the back case 510 and is configured to engage with the regulated hole 657 of the enlargement/reduction unit 600, details of which will be described later.

16 is an exploded rear perspective view of the displacement restricting device 180, FIG. 17 is an exploded front perspective view of the displacement restricting device 180, and FIG. 18(b) is a front view of the guide member 182, and FIG. 18(c) is a front view of the operation member 183. FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 16 to 18, the displacement restricting device 180 includes an abutting member 181 arranged to abut on the rear case 510 (see FIG. 6), and a abutting member 181 arranged on the rear side of the abutting member 181. A guide member 182 that is fastened and fixed to 181 and guides the operation member 183 in the front-rear direction; It is mainly provided with a coil spring 184 configured to be able to apply an urging force directed toward the back side to the operating member 181 .

As the operation member 183 is formed in a substantially elliptical shape elongated in the left and right direction when viewed from the rear, the abutment member 181 and the guide member 182 which accommodate the operation member 183 also have a substantially elliptical shape elongated in the left and right direction when viewed from the rear. Since it is formed, the external shape of the displacement restricting device 180 is a substantially elliptical shape elongated left and right when viewed from the rear.

The abutment member 181 is mainly designed in a plate shape so as to increase the holding force by increasing the contact area with the rear case 510. The plate end of the abutment member 181 extends toward the rear side to hold the guide member 182. The wall portion is extended, and insertion holes 181a are drilled at the left and right ends and through which the fastening portions protruding from the back case 510 are inserted. It has a cylindrical holding portion 181b protruding to the side, and an engaged portion 181c that forms a well-known latch mechanism in relation to the operating member 183 and is configured to be engageable with the operating member 183. As shown in FIG.

The guide member 182 includes a body portion 182a extending in the front-rear direction in an elliptical ring along the outer periphery of the contact member 181, and a screw through which a fastening screw is inserted into a fastening portion that is inserted through the insertion hole 181a. An insertion portion 182b, a fastening portion 182c into which a fastening screw to be inserted through the contact member 181 is screwed, a retainer portion 182d projecting radially inward at the back side end portion of the main body portion 182a, and the main body portion 182a. The upper and lower inner portions are provided with projections 182e projecting radially inward in the front-rear direction.

From this configuration, by fastening and fixing the abutment member 181 and the guide member 182, the operation member 183 can be arranged between the abutment member 181 and the guide member 182 and held so as not to fall off. In the embodiment, the conditions in which the contact member 181 and the guide member 182 can be disassembled are limited by setting the fastening direction.

In other words, in this embodiment, the fastening screw for fastening and fixing the contact member 181 and the guide member 182 is inserted from the front side of the contact member 182 (the side covered by the rear case 510). Therefore, when the displacement restricting device 180 is attached to the rear case 510, the fastening screws cannot be touched. Therefore, the contact member 181 and the guide member 182 can be disassembled only when the displacement restricting device 180 is removed from the rear case 510 .

The fastening screws for fastening and fixing the displacement restricting device 180 to the back case 510 are inserted through the screw insertion portions 182b from the back side of the guide member 182, so that the back side of the back case 510 is exposed (FIG. 19). ) can be easily touched, and the displacement restricting device 180 can be easily removed from the rear case 510 .

The operation member 183 has a main body portion 183a formed in a cup shape with an elliptical shape slightly smaller than the retainer portion 182d of the guide member 182 when viewed from the rear, the front side being open, and a front edge portion of the main body portion 183a. a flange portion 183b projecting radially outward from the flange portion 183b; a groove portion 183c recessed in the flange portion 183b; An arc-shaped protrusion 183e projecting toward the front side in an arc shape having a diameter larger than the outer diameter of the coil spring 184 centered on the portion 183d and a position where it can be engaged with the engaged portion 181c of the contact member 181. and an engaging portion 183f that can constitute a well-known latch mechanism in relation to the engaged portion 181c.

An elliptical seal is attached to the rear surface of the operation member 183 . This seal has a concave shape formed on one of the ends in the short direction (see FIG. 15(a)), and by arranging this concave shape upward, it is possible to easily prevent vertical orientation errors during assembly. can do.

By making the main body portion 183a oval, it is possible to easily prevent the operation member 183 from being rotationally displaced. That is, even if the operating member 183 is about to be rotationally displaced, the rotation is regulated by coming into contact with the main body portion 182a of the guide member 182 .

The flange portion 183b is larger than the retaining portion 182d of the guide member 182 when viewed from the rear, thereby preventing the operation member 183 from falling off the guide member 182. As shown in FIG. That is, the operating member 183 can be displaced in the front-rear direction while the flange portion 183b is held between the contact member 181 and the guide member 182. As shown in FIG.

The groove portion 183c is formed at a position corresponding to the protrusion 182e of the guide member 182, and has a function of smoothly moving the operating member 183 back and forth. In the present embodiment, the grooves 183c are also formed at two locations on the upper side and one location on the lower side as the ridges 182e are formed at two locations on the upper side and one location on the lower side. As a result, it is possible to prevent erroneous assembly in which the operation member 183 is mistakenly placed upside down.

The cylindrical portion 183 d is a portion that is inserted through the center of the coil spring 184 , and is configured to be able to be inserted through the central opening of the cylindrical holding portion 181 b of the contact member 181 . When the cylindrical portion 183d protrudes from the central opening of the abutting member 181, the cylindrical portion 183d engages with the restricted hole 657 of the enlargement/reduction unit 600 to restrict the up-and-down displacement of the effect member 700, as will be described later.

That is, in the present embodiment, the cylindrical portion 183d can be used both as a portion that regulates the vertical displacement of the effect member 700 of the enlargement/reduction unit 600 and as a portion that supports the coil spring 184. FIG.

The arc-shaped ridge portion 183e is arranged so as to face the outer diameter side of the coil spring 184, and faces the large diameter side cylindrical portion of the cylindrical holding portion 181b of the contact member 181 in the front-rear direction.
When the operation member 183 is pushed, the arc-shaped ridge 183e and the cylindrical holding portion 181b come into contact with each other before other parts, so that the load generating area can be increased, and the load is locally increased. It is possible to prevent the load from occurring.

The arc-shaped protrusion 183e is not circular, but is formed in an arc-like shape where the circle is interrupted, and the engaging portion 183f is arranged at the interrupted position. As a result, it is possible to avoid excessive separation between the engaging portion 183f and the cylindrical portion 183d and the coil spring 184. FIG.

State changes of the operating member 183 will be described. The operating member 183 is biased toward the rear side by the coil spring 184. When the operating member 183 is pushed forward against the biasing force, the engaging portion 183f and the engaged portion 181c are formed. The latch mechanism is activated, and each time it is pushed in by a stroke greater than the minimum stroke for which the latch mechanism acts, the restriction state and the restriction release state are alternately switched.

In this way, since the state can be changed by the latch mechanism, the operation member 183 is not limited to the case where the operation member 183 is intentionally operated. If it is displaced by the stroke, there is a possibility that the state of the displacement restricting device 180 will change unintentionally.

For example, in the regulated state of the displacement regulating device 180, if the state of the displacement regulating device 180 unintentionally changes due to an impact during shipping or vibration during transportation, the scaling unit 600 will be placed in an effect standby state (effect member 700 is located at the upper displacement end).
When the effect member 700 displaced from the effect standby state is placed close to the partitioning member 310 (see FIG. 13), the effect member 700 is subjected to the impact during shipping or the vibration during transportation, and the effect member 700 becomes the partitioning member of the firing effect unit 300. 310, and the effect member 700 and the partition member 310 may be damaged.

In contrast, in the present embodiment, the engaging portion 183f is arranged at a position (position eccentric to the right) away from the position (central position) where the biasing force is applied to the operating member 183, and the operating member 183f The gap dimension between the groove portion 183c of the guide member 183 and the projection 182e of the guide member 182 is set large, and the posture maintenance capability of the operation member 183 is intentionally lowered.

As a result, the attitude of the operation member 183 with respect to the guide member 182 can be tilted in advance, so that the displacement resistance of the operation member 183 can be increased. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the amount of displacement of the operating member 183 in the front-rear direction due to an unintended external force.

A relationship between the displacement restricting device 180 and the operation unit 500 will be described. 19 is a front perspective view of the pachinko machine 10 with the front frame 14 opened, and FIG. 20 is a rear view of the game board 13 and the operation unit 500, FIGS. 21(a) and 21(b). 20] is a cross-sectional view of the game board 13 and the operation unit 500 taken along line XXIa-XXIa of FIG.

21(a) illustrates the restricted state of the displacement restricting device 180, and FIG. 21(b) illustrates the released state of the displacement restricting device 180. As shown in FIG.

As shown in FIG. 19, the displacement regulating device 180 is arranged on the opening/closing base end side (left side) of the inner frame 12, and by opening the back pack 92 with respect to the inner frame 12, the operator can extend his hand. configured to be touchable. Since this position is opposite to the side (opening/closing front end side, right side) where a worker who works with the inner frame 12 open enters, the worker may unintentionally move the displacement restricting device when the inner frame 12 is opened. Touching 180 can be avoided.

As shown in FIGS. 21(a) and 21(b), the engaging portion 183f and the engaged portion 181c that constitute the latch mechanism are formed on the right side of the displacement restricting device 180. As shown in FIGS. Since the operating member 183 is loosely supported, not all of the load pushing the operating member 183 is used to move the operating member 183 back and forth, but is also used to change the posture of the operating member 183 .

For example, when the right side of the operating member 183 is pushed, even if the right side moves back and forth sufficiently, the posture of the operating member 183 may change and the left side may not be pushed sufficiently.

Therefore, for the purpose of pushing the displacement restricting device 180 to switch the state, it is easier for the operator to cause the necessary displacement of the displacement restricting device 180 by pinpointing the forming portion of the latch mechanism. It can be said that it is easy to succeed in switching the state of the regulation device 180 .

In this embodiment, as described above, the engaging portion 183f and the engaged portion 181c, which constitute the latch mechanism, are formed on the right side of the displacement restricting device 180, and the operator enters from the right side to displace the displacement restricting device. Since the operator operates the device 180, the operator can reach the displacement restricting device 180 with a minimum of movement. Therefore, the operator can easily perform an operation of pinpointing the forming portion of the latch mechanism.

Also, the posture change when the operation member 183 is pushed occurs in such a manner that the pressing surface (the surface formed on the base end side of the cylindrical portion 183d) faces the pushed side. Therefore, the pressing load of the operator can be easily transmitted to the operating member 183 as the amount of pressing increases.

In the regulated state shown in FIG. 21( a ), the cylindrical portion 183 d of the operating member 183 is inserted through the regulated hole 657 of the transmission gear 650 to restrict displacement of the transmission gear 650 . This can prevent the state of the scaling unit 600 from changing.

Since the displacement direction of the transmission gear 650 (the rotation direction about the longitudinal axis) and the displacement direction of the operation member 183 (the front-rear direction) are perpendicular to each other, the operation member 183 receives the load from the transmission gear 650 in the displacement direction. can be prevented from receiving As a result, the displacement of the transmission gear 650 can be effectively restricted without making the formation portion of the latch mechanism rigid.

Since the state of the enlargement/reduction unit 600 can be maintained by placing the displacement restricting device 180 in the restricted state, the application of the displacement restricting device 180 is not limited to transportation. For example, after installation in a game machine store, the displacement regulation device 180 is set in the regulation state to maintain the state of the enlargement/reduction unit 600 during maintenance, so that maintenance of the displacement/rotation unit 800, which will be described later, can be performed safely and easily.

That is, when the displacement trajectory of the scaling unit 600 and the displacement trajectory of the displacement/rotation unit 800 partially overlap as in the present embodiment, the drive motor of the scaling unit 600 is operated during maintenance work on the displacement/rotation unit 800. Even if MT2 malfunctions, the state (arrangement) of the enlargement/reduction unit 600 can be maintained by the displacement control device 180, so that the enlargement/reduction unit 600 and the displacement rotation unit 800 can be prevented from colliding. can be done.

When the displacement restricting device 180 is in the restricting state before the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the displacement restricting device 180 is switched to the deregulation state by pushing the operating member 183 of the displacement restricting device 180. (See FIG. 21(b)). As a result, the transmission gear 650 can be displaced, and the enlargement/reduction unit 600 can be caused to perform an effect operation accompanied by a state change.

Here, before the power is turned on, the front frame 14 and the inner frame 12 are slightly opened with respect to the outer frame 11, and the displacement restricting device 180 is released from restriction by looking in from the open tip side (right side). It will be described that it is configured to be able to confirm whether or not

As shown in FIG. 21(a), in the restricted state of the displacement restricting device 180, the operation member 183 is arranged in front of the shape of the bottom wall portion 511 of the rear case 510, so that when viewed from the right side, , the operation member 183 is hidden by the shape portion of the bottom wall portion 511 .

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 21(b), when the displacement restricting device 180 is in the released state, the operation member 183 is arranged to protrude further toward the rear than the shape of the bottom wall 511 of the rear case 510. When viewed from the right side, the operation member 183 is visible at a position protruding from the bottom wall portion 511 .

Therefore, even if the operator does not fully open the front frame 14 and the inner frame 12 with respect to the outer frame 11, the operator can slightly open the front frame 14 and the inner frame 12 with respect to the outer frame 11 as confirmation work before turning on the power. By visually confirming that the operation member 183 protrudes from the bottom wall portion 511 when viewed from the right side, it is possible to confirm that the displacement restricting device 180 is in the released state.

In this embodiment, the rear case 510 is made of a colorless transparent resin material, and the operation member 183 is made of a red transparent resin material, so that the visibility of the operation member 183 can be improved.

Here, a case where the power is turned on while the cylindrical portion 183d is inserted into the restricted hole 657 of the transmission gear 650 of the enlargement/reduction unit 600 in the restricted state of the displacement restricting device 180 (see FIG. 21(a)) will be described. . In this embodiment, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on while the displacement regulating device 180 is in the regulated state, the detection sensor SC7 (see FIG. 52) detects that the enlargement/reduction unit 600 has not changed in the power-on operation. is determined from the output of , and the position detection error display associated with this determination is displayed by the third pattern display device 81 .

By showing this position detection error display to the store clerk of the game machine store, it is possible to make the store clerk notice that the state of the displacement control device 180 may not have been changed. It should be noted that this error display is displayed by detecting whether or not there is a change in the state of the enlargement/reduction unit 600, not by detecting the state of the displacement restricting device 180. FIG.

That is, in the present embodiment, an alarm regarding the state of the displacement regulating device 180 is issued using the position detection error display normally provided in the enlargement/reduction unit 600 without preparing an additional error display program or display material. can be output. As a result, the design cost can be reduced.

In this embodiment, the power is turned on while the cylindrical portion 183d is inserted through the regulated hole 657 of the transmission gear 650 of the enlargement/reduction unit 600 in the regulated state of the displacement regulating device 180 (see FIG. 21(a)). In this case, the pressing operation of the operation member 183 is disabled while the power is on, and it is required to turn off the power once, but this is not necessarily the case. For example, the operating member 183 may be configured to be operable even during power-on.

In addition, the configuration for disabling the pushing operation of the operating member 183 can be arbitrarily set. For example, it may be configured such that the pushing operation is disabled due to friction generated between the transmission gear 650 and the operation member 183, or a large-diameter portion is provided on the base end side of the cylindrical portion 183d of the operation member 183 to displace the transmission gear 650. Inside, the back surface of the transmission gear 650 and the large-diameter portion of the cylindrical portion 183d may be engaged with each other to limit the displacement of the operating member 183. As shown in FIG.

As a different situation, an example in which the operating member 183 of the displacement restricting device 180 is pressed during maintenance at a game machine store will be described. In this embodiment, the pushing operation of the operating member 183 is not possible only when the regulated hole 657 of the enlarging/reducing unit 600 is aligned with the cylindrical portion 183d in the front and rear.

For example, during maintenance, even if the operation member 183 is pushed while the enlargement/reduction unit 600 is in the extended state (see FIG. 8), the displacement restricting device 180 changes its state to the restricting state. In this case, the cylindrical portion 183d is arranged on the displacement trajectory of the transmission gear 650 of the enlargement/reduction unit 600. Therefore, when the transmission gear 650 is displaced by the driving force after the maintenance is completed, the displacement is the cylindrical portion 183d. is limited to

In this embodiment, it is configured to be able to determine that the displacement of the transmission gear 650 is restricted, and by performing an error display (notification of abnormality) based on this determination, the displacement restricting device 180 remains in the restricted state. This can be notified to the clerk of the game machine store, the details of which will be described later.

As a result, the state of the displacement restricting device 180 can be determined by using the device for detecting the state of the enlargement/reduction unit 600 without providing a separate device for detecting the state of the displacement restricting device 180 .

The displacement control device 180 can be operated before or after the game board 13 and the motion unit 500 are assembled to the inner frame 12 . After assembly to the inner frame 12, it is necessary not only to open the inner frame 12, but also to open the back pack 92 with respect to the inner frame 12. Therefore, if possible, before assembling to the inner frame 12, the displacement regulation is performed. Preferably, the device 180 has been operated.

Returning to FIG. 5 and FIG. 6, description will be made. In this embodiment, in addition to the third symbol display device 81, the above-described shooting effect unit 300, enlargement/reduction unit 600, and displacement/rotation unit 800 are provided as effect devices for livening up the game. These rendering devices will be described in order from the firing rendering unit 300. FIG.

22 is an exploded front perspective view of the game board 13 and the firing effect unit 300, and FIG. 23 is an exploded rear perspective view of the game board 13 and the firing effect unit 300. FIG. As shown in FIGS. 22 and 23 , the partitioning member 310 is arranged to face the light guide plate 161 in the assembled state of the shooting effect unit 300 . That is, it is possible to execute an effect in which the light guide plate 161 and the partitioning member 310 are superimposed and visually recognized by the player.

Since the partitioning member 310 is made of a colorless and light-transmitting resin material, the granular member 320 scattered inside can be visually recognized by the player. Thus, an effect can be executed in which the light guide plate 161 and the scattering granular members 320 are superimposed and visually recognized.

24 is an exploded front perspective view of the firing effect unit 300, and FIG. 25 is an exploded rear perspective view of the firing effect unit 300. FIG. 24 and 25, the partition member 310 is shown exploded.

As shown in FIGS. 24 and 25, the firing effect unit 300 includes a partitioning member 310 arranged inside the center frame 86 (see FIGS. 22 and 23) and forming a box shape with an open bottom, and a partitioning member 310 for the partition. A plurality of granular members 320 displaceably arranged inside the member 310, an injection device 400 arranged in such a manner as to close the lower open portion so that the granular members 320 do not drop out of the partitioning member 310, and the partitioning member. A first light irradiation device 330 arranged on the right side of the partition member 310 and a second light irradiation device 340 arranged on the left side of the partition member 310 are provided.

The partitioning member 310 is formed of a light-transmitting resin material, and includes a front plate portion 311 that is a plate-like portion arranged on the forefront, and a curved plate portion 312 that is integrally formed below the front plate portion 311 . A bottom plate portion parallel to the front plate portion 311 is arranged on the rear side of the front plate portion 311, and blocking walls extending from the left, right, and top of the bottom plate portion toward the front side so as to block the gap are provided. Communicates with a back partition 313 and an internal space IE1 (see FIG. 12(a)) integrally formed below the back partition 313 and configured between the front panel 311 and the back partition 313. It has a rear section lower part 314 that allows a path to be configured between the curved plate part 312 and a deformed penetrating part 315 penetrating through the rear section lower part 314 .

Although the size of the partitioning member 310 is not limited at all, in the present embodiment, the size of the window portion surrounding the light guide plate 161 inside the center frame 86 and the size of the partitioning member 310 when viewed from the front are about the same. is formed to be That is, the light guide plate 161 and the front plate portion 311 are formed to have substantially the same shape.

Thereby, the component for hiding the edge of the light guide plate 161 can also be used for hiding the edge of the partition member 310 . A dedicated component for hiding the edge of the partitioning member 310 is not required, and the number of members is reduced. can be avoided, the visibility of the display by the third pattern display device 81 can be maintained.

The internal space IE1 serves as a range in which the granular members 320 can scatter. need to do more. Therefore, forming a space narrower to some extent makes it possible to perform a powerful presentation by visually recognizing a small number of granular members 320 with a high density.

On the other hand, if the space is made too narrow, there is a risk that the granular member 320 will be clogged. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the front-rear width of the internal space IE1 is ensured to be approximately the same as the front-rear width between the left-right central portion 312b of the curved plate portion 312 and the rear section lower portion 314 . Therefore, compared to the case where the front-to-rear width is shortened, it is possible to avoid clogging of the granular member 320 in the internal space IE1 and rapid deceleration during injection.

Furthermore, since the left and right portions 312a of the curved plate portion 312 are arranged closer to the rear section lower portion 314 than the left and right central portion 312b, the movement path of the granular member 320 near the left and right central portions 312b is relatively large. can be narrowed.

That is, when the granular member 320 is injected into the internal space IE1 by the injection device 400, the movement path of the granular member 320 can be concentrated near the left-right central portion 312b, and the granular member 320 can be positioned in the internal space IE1. It is possible to make it easier to reach the vicinity of the central portion. This makes it easier for the player to visually recognize the granular member 320 .

In addition, after the granular member 320 reaches the vicinity of the central portion of the internal space IE1, the granular member 320 collides with the front plate portion 311 and scatters in the internal space IE1. As a result, the player can visually recognize as if the granular members 320 explode from the vicinity of the center of the internal space IE1 and scatter in all directions. can be improved.

The curved plate portion 312 functions as a portion that receives the granular member 320 when the granular member 320 injected into the internal space IE1 falls. From this point of view, in this embodiment, the curved plate portion 312 is designed to be inclined downward toward the rear side and inclined downward toward the left-right center.

As a result, regardless of where in the internal space IE1 the granular member 320 is arranged, the granular member 320, which is displaced downward by its own weight, can be displaced toward the lower side of the rear side while being moved toward the left-right center.

Further, the degree of downward inclination of the left and right portions 312a of the curved plate portion 312 is configured so that the downward inclination toward the left and right central side is steeper than the downward inclination toward the rear side. As a result, as the downward displacement tendency of the granular member 320, it is possible to cause displacement toward the left-right central side with priority over displacement toward the rear surface side. Therefore, due to the configuration of the injection device 400, which will be described later, at the right and left end positions where the granular members 320 are likely to be densely packed, the granular members 320 tend to be displaced to the rear side all at once, and the granular members 320 stay (clog) in the middle of downward displacement. can be avoided.

In addition, the degree of downward inclination toward the rear side of the left and right central portions 312b of the curved plate portion 312 is steeper than the degree of downward inclination toward the left and right central portions of the left and right portions 312a of the curved plate portion 312. is configured as This makes it easier to avoid the granular members 320 from crowding together while flowing down.

On the other hand, in the rear section lower part 314, the plate portion arranged to face the rear side of the curved plate portion 312 is approximately the same as the left and right central portions 312b of the curved plate portion 312 (see FIG. 12A) in a side view (see FIG. 12A). It is formed in a flat plate shape with an inclination angle such that the distance from the left and right center portions 312b is slightly widened toward the front side, that is, the angle with respect to the horizontal direction is large.

In the present embodiment, the inclination angle of the rear section lower portion 314 with respect to the vertical direction is the same (slightly larger angle) than the inclination angle with respect to the vertical direction of the displacement direction of the collision member 420 that ejects the granular member 320 .

Therefore, the incident angle of the granular members 320 with respect to the rear section lower portion 314 is the same regardless of the ejection direction of the granular members 320 that can change to the left and right, so that the resistance given to the granular members 320 from the rear section lower portion 314 is substantially uniform. can do.

The deformed penetrating portion 315 is formed into a shape into which the lid member 480 can be inserted. Prepare. The penetrating direction is inclined upward from the back side toward the front side with respect to the plate surface of the back section lower portion 314 (see FIG. 12(a)). As a result, the acute-angled portion of the rear section lower portion 314 that constitutes the deformed through portion 315 (the lower portion of the deformed through portion 315 in FIG. 12A ) is not arranged to face the ejection direction of the granular member 320 .

This can reduce the possibility that the granular member 320 collides with an acute-angled portion when the granular member 320 is injected, thereby avoiding the occurrence of a local load on the granular member 320 and the rear section lower part 314, thereby preventing the granular member 320 from being locally loaded. It is possible to prevent the member 320 and the rear section lower part 314 from being cracked or chipped.

24 and 25, the granular member 320 is made of a relatively soft resin material (at least softer than the resin material forming the partition member 310) and formed into a substantially soccer ball shape (12 regular pentagons). and 20 regular hexagons formed into a quasi-regular polyhedron) and provided with non-penetrating recesses 321 recessed along a plurality of mutually parallel straight lines.

The non-penetrating concave portion 321 can reduce the weight of the granular member 320 and deviate the center of gravity of the granular member 320 from the central position of the shape. That is, in the linear direction in which the non-penetrating recesses 321 are formed, the meat portion remains on the side where the non-penetrating recesses 321 are not formed, so the center of gravity can be biased toward the side where the non-penetrating recesses 321 are not formed. .

Thereby, the standby posture of the granular member 320 can be adjusted. That is, the standby posture of the granular member 320 can be adjusted to a posture in which the non-penetrating concave portion 321 faces upward (see FIG. 24).

In this case, the load from the injection device 400 can be received by the surface (see FIG. 25) on the side where the non-penetration recess 321 is not formed, so damage and chipping of the granular member 320 can be easily avoided. . Furthermore, since the non-penetrating concave portion 321 is directed toward the injection direction side when being injected with a load from the injection device 400, the surface on which the non-penetrating concave portion 321 is formed should collide with the front plate portion 311. can be done. As a result, the deformation of the granular member 320 can easily absorb the load upon collision with the front plate portion 311, and the possibility of damaging the front plate portion 311 can be reduced.

The first light irradiation unit 330 includes a fixed plate portion 331 fastened and fixed to the back side of the rear partition portion 313, an electrical board 332 fastened and fixed to the right side of the fixed plate portion 331, and the electrical board 332. A lid portion 333 is provided on the right side, is fastened and fixed to the fixing plate portion 331 , and is formed so as to accommodate the electrical board 332 between the fixing plate portion 331 and the fixing plate portion 331 .

Light irradiation units 332a such as LEDs are arranged on both left and right sides of the electrical board 332, and light having an optical axis is emitted from the light irradiation units 332a in the left-right direction. The fixing plate portion 331 and the lid portion 333 are made of a resin material with low light transmittance, and are provided with through holes 331a and 333a at positions corresponding to the light irradiation portion 332a. Thereby, it can be visually recognized as light divided into particles.

Of the light emitted from the illumination board 332, the light emitted to the right side often illuminates the right side path (right-handed path) of the game area where the through gate 67 and the like (see FIG. 2) are arranged. one purpose. The light emitted to the left will be described later.

The fixing plate portion 331 and the lid portion 333 are made of a resin material with low light transmittance (or no light transmittance), and are provided with through holes 331a and 333a at positions corresponding to the light irradiation portion 332a. As a result, the light emitted from the light irradiation section 332a can be visually recognized as light divided into granules. It is possible to avoid being shielded by and visually recognized.

The second light irradiation unit 340 includes a fixed plate portion 341 fastened and fixed to the rear side of the rear partition portion 313, an electrical board 342 fastened and fixed to the left side of the fixed plate portion 341, and the electrical board 342. A lid portion 343 is provided on the left side, is fastened and fixed to the fixed plate portion 341 , and is formed so as to accommodate the electrical board 342 between the fixed plate portion 341 and the fixed plate portion 341 .

The fixing plate portion 341 is made of a resin material with low light transmittance (or non-light transmittance), while the lid portion 343 is made of a colorless and light transmittance resin material. Therefore, the electrical board 342 is visible when viewed from the left, but in the present embodiment, the left side of the center frame 86 (see FIG. 2) protrudes leftward. As a result, the field of view of the player can be narrowed in advance, and the left side of the decorative board 342 can be prevented from being seen when viewed from the front.

As a result, light can be emitted through the transparent lid portion 343 while avoiding the decorative electrical substrate 342 from being visually recognized.

Light irradiation units 342a such as LEDs are arranged on both the left and right sides of the electrical board 342 . Light having an optical axis directed forward is emitted from the light emitting portion 342a arranged on the left side surface. One purpose of this light is to illuminate the left side of the center frame 86 while not illuminating the left path of the game area.

Here, the reason for adopting a configuration different from the configuration in which the light emitted from the light emitting portion 342a of the electric decoration board 332 on the right side is positively directed to the game area is the playability of the pachinko machine 10 (normally It is considered that the game is played with the left hand, and the game is played with the right hand during the probability variation, the time reduction, and the jackpot game). This is explained below.

Since the game area of the pachinko machine 10 has a high degree of freedom in the ball flow path on the left side of the game area, during normal play, the ball shooting intensity is adjusted so that the ball will flow down the desired path. The operation of doing is performed by the player. Therefore, if the light emission intensity on the left side of the game area is increased too much, the visibility of the ball becomes poor, which hinders the adjustment of the shooting intensity of the ball and may cause dissatisfaction of the player.

On the other hand, when shooting the ball to the right side of the playing area, basically, the player launches the ball with maximum shooting strength. The momentum of the shot ball is suppressed by the return rubber 69, and the degree of freedom of selection of the downstream path of the ball on the downstream side is significantly reduced, and the same path is exclusively used.

More specifically, in the present embodiment, a single guide path DL1 (see FIG. 2) is formed downstream of the second prize winning port 640 and has a width through which one ball can pass. All the balls that did not hit go through the guide path DL1 and go to the variable winning device 65 and the general winning opening 63 arranged on the downstream side.

As described above, since there is little need to adjust the shooting intensity of the ball, even if the visibility of the ball becomes poor in the right side of the game area (especially the part where the guide path DL1 is formed), the game will not be hindered. Since the possibility of causing this is low, it is possible to perform an effect with a high emission intensity in this range.

For this reason, in the present embodiment, the illumination board 332 arranged on the right side is provided with the light irradiation part 332a so as to direct the light to the game area, while the illumination board 342 arranged on the left side Then, the light irradiation part 342a is arranged so as not to direct the light to the game area.
As a result, it is possible to execute an effective lighting effect while suppressing the dissatisfaction of the player.

Light having an optical axis directed to the right is emitted from the light emitting portion 342a arranged on the right side. A through hole 341a is formed in the fixed plate portion 341 at a position corresponding to the light irradiation portion 342a. As a result, the light emitted from the light irradiation unit 342a can be visually recognized as light divided into granules, and the decorative substrate 342 is shielded by the fixed plate portion 341 in a range away from the light irradiation unit 342a. You can avoid being seen. The object illuminated by the light irradiation section 342a arranged on the right side will be described later.

26(a) is a side view of the first light irradiation device 330 viewed in the direction of arrow R in FIG. 25, and FIG. 26(b) is a side view of the second light irradiation device 340 viewed in the direction of arrow L in FIG. It is a diagram. In FIGS. 26(a) and 26(b), the outer shape of the partition member 310 is illustrated by imaginary lines.

As shown in FIG. 26( a ), the light irradiation unit 332 a provided on the left side of the first light irradiation device 330 includes an LED whose optical axis passes through the partitioning member 310 and an LED whose optical axis passes through the partitioning member 310 . an LED through which the axis passes.

As a result, not only is the effect of irradiating light onto the granular member 320 inside the partitioning member 310 , but also other movable means (enlargement/reduction unit 600 and displacement/rotation unit 800 ) arranged on the rear side of the partitioning member 310 are illuminated with light. It is possible to execute the effect to irradiate.

As shown in FIG. 26(b), the light irradiation unit 342a arranged on the right side of the second light irradiation device 340 has no LED whose optical axis passes through the partitioning member 310, and the rear side of the partitioning member 310. It consists only of LEDs through which the optical axis passes.

As a result, while suppressing the light emission intensity into the partitioning member 310, the illumination intensity of the light directed to the other movable means (the enlargement/reduction unit 600 and the displacement/rotation unit 800) arranged on the rear side of the partitioning member 310 is reduced. can be improved.

In the second irradiation device 340, by suppressing the emission intensity to the inside of the partitioning member 310, it is possible to improve the comfort of the game in the normal state. That is, in the game in the normal state, the player's line of sight is not fixed, but is mainly directed to the left side of the game area, the display of the third symbol display device 81, or the vicinity of the first winning hole 64, In many cases, the player is looking at the area to the left of the center of the game area.

In this case, when the interior of the partitioning member 310 is irradiated with light from the second irradiation device 340, it shines at a position near the front to the same degree as the game area. As a result, there is a possibility that the visibility of the game area may be deteriorated for the player.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the light irradiation unit 342a of the second irradiation device 340 is arranged toward the back side, and the light irradiation unit 342a is separated from the game area. can weaken the degree of influence on the visibility of the game area.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, the light emitted from the light irradiation unit 342a of the second irradiation device 340 emits light that illuminates the inner side of the center frame 86 in front view with high intensity while reducing the degree of lighting the game area. can perform the performance. Therefore, it is possible to perform an effect of lighting up the enlargement/reduction unit 600 and the displacement/rotation unit 800 (see FIG. 5) without lowering the visibility of the game area.

27 is a cross-sectional view of the game board 13 and the shooting unit 300 along line XXVII-XXVII of FIG. That is, in FIG. 27, the game board 13 and the shooting unit 300 are illustrated, and the illustration of the operation unit 500 is omitted. Also, the directions of light emitted from the first light irradiation device 330 and the second light irradiation device 340 are schematically indicated by arrows.

As shown in FIG. 27, the second light irradiation device 340 is arranged on the left side and the rear side of the vertically placed substrate unit 167, avoiding the later-described vertically placed substrate unit 167 that irradiates the light guide plate 161 with light. As a result, the light emitted from the light irradiation unit 342a can be prevented from entering the light guide plate 161, and the light emission effect can be performed. It can be separated from performance.

When the light guide plate 161 is employed as in the present embodiment, the light guide plate 161 may unintentionally emit light depending on the light irradiation path, which may reduce the presentation effect. In particular, since the light irradiated around the light guide plate 161 (for example, the front side of the center frame 86) tends to illuminate the light guide plate 161, it may be necessary to suppress the light emission intensity, which may reduce the degree of freedom in rendering. was

In contrast, according to the present embodiment, the light from the light irradiation unit 342a is configured to travel while avoiding the light guide plate 161, so that the degree of freedom in setting the irradiation intensity of the light from the light irradiation unit 342a is improved. be able to. As a result, the degree of freedom of the lighting effect around the light guide plate 161 can be improved.

Returning to FIG. 24 and FIG. 25, description will be made. The injection device 400 is disposed below the partition member 310, and is a device on which the granular member 320 that has flowed downward from the internal space IE1 (see FIG. 12(a)) of the partition member 310 rides.

28, 29 and 30 are front exploded perspective views of the injection device 400, and FIGS. 31, 32 and 33 are rear exploded perspective views of the injection device 400. FIG. 28 and 31 show an overview of the configuration of the injection device 400, and FIGS. 29 and 32 show details of the configuration of a part of the injection device 400 arranged near the front side. 30 and 33 show details of the configuration of a portion of the injection device 400 arranged closer to the rear side. 24 and 25 will be referred to as necessary in the description of FIGS. 28 to 33. FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 28 to 33, the injection device 400 includes, as fixed members, a fixing member 350 fastened and fixed to the partition member 310 (see FIG. 24), and a fixed member 350 fastened and fixed on the rear side of the fixed member 350. A space forming member 360 configured to be able to form a space capable of accommodating other movable members between itself and the fixed member 350, and an electric wiring and transmission arm member 470 which are fastened and fixed on the back side of the space forming member 360 and which will be described later. and an intermediate member 401 disposed between the fixing member 350 and the space forming member 360 and having a keyhole-shaped opening 402 in the center.

A fastening screw used to fasten and fix the fixing member 350 to the partitioning member 310 is inserted through the partitioning member 310 from the front side. Therefore, when removing the fixing member 350 from the partitioning member 310, it is necessary to loosen this fastening screw with a screwdriver and remove it, but the game board 13 and the shooting unit 300 are assembled (see FIG. 12(a)). , the base plate 60 is arranged on the front side of the fixing member 350, and is configured so that a screwdriver cannot be inserted into the fastening screw.

Therefore, as a preparation before removing the fixing member 350 from the partitioning member 310, the operation of removing the shooting unit 300 from the game board 13 can be performed. This prevents the occurrence of a situation in which the fixing member 350 is mistakenly removed from the partitioning member 310 and the granular member 320 is ejected from the fixing member 310 while the shooting unit 300 is attached to the game board 13.例文帳に追加be able to.

Injection device 400 is configured such that a plurality of metal rods MB1 fixed to the front side of intermediate member 401 are inserted as members displaceably arranged between intermediate member 401 and fixed member 350 so as to be linearly displaceable. a linear motion member 410 arranged above the linear motion member 410 and supported so as to be displaceable along the displacement direction of the linear motion member 410; A contact member 430 is provided below the motion member 410 and configured to be capable of changing its state between a contactable state and a non-contactable state in the displacement direction of the linear motion member 410 .

The injection device 400 is a member disposed between the intermediate member 401 and the space forming member 360 so as to be displaceable. and a drive shaft of a driving motor MT1 fastened and fixed to a fixing member 350 and engaged with the gear teeth of the front transmission member 440. A gear 450 and a rear transmission member 460 disposed on the side opposite to the flange portion 444 of the front transmission member 440 with respect to the drive gear 450 and fastened and fixed to the rotation transmission member 440 are provided.

The injection device 400 is a member arranged displaceably on the back side of the space forming member 360 and is pivotally supported so as to be rotationally displaceable about a rotation axis parallel to the rotation axis of the front transmission member 440 . A transmission arm member 470 configured to be displaceable by action, and a cover member 480 that is rotatably displaceable about a horizontal straight line as a rotation axis and is displaced by a load received from the transmission arm member 470 .

A design concept of the injection device 400 having the above configuration will be described. In the injection device 400 , the fixed intermediate member 401 and the space forming member 360 divide the arrangement range of the constituent members into three along the projecting direction of the shaft portion 362 projecting from the space forming member 360 . Among the arrangement ranges divided in this way, the driving force of the driving motor MT1 is generated in the intermediate range where the driving gear 450 rotated by the driving force of the driving motor MT1 is arranged, and the driving force is distributed between the front range and the rear range. are respectively transmitted to the range of , displacement of each component occurs in the front range and the rear range.

Based on this design concept, the intermediate member 401 and the space forming member 360 are each provided with openings for transmitting driving force. That is, the intermediate portion 401 has a keyhole-shaped opening 402 , and the space forming member 360 has a lemon-shaped (substantially elliptical) opening 361 .

Since the transmission of driving force is completed in the front range of the intermediate portion 401 and the rear range of the space forming member 360, the details of the configuration will be described in the order of the front range and the rear range. , the details of the construction of the intermediate range are described, and the mode of operation is described.

First, description will be made focusing on the front range. As shown in FIGS. 29 and 32, the intermediate member 401 includes the opening 402 described above, a plurality of cylindrical projections 403 projecting from the upper end to the front side, and the cylindrical projections 403 a plurality of coil springs SP1 whose upper ends are supported by the base, a plurality of rod fixing portions 404 arranged in left-right symmetrical positions so as to be able to fix a plurality of metal rods MB1, and a columnar shape protruding toward the front side near the lower end. The lower end of the coil spring SP1 is hooked on each of a plurality of claws 411 formed on the lower end of the direct-acting member 410 .

The natural length of the coil spring SP1 is formed to be shorter than the distance between the cylindrical projection 403 and the claw 411 when the linear motion member 410 is arranged at the upper end position. Therefore, the linear motion member 410 is always biased by the coil spring SP1, and the linear motion member 410 is arranged at the upper end position by the biasing force before the driving force is transmitted from the intermediate range. The coil spring SP1 is arranged obliquely below the direct-acting member 410. This is also intended to concentrate the biasing force of the coil spring SP1 on the side where the granular members 320 tend to accumulate.

The direct-acting member 410 includes the claw portion 411 described above, a plurality of insertion portions 412 formed so that the metal rod MB1 can be inserted therethrough, a trapezoidal projecting portion 413 projecting in a trapezoidal shape from the upper end portion in the left-right center, A linear protrusion 414 extending in the left-right direction at a substantially central position in the vertical width direction on the back side, and a lower protrusion formed as a shorter protrusion than the protrusion 414 on the lower side of the protrusion 414. 415, and a displacement restricting portion 416 protruding from the lower end portion in the center in the left-right direction toward the front side.

Trapezoidal protruding portion 413 is formed so as to be able to abut against collision member 420 in a state in which direct-acting member 410 is arranged at the upper end position. In other words, the direct-acting member 410 is formed such that only the trapezoidal projecting portion 413 can contact the collision member 420, and the portion other than the trapezoidal projecting portion 413 is not in contact with the collision member 420. be.

The ridge portion 414 and the lower ridge portion 415 are portions that receive loads from other constituent members during load transmission, and the details will be described later.

The displacement restricting portion 416 is a portion of the fixed member 350 that abuts against the cushioning member 352 in the displacement direction, and this abutment restricts displacement of the direct-acting member 410 (upward-side displacement end is set).

The collision member 420 includes a curved plate portion 421 forming an arch-shaped collision surface, and a flat plate-shaped portion extending from the back side end portion of the curved plate portion 421 parallel to the plane in which the linear motion member 410 displaces. A plate portion 422, a plurality of elongated guide holes 423 extending along the extension direction of the plate portion 422, and a trapezoidal projecting portion 413 at the lower end of the left and right central portion of the plate portion 422 in the displacement direction. A cushioning member 424 is fixed at a position facing each other and arranged so as to be able to abut against the trapezoidal projecting portion 413 .

The cylindrical protrusion 403 is inserted through the guide hole 423 . That is, the columnar protrusion 403 is used both as a portion that supports the upper end portion of the coil spring SP1 and as a portion that guides the displacement of the collision member 420 .

The cushioning member 424 is formed as a small piece with a square outer shape from a highly durable and flexible resin material. Although not particularly limited, for example, nylon resin, urethane resin, or the like can be used. In this case, the load and impact when the cushioning member 424 and the trapezoidal projecting portion 413 of the direct-acting member 410 come into contact can be softened by the characteristics of the resin material, and the trapezoidal projecting portion 413 can be prevented from being damaged or chipped. can be suppressed.

The contact member 430 is formed in a substantially triangular elongated plate shape, and has a support hole 431 formed as a circular opening through which the support column portion 405 can be inserted at one end of the elongated plate, and the other end of the elongated plate. and a hook-shaped protrusion 433 having a hook-shaped cross section and protruding toward the front side at a position between the support hole 431 and the protrusion 432. Prepare.

The support hole 431 is an opening through which the support column portion 405 is inserted, whereby the contact member 430 is pivotally supported by the support column portion 405 so as to be rotatably displaceable.

The protruding portion 432 and the hook-shaped protruding portion 433 are portions that receive loads from other constituent members during load transmission, the details of which will be described later.

The fixing member 350 includes a motor fixing portion 351 to which the drive motor MT1 is arranged and fixed, a cushioning member 352 arranged to contact the displacement restricting portion 416, and a tip end of the circular protrusion 403. a plurality of fastening recesses 353 formed as recesses configured so that a fastening screw inserted from the front side through a through-hole inside the recess can be screwed into a female thread formed in the circular protrusion 403 to be fastened and fixed; and a guide portion 354 which is formed of an inclined surface tapered from the front side and the left and right directions and guides the displacement of the granular member 320 (see FIG. 24).

The cushioning member 352 is formed as a small piece having a square outer shape from a highly durable and flexible resin material. Although not particularly limited, for example, nylon resin, urethane resin, or the like can be used. In this case, the load and impact when the cushioning member 352 and the displacement restricting portion 416 of the linear motion member 410 come into contact can be softened by the characteristics of the resin material, and the occurrence of breakage and chipping of the displacement restricting portion 416 can be suppressed. be able to.

As described above, in this embodiment, the buffer members 352 and 424 are arranged at a plurality of locations with which the linear motion member 410 abuts at the end of displacement in the biasing direction. As a result, as will be described later, the linear motion member 410 is displaced upward at high speed by the biasing force of the coil spring SP1. can be absorbed by the deformation of the cushioning members 352 and 424, and the load can be distributed to a plurality of locations.

The columnar protrusion 403 and the fixing member 350 are connected via the fastening recess 353, and in order to release this connection, the fastening screw inserted through the coupling recess 353 needs to be turned and removed. On the other hand, since the fastening screw is inserted from the front side of the fixing member 350, it is possible to insert a screwdriver into the fastening screw when the game board 13 and the shooting effect unit 300 are assembled (see FIG. 12). configured to prevent

As a result, in a state where the game board 13 and the shooting performance unit 300 are assembled, the tightening screws are erroneously loosened to prevent loosening of the tightening between the fixing member 350 and the intermediate member 401. - 特許庁can be done.

Next, description will be made focusing on the rear range. As shown in FIGS. 30 and 33, the space forming member 360 includes the above-described opening 361, a shaft portion 362 projecting in a columnar shape toward the front side from approximately the center position of the rear plate portion, and a rear plate portion. A pair of left and right guide inclined surfaces 363 formed as inclined surfaces on the upper surface of the plate-shaped portion extending toward the front side at the left and right ends of the upper end position of the face plate portion, and arranged below the left and right inner side of the guide inclined surfaces 363 A pair of left and right protruding support portions 364 protruding from the back plate portion toward the front side, and both left and right end portions are formed in a cylindrical shape and arranged on the same line, and are formed in a size capable of pivotally supporting the lid member 480 . A plurality of support column portions 365, a torsion spring SP2 that is wound around the left support column portion 364 and generates a biasing force toward the retracting side of the lid member 480, and a columnar projection on the back side at the upper left portion of the opening 361. and a cylindrical projection 366 that is

The shaft portion 362 is a portion that rotatably supports the front transmission member 440 and the rear transmission member 460 as will be described later. Correspondingly, a wall portion having an arc-shaped inner surface centered on the shaft portion 362 extends from the rear plate portion of the space forming member 360 toward the front side. This wall portion can cover the front transmission member 440 and the rear transmission member 460 inside.

The guide inclined surface 363 is configured so that the inclination of the left and right inner side surfaces is flush with the left and right inner gully surfaces of the guide portion 354 (see FIG. 32), and the granular member 320 flowing down is directed to the collision member 420 side (left and right central side). It is formed so as to be able to be guided toward.

The protruding support part 364 is formed so that the protruding tip contacts the back surface of the intermediate member 401 and the upper surface is flush with the intermediate member 401 . This flush upper surface supports the left and right ends of the curved plate portion 421 in a state where the collision member 420 is arranged at the lower end position.

The support column portion 365 has different shapes on the left and right. That is, the right side is formed in a small-diameter cylindrical shape that protrudes outward to the left and right, and the left side is formed in a cylindrical shape having an inner diameter capable of receiving the cylindrical portion of the left cover member 489 .

The cylindrical protrusion 366 is a portion that rotatably supports the transmission arm 470 by being inserted through the transmission arm 470 . A screw having a large head diameter is fixed to a female screw formed at the tip of the cylindrical protrusion 366, thereby supporting the transmission arm 470 so that it cannot fall off.

The transmission arm member 470 is an elongated member having an approximately V-shape in appearance, and is a support that is bored with a diameter slightly larger than the outer diameter of the cylindrical projection 366 and through which the cylindrical projection 366 is inserted. A hole 471, a cylindrical protrusion 472 projecting from one end in the longitudinal direction toward the front side in parallel with the axial direction of the support hole 471, and the other end in the longitudinal direction perpendicular to the axis of the support hole 471. and a transmission protrusion 473 that protrudes in a cylindrical shape along the plane.

The columnar protrusion 472 extends through the opening 361 of the space forming member 360 toward the front side and is formed to be engageable with the rear transmission member 460 . In the present embodiment, the position of the transmission arm member 470 is changed by changing the arrangement of the columnar protrusion 472 as the rear transmission member 460 changes its position, which will be described later in detail.

A restricting member 370 is provided on the rear side of the columnar protrusion 472 . That is, the restricting member 370 is a plate-like member that is fastened and fixed to the back side of the space forming member 360, and includes a covering plate portion 371 that covers the movement path of the cylindrical protrusion 472 from the back side and an electrical wiring. Alternatively, a plurality of pressing claw portions 372 formed in a claw shape for the purpose of bundling are provided.

The covering plate portion 371 is arranged close to the back side of the transmission arm member 470, and restricts the displacement of the cylindrical protrusion 472 toward the back side (the back side in the rotation axis direction of the transmission arm member 470). As a result, it is possible to prevent the columnar protrusion 472 from separating from the rear transmission member 460 , thereby preventing the release of the engagement between the columnar protrusion 472 and the rear transmission member 460 . can.

The pressing claw portion 372 is a portion that temporarily fastens the electrical wiring connected to the drive motor MT1 and the detection sensor SC4 to the rear side plate of the space forming member 360 . As a result, it is possible to prevent the arrangement of the electrical wiring from shaking (for example, the arrangement of the electrical wiring changes due to vibration, etc.). It can be configured to displace lateral slide member 840 and wings 854 (see FIGS. 10 and 12) of displacement rotary unit 800 in a path that includes positions proximate device 400 .

The transmission protrusion 473 is a portion that is inserted through the lid member 480 to transmit driving force to the lid member 480 .

The lid member 480 is a member configured to be movable forward and backward in and out of the partitioning member 310 through the deformed through portion 315 (see FIG. 12A) of the partitioning member 310, and is formed in a curved plate shape. 481, a plurality of extension plate portions 485 extending in the same direction from both left and right ends of the advancing/retracting portion 481, and a plurality of extension plate portions 485 coaxially received at the extending end portions of the extension plate portions 485. , a transmission hole 487 formed in the left extension plate portion 485 in a curved elongated hole shape and through which the transmission projection 473 of the transmission arm member 470 is inserted, and a cylindrical shape surrounding the right reception portion 486 and has an insertion hole through which a fastening screw to be fastened to a female screw formed at the tip of the support column portion 365 can be inserted while surrounding the receiving portion 486 . a left cover member 489 having a cylindrical portion inserted into the left receiving portion 486 and an elongated hole-shaped portion continuously connected to the transmission hole 487 .

The left cover member 489 is provided with abutment surfaces 489a to 489c that are functionally formed rather than drilled along the axial direction, details of which will be described later.

The cross-sectional shape of the advance/retreat portion 481 of the lid member 480 is arc-shaped around the rotation axis assumed for the receiving portion 486, so that the load from the outer diameter side (the load applied from the granular member 320) can be rotated. Although it is configured to face the axis, it is not a simple pipe divided shape, but the radius of the arc and the length of formation are changed according to the left and right positions. This design intent will be explained.

First, the advance/retreat portion 481 has an overhang portion 482 projecting toward the entrance side at the lateral center position. The projecting portion 482 is formed so that the projecting width becomes shorter toward the left and right outer sides, and the end surface on the entry side is formed to be inclined toward the left and right outer sides. As a result, when the overhanging portion 482 and another component (in this embodiment, the granular member 320 (see FIG. 24) is assumed) come into contact with each other, the load directed to the left and right outer sides of the component is reduced. can be provided, and the component can be driven to the left and right outside.

Secondly, as described above, the advancing/retracting portion 481 is configured to be able to enter the partitioning member 310 through the deformed through portion 315 (see FIG. 25) of the partitioning member 310. Since it enters the member 310, the arc radius of the advance/retreat portion 481 is shortened at the lateral center position where the overhang portion 482 is formed.

As a result, it is possible to suppress the positional deviation that may occur at the point where it starts to enter the deformed penetrating portion 315 (the center of the projecting portion 482 in the left and right direction). can be suppressed.

Third, the radius of the arc is increased near the left and right outer sides of the retractable portion 481 , as opposed to the center position of the projecting portion 482 . The main purpose of this is to avoid contact with the particulate material 320 . That is, in this embodiment, the granular member 320 (see FIG. 12A) arranged on the upper surface of the collision member 420 stays on the left and right outer sides due to the shape of the curved plate portion 421 .

This retention method is not completely uniform on the left and right, and may become non-uniform on the left and right. For example, there is a possibility that an extremely large number of granular members 320 will stay on the right side, and if sufficient space is not secured, there is a possibility that the unevenly accumulated granular members 320 and the advancing/retreating portion 481 will collide. .

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the arc radius of the advance/retreat portion 481 is increased near the left and right outer portions where a large amount of the granular members 320 tend to stay. As a result, it is possible to secure a sufficiently long distance between the advancing/retreating portion 481 and the curved plate portion 421 in advance. Collisions can be avoided.

Another design concept will be described. The extension plate portion 485 is formed on a plane perpendicular to the rotation axis of the lid member 480, and the end face on the entrance side is recessed toward the retraction side. As a result, the extended plate portion 485 can be prevented from colliding with the staying granular member 320 .

In addition, even if the cover member 480 is arranged at the end of displacement on the entrance side before the granular member 320 completely flows down, the granular member 320 is positioned between the recess forming portion of the extension plate portion 485 and the curved portion of the partition member 310 . The particle members 320 can be collected above the collision member 420 by configuring the particle members 320 to be large enough to pass through the gap between the plate portion 312 (see FIG. 25).

The right and left receiving portions 486 have different shapes. That is, the left receiving portion 486a on the left side is formed in a circular cylinder shape, and the right receiving portion 486b on the right side is formed in a semi-cylindrical shape (half-pipe shape).

Returning to FIG. 28 and FIG. 31, description will be made. The support column portion 365 that supports the lid member 480 extends laterally outward, particularly on the right side. It is necessary to divide the advance/retreat portion 481 in order to assemble it to the column portion 365 .

As described above, in this embodiment, the lid member 480 moves forward and backward through the deformed through portion 315 (see FIG. 25). The deformed penetrating part 315 needs to be configured to allow the lid member 480 to move back and forth with respect to the partitioning member 310 , and to be configured to prevent the particulate member 320 from being ejected from the partitioning member 310 . In other words, the deformed through portion 315 cannot be increased indefinitely, and the degree of freedom in designing the deformed through portion 315 is limited.

Here, if the lid member 480 loses its shape to such an extent that it cannot pass through the deformed through portion 315, it becomes impossible to move forward and backward. On the other hand, when the advancing/retracting portion 481 of the lid member 480 is configured by coupling a plurality of members, there is a possibility that the shape may be lost due to factors such as assembly errors.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the shape of the receiving portion 486 is made different on the left and right, so that the moving portion 481 does not need to be divided. As an assembly process, first, the left receiving portion 486a is arranged on the axially outer side (left side) of the support column portion 365, and the cylindrical portion of the left cover member 489 is inserted into the support column portion 365 while being inserted into the left receiving portion 486a. Thus, the left receiving portion 486a can be arranged coaxially with the support column portion 365. As shown in FIG.

At this time, the right receiving portion 486b is arranged to face the support column portion 365 on the open side of the half cylinder. The left cover member 489 is fastened and fixed to the extended plate portion 485 by inserting fastening screws through the plurality of screw insertion holes formed in the left cover member 489 and screwing them into the extended plate portion 485 on the left side of the lid member 480 . can do.

After that, the right cover member 488 is attached from the outside in the axial direction, and the screw head of the fastening screw that is screwed into the female screw formed at the tip of the right support column portion 365 is used to support the lid member 480 into a space. It can be rotatably supported relative to the forming member 360 .

The design concept of the transmission protrusion 473 of the transmission arm member 470 and the left cover member 489 will be described with reference to FIGS. 34 to 36. FIG. 34 to 36 show the displacement of the transmission arm member 470 and the lid member 480 in chronological order.

34(a) is a plan view of the transmission arm member 470 and the lid member 480 viewed in the direction of arrow XXXIVa in FIG. 28, and FIG. 34(b) is a transmission arm member viewed in the direction of arrow XXXIVb in FIG. 34(a). 34(c) is a partial cross-sectional view of the transmission arm member 470 and the lid member 480 taken along line XXXIVc-XXXIVc of FIG. 34(b).

35(a) is a plan view of the transmission arm member 470 and the lid member 480 as seen in the direction of arrow XXXIVa in FIG. 28, and FIG. 35(b) is a plan view of the transmission arm member as seen in the direction of arrow XXXVb in FIG. 35(a). 35(c) is a partial cross-sectional view of the transmission arm member 470 and the lid member 480 taken along line XXXVc-XXXVc of FIG. 35(b).

36(a) is a plan view of the transmission arm member 470 and the lid member 480 viewed in the direction of arrow XXXIVa in FIG. 28, and FIG. 36(b) is a transmission arm member viewed in the direction of arrow XXXVIb in FIG. 36(a). 36(c) is a partial cross-sectional view of the transmission arm member 470 and the lid member 480 taken along line XXXVIc-XXXVIc in FIG. 36(b).

35 and 36 illustrate a process in which the transmission protrusion 473 of the transmission arm member 470 is displaced upward from the state shown in FIG. 34, and the advance/retreat portion 481 of the lid member 480 is displaced toward the entrance side. Specifically, FIG. 36 illustrates a state in which the lid member 480 is arranged at the entry-side end of the displacement range, and FIG. The arranged state is shown, and FIG. 35 shows the state where the lid member 480 is arranged at the intermediate position of the displacement range.

As shown in FIGS. 34 to 36, in this embodiment, the rotation axis of transmission arm member 470 and the rotation axis of lid member 480 are not parallel. Specifically, a plane orthogonal to the rotation axis of the transmission arm member 470 (a plane shown in FIG. 34(a)) and a plane orthogonal to the rotation axis of the lid member 480 (a plane shown in FIG. 34(b)) ) are orthogonal to each other.

Therefore, without countermeasures, the contact area of the transmission protrusion 473 that contacts the left cover member 489 normally changes as the posture changes. For example, when the inner surface of the opening of the left cover member 489 is formed by a surface extending parallel to the axial direction of the lid member 480, the longitudinal direction of the transmission protrusion 473 extends in the left-right direction as shown in FIG. 34(a). On the other hand, in the inclined state, the upper side surface of the transmission protrusion 473 is considered to abut on the left cover member 489 at a rightward position (near the support hole 471 of the transmission arm member 470).

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 36( a ), when the longitudinal direction of the transmission projection 473 extends along the left-right direction, the upper side surface of the transmission projection 473 is considered to be in contact with the left cover member 489 across the width direction. be done.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 34(c), 35(c) and 36(c), the upper surface of the transmission projection 473 changes in accordance with the posture change of the transmission projection 473. The left cover member 489 is designed in such a shape that the upper side surface of the opening of the left cover member 489 can abut across the lateral width direction.

That is, the left cover member 489 has a first contact surface 489a that contacts the transmission protrusion 473 in a state where the lid member 480 is arranged at the displacement end position on the retracting side, and the first contact surface 489a is relatively small. A second contact surface 489b formed with a small inclination in the left-right direction, and a lid member 480 formed with a small inclination in the left-right direction compared to the second contact surface 489b are arranged at the displacement end position on the entrance side. and a third contact surface 489c that contacts the transmission protrusion 473 in a state.

As described above, in this embodiment, the inclination of the shape of the upper side surface of the opening of the left cover member 489 with respect to the left-right direction is maximized at the first contact surface 489a and gradually decreases toward the rotation axis of the lid member 480. designed to

More specifically, as the transmission arm member 470 rotates, the contact position between the transmission protrusion 473 and the upper side surface of the opening of the left cover member 489 changes in the axial radial direction of the cover member 480 . The inclination at the contact position of the left cover member 489 with the upper side surface of the opening is designed at an inclination angle along the upper surface of the transmission protrusion 473 in the contact state.

As a result, when the transmission arm member 470 and the left cover member 489 are in contact with each other, the contact area between the transmission protrusion 473 and the left cover member 489 can always be ensured regardless of the posture of the transmission arm member 470 . Therefore, it is possible to prevent a local load (overload) from being applied to the transmission protrusion 473 from the left cover member 489 .

Furthermore, in this embodiment, at the timing when a large load is generated, that is, the timing at which the cover member 480 starts to be displaced against gravity, the inclination angle of the transmission projection 473 is set with respect to the left-right direction (the width direction of the left cover member 489). Therefore, the contact area (contact length) between the transmission protrusion 473 and the left cover member 489 can be maximized.

As a result, the area that bears the load applied to the transmission protrusion 473 can be increased, and the load applied per unit area can be reduced, so that the durability of the transmission protrusion 473 can be improved.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, when the lid member 480 is arranged at the displacement end on the entry side, the inclination angle of the transmission protrusion 473 is along the left-right direction (the width direction of the left cover member 489). In addition to the reduced contact area (contact length) between the portion 473 and the left cover member 489, the biasing force of the torsion spring SP2 is maximized, and there is a possibility that the transmission protrusion 473 will be overloaded. be.

As a countermeasure, in the present embodiment, when the cover member 480 is arranged at the displacement end position on the entry side, the proportion of the weight of the cover member 480 that is applied to the transmission protrusion 473 is reduced. ing.

That is, as shown in FIG. 36(b), when the lid member 480 is arranged at the displacement end position on the entrance side, the advance/retreat portion 481, which accounts for most of the self weight of the lid member 480, is the rotational axis of the lid member 480. It is arranged on the opposite side (front side) of the transmission protrusion 473 in the front-rear direction with respect to O1. Therefore, most of the weight of the lid member 480 is generated in the direction of displacing the lid member 480 toward the entrance side, and the load applied to the transmission protrusion 473 can be reduced.

In this case, the biasing force of the torsion spring SP2 applied to the lid member 480 is the maximum, but since most of the weight of the lid member 480 is generated against the biasing force of the torsion spring SP2, the biasing force is at least Part of this can be offset by the weight of the lid member 480 itself.

As a result, the load applied to the transmission protrusion 473 is greater than that in the case where most of the biasing force of the torsion spring SP2 is transmitted to the transmission protrusion 473 in the state where the cover member 480 is arranged at the displacement end position on the entry side. can be reduced.

Further, as described above, in the present embodiment, the contact position between the transmission protrusion 473 and the left cover member 489 changes in the axial radial direction of the rotation axis O1 of the lid member 480 . More specifically, the distance between the abutment position between the transmission protrusion 473 and the left cover member 489 and the rotation axis of the cover member 480 in the process of displacing the cover member 480 from the retreating position to the entering position is The member 480 is configured to be the longest when it is arranged at the displacement end position on the withdrawal side.

In addition, the first contact surface 489a has a normal line at the contact position with the transmission protrusion 473 on a plane orthogonal to the rotation axis O1 of the lid member 480, which is an arc centered on the rotation axis O1 of the lid member 480. Since the inclination of the first contact surface 489a is designed so as to follow (the inclination angle becomes small), the load transmitted from the transmission protrusion 473 to the lid member 480 is shifted to the rotation axis O1 of the lid member 480. It can occur along an arc.

This lengthens the arm length of the moment generated in the lid member 480 when the load starts to be transmitted from the transmission protrusion 473 to the lid member 480, thereby reducing the load required to rotate the lid member 480. can do.

As a contrivance of the shape of the transmission projection 473 itself, as shown in FIG. 34(c), the transmission projection 473 has a groove 473a formed along the longitudinal direction. That is, the transmission protrusion 473 is formed with a groove 473a extending in the longitudinal direction from the front side to the rear side to a position beyond the center in the width direction.

As a result, the transmission protrusion 473 can be compressed and deformed in the direction of contact with the left cover member 489, so that the load applied during contact can be relieved by deformation, and the contact area can be easily increased by deformation. can do.

As shown in FIGS. 34(b), 35(b), and 36(b), the curved plate portion 312 arranged to face the advancing/retracting portion 481 of the lid member 480 is formed in a shape along the same plane across the left and right. be done.
Therefore, the distance between the lid member 480 and the curved plate portion 312 becomes shorter toward the center in the left-right direction due to the shape of the retractable portion 481 and the projecting portion 482 .

The radius of the projecting portion 482 of the lid member 480 at the center position in the left-right direction is designed to be less than the distance (length) from the rotation axis O1 to the curved plate portion 312 . As a result, it is possible to prevent the projecting portion 482 having the maximum approach width from colliding with the curved plate portion 312, so that the lid member 480 is slightly over-rotated (caused by design error of each member). In this case, the lid member 480 and the curved plate portion 312 can be prevented from colliding and being damaged.

Returning to FIGS. 28 and 31, description will be made focusing on the intermediate range. The drive gear 450 is meshed with the front transmission member 440, and the rear transmission member 460 is fastened and fixed to the front transmission member 440. As a result, as the drive gear 450 rotates, the front transmission member 440 and the rear transmission member 440 rotate. The transmission member 460 integrally rotates about the shaft portion 362 of the space forming member 360 . In the following description, rotation in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front (viewed from the side of the front transmission member 440) is defined as forward rotation.

The front side transmission member 440 and the rear side transmission member 460 have a structure for ensuring mutual relative position and rigidity on the sides arranged opposite to each other, and the opposite side surface is used for driving force transmission. A shape is formed. The details of the shape portion used for this driving force transmission will be described below.

37(a) is a plan view of the front transmission member 440 as viewed in the direction of arrow XXXVIIa in FIG. 28, and FIG. 37(b) is a plan view of the rear transmission member 460 as viewed in the direction of arrow XXXVIIb in FIG. . The arrow XXXVIIa direction and the arrow XXXVIIb direction are set as directions parallel to the rotation axes of the front transmission member 440 and the rear transmission member 460 .

As shown in FIG. 37( a ), the front transmission member 440 includes a substantially disk-shaped body plate portion 441 and an axially protruding center portion of the body plate portion 441 from the edge of the body plate portion 441 . A groove forming portion 442 that is recessed, a support hole 443 that is a circular opening that is bored in the center of the main body plate portion 441 and has a size that allows the shaft portion 362 to pass through, and a gear that is formed in the main body plate portion 441. A flange portion 444 covering the teeth, a detected portion 445 extending radially outward from the flange portion 444 and formed so as to be able to enter the detection groove of the detection sensor SC4 (see FIG. 32), and groove formation. a transmission protrusion 446 protruding parallel to the rotation shaft from a position eccentric to the support hole 443 on the support hole 443 side of the groove formed in the portion 442 .

The groove forming portion 442 is recessed with a groove having a groove width slightly longer than the diameter of the projecting portion 432 so that the projecting portion 432 of the contact member 430 (see FIG. 28) can enter. The groove is a first groove portion 442a formed along a first circular arc shape, and the front transmission member 440 rotates forward in a state in which the projecting portion 432 of the contact member 430 is arranged in the first groove portion 442a. A second groove portion 442b in which the protruding portion 432 is guided, and an arc shape formed on the opposite side of the first groove portion 442a with respect to the second groove portion 442b and having a larger diameter than the arc serving as the reference of the first groove portion 442a. and a fourth groove portion 442d connecting the third groove portion 442c and the first groove portion 442a.

While the second groove portion 442b and the fourth groove portion 442d have a common role of connecting between the first groove portion 442a and the third groove portion 442c, their forming angle range is not common. That is, the formation angle range of the fourth groove portion 442d is smaller than that of the second groove portion 442b. designed to be

The transmission projection 446 does not have a simple cylindrical shape, but has a groove 446a formed in a straight line connecting the central portion and a point on the outer diameter side along the projecting direction. Thereby, the degree of deformation of the transmission protrusion 446 with respect to the load input from the radial direction can be changed according to the input angle of the load. That is, the transmission protrusion 446 can be formed so that the degree of deformation is maximized when a load is input in a direction perpendicular to the straight line that serves as a reference for the groove 446a.

As shown in FIG. 37(b), the rear transmission member 460 includes a body plate portion 461 formed in a substantially disk shape with a diameter approximately equal to that of the flange portion 444 of the front transmission member 440, and and a groove forming portion 462 projecting in the axial direction of the body plate portion 461 and having a groove recessed therein; and a non-contact opening 463 formed to avoid contact with the

The main body plate portion 461 includes a weight portion 461a that is enlarged in the radial direction in a range in which a recessed groove portion is not formed in the groove forming portion 462 and does not function as a groove. The weight portion 461a is an adjustment portion formed for the purpose of correcting the amount of deviation of the center of gravity of the rotationally displaced rear transmission member 460 from the rotation axis.

In the present embodiment, the center of gravity is calculated when the rear transmission member 460 and the front transmission member 440, which are integrally rotationally displaced, are viewed as an integrated body, and the weight 461a is arranged and arranged for the purpose of correcting the center of gravity to the shape of the rotation axis. It is weighted and formed integrally with the rear transmission member 460 . As a result, the center of gravity of the front transmission member 440 and the rear transmission member 460 can be aligned with the rotation axis, so that the posture change of the front transmission member 440 and the rear transmission member 460 with respect to the rotation axis can be suppressed. .

The groove forming portion 462 is formed with a groove having a groove width slightly longer than the diameter of the cylindrical projection 472 so that the cylindrical projection 472 of the transmission arm member 470 (see FIG. 28) can enter. , the groove includes a first groove portion 462a formed along a first circular arc shape, and the rear transmission member 460 in a state where the cylindrical protrusion 472 of the transmission arm member 470 is arranged in the first groove portion 462a. A second groove portion 462b in which the cylindrical protrusion 472 is guided by forward rotation (rotation in the clockwise direction when viewed from the back), and a second groove portion 462b formed on the opposite side of the first groove portion 462a with respect to the second groove portion 462b. A third groove 462c formed along an arc having a larger diameter than the reference arc of 462a, and a fourth groove 462d connecting the third groove 462c and the first groove 462a.

While the second groove portion 462b and the fourth groove portion 462d have a common role of connecting between the first groove portion 462a and the third groove portion 462c, their forming angle range is not common. That is, compared to the second groove portion 462b, the formation angle range of the fourth groove portion 462d is remarkably large (approximately 180 degrees). It is designed so that the change in the distance between is slow.

An example of a displacement mode enabled by the injection device 400 will be described below. First, an overview of the displacement mode of the injection device 400 will be described.

38, 39, 40 and 41 are plan views of the injection device 400 viewed in the direction of arrow XXXVIIa in FIG. 38, 39, 40 and 41, the illustration of the fixing member 350 is omitted so that the internal structure of the injection device 400 can be visually recognized. In order to facilitate understanding, the coil spring SP1 is shown in phantom lines as a schematic diagram to the extent that changes in length can be grasped.

38 to 41 illustrate the displacement of the injection device 400 in chronological order. 38 shows the state immediately after the granular member 320 flows down toward the collision member 420 and stops, FIG. 39 shows the waiting state of the injection device 400 for effect, and FIG. A firing standby state, which is a state of waiting for the firing timing of the device 400, is illustrated, and FIG. 41 illustrates a firing state, which is a state immediately after the ejection device 400 executes the firing effect. 41 shows a state in which the granular member 320 is still riding on the collision member 420, the granular member 320 scatters in the normal direction of the curved plate portion 421 immediately after this.

In the state shown in FIG. 38, the collision member 420 is supported by the direct-acting member 410, and the cover member 480 is arranged at the displacement end position on the retreating side. A state in which the cover member 480 is displaced from the state shown in FIG. 38 to the end of displacement on the entrance side will be described as the effect waiting state of the injection device 400 (see FIG. 39).

In the effect waiting state shown in FIG. 39, the cover member 480 is arranged at the displacement end position on the entry side, so that the player's line of sight to the granular member 320 can be partially blocked by the cover member 480 . As a result, the player's attention to the granular member 320 can be reduced, so that the player's eyes can be taken away from the subsequent displacement of the granular member 320 and the collision member 420 arranged therebelow.

In the firing standby state shown in FIG. 40, the collision member 420 is suspended in such a manner that the cylindrical projection 403 abuts against the upper inner surface of the guide hole 423, and the cover member 480 is arranged at the displacement end position on the retreat side. . In addition, as will be described later, the displacement of the linear motion member 410 is restricted by the contact member 430, and the biasing force of the coil spring SP1 is accumulated.

In the firing state shown in FIG. 41, the placement of the lid member 480 is maintained at the displacement end position on the retreating side, the collision member 420 is bounced by the linear motion member 410 and rises, and the cylindrical protrusion 403 is pushed up into the guide hole. It stops at a position where it abuts against the lower inner surface of 423 . After that, the collision member 420 is displaced downward by its own weight or the weight of the granular member 320, and returns to the arrangement shown in FIG.

The flowing down of the granular members 320 splashed and scattered by the collision member 420 is guided toward the collision member 420 after being gathered to the left and right central sides due to the shape of the curved plate portion 312 (see FIG. 25) of the partition member 310. (See arrows schematically shown in FIG. 38).

In the present embodiment, when the granular member 320 is guided toward the collision member 420, the collision member 420 is arranged relatively upward. and the upper surface of the curved plate portion 421 is set shallow.

Therefore, due to the shape, there is a possibility that the plurality of granular members 320 cannot be received unevenly. In this embodiment, the partitioning member 310 accommodates the number of granular members 320 that cannot be received unevenly.

As a result, for example, even if a large number of the granular members 320 begin to return to the right side of the collision member 420, when the granular members 320 return after that, the granular members 320 that have returned first will cause the collision member 420 to move. Since a slope that slopes downward toward the left side is formed on the right side, the granular material 320 that returns later flows along the slope to the left. That is, it flows to the left while riding on the granular member 320 .

As a result, the left and right bias of the granular members 320 accumulated on the upper surface of the curved plate portion 421 of the collision member 420 can be reduced, so that the bias in the arrangement of the granular members 320 (differences in the scattering mode) in each firing performance can be reduced. can do.

Further, when the granular member 320 is guided to the collision member 420 side, the collision member 420 is arranged in the middle position of the displacement section, and the lower direct-acting member 410 and the trapezoidal projecting portion 413 are located at one point. They are only in contact with each other. Therefore, the collision member 420 is allowed to change its posture by the gap generated between the cylindrical protrusion 403 and the guide hole 423 . In other words, it is allowed to change its posture in a manner of rotating around an axis parallel to the axis of one cylindrical protrusion 403 .

As described above, for example, when a large number of granular members 320 begin to return to the right side of the collision member 420, the collision member 420 changes its posture so that the right side descends compared to the left side. However, in this case, the uppermost portion of the curved plate portion 421 is relatively displaced to the right.

Therefore, it becomes easier to guide the granular member 320, which flows down near the left-right center position of the guide portion 354 (see FIG. 32) and returns to the collision member 420 side, to the left side. For example, before the collision member 420 changes its posture, the left-right center position of the guide portion 354 and the uppermost position of the curved plate portion 421 match when viewed from the front. As to which direction the granular members 320 flow down, it is considered that the granular members 320 and the curved plate portion 421 are distributed almost evenly to the left and right depending on the difference in contact points between the granular members 320 and the curved plate portion 421 .

On the other hand, when the collision member 420 changes its posture, the position of the uppermost portion of the curved plate portion 421 is shifted to the right with respect to the left-right center position of the guide portion 354, and the guide portion 354 flows downward at the left-right center position. It is considered that the granular member 320 is guided leftward along the slope of the curved plate portion 421 .
As a result, it becomes easier for the granular members 320 that have returned later to flow down to the side where there are fewer staying granular members 320, so that the granular members 320 can be distributed substantially evenly to the left and right.

It should be noted that the attitude change of the collision member 420 is not always permitted. For example, in the firing standby state of the injection device 400 (see FIG. 40), the cylindrical protrusions 403 are arranged at the upper end positions of both of the pair of guide holes 423, and the collision member 420 is suspended at two symmetrical points. Therefore, compared with the effect standby state of the injection device 400, the posture change of the collision member 420 is suppressed.

Further, for example, in the firing state of the injection device 400 (see FIG. 41), the cylindrical projections 403 are arranged at the lower end positions of both of the pair of guide holes 423, and the collision member 420 moves upward at two symmetrical points. is restricted, the change in posture of the collision member 420 is suppressed compared to the effect standby state of the injection device 400 .

In addition, when the collision member 420 receives the load from the linear motion member 410, the load is the biasing force generated by the pair of coil springs SP1 that expand and contract in the direction parallel to the longitudinal direction of the pair of guide holes 423. The posture of the collision member 420 is easily stabilized.

Therefore, it is possible to suppress the attitude change of the collision member 420 from the firing standby state to the firing state. This makes it possible to stabilize how the granular members 320 scatter under the load from the collision member 420 when the staying state of the granular members 320 (left-right imbalance in the number of particles) is the same.

As described above, when the injection device 400 executes the shooting effect, the granular members 320 scatter, flow down along the internal shape of the partitioning member 310 (see FIG. 25), and the curved plate portion 421 of the collision member 420 , and return to the production standby state again. That is, in this embodiment, the injection device 400 is configured to be able to repeatedly execute the state changes of FIGS. 38 to 41 . The relationship between the structures of injection device 400 to enable this state change is described in detail below.

FIGS. 42(a) to 42(f) and FIGS. 43(a) to 43(e) show the linear motion member 410, the collision member 420, the contact member 430 and the front transmission member as viewed in the direction of the arrow XXXVIIa in FIG. 440 is a plan view of FIG.

42(a) to 42(f) and FIGS. 43(a) to 43(e), the outlines of the linear motion member 410, the collision member 420 and the contact member 430 are illustrated by imaginary lines. 414 and 415 of the linear motion member 410, the cushioning member 424 of the collision member 420, the projecting portion 432 of the contact member 430 and the hook-shaped The outer shape of the protrusion 433 is illustrated by a solid line, the interior thereof is illustrated transparently, and the front transmission member 440 arranged on the rear side thereof is illustrated without being hidden.

Also, in order to facilitate understanding of the displaceable section of the collision member 420, the outer shape of the cylindrical projection 403 is shown in solid lines, and the inside thereof is shown transparently. is illustrated without being hidden.

In addition, the arrangement of the detection sensor SC4 is illustrated by imaginary lines in order to facilitate understanding of the relationship with drive control.

42 and 43, the linear motion member 410, the collision member 420, and the contact member 430 (hereinafter also referred to as "each component member" in the description of FIGS. ) are shown in chronological order. They will be described in order below.

FIG. 42(a) shows the layout of each component in the injection device 400 in the waiting state for the effect. As shown in FIG. 42(a), when the ejection device 400 is in the presentation standby state, the detected portion 445 of the front transmission member 440 begins to enter the detection groove of the detection sensor SC4.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, the MPU 221 (see FIG. 4) of the sound lamp control device 113 detects the front transmission member 440 in the detection groove of the detection sensor SC4 in a state where the drive motor MT1 is driven and controlled to rotate forward. By detecting a change from a state in which the portion 445 is not arranged to a state in which the portion 445 to be detected is inserted, it can be determined that the ejection device 400 is in the effect standby state.

FIG. 42(b) shows the arrangement of each component in a state where the transmission projection 446 of the front transmission member 440 abuts on the projection 414 of the linear motion member 410 and starts pushing down the linear motion member 410. FIG. From the state shown in FIG. 42(b), the front transmission member 440 starts pushing down the linear motion member 410 against the biasing force of the coil spring SP1 (see FIG. 38).

Therefore, from FIG. 42(a) to FIG. 42(b), since the linear motion member 410 and the front side transmission member 440 are not in contact with each other, direct load transmission between the members is interrupted. Therefore, for example, even if the granular member 320 (see FIG. 38) flows down and collides with the collision member 420 and the collision member 420 vibrates slightly, the vibration and load are directly transmitted to the front transmission member 440. is configured to be interruptible.

FIG. 42(c) shows the arrangement of each component in a state where the collision member 420 is arranged at the lower end position of the displacement range and the contact between the linear motion member 410 and the collision member 420 begins to be released.

From the state shown in FIG. 42(b) to the state shown in FIG. 42(c), the linear motion member 410 and the collision member 420 are integrally displaced downward. In this state, the collision member 420 and the linear motion member 410 are in contact with each other, and the linear motion member 410 and the front transmission member 440 are in contact with each other. , indirectly to the front transmission member 440 .

On the other hand, the load generated when the granular member 320 collides with the collision member 420 is a load in the direction of pushing down the linear motion member 410. This is the direction away from the protrusion 446 . Therefore, the influence of the load and vibration transmitted to the front transmission member 440 on the positive rotational displacement of the transmission member 440 can be reduced.

It should be noted that the influence on forward rotation displacement is not limited at all. For example, there are influences such as the difference between the speed that is driven and controlled as rotational displacement and the actual speed, and the influence that hinders the rotational displacement and causes the drive motor MT1 (see FIG. 38) to generate heat.

FIG. 42(d) shows the arrangement of each component in a state where the projecting portion 432 of the contact member 430 is arranged at the end position of the first groove portion 442a of the front transmission member 440 and the contact member 430 begins to tilt. be done.

The abutting member 430 is a member that does not receive an urging force from other urging means and changes its posture according to the shape of the grooved portion 442 . From FIG. 42(d) onward, the number of members displaced by the front transmission member 440 increases to two, namely, the linear motion member 410 and the contact member 430. Since it is the same, substantially, the state of the load received by the front transmission member 440 is little changed from the state before FIG.

FIG. 42(e) illustrates the arrangement of each structural member in a state where the linear motion member 410 is arranged at the lower terminal position of the displacement range. As shown in FIG. 42(e), when the linear motion member 410 is located at the lower end position, the linear motion member 410 and the contact member 430 are still separated from each other.

After the state shown in FIG. 42(e), the transmission protrusion 446 of the front transmission member 440 starts to be displaced upward. Therefore, the biasing force of the coil spring SP1 (see FIG. 38) applied to the linear motion member 410 is generated in the direction of pushing the transmission projection 446. The load required for posture change can be assisted by the biasing force of the coil spring SP1. As a result, the load on the drive motor MT1 (see FIG. 38) can be reduced.

FIG. 42(f) shows the arrangement of each component in a state where the projecting portion 432 of the contact member 430 is arranged at the end position of the second groove portion 442b of the front transmission member 440, and the contact member 430 has finished tilting. be done.

As shown in FIG. 42(f), the linear motion member 410 and the contact member 430 are still arranged apart from each other, but after the state shown in FIG. is arranged in the third groove portion 442c, the posture of the contact member 430 is maintained (posture change is prevented).

Therefore, regarding the contact between the linear motion member 410 and the contact member 430 after this, compared to the case where the linear motion member 410 and the contact member 430 are brought into contact with each other at a speed in the direction facing each other, the speed of contact is greater. Aspects can be softened.

In order to facilitate understanding, FIG. 43(a) shows the same state as FIG. 42(f). In FIG. 43(b), as the transmission projection 446 of the front transmission member 440 is displaced upward, the linear motion member 410 is displaced upward. The arrangement of each component is illustrated in a state where the hook-shaped protrusion 433 of 430 starts to abut.

The state shown in FIG. 43(a) to the state immediately before the state shown in FIG. 43(d) corresponds to the firing standby state (for example, see FIG. 40).

The lower protrusion 415 and the hook-shaped protrusion 433 are provided with projecting portions projecting toward the mutually opposing sides at the tip portions on the mutually opposing sides. As a result, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of slippage at the contact position between the lower protruding portion 415 and the hook-shaped protrusion 433, so that the lower protruding portion 415 and the hook-shaped protruding portion 433 can stably contact each other. can be brought into contact.

In the state shown in FIG. 43(b), the end position of the detected portion 445 of the front transmission member 440 is arranged in the detection groove of the detection sensor SC4. Therefore, when the front transmission member 440 rotates forward from the state shown in FIG. 43(b), the detected portion 445 is retracted from the detection groove of the detection sensor SC4, and the MPU 221 (see FIG. 4) changes this state. output.

That is, in the present embodiment, the MPU 221 (see FIG. 4) of the sound lamp control device 113 detects the front transmission member 440 to be detected by the detection groove of the detection sensor SC4 in a state in which the drive motor MT1 is driven and controlled to rotate forward. Control is performed to determine that the injection device 400 has transitioned to the firing standby state by detecting a change from the state in which the portion 445 is arranged to the state in which the detected portion 445 retreats from the detection groove of the detection sensor SC4. be done.

After the state shown in FIG. A coil spring SP1 (see FIG. 38) exerts a biasing force on the direct-acting member 410, and a load is applied to the contact member 430 in a direction that causes the contact member 430 to stand up. The displacement of the setting portion 432 is restricted by being blocked by the groove forming portion 442 .

The contact between the protruding portion 432 and the groove forming portion 442 is the contact between the circularly curved surface (the outer side surface of the protruding portion 432) and the arcuate surface (the inner side surface of the third groove portion 442c). The resulting load is directed towards the center of the circle.

That is, in the state shown in FIG. 43(b), the load applied from the projecting portion 432 to the groove forming portion 442 is directed toward the rotation shaft of the front transmission member 440, so the load applied from the projecting portion 432 is applied to the front side. It is possible to prevent the rotation of the transmission member 440 from being affected, and to restrict the displacement of the projecting portion 432 regardless of the driving state of the front transmission member 440 .

Therefore, in the firing standby state shown in FIG. 43(b), the state shown in FIG. 43(b) can be maintained even after the drive motor MT1 (see FIG. 38) is de-energized. As a result, the heat generation of the drive motor MT1 can be suppressed, for example, compared to a configuration in which the drive motor MT1 must be constantly energized in the firing standby state, so the degree of freedom in setting the drive control of the drive motor MT1 can be increased. can be improved.

For example, when the injection device 400 is driven and controlled in conjunction with the display effect on the third symbol display device 81, the setting of the length of the display effect from the firing standby state to the firing state is restricted. does not occur from the viewpoint of heat generation of the drive motor MT1.

FIG. 43(c) shows the arrangement of the constituent members in a state where the protruding portion 432 of the contact member 430 is arranged at the end position of the third groove portion 442c of the front transmission member 440, and the contact member 430 begins to stand up. be done.

After the state shown in FIG. 43(c), the position of the grooved portion 442 in contact with the projecting portion 432 changes from the third grooved portion 442c. The axis of rotation of the member 440 is displaced.

Therefore, in order to deenergize the drive motor MT1 (see FIG. 38) and maintain the firing standby state, the drive motor MT1 must be turned off before the state shown in FIG. 43(b) changes to the state shown in FIG. must be de-energized.

In FIG. 43(d), the hook-shaped protrusion 433 of the contact member 430 retreats from the displacement trajectory of the lower projection 415 of the linear motion member 410, so that the upward displacement restriction of the linear motion member 410 is released. , and coil spring SP1 (see FIG. 38), the linear motion member 410 is displaced upward by the biasing force accumulated, and the collision member 420 is bounced upward. The state shown in FIG. 43(d) corresponds to the firing state (see FIG. 41).

Since the displacement of the contact member 430 in the upright direction basically occurs along the shape of the grooved portion 442 of the front transmission member 440, its driving force is generated from the drive motor MT1 (see FIG. 38). . On the other hand, since the displacement of the linear motion member 410 is not restricted by the transmission projection 446 of the front transmission member 440, the coil spring SP1 transmitted to the contact member 430 via the linear motion member 410 The urging force (see FIG. 38) also acts to assist the displacement of the contact member 430 in the upright direction.

In this embodiment, both the direction of displacement of the contact member 430 caused by the driving force of the drive motor MT1 and the direction of displacement of the contact member 430 caused by the biasing force of the coil spring SP1 given via the linear motion member 410 are Since they are configured to be the same in the erecting direction, the driving force and the urging force applied to the contact member 430 can be generated in a mutually assisting manner.

FIG. 43(e) shows the arrangement of each component in a state where the projecting portion 432 of the contact member 430 is arranged at the end position of the fourth groove portion 442d of the front transmission member 440, and the contact member 430 finishes standing. be done.

After the state shown in FIG. 43(e), the position of the grooved portion 442 that contacts the projecting portion 432 of the contact member 430 is the first grooved portion 442a. As a result, the load applied from the projecting portion 432 to the grooved portion 442 is directed toward the rotation shaft of the front transmission member 440 , so that the load applied from the projecting portion 432 to the grooved portion 442 is applied to the front transmission member 440 . The influence on rotation can be reduced.

For example, in the present embodiment, the biasing force accumulated in the coil spring SP1 (see FIG. 38) was applied to the contact member 430 until immediately before the state shown in FIG. ) It is expected that the load generated in the direction in which the contact member 430 is erected in subsequent displacements will also increase. Therefore, without countermeasures, the rotation of the front transmission member 440 may be hindered due to the standing displacement of the contact member 430 .

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as soon as the contact member 430 finishes standing up, the projecting portion 432 of the contact member 430 is arranged in the first groove portion 442 a, and the contact member 430 moves through the projecting portion 432 . The load applied to the front transmission member 440 is directed toward the rotation shaft of the front transmission member 440 . This makes it easier to avoid hindrance to the rotation of the front transmission member 440 due to the upright displacement of the contact member 430 .

43(e), the drive motor MT1 (see FIG. 38) is driven in the direction to rotate the front transmission member 440 forward, and when it is detected that the detected portion 445 has entered the detection groove of the detection sensor SC4. , the injection device 400 can be returned to the effect standby state by controlling the drive motor MT1 to stop, and the MPU 221 ( 4) is designed.

In the above description with reference to FIGS. 42 and 43, as an example of the control of the ejection device 400, the ejection execution control of making one rotation of the front transmission member 440 in the forward rotation direction from the standby state of the ejection device 400 for rendering has been described. In the shooting execution control, in the shooting state, the collision member 420 is bounced off by the linear motion member 410 which is lifted by the biasing force of the coil spring SP1, and the granular member 320 scatters.

This effect is flashy because the granular members 320 are scattered in the field of view of the player, and can improve the attention of the player. At the timing near the end of the following long reach, if a big hit is achieved, the player's amusement can be improved by shifting to a shooting state and scattering the granular members 320 for presentation.

On the other hand, if it is not a big win (if it is a miss), executing the effect of scattering the granular members 320 may mislead the player into thinking that it is a big win, which is not preferable.

Also, if the driving motor MT1 (see FIG. 38) of the injection device 400 is not driven at all when the ejection state does not shift (in the case of a miss), the driving sound of the driving motor MT1 indicates that long reach during execution results in a big hit. The player will be able to grasp whether it will be or will be lost, and there is a risk that the player's interest will be reduced.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, in the case of misalignment, after the injection device 400 is placed in the firing standby state, the drive motor MT1 is controlled to rotate the front transmission member 440 in the reverse direction. It is configured to be able to return to the performance standby state of the injection device 400 without going through the firing state.

That is, for example, from the state shown in FIG. 43(c), by driving and controlling the driving motor MT1 in the direction of rotating the front side transmission member 440 in the reverse direction (clockwise), each constituent member is displaced in the reverse direction of the time series. can be made

In this case, before the contact member 430 starts to be displaced in the upright direction (see FIG. 42(e)), the linear motion member 410 is pushed down to bring the linear motion member 410 and the contact member 430 into contact with each other. is released (see FIG. 42(f)), it is possible to avoid rubbing between the linear motion member 410 and the contact member 430 when the contact is released.

42(e) onward, the biasing force of the coil spring SP1 (see FIG. 38) applied to the transmission projection 446 of the front transmission projection 440 via the linear motion member 410 causes the front transmission projection 440 to rotate. Since it works in the assisting direction, it is possible to reduce the magnitude of the drive force required for the drive motor MT1 (see FIG. 38).

In this case, the upward displacement of the linear motion member 410 is not instantaneous due to the elastic return of the coil spring SP1 (see FIG. 38), but is configured as a gradual displacement accompanying the displacement of the transmission protrusion 446. FIG.

As a result, it is possible to prevent the linear motion member 410 from knocking off the collision member 420, so that the injection device 400 is placed in the effect waiting state (see FIG. 42(a)) without executing the effect in which the granular member 320 scatters. can be returned to

In order to achieve the state shown in FIG. 42(a) after the front transmission member 440 reversely rotates, the detection sensor SC4 is rotated after detecting that the detected portion 445 has retreated from the detection groove of the detection sensor SC4. The drive motor MT1 (see FIG. 38) may be driven and controlled so as to rotate the front transmission member 440 forward until it is detected that the groove 445 to be detected has again entered the detection groove.

As a result, both the effect control to scatter the granular members 320 and the effect control not to scatter the granular members 320 can be performed with the same preparatory motion associated with the driving of the drive motor MT1. Therefore, it is possible to make it possible for the player to easily understand whether the game is a big hit or not, and it is possible to prevent the player from being able to predict the result of winning or not due to the difference in the driving sound.

In particular, according to this embodiment, in the firing standby state (see FIG. 43(c)), the drive motor MT1 (see FIG. 38) is de-energized, and the drive sound of the drive motor MT1 can be temporarily eliminated. . As a result, compared to the case where control is performed to switch the driving direction from a state in which the driving of the driving motor MT1 is continued, it is possible to make it difficult to recognize from the driving sound whether the driving direction is the same or the opposite direction. .

Therefore, even if the drive motor MT1 is driven and controlled prior to the winning/failure notification timing in the performance, and the driving sound is generated, it is difficult to determine the driving direction, thereby avoiding a situation in which the player grasps the winning/failing result. be able to.

As a result, the drive control of the drive motor MT1 can be started prior to the timing of the success/fail notification without running the risk of the player grasping the win/fail result by the driving sound. It is possible to give width to the stop timing. In other words, it is possible to eliminate the need to stop the driving motor MT1 in a state immediately before the firing state, and even if the driving motor MT1 is stopped in a state sufficiently before the firing state, there is no hindrance to the performance thereafter. Therefore, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the drive motor MT1 overrotates against the control and unintentionally enters a firing state.

FIGS. 44(a) to 44(f) are plan views of the rear transmission member 460, the transmission arm member 470, and the lid member 480 as viewed in the direction of the arrow XXXVIIb in FIG.

In FIG. 44, the change in arrangement of the transmission arm member 470 and the lid member 480 (hereinafter also referred to as “each constituent member” in the description of FIG. 44) associated with forward rotation (clockwise rotation) of the rear transmission member 460 is Illustrated in chronological order. They will be described in order below.

FIG. 44(a) shows the arrangement of each component in the injection device 400 in the presentation standby state (see FIG. 42(a)). As shown in FIG. 44( a ), when the ejection device 400 is in the performance standby state, the cylindrical projection 472 of the transmission arm member 470 is arranged at the end position of the third groove 462 c of the rear transmission member 460 , and the cover member 480 is placed at the displacement end position on the entry side.

Since the cover member 480 receives a biasing force directed toward the retreating side from the torsion spring SP2 (see FIG. 33), a load is generated through the cover member 480 in the direction of pushing down the transmission protrusion 473 of the transmission arm member 470, and this load is reduced. The transmission to the rear transmission member 460 may affect the rotation of the rear transmission member 460 without countermeasures.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, in the state after FIG. 44(a), the cylindrical projection 472 of the transmission arm member 470 contacts the third groove 462c of the groove forming portion 462, and When a load is applied to the rear transmission member 460, the contact between the circular curved surface and the arc-shaped surface causes the load generated by the contact to move toward the center of the circle.

Therefore, the load applied to the grooved portion 462 via the cylindrical protrusion 472 is directed toward the rotation shaft of the rear transmission member 460, so the load applied to the grooved portion 462 via the cylindrical protrusion 472 is transferred to the rear side. The influence on the rotation of the side transmission member 460 can be reduced.

In FIG. 44(b), the cylindrical projection 472 of the transmission arm member 470 is arranged at the terminal position of the third groove 462c of the rear transmission member 460, and the lid member 480 is still arranged at the displacement terminal position on the entry side. The placement of each component in the state is illustrated.

In FIG. 44(c), the columnar projection 472 of the transmission arm member 470 is arranged at the middle position of the fourth groove 462d of the rear transmission member 460, and the lid member 480 is arranged at substantially the middle position of the displacement range. The arrangement of each component in is illustrated.

Since the posture change of the transmission arm member 470 basically occurs along the shape of the grooved portion 462 of the rear side transmission member 460, the driving force for the posture change drives the rear side transmission member 460 to rotate. It is generated from the drive motor MT1 (see FIG. 38).

On the other hand, the biasing force of the torsion spring SP2 (see FIG. 33) works in the direction of pushing down the transmission projection 473 of the transmission arm member 470 via the cover member 480, and at the same time, this biasing force pushes the cylindrical projection 472 upward. Since the biasing force of the torsion spring SP2 also acts to assist the posture change of the transmission arm member 470, it acts in the direction of displacement.

In this embodiment, the direction in which the posture of the transmission arm member 470 changes due to the driving force of the drive motor MT1 and the direction in which the posture of the transmission arm member 470 changes due to the biasing force of the torsion spring SP2 applied via the lid member 480 are Since both are configured identically in the clockwise direction, the driving force and the biasing force applied to the transmission arm member 470 can be generated in a mutually supportive manner.

In FIG. 44(d), the columnar projection 472 of the transmission arm member 470 is arranged at the end position of the fourth groove portion 462d of the rear transmission member 460, and the cover member 480 is arranged at the displacement end position on the withdrawal side. The arrangement of each component in is illustrated.

In the state shown in FIG. 44(d), the lid member 480 is maintained at the end of displacement on the retreating side by the biasing force of the torsion spring SP2 (see FIG. 33). Further, the transmission protrusion 473 of the transmission arm member 470 and the left cover member 489 are arranged without contact.

As a result, it is possible to prevent a load from being applied to the transmission protrusion 473 even when it is not necessary to displace the cover member 480 toward the entrance side, and it is possible to reduce the degree of accumulation of fatigue in the transmission arm member 470 . .

In FIG. 44(e), the columnar projection 472 of the transmission arm member 470 is arranged in the middle of the first groove 462a of the rear transmission member 460, and the lid member 480 is still arranged at the displacement end on the retreat side. The arrangement of each component in is illustrated.

After the state shown in FIG. 44(e), the firing standby state (see FIG. 43(b)) is configured. From the firing standby state to the firing state, the cover member 480 is arranged at the displacement end on the retracting side, and is configured to be able to avoid collision with the ejected granular member 320 (see FIG. 41).

In FIG. 44(f), the cylindrical projection 472 of the transmission arm member 470 is arranged at the terminal position of the first groove 462a of the rear transmission member 460, and the lid member 480 is still arranged at the displacement terminal position on the retreating side. The placement of each component in the state is illustrated.

From the state shown in FIG. 44(e) to the state shown in FIG. 44(f), the injection device 400 goes through the firing state (see FIG. 41). Then, by continuing forward rotation from the state shown in FIG. 44(f), the cover member 480 is arranged at the displacement end position on the entry side, and returns to the effect waiting state (see FIG. 44(a)).

Here, since the state shown in FIG. 44(f) is the state after execution of the shooting effect, there is no load transmission from the linear motion member 410 or the contact member 430 to the front side transmission member 440 (for example, FIG. 43 ( e) see). Therefore, the amount of the drive force of the drive motor MT1 (see FIG. 38) that is distributed to the front transmission member 440 side can be greatly reduced.

As a result, even if a large driving force is required because the lid member 480 is displaced in a direction opposing the biasing force of the torsion spring SP2 (see FIG. 33), the driving force of the drive motor MT1 is maintained. can be used as a driving force for rotating other components that abut on the rear transmission member 460, so a sufficient driving force can be secured.

FIG. 45 is a plan view of the injection device 400 viewed in the direction of arrow XXXVIIa in FIG. 45, illustration of the fixing member 350 is omitted so that the internal structure of the injection device 400 can be visually recognized.

In FIG. 45, the linear motion member 410, the collision member 420 and the contact member 430 are illustrated in a manner similar to that described in FIGS. Also, in order to facilitate understanding of the displaceable section of the collision member 420, the outer shape of the cylindrical projection 403 is shown in solid lines, and the inside thereof is shown transparently. is illustrated without being hidden.

In FIG. 45, in a state in which the linear motion member 410 is arranged at the displacement end position on the rising side (for example, the waiting state for effect, see FIG. 42(a)), the front transmission member 440 is driven in the reverse rotation direction, and the front transmission The figure shows a state in which the transmission projection 446 of the member 440 contacts the lower projection 415 of the direct-acting member 410 from below, and further rotational displacement is restricted.

Thus, in the present embodiment, a limit is set for the displacement mode that is allowed for the front transmission member 440 . That is, as shown in FIGS. 42 and 43, in forward rotation, the front transmission member 440 can be continuously driven without being restricted in displacement. When the displacement angle exceeds the allowable angle, the displacement of the transmission projection 446 is restricted by the linear motion member 410, and further continuous driving is restricted.

If the drive motor MT1 continues to be driven while the displacement is restricted, the drive motor MT1 may generate heat and may be damaged. is provided to avoid damage to the drive motor MT1, the details of which will be described later.

FIG. 46 shows the output state of the detection sensor SC4, the arrangement of the linear motion member 410, the arrangement of the collision member 420, and the arrangement of the projecting portion 432 of the contact member 430 as the front transmission member 440 and the rear transmission member 460 rotate. and a change over time of the arrangement of the cylindrical protrusion 472 of the transmission arm member 470. FIG.

It should be noted that FIG. 46 does not describe the relative relationship between the variation widths of the arrangement changes of the respective configurations, but shows the reference of the relative relationship of the timing at which the arrangement change occurs. Also, the change in the arrangement of the direct-acting member 410 corresponds to the change in the biasing force accumulated in the coil spring SP1.

In addition, in FIG. 46, the standard rotation angle of forward rotation from the effect standby state (FIGS. 42(a) and 44(a)) is shown on the horizontal axis. That is, 0 degrees corresponds to FIG. 42(a), 66 degrees corresponds to FIG. 42(b), 125 degrees corresponds to FIG. 42(c), 162 degrees corresponds to FIG. 42(d), 202 degrees corresponds to FIG. 42(e), 219 degrees corresponds to FIGS. 42(f) and 43(a), 228 degrees corresponds to FIG. 43(b), and 266 degrees corresponds to FIG. 43(c). , 287 degrees corresponds to FIG. 43(d), and 295 degrees corresponds to FIG. 43(e).

46, 0 degrees corresponds to FIG. 44(a), 21 degrees corresponds to FIG. 44(b), 96 degrees corresponds to FIG. 44(c), and 173 degrees corresponds to FIG. 44(d). , 304 degrees corresponds to FIG. 44(e), and 360 degrees corresponds to FIG. 44(f).

In FIG. 46, the rotation angles of forward rotation of the front transmission member 440 and the rear transmission member 460 are shown on the horizontal axis with the production standby state as a reference (the angle is 0 degrees), and the components described above corresponding to the angles are shown. State changes in are described. It should be noted that the change in layout of each component due to drive control in forward rotation corresponds to the change toward the right in FIG. 46, and the change in layout of each component due to drive control in reverse rotation corresponds to the change to the left in FIG. respond to changes.

As shown in FIG. 46, the displacement speed when the collision member 420 is upwardly displaced by rotating the front transmission member 440 and the rear transmission member 460 in the reverse direction before entering the firing state (angle of 287 degrees) is It becomes slower than the displacement speed when the collision member 420 reaches the firing state and is displaced upward. That is, in the present embodiment, the speed of upward displacement of the collision member 420 can be configured in a plurality of ways.

In addition, since the collision member 420 has already been raised after the firing state is exceeded, the reverse rotation of the front transmission member 440 and the rear transmission member 460 is restricted halfway (see FIG. 45). On the other hand, whether the arrangement of the front side transmission member 440 and the rear side transmission member 460 is between the firing state (angle of 287 degrees) and the effect waiting state (angle of 360 degrees) is determined only from the output state of the detection sensor SC4. Can not.

For example, when the arrangement of the front side transmission member 440 and the rear side transmission member 460 is between the firing state (angle of 287 degrees) and the presentation standby state (angle of 360 degrees), the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on again. Even so, the MPU 221 (see FIG. 4) cannot determine whether the reverse rotation of the front transmission member 440 and the rear transmission member 460 is restricted.

In contrast, in this embodiment, when the power is turned on again, the arrangement of the front transmission member 440 and the rear transmission member 460 is suspected to be between the firing state (angle of 287 degrees) and the effect standby state (angle of 360 degrees). , that is, when the detected portion 445 is not arranged in the detection sensor SC4 (when the output of the detection sensor SC4 is OFF), the front transmission member 440 and the rear transmission member 460 are driven in the forward rotation direction. Motor MT1 is controlled to rotate.

Due to this rotation, the injection device 400 is temporarily returned to the production standby state, and then the execution control of each production is performed. As a result, the rotation of the front transmission member 440 and the rear transmission member 460 is unintentionally restricted after the control is interrupted such as when the power is turned on again, thereby preventing the drive motor MT1 from generating heat. can be done.

In this embodiment, the position of the granular member 320 (see FIG. 38) is changed from the firing state (angle of 287 degrees) to the state (angle of 304 degrees) where the cylindrical protrusion 472 of the transmission arm member 470 begins to change its position. The front transmission member 440 and the rear transmission member 460 are rotationally driven at a rotational speed at which is stabilized.

For example, if the arrangement is stabilized 2 seconds after the launch, the front transmission member 440 and the rear transmission member 460 are driven and controlled to rotate at 8 degrees per second (45 seconds/rotation), so that the particles in the middle of the flow are controlled. It is possible to prevent the member 320 from being caught in the lid member 480 (see FIG. 38).

Note that the rotational speeds of the front transmission member 440 and the rear transmission member 460 are not limited to these, and can be arbitrarily set. For example, it may be rotated at a quadruple speed. In this case, the lid member 480 can start to be displaced to the entrance side at the timing when the granular member 320 starts to flow down. In this case, the displacement of the lid member 480 can be completed before the granular members 320 are arranged in the advancing direction of the lid member 480 .

In this state, by stopping the drive in the performance waiting state, the granular members 320 can be deposited above the lid member 480, so that the granular members 320 can be gathered to the left-right central side along the shape of the lid member 480. can be done. After that, by driving and controlling the forward transmission member 440 and the rear transmission member 460 in the forward rotation direction, the granular member 320 falls from the lid member 480 as the lid member 480 is displaced to the retreat side, and the collision member 420 is moved. ride on.

In this way, by controlling the rotation speeds of the front transmission member 440 and the rear transmission member 460 differently, it is possible to configure a plurality of modes until the granular member 320 reaches the collision member 420 .

Thereby, the relative position of each granular member 320 (each spherical member) with respect to the collision member 420 can be changed for each firing execution control. Therefore, for example, by configuring the granular members 320 with a plurality of spherical members having different shapes and colors, it is possible to change the appearance of the fired granular members 320 (arrangement and displacement direction of each granular member 320). , the performance effect can be improved.

Returning to FIG. 5 and FIG. 6, description will be made. In this embodiment, in addition to the third symbol display device 81, the above-described shooting effect unit 300, enlargement/reduction unit 600, and displacement/rotation unit 800 are provided as effect devices for livening up the game. Next, the scaling unit 600 will be described.

47 and 48 are front perspective views of the scaling unit 600, and FIGS. 49 and 50 are back perspective views of the scaling unit 600. FIG. 47 and 49 show the rendering standby state of the scaling unit 600, and FIGS. 48 and 50 show the extended state of the scaling unit 600. FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 47 to 50, the enlarging/reducing unit 600 includes an effect member 700 which can move up and down at the central position in the left-right direction and which is capable of emitting light, and a hemispherical lighting unit fixedly arranged apart from the right and left sides of the effect member 700. a device 613;

By performing a light emission effect with the effect member 700 and the hemispherical lighting device 613, the light is emitted from the front side of the third pattern display device 81 (see FIG. 7) to the player, and the effect is executed to make the player visually glamorous. be able to.

51 is a front exploded perspective view of the scaling unit 600, and FIG. 52 is a rear exploded perspective view of the scaling unit 600. FIG. 51 and 52, the effect member 700 is illustrated in an assembled state. As shown in FIGS. 47 and 49, in the assembled state, the tip of the lower arm member 630 connected to the effect member 700 is arranged on the front side of the rear plate portion 611, but in FIGS. , are arranged on the rear side of the rear plate portion 611 for convenience.

As shown in FIGS. 51 and 52, the enlargement/reduction unit 600 includes a main body member 601 having a left and right elongated shape fastened and fixed to a bottom wall portion 511 of a rear case 510 (see FIG. 5), and a front surface of the main body member 601. A front cover member 610 arranged on the side and having a design surface, a pair of upper arm members 620 rotatably supported by the columnar shaft portion 603 of the main body member 601 and interlocked in a meshing relationship, and the upper arm member 620 and the middle. A pair of lower arm members 630 that are connected by a joint and change in posture as the upper arm member 620 rotates, a drive motor MT2 that is fastened and fixed to the back side of the main body member 601, and a drive gear and teeth of the drive motor MT2. A transmission gear 650 is rotatably supported by the main body member 601, and the annular portion is assembled to the main body member 601, A torsion spring SP3 that applies a biasing force in the upward direction to the upper arm member 620, and an effect member 700 that is connected to the tip of the lower arm member 630 are provided.

The main body member 601 is formed in the shape of an elongated left and right plate, and includes a pair of guide holes 602, which are elongated left and right holes arranged in a straight line from left to right, and a pair of cylindrical guide holes 602 projecting in both front and rear directions from left and right symmetrical positions. A columnar shaft portion 603, a pair of arcuate holes 604 formed in an arc with the columnar shaft portion 603 as the center axis, a columnar shaft portion 605 projecting from the left side to the rear side in a columnar shape, An arc-shaped hole 606 is drilled in an arc with the cylindrical shaft portion 605 as the center axis, and a detection groove in a circular shape centered on the cylindrical shaft portion 605 is directed toward the cylindrical shaft portion 605 side and is placed on the back side. and a detection sensor 607 that is fastened and fixed.

The guide hole 602 is formed with a vertical width that is slightly longer than the outer diameter of the cylindrical protrusion 632 of the lower arm member 630 . The guide hole 602 functions as an elongated hole that guides the displacement of the lower arm member 630 by inserting the cylindrical protrusion 632 of the lower arm member 630 .

A portion of the cylindrical shaft portion 603 that protrudes toward the front side is inserted into the support hole 621 of the upper arm member 620 to rotatably support the upper arm member 620 . A screw with a large head diameter is screwed into a female screw formed at the tip of the cylindrical shaft portion 603 to support the upper arm member 620 so that it cannot fall off.

A portion of the columnar shaft portion 603 protruding toward the rear side is inserted through the winding-shaped body portion of the torsion spring SP3, thereby stabilizing the arrangement of the torsion spring SP3.

One arm of the torsion spring SP3 is pressed from above by a protruding portion 601a that protrudes in a V-shape from the back side of the main body member 601, and the other arm is pressed against the biased portion 625 of the upper arm member 620. engaged. As a result, the elastic recovery force of the torsion spring SP3 functions in the direction of pushing down the urged portion 625, so that the upper arm member 620 is urged in the direction in which the connecting portion 623 is displaced upward.

The arcuate hole 604 is a through hole for passing the urged portion 625 of the upper arm member 620 to the rear side of the main body member 601 . Thereby, the urged portion 625 of the upper arm member 620 and the torsion spring SP3 can be configured to be engaged.

The cylindrical shaft portion 605 is inserted through the support hole 653 of the transmission gear 650 to rotatably support the transmission gear 650 . A screw with a large head diameter is screwed into a female screw formed at the tip of the cylindrical shaft portion 605, thereby supporting the transmission gear 650 so that it cannot fall off.

The arcuate hole 606 is a through hole for passing the cylindrical protrusion 654 of the transmission gear 650 to the front side of the main body member 601 . Thereby, the transmission hole 624 of the upper arm member 620 and the transmission gear 650 can be configured to be engaged. A screw having a large head diameter is screwed into a female screw formed at the tip of the cylindrical protrusion 654 of the transmission gear 650 , so that the upper arm member 620 is supported by the transmission gear 650 so as not to fall off.

The detection sensor 607 has a detection groove into which the plate portion 655 to be detected of the transmission gear 650 can enter, and is arranged at a position where the transmission gear 650 puts the enlargement/reduction unit 600 in the rendering standby state, or at another position. It is configured to be able to determine whether the

The front cover member 610 is a thin-walled member made of a resin material with low light transmittance and fastened to the main body member 601. The front cover member 610 includes a rear plate portion 611 formed in the left-right central portion, and the rear plate portion 611. A front plate portion 612 is formed on the left and right outside from the connection position with the left and right upper end portions and is formed to protrude toward the front side from the rear plate portion 611, and is fastened and fixed to the front side of the front plate portion 612 so as to be capable of emitting light. and a hemispherical illumination device 613 .

The rear plate portion 611 is arranged on the front side of the columnar shaft portion 603 of the main body member 601 and shields the field of view so that the columnar shaft portion 603 is not visually recognized. On the rear side of the rear plate portion 611, avoiding the movement locus of the gear portion 622 of the upper arm member 620, the rear plate portion 611 protrudes toward the rear side by a dimension slightly longer than the front-to-rear width of the gear portion 622, and contacts the main body member 601 with a surface. It has an overhanging abutting portion 611a that makes contact.

As a result, the fastening state of the rear plate portion 611 to the main body member 601 can be stabilized, and the upper arm member 620 can be displaced in the space divided by the rear plate portion 611 and the main body member 601 . can. In other words, a change in posture of the upper arm member 620 (for example, a change in posture such that it bends with respect to the rotation shaft) can be suppressed on both sides in the axial direction, so the state of the upper arm member 620 can be stabilized. .

The front plate portion 612 is a plate-like portion that is arranged on the front side of the upper arm member 620 and the lower arm member 630 and is configured so as not to allow the players to visually recognize the structural parts of these members. A sliding surface 612a formed as a pair of left and right planes parallel to the front plate portion, and a wiring passage formed as a recess opening to the back side in the plate portion projecting from the left upper end toward the back and a recess 612b.

The sliding surface 612a is assembled to the lower arm member 630 from the front side and fastened and fixed, and is configured as a flat surface on which the pressing member PC1, which is formed with low friction due to its shape and material, can slide. That is, the pressing member PC1 fixed midway in the longitudinal direction of the lower arm member 630 is a planar plate surface formed along a locus that is displaced as the lower arm member 630 is displaced.

The shape of the side of the pressing member PC1 facing the sliding surface 612a is a substantially semicircular shape protruding toward the sliding surface 612a. is configured to be Thereby, the resistance generated between the pressing member PC1 and the sliding surface 612a can be reduced, and the lower arm member 630 can be smoothly displaced easily.

The sliding surface 612a and the pressing member PC1 are not always in contact with each other, and a gap is provided between them. On the other hand, before the amount of frontward displacement of the lower arm member 630 exceeds the permissible amount, the sliding surface 612a and the pressing member PC1 contact each other to limit the frontward displacement of the lower arm member 630. be.

In this embodiment, the permissible amount of displacement of the lower arm member 630 toward the front side is set according to the dimensional relationship between the rear side plate portion of the partitioning member 310 (see FIG. 13A) and the effect member 700 . That is, the permissible amount of displacement of the lower arm member 630 toward the front side is set to such a degree that the effect member 700 arranged as expected from the arrangement of the lower arm member 630 does not come into contact with the partitioning member 310 .

That is, according to the present embodiment, the sliding surface 612a abuts against the pressing member PC1 to limit the displacement of the lower arm member 630 toward the front side. Contact can be prevented.

The sliding portion 612a arranged on the right side is formed in an arc shape along the trajectory of the pressing member PC1, but the sliding portion 612a arranged on the left side includes an arc shape as the trajectory of the pressing member PC1. Although formed as a large flat surface, the functions of the left and right sliding portions 612a are common. That is, at least the circular arc shape as the trajectory of the pressing member PC1 should be formed in a plane shape, and the shape of other portions can be set arbitrarily. For example, as in the right side portion of the present embodiment, the sliding portion 612a is formed in a limited circular arc shape as the trajectory of the pressing member PC1, and the other portion protrudes toward the back side (the design portion on the front side is It may be configured such that it protrudes toward the back side due to the effect of being arranged closer to the back side), or like the left side portion of the present embodiment, the periphery of the sliding portion 612a may also be configured in a similar planar shape. good.

The forward displacement of the lower arm member 630 is restricted by the contact between the pressing member PC1 and the sliding portion 612a. Forward displacement is regulated by the fixed fastening screw. That is, in addition to limiting the forward displacement of the lower arm member 630, by limiting the displacement of the upper arm member 620, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of a large local load.

The wiring through recess 612b is a recess that functions as a path for the electrical wiring to be passed through the base end side through hole 635a of the lower arm member 630. As shown in FIG. That is, the electric wiring reaching between the rear case 510 and the enlargement/reduction unit 600 passes through the wiring passage recess 612b, passes through the base end side through hole 635a of the lower arm member 630, and then reaches the tip side of the lower arm member 630. It is guided and passed through the production member 700. - 特許庁

In this way, by setting the path for the electrical wiring to be inserted into the enlargement/reduction unit 600 from the upper side, the long lower arm member 630 connected to the effect member 700 is displaced significantly in the left-right direction as it is displaced. (In this embodiment, the displacement is about half the width of the rear case 510), it is possible to easily prevent the electric wiring from loosening and hanging downward.

The hemispherical lighting device 613 has a hemispherical lens member, and is a device for irradiating the front side through the hemispherical lens member with light emitted from a light emitting means such as an LED disposed on the back side thereof. . In this embodiment, the optical axis of the light emitted from the light emitting means is configured to incline downward toward the center in the left-right direction.

As a result, compared to the case where the optical axis of the light emitted from the hemispherical lighting device 613 is oriented in the front-rear direction, the player's attention to the light emitted from the hemispherical lighting device 613 can be easily improved. can. For example, it is possible to make it easier for the player who is visually recognizing the center of the third pattern display device 81 to enter the light, or to make the player notice the light by irradiating the production member 700 in the overhanging state or the enlarged state with the light. can be

The upper arm member 620 is formed in the shape of an elongated plate, and has a support hole 621 formed as a circular hole having a slightly larger diameter than the outer diameter of the cylindrical shaft portion 603 so that the cylindrical shaft portion 603 can be inserted therethrough. , a gear portion 622 which is formed on a circular arc centering on the support hole 621 and is configured to be meshable with a pair of upper arm members 620, and a lower arm member 630 which is circularly drilled at the end portion in the longitudinal direction. and a long hole formed only in the left upper arm member 620 and having a width slightly longer than the outer diameter of the cylindrical projection 654 of the transmission gear 650. A transmission hole 624 is formed, and a biased portion 625 protrudes from the back side of the upper arm member 620 and has a hook-shaped tip.

The transmission hole 624 has a transmission portion 624a formed along a straight line passing through the center of the support hole 621 and a margin continuously extending from one end of the transmission portion 624a along an arc centered on the rotation axis of the transmission gear 650. and a portion 624b.

The transmission portion 624a functions as a portion for receiving the driving force transmitted through the transmission gear 650, and the allowance portion 624b functions as a portion for blocking the transmission of the driving force, details of which will be described later.

The urged portion 625 is a portion to which one end of the arm portion of the torsion spring SP3 is engaged. Arm member 620 receives.

In addition, the forward displacement of the upper arm member 620 can be restricted by the engagement between the hooked end of the biased portion 625 and the torsion spring SP3 (see FIG. 49).

The lower arm member 630 is composed of a long plate member in a substantially bilaterally symmetrical manner, except that the left arm has a path through which electrical wiring is passed. A columnar protrusion 631, a columnar protrusion 632 projecting from the left and right outer sides of the columnar protrusion 631 to the rear side in a columnar shape, and a left and right inner position of the columnar protrusion 631 in the front-rear direction. and a plurality of arc-shaped holes 634 penetrating along a pair of arcs centered on the support hole 633 .

The columnar protrusion 631 is inserted through the connecting portion 623 of the upper arm member 620, and a screw with a large head diameter is screwed into the female screw formed at the tip of the columnar protrusion 631 from the back side. A lower arm member 630 is non-droppably supported on the upper arm member 620 .

The columnar protrusion 632 is inserted through the guide hole 602 of the main body member 601 through the collar member C1 formed in a cylindrical shape for resistance reduction, and is attached to the female screw formed at the tip of the columnar protrusion 632 on the rear side. The lower arm member 630 is supported by the main body member 601 so as not to fall off by screwing a screw having a large head diameter through the lower arm member 630 .

The support hole 633 and the arc-shaped hole 634 are used for connection with the effect member 700 . Due to the relationship with the placement portion 635, which will be described later, the thickness of the portion where the arc-shaped hole 634 is formed is thicker in the lower portion than in the upper portion. Thereby, when the production member 700 is arranged at the lower end position, the production member 700 can be supported so as to be held from the left and right at the thick part, so that the production member 700 can be effectively changed to the forward leaning posture. can be regulated.

In addition, the left lower arm member 630 has a placement portion 635 that is formed open to the back side in order to form a space for passing electrical wiring over the longitudinal direction of the arm body, and the back side of the placement portion 635 . and a thin lid portion 636 disposed on the side and functioning as a lid for the placement portion 635 .

The arranging portion 635 includes a base-side through-hole 635a drilled in the front-rear direction at the end portion on the side of the cylindrical projection 632 .

The proximal side through-hole 635a is a through-hole for passing the electrical wiring arranged in the arrangement portion 635 in the front-rear direction. That is, the electrical wiring arranged in the placement portion 635 passes through the base end side through hole 635 a from the front side, is guided to the placement portion 635 , and exits from the placement portion 635 to the distal end side of the lower arm member 630 .

The lower arm member 630 has a boundary along the longitudinal direction of the lower arm member 630, and a lower meat portion 637 arranged below the boundary in the waiting state for presentation is formed recessed on the back side. be done. In other words, the upper side of the tangent line is formed as a thin plate.

This lower meat portion 637 is reinforced by a plurality of ribs extending in the lateral direction in the right lower arm member 630 . In addition, the lower meat portion 637 constitutes the upper wall portion of the placement portion 635 in the left lower arm member 630, is configured to be able to guide the electric wiring inside, and is arranged as a lid on the guide path. It is reinforced by fastening and fixing the thin-walled lid portion 636 that is attached to the frame.

Since the electric wiring is guided to the direction member 700 side through the inside of the lower arm member 630 (between the placement portion 635 and the thin lid portion 636), members arranged in front and behind the lower arm member 630 (for example, It is possible to prevent the contact between the upper arm member 620) and the electrical wiring. As a result, it is possible to avoid damage to the electrical wiring due to tangling or rubbing of the electrical wiring with these members.

The lower arm member 630 includes, in addition to the above-described pressing member PC1 assembled from the front side, a pressing member PC1 composed of the same members and assembled from the rear side. Through this pressing member PC1, the lower arm member 630 is configured to be able to abut on the body plate-like portion of the body member 601 in the front and rear. The main body member 601 and the pressing member PC1 are not always in contact with each other, but have a slight gap, so that when the lower arm member 630 is displaced to the back side, they come into contact with each other to limit the displacement. function is the same as in the case of the front pressing member PC1.

That is, the lower arm member 630 has the pressing members PC1 attached to both front and rear sides thereof, and is configured to be able to contact the main body member 601 or the front cover member 610 via the pressing members PC1. It is possible to facilitate the restriction of displacement and to reduce the resistance generated against the up-and-down displacement during the restriction of displacement.

The tip of the pressing member PC1 assembled from the back side, which projects toward the back side, is arranged closer to the back side than the end portion of the upper arm member 620 on the back side. As a result, even when the tip of the pressing member PC1 is displaced to the rear side to such an extent that it abuts on the body member 601, the upper arm member 620 can be prevented from abutting on the body member 601. FIG. Therefore, according to the present embodiment, it is possible to prevent the upper arm member 620 from coming into contact with the body member 601 or the front cover member 610 arranged in the front-rear direction.

This configuration is particularly effective when the lower arm member 630 is likely to be unintentionally displaced in the front-rear direction. For example, in the present embodiment, the tip of the lower arm member 630 is arranged near the rear end surface of the effect member 700, and the center of gravity of the effect member 700 and the connection position between the effect member 700 and the lower arm member 630 Since the lower arm member 630 is displaced in the direction, it can be said that the lower arm member 630 is likely to be displaced in the front-rear direction. In addition, due to the displacement mode of the lower arm member 630 and the driving displacement of the effect member 700 itself, the lower arm member 630 is configured to easily cause displacement in the front-rear direction.

The transmission gear 650 includes a semicircular main body portion 651 formed in a substantially semicircular plate shape, a gear portion 652 carved radially outward of the semicircular main body portion 651, and a semicircular main body portion. A support hole 653 is formed as a circular hole through which the cylindrical shaft portion 605 can be inserted through the central axis of the semicircular shape of 651, and a cylindrical shape projecting from the outer diameter end portion of the semicircular main body portion 651 toward the front side. a cylindrical projecting portion 654, a plate portion 655 to be detected formed in a thin plate shape that can enter the detection groove of the detection sensor 607 at the circumferential end portion of the semicircular body portion 651, and the plate portion to be detected A thickened portion 656 formed to extend between 655 and the support hole 653 , and a regulated hole 657 formed through the thickened portion 656 on the support hole 653 side in the front-rear direction.

The gear portion 652 is arranged in mesh with the driving gear of the driving motor MT2, and the driving force of the driving motor MT2 is directly transmitted.

The cylindrical projection 654 passes through the arc-shaped hole 606 of the main body member 601 and is arranged inside the transmission hole 624 of the upper arm member 620 . Accordingly, as the transmission gear 650 rotates, the driving force can be transmitted to the upper arm member 620 via the cylindrical protrusion 654 . The columnar protrusion 654 is inserted through a collar member whose outer diameter is slightly shorter than the width of the transmission hole 624, and a female threaded portion formed at the projecting tip of the columnar protrusion 654 has a fastening screw with a large head diameter. By being screwed in, the collar member and the upper arm member 620 are supported so as not to fall off, and the forward displacement of the upper arm member 620 is restricted.

The thickened portion 656 and the restricted hole 657 are configured to be engageable with the displacement restricting device 180 (see FIG. 6). By disposing the regulated hole 657 on the side of the support hole 653 (position close to the support hole 653), when the displacement regulating device 180 is in the regulated state (see FIG. 21A), the displacement from the transmission gear 650 to the displacement regulating device 180 It is configured such that the transmitted load (moment) is reduced.

Further, as a design concept for the thickness of the transmission gear 650 , a thickened portion 656 is set as a portion where it is necessary to withstand the load caused by engagement with the displacement restricting device 180 . That is, by forming thin parts where engagement with the displacement restricting device 180 cannot occur, the material cost required for the transmission gear 650 can be reduced.

53 is a front exploded perspective view of the effect member 700, and FIG. 54 is a rear exploded perspective view of the effect member 700. FIG. 51 and 52 will be referred to in the description of FIGS. 53 and 54 as needed.

As shown in FIGS. 53 and 54, the effect member 700 includes a plate-like main body 710 connected to the tip of the lower arm member 630, and a functional plate portion 720 fastened and fixed to the front side of the plate-like main body 710. , a rotating plate 730 arranged between the function plate portion 720 and the plate-like main body 710 and supported so as to be rotatably displaceable with respect to the function plate portion 720 , and between the rotating plate 730 and the function plate portion 720 A telescopic displacement member 740 is provided and configured to be displaceable in the same manner as a magic hand in conjunction with the rotation of the rotating plate 730, and a driving gear MG3 is fastened and fixed to the front side of the function plate portion 720. A drive motor MT3 arranged on the back side, a light emitting effect device 750 that is fastened and fixed to the front side of the function plate portion 720 and executes the light emitting effect, and a plurality of extensible displacement members 740 that are respectively fastened and fixed to the end portions of the extensible displacement members 740 to wait for the effect. and a plurality of shielding design members 760 combined so as to shield the passage of light on the front side of the light emitting effect device 750.

The plate-shaped main body 710 has a pair of cylindrical projections 711 projecting from a symmetrical position toward the rear side in a cylindrical shape having an outer diameter slightly shorter than the inner diameter of the support hole 633 of the lower arm member 630, and the cylindrical projections. A plurality of auxiliary protrusions 712 projecting in a columnar shape having an outer diameter slightly shorter than the width of the arcuate upper hole 634 of the lower arm member 630 and a pair of columnar protrusions. A through-hole 713 drilled in the front-rear direction at a position between 711, a wiring guide member 714 arranged below the through-hole 713 and opened only on the front side, and a pressure member arranged on the back surface of the plate. and a member PC1.

The through hole 713 is a through hole for passing the electrical wiring DK1, which passes through the lower arm member 630 and is guided to the tip side of the lower arm member 630 between the placement portion 635 and the thin lid portion 636, to the front side. . A wire guide member 714 guides the electric wire DK1 in a section from the tip of the lower arm member 630 to the through hole 713 . As a result, even in a limited section from the lower arm member 630 to the through-hole 713, the electric wiring DK1 can be prevented from coming into contact with other members or being visually recognized by the player.

The wiring guide member 714 has the function of guiding the electric wiring DK1, and is formed with an inclined surface that slopes down toward the rear surface side. It also has the function of softening the contact of the

That is, when the upper surface of the wiring guide member 714 is arranged to face the rear plate portion 611 of the front cover member 610 when the effect member 700 is displaced upward, the effect member 700 is displaced toward the back side. Even so, the wiring guide member 714 abuts on the rear plate portion 611 , so that the effect member 700 can be returned to the front side in the middle of the upward displacement along the slope of the upper surface of the wiring guide member 714 .

Like the wiring guide member 714, the pressing member PC1 is also disposed slidably on the rear plate portion 611 of the front cover member 610. As shown in FIG. That is, in the present embodiment, the pressing member PC1 arranged at the upper end portion and the wiring guide member 714 arranged at the lower portion can come into contact with the rear plate portion 611 of the front cover member 610 during the upward displacement process of the effect member 700. , the position where the load for maintaining the attitude of the effect member 700 is generated can be divided.

55 is a front view of the function plate portion 720. FIG. In the description of FIG. 55, FIGS. 53 and 54 are referred to as appropriate.

The functional plate portion 720 is made of a resin material and has a substantially plate-like shape. An arc-shaped hole 722 drilled along the coaxial arc shape, a sensor placement portion 723 formed at one end of the arc-shaped hole 722 so that the detection sensor SC7 can be arranged, and a drive shaft of the drive motor MT3 can be inserted. a motor fixing portion 724 having an opening and capable of fastening and fixing the drive motor MT3; A plurality of (in this embodiment, five) guide holes 725 each including a pair of intersecting elongated holes 725b that intersect perpendicularly with each other, and radially outwardly extending on extension lines of the radially elongated holes 725a. A plurality of (in this embodiment, five) extension plate portions 726, and the rear side end portion of the planar portion disposed at the extension base end of the extension plate portion 726 and the width direction both ends of the extension plate portion 726 A pair of auxiliary protrusions 727 (in this embodiment, a pair for each of the extended plate portions 726) protruding from the support, and a pair of columnar protrusions protruding from the vicinity of the radially outward end toward the back side in a columnar shape. 728;

The cylindrical portion 721 is arranged so that the back side end abuts on the plate-like main body 710 , and is fastened and fixed to the plate-like main body 710 in a state in which the internal through-hole communicates with the through-hole 713 of the plate-like main body 710 . be done. At this time, the fastening screw is inserted through the plate-like main body 710 from the rear side of the plate-like main body 710 , and the threaded portion is screwed into the female screw formed at the rear-side end portion of the cylindrical portion 721 .

As a result, the functional plate portion 720 is fastened and fixed to the plate-like main body 710, and a through hole is formed in the central portion thereof. In this embodiment, the electric wiring DK1 is guided to the front side through this through hole. .

The electric wiring DK1 (see FIG. 76) guided to the front side is connected to the detection sensor SC7 fastened and fixed to the sensor placement portion 723 and the driving motor MT3 fastened and fixed to the motor fixing portion 724. FIG. As a result, the detection sensor SC7 and the drive motor MT3 can be energized.

The circular arc-shaped hole 722 is a through hole for allowing the detection target portion 731a of the rotating plate 730 to extend toward the front side. It is possible to determine the posture.

The guide holes 725 are a group of through holes formed with a width that allows the guided protrusions 741b, 741c, and 742a of the expansion/contraction displacement member 740 to be arranged. A long hole-shaped radial long hole 725a is formed, and on both sides of the outer diameter side end of the long hole-shaped long hole 725a, a long hole-shaped hole is formed along a straight line orthogonal to the straight line that is the reference of the radial long hole 725a. and a pair of cross slots 725b formed in the .

The radially elongated holes 725a and the intersecting elongated holes 725b function to limit the displacement of the telescopic displacement member 740, and the extension plate portion 726 and the auxiliary protrusions 727 correct the posture of the telescopic displacement member 740 in the collective arrangement state. function as described below in detail.

The columnar projecting portion 728 is configured such that the rear end thereof can come into contact with the plate-like main body 710 . In the abutting state, a fastening screw that is inserted through the plate-like body 710 from the rear side is screwed into a female thread formed on the distal end side of the columnar projecting portion 728, so that the function plate portion 720 is connected to the plate-like body. 710 is fastened and fixed.

In the assembled state, the columnar projecting portion 728 is inserted through the arc-shaped hole 732 of the rotating plate 730 to limit the rotation angle of the rotating plate 730 . That is, the columnar projecting portion 728 is used both as a portion for fastening and fixing the function plate portion 720 to the plate-like main body 710 and as a portion for limiting the rotation angle of the rotating plate 730 .

56 is a front view of rotating plate 730, and FIG. 57 is a side view of rotating plate 730. FIG. 53 and 54 will be referred to in the description of FIGS. 56 and 57 as appropriate.

The rotating plate 730 is made of a resin material and has a substantially disk shape. A plurality of arc-shaped holes 732 drilled along the coaxial arc shape and long through-holes formed at positions on the outer diameter side of the cylindrical portion 731 and on the inner diameter side of the arc-shaped hole 732 . and a plurality of guide holes 733 (five in this embodiment), and extended hook portions 734 extending radially outward in a hook shape at positions corresponding to the guide holes 733 .

The cylindrical portion 731 is designed to have an inner diameter slightly longer than the outer diameter of the cylindrical portion 721 of the function plate portion 720, and extends from the front end to the front side so that the detection sensor SC7 passes through the arc-shaped hole 722 of the function plate portion 720. and a gear portion 731b formed on the outer peripheral side in a gear shape that can mesh with the drive gear MG3 of the drive motor MT3.

The arc-shaped hole 732 is an opening in which the columnar projecting portion 728 of the function plate portion 720 is arranged, and is formed with a length that can ensure the rotation angle of the rotating plate 730 at approximately 120 degrees or less.

The guide holes 733 are formed in the same shape. A small-diameter arc portion 733a formed in an arc shape centering on the central axis of the tubular portion 731 and a center of the tubular portion 731 from the small-diameter arc portion 733a. A large-diameter arc portion 733b having a long length from the axis and a connecting portion 733c connecting the large-diameter arc portion 733b and the small-diameter arc portion 733a are provided.

Although the aspect of the connecting portion 733c is not limited in any way, in the present embodiment, it is formed so that the change in the length from the central axis of the cylindrical portion 731 per unit angle changes according to the position. be. In particular, in the present embodiment, the change in length from the central axis of the tubular portion 731 per unit angle near the small-diameter arc portion 733a and the large-diameter arc portion 733b is designed to be relatively small.

As a result, it is possible to reduce the resistance generated when the load is transmitted to the telescopic displacement member 740, and to improve the performance effect by making the displacement speed of the telescopic displacement member 740 non-uniform.

The extended claw portion 734 is formed in a claw shape that protrudes clockwise in a front view, is configured to be able to engage with the telescopic displacement member 740 arranged on the front side, and is formed closer to the rear side in the thickness direction. It has a rear side claw portion 734a and a front side claw portion 734b formed on the front side of the rear side claw portion 734a. In the present embodiment, the extended claw portion 734 is divided into the rear claw portion 734a and the front claw portion 734b at a substantially intermediate position in the thickness dimension.

The extended claw portion 734 functions as a portion that engages with the first guided protrusion 743 b and the second guided protrusion 744 b of the telescopic displacement member 740 . The front-side claw portion 734b and the back-side claw portion 734a correspond to the second guided projection portion 744b and the first guided projection portion 743b, which have different projecting tip positions from the telescopic displacement member 740, respectively. It is guided radially inward, the details of which will be described later.

In the present embodiment, the extension claw portion 734 is arranged such that the extension claw portion 734 arranged on the lower side has a longer extension length than the extension claw portion 734 arranged on the upper side. formed in In this embodiment, the extension length is increased in both the circumferential direction and the radial direction. Thereby, the influence of gravity can be mitigated.

That is, even if the telescopic displacement members 740 are configured to have the same shape, the displacement caused by the action of gravity is different for each telescopic displacement member 740 because the relationship between the displaceable direction and the direction of gravity is different. For example, the telescopic displacement member 740 disposed on the lower side hangs down due to its own weight and is displaced in the direction away from the rotation axis of the rotary plate 730 . There is a possibility that the first guided projection 743b of 740 will be arranged, and the radially inward guidance by the extended claw 734 will fail.

In contrast, in the present embodiment, the extension length of the extension claw portion 734 arranged on the lower side is designed to be sufficiently long in consideration of the sagging of the telescopic displacement member 740. The radially inward guidance by the portion 734 can be stably performed.

On the other hand, even if the telescopic displacement member 740 disposed on the upper side is displaced due to its own weight, the displacement is in the direction of approaching the rotation axis of the rotary plate 730, so the extension claw 734 is guided radially inward. is unlikely to fail. Therefore, the extended claw portion 734 arranged on the upper side should not be extended longer than necessary, and should be formed short, thereby reducing the material cost and miniaturizing the rotating plate 730. can be done.

The elastic displacement member 740 and the shielding design member 760 will be described with reference to FIGS. 58 and 59. FIG. 53 and 54 will be referred to in the description of FIGS. 58 and 59 as appropriate.

58(a) is a front perspective view of the telescopic displacement member 740 and the shielding design member 760, FIG. 58(b) is a rear perspective view of the telescopic displacement member 740 and the shielding design member 760, and FIG. ) is a front perspective view of the telescopic displacement member 740 and the shielding design member 760, and FIG.

In FIGS. 58(a) and 58(b), of the five sets of telescopic displacement members 740 and shielding design members 760, one set arranged at the top is illustrated in a state in which it is collectively arranged. In 59(a) and 59(b), the same set is illustrated as if it were to be discrete.

The telescopic displacement member 740 is a member that constitutes a link mechanism composed of a plurality of long members arranged in two layers, front and rear. The plane in which the first elongate member can be displaced is also called a front layer plane, and the plane in which a plurality of elongate members arranged on the rear side can be displaced is also called a rear layer plane.

The expansion/contraction displacement member 740 is arranged in two layers, front and rear, and has a pair of proximal side members 741 that are pivotally supported at the lower end so as to be relatively rotatable, and a pair of proximal side members 741 that are pivotally supported at the upper end of the proximal side member 741 so as to be relatively rotatable. A pair of first elongated members 742, a pair of second elongated members 743 pivotally supported at upper ends of the first elongated members 742 so as to be relatively rotatable, and upper ends of the second elongated members 742 are and a distal adjustment member 744 having a guide slot 744a extending linearly to allow guidance.

The proximal side member 741, the first elongated member 742, and the second elongated member 743, which are configured as a pair of front and rear members, are designed to have the same length in the longitudinal direction and the same support position.

The base end member 741 includes a transmission target projection 741a projecting from the lower end of the member on the rear plane side toward the rear surface side in a cylindrical shape, and a circular transmission receiving projection 741a projecting from the rear surface toward the front surface where the cylindrical projection 741a projects. A guided protrusion 741b that protrudes in a columnar shape and is inserted into the member on the front layer plane side, and a lower end portion of a first elongated member 742 that protrudes in a columnar shape from the upper end portion of the member on the rear layer plane side toward the front side. and a guided protrusion 741c that is inserted into a through hole that is drilled in.

The transmitted projection 741a is arranged in a guide hole 733 (see FIG. 56) of the rotating plate 730 and configured to be displaced in the radial direction as the rotating plate 730 rotates.

The guided projection 741b and the guided projection 741c are arranged in the guide hole 725 of the function plate portion 725 and guided in the longitudinal direction thereof. The guided protrusion 741b is arranged in the radially elongated hole 725a, and the guided protrusion 741c is arranged in the intersecting elongated hole 725b (see FIG. 55).

The first elongated member 742 is rotatably supported about a front-rear axis at a substantially intermediate position in the longitudinal direction. A guided protrusion 742a is provided to be inserted through the upper end of the base end member 741 on the side.

The guided protrusion 742a is arranged in the intersecting elongated hole 725b of the function plate portion 725 and guided in its longitudinal direction (see FIG. 55).

The second elongated member 743 is rotatably supported about a front-rear axis at a substantially intermediate position in the longitudinal direction. From the upper end of the member on the floor plane side, a diameter of about the width of the member is projected flush with the front end surface of the member on the front layer plane side, and a pair of cylindrical projections are projected from the projecting tip to the front side. It has a support protrusion 743a and a first guided protrusion 743b that protrudes in a columnar shape toward the back side from a substantially intermediate position of the member on the rear plane side.

The first guided protrusion 743b is guided by the rear side claw portion 734a of the extended claw portion 734 of the rotary plate 730, and receives a radially inward load due to this guidance (see FIG. 56).

The front end adjustment member 744 is a member to which the shielding design member 760 is fastened and fixed on the front side, and has a length that extends along the straight direction with a width that allows the support protrusion 743a of the second long member 743 to be inserted. It is provided with a pair of guide long holes 744a drilled in a hole shape, and a second guided projection 744b projecting from the central position in the longitudinal direction to the back side in a cylindrical shape.

The projecting tip of the second guided projection 744b is disposed forward of the projecting tip of the first guided projection 743b, and is guided by the front claw 734b of the extended claw 734 of the rotary plate 730, This guide receives a radially inward load (see FIG. 57).

The second guided projection 744b does not have a circular shape at the tip of the projecting part, and has an inclination that approaches as the rotating plate 730, which has the center of rotation on the side of the transmitted projection 741a, is rotationally displaced in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the rear. The surface on the side opposite to the surface 734c (see FIG. 57) (the left surface in FIG. 59(b)) has a chamfered inclined surface.

Due to this inclined surface, even if the arrangement of the telescopic displacement member 740 is slightly deviated in the front-rear direction, it is possible to avoid excessive resistance when the rotating plate 730 abuts against the extended claw portion 734. can be done.

As shown in FIGS. 58(b) and 59(b), when the telescopic displacement members 740 are collectively arranged and when they are separated, the telescopic displacement members 740 are arranged at the tips of the second elongated members 743. The support projections 743 a are arranged at both outer and inner ends of the guide elongated hole 744 a of the tip adjustment member 744 . Thereby, the arrangement (arrangement in the longitudinal direction) of the distal end adjusting member 744 with respect to the pair of support protrusions 743a can be stabilized.

The shielding design member 760 is fastened and fixed to the front side of the distal end adjustment member 744, extends toward the front side from the fastening portion as an end, and extends toward the front side from the extended distal end toward the side covering the telescopic displacement member 740. It is a substantially triangular member in front view and has a shape portion extending in parallel with a plane (front layer plane or rear layer plane) in which the expansion/contraction displacement member 740 is displaced from the extension end thereof. be.

The shielding design member 760 is configured to shield the decorative member 752 on the back side invisibly by attaching a colored (red in this embodiment) reflective sheet to the front and back sides of the shielding design member 760. It has an extension plate portion 761 extending in a plate shape to the right side in such a manner that a plate surface is formed on the top.

The extended plate portion 761 has colored (red in this embodiment) reflective sheets attached to its front and back surfaces in the same manner as the main body portion of the shielding design member 760, and is arranged on the right side (clockwise side) in front view. It is arranged to face the rear side of the left end portion of the design member 760, and when the shielding design member 760 is displaced to the rear side, it abuts and is configured to be able to suppress the displacement.

The arrangement of the extended plate portion 761 is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the front surface of the plate may be arranged so as to be shifted toward the rear surface side from the rear surface of the main body of the shielding design member 760 . In this case, when the plurality of shielding design members 760 are displaced to the collective arrangement position, the main body portion of the shielding design member 760 and the extension plate portion 761 are aligned in the displacement direction (displacement plane) of the shielding design member 760 or the expansion/contraction displacement member 740 . abutment (collision) can be avoided along the

This effect becomes more pronounced as the extension plate portion 761 is placed farther from the body portion of the shielding design member 760. However, at least the positional deviation of the shielding design member 760 in the front-rear direction is allowed for the shielding design member 760. By arranging the extension plate portion 761 apart, the extension plate portion 761 and the body portion of the shielding design member 760 abut along the displacement direction (displacement plane) of the shielding design member 760 or the telescopic displacement member 740. (collision) can be avoided.

Further, the shape of the front surface of the extension plate portion 761 may be formed as an inclined surface, or may be formed as a flat surface whose normal is oriented in the front-rear direction. In this embodiment, it is configured as an inclined surface that approaches the back side as the distance from the shielding design member 760 increases.

As a result, for example, the shielding design member 760 is assembled in a state in which the shielding design member 760 adjacent to the top shielding design member 760 on the right side in the front view is slightly displaced toward the rear side with respect to the top shielding design member 760. Even if it is displaced to the arrangement (see FIG. 63) position, along the front inclination of the extended plate portion 761 of the uppermost shielding design member 760, the front-rear position of the shielding design member 760 adjacent to the right in the front view. Deviations can be corrected. This makes it easier to align the relative longitudinal positions of the adjacent shielding design members 760 .

In addition, as shown in FIG. 58(b), the second long member 743 of the elastic displacement member 740 supporting the shielding design member 760 has a member supporting the right side of the shielding design member 760 arranged on the rear layer plane. , the member supporting the left side of the shielding design member 760 is arranged on the front layer plane, and the middle portions of the pair of second elongated members 743 intersect so that they are overlapped back and forth, so that the left side becomes the right side. It is configured so that the shielding design member 760 can be easily tilted toward the forward side in comparison.

Since the configuration of the extensible displacement members 740 that support the shielding design members 760 is common to all five sets, each shielding design member 760 is common, and the left side is the right side (the side where the extended plate portion 761 is formed). It is configured so that it can be easily tilted to a posture that is arranged on the front side in comparison.

Due to the inclination of the attitude of the shielding design member 760, the extension plate portion 761 can be positioned away from the rear side of the shielding design member 760 arranged to face the extension plate portion 761 side. In this state, the shielding design member 760 is displaced to the collective arrangement position, so that the main body portion of the shielding design member 760 and the extension plate portion 761 move in the displacement direction (displacement plane) of the shielding design member 760 or the telescopic displacement member 740. ) can be avoided.

In the state where the five sets of shielding design members 760 are collectively arranged (see FIG. 53), the shielding design members 760 are arranged in a circle, and all the shielding design members 760 are adjacent to the left side (counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front). The extended plate portion 761 of the shielding design member 760 suppresses positional deviation to the rear side.

According to this configuration, the shielding design member 760 is prevented from being displaced to the front side by the extension plate portion 761 coming into contact with the shielding design member 760 on the right side (adjacent in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front). Therefore, by arranging the five sets of shielding design members 760 to face each other in the front-rear direction, it is possible to suppress displacement in the front-rear direction for each of the five sets of shielding design members 760 .

Interlocking between the rotating plate 730 and the telescopic displacement member 740 will be described with reference to FIGS. 60 and 61. FIG. 60 and 61 are front views of the function plate portion 720. FIG. 60 and 61, the guide hole 733 of the rotating plate 730 is illustrated by imaginary lines, and an example of the outer shape arrangement of the transmitted projection 741a, the guided projections 741b, 741c, and 742a of the expansion/contraction displacement member 740 is illustrated. be.

FIG. 60 shows a state in which the telescopic displacement members 740 are collectively arranged (see FIG. 58), and in FIG. 61, the rotary plate 730 rotates about 120 degrees counterclockwise in front view, and the telescopic displacement members 740 are dispersed. A state (see FIG. 59) is illustrated.

In this embodiment, the guided projections 741b, 741c, and 742a are guided along the guide hole 725, and the transmitted projection 741a is arranged in the guide hole 733 as the rotary plate 730 rotates. The state of the telescopic displacement member 740 changes by displacing it in a direction approaching the rotating shaft side of 730 .

In this state change, since the guided projections 741c and 742a are still maintained on the outer diameter side of the function plate portion 720, the shielding design member 760 is stretched to the outer diameter side with reference to the positions of the guided projections 741c and 742a. It is configured to be displaceable so that it can be pulled out, the details of which will be described later.

Returning to FIGS. 53 and 54, description will be made. The light emitting device 750 includes an electrical board 751 having an opening in the center, and a decorative member 752 arranged on the front side of the electrical board 751 and made of a light-transmitting resin material. An opening is formed in the central portion of the electrical decoration board 751, and the decorative member 752 is formed in a dome shape projecting toward the front side, so that an area for arranging the drive motor MT3 can be secured.

The illumination board 751 has an opening 751a formed in the center. Inside the opening 751a, the drive motor MT3 and electrical wiring guided through the lower arm member 630 are arranged. The larger the opening 751a, the easier it is to arrange the drive motor MT3 and the electrical wiring, but the area for arranging the LED as the light emitting means is limited. desirable.

Since an LED cannot be arranged in the opening 751a, the front side thereof is dark and easily visible. In contrast, in the present embodiment, the configuration of the decorative member 752 is divided into two.

That is, the decorative member 752 is composed of a light-transmitting member 752a formed of a colorless and light-transmitting resin material, and a light-transmitting member 752a assembled from the front side to the light-transmitting member 752a and having a mirror surface (for example, silver-plated coating). ) and a mirror member 752b.

An opening is formed in the central portion of the light transmitting member 752a, and the central portion of the mirror surface member 752b is closed, so that the mirror surface member 752b can be arranged at a position where the drive motor MT3 is arranged in a front view. . As a result, even if there is no light irradiation from the LED from the back side, the reflected light by light irradiation from another direction (for example, light irradiation from the hemispherical lighting device 613) can be visually recognized by the player. , the front side portion of the opening 751a can be prevented from being viewed darkly.

The vertical displacement of the rendering member 700 of the scaling unit 600 will be described. 62 to 64 are front views of the enlargement/reduction unit 600 showing the downward displacement of the effect member 700 in chronological order. 62 to 64, illustration of the front cover member 610 is omitted for easy understanding.

FIG. 62 shows the effect waiting state of the enlargement/reduction unit 600, FIG. 63 shows the effect member 700 descending from the effect standby state, and FIG. illustrated.

63 is illustrated as a state in which the rotation angle of the lower arm member 630 is half the rotation angle of the lower arm member 630 from the presentation standby state to the extended state. In this embodiment, the rotation angle of the upper arm member 620 is also halved.

As shown in FIG. 62, in the rendering standby state of the scaling unit 600, the columnar protrusion 654 is arranged at the boundary between the transmission portion 624a and the allowance portion 624b of the upper arm member 620. As shown in FIG.
That is, the state in which the cylindrical projection 654 immediately enters the transmission portion 624a and the effect member 700 is placed at a position where the downward displacement can be started is the effect standby state of the scaling unit 600.

This effect standby state suggests that the effect member 700 of the enlargement/reduction unit 600 is displaced downward by the effect member including the third pattern display device 81 (see FIG. 7) disposed in the pachinko machine 10, for example. Before the suggestive effect is executed, the columnar protrusion 654 is arranged on the margin 624b side.

As described above, the clearance portion 624b is a shaped portion continuously extending from one end of the transmission portion 624a along the arc centered on the rotation axis of the transmission gear 650. In the state shown in FIG. 606 in the front-rear direction.

Therefore, the load applied to the cylindrical protrusion 654 through the transmission hole 624 of the upper arm member 620 is directed toward the rotation shaft of the transmission gear 650 and does not function as a load to rotate the transmission gear 650 . Therefore, the displacement of the upper arm member 620 can be restricted regardless of whether or not the driving motor MT2 (see FIG. 51) is energized, whereby the upper arm member 620 is connected to the lower arm member 630 which is connected to the upper arm member 620. Displacement of the production member 700 can be regulated.

Note that even if the effect suggesting that the effect member 700 is displaced downward is the effect mode in which the effect member 700 is not finally displaced downward, in the present embodiment, the enlargement/reduction unit 600 is placed in the effect standby state. is controlled to change state to

In this case, immediately after the player is notified that the effect member 700 will not be displaced downward, the transmission gear 650 rotates counterclockwise in front view in order to return the cylindrical protrusion 654 to the margin 624b side. The drive motor MT2 (see FIG. 51) is driven.

As a result, when an effect suggesting downward displacement of the effect member 700 is executed, it is possible to avoid predicting the subsequent effect regarding the effect member 700 due to the difference in the driving sound of the drive motor MT2. .

The margin portion 624b also has a function of lowering the accuracy required for the drive stop position when the drive motor MT2 is rotationally driven in the direction in which the effect member 700 is lifted. 62, the effect member 700 has already been placed at the displacement end position on the upper end side, and the subsequent displacement of the cylindrical protrusion 654 is limited to the allowance portion. 624b is a displacement that only slides.

Further, the function of restricting the displacement of the upper arm member 620 does not differ regardless of the position of the columnar projection 654 in the margin 624b. Therefore, it is allowed that the setting accuracy of the stop position of the columnar projection 654 is lowered, so that the transmission gear 650 can be stopped immediately when the plate portion 655 to be detected enters the detection sensor 607 (see FIG. 52). The rotation speed of the drive motor MT2 (see FIG. 51) can be set to be large when the effect member 700 is displaced upward without being limited to the speed. Thereby, the rising speed of the production member 700 can be set to be large.

In addition, even if the rising speed is excessive, when the upper arm member 620 comes into contact with the columnar protrusion 654 , the load applied to the columnar protrusion 654 is directed in the radial direction of the transmission gear 650 . Therefore, it does not function to displace the cylindrical protrusion 654 in the rotational direction. Therefore, even if the rising speed is excessive, the displacement of the upper arm member 620 can be restricted at the position where it abuts on the columnar protrusion 654 .

Furthermore, even if the ascending speed is excessive, the upward displacement of the lower arm member 630 is restricted by the upper arm member 620, which will be described later in detail.

As shown in FIGS. 62 to 64, the change in the lateral distance between the ends of the pair of lower arm members 630 (the lateral distance between the ends arranged in the guide holes 602 of the main body member 601) changes from the effect standby state. It is set larger from the halfway down state to the overhanging state compared to the halfway down state.

In this way, by increasing the displacement speed between the ends of the pair of lower arm members 630 accompanying the downward displacement of the effect member 700, the lower arm member 630 supporting the effect member 700 is violently displaced in the width direction. It is possible to make the player visually recognize as if the displacement speed of the production member 700 is rapidly increasing, and the production effect of the up-and-down displacement of the production member 700 can be visually recognized. can be improved.

65 to 67 are rear views of the enlargement/reduction unit 600 showing the downward displacement of the effect member 700 in chronological order. In addition, in FIG. 65, FIG. 65(b) is also shown as a diagram in which illustration of the main body member 601 and the front cover member 610 is omitted for easy understanding.

65(a) and 65(b) show the production standby state of the enlargement/reduction unit 600, FIG. 66 shows the lowering state in which the production member 700 descends from the production standby state, and FIG. The expanded state of the scaling unit 600 is shown.

As shown in FIG. 65( a ), when the enlarging/reducing unit 600 is in the rendering standby state, the detected plate portion 655 of the transmission gear 650 is retracted from the detection groove of the detection sensor 607 . That is, in the present embodiment, the drive motor MT2 is stopped in a state in which the detection plate portion 655 is arranged in the detection groove of the detection sensor 607 before execution of the effect suggesting that the effect member 700 is displaced downward. At this point, the driving motor MT2 is driven and controlled in accordance with the execution of the above-described suggestive effect, and the driving motor MT2 is temporarily stopped at a position where it is determined that the plate portion 655 to be detected has retreated from the detection groove of the detection sensor 607. It is controlled to change the state of the enlargement/reduction unit 600 to the presentation standby state.

Conversely, when the transmission gear 650 is rotationally driven to the side of upwardly displacing the effect member 700, when it is determined that the detected plate portion 655 has entered the detection groove of the detection sensor 607, the drive motor MT2 is energized. is released, the transmission gear 650 can be stopped at a position slightly entering the margin 624b from the position of the cylindrical projection 654 in the standby state for the effect, and as described above, the upper arm member 620 , the displacement of the lower arm member 630 and the effect member 700 can be regulated.

In this embodiment, when it is determined that the plate portion 655 to be detected has entered the detection groove of the detection sensor 607, the driving of the driving motor MT2 is not stopped immediately, but regardless of whether the driving speed is maintained or decelerated, The driving of the drive motor MT2 is controlled to stop after a time delay sufficient for the position of the columnar protrusion 654 to be arranged at the end of the margin 624b.

As a result, the stop position of the transmission gear 650 can be set to a position where the cylindrical protrusion 654 is located at the end of the margin 624b. At this position, the cylindrical portion 183 of the displacement restricting device 180 can be inserted into the restricted hole 657 of the transmission gear 650 (see FIG. 21(a)). Even if the stop position of the transmission gear 650 is slightly deviated, the tapered surface is formed at the tip of the cylindrical portion 183 (see FIG. 15(c)), so that the cylindrical portion 183 can be easily inserted into the restricted hole 657. can do.

The position of the regulated hole 657 when the cylindrical portion 183 can be inserted is a position slightly rotated clockwise from the state shown in FIG. It is set at a position that partially overlaps with the regulation hole 657 .

Therefore, for example, in the state shown in FIG. 66 or FIG. 67, the operation member 183 of the displacement restricting device 180 is pushed to set the displacement restricting device 180 in the restricting state (see FIG. 15(c)), and then the transmission gear 650 is disengaged. Even if the transmission gear 650 is rotationally controlled in the direction to move the production member 700 upward by drive control, the cylindrical portion 183 interferes with the displacement of the transmission gear 650, and the state shown in FIG. 65(a) is not reached.

The plate portion 655 to be detected does not enter the detection groove of the detection sensor 607 even though the drive motor MT2 continues to be driven, so that the MPU 221 (see FIG. 4) determines that the transmission gear 650 is defective in displacement. can be done.

Based on this determination, the abnormality can be notified by a method such as displaying an error indicating the displacement failure of the enlargement/reduction unit 600 on the third pattern display device 81 (see FIG. 4). store clerk to understand that the displacement restricting device 180 may remain in the restricting state.

As a result, the error display or the like regarding the displacement of the enlargement/reduction unit 600 can be used to convey information regarding the state of the displacement restricting device 180 to the store clerk of the gaming machine shop. Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the need to separately provide a device for detecting the state of the displacement restricting device 180 .

Here, since the stop position of the transmission gear 650 has a margin corresponding to the length of the margin 624b of the transmission hole 624, the rotational speed of the transmission gear 650 can be set to a large value. If the rotation speed of the transmission gear 650 is excessive when the transmission gear 700 is displaced upward, the upward speed of the lower arm member 630 suspended from the upper arm member 620 will be excessive, and the lower arm member 630 will move to the upper arm member 620. There is a possibility of collision.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the direction in which the effect member 700 is displaced toward the effect standby state is set in the direction opposite to the direction of gravity (upward direction), downward acceleration is always applied to the lower arm member 630. It is possible to reduce the vertical load at the contact position when the lower arm member 630 collides with the upper arm member 620 .

In addition, as shown in FIG. 65(b), since the upper side surface shape of the lower meat portion 637 of the lower arm member 630 is formed along the lower side surface shape of the upper arm member 620, the lower arm member 630 can increase the contact area in the case of collision with the upper arm member 620 . As a result, it is possible to prevent the upper arm member 620 and the lower arm member 630 from being locally subjected to a large load, and prevent the upper arm member 620 or the lower arm member 630 from being damaged or broken.

In this way, since the lower arm member 630 is configured to be able to contact the lower surface of the upper arm member 620 with a sufficiently wide contact area, the rotation speed of the transmission gear 650 is excessive when the effect member 700 is displaced upward. Even if the rising speed of the lower arm member 630 suspended from the upper arm member 620 becomes excessive, the upper arm member 620 whose displacement is restricted by the columnar protrusion 654 as described above allows the lower arm member 630 to move upward. The upward displacement of the member 630 can be restricted. Thereby, the production member 700 can be prevented from being displaced upward beyond the arrangement in the production standby state.

In the state shown in FIGS. 66 and 67, the upper arm member 620, the lower arm member 630 and the effect member 700 are displaced downward from the effect standby state against the biasing force of the torsion spring SP3 by the driving force of the drive motor MT2. corresponds to the state

In the state shown in FIG. 66, the auxiliary protrusion 712 of the effect member 700 is arranged at the intermediate position of the arcuate hole 634 of the lower arm member 630, and in the state shown in FIG. An auxiliary protrusion 712 of 700 is located at the end of the arcuate hole 634 of the lower arm member 630 .

Thereby, the extent to which the lower arm member 630 holds the effect member 700 (the extent to which the posture is stabilized) can be changed. That is, the lower arm member 630 can hold the effect member 700 to a higher extent in the effect standby state or the overhanging state than in the mid-descent state.

In other words, it is possible to easily prevent the effect member 700 from changing its posture in the direction of rotation about the cylindrical protrusion 711 . For example, when the auxiliary projection 712 is arranged in the middle position of the arc-shaped hole 732 and the displacement in the rotational direction is not restricted (see FIG. 66), the effect member 700 rotates in the rotational direction around the right cylindrical projection 711. Attitude may change.

In the present embodiment, the effect member 700 is supported by the pair of left and right lower arm members 630 at two points including the left cylindrical projection 711, but it rotates around the right cylindrical projection 711. The displacement direction of the left columnar protrusion 711 when the performance member 700 changes its posture is the lateral direction of the lower arm member 630, that is, the direction in which the lower arm member 630 is displaced. Therefore, there is a possibility that the change in posture of the effect member 700 will be visibly caused without being restricted by the lower arm member 630, which may give the player a sense of discomfort.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, in the overhanging state, the direction of displacement of the left cylindrical protrusion 711 when the direction of the production member 700 changes in the direction of rotation around the right cylindrical protrusion 711 is downward. Lower arm member 630 is arranged along the longitudinal direction of arm member 630 . As a result, the lower arm member 630 can effectively limit the change in the posture of the effect member 700, and the change in the posture of the effect member 700 to the extent that the effect member 700 can be identified can be prevented.

In addition, in the overhanging state, the pair of auxiliary protrusions 712 arranged on the right side is arranged at the end position of the arc-shaped hole 732, so that the contact between the auxiliary protrusions 712 and the arc-shaped hole 732 causes the right side It is possible to prevent the attitude of the effect member 700 from changing in the clockwise direction when viewed from the back around the cylindrical protrusion 711 of . As described above, the change in posture in the counterclockwise direction in rear view is restricted by the displacement direction of the left cylindrical projection 711 along the longitudinal direction of the left lower arm member 630 .

Similarly, in the overhanging state, the pair of auxiliary projections 712 arranged on the left side are arranged at the terminal positions of the arc-shaped holes 732, so that the contact between the auxiliary projections 712 and the arc-shaped holes 732 causes the left side It is possible to prevent the attitude of the effect member 700 from changing in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the rear around the cylindrical protrusion 711 . As described above, the change in posture in the clockwise direction in the rear view is restricted by the fact that the displacement direction of the right cylindrical protrusion 711 is along the longitudinal direction of the right lower arm member 630 .

Furthermore, the auxiliary protrusion 712 not only changes the attitude of the production member 700 in the direction of rotation (the direction of rotation about the axis extending in the front-rear direction), but also in the direction of tilting (the direction of rotation about the axis extending in the left-right direction). It functions to suppress posture changes and posture changes in the lateral swing direction (rotation direction around an axis extending in the vertical direction).

For example, the lower arm member 630 and the directing member 700 are not connected only by the pair of left and right cylindrical projections 711, but the auxiliary projections 712 arranged above the cylindrical projections 711, or the cylindrical projections 711. Since the lower arm member 630 and the effect member 700 can be connected at three upper and lower positions by being connected also by the auxiliary protrusions 712 arranged on the lower left and right outer sides, the posture change in the tilting direction of the effect member 700 can be controlled. can be suppressed.

In addition, since the auxiliary projection 712 arranged above the cylindrical projection 711 is arranged in the middle of the elongated body portion of the lower arm member 630 (the root side of the arc-shaped hole 634), the effect member 700 tilts. The long main body of the lower arm member 630 can withstand the load caused by the change in orientation.

Further, the pressing member PC1 is disposed on the elongated body portion of the lower arm member 630 as described above (see FIGS. 64 and 67), and the body member 601 or the front cover member 610 is moved downward by the pressing member PC1. The longitudinal displacement of the arm member 630 is restricted.

In this way, when the load due to the change in posture of the effect member 700 is applied to the long main body portion of the lower arm member 630 and the lower arm member 630 receives the load in the bending direction along the lengthwise direction, the lower arm member 630 By using the configuration that regulates the displacement, it is possible to strongly prevent the attitude change of the effect member 700 .

In addition, as described above, the auxiliary projections 712 arranged on the left and right outer sides (below) of the cylindrical projections 711 can increase the number of connection positions between the lower arm member 630 and the effect member 700, and the effect member 700 can move downward. It is possible to suppress the posture change in the lateral swing direction with respect to the arm member 630 .

In this embodiment, the connecting position between the lower arm member 630 and the effect member 700 is arranged on a horizontal plane passing through the vertical center of the plate-shaped main body 710 of the effect member 700 . In addition, in this embodiment, the center of gravity of the production member 700 is arranged on the same horizontal plane.

As a result, it is possible to minimize the amount of displacement in the front-rear direction when the posture of the effect member 700 is changed in such a manner that the effect member 700 falls forward about the connecting portion with the lower arm member 630 . It is possible to minimize the amount of displacement in the front-rear direction when the posture of the effect member 700 is changed in such a manner that the effect member 700 falls backward about the connecting portion.

That is, even if there is a possibility that a plurality of types of posture changes occur in the effect member 700, the front-rear direction displacement of the effect member 700 is suppressed even if any one of the plurality of posture changes occurs. Therefore, any posture change can be dealt with.

As a result, even when the effect member 700 and the partition member 310 (see FIG. 13(a)) are arranged with a narrow front-to-rear space, the effect member 700 is prevented from rubbing against or colliding with the partition member 310. Since this can be avoided, it is possible to make it difficult for the performance member 700 to be damaged, the design portion to be deteriorated, and visibility deterioration (transparency deterioration) due to damage or abrasion to the partitioning member 310 to occur.

In a state where the effect member 700 is arranged at the lower end position, the transmission gear 650 abuts on the shape portion of the main body member 601 in the rotational direction and is restricted from further rotation. Therefore, even if the drive motor MT2 continues to drive, it is possible to prevent the upper arm member 620, the lower arm member 630, and the effect member 700 from being excessively displaced simply by accumulating the driving force in the transmission gear 650.

In this embodiment, in the overhanging state shown in FIG. 67, a driving force slightly exceeding the biasing force of the torsion spring SP3 is continuously applied to prevent the production member 700 from rebounding upward and displacing it. controlling.

As a result, the effect member 700 can be stably stopped at the lower end position while setting the biasing force of the torsion spring SP3 to a large value (for example, a magnitude that allows the effect member 700 to be lifted).

On the other hand, when the effect member 700 starts to be displaced upward, the urging force of the torsion spring SP3 can be used, so it is possible to avoid excessive load on the drive motor MT2.

For example, when starting to displace upward, after releasing the driving force for stably arranging the effect member 700 at the lower end position, the upward displacement of the effect member 700 is prevented by the biasing force of the torsion spring SP3. By generating the driving force of the driving motor MT2 after waiting (by providing a waiting time until the driving of the driving motor MT2 is started), the driving force can be applied to the effect member 700 after the start of displacement.

This makes it possible to reduce the burden on the drive motor MT2 compared to the case where the effect member 700 in the stopped state is displaced upward.

65 to 67, imaginary lines show changes in the arrangement of the electric wiring DK1 passing through the lower arm member 630, and hidden lines show the shape of the inner surface of the wiring guide member 714 for guiding the electric wiring DK1. be done.

As shown in FIG. 65(b), the electrical wiring DK1 passes through the front side of the thin lid portion 636 of the lower arm member 630, passes through the inner diameter side of the arcuate hole 634, and is guided to the inside of the wiring guide member 714. It passes through the through hole 713 to the front side.

As shown in FIGS. 65 to 67, the tension of the electrical wiring DK1 that may occur due to the relative displacement of the lower arm member 630 with respect to the effect member 700 is offset by the excess length of the electrical wiring DK1 previously arranged inside the wiring guide member 714. I am trying to As a result, the displacement of the electric wire DK1 can be completed near the wire guide member 714, so that the displacement of the electric wire DK1 on the front side of the through hole 713 and inside the lower arm member 630 can be suppressed.

The shape of the inner surface of the wiring guide member 714 is formed in an arc shape centered on the electric wiring DK1 side. Thereby, the load that the electric wiring DK1 receives from the wiring guide member 714 can be reduced.

In addition, the shape portion of the lower arm member 630 in which the arc-shaped hole 634 is formed functions to guide the displacement of the electrical wiring DK1. For example, when the effect member 700 is displaced upward from the extended state of the enlargement/reduction unit 600 (see FIG. 67), the shape portion in which the arc-shaped hole 634 of the lower arm member 630 is formed is the electrical wiring DK1. DK1 can be pushed into the wiring guide member 714 side.

As a result, the electric wiring DK1 can be stably put in and taken out of the wiring guide member 714, and the state change of the enlargement/reduction unit 600 can be stably caused.

As shown in FIGS. 65 to 67, the auxiliary projections 712 arranged in the arc-shaped holes 634 arranged on the front side of the thin lid portion 636 and mostly hidden by the thin lid portion 636 are in an overhanging state. is arranged at a position visible from the rear (see FIG. 67).

The auxiliary protrusion 712 is a portion guided by the arc-shaped hole 634 and a fastening portion used for connecting the lower arm member 630 and the effect member 700 . Therefore, in order to assemble (or disassemble) the lower arm member 630 and the effect member 700, it is necessary to screw the fastening screw into (or remove) the auxiliary protrusion 712. FIG.

Therefore, in this embodiment, the state in which the lower arm member 630 and the effect member 700 are assembled (or disassembled) can be limited to the extended state of the enlargement/reduction unit 600 . As a result, assembly efficiency and maintenance efficiency can be improved. In addition, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation in which the production member 700 and other constituent members are damaged as a result of performing assembly or maintenance while the production member 700 is arranged in an incomplete position.

Next, the displacement (enlargement/reduction displacement) associated with the state change of the expansion/contraction displacement member 740 of the effect member 700 will be described. In this embodiment, the degree of expansion/contraction displacement of the effect member 700 is controlled so as to be variable depending on the arrangement of the effect member 700 .

68 is a front view of the scaling unit 600, and FIG. 69 is a rear view of the scaling unit 600. FIG. In FIGS. 68 and 69, illustration of the front cover member 610 is omitted for easy understanding.

FIGS. 68 and 69 illustrate a state in which the enlarging/reducing unit 600 is in the process of being lowered. As shown in FIGS. 68 and 69, in the midway down state of the scaling unit 600, the effect member 700 is not controlled to be enlarged and displaced until the expansion/contraction member 740 reaches its maximum diameter. It is controlled to allow expansion displacement.

In other words, the rotation angle of the rotary plate 730 is limited by shortening the drive time of the drive motor MT3 (see FIG. 53). Therefore, since it is possible to avoid the effect member 700 from becoming excessively large when viewed from the front, the allowable attitude change amount of the effect member 700 from the viewpoint of avoiding contact with the partitioning member 310 (see FIG. 22). can be increased.

At an intermediate position of the expansion displacement of the effect member 700, the decorative member 752 is partially covered with the shielding design member 760 (outer diameter side portion is covered). As for the arrangement of the decorative members 752 in a front view, the light transmitting member 752a is arranged at a position (gap position) not covered by the effect member 700, and the mirror surface member 752b is arranged at a position covered by the effect member 700, including the light transmitting member. 752a is arranged at a position other than the position where it is visually recognized.

As a result, it is possible to improve the visibility of the light emitted through the light transmitting member 752a from the LEDs or the like arranged on the electrical board 751 (see FIG. 53), and the light transmitting member 752a is transmitted through the light transmitting member 752a to provide a shielding design. By reflecting the light reflected on the back side of the member 760 by the mirror surface member 752b, the effect of the mirror surface member 752b can be improved.

For example, as an effect mode of the mirror surface member 752b, when light is not emitted from the LEDs of the electrical board 751 (see FIG. 53), the background color of the shielding design member 760 (red in this embodiment) is applied to the mirror surface member 752b. can be reflected and made visible to the player.

On the other hand, when light is emitted from the LEDs of the electrical board 751, the color reflected from the mirror surface member 752b is mixed with the color of the background of the shielding design member 760 and the color of the light emitted from the LEDs. can be any color. Therefore, the appearance of the mirror surface member 752b can be changed by the light passing through the portion other than the mirror surface member 752 (for example, the light transmitting member 752a).

Note that the control mode is not limited at all. For example, after the shielding design member 760 is stopped in the state shown in FIG. 68, it may be controlled to return to the assembled state, or the driving direction of the drive motor MT3 (see FIG. 53) may be changed from the state shown in FIG. The shielding design member 760 may be controlled to vibrate in the radial direction by switching between normal and reverse in small steps.

When controlling the shielding design member 760 to vibrate, the displacement of the shielding design member 760 can be further complicated. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 69, the position of the support protrusion 743a arranged at the tip of the second elongated member 743 of the telescopic displacement member 740 in the state of the enlarged displacement to the intermediate position is the position of the tip adjustment member. 744 and the intermediate position of the guide slot 744a. As a result, the distal end adjusting member 744 can be displaced in the longitudinal direction of the guide long hole 744a, so that the shielding design member 760 can be displaced not only in the radial direction but also in the circumferential direction.

While such a displacement is achievable, when the shielding design members 760 are collectively arranged or displaced to expand in the radial direction to the maximum, the support projection 743a arranged at the tip of the second long member 743 are placed at both end positions of the guide long hole 744a of the tip adjustment member 744, the circumferential arrangement of the shielding design member 760 can be returned (see FIGS. 58(b) and 59(b). ).

In addition, the midway position that is allowed as the expansion displacement of the effect member 700 is not limited to the position shown in FIG. 69, and can be set arbitrarily. For example, it may be a position slightly shifted from the collective arrangement state, or a position slightly before the position of maximum expansion displacement.

Here, in a state in which the extended plate portion 761 is enlarged and displaced to a position slightly deviated from the collective arrangement state (for example, a position where the extended plate portion 761 overlaps the shielding design member 760 arranged oppositely in a front view and is visually recognized), the extended plate Since the portion 761 fills the gap between the shielding design members 760, it is possible for the player to visually recognize that the collective arrangement state is maintained.

In this embodiment, a red reflective sheet is attached to the extension plate portion 761 in the same manner as the main body portion of the shielding design member 760, so the red color of the extension plate portion 761 is visible in the gap between the shielding design members 760. Even if the red color is the color of the extended plate portion 761 or the color of the shielding design member 760, it can be difficult to distinguish.

It should be noted that unlike the present embodiment, the effect member 700 is expanded and displaced to a position slightly displaced from the collective arrangement state by means such as painting the extension plate portion 761 with another color (for example, gold). The extension plate portion 761 that is visually recognized in the gap between the shielding design members 760 may be conspicuous.

Although the case where the light transmitting member 752a is made of a colorless and light transmitting resin material has been described in the present embodiment, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be formed from a red resin material.

In this case, even if the shielding design members 760 are displaced beyond the overlapping margin with the extended plate portion 761 from the collective arrangement state, the light transmitting members 752a visible in the gaps between the shielding design members 760 are shielded. Since it is visually recognized in red like the design member 760, it is possible for the player to visually recognize that the shielding design members 760 are at least partially connected to each other.

On the other hand, when light is emitted from the LEDs of the illumination board 751 (see FIG. 53), the light transmitting members 752a visible in the gaps between the shielding design members 760 can be made to emit light to make them stand out. It is possible to improve the production effect of.

70 is a front view of the scaling unit 600, and FIG. 71 is a rear view of the scaling unit 600. FIG. In FIGS. 70 and 71, illustration of the front cover member 610 is omitted for easy understanding.

70 and 71 show the extended state of the scaling unit 600 and the expanded state of the effect member 700. FIG. As shown in FIGS. 70 and 71, in the extended state of the scaling unit 600, the effect member 700 is controlled to be enlarged and displaceable until the expansion/contraction displacement member 740 is dispersed with the maximum diameter.

Therefore, the size of the effect member 700 when viewed from the front is maximized, and the allowable posture change amount of the effect member 700 is minimized from the viewpoint of avoiding contact with the partition member 310 (see FIG. 22). In addition, the device for suppressing the posture change of the effect member 700 is as described above.

In the expanded state of the production member 700, the shielding design member 760 is arranged to retreat from the decorative member 752 in front view. Therefore, it is possible to change the mode of reflection on the mirror surface member 752b when light is emitted from the LEDs of the illumination board 751 (see FIG. 53) to the case where the effect member 700 is arranged in the middle of the expansion displacement.

That is, it is possible to suppress the reflection of the background color of the shielding design member 760 and make it easier for the player to visually recognize the background color (silver in this embodiment) of the mirror surface member 752b. Therefore, even in a control mode in which light of the same color is continuously emitted from the LEDs of the decorative board 751 (see FIG. 53) when the elastic displacement member 740 is displaced and the shielding design member 760 is expanded and displaced, the decorative member 752 is visually recognized. It is possible to change the color of the light visually recognized by the player who plays the game in time series.

In more detail, for example, when white light is emitted from the electrical board 751, the background color (red) of the shielding design member 760 is visible near the start of enlargement, while the shielding design member changes with the displacement of the enlargement. The color of the character 760 is weakened (the range is narrowed), and the background color (silver) of the mirror surface member 752b becomes more visible at the end position of the expansion displacement. As a result, the color of the light visually recognized by the player can be changed without changing the color of the emitted light.

68 and 69 and the expansion displacements shown in FIGS. 70 and 71 do not occur continuously in this embodiment. , is controlled to execute the expansion displacement of the effect member 700 .

That is, the vertical displacement of the effect member 700 is controlled to be executable only when the effect member 700 is collectively arranged. This can prevent the shielding design member 760 from colliding with other components such as the hemispherical front device 613 (see FIG. 47).

In addition, after considering the avoidance of collisions with other constituent members, or by configuring so as not to cause problems in displacement due to collisions with other constituent members, the production member 700 is expanded and displaced in the middle of the vertical displacement. It may be controlled as much as possible.

The radial contraction displacement of the shielding design member 760 will be described with reference to FIGS. 72 to 75 . 72(a), 72(b), 73, 74(a), and 75(a) are rear views of the effect member 700 showing contraction displacement of the effect member 700 in chronological order. 74(b) is a top view of the effect member 700 as viewed in the direction of arrow LXXIVb in FIG. 74(a), and FIG. 75(b) is a top view of the effect member 700 as viewed in the direction of arrow LXXVb in FIG. 75(a). It is a diagram.

In FIGS. 72(a), 72(b), 73, 74(a), and 75(a), illustration of the plate-like main body 710 is omitted for ease of understanding, and FIG. , the rotating plate 730 rotates counterclockwise in rear view. In FIGS. 74(b) and 75(b), the illustration of the rotating plate 730b is further omitted.

FIG. 72(a) shows a state in which the shielding design members 760 of the production member 700 are dispersed with the maximum diameter (see FIGS. 70 and 71), and FIG. 72(b) shows the shielding design members 760 of the production member 700 A state of being expanded and displaced to the halfway position (see FIGS. 68 and 69) is illustrated.

In the state shown in FIG. 72(a), the transmitted projection 741a of the expansion/contraction displacement member 740 is arranged at the boundary between the small-diameter arc portion 733a and the connecting portion 733c of the rotary plate 730, and in the state shown in FIG. , the transmitted projection 741 a of the expansion/contraction displacement member 740 is arranged in the middle of the connecting portion 733 c of the rotary plate 730 .

FIG. 73 shows a state in which the first guided protrusion 743b of the telescopic displacement member 740 arranged on the lower side starts contacting the back-side claw portion 734a of the rotating plate 730, and FIG. The first guided protrusion 743b of the telescopic displacement member 740 is guided by the back-side claw 734a of the rotating plate 730 and reaches the position just before the collective arrangement state.

Due to the difference in the influence of gravity between the members arranged on the upper side and the members arranged on the lower side, the displacement modes of the telescopic displacement member 740 and the shielding design member 760 are arranged on the members arranged on the upper side and the members arranged on the lower side. It differs depending on the material.

As shown in FIG. 73, the telescopic displacement member 740 and the shielding design member 760 arranged on the upper side are arranged close to the rotating plate 730 by their own weight, and the telescopic displacement member 740 arranged on the lower side is rotated by its own weight. Since it acts in the direction away from the plate 730, it hangs down in the direction away from the rotating plate 730 to the extent allowed by the gap between the guide hole 733 and the transmitted projection 741a.

This hanging portion is lifted by the load from the extended claw portion 734 of the rotating plate 730, and the lower telescopic displacement member 740 and the shielding design member 760 reach the collectively arranged position. Therefore, the five shielding design members 760 do not arrive at the collective arrangement state at the same time, and at least the upper three are earlier than the lower two.

As a result, the production members 700 can be stably displaced to the collective arrangement state. That is, when the lower telescopic displacement member 740 and the shielding design member 760 are arranged first, the upper telescopic displacement member 740 and the shielding design member 760 vigorously reach the collectively arranged state, whereby the lower telescopic displacement member is arranged. 740 and the shielding design member 760, fatigue accumulates in the lower expansion/contraction displacement member 740 and the shielding design member 760, which may cause premature failure.

On the other hand, when the upper elastic displacement member 740 and the shielding design member 760 are arranged first as in the present embodiment, and then the lower elastic displacement member 740 and the shielding design member 760 are arranged in a collective arrangement state. Since its own weight is generated in a direction against the displacement of the lower telescopic displacement member 740 and the shielding design member 760, the momentum of colliding with the upper telescopic displacement member 740 and the shielding design member 760 can be suppressed. As a result, it is possible to suppress the accumulation of fatigue caused by collision between the elastic displacement member 740 and the shielding design member 760 .

In FIG. 74, the transmitted protrusion 741a of the expansion/contraction displacement member 740 is arranged at the boundary between the large-diameter arc portion 733b of the rotating plate 730 and the connecting portion 733c. Immediately after this, the expansion/contraction displacement member 740 is fully pushed by the back side claw portion 734a, and is brought into a collective arrangement state. On the other hand, the second guided projection 744b of the distal end adjusting member 744 is arranged apart from the front claw 734b.

In FIG. 75 , a collective arrangement state of the effect members 700 is illustrated. That is, the figure shows a state in which the rotary plate 730 is rotated counterclockwise in rear view to the end position where the columnar projecting portion 728 of the function plate portion 720 is arranged at the end portion of the arc-shaped hole 732 of the rotary plate 730 .

FIG. 76 is a cross-sectional view of the effect member 700 along line LXXVI-LXXVI of FIG. As shown in FIG. 76, when the production member 700 is collectively arranged, the central axis side surface of the rear claw portion 734a abuts against the first guided projection 743b of the expansion/contraction member 740, and the diameter of the expansion/contraction member 740 increases. Directionally outward displacement is restricted.

In addition, the central axis side surface of the front claw portion 734b abuts against the second guided protrusion 744b of the telescopic displacement member 740, and the radially outward displacement of the telescopic displacement member 740 is restricted. At this time, the second guided protrusion 744b and the first guided protrusion 743b are brought into contact with each other in the radial direction with a front-to-rear width in the projecting direction. You can stabilize your posture.

Furthermore, the front surface of the distal end adjustment member 744 is configured to be slidable on the rear surface of the extension plate portion 726 .
During this sliding process, the projecting tip of the second guided protrusion 744b of the telescopic displacement member 740 abuts on the inclined surface 734c of the rotary plate 730 in the front-rear direction, and the inclined surface 734c is inclined in the rotational direction. (The closer it is to the collectively arranged state, the more it is inclined in such a manner that it protrudes toward the front side.) Therefore, the inclined surface 734c can apply a load toward the front side to the second guided projection 744b.

As a result, in the configuration in which the distal end adjusting member 744 is sandwiched between the extended plate portion 726 of the functional plate portion 720 and the inclined surface 734c of the rotating plate 730, as the rotating plate 730 rotates and the effect members 700 approach the collective arrangement state, the leading end The distal end adjusting member 744 can be displaced toward the front side in such a manner that the adjusting member 744 is gradually brought into close contact with the extension plate portion 726 .

Therefore, while preventing excessive increase in the resistance caused by the rotation of the rotating plate 730, the front-rear direction position and posture of the front-rear adjustment member 744 are gradually increased. can be stabilized, the longitudinal position and posture of the shielding design member 760 can be stabilized, and the shielding design member 760 can be arranged in close contact without gaps in the collective arrangement state.

With reference to FIGS. 74(b) and 75(b), the fact that the load applied to the second guided protrusion 744b can correct the posture inclination of the shielding design member 760 will be described. All of the shielding design members 760 have a common configuration, and the telescopic displacement member 740 that displaces the shielding design members 760 also has a common configuration.

As described above, the shielding design member 760 is located on the side where the extended plate portion 761 (see FIG. 59(a)) is formed in the width direction (the right side in the case of the shielding design member 760 arranged at the top, FIG. (b)) is arranged on the rear side compared to the opposite side so that the posture can be easily inclined.

This is due to the form of the second elongated member 743, and this attitude inclination also occurs in the distal end adjusting member 744 to which the shielding design member 760 is fastened and fixed. Due to the inclination of the attitude of the tip adjusting member 744, the tip position of the second guided protrusion 744b is located on the rear surface compared to the tip position of the first guided protrusion 743b (the protrusion direction is along the front-rear direction). The position tends to shift in the clockwise direction (to the left in the case of the shielding design member 760 arranged at the top, see FIG. 74(b)).

On the other hand, the rotating plate 730 has the extended claw portion 734 arranged to face the second guided protrusion 744b in the clockwise direction in the rear view, and is arranged to face the second guided protrusion 744b in the counterclockwise direction in the rear view. It rotates and displaces so that a load can be applied.

That is, for example, when the inner diameter side surface of the front claw portion 734b and the front side surface of the inclined surface 734c (see FIGS. 56 and 57) contact the second guided protrusion 744b, the second guided protrusion 744b Since the tip position can be returned to the counterclockwise direction side in rear view, the degree of inclination of the postures of the tip adjustment member 744 and the shielding design member 760 can be relaxed (the inclination can be eliminated). As a result, it is possible to easily eliminate the attitude inclination of the shielding design member 760 at the collective arrangement position of the effect members 700 .

The load applied to the second guided protrusion 744b is configured to occur from the state shown in FIG. 74 to the state shown in FIG. Therefore, in the process of changing the state of the production member 700 shown in chronological order from FIG. 72 to FIG. 75, until the shielding design member 760 is arranged at the small diameter side end (reduction side end) of the displacement allowable range (see FIG. 74). , the posture inclinations of the distal end adjusting member 744 and the shielding design member 760 are maintained, and then the posture change to eliminate (correct) the posture inclinations of the distal end adjusting member 744 and the shielding design member 760 can be caused.

In other words, while the shielding design members 760 approach each other, by maintaining the attitude inclination of the tip adjustment member 744 and the shielding design member 760, the body portion of the shielding design member 760 and the extended plate portion 761 come into contact (collision). ), on the other hand, after the shielding design members 760 have come close to each other, the attitude inclination of the tip adjustment member 744 and the shielding design member 760 can be eliminated (corrected), so that the shielding design member The plate portion arranged in the forefront of the shielding design members 760 can be arranged flush with each other, and a sense of unity of the shielding design members 760 in the collectively arranged state can be easily produced.

The state shown in FIG. 74(b) is illustrated as a state in which the posture deviation of the shielding design member 760 is maximized. In addition, the posture deviation on the opposite side of the posture deviation shown in FIG. This makes it easier to avoid the extension plate portion 761 from colliding with the main body portion of the shielding design member 760 arranged to face it.

Further, an auxiliary protrusion 727 (see FIG. 54) arranged on the opposite side of the extended plate portion 726 is configured to be able to come into contact with the contraction side wall portion of the distal end adjustment member 744 during expansion/contraction displacement. Since a pair of auxiliary projections 727 are formed on the left and right sides of the extension plate portion 726, the tip adjustment member 744 is moved by contacting the left and right ends of the tip adjustment member 744 that have reached the contraction side ends of the displacement range. Posture deviation can be corrected.

As a result, it is possible not only to correct the posture by engaging with another shielding design member 760, but also to stabilize the posture when the distal end adjusting member 744 reaches the contraction side end of the displacement range by itself. can.

Returning to FIG. 5 and FIG. 6, description will be made. In this embodiment, in addition to the third symbol display device 81, the above-described shooting effect unit 300, enlargement/reduction unit 600, and displacement/rotation unit 800 are provided as effect devices for livening up the game. Next, the displacement/rotation unit 800 will be described.

Since the displacement/rotation unit 800 is a pair of units arranged symmetrically and configured to have symmetrical shapes, the configuration of the displacement/rotation unit 800 on the left side will be described below, and the explanation of the displacement/rotation unit 800 on the right side will be described below. omitted. Note that FIG. 5 will be referred to as needed in the following description.

77 is a front perspective view of the displacement rotation unit 800, and FIG. 78 is a rear perspective view of the displacement rotation unit 800. FIG. 77 and 78 show the effect standby state of the displacement rotation unit 800. FIG.

79 is a front exploded perspective view of the displacement rotation unit 800, and FIG. 80 is a rear exploded perspective view of the displacement rotation unit 800. FIG. 79 and 80, the lateral slide member 840 is shown in an assembled state.

As shown in FIGS. 79 and 80, the displacement/rotation unit 800 includes a base plate portion 810 fastened and fixed to the bottom wall portion 511 of the rear case 510, and a metal plate portion fixed to the base plate portion 810 with a member such as a screw. A rod MB2, a vertical slide member 820 configured to be vertically slidable through which the metal rod MB2 is inserted, and a drive fastened and fixed to the rear side of the vertical slide member 820 and fastened and fixed to the base plate portion 810. A transmission member 830 configured to transmit the driving force of the motor MT4, a metal rod MB3 fixed to the vertical slide member 820 with a member such as a screw, and a configuration in which the metal rod MB3 is inserted and slidable in the left-right direction. a transmission means 860 configured to transmit the driving force of the drive motor MT4 to the horizontal slide member 840 via the vertical slide member 820 as the vertical slide member 820 is displaced in the vertical direction; A wiring arm member 870 fastened and fixed to the vertical slide member 820 so as to be rotatably displaceable at the upper end position of the vertical slide member 820 on the side of the metal rod MB2, and a wiring guide member 880 for guiding the wiring arm member 870 and the electric wiring. .

The base plate portion 810 includes a pair of both end fixing portions 811 on which the metal rod MB2 is arranged, a slide guide portion 812 formed so as to be able to guide the transmission member 830 arranged on the front side, and a long length on the back side. A transmission guide portion 813 formed in a groove shape so as to be able to guide the columnar protrusion 862b of the transmission means 860, a drive motor MT4 fastened and fixed to the back side, and a rack member 862 guided by the transmission guide portion 813. and a fall prevention plate 814 arranged on the rear side to prevent the falling of the device.

The vertical slide member 820 includes a flat plate portion 821, a wall portion 822 extending from the edge of the flat plate portion 821 toward the rear side, and a circular portion extending from a substantially central position of an area surrounded by the wall portion 822 toward the rear side. A cylindrical protrusion 823 protruding in a columnar shape, omission portions 824a and 824b having a size that allows insertion of a connector portion of an electrical wiring and omitting the formation of a wall portion, and the left end portion of the plane plate portion 821 A pair of upper and lower metal rod insertion portions 825 formed in a cylindrical shape (or a cylindrical member is disposed) through which the metal rod MB2 can be inserted, and a normal plate portion 821 at the upper and lower central portions of the plane plate portion 821 through which the metal rod MB3 can be inserted. A pair of left and right metal rod insertion portions 826 formed (or a cylindrical member is disposed) on the left and right, and near the ends of the metal rod insertion portions 826, are fastened and fixed to the flat plate portion 821 to prevent the metal rod MB3 from falling off. a support portion 828 formed in a columnar shape projecting from the back side of the plane plate portion 821 and capable of supporting a two-stage pinion 861; and a support protrusion 829 that protrudes cylindrically toward the left side of FIG. 79).

The wall portion 822 is a portion for ensuring the durability of the electrical wiring by structuring inside a region in which the electrical wiring disposed between the wiring arm member 870 and the lateral slide member 840 can be displaced.
The omission portions 824a and 824b formed as discontinuous portions of the wall portion 822 are composed of a first omission portion 824a formed as an opening and a second omission portion 824b formed as a concave portion opened to the rear side.

The metal rod insertion portion 825 extends in a plate shape from the upper side thereof toward the rear side, and the upper detection sensor SC8 and the lower detection sensor SC8 are fastened and fixed to the base member 810 in a posture in which the detection groove faces the front side of the base member 810. A detection target plate portion 825a configured to be arranged in the detection groove of the sensor SC9 is provided.

The transmission member 830 includes a main body portion 831 formed in a plate shape elongated in the vertical direction, and a female screw formed at the tip of a columnar protrusion 823 of the vertical slide member 820 on the upper side of the main body portion 831 . An insertion hole 832 that is formed so that a fastening screw that can be screwed into it can be inserted, and a plate portion in which the insertion hole 832 is drilled. A lid-shaped portion 833 that covers from the side, and a linear gear portion 834 in which gear teeth are linearly formed in the vertical direction on the left side surface of the main body portion 831 are provided.

The columnar protrusion 823 has both a role as a portion into which the fastening screw inserted through the insertion hole 832 is screwed, and a role as a winding center of the electrical wiring, as will be described later.

The linear gear portion 834 meshes with the drive gear MG4 of the drive motor MT4. That is, the transmission member 830 is vertically displaced as the drive motor MT4 is controlled to rotate. As a result, the vertical slide member 820 is vertically displaced.

81 is an exploded front perspective view of the lateral slide member 840, and FIG. 82 is an exploded rear perspective view of the lateral slide member 840. FIG. As shown in FIGS. 81 and 82, the horizontal slide member 840 includes a body plate member 841 formed in a substantially circular plate shape through which a metal rod MB3 is inserted and whose lateral displacement is restricted, and a rear surface of the body plate portion 841. A wiring guide member 844 that is fastened and fixed to the upper part of the side and constitutes a guide path for electric wiring, a circular member 847 arranged on the front side of the main body plate member 841 and formed in a circular plate shape when viewed from the front, and the circular member 847. and the main body plate member 841, an annular decorative member 853 fastened and fixed to the front side of the circular member 847, and the circular member 847 via a cylindrical collar member C8. and an intermediary member 857 fitted from the front side into the opening of the wing-like member 854 in order to match the central opening diameter of the wing-like member 854 with the opening diameter of the collar member C8. , and a central design member 858 in which a columnar member having an outer diameter that can be inserted into the central opening of the intermediary member 857 protrudes from the rear side.

The main body plate member 841 has a rod arrangement portion 842 in which the drive motor MT5 is fastened and fixed on the back side, the drive gear MG5 is arranged on the front side, and the metal rod MB3 is arranged. and a rack gear portion 843 in which gear teeth are engraved along the left-right direction.

The wiring guide member 844 is a member for guiding lateral displacement of the electrical wiring, and is formed in a shape that allows the electrical wiring to bypass. As a result, it is possible to prevent the electrical wiring from rubbing against other components, which will be described later in detail.

The circular member 847 is made of a light-transmitting resin material, and is configured such that a wing-like member 854 and the drive gear MG5 which are formed to be able to mesh with each other are assembled from front and back directions different from each other.

The circular member 847 includes a cup-shaped receiving portion 848 of a size capable of receiving the feather-shaped member 854 and recessed toward the rear side, and a cylindrically protruding portion from the center of the receiving portion 848 toward the front side. and a cylindrical protrusion 849 that is

The receiving portion 848 has a through-hole portion 848a which is formed so as to have a shape that overlaps with the cylindrical column centered on the drive shaft of the drive motor MT5. Exposed to a position visible from the back.

In this manner, the exposed portion of the gear portion 855 can mesh with the drive gear MG5, and the drive motor MT5 rotates, thereby transmitting the drive force and controlling the rotation of the vane member 854. FIG. Rotational driving of the vane member 854 is possible regardless of the state of the displacement/rotation unit 800 . That is, the shape of the wall portion 882a of the path forming member 882 is designed so that it is possible even in the waiting state for the effect.

The cylindrical protrusion 849 has a linear notch 849a at its tip. This is a shaped portion for facilitating maintenance of the posture of the central design member 858 by arranging the radially protruding portion 858b of the central design member 858, the details of which will be described later.

83 is a partial cross-sectional view of displacement rotation unit 800 taken along line LXXXIII-LXXXIII in FIG. In the description of FIG. 83, FIGS. 81 and 82 are referred to as appropriate.

The electrical decoration board 850 includes a circular opening with an inner diameter slightly larger than the outer diameter of the receiving portion 848 of the circular member 847, an elongated opening extending upward, and a deformed opening 851 formed by the deformed opening. A front side light emitting means 852a composed of a plurality of LEDs etc. arranged on the front side near the opening 851, and a plurality of LEDs etc. and a rear side light emitting means 852b.

The deformed opening 851 allows the receiving portion 848 of the circular member 847 to be arranged inside the opening, and the gear portion 855 of the feather member 854 is arranged on the rear side of the deformed opening 851 in the assembled state.

The elongated hole portion extending upward from the deformed opening 851 is formed for the purpose of avoiding contact with the rotation shaft of the drive gear MG5. As a result, the driving gear MG5 can be brought closer to the electrical board 850, and the gear portion 855 of the feather-shaped member 854 can be easily meshed with the driving gear MG5.

The front side light emitting means 852a is composed of an LED or the like whose optical axis faces the front-rear direction. As a result, the light can be emitted to the front side along the arrow D8a in the vicinity of the rotation axis of the feather member 854 .

The rear side light emitting means 852b is composed of an LED or the like whose optical axis faces radially outward. As a result, light can be emitted toward the outer diameter side of the circular member 847 along the arrow D8b.
By reflecting (refracting) this light to the front side by the uneven shape formed on the back surface of the circular member 847 , the light can travel to the front side at a position far from the rotation axis of the feather member 854 . In addition, in this embodiment, since a plurality of elongated concave-convex shapes formed along arcs concentric with the rotational axis of the feather-shaped member 854 are densely formed on the back surface of the circular member 847, the player can In contrast, arc-shaped (or circular) light can be visually recognized when viewed from the front.

That is, according to the present embodiment, even if the front side of the electrical board 850 is not arranged with an LED or the like whose optical axis is oriented in the front-rear direction at a position far from the rotation axis of the feather-shaped member 854, the player can The position at which light is visually recognized can be moved radially outward. In other words, while using the electrical board 850 having a smaller diameter than the outermost diameter of the wing-shaped member 854, the outer side of the surface on which the electrical board 850 is formed, that is, the outermost diameter of the wing-shaped member 854, is used. , the light can be seen (see FIG. 14).

As a result, even without increasing the size of the electrical board 850, it is possible to perform an effect in which light is visually recognized radially outward of the feather-shaped member 854. FIG. In this embodiment, as will be described later, when the wing-shaped member 854 rotates at high speed, the rear side of the wing-shaped member 854 becomes a shadow, and there is a possibility that it may be difficult to effectively perform the lighting effect in this range. . In order to solve this problem, it is considered effective to irradiate the light from the outside in the radial direction of the rotational locus of the vane member 854, but this requires increasing the layout area of the LEDs and the like. In other words, it is necessary to increase the area of the electrical board, which increases the manufacturing cost of the board.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, while maintaining the size of the electrical board 850 smaller than the rotational locus of the wing-shaped member 854, only the visible position of the light is positioned radially outward from the rotational trajectory of the wing-shaped member 854. can be displaced. As a result, the effect of the lighting effect can be improved without increasing the manufacturing cost.

Returning to FIGS. 81 and 82, description will be made. The decorative member 853 is a member that is formed from a light-impermeable resin material and that is coaxially fastened to the front side of the circular member 847 . Therefore, since the light passing through the circular member 847 is separated by the decorative member 853, it is possible to effectively perform an effect in which the appearance of the light is changed between the inner side and the outer side of the decorative member 853 as a boundary.

For example, blue light is emitted from the front side light emitting means 852a while red light is emitted from the rear side light emitting means 852b. can be clearly separated by the decorative member 853 .

The feather-like member 854 is made of a light-transmitting resin material, and has a circular opening 854a formed in the central portion in the front-rear direction, and radially outwardly extending at equal intervals in the circumferential direction around the circular opening 854a. a gear portion 855 formed in a gear shape coaxial with the circular opening 854a on the back side; and a plurality of recessed portions 856 recessed on the back side at an intermediate position between the adjacent blade portions 854b. And prepare.

The circular opening 854a is formed with an inner diameter slightly longer than the outer diameter of the collar member C8.

The wing-shaped member 854 is configured to be rotatable via a drive gear MG5 that is rotationally driven by the drive motor MT5. The attitude of the vane member 854 is controlled depending on the length of the driving time. In this configuration, the wing-shaped member 854 is configured so that the rotation axis and the center of gravity are aligned, and by minimizing idling after de-energization of the drive motor MT5, the drive motor MT5 It is possible to reduce the deviation between the attitude of the wing-shaped member 854 assumed by the driving time of , and the actual attitude of the wing-shaped member 854 . It should be noted that the orientation of the vane member 854 may be detectable by configuring the drive motor MT5 with a stepping motor.

The intermediary member 857 is formed so as to be fitted into the front opening of the circular opening 854 a , and the inner diameter of the opening 857 a is slightly longer than the outer diameter of the cylindrical protrusion 849 of the circular member 847 . Thereby, the intermediary member 857 can be rotatable around the cylindrical protrusion 849 .

The central design member 858 includes a central projection 858a projecting from the central portion toward the back side in a cylindrical shape, a radially projecting portion 858b projecting radially outward from the central projection 858a, and a circular body portion. and a design projected streak portion 858c projecting upward from the .

The central protrusion 858a is a portion that is inserted into the cylindrical protrusion 849 in such a manner that the radial protrusion 858b is inserted into the notch 849a. The central design member 858 is fastened and fixed to the circular member 847 by screwing the inserted fastening screw.

In addition to functioning as a design portion, the design rib portion 858 c can also function to abut against the wing-shaped member 854 and adjust the rotation mode of the wing-shaped member 854 . That is, when the rear surface of the design projection 858c and the front surface of the wing-shaped member 854 are arranged close to each other to such an extent that they rub against each other, the stop posture of the wing-shaped member 854 is stabilized by utilizing the increase in resistance caused by this rubbing. can be planned.

As a result, the drive control mode of the feather-shaped member 854 is a drive mode in which the rotation continues for a long period of time, and a drive mode in which the rotation of about one rotation occurs intermittently (an irregular operation at the beginning of rotation is produced). drive mode), it is possible to stabilize the intermittent stop posture of the feather member 854 in the latter drive mode.

Returning to FIGS. 79 and 80, description will be made. The transmission means 860 meshes with a two-stage pinion 861 rotatably supported by the vertical slide member 820 and a small-diameter pinion 861a of the two-stage pinion 861, and is supported by the vertical slide member 820 so as to be slidable in the left-right direction. and a drop prevention member 863 that prevents the rack member 862 from dropping from the vertical slide member 820 .

The two-stage pinion 861 is formed as a small-diameter pinion 861a that meshes with the gear teeth of the rack member 862 and a pinion that has a longer pitch radius than the small-diameter pinion 861a. The small pinion 861a and the large pinion 861b are integrally formed.

The rack member 862 is formed to be long in the left and right direction, and has a gear portion 862a formed as a rack gear that can mesh with the small-diameter pinion 861a of the two-stage pinion 861. A columnar protrusion 862b that protrudes in a columnar shape from the end toward the front side.

In the present embodiment, the gear teeth of the gear portion 862a of the rack member 862 and the gear teeth of the rack gear portion 843 of the lateral slide member 840 are configured with gear teeth of the same shape, and the pitch circle radius of the small diameter pinion 861a , and the pitch circle radius of the large-diameter pinion 861b is designed to be 9:16. Therefore, the ratio of the amount of lateral displacement of the rack member 862 and the amount of lateral displacement of the lateral slide member 840 is maintained at 9:16.

The columnar protrusion 862b has an outer diameter that allows it to be placed inside the transmission guide portion 813 of the base member 810 . In addition, the plate thickness of the rack member 862 on the side where the columnar projection 862b is formed is such that when the columnar projection 862b is arranged in the transmission guide portion 813, the rear side end portion of the rack member 862 is prevented from falling off. The thickness of the plate is such that the columnar projection 862b does not fall off the transmission guide portion 813 even if the plate 814 is brought into contact with the rear surface side.

This can prevent the rack member 862 from falling off from the transmission guide portion 813 when the fall prevention plate 814 is in the assembled state.

In the present embodiment, the gear teeth of the gear portion 862a and the gear teeth of the rack gear portion 843 of the horizontal slide member 840 are formed as gear teeth of the same shape, so that the displacement amount of the rack member 862 is larger than that of the small-diameter pinion 861a. The lateral slide member 840 is laterally displaced by a displacement amount calculated by multiplying the gear ratio with the radial pinion 861b.

Therefore, the amount of displacement of the lateral slide member 840 can be increased compared to the amount of displacement of the rack member 862 . As a result, it is possible to ensure a large lateral displacement width of the lateral slide member 840 while keeping the lateral width of the transmission guide portion 813 small, which will be described later in detail.

84 is a perspective view of the wiring arm member 870, and FIG. 85 is a perspective view of the path forming member 882 of the wiring guide member 880. FIG. 79 and 80 will be referred to in the description of FIGS. 84 and 85 as appropriate.

As shown in FIG. 84, the wiring arm member 870 is a long member made of a resin material. A circular support hole 872 is drilled at one end in the longitudinal direction of the wire, and a wire placement hole 873 is placed close to the support hole 872 and drilled in the same direction so that electrical wires can be placed. , a plurality of claw portions 874 extending from one wall portion toward the other wall portion at the open side end portion of the long main body portion 871, and a resin mold for forming the claw portions 874 can be removed. and a circular projecting portion 876 projecting in parallel with the axial direction of the support hole 872 from near the other end of the long body portion 871 in the longitudinal direction.

The long body portion 871 is a portion where the electric wiring guided to the open side portion through the wiring arrangement hole 873 is arranged, and has a constricted portion 871a having a reduced width length in the intermediate portion thereof. The electric wiring is arranged along the longitudinal direction of the elongated body portion 871 and guided to the outside from the other end portion (the end portion opposite to the side where the support hole 872 is formed) in the elongated direction.

The constricted portion 871a functions as a portion that loosely sandwiches the electrical wiring arranged on the open side of the long body portion 871 to the extent that disconnection does not occur, and prevents the arrangement of the electrical wiring from being excessively shifted. The narrowed portion 871a can prevent the electrical wiring arranged on the open side portion of the long main body portion 871 from being displaced beyond the narrowed portion 871a.

The support hole 872 is formed with a size that allows the support protrusion 829 of the vertical slide member 820 (see FIG. 79) to be inserted thereinto, so that the wiring arm member 870 is rotatably supported by the vertical slide portion 820 .

The wiring arrangement hole 873 is a through hole through which the electric wiring arranged on the wiring arm member 870 passes when passing over to the vertical slide member 820 . In the present embodiment, since the wire placement hole 873 is arranged close to the support hole 872, the positional deviation amount of the wire placement hole 873 when the wire arm member 870 rotates can be reduced. As a result, the load applied to the electrical wiring due to the rotation of the wiring arm member 870 can be reduced.

The claw portion 874 prevents the electrical wiring arranged in a mode of being housed in the open portion side of the long main body portion 871 from falling off from the long main body portion 871 . In addition, since the through-hole 875 with a minimum area secures the space for extracting the resin mold required for forming the claw portion 874, the electrical wiring can It is possible to prevent it from slipping out from the side (the side where the through hole 875 is formed in this embodiment).

The circular projecting portion 876 is formed with an outer diameter and projecting length that can be placed in the guide recess 886 of the wiring guide portion 880 (see FIG. 79). In this embodiment, the guide recess 886 of the wire guide portion 880 is designed from the viewpoint of appropriately causing the displacement of the wire arm member 870 .

As shown in FIG. 79, the wiring guide member 880 comprises a prevention plate 881 for preventing the wiring arm member 870 from falling off from the guide recess 886, and the prevention plate 881 is fastened and fixed to form an internal path. and a passage forming member 882 that is fastened and secured to the base member 810 .

As shown in FIG. 85, the path forming member 882 is formed in the shape of a box with one side open, and a prevention plate 881 is fastened and fixed to the open portion so that the path forming member 882 is opened to the rear side at a vertically spaced position. A path through the upper opening 883 and the lower opening 884 is formed.

That is, the path forming member 882 has a wall portion 882a projecting to one side at the edge, and an upper opening portion 883 that forms an upper opening portion of the path by missing the wall portion 882a, and the lower end of the path forming member 882. A lower opening portion 884 drilled in the wall portion 882a with a size that enables insertion of a connector of an electrical wiring, and a portion extending from the wall portion 882a toward the upper opening portion 883 within a range not overlapping the prevention plate 881 when viewed in the left-right direction. An extension part 885 that extends, a guide recess 886 that is recessed in a long groove shape in a range that does not overlap with the extension part 885 when viewed in the left-right direction, and a lower edge of the guide recess 886 A columnar projecting portion 887 is provided so as to protrude on the side of the prevention plate 881 , and into which a fastening screw inserted through the prevention plate 881 is screwed into a female screw formed at the tip.

A space in which the vertical slide member 820 can be displaced in the vertical direction is formed on the back side of the path forming member 882, and the horizontal slide member 840, which is displaced in the horizontal direction along with the displacement, has a wall portion 882a that is closest to the front side. At the position where it is arranged (the position near the lower end of displacement), it enters the rear side of the wall portion 882a (see FIG. 86(a)).

That is, the lateral slide member 840 is arranged on the rear side of the wiring guide member 880 forming the route along which the electric wiring is guided at a position near the lower end of displacement. As a result, it is possible to prevent the electrical wiring from coming into contact with or rubbing against the horizontal sliding member 840 while allowing the electrical wiring and the horizontal sliding member 840 to overlap each other in the front view.

In the assembled state, the wiring arm member 870 is guided along the path of the wiring guide member 880 through the upper opening 883 . and is regulated by the prevention plate 881 . Furthermore, the widthwise length of the path of the wiring guide member 880 is designed to be shorter than the sum of the widthwise lengths of the long main body portion 871 of the wiring arm member 870 and the circular projecting portion 876 . As a result, it is possible to prevent the circular protrusion 876 of the wiring arm member 870 from falling out of the guide recess 886 in the assembled state.

The lower open portion 884 functions as a wire through hole through which an electrical wire arranged so as to be wound around the columnar projecting portion 887 is passed to the rear side.

The guide recess 886 includes a front vertical recess 886a extending vertically upward from the lower end, a rear vertical recess 886b extending vertically downward from the upper end, and a connecting recess 886c connecting the lower end of the rear vertical recess 886b and the upper end of the front vertical recess 886a. and

The columnar projecting portion 887 has a role of a restricting portion that restricts the displacement of the electrical wiring and a role of a fastening portion for fixing the prevention plate 881 to the path forming member 882 .

With reference to FIGS. 86 to 89, the displacement mode of displacement/rotation unit 800 will be described.
FIGS. 86 to 89 show how the displacing/rotating unit 800 changes state from the waiting state for presentation to the upper end state for presentation in chronological order.

86(a) is a side view of the displacement/rotation unit 800 as viewed in the direction of arrow L in FIG. 77, and FIG. 86(b) is a sectional view of the displacement/rotation unit 800 taken along line LXXXVIb-LXXXVIb of FIG. 86(a). 87(a) is a side view of the displacement/rotation unit 800 as viewed in the direction of arrow L in FIG. 77, and FIG. 87(b) is a side view of the displacement/rotation unit 800 along line LXXXVIIb-LXXXVIIb of FIG. 87(a). 88(a) is a side view of the displacement/rotation unit 800 viewed in the direction of arrow L in FIG. 77, and FIG. 88(b) is a displacement along line LXXXVIIIb-LXXXVIIIb in FIG. 88(a). FIG. 89(a) is a cross-sectional view of the rotation unit 800, FIG. 89(a) is a side view of the displacement/rotation unit 800 viewed in the direction of arrow L in FIG. 77, and FIG. 89(b) is LXXXIXb-LXXXIXb in FIG. 89(a). 8 is a cross-sectional view of the displacement rotation unit 800 along the line; FIG.

In FIG. 86, the displacement and rotation unit 800 is shown in a waiting state for effect. In FIG. 88, the vertical slide member 820 is arranged at an intermediate position between the middle right end state and the upper end state of the effect, and the horizontal slide member 840 is arranged between the middle right end state and the upper end state of the effect. In FIG. 89, the upper end state of the production of the displacement rotation unit 800 is shown.

In FIGS. 86(a), 87(a), 88(a) and 89(a), for ease of understanding, the wire guide member 880 includes a wall portion 882a, a guide recess 886 and a cylindrical projecting portion. The wiring arm member 870 and the horizontal slide member 840 can be visually recognized by omitting the illustration of the other shaped portions while the outer shape of the portion 887 is shown in imaginary lines. In addition, by partially breaking the shape portion near the upper end of the base plate 810, the vertical slide member 820 is prevented from being hidden during vertical displacement.

In FIGS. 86(b), 87(b), 88(b) and 89(b), the shape line of the transmission guide portion 813 of the base member 810 is illustrated by imaginary lines. A circular imaginary line along the outer shape of the body plate member 841 is shown for the purpose of showing only the horizontal displacement width.

86 to 89, imaginary lines illustrate how the electrical wiring DK2 connected to the drive motor MT5 is displaced according to the state change of the displacement/rotation unit 800. FIG. The electric wiring DK2 is guided into the wiring guide member 880 from the lower opening 884 (see FIG. 85) of the wiring guide member 880, passes through the wiring arm member 870, and then reaches the wall portion 822 of the vertical slide member 820. It is guided through the enclosed space to the lateral slide member 840, the details of the displacement of which will be described later.

The displacement/rotation unit 800 is configured such that the vertical slide member 820 can be vertically reciprocated. First, the upward displacement of the vertical slide member 820 and the horizontal slide member 840 will be described.

In this embodiment, the vertical slide member 820 is arranged at the lower end position in the vertical direction (see FIG. 86). In the effect standby state, the plate portion 825a to be detected of the vertical slide member 820 is arranged in the detection groove of the lower detection sensor SC9, so that the displacing rotation unit 800 is in the effect standby state by the output of the lower detection sensor SC9. The MPU 221 (see FIG. 4) can determine that.

In addition, in the performance standby state, the horizontal slide member 840 is arranged at the left end (left and right outer ends) of the displacement path, while the lower end side of the wiring arm member 870 is arranged at the front side. That is, by arranging the wiring arm member 870 on the front side so as to retreat from the displacement trajectory of the horizontal slide member 840, the horizontal displacement of the horizontal slide member 840 is prevented from being restricted by the horizontal position of the wiring arm member 870. can do. Therefore, the lateral slide member 840 can be displaced fully to the left and right outer sides.

The state in which the driving motor MT4 is driven and controlled in the direction of upwardly displacing the vertical slide member 820 from the effect standby state, and the detection plate portion 825a is arranged in the upper detection sensor SC8 corresponds to the middle right end state (see FIG. 87). ). Therefore, the MPU 221 (see FIG. 4) can determine that the displacing/rotating unit 800 is in the middle right end state from the output of the upper detection sensor SC8.

In the intermediate right end state, while the horizontal slide member 840 is displaced upward and to the right from the effect standby state, the wiring arm member 870 is only displaced upward and the posture is maintained.

84) of the wiring arm member 870 is still arranged in the front vertical recess 886a of the guide recess 886, the wiring arm member 870 is supported as a support point. The distance in the longitudinal direction between the projecting portion 829 and the circular projecting portion 876 (see FIG. 84) of the wiring arm member 870 is maintained from the effect standby state.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the lateral slide member 840 is displaced to the right along with the upward displacement of the vertical slide member 820 from the effect standby state to the middle right end state without changing the posture of the wiring arm member 870. be. As a result, it is possible to avoid a collision between the members due to displacement timing deviation, which tends to occur when both the lateral slide member 840 and the wiring arm member 870 are displaced.

As shown in FIGS. 86(b) and 87(b), as the vertical slide member 820 is displaced upward, the horizontal slide member 840 is displaced in the horizontal direction. In this displacement, the direction of displacement is switched along the shape of the transmission guide portion 813 , but the displacement in the left-right direction exceeds the lateral width of the transmission guide portion 813 .

This is because the displacement of the lateral slide member 840 is transmitted via the two-stage pinion 861 . That is, it is the rack member 862 of the transmission means 860 that is guided by the transmission guide portion 813, and the gear portion 862a of the rack member 862 and the rack gear portion 843 of the lateral slide member 840 are connected to the two-stage pinion 861. combined. Therefore, the ratio of the pitch circle radii of the two-stage pinion 861 corresponds to the ratio of the displacement width of the rack member 862 and the displacement width of the lateral slide member 864 .

In this embodiment, the ratio of the pitch circle radius of the small diameter pinion 861a and the pitch circle radius of the large diameter pinion 861b of the two-stage pinion 861 (see FIG. 80) is 9:16. is multiplied by a constant (that is, 16/9=approximately 1.78).

As shown in FIG. 88(b), in the intermediate left end state, the horizontal slide member 840 is not displaced to the right and left outwards as much as in the effect waiting state. In other words, the horizontal slide member 840 is not displaced to the position where it overlaps the wiring arm member 870 when viewed in the front-rear direction.

In such an arrangement, as shown in FIG. 88(a), the posture of the wiring arm member 870 changes. That is, in the process from the midway right end state to the midway left end state, the circular projecting portion 876 (see FIG. 84) of the wiring arm member 870 is connected to the connecting recess 886c formed on the rear side of the front vertical recess of the guide recess 886. The distance in the longitudinal direction between the supporting projection 829 as a supporting point of the wiring arm member 870 and the circular projecting portion 876 (see FIG. 84) of the wiring arm member 870 is shortened compared to the effect standby state.

Therefore, in this embodiment, the posture of the wiring arm member 870 is changed after the horizontal slide member 840 does not overlap the wiring arm member 870 when viewed in the front-rear direction. In the downward displacement, the reverse is established (after the wiring arm member 870 does not change its posture, the lateral slide member 840 is arranged at a position overlapping the wiring arm member 870 when viewed in the front-rear direction).

As a result, even if there is a deviation between the displacement timing of the lateral slide member 840 and the displacement timing of the wiring arm member 870, the lateral slide member 840 and the wiring arm member 870 can be prevented from colliding with each other.

The wiring arm member 870 is arranged at the left end (the outer end in the left-right direction) of the displacement/rotation unit 800, and displacement is limited to up-and-down displacement and posture change in the front-rear direction. That is, regardless of the state of the displacing/rotating unit 800, the wiring arm member 870 can be continuously arranged at the left and right outer ends where the player is unlikely to notice, so that the wiring arm member 870 and the wiring arm member 870 guide the wiring arm member 870. It is possible to avoid the electric wiring DK2 from entering the field of view of the player.

As shown in FIGS. 89(a) and 89(b), during the period until the displacing/rotating unit 800 reaches the effect upper end state, the circular projecting portion 876 (see FIG. 84) of the wiring arm member 870 is A support protrusion 829 as a support point for the wiring arm member 870 and a circular protrusion 876 of the wiring arm member 870 ( 84) is maintained at a minimum.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the wiring arm member 870 configured to be able to change its posture as the vertical slide member 820 is displaced vertically is used to arrange the electric wiring DK2 at different front and rear positions corresponding to the vertical position. By constructing such a structure, there is an advantageous effect that a space for arranging the constituent members can be secured.

For example, when the electrical wiring DK2 is arranged at a rearward position, lateral displacement of the lateral slide member 840 is restricted. Specifically, in order to avoid contact with the electrical wiring DK2, the horizontal slide member 840 is set to the right side (left and right inner side) in the waiting state for the effect. In this embodiment, since the injection device 400 (see FIG. 6) is arranged at the right side (left and right inner side) of the horizontal slide member 840, the size of the displacement/rotation unit 800 is reduced in order to avoid contact. There is a possibility that it will be necessary to deal with That is, the degree of freedom in designing the displacement/rotation unit 800 is reduced.

Further, for example, when the electric wiring DK2 is arranged at a position closer to the front, while the horizontal displacement of the horizontal slide member 840 can be sufficiently ensured, the game board 13 arranged on the front side of the displacement/rotation unit 800 can be displaced. The degree of freedom in arranging the constituent members on the back side of the is lowered.

In this embodiment, since the displacement/rotation unit 800 is arranged symmetrically, in order to drive the electric accessory 640a (see FIG. 2) of the second prize winning port 640 arranged in the right side area of the game board 13. The degree of freedom in designing the configuration of the solenoid, etc., tends to be low.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the wiring arm member 870 is configured to displace the electrical wiring DK2 in the front-rear direction, thereby avoiding the limitation of the lateral displacement of the lateral slide member 840, thereby allowing the game to be played. It is possible to avoid lowering the degree of freedom in arranging the constituent members on the back side of the board 13 .

That is, at the lower end position where the horizontal slide member 840 is to be retracted to the right and left outer sides, the lower end of the wiring arm member 870 is arranged forward, so that the electrical wiring DK2 is arranged in front of the horizontal slide member 840, and the horizontal slide member 840 is moved forward. is avoided from being restricted by the electrical wiring DK2.

In addition, the horizontal slide member 840 is displaced inward to the left and right, and in the upper position where the second winning hole 640 (see FIG. 2) is desired to be arranged, the lower end portion of the wiring arm member 870 is arranged rearward, thereby The DK2 is placed closer to the back, leaving a space on the front side. As a result, it is possible to improve the degree of freedom in arranging members arranged on the game board 13 as components such as solenoids for driving the electric accessory 640a (see FIG. 2) of the second prize winning opening 640. FIG.

State changes of the electric wiring DK2 in the state changes shown in FIGS. 86 to 89 will be described. The change in the state of the electric wiring DK2 here means a change in the winding state of the electric wiring DK2 in the state where the electric wiring DK2 is wound around the pillar.

In the electrical wiring DK2, the upper portion of the lower winding portion DK2b (the side close to the wiring arm member 870) exclusively extends vertically and is not preferred to be curved. In particular, during the downward displacement, it is necessary to slide the electrical wiring DK2 into the front side of the cylindrical projecting portion 887 (see FIG. 86(a)). A higher value is preferred.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, a cable tube made of resin is wound around the upper portion of the lower winding portion DK2b so that the behavior is such that the rigidity is higher than that of the portion that undergoes winding displacement.

In the state shown in FIG. 89(a), the cable tube is arranged between the wall portion 882a and the electrical wiring DK2, thereby avoiding friction between the electrical wiring DK2 and the wall portion 882a. there is

In addition, since the opening direction of the lower end of the wiring arm member 870 is configured to face vertically downward, the displacement direction of the electric wiring DK2 at the start of downward displacement can be directed vertically downward. Thereby, it is possible to avoid unnecessary bending deformation of the electric wiring DK2.

As shown in FIGS. 86 to 89, the electrical wiring DK2 is arranged such that the upper winding portion DK2a is wound around the cylindrical protrusion 823 between the wiring arm member 870 and the lateral slide member 840, Winding portion DK2b is arranged to be wound around cylindrical projecting portion 887 below wiring arm member 870 .

Of the electrical wiring DK2, the upper winding portion DK2a arranged so as to be wound around the cylindrical protrusion 823 can be displaced in a radial direction along a plane orthogonal to the central axis of the cylindrical protrusion 823. configured to

Of the electrical wiring DK2, the lower winding portion DK2b arranged so as to be wound around the cylindrical projecting portion 887 is displaced in a radial direction along a plane perpendicular to the central axis of the cylindrical projecting portion 887. configured as possible.

That is, the plane in which the electrical wiring DK2 is displaced between the wiring arm member 870 and the lateral slide member 840 is configured to be different from the plane in which the electrical wiring DK2 is displaced below the wiring arm member 870 . In this embodiment, the planes are perpendicular to each other, and the planes in which the electrical wiring DK2 is displaced between the wiring arm member 870 and the lateral slide member 840 are the first omitted portion 824a, the second omitted portion 824b, and the wiring arrangement hole. 873.

Displacement of the electrical wiring DK2 is suppressed by sandwiching the portion of the wiring arm member 870 that is disposed inside the long main body portion 871 between the constricted portions 871a as described above. Therefore, relative displacement of the electrical wiring DK2 with respect to the wiring arm member 870 is suppressed.

Thus, in the present embodiment, the displacement required for the electric wire DK2 due to the change in the state of the displacement/rotation unit 800 is completed independently in the upper winding portion DK2a and the lower winding portion DK2b. Therefore, they will be described separately below.

First, displacement of the upper winding portion DK2a will be described. The upper winding portion DK2a includes a portion that is wound counterclockwise around the columnar protrusion 823 from a portion that passes through the wiring arrangement hole 873 of the wiring arm member 870 to the right side, and is on the left side of the wiring guide member 844. It means the part up to the point guided by the tip.

The upper winding portion DK2a is configured to be displaceable in the radial direction around the center of the cylindrical protrusion 823 with the space surrounded by the wall portion 822 as a limit, and is in the radially widest production standby state (see FIG. 86(b)). , a wall portion 822 is formed at a position (or a position with a slight gap) along the arrangement of the electric wiring DK2 arranged without load. As a result, the load applied from the wall portion 822 to the electrical wiring DK2 can be reduced in the presentation standby state.

When the horizontal slide member 840 is displaced to the right side from the production standby state, the side guided by the wiring guide member 844 is displaced to the right side, thereby pulling the upper winding portion DK2a and moving it radially inward about the columnar protrusion 823. The displacement length of the horizontal slide member 840 is complemented by the surplus length generated by the displacement of the upper winding portion DK2a. Thereby, it is possible to avoid applying a tensile force to the electric wiring DK2.

On the other hand, when the lateral slide member 840 is displaced leftward, the side guided by the wiring guide member 844 is displaced leftward, thereby pushing the upper winding portion DK2a and winding it radially outward around the cylindrical protrusion 823. The portion DK2a is displaced. At this time, a guide piece 844a is protruded from the left end of the wire guide member 844 and inclined downward toward the left, so that the upper winding portion DK2a moves outward (between the vertical slide member 820 and the wire guide member 844). ) can be prevented from protruding upward), and the upper winding portion DK2a can be appropriately pushed in along the shape of the wall portion 822.

Next, displacement of the lower winding portion DK2b will be described. The lower winding portion DK2b is wound clockwise around the columnar projecting portion 887 from a portion that hangs downward from the wiring arm member 870 when viewed from the left side (viewed from the outside of the left and right sides). 88 (see FIG. 85).

The lower winding portion DK2b is configured to be displaceable in the radial direction around the center of the columnar projecting portion 887 with the space surrounded by the wall portion 882a as the limit, and the radially widest effect standby state (see FIG. 86(a)). ), a wall portion 882a is formed at a position (or a position with a slight gap) along the arrangement of the electric wiring DK2 arranged without load. As a result, the load applied from the wall portion 882a to the electrical wiring DK2 can be reduced in the presentation standby state.

When the wiring arm member 870 is displaced upward due to the upward displacement of the vertical slide member 820 from the effect standby state, the side guided by the wiring arm member 870 is displaced upward, thereby pulling the lower winding portion DK2b upward. , the displacement length of the wiring arm member 870 is complemented by the surplus length generated by the displacement of the lower winding portion DK2b inward in the radial direction centering on the columnar projecting portion 887 . Thereby, it is possible to avoid applying a tensile force to the electric wiring DK2.

On the other hand, when the wiring arm member 870 is displaced downward, the side arranged on the wiring arm member 870 is displaced downward, so that the lower winding portion DK2b is pushed downward in the radial direction around the columnar projecting portion 887. The side winding portion DK2b is displaced. At this time, the lower end portion of the wiring arm member 870 is opened in the direction of inclination toward the front side as it goes downward, so that the lower winding portion DK2b is positioned between the cylindrical projecting portion 887 and the wall portion 882a (a cylindrical portion). (above the projecting portion 887) can be prevented, and the lower winding portion DK2b can be appropriately pushed in along the shape of the wall portion 882a.

In this embodiment, the space in which the lower winding portion DK2b is arranged is arranged below the position of the lower end of the displacement range of the lateral slide member 840. As shown in FIG. As a result, it is possible to prevent the size of the space in which the lower winding portion DK2b is displaced in the radial direction from being restricted by the arrangement of the horizontal slide member 840, so that the lower winding portion DK2b can be mounted on the rear case 510 (FIG. 5). See) can be displaced by using the full front-to-rear width.

Accordingly, since a large space for accommodating the lower winding portion DK2b can be secured below the wiring arm member 870, the length of the lower winding portion DK2b can be sufficiently increased, and the wiring arm member 870 can be The allowable vertical displacement amount can be lengthened.

90 is an exploded front perspective view of the game board 13, and FIG. 91 is an exploded rear perspective view of the game board 13. FIG. As shown in FIGS. 90 and 91, the game board 13 includes a center frame 86 disposed on the front side of a window 60a formed in the base plate 60, and a plurality of flow channels whose front sides are opened from resin members. and a spherical flow down unit 150 formed in a channel shape and arranged in the lower part of the back side of the base plate 60 .

The ball flow down unit 150 is formed so as to be able to receive the ball that has flowed down the flow path lower end LB1 of the game ball entering the second prize winning port 640 in the vicinity of the upper end portion of the fixed plate portion 151 fastened and fixed to the base plate 60. A first receiving channel 152 and a second receiving channel, which is a long box-shaped member whose front side is open and which is connected to the downstream side of the receiving channel 151 and is fastened and fixed to the fixed plate portion 151 from the back side. It has a channel member 153 and a plurality of ridges 154 projecting inward from the inner side portions of the left and right walls of the second receiving channel member 153 in a direction perpendicular to the flowing direction of the ball.

The plurality of ridges 154 are alternately arranged on the left and right sides of the left and right wall portions with an interval approximately equal to the diameter of a sphere. As a result, it is possible to decelerate the flow of the balls flowing down the second receiving channel member 153 .

Functions of the first receiving channel 152 and the second receiving channel member 153 will be described. The first receiving channel 152 and the second receiving channel member 153 have a function of guiding a game ball that has entered the second winning port 640 to a ball discharge channel (not shown), There is a function to improve the production effect by allowing the player to visually recognize the later game balls. Note that FIG. 2 will be referred to as needed in the following description.

The second winning hole 640 is provided with a detection sensor for ball passage detection near the lower edge shown in FIG. As a result, the payout of prize balls and the pending display on the third symbol display device 81 can be executed immediately, and a comfortable game can be provided to the player. Even if the player does not see the ball entering the second prize winning port 640, the player can notice the ball entering the second prize winning port 640 by visually recognizing the ball flowing down the first receiving channel 152. For example, it is possible to make it easy to notice a situation in which the payout is not performed due to a problem on the gaming machine side.

As will be described below, it is clear that the ball has entered the second winning port 640 by visually recognizing the ball flowing down the intermediate flow path LM1. , the timing of paying out the prize balls and the timing of the pending display may be delayed.

A game ball that enters the second winning hole 640 is placed inside the guide path DL1 in the left-right direction along which the ball deviating from the second winning hole 640 can be visually recognized in the front view. 27) flows down.

Like the guiding flow path DL1, the intermediate flow path LM1 is formed so as to be able to guide the sphere vertically downward while displacing the sphere in a zigzag pattern to the left and right. That is, since the ball flowing down the intermediate flow path LM1 and the ball flowing down the guide flow path DL1 appear to flow in the same way, the ball in the right path of the third symbol display device 81 during a right-handed game , it is possible to make it difficult to determine whether the ball is flowing down the intermediate flow path LM1 or the guide flow path DL1.

Here, the information as to which path the ball is flowing down in a right-handed game is information directly linked to the profit of the player, and the number of nails (not shown) implanted in the base plate 60. This is a portion where individual differences of the pachinko machine 10 occur depending on the state.

In this embodiment, the meat portion of the base plate 60 is left near the through gate 67, and the ball before passing through the through gate 67 collides with this position, and the ball before entering the second winning hole 640 Since the nail that the ball collides with is planted, it depends on each pachinko machine 10 whether the ball tends to flow down the middle flow path LM1 or the guide flow path DL1 during a right-handed game. different.

A ball that does not enter the second winning hole 640 during the probability change or the time saving during the right-handed game flows down the guide route DL1, and unless it enters the general winning hole 63 arranged on the downstream side, The ball is discharged from the game area through the out port 71 and does not benefit the player (it becomes a useless ball).

From here, whether or not the ball enters the second winning hole 640 and whether or not the ball flows down the guide path DL1 are uniquely related. The degree of freedom of the target position is higher when focusing on the guide route DL1 than when focusing only on the second winning hole 640, because the guide route DL1 extends in the vertical direction. Clear.

Therefore, some players check the frequency of balls flowing down the guidance path DL1, and calculate the frequency of balls entering the second winning hole 640, the frequency of waste balls in right-handed games, and the like. It is expected that they will consider whether to continue the game or not.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, it is possible to make it difficult to distinguish between a ball flowing down the guide path DL1 and a ball entering the second winning hole 640 and flowing down the intermediate flow path LM1. This makes it seem as if the frequency of entering the second winning hole 640 is high, and encourages the continuation of the game.

On the other hand, the ball flowing down the intermediate flow path LM1 has already entered the second winning hole 640 and has been ejected from the game area. If the ball falls down to a position overlapping with , it is difficult to distinguish it from a ball that can actually enter the specific winning hole 65a, which may interfere with the game.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, by causing the ball to flow down to the left and right inside through the first receiving channel 152 above the specific winning opening 65a, it is possible to prevent the ball from reaching a position overlapping the specific winning opening 65a in a front view. (See Figure 2). As a result, it is possible to easily distinguish between a ball that can actually enter the specific winning opening 65a and a ball that has already entered the second winning opening 640 and cannot enter the specific winning opening 65a. .

The first receiving flow path 152 passes from the right side of the display area of the third pattern display device 81 (see FIG. 7) when viewed from the front, passes near the lower edge of the display area of the third pattern display device 81 when viewed from the front, and reaches the display area. Let the ball flow down to the left and right center position side. That is, the ball guided to the first receiving flow path 152 enters the field of view of the player who pays attention to the display of the third symbol display device 81, so the player is paying attention to the display of the third symbol display device 81. , the player who does not pay attention to the right-handed path can be made to recognize whether or not the ball has entered the second winning hole 640 .

As a result, the player can recognize whether or not the ball has entered the second winning hole 640 without moving the field of view while paying attention to the third symbol display device 81 . Therefore, when the eye is averted from the third pattern display device 81 for viewing the second prize winning opening 640, the important display is executed, and it is possible to avoid the occurrence of the situation where the player misses the display, and the game can be played comfortably. can be provided.

The ball flowing down the second receiving flow channel member 153 flows down diagonally leftward and downward on the right side of the first winning opening 64 in a front view. Since this ball is decelerated by the ridges 154, the staying time of the falling ball can be extended. As a result, it is possible to easily increase the number of game balls visually recognized in the game area when viewed from the front.

Further, by securing a long lateral width of the flow-down path of the ball, the line of sight directed to the display area of the third pattern display device 81 and the flow-down path of the second receiving flow path member 153 are likely to intersect. As a result, the ball flowing down the inside of the second receiving channel member 153 can easily enter the field of vision of the player.

92 and 93 are exploded front perspective views of the center frame 86, the light guide plate effecting means 160 and the decorating means 170, and FIGS. 94 and 95 are exploded views of the center frame 86, the light guide plate effecting means 160 and the decorating means 170. It is a rear perspective view.

As shown in FIGS. 92 to 95 , the light guide plate rendering means 160 is fastened and fixed to the light guide plate 161 and the center frame 86 from the back side, and is configured to be able to contact the front side and top side of the light guide plate 161 . An upper supporting member 162 made of an impermeable resin material for positioning the light guide plate 161, and a center frame 86 made of a light transmissive resin material to press the lower side of the light guide plate 161 from the rear side. a lower support member 163 that can be fastened and fixed; a spherical flow path forming member 164 that is fastened and fixed to the lower support member 163 and is made of a light-transmitting resin material to form a spherical flow path; and a plurality of left and right side support members 165 which are configured to be capable of being fastened and fixed to the center frame 86 in such a manner as to press the left and right side portions of the light guide plate 161 from the rear side, and a plurality of left and right side support members 165 which are formed in a left and right long shape to support the upper side. A horizontal substrate unit 166 that is fastened and fixed to the center frame 86 in a state of extending to the front side of the center frame 86 through the upper side of the member 162, and a horizontal substrate unit 166 that is formed in a vertically elongated shape and extends from the front side of the center frame 86 to the center frame 86. and a vertical substrate unit 167 arranged along the left inner wall and fastened and fixed.

The decoration means 170 includes a first decoration member 171 made of a light-transmitting resin material and arranged in the left-right central position near the upper part of the center frame 86, and a left side of the first decoration member 171 made of a light-transmitting resin material. a second decorative member 174 arranged on the front side of the left frame portion of the center frame 86; and a third decorative member 177 arranged.

The first decorative member 171 includes a horizontally long rectangular central decorative member 172 that can be fastened and fixed to its central portion, a margin member 173 that is composed of a separate member as a margin portion such as a title representing the pachinko machine 10, Prepare.

As shown in FIG. E4, the first decorative member 171 has a laterally elongated groove portion 171a recessed on the back side. The horizontally elongated groove portion 171a is formed with a groove width that allows the electrical decoration substrate of the horizontal substrate unit 166 of the light guide plate rendering means 160 to be arranged.

The first decorative member 171 is arranged at a position slightly overlapping with the lower side of the opening 86a formed in the upper portion of the center frame 86 in the front-rear direction. In the present embodiment, the effect member 700 in the effect standby state is configured to be visible through the opening 86a (see FIG. 2).

Thus, in this embodiment, the front position of the third pattern display device 81 is closed by the light guide plate 161 inside the center frame 86, while the front position of the effect member 700 in the effect standby state is open. It is opened by the portion 86a. Therefore, it is possible for the player to visually recognize the light emission effect by the effect member 700 in the effect standby state without being shielded by the light guide plate 161 .

The relationship between the oblong groove portion 171a and the horizontal substrate unit 166 will be described with reference to FIG. 96 is a cross-sectional view of the game board 13 and the action unit 500 taken along line XCVI--XCVI in FIG. In addition, in FIG. 96, the vicinity of the oblong groove portion 171a is illustrated as an enlarged view separately. 92 to 95 will be referred to as appropriate in the description of FIG.

In this embodiment, light emitting means 166a such as LEDs are arranged on the front and back sides of the electrical board of the horizontal board unit 166, and light is emitted vertically along arrows D1a and D1b. 1 The light reaching the reflective shape portion 171b formed in a horizontally long wedge shape on the upper and lower sides of the horizontally long groove portion 171a on the back side of the decorative member 171 can be conspicuously recognized.

As a result, even when the arrangement of the light emitting means is concentrated on the horizontal board unit 166, the form of the light emitting effect (light emitting range or light emitting shape) visually recognized by the player depends on the forming range or forming shape of the reflective shape portion 171b. can be visually recognized differently.

In this embodiment, light emitting means 166a such as LEDs are arranged in a row on the upper surface of the horizontal substrate unit 166, and light emitting means 166a such as LEDs are arranged in a row on the lower surface. They are arranged in two horizontal rows, one row corresponding to the top and bottom and another row parallel to the row and formed on the back side. Among the rows in which the LEDs as the light emitting means 166a are arranged, the upper row and the lower front row are arranged inside the oblong groove 171a, and the lower rear row is arranged outside the oblong groove 171a.

With this configuration, the LEDs arranged in the row on the upper surface and the front row on the lower surface can irradiate light onto the reflective shape portion 171b, and the LEDs arranged in the rear row on the lower surface can irradiate light to another light-emitting target. Light can be applied.

In this embodiment, the light emitting means 166b such as LEDs arranged in the rear row on the bottom surface is arranged above the light guide plate 161, and the emitted LED light is incident from the edge of the light guide plate 161. FIG. That is, the light emitting means 166b such as LEDs arranged in the rear row on the lower surface of the horizontal substrate unit 166 are used to illuminate the light guide plate 161. FIG.

The upper support member 162 is arranged between the front and rear two rows of the LEDs arranged on the lower surface of the horizontal substrate unit 166 . Thereby, the light emitted from the LEDs in the front and rear two rows can be separated by the upper support member 162 .

The horizontal substrate unit 166 is arranged right above the upper edge of the light guide plate 161, that is, near the upper edge of the display area of the third pattern display device 81 in front view. In other words, it is arranged at the boundary position between the display area and the game area when viewed from the front. As a result, it is possible to clearly separate the light that irradiates the display area side and the light that irradiates the game area side without irradiating the display area side.

The central decorative member 172 is arranged in the same front and rear positions as the reflective shape portion 171b, and has flat front and rear surfaces. As a result, even when light is emitted from the horizontal board unit 166, it is possible to avoid intense reflection of the light and maintain visibility.

In this embodiment, a pattern such as a star shape is drawn on the front surface of the central decorative member 172, and the number of star shapes indicates the type of performance of the pachinko machine 10 (for example, the type of spec, so-called another spec). It is configured so that By constructing the central decorative member 172 as a separate member from the first decorative member 171, when manufacturing the pachinko machine 10 with different types of performance, the pachinko machine 10 can be manufactured by replacing only the central decorative member 172.例文帳に追加Can be configured.

The blank member 173 is configured as a separate member from the first decorative member 171, and the front and rear surfaces of the blank member 173 have a shape different from the shape formed on the reflective shape portion 171b (in this embodiment, striped grooves). ) is formed, the appearance of the reflected light is different from that of the reflective shape portion 171b.

97 is a partially enlarged front view of the first decorative member 171 in the range XCVII of FIG. 2. FIG. In the present embodiment, when light is emitted in the vertical direction of the horizontal substrate unit 166 along the arrows D1a and D1b, the light that reaches the reflective shape portion 171b travels toward the front side by reflection and refraction, and shines. While the light that reaches the blank member 173 is not mainly reflected, it is configured so that most of the light is transmitted and proceeds as it is, so it is visually recognized slightly darker.

As a result, the shape of the blank member 173 can be visually recognized as a shadow while adopting a configuration in which the light emitted from the horizontal board unit 166 travels in the vertical direction. It can be visually recognized as if In other words, it is possible to visually recognize as if LEDs are arranged on the back side and a light emission effect is performed.

The second decorative member 174 includes a shielding member 175 which is a thin plate member (sheet-shaped member) with low permeability and is colored in an arbitrary manner, and the shielding member 175 is fixed to the back side of the second decorative member 174. . As a result, the rear side of the second decorative member 174 can be configured to be difficult to see.

As a result, the game area formed on the front side of the base plate 60 (especially the left side) and the formation area of the light guide plate 161 in front view (including the area overlapping the display area of the third pattern display device 81 in the front and rear). can be clearly separated. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the visibility of the balls flowing down the game area from being lowered by the light accompanying the performance of the light guide plate 161 and the light emitted from the third pattern display device 81 .

The third decorative member 177 has a plurality of hexagonal decorative patterns three-dimensionally formed on the front side, and a plurality of hexagonal-shaped portions displaced back and forth on the back side thereof. It has a plurality of three-dimensional decoration members 178 which are formed in a uniform manner.

Similarly to the third decorative member 177, the three-dimensional decorative member 178 is made of a light-transmitting resin material, and is arranged in the space arranged between the portion of the center frame 86 where the light guide plate 161 is arranged and the guide path DL1. be.

As a result, it is possible to perform a stereoscopically visible light effect instead of a two-dimensionally visible light effect between the portion where the light guide plate 161 is arranged and the guide route DL1. That is, when viewed from the front, it is possible to execute a light emitting effect with depth.

For example, when the three-dimensional decoration member 178 is irradiated with light from the back side, depending on which position of the three-dimensional decoration member 178 in the front view is irradiated with the light, which position of the three-dimensional decoration member 178 in the front-rear direction is It changes whether it becomes brighter. Therefore, it is possible to perform a light effect in which the front side is illuminated and the back side is illuminated from the player's point of view.

In this embodiment, the third pattern display device 81, the front side light emitting means 852a of the displacement rotation unit 800, and the like (see FIG. 81) are assumed as means for irradiating the three-dimensional decoration member 178 with light from the back side. , the light emission position can be changed. Therefore, compared with the case where light is emitted toward the three-dimensional decorative member 178 from light emitting means such as LEDs that are fixedly arranged, it is possible to easily increase the types of light effects.

Further, for example, when the three-dimensional decoration member 178 is irradiated with light from the left-right direction or the top-bottom direction, the position of the three-dimensional decoration member 178 in the front-rear direction depends on the position of the three-dimensional decoration member 178 in the front view where the light is irradiated. which position is brighter changes. Therefore, it is possible to perform a light effect in which the front side is illuminated and the back side is illuminated from the player's point of view.

In this embodiment, the first light irradiation device 330 of the firing effect unit 300 is assumed as means for irradiating the three-dimensional decorative member 178 with light from the left and right directions (see FIG. 27). Due to its arrangement, the first light irradiation device 330 functions to block at least part of the light directed toward the three-dimensional decorative member 178 among the light irradiated from the display area of the third pattern display device 81 .

As a result, it is possible to reduce the extent to which the form of light visually recognized through the three-dimensional decorative member 178 depends on the display effect form of the third pattern display device 81 . For example, when the color of the light emitted from the third pattern display device 81 is blue, even if the color of the light emitted from the first light irradiation device 330 is red, the game is played through the three-dimensional decoration member 178. It is possible to easily avoid the color of the light visually recognized by the person becoming purple (a color in which blue light and red light are mixed). That is, the light visually recognized through the three-dimensional decoration member 178 can be easily visually recognized independently of the display of the third pattern display device 81 .

A second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the first embodiment, the ball flowing down the ball flow unit 150 is configured to be visible from the front, and the entire ball is configured to flow down the same route. However, the ball flow unit of the second embodiment At 2150, the falling sphere is configured to flow down any of a plurality of paths. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

FIG. 98 is a front view of the game board 2013 in the second embodiment. In FIG. 98, an example of how the granular member 320 looks just after firing is illustrated. As shown in FIG. 98, the spherical flow downward unit 2150 is formed so as to be inclined downward from the lower end of the first receiving channel 152 toward the left, as a difference from the spherical flow downward unit 150 described in the first embodiment. A third receiving channel 2155 formed in a size that allows the ball to flow down is provided.

The third receiving channel 2155 is formed on the upstream side and has a lower inclination angle than the first receiving channel 152, and the lower end (left end) of the inclined portion 2155a is set on the left side of the first winning port 64 when viewed from the front. , and a discharge portion 2155b extending vertically downward in front view from the lower end (left side) of the inclined portion 2155a.

The flow speed of the balls flowing down the inclined portion 2155a is lower than the flow speed of the balls in the first receiving channel 152 due to the shallowness of the inclination angle. The ball flowing down the inclined portion 2155a is configured to be visible to the player, and the inclined portion 2155a is arranged near the lower edge of the light guide plate 161 when viewed from the front. Therefore, the ball flowing down the inclined portion 2155a can be kept in the player's field of vision for a long time.

As a result, the ball flowing down the inclined portion 2155a can enter the field of view of the player playing the game while viewing the third pattern display device 81 (see FIG. 12(a)) through the light guide plate 161. . In other words, it is possible to increase the attention to the ball flowing down the slope 2155a without causing discomfort.

Guidance of the ball to the inclined portion 2155a will be described. In this embodiment, the ball entering the second winning port 640 similarly flows down to the lower end of the first receiving channel 152, and at the lower end of the first receiving channel 152, along the second receiving channel member 153. The switching means switches between flowing down in the first direction D<b>21 and flowing down in the second direction D<b>22 along the third receiving channel 2155 .

In this embodiment, the flow resistance of the ball flowing through the second receiving channel member 153 is increased by the protrusion 154 (see FIG. 90) formed on the second receiving channel member 153 . Therefore, when the next ball reaches the lower end of the first receiving channel 152 while the ball is flowing down the second receiving channel member 153, the ball is guided to the third receiving channel 2155. .

Such a situation is likely to occur, for example, when a plurality of balls enter the second winning hole 640 in succession in a short period of time. Therefore, by visually recognizing the state of the balls flowing down the third receiving channel 2155, the player can understand that a plurality of balls have entered the second winning hole 640 in a row.

In addition, the aspect of a switching means is not limited at all. For example, the ball flow-down unit 2150 is provided with an opening/closing plate configured to be switchable between a state in which the ball is allowed to flow down in the first direction D21 and a state in which it is restricted using a driving means such as a solenoid. Alternatively, an electromagnet that can generate a magnetic force is disposed at the branch point between the first direction D21 and the second direction D22, and the generated magnetic force is used as a pulling force or a repulsive force to move the ball downward. The route may be switched.

According to these methods, it is possible not only to switch the flow-down route of the ball to the first direction D21 or the second direction D22, but also to stop the ball or reverse the ball. Unlike the ball that flows down the game area, even if the flow path of the ball that enters the second winning hole 640 is changed, it does not affect the subsequent game results. It is possible to switch the flow path of

As described above, when switching the flow path of a ball in a device using electricity, the MPU 221 (see FIG. 4) can control whether the ball flows down in the first direction D21 or in the second direction D22. can. Therefore, the result of the lottery by the ball entering the second winning hole 640 can be associated with the switching of whether the ball flows down in the first direction D21 or in the second direction D22.

For example, if the switching means is controlled so that the ball flows down the third receiving channel 2155 in 60% of the cases where the lottery due to the ball entering the second prize winning port 640 is a jackpot, the third receiving channel It is possible to improve the player's sense of expectation for the big win, seeing the ball flowing down the 2155. - 特許庁

In this case, the player's line of sight is most likely to be gathered at the lower end position of the first receiving channel 152, which is the guide path to the third receiving channel 2155, and as a result, the discharge ball (game It can improve attention to the balls that have already been ejected from the area).

As described above, the ball flowing down the third receiving flow path 2155 is expected value of the lottery jackpot due to the ball entering the second prize winning port 640 when the frequency of the ball entering the second prize winning port 640 is high. is high.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, a detection sensor SC21 capable of detecting the passage of the ball is arranged in the middle of the discharge portion 2155b, and when the passage of the ball is determined, the granular member 320 is controlled to be shot. .

As described above, in order to shoot the granular member 320, it is necessary to change the state of the injection device 400 in advance from the presentation standby state (see FIG. 38) to the shooting standby state (FIG. 40). time consuming. On the other hand, at the timing when the ball enters the second winning hole 640, it is decided whether or not to execute the firing of the granular member 320, and it takes a certain amount of time for the ball to reach the ejection part 2155b. The injection device 400 is controlled to change its state by using this flow time.

As a result, it is possible to control the particulate member 320 to shoot at the same time when the detection sensor SC21 determines that the ball has passed. By controlling in this way, the granular member 320 is fired after a certain time delay expected for the ball to flow down the third receiving channel 2155 after entering the second winning hole 640. It is possible to make it easier to match the falling timing of the ball and the firing timing of the granular member 320, as compared with the case of controlling to .

For example, there is a case where the oil attached to the balls adheres to the first receiving channel 152, causing the falling speed of the balls to decrease. If controlled in this way, the granular member 320 will be launched before the ball reaches the third receiving flow path 2155, and there is a possibility that the rendering effect will be reduced.

On the other hand, at the same time when the passage of the ball is determined by the detection sensor SC21, by controlling the granular member 320 to be shot, the player can see that the ball reaches the third receiving channel 2155. After concentrating the attention on the third receiving flow path 2155, the granular member 320 is fired to execute a powerful effect that spreads over the area of the light guide plate 161, thereby improving the effect of a series of effects. can.

The arrangement of the third receiving channel 2155 through which the balls flow down and the arrangement of the display area of the third pattern display device 81 (see FIG. 12(a)) visually recognized through the light guide plate 161 are partially different when viewed from the front. , the above-described series of effects can be visually recognized without requiring the player to change his line of sight.

It should be noted that control may also be combined so that the granular member 320 is not fired when the ball passes through the detection sensor SC21. For example, if a big win occurs when the granular member 320 is not fired, control may be performed to increase the possibility of the variable probability big win described above.

In this case, since it is possible to increase the number of types of effects after the ball is guided to the third receiving channel 2155, at the stage when the ball is guided to the third receiving channel 2155 It is possible to avoid that the attention of the

In addition, when the granular member 320 is not fired, it is possible to increase attention to the subsequent display effects on the third pattern display device 81 .

A detection sensor having a function similar to that of the detection sensor SC21 may be arranged at another location. For example, it may be placed at a location through which a ball entering the specific winning hole 65a can pass. In this case, an effect of shooting the granular member 320 can be executed at the timing when the ball that enters the specific winning hole 65a passes. In this case, the detection sensor SC21 may be arranged in a specific area where the profit given to the player becomes more advantageous as the game ball passes through.

A third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 99 and 100. FIG. In the first embodiment, the effect member 700 of the enlargement/reduction unit 600 is configured to be displaced in the radial direction so as to be symmetrical and discrete, but the effect member 3700 of the third embodiment , is configured to be able to form a section that is not left-right symmetrical in the expansion/reduction displacement in the radial direction. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

FIG. 99 is a front view of the scaling unit 3600 in the third embodiment. The difference from the first embodiment of the scaling unit 3600 is only in the rendering member 3700, and the main body member 601, the front cover member 610, the upper arm member 620, the lower arm member 630, and the transmission gear 650 have the same configuration. Therefore, the description is omitted.

FIG. 99 illustrates a state in which the shielding design member 760 of the effect member 3700 is arranged in the middle position (intermediate position) of the radial enlargement/reduction displacement. As shown in FIG. 99, this embodiment employs five shielding design members 760, which is the same as in the first embodiment. While the sheets are displaced radially to a similar length, the top one and the top right sheet are still in a collective arrangement (not radially displaced). A configuration for realizing this displacement will be described.

100 is a front view of rotating plate 3730. FIG. Rotating plate 3730 has the same configuration as rotating plate 730 described in the first embodiment, except that some guide holes 733 are changed to separate guide holes 3733 .

As shown in FIG. 100, the rotary plate 730 includes separate guide holes 3733 instead of the upper and upper right guide holes 733 in front view. The separate guide hole 3733 includes the above-described small-diameter arc portion 733a, large-diameter arc portion 733b, and an adjustment connecting portion 3733c that connects the small-diameter arc portion 733a and the large-diameter arc portion 733b.

The adjustment connection portion 3733c extends along the same arc shape from the connection portion with the large-diameter arc portion 733b to near the intermediate position, and on the opposite side of the large-diameter arc portion 733b (the guide hole 733 or (at a position close to the separate guide hole 3733) is formed so as to abruptly approach the small-diameter arc portion 733a side.

That is, in the displacement mode in which the telescopic displacement member 740 is displaced from the collective arrangement state (see FIG. 63), the telescopic displacement member 740 guided by the connecting portion 733c expands and displaces in the radial direction from an early stage, while the adjusting connecting portion 3733c is displaced. The expansion/contraction displacement member 740 guided in the radial direction does not expand while being guided in the same arc shape as the large-diameter arc portion 733b. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 99, the arrangement of the shielding design member 760 can be shifted. The effect caused by the misalignment of the shielding design member 760 will be described.

As shown in FIG. 99, by asymmetrically disposing the shielding design member 760, the center of gravity of the effect member 3700 can be shifted from the center in the horizontal direction or the center in the vertical direction. In particular, in the state shown in FIG. 99, since the shielding design member 760 arranged at the upper right position is still in the collective arrangement state, the center of gravity G31 of the effect member 3700 is shifted to the lower left position by that amount.

As a result, a load in the direction of correcting the deviation of the center of gravity G31, that is, a load in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front is applied to the effect member 3700 by its own weight. Due to this load, it is possible to cause the attitude of the effect member 3700 to change in the rotational direction about the longitudinal axis. can be displaced in a combination of directions.

As a result, a direction (that is, a , rotational direction).

In this embodiment, the connecting portion 733c and the adjusting connecting portion 3733c are different, and the guide hole 733 and the separate guide hole 3733 have the same shape. The arrangement of the portion 733b is the same between the guide hole 733 and the separate guide hole 3733. FIG.

Therefore, after the position of the center of gravity G31 is displaced in the state shown in FIG. 99, the shielding design member 760 is placed in a collective arrangement state or arranged at the end position of radial expansion displacement. Since they are arranged symmetrically, the center of gravity G31 returns to the horizontal center position and the vertical center position of the effect member 3700 again. As a result, the position of the center of gravity G31 is maintained in a displaced position, and the occurrence of problems can be prevented.

An example of effect using the return of the center of gravity G31 will be described. In the first embodiment, the vertical displacement and the radial displacement of the effect member 700 are not performed at the same time, but are performed separately. .

In the present embodiment, a contrivance is adopted to avoid collisions with other structures, and the vertical displacement and radial displacement of the effect member 3700 are controlled so as to be executable at the same time. That is, from the state shown in FIG. 99, the shielding design member 760 can be expanded in the radial direction while the effect member 3700 is downwardly displaced.

In this case, in addition to the downward displacement of the effect member 3700 and the expansion displacement of the shielding design member 760 in the radial direction, the return of the center of gravity G31 of the effect member 3700 occurs. It is possible to cause a posture change in a direction opposite to the direction of rotation assumed from the state (counterclockwise when viewed from the front).

In this way, since rotational displacement in the forward and reverse directions can be added to the radial expansion displacement of the effect member 3700, a simple configuration specialized for expanding and contracting the shielding design member 760 in the radial direction is provided. while adopting, as a result, it is possible to make a complicated motion with a displacement in the rotational direction. As a result, the effect of the effect produced by the effect member 3700 can be improved.

A fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the first embodiment, the drive motor M1 is driven in the forward rotation direction from the effect standby state, and the linear motion member 410 and the transmission arm member 470 are simultaneously displaced. The shape of the grooved portion 462 of the rear transmission member 460 is changed, and the displacement of the transmission arm member 470, that is, the displacement of the lid member 480 is completed prior to the displacement of the linear motion member 410. FIG. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

FIG. 101 shows the output state of the detection sensor SC4, the arrangement of the linear motion member 410, the arrangement of the collision member 420, and the projection of the contact member 430 associated with the rotation of the front transmission member 440 and the rear transmission member 460 in the fourth embodiment. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing changes over time in the placement of the installation portion 432 and the placement of the cylindrical protrusion 472 of the transmission arm member 470;

Note that FIG. 101 does not describe the relative relationship between the change widths of the arrangement changes of the respective components, but shows the relative relationship of the timing at which the arrangement change occurs. Also, the change in the arrangement of the direct-acting member 410 corresponds to the change in the biasing force accumulated in the coil spring SP1.

As shown in FIG. 101, in the fourth embodiment, the displacement of the transmission arm member 470 is completed prior to the displacement of the linear motion member 410 and the collision member 420 . Therefore, since the downward displacement of the direct-acting member 410 and the collision member 420 is started in a state in which the lid member 480 is arranged at the displacement end position on the retreating side, the player can see without the lid member 480 blocking his line of sight. It is possible to visually recognize the displacement of the granular member accompanying the downward displacement of the collision member 420 (see FIGS. 12(a) and 38).

In this situation, by reciprocating the direct-acting member 410 between an angle of 66 degrees and an angle of 125 degrees shown in FIG.

In this embodiment, since the biasing force of the coil spring SP1 is strong, when the driving of the drive motor M1 is canceled, the linear motion member 410 and the collision member 420 are displaced upward by the biasing force of the coil spring SP1.

Therefore, by intermittently energizing the drive motor MT1, the linear motion member 410 can be reciprocated. This eliminates the need to switch the driving direction of the drive motor MT1, thereby facilitating control.

In addition, in such a manner that the granular member 320 is vibrated (micro-displaced) and visually recognized by the player, the load (fatigue) received by the torsion spring SP2 can be reduced compared to the case where the cover member 480 is displaced together. can be done.

Note that the manner in which the collision member 420 is displaced in order to vibrate (micro-displace) the granular member 320 is not limited to this. For example, vibration may be transmitted from another vibration device to the collision member 420 to cause the collision member 420 to vibrate. In this case, the other vibrating device is preferably arranged below the collision member 420 in the direction of displacement. As a result, it is possible to prevent other vibration devices from receiving a load when the collision member 420 is displaced by the biasing force of the coil spring SP1.

A fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the first embodiment, the drive motor M1 is driven in the forward rotation direction from the effect standby state, and the linear motion member 410 and the transmission arm member 470 are simultaneously displaced. The shape of the grooved portion 462 of the rear transmission member 460 is changed, and after the displacement of the direct-acting member 410 is completed, the displacement of the transmission arm member 470, that is, the displacement of the lid member 480 starts. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

FIG. 102 shows the output state of the detection sensor SC4, the arrangement of the linear motion member 410, the arrangement of the collision member 420, and the projection of the contact member 430 associated with the rotation of the front transmission member 440 and the rear transmission member 460 in the fifth embodiment. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing changes over time in the placement of the installation portion 432 and the placement of the cylindrical protrusion 472 of the transmission arm member 470;

Note that FIG. 102 does not describe the relative relationship between the variation widths of the layout changes of the respective components, but shows the relative relationship of the timing at which the layout changes occur. Also, the change in the arrangement of the direct-acting member 410 corresponds to the change in the biasing force accumulated in the coil spring SP1.

As shown in FIG. 102, in the fifth embodiment, the displacement of the transmission arm member 470 starts after the displacement of the linear motion member 410 and the collision member 420 is completed. Further, after firing the granular member 320, the displacement of the lid member 480 is completed before the granular member 320 reaches the impact member 420 (see near the angle of 290 degrees).

Therefore, at least part of the granular member 320 can be put on the upper side of the lid member 480 and retained. Although it is conceivable that the particulate member 320 collides with the lid member 480 and hinders the rotation of the lid member 480, in the present embodiment, the advancing/retracting portion 481 of the lid member 480 is formed in an arc shape centering on the rotation axis. Therefore, the load received from the granular member 320 can be directed toward the rotating shaft. As a result, it is possible to prevent the rotation of the lid member 480 from being hindered.

If the drive motor MT1 continues to rotate in the normal direction while the granular member 320 remains on the lid member 480, the transmission arm member 470 is displaced toward the retracted side (the smaller diameter side in FIG. 102), causing the granular member 320 to collide. It falls on member 420 .

On the other hand, at this timing, the contact between the collision member 420 and the linear motion member 410 is released, so that the load transmitted from the granular member 320 to the collision member 420 can be prevented from being transmitted to the linear motion member 410. .

Further, when the drive motor MT1 is rotationally driven in the reverse rotation direction from the firing standby state, if it is set to a high speed, the rising speed of the linear motion member 410 and the collision member 420 can be increased, and the granular member 320 can be fired.

In this case, since the lid member 480 is arranged at the displacement end position on the entrance side at the time of firing, the firing of the granular member 320 is inhibited at the left-right central portion where the projecting portion 482 is arranged, and the firing in the left-right direction is prevented. It can be made visible to become the owner.

That is, the direction in which the granular member 320 is ejected can be changed between the shooting mode when the drive motor MT1 is rotated in the forward direction and the shooting mode when the drive motor MT1 is rotated in the reverse direction. As a result, variations can be provided in the shooting direction of the granular member 320, and the performance effect can be improved.

A sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the first embodiment, the case where the first light irradiation device 330 and the second light irradiation device 340 have flat substrates and irradiate light in the front-back direction and the left-right direction has been described. It has an electrical board on which the first light irradiation device 6330 and the second light irradiation device 6340 are bent. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

FIG. 103 is a cross-sectional view of the game board 13 and the launching unit 6300 in the sixth embodiment along the line corresponding to line XXVII-XXVII of FIG. That is, in FIG. 103, the game board 13 and the shooting unit 6300 are illustrated, and the illustration of the operation unit 500 is omitted. Also, the directions of light emitted from the first light irradiation device 6330 and the second light irradiation device 6340 are schematically illustrated by arrows.

As shown in FIG. 103, the first light irradiating device 6330 has a front end close to the front end of the electrical board 332 and a back end of the electrical board 332 . It has a second electrical decoration board 6334 that is tilted away from 332 .

The second electrical board 6334 has a light emitting means such as an LED arranged so as to be able to irradiate light from at least the front side surface. This light emitting means makes it easier to direct light to the partitioning member 310, and can improve the presentation effect of lighting the granular members 320 scattering in the internal space IE1 of the partitioning member 310. FIG.

In addition to the electrical board 342, the second light irradiation device 6340 is inclined in such a manner that the back side end is close to the back side end of the electrical board 342 and the front side end is away from the electrical board 342. A second electrical board 6344 is provided.

The second decorative board 6344 has a light emitting means such as an LED arranged so as to be able to irradiate light from at least the rear side surface. This light emitting means makes it easier to direct light to the effect member 700 of the enlargement/reduction unit 600, the displacement/rotation unit 800, and the like arranged on the back side of the emission unit 6300, thereby improving the effect of the light emission effect.

It should be noted that the arrangement of the electrical board is not limited to this. For example, only the second electrical boards 6334 and 6344 may be employed and the electrical boards 332 and 342 may be omitted, or other combinations may be employed. Further, the light emitting means may be arranged on the side where the light emitting means is not arranged in the second electrical board 6334, 6344, or the light may be irradiated from both sides.

In addition, for the purpose of obliquely irradiating light, a device in which the attitude of the light emitting means can be changed may be constructed without adopting the method of increasing the number of decorative boards. Also, light emitting means may be arranged at intersections of the electrical boards 332, 342 and the second electrical boards 6334, 6344 so as to emit light.

A board box A100 according to the seventh embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS. 104 to 120. FIG. First, with reference to FIGS. 104 to 107, a schematic configuration of the board box A100 will be described. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

104 is a rear view of the pachinko machine A10 in the seventh embodiment, FIG. 105 is a front perspective view of the board box A100 in the seventh embodiment, and FIG. 106 is a rear perspective view of the board box A100. 107(a) is a front view of the board box A100, and FIG. 107(b) is a side view of the board box A100.

Note that arrows F, B, arrows L, R, and arrows U, D in FIGS. 105 to 107 respectively indicate the front-rear direction, the left-right direction, and the up-down direction of the board box A100. It should be noted that the same applies to each of the following figures, so the description thereof will be omitted.

Also, the pachinko machine A10 in the seventh embodiment has the same configuration as the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment except for the board box A100. Therefore, other descriptions are omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 104 to 107, the board box A100 includes a box cover A200, a box base A300 whose opening is covered by the box cover A200, and the box cover A200 and the box base A300 unopenably connected (caulked structure). and a sub-cover A500 disposed at the end opposite to the sealing unit A400 of the box cover A200 and the box base A300 connected by the sealing unit A400, and a main control device A110 (see FIG. 112) is stored.

A rotating shaft A410 is formed in the sealing unit A400. The rotation axis A410 is a shaft for rotatably supporting the board box A100 on the back side of the inner frame 12 (see FIG. 120), and extends in the lateral direction (arrows U, D direction) and orthogonal to the longitudinal direction (directions of arrows L and R) of the board box A100 (box cover A200).

Further, the rotation axis A410 is positioned on one side in the longitudinal direction of the board box A100 (box cover A200) when viewed from the front (viewed in the direction of the arrow B) (on the side opposite to the first connection wall A220 across the coating A270, which will be described later). R direction side). Note that the rotation axis A410 may be arranged on the other longitudinal direction side (arrow L direction side) opposite to the one longitudinal direction side of the substrate box A100 (box cover A200).

A switch device A120 and a key device A130 are arranged (mounted) in the main controller A110. The main controller A110 is configured by further disposing (mounting) a switch device A120 and a key device A130 to the main controller 110 in the first embodiment. That is, the main controller A110 and the main controller 110 in the first embodiment have the same configuration except for the presence or absence of the switch device A120 and the key device A130. Therefore, other descriptions are omitted.

The switch device A120 is a momentary push button that is operated (turned on) by pushing the operation part A122 from the initial position and turned off by releasing the push (the operation part A122 is returned to the initial position). It is configured as a switch and used for input to main controller A110. The switch device A120 and the key device A130 correspond to some of the various switches 208 (see FIG. 4) in the main controller A110 (main controller 110).

The switch device A120 is configured to generate a predetermined click feeling (change in pushing force) when the operating portion A122 is pushed to the operating position (on position). The operator can detect completion of input to device A110.
Therefore, it is effective when it is necessary to operate the operation unit A122 in a situation where the operation unit A122 cannot be visually recognized.

The key device A130 is configured such that the key A140 can be inserted and removed at the initial position (hereinafter referred to as the "off position"), and the inserted key A140 is rotated (right in this embodiment) to a predetermined position (hereinafter referred to as the "on position"). A key-operated selector switch (which is referred to as a "position") is operated (turned on) and is turned off by turning the key A140 (counterclockwise in this embodiment) to the off position (mode switch).

In addition, in this embodiment, the phase difference between the OFF position and the ON position is set to approximately 90 degrees. Further, the key device A130 allows the key A140 to be inserted and removed in the off position, while the key device A130 disables the removal of the key A140 in the on position.

Also, the function of the switch device A120 can be switched according to the ON/OFF state of the key device A130. For example, in this embodiment, when the key device A130 is turned off, the switch device A120 functions as a reset switch (RAM clear switch) for initializing the main control device A110 (executing RAM erasure). When the A130 is turned on, the switch device A120 functions as a setting change switch for changing the value of the winning probability in the lottery (hereinafter referred to as "setting change"), as will be described later. .

Here, as described above, since the substrate box A100 (the box cover A200 and the box base A300) is unopenably connected, in order to operate the main control device A110 (for example, the switch device A120 and the key device A130), , it is necessary to open the board box A100, which is troublesome.

On the other hand, according to the substrate box A100 of this embodiment, the openings A250 and A260 are formed in the box cover A200, and the switch device A120 and the key device A130 can be operated through these openings A250 and A260. That is, it is unnecessary to open the board box A100, and the labor can be reduced. Details will be described later.

Legs A121 and A131 (electrical connection terminals, see FIG. 114) are provided on the rear side of the switch device A120 and the key device A130 (the push direction side of the operation part A122, the insertion direction side of the key A140, and the arrow B direction side). The protruding legs A121 and A131 are inserted from the front side into holes opening in the main control device A110 (printed circuit board A119), and the portions protruding to the rear side are soldered to form the switch device A120 and the key device. A130 is arranged on the front side of main controller A110 (printed circuit board A119).

In this case, an external force applied to the switch device A120 and the key device A130 (for example, a force that displaces the operation unit A122 or the key A140 in a direction perpendicular to the pushing direction (insertion direction), a plane containing the arrows U and D and the arrows L and R When a force in a parallel direction is applied and tilted with respect to the main controller A110 (printed circuit board A119), the legs of one side (the side lifted from the printed circuit board A119 by tilting) of the switch device A120 and the key device A130 While a tensile force is applied to A121 and A131, a compressive force is applied to the legs A121 and A131 on the other side (the side pressed against the printed circuit board A119 due to tilting). As a result, the legs A121 and A131 may break or bend, the legs A121 and A131 may come out of the holes, and the solder may peel off, resulting in disconnection or poor contact. On the other hand, the board box A100 adopts means for solving such problems. Details will be described later.

The main controller 100 is provided with a plurality (four in this embodiment) of 7-segment displays (not shown), and such 7-segment displays are mounted on the printed circuit board A119. Since the box cover A200 is made of a light-transmissive resin material, the operator can visually recognize the display of the 7-segment display through the box cover A200.

Here, a method of changing settings using the switch device A120 and the key device A130 will be described.

First, in a state where the pachinko machine A10 is powered off, the key A140 inserted into the key device A130 is placed in the ON position, and then the operating portion A122 of the switch device A120 is pushed to the operating position, and the pachinko machine A10 is operated. power on. As a result, the setting change mode is activated, and the setting is changed each time the operating portion A122 of the switch device A120 is pressed.

In the present embodiment, six values from the first to the sixth are specified as set values, and these values are circulated (for example, by pressing the operation unit A122, the set value is changed from the first value to the first value). When the operation unit A122 is pressed from the state where the sixth value is set, the set value advances to the first value).

The set value is displayed on the third pattern display device 81, which is a liquid crystal display (display device), and when the operating portion A122 of the switch device A120 is pressed (when the set value is changed), the third pattern display device is displayed. The setting value displayed at 81 is also changed. In this embodiment, the set value is also displayed on the 7-segment display.

In addition, the information regarding the setting change displayed on the third pattern display device 81 is not limited to the setting value, and may include other information. Other information includes, for example, the current mode (setting change mode, setting confirmation mode), previous set values, and the like. In this way, by using the third pattern display device 81, it is possible to secure (larger) the amount of information that can be displayed compared to, for example, the case of using a 7-segment display. As a result, it becomes easier to grasp the operation state, and it is possible to improve the operability and suppress operation errors. Further, by also using a device (third symbol display device 81) for displaying information about games, the product cost can be reduced accordingly.

Moreover, the display of the setting value may be displayed only on one of the third pattern display device 81 and the 7-segment display, and may not be displayed on the other. Alternatively, neither the third pattern display device 81 nor the 7-segment display may be displayed.

After changing the desired set value, the key A140 inserted into the key device A130 is placed at the OFF position. As a result, the setting change mode is terminated (set values are fixed). In this case, the off-edge of the key device A 130 is detected, the detection triggers the execution of the power recovery process, and the normal mode is started with the set (changed) set value.

After changing the desired set value, the power of the pachinko machine A10 is turned off without placing the key A140 inserted in the key device A130 in the OFF position (that is, while it is placed in the ON position). When the power of the pachinko machine A10 is turned on while the key A140 of the key device A130 is placed at the OFF position, the normal mode is started with the set (changed) set values.

Also, in the setting change mode, RAM erasure is executed. Such RAM erasure is confirmed by placing the key A140 inserted in the key device A130 in the OFF position. Examples of the timing for executing the RAM erasing include the timing when the power of the pachinko machine A10 is turned on, the timing when a predetermined time has passed since that timing, and the timing when the key A140 is placed at the OFF position. That is, the timing for executing RAM erasure can be set as appropriate.

Also, during the setting change mode (that is, in a state in which the setting value can be changed by pressing the operating portion A122 of the switch device A120, the key A140 inserted into the key device A130 is not placed at the OFF position ( In other words, when the power of the pachinko machine A10 is turned off while the key device A10 remains in the ON position, the key A140 is removed from the key device A130, or the key A140 inserted into the key device A130 When the power of the pachinko machine A10 is turned on while the pachinko machine A10 is arranged in the off position, the normal mode is not started, an error state occurs, and an error display is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Simultaneously with the third pattern display device 81 or instead of this, an error display may be displayed on the 7-segment display.

Next, to confirm the setting values set in the setting change mode, first turn off the power of the pachinko machine A10, place the key A140 inserted in the key device A130 in the ON position, and then turn on the power of the pachinko machine A10. to turn on. Thereby, the setting confirmation mode for confirming the setting value is activated, and the setting value set at that time is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 and the 7-segment display.

In addition, the display of the setting value in the setting confirmation mode may be displayed only on one of the third pattern display device 81 or the 7-segment display, and may not be displayed on the other. Alternatively, neither the third pattern display device 81 nor the 7-segment display may be displayed.

In this setting confirmation mode, the key A140 inserted into the key device A130 is placed at the OFF position. This terminates the setting confirmation mode. Further, the off-edge of the key device A 130 is detected, and the power recovery process is executed with the detection as a trigger, and the normal mode with the setting value set at that time is activated.

In the setting confirmation mode, turning off the power of the pachinko machine A10, placing the key A140 inserted in the key device A130 in the OFF position, and then turning on the power of the pachinko machine A10 also Normal mode is activated with the set values.

In this embodiment, when the change of the setting value in the setting change mode is completed (confirmed), the 7-segment display is issued in a predetermined manner. As a predetermined mode, for example, a mode in which a predetermined display (for example, "7") blinks at regular time intervals is exemplified.

In addition, four 7-segment displays are arranged side by side to enable display of four digits, and the mode is displayed by the first two digits (two) (for example, "01" in setting change mode). However, in the setting confirmation mode, "02" is displayed respectively), and the setting value is displayed by the latter two digits (two pieces) (for example, the first value is "01", the second value is " 02”, . . . , and the sixth value is displayed as “06”).

Next, with reference to FIGS. 108 to 114, each part (box cover A200, box base A300, and main controller A110) constituting the board box A100 will be described in order. First, the box cover A200 will be described with reference to FIGS. 108 to 110. FIG.

108 is a front perspective view of the box cover A200, FIG. 109 is a rear perspective view of the box cover A200, and FIG. 110(a) is a partially enlarged front view of the box cover A200 as viewed in the direction of arrow CXa in FIG. 110(b) is a partially enlarged rear view of the box cover A200 as viewed in the direction of arrow CXb in FIG. 109. FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 108 to 110, the box cover A200 includes a front wall portion A201 formed in a substantially horizontally long rectangular plate shape when viewed from the front, and four sides of the front wall portion A201 extending toward the rear side (in the direction of arrow B). The wall portions (upper wall portion A202, lower wall portion A203, left wall portion A204 and right wall portion A205 connecting the upper wall portion A202 and the lower wall portion A203) which are erected and formed in a plate shape are mainly used. In preparation for this, these wall portions A201 to A205 form a box shape with an open back side. The box cover A200 is made of a light-transmissive resin material and molded using a resin molding die.

A two-stage step is formed on the upright end surfaces (surfaces on the arrow B direction side) of the upper wall portion A202, the lower wall portion A203, the left wall portion A204, and the right wall portion A205. The steps are such that a first surface (first step) is formed on the inner space side of the board box A100 (box cover A200), and a second surface is formed on the outer side of the first surface (opposite side to the inner space). A face (first step) is formed. The first surface is lower than the second surface (the standing height from the front wall portion A201 is small), and is a surface on which the main controller A110 (printed circuit board A119) is placed (hereinafter "seat surface A206"). ) is formed as

The seat surface A206 is formed in a substantially rectangular frame shape in front view in which surfaces (first surfaces) of the wall portions A201 to A205 are continuous, and is formed as a surface parallel to the front wall portion A201. Four corner portions of the seat surface A206 (portions where the surfaces (first surfaces) of the wall portions A201 to A205 are connected) are recessed with fastening holes A206a having internal threads threaded on the inner periphery. be done.

Therefore, main controller A110 (printed circuit board A119) has the outer edge side of its front surface in contact with seat surface A206, and screw ASC (Fig. 117(b) and FIG. 118(b)) is screwed into the fastening hole A206a, so that it is fastened and fixed to the box cover A200 (seat surface A206) in a posture parallel to the front wall A201, and attached to the board box A100. be housed.

A plurality of engaging pieces A207 are arranged side by side at predetermined intervals on the upper wall portion A202 and the lower wall portion A203. The engaging piece A207 has a base portion erected from the upper wall portion A202 and the lower wall portion A203 toward the rear side (in the direction of the arrow B), and extends in one direction (in the direction of the arrow R) from the erected tip of the base portion. It is formed in a substantially L-shaped bent shape from the extended portion, and is engaged with the engaged portion A307 of the box base A300, as will be described later.

A part of the front wall portion A201 is recessed toward the rear side (in the direction of arrow B). The recessed portion includes a plate-shaped operation wall portion A210 located backward (toward the main controller 110 side) from the front wall portion A201, and each side of the operation wall portion A210 is formed by the front wall portion. The front wall portion A201 is formed by the plate-like wall portions (first connection wall portion A220, second connection wall portion A230, and third connection wall portion A240) connected to A201.

That is, the outer surface on the front side of the board box A100 (surface in the direction of the arrow F) is positioned closer to the main controller A110 than the first area formed by the front wall portion A201 and the first area. and a second region formed by the wall portion A210.

The operation wall portion A210 is a portion that forms the operation surface of the switch device A120 and the key device A130, and has a substantially oblong rectangular shape in front view (the length in the directions of arrows L and R is longer than the length in the directions of arrows U and D). It is formed in a rectangular shape with an elongated dimension) and arranged in a posture substantially parallel to the front wall portion A201.

Note that the operation wall portion A210 is arranged on one side (rotational axis A410 side of the sealing unit A400) of the center in the longitudinal direction of the box cover A200 when viewed from the front (viewed in the direction of arrow B).

The first connection wall portion A220 is a wall portion that connects one side of the operation wall portion A210 in the longitudinal direction (arrow L direction side) to the front wall portion A201. It is formed to incline (downward) in the direction of approaching the main controller A110 as it goes. Therefore, on the front side (arrow F direction side) of the first connection wall portion A220, a space can be formed that continues to the space on the front side (arrow F direction side) of the operation wall portion A210. As a space including the space on the front side of the operation wall A210, the space as a whole (space that can be used when operating the key device A130) can be expanded.

In addition, in this embodiment, the inclination angle of the first connection wall portion A220 with respect to the front wall portion A201 and the operation wall portion A210 is set to approximately 45 degrees. As a result, it is possible to achieve both expansion of the space on the front side (arrow F direction side) of the operation wall portion A210 and securing of space inside the board box A100.

The second connection wall portion A230 extends along one side of the operation wall portion A210 in the short direction (arrow U direction side), and the third connection wall portion A240 extends along the other longitudinal direction side of the operation wall portion A210 (arrow R direction side). direction side) are connected to the front wall A201, and are arranged in a posture substantially perpendicular to the front wall A201 and the operation wall A210.

The operation wall portion A210 has an opening A250 for projecting the operation portion A122 to the outside of the board box A100, an opening A260 for allowing the key A140 to be inserted into and removed from the key device A130, and the main controller A110 ( Openings AOP1 to AOP8 are formed to allow connection to connectors (not shown) mounted on the printed circuit board A119).

The opening A250 has a front view shape corresponding to the outer shape of the operation portion A122 (in this embodiment, a substantially square shape when viewed from the front), and is substantially square in the longitudinal direction (directions of arrows L and R) of the operation wall portion A210. placed in the center. Around the opening A250, a guide wall A251 is erected from the front surface (outer surface, arrow F direction side) of the operation wall portion A210.

The guide wall A251 guides the displacement of the operation part A122 in the pushing direction (direction of arrow B) and also displaces it in a direction orthogonal to the pushing direction (direction parallel to the plane containing arrows U, D and arrows L, R). It is a portion for restricting (tilting), and is formed in a substantially square frame shape surrounding the opening A250 when viewed from the front, and the inner peripheral surface thereof is formed to smoothly connect to the inner peripheral surface of the opening A250.

In this embodiment, the height of the guide wall A251 standing from the operation wall A210 is higher than the tip of the operation part A122 pushed to the operation position (turned on position) from the operation wall A210. The dimension is set so that the tip is at a low position (the tip of the operation portion A122 protrudes outward (in the direction of the arrow F) from the standing tip of the guide wall A251). As a result, it is possible to prevent the guide wall A251 from interfering with the push-in operation of the operation portion A122, thereby improving the operability of the operation portion A122.

However, the standing height of the guide wall A251 from the operation wall A210 is higher than the tip of the operation part A122 pushed to the operation position (turned on position). The dimension may be set to a position (the tip of the operation portion A122 is retracted inward (arrow B direction side) from the standing tip of the guide wall A251). As a result, it is possible to prevent the operating portion A122 from being unintentionally pushed (turned on) to the operating position due to careless operation by the operator or contact (interference) with another member.

In addition, the tip of the operation part A122 pushed in to the operating position (turned-on position) of the guide wall A251 from the operation wall A210 is substantially the erection tip from the operation wall A210. The dimensions may be set at the same height position. When the operating portion A122 is pushed in, the fingers are brought into contact with the standing tip of the guide wall A251, so that the operator can recognize that the operating portion A122 has been pushed up to the operating position based on such abutment. . This is effective when it is necessary to operate the operation unit A122 in a situation where the operation unit A122 cannot be visually recognized.

A covering portion A270 protrudes from the operation wall portion A210 from the front surface (the outer surface, the surface in the direction of the arrow F). The covering portion A270 is a portion that covers a portion of the front end side (arrow F direction side) of the key device A130 (see FIG. 112(a)), and is a peripheral wall that is erected from the operation wall portion A210 and formed in a cylindrical shape. A portion A271 and a plate-like end wall portion A272 that closes (forms an end face) the protruding tip of the peripheral wall portion A271, and a part of the tip side of the key device A130 is accommodated in the inner space thereof. be.

The peripheral wall portion A271 includes a base portion A271a formed in a cylindrical shape having a substantially circular cross section, and a pair of projections projecting radially outward from two opposing locations (positions with a phase difference of approximately 180 degrees) on the base portion A271a. A part A271b. The peripheral wall portion A271 (base portion A271a and projection portion A271b) is formed to have substantially the same cross-sectional shape as a whole along the axial direction (directions of arrows F and B). Therefore, the operation wall portion A210 has substantially the same shape as the cross-sectional shape of the peripheral wall portion A271 (the base portion A271a and the protrusion A271b) (that is, a circular shape in which two opposing portions protrude radially outward). is formed (see FIG. 110(b)).

The opening A260 is formed in the projecting tip surface of the covering portion A270, that is, in the end surface wall portion A272. As a result, the end wall portion A272 is formed in a plate shape extending radially inward from the inner peripheral surface of the projecting tip of the peripheral wall portion A271. That is, the end wall portion A272 is formed as a plate (cantilever beam) having a base end fixed to the inner peripheral surface of the peripheral wall portion A271 and one end (opening A260 side) being free.

Here, the opening A260 is provided only in a region corresponding to the displacement trajectory of the key A140 when the key A140 is displaced (rotated) between the OFF position and the ON position (the region necessary to allow the displacement). It is formed. Specifically, the opening A260 includes a first fan-shaped opening with a center angle of approximately 90 degrees for allowing displacement of a portion on one side of the rotation center of the key A140, and an opening on the other side of the rotation center of the key A140. A second fan-shaped opening with a central angle of approximately 90 degrees for allowing displacement of the portion (one side and the opposite side) is formed in a shape that is combined with a phase difference of approximately 180 degrees.

As a result, the end wall portion A272 has an annular portion A272a extending radially inward from the inner peripheral surface of the projecting tip of the peripheral wall portion A271 and formed in a substantially annular shape when viewed from the front (as viewed in the direction of arrow B). A square portion A272b extending radially inward from the inner edge of the annular portion A272a and having a substantially triangular shape when viewed from the front (as viewed in the direction of arrow B) is formed. The rectangular portion A272b is arranged in a posture tapering inward in the radial direction when viewed from the front (viewed in the direction of arrow B), and is formed at two locations with a phase difference of approximately 180 degrees.

Note that the key A140 has different dimensions for the turning radius of the portion on one side of the center of rotation and the radius of rotation of the portion on the other side of the center of rotation. Therefore, the opening A260 has a different size (radius) between the first fan-shaped opening and the second fan-shaped opening.

A first protrusion A211 and a second protrusion A212 protrude from the front surface (the outer surface, the surface facing the arrow F direction) of the operation wall A210. These first ridges A211 and second ridges A212 are ridges extending in a stripe shape while maintaining a substantially rectangular cross-sectional shape, and one end is connected to the outer peripheral surface (outer surface) of the covering portion A270. .

Specifically, one end of the first protrusion A211 is connected to the outer peripheral surface (outer surface) of the protrusion A271b of the peripheral wall A271 at a position (phase) facing the edge of the key A140 in the OFF position. One end of the ridge A212 is connected to the outer peripheral surface (outer surface) of the base A271a of the peripheral wall A271 at a position (phase) facing the edge of the key A140 in the ON position. That is, one end of the first ridge A211 and one end of the second ridge A212 are connected to the outer peripheral surface (outer surface) of the covering portion A270 at positions with a phase difference of approximately 180 degrees.

In addition, on the front surface (outer surface, arrow F direction side) of the operation wall portion A210, a display portion is provided at a position adjacent to the other end of the first protrusion A211 and the second protrusion A212 (on the extension line of the other end). are respectively formed. The display section is a part that shows information on the operation position (rotational position) of the key A140, and "OFF" and "ON" are displayed. That is, the key A140 with its edge toward one end of the first protrusion A211 is placed at the OFF position (see FIG. 115(a)), and the key with its edge toward one end of the second protrusion A212. A140 is placed in the ON position (see FIG. 115(b)).

The opening AOP1 is formed in the operation wall A210, and the openings AOP2 to AOP8 are formed (in parallel) in series (one line) along the edge of the front wall A201.

Standing walls A280 and A290 are erected on the rear surface (inner surface, surface on the arrow B direction side) of the operation wall portion A210. The erected wall A280 includes a first erected wall A281, a second erected wall A282, a third erected wall A283, and a fourth erected wall A284. A250 is surrounded (see FIG. 110(b)). Therefore, when the main controller A110 is housed in the board box A100, the switch device A120 is surrounded by the standing wall A280.

The first erected wall A281 is arranged between the opening A250 and the second connection wall portion A230, and formed in a plate shape substantially parallel to each of the second connection wall portion A230 and the lower wall portion A203. The second erected wall A282 and the third erected wall A283 are opposed to each other with the opening A250 interposed therebetween, and are formed in a plate shape substantially orthogonal to the first erected wall A281. The fourth erected wall A284 is arranged between the opening A250 and the lower wall portion A203, and is formed in a plate shape substantially parallel to the first erected wall A281.

The second erected wall A282 and the third erected wall A283 are connected to the first erected wall A281 on one side and to the lower wall portion A203 on the other side. That is, the first erected wall A281 is connected to the lower wall portion A203 via the second erected wall A282 and the third erected wall A283. The fourth standing wall A284 is connected to the second standing wall A282 on one side and to the third standing wall A283 on the other side.

The erected wall A290 includes a first erected wall A291, a second erected wall A292, and a third erected wall A293, and the opening A260 is surrounded by these erected walls A291, A292, and A293 (see FIG. 110). (b)). Therefore, when the main controller A110 is housed in the board box A100, the key device A130 is surrounded by the standing wall A290.

The first erected wall A291 is arranged between the opening A260 and the second connection wall A230, and formed in a plate shape substantially parallel to the second connection wall A230 and the bottom wall A203. The second erected wall A292 and the third erected wall A293 are opposed to each other with the opening A260 interposed therebetween, and are formed in a plate shape substantially perpendicular to the first erected wall A291.

The second erected wall A292 and the third erected wall A293 are connected to the first erected wall A291 on one side and to the lower wall portion A203 on the other side. That is, the first erected wall A291 is connected to the lower wall portion A203 via the second erected wall A292 and the third erected wall A293. The fourth standing wall A284 is connected to the second standing wall A292 on one side and the third standing wall A293 on the other side.

The standing wall A290 is formed in a size surrounding the covering portion A270 (a position outside the covering portion A270) when viewed from the front (as viewed in the direction of arrow B). Specifically, when viewed from the front (viewed in the direction of arrow B), the outer surface (arc) of the base portion A271a of the peripheral wall portion A271 of the covering portion A270 is aligned with the inner surface (straight line) of the second erected wall A292 and the third erected wall A293. The outer surface (circular arc) of the protrusion A271b in the peripheral wall portion A271 of the covering portion A270 is inscribed in the inner surfaces (straight lines) of the first standing wall A291 and the lower wall portion A203, respectively.

The first erected walls A281 and A291, the second erected walls A282 and A292, and the third erected walls A283 and A293 of the erected walls A280 and A290 are the rear surface (inner surface, arrow B direction side) of the operation wall portion A210. The standing height from the surface) is the same, and the standing tip surfaces (surfaces on the arrow B direction side) of the respective standing walls A281, A291, A282, A292, A283, and A293 are the bearing surface A206. placed at the same height as

Therefore, the erected walls A280 and A290 are such that the erected tip surfaces of the second erected walls A282, A292 and the third erected walls A283, A293 are connected to the seat surface A206, and the seat surface A206 and the respective erected walls A281, A293 , A282, A292, A283, and A293 are positioned on the same plane (form the same plane). As a result, when the main controller A110 (printed circuit board A119) is fastened and fixed to the box cover A200 (seat A206), the first standing walls A281 and A291, the second standing walls A282 and A292 and the third standing walls A282 and A292 are fixed. The upright tip surfaces (surfaces in the direction of arrow B) of the walls A283 and A293 are brought into contact with the front surface (surface in the direction of arrow F) of the main controller A110 (printed circuit board A119).

Here, in the erected wall A280, the length dimensions of the second erected wall A282 and the third erected wall A283 (the dimensions in the directions of arrows U and D) are the length dimensions of the first erected wall A281 (the dimensions of the arrows L and R-direction dimension). Therefore, as will be described later, when the outer surface of the tilted switch device A120 abuts against the inner surface of the erected wall A280 (the second erected wall A282 and the third erected wall A283), the second erected wall A282 and the third standing wall A283 may be deformed and the tilting of the switch device A120 may not be suppressed.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the opposing portions of the second erected wall A282 and the third erected wall A283 are connected by the fourth erected wall A284, the second erected wall A282 and the third erected wall Deformation of A283 can be suppressed. As a result, tilting of the switch device A120 can be suppressed.

On the other hand, since the fourth standing wall A284 is arranged at a position close to the lower wall portion A203, the material volume in the vicinity of the fourth standing wall A284 increases. This corresponds to the formation of a part with a large thickness dimension, and due to the difference in shrinkage rate from other parts, molding defects occur in the part with a large thickness dimension and its vicinity. give rise to

On the other hand, the erected height of the fourth erected wall A284 is smaller (lower) than the erected heights of the first erected wall A281, the second erected wall A282, and the third erected wall A283. As a result, while securing the function of suppressing the deformation of the second erected wall A282 and the third erected wall A283, the material volume in the vicinity of the fourth erected wall A284 is reduced, and molding defects due to the difference in shrinkage rate are eliminated. can be suppressed.

In addition, since the fourth standing wall A284 is provided at a position closer to the opening A250 than the lower wall portion A203, the switch device A120 is prevented from tilting in the direction of the arrow D, as will be described later. By bringing the outer surface of the device A120 into contact with the inner surface of the fourth standing wall A284, the tilting thereof can be suppressed within an appropriate range (that is, tilting at a smaller angle than in the case of contacting the lower wall portion A203). .

On the inner surfaces of the first erected walls A281, A291, the second erected walls A282, A292, and the third erected walls A283, A293 of the erected walls A280, A290, the erected tip side (arrow B direction), tapered surfaces A280a and A290a, which are inclined surfaces approaching the outer surface side, are formed. As a result, the thickness dimension (plate thickness dimension) of each of the erected walls A281, A291, A282, A292, A283, and A293 at the erected distal end is gradually reduced toward the erected distal end side, and each of the erected walls A281 is reduced accordingly. , A291, A282, A292, A283, and A293 are reduced in area.

Note that the tapered surfaces A280a and A290a may be omitted. The tapered surfaces A280a and A290a are formed on the outer surfaces of the first erected walls A281 and A291, the second erected walls A282 and A292, and the third erected walls A283 and A293 of the erected walls A280 and A290. You can set it.

An erecting wall A208 is erected on the rear surface (the inner surface, the surface on the arrow B direction side) of the front wall portion A201. In addition to the erected walls A280 and A290 described above, an erected wall A209 is erected on the rear surface (the inner surface, the surface facing the arrow B direction) of the operation wall portion A210.

The standing wall A208 is formed in a box-like shape with four sides of plate-shaped bodies connected to each other and the side opposite to the front wall portion A201 is open. 4). The standing wall A209 has an inner shape corresponding to the opening AOP1, and is formed in a box-like shape with an open side opposite to the operation wall A210. is formed at a position corresponding to Therefore, when the main controller A110 is housed in the board box A100, the arithmetic unit (MPU201) is surrounded by the standing wall A208, and the connector is surrounded by the standing wall A209.

Here, the plurality of erected walls A208, A209, A280, and A290 surrounding the plurality of objects are arranged such that the height positions of the erected tip surfaces of one or more of the erected walls correspond to the height positions of the remaining erected walls. It is set at a height position different from the height position of the tip surface. In this embodiment, the height position of the upright end face of the upright wall A209 is retreated from the height position of the upright end face of the upright walls A208, A280, A290 (that is, separated from the printed circuit board A119). side). As a result, even if there are dimensional tolerances of the standing walls A208, A209, A280, and A290, mounting tolerances of the printed circuit board A119 to the box cover A200, or dimensional tolerances of the printed circuit board A119 (for example, variations in flatness), , the standing walls A208, A280, and A290 can be easily brought into close contact with the printed circuit board A119 compared to the standing wall A209. That is, it is possible to ensure that the erected wall surrounding the object of high importance is in close contact with the printed circuit board A119.

Next, with reference to FIG. 111, the box base A300 will be described. FIG. 111(a) is a front perspective view of the box base A300, and FIG. 111(b) is a rear perspective view of the box base A300.

As shown in FIG. 111, the box base A300 includes a rear wall portion A301 formed in a plate shape of a substantially horizontally long rectangle when viewed from the front, and four sides of the rear wall portion A301 extending toward the front side (in the direction of arrow F). Mainly provided and plate-shaped wall portions (upper wall portion A302, lower wall portion A303, left wall portion A304 and right wall portion A305 connecting the upper wall portion A302 and the lower wall portion A303), These walls A301 to A305 form a box shape with an open front side. The box base A300 is made of a resin material and molded using a resin molding die.

A plurality of engaged portions A307 are arranged side by side at predetermined intervals on the upper wall portion A302 and the lower wall portion A303. The engaged portion A307 is a portion with which the engaging piece A207 of the box cover A200 is engaged, and is formed to protrude downward (arrow D direction side).

To connect the box base A300 and the box cover A200, first, the phase is shifted by the extension length of the extension portion on the side opposite to the extension direction of the extension portion of the engagement piece A207 (arrow L direction side). They face each other at a shifted position, and push the box cover A200 toward the box base A300. As a result, the engaging piece A207 enters the space between the adjacent engaged portions A307. arrow R direction).
As a result, the engaging piece A207 enters the rear side (the arrow B direction side) of the engaged portion A307, and the two are engaged (displacement of the box cover A200 in the arrow F direction is restricted).

Next, main controller A110 will be described with reference to FIGS. 112 to 114. FIG. FIG. 112(a) is a front perspective view of main controller A110, FIG. 112(b) is a back perspective view of main controller A110, and FIG. FIG. 11 is a partially enlarged front perspective view of the control device A110;

114(a) is a front view of main controller A110 as viewed in the direction of arrow CXIVa in FIG. 112(a), and FIG. 114(b) is a front view of main controller A110 as viewed in the direction of arrow CXIVb in FIG. 114(a). 114(c) is a side view of main controller A110 as seen in the direction of arrow CXIVc in FIG. 114(a).

112 to 114, in order to simplify the drawings and facilitate understanding, only the major electronic components mounted on the printed circuit board A119 are illustrated, and other illustrations are omitted. .

As shown in FIGS. 112 to 114, the main controller A110 includes a printed circuit board A119, and a switch device A120 and a key device A130 mounted on the printed circuit board A119. The printed circuit board A119 has various electronic components (IC, resistors, capacitors and transistors) mounted on a board made of an insulating resin material, and the circuits (patterns) connecting these electronic components are conductors such as copper foil. , and insertion holes A112 are formed in four corner portions.

The printed circuit board A119 is installed in the circuit board box A100 with the front surface (the surface on which the switch device A120 and the key device A130 are mounted, the surface in the direction of the arrow F) facing the rear surface of the box cover A200 (front wall portion A201). stored in.

In this case, of the front surface of the printed circuit board A119, at least the areas AS1 and AS2 on which the standing walls A280 and A290 of the box cover A200 and the seat surface A206 of the lower wall A203 abut (Fig. 114 (see (a)), no electronic components are mounted or no circuits are formed, and the areas AS1 and AS2 are formed as flat surfaces. It should be noted that FIG. 114(a) shows only the portion of the area where the seat surface A206 abuts, which is continuous with the erected walls A280 and A290.

The switch device A120 includes a main body A123 that holds the operating part A122 displaceably (pushing operation), and a coil spring ( an urging means (not shown), a contact (not shown) disposed inside the main body A123 and whose contact is switched according to the displacement of the operation portion A122, and a leg A121 electrically connected to the contact. Prepare.

The main body A123 is formed in a substantially cubic shape and includes a base A123a mounted on the front of the printed circuit board A119, and a cylindrical protrusion A123b protruding from the front of the base A123a (surface on the arrow F direction side), The outer diameter dimension of the protrusion A123b is made larger than the maximum dimension (diagonal length) of the opening A250 (the inner edge of the guide wall A251). When the main controller A110 is housed in the board box A100, the front surface of the protrusion A123b faces the rear surface of the operation wall portion A210 (surface in the arrow B direction).

In the present embodiment, the portion that protrudes from the bottom surface of the base A123a (the portion that is part of the bottom surface of the base A123a and from which the leg A121 protrudes) abuts the front surface of the printed circuit board A119. However, a gap may be formed between the bottom surface of the base portion A123a (a part of the bottom surface of the base portion A123a and from which the leg A121 protrudes) and the front surface of the printed circuit board A119. That is, the base A123a may be raised from the front of the printed circuit board A119 by the legs A121.

Further, in this embodiment, a predetermined gap is formed between the front surface of the protrusion A123b and the rear surface (the surface on the arrow B direction side) of the operation wall portion A210. However, the front surface of the projecting portion A123b and the back surface of the operation wall portion A210 (the surface on the arrow B direction side) may be in contact with each other.

The legs A121 protrude from the rear surface of the base portion A123a of the main body A123 (the surface facing the arrow B direction, the surface facing the printed circuit board A119), and as described above, are inserted from the front side into the holes opening in the printed circuit board A119. The part protruding to the back side is soldered. As a result, the switch device A120 is arranged (mounted) on the front side of the printed circuit board A119.

The key device A130 has a cylinder portion A132 formed as a lock that allows the rotation of the inner cylinder A132a with respect to the outer cylinder A132b when a suitable key A140 is inserted into the inner cylinder A132a, and the cylinder portion A132 is arranged inside. A main body A133 that holds the main body A133, a support A134 that supports the outer peripheral surface (outer surface) of the main body A133, and a contact whose contact is switched according to the state of the cylinder part A132 (rotational position of the inner cylinder A132a with respect to the outer cylinder A132b) (not shown) and a leg A131 electrically connected to the contact.

The main body A133 has a base portion A133a which is formed in a substantially cylindrical shape and holds the cylinder portion A132 on the inner peripheral side (inside) of the base portion A133a. ), and an end portion A133c forming an end face on the tip side (arrow F direction side) of the base portion A133a.

In this embodiment, the portion that protrudes from the bottom surface of the main body A133 (the portion that is part of the bottom surface of the main body A133 and from which the legs A131 protrude) abuts the front surface of the printed circuit board A119. However, a gap may be formed between the bottom surface of the main body A133 (a portion of the bottom surface of the main body A133 and from which the leg A131 protrudes) and the front surface of the printed circuit board A119. That is, the main body A133 may be raised from the front of the printed circuit board A119 by the legs A131.

The end surface of the protrusion A133b on the arrow F direction side is formed at a position one step lower (arrow B direction side) from the end surface (surface on the arrow F direction side) formed by the end portion A133c. The end portion A133c is formed with a circular opening in a front view at a position substantially concentric with the base portion A133a, through which the key A140 can be inserted into and removed from the cylinder portion A132 (inner cylinder A132a). .

When the main controller A110 is housed in the board box A100, a part of the main body A133 on the front end side (arrow F direction side) is housed in the inner space of the covering section A270.

Specifically, the outer diameter of the base portion A133a of the main body A133 is set to a value equal to or slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the base portion A271a in the peripheral wall portion A271 of the covering portion A270, and the protruding shape of the protrusion A133b of the main body A133 The projection A271b of the peripheral wall portion A271 in the portion A270 is formed to have a size equal to or slightly smaller than the recessed shape of the protrusion A271b of the peripheral wall portion A271. The protrusion A133b of the A133 is accommodated on the inner peripheral side (inside) of the protrusion A271b of the peripheral wall portion A271.

Further, in this case, a predetermined gap is formed between the front surface (end surface, surface in the direction of arrow F) of the end portion A133c of the main body A133 and the rear surface (surface in the direction of arrow B) of the end surface wall portion A272 of the covering portion A270. It is formed. Note that the front surface of the end portion A133c and the back surface of the end wall portion A272 may be configured to contact each other.

The legs A131 protrude from the rear surface of the base portion A133a of the main body A133 (the surface facing the arrow B direction, the surface facing the printed circuit board A119), and as described above, are inserted from the front side into the holes that open to the printed circuit board A119. The part protruding to the back side is soldered. As a result, the key device A130 is arranged (mounted) on the front side of the printed circuit board A119.

The support body A134 includes a base part A134a in which an opening is formed substantially in the center through which the main body A133 (a base part A133a and a projection part A133b) is inserted. A pair of extending portions A134b and a pair of reinforcing portions A134c extending from the remaining two sides of the base portion A134a toward the printed circuit board A119 are provided. formed in

The extension length of the extension portion A134b from the base portion A134a is larger than the extension length of the reinforcement portion A134c from the base portion A134a, and the extension tip surface of the extension portion A134b (surface on the arrow B direction side) abuts on the front surface of the printed circuit board A119 (the surface on the arrow F direction side). In addition, a leg A134b1 is protrudingly provided on the extension tip surface of the extension portion A134b. The support A134 is arranged on the front side of the printed circuit board A119 and stands on its own by inserting the leg A134b1 from the front side into the hole opening in the printed circuit board A119 and soldering the portion projecting to the rear side. As a result, the main body A133 can be supported by the support A134, and the support A134 can prevent the main body A133 from tilting with respect to the printed circuit board A119.

A gap may be provided between the extended end surface of the extended portion A134b (surface on the arrow B direction side) and the front surface of the printed circuit board A119 (surface on the arrow F direction side). That is, the support A134 may be raised from the front of the printed circuit board A119 by the legs A131. In this case, the heat dissipation of the key device A130 can be enhanced by the gap.

On the other hand, the extension length from the base portion A134a of the extension portion A134b and the extension length from the reinforcement portion A134c may be the same. That is, the extending tip surface of the reinforcing portion A134c (surface on the arrow B direction side) may also be configured to contact the front surface of the printed circuit board A119 (surface on the arrow F direction side). In this case, the main body A133 is supported by both the extended portion A134b and the reinforcing portion A134c, and the tilting of the main body A133 with respect to the printed circuit board A119 can be suppressed more firmly. Also, it is possible to prevent foreign objects such as wires from entering the leg A131 side of the key device A130.

Also, the soldering of the leg A134b1 is omitted, and the leg A134b1 is formed to have a substantially dogleg or S-shaped cross-sectional shape, and the leg A134b1 is inserted into the hole of the printed circuit board A119 in an elastically deformed state. It is good also as a structure to carry out. That is, the elastic recovery force of the leg A134b1 may be used to elastically engage the leg A134b1 with the inner peripheral surface (inner surface) of the hole of the printed circuit board A119. Since soldering can be omitted, the manufacturing cost can be reduced. Alternatively, in addition to elastic engagement of the leg A134b1 with the hole, soldering may also be performed. It is possible to more strongly prevent the leg A134b1 from coming out of the hole. Therefore, the function of the support A134 that supports the inclination of the main body A133 can be further enhanced.

The leg A134b1 has a width dimension (dimensions in the directions of arrows L and B, dimensions in the left-right direction in FIG. The hole of the printed circuit board A119 through which the leg A134b1 is inserted is formed in a rectangular shape. As a result, when the rigidity of the leg A134b1 is increased and the tilting of the main body A133 is supported by the support body A134, deformation or breakage of the base of the leg A134b1 (connected portion with the extended portion A134b) can be suppressed.

However, the width dimension of the leg A134b1 may be substantially the same as the thickness dimension. That is, the cross-sectional shape of the leg A134b1 may be square.

In addition, by forming the reinforcing portions A134c on the two opposing sides of the support A134, it is possible to restrict the bending and twisting of the base portion A134a. As a result, the rigidity of the support body A134 as a whole can be increased, and the function of supporting the main body A133 can be enhanced, so that tilting of the main body A133 with respect to the printed circuit board A119 can be more strongly restricted (suppressed).

Next, the detailed configuration of the board box A100 will be described with reference to FIGS. 115 to 119. FIG.

FIG. 115(a) is a partially enlarged front view of the board box A100 with the key A140 operated to the off position, and FIG. 115(b) is a board box A100 with the key A140 operated to the on position. 116(a) is a partially enlarged side view of the board box A100 as viewed in the direction of arrow CXVIa in FIG. 115(a), and FIG. 116(b) is a partially enlarged front view of FIG. 115(b). FIG. 10 is a partially enlarged side view of the board box A100 as viewed in the direction of arrow CXVIb;

117(a) is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the substrate box A100 taken along the section line CXVIIa-CXVIIa of FIG. 115(a), and FIG. 117(b) is a substrate taken along the section line CXVIIb-CXVIIb of FIG. 115(a). 118(a) is a partially enlarged sectional view of the substrate box A100 taken along the cutting line CXVIIIa-CXVIIIa of FIG. 115(a), and FIG. 118(b) is a partially enlarged sectional view of the box A100 of FIG. FIG. 10 is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the board box A100 taken along the cutting line CXVIIIb-CXVIIIb of a).

119(a) is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the substrate box A100 taken along the section line CXIXa-CXIXa in FIG. 116(a), and FIG. 119(b) is a substrate taken along the section line CXIXb-CXIXb in FIG. FIG. 10 is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of Box A100;

117 to 119, in order to simplify the drawing and facilitate understanding, the internal structure is not shown, and the cross section is hatched by single hatching to schematically show the switch device A120 and the key device A130. diagrammatically.

As shown in FIGS. 115 to 118, the board box A100 has a covering portion A270 projecting from the front surface (the surface facing the arrow F direction) of the operation wall portion A210 of the box cover A200. An opening A260 is formed in an end wall portion A272 that forms a tip surface (a surface on the arrow F direction side). This makes it difficult for the tip of a foreign object such as a wire to reach the opening A260.

For example, if the opening A260 cannot be visually recognized by an unauthorized person due to a shield or the like, and it is difficult to directly insert the tip of a foreign object such as a wire into the opening A260, the tip of the foreign object such as a wire can be inserted into the box cover A200 (for operation). A method of sliding on the front surface (outer surface, arrow F direction side surface) of the wall portion A210) to reach the opening A260 is performed.

On the other hand, since the covering portion A270 projects from the front surface (outer surface) of the operation wall portion A210, the tip of a foreign object such as a wire slides on the front surface (outer surface) of the operation wall portion A210. , the tip of the foreign matter such as a wire can be brought into contact with the outer surface of the covering portion A270 (the outer peripheral surface of the peripheral wall portion A271) to stop further progress (sliding). That is, the outer surface of the covering portion A270 (peripheral wall portion A271) can function as a wall that restricts sliding of foreign matter such as wires. As a result, it is possible to prevent a foreign object such as a wire from being inserted through the opening A260.

The covering part A270 has an internal space, and a part of the front end side (one end side, arrow F direction side) of the key device A130 of the main control device A110 is housed in the internal space. That is, the covering portion A270 covers a portion of the tip side of the key device A130.

Thereby, the gap between the inner surface of the covering portion A270 and the outer surface of the key device A130 can be bent. That is, when a foreign object such as a wire is inserted into the board box A100 from the opening A260, the route through which the foreign object such as the wire passes (the gap between the end wall portion A272 and the end portion A133c and the peripheral wall portion A271 and the base A133a and the protrusion A133b) is bent, and the wall with which the tip of a foreign object such as a wire hits (a wire passing through the gap between the end wall A272 and the end A133c A wall against which the tip of the foreign matter abuts (that is, the inner surface of the peripheral wall portion A271) can be formed in the path. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the main controller A110 from being tampered with by an inserted foreign object such as a wire (see FIGS. 117(a) and 117(b)).

The key device A130 is formed by inserting a substantially cylindrical main body A133 into a support A134 having a substantially rectangular parallelepiped outer shape. In this case, the width dimension of the support A134 (horizontal dimension in FIGS. 117(a) and 117(b)) corresponds to the inner diameter dimension of the covering portion A270 (peripheral wall portion A271) (FIGS. 117(a) and 117(b)). is set to a value larger than the left-right dimension of

As a result, the upper surface of the support A134 (the surface facing the arrow F direction) can face the inner surface of the operation wall portion A210 (the surface facing the arrow B direction). Therefore, the gap between the inner surface of the covering portion A270 and the outer surface of the key device A130 can be bent.

That is, when a foreign matter such as a wire is inserted into the board box A100 from the opening A260, the path through which the foreign matter such as the wire passes (formed by the gap between the peripheral wall portion A271 and the base portion A133a and the projection portion A133b) path) is bent to form a wall against which the tip of a foreign object such as a wire strikes (a wall against which the tip of a foreign object such as a wire passing through the gap between the peripheral wall portion A271 and the base A133a and the protrusion A133b strikes, that is, the support A134). In addition, for a foreign matter such as a wire that collides with the upper surface of the support A 134 and changes its traveling direction, the vertical walls A291, A292, A293 and the inner surface of the lower wall portion A203 are formed in the path. be able to. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the main controller A110 from being tampered with by an inserted foreign object such as a wire (see FIGS. 117(a) and 117(b)).

A protruding portion A271b is formed on the peripheral wall portion A271 of the covering portion A270, and a protruding portion A133b is formed on the main body A133. The protrusions A133b of the main body A133 are accommodated on the inner peripheral side (inner side) of the protrusions A271b of the peripheral wall portion A271.

As a result, the circumferential outer surface of the projection A133b (the surface facing the arrows L and R) and the circumferential inner surface of the projection A271b (the surface facing the arrows L and R) can face each other. Therefore, the gap between the inner surface of the covering portion A270 and the outer surface of the key device A130 can be bent.

That is, when a foreign object such as a wire is inserted into the board box A100 from the opening A260, the route through which the foreign object such as the wire passes The tip of foreign matter such as a wire that passes along the circumferential direction through the gap between the peripheral wall portion A271 and the base portion A133a and the protrusion A133b. Abutting walls, that is, the circumferential outer surface of the protrusion A133b and the circumferential inner surface of the protrusion A271b) can be formed in the path. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the main controller A110 from being tampered with by an inserted foreign object such as a wire (see FIG. 118(a)).

In the switch device A120, the outer diameter dimension of the protrusion A123b is set to a value larger than the maximum dimension (diagonal length) of the opening A250 (the inner edge of the guide wall A251). As a result, the upper surface of the protrusion A123b (the surface facing the arrow F direction) can face the inner surface of the operation wall portion A210 (the surface facing the arrow B direction). Therefore, it is possible to bend the gap between the inner surface of the guide wall A251 and the operation wall portion A210 and the outer surface of the switch device A120.

That is, when a foreign object such as a wire is inserted into the board box A100 from the opening A250, the route through which the foreign object such as a wire passes path formed by the gap between the guide wall A251 and the operation part A122) is bent to form a wall against which the tip of a foreign object such as a wire hits (a wall against which the tip of a foreign object such as a wire passing through the gap between the guide wall A251 and the operation part A122 hits, that is, The upper surface of the protrusion A123b.In addition, foreign matter such as a wire that collides with the upper surface of the protrusion A123b and changes its traveling direction is routed through each of the standing walls A281, A282, A283 and the inner surface of the lower wall portion A203. can be formed in Therefore, it is possible to prevent the main controller A110 from being tampered with by an inserted foreign object such as a wire (see FIGS. 118(a) and 118(b)).

As described above, the covering part A270 has an internal space, and a part of the front end side (one end side, arrow F direction side) of the key device A130 of the main control device A110 is accommodated in the internal space. That is, the covering portion A270 covers a portion of the tip side of the key device A130.

As a result, the inner surface of the covering portion A270 and the outer surface of the key device A130 can face each other in a direction perpendicular to the inserting direction of the key A140 (direction parallel to a plane including arrows U, D and arrows L, R). Therefore, for example, an operator's careless operation or rough operation of the key A140 inserted into the key device A130, collision of another member with the key A140 during the operation of opening the inner frame 12 from the outer frame 11, etc. When an external force is applied to the key A140 in a direction orthogonal to the insertion direction, the outer surface of the key device A130 is brought into contact with the inner surface of the covering portion 170 to suppress (regulate) tilting of the key device A130.

Therefore, as described above, it is possible to prevent the leg A131 from being broken or bent, the leg A131 coming out of the hole of the printed circuit board A119, and the solder from peeling off. As a result, it is possible to prevent the key device A130 from falling off from the main control device A110 (printed circuit board A119), and the disconnection or poor contact of the key device A130 (leg A131).

An end face wall portion A272 is formed at the projecting tip (arrow F direction side) of the covering portion A270, and this end face wall portion A272 faces the end portion A133c of the key device A130. As a result, the area of the opening A260 (in addition to the area of the opening A260 when viewed from the front (viewed in the direction of arrow B), the cross-sectional area of the path through which a foreign object such as a wire passes) can be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a foreign object such as a wire from being inserted into the board box A100 and the main controller A110 being tampered with.

In particular, the end wall portion A272 of the covering portion A270 has square portions A272b extending radially inward from two points on the inner edge of the annular portion A272a. That is, the projecting tip surface of the covering portion A270 (the surface facing the direction of arrow F) is open only in the region that allows the displacement of the key A140 (the region corresponding to the displacement locus of the key A140). The rest of the tip surface (the surface on the arrow F direction side) is entirely the end surface wall portion A272. Therefore, by minimizing the area of the opening A260, it is possible to make it difficult to insert a foreign object such as a wire into the opening A260. In addition, since the facing area between the inner surface of the end wall portion A272 and the outer surface of the key device A130 (end portion A133c) can be maximized, even if a foreign object such as a wire is inserted through the opening A260, the foreign object such as the wire can pass through. It can be difficult.

In this way, in order to make the opening A260 an irregular shape (a shape in which a pair of fan shapes are opposed to each other), the end face wall portion A272 has a relatively complicated shape in which a pair of rectangular portions A272b protrude from the inner edge of an annular portion A272a. formed into a shape. In this case, the end wall portion A272 (annular portion A272a and square portion A272b) has a plate shape with a constant thickness (a cantilever with a base end fixed to the peripheral wall portion A271 and one end (extended tip) free). shape), the shape can be simplified and its formability can be ensured. As a result, the yield can be improved and the product cost can be reduced.

Here, only the peripheral wall portion A271 is formed in the covering portion A270 and the end wall portion A272 is not formed. configuration), when an external force is applied to the key A140 in a direction perpendicular to the insertion direction, the outer surface of the key device A130 is brought into contact with the inner surface of the peripheral wall portion A271 to suppress the tilting of the key device A130. (regulation) can be done.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, an end wall portion A272 is formed on the projecting tip side (arrow F direction side) of the covering portion A270, and the key A140 is formed on the inner edge of the end wall portion A272 (the portion forming the opening A260). can be abutted. That is, the position (key A140) farther from the fulcrum (leg A131) when the key device A130 tilts due to the action of the above-described external force can be brought into contact with the end wall portion A272. As a result, tilting of the key device A130 can be suppressed (regulated), and breakage of the box cover A200 (coating portion A270) can be suppressed.

In addition, the protrusion A133b of the main body A133 and the protrusion A271b of the peripheral wall A271 are partially formed in the circumferential direction, and the protrusion A133b of the main body A133 is accommodated on the inner peripheral side (inside) of the protrusion A271b of the peripheral wall A271. Therefore, as described above, the circumferential outer surface of the projection A133b (the surface facing the arrows L and R) and the circumferential inner surface of the projection A271b (the surface facing the arrows L and R) face each other. (See FIG. 118(a)).

Therefore, for example, an operator's careless operation or rough operation of the key A140 inserted into the key device A130, collision of another member with the key A140 during the operation of opening the inner frame 12 from the outer frame 11, etc. When an external force in the direction of rotation is applied to the key A140, the outer circumferential surface of the projection A133b (the surface facing the arrows L and R) is aligned with the inner circumferential surface of the projection A271b (the surface facing the arrows L and R). ) to restrict the rotation (displacement in the circumferential direction) of the key device A130.

Therefore, as described above, it is possible to prevent the leg A131 from being broken or bent, the leg A131 coming out of the hole of the printed circuit board A119, and the solder from peeling off. As a result, it is possible to prevent the key device A130 from falling off from the main control device A110 (printed circuit board A119), and the disconnection or poor contact of the key device A130 (leg A131).

Here, for example, the operation portion A122 of the switch device A120 or the key A140 inserted into the key device A130 is carelessly or violently operated by the operator, and the operation portion A122 when the inner frame 12 is opened from the outer frame 11. Or, due to a collision of another member against the key A140, an external force is applied to the operation part A122 or the key A140 in a direction orthogonal to the pushing direction or the insertion direction (direction parallel to the plane containing arrows U, D and arrows L, R). When this is applied, the switch device A120, the key device A130 or the key A140 tilts, and there is a risk that the box cover A200 (in particular, the operation wall portion A210 and the covering portion A270) will be deformed and damaged due to their contact. .

On the other hand, erected walls A280 and A290 are erected on the rear surface (inner surface, surface facing the arrow B direction) of the operation wall portion A210. 117(a) and 117(b).

As a result, the standing walls A280 and A290 are erected (functioning as ribs) to improve the rigidity of the operation wall portion A210. The erected walls A280 and A290 can function as means).
As a result, deformation of the box cover A200 (in particular, the operation wall portion A210 and the covering portion A270) can be suppressed, and damage thereof can be suppressed.

Further, when the switch device A120 or the key device A130 is tilted by the action of an external force, the outer surfaces of the switch device A120 or the key device A130 are brought into contact with the inner surfaces of the erected walls A280 and A290, thereby It is possible to suppress (regulate) the tilting of the key device A130. That is, the portion that abuts on the switch device A120 or the key device A130 to suppress its tilting is shared not only by the operation wall portion A210 or the cover portion A270 but also by the erected walls A280 and A290, and the load is increased accordingly. can be dispersed. From this point as well, damage to the box cover A200 can be suppressed.

Furthermore, since the erected end surfaces of the erected walls A280 and A290 are in contact with the front surface of the printed circuit board A119, even if a foreign object such as a wire inserted through the openings A250 and A260 reaches the printed circuit board A119, The erected walls A280 and A290 can function as walls against which the tips of foreign objects such as wires hit (walls that restrict further progress). Thus, it is possible to prevent the main controller A110 (printed circuit board A119) from being tampered with.

The standing walls A280 and A290 are formed in a form surrounding the switch device A120 and the key device A130 together with the lower wall portion A203 (see FIG. 118(b)). That is, an area AS1 where the upright end surfaces (surfaces in the direction of arrow B) of the erected walls A280 and A290 and the seating surface A206 of the lower wall portion A203 and the front surface (surface in the direction of arrow F) of the printed circuit board A119 contact each other. , AS2 are formed in a substantially rectangular frame shape, and are formed as an endless continuous shape (closed shape) (see FIG. 114(a)).

Therefore, the standing walls A280 and A290 can block (divide) a path for foreign objects such as wires to enter the board box A100. That is, even if a foreign object such as a wire inserted through the openings A250 and A260 reaches the printed circuit board A119, it is restricted from advancing outside the space surrounded by the erected walls A280 and A290 and the lower wall portion A203. can be done. Thus, it is possible to prevent the main controller A110 (printed circuit board A119) from being tampered with.

In addition, the erected walls A280 and A290 are erected (functioning as ribs) by forming the erected walls A280 and A290 together with the lower wall portion A203 so as to surround the switch device A120 and the key device A130. ), not only can the rigidity of the operation wall portion A210 be further improved by function as a supporting portion (deformation suppressing means) for supporting the operation wall portion A210 and the covering portion A270 can be reliably exerted even when an external force acts in any direction within the plane including. As a result, deformation of the box cover A200 (in particular, the operation wall portion A210 and the covering portion A270) can be suppressed, and damage thereof can be suppressed.

Note that the first standing wall A291 is arranged in a posture perpendicular to the key A140 in the OFF position and parallel to the key A140 in the ON position. The three erected walls A293 are arranged in a posture orthogonal to the key A140 in the ON position and parallel to the key A140 in the OFF position. Therefore, the standing wall A290 can efficiently function as a support portion (deformation suppressing means) that supports the operation wall portion A210 and the covering portion A270.

That is, of the external forces parallel to the plane containing the arrows U and D and the arrows L and R, when the external forces in the directions of the arrows U and D or the directions of the arrows L and R are applied to the key A140, the standing wall While the load received by A290 (withstand load to be exerted by standing wall A290 as a support portion) is maximized, an external force acts in a direction inclined by a predetermined angle from arrows U and D or arrows L and R. In this case, there is a high possibility that the key A140 will rotate due to the inclination of the direction in which the external force acts. load capacity) is lower. As a result, by arranging the posture of the standing wall A290 as described above, the standing wall A290 can efficiently function as a support portion (deformation suppressing means) that supports the operation wall portion A210 and the covering portion A270. be able to.

The erected walls A280, A290 (the second erected walls A282, A292 and the third erected walls A283, A293) are connected to the lower wall portion A203. The rigidity of A280 and A290 can be increased, and the rigidity of the entire box cover A200 can be increased by connecting the inner surfaces of the operation wall portion A210 and the lower wall portion A203 via the standing walls A280 and A290. Therefore, the function of the erected walls A280 and A290 as supporting portions (deformation suppressing means) for supporting the operation wall portion A210 and the covering portion A270 can be enhanced. As a result, damage to the box cover A200 can be suppressed.

The surface of the printed circuit board A119 to which electronic components are connected by soldering is the surface facing the box base A300 (the surface opposite to the surface on which the switch device A120 and the key device A130 are mounted). , A290 and the bearing surface A206 of the lower wall portion A203 (see FIG. 114(a)), no electronic components are mounted or circuits are formed, and the area AS1 , AS2 are formed as flat surfaces.

Therefore, the standing walls A280 and A290 can be easily brought into close contact with the front surface (the arrow F direction side) of the printed circuit board A119, so that the standing walls A280 and A290 and the standing walls A280 and A290 It is possible to suppress the formation of a gap with the printed circuit board A119. Therefore, the standing walls A280 and A290 can reliably function as walls against which the tips of foreign objects such as wires inserted through the openings A250 and A260 abut.

The first erected walls A281, A291, the second erected walls A282, A292, and the third erected walls A283, A293 of the erected walls A280, A290 are formed with tapered surfaces A280a, A290a. The area of the surface (surface on the arrow B direction side) is reduced (see FIGS. 117 and 118). As a result, it is possible to increase the surface pressure of the upright end surface that abuts on the printed circuit board A119, thereby suppressing insertion of a foreign object such as a wire between the printed circuit board A119 and the upright walls A280 and A290.

In this case, the tapered surfaces A280a and A290a are formed on the inner surfaces of the erected walls A280 and A290 on the side of the erected tips (surfaces on the side facing the switch device A120 and the key device A130), thereby improving moldability. At the same time, it is possible to prevent a foreign object such as a wire from being inserted into the board box A100.

That is, by reducing the area of the upright tip surface by the inclined surfaces (tapered surfaces A280a and A290a) that gradually approach the outer surface side toward the upright tip side (in the direction of arrow B), the shape of the upright walls A280 and A290 can be changed. By making the change moderate, the fluidity of the resin in the mold can be ensured. Therefore, moldability can be improved.

Furthermore, when the erected end surfaces of the erected walls A280 and A290 are brought into contact with the front surface of the printed circuit board A119, a groove having a substantially V-shaped cross section can be formed by the tapered surfaces A280a and A290a and the front surface of the printed circuit board A119 ( See FIGS. 117(a) and 117(b)). Therefore, the tip of a foreign object such as a wire inserted through the openings A250 and A260 can be moved (guided) along the groove described above. In other words, it is possible to make it difficult for the liquid to pass through (into) the space between the erected end surfaces of the erected walls A280 and A290 and the front surface of the printed circuit board A119. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a foreign object such as a wire from being inserted into the board box A100.

A first protrusion A211 and a second protrusion A212 protrude from the front surface (the outer surface, the surface facing the arrow F direction) of the operation wall A210. One end of the first protrusion A211 and the second protrusion A212 is connected to the outer peripheral surface (outer surface) of the covering portion A270 (the base portion A271a or the protrusion A271b of the peripheral wall portion A271) (FIGS. 115(a) and 115( b) see).

Thereby, the first protrusion A211 and the second protrusion A212 can be made to function as ribs for increasing rigidity, and the covering portion A270 can be supported by the first protrusion A211 and the second protrusion A212. As a result, when the outer surfaces of the switch device A120 and the key device A130 are brought into contact with the inner surface of the covering portion A270, the rigidity of the ridges A211 and 222 is used to prevent the switch device A120 and the key device A130 from tilting. While being able to suppress reliably, damage to covering part A270 can be suppressed.

In addition, on the front surface (outer surface, arrow F direction side) of the operation wall portion A210, a display portion is provided at a position adjacent to the other end of the first protrusion A211 and the second protrusion A212 (on the extension line of the other end). (“ON” and “OFF”) are formed respectively. As a result, the first protrusion A211 and the second protrusion A212 can also function as an indication line for indicating the position corresponding to the predetermined information displayed by the display unit. Therefore, the product cost can be reduced accordingly.

In this case, the position where one end of the first protrusion A211 is connected to the outer peripheral surface (outer surface) of the covering portion A270 (the protrusion A271b of the peripheral wall portion A271) corresponds to the end surface of the key A140 in the OFF position (the surface gripped with the fingers). (narrow surface along the outer edge of the key A140) and the same phase position (position facing the end surface of the key A140) (see FIG. 115(a)). The position connected to the outer peripheral surface (outer surface) of the base A271a) is at the same phase position as the end surface of the key A140 in the ON position (see FIG. 115(b)).

As a result, an external force acts on the key A140 in the OFF position, and the key A140 covers the end face in the direction of the arrow U (the narrow face along the outer edge of the face gripped by the fingers) with the covering portion A270 (end face wall portion A272). ), the first projection A211 is positioned on the extension line of the load input from the key A140 (see FIG. 115(a)), and the ON position When an external force acts on the key A140 located in the key A140 and the key A140 is tilted in a direction (arrow L direction) in which the end surface of the key A140 on the arrow L direction side contacts the cover portion A270 (end surface wall portion A272), the The second ridge A212 is positioned on the extension of the load input from the key A140 (see FIG. 115(b)).

As a result, when the key device A130 is tilted by the action of an external force, the load is input from the end surface of the key A140 (the narrow surface along the outer edge of the surface gripped by the fingers) (the end surface of the key A140 abuts). The portion to be covered) can be efficiently reinforced by the first protrusion A211 and the second protrusion A212. As a result, damage to the covering portion A270 can be suppressed.

It should be noted that the second connection wall A230 can prevent the key A140 in the off position from being subjected to an external force in the direction opposite to that described above (a force displacing the key A140 in the direction of arrow D) (see FIG. 115(a)). )), the first connection wall portion A220 can suppress the application of an external force in the direction opposite to the above-described case (the force displacing the key A140 in the direction of arrow R) to the key A140 in the on position (see FIG. 115 (b)).

That is, as will be described later, the operation wall portion A210 is formed in a horizontally long rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and the other side (arrow D direction side) is open (connection wall is not formed). Further, the key device A130 is positioned on one side (first connection wall A220 side) of the center in the longitudinal direction (directions of arrows L and R) of the operation wall portion A210 (second region), and the third region from the key device A130. The distance to the connection wall portion A240 is increased.

Therefore, since there is a space on the open side and a space on the side of the third connection wall A240, the operator's hand or other components on the side of those spaces collide with the key A140, causing the key A140 to move toward the arrow D. An external force displacing in the direction or the arrow L direction is likely to act. Therefore, by forming the first protrusion A211 and the second protrusion A212 on the side of suppressing (receiving) the tilting of the key device A130 against such an external force, it is possible to reduce the material cost and secure the rigidity. can be done efficiently.

As described above, the square portions A272b of the end wall portion A272 are arranged at two locations with a phase difference of approximately 180 degrees, and are formed in a substantially triangular shape when viewed from the front (as viewed in the direction of arrow B). In this case, the two sides (the outer edge and the edge forming the opening A260) of the triangular portion A272b are set to different lengths (that is, the front view shape is formed as a scalene triangle).

Specifically, with respect to the key A140 in the off position, the rectangular portion A272b on the side closer to the first connection wall portion A220 is the side (outer edge) of the side facing the gripping surface (surface gripped with fingers) of the key A140. The length of the key A140 is longer (larger), and the rectangular portion A272b on the far side (opposite side across the key A140) from the first connection wall portion A220 with respect to the key A140 in the OFF position is the gripping surface of the key A140. The length of the side (outer edge) on the side facing is shortened (reduced) (see FIG. 115(a)).

Therefore, in other words, the rectangular portion A272b on the side closer to the first connection wall portion A220 has the length dimension of the side (outer edge) on the side facing the gripping surface (surface gripped with fingers) of the key A140 in the ON position. is shortened (reduced), and the side (outer edge) of the rectangular portion A272b on the far side from the first connection wall A220 is long (large) on the side facing the gripping surface of the key A140 in the ON position. (See FIG. 115(b)).

As described above, due to the space on the open side and the space on the side of the third connection wall A240, the operator's hand or other components in those spaces collide with the key A140, and the key A140 is likely to be displaced in the direction of arrow D or in the direction of arrow L, according to the square portion A272b of this embodiment, the side of the side that receives the key A140 to which the external force in the direction of arrow D or arrow F is applied Since the length dimension of the (outer edge) is increased, the rigidity of the rectangular portion A272b is efficiently increased, and tilting of the key A140 (key device A130) can be reliably suppressed. In addition, it is possible to suppress damage to the square portion A272b by suppressing the surface pressure.

The outer surface on the front side of the board box A100 (the surface in the direction of the arrow F) includes a first area formed by the front wall portion A201 and an operation wall positioned closer to the main controller A110 than the first area. A second region formed by a portion A210, and openings A250 and A260 are formed in the second region.

As a result, the openings A250 and A260 are arranged at positions recessed from the outer surface of the board box A100 (the box cover A200) (the first area formed by the front wall portion A201), and the first area and the second area are connected. Stepped portions (first connection wall portion A220, second connection wall portion A230, and third connection wall portion A240) can be arranged around the openings A250 and A260. As a result, compared to the case where the openings A250 and A260 are formed in the front wall portion A201 (the first region), the distance to the openings A250 and A260 can be increased for a person who commits fraud. By making the openings A250 and A260 difficult to see, it is possible to make it difficult to directly insert the tip of a foreign object such as a wire into the opening A260.

Considering heat dissipation from the main controller A110, the board box A100 has a distance from the main controller A110 (for example, a distance between the front surface of the printed circuit board A119 and the inner surface of the box cover A200 (internal space )) must be ensured. On the other hand, if the openings A250 and A260 are too far from the switch device A120 and the key device A130, the operability deteriorates.

In this case, by forming the openings A250 and A260 in the operation wall portion A210 (second region), it is possible to easily ensure the operability of the switch device A120 and the key device A130, and as described above, the openings A250, A260 are formed. It is possible to prevent a foreign object such as a wire from being inserted from A260 into the board box A100. However, when the switch device A120 or the key device A130 is operated, the steps connecting the first area and the second area (the first connection wall A220, the second connection wall A230 and the third connection wall A240) are difficult to work on. The hand of the person (operator) interferes and interferes with the operation. Therefore, operability deteriorates when operating the switch device A120 and the key device A130.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the first connection wall A220 is inclined (downward) toward the main controller A110 from the front wall A201 toward the operation wall A210. , the space on the front side (arrow F direction side) of the operation wall portion A210 can be expanded by the amount of this inclination (the space on the front side of the first connection wall portion A220). As a result, it is possible to improve operability when operating the switch device A120 and the key device A130.

The operation wall portion A210 (second region) has a length dimension along one direction (directions of arrows L and R) that is perpendicular to the other direction (arrows U and D 115(a) and 115(b).

The key device A130 is arranged such that the posture of the key A140 in the OFF position is aligned with the above-described other directions (directions of arrows U and D) (see FIG. 115(a)). That is, the key A140 in the off position faces the longitudinal direction (directions of arrows L and R) of the operation wall portion A210 (the second region), and the key A140 in the front view (direction of arrow B). The longitudinal direction of is along the lateral direction (directions of arrows U and D) of the operation wall portion A210 (second region).

As a result, it is possible to secure a space on the sides (right and left sides in FIG. 115(a)) desired to be gripped with the fingers of the key A140 in the OFF position. Therefore, when the key A140 is inserted into the key device A130 or pulled out from the key device A130, the fingers (for example, thumb and forefinger) holding the key A140 connect the first area and the second area (first connection wall). Interference with the portion A220, the second connection wall portion A230, and the third connection wall portion A240) can be suppressed. As a result, it is possible to improve the operability when operating the key device A130.

In this case, the key device A130 is located on one side (first connection wall A220 side) of the center of the operation wall A210 (second region) in the longitudinal direction (directions of arrows L and R). Thus, since the first connection wall portion A220 is formed to be inclined downward, when the key A140 is gripped with fingers and operated (rotated from the OFF position to the ON position or vice versa), the key A140 can be Fingers different from the gripping fingers can be prevented from interfering with the steps (the first connection wall A220, the second connection wall A230, and the third connection wall A240) connecting the first area and the second area. As a result, it is possible to improve the operability when operating the key device A130.

For example, when holding the key A140 in the OFF position with the index finger and thumb, the little finger and the ring finger can be placed using the space secured by the downward slope of the first connection wall A220, and the key A140 can be moved from the OFF position to the ON position. When operating (rotating) the F key A140, the little finger and ring finger can be displaced (moved) using the space secured by the downward inclination of the first connection wall portion A220.

When the key A140 in the ON position is gripped with the index finger and the thumb, the operation wall portion A210 (second area) is formed into a horizontally long rectangle in front view, and the key device A130 is used for operation. Positioned on one side of the longitudinal center of the wall portion A210 (second region), and arranged using the space on the other longitudinal direction side (arrow R direction side) secured on the front side of the operation wall portion A210. When operating (rotating) the key A140 from the off position to the on position, the little finger and ring finger can be displaced (moved) using the space on the other side in the longitudinal direction (arrow R direction side). can.

In the switch device A120, the projecting tip surface (face in the direction of arrow F) of the operating portion A122 in the initial position (height from the operation wall portion A210) is aligned with the projecting portion of the covering portion A270. It is set at a lower position (smaller dimension) than the position of the tip surface (the front surface of the end wall portion A272, the surface in the direction of the arrow F) (standing height from the operation wall portion A210). Therefore, interference between the operation unit A122 and fingers when operating the key A140 can be suppressed.

The operation wall portion A210 (second region) has connection surfaces (first connection wall portion A220 and third connection wall A220 and portion A240) is formed, and a connection surface (second connection wall portion A230) is formed on one side in the short direction (direction of arrow U), and on the other side in the short direction (direction of arrow D) , the connection surface is non-formed.

Thereby, the other side (arrow D direction side) in the short direction of the operation wall portion A210 (second region) can be opened. That is, by such opening, the space on the front side of the operation wall portion A210 (second area) can be communicated with the outside space. Therefore, when the key A140 is gripped with fingers and operated (inserted into the key device A130, pulled out from the key device A130, rotated from the off position to the on position, or vice versa), the key A140 is Use the space (external space) communicated with the above-mentioned opening as a space for arranging and displacing (moving) fingers (little finger and ring finger) different from the gripping fingers (for example, thumb and index finger). can be done. As a result, it is possible to improve the operability when operating the key device A130.

Here, as described above, considering the heat radiation from the main controller A110, the substrate box A100 is located at a distance from the main controller A110 (for example, between the front surface of the printed circuit board A119 and the inner surface of the box cover A200). distance (internal space)) must be secured.

In this case, the steps (first connection wall A220, second connection wall A230 and third connection wall A240) connecting the front wall A201 (first area) and the operation wall A210 (second area) , the first connection wall portion A220 is inclined downward from the first region to the second region, while the second connection wall portion A230 and the third connection wall portion A240 are formed by the front wall portion A201 (first region) and the It is formed in a form substantially orthogonal to the operation wall portion A210 (second area).

That is, by inclining the first connection wall portion A220 downward, interference with the fingers is suppressed, and the operability of the key device A130 is improved, while the second connection wall portion A230 and the third connection wall portion A240 are moved downward. By not tilting (only the first connection wall A220 is tilted downward), the volume of the internal space of the board box A100 for coping with heat dissipation from the main controller A110 can be secured.

In this way, even if only the first connection wall portion A220 is inclined downward and the others (the second connection wall portion A230 and the third connection wall portion A240) are not inclined, interference with the fingers can be suppressed. The operation wall portion A210 (second region) has a horizontally long rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and one side (first connection wall portion A220 side) of the center of the operation wall portion A210 (second region) in the longitudinal direction ) in which the key device A 130 is placed close to the key device A 130 .

In addition, by forming the third connection wall portion A240 on the other longitudinal direction side (the side opposite to the first connection wall portion A220) of the operation wall portion A210 (second region), the third connection wall portion A240 It is possible to protect the switch device A120 and the key device A130 (key A140). For example, it is possible to prevent the robot arm that handles the substrate box A100 from colliding with the switch device A120 and the key device A130 during manufacturing.

FIG. 120 is a front perspective view of the pachinko machine A10, showing a state in which the inner frame 12 is opened with respect to the outer frame 11. FIG. In addition, in FIG. 120, in order to simplify the drawing and facilitate understanding, illustration of a part of the configuration (for example, various electrical connection lines connected to the main controller A110) is omitted. Symbols are illustrated only for the main components.

As shown in FIG. 120, the pachinko machine A10 has hinges 18 (rotating shafts) for supporting the inner frame 12 on the outer frame 11 as described above. The inner frame 12 is supported by the outer frame 11 so as to be openable and closable toward the front side, with the side on which is provided as an opening/closing axis.

Here, when the inner frame 12 is opened toward the front side with the hinge 18 as the opening/closing axis, the opening angle can be made sufficiently large (for example, as shown in FIG. 120, approximately 90 degrees). 115 to 119), the operator can stand at a position facing the front of the board box A100 and operate the switch device A120 and the key device A130 can be operated and the operability can be ensured.

On the other hand, if the release angle cannot be sufficiently increased (for example, only about 45 degrees can be secured for the release angle, and the space formed on the back side of the inner frame 12 is opened, the outer frame 11 and the inner frame are separated from each other). 12), the operability of the switch device A120 and the key device A130 is ensured.

That is, the substrate box A100 is configured such that the longitudinal direction of the operation wall A210 (second region) (for example, the directions of arrows R and L in FIG. 115(a)) is substantially orthogonal to the axial direction of the hinge 18 (rotating shaft). 115(a), the lateral direction (arrow U, D direction in FIG. 115(a)) is directed in a direction substantially parallel to the axial direction of the hinge 18 (rotating shaft), and the longitudinal direction one side (arrow in FIG. 115(a) L direction side) is positioned on the hinge 18 side. Therefore, the first connection wall portion A220 is arranged on the side closer to the hinge 18 than the key device A130, and the switch device A120 is arranged on the side farther from the hinge 18 than the key device A130.

As a result, when a hand is inserted between the outer frame 11 and the inner frame 12 to the back of the inner frame 12 (the front of the board box A100) at the same height position as the operation wall A210 (second area), The space between the key device A130 and the third connection wall portion A240 (ie, the operation wall portion A210 (second region)) is formed in the thumb and the palm near the base of the thumb in a horizontally long rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and the key device A space on the other longitudinal direction side (arrow R direction side) secured on the front side of the operation wall portion A210 by positioning A130 on one side of the longitudinal direction center of the operation wall portion A210 (second region)) can be placed using

In such a state, it is possible to operate (depress) the operating portion A122 of the switch device A120 with the thumb or forefinger, and to rotate the key A140 of the key device A130. As a space for displacing (moving) the thumb and forefinger holding the key A140, the space secured by downwardly inclining the first connection wall portion A220 can be used. As a result, the operability of the switch device A120 and the key device A130 can be ensured.

Note that the above-described setting change (operation of the switch device A120 and the key device A130) may be performed while the board box A100 is rotated around the rotation axis A410 from the state shown in FIG. Since the switch device A120 and the key device A130 can be positioned closer to the front side (the front side of the outer frame 11), the operability of the switch device A120 and the key device A130 can be improved.

With the inner frame 12 opened toward the front side with the hinge 18 as the opening/closing axis, the circuit board box A100 is further opened toward the front side (the front side of the page in FIG. 120) with the rotation axis A410 as the opening/closing axis. Also good. As a result, the operator can stand facing the front of the board box A100 at a position where it does not interfere with the outer frame 11, and the switch device A120 and The key device A130 can be operated and its operability can be ensured.

In this case, the main control device A110 (input/output port 205) has various devices (power supply device 115, payout control device 111, sound lamp control device 113, various switches 208, solenoid 209, third The other end (connector) of the electrical connection line, one end of which is connected to the 1-symbol display device 37, the 2-symbol display device 83, the 2-symbol retention lamp 84 (see FIG. 4), is connected respectively.

If operation of the switch device A120 and the key device A130 is permitted regardless of the state of connection of these electrical connection lines to the main control device A110, there is a risk that the switch device A120 and the key device A130 will be more likely to be illegally operated. On the other hand, if the operation of the switch device A120 and the key device A130 is uniformly prohibited regardless of the connection state of a plurality of electrical connection lines, the work (setting change) associated with the operation of the switch device A120 and the key device A130 It may lead to sexual deterioration.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the operability of the switch device A120 and the key device A130 is changed according to the connection state of the electrical connection line with the main control device A110. As a result, fraud can be suppressed and workability can be improved.

Specifically, in the present embodiment, the other end (connector) of the electrical connection lines, of which one end is connected to at least the power supply device 115 and the sound lamp control device 113, is connected to the main control device A110. (input/output port 205), regardless of the connection state of other electrical connection lines (that is, connected, disconnected, or mixedly connected and disconnected) ), the switch device A120 and the key device A130 are allowed to operate. As a result, fraud can be suppressed and workability can be improved.

That is, if a predetermined electrical connection line (the electrical connection line connecting the power supply device 115 and the sound lamp control device 113 to the main control device A110) is not connected to the main control device A110, the switch device A120 and the key device A130 are not connected to the main control device A110. is prohibited, it is possible to prevent the switch device A120 and the key device A130 from being illegally operated.

On the other hand, when the connection of a predetermined electrical connection line (the electrical connection line connecting the power supply device 115 and the sound lamp control device 113 to the main control device A110) to the main control device A110 is ensured and fraud can be suppressed , other electrical connection lines (payout control device 111, various switches 208, solenoid 209, first symbol display device 37, second symbol display device 83, and second symbol reservation lamp 84 are connected to the main controller A110 Even if the main control device A110 is disconnected (extracted) from the main control device A110, the operation (setting change) of the switch device A120 and the key device A130 is allowed, thereby improving workability (ensuring versatility). ) can be achieved.

That is, when the main controller A110 is opened to the front side (the front side of the paper surface of FIG. 120) with the rotation axis A410 as the opening/closing axis, the main control The electrical connection must be released (pulled out) so that the rotation of the device A110 is not restricted).

Therefore, in a configuration in which operation (change of settings) of the switch device A120 and the key device A130 is not permitted unless all of the electrical connection lines are connected to the main controller A110, the main controller A110 is set to a predetermined position (switch device A120 and key device A130 are rotated to a position where it is easy to operate), and then the electrical connection line released (disconnected) from the main controller A110 needs to be reconnected to the main controller A110.

In particular, when the main controller A110 is displaced (rotated) away from the back surface of the inner frame 12 and the length of the electrical connection wire is insufficient, an extension wire is interposed to release (remove) the electrical connection wire. It is necessary to reconnect the electrical connection line to the main controller A110, which is troublesome.

In contrast, in this embodiment, if a predetermined electrical connection line (electrical connection line connecting the power supply device 115 and the sound lamp control device 113 to the main controller A110) is connected to the main controller A110, Since the operation (change of setting) of the switch device A120 and the key device A130 is permitted, other electrical connection lines (payout control device 111, various switches 208, solenoid 209, first symbol display device 37, second symbol display It is unnecessary to reconnect (reconnect) the device 83 and the electrical connection line that connects the second symbol holding lamp 84 to the main controller A110 by interposing an extension line.

As a result, it is possible to arrange the main controller A110 in a position where it is easy to operate the switch device A120 and the key device A130, and at the same time, it is possible to reduce labor and improve workability associated with the operation (setting change) of the switch device A120 and the key device A130. can be improved.

Next, with reference to FIG. 121, the board box A2100 in the eighth embodiment will be described. In the seventh embodiment, the entire back surface of the end wall portion A272 is formed as a flat surface, but the end wall portion A2272 in the eighth embodiment has a ridge A2273 projecting from the back surface. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

121(a) is a partially enlarged rear view of the board box A2100 in the eighth embodiment, and FIG. 121(b) is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the board box A2100 taken along the cutting line CXXIb-CXXIb of FIG. 121(a). is.

Note that FIG. 121(a) corresponds to FIG. 110(b). Also, in FIG. 121(b), only the cross-sectional view is shown in order to simplify the drawing and facilitate understanding.

As shown in FIG. 121, an end wall portion A2272 of the covering portion A2270 of the eighth embodiment is provided with a ridge A2273 protruding from the rear surface (the inner surface, the surface on the arrow B direction side). The protrusion A2273 is a portion (protrusion) that extends in a striped shape while maintaining a substantially semicircular cross-sectional shape, and is located at the outer edge of the end wall portion A2272 (the tip of the projecting direction projecting radially inward from the peripheral wall portion A271). side edge) in a predetermined range.

More specifically, the range in which the ridge A2273 is formed is the position facing the end A133c (see FIG. 113) of the main body A133 of the key device A130 and the range along the outer edge of the rectangular portion A272b (position The range between the positions AP1 and AP3 including the AP2, and the range between the positions AP4 and AP6 including the position AP5) and one side of the rectangular portion A272b (radially inward from the peripheral wall portion A271). (the side with a larger overhang dimension) along the inner edge of the annular portion A272a (the range between the positions AP3 and AP4), and in this range (the range between the positions AP1 and AP6) Formed continuously.

The projecting dimension from the rear surface of the end wall portion A2272 (annular portion A272a and square portion A272b) of the ridge A2273 is set to a constant value in the range between the position AP3 and the position AP4, The value gradually changes toward the position AP2 toward the position AP1 and gradually changes to a smaller value toward the position AP2, and is set to the same value as the position AP3 at the position AP2. Similarly, the projecting dimension gradually changes to a larger value from the position AP4 to the position AP5, and gradually changes to a smaller value from the position AP5 to the position AP6, reaching the same value as the position AP4 at the position AP6. set. Also, the position AP2 and the position AP5 are set to the same value (projection dimension).

Thus, the rigidity of the end wall portion A2272 can be increased by protruding the ridge A2273 from the end wall portion A2272. Therefore, the key A140 inserted into the key device A130 receives a force in a direction perpendicular to the insertion direction (in a direction parallel to the plane containing the arrows U, D and the arrows L, R), and the key device A130 tilts. , the breakage of the end wall portion A2272 can be suppressed when the key A140 abuts against the inner edge of the end wall portion A2272.

Since the ridge A2273 is formed at a position facing (opposing) the end A133c (see FIG. 113) of the main body A133 of the key device A130, the back surface of the end wall A2272 and the key device A130 (the end A133c of the main body A133) ) can be made smaller to prevent a foreign object such as a wire from being inserted into the board box A2100 through the gap.

Here, in the present embodiment, the projecting length A2273 in the range between the positions AP3 and AP4 is the distance between the rear surface of the end wall portion A2272 and the front surface of the end portion A133c of the main body A133 of the key device A130. It is set to a value approximately equal to the facing distance between the two. Therefore, the protruding tip (arrow B direction side) of the projection A2273 contacts the front of the end A133c (see FIG. 113) of the main body A133 of the key device A130.

This eliminates the gap between the rear surface of the end wall portion A2272 and the front surface of the key device A130 (the end portion A133c of the main body A133), so that a foreign object such as a wire can be inserted into the board box A2100 through the gap. can be suppressed.

In particular, at positions AP2 and AP5, the projecting dimension of the projection A2273 is set to a large value, so that the elastic deformation of the rectangular portion A272b formed as a plate (cantilever beam) with a free outer edge side is used. As a result, the protrusion A2273 in the range from position AP1 to position AP3 and from position AP4 to position AP6 can be brought into firm contact with the front surface of the key device A130 (end A133c of main body A133). As a result, it is possible to more reliably prevent a foreign object such as a wire from being inserted into the board box A2100 through the gap between the rear surface of the end wall portion A2272 and the front surface of the key device A130 (the end portion A133c of the main body A133). .

Also, in this way, the protruding tip (arrow B direction side) of the projection A2273 is in contact with the front of the end A133c (see FIG. 113) of the main body A133 of the key device A130, so that the key device A130 Even if the end wall A2272 is accidentally pushed in the insertion direction by the key A140 when the key A140 is inserted into the key A140, deformation of the end wall A2272 in the insertion direction can be suppressed. Therefore, it is possible to suppress damage to the base end side of the end wall portion A2272 (the side connected to the peripheral wall portion A271).

Next, with reference to FIG. 122, the board box A3100 in the ninth embodiment will be described. In the seventh embodiment, the switch device A120 and the key device A130 are arranged closer to the rotation axis A410 (arrow R direction side) than the longitudinal direction (arrow L, R direction) center of the board box A100 (box cover A200). However, the switch device A120 and the key device A130 in the ninth embodiment are arranged farther from the rotation axis A410 than the longitudinal center of the board box A3100 (box cover A3200). In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

FIG. 122(a) is a front view of the board box A3100 in the ninth embodiment, and FIG. 122(b) is a schematic front view of the pachinko machine A3010. Note that FIG. 122(b) shows a state in which the substrate box A3100 is displaced (rotated) to the maximum movable position (second position) within the movable range (rotatable range). In addition, in FIG. 122(b), only the main configuration is schematically illustrated in order to simplify the drawing and facilitate understanding.

Here, the circuit board box A3100 in the ninth embodiment differs from the circuit board box A100 in the seventh embodiment in terms of the formation position of the operation wall part A210 and the opening A260 (cover part A270, key While the arrangement of the device A130) and the opening A250 (the guide wall A251, the switch device A120) is different, the other configurations are the same, so the description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 122, in the board box A3100 of the ninth embodiment, the operation wall portion A210 is formed on the far side (arrow L direction side) from the rotation axis A410 relative to the longitudinal center of the box cover A3200. Three sides of the front wall portion A210 are connected to the front wall portion A201 by a first connection wall portion A220, a second connection wall portion A230, and a third connection wall portion A240.

An opening AOP1, an opening A260 (covering portion A270) and an opening A250 (guide wall A251) are formed in the operation wall portion A210, and the switch device A120 and the key device A130 can be operated through these openings A250 and A260. be done.

In this case, in the present embodiment, the switch device A120 is arranged farther from the rotation axis A410 (the side closer to the first connection wall A220, the arrow L direction side) than the key device A130.
That is, the arrangement is the reverse of the arrangement in the seventh embodiment.

Here, the movable range (rotatable range) when the substrate box A3100 is rotated around the rotation axis A410 is the first position (disposed during the game) that is disposed on the back side of the inner frame 12. position, see FIG. 120), the second position ( That is, it is set within a range of approximately 180° up to a position facing the same side as the display surface of the third pattern display device 81 (see FIG. 122(b)).

As a result, the substrate box A3100 is arranged (displaced) at a position where the switch device A120 and the key device A130 can be operated while viewing the information displayed on the third pattern display device 81 (e.g., information regarding setting changes, setting values). )be able to. As a result, it is possible to operate while confirming the display (information), so that it is possible to easily grasp the operation state of the switch device A120 and the key device A130 based on the display (information). As a result, operability can be improved, and operation errors can be suppressed.

On the other hand, when the switch device A120 and the key device A130 are not operated, it can be placed on the back side of the pachinko machine A3010 (inner frame 12) (that is, a position that is difficult to be visually recognized from the outside, see FIG. 120), so fraud is performed. (unauthorized operation of the switch device A120 and the key device A130).

In particular, in this embodiment, the surface on which the switch device A120 and the key device A130 of the board box A3100 are arranged (the front surface of the operation wall portion A210) and the display surface of the third pattern display device 81 are oriented in the same direction (arrow The substrate box A3100 can be displaced (rotated) to a position in which the direction B) is desired (both sides are substantially parallel in this embodiment). The angle between the front surface of the operation wall A210 and the display surface of the third pattern display device 81 is preferably set within a range of approximately 0° to approximately 45°.

In other words, the substrate is placed at a position where the surface on which the switch device A120 and the key device A130 of the substrate box A3100 are arranged (the front surface of the operation wall portion A210) and the display surface of the third pattern display device 81 can be visually recognized at the same time. Box A3100 can be displaced (rotated). As a result, it is possible to eliminate the need to take an unreasonable posture such as putting the hand around the back side of the pachinko machine A3010 in order to operate the switch device A120 and the key device A130 while viewing the third pattern display device 81. .

As a result, it becomes easier to operate the switch device A120 and the key device A130 while confirming the information displayed on the third pattern display device 81 (for example, information about setting changes), thereby improving the operability and preventing mistakes in operation. can be achieved more reliably.

Further, as described above, the operation wall portion A210 is formed on the far side (arrow L direction side) from the rotation axis A410 from the longitudinal center of the box cover A3200, and the switch device A120 and the keys are mounted on the operation wall portion A210. An apparatus A130 is provided.

As a result, the board box A3100 is placed at a position where the switch device A120 and the key device A130 are arranged (the front face of the operation wall A210) and the display face of the third pattern display device 81 can be viewed at the same time. With the box A3100 displaced (rotated) (see FIG. 122(b)), the switch device A120 and the key device A130 are positioned further from the outer edge of the pachinko machine A10 (inner frame 12) (right side of FIG. 122(b)). can be placed in Therefore, it is possible to prevent the fingers operating the switch device A120 (operation unit A122) and the key device A130 (key A140) from interfering with the outer edge of the pachinko machine A10 (inner frame 12). As a result, operability can be improved.

Here, in the setting change mode, it is necessary to repeatedly press the switch device A120 (operation unit A122), and the frequency of operation of the switch device A120 is higher than that of the key device A130.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the switch device A120, which is operated more frequently than the key device A130, is located farther from the rotation axis A410 (that is, closer to the first connection wall A220) than the key device A130. are placed. As a result, the switch device A120, which is frequently operated, can be arranged at a position farther from the outer edge of the pachinko machine A10 (inner frame 12) (right side in FIG. 122(b)). Therefore, it is possible to more reliably prevent the finger operating the switch device A120 (operation unit A122) from interfering with the outer edge of the pachinko machine A10 (inner frame 12). As a result, operability can be improved.

Furthermore, since the switch device A120 is disposed adjacent to the first connection wall portion A220, the space formed by the inclination of the first connection wall portion A220 is also used when operating the switch device A120 (operation portion A122). It can be used as a space (a space for avoiding interference between fingers and the box cover A3200). As a result, the operability can be improved also from this point.

Here, the pachinko machine A3010 in the ninth embodiment has the board box A3100 up to the second position described above (the position where the front of the operation wall A210 faces the front of the pachinko machine A3010, see FIG. 122(b)). When displaced (rotated), it engages with the board box A3100 to restrict the displacement (rotation) of the board box A3100 in the direction toward the first position (i.e., fix the board box A3100 to the second position). ). This eliminates the need to hold the board box A3100 by hand when operating the switch device A120 and the key device A130, thereby improving operability.

The restricting means uses the magnetic force (attractive force) of the magnet to fix (hold) the board box A3100 at the second position (when a force exceeding the attractive force is applied, the first a projecting member that is allowed to be displaced (rotated) in a direction toward a position), and has a projecting member that is located at the projecting position by the elastic recovery force of an elastically deformed biasing means (for example, a coil spring), and is located at the projecting position The projecting member engaged with the board box A3100 placed at the second position restricts the displacement (rotation) of the board box A3100 in the direction toward the first position (biasing means from the projecting position). When the protruding member is retracted against the urging force of , displacement (rotation) of the board box A3100 in the direction toward the first position is permitted).

Next, with reference to FIG. 123, the board box A4100 in the tenth embodiment will be described. In the seventh embodiment, the case where the rotation axis A410 of the board box A100 is arranged along the vertical direction (directions of arrows U and D) of the pachinko machine A10 has been described, but the rotation axis A4410 in the tenth embodiment It is arranged in a posture along the width direction (horizontal direction, arrow L, R direction) of the pachinko machine A4010. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

FIG. 123(a) is a front view of the board box A4100 in the tenth embodiment, and FIG. 123(b) is a schematic front view of the pachinko machine A4010. Note that FIG. 123(b) shows a state in which the substrate box A4100 is displaced (rotated) to the maximum movable position (second position) within the movable range (rotatable range), and is displaced to the first position. The (rotated) board box A4100 is shown in dashed lines. In addition, in FIG. 123(b), only the main configuration is schematically illustrated in order to simplify the drawing and facilitate understanding.

Here, the circuit board box A4100 in the tenth embodiment differs from the circuit board box A100 in the seventh embodiment in the arrangement (placement position and direction) and the number of rotation shafts A4410, but other configurations are the same. Therefore, description thereof is omitted.

As shown in FIG. 123, the substrate box A4100 in the tenth embodiment includes a pair of rotating shafts A4410 protruding from the sealing unit A400 and the sub-cover A500 in the direction of separating from each other. The pair of rotation shafts A4410 are located on one side of the board box A4100 in the short direction (directions of arrows U and D) (opposite side of the operation wall portion A210, direction of arrow U), (L, R directions) are formed in a posture protruding outward along the longitudinal direction of the board box A4100 from both ends. Also, the pair of rotation shafts A4410 are arranged coaxially.

Here, the movable range (rotatable range) when the board box A4100 is rotated about the rotation axis A4410 is the first position (disposed during game play) at which the movable range (rotatable range) is arranged on the back side of the inner frame 12 123(b)) in a direction away from the back surface of the inner frame 12 (direction of arrow B), and the front surface of the box cover 4200 (operation wall portion A210) is vertical. It is set within a range of approximately 90° up to the second position facing upward (in the direction of arrow U) (that is, the position where the board box A4100 protrudes most toward the rear side of the inner frame 12, see FIG. 123(b)). .

As a result, in the second position, the operation wall portion A210 can be directed upward, and the release side thereof (opposite side to the second connection wall portion A230) can be directed toward the side where the operator is present. And the operability of the key device A130 can be improved.

On the other hand, at the first position, the front surface of the operation wall portion A210 can face the rear surface of another component provided on the inner frame 12. As shown in FIG. Therefore, the separate parts can face the switch device A120 and the key device A130, and the switch device A120 and the key device A130 can be arranged at positions where it is difficult to operate. As a result, it is possible to prevent tampering (unauthorized operation of the switch device A120 and the key device A130).

Further, in the present embodiment, when the key A140 is inserted into the key device A130, even if the board box A4100 is displaced (rotated) toward the first position, the key A140 contacts another member of the inner frame 12. The contact prevents the board box A4100 from being placed at the first position. As a result, forgetting to pull out the key A140 can be suppressed. Therefore, it is possible to suppress illegal acquisition of the key A140 that has been forgotten to be pulled out.

In particular, in the present embodiment, the second position of the board box A4100 is positioned lower than the first position in the direction of gravity (vertical direction), so as described above, the key A140 is inserted into the key device A130. When the board box A4100 is displaced (rotated) toward the first position in this state, the board box A4100 can then be displaced (rotated) to the second position by its own weight. Therefore, the operator can easily recognize that the board box A4100 cannot be placed at the first position.

In addition, when the substrate box A4100 is displaced (rotated) to the first position, a part of the separate member is closer to the front side of the operation wall portion A210 than the front wall portion A201 of the box cover 4200. It is preferable to have a shape to enter into. As a result, the space formed on the front side of the operation wall portion A210 can be reduced, and unauthorized operation of the switch device A120 and the key device A130 can be suppressed.

Although the present invention has been described based on the above embodiments, the present invention is by no means limited to the above embodiments, and it will be easily understood that various modifications and improvements are possible without departing from the scope of the present invention. It can be inferred.

In each of the above embodiments, part or all of the configuration in one embodiment may be combined with or replaced with part or all of the configuration in another embodiment to form another embodiment.

In the above-described first embodiment, a case has been described in which the projecting portion 154 decelerates the ball flowing down the ball falling unit 150, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the flow resistance of the sphere may be increased by placing an adhesive member on the inner surface, air may be sent into the flow path, or the flow speed of the sphere may be adjusted by magnetic force. You can

In the first embodiment, the case where the displacement restricting device 180 is disposed on the rear case 510 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the displacement restricting device 180 may be arranged on the side of the movable accessory. A displacement regulating device 180 may be provided on the back side of the effect member 700 so that the extension width to the back side can be changed by a pushing operation.

In this case, it is possible to restrict the displacement of the effect member 700 by configuring the body portion 183a of the operating member 183 of the displacement restricting device 180 to be inserted through the rear case 510 in a state in which the overhang width is long. can. On the other hand, the production member 700 can be displaced by disengaging the operation member 183 from being inserted into the rear case 510 in a state in which the operation member 183 is operated to shorten the overhang width. Along with the displacement, the displacement restricting device 180 is also displaced. Therefore, by adding a designed shape to the displacement regulating device 180 or arranging a light emitting device such as an LED, the displacement regulating device 180 can be visually recognized by the player.

In the first embodiment described above, the case where the state change of the displacement restricting device 180 is caused by manual operation has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the displacement restricting device 180 may include a driving device, and the arrangement of the operating member 183 may be electrically switched. In this case, by controlling the displacement restricting device 180 to be in the restricted state prior to the initial operation after the power is turned on, it is possible to prevent the enlargement/reduction unit 600 from starting to move while the displacement restricting device 180 remains in the restricted state. can do. As a result, it is possible to prevent the operation member 183 from being overloaded.

Further, a cushioning material having a high cushioning property may be arranged around the cylindrical portion 183d of the operation member 183. FIG. Further, when a detection sensor capable of detecting the arrangement of the operation member 183 is provided without driving the displacement restricting device 180, and the detecting sensor determines that the displacement restricting device 180 is in the restricting state. Alternatively, the enlargement/reduction unit 600 may be controlled not to start driving.

In the first embodiment, the case where the displacement restricting device 180 is arranged on the back side of the back case 510 has been described, but it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be arranged on at least one of the upper and lower sides of the rear case 510, may be arranged on at least one of the left and right sides of the rear case 510, or may be a combination thereof.

For example, in order to maintain the arrangement of the production member 700, it is sufficient to prevent the arrangement change of the lower arm member 630. Therefore, a recess is provided in the upper surface of the lower arm member 630 in the production standby state, and from the upper side of the back case 510 By constructing the cylindrical portion 183d of the operation member 183 to engage with a recess provided in the lower arm member 630 when the cylindrical portion 183d of the operation member 183 protrudes, the lower arm member 630 is prevented from being displaced in the left-right direction. can be done.

In the above-described first embodiment, the case where the displacement restricting device 180 is provided as an example of a device for restricting the displacement of the scaling unit 600 arranged above the game area has been described, but it is not necessarily limited to this. . For example, by disposing a device for regulating (restricting) the displacement of the granular member 320 (a member capable of freely displacing the internal space IE1) of the injection device 400, the granular member 320 displaces the internal space IE1 at the time of shipment. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the partition member 310 from rubbing against the wall surface of the partition member 310 , cracking the granular member 320 , and scratching the partition member 310 .

For example, the granular member 320 can be prevented from exceeding the lid member 480 and displacing the internal space IE1 by shipping the lid member 480 in the state of being placed at the displacement end position on the entrance side (indicator standby state). Therefore, it is possible to limit the range of the partitioning member 310 with which the granular members 320 can come into contact at the time of shipment. can.

Further, as another example, a granular member 320 is disposed on the lower support member 163 of the light guide plate rendering means 160, configured to be able to protrude into the internal space IE1 of the partition member 310, and arranged in the internal space IE1 in the protruding state. A protruding member configured to limit the displacement of is also provided.

The projecting member can be pushed from the front side of the lower support member 163 (the front side of the game board 13), and can be switched between the projecting state and the non-projecting state each time the pushing operation is performed. After the pachinko machine 10 is installed in the game machine parlor, the projecting member can be operated from the front side by opening the front frame 14, so that the operability of the projecting member can be improved.

In addition, the aspect of the state change of the projecting member is not limited at all. For example, like the displacement restricting device 180, the state may be changed by a latch mechanism, or the state may be changed by engaging and disengaging claws.

As another example, the arrangement of the granular members 320 may be maintained by shipping the partitioning member 310 in a state where the internal air pressure is increased. In this case, by installing the pachinko machine 10 in the amusement machine parlor and lowering the air pressure inside the partitioning member 310 before starting operation, the granular members 320 can be arranged freely.

As another example, the granular member 320 may be formed by mixing ferromagnetic metal powder with the resin material of the granular member 320, and the magnet may be arranged near the lower end of the partition member 310 at the time of shipment. Accordingly, the arrangement of the granular members 320 can be maintained by the magnetic force of the magnet during shipment. On the other hand, during operation, the granular member 320 can be freely arranged by removing the magnet.

Note that the magnet is not limited to one that needs to be removed during operation. For example, a magnet may be arranged on a part of another movable accessory, and as an example, a magnet may be arranged on the lid member 480 .

In addition, in a mode in which ferromagnetic metal powder is mixed in the granular member 320, for example, after execution of the shooting effect, an operation is performed so as to generate a magnetic force near the partitioning member 310 (for example, to bring the magnet closer to the partitioning member 310). By arranging the performance accessories that operate, it is possible to include a performance mode in which the granular member 320 is stopped in the air (visible as if it is floating) in the shooting performance.

In the first embodiment described above, the case where the displacement restricting device 180 that restricts the displacement of the scaling unit 600 is fixed to the back case 510 has been described, but this is not necessarily the case.
For example, an insertion hole is formed in the rear case 510 so as to be aligned with the central axis of the regulated hole 657 when the transmission gear 650 of the enlargement/reduction unit 600 is located at the predetermined end position. A metal rod or resin rod is inserted through the insertion hole into the regulated hole 657 and fixed with a tape or the like. The scaling unit 600 may be configured to be displaceable.

On the other hand, with this method, there is a possibility that the pachinko machine 10 may become dirty with the tape for fixing, and it is not possible to throw away the metal rod or resin rod for delivery of the pachinko machine 10 to another store, so storage is not possible. It may be necessary to do so.

Also, if the storage of the metal sticks or resin sticks is entrusted to each game machine store, the possibility of loss increases. may not be possible. It can also be recognized that the displacement restricting device 180 that is fastened and fixed to the back case 510 is an improvement on this point of view.

In the first embodiment described above, the front-rear width of the internal space IE1 and the front-rear width between the left-right central portion 312b of the curved plate portion 312 and the rear section lower portion 314 are approximately the same, but this is not necessarily the case. isn't it. For example, the front-to-rear width between the left-right central portion 312b and the rear section lower portion 314 may be configured to be as narrow as the front-to-rear width between the left and right portions 312a and the rear section lower portion 314. FIG. In this case, since the movement resistance of the granular member 320 can be increased in the lower side of the internal space IE1 regardless of the lateral position, the momentum of the injected granular member 320 can be reduced. It is possible to reduce the probability that the granular member 320 will be damaged or damaged due to collision.

Also, for example, the front-to-rear width between the left and right portions 312a and the rear section lower portion 314 may be widened to the same extent as the front-to-rear width of the internal space IE1. In this case, the granular member 320 can enter the internal space IE1 without reducing the momentum of the granular member 320 to be injected.

Also, the front-to-rear width of the internal space IE1 does not have to be constant. For example, it may be tapered toward the moving direction (upper side) of the ejected granular member 320 . In this case, the momentum of the granular members 320 can be gradually reduced, so that localized excessive loads on the partitioning members 310 can be easily avoided. Furthermore, by bringing the tapering direction to the front side, the scattering granular members 320 can be easily brought to the front side.

Further, for example, a bump-shaped portion projecting toward the rear side in a manner of protruding toward the rear side may be provided at a portion of the front plate portion 311 where it is expected that the injected granular members 320 will collectively arrive. good. This hump-like portion may be formed by fixing a separate member to the rear surface of the front plate portion 311, or by forming a metal plate so that a portion of the front plate portion 311 protrudes toward the rear surface side. The mold may be configured to have a convex portion.

In the first embodiment, the granular member 320 has a soccer ball shape, but the configuration is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may have a spherical shape, a rugby ball shape, or a star shape (a shape in which protrusions are formed three-dimensionally). By configuring the members with a certain size, gaps can be generated between the members, so that the granular members 320 can be violently scattered when the shooting effect is executed.

In the first embodiment, the ejection device 400 is arranged below the back side of the light guide plate 161 and is configured to eject the granular members 320 obliquely forward and upward, but this is not necessarily the case. For example, the injection device 400 may be arranged on the left and right sides of the light guide plate 161 or on the upper side. Even in this case, an effect of shooting the granular member 320 obliquely forward can be executed. When the injection device 400 is arranged at the upper position, it is preferable to add a device for lifting the granular member 320 to the presentation standby position.

In the first embodiment described above, the granular member 320 is formed of a single-color (red in this embodiment) resin member, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, one granular member 320 may be configured by two-color molding or combining two members of different colors. In this case, the appearance at the time of deposition can be devised by color-coding in consideration of the position of the center of gravity. For example, by changing the color at the horizontal position in the stable posture of the granular member 320 in consideration of the position of the center of gravity, it is possible to visually recognize the layer of color when the granular member 320 is deposited.

Also, the number of granular members 320 is not limited, and may be one. For example, a member having approximately the same size as the collision member 420 may be employed as the granular member 320, and the outer surface may be configured to have a concave curved shape approximately the same as the curved plate portion 421 of the collision member 420. As a result, how the granular member 320 flies and how it looks changes depending on whether the shooting effect is executed in a state where the curved shape fits well or when the firing effect is executed in a state where the curved shape does not fit. be able to.

In the above-described first embodiment, the granular members 320 are disposed in the internal space IE1 so as to be able to scatter, and gather on the collision member 420 due to gravity, but this is not necessarily the case. For example, an urging means for urging the granular member 320 toward the initial position side (position side of the standby state for the effect) is provided, and the granular member 320 is returned to the initial position side by the urging force of the urging means. can be In this case, it is possible to avoid limiting the initial position side of the granular member 320 to the lower side.

Examples of the urging means include a spring, an elastic rubber-like member, a net-like member whose ends are fixedly arranged, an elastic sheet that partially covers the path of the granular member 320, and the like.

The relationship between the biasing means and the granular member 320 is not limited at all. For example, the granular member 320 and the urging means may be adhered to each other, or they may not be adhered but are not separated, and a part of the urging means is arranged inside the granular member 320 and integrated. Alternatively, the urging means may be supported in the internal space IE1 while being able to be arranged apart from the granular member 320 .

Also, the biasing means is not limited to an object that can come into contact with the granular member 320 . For example, in the same way as the gravitational force acting on the granular member 320 in the first embodiment, air pressure adjusting means for adjusting the air pressure in the internal space IE1 may be employed. In this case, the arrangement of the granular members 320 can be affected by increasing or decreasing the atmospheric pressure of the internal space IE1.

For example, when the atmospheric pressure of the internal space IE1 is increased by injecting gas into the internal space IE1 from above, the granular member 320 can be easily maintained below the internal space IE1, and conversely, above the internal space IE1. When the atmospheric pressure of the internal space IE1 is lowered in a manner in which gas is extracted from the internal space IE1, the granular member 320 can be displaced (displaced to float) toward the upper side of the internal space IE1. Further, the direction of gas injection and the direction of gas extraction are not limited to the upper side, and can be set to any side of up, down, left, right, front and back.

It should be noted that it is preferable to close the deformed through portion 315 when the air pressure is to be changed.
It is easily possible to provide the lid member 480 with the function of closing the deformed through portion 315 . For example, when a soft, thin, deformable member (for example, a sponge-like member or a low-friction rubber-like member) is attached to the lid member 480 and the lid member 480 enters the deformed through portion 315, the lid The gap between the member 480 and the deformed through portion 315 may be filled with a deformable member. As a result, the deformed penetrating portion 315 can be closed or opened according to the displacement of the cover member 480 with respect to the deformed penetrating portion 315 .

In the above-described first embodiment, the case where the ridge portion 414 of the direct-acting member 410 is formed along a straight line has been described, but this is not necessarily the case. For example, the surface of the right distal end facing the transmission projection 446 may be formed as a curved surface along the displacement locus of the transmission projection 446 of the front transmission member 440 . In this case, the linear motion member 410 can be maintained at the displacement lower end position throughout the period of contact with the curved surface, not limited to the case where the transmission protrusion 446 is arranged at the lower end position. It is possible to shift to the firing state while maintaining the maximum biasing force.

In the above-described first embodiment, the collision member 420 has a curved shape in which the left-right center portion of the collision member 420 protrudes upward, but this is not necessarily the case. For example, it may be shaped like a slope that descends in the left-right direction with a sharp central portion, or it may be shaped like a hipped roof. In this case, compared to a curved shape, it is possible to make it more difficult for the granular member 320 to pass through the central sharp point in the left-right direction. Therefore, the left-right arrangement bias of the granular members 320 can be increased.

Further, for example, a planar shape orthogonal to the displacement direction may be used, or a curved shape in which the left and right central portions are recessed downward may be used. In this case, unlike the first embodiment, it is possible to configure a displacement mode in which the granular members 320 are displaced as a lump until they collide with the inner wall of the partitioning member 310, and are separated by the collision.

When changing the shape of the collision member 420, it is preferable to change the shape of the lid member 480 accordingly. For example, when the upper surface of the collision member 420 is configured to have a curved shape in which the central portion of the left and right sides are concave downward, the retractable portion 481 of the cover member 480 preferably has a curved shape in which the central portion of the left and right portions is convex upward. Therefore, collision between the granular member 320 and the lid member 480 can be easily avoided.

In the first embodiment, the curved plate portion 421 of the collision member 420 has a flat shape when viewed from the side, but this is not necessarily the case. For example, the lower half may protrude and be bent when viewed from the side. In this case, the dense position of the granular members 320 can be shifted to the upper half side.

In the above-described first embodiment, the case where the size of the partitioning member 310 in front view is approximately the same as the size of the light guide plate 161 has been described, but this is not necessarily the case. For example, the size of the partitioning member 310 when viewed from the front is designed to be about the size of, or larger than, the visual recognition area in which the player can visually recognize the display in the display area of the third pattern display device 81. You can do it. As a result, it is possible to avoid the situation where the edges of the partitioning member 310 are superimposed on the display of the third pattern display device 81 and visually recognized, so that the visibility of the display of the third pattern display device 81 can be improved. can.

In the above-described first embodiment, the single collision member 420 is used as the member that applies the load to the granular member 320, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a plurality of collision members 420 arranged to apply a load to the granular member 320 may be employed and may be operated in concert or individually by separate driving devices.

In the above-described first embodiment, the direct-acting member 410 contacts the collision member 420 and the front transmission member 440 does not contact the collision member 420, but this is not necessarily the case.
For example, a pillar portion projecting from the plate portion 422 to the rear side may pass through the intermediate member 401 and may contact the front transmission member 440 . In this case, the abutting portion of the front transmission member 440 with the pillar is unevenly formed in such a manner that the length in the radial direction changes according to the angular arrangement. can be changed. By utilizing this, the collision member 420 may be slightly displaced up and down to cause the granular member 320 to vibrate (slightly displace).

In the above-described first embodiment, the case where the cover member 480 enters the partition member 310 by rotational displacement has been described, but the displacement mode of the cover member 480 is not limited in any way, and is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be entered by sliding displacement along a straight line. In this case, the shape of the deformed through portion 315 can be easily formed.

In the first embodiment, the case where the extension plate portions 485 arranged on the left and right sides of the lid member 480 are formed in a shape recessed toward the back side has been described, but this is not necessarily the case. For example, the recess may not be formed. In this case, it is possible to easily prevent the granular members 320 from flowing into the collision member 420 from the left and right.

In the above-described first embodiment, the granular member 320 is separated and stored under the cover member 480 in the waiting state of the injection device 400, but this is not necessarily the case.
For example, a protruding portion may be formed from the lower surface (inner diameter side surface) of the lid member 480 toward the inner diameter side, and the protruding portion may contact the granular member 320 . In this case, when the granular members 320 are locally deposited, the accumulation of the granular members 320 can be broken as the lid member 480 is displaced toward the entrance side by pushing the granular members 320 with the projecting portion. . Thereby, uniformity of the arrangement of the granular members 320 can be achieved.

The shape of the projecting portion of the lid member 480 is not limited at all. For example, it may be configured such that a plurality of protrusions are scattered. In this case, regardless of the position where the particulate members 320 are deposited, the protrusions can be brought into contact with the deposited particulate members 320, and the deposition of the particulate members 320 can be broken.

Alternatively, the projections may be configured as a pair of protrusions that are arranged so as to incline left and right outward toward the retraction side tip of the retractable portion 481 from the left-right central portion of the entry-side tip of the projecting portion 482 as a starting point. . In this case, as the lid member 480 is displaced on the approach side, a load can be applied to the granular member 320 in a direction that pushes the granular member 320 outward to the left and right.

Also, the direction of the protrusions is not limited to this. For example, the inclination may be reversed, the ridge may be formed along a single inclination direction instead of a pair of inclination directions, or a combination of ridges with different degrees of inclination may be used. A ridge (a ridge extending on a plane orthogonal to the rotation axis or a ridge extending on a plane parallel to (or overlapping) the rotation axis) may be used. Also, the number of protrusions is not limited to this, and can be set arbitrarily.

In addition, the projecting length of the projecting portion is not limited at all. For example, the projecting tip may project until it reaches a circle having the same diameter and coaxial with the rotating shaft of the lid member 480, or the projecting length of the lid member 480 from the advance/retreat portion 481 may be constant. Also good. In the latter case, the surface connecting the projecting tips of the projecting portions has a shape along the lower surface (inner diameter side surface) of the advancing/retreating portion 481, so that the same effect as the above-described effect obtained from the shape of the lid member 480 can be obtained from the projecting portion. It can be played by the department.

When the protrusion is formed on the lid member 480, the action timing of the protrusion is not limited to when the granular member 320 stops and the lid member 480 is displaced toward the entrance side. For example, in a state where the granular member 320 is accommodated under the lid member 480, the drive motor MT1 is rotated in small increments in the forward and reverse directions when the front side transmission member 440 rotates 66 degrees in the forward rotation direction with reference to the effect standby state. By rotating (for example, reciprocating between 56 degrees and 76 degrees), the linear motion member 410 and the collision member 420 can be vertically displaced in small steps, and the granular member 320 on the collision member 420 can be displaced in small increments. can be vertically displaced.

Since the granular member 320 is not fixed to the collision member 420 , the vertical displacement of the collision member 420 causes the granular member 320 to bounce up and collide with the projecting portion of the lid member 480 . Due to this collision, the arrangement of the granular members 320 can be changed, and the stacking of the granular members 320 can be collapsed.

In addition, when the collision member 420 flips up the granular member 320 (when displaced upward), the cover member 480 is displaced toward the entrance side, so that the load is easily applied to the granular member 320 via the projecting portion. be able to.

The execution of the forward and reverse rotation of the driving motor MT1 in small increments may be controlled so that the driving force is reversed in the forward and reverse directions, or may be rotated in the forward direction at short time intervals. In this case, the biasing force of the coil spring SP1 displaces the transmission protrusion 446 of the front transmission member 440 in the reverse rotation direction via the linear motion member 410, thereby causing the drive motor MT1 to rotate in the reverse direction.

In the above-described first embodiment, the curved plate portion 312 arranged to face the advancing/retracting portion 481 of the lid member 480 is formed in a shape along the same plane across the left and right. Although the case where the interval between 480 and curved plate portion 312 changes has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the curved plate portion 312 arranged to face the lid member 480 is not flat but has an uneven (wavy shape) shape, and the relative relationship between the shape of the lid member 480 and the shape of the curved plate portion 312 causes the lid member to It may be configured such that the interval between 480 and the curved plate portion 312 is changed. Alternatively, the entrance-side end of the advance/retreat portion 481 of the lid member 480 may be formed parallel to the axis of the rotation shaft O1.

In the above-described first embodiment, the case where the contact area between the transmission arm member 470 and the left cover member 489 is secured by changing the inclination angles of the contact surfaces 489a to 489c of the left cover member 489 has been described. It is not limited to this. For example, a roller member whose posture can be changed may be provided on the transmission protrusion 473 of the transmission arm member 470, and the contact area with the inner surface of the left cover member 489 may be secured by changing the posture of the roller member. In this case, the inner wall of the left cover member 489 can be formed as a simple through hole.

In the first embodiment, the driving force of the drive motor MT1 is transmitted via the front transmission member 440 and the rear transmission member 460, and the plurality of members (the linear motion member 410, the collision member 420, the contact member 430, the transmission arm In the situation in which the member 470 and the lid member 480) are displaced, the displacement timing is devised so that all the members are not displaced at the same time, but this is not necessarily the case. For example, there may be a timing for displacing all of the plurality of members by the driving force of the drive motor MT1. In this case, the size of the drive motor MT1 to be employed should be slightly increased.

In the above-described first embodiment, the front transmission member 440 contacts the linear motion member 410 to transmit the driving force, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, when at least part of the transmission protrusion 446 of the front transmission member 440 is made of a magnetic material and the projection 414 of the direct-acting member 410 is made of a magnetic material, and a repulsive force is generated therebetween, the front side A load can be transmitted to the direct-acting member 410 when the transmission member 440 and the direct-acting member 410 are not in contact with each other.

For example, the half of the transmission projection 446 in the circumferential direction facing the projection 414 of the direct-acting member 410 is provided with a magnetic material having a magnetic pole that generates an attractive force between itself and the projection 414 . On the other hand, on the opposite half of the circumference, a magnetic material having a magnetic pole that generates a repulsive force with respect to the protrusion 414 is disposed, so that the repulsive force moves the direct-acting member 410 to the lower end position. Since it can be configured to be generated on the side to be maintained at , the load at the start of contact between the linear motion member 410 and the contact member 430 can be reduced.

In the above-described first embodiment, the driving force is transmitted at two positions, the grooved portion 442 formed on the front surface of the front transmission member 440 and the grooved portion 462 formed on the rear surface of the rear transmission member 460. Although explained, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a groove may be formed in the circumferential surface of at least one of the front transmission member 440 and the rear transmission member 460, and driving force may be transmitted through this groove to increase the number of driving force transmission targets.

In the first embodiment described above, there is a possibility that it may become unclear whether or not it is time to reversely rotate the front transmission member 440 based on detection by the detection sensor SC4, but this is not necessarily the case. For example, in addition to the detection sensor SC4, a detection sensor that detects the arrangement of the linear motion member 410 or the collision member 420 is provided, and the detection result of the detection sensor and the detection sensor SC4 determines whether the front side transmission member 440 reversely rotates. You may judge whether it is possible or not. As a result, it is possible to determine whether or not the firing state has been passed by driving in the forward rotation direction. It can be determined that it is possible.

Although the case where the front transmission member 440 and the rear transmission member 460 are rotationally displaced has been described in the first embodiment, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, at least one of the front transmission member 440 and the rear transmission member 460 may be displaced by displacement other than rotation (for example, direct sliding).

In the above-described first embodiment, by making the shape of the extension claw portion 734 of the effect member 700 different between the upper and lower sides, problems related to the displacement of the expansion/contraction displacement member 740 and the shielding design member 760 toward the collective arrangement state can be prevented. Although the case where it is configured has been described, it is not necessarily limited to this.

For example, by varying the shape of the extension claw portion 734, the start timing of the radial expansion displacement can be adjusted to the upper expansion/contraction displacement member 740 and the shielding design member 760 compared to the lower expansion/contraction displacement member 740 and the shielding design member 760. The design member 760 may be configured to be faster. As a result, the expansion/contraction displacement member 740 and the shielding design member 760 on the lower side are balanced with the acceleration of the start of displacement due to their own weight. You can make it look like the displacement is starting.

In the above-described first embodiment, by bringing the rotating plate 730 into contact with the telescopic displacement member 740, a load is generated in the radial direction of a circle about the rotation axis of the rotating plate 730. However, this does not necessarily apply to this case. It is not limited. For example, a spring member that applies a biasing force to the telescopic displacement member 740 may be disposed to apply the biasing force to the telescopic displacement member 740, or a magnet may be disposed to apply a magnetic force to the telescopic displacement member 740. good.

In the above-described first embodiment, the rotating plate 730 is used both as means for transmitting the load to the telescopic displacement member 740 and as means for displacing the telescopic displacement member 740, but this is not necessarily the case. For example, means for applying a load to the expansion/contraction displacement member 740 and means for displacing the expansion/contraction displacement member 740 may be provided separately.

In the first embodiment, when the telescopic displacement member 740 is displaced toward the collective arrangement state, the first guided protrusion 743b receives the load first, and the first guided protrusion 743b receives the load radially outward from the first guided protrusion 743b. Although the case where the arranged second guided protrusion 744b receives a load later has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the shape of the extended claw portion 734 of the rotating plate 730 may be configured so that the order is reversed, and load transmission to the first guided projection 743b and the second guided projection 744b occurs simultaneously. It may be configured as follows.

In the first embodiment described above, the expansion/contraction displacement member 740 has two protrusions, the first guided protrusion 743b and the second guided protrusion 744b, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, one protrusion may be configured to protrude obliquely with respect to the rotating shaft of the rotating plate 730 . In this case, in addition to the function of changing the arrangement of the expansion/contraction displacement member 740 , the function of generating a load for adjusting the posture of the shielding design member 760 can be generated in one protrusion.

In the above-described first embodiment, a case has been described in which the extended claw portion 734 arranged on the outer side of the circumference is configured to assist the displacement of the telescopic displacement member 740 toward the collective arrangement state, but this is not necessarily the case. It is not limited. For example, a protruding portion is formed on the outer circumference of the rotating plate 730, and the protruding portion can push the first guided projection 743b radially outward. It can assist with directed displacement.

In the above-described first embodiment, the lower arm member 630 suppresses the change in posture of the effect member 700 at the lower end position of the displacement, and the degree of change in the posture of the effect member 700 permitted at the upper and lower intermediate positions is reduced. However, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be configured such that the degree of allowable change in the posture of the effect member 700 increases toward the displacement lower end position.

Also, although the degree of posture change is configured by increasing or decreasing the position where the force acting on the effect member 700 is generated, it is not limited to this. For example, it may be configured by increasing or decreasing the area where the acting force is generated.

That is, the contact area between the arc-shaped hole 634 and the auxiliary protrusion 712 may be configured to be variable. For example, the thickness (hole depth) of the arcuate hole 634 can be changed by changing the thickness of the tip of the lower arm member 630 for each part, so that the arcuate hole 634 and the auxiliary protrusion 712 can be changed. contact area can be changed.

The degree of posture change of the effect member 700 is not specified only by the connecting position between the lower arm member 630 and the effect member 700 . For example, the front surface of the body member 601 facing the pressing member PC1 of the lower arm member 630 or the sliding portion 612a of the front cover 610 may be provided with unevenness to change the distance from the pressing member PC1. good. In this case, in the process of displacing the lower arm member 630, it is easy to allow the attitude change of the effect member 700 in the front surface of the main body member 601 and in the portion where the distance between the sliding portion 612a of the front cover 610 and the pressing member PC1 is wide. This makes it easier to suppress posture changes in portions where the distance is narrow. Alternatively, the interval may be gradually narrowed as the effect member 700 approaches the end of the descent.

In the above-described first embodiment, a case has been described in which the connection position between the lower arm member 630 and the effect member 700 is configured so as not to change, but this is not necessarily the case. For example, at the connection position between the lower arm member 630 and the effect member 700, a resistance increasing/decreasing device capable of increasing/decreasing the displacement resistance of the relative displacement between the lower arm member 630 and the effect member 700 may be provided. The resistance increasing/decreasing device may be a brake device capable of increasing/decreasing frictional resistance, a device increasing/decreasing displacement resistance by magnetic force, or a device projecting to a position where the displacement of the lower arm member 630 can be mechanically regulated. . In the case of a device using magnetic force, it can be easily configured by arranging a magnetic material in a portion (for example, an auxiliary arm portion in which an arc-shaped hole 634 is formed) that is arranged close to the tip side portion of the lower arm member 630. be able to.

In the above-described first embodiment, the effect member 700 is permitted to undergo a large displacement as a displacement in the expansion direction as the arrangement position moves downward. Although the case in which displacement occurs has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the effect member 700 may be controlled to be displaced in the expanding direction while being displaced in the vertical direction. In this case, by displacing the telescopic displacement member 740 and the shielding design member 760 in the direction of contracting the effect member 700 (displaced radially inward) while the effect member 700 is displaced downward, the lower arm member 630 moves left and right. It is possible to cancel the influence of the change from the extremely long posture to the vertically long posture, and suppress the change in the posture of the production member 700 in the forward tilting direction.

In the above-described first embodiment, the case where the effect member 700 is vertically displaced has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be displaced back and forth. In this case, an opening is provided in the central portion of the center frame 86, and the effect members 700 project to the front side of the center frame 86 in a collectively arranged state, and change the state to a discrete state on the front side of the center frame 86, thereby opening. It may be configured to change to a larger state than .

In this case, in order to avoid collision between the glass unit 16 and the effect member 700, it is preferable to form an opening in the front side portion of the center frame 86 of the glass unit 16. That is, it is preferable to provide a second layer of glass unit covering the front side of the glass unit 16 separately from the glass unit 16 covering the front surface of the game area. In addition, from the viewpoint of maintaining the size of the upper tray 17, the glass unit of the second layer is inclined from the same front-rear position as the lower end of the glass unit 16 toward the front as it goes upward. preferred from

In the above-described first embodiment, the case where the shielding design member 760 and the tip adjustment member 744 tend to tilt due to the positional relationship of the second elongated member 743 has been described, but this is not necessarily the case. For example, an urging means such as a spring that generates an urging force is provided between the second elongated member 743 and the tip adjustment member 744, and the orientation of the tip adjustment member 744 and the shielding design member 760 is adjusted by the urging force. It may be configured to change. In this case, since the attitude inclination of the distal end adjusting member 744 and the shielding design member 760 can be intentionally formed, the effect of the attitude inclination of the distal end adjusting member 744 and the shielding design member 760 can be easily exhibited.

In the above-described first embodiment, the case where the cable tube is wound around the wiring DK2 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a cable tube may be wound around the electrical wiring DK1. In particular, by winding the cable tube around the portion arranged above the base-end through-hole 635a, it is possible to prevent the main body member 601 or the front cover member 610 from rubbing against the electrical wiring DK1.

In the first embodiment described above, in the displacing/rotating unit 800, the wiring arm member 870 is displaced along the shape of the guide recess 886, but this is not necessarily the case. For example, a driving device such as a solenoid for changing the arrangement of the wiring arm member 870 may be provided. By controlling the operation of the driving device based on the detection of the position of the vertical slide member 820, the arrangement of the wiring arm member 870 can be appropriately changed.

In the first embodiment, the case where the electric wiring DK2 is temporarily fastened by being sandwiched between the narrowed portions 871a of the wiring arm member 870 has been described, but this is not necessarily the case. For example, the electrical wiring DK2 may be fixed to the wiring arm member 870 with a fixture such as a binding band, or the displacement direction of the electrical wiring DK2 may be restricted.

Moreover, the fastening position of the electrical wiring DK2 can be set arbitrarily. For example, in the electrical wiring DK2 arranged through the connection position between the wiring arm member 870 and the vertical slide member 820, a fastening position (for example, a narrowed portion 871a) may be provided on the wiring arm member 870 side of the connection position. , the fastening position may be provided on the vertical slide member 820 side of the connecting position.

Further, the means for fastening the electrical wiring DK2 is not limited to use for the electrical wiring DK2. For example, it may be used to fasten the electric wiring DK1 of the enlargement/reduction unit 600. FIG. That is, by narrowing the width of a portion of the placement portion 635 in which the electrical wiring DK1 is arranged, the electrical wiring DK1 may be sandwiched to limit the displacement. Alternatively, the electrical wiring DK1 may be temporarily fixed with a fastener such as a binding band at a position upstream or downstream of the placement portion 635 as the wiring path of the electrical wiring DK1.

In this case, the target to which the electrical wiring DK1 is temporarily fastened may be the lower arm member 630 including the placement portion 635, or the effect member 700 arranged on the tip side (one end side) of the lower arm member 630. However, the body member 601 or the front cover member 610 disposed on the base end side (other end side) of the lower arm member 630 may be used, or the rear case 510 to which the body member 601 is fastened and fixed may be used.

In the first embodiment, in the displacement/rotation unit 800, the wiring arm member 870 is displaced in the direction (front-rear direction) toward and away from the up-down, left-right plane in association with the displacement of the lateral slide member 840 on the up-down, left-right, plane. Although the case where it does is explained, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, when the lateral slide member 840 is displaced on the front, rear, left, and right plane, it is naturally possible to displace the wiring arm member 870 in the vertical direction. It is good also as the direction which inclines and is displaced.

Although the relationship between the small diameter pinion 861a and the large diameter pinion 861b in the displacement/rotation unit 800 has been described in the first embodiment, the relationship is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the magnitude relationship may be reversed, or the small diameter pinion 861a and the large diameter pinion 861b may be configured to have the same diameter.

In the first embodiment described above, in the displacement/rotation unit 800, the electric wiring DK2 is spirally displaced at the upper winding portion DK2a and the lower winding portion DK2b, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a plurality of arm members whose posture can be changed along with the vertical displacement of the vertical slide member 820 are arranged in accordance with the arrangement of the upper winding portion DK2a and the lower winding portion DK2b, and electrical wiring is passed through the plurality of arm members. Thus, the arrangement of the electrical wiring may be changed by changing the posture of the arm member.

In the above-described first embodiment, the vertical slide member 820 and the wiring arm member 870 are integrally displaced in the displacing/rotating unit 800, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the vertical slide member 820 and the wiring arm member 870 may be arranged apart from each other.

In this case, by disposing a driving device such as a solenoid for displacing the wiring arm member 870, the wiring arm member 870 can be displaced even when the vertical slide member 820 is stopped. Therefore, for example, by further separating the wiring arm member 870 from the vertical slide member 820 during rotational displacement of the feather-shaped member 854, the wiring arm member 870 can be displaced if necessary even while the vertical slide member 820 is stopped. It can be driven and controlled as follows.

In the above-described first embodiment, a case has been described in which the effect member 700 of the enlargement/reduction unit 600 changes its state to the extended state or enlarged state while the displacing/rotating unit 800 is in the effect waiting state. do not have. For example, when the vane-like member 854 of the displacing/rotating unit 800, which has the same position in the front-rear direction with respect to the effect member 700, is arranged in the gap between the shielding design members 760 of the effect member 700 in the discrete state, the effect member 700 can be changed to the expanded state.

In this case, collision between the effect member 700 and the displacement/rotation unit 800 can be avoided, and it is possible to avoid predicting a state change of the effect member 700 from the arrangement of the displacement/rotation unit 800 . In this case, it is preferable to add a detection sensor for detecting the vertical arrangement of the vane member 854 of the displacement/rotation unit 800 .

In the first embodiment described above, the intermediate flow path LM1 has the same shape as the guide path DL1, but the shape is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be formed as a flow path that bends with a longer lateral width than the guide path DL1, may bend in the front-rear direction, or may be formed as a flow path that extends vertically without bending. .

In the above-described first embodiment, the intermediate flow path LM1 is configured as a path through which the ball that enters the second winning hole 640 flows down, but this is not necessarily the case. For example, the intermediate flow path LM1 may be used as a path for a ball entering the general winning opening 63, may be used as a path for a ball entering the specific winning opening 65a, or may be used in combination. good. Further, the intermediate flow path LM1 may be configured as a sphere path passing through the out port 71 .

Further, since the winning openings 63, 64, 640, 65 are set at arbitrary positions within the game area, the middle flow path LM1 can also be set arbitrarily. For example, the intermediate flow path LM1 may be arranged on the left side of the game area.

Further, the intermediate flow path LM1 is not limited to being arranged on the back side of the game area.
For example, they may be arranged side by side on the left and right of the game area, or may be arranged on the front side of the game area (inside the glass unit 16, etc.). Also in this case, it is preferable that the intermediate flow path LM1 has a section that flows down along the path in the front view of the ball that flows down the game area.

Further, for the purpose of bringing the ball flowing down the intermediate flow path LM1 into the field of view of the player, it is sufficient that the intermediate flow path LM1 is formed so as to be closer to the left-right center side of the game area. Therefore, a route that does not reach the inside of the center frame 86 when viewed from the front may be used.

In the above-described first embodiment, a description has been given of the case where the electrical boards of the horizontal board unit 166 are arranged in a posture in which the thickness direction coincides with the vertical direction, but this is not necessarily the case. For example, like the hemispherical lighting device 613, the illumination board may be arranged so as to be inclined with respect to the vertical direction.

In addition, the entire range of the electrical board is not limited to that covered by the first decorative member 171 . For example, a part of the electrical board may not be shielded, and the light emitted from the light emitting means such as an LED may be directly visible.

In the above-described third embodiment, a case has been described in which the displacement start timing of the expansion/contraction displacement member 740 is changed by changing the shape of the guide hole 733, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, by forming the shape of the guide hole 733 in a stepped shape, it may be configured such that a section in which the elastic displacement member 740 is displaced and a section in which it stops alternately occur.

Further, by fixing the stepped guide holes 733 to some of the guide holes 733, the shielding design member 760 can be displaced so as to approach or abut on different displacement trajectories or different displacement timings.

In the sixth embodiment, the case where the first light irradiation device 6330 and the second light irradiation device 6340 arranged on the left and right sides of the firing effect unit 6300 are provided with a plurality of decorative substrates has been described, but this is not necessarily the case. isn't it. For example, the horizontally placed board unit 166 and the vertically placed board unit 167 of the light guide plate rendering means 160 may employ a configuration of a plurality of decorative boards. In addition, the portion corresponding to the oblong groove portion 171a of the decoration means 170 (the left and right long portion) is configured so as to have good light transmission, and the oblong groove portion 171a is adopted as an intersection position of a plurality of electrical decoration substrates. By arranging a light emitting means such as an LED, it may be configured such that light can be visually recognized through the oblong groove portion 171a.

In addition, from the viewpoint of increasing the irradiation direction of light, it is not limited to the case of using a plurality of rigid electrical boards. For example, a flexible substrate (flexible printed circuit board) may be provided with light emitting means such as an LED. In this case, the surface of the flexible substrate can be oriented in various directions by winding the flexible substrate or fixing it at parts. As a result, the optical axis of the light emitting means such as an LED arranged on the surface of the flexible substrate can be directed in various directions, and the number of light irradiation directions can be increased. Also, in this case, it can be configured with a single substrate.

In each of the above-described embodiments, regardless of whether the number of configurations is singular or plural, the configuration may be omitted (if there are multiple configurations, the number of configurations may be reduced). Similarly, the number of configurations may be increased.

For example, in each of the above-described embodiments, the key device A130 has two protrusions A133b, but the number of protrusions A133b may be reduced to one. Similarly, in each of the above embodiments, the case where one key device A130 is arranged in the main control device A110 has been described, but the number of such key devices A130 (the number of arrangement) may be increased to two or more. .

Further, in each of the above-described embodiments, the arrangement position of each configuration with respect to other configurations, the arrangement direction (orientation, attitude, phase) of each configuration with respect to other configurations, or the arrangement based on the other configuration of each configuration You can change the order of The order of arrangement may be changed for all configurations, or only some configurations may be exchanged. That is, the arrangement position, arrangement direction, and order of arrangement of each component are arbitrary.

For example, in each of the above embodiments, the opening A260 (key device A130) is located on one side (first connection wall A220 side) of the center in the longitudinal direction (directions of arrows L and R) of the operation wall A210 (second region). However, the opening A260 (key device A130) may be arranged in the longitudinal center of the operation wall A210 (second area). It may be arranged on the other side in the longitudinal direction (the side of the third connecting wall portion A240).

Further, for example, in each of the above-described embodiments, the key device A130 (coating portion A270) connects the pair of protrusions A133b (protrusion A271b) in the longitudinal direction (arrow L , R direction), but the direction connecting the pair of protrusions A133b (protrusions A271b) is the operation wall A210 ( The arrangement direction (posture, phase) parallel to the longitudinal direction (directions of arrows L, R) of the second region), and the longitudinal direction (directions of arrows L, R) of the operation wall portion A210 (second region) and a predetermined The key device A130 (coating part A270) may be arranged in an arrangement direction (posture, phase) having an angle of (larger than 0° and smaller than 90°).

Further, for example, in each of the above embodiments, the opening A260 (coating portion A270), the opening A250 (the guide wall A251), and the opening AOP1 are arranged in order from the side closer to the first connecting wall portion A220. For example, the order of arranging the opening AOP1, the opening A250 (the guide wall A251), and the opening A260 (the covering portion A270) in order from the side closer to the first connection wall portion A220 is opposite to the order of arrangement in each of the above embodiments. ), and the order of arrangement of only a part may be changed (for example, the order of arrangement in which the opening AOP1 is positioned between the opening A250 (guide wall A251) and the opening A260 (covering portion A270) is exemplified. is done).

In each of the above-described embodiments, the case where the covering portion A270 protrudes from the front surface of the operation wall portion A210 (the surface on the arrow F direction side) has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the operation wall portion A210 is formed at the same height position as the end wall portions A272 and A2272 (that is, the end surface wall portions A272 and A2272 are also used by the operation wall portion A210), and a configuration corresponding to the peripheral wall portion A271 is provided. It may be provided on the back side (arrow B direction side) of the operation wall portion A210.

In the above embodiments, the opening A250 is formed in the operation wall A210, and the opening A260 is formed in the covering portion A270 (end wall portion A272). may be formed at the site of That is, it does not need to be formed on the lowered portion of the outer surface of the board boxes A100, A2100, A3100, and A4100. Other parts include, for example, the parts forming the outer surfaces of the board boxes A100, A2100, A3100 and A4100, that is, the front wall A201, upper wall A202, lower wall A203 and left wall of the box covers A200 and A3200. Examples include A204 or right wall A205, back wall A301, upper wall A302, lower wall A303, left wall A304 or right wall A305 of box base A300. Moreover, similarly, as another part, the 1st connection wall part A220, the 2nd connection wall part A230, or the 3rd connection wall part A240 is illustrated, for example.

In each of the above-described embodiments, the case where the covering portion A270 protrudes from the front surface of the operation wall portion A210 (the surface on the arrow F direction side) has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the operation wall portion A210 is formed at the same height position as the end wall portions A272 and A2272 (that is, the end surface wall portions A272 and A2272 are also used by the operation wall portion A210), and a configuration corresponding to the peripheral wall portion A271 is provided. It may be provided on the back side (arrow B direction side) of the operation wall portion A210.

In this case, the switch device A120 may extend the length dimension of the operation portion A122 to a position protruding from the front surface (the surface on the arrow F direction side) of the operation wall portion A210. In addition, it is preferable to provide the guide wall A251 also on the back surface (the surface on the arrow B direction side) of the operation wall portion A210 along with the extension of the length dimension of the operation portion A122.

In each of the above-described embodiments, a recess is formed in the outer surface (front face) of the box covers A200 and A3200, and the portion forming the recessed bottom surface of the recess is the operation wall A210 (that is, the front wall A201 (when the operation wall A210 is positioned at the lower position (on the side of the main controller A110)), but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. A projecting portion may be formed, and the portion forming the projecting tip surface of the projecting portion may be used as the operation wall portion A210 (that is, the operation is performed at a position one step higher than the front wall portion A201 (on the side opposite to the main controller A110). position the wall A210).

In each of the above-described embodiments, the case where the main controller 100 is housed in the board boxes A100, A2100, A3100, and A4100 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and at least the board boxes A100, A2100, A3100, and A4100 Any item can be stored as long as the manipulator can be operated through the opening. For example, it may be one that does not have an electrical configuration. For example, such a storage item has a connecting portion connected to an open/close lid that opens and closes a discharge port for discharging balls from the ball flow path, and the open/close lid is operated by operating the connecting portion as an operator. A member (structure, device) that opens and closes is exemplified.

In each of the above-described embodiments, the operation means (the switch device A120, the key device A130) has been described as a case where a push button switch or a key-operated selector switch is employed. You may adopt the operation means of. Other types of operating means include, for example, tactile switches, rocker switches, dip switches, thumb rotary switches, toggle switches, and the like.

In each of the above embodiments, the operating mode of the operator (operation unit A122, key A140) is described as pushing and rotating. Any operation mode may be employed as long as it is arranged so as to be operable through the openings (the openings A250 and A260 in each of the above-described embodiments). Other modes of operation include pull-out, slide, seesaw displacement (for example, a mode in which the operation button is displaced like a seesaw by alternately pressing both ends like the operation button of a rocker switch), tilting (for example, toggle A mode in which the operation lever is displaced so as to fall to one side with the base end side as a fulcrum, like the operation lever of a switch, is exemplified.

In this case, the sliding direction of the manipulator, the direction connecting both ends of the seesaw-displaced manipulator, and the tilting direction of the tilting manipulator are in the longitudinal direction (directions of arrows L and R) of the operation wall portion A210 (second region). It is preferable to dispose the operating means in a parallel posture. This is because the space formed along the longitudinal direction of the operation wall portion A210 (second area) can be effectively used to improve the operability of the operation means.

In any of the operation modes described above, the front view shape of the openings A250 and A260 is assumed to be a shape formed only in a region corresponding to the displacement trajectory of the manipulator (a region necessary for allowing displacement). Also good.

In each of the above-described embodiments, a case where a predetermined gap is formed between the surface and end surface of the key A140 gripped by fingers and the end surface wall portions A272 and A2272 (the outer edges of the annular portion A272a and the square portion A272b) has been described. However, it is not necessarily limited to this. In a state where no external force is applied to the key A140 or the key device A130, at least one of the surface or the end surface of the key A140 gripped by fingers and the end surface wall portions A272 and A2272 (annular The outer edge of the portion A272a or the rectangular portion A272b may be in contact. That is, at least one of the finger gripped surface and the end surface of the key A140 in the OFF position or ON position is brought into contact with the end wall portions A272, A2272 (outer edges of the annular portion A272a or the square portion A272b), and the key A140 is operated. When (rotated), the end surface of the key A140 may slide against the end surface wall portions A272 and A2272 (the outer edge of the annular portion A272a).

The gap between the surface and end surface of the key A140 gripped by the fingers and the end wall portions A272 and A2272 (outer edges of the annular portion A272a and the rectangular portion A272b), and the gap between the outer surface of the key device A130 and the inner surface of the covering portion A270. The gap between the outer surface of the key device A130 and the inner surface of the erected wall A290 and the lower wall portion A203 is such that the inclination of the key device A130 with respect to the printed circuit board A119 is a specified angle (an angle that allows the inclination of the key device A130 That is, it is set to a value at which at least one of the gaps disappears (with which the key A140 or the key device A130 abuts) before reaching the angle at which the leg A131 is unlikely to come off or be damaged or the solder peels off. . The specified angle is preferably 10 degrees or less, more preferably 7 degrees or less, and even more preferably 5 degrees or less. In this embodiment, it is set to 7 degrees.

In each of the above embodiments, the protrusion A271b of the covering portion A270 and the protrusion A133b of the key device A130 are formed at two locations in the circumferential direction. , A133b may be formed at only one position, or at three or more positions. Moreover, when forming in two or more places, those circumferential directions positions (phase) are arbitrary. That is, they may be formed at equal intervals in the circumferential direction as in each of the above embodiments, or may be formed at unequal intervals in the circumferential direction.

In each of the above embodiments, the protrusion A271b of the covering portion A270 and the protrusion A133b of the key device A130 are formed intermittently in the circumferential direction. , A133b may be formed continuously in the circumferential direction.

In each of the above-described embodiments, the projection A271b of the covering portion A270 and the projection A133b of the key device A130 project radially outward, and the projection A133b of the device A130 is arranged in the space formed by the projection A271b. Although the case has been described, it is not necessarily limited to this. A configuration may be adopted in which a concave recess is provided, and the projection of the covering portion A270 is arranged in the internal space of the recess of the key device A130. In this case, if the recess is continued to the end surface (the surface in the direction of the arrow F) of the base A133a (the projection It is only necessary to form an opening in the end face for inserting the part into the recess).

In each of the above embodiments, the case where the first protrusion A211 and the second protrusion A212 are connected to the covering portion A270 has been described, but this is not necessarily the case. may be concatenated.

In each of the above-described embodiments, the case where two protrusions (the first protrusion A211 and the second protrusion A212) are connected to the covering portion A270 has been described, but the number of protrusions formed is not necessarily limited to this. , may be one, or three or more. When forming a plurality of wires, the connection position between one end thereof and the covering portion A270 is arbitrary. However, it is preferable to connect the other protrusions to the positions where the phases of the first protrusion A211 and the second protrusion A212 are different from each other by approximately 180 degrees. This is because the load input from the key A140 in the off position/on position to the covering portion A270 can be efficiently received.

In addition, the cross-sectional shape of the first protrusion A211 and the second protrusion A212, the other protrusions, the height dimension of the cross-sectional shape (the standing dimension from the front surface of the operation wall A210 (the surface on the arrow F direction side) ) and the width dimension (the dimension in the direction perpendicular to the height direction of the vanishing cross section) are arbitrary and can be set as appropriate. Examples of the shape of the end surface include a rectangular shape, a semicircular shape, a triangular shape, and a combination of these shapes. The relationship between the height dimension and the width dimension of the cross-sectional shape is arbitrary, and either one may have a larger value.

In each of the above embodiments, the height dimension of the first protrusion A211 and the second protrusion A212 (standing dimension from the front of the operation wall portion A210 (surface on the arrow F direction side)) is along the extension direction Although a case has been described in which the width is constant along the extending direction, the width is not necessarily limited to this, and may be varied along the extending direction.

It should be noted that the height dimension may be configured to gradually decrease as the distance from the one end connected to the covering portion A270 increases. In this case, the rigidity of the covering portion A270 can be efficiently increased while reducing the material cost.

In each of the above-described embodiments, the case where the rotation angle (phase difference between the ON position and the OFF position) of the key A140 is set to 90° has been described. phase difference). That is, the rotation angle of the key A140 may be set to an angle smaller than 90° or may be set to an angle larger than 90°.

In this case, the shape of the opening A260 (the shape of the edge of the end wall portion A272) corresponds to the displacement trajectory of the key A140 when the key A140 is displaced (rotated) between the off position and the on position. It is preferably formed only in (regions necessary to allow displacement). That is, when the rotation angle of the key A140 is θ, the opening A260 is a first fan-shaped opening having a central angle of approximately θ for allowing displacement of a portion on one side of the rotation center of the key A140, A second fan-shaped opening having a center angle of approximately θ for allowing displacement of the portion on the other side (the side opposite to the one side) of the rotation center of the key A140 is coupled with a phase difference of approximately 180 degrees. It is formed into a shape.

In each of the above embodiments, the key A140 has a radius of rotation (distance from the center of rotation to the end face (a narrow surface along the outer edge of the surface gripped by fingers)) on one side of the center of rotation, and Although the description has been given of the case where the radius of rotation of the other side is different, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. The distance to the narrow surface) along the outer edge of the surface) may be substantially the same. That is, the first fan-shaped opening and the second fan-shaped opening of the opening A260 may have approximately the same size (radius).

In each of the above-described embodiments, the case where the front view shape of the operation wall portion A210 is formed in a substantially horizontally elongated rectangle (rectangular shape) has been described, but it is not necessarily limited to this, and other front view shapes may be used. good. Other shapes in front view include, for example, a substantially square shape, a substantially circular shape, a substantially elliptical shape, a substantially triangular shape, a substantially polygonal shape with five or more sides, and a shape combining these shapes.

In each of the above embodiments, the longitudinal direction of the operation wall A210 is substantially parallel to the longitudinal direction of the board boxes A100, A2100, A3100, A4100 (box covers A200, A3200). It is not limited and may be non-parallel. Alternatively, they may be substantially perpendicular (that is, the longitudinal direction of the operation wall portion A210 may be along the directions of arrows U and D).

In each of the above embodiments, part of the outer edge of the operation wall A210 (three sides in each of the above embodiments) is connected to the connection walls (the first connection wall A220, the second connection wall A230 and the third connection wall). A240) and the remaining portion of the outer edge (one side in each of the above embodiments) is not surrounded (opened), but this is not necessarily the case. The entire outer edge of the operation wall A210 may be surrounded by the connection wall.

That is, in the front view of the box covers A200 and A3200, in each of the above-described embodiments, the operation wall A210 is positioned at a position where a part of the outer edge of the operation wall A210 coincides with a part of the outer edge of the box covers A200 and A3200. is arranged (formed), the operation wall A210 may be arranged (formed) at a position where the outer edges of the operation wall A210 do not match the outer edges of the box covers A200 and A3200.

In each of the above embodiments, the opening AOP1, the opening A250 (the guide wall A251), and the opening A260 (the covering portion A270) are arranged substantially in series (substantially in one row). Other arrangements may be used. Examples of other arrangements include a staggered arrangement, an arrangement distributed to positions having no regularity, and a grid arrangement (arrangement at intersections of a plurality of mutually orthogonal straight lines). When they are arranged substantially in series (substantially in one row), the direction of the series may be non-parallel to the longitudinal direction of the operation wall A210 (box covers A200 and A3200), or may be substantially perpendicular to the longitudinal direction. can be

In each of the above embodiments, the case where the front surfaces of the end wall portions A272 and A2272 (surfaces in the direction of the arrow F) are formed as flat surfaces has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and the end wall portions A272 and A2272 One or a plurality of protrusions or ribs may be erected from the front surface of (the surface on the arrow F direction side).

In this case, the ridge (rib) (for example, a portion formed by extending in a streak shape while maintaining a substantially semicircular or substantially rectangular cross-sectional shape) is, when viewed from the front (as viewed in the direction of arrow B), the end wall It is preferable to extend radially outward from the center of the portions A272 and A2272 (the axis of the peripheral wall portion A271). Moreover, it is preferable that a plurality of such ridges (ribs) are arranged at predetermined intervals in the circumferential direction. As a result, when the key A140 is pulled out, the key A140 engages with the edges of the end wall portions A272 and A2272, and even if the end wall portions A272 and A2272 are lifted in the direction in which the key A140 is pulled out (direction of arrow F), This is because damage to the end wall portions A272 and A2272 can be suppressed by utilizing the rigidity of the ridges (ribs).

Alternatively, the ridges (ribs) may be formed in an annular shape continuous in the circumferential direction when viewed from the front.
A plurality of such protrusions (ribs) may be arranged with different diameters (that is, at predetermined intervals in the radial direction). In addition, it may be intermittent (non-continuous) in the circumferential direction.

In each of the above-described embodiments, the height position of the upright end face of the upright wall A209 is set back from the height position of the upright end face of the upright walls A208, A280, and A290 (that is, from the printed circuit board A119). However, it is not necessarily limited to this, and the other standing walls A208, A280, A290 may be retreated.

Further, the amount of retreat of each standing wall A208, A209, A280 and A290 from the reference plane may be different from the amount of retreat from the reference plane of the other standing walls A208, A209, A280 and A290. Furthermore, in one standing wall A208, A209, A280, A290, the retreat amount may be changed.

In this case, it is preferable that the farther the erected wall is from the fastening hole A206a, the smaller the receding amount of the erected tip surface from the reference plane. In the printed circuit board A119, the area farther from the fastening hole A206a is less regulated by the screw ASC than the area closer to the fastening hole A206a. It becomes easy to deform (displace) in the direction to move toward the front of the printed circuit board A119, and the degree of adhesion to the front surface of the printed circuit board A119 weakens. This is because it is possible to easily ensure close contact between the erected front end surfaces of the erected walls and the front surface of the printed circuit board A119 in all the erected walls.

For example, in the present embodiment, assuming that the standing tip surface of the standing wall A209 closest to the fastening hole A206a is the reference plane, the fastening hole A206a ( Since the distance from the erected wall A209) increases, the amount of retreat from the above-described reference plane is decreased in this order according to the distance from the fastening hole A206a (that is, the erected tip surface of the erected wall A208 is preferably minimized from the reference plane).

Further, each standing wall A208, A209, A280, and A290 may be changed so that the amount of retreat from the reference plane described above decreases as the distance from the fastening hole A206a increases. That is, the erected end surfaces of the erected walls A208, A209, A280, and A290 may be inclined with respect to the front wall portions A201 of the box covers A200 and A3200, respectively.

In each of the above-described embodiments, in the setting change mode, the case where the set value is displayed on at least one of the third pattern display device 81 or the 7-segment display has been described, but this is not necessarily the case, and instead Alternatively, or in addition, it may be displayed on another display device.
Other display devices include, for example, the first symbol display device 37, the second symbol display device 83, the second symbol reservation lamp 84, and the like.

Moreover, the configuration may be such that the set value is not displayed on either the third pattern display device 81 or the 7-segment display.

In this case, when the setting change mode is activated, the set value is updated to a predetermined initial value (for example, the first value) regardless of the set value before activation, and the operation portion A122 of the switch device A120 is pushed. A configuration may be adopted in which the operator recognizes the set value based on the number of times. Unauthorized acquisition of setting values by unauthorized means (for example, means for photographing the display of the third pattern display device 81 with a hidden camera installed in the hall) can be suppressed. In addition, it is possible to prevent the player from recognizing the setting value when changing the setting during the game. In this case, the setting confirmation mode may be omitted.

Although not described in each of the above embodiments, a first detection sensor is provided to detect the relative position of the inner frame 12 with respect to the outer frame 11 (rotational position about the hinge 18). When the first detection sensor detects that the frame 12 is opened (rotated) by a predetermined angle or more, the setting change described above is permitted, and the inner frame 12 is opened by a predetermined angle or more with respect to the outer frame 11. If the opening (rotation) is not detected by the first detection sensor, the setting change may be prohibited (for example, input from the switch device A120 or the key device A130 may be disabled). . This is because it is possible to prevent unauthorized setting changes.

A second detection sensor is provided to detect the relative positions of the board boxes A100, A2100, A3100, and A4100 with respect to the inner frame 12 (rotational positions about the rotation axis A410). , A2100, A3100, and A4100 are opened (rotated) by a predetermined angle or more, the above-described setting change is prohibited (for example, switch device A120 or key device input from A130 is invalidated) and opening (rotation) of the substrate boxes A100, A2100, A3100, and A4100 with respect to the inner frame 12 by a predetermined angle or more is not detected by the second detection sensor, the setting change is performed. It may be configured to allow. This is because it is possible to prevent unauthorized setting changes.

Both the first detection sensor and the second detection sensor may be provided, or only one of them may be provided (the other may be omitted). When both are provided, the opening (rotation) of the inner frame 12 with respect to the outer frame 11 by a predetermined angle or more is detected by the first detection sensor, and the board boxes A100, A2100, A3100, A4100 with respect to the inner frame 12 are detected by the predetermined angle. The above-described setting change may be allowed when the second detection sensor does not detect the opening (rotation) beyond the angle. Examples of the first detection sensor and the second detection sensor include a rotary sensor that detects a rotation angle and a limit switch whose mechanical detection portion is displaced when opened or closed.

In each of the above embodiments, if a predetermined electrical connection line (electrical connection line connecting the power supply device 115 and the sound lamp control device 113 to the main controller A110) is connected to the main controller A110, the switch device A120 and the operation (setting change) of the key device A130 is permitted (that is, the setting change is prohibited unless a predetermined electrical connection line is connected to the main control device A110), but this is not necessarily the case. , and the predetermined electrical connection line can be arbitrarily set (selected).

For example, the predetermined electrical connection line may be only the electrical connection line that connects the power supply device 115 to the main controller A110. That is, as long as at least the power supply device 115 is connected to the main controller A110 by an electrical connection line, regardless of the connection state of the other electrical connection lines (that is, whether it is connected or disconnected) , connection and disconnection are mixed), the operation (setting change) of the switch device A120 and the key device A130 may be permitted.
In this case, the set value associated with the setting change cannot be confirmed on the third pattern display device 81, but can be confirmed on the 7-segment display of the main controller A110.

In each of the above embodiments, if a predetermined electrical connection line (electrical connection line connecting the power supply device 115 and the sound lamp control device 113 to the main controller A110) is connected to the main controller A110, the switch device A120 and the case where the operation (setting change) of the key device A130 is permitted (that is, if a predetermined electrical connection line is not connected to the main control device A110, the setting change is prohibited), but this is not necessarily the case. However, if a predetermined electrical connection line is not disconnected from the main controller A110, regardless of the connection state of other electrical connection lines (that is, even if it is connected, it is disconnected) (Even if connection and disconnection are mixed), the operation (setting change) of the switch device A120 and the key device A130 is not permitted (that is, if a predetermined electrical connection line is connected to the main control device A110 setting change is prohibited). Also in this case, the predetermined electrical connection line can be arbitrarily set (selected).

For example, the payout control device 111 is exemplified as the predetermined electrical connection line. According to this, since the power supply of the payout control device 111 is turned off, it is possible to prevent the payout control device 111 from operating illegally and the game balls from being paid out.

In the above-described eighth embodiment, the case where the projecting ridges A2273 extend in a stripe shape has been described as the form of the portion protruding from the back surface (the surface on the arrow B direction side) of the end wall portion A2272, but this is not necessarily the case. is not limited to For example, a plurality of protrusions may be arranged side by side at predetermined intervals between positions AP1 to AP6 including positions AP2 to AP5.
Alternatively, the protrusion A2273 may be intermittently formed between positions AP1 to AP6 including positions AP2 to AP5.

The range in which the ridge A2273 or the plurality of protrusions are formed is not limited to the range from the position AP1 to the position AP6 including the positions AP2 to AP5, and the range may be reduced or expanded. . Such a range may be the entire outer edge of the annular portion A272a and the rectangular portion A272b.

In the ninth embodiment, the substrate box A3100 rotates around the rotation axis A410 to move to the second position (the position where the front of the operation wall A210 faces the front of the pachinko machine A3010, as shown in FIG. 122 ( Although the case where it is arranged in b) is explained, it is not necessarily limited to this, and it is of course possible to adopt other displacement forms.

As another form of displacement, for example, the substrate box is arranged so as to be slidable in the width direction (directions of arrows L and R) with respect to the inner frame 12, and is slidably displaced in the direction opposite to the hinge 18 (direction of arrow L). By doing so, the board box is arranged at the second position, the rotation axis A410 is formed as an axis along the front-rear direction (arrow F, B direction) of the pachinko machine A10 (inner frame 12), and the rotation axis A mode in which the substrate box is arranged at the second position by being displaced (rotated) around A410 is exemplified.

In the tenth embodiment, the case where the rotation axis A4410 is formed in each of the sealing unit A400 and the sub-cover A500 has been described. It may be formed on the box cover A200, A3200 or the box base A300. In this case, each of the box covers A200 and A3200 and the box base A300 is provided with a division of the rotation axis A4410. A4410 may be formed.

The seventh to ninth embodiments are the same, and the case where the rotation axis A410 is formed in the sealing unit A400 has been described. can be Further, as in the case described above, in a state where the box covers A200 and A3200 are connected to the box base A300, one rotary shaft A410 may be formed from divisions formed respectively.

<First control example>
Next, various control contents executed by the pachinko machine 10 in each embodiment described above will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 124 to 225. FIG. In addition, in the first control example, the configuration of each embodiment described above is partially changed, and the control example thereof will be described. Description is omitted. It should be noted that, in some configurations used in this control example, the same configurations as those in the above-described embodiments are given different reference numerals, but this is for the sake of easy-to-understand explanation of the invention of this control example. , and since the specific contents of the configuration are the same as those corresponding to the above-described embodiments, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

<Regarding the configuration of the pachinko machine in the first control example>
First, the configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 124 to 128. FIG. The configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example differs from the configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the above-described first embodiment in that the configuration of the operation means (for example, the frame button 22) that can be operated by the player is changed. are different, and otherwise identical. The detailed description of the same configuration will be omitted, and the differences from the configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment and the points omitted in the first embodiment will be described in detail.

FIG. 124 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example. As shown in FIG. 124, in this first control example, a first frame button 22za and a second frame button 22zb are added to the front view (see FIG. 1) of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment described above. are the same except that The same reference numerals are assigned to the same configurations, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The first frame button 22za and the second frame button 22zb, like the frame button 22 described above, serve as operating means that can be operated by the player. In this first control example, as in the above-described first embodiment, the player can arbitrarily select an effect mode for various effects executed by the pachinko machine 10. The difference from the embodiment is that the number of operation means that can be operated by the player is increased from one to three.

As shown in FIG. 124, the frame button 22 is arranged on the substantially horizontal surface of the top plate 17, whereas the first frame button 22za and the second frame button 22zb are arranged on the substantially vertical surface of the top plate 17. It is configured to be placed in Further, the frame button 22 is arranged at a position spaced apart from the operating handle 51 (a position spaced 300 mm to the left from the operating handle 51) in the width direction when the pachinko machine 10 is viewed from the front (viewpoint in FIG. 124). The first frame button 22za and the second frame button 22zb are arranged at a position closer than the frame button 22 (at a position spaced 100 to 150 mm leftward from the operation handle 51). there is

That is, when the player operates the operation handle 51 with the right hand, the frame button 22 is configured to be easier to operate with the left hand than the first frame button 22za and the second frame button 22zb. In addition, since the operation button 22 arranged on the horizontal plane can be operated by moving the left hand in the direction of gravity, it can be operated more easily than the first frame button 22za and the second frame button 22zb arranged on the vertical plane. is designed for easy operation.

Although a detailed description will be given later, in this control example, it is possible to execute an effect (so-called continuous hit effect) in which the player can operate the operation means multiple times within one effect executed by the pachinko machine 10. are doing. In this case, by using the frame button 22 as the operating means for the player to operate in the repeated hitting effect, it is possible to make the player easily participate in the repeated hitting effect.

Further, during execution of the above-described repeated hit effect, an operation for terminating the repeated hit effect that is being executed can be executed. By operating the operating means (the first frame button 22za or the second frame button 22zb) arranged at a spaced position, the repeated hit effect can be terminated in the middle. By configuring in this way, a player who is actively participating in the repeated hitting effect, that is, a player who has operated the frame button 22 multiple times, can accidentally end the repeated hitting effect. 1-frame button 22za or second-frame button 22zb) can be suppressed from being operated. In addition, since the frame button 22, the first frame button 22za, and the second frame button 22zb are moved in different directions with the left hand when they are operated, it is possible to prevent the player from erroneously operating the operation means. can be suppressed more. Furthermore, since the first frame button 22za and the second frame button 22zb are arranged at positions that are more difficult to operate with the left hand than the frame button 22, it is possible to further prevent the player from erroneously operating the operation means. can.

Next, with reference to FIG. 125, the configuration of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example will be described. FIG. 125 is a front view showing the game board of the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example. As shown in FIG. 125, the configuration of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example is the same as the configuration of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment described above (see FIG. 2). The same reference numerals are assigned to the same configurations, and detailed description thereof will be omitted. In addition, in this control example, in order to explain in detail the contents of the control of the game executed based on the balls shot to the game board 13 among the configuration of the game board 13, in FIG. The configuration necessary for explaining the content of the flow is described, and the rest is simplified, but in reality, the same configuration as the game board 13 described in FIG. 2 is provided.

The pachinko machine 10 of this first control example, as shown in FIG. A game (left-handed game) in which the player operates the operation handle 51 so that the shot ball flows down the left side area (left-handed game), and a game where the shot ball is on the right side. It is configured to be able to execute a game (right-handed game) that has the strength to flow down the area.

Two general ball entrances 63 are provided in the left area, and a first ball entrance 64 is provided at a position where a ball flowing down the left area can enter. Of the balls that have flowed down the left side area, the balls that have not entered the general ball entrance 63 and the first ball entrance 64 flow into an out hole 71 provided at the most downstream part of the game area, and are not shown. It is configured to flow down the discharge route and be discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 10.例文帳に追加

On the other hand, in the right area, there are a through gate 67, a second ball entrance 640, an open state associated with the second ball entrance 640 in which a ball can enter the second ball entrance 640, and the open state. An electric accessory 640a that can be changed between a closed state and a closed state that makes it difficult for a ball to enter, a specific winning hole 65a, and an open state associated with the specific winning hole 65a that allows a ball to enter the specific winning hole 65a. A variable prize winning device 65 is provided which is variable between its open state and its closed state in which it is difficult to enter a ball.

In the pachinko machine 10 of this control example having the game board 13 configured as described above, a special symbol lottery is executed based on the ball entering the first ball entrance 64, and based on the lottery result. Then, the variable display (dynamic display) of the third symbol is executed in the third symbol display device 81 . Then, when the variably displayed third symbol is stop-displayed in a predetermined stop-display mode (for example, "7.7.7"), a jackpot game (privilege game) advantageous to the player is executed.

When the jackpot game is executed, the specific winning port 65a of the variable winning device 65 is opened a predetermined number of times (for example, 16 times). , is called a right-handed game), and the ball is entered into the specific winning hole 65 a of the variable winning device 65 . When one ball enters the specific winning hole 65a, 15 balls are paid out as prize balls, so the player can win many prize balls during the jackpot game.

As described above, in the normal state, which is a gaming state in which no jackpot game is executed, a game is performed in which the ball is entered into the first ball entrance 64, and in the jackpot game state in which the jackpot game is executed, the variable is a right-handed game. The winning device 65 is aimed. Therefore, by varying the area from which the ball is shot according to the game state, the player can be made to feel that he/she is playing the game.

Further, the variable prize winning device 65, which is opened during the jackpot game, is provided with a probability variable switch 65e3 through which a ball entering the specific prize winning port 65a can pass. Details will be described later with reference to FIGS. 126 to 128, but the variable winning device 65 is provided with two paths through which a ball can pass. It is configured to pass through the variable probability switch 65e3. Then, when the ball passes through the variable probability switch 65e3 during the jackpot game, the probability variable state (high probability of special symbols) is a game state that is advantageous to the player after the jackpot game is finished. state) is given.

In addition, the pachinko machine 10 of this control example is configured to be able to execute a normal symbol lottery as a lottery different from the special symbol lottery. It is configured so that the right of the normal pattern lottery can be acquired. As with the special symbols, the normal symbols are also configured so that a state (high probability state) in which it is easy to win a win and a state (low probability state) in which it is difficult to win a win can be set, and a jackpot is won in a special symbol lottery. When the jackpot game executed based on the fact that the game is played is completed, a normal pattern high probability state is set, and when a predetermined end condition is satisfied, a normal pattern low probability state is set. .

Although the details will be described later, when the normal symbol lottery wins and wins, the electric accessory 640a is in an open state for a predetermined period of time, and a normal pattern winning game is executed. This normal pattern per game is configured to be executed with different operation contents according to the state of the normal pattern at the time when the normal pattern per game is executed, and the normal pattern per game is executed during the low probability state of the normal pattern. When the normal pattern winning game is executed during the high probability state of the normal pattern than when is executed, the normal pattern winning game in which the period in which the electric accessory 640a is in the open state is longer is executed. are doing.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of this control example configured to be variable between the state of the special symbol lottery and the state of the normal symbol lottery, the game state is the normal state (low probability state of special symbols, low probability of normal symbols). probability state), time-saving state (low probability state for special patterns, high probability state for normal patterns), and variable state (high probability state for special patterns, high probability state for normal patterns). , and the normal state in which the low probability state of the normal symbol is set is a state in which it is difficult to enter the ball into the second ball entrance 640, so the left-handed game is better than the right-handed game. It becomes a game method that is advantageous to the person.

On the other hand, the time saving state in which the high probability state of the normal symbol is set, and the variable probability state are states that make it easier to enter the ball into the second ball entrance 640, so the right-handed game is better than the left-handed game. The game method is advantageous to the player. In this way, by varying the game method that is advantageous to the player according to the set game state, the player can play the game while changing the firing intensity by operating the operating handle 51. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game from becoming monotonous. In addition, the high-probability state of the normal symbol can be set after the end of the jackpot game, and furthermore, as described above, during the jackpot game, the player is made to play the right-handed game. During a period in which a state advantageous to the player (jackpot game state, normal symbol high probability state) is continuously set, the game (right-handed game) can be played with the same firing intensity. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player's willingness to play from being lowered due to complicated operation of the operation handle 51 .

Next, the flow of the game when the ball is shot in each game method will be described. When the player executes a left-handed game, about 1/20 of the balls flowing down the left side enter the general ball entrance 63, and about 1/20 enter the first ball entrance 64. When the ball enters the general ball entrance 63, a privilege of paying out three balls as prize balls is provided. In addition, when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64, four balls are paid out as prize balls, and a privilege of obtaining the lottery right of the first special pattern is given. In other words, entering the ball into the first ball entrance 64 gives the player a privilege that is more advantageous than entering the ball into the general ball entrance 63 .

That is, when the player executes a left-handed game and shoots 250 balls, an average of 3.5 prize balls can be obtained for the 10 shot balls. It is constructed so that about 20 balls can be entered into the first ball inlet 64 before 250 balls including prize balls are exhausted. In this way, a ball entrance (general ball entrance 63) that can acquire only prize balls, a ball entrance (first ball entrance 64) that can acquire the right of a special symbol lottery in addition to prize balls, By constructing a game aiming at , the period required to digest all the specified number of balls (for example, 250) is lengthened, and at the same time, the special symbol lottery that can be obtained for the specified number of balls is performed. Since the number of rights can be suppressed, it is possible to prevent excessive granting of special symbol lottery rights to players in a short period of time. In addition, since the pachinko machine 10 in this control example is configured so that the ball that has flowed down the left side area cannot enter the second ball entrance 640, The privilege to be given is always constant regardless of the game state.

On the other hand, when the player executes a right-handed game, about 1/2 of the balls flowing down the right side region pass through the through gate 67, or the balls that have passed through the through gate 67 or avoid the through gate 67. Approximately 1/2 of the balls flowing down the right area reach the electric accessory 640a. The electric accessory 640a is buried in the game board 13 in the closed state, and the ball can pass through the electric accessory 640a in the closed state and flow down to the downstream side of the right area.

Then, about 1/4 of the ball that has flowed down to the downstream side of the right area (below the electric accessory 640a) enters the general ball entrance 63 provided on the upper right side of the variable winning device 65, and about 3 /4 is configured to reach the variable winning device 65 . The configuration of the variable winning device 65 will be described later with reference to FIGS. 126 to 128. When the variable winning device 65 is in the closed state, the balls flow down on the upper surface of the variable winning device 65 in the closed state, It flows into the out port 71 as it is. When a plurality of balls flowing down the right side area collide and the trajectories of the balls become irregular, a part (approximately 1/400) of the balls flowing down the right side area will enter the first ball entrance 64. It is configured so that it can enter the ball.

In other words, when a right-handed game is played in a state where the normal state is set as the game state, about 1/4 of the fired ball enters the general ball entrance 63 (three prize balls), Since the ball can very rarely enter the first ball entrance 64, when the normal state is set, the left-handed game is more advantageous to the player than the right-handed game. becomes.

As a game state, when a time-saving state or a variable probability state is set and a right-handed game is executed, a game per normal pattern with a longer open period than the normal state is executed with a high probability, and flows down the right side area. It is configured so that about half of the balls that do enter the second ball entrance 640 . In addition, in this control example, since it is configured to be able to store up to four normal symbol lottery rights, the rate at which the ball fired by the right-handed game passes through the through gate 67 is about 1/2. Even if it is designed for , the normal pattern lottery can be continued without interruption.

When the ball enters the second ball entrance 640, one prize ball is given and a privilege of obtaining the right of the second special symbol lottery is given. Therefore, when the high probability state of the normal pattern is set, the ball is placed in the second ball entrance 640 (winning ratio about 1/2, 1 prize ball) and the general ball entrance 63 by the right-handed game. (winning ratio 1/4, 3 prize balls) can be entered, and a special symbol lottery (second special symbol lottery) can be executed without almost reducing the number of balls in hand. Therefore, when the high probability state of the normal symbol is set, the right-handed game is more advantageous to the player than the left-handed game.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 125, a plurality of nails are planted in the right area, and the ball that flows down the right area reaches the electric accessory 640a and the flow path r1 that can reach the electric accessory 640a. At least an unobtainable flow path r2 is formed. The ball that has flowed down the flow path r2 is more likely to enter the general ball entrance 63 than the ball that has flowed down the flow path r1 and passed through the electric accessory 640a. Therefore, when the ball launched by the right-handed game flows down the flow path r1, the second special symbol lottery is efficiently executed by making it easier for the ball to enter the second ball entrance 640. - 特許庁Therefore, when the ball flows down the flow path r2, the ball enters the general ball entrance 63 where more prize balls are awarded than when the ball enters the second ball entrance 640. It is configured so that it can be easily done. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being provided with an excessively disadvantageous situation according to the flow-down situation of the ball shot in the right-handed game.

In this control example, as shown in FIG. 125, the ball flowing down the left side area is configured so as not to enter any of the through gate 67, the second ball entrance 640, and the specific prize winning opening 65a. However, it is sufficient if it is configured so that it is more difficult to enter than the balls that flow down the right side area. For example, about 1/100 of the balls that flow down the left side area can pass through the through gate 67. , to reach the electric accessory 640a.

Also, a variable winning device 65 is provided below the variable display unit 80 (above the out port 71), and the balls flowing down the left side region and the balls flowing down the right side region enter the specific winning port 65a at the same rate. It may be configured to allow When constituted in this way, even when a big win is won in a normal state, and when a big win is won in a time-saving state or a variable-probability state, a big win game can be executed without changing the game method being executed.

Next, a case where a right-handed game is executed during a jackpot game will be described. In this control example, when a jackpot game is executed, a normal symbol low probability state is set. As a result, when a right-handed game is executed during a jackpot game, the ball flowing down the right side area enters the second ball entrance 640, and the ball is efficiently entered into the specific winning opening 65a. It is possible to prevent the occurrence of unavoidable situations. In addition, during the jackpot game in which the balls are likely to enter the specific winning opening 65a where many winning balls (15 winning balls) are provided, it is made easier to enter the second ball opening 640.例文帳に追加It is possible to suppress excessive awarding of the prize balls to the player due to overuse.

Therefore, when a right-handed game is played during a jackpot game, most of it flows down to the downstream side of the right region. Although the details will be described later, the specific prize winning port 65a of the variable prize winning device 65 is configured to be switched between an open state and a closed state by the opening/closing operation of the opening/closing door 65f. When the opening/closing door 65f is closed, a flow path is formed on the upper surface of the opening/closing door 65f in the closed state, through which the balls can flow down. The sphere flows down to the downstream side of 65f (left side from the viewpoint of FIG. 125). In this control example, during one jackpot game, the opening/closing door 65f is opened until a predetermined period (30 seconds) elapses or until a predetermined number (10) of balls enter the specific winning opening 65a. A round game can be executed a plurality of times, and an interval period (a period in which the open/close door 65f is closed) of a predetermined period (for example, 0.5 seconds) is set between the round games. there is The period (for example, 0.8 seconds) required for the ball to flow down the flow path formed on the upper surface of the open/close door 65f in the closed state is longer than the above-described interval period (for example, 0.5 seconds). It is configured to be Therefore, during the jackpot game, even if the player continues to play the right-handed game and a ball reaches the variable winning device 65 during the interval period, the ball will flow down the upper surface of the opening/closing door 65f. Since the next round game is started while the game is being held, the balls shot during the jackpot game can enter the specific winning hole 65a without waste.

Thus, in the pachinko machine 10 configured so that most of the balls that reach the variable winning device 65 out of the balls that are shot in the right-handed game during the jackpot game can enter the specific winning hole 65a, The total number of prize balls that can be obtained during the jackpot game varies depending on the number of balls entering the general ball entrance 63 among the balls shot in the right-handed game. Therefore, it is possible for the player to pay attention to what kind of flow path the ball shot in the right-handed game flows down during the jackpot game.

When the jackpot game ends, when the ball passes through the probability variable switch 65e3 provided in the variable prize winning device 65 during the jackpot game, the variable probability state is set, while the variable prize winning device 65 is activated during the jackpot game. When the ball does not pass through the variable probability switch 65e3, the time saving state is set.

Here, in the variable probability state in this control example, as described above, the probability that the result of the special symbol lottery will be a big hit is high, and the lottery that the normal symbol that the lottery is executed by passing through the through gate 67 is a win. The probability is set to be high. Furthermore, the time until the lottery results of the special symbols and normal symbols are determined (hereinafter referred to as fluctuation time) is also set to be shorter than in the normal game state. In addition, the variable probability state in this control example is set so as to continue until the result of the lottery of the special symbol is 200 times in a row after the end of the jackpot game, and the lottery of the special symbol is 200 times. It is set so as to shift from the probability variable state to the normal game state after consecutively hitting other than the jackpot. In this way, by setting a limit on the period in which the variable probability state that is advantageous to the player continues, the player can be motivated to play the game so as to win a big win, and the interest in the game can be improved. It has the effect of being able to In addition, the period during which the variable probability state continues may be set to other contents, for example, it may be continued until the next jackpot is won, or at the same timing as the timing when the special symbol lottery is executed. A shift lottery may be performed to shift the variable probability state to the normal game state. Moreover, you may set the period during which a probability change state continues with time.

Furthermore, in the variable probability state of this control example, the opening pattern of the electric accessory 640a that is driven to open when winning in the normal symbol lottery executed by the ball passing through the through gate 67 is the normal game state. It is set to be an opening pattern that is more advantageous to the player than. Details will be described later with reference to FIG. It is set so that the period of the open state in which the ball is possible is long.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 in this control example executes a right-handed game in the variable probability state, and aims at the through gate 67 and the second ball entrance 640 so that the game can be executed efficiently. is configured to Therefore, during the period from the start of the jackpot game to the end of the variable probability state, the right-handed game may be continuously executed, and it is possible to provide the player with easy-to-understand game characteristics.

On the other hand, when the time-saving state is set after the jackpot game ends, the probability that the result of the lottery of the special symbols will be a jackpot is the same low probability state as in the normal state, but the lottery is performed by passing through the through gate 67. The lottery probability that the executed normal symbol wins is set to be as high as the variable probability state. Furthermore, the time until the lottery results of the special symbols and normal symbols are determined (hereinafter referred to as fluctuation time) is also set to be shorter than in the normal state. In addition, the time-saving state in this control example is set to continue until the result of the lottery of the special symbol is 100 times in a row after the end of the big win game, and the lottery of the special symbol is 100 times. It is set to shift from the time-saving state to the normal state after consecutive hits other than the jackpot. In this way, by setting a limit on the period in which the time saving state that is advantageous to the player continues, the player can be motivated to play the game so as to win a big win, and the interest of the game can be improved. It has the effect of being able to In addition, the period during which the time saving state continues may be set to other contents, for example, it may be continued until the next jackpot is won, or at the same timing as the timing when the special symbol lottery is executed. A transition lottery for shifting the working hours state to the normal state may be performed. Moreover, you may set the period when a time saving state continues with time. Furthermore, depending on the type of jackpot game that triggers the setting of the time saving state, the period (time saving number of times) during which the time saving state is set may be varied.

Furthermore, in the time-saving state of this control example, the opening pattern of the electric accessory 640a that is driven to be opened when winning in the normal symbol lottery executed by the ball passing through the through gate 67 is the normal game state. It is set to be an opening pattern that is more advantageous to the player than. Details will be described later with reference to FIG. 183, but the opening pattern of the electric accessory 640a set during the time-saving state allows the ball to enter the second ball entrance 640 more than the opening pattern set during the normal state. It is set so that the period of the open state in which the ball is possible is long.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 in this control example executes a right-handed game in the time-saving state, and aims at the through gate 67 and the second ball entrance 640 so that the game can be executed efficiently. is configured to Therefore, during the period from the start of the jackpot game to the end of the time-saving state, the right-handed game may be continuously executed, and it is possible to provide the player with easy-to-understand game characteristics.

<Regarding the variable winning device in the first control example>
Next, the configuration of the variable winning device 65 in this control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 126 to 128. FIG. 126 is an exploded perspective view of the variable winning device 65. FIG. As shown in FIG. 126, the variable winning device 65 is an opening forming member 65b arranged to protrude from the front side of the game board 13, and the variable winning device 65 is combined with the rear side of the opening forming member 65b. A base member 65c for screwing to the game board 13, and a plurality of LEDs arranged on the back side of the base member 65c for lighting the front side of the pachinko machine 10 from the back side of the base member 65c. It has an arranged LED board 65d, a back cover body 65e that sandwiches the LED board 65d with a base member 65c, and an opening/closing door 65f1 for opening and closing the specific prize winning opening 65a formed in the opening forming member 65b. The open/close unit 65f, the flow path cover body 65g combined with the back side of the back cover body 65e to form a flow path, and the flow path formed by the back cover body 65e and the flow path cover body 65g protrude into the game. A switching member 65h for switching the flow path of the sphere, a link member 65i engaged with the switching member 65h, a rear surface cover body 65j arranged on the rear surface side of the flow path cover body 65g, and a rear surface of the rear surface cover body 65j. A flow path solenoid 65k fixed to the side to operate the link member 65i, and a fixing cover body 65m for covering the flow path solenoid 65k from the back side and fixing it to the back cover body 65j with screws. there is

127 is a sectional view of the variable winning device 65. FIG. 127(c) is a top view of the variable winning device 65, and FIG. 127(b) is a cross-sectional view of the variable winning device 65 taken along line Lb-Lb. As shown in FIG. 127(b), the variable winning device 65 is formed with a specific winning opening 65a, which is an opening into which game balls can enter. The specific winning hole 65a is formed with a substantially rectangular opening above the pachinko machine 10, and is inclined downward to the left so that game balls passing through the opening are guided leftward in FIG. 127(b). A bottom surface is formed. A detection port 65a1 composed of a magnetic sensor 65c1 for detecting winning of a game ball is arranged at the left end of the bottom surface. A game ball that has passed through the detection port 65a1 is guided to a sorting channel formed on the back side of the back cover body 65e shown in FIG. 128(b).

In addition, as shown in FIG. 127(b), the opening of the specific winning hole 65a has an open state in which a game ball can enter and a ball in which a game ball cannot enter due to an opening/closing door 65f1 configured by a shutter mechanism that can be retracted from the game board 13 side. Possible (difficult to enter) closed state and variable. In the closed state, the opening is completely covered with the open/close door 65f1, and the game balls can roll on the top of the open/close door. In the open state, the opening/closing door 65f1 is retracted inside the base member 65c (inside the game board 13) to be retracted from the specific winning opening 65a.

With this configuration, when the opening of the variable winning device 65 is closed, the game ball rolls on the upper surface of the variable winning device 65 and is guided toward the second ball entrance 640 side. is configured as Therefore, even during the time saving state (including during the variable probability state), it is possible to enter the game ball into the second ball entrance 640 while the right-handed game is being executed, and the left-handed game can be played immediately after the jackpot game. It is possible to reduce the trouble of changing the game method. Therefore, the game can be played more easily.

In addition, in the open state, since the surface perpendicular to the direction in which the game balls flow down can be configured as the opening of the variable winning device 65, more game balls can efficiently win in the specific winning hole 65a. Therefore, the time required for the jackpot game can be shortened, and the efficiency of the game can be improved.

FIG. 127(a) is a cross-sectional view along La-La shown in FIG. 127(b). As shown in FIG. 127(a), a magnetic sensor 65c1 having a detection port 65a1 is fixed to the base member 65c so that the detection port 65a1 is inclined toward the distribution channel side of the back cover body 65e.

With reference to FIG. 128, a configuration for distributing game balls guided to the distributing flow path of the back cover body 65e to a normal discharge flow path 65e1 and a special discharge flow path 65e2, which will be described later, will be described.

FIG. 128(a) is a back view of the back cover body 65e showing a state in which the switching member 65h is operated so that game balls are distributed to the special discharge channel 65e2. As shown in FIG. 128(a), the switching member 65h has a locking hole 65h1 into which the protrusion of the link member 65i is inserted and a guiding piece 65h2 for guiding the game ball. is rotatably supported from the rear side. Here, the channel cover 65g is provided with an opening through which the guide piece 65h2 can be inserted, and the guide piece 65h2 is rotated into the distribution channel from the rear side of the channel cover 65g. It is configured so that it can be arranged as much as possible.

As shown in FIG. 128(a), the game ball guided into the distribution channel from the detection port 65a1 is guided to the upper surface of the guide piece 65h2 arranged diagonally downward to the left and guided to the special discharge channel 65e2. be. A game ball that has passed through the special discharge channel 65e2 is detected by a variable probability switch 65e3 that is configured by a magnetic sensor capable of detecting the passage of the game ball provided in the special discharge channel 65e2, and is discharged out of the pachinko machine 10 as an out ball. be done.

Here, although the details will be described later, in the pachinko machine 10 in this control example, the game ball passes through the variable probability switch 65e3 described above during the jackpot game, so that the game state after the jackpot game. high probability state) is set. That is, the variable probability switch 65e3 is configured as a specific region for giving (setting) a variable probability state. Further, the switching member 65h is configured to distribute the state of the special symbol to a high probability state (probability variable state) or a low probability state (time saving state) after the end of the jackpot game.

In this way, since the game state set after the end of the big win game is changed by the flow-down route of the game ball that has won the specific winning hole 65a during the big win game, the interest of the player can be improved even during the big win game. can. The time required to pass from the opening of the variable winning device 65 to the entrance of the special discharge channel 65e2 (opening surface closed by the guide piece 65h2 of the switching member 65h) is 1 second at the shortest. The operation timing and the operation time of the switching member 65h are set according to the jackpot type. In this embodiment, when the jackpot A is won, the switching member 65h is operated for 0.5 seconds in accordance with the opening timing of the variable winning device 65 at the start of the fifth round. Further, when the jackpot B or jackpot C is won, the switching member 65h is operated for 5 seconds in accordance with the opening timing of the variable winning device 65 at the start of the fifth round.

Therefore, in the jackpot B and the jackpot C, the game ball that has won the variable winning device 65 is configured to be able to pass through the variable probability switch 65e3, but in the jackpot A, it is impossible to pass through the variable probability switch 65e3 ( so that it is difficult to pass through). Therefore, it is possible to control the rate at which the variable probability state is given according to the jackpot type, and it is possible to prevent excessive advantages and disadvantages from occurring.

In addition, in this control example, by changing the switching control contents of the switching member 65h according to the jackpot type, a jackpot game (variable jackpot game) in which the ball easily passes through the variable probability switch 65e3, and a ball rather than the jackpot game. Although it is possible to set a jackpot game (normal jackpot game) in which it is difficult to pass the variable probability switch 65e3, but not limited to this, for example, the switching control content of the switching member 65h is the same regardless of the jackpot type. By setting and controlling the operation so that the opening and closing timing of the opening and closing door 65f1 in the jackpot game is different, the ball is entered into the specific winning opening 65a during the period in which the ball can be passed through the variable probability switch 65e3. It may be configured to set a jackpot game that is easy to hit the ball (probability variable jackpot game) and a jackpot game that is hard to hit (normal jackpot game). By varying the length of the period (opening period) until the round game (round game of the first round) is executed and the length of the interval period, it is possible to set the above-mentioned probability variable jackpot game and normal jackpot game. Good to configure.

With reference to FIG. 128(b), the case where the game ball is guided to the normal discharge channel 65e1 will be described. FIG. 128(b) is a diagram showing a state in which the channel solenoid 65k is inactive and the guide piece 65h2 of the switching member 65h blocks the entrance opening of the special discharge channel 65e2.

The game ball guided to the distribution channel from the detection port 65a1 is guided to the upper surface of the guide piece 65h2 of the switching member 65h and guided to the normal discharge channel 65e1. A discharge confirmation switch 65e4 composed of a magnetic sensor capable of detecting the passage of a game ball is provided at the end of the normal discharge channel 65e1. As a result, it is possible to determine whether or not all the game balls entering the variable winning device 65 have been discharged by the sum of the discharge confirmation switch 65e4 and the variable probability switch 65e3.

Therefore, it is possible to suppress the problem that the player wins in the 5th round while the game ball that won 5 rounds ago is not discharged, and even if the jackpot A is won, the variable probability switch 65e3 wins.

In this way, the game ball that has entered the specific winning hole 65a in the variable winning device 65 is detected by the magnetic sensor 65c1, and based on this, the player receives a prize ball (in this embodiment, 15 balls for each winning ball). prize balls) can be paid out. In addition, by using the game ball after being detected, it is possible to distribute whether or not it passes through the variable probability switch 65e3, so that a lottery can be executed as to whether or not to give the variable probability game state. . Therefore, there is no need to provide a dedicated prize winning port for imparting the variable probability game state separately from the variable prize winning device 65, and the space of the game board 13 can be effectively used.

Returning to FIG. 125, the description continues. A center frame 86 is arranged in a variable display device unit 80 provided substantially in the central portion of the game board 13 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third pattern display device 81 . The third pattern display device 81 can be visually recognized through an opening formed in the center of the center frame 86 . The center frame 86 protrudes toward the front side of the game board 13 and surrounds the third symbol display device 81 to prevent the game ball from contacting the third symbol display device 81 .

The third pattern display device 81 is composed of a large liquid crystal display of 15-inch size, and the third pattern is variably displayed in synchronism with the variable display of the identification information (first pattern) indicating the result of the special pattern lottery. is a display means to be displayed. The variable display of the third pattern is controlled by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 152). As a result, the player can visually recognize the third symbol that is variably displayed in various variable display modes, so that the period until the lottery result of the special symbol is displayed (variation display period of the special symbol) elapses. It is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the game by.

Further, in this control example, it is possible to set different lengths of variation time as the variation time of the first symbol based on the result of the special symbol lottery. Specifically, when the result of the special symbol lottery is a big win, it is easier to set a longer fluctuation time than when it is a loss. Since the variation time of the third symbol whose display is controlled by the display control device 114 is synchronized with the variation time of the first symbol, the longer the third symbol is variably displayed, the more the corresponding special symbol lottery is won. can increase the likelihood that

Therefore, the display control device 114, as the third pattern variation that is variably displayed on the display surface (liquid crystal display) of the third pattern display device 81, controls the length of the variation time of the third symbol variation that is being executed. A variable display mode, that is, a variable display mode indicating whether or not the third symbol variation is displayed in a stopped state is configured to be executable. By constructing in this manner, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand the variation time of the third symbol variation, and to play the game while expecting the third symbol to be variably displayed in a longer variation time. can.

Here, the display contents of the third pattern displayed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81 will be briefly described. In this control example, one symbol row is formed by a plurality of types of third symbols, and three symbol rows of left, middle and right are displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 . Each pattern row is formed by a plurality of patterns (third patterns), and these third patterns are vertically scrolled for each pattern row, and the third pattern is variably displayed (variable) on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81. display). Each symbol row that is variably displayed is stopped in a predetermined order (for example, the order of left, right, and middle), and at the time when all the symbol rows are stopped and displayed, a predetermined number visible to the player is displayed. The result of the special symbol lottery is notified to the player by the combination of the third symbols stopped and displayed at the position (active line).

Specifically, when the third symbol of the same type as the third symbol of each symbol row is stopped and displayed on the active line, that is, "7.7.7" is displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81. It is configured to notify that the result of the special symbol lottery is a jackpot winning when the stop display is made.

In addition, in a state where at least one symbol row is variably displayed, other symbol rows are stopped and displayed in a combination that can indicate a big win, specifically, a left symbol row and a right symbol row are displayed. A state in which "7" is stopped and displayed and the middle symbol row is being displayed in a variable manner, that is, a state in which the third symbol can be stopped and displayed in a combination indicating a jackpot winning is defined as a "ready-to-win state". It is configured to execute an effect that raises the expectation of winning a jackpot.

In this way, by varying the degree of expectation for winning the jackpot depending on the variation mode of the third symbol variation to be performed, it is possible to make the players interested in the contents of the variation mode of the third symbol variation to be performed, and to improve the game. It can prevent monotony. In the above example, the left symbol row and the right symbol row are stopped and displayed at "7", and the middle symbol row is displayed in a variable state, that is, the third symbol is stopped in a combination indicating a jackpot winning. A state in which it is possible to display is referred to as a "reach state", but a state in which it is possible to suggest to the player that there is a high possibility of winning a jackpot in the special symbol lottery corresponding to the third symbol variation being executed. For example, once the left symbol row and the right symbol row are stopped and displayed in the above-mentioned "reach state", all the symbol rows are displayed without the middle symbol row being stopped and displayed. The state of being variably displayed again may be referred to as a "reach state", and even if the third symbol is not stop-displayed as part of a combination for winning a big win, the player is shown that the degree of expectation for a big win is high. Therefore, even when the third symbol is stopped and displayed in a predetermined display mode (for example, a display mode in which "development of reach" is displayed), the "reach state" may be set.

In the third symbol display device 81 of this control example, the display of the game state accompanying the control of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 152) is performed by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B. Decorative display according to the display of the pattern display devices 37A and 37B is performed. Instead of the display device, for example, reels or the like may be used to configure the third pattern display device 81, or a plurality of liquid crystal displays may be used to stop display the third pattern. A device 81 may be configured.

Next, the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 in this control example will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 129(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 in this control example, and FIG. 129(b) is the third symbol display device 81 in this control example. FIG. 3 is a schematic diagram schematically showing display contents; The third pattern display device 81 is composed of a 15-inch liquid crystal display, and the display contents are controlled by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 152), for example, three patterns of left, middle and right. A row of symbols is displayed. By configuring the third symbol display device 81 with a liquid crystal display in this manner, various effects can be easily executed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the amusement of the game can be improved.

As shown in FIG. 129(a), the display screen of the third pattern display device 81 is roughly divided into two upper and lower parts. The lower 1/3 is a sub-display area Ds for displaying an advance notice effect, characters, the number of pending balls, and the like.

The third pattern (identification information for indicating the lottery result of the special pattern) displayed on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81 is 10 kinds of main patterns imitating numbers "0" to "9". It is configured. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of this control example, when the lottery result by the main controller 110 (see FIG. 152) is a big hit, the same main symbols are aligned (stopped display). A variable display in which "7.7.7" is stopped and displayed) is performed, and the jackpot game is executed after the variable display is finished. That is, the third symbol is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a symbol for showing the lottery result of the special symbol by the main control device 110 .

Specifically, the main display area Dm displays three pattern lines L1, L2, and L3 on the left, middle, and right, respectively. The above-described third symbols are displayed in a prescribed order in each of the symbol rows L1 to L3. That is, the main symbols are arranged in ascending or descending numerical order in each of the symbol rows L1 to L3, and each symbol row L1 to L3 is periodically scrolled from top to bottom for variable display.

Also, in the main display area Dm, the third symbol of each symbol row is stopped and displayed on the activated line Z1. When the third pattern is stop-displayed on the effective line Z1 in a combination of big winning patterns (combination of the same main patterns in this first control example), a big winning moving image showing winning of big winning is displayed.

In addition, the aspect of the variable display of the third symbols in the third symbol display device 81 is not limited to the above and is arbitrary, and the number of symbol rows, the direction of the variable display of the third symbols in the symbol rows, The number of third symbols forming each symbol row can be changed as appropriate. Further, the third pattern that is variably displayed by the third pattern display device 81 is not limited to the above. . Further, the area in which the third symbol is variably displayed may be configured to be variable. For example, when a specific effect is executed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, the variable display area of the third symbol or moving the variable display area to a position that is difficult for the player to visually recognize (for example, a corner of the display screen), making it difficult for the player to understand whether the third symbol is changing. You may make it Also, during the period when the special symbol is fluctuating, the fluctuation of the third symbol may be temporarily stopped (temporarily stopped) and then changed again.

Furthermore, in this control example, the display mode of the third symbol corresponding to the variation of the first special symbol and the display mode of the third symbol corresponding to the variation of the second special symbol are the same (to the extent that the player can hardly distinguish ), but the display mode and display area of the third symbol may be changed so as to correspond to the type of special symbol that is fluctuating.

In addition, in the first control example, among the plurality of symbol rows, the specific symbol can be stopped and displayed as the third symbol to be variably displayed in the middle symbol row L2 which is stopped and displayed last. . This specific pattern is constructed in a display mode to which identification information (for example, "development") that is not used for a combination indicating a jackpot winning is added, and this specific pattern is stopped on the activated line Z1. By displaying, it is possible to inform that the lottery result of the special symbol is a specific lottery result (for example, a lottery result with a fluctuation time of 60 seconds or more). Then, it is configured to be able to notify that the variable display of each symbol row is executed again.

By configuring in this way, for example, even if the third symbol is stopped and displayed in a combination other than the combination indicating the winning of the jackpot in the previously stopped symbol rows L1 and L3, the special symbol lottery that is being executed can be processed. Since the expectation of winning the jackpot can be kept in the player until the medium pattern row L2 is stopped and displayed, the player can be prevented from becoming bored with the game early.

In this control example, when a predetermined condition is established, for example, when the third symbols indicating the same number are displayed in a stopped state in the left symbol row L1 and the right symbol row L3, the middle symbol row L2 during fluctuation is specified. It is configured such that a specific pattern is displayed by interrupting a portion (for example, a portion between numbers "0" and "9"). As a result, the specific symbol is suddenly displayed after the lapse of the predetermined period of variable display of the third symbol, so that it is possible to provide the player with an unexpected variation effect.

The conditions for displaying the specific symbols may be conditions other than those described above. For example, it is necessary to indicate that the numbers indicated by the third symbols stopped and displayed in the left symbol row L1 and the right symbol row L3 are a predetermined combination. Alternatively, the condition may be that the player operates the operating means while the third symbol is displayed in a variable manner. Moreover, it is good also as a condition satisfied based on the lottery result of a special design. In addition, a variable effect in which a specific pattern is displayed after a predetermined period of time has passed since the variable display of the third symbol is started may be set in advance at the time of setting the variable effect (at the time of start of variation).

In addition, when displaying the specific pattern, it is possible to use a method other than the method of displaying by interrupting the preset pattern row, for example, replacing with one third pattern preset in the pattern row. good. In this case, for example, among the third symbols set in the middle symbol row L2, when a specific third symbol is stopped and displayed, the combination of the third symbols indicating a special symbol jackpot winning is stopped and displayed. If it is in a ready state, ie, a ready-to-win state, it is preferable to display the specific pattern by replacing it with a third pattern set before or after the specific third pattern. As a result, even if any one of the plurality of continuous third symbols is stopped and displayed, a lottery result advantageous to the player is shown, so that the player can be made to pay attention to the variation presentation while having a sense of expectation. .

In this control example, it is possible to set two types of special symbol lottery results, "big win" and "loss". By varying the game content of the big win game according to the set big win type, a variable probability big winning game in which the ball easily passes through the variable probability switch 65e3 during the big winning game and a variable probability big winning game in which the ball easily passes through the variable probability switch 65e3 during the big winning game A normal jackpot game in which it is difficult to pass the variable probability switch 65e3 can be executed. The combination of the third symbols stop-displayed on the third symbol display device 81 notifies the lottery result of the special symbols and suggests (notifies) the player the type of jackpot to be set. .

Specifically, if the lottery result of the special symbol is "jackpot B" or "jackpot C", which sets the jackpot type that is most advantageous to the player, the main symbol of odd number "3, 7" is selected. A variable display is performed in which any one of them is aligned in a grid and stopped. Further, if it is a "jackpot A", a variable display is performed in which any of the even numbers "4, 6, 8" among the main symbols "0 to 9" is aligned in a grid. In addition, in order to notify the player of only winning the jackpot and make it difficult for the player to grasp the set jackpot type, one of "jackpot A", "jackpot B", and "jackpot C" is set. Even in the case of 1, 2, 5, 9, 0, a variable display is performed in which any one of "1, 2, 5, 9, 0" is aligned.

In this control example, one symbol row is formed by the ten main symbols described above, but the present invention is not limited to this. A sub symbol (for example, a display mode of a star) may be provided. Information other than the lottery result of the special symbols may be notified to the player according to the combination of the main symbols and the sub-symbols that are stopped and displayed. If the main symbol or the sub symbol is stopped in a specific combination (first stop display mode) other than the above, the lottery right that can win the jackpot is included in the lottery right of the reserved and stored special symbols. or when the main symbol or the sub-symbol is stop-displayed in a second stop display mode different from the first stop display mode, the variation time of the special symbol variation being executed is predetermined. It may be configured to suggest that it is longer than the period. By configuring in this way, information other than the result of the special symbol lottery being executed (result of winning/failure determination) is provided to the player according to the result of the third symbol variation executed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 in which the jackpot probability is set lower than the probability of losing, only the fact that the result of the special symbol lottery results in losing is continuously reported, and the willingness to play is lowered. It can be suppressed.

Returning to FIG. 129(a), the description is continued. In the secondary display area Ds, the number of lottery rights (the number of reserved symbols) of reserved and stored special symbols is displayed. In this control example, both the first special symbol and the second special symbol are configured to be able to retain and store up to four lottery rights. It is configured so that the corresponding reserved pattern is displayed. In addition, it is configured to display comments for explaining the effect content of the variable effect executed in the main display area Dm and for explaining the result of the effect.

Although detailed explanation is omitted, in this control example, the second special symbol lottery is preferentially executed over the first special symbol lottery, and the normal symbol high probability state is set. It is configured to make it easier to acquire the second special symbol suspension memory (special figure 2 suspension) during the probability variable state or the time saving state. In other words, the first special symbol lottery is mainly executed in the normal state in which the normal symbol low probability state is set, and the second special symbol lottery is mainly executed in the probability variable state and the time saving state. Therefore, the type of reserved symbols displayed in the sub display area Ds is configured to be switched according to the set game state, and when the normal state is set, the first special symbol is reserved. Identification information (special figure 1 reserved pattern) indicating the number of memories (special figure 1 reserved balls) is displayed, and when the variable state and time saving state are set, the number of reserved memories of the second special pattern (special figure It is configured to display identification information (special figure 2 reserved pattern) indicating 2 reserved balls). As a result, it is possible to inform the player in an easy-to-understand manner how many reserved balls corresponding to the special symbol lottery mainly executed in the current game state have been obtained.

Next, the contents actually displayed on the third pattern display device 81 will be described with reference to FIG. 129(b). As shown in FIG. 129(a), in the upper left of the main display area Dm when viewed from the front, a first display is displayed in which a guidance display mode is displayed for guiding the player to the game method corresponding to the set game state. A region Dm1 is formed. As described above, in this control example, when the normal state (low probability state of special symbols, low probability state of normal symbols) is set as the game state, the left-handed game is more to the player than the right-handed game Advantageous, if the time saving state (low probability state of special design, high probability state of normal design) is set, or probability variable state (high probability state of special design, high probability state of normal design) is set In this case, the right-handed game is more advantageous to the player than the left-handed game. Also, during the jackpot game, the right-handed game is more advantageous to the player than the left-handed game.

In this way, in the case of having a game property that changes the game method that is advantageous to the player according to the game situation (the set game state, the presence or absence of the big win game), the game method can be changed so that the player can Although it is possible to suppress the early boredom of the game, the player cannot grasp the advantageous game method in the current situation, and the player is disadvantaged by executing the game with a disadvantageous game method. Therefore, there is a problem that the desire to play is lowered.

On the other hand, in the present control example, guidance display is provided in the first display area Dm1 (see FIG. 129(a)) to guide the game method (right-handed game or left-handed game) that is currently advantageous to the player. It is configured so that the mode can be displayed. As a result, it is possible to inform the player of an advantageous game method in an easy-to-understand manner. In this control example, the guidance display mode is hidden for the game method (left-handed game) that is advantageous in the normal state set when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on. As a result, when a game situation is set in which a right-handed game is advantageous to the player, a guidance display mode (for example, a display mode of "right-handed") is displayed in the first display area Dm1 that was not displayed. Therefore, it is possible to inform the player in an easy-to-understand manner that the advantageous game method has been switched.

Further, although the detailed description is omitted, in this control example, a pre-guidance notification mode for notifying in advance that the game method advantageous to the player will be switched is performed before the game method advantageous to the player is switched. is configured to be configurable. As a result, it is possible for the player to grasp that effect before the game method is actually switched, so that a suitable game can be easily executed immediately after the game method is switched.

In this way, a notification mode (guidance display mode) for notifying the player of a game method that is advantageous to the player and advance guidance notification that notifies in advance that the game method that is advantageous to the player will be switched. By making it possible to display the modes, it is possible to provide a game that does not give stress to the player.

In this control example, when a period in which a right-handed game is advantageous to the player is set, the guidance display mode is displayed. In a state (for example, normal state) that is more advantageous than a right-handed game, the display mode of "left-handed" may be displayed as a guidance display mode.

Further, as a mode for guiding the player to the display contents of the guidance display mode, a first mode and a second mode for guiding the player with emphasis on the first mode may be set. For example, for two seconds after switching to a game method that is advantageous to the player, an enhanced guidance display mode that is an enlarged version of the guidance display mode displayed in the first display area Dm1 may be displayed. Further, detection means for detecting the game method being executed by the player (for example, detection means capable of detecting that the ball has flowed down the left side area and detection means capable of detecting that the ball has flowed down the right side area). is provided, and based on the detection result of the detection means, the game is not executed in the advantageous side game method even after a predetermined period has passed since the game method advantageous to the player was switched, or the game is not performed in the disadvantageous side game method. The above-described second mode may be set when it is determined that a game is being played. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make the player play the game more reliably in a game method that is advantageous to the player.

In addition, when it is determined that the game is played in a game method that is advantageous to the player while the guide display is being performed in the above-described second mode, the guide display is changed from the second mode to the first mode. It is preferable to configure so as to switch the display contents of the mode. As a result, the game method is excessively guided to the player who is playing the game with the appropriate game method, and the effect of various effects executed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 is reduced. It is possible to suppress the decrease.

In the above example, only the guidance display mode using the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 was described as the guidance mode for guiding the game method to the player. , corresponding to the display timing of the guidance display mode, the voice output device 226 outputs the voice of "Right shot" as a guidance voice for guiding the game method, and the lamp display device 227 is provided in the pachinko machine 10. It may also be configured such that light emission control for guiding the game method is executed by sequentially lighting or extinguishing a plurality of light emitting means. As a result, the player can easily grasp the fact that the game method has been switched or the game method to be executed by senses other than sight (hearing, etc.).

Furthermore, the above-described first display area Dm1 is configured such that the display position is difficult to change with respect to other display areas. By configuring in this way, the game method of the game to be executed can be grasped simply by confirming a specific portion (for example, the upper left side) of the display surface of the third pattern display device 81 in any game situation. be able to. Therefore, it is possible to provide a game that is easy for the player to understand.

Next, on the upper right side of the main display area Dm in the front view, the fourth pattern interlocked with the variable display of the first special pattern or the fourth pattern interlocked with the variable display of the second special pattern is variably displayed. A second display area Dm2 is formed. This fourth pattern is a pattern for notifying the player of the lottery result of each special pattern lottery, similarly to the above-described third pattern, and is configured to be less conspicuous than the above-described third pattern. . When the special symbol lottery is executed, the fourth symbol is always variably displayed in the second display area Dm2. By configuring in this way, in order to enhance the effect of the third symbol variation, even if the effect using the entire main display area Dm is executed, whether or not the special symbol lottery is being executed can be determined. It is possible to inform the player in an easy-to-understand manner.

In addition, the pachinko machine 10 of this control example is provided with a movable means (effect accessory) that can be moved so as to cover at least a part of the display surface of the third pattern display device 81, as in the above-described embodiments. However, the above-described second display area Dm2 is formed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81 at a position that does not (difficultly) overlap with the movable range of any movable means. Therefore, even if the movable means is moved during the third symbol variation, the player can be notified of the variation display mode of the fourth symbol in an easy-to-understand manner.

In the schematic diagram shown in FIG. 129(b), the first display area Dm1 and the second display area Dm2 are shown to be large enough to be visually recognized by the player. It is formed in a difficult degree of size. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the variation effect of the third symbol executed in the main display area Dm.

In addition, when an effect using the entire display screen is executed as a variable effect of the third pattern, or a movable accessory for effect provided near the third pattern display device 81 (for example, a falling accessory 700 or a rotating accessory 840 (see FIG. 7)) is moved to cover the display screen of the third pattern display device 81, the sizes of the first display area Dm1 and the second display area Dm2 are reduced, The display position may be changed, or the display may be temporarily hidden. As a result, it is possible to provide a powerful presentation without a sense of incongruity.

Further, instead of the first display area Dm1 and the second display area Dm2, a fourth dynamic display is performed outside the third symbol display device 81 in conjunction with the variable display of the first special symbol, the second special symbol, and the normal symbol. It may be configured to display a pattern. In this case, it is preferable to provide LEDs for the fourth symbol corresponding to each symbol at the same locations as the many decorative LEDs provided on the pachinko machine 10 . As a result, the variation of the fourth symbol corresponding to the variation display of each symbol can be executed in a manner that is difficult for the player to understand.

<Regarding the production content in the first control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 130 to 145, the contents of various effects executed in the first control example will be specifically described. First, with reference to FIGS. 130 to 132, the contents of the operation presentation for allowing the player to operate the operation means (frame button 22) in multiple numbers will be described.

Conventionally, an operation means (for example, frame button 22) that can be operated by a player is provided, and the effect mode is changed step by step according to the number of times the operation means is operated during a predetermined period during which a specific effect is executed. There is a pachinko machine 10 that executes a variable operation effect (so-called repeated hitting effect). In such a continuous hit effect, the effect mode is generally configured to be changed in stages, and when changing to a specific effect mode, it is more likely than not to change to the specific effect mode. are also constructed so as to produce an effect effect that is advantageous to the player.

According to the gaming machine capable of executing such a continuous hitting effect, the player can actively operate the operation means to change the effect mode of the effect to be executed, so that the player can motivate the player. You can participate in games. However, since the effect mode set in the repeated hit effect is preset according to the result of the special symbol lottery, for example, if the special symbol lottery is lost and won, the operating means can be operated multiple times within a predetermined period. Even if is operated, the effect mode indicating that the result of the special symbol lottery is the big win is not set. In addition, in the case where the performance contents are set so that the degree of expectation of winning a big hit in the special symbol lottery increases as the performance mode changes during the continuous hitting performance, the special symbol lottery is lost and won. It is necessary to execute a repeated hitting effect in which the effect mode is difficult to change in the repeated hitting effect that is actually executed.

In this case, even if the player operates the operating means a plurality of times within a predetermined period during which the continuous hitting effect is executed, the period in which the effect mode is not changed continues, and the player's motivation to operate the operating means decreases. There was a problem.

On the other hand, in this control example, all the effect modes set in the repeated hit effect, that is, when the effect mode is changed to the final effect mode based on the operation to the operation means, the subsequent operation means Depending on the operation content of , the continuous hit effect can be terminated without waiting for the lapse of a predetermined period of time during which the repeated hit effect is executed. By constructing in this way, the player is made to execute the continuous hitting performance for a long time without changing the performance mode, and the player's desire to play the game and, in turn, the desire to operate the operation means is reduced. You can prevent it from happening.

Next, the effect contents of the repeated hitting effect executed in the pachinko machine 10 of this control example will be specifically described. FIG. 130(a) is a diagram schematically showing the start screen of the continuous hit effect. As shown in FIG. 130(a), in this control example, as the continuous hit effect, a effect in which the main character 801 fights a plurality of enemy characters 802 is executed. It is configured so that a production that reduces the

First, when the repeated hit effect is executed, "100" is displayed as a display mode indicating the number of enemy characters 802 in the display area HR1, and a message prompting the user to operate the frame button 22 is displayed in the display area HR2. A button 803, which is a display mode, and a time gauge 804 for indicating the period of repeated hit effects (the period during which it is determined that the operation of the frame button 22 is effective) are displayed. More specifically, the button 803 has an operation mode (represented by a downward arrow in the drawing) showing a pressing action as an animation prompting the player to press the frame button 22, and a normal state (non-operating state) of the button 803. It is displayed by an animation having a pressing state (operating state) and an operation mode of repeating.

Here, the enemy character 802 is configured to be displayed in a plurality of display modes, and in the example shown in FIG. ing. In this control example, the privilege given according to the remaining number of enemy characters displayed in the display area HR1 (the result of the special symbol lottery, the type of variable effect executed after the end of the continuous hit effect) is advantageous to the player. It is configured to be able to suggest whether or not it is a thing, and it is configured so that the fewer the number of remaining enemy characters 802 displayed in the display area HR1, the easier it is for the player to receive an advantageous privilege. Furthermore, when the remaining number displayed in the display area HR1 is the same, the type of the enemy character 802 displayed corresponding to the remaining number can also indicate the degree of advantage of the privilege given to the player. Configure.

Specifically, it is configured such that the player is more likely to receive benefits that are advantageous to the player when the strong enemy character 802a is defeated than when the strong enemy character 802a remains. With this configuration, the player can watch the repeated hitting effect while expecting that the number of remaining enemy characters 802 will be reduced in the repeated hitting effect and that a specific enemy character 802 will be defeated. , can enhance the performance effect.

In addition, the character 801 is equipped with a sword 801k as a weapon for defeating the enemy character 802, and by swinging the sword 801k, an effect of reducing the number of remaining enemy characters 802 is executed. The display mode of the sword 801k is configured to vary as the variable mode of the continuous hit effect approaches the upper limit value (maximum variable value). Specifically, it is configured so that the display mode can be varied so that the player can grasp that the sharpness of the sword 801k is steadily decreasing. In other words, the sword 801k is a suggesting means that enables the player to predict how many enemy characters 802 can be reduced at maximum in this continuous hitting effect.

By configuring in this way, when a specific number (for example, 10) of enemy characters 802 are displayed in the middle of the continuous hit effect, the remaining number of enemy characters 802 can be determined by looking at the display mode of the sword 801k. can be further reduced. Therefore, it is possible to provide the enjoyment of predicting the performance result of the repeated hitting performance, and enhance the performance effect.

The display mode of the time gauge 804 is varied in accordance with the elapsed time of the repeated hit effect, and the remaining time area 804b indicating the remaining period of the repeated hit effect decreases from the left end of the time gauge 804. Is displayed. Then, as the remaining time area 804b decreases, the time gauge 804 displays an increased elapsed time area 804a. With this configuration, the player can see at a glance the time that has already passed (the display mode of the elapsed time area 804a) and the remaining time (the display mode of the remaining time area 804b) in the entire period of the continuous hit effect. can be grasped by Further, in this control example, the length of the period set as the continuous hit effect is not displayed numerically. In other words, the length of the period set as the repeated hitting effect is given to the player based on the elapsed time since the repeated hitting effect was executed and the variable state of the display mode of the time gauge 804 displayed in the display area HR2. It is structured so that it can be grasped intuitively.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to provide the enjoyment of predicting the length of the period set as the continuous hit effect. Moreover, even when different lengths of periods are set as the period during which the continuous hit effect is executed, it is only necessary to change the variable mode of the time gauge 804, thereby simplifying the processing related to the display control. In this control example, the display mode of the time gauge 804 is configured so that the player can visually determine the display ratio between the elapsed time area 804a and the remaining time area 804b, thereby grasping the effect period of the continuous hit effect. In addition to this, for example, as information indicating the ratio to the display area of the time gauge 804, for example, a value of "100" is displayed at the left end of the time gauge 804, and a value of "50" is displayed at the center of the time gauge 804. , and a value of “0” may be displayed at the right end of the time gauge 804 . As a result, the display ratio between the elapsed time area 804a and the remaining time area 804b in the time gauge 804 can be notified to the player in an easy-to-understand manner.

In this control example, the remaining time area 804b is configured to be variably displayed at a constant speed. When the remaining time area 804b is displayed until the remaining time area 804b is smaller than when the remaining time area 804b is displayed on the right end side of the time gauge 804, the remaining time per unit time It may be configured such that the degree of decrease in the region 804b is greater. As a result, the degree of decrease in the remaining time region 804b can be made slower as the remaining period of the repeated hitting effect decreases, so the repeated hitting effect can be executed without giving up until the end.

Also, for example, when the remaining time region 804b is large, that is, the remaining time region 804b is displayed to the left end of the time gauge 804, the remaining time region 804b is smaller, that is, the right end of the time gauge 804 is displayed. The degree of decrease in the remaining time area 804b per unit time may be smaller than when the remaining time area 804b is displayed in , or the continuous hit effect period after the time gauge 804 is displayed is The length of the period until the end is set in advance, and the remaining time area 804b is not displayed at the timing when the period has passed. Display control may be executed as follows. By constructing in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to predict the period during which the repeated hitting performance is set, so that the player is motivated to operate the frame button 22 (operating means) immediately after the repeated hitting performance is executed. be able to.

Returning to FIG. 130(a), the description is continued. In the sub-display area Ds, a comment "Defeat the enemy with repeated button presses" is displayed as a display mode indicating that the successive press effect has started. As a result, the execution of the repeated hitting performance and the contents of the operation to be executed during the repeated hitting performance can be notified to the player in an easy-to-understand manner, so that the player can be easily made to participate in the repeated hitting performance.

Then, when the player operates the frame button 22 a plurality of times during the continuous hitting effect, a display screen as shown in FIG. 130(b) is displayed. FIG. 130(b) is a diagram showing an example of the display screen displayed after the frame button 22 is operated a plurality of times during the continuous hitting effect. As shown in FIG. 130(b), when the player operates the frame button 22 a plurality of times during the continuous hit effect, the number of enemy characters 802 decreases according to the number of times the operation is performed. An effect is executed in which the number of enemy characters 802 is reduced to a variable value). FIG. 130(b) shows a continuous hit effect in which "3" is set as the maximum variable value, and the number of remaining enemy characters 802 on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 is three. is displayed in the display mode of the enemy characters 802, and the characters "3 remaining" indicating the number of remaining enemy characters 802 are displayed in the display area HR1. In the example shown in FIG. 130(b), since the display mode of the enemy character 802 has reached the upper limit (maximum variable value), the sword As the display mode of 801k, a display mode in which the blade is tattered is displayed.

It should be noted that even if the effect mode of the continuous hitting effect is varied up to the maximum variable value, the player is not immediately notified that the maximum variable value has been reached. The display of the time gauge 804 indicating the effect period of the repeated hit effect and the display of the button 803 are continuously displayed. As a result, the player who is executing the repeated hitting effect can play the game expecting that the effect mode of the repeated hitting effect will be more varied.

The variable degree of the effect mode of the continuous hit effect in this control example is configured so that the maximum variable value tends to vary according to the lottery result of the special symbol, and the smaller the maximum variable value (displayed in the display area HR1 The smaller the number of remaining enemy characters 802 to be drawn, the higher the possibility of winning a jackpot in the special symbol lottery.

Then, the effect result of the repeated hit effect is displayed in a different display mode according to the number of the enemy characters 802 at the end of the repeated hit effect. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 130(c), when the number of enemy characters 802 (remaining number displayed in the display area HR1) at the end of the continuous hit effect is "0", the special symbol lottery of this time is executed. is displayed in the sub-display area Ds (see FIG. 131(a)), indicating that the result is likely to be a jackpot. , but the characters of ``Chance'' are displayed in the sub-display area Ds (see FIG. 131(b)), and ``10-89 is displayed in the secondary display area Ds as a display mode that does not show the result of the special symbol lottery. By configuring in this manner, the player can be motivated to play the game to reduce the number of the enemy characters 802 during the continuous hitting effect.

If the number of enemy characters 802 (remaining number displayed in the display area HR1) at the end of the repeated hit effect is "90 to 100", it means that the player is not actively participating in the repeated hit effect. Therefore, instead of the lottery result of the special symbol, the characters "more hits!!" are displayed in the secondary display area Ds as the effect result of the repeated hits effect to encourage participation in the repeated hits effect. As a result, it is possible to reinform the player who has forgotten to operate the frame button 22 during execution of the repeated hitting effect or who has not understood how to operate it, of the contents of the game to be executed during the repeated hitting effect. Therefore, the frame button 22 can be easily operated when the repeated hitting effect is executed next time.

In addition, in this control example, when the frame button 22 is operated a predetermined number of times (e.g., eight times) after the effect mode of the repeated hit effect reaches the maximum variable value, the conditions for ending the repeated hit effect are established, and the repeated hit effect is completed. It is constructed so that the performance result of the continuous hitting performance is displayed before the performance period of . More specifically, as shown in FIG. 132(a), when the end condition is established in a state where the continuous hit effect has reached the maximum variable value (3), the remaining time area 804b of the time gauge 804 remains. At , the effect result similar to the effect result of the continuous hit effect executed when the remaining number of enemy characters 802 is "3" (see FIG. 131(b)) is displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81. be done.

By configuring in this manner, the maximum variable value of the repeated hitting effect currently being executed can be notified to the player in an easy-to-understand manner before the end of the effect period of the repeated hitting effect. Although detailed explanation is omitted, in this control example, when the effect result of the repeated hit effect is displayed before the effect period of the repeated hit effect elapses, the remaining effect period (remaining period of the time gauge 804) ) has elapsed, an effect different from the continuous hit effect is executed according to the operation of the frame button 22 . By configuring in this way, even when the effect result of the repeated hitting effect is displayed early, the player can be motivated to operate the frame button 22 .

Furthermore, in this control example, in a part of the case where the end condition is satisfied while the effect mode of the continuous hit effect reaches the maximum variable value (3), as a special effect result, as shown in FIG. 132(b) A performance is performed. FIG. 132(b) is a diagram showing an example of the display screen when a special effect result is set as the effect result of the repeated hitting effect.

FIG. 132(b) shows, as the effect result of the continuous hit effect, when the end condition is established in a state where the effect mode of the repeated hit effect reaches the maximum variable value (3) (see FIG. 130(b)), the above-described maximum This shows a special effect result in which a follow-up effect is executed to further change the variable value (3), the number of enemy characters 802 is reduced to 0, and the characters "great chance" are displayed in the secondary display area Ds. In the display area Dm, the characters "Follow-up Attack" are displayed, and an animation is displayed in which the character 801 makes an additional attack on the enemy character 802 and defeats the remaining enemy characters 802 . Then, the characters "0 bodies remaining" are displayed in the display area HR1. In addition, the button 803 is hidden in the display area HR2, and the player is notified that the effect mode will not change even if the frame button 22 is pressed any more, and the player is informed of the timing at which the follow-up effect is executed. A time gauge 804 is displayed to notify the time.

In this way, the pachinko machine 10 configured to be able to display the performance result of the repeated hitting performance before the performance period of the repeated hitting performance elapses, that is, the pachinko machine provided with a termination condition other than the lapse of the period as the termination condition of the repeated hitting performance. In the machine 10, by making it possible to display a performance result different from the normal one partly when the end condition is satisfied, the player is motivated to end the repeated hit performance under various end conditions. can participate in

Further, in this control example, as described above, the condition for ending the repeated hit effect is to operate the frame button 22 a predetermined number of times (eight times) after the effect mode of the repeated hit effect has been varied up to the maximum variable value, in addition to the lapse of the effect period. It has an end condition (shortened end condition) that is satisfied when the game is completed, and a special effect result is displayed in part when the shortened end condition is satisfied. As a result, when the continuous hit performance is executed, the player who has intentionally operated the frame button 22 is more likely to execute the special performance result than the player who has not intentionally operated the frame button 22.例文帳に追加be able to.

In this control example, the shortening end condition is established according to the number of times the player operates the frame button 22. However, when the player operates the frame button 22, For example, every time the frame button 22 is operated after the effect mode of the continuous hit effect is varied up to the maximum variable value, a predetermined A lottery may be executed, and if the lottery is won, the shortened termination condition may be established. Even in the case of such a configuration, it is possible to make it easier for the player to satisfy the shortened end condition when the player operates the frame button 22 more often than when the player does not operate the frame button 22 more often. In addition, in this case, immediately after the effect mode of the continuous hit effect is varied to the maximum variable value (by the first operation of the frame button 22 after the effect mode is varied to the maximum variable value), the shortening end condition is satisfied. Therefore, the shortened end condition can be satisfied without making the player predict the maximum variable value set in the continuous hit effect being executed.

In addition, in the above-described control example, it is configured so that the termination condition can be established after the effect mode of the repeated hit effect is varied to the maximum variable value. In the case where the mode can be changed to three or more performance modes, it is constructed so that the end condition of the continuous hitting performance can be established before the performance mode of the continuous hitting performance is changed to the performance mode corresponding to the maximum variable value. can be Specifically, when the frame button 22 is operated while the first effect mode (first effect mode) in the repeated hit effect is being executed, the change to the next effect mode occurs with a probability of about 1/2. A variable lottery (first lottery) is executed to allow the game to be played, and a termination lottery (second lottery) is executed to end the consecutive hitting performance with a probability of about 1/100. Then, when the variable lottery (first lottery) is won before the end lottery (second lottery), the performance mode is changed to the second performance mode (performance mode corresponding to the semi-variable value). When the frame button 22 is operated in a state in which the continuous hit performance is being executed in the second performance mode, the first lottery is executed with a probability of about 1/10, and the second lottery is executed with a probability of about 1/10. Execute. In other words, it is constructed so that it is easier to win the second lottery when the repeated hit performance is executed in the second performance mode than when the repeated hit performance is executed in the first performance mode, and the continuous hit performance is being performed. Depending on the results of various lotteries executed based on the operation of the frame button 22 in , the effect mode of the continuous hitting effect may be varied.

In this way, when the frame button 22 is operated during the repeated hitting effect, the effect mode of the repeated hitting effect is changed by satisfying the first condition, and the repeated hitting effect is effected by satisfying the second condition different from the first condition. Further, the more the effect mode of the repeated hitting effect is changed, the more likely the second condition is satisfied than the first condition, so that the repeated hitting effect executed this time is preliminarily executed. While making it difficult for the player to predict the maximum variable value that has been set, it is possible to execute continuous hitting performance in a performance mode rich in variations based on the operation of the frame button 22.例文帳に追加

Also in this case, the maximum variable value in the continuous hitting performance is set in advance, and when the maximum variable value is reached, even if the first lottery is won, the performance mode is not changed, and the second lottery is entered. It is only necessary to continue the continuous hitting effect without changing the effect mode until winning. Further, when winning the first lottery while reaching the maximum variable value, a process for increasing the probability of winning the second lottery may be executed without changing the presentation mode. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the period during which the second lottery is not won from being unnecessarily long during the continuous hitting effect.

In the above-described example, both the first condition and the second condition are established according to the result of a predetermined lottery. At least one of the first condition and the second condition may be established according to the number of times the (operation means) is operated. In this way, the condition that is established according to the number of times the frame button 22 is operated during the repeated hit effect and the lottery result of the predetermined lottery that is executed when the frame button 22 is operated during the repeated hit effect. and a condition to be satisfied by each condition, and depending on the degree of establishment of each condition, the effect mode of the repeated hit effect is varied, or the end timing of the repeated hit effect is set. It is possible to make it difficult to understand whether the performance mode of is variable and at what timing the continuous hitting performance ends, so that the performance effect can be enhanced.

Furthermore, in this control example, it is possible to notify the player that the possibility of winning a big hit in the special symbol lottery increases as the performance mode changes during the continuous hitting performance, but this is not the only option. For example, even if the player operates the operating means (the frame button 22) for a predetermined number of times (for example, 10 times) during the repeated hitting performance, the special pattern lottery is performed when the performance mode of the repeated hitting performance does not change. It may be configured to notify that the possibility of winning is high. By configuring in this way, even when a state in which it is difficult to change the performance mode is set during the repeated hitting performance, the player can be entertained with the performance mode until the end. In addition, when the effect result of the continuous hit effect is displayed in the effect mode that has not been changed from the initial state, the current effect result is the effect result executed because the frame button 22 was not operated, or the frame button 22 is not operated. It is possible to make it difficult for a nearby player to grasp whether the performance result is based on the result of operating 22.例文帳に追加

In addition, a plurality of performance modes that can be set during the continuous hit performance are provided, and when a variable condition for varying the performance mode during the continuous hit performance is established, one of the plurality of performance modes is selected. In a game machine configured to be able to be set at random, it may be configured such that when the result of a special symbol lottery is a big win, it is easier to set a specific performance mode than when it is a loss. By configuring in this way, it is possible to eliminate the relationship between the variable number of times of the performance mode during the repeated hitting performance and the degree of expectation of winning the jackpot. In contrast, the frame button 22 can be voluntarily operated.

In this case, an upper limit is set for the number of times the effect mode is changed during the repeated hit effect, and when the number of times the effect mode is changed during the repeated hit effect reaches the upper limit value, the maximum It may be configured to execute the same processing as when the display mode is changed to the variable value display mode. Thus, by positively operating the frame button 22 during the continuous hit effect, the variable number of times of the effect mode is set to the upper limit while the remaining period of the repeated hit effect (period for validly determining the operation of the frame button 22) remains. When the value is reached, it is possible to shorten the effect period of the continuous hit effect.

Next, the display contents of the icon display effects will be described with reference to FIGS. 133 to 135. FIG. FIG. 133(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an area in which icon display can be performed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81. FIG. FIG. 133(b) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the display screen displayed when the icon display effect is started.

In this control example, a plurality of types of icons can be displayed at a plurality of locations on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81, and the locations where the icons are displayed and the icon display effect (icon display effect in which the display order is random). display notice) is configured to be executable. In this icon display effect, the result of the special symbol lottery can be suggested to the player according to the location where each icon is displayed and the type of icon to be displayed.

In the pachinko machine 10 capable of executing such an effect, in order to prevent the player from easily predicting the effect mode of the icon display effect, the locations where each icon is displayed in the icon display effect, A plurality of performance pattern data with different types of icons to be displayed are prepared in advance, and the performance mode of the icon display performance to be executed is determined according to the lottery result of the special pattern. However, in the case of using the method of preparing a plurality of effect pattern data in advance, there is a problem that the amount of effect data to be stored in advance increases according to the number of effect patterns.

On the other hand, in this control example, when the icon display effect is executed, the icon display effect can be executed in a manner in which a plurality of lottery results are combined. That is, instead of pre-storing effect pattern data indicating a series of effect contents in the icon display effect, the effect contents are determined for each part of the icon display effect, and the icons are displayed in an effect mode combining the determined contents. It is configured to execute a production. By configuring in this way, icon display effects can be executed in various effects modes using a limited amount of effect data.

Although a specific description will be given later, in this control example, when determining the effect mode of the icon display effect, the number of icons to be displayed by the current icon display effect, the order of displaying the icons, and the display positions of the icons are set separately. are selected by lottery, and the icon display effect is executed in the effect mode combining each selected content. That is, for example, when the number of displayed icons is four, the icon type displayed first, the icon type displayed second, the icon type displayed third, the icon type displayed fourth, In addition, the display location where the first icon is displayed, the display location where the second icon is displayed, the display location where the third icon is displayed, and four A display location where an eye icon is displayed is selected.

Furthermore, the icon display locations are configured so that the same display location can be selected more than once, and if the same display location is selected more than once, the latter icon will not be displayed. Configure. By configuring in this way, it is possible to display a number of icons different from the number of icons selected as the effect mode of the icon display effect, so the icon display effect is executed simply by combining a plurality of effect contents. It is possible to execute the icon display effect in a more diverse manner than in the case of doing so, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

As shown in FIG. 133(a), in this control example, five areas 811a to 811d are set in advance as areas where icons can be displayed in the icon display effect. Then, when the icon display effect is executed, a suggestive mode suggesting a place where the icon is displayed is displayed in five places of the areas 811a to 811d.

FIG. 133(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the display screen when the suggestion mode is displayed in the icon display effect. As shown in FIG. 133(b), when the icon display effect is executed and the suggestive mode is displayed, the areas 811a and 811b are displayed as display locations where icons may be displayed in the current icon display effect. , and a display mode (a circle in the figure) indicating the area 811c is displayed. An area 811a is displayed in a highlighted display mode (a double circle in the figure) for indicating the area in which the icon is displayed next (first) among the areas displayed in the suggestive mode.

In this way, when the icon display effect is executed, by displaying the suggestion mode suggesting the place where the icon is displayed before the icon is actually displayed, the player can see the icon It is possible to provide the enjoyment of predicting the presentation mode of the display presentation. Furthermore, in this control example, when the result of the special symbol lottery is a jackpot, there is provided a display portion (specific display portion) where the icon is more likely to be displayed than when the result is a loss. Therefore, when the specific display location is suggested as the suggestion mode, the player can have a sense of anticipation that he or she has won a special symbol jackpot.

In this control example, it is configured such that a plurality of display locations are displayed as the suggestive mode displayed in the icon display effect. By configuring in this way, it is possible to notify the display locations where the icons are displayed in the icon display effect to be executed this time without suggesting the display order. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with the enjoyment of predicting the presentation mode of the icon display presentation, specifically in which display order the icons will be displayed.

In this control example, the icon is always displayed at the display location where the suggestion mode is displayed. It is sufficient that the icon is more likely to be displayed than the non-displayed display location, and when a plurality of display locations are displayed in a suggestive mode, some of the plurality of display locations may not display the icon. It may be configured not to be displayed. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult to predict the effect mode of the icon display effect to be executed.

Now, with reference to FIG. 134, the flow of actual icon display in the icon display effect will be described. FIG. 134(a) is a diagram showing an example of the display screen when the first icon is displayed in the icon display effect, and FIG. 134(b) is a view showing all the icons in the icon display effect. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a display screen when

As shown in FIG. 134(a), an icon 812a that is first displayed as the icon display effect is displayed in the area 811a that is highlighted in FIG. 133(b). In this control example, the icon 812a is displayed after the icon display area is destroyed in the main display area Dm, and the icon pops out from the area. The mode, that is, the display mode showing the area where the icon is displayed is made different from the display mode showing the other areas.

Then, the area 811c is displayed in a highlighted display mode for suggesting the display location where the icon will be displayed next, and is not displayed in the suggested mode on the display screen shown in FIG. Area 811d is displayed in a suggestive manner. In this way, as the icon display effect progresses, by adding information about the order in which the icons are displayed in the icon display effect and the display locations where the icons are displayed, even after the icon display effect is executed, It is possible to provide the enjoyment of predicting the final result of the icon display effect.

In addition, since it is possible to comprehend the content of the suggestive mode while comprehending the type of icon to be displayed, the icon display effect can be enjoyed in a complex manner. Although a detailed description will be given later, in the example shown in FIG. 134(a), the most common icon display mode, "square", is displayed as the first icon display mode in the icon display effect. there is In this control example, the ease of display is also changed for the types of icons displayed in the icon display effect. It is configured so that it is easier to display in the case of a big win. As a result, in the icon display effect, the player can be interested not only in the number of icons to be displayed and the display locations, but also in the types of icons to be displayed.

In addition, the degree of expectation for winning the jackpot can be varied based on the combination of the display location of the icon and the icon type, or the degree of expectation for winning the jackpot can be varied based on the combination of the number of icons displayed and the icon type. It may be configured such that the degree of expectation for winning the jackpot is varied based on the combination of the icon types to be used. As a result, it is possible to predict the result of the effect as the repeated hit effect progresses, that is, while grasping the type and display position of the actually displayed icon, so that the player can be more interested. has the effect of

Then, after a predetermined period of time has elapsed from the diagram shown in FIG. 134(a), icons are displayed for all of the four areas (areas 811a to 811e) displayed in the suggestive mode. Specifically, the icon displayed second is the area 811c adjacent to the area 811a, and then the icons 811b and 811d are displayed in this order. In the example shown in FIG. 134(b) of this control example, the display order of icons is set in the order of area 811a, area 811c, area 811b, and area 811d. An icon 812a has an icon type of "diamond shape" in the area 811b, an icon 812c has an icon type of "round shape" in the area 811c, and an icon of "V sign shape" as an icon type in the area 811d. 812d is displayed.

Although the details will be described later, in this control example, the "V sign shape" icon 812d is displayed more when the jackpot is won in the special symbol lottery than when the jackpot is not won (when the jackpot is not won). It is designed to be easily displayed. In order to make it difficult for the player to understand at what timing and in which display position the icon 812d of the "V sign shape" is displayed, the icon type, the display position, and the display order are separated. It is configured so that it is possible to select independently and execute an icon display effect combining the selected contents. Therefore, it is possible to keep the player interested in the effect content of the icon display effect.

In this control example, each icon displayed in the icon display effect is configured to be displayed continuously until the icon display effect ends. The icon may be erased after a predetermined period of time has passed. For example, the previously displayed icon may be erased after the next icon is displayed. By configuring in this way, while suppressing the occurrence of a period in which no icon is displayed during the icon display effect, the effect of the icon display effect is not obtained unless the icon display effect is continuously observed. Since it can be made difficult to grasp, the production effect can be enhanced.

Next, with reference to FIG. 135, another pattern of icon display effects will be described. FIG. 135 is a diagram showing an example of a display screen when overlapping icon display locations are set as icon display effects. The icon display effects shown in FIG. 135 are the same as those in FIG. 134B described above in the number of icons to be displayed and the icon types, but are different only in the order of icon display. Specifically, in FIG. 134(b) described above, the display order of the icons is set in the order of area 811a, area 811c, area 811b, and area 811d, whereas in FIG. Areas 811a, 811c, 811a, 811c are set in this order.

In this control example, when the icon display locations are selected in duplicate, only the icon types corresponding to the previously selected display order are displayed. Therefore, an icon display effect is executed in which the third icon (“rhombus shape” icon 812b) and the fourth icon (“V sign shape” icon 812d) selected as the icon type are not displayed. It will be. As a result, the possibility of winning a jackpot in a special symbol lottery, that is, an icon display effect that enables the display of four icons and the icon 812d in the shape of a "V sign" can be displayed internally. In spite of being in a state capable of executing an icon display performance for indicating a high value, only two icons are displayed as a performance mode of the icon display performance to be actually executed, and the degree of expectation for winning a big win. An icon display effect is executed in which only the icon types for which the value is not high are displayed.

Therefore, it is possible to set the effect mode of the icon display effect to be executed in a complicated manner with respect to the result of the special symbol lottery. In addition, as an icon display effect executed when the result of the special symbol lottery is a loss, only two icons can be displayed internally, and only icon types that are not highly expected to win a big win are displayed. Even when the icon display performance to be displayed is executed, the icon display positions in the icon display performance are duplicated, so that the player is made to think that the icon display performance in which only two icons are displayed is executed. be able to. As a result, the player can play the game while feeling the expectation of winning a big win until the icon display effect is finished.

According to the example shown in FIG. 135, when the icon display locations in the icon display effect overlap, the icon set first is displayed. Alternatively, a discriminating means capable of discriminating the types of icons whose display portions are duplicated is provided, and icons discriminated as easily selected icon types are displayed. Alternatively, it may be configured to display an icon that is determined to be an icon type that is difficult to select. Alternatively, a fused icon may be generated by merging icons having overlapping display locations, and the fused icon may be displayed.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 136 to 138, the contents of the delay effect in this control example will be described. In this control example, the player is caused to operate the frame button 22, and while the display mode displayed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81 is varied according to the operation result, voice is output corresponding to the variable mode. An effect (operation effect) for outputting a sound from the device 226 is configured to be executable. Furthermore, when the operation effect is executed, a predetermined delay condition (for example, a delay condition established when the determination means for determining whether or not to execute the delayed effect determines to execute the delayed effect) is established. , the operation of the frame button 22 can be executed by delaying one or both of the variable timing of the display mode and the audio output timing.

The above-mentioned delayed effect makes the player feel uncomfortable by changing only the execution timing without changing the contents of each effect to be executed (display effect for changing the display mode, audio effect for outputting sound). Only the player who notices the discomfort can grasp that the delayed effect has been executed, and as a benefit, benefits advantageous to the player (for example, winning a jackpot) are given with a high probability. In recent years, it has been used as a production to show that

However, as long as it is used as an effect in which a privilege that is advantageous to the player is given with a high probability, the occurrence frequency (execution frequency) is low, and even if the player plays the game all day long, it will be executed only once or twice. It was something. In contrast to the delay effects that are executed less frequently and the content of each effect does not change, conventionally, the effect data corresponding to the pattern of each delay effect, that is, the display effect is displayed after the frame button 22 is operated. Display data including display image data corresponding to the waiting period until the performance is executed, and effect data dedicated to the delay effect having audio data including the sound corresponding to the waiting period until the sound effect is performed are prepared in advance. Therefore, there is a problem that the capacity of the effect data increases with respect to the execution frequency.

On the other hand, in this control example, in the case of executing the delayed effect, it is possible to set a waiting period from when the frame button 22 is operated until the effect corresponding to the operation of the frame button 22 is executed. , when it is determined that the set waiting period has elapsed, the operation effect is executed. In other words, the timing at which the operation effect is executed is delayed from the timing at which the frame button 22 is operated.

By configuring in this way, the delay effect can be executed without providing the effect data dedicated to the delay effect. In addition, in this control example, different lengths of waiting periods can be set as the waiting period from when the frame button 22 is operated until the operation effect is executed. In addition, in this control example, the standby period described above can be set for each of the display effect and the sound effect. That is, when the delay effect is executed, the length of the delay period of the display effect and the length of the delay period of the sound effect can be made different. In this way, only by changing the length of the waiting period, it is possible to set a plurality of delay timings in the delay performance and increase the variation of the delay performance, so that the interest in the game can be improved.

First, with reference to FIG. 136, an example of an operation presentation executed in this control example will be described. FIG. 136(a) is a diagram showing an example of the display screen displayed when the operation effect is executed, and FIG. 136(b) is an example of the display screen displayed as the effect result of the operation effect. It is a figure showing. First, when an operation effect is executed, as shown in FIG. 136(a), a treasure chest 810 is displayed in the center of the main display area Dm, and a message "PUSH the button to open the treasure chest!!" ” comment is displayed. In the display area HR2 formed in the main display area Dm, a button 803, which is a display mode prompting the operation of the frame button 22, and a time gauge 804 for indicating the period during which the operation of the frame button 22 is effectively accepted. is displayed. The display mode displayed in the display area HR2 is the same as the display mode (see FIG. 130(a)) in the repeated hit effect described above, so the same reference numerals are given and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

A schematic diagram showing the state of the frame button 22 and the audio output device 226 is shown next to the diagram simulating the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 in FIG. 136(a). The situation is a schematic diagram showing a situation in which the frame button 22 is not operated and a situation in which the audio output device 226 does not output a sound indicating the effect result of the operation effect.

After the operation effect is executed, when the player operates the frame button 22, the treasure box 810 displayed in the center of the main display area Dm opens as shown in FIG. A character of "chance" is displayed as a result display mode 810a for indicating. Then, the comment "Chance!!" is also displayed in the sub-display area Ds. The state shown in FIG. 136(b) is a state in which the frame button 22 has been operated, and a state in which a sound (“pakkan”) indicating the effect result of the operation effect is output from the audio output device 226, and the display is performed. The display mode that prompts the user to operate the frame button 22 from the area HR2 is deleted.

As described above, if it is a normal operation effect, the player operates the frame button 22 during the operation effect (while the remaining time area 804b is displayed on the time gauge 804), and immediately after that, the operation is performed. As a performance result of the performance, a display performance of opening the treasure box 810 and a voice ("pakkan") indicating the opening of the treasure box 810 are output at the timing corresponding to the variable state of the display mode in the display performance. As a result, it is possible to execute an effect with a sense of unity between sight and sound.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 137 and 138, the content of the effect when the delayed effect is executed with respect to the operation effect (when the delay pattern is set) will be described. FIG. 137(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the display screen when the frame button 22 is operated when a delay pattern is set for the operation effect, and FIG. 8 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the display screen 0.8 seconds after the frame button 22 is operated when a delay pattern is set for the operation presentation. FIG.

First, when the frame button 22 is pressed in a state where a delay pattern is set for the operation effect, as shown in FIG. "Pakkan") is output, but the display mode displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 is the display mode displayed when the operation effect is executed and the frame button 22 is not operated (Fig. 136). (a) reference) is continuously displayed. Then, when the delay period (0.8 seconds) set as the current delay pattern has elapsed, as shown in FIG. It is displayed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81 .

That is, the delay pattern explained with reference to FIG. 137 is a delay pattern in which the display effect is delayed by 0.8 seconds and the sound effect is delayed by 0 seconds (not delayed). By executing the delayed effect in this manner, it is possible to cause the player to execute an effect that gives the player a sense of discomfort. In addition, since the production situation after the display mode shown in FIG. 137(b) is displayed is the same as the production situation (see FIG. 136(b)) when the delayed production is not executed, the player can It is necessary to determine whether or not the delay performance is executed in a short period in which the display performance is not executed and only the voice performance is executed, and the player can be made to pay attention to the performance contents of the operation performance. .

137, the sound is output from the sound output device 226 immediately after the player operates the frame button 22 (because the sound effect is executed), so the frame button 22 is properly operated. However, it is not limited to this, and it is also possible to set a delay period for both the display effect and the sound effect as a delay pattern of the operation effect. good.

The state shown in FIG. 137(a) is actually the state in which the frame button 22 has already been pressed. Configure. Then, the display mode of the time gauge 804 is changed in the same manner as when the frame button 22 is not operated. That is, a display mode in which the remaining time area 804b is reduced is displayed. In other words, the display mode is continuously displayed when the frame button 22 is not operated. In this way, when the delay pattern of the operation effect is set, when the frame button 22 is operated, the same display mode as when the frame button 22 is not operated is continuously displayed during the delay period. By configuring so as to be such that, as the effect mode during the delay period, the effect mode that does not give the player a sense of discomfort can be executed without using a new effect. Also, even if a different length of delay period is set, it is only necessary to change the length of the period during which the same display mode as when the frame button 22 is not operated is maintained.

Here, for example, the frame button 22 is operated in a state in which there is almost no remaining effect period of the operation effect (a period indicated by the remaining time area 804b of the time gauge 804) (specifically, less than 0.8 seconds), and a delay occurs. When the pattern is set, the remaining performance period of the operation performance becomes 0 during the delay period, so the same display mode as when the frame button 22 is not operated is continuously displayed during the delay period. I have a problem that I can't.

Therefore, in this control example, it is made possible to determine whether or not the present is in the delay period. When it is determined that there is, a specific effect is configured to be executable.

Next, the effect contents of this specific effect will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 138 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the effect content of the specific effect. As shown in FIG. 138, when the specific effect is executed, a comment "during delay" is displayed in the sub-display area Ds to notify the player that the delay period is currently in progress. , a special effect (indicated by a star in the figure) is displayed around the closed treasure chest 810 in the center of the main display area Dm, and a special effect (indicated by a star in the figure) is also displayed around the button 803 displayed in the display area HR2. (indicated by an asterisk) is displayed. Further, since the effect period of the operation effect is 0 at the timing when this specific effect is executed, the time gauge 804 without the remaining time region 804b is displayed. Then, in accordance with the execution timing of the specific effect, the sound of "Chance" is output from the sound output device 226 as a sound mode based on the result of the special symbol lottery which is the target of the operation effect of this time. This voice mode is variable based on the actual result of the special symbol lottery, and when the result of the special symbol lottery is a big win, the voice for suggesting the result of the special symbol lottery (for example, chance, When the result of the special symbol lottery is a loss, a voice (for example, the occurrence of a delay, etc.) is output to notify the player that the delay effect is being executed. It should be configured so that it can be easily output.

With such a configuration, it is possible to provide the player with the pleasure of selecting at what timing the frame button 22 should be operated during the operation performance. In this control example, when the effect period of the operation effect (valid period during which the frame button 22 can be operated) has elapsed during the set delay period, the specific effect described above is executed. However, without being limited to this, even during the delay period, the delay period may be reset at the point when the presentation period of the operation presentation has passed, and the presentation result of the operation presentation may be displayed. Such a configuration eliminates the need to use new performance data, and furthermore, the length of the delay period can be made more complicated.

In addition, a separate execution condition for the above-described specific effect may be provided. For example, if the remaining period of the effect period of the operation effect is longer than or equal to a predetermined period, an execution condition that is established when the delay period is set may be provided. Alternatively, it may be configured such that only the operation performance executed during the special symbol variation in which the result of the special symbol lottery is a big hit is the specific performance.

An example of the delay effect in this control example has been described above with reference to FIGS. A delay pattern may be set so that the timing is delayed. Further, in this control example, when a delay pattern is set for the operation performance executed within one special symbol variation period, the operation performance of the delay pattern is completed within the special symbol variation period. However, without being limited to this, when the delay pattern is set, it may be configured so that the operation effect is executed so as to straddle a plurality of special symbol variations. In this case, for example, a pre-determination process for pre-determining the winning information of the special figure reservation newly acquired during the execution of the operation effect is executed, and if the result of the pre-determination process is that the jackpot is won, It may be configured to set a delay pattern. Further, the delay period set as the delay pattern can be set up to the specific timing of the special symbol variation corresponding to the special symbol holding which is the result of the preliminary determination that the jackpot is won in the preliminary determination at the longest. It is possible to execute a delay performance with a surprising length for In addition, when the delayed performance is executed across a plurality of special symbol variations, the same operation performance may be executed as the performance corresponding to the special symbol variation in which the delayed performance is executed. As a result, the effect result of the operation effect to be executed after the delay period has elapsed can be provided to the player without discomfort.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 139 to 144, the contents of the gathering effect and the battle effect will be described. In this control example, as an effect for showing the lottery result of the special symbol, it is configured to be able to execute a variation effect corresponding to the variation period of the special symbol variation. Furthermore, as one of the variable effects, a variable display effect using the display surface of the third pattern display device 81 is configured to be executable. As one of the variable display effects, a group effect and a battle effect are configured to be executable.

In this control example, as the variable display effect executed within the special symbol variation period for showing the result of one special symbol lottery, the group effect is executed in the first half of the variable display effect, and the second half of the variable display effect. During the period, the battle performance is executed in a performance mode corresponding to the performance result of the collective performance. In this way, the variable display effect that is continuously executed for a predetermined period is configured to vary the effect mode that is executed in the latter half according to the result of the effect that is executed in the first half of the variable display effect. can be watched continuously.

First, among the variable display effects executed in the pachinko machine 10 of this control example, the contents of the group effects executed in the first half period will be described with reference to FIGS. 139 to 141. FIG. The group production is a production for gathering a plurality of characters (ally characters), and the battle production in the latter half period is executed in a production mode according to the number of grouped ally characters in this group production. In this control example, the larger the number of ally characters gathered in the gathering effect, the more likely the result of the corresponding special symbol lottery will be a big win than the smaller number. Therefore, when the gathering effect is executed, the player can play the game while expecting more allied characters to gather.

In this control example, the display mode of the third pattern that is variably displayed on the display surface (main display area Dm) of the third pattern display device 81 is varied to execute a group effect. Each of the symbol rows L1 to L3 variably displayed in the display area Dm is variably displayed with the third symbols corresponding to the ally characters of different types. Then, among the third symbols that are stopped during the group effect (this concept includes a temporary stop display that looks like it has stopped, and the same applies to the stop display described below), there is a third symbol that corresponds to the ally character. is included, an effect is executed to indicate that the stopped-displayed allied characters have gathered.

The number of times the third pattern is stop-displayed in the collective performance differs according to the performance period of the collective performance, and the third pattern is stopped when a longer performance period is set as the performance period of the collective performance. It is configured to be displayed more often. In this way, by configuring the number of times the third symbol is stop-displayed to be variable according to the gathering effect to be executed, it is possible to determine how many friendly characters can be acquired (collected). Since it is possible to make it difficult for the players to understand, it is possible to play the game while anticipating that more allied characters will gather until the end of the gathering effect.

Furthermore, in this control example, different types of ally characters are set for each of the symbol rows L1 to L3 that are variably displayed. By configuring in this manner, it is possible to make the player interested in which display mode each of the symbol rows L1 to L3 is stopped and displayed. Also, in this control example, the number of allied characters set for each symbol row is made different. Specifically, for the middle symbol row L2, the other symbol rows It is configured so that more ally characters are set than in the symbol column L3).

By configuring in this way, the player watches the gathering effect while being strongly aware that the third symbol corresponding to the ally character is stopped and displayed in the symbol row in which many ally characters are set. Therefore, the production effect can be enhanced. For example, the number of times that the third pattern is stopped and displayed as a group effect is set to 2 times, and one friendly character (character 1) in the left pattern row L1 and one friendly character (character 2) in the right pattern row L3 are displayed in the middle pattern. When two types of allied characters (character 3 and character 4) are set in column L2, in order to collect four types of allied characters (character 1 to character 4) in this variation effect, the first At the 3-symbol stop display timing, at least character 3 or character 4 must be stop-displayed in middle pattern row L2, and it is not necessary to stop-display ally characters in left pattern row L1 and right symbol row L3. . Therefore, it is possible to make the player interested in which teammate character is stop-displayed in which pattern row at which timing, and the production effect can be enhanced.

Next, the concrete effect content of the collective effect executed in this control example will be described. FIG. 139(a) is a diagram schematically showing an example of the display screen displayed when the gathering effect is started, and FIG. FIG. 140(a) is a diagram showing an example of the display screen that is displayed, FIG. 140(b) is a diagram showing an example of the display screen when an ally character is acquired in the gathering effect; [FIG. 11] is a diagram showing an example of an end screen of a collective effect.

As shown in FIG. 139(a), when the group effect is executed, the display mode of the third symbols set in the symbol rows L1 to L3 is varied, and the third symbols in the left symbol row L1 are displayed stationary. A left preliminary symbol display area 900a in which a preliminary symbol is displayed is formed so as to accompany the left third symbol display area 901a. Similarly, a middle preliminary symbol display area 900b in which a middle preliminary symbol is displayed is formed so as to accompany the middle third symbol display area 901b in which the third symbol of the middle symbol row L2 is stop-displayed, and the right symbol row L3. A right preliminary symbol display area 900c in which a right preliminary symbol is displayed is formed so as to accompany the right third symbol display area 901c in which the third symbol is stopped and displayed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 139(a), the character "large" is displayed in the left preliminary symbol display area 900a, the character "collection" is displayed in the middle preliminary symbol display area 900b, and the right preliminary symbol display area 900c. On the other hand, when the characters "go" are stop-displayed, the group effect is started, and the characters "group effect start" indicating that the group effect is executed are displayed in the sub-display area Ds.

In the example shown in FIG. 139(a), the start timing of the collective effect is displayed. Although the displayed display screen has been described, each of the preliminary symbol display areas 900a to 900c may be used in other effects, for example, an effect that spans continuously executed variable effects (continuous effect ), each preliminary symbol display area 900a ~ 900c in order to indicate that the continuous effect is being executed (for example, characters "continuous") to stop display each preliminary symbol, Each preliminary symbol may be stop-displayed in a display mode (for example, characters of "probability change") to indicate the currently set game state.

In addition, a preliminary pattern may be used as an effect to incite whether or not the collective effect is to be executed. is stop-displayed, the left preliminary symbol display area 900a that is first stop-displayed is "Large", and then the right preliminary symbol display area 900c that is stop-displayed is "Composite". It is also possible to configure so that a preliminary symbol of "X mark" is stopped and displayed in the intermediate preliminary symbol display area 900b that is stopped and displayed. By configuring in this manner, it is possible to provide the player with the pleasure of predicting whether or not the group effect will be executed according to the stop display mode of each of the preliminary symbol display areas 900a to 900c.

In addition, in this control example, at the start timing of the collective effect shown in FIG. 139(a), the third symbol is stopped and displayed in a normal display mode. The preliminary symbols are stopped and displayed irrespective of the stopped display mode of the third symbols. By configuring in this way, as the display control when the collective effect is started, it is not necessary to use the dedicated stop display control for the third symbol or the dedicated third symbol type, and the processing load of the display control is eliminated. can be reduced.

In this control example, the third symbol is also stop-displayed (temporarily stopped) at the stop display timing of the preliminary symbol indicating the start of the collective effect, so that the player can understand that the collective effect will start. However, without being limited to this, it may be configured such that only the preliminary symbols are stopped and displayed while the third symbols are being variably displayed. With this configuration, the preliminary symbols can be stop-displayed regardless of the stop-display timing of the third symbol, so that the collective effect can be started at various timings. Further, there is no need to execute stop display control for stopping (temporarily stopping) the third symbol in accordance with the start timing of the collective effect, and the processing load of display control can be reduced.

In addition, in this control example, the display screen showing the start of the group effect shown in FIG. 139(a) can be displayed at a plurality of timings. When executing the group effect from the start timing of the special pattern variation, the preliminary pattern stops in a display mode indicating the start of the group effect at the stop display timing of the third pattern corresponding to the stop timing of the special symbol variation being executed. In the case of executing the set performance with the special symbol variation being displayed and being executed, the preliminary symbols can be stopped and displayed at a plurality of timings during the variation display of the third symbol corresponding to the special symbol variation. It consists of By configuring in this way, it is possible to easily vary the effect period of the collective effect. In addition, in FIG. 139(a), since the preliminary symbol is stopped and displayed at a specific timing during the variable display of the special symbol variation, the display area Dm1 formed on the upper right side of the main display area Dm Then, the fourth symbol corresponding to the special symbol variation is variably displayed.

Next, when the collective effect is started, the display screen of the collective effect is displayed as shown in FIG. 139(b). When the collective effect is started, a display area HR5 is formed on the left side of the main display area Dm. This display area HR5 is a display area in which acquired (collected) ally characters are displayed, and is an obtainable display frame corresponding to the maximum number of ally characters that can be acquired, according to the effect mode of the gathering effect to be executed. (in the figure, seven display frames are indicated by dotted lines) are displayed. At the time shown in FIG. 139(b), no allied character has been acquired, and therefore no acquired allied character is displayed in the display area HR5.

By forming the display area HR5 in this manner and displaying the obtainable display frame and the acquired allied characters, the player is notified in advance of the maximum number of allied characters that can be acquired in the gathering effect this time. Therefore, it is possible to easily evaluate the performance contents of the collective performance. Furthermore, since the number and type of allied characters that have already been acquired can be displayed as a history, it is possible to provide an effect that is easy for the player to understand. In addition, a display area HR6 is formed on the lower right side of the main display area Dm, and the maximum number of allied characters that can be obtained in this gathering effect and the number of allied characters that have already been obtained are displayed as numerical information. In the state shown in FIG. 139(b), the maximum number of obtainable allied characters is "7" and the number of allied characters already obtained is "0". "0/7" is displayed as an information display mode indicating the status.

When the collective effect is executed, a display mode dedicated to the collective effect is set as the display mode of the third symbols stopped and displayed in the respective third symbol display areas 901a to 901c. Specifically, the third symbols in the display mode corresponding to each teammate character and the third symbols in the display mode not corresponding to the teammate character are stopped and displayed. Then, the third symbols variably displayed in the third symbol display areas 901a to 901c stop and display before the preliminary symbols variably displayed in the preliminary symbol display areas 900a to 900c.

In FIG. 139(b), the third symbol (displayed as "?" in the figure) in a display mode not corresponding to the ally character is stopped and displayed in the left third symbol display area 901a and the right third symbol display area 901c. In the middle third symbol display area 901b, as the third symbol corresponding to the ally character, the third symbol imitating a "bird" is stopped and displayed. At this time, as described above, the preliminary symbols are being displayed in a variable manner, so although the ally character stopped and displayed in the third symbol in the gathering effect has not been acquired, it indicates that the ally character will be acquired. When the preliminary symbols are stopped and displayed in the display mode, a state is entered in which the ally character to be acquired is notified in advance.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to notify the player in advance of the number and type of allied characters to be acquired when allied characters are successfully acquired in the gathering effect. , the performance contents of the group performance to be executed this time can be notified step by step. In addition, during execution of the gathering effect, by displaying a plurality of display modes corresponding to the ally characters in the third pattern, and stopping and displaying the preliminary symbols in a display mode indicating that acquisition of the ally character has failed. , it is possible to stop and display the third symbol corresponding to the ally character that cannot actually be obtained. Therefore, it is possible to execute an effect that effectively uses the image data of the third symbol, which is a display mode dedicated to the collective effect.

After that, when the preliminary symbols are stop-displayed in a display mode indicating acquisition of an ally character, the display screen shown in FIG. 140(a) is displayed. In FIG. 140(a), as the display mode of preliminary symbols indicating acquisition of an ally character, the left preliminary symbol display area 900a is "Large", the middle preliminary symbol display area 900b is "Collective", and the right preliminary symbol display area 900c. The character "go" is stopped and displayed. Then, as a gathering effect, the secondary display area Ds is displayed as a guide display indicating that a friendly character (tri-character) corresponding to the display mode imitating the "bird" that has already been stopped and displayed in the middle third symbol display area 901b has been obtained. A comment "Tori GET!!" is displayed.

In addition, in the display area HR5, a simple display mode imitating a "bird" is displayed in the fifth display frame from the top to indicate the acquired ally character. Here, in this control example, a predetermined order is assigned in advance to the ally characters that can be obtained, and among the plurality of display frames displayed in the display area HR5, the order corresponds to the order assigned in advance. It is configured so that the acquired ally character is displayed at the position. That is, in the state of the display area HR5 shown in FIG. 139(b), the player is notified only of the total number of allied characters that can be acquired in the current gathering effect, but as shown in FIG. 140(a). , when one ally character is acquired, the player can predict the type of ally character that can be acquired in the gathering effect being executed, depending on the position of the display frame where the acquired ally character is displayed. Become.

Therefore, as the collective performance progresses, it becomes possible to predict the performance mode of the collective performance in more detail, so that the players can continue to be interested in the content of the performance to be executed.

In this control example, all the display frames displayed in the display area HR5 have the same shape. The shape of the display frame may be varied to some extent. In addition, it is also possible to display supplementary information that makes it possible to predict the friendly character corresponding to each display frame. By configuring in this way, it is possible to provide the player with the enjoyment of predicting the types of allied characters that can be acquired in the current gathering presentation immediately after the gathering presentation is started.

In addition, in this control example, as described above, the acquired allied characters are displayed at positions corresponding to the order given in advance, but this is not the only option. It may be configured to be displayed side by side, or if the possibility of winning the jackpot in the special symbol lottery is different depending on the type of the ally characters acquired, It may be configured so that the acquired ally characters are displayed side by side.

Furthermore, in this control example, the total number of allied characters that can be acquired in the gathering performance being executed in the display area HR5 is notified to the player immediately after the gathering performance is started. Without limitation, only part of the total number of allied characters obtainable in the collective performance being executed is notified to the players, and as the collective performance progresses, the number of display frames displayed in the display area HR5 is increased. By doing so, the number of allied characters that can be acquired in the gathering effect may be increased. As a result, even if the number of obtainable allied characters is reported to be small immediately after the gathering effect is executed, the number of reported characters may increase in the middle, which reduces the motivation to play. can be suppressed.

In this example of control, the timing for acquiring a teammate character, that is, the preliminary symbols can be stopped and displayed a plurality of times during the performance period of the gathering performance. Then, after acquiring a teammate character a plurality of times, as shown in FIG. 140(b), when the preliminary symbols are displayed in a display mode different from the "large gathering", the gathering effect ends.

In FIG. 140(b), as shown in the display areas HR5 and HR6, the state in which a total of four allied characters, "elephant", "dugong", "bird", and "bear" have been acquired is shown. and "4/7" is displayed as the information display mode. A third symbol indicating "?" is displayed in the left third symbol display area 901a, "wild boar" in the middle third symbol display area 901b, and "rhinoceros" in the right third symbol display area 901c. "Large" in the symbol display area 900a, "X mark" in the middle preliminary symbol display area 900b, and "Complete" in the right preliminary symbol display area 900c are stop-displayed.

In other words, while each preliminary symbol is displayed in a variable manner, each third symbol is stopped and displayed, and after arousing the player that it is possible to obtain "wild boar" and "rhinoceros" as friendly characters, the left, right, and middle symbols are displayed in this order. The preliminary symbols that are stopped and displayed are "Large" and "Go", and after emphasizing that it is possible to obtain an ally character, a state is shown in which a "X mark" is finally stopped and displayed. By making it difficult for the player to predict until the end whether the gathering performance will end or whether the gathering performance will be continued by acquiring a teammate character, It is possible to prevent the player from getting bored early.

As shown in FIG. 140(b), in the group effect in this control example, one of the display modes (“Large”, “X mark”, “Agreement”) of the preliminary pattern for notifying that the group effect is finished is displayed. The part is the same as the display mode ("large", "collection", "combination") when acquiring an ally character, but it is not limited to this, for example, to notify that the group effect is over. The display mode of the preliminary symbols is set to a display mode that is completely different from the display mode when acquiring an ally character (for example, "E", "N", "D"), and to notify that the gathering effect is over. A continuous display mode (for example, 'E', '?', 'D') in which the display mode of the preliminary symbols and a part of the display mode are different can be displayed.

In this case, when "E" is stop-displayed in the left preliminary symbol display area 900a during the gathering effect, it is confirmed that the ally character cannot be acquired, and whether or not the gathering effect ends. Only then will the player be interested. That is, it is possible to provide an advantageous effect to the player even if the effect does not increase the number of allied characters. Therefore, in the case of performing a collective performance in which only a limited upper limit number of ally characters can be acquired, it is possible to increase the number of times the preliminary symbols are stopped and displayed, and the performance effect can be enhanced.

Further, when the preliminary symbols can be stopped and displayed in the continuous display mode, the display control may be executed so that only the preliminary symbols are stopped and displayed while the third symbols are not stopped and displayed. As a result, it is possible to increase the frequency of stop-displaying the preliminary symbols. Furthermore, when the continuous display mode described above is stopped and displayed a predetermined number of times (for example, twice) in succession, the display mode ("Large", It is preferable to configure so that the stop display (the possibility of the stop display is increased) is performed by "collection" and "matching"). By configuring in this way, when the preliminary symbols are stopped and displayed in the continuous display mode, not only the gathering effect is continued but also the degree of expectation for acquiring the ally character can be increased, so that the gathering effect can be performed. The production effect can be further enhanced.

As shown in FIG. 140(b), when it is notified that the group effect is over in the stop display mode of the preliminary symbols, the sub display area Ds displays the A comment of "battle start" is displayed as a guidance display mode for guiding that the effect will be executed. Then, a battle production is executed. Details of the battle effect will be described later with reference to FIGS. 142 to 144. FIG.

Here, in the present control example, when executing a collective effect, various effects are selected independently, and the collective effect is executed in an effect mode in which a plurality of independently selected effect contents are combined. are doing. As a result, compared to the case where performance data (image data) is provided for each performance pattern executed in the collective performance, it is possible to execute a variety of collective performances using a small amount of performance data.

Specifically, the types of allied characters that can be displayed in each of the symbol rows L1 to L3 are set in advance, and the allied characters are acquired during the gathering performance according to the variation pattern in which the gathering performance is executed. The number of times to do is set in advance. The total number and type of allied characters to be obtained in the gathering effect this time are configured to be independently selected according to the result of the special symbol lottery (type of variation pattern command).

Therefore, for example, the number of allied character types that are set only in the symbol row 1 out of all the allied character types acquired in this set performance is more than the number of times allied characters are acquired during the collective performance. may occur. In other words, when various effects are independently selected and a predetermined effect is executed in a mode of effect combining a plurality of independently selected effects, there is a combination of effects that are impossible (difficult) to execute. There is a problem that arises.

On the other hand, in this control example, it is determined whether or not the result of combining a plurality of independently selected performance contents is a feasible performance mode. When it is determined that it is a performance mode, a dedicated performance is executed, and the result of combining a plurality of independently selected performance contents can be provided to the player without discomfort. By constructing in this manner, compared to the case where performance data (image data) is provided for each performance pattern executed in the collective performance, the player can enjoy a variety of collective performances without problems by using less performance data. can be provided to

Here, with reference to FIG. 141, the content of the above-described dedicated effect will be described. FIG. 141(a) is a diagram showing an example of a suggestion screen suggesting the last winning chance in the collective effect, and FIG. 141(b) shows an example of a display screen showing the result of the last winning chance in the collective effect. It is a diagram.

In this control example, it is determined whether or not the result of combining a plurality of independently selected performance contents is a feasible rendering mode. As a dedicated effect to be executed when it is determined, it is configured to be able to execute a last acquisition chance effect. In this last acquisition chance effect, the effect of acquiring an ally character is executed regardless of whether the third symbol is displayed in a variable display or a stop display. With reference to 139 and FIG. 140, an effect is executed for obtaining a teammate character that could not be obtained with the effect contents of the group effect described above.

Specifically, after the end screen of the group effect shown in FIG. 140(b) is displayed, the third pattern is oscillatingly displayed as shown in FIG. 141(a). Then, in the sub-display area Ds, a comment "Get a chance when it starts to move" is displayed as a guidance display mode suggesting that the last chance to win effect will be executed. In the state shown in FIG. 141(a), when the variable display of the third symbol is resumed, the last acquisition chance effect is executed, and as shown in FIG. In (b)), an effect is executed to acquire the ally character that was stopped and displayed. Furthermore, allied characters that are not stop-displayed are additionally displayed on the end screen of the gathering effect (see FIG. 140(b)), and an effect is executed in which the additionally displayed allied characters are also acquired.

When the last chance to win effect ends, as shown in FIG. 141(b), the display area HR5 and the display region HR6 show the result of the group effect including the effect of the last chance to win "Elephant" and "Dugong". , ``Rhinoceros'', ``Bird'', ``Bear'', and ``Wild Boar'' are displayed, and ``6/7'' is displayed as the information display mode. In the secondary display area Ds, the number of allied characters acquired in the last acquisition chance, and a guide display mode for guiding the performance to be executed after the gathering performance, "Last 2 characters get!! Battle start". comment is displayed.

In this way, by enabling execution of the last winning chance performance, when a group performance is executed by combining a plurality of independently selected performance contents, the result of the combination is provided without making the player feel uncomfortable. can do. In the example of the effect described above with reference to FIG. 141, the last chance to win effect is executed after the suggestion effect (see FIG. 141(a)) suggesting that the last chance to win effect is executed. Although an example is shown, after the suggestive effect (see FIG. 141(a)) suggesting that the last winning chance effect will be executed is executed, the third symbol is stopped and displayed again, so that the last winning chance effect is executed. It is configured so that the collective production ends without executing

Thus, in the case where the suggestive effect (see FIG. 141(a)) suggesting that the last chance to win effect is executed is executed, the game is played while making the player interested in whether or not the last chance to win effect will be executed. can be done.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 142 to 144, the details of the battle effects will be described. This battle effect is an effect that is executed after the group effect is finished, and the effect is executed according to the effect result of the group effect, that is, the number of allied characters acquired in the group effect. In this battle effect, an effect is executed in which the ally character acquired in the gathering effect battles with the enemy character.

FIG. 142(a) is a diagram showing an example of the display screen when the battle effect is started. In addition, in FIG. 142(a), a description will be given of the battle effect executed after the above-described last acquisition chance effect (see FIG. 141(b)) is executed. As shown in FIG. 142(a), when the battle effect is executed, a display area HR7 is formed on the left side of the main display area Dm. A total of six ally characters of "elephant", "dugong", "rhino", "chicken", "bear", and "wild boar" are displayed as a display mode in which the characters can be distinguished from each other. A display area HR8 is formed above the display area HR7, and "attack times 6" is displayed as a display mode indicating the number of battles to be executed in the current battle effect. In other words, in this battle presentation, the player is notified that a battle presentation will be executed in which the six ally characters acquired in the gathering presentation will individually battle the enemy characters. In this way, by making it possible for the player to grasp the effect content of the battle effect in advance, the progress of the battle effect can be properly determined, and an easy-to-understand effect can be executed.

In addition, an enemy character (boss character) 910 for battle production is displayed on the right side of the main display area Dm, and a physical strength gauge 911 indicating the physical strength (HP) of the boss character 910 is displayed near (below) it. This physical strength gauge 911 is composed of a numerical display mode (displayed as "1000" in the figure) showing the current physical strength value (HP) numerically, and a gauge display mode showing a gauge. remaining HP display mode 911a showing the physical strength (HP) of the player, and consumed HP display mode 911b (see FIG. 142(b)) showing already consumed HP.

The physical strength gauge 911 indicates that the remaining physical strength (HP) is full as a guide display for the player to easily grasp how much the remaining physical strength (HP) is. "MAX", "200" indicating that the remaining physical strength (HP) is a predetermined value, and "0" indicating that the remaining physical strength (HP) is 0 are displayed. Then, according to the physical strength (HP) of the boss character 910 reduced in the battle production, the remaining physical strength is displayed as a guide display for guiding the player about the production mode to be executed after the battle production and the degree of expectation of winning the jackpot. When (HP) decreases to a predetermined value (200), after the battle effect, "SP reach" indicating that the SP reach with a high expectation of big hit will be executed, and the remaining physical strength value (HP ) becomes 0, that is, when the boss character 910 is subjugated in the battle effect, "great chance" is displayed to indicate that the expectation of winning the jackpot is high.

By configuring in this way, the effect result of the battle effect and the subsequent game content can be associated with each other and grasped, so that it is possible to provide the player with an effect that is easy to understand. In addition, even if the boss character 910 is not defeated in the battle production, the player can grasp in advance that the expectation of winning the jackpot increases by reducing the remaining physical strength value (HP) to a predetermined value. It is possible to provide a presentation that is easy for the player to understand.

In the battle effect executed in this control example, an attack effect is basically executed in which one ally character attacks the boss character 910, and either a weak attack or a strong attack is executed as the attack pattern of the ally character. It consists of When a weak attack is executed, the physical strength (HP) of the boss character 910 decreases by the minimum unit (eg, 100), and when a strong attack is executed, the physical strength (HP) of the boss character 910 decreases by the minimum unit (eg, , 100) (eg, 200).

142(b) and FIG. 143(a), description will be given of the effect contents of the attack effect in which the ally character attacks the boss character 910 in the battle effect. FIG. 142(b) is a diagram showing an example of the display screen displayed when the weak attack effect is executed, and FIG. 143(a) is a display displayed when the strong attack effect is executed. It is the figure which showed an example of a screen.

As shown in FIG. 142(b), when the attack effect is started in the battle effect, among the friendly characters displayed in the display area HR7, the attack is executed in order from the friendly character first obtained in the gathering effect. attack production is executed. Then, the display mode indicating the teammate character used for the attack effect is erased from the display area HR7, and "remaining 5 times" is displayed in the display area HR8 with the number of remaining attacks subtracted. In FIG. 142(b), "Tori" is executing a weak attack as the ally character 820, and "-100" is displayed in the display area HR9 to indicate the health value of the boss character 910 that has decreased due to this attack (light attack). At the same time, the numerical display mode of the physical strength gauge 911 is reduced to "900", and the remaining HP display mode 911a and the consumed HP display mode 911b correspond to the current physical strength value (HP) of the boss character 910, which is "900". displayed in the display mode Also, in the sub-display area Ds, "Attack of Birds!!" is displayed as a guide display mode for guiding that the current attack is a weak attack. The display mode of the boss character 910 displayed in the main display area Dm is configured to be slightly variable (represented by sweat in the figure) from the state in which the boss character 910 is not attacked (see FIG. 142(a)). ing. The display mode of the boss character 910 is configured to be variably displayed in different display modes according to the amount of physical strength decreased (consumed) by one attack effect or the remaining physical strength. By variably displaying the display mode of the boss character 910 in this way, it is possible to allow the player to visually grasp the content of the battle production, so that it is possible to provide the player with an easy-to-understand production.

Next, the contents of the strong attack effect executed after the attack effect shown in FIG. 142(b) will be described with reference to FIG. 143(a). As shown in FIG. 143(a), a "bear" is executing a strong attack as an ally character 820, and the display area HR9 shows the physical strength of the boss character 910, which has decreased due to this attack (strong attack), "-". 200" is displayed, the numerical value display mode of the physical strength gauge 911 is subtracted from "700", and the remaining HP display mode 911a and the consumed HP display mode 911b are the current physical strength (HP) of the boss character 910, which is "700". is displayed in a display mode corresponding to ". Also, in the sub-display area Ds, "CRITICAL HIT!!" is displayed as a guidance display mode for guiding that the current attack is a strong attack.

In addition, the display mode indicating the teammate character used for the attack effect is erased from the display area HR7, and "5 times remaining" is displayed in the display area HR8 with the number of remaining attacks subtracted. Then, when the physical strength value (HP) of the boss character 910 becomes 0 as a result of execution of the attack presentation for a predetermined number of times in the battle presentation, the display screen shown in FIG. 143(b) is displayed. FIG. 143(b) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen displayed when the boss character 910 is subjugated as a result of the battle production. As shown in FIG. 143(b), as the final attack presentation (sixth attack presentation) in the battle presentation, the ally character 820 "Sai" executes a strong attack, and the boss character 910's physical strength (HP) reaches 200. Due to the decrease, an effect display is executed in which the boss character 910 is subjugated.

On the other hand, if the boss character 910 cannot be subjugated as a result of the battle production, a different production is executed according to the remaining physical strength (HP). When the physical strength value (HP) is 200 or less, as shown in FIG. 144(a), an effect display is executed in which the boss character 910 escapes. When the remaining physical strength value (HP) of the boss character 910 is larger than 200, a counterattack performance in which the boss character 910 counterattacks is executed, the battle performance is finished, and the corresponding special pattern variation is stopped and displayed.

In addition, in this control example, as an effect mode of the battle effect, when a predetermined condition is satisfied, a joint battle effect (see FIG. 144(b)) is executed in which a plurality of allied characters attack the boss character 910 at the same time. are doing. In this case, the physical strength value (HP) of the boss character 910, which is decreased by one attack effect, becomes larger than that of the strong attack, and the effect is advantageous to the player. For example, in the battle production start screen shown in FIG. It is configured to suggest that the production is executed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 145, the contents of the pseudo-loss effect will be described. In this control example, in order to be able to execute the special symbol variation continuously, the right to execute the special symbol variation (lottery right of the special symbol lottery) can be retained and stored up to a predetermined number (4). have the means. Thereby, even when the lottery right (special figure reservation) of the special symbol lottery is acquired during the execution of the special pattern variation, the lottery right (special figure reservation) can be stored in the storage means. Therefore, after the special symbol variation is stopped and displayed, it is possible to immediately execute the special symbol lottery based on the lottery right stored in the storage means, so that the special symbol variation can be continuously executed. It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Furthermore, the fluctuation time of the special symbol variation for indicating the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is configured to vary according to the number of lottery rights (number of special symbol reservations) stored in the storage means. Specifically, the smaller the number of lottery rights (the number of reserved special symbols) stored in the storage means, the easier it is to execute the special symbol variation with a longer variation time. By constructing in this way, it is possible to reduce the period during which the special symbol variation is not executed, and to obtain a new lottery right when the number of lottery rights stored in the storage means has reached the upper limit. can be suppressed.

Specifically, in this control example, when the number of reserved and stored special figure reservations is 0, and the result of the special symbol lottery to be executed is out, the number of special figure reservations is greater than 0. A variation pattern with a variation time of 14 seconds is more likely to be set than when the result of a special symbol lottery executed in a state where there are a large number of symbols is lost. Then, when a variation pattern with a variation time of 14 seconds is set, a variation performance of 14 seconds is executed to indicate that the special figure lottery result is out.

In other words, when the variable production executed in response to the special symbol lottery executed in the state where the number of special figure reservations is 0 is the above-described 14-second variable production, the production result of the variable production is There is a problem that the player can easily discriminate that the result of the special symbol lottery of this time is a loss before the result is displayed, and the motivation for playing the game is lowered.

In addition, in order to solve the above-mentioned problem, for example, it is possible to set a plurality of types of production modes of the fluctuation production corresponding to the fluctuation pattern with a fluctuation time of 14 seconds, but in this case, the result of the special symbol lottery Since the performance data for the variable performance for indicating that the is out is increased, a new problem arises that the data amount of the entire variable performance increases. Furthermore, a plurality of variation times (eg, 14 seconds, 16 seconds, 18 seconds) as a variation pattern selected when the result of the special symbol lottery executed with the number of special figure reservations being 0 is out. However, in this case, the load is applied to the control processing for selecting the variation time of the special symbol variation, and the type of variation time to be set increases. , there is a problem that a load is applied to the variable display processing of the special symbol and the variable display processing of the third symbol.

On the other hand, in this control example, when the result of the special symbol lottery is a big hit, or when a variation pattern in which a variation time longer than 14 seconds is set is selected, the above-described variation of 14 seconds It is configured so that production can be executed. In other words, even if the result of the special symbol lottery is lost and the prize is not won, by executing the above-described 14-second variable performance, the player's willingness to play who grasps that the 14-second variable performance is being executed. can be suppressed.

In addition, since there is a case where the result of the special symbol lottery is a big win, even if the player grasps that the 14-second variable performance is being executed, the player's willingness to play may decrease. Therefore, there is no need to configure a plurality of types of variable performance effects corresponding to the variation pattern with a variable time of 14 seconds to be able to set. Therefore, it is possible to suppress an increase in the amount of data for the entire variable effect. In addition, when the result of the special symbol lottery executed with the number of special figure reservations being 0 is out, it is not necessary to select a plurality of variation time variation patterns, so special A load is applied to the control processing for selecting the variation time of the symbol variation, and as the type of variation time to be set increases, the load is increased for the special symbol variation display processing and the third symbol variation display processing. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of the problem of hanging.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 146 to 150, the flow of various effects executed by the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example will be described.

First, with reference to FIG. 146, the flow of the continuous hit effect (see FIGS. 130 to 132) will be described. As described above with reference to FIGS. 130 to 132, this repeated hit effect is an effect executed using a partial period of the effect period of the variable effect executed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81. When the player operates the operating means (frame button 22), an effect (operation effect) is executed in which a specific display mode displayed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81 can be varied. be.

Specifically, for example, as a special symbol variation (special figure variation) executed by the main controller 110, when a special figure variation in which a variation time of 60 seconds is set is performed (see FIG. 146 (a) ), the variation production is executed by the voice lamp control device 113 in the production period (60 seconds) of the length corresponding to the fluctuation time (60 seconds) of the special figure fluctuation (see FIG. 146 (b)).

When the performance mode of the variable performance set by the voice lamp control device 113 includes the repeated hit performance, the player presses the frame button 22 for 10 seconds after 10 seconds have elapsed since the start of the variable performance. A button effective period (operation effective period) for validly determining the operation (pressing) of is set (see FIG. 146(c)), and a continuous hit effect is executed corresponding to the operation effective period (FIG. 146 (d- 2) See).

In this continuous hit effect, the display mode (in FIG. 130(a), the display mode of the enemy character 802 and the display mode of the display area HR1) is changed based on the number of times the frame button 22 is operated during the operation valid period. A production is executed. This display mode suggests to the player whether or not a privilege advantageous to the player (for example, an effect that makes it easy to win a jackpot (SP reach), a jackpot win) will be given after the continuous hit effect is completed. In the control example, the upper limit value (maximum variable value) at which the display mode is varied during the continuous hit production is set based on the corresponding special figure variation propriety determination result (big hit lottery result).

In the example shown in FIG. 146, the maximum variable value is set to 20 operations of the frame button 22 (upper limit of 20 operations). is not variable. In addition, in this control example, after the number of times the frame button 22 is operated during the effective period of operation reaches the maximum variable value, if the frame button 22 is continued to be operated and the end condition is satisfied, the continuous hit effect is produced. It is configured so that the timing for displaying the results can be shortened. In the example shown in FIG. 146, as the end condition for shortening the timing for displaying the effect result of the continuous hit effect, the end condition is established when the number of times the frame button 22 is operated after reaching the maximum variable value reaches eight times. 8 is set for the end count.

Here, with reference to FIGS. 146(d) and 146(e), the details of the player's operation of the frame button 22 during the continuous hitting effect period and the effect to be executed will be described. FIG. 146(d) shows the flow of effects executed when the end condition is not met during the valid period of operation, and FIG. It shows the flow of the performance to be executed.

As shown in FIG. 146(d), after the continuous hit effect is executed, until the frame button 22 is operated 20 times, the effect of changing the display mode according to the operation of the frame button 22 is executed. (Period A). After that, the number of times the frame button 22 is operated exceeds 20 times, and the number of times the frame button 22 is operated is 21, 22, and 23 (period B). Since it exceeds, it becomes a period during which the display mode is not changed. Then, when the continuous hit effect ends (when the remaining period of the operation valid period becomes 0), the result effect for 10 seconds is executed.

On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 146(e), the end condition is met before the repeated hit effect is completed (before the remaining period of the operation valid period becomes 0). When the number of operations of has reached 28, the result effect is executed. In this case, since the result effect is executed while the operation effective period remains, the display mode displayed as the result effect is varied by the player operating the frame button 22 during that period (period C). Also, in order to liven up the result performance, a lively performance is executed in which a light-emitting means (LED or the like) provided in the pachinko machine 10 is illuminated, or voice is output from the voice output device 226.例文帳に追加

As described above, in this control example, if the end condition is satisfied based on the operation of the operation means during the period in which the repeated hit effect is executed, the repeated hit effect is executed before the end condition based on the passage of time is satisfied. The effect is terminated, and the effect result of the continuous hitting effect is displayed. With this configuration, when the repeated hitting effect is executed, the player can operate the operation means for changing the display mode of the repeated hitting effect and the operation for shortening the effect period of the repeated hitting effect. The player can be motivated to operate the operating means.

In addition, in this control example, based on the result of the special symbol lottery corresponding to the continuous hit effect, by setting a limit on the variable content (variable number of times) in the continuous hit effect, the variable content of the repeated hit effect suggests the result of the special symbol lottery. configured as possible. Therefore, depending on the result of the special symbol lottery, an effect is executed in which the number of times the display mode is changed is small (according to the example of FIG. 130(a), the number of remaining enemy characters 802 is less likely to decrease). In this case, if the performance period of the continuous hit effect is fixed, the period during which the display mode does not change when the operating means is operated in the repeated hitting effect will continue for a long time, and the player cannot operate the operating means. I had a problem with losing motivation.

On the other hand, in this control example, after the number of variable times of the display mode reaches the upper limit (maximum variable value) in the continuous hit effect, the end condition is satisfied, so that the effect period of the repeated hit effect can be shortened. , the occurrence of the above-described problems can be suppressed. Furthermore, in this control example, since the contents of the operation to the operation means executed to change the display mode in the continuous hit effect and the contents of the operation for establishing the end condition are the same, , the termination condition can be satisfied without causing a sense of discomfort.

In addition, in this control example, even if the effect period of the continuous hit effect is shortened, the operation effective period is not shortened. During the period, it is possible to execute an effect (an effect indicating the result of the repeated hit effect) to be executed after the repeated hit effect, and it is possible to execute a dedicated operation effect. In other words, the effect mode of the effect to be executed next can be changed according to the type of the end condition to be satisfied (the end condition to be satisfied with the lapse of time, the end condition to be satisfied based on the operation of the operating means).

In this control example, the operation for changing the display mode during the repeated hit effect and the operation for ending the repeated hit effect are the same operation (pressing the frame button 22), but the present invention is not limited to this. , different operations may be set. In addition, the operation content of the operation means that is determined to be valid during the valid operation period is not limited to whether or not the frame button 22 is operated (pressed). It is also possible to determine the length (so-called long press), or determine the press interval at which the frame button 22 is continuously pressed. Further, it may be configured to determine a period during which the frame button 22 is not pressed, that is, the player has selected an operation of not pressing the frame button 22 .

In this way, by recognizing and discriminating a plurality of operation contents as the operation contents for the operation means, it is possible to set different presentation modes according to the operation contents executed by the player. It is possible to improve the interest of the game. For example, when it is determined that the frame button 22 is continuously pressed without an interval of a predetermined period or more (for example, 1 second) during the continuous hit effect, it is determined that the operation means has been operated, and the display mode is determined. may be executed, and then, when the frame button 22 is held down for a predetermined period of time (for example, two seconds), the process of satisfying the end condition may be executed.

Further, it may be configured such that the end condition is established when the player does not press the frame button 22 for a predetermined period (for example, 1 second) during the continuous hit effect. In this case, if the frame button 22 is not pressed even once after the continuous-hit effect is executed, the condition for ending the continuous-hit effect is satisfied without changing the display mode, so the continuous-hit effect is executed. A suitable game can be provided to a player who does not want to play. In addition, as long as the player who operates the frame button 22 during the continuous hit effect does not continue to operate the frame button 22, the end condition can be met midway (before the maximum variable value is reached). , the player can voluntarily operate the frame button 22.例文帳に追加

Furthermore, in this case, on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81, it is preferable to execute a guidance display that guides the player in an easy-to-understand manner as to the conditions under which the end condition is satisfied. If it continues for more than 1 second, the continuous hit effect will end." and a time gauge indicating the remaining time until the end condition is satisfied. As a result, it is possible to prevent the repeated hitting effect from ending at a timing unintended by the player.

In this control example described above, only one termination condition is set as the termination condition for terminating the operation while the operation valid period remains. can be In this case, for example, it may be configured so that the end condition that is likely to be satisfied is changed according to the effect situation of the continuous hit effect. The termination condition that can be satisfied when the frame button 22 is not pressed is likely to be satisfied, and if the remaining period of the operation valid period is less than 5 seconds, the termination condition that can be satisfied when the frame button 22 is pressed is easily satisfied. Good to configure.

In addition, the content of the end condition may be changed according to the display mode displayed as the continuous hit effect. For example, the display mode when the maximum variable value is reached is the first display mode (remaining number is 50 or more). may be made more difficult to be established than the case of the second display mode (remaining number is less than 50) in which the remaining number is smaller than that of the first display mode. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it more difficult to satisfy the end condition when the number of remaining enemy characters 802 is large. It can be lengthened, and the production effect can be enhanced.

Next, with reference to FIG. 147, the flow of the button effect (delayed effect) described with reference to FIGS. 136 to 138 will be described.

When the production period of the variable production is 60 seconds and the button production is set as the production mode, the button production period of 15 seconds is set 10 seconds after the start of the variable production (Fig. 147). (a)). This button effect period is formed from a button valid period (operation valid period) of 10 seconds and an effect period of 5 seconds.

As described above with reference to FIGS. 136 to 138, this button effect is displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 when the frame button 22 is pressed during the operation valid period. (For example, the treasure box 810) is to be changed, and the sound effect to output a sound (for example, "Pakkan") from the sound output device 226 is executed, and the delay effect mode is not set. (In the case of normal button effect), the display effect and the sound effect are executed synchronously (at the same timing). executed.

Here, with reference to FIG. 147(b), the flow of the effect when the normal button effect is executed will be described. As shown in FIG. 147(b), when the button effect is executed, as shown in FIG. 136(a), a button operation suggestion display prompting the player to operate the frame button 22 is executed. This button operation suggestion display is continuously displayed for a period (period A) until the player operates the frame button 22 . Then, when the player operates the frame button 22, the display effect and the sound effect are executed simultaneously, and the operation result display (see FIG. 136(b)) showing the effect result of the button effect ends. is displayed continuously for a period (period B). After that, a variable performance is executed (period C).

Next, referring to FIG. 147(c), among the cases where the delay button effect is executed, the timing at which the player operates the frame button 22 is just before the end of the operation valid period, specifically, the delay period ( For example, 0.8 seconds) have passed, and the effect when the frame button 22 is operated at the timing when the operation valid period ends (for example, the timing 0.5 seconds before the operation valid period ends) Explain the flow. As shown in FIG. 147(c), when the button effect is executed, the effect is executed in the same effect mode as the normal button effect. Then, when the player operates the frame button 22 0.5 seconds before the expiration of the button valid period (operation valid period), a delay period of 0.8 seconds is set, and 0.8 seconds after the frame button 22 is operated. After 8 seconds, the display effect and the sound effect are executed.

Here, in this control example, if the operation valid period remains even after the delay period has elapsed, the button operation indication that was displayed before the frame button 22 was operated is displayed during the delay period of 0.8 seconds. It is configured so that the display mode of the production is continuously displayed. In other words, in this control example, when a delay period of 0.8 seconds is set, the display control device 114 delays the execution timing of various effects based on the operation of the frame button 22 by 0.8 seconds. Since the timing of setting (outputting) the display command is delayed, the display control device 114 waits until the display command is received, that is, until 0.8 seconds have passed since the frame button 22 was operated. , since the information indicating that the frame button 22 has been operated cannot be received, the display mode of the button operation suggestion effect is continuously displayed.

By constructing in this way, when the delayed performance is executed in the button performance, it is not necessary to separately set a display command for displaying the corresponding display mode during the delay period, and the delayed performance is executed. It is possible to reduce the control processing for In addition, various variations of the delay effect can be executed only by setting different lengths of the delay period, so that control processing for executing the delay effect can be reduced. Furthermore, in this control example, the delay period can be set for each of the display effect and the sound effect. be able to.

It should be noted that the above-described normal button effect, that is, when the frame button 22 is operated, the display effect and sound effect are executed without setting the delay period. The delay period may be set to 0 second. With this configuration, when setting the button effect, the same processing is executed when setting the normal button effect and when setting the delayed button effect. Since button effects can be set without changing the content, control processing can be simplified.

Returning to FIG. 147(c), the description is continued. In the example shown in FIG. 147(c), the frame button 22 is operated when the remaining period of the valid operation period is 0.5 seconds, and the valid operation period ends ( Therefore, if the button operation suggestive display is continuously displayed during the delay period, the remaining period display area 804b of the time gauge 804 disappears during the delay period, and an unnatural effect is executed. I had a problem with it. On the other hand, in this control example, if it is determined that the valid operation period ends (elapses) during the delay period, a dedicated effect (see FIG. 138) is performed during the delay period (period D). configured to run.

With this configuration, different effects can be executed depending on whether or not the delay period is set during the button effect and the operation timing of the frame button 22. can be operated. In this control example, the effect mode of the variable effect is set in advance, that is, whether or not to execute the button effect as the variable effect to be executed this time when the variable effect is executed, and whether or not to set the delay period. , is determined, and if the frame button 22 is operated during the button presentation, the presentation based on the contents of the button presentation determined in advance is executed. At the time when the variable performance is executed, only the presence or absence of execution of the button performance is determined, and when the frame button 22 is operated during the button performance, the presence or absence of the delay performance and the delay mode (delay target, delay period) are determined. In this case, for example, a plurality of operations can be executed for the button effect, and the execution probability and delay mode of the delay effect are determined according to the operation contents executed during the button effect. may be configured to be determinable with different values.

Specifically, the delay period can be set more easily when the player performs the second operation than when the player performs the first operation, or the delay period can be set based on the first operation. In the case where the delay period is set based on the second operation, the possibility of winning the corresponding special symbol lottery may be increased. By configuring in this way, it is possible to vary the degree of expectation and the execution frequency of the delay effect according to the operation content executed by the player.

In this control example, a period of 5 seconds (last 5 seconds of the button effect period) is provided as the result display period during which the operation result display for showing the effect result of the button effect is displayed. After the frame button 22 is operated and the performance result is displayed until the result display period elapses, the operation result display is displayed. In this way, by configuring the length of the result display period to be longer than the maximum period (1.5 seconds) that can be set as the delay period, as shown in FIG. Even when the frame button 22 is operated just before the end of the period and the delay period of the longest period is set, the period for displaying the operation result can be secured, so that the player can easily understand the presentation. can be done.

In this control example, the effect mode of the delayed effect is set before the button effect is executed. The display period of the operation result display differs depending on the operation timing of . Therefore, for example, when executing a specific animation display as the operation result display, it was necessary to change the display mode of the animation according to the length of the display period of the operation result display. In other words, if the display mode of the operation result display is, for example, a 1-second animation, and the display period of the operation result display is other than a multiple of 1 second, the operation result display ends in the middle of the animation. There is a risk that the performance effect will be reduced.

In this case, a method of executing control for extending or shortening the display period of the operation result display in accordance with the timing at which the animation being executed ends is conceivable. Thereby, the display period of the operation result display can be terminated at the timing when the animation is terminated. However, if the length of the display period of the operation result display is made variable, the effect period of the variable effect that is executed after the display period of the operation result display has elapsed must also be varied correspondingly. There was a possibility that the performance of the game would cause a sense of incongruity.

In order to solve such a problem, for example, at the operation timing of the frame button 22 during the operation valid period, the remaining period of the operation valid period or the remaining period of the button effect is determined, and based on the determination result , to determine the length of the delay period. Specifically, in accordance with the operation timing of the frame button 22, the basic delay period (delay period set in advance as a variable effect) is changed so that the display period of the operation result display is a multiple of 1 second. , a correction delay period may be added and set. By configuring in this way, the display period of the operation result display can be terminated at the timing when the animation is terminated. In addition, since different delay periods are set depending on the operation timing of the frame button 22, the presentation effect can be enhanced.

In addition, as another method, for example, when an animation is being executed at the timing when the display period of the operation result display ends, the remaining animation is overlapped and executed while executing the variable effect. Also good. In this case, since the player is more interested in the newly executed variable effect rather than the animation, the area in which the animation is displayed is made smaller than during the display period of the operation result display, or the transparency of the animation is changed. The rest of the animation may be executed while performing display control such as increasing

In this control example, as shown in FIG. 147, since it is configured to be able to execute the delay production in the middle period of the special symbol fluctuation, even if the delay period is set by the delay production, the set delay Regardless of the length of the period, it is possible to change the production mode of the variable display so that the display mode showing the result of the special symbol lottery is stopped at the timing of stopping the special symbol variation. When the delayed performance can be executed in the variable performance executed immediately before the stop timing of the variation, there is a possibility that the delayed performance is executed across the stop timing of the special symbol fluctuation.

In this case, for example, when it is determined that it is the stop timing of the special symbol variation (stop timing of the variation effect), it is determined whether or not the delay period is set, and if the delay period is set, Until the delay period elapses (ends), it is preferable to perform display control so as not to notify the player of the stop display of the special symbol variation or the lottery result of the special symbol variation (special symbol lottery). In this case, when it is determined that the next special symbol variation will be executed after the special symbol variation being executed is stopped and displayed, a predetermined period after the start of the next special symbol variation is used. Then, the variation effect (delay effect) for showing the lottery result of the previous special symbol variation is executed, and if the next special symbol variation is not executed, the previous time using the waiting period until the demo screen is displayed Executes a variable production (delayed production) to show the lottery result of the special symbol fluctuation, and when the jackpot game is started, the period until the first round game is started (opening period) Using It may be configured to execute a variation performance (delay performance) for showing the lottery result of the last special symbol variation.

Also, the length of the period (fixed display period) during which the special symbol variation is stopped and displayed may be longer than the maximum period (1.5 seconds) that can be set as the delay period. Fixed display of the minimum period (for example, 0.3 seconds) required to confirm and display the special pattern and the maximum period (1.5 seconds) that can be set as the delay period (1.8 seconds) It should be set as a period. In addition, it may be configured such that the fixed display period of the special symbol variation is lengthened only when the delay performance can be executed as the variation performance.

As described above, when executing a delayed effect using another effect period (next variable display period, standby period, jackpot game period, fixed display period), the actual game content executed during the effect period should be displayed so that the player can understand it. As a result, since the player can grasp the actual game content, it is possible to suppress the execution of an unintended game.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 148 and 149, the flow of effects executed in the gathering effect (see FIGS. 139-141) and the battle effect (see FIGS. 142-144) will be described.

As shown in FIG. 148, in this control example, during one variable effect period, it is configured to execute a set effect and a battle effect. , the effect period of the collective effect (the number of times the effect for obtaining a character is executed) is defined in advance. In addition, the execution timing of the group production in the variable production is configured to be able to set multiple times, and as shown in FIG. The display mode showing the result of the variation production corresponding to (the first special figure variation), that is, the stop display mode of the third symbol for indicating the lottery result of the first special figure variation "Large set" is stopped and displayed. , The special symbol variation of the production mode (the second special symbol variation) is started (with the variation production being started), and the collective production is executed. By configuring in this way, compared to the case of executing the group production from the middle of the second fluctuation production of the special figure fluctuation (see FIG. 148 (b)), when the timing of ending the group production is the same, that is, In the case of executing the battle performance and various ready-to-win performances in the same period in the second special figure variation, the performance period of the collective performance can be made different.

In this case, for example, at least before the second special figure variation is executed, based on the winning information, the result of the special symbol lottery corresponding to the second special figure variation is determined in advance, and the result of the preliminary determination is a jackpot, it is preferable to configure the effect mode shown in FIG. 148(a) so that it is easy to set.

Also, as shown in FIG. 148, in addition to the configuration in which the start timing of the group effect is different, it is preferable to configure the end timing of the group effect to be set multiple times. As a variable performance, a case where a collective performance is executed from the start timing of the variable performance, and a case where a collective performance is executed from the middle timing of the variable performance as a variable performance corresponding to the special figure fluctuation with a variable time of 90 seconds. , it is preferable to configure so that the collective effect of the same length (the number of times the character acquisition effect is executed) is executed. By configuring in this way, when the group performance is executed, the player can be interested in the length of the variable performance period, and the group performance of the same mode can be changed in different variable performance periods. It becomes possible to use it for production, and it is possible to simplify the control processing for executing the variable production.

Next, referring to FIG. 149, the flow of setting the content of the battle effect will be described. In this control example, one special symbol variation (special symbol variation) period is used to enable execution of a set effect and a battle effect. That is, it is configured to determine the performance result of the battle performance and the performance result of the group performance according to the result of one special symbol lottery. That is, when the special figure fluctuation is started (when the fluctuation production is started), it is configured to determine the production mode of the battle production.

Specifically, the battle period (the number of attacks) and the effect result (enemy HP, remaining HP) are determined as the effect mode of the battle effect based on the variation pattern (variation time) for which the variable effect is determined. It is configured to By configuring in this way, it is possible to execute the collective effect and the battle effect in the effect mode corresponding to the effect result of the battle effect.

In addition, without being limited to this, the effect mode of the battle effect may be determined after the end of the collective effect based on the result of the effect of the collective effect. In this case, for example, when the number of characters that can be acquired in the group production is configured to vary according to the operation result of the operation means during the group production, the number of characters acquired during the group production can be changed. Even if it is configured, it is possible to suitably execute a battle effect corresponding to the gathering effect.

Next, with reference to FIG. 150, the flow of the pseudo-loss effect (see FIG. 145) will be described. In this control example, when the number of reserved balls of the special symbol is 0, in order to suppress the period during which the special symbol variation is not executed from continuing for a long time, even if the result of the special symbol lottery is out, the long period It is configured to select a specified non-specific variation pattern in which a variation time of (14 seconds) is set, and is configured to execute a specific non-specified performance (14 seconds) as a variation performance corresponding to the specified non-specific variation pattern. (See FIG. 150(a)).

However, in this specified non-specific performance, a variable performance in which the third pattern does not become a ready-to-win state is executed for a predetermined period, and the variable performance currently being executed is the specified non-specific performance before the end of the variable performance. The player can easily grasp this fact. That is, there is a problem that the player can easily determine that the result of the special symbol lottery executed with the number of special symbols reserved being 0 is a loss, and the player's willingness to play decreases.

On the other hand, in this control example, when a variation pattern with a variation time of special symbol variation of 14 seconds or more is selected, a part of the variation time is used to execute the above-described specific out-of-specification effect. (see FIG. 150(c)). Also, when a variation pattern with a variation time of 28 seconds is selected, the specific out-of-specification effect is executed twice (see FIG. 150(b)).

In this control example configured in this manner, even when the player determines that the specific non-specific production is executed, the timing of displaying the production result of the specific non-specific production and the special symbol fluctuation are stopped. It becomes difficult to predict whether or not the displayed timing matches. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to determine whether or not the result of the special symbol lottery is a loss until the end of the specified failure effect, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the willingness to play.

In addition, in this control example, as shown in FIG. 145, when the specific out-of-specification effect is executed by making it different from the stop display timing of the special symbol lottery (first specific out-of-specification effect in FIG. 150 (b), FIG. 150 ( c) Specified out-of-specification production) is configured to display the third symbol by swinging (temporarily stopping), but without being limited to this, specific out-of-specification production executed at the time of 14-second deviation fluctuation The same effect data may be used to execute the same effect.

Also, as shown in FIG. 150 (b), in the case of executing two specific out production during one special figure fluctuation period, for example, in accordance with the start timing of the special figure fluctuation, fluctuation for 14 seconds Set the production (first specific out production), when it is determined that the first specific out production is completed, determine the remaining period of the special figure fluctuation, and if the determination result is 14 seconds or more, It may be configured such that the variable effect for 14 seconds (the second non-specified effect) is executed again.

By configuring in this way, it is not necessary to store in advance the performance data for 28 seconds in which the specified non-specified performance is executed twice, so the data capacity of the performance data can be reduced. In addition, by dividing the setting process of the variable production corresponding to one special figure fluctuation period into multiple times (for example, the first half period and the second half period), it is possible to set the variable production in the first half period. Since it is possible to vary the performance mode in the second half period based on the performance conditions established in the second half, it is possible to enhance the performance effect.

Furthermore, as described above, using a configuration that can be set by dividing the setting process of the fluctuation effect corresponding to one special figure fluctuation period into multiple times (for example, the first half period and the second half period), FIG. 150 (c) In the case of setting the variable performance that will be the flow of , first, only the 30-second variable performance (normal hit performance) in the second half period and the 16-second interrupt performance in the first half period are decided, and the interrupt performance is being executed. When a predetermined effect condition (for example, a new special figure reservation ball is not acquired) is established, it is preferable to configure so as to set a specific out-of-specification effect. By configuring in this way, when the special figure fluctuation is started, the special figure reservation ball is 0, and the special figure fluctuation is started even when the execution condition of the specific out-of-effect is satisfied. When a new special figure reservation is acquired at the time when 16 seconds have passed since, it is possible to suppress the execution of the specific out-of-specification performance.

<Regarding the game flow of the pachinko machine in the first control example>
Next, with reference to FIG. 151, the game flow in this control example will be described. FIG. 151 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the game flow in the pachinko machine 10 of the first control example. Pachinko machine 10 of this control example, as shown in FIG. 3 types of game states, ie, a high probability state of symbols) and a time-saving state (low probability state of special symbols, high probability state of normal symbols), are configured to be settable, and an initial state (when the pachinko machine 10 is shipped). or after the power is turned on while the RAM erase switch 122 is operated (depressed), the normal state is set.

Then, during the normal state, a game mainly including the first special symbol lottery executed by entering the ball into the first ball entrance 64 is executed. In the normal state in which the low probability state of the special symbols is set, the probability of the big win of the special symbols is set to 1/300, and when the big win is won, the type of the big win is "jackpot A" (selection rate of 1/2). and "jackpot B" (selection rate 1/2) is selected. When "jackpot B" is selected, a jackpot game (probability variation jackpot game) that makes it easy for the ball to pass through the specific area (probability variation switch 65e3 (see FIG. 128)) is executed during the jackpot game, and "jackpot A" is executed. is selected, a jackpot game (normal jackpot game) is executed in which it is difficult for the ball to pass through the specific area (probability variable switch 65e3 (see FIG. 128)) during the jackpot game.

Then, when the ball passes through the specific area (probability variation switch 65e3 (see FIG. 128)) during the jackpot game, the probability variation state is set after the jackpot game ends. In this variable probability state, when the number of executions of the special symbol lottery (variation) reaches 200 times, or when a jackpot is won, the end condition is satisfied and the state shifts to another game state. Specifically, when the number of executions of the special symbol lottery reaches 200 times in a state where the variable probability state is set, the game state changes to the normal state before the 201st special symbol lottery is executed. and migrated. It should be noted that, in this control example, the process of shifting the game state from the variable probability state to the normal state, that is, the process of shifting the high probability state of the special symbol to the low probability state, and the high probability state of the normal symbol to the normal symbol The process of shifting to the low probability state is configured to be executed at the timing when the special symbol variation corresponding to the 200th special symbol lottery is stopped and displayed, but the 201st special symbol lottery is the special symbol lottery. It should not be executed in the state where the high probability state and the high probability state of normal symbols are set, for example, immediately after executing the 200th special symbol lottery (at the start of the 200th special symbol variation) Alternatively, it may be shifted to immediately before the execution of the 201st special symbol lottery (at the timing when the execution condition of the 201st special symbol lottery is satisfied but the special symbol lottery is not executed).

Furthermore, the timing of shifting the probability state of the special design and the timing of shifting the probability state of the normal design may be different, for example, the high probability of the special design immediately after the 200th special design lottery is executed. Only the state may be shifted to the low probability state, and after the result of the 200th special pattern lottery is stopped and displayed, the normal pattern high probability state may be shifted to the low probability state. By configuring in this way, it is possible to set the time saving state (low probability state of special symbols, low probability state of normal symbols) as a game state during the 200th special symbol variation period.

Since the probability variable state is a high probability state of the normal pattern, the electric accessory 640 is more likely to be opened by the normal pattern winning game than the normal state of the low probability state of the normal pattern, and the game mainly based on the second special pattern lottery. is executed. In the probability variable state in which the high probability state of the special pattern is set, the probability of the special pattern jackpot is set to 1/100, and when the jackpot is won in the second special pattern lottery, "jackpot C" is selected as the jackpot type. selected.

The “jackpot C” is a jackpot type in which 16 rounds of probability variable jackpot games are executed. In other words, when the jackpot is won in the second special symbol lottery, the probability variable jackpot game is always executed. Therefore, the second special symbol lottery is more advantageous to the player than the first special symbol lottery in terms of the execution probability of the probability variable jackpot game.

Further, in detail, in this control example, when a jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery, a 6-round game is always executed, and when a jackpot is won in the second special symbol lottery, a 16-round game is always executed. be done. Therefore, the second special symbol lottery is more advantageous to the player than the first special symbol lottery in terms of the average number of prize balls that can be obtained during the jackpot game.

Next, the time-saving state (low-probability state of special symbols, high-probability state of normal symbols) will be described. When the ``jackpot A'' is won in the first special symbol lottery executed during the normal state, or when the ball cannot be passed through the specific area (V gate) 65v during the probability variable jackpot game. , the time-saving state is set. This time-saving state is configured to disappear until the number of special symbol lotteries executed after the end of the previous big win game reaches 100 times, or when a big win is won before reaching 100 times. . That is, when the time saving state is set after the end of the jackpot game (when the jackpot A is elected), the time saving state is set for the period from the end of the jackpot game until the special symbol variation is executed 100 times (time saving 100 times is set).

During this time saving state, since it is a game state in which a high probability state of normal symbols is set similarly to the variable probability state described above, the electric accessory 640 is easily opened, and the game in which the second special symbol lottery is mainly executed. state. In addition, the lottery probability of the special symbol lottery executed during the time saving state is the same as in the normal state. Therefore, in the time saving state, the second special symbol lottery is more likely to be executed than in the normal state, and the special symbol lottery is executed with the same jackpot probability as in the normal state. That is, from the point of view of the ease of execution of the second special symbol lottery, the game state is more advantageous to the player than the normal state.

On the other hand, in the time-saving state, the special symbol lottery is executed with a jackpot probability lower than that in the variable probability state, and the ease of execution of the second special symbol lottery is the same as in the variable probability state. That is, from the point of the jackpot winning probability by the special symbol lottery, the time saving state is a game state more disadvantageous to the player than the variable probability state. In addition, in this control example, in the variable probability state and the time saving state, it is configured so that the ease of execution of the second special symbol lottery is the same, but not limited to this, for example, during the variable probability state The variation time of the second special symbol lottery to be executed is made different from the variation time of the second special symbol lottery to be executed during the time saving state, for example, the variation time is shorter during the probability variable state than during the normal state. , it may be configured to be able to execute the special symbol variation.

<Regarding the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example>
As described above with reference to FIG. 152, main controller 110 is equipped with MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic device. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 storing various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the MPU 201, and a memory for temporarily storing various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 202. A RAM 203 and other various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission/reception circuit are incorporated. In addition, various commands are transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sub-controller by the data transmission/reception circuit in order to instruct the operation of the sub-controller such as the payout controller 111 and the sound lamp controller 113. Such commands are sent in only one direction from the main controller 110 to the sub-controllers.

The main controller 110 executes the main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as special symbol lottery, normal symbol lottery, display setting in the first symbol display device 37 and display setting in the second symbol display device 83 . The RAM 203 is provided with various counters for controlling these processes.

Here, with reference to FIG. 153, counters and the like provided in RAM 203 of main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 153 is a schematic diagram schematically showing counters and the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main controller 110 in the first control example. These counters, etc. are the special symbol lottery, the normal symbol lottery, the setting of the display in the first design display device 37, the setting of the display in the second design display device 83, and the setting of the display in the third design display device 81. etc., it is used in the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 .

In order to select the special symbol lottery and the setting of the display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, the first winning random number counter C1 used for the special symbol lottery and the special symbol jackpot type. The first hit type counter C2 used for, the stop type selection counter C3 for determining the stop type of special symbols (type per reach, type other than reach, type out of reach), variation type counter used for selection of variation pattern CS1 and an initial value random number counter CINI1 used to set the initial value of the first hit random number counter C1 are used. Also, the second winning random number counter C4 is used for the lottery of normal symbols, and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is used for setting the initial value of the second winning random number counter C4. Each of these counters is a loop counter that adds 1 to the previous value each time it is updated and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

Each counter is updated, for example, at intervals of 2 milliseconds, which is the execution interval of timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 177), and some counters are updated irregularly during the main processing (see FIG. 187). Then, the updated value is appropriately stored in a counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 203 . The RAM 203 has a special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a consisting of four reserved areas (reserved first to fourth areas) for storing the lottery right (reserved ball) of the first special symbol, and a second special symbol holding ball storage area 203a. A special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b consisting of four reserved areas (reserved first to fourth areas) for storing the lottery right (reserved ball) is provided, and the first special symbol and the second special A special symbol holding ball execution area common to the symbol is provided. In each area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, a first hit random number counter C1, a first hit type counter C2, a stop type selection counter C3, a variable Each value of the type counter CS1 is stored. Similarly, for each area of the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b, similar values are stored in accordance with the ball entry timing to the second ball entrance 640. FIG.

In addition, the RAM 203 is provided with a normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c consisting of one execution area and four reserved areas (first to fourth reserved areas). The value of the second random number counter C4 is stored at the timing when the gate 67 is passed.

Next, each counter will be described in detail. The first hit random number counter C1 is incremented by 1 in order within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 599), and reaches 0 after reaching the maximum value (for example, 599 in the case of a counter that can take a value of 0 to 599). It is configured to return to In particular, when the first winning random number counter C1 completes one cycle, the value of the initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the special winning random number counter C1.

The initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter that is updated within the same range as the first winning random number counter C1. That is, for example, if the first random number counter C1 is a loop counter that can take values from 0 to 599, the initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter that ranges from 0 to 599. This initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once each time the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 177) is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main processing (see FIG. 187).

The value of the first winning random number counter C1 is, for example, periodically updated (once per timer interrupt processing in this embodiment), and is the timing at which the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640. is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203. The value of the random number that becomes the special symbol jackpot is set by the first winning random number table 202a (see FIG. 155(a)) stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110, and the obtained first winning random number counter If the value of C1 matches the value of the random number set by the first winning random number table 202a as a big win, it is determined as a special symbol big win. In addition, this first hit random number table 202a has a low probability of special symbols (a period in which the probability of special symbols is low) and a high probability of winning a special symbol from the low probability (special symbol The value (number) of the random number that becomes a big hit is set to be different between the high probability state period).

In this way, by varying the number of random numbers that result in a big win, the probability of a big win is changed between when the probability of special symbols is low and when the probability of special symbols is high. In addition, the first winning random number table 202a (see FIG. 155(a)) for when the special symbol is high probability and the first winning random number table 202a (see FIG. 155(a)) for when the special symbol is low probability , are provided in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110 .

The first win type counter C2 determines the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 when a special symbol jackpot is won, and adds 1 in order within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 99). and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (for example, 99 in the case of a counter that can take values from 0 to 99). The value of the first hit type counter C2 is, for example, periodically updated (once per timer interrupt processing in this control example), and the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640. It is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203 at the timing.

Here, if the value of the first winning random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b is not a random number that becomes a special symbol jackpot, that is, the special symbol If it is a random number that will result in a loss, the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37 will be the one when the special symbol is lost.

On the other hand, if the value of the first winning random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b is a random number for a special symbol jackpot, the first symbol display device. The display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed in 37 is the one at the time of the special symbol jackpot. In this case, the specific display mode at the time of the big hit is the display mode indicated by the value of the first winning type counter C2 stored in the same special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b. Become. In this control example, three types of "jackpot A", "jackpot B", and "jackpot C" are set as the jackpot types, and any one of them is determined by the first hit type counter C2. Then, a display mode indicating the jackpot type is displayed on the first symbol display device 37 as a jackpot symbol.

The first hit random number counter C1 in the pachinko machine 10 of this control example is configured as a 2-byte loop counter in the range of 0-599. In this first winning random number counter C1, there are two random numbers that become a jackpot with special symbols when the probability of special symbols is low. It is stored in the table 202a. In this way, when the probability of special symbols is low, the total number of random numbers that will be a big hit is 2 among the total number of random numbers of 600, so the probability of a special symbol being a big hit is "2/600 (1/300)". becomes.

On the other hand, when the probability of the special symbol is high, there are 6 random numbers for the special symbol jackpot, and the values "0 to 5" are stored in the first winning random number table 202a for the high probability. . In this way, when the probability of a special symbol is high, the total number of random numbers that will be a big hit is 6 among the total number of random numbers of 600, so the probability of a special symbol to be a big hit is "6/600 (1/100)". becomes.

In addition, in this control example, the random number for the jackpot stored in the first winning random number table 202a for the low probability and the random number for the jackpot stored in the first random number table 202a for the high probability It is configured so that the same random number is defined by the numerical value. By configuring in this way, for example, when "0" is acquired as the value of the first winning random number counter C1, the game state when executing the jackpot determination using the value of the first winning random number counter C1 Regardless, you can win the jackpot. Therefore, when the ball is entered into the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640 and the reserved ball of the special symbol is acquired, the value of the first winning random number counter C1 for winning the jackpot is obtained. Since it can be easily discriminated before the execution of the special pattern lottery, the suggestion performance for suggesting the determination of the big win can be executed without grasping the set game state, and the performance effect can be obtained. can be enhanced.

In addition, the value of the first winning random number counter C1 that is determined to be a big hit when the probability of special symbols is low and the value of the first random number counter C1 that is determined to be a big hit when the probability of special symbols is high are not duplicated. may be configured. In this case, depending on the situation (that is, depending on whether the pachinko machine 10 is in a special symbol high probability state or a special symbol low probability state), a random number determined to be a big hit (the value of the first winning random number counter C1 ) are different, it is possible to make it difficult to predict the random number value that will be the jackpot of the special symbol. Therefore, when the special pattern has a high probability (high probability state) and when the special pattern has a low probability (low probability state), the random number value that is determined to be a big hit is duplicated. can be suppressed.

Further, the value of the first win type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of this control example is configured as a loop counter within the range of 0-99. Then, as shown in FIG. 155(b), the first hit type selection table 202b for determining the jackpot type includes a data table to be referred to corresponding to the lottery of the first special design, and the second special design. and a data table to be referred to corresponding to the lottery of .

Here, the contents of the first winning type selection table 202b will be described with reference to FIG. 155(b). FIG. 155(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the first winning type selection table 202b. This first hit type selection table 202b is a data table referred to when selecting a jackpot type that is set when a jackpot is won in a special symbol lottery, and includes a special symbol type and the acquired first hit type. Different jackpot types (jackpot A to jackpot C) are selected based on the value of the counter C2.

In this control example, the game content (the number of rounds) of the jackpot game and the game state set after the jackpot game ends are configured to differ according to the set jackpot type. Therefore, it is possible to make a player who is playing a game with the aim of winning a big win interested in not only the winning of the big win but also the type of the big win. Furthermore, in this control example, it is configured such that a privilege with a different degree of advantage is granted to the player depending on the set jackpot type. As a result, it is possible to make the player more interested in the type of jackpot to be set.

Next, referring to FIG. 155(b), the contents defined in the first winning type selection table 202b will be described in detail. In the case of the first special symbol (special figure 1), the value of the acquired first hit type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 49", and the jackpot type "jackpot A" is "50 to 99". , the jackpot type “jackpot B” is defined respectively. Also, when the symbol type is the second special symbol (special figure 2), the jackpot type "jackpot C" is defined regardless of the acquired first hit type counter C2 value.

When "jackpot A" is set as the jackpot type, the round game is six rounds, and a jackpot game (usually a 6R jackpot game) in which it is difficult for the ball to pass through the specific area (V prize opening) during the jackpot game is executed. be. Then, when the ball does not win the V prize during the jackpot game, a special pattern lottery is executed 100 times in a time-saving state (low probability state for special patterns, high probability state for normal patterns) after the end of the jackpot game. In order to set the game state (time saving 100 times) that continues until, "100" is set to the value of the time saving counter 203u, and "0" is set to the value of the variable probability counter 203t. On the other hand, when the ball wins V during the jackpot game, the latent state (high probability state of special symbols, low probability state of normal symbols) continues until 200 special symbol lotteries are executed ( In order to set the probability 200 times), "0" is set to the value of the time reduction counter 203u, and "200" is set to the value of the probability variable counter 203t.

That is, the above-mentioned "jackpot A" is a jackpot type in which a normal jackpot game is executed in which the ball is difficult to pass through the specific area (V winning opening) during the jackpot game, and when the game is normally executed. , the ball does not pass through the V prize opening during the jackpot game. However, if an illegal game is executed during the jackpot game, for example, a game that destroys the structure in the variable prize winning device 65 and forces the ball to win a V prize, the ball may be played during the "jackpot A" jackpot game. may pass through the specific area (V winning opening). In this control example, when the ball is made to win V by a fraudulent game, the player is more likely than the probability variable state (high probability state of special symbols, high probability state of normal symbols) which is the most advantageous gaming state for the player. It is configured to set a latent state (high probability state of special symbols, low probability state of normal symbols) as a game state to be disadvantageous. As a result, a penalty can be imposed on a player who has played an illegal game.

Further, as a penalty to be imposed on a player who has executed an illegal game, for example, an illegal variation pattern is selected as a variation pattern of the special symbol variation executed when the latent state is set. Also, for example, when a game state (for example, latent state) that cannot be set when a normal game is executed is set, a variation pattern with a variation time of 10 minutes is selected. can be configured to By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the special symbol lottery from being efficiently executed for a player who has played an illegal game.

In this control example, the ease with which the ball can pass through the V winning opening varies depending on the type of jackpot game to be executed. When the ball enters the specific area (V prize opening) during the jackpot game, the high probability state of the special pattern is set after the jackpot game is finished, but it is not limited to this. For example, even if the ball enters the V winning hole during the normal jackpot game, the high probability state of the special symbol may not be set after the jackpot game ends.

When "jackpot B" is set as the jackpot type, the round game is 6 rounds, and a jackpot game (probable variable 6R jackpot game) in which the ball easily passes through a specific area (V winning opening) during the jackpot game is executed. be. Then, when the ball wins V during the jackpot game, the variable probability state (high probability state of special symbols, high probability state of normal symbols) continues until the special symbol lottery is executed 200 times (variable probability 200 times), "200" is set to the value of the time reduction counter 203u, and "200" is set to the value of the variable probability counter 203t. On the other hand, when the ball does not win the V prize during the jackpot game, a special pattern lottery is executed 100 times in a time-saving state (low probability state for special patterns, high probability state for normal patterns) after the end of the jackpot game. In order to set the game state (time saving 100 times) that continues until, "100" is set to the value of the time saving counter 203u, and "0" is set to the value of the variable probability counter 203t.

When "jackpot C" is set as the jackpot type, the round game is 16 rounds, and a jackpot game (probability variable 16R jackpot game) in which the ball easily passes through a specific area (V winning opening) during the jackpot game is executed. be. Then, when the ball wins V during the jackpot game, the variable probability state (high probability state of special symbols, high probability state of normal symbols) continues until the special symbol lottery is executed 200 times (variable probability 200 times), "200" is set to the value of the time reduction counter 203u, and "200" is set to the value of the variable probability counter 203t. On the other hand, when the ball does not win the V prize during the jackpot game, a special pattern lottery is executed 100 times in a time-saving state (low probability state for special patterns, high probability state for normal patterns) after the end of the jackpot game. In order to set the game state (time saving 100 times) that continues until, "100" is set to the value of the time saving counter 203u, and "0" is set to the value of the variable probability counter 203t.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of this control example determines which of the three types of jackpot types is determined according to the type of the special symbol that has won the jackpot and the value of the first winning type counter C2 that has been acquired. is configured to In addition, the first special pattern and the second special pattern are different in the type of the jackpot to be selected when the judgment result is a jackpot, and the first special pattern is selected when the jackpot is won in the second special pattern lottery. It is configured to make it easier for the player to select a jackpot type that is advantageous to the player, ie, a jackpot type in which a probability variable jackpot game is executed, than when the jackpot is won in a lottery. Therefore, it is possible to make the player interested in whether the lottery is executed with the first special symbol or the second special symbol.

The fluctuation type counter CS1 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 198 and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198). A rough variation mode is determined by the stop type selection counter C3 and the variation type counter CS1 described above. Specifically, the variation time of the special symbol variation is determined based on the value of the variation type counter CS1, and the short time off, long time off, normal reach, super reach, etc. are roughly determined based on the value of the stop type selection counter C3. A display mode is determined. Then, based on the variation mode determined by the value of the variation type counter CS1 and the value of the stop type selection counter C3, the third symbol display device 81 displayed by the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 The reach type of 3 patterns and detailed pattern variation mode are determined. The value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated once each time the main process (see FIG. 187) described later is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process. In addition, the variation pattern selection table 202d (see FIG. It is provided in the ROM 202 .

Next, referring to FIG. 156, the contents of the variation pattern selection table 202d will be described. FIG. 156 is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the variation pattern selection table 202d. As shown in FIG. 156, the variation pattern selection table 202d includes a normal table 202d1 used during normal design low probability state (normal state), and normal design high probability state (time saving state, probability variable state) during The time/probability variation table 202d2 to be used is defined, and a variation pattern is selected using the corresponding data table according to the game state at the time when the special symbol lottery is executed. In this control example, the special symbol lottery can be executed more efficiently when the normal symbol high probability state is set than when the normal symbol low probability state is set. Compared to selecting a variation pattern using the table 202d1, when selecting a variation pattern using a time saving / probability variation table 202d2, a variation pattern with a short variation time is configured to be easily selected. .

In this control example, when the time saving state is set as the gaming state and when the probability variation state is set, the same data table (time saving / probability variation table 202d2) is used to select the variation pattern , it is difficult for the player to understand the game state currently set based on the selected variation pattern. Various effects executed by the third symbol display device 81 allow the player to grasp the currently set game state. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make the player interested in various effects executed by the third symbol display device 81 .

In addition, if the special symbol lottery can be efficiently executed when the high probability state of the normal symbol is set than when the low probability state of the normal symbol is set, it is limited to this. Alternatively, the variable pattern may be selected using different data tables for the time saving state and the variable probability state. In addition, when the high probability state of the normal symbols is set, it is sufficient that the special symbol lottery can be efficiently executed than when the low probability state of the normal symbols is set. Of the various variation patterns defined in the data table (normal table 202d1) used when the low probability state of the normal design is set, the high probability state of the normal design is higher than the variation pattern with the longest variation time. Of the various variation patterns defined in the data table (time saving/probability variation table 202d2) used when is set, the variation pattern with the longest variation time may be specified with a long variation time. .

The selection of the variation pattern in the voice ramp control device 113 will be described later in more detail. Based on the value of the counter CS1, rough fluctuation pattern contents (reach, super reach, non-reach, etc.) and fluctuation time are determined, and a fluctuation pattern command indicating the determined contents is set.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 157 and 158, the contents of various tables defined in the variation pattern selection table 202d used when main controller 110 selects a variation pattern will be described. FIG. 157 is a data table schematically showing the contents of the normal table 202d1. In the normal table 202d1, various variation patterns are set corresponding to the lottery results of the special symbols, and the value of the variation type counter CS1 is assigned to each of the variation patterns.

Next, with reference to FIG. 158, it is the data table which showed typically the content of table 202d2 for time reduction and probability variation. In the time reduction/probability variation table 202d2, various variation patterns are set corresponding to the lottery results of the special symbols, and values of the variation type counter CS1 are assigned to each of the variation patterns.

In addition, in this control example, the variation pattern is defined in correspondence with the value of the variation type counter CS1, but is not limited to this. Each variation pattern may be defined corresponding to the jackpot type selected by.

The second hit random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter that increments by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 239, for example, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 239). Further, when the second winning random number counter C4 completes one cycle, the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the second winning random number counter C4. In this example of control, the value of the second hit random number counter C4 is updated, for example, periodically for each timer interrupt process, and is acquired when it is detected that the ball has passed through the through gate 67, and the normal symbol is reserved in the RAM 203. It is stored in the ball storage area 203c.

Then, the value of the random number that is the normal winning pattern is set by the second winning random number table 202c (see FIG. 155(c)) stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller, and the value of the second winning random number counter C4. is equal to the winning random number value set by the second winning random number table 202c, it is determined that the winning is a normal symbol. Also, this second hit random number table 202c (see FIG. 155(c)) is for normal design low probability time (normal design normal state period) and normal design hit probability from the low probability time. It is divided into two types, one for high probability (a period in which normal symbols are in a time-saving state), and the number of random numbers included in each is set differently.

Here, in this control example, in the normal pattern winning game executed based on the winning of the normal symbol, the electric accessory 640a (see FIG. 125) attached to the second ball entrance 640 is variable to the open state. A game is executed to cause the That is, normally, the electric accessory 640a, which is positioned in the closed state for restricting the entry of the ball into the second ball entrance 640, performs the second ball entry when the normal figure winning game is executed. A normal game is executed so that the opening state is changed to allow the ball to enter the mouth 640 . By configuring in this way, it is possible to vary the ease with which the ball enters the second ball entrance 640 according to the lottery result of the normal symbol lottery. That is, according to the result of the normal symbol lottery, the frequency of execution of the second special symbol lottery, which is more advantageous to the player than the first special symbol lottery, can be varied, so the normal symbols are executed independently. A game in which the lottery and the special pattern lottery are associated with each other can be played.

Furthermore, in this control example, it is configured so as to vary the game content of the normal per game according to the set game state, specifically, the state in which the high probability state of the normal symbol is set. When the normal pattern per game is executed, the ball is entered into the second ball entrance 640 than when the normal pattern per game is executed in the state where the low probability state of the normal pattern is set. It is configured so that an easy-to-play normal game is executed.

More specifically, when the normal pattern winning game is executed in a state where the high probability state of the normal symbol is set, the long winning in which the electric accessory 640a is opened in the opening time of 4 seconds is executed. , When the normal pattern winning game is executed in a state where the low probability state of the normal pattern is set, the electric accessary 640a is opened with an opening time of 0.2 seconds so that the short winning is executed. Configure. By configuring in this way, when the high probability state of the normal pattern is set, it is easier to win in the normal pattern lottery than when the low probability state of the normal pattern is set, and the normal pattern Since the ball can be easily entered into the second ball entrance 640 in the winning game, it is possible to motivate the player to play the game for executing the second special symbol lottery.

In addition, in this control example, in the state in which the low probability state of normal symbols is set, only the short hit is executed. In a part of the case of winning per figure, it may be configured so that the above-mentioned long per normal per game is executed, or normal per normal pattern which is executed in the state where the high probability state of the normal symbol is set In a part of the winning game, it may be configured so that the normal figure winning game per short described above is executed. In addition, in this control example, the game type of the game per normal pattern is two types of per short and per long, but the game type of the game per normal pattern may be configured to be able to set three or more types.

The normal initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated within the same range as the second random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 239), and is updated once per timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 177). Together with this, it is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main processing (see FIG. 187).

In this way, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters and the like, and the main control device 110 controls the big winning lottery and the display on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 according to the values of the counters and the like. Main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as setting and lottery of the display result in the second pattern display device 83 can be executed.

Returning to FIG. 152, the description is continued. The RAM 203 stores the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201, the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 201, etc., in addition to the various counters shown in FIG. and a work area (work area) in which the value of is stored.

The RAM 203 is configured to retain (back up) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply 115 even after the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, and all the data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

When power is interrupted due to power failure or the like, the RAM 203 stores the stack pointer and the values of each register at the time of power interruption (including power failure; the same applies hereinafter). On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including when the power is turned on due to the cancellation of the power failure; the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power was cut off based on the information stored in the RAM 203 . Writing to the RAM 203 is executed by the main process (see FIG. 187) when the power is turned off, and restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed by the start-up process (see FIG. 186) when the power is turned on. The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured to receive a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when power is shut off due to a power failure or the like. , NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 185) is immediately executed as power failure processing.

As shown in FIG. 154(a), the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 stores the above-described first winning random number table 202a (see FIG. 155), first winning type selection table 202b (see FIG. 155), A per-two random number table 202c (see FIG. 155) and a fluctuation pattern selection table 202d (see FIG. 156) are set. Although omitted in this control example, the ROM 202 stores various data necessary for the game (for example, action scenario data for a jackpot game, etc.), programs, etc., in addition to the above-described data.

For example, the action scenario data of the jackpot game is defined in a data table in which game action contents during the jackpot game are associated with the determined win type, and based on the information (scenario) stored in the data table. It is constructed so that movement control of various devices (variable winning device 65, etc.) during the jackpot game is executed.

Also, as shown in FIG. 154(b), the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 has a special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, a special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b, and a normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c. , special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d, special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e, normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f, probability variable setting flag 203h, probability variable passage counter 203i, prize number counter 203j, operation counter 203k , a notification counter 203m, a remaining ball timer flag 203n, a remaining ball timer 203p, a variable probability effective flag 203q, a variable probability effective timer 203r, a discharge number counter 203s, a variable probability counter 203t, a time reduction counter 203u, and other memories It has an area 203z.

The special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a has one execution area for the first special symbol and four reserved areas (first reserved area to fourth reserved area). Each value of the first winning random number counter C1, the first winning type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 is stored.

More specifically, at the timing when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 (start winning), each value of each counter C1 to C3 is acquired, and the acquired data is stored in four holding areas (holding number Area 1 to reserved area 4) are stored in ascending order of area numbers (first to fourth). That is, the smaller the area number, the data corresponding to the oldest winning is stored, and the first reserved area stores the data corresponding to the oldest winning. If data is stored in all four holding areas, nothing is newly stored.

After that, in the main control device 110, when a special symbol lottery is performed, each value of each counter C1 to C3 stored in the first reserved area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a is transferred to the execution area. Based on the values of the respective counters C1 to C3 which are shifted (moved) and stored in the execution area, determination such as lottery for special symbols is performed.

When data is shifted from the first reservation area to the execution area, the first reservation area becomes empty. Therefore, there is a shift process that packs the winning data stored in the other reservation areas (second reservation area to fourth reservation area) to the reservation area with the area number 1 smaller (first reservation area to third reservation area). done. In this control example, in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, data is shifted only for the reserved areas (second reserved area to fourth reserved area) in which winning data is stored. In addition, since the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b differs from the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a only in that it is a storage area corresponding to the second special symbol, detailed description thereof is omitted. do.

Like the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c has one execution area and four reserved areas (first reserved area to fourth reserved area). Each of these areas stores a normal random number counter C4.

More specifically, at the timing when the ball passes through the through gate 67, the value of the counter C4 is acquired, and the acquired data is stored in the four reserved areas (first reserved area to fourth reserved area). Among the areas in which the data is stored, the areas having the smallest area numbers (first to fourth) are stored in order. That is, similarly to the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, the data corresponding to the winning is stored while the winning order is maintained. If data is stored in all four holding areas, nothing is newly stored.

After that, in the main controller 110, when the normal symbol winning lottery is performed, the value of the counter C4 stored in the first reserved area of the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c is shifted to the execution area ( (moved), and based on the value of the counter C4 stored in the execution area, a determination such as a lottery for winning a normal symbol is performed.

In addition, when the data is shifted from the first reserved area to the execution area, the first reserved area becomes vacant. is shifted to a reserved area with an area number smaller by one. Also, the data shift is performed only for the reserved areas in which the winning data are stored.

The special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is a counter that counts up to four times the lottery right of the first special symbol lottery executed based on the ball entering the first ball entrance 64 (start winning). The initial value of this special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is set to zero. When the lottery right for the middle line in the pattern is acquired, 1 is added until the maximum value of 4 is reached. On the other hand, the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is decremented by 1 each time a special symbol variable display is newly executed.

The value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d (the number of times N of holding the variable display in the special symbol) is notified to the sound lamp control device 113 by the reserved ball number command. The reserved ball number command is a command transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sound lamp controller 113 every time the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is changed.

The special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is a counter that counts the reserved balls based on the winning of the second ball entrance 640, and other configurations are the same as the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d. A detailed description thereof is omitted.

The voice lamp control device 113, every time the values of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e are changed, the main controller 113 according to the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main controller 110. It is possible to acquire the value of the number of pending balls in the variable display that is held in 110 . As a result, the number of holding balls in the variable display managed by the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 223a and the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 223b of the sound lamp control device 113 is held by the main controller 110 due to the influence of noise and the like. Even if there is a deviation from the actual number of held balls in the displayed variable display, the deviation can be corrected by the next received number of held balls command.

In addition, the voice lamp control device 113 manages the number of held balls based on the number of held balls command, and every time the number of held balls changes, the display control device 114 is notified of the number of held balls. Send a pitch command. The display control device 114 displays the reserved ball number pattern in the sub-display area Ds of the third pattern display device 81 based on the reserved ball number notified by the display reserved ball number command.

The normal design reserved ball number counter 203f counts the number of reserved balls (number of standby times) of the variable display of the normal design (second design) performed by the second design display device 83 based on the passage of the ball through the through gate 67 up to 4 times. A counter that counts up to The initial value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is set to zero, and each time a ball passes through the through gate 67 and the number of reserved balls of variable display increases, 1 is added up to a maximum value of 4. On the other hand, the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is decremented by 1 each time the variable display of the normal symbol (second symbol) is newly executed.

When the ball passes through the through gate 67, if the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f (the number M of holding variable display in normal symbols) is less than 4, the value of the normal per random number counter C4 is acquired, The acquired data is stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c. On the other hand, when the ball passes through the through gate 67, if the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is 4, nothing is newly stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c.

The variable probability setting flag 203h is a flag indicating whether or not to set the high probability state of the special symbol after the jackpot game. In this pachinko machine 10, whether or not the high probability state of the special symbol is set depends on whether the ball enters (passes) the probability variable switch 65e3 (see FIG. 128) provided in the variable winning device 65 during the jackpot game. ). Here, when it is detected that the ball has entered (passed) this variable probability switch 65e3 during the jackpot game (hereinafter referred to as V winning), the variable probability setting flag 203h is set to ON (see S1412 in FIG. 191). . On the other hand, this variable probability setting flag 203h is referred to at the end of the jackpot game (see S1202 in FIG. 190), and when it is determined that it is set to ON, after setting 200 to the value of the variable probability counter 203t, it is turned OFF. It is set (see S1205 in FIG. 190). The variable probability setting flag 203h is backed up when the power is turned off, and is set to the state immediately before the power is turned off when the power is restored (when the power is turned on). Moreover, it is set to OFF when the pachinko machine 10 is initialized.

In addition, when the probability variation setting flag 203h is set to ON when the power is turned on, it is determined whether the probability variation switch has passed before the power is turned off. may be configured to formally set to ON and return. In this case, whether or not the variable probability switch 65e3 is passed before the power is turned off can be determined by whether the variable probability passage counter 203h, which will be described later, is a value greater than zero. By configuring in this way, in a state where the power is turned off, it is possible to reduce the damage on the side of the amusement arcade by determining fraud such as rewriting the probability variable setting flag 203h to ON and turning on the power again. can.

The variable probability passage counter 203i is a counter for counting the number of balls that have passed through the variable probability switch 65e3 (flowed down a specific area) in one round (one round of the jackpot in this control example) during the jackpot game. By the sum of the value of the variable probability passage counter 203i and the value of the ejection number counter 203s described later, it is possible to determine whether or not all the winning balls have been ejected. This variable probability passing counter 203i is updated by adding one by one when the ball passes through the variable probability switch 65e3 (V winning). Also, after executing the determination processing of whether or not the number of winning balls in the variable winning device 65 and the number of discharged balls match, the value is reset to "0" which is the initial value. It should be noted that this probability variable passing counter 203i is backed up when the power is turned off. It is set to 0 in the initialized state.

The winning number counter 203j is a counter for counting the number of balls that have won in the specific winning opening 65a of the variable winning device 65 in one round in the jackpot game. Based on this, 1 is added and updated. On the other hand, when one round is completed, the number of prizes won by the variable prize device 65 (the value of the prize number counter 203j) and the number of discharges (the total value of the discharge number counter 203s and the probability variable passage counter 203i) are the same. After it is determined whether they match, the initial value is reset to "0". The value of the winning number counter 203j is backed up when the power is turned off. It is set to 0 in the initialized state.

The operation counter 203k is for measuring (counting) the operation time of various devices (the opening/closing door 65f, the switching valve 65h) that are variably controlled during the jackpot game. solenoid) 65k is set to ON (excited). In the pachinko machine 10, the flow path solenoid 65k is set to ON for 0.5 seconds at the start of 5 rounds for the jackpot A, and the flow path solenoid 65k is turned on at the start of 5 rounds for the jackpots B and C. Set on for 5 seconds. In the operation counter 203k, a counter value corresponding to 0.5 seconds is set as start data of 5 rounds for the jackpot A, and a counter value corresponding to 5 seconds is set for the jackpots B and C. On the other hand, in the winning process executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the number is decremented by one and updated. Further, based on the determination that the value of the operation counter 203k is 0, the flow path solenoid 65k is set to OFF. The operation counter 203k is backed up when the power is turned off, and is set to 0 as an initial value in the initialized state. Thus, by setting the operation counter 203k and controlling the flow path solenoid 65k, winning to the variable probability switch 65e3 can be controlled according to the jackpot type.

The notification counter 203m is a counter for determining the timing of outputting a notification effect for attracting the player's attention (in this control example, a voice saying "look at the liquid crystal"). In this control example, a value corresponding to one second is set in the notification counter 203m at the end timing of the fourth round (10 balls won by the variable winning device 65 or 30 seconds have passed). This notification counter 203m is updated by being decremented by one each time the big win control process (see S904 in FIG. 188) of the main controller 110 is executed. A notification command to be output to the sound lamp control device 113 is set based on the value of the notification counter 203m becoming zero. Upon receiving this command, the sound lamp control device 113 executes the processing for outputting the sound described above.

By configuring in this manner, the sound "Look at the liquid crystal" is output before the start of the fifth round in which the flow path solenoid 65k is operated, so that the player can easily see the third symbol display device corresponding to the liquid crystal. Watch 81. Here, details will be described later, but in the fifth round of the jackpot game, for example, a girl character is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 to urge the player to look at the third pattern display device 81. The word "attention", which is a notification, is displayed. Since the channel solenoid 65k is activated in the fifth round, when the player watches the operation, the type of jackpot being executed is determined by the operating period of the channel solenoid 65k. Therefore, in order for the player to continue to expect that the variable probability game state will be provided until the end of the jackpot game, the movement of the switching member 65h (the flow path solenoid 65k) in the variable winning device 65 is controlled by the player. A notification effect that makes it difficult to see is being executed. However, when the fifth round ends, there is a risk that the player will look at the switching member 65h during the interval display, so the player is notified by voice to watch the third symbol display device 81 during the interval period. A notification effect is executed. As a result, the player's attention can be attracted to the displayed display contents after the interval effect is executed, and the player's attention can be diverted from the operation of the switching member 65h.

In this control example, the player's attention is diverted from the switching member 65h by announcing that the third symbol display device 81 is shown. By notifying that the player's hand is held over the device 65, the movement of the switching member 65h may be notified so as to be hidden by the player's hand. Also, not only the third symbol display device 81 but also the decorative lamp 34 may be notified to the player to look at, thereby diverting the player's attention. Furthermore, it is also possible to divert the player's attention by displaying a two-dimensional code or the like during the four rounds to notify the player to read it with a mobile phone. In this control example, regardless of the jackpot type of the jackpot game being executed, the above-described distraction effect is executed for the longest time (5 seconds from the start of round 5) until the operation of the switching member 65h ends. It is configured as follows. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from determining the jackpot type of the jackpot game of this time due to the length of the notification time.

The remaining ball timer flag 203n is a flag indicating whether or not it is a ball sweeping period after one round is finished and the specific winning hole 65a is closed. When the remaining ball timer flag 203p is set to ON, it means that it is the ball sweeping period. While the remaining ball timer flag 203n is set to ON, the remaining ball timer 203p, which will be described later, is incremented by one and updated. The remaining ball timer 203p is a counter for determining the time after the specific winning hole 65a is closed, and determines whether the time required for the game balls in the variable winning device 65 to be discharged has passed. is a counter for

The remaining ball timer 203p is the time required for the winning balls to be discharged to the variable prize winning device 65 when one preset round is completed and the specific prize winning port 65a of the variable prize winning device 65 is closed. is a counter for determining whether or not has elapsed. In this embodiment, it takes 0.5 seconds for the variable winning device 65 to eject the winning ball. is set as the upper limit of When the remaining ball timer 203p reaches the upper limit value (0.8 seconds in this embodiment), it is determined whether or not the number of winning prizes to the variable prize winning device 65 and the number of discharged prizes match. be. If they do not match, an error command is set to notify you. Therefore, it is possible to notify early that game balls are clogged in the variable prize winning device 65.例文帳に追加

In addition, if the winning number and the discharge number do not match, a dedicated flag is set to ON, and if the flag is ON, the probability variation setting flag 203h is turned on even if the game ball passes through the probability variation switch may be configured not to be set to . By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the variable probability state from being improperly imparted.

Probability variation effective flag 203q, after the switching member 65h is switched to an arrangement that cannot be distributed to the specific region (probability variation switch 65e3), when the game ball passes through the specific region (probability variation switch 65e3) (when V wins ), it is a flag for determining whether or not the passage (V winning) is valid. When this variable probability effective flag 203q is set to ON, it indicates that the game ball passing through the specific area (variable probability switch 65e3) is a normal period.

The variable probability effective timer 203r is a counter for counting the time after the variable probability effective flag 203q is set to ON. After the switching member 65h is switched to an arrangement in which the ball cannot flow down the specific area (variable probability switch 65e3) by this variable probability effective timer 203r, it is possible to determine the period necessary for normally passing through the variable probability switch 65e3. In this control example, the time required for the ball reaching the switching member 65h to pass through the variable probability switch 65e3 is 0.3 seconds. The upper limit value of the variable probability valid timer 203r is set to a counter value corresponding to 0.5 seconds, and even if the specific area (variable probability switch 65e3) is passed (V winning) after that, it is determined to be illegal and passed. do not.

As a result, the ball is illegally entered into a specific area (variable probability switch 65e3) (V prize), pushed up the game ball with a piano wire or the like from below the variable probability switch 65e3 and passed, or passed through the magnetic sensor by radio waves etc. It is possible to suppress damage caused by fraud such as false detection.

The discharged number counter 203s is a counter for counting the number of game balls discharged from the variable winning device 65 in one round. The discharge number counter 203s is reset to 0, which is the initial value, after it is determined that the number of winning balls in the variable winning device 65 matches the discharge number.

The variable probability counter 203t is a counter for indicating a state in which a special symbol high probability state is set, and is set to a value corresponding to a case in which a special symbol high probability state is set. A value is set to this variable probability counter 203t after the jackpot game ends based on the ball passing through the specific area (variable probability switch 65e3) during the jackpot game (see S1203 in FIG. 190). Then, every time the special symbol lottery is executed (every time the special symbol variation time elapses and the special symbol during variable display is stopped and displayed), 1 is subtracted from the set value. Also, it is cleared to 0 when winning the jackpot game. As a result, since the high probability state of the special symbol is not set during the jackpot game, it is possible to suppress giving excessive benefits to the player during the jackpot game.

In addition, in this control example, when the high probability state of the special symbol is set, the value of the probability variation counter 203t is set, based on the special symbol lottery (fluctuation), the value of the probability variation counter 203t is subtracted, and the probability variation counter 203t When the value of becomes 0, the high probability state of the special pattern is terminated, and it is configured to shift to the low probability state of the special pattern, but not limited to this, for example, the next jackpot game is executed (until the jackpot is won), the special symbol high probability state may be continued. In this case, "10000" may be set as the value of the variable probability counter 203t.

In addition, in this embodiment, as a condition for ending the high probability state of the special symbol, as a condition for subtracting the value of the probability variation counter 203t, the value of the probability variation counter 203i based on the number of special symbol lottery (variation) Although only the condition for subtraction is set, the value of the variable probability counter 203t is subtracted when, for example, an end condition that can be satisfied depending on the processing contents of various processes executed by the main controller 110 is satisfied without being limited to this. It may be configured to Specifically, when the lottery result of each symbol lottery executed in the state where the high probability state of the normal symbol is set becomes a predetermined lottery result (for example, special winning election), or the normal symbol lottery Also when the result is a predetermined lottery result (for example, winning per special normal figure), the value of the probability variation counter 203t may be subtracted.

Furthermore, the winning jackpot type and the value set in the variable probability counter 203t may be changed based on the passing situation of the ball to the specific area (variable probability switch 65e3), and the content of subtracting the value of the time saving counter 203u Similarly, the value of the probability variable counter 203t may be configured to be subtractable according to conditions other than the number of times of variation of the special symbol, and when the subtraction condition for subtracting the value of the probability variable counter 203t is satisfied, the probability variable counter 203t may be configured so that a plurality of values of can be subtracted at once. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for a player to grasp how long the high probability state of the special pattern continues, so that the player can watch the result of the special pattern lottery executed during the high probability state of the special pattern without getting bored. can be done.

In addition, in this control example, as a condition for ending the variable probability state, that is, as a condition for subtracting the value of the variable probability counter 203t, the value of the variable probability counter 203t is subtracted based on the number of special symbol lotteries (fluctuations). Although only the conditions are set, the value of the variable probability counter 203t is subtracted when, for example, the end conditions that can be satisfied depending on the processing contents of the various processes executed by the main controller 110 are satisfied without being limited to this. can be configured to Specifically, when the lottery result of each symbol lottery executed in the state where the high probability state of the special symbol is set becomes a predetermined lottery result (for example, special lost winning), or normal symbol lottery Even if the result is a predetermined lottery result (for example, winning a special normal figure), the value of the probability variable counter 203t may be subtracted, or the ball may enter a specific entrance (for example, the first 1 entrance 64, second entrance 640, etc.), the value of the variable probability counter 203t may be subtracted.

In addition, in this control example, the value of the variable probability counter 203t is configured to be decremented by one. It may be configured to be subtracted, or may be configured to be subtracted so that the value of the variable probability counter 203t becomes "0" regardless of the current value of the variable probability counter 203t. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand how long the variable probability state continues, and it is possible to make the player interested in the game during the variable probability state.

Furthermore, the conditions for ending the variable probability state may be varied according to the content of establishment of the conditions for which the variable probability state is set (jackpot type). As a result, not only the execution of the jackpot game but also the jackpot type corresponding to the executed jackpot game can be made interesting to the player, and the interest in the game can be improved. .

The time saving counter 203u is a counter for indicating a state in which a high probability state of normal symbols is set, and a value corresponding to a case where a high probability state of normal symbols is set is set. A value corresponding to the winning jackpot type is set to the time saving counter 203u after the jackpot game ends (see S1205 in FIG. 190). Then, it is cleared to 0 when the jackpot game is won. As a result, since the high probability state of normal symbols is not set during the jackpot game, it is possible to suppress giving excessive benefits to the player during the jackpot game.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the high probability state of the normal design is set, the value of the time reduction counter 203u is set, based on the special design lottery (fluctuation), the value of the time reduction counter 203u is subtracted, and the time reduction counter 203u When the value of becomes 0, the high probability state of the normal pattern ends, and it is configured to shift to the low probability state of the normal pattern, but not limited to this, for example, the next jackpot game is executed (until the jackpot is won), the normal symbol high probability state may be continued. In this case, "10000" may be set as the value of the time saving counter 203u.

In addition, in this embodiment, as a condition for terminating the high probability state of normal symbols and a condition for subtracting the value of the time saving counter 203u, the value of the time saving counter 203h is set based on the number of special symbol lotteries (fluctuations). Although only the conditions for subtraction are set, the value of the time saving counter 203u is subtracted when, for example, an end condition that can be satisfied depending on the processing contents of various processes executed by the main controller 110 is satisfied without being limited to this. It may be configured to Specifically, when the lottery result of each symbol lottery executed in the state where the high probability state of the normal symbol is set becomes a predetermined lottery result (for example, special winning election), or the normal symbol lottery Even when the result is a predetermined lottery result (for example, winning per special normal figure), the value of the time saving counter 203u may be subtracted.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the value of the time-saving counter 203u is configured to be decremented by 1, but according to the type of the established end condition, a plurality of values of the time-saving counter 203u are collectively (for example, 2) It may be configured to be subtracted, or may be configured to be subtracted so that the value of the time saving counter 203u becomes "0" regardless of the current value of the time saving counter 203u. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand how long the time saving state will continue, and it is possible to make the player interested in the game during the time saving state.

Furthermore, the conditions for ending the time saving state may be varied according to the contents of establishment of the conditions for which the time saving state is set (jackpot type). As a result, not only the execution of the jackpot game but also the jackpot type corresponding to the executed jackpot game can be made interesting to the player, and the interest in the game can be improved. .

The other memory area 203z is set (stored) with other data necessary for the game, counters, flags, and the like.

Returning to FIG. 152, the description is continued. An input/output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 via a bus line 204 comprising an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 205 includes the payout control device 111, the sound lamp control device 113, the first symbol display device 37, the second symbol display device 83, the second symbol reservation lamp 84, and the lower side of the opening/closing plate of the specific winning opening 65a. A solenoid 209 consisting of a large opening solenoid for driving opening and closing to the front side and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory is connected. to send.

The input/output port 205 is connected to various switches 208 including a switch group and a sensor group (not shown), and a RAM erasure switch circuit 253 provided in the power supply 115, which will be described later. , and the RAM erasing signal SG2 output from the RAM erasing switch circuit 253, various processes are executed.

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and rental balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 212 storing control programs executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 used as a work memory and the like.

The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area for storing the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211, and various flags and counters. , and a work area (work area) in which values such as I/O are stored. The RAM 213 is configured to retain (back up) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply 115 even after the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, and all the data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. As with the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is also configured to receive a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when power is shut off due to a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 185) is immediately executed as power failure processing.

An input/output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 215 is connected to the main controller 110, the dispensing motor 216, the launch controller 112, and the like. Although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected with a prize ball detection switch for detecting paid prize balls. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout controller 111 but not to the main controller 110 .

The shooting control device 112 controls the ball shooting unit 112a so that the shooting strength of the ball corresponds to the amount of rotation of the operating handle 51 when the main controller 110 issues a ball shooting instruction. The ball shooting unit 112a has a shooting solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 290 detects that the player is touching the operating handle 51, and the operating handle 51b is turned off (not operated) to stop the shooting of the ball. A shooting solenoid is energized corresponding to the amount of rotation of the operating handle 51, and the ball is shot with strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operating handle 51.

The audio lamp control device 113 outputs audio from an audio output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, outputs lighting and extinguishing from a lamp display device (electrical parts 29 to 33, display lamp 34, etc.) 227, and changes production (variation It controls the setting of the display mode of the third pattern display device 81 performed by the display control device 114 such as display) and continuous advance notice effect. The MPU 221, which is an arithmetic device, has a ROM 222 storing control programs executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 used as a work memory and the like.

An input/output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 comprising an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 225 is connected to the main controller 110, the display controller 114, the audio output device 226, the lamp display device 227, the frame button 22, and the like.

The sound lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, changes the background mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81, or changes the background mode displayed at the time of super reach. The voice output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are controlled, and the display control device 114 is instructed so as to change the content of the presentation.

The audio lamp control device 113 determines an error according to the command from the main control device 110 and the status of various devices connected to the audio lamp control device 113, and displays and controls the error command including the error type. Send to device 114 . The display control device 114 controls the third pattern display device 81 to display an error message image corresponding to the error type (for example, vibration error) indicated by the received error command without delay.

As shown in FIG. 159(a), the ROM 222 of the sound lamp control device 113 contains a variable effect pattern selection table 222a, a repeated hit effect selection table 222b, a random display selection table 222c, a delay effect selection table 222d, and a group effect selection table 222e. , and a battle effect selection table 222f are stored.

The variation effect pattern selection table 222a is a selection table for determining a variation pattern based on a variation pattern command output from the main controller 110. FIG. A plurality of variation patterns are set corresponding to the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern command and the variation pattern type, and one variation pattern is determined by acquiring a counter value for selection (not shown).

Here, with reference to FIG. 160, the contents of the variable effect pattern selection table 222a will be described. FIG. 160(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the variable effect pattern selection table 222a. As shown in FIG. 160(a), the variation effect pattern selection table 222a is referred to when a variation pattern command (normal time variation pattern command) selected by the main controller 110 using the normal table 202d1 is received. The normal production pattern table 222a1 and the time saving/probability variation referred to when the variation pattern command (time saving/probability variation pattern command) selected using the time saving/probability variation table 202d2 in the main control device 110 is received It has an effect pattern table 222a2.

In each production pattern table, various production data corresponding to the variation pattern command (variation time) selected by the main control device 110 are defined, and the variation production executed by the third pattern display device 81 is specified. It is used when selecting the contents of the presentation.

Next, the contents of the normal effect pattern table 222a1 will be described with reference to FIG. 160(b). FIG. 160(b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents defined in the normal effect pattern table 222a1. As shown in FIG. 160(b), the normal production pattern table 222a1 includes the type of the normal fluctuation pattern command output from the main control device 110, the number of reserved special symbols, and the acquired first production. Various production patterns (fluctuation production) are defined corresponding to the value of the counter 223p1. In the schematic diagram shown in FIG. 160(b), for convenience of explanation, there is a range indicated as "various reach effects" as the effect pattern, but this actually corresponds to the acquired first effect counter 223p1. This indicates that different types of production patterns are defined for each.

More specifically, the content defined in the normal effect pattern table 222a1 will be described as follows. When the number of reserved corresponding special symbols is "0", regardless of the value of the acquired first effect counter 223p1, "pseudo-off effect" is used as the effect pattern, and the number of reserved corresponding special symbols is "1 to 3". , "various ready-to-win effects" according to the acquired value of the first effect counter 223p1 are defined. In addition, when the type of the received variation pattern is "type B (90 seconds)" and the number of reserved special symbols is "0 to 3", the value of the acquired first effect counter 223p1 is "0 to 149 , and the range of ``150 to 198'' defines ``series of character effects''.

Here, when the "pseudo failure effect" is selected as the effect pattern, an effect including a specific failure effect for 14 seconds (see FIG. 145(a)) is executed. By constructing in this way, since the number of reserved special symbols is '0', the final result of the special symbol lottery is a jackpot win even though the player thinks that the specified non-specified performance has been executed. can be provided to the player. Therefore, even when the 14-second specific failure performance executed when the result of the special symbol lottery is lost, the lottery result can leave the possibility of a big win, so the contents of the variable performance to be executed. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the fact that the result of the special symbol lottery is grasped in advance.

In addition, when "a series of character effects" is selected as the effect pattern, an effect using a plurality of effect devices of the pachinko machine 10 is executed. Although a detailed description of this production device is omitted, it is a movable means (a member for production that operates using an electric drive source) provided in the pachinko machine 10, and a production is performed according to the result of the special symbol lottery. The device is movable from at least a first position to a second position different from the first position for use. Some of these effect devices require a preparatory action (for example, an action to move to a standby position) in advance in order to actually move to a different position. Therefore, as in this control example, by setting the effect pattern of the variable effect, it is possible to reliably execute the preparatory motion. Incidentally, for an effect device requiring a preparatory action, an effect pattern in which only the preparatory action is executed may be provided in addition to the case where the effect is actually executed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from knowing in advance whether or not the effect using the effect device will be executed based on the presence or absence of the preparatory motion.

If the result of the determination is "out", the type of the received variation pattern is "type D (14 seconds)", and the number of reserved special symbols is "0", the value of the acquired first effect counter 223p1 Regardless, if the production pattern is "unspecified production", the type of the received variation pattern is "type E (28 seconds)", and the number of pending special symbols is "0 to 3", the acquired Regardless of the value of the first effect counter 223p1, the effect pattern is "second specified non-specific effect", the type of the received variation pattern is "type F (60 seconds)", and the number of reserved special symbols is "0". ~ 3”, the “various reach effects” according to the value of the acquired first effect counter 223p1, the type of the received variation pattern is “type F (60 seconds)”, and the number of corresponding special symbols held is "0 to 3", the "various reach effects" according to the value of the acquired first effect counter 223p1, the type of the received variation pattern is "type F (60 seconds)", the corresponding special symbol If the number of pending is "0 to 3", the value of the acquired first effect counter 223p1 is "various reach effects" in the range of "0 to 194" and "series of reach effects" in the range of "195 to 198" Role performance" is stipulated.

Next, with reference to FIG. 161, the contents of the effect pattern table 222a2 for time reduction/probability variation will be described. FIG. 161 is a schematic diagram showing the contents defined in the production pattern table 222a2 for time saving/probability variation. As shown in FIG. 161, the time saving/probability variation effect pattern table 222a2 includes the type of the time saving time variation pattern command output from the main control device 110, the number of corresponding special symbols on hold, and the acquired first effect counter 223p1 value and various effect patterns (variable effect) are defined. In the schematic diagram shown in FIG. 161, for convenience of explanation, there is a range indicated as "various types of ready-to-win effects" as effect patterns. This indicates that the production pattern of is specified. In addition, regarding the specified detailed contents, it is different from the above-described normal production pattern table 222a1 (see FIG. 160(b)) in that the specific distribution numerical values are different and the corresponding production patterns are different. Since the difference is that the two are the same, the detailed description is omitted.

The repeated hit effect selection table 222b is a list of repeated hit effects executed when "continuous hit effect" is selected as the variable effect pattern selected by the variable effect pattern selection table 222a based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110. It is for selecting the effect mode, and includes an upper limit frequency selection table 222b1, an end frequency selection table 222b2, and an effect result selection table 222b3.

It should be noted that this "continuous hit effect" is included in the effect patterns described as "various reach effects" in the variable effect pattern selection table 222a described above with reference to FIGS. 160 and 161. , the effect of the effect described with reference to FIGS. 130 to 132 is executed.

First, with reference to FIG. 162(b), the contents of the upper limit count selection table 222b1 will be described. FIG. 162(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the upper limit number of times selection table 222b1. The upper limit number selection table 222b1 is referred to when selecting the number of times the frame button 22 is operated (upper limit number) required until the display mode changes to the maximum variable value in the continuous hit effect.

Specifically, when the result of the corresponding special symbol lottery is "win (big win)" and the reach type is "SP reach", the acquired value of the second effect counter 223p2 is "0 to 39". , "20" is selected as the upper limit number of times. In this case, the final variable mode (maximum variable value) of the repeated hit effect is "0". When the obtained value of the second effect counter 223p2 is "40 to 198", "15" is selected as the upper limit number of times. In this case, the final variable mode (maximum variable value) of the repeated hit effect is "5 bodies".

In addition, when the result of the corresponding special symbol lottery is "hit (big hit)" and the reach type is "super reach", regardless of the value of the acquired second effect counter 223p2, the upper limit number of times is set to " 15” is selected. In this case, the final variable mode (maximum variable value) of the repeated hit effect is "11 to 40 bodies".

Here, the final variable mode of "11 to 40 bodies" is a case where only the possible range is selected without determining a specific numerical value when selecting the effect mode of the continuous hit effect. When this "11 to 40 bodies" is selected, when the operation command for the frame button 22 is received on the display control device 114 side, the currently displayed variable mode is changed within a range in which the variable mode is not reversed. A determination is made as to whether or not to vary, and if the determination is won, the variable mode is configured to be varied within the above-described range. In this way, by configuring the sound lamp control device 113 so as not to determine the details of the effect mode of the repeated hitting effect, variations can be given to the effect mode of the repeated hitting effect that is actually executed.

When the result of the corresponding special symbol lottery is "loss" and the reach type is "SP reach", "15" is selected as the upper limit number of times regardless of the acquired value of the second effect counter 223p2. . In this case, the final variable mode (maximum variable value) of the repeated hit effect is "5 bodies". When the reach type is "super reach", "15" is selected as the upper limit number regardless of the acquired value of the second effect counter 223p2. In this case, the final variable mode (maximum variable value) of the repeated hit effect is "11 to 40 bodies". When the ready-to-win type is "other than ready-to-win", regardless of the acquired value of the second effect counter 223p2, "10" is selected as the upper limit number of times. In this case, the final variable mode (maximum variable value) of the repeated hit effect is "11 to 40 bodies".

Next, the contents of the number-of-ends selection table 222b2 will be described with reference to FIG. 163(a). FIG. 163(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the number-of-ends selection table 222b2. The end number selection table 222b2 selects an end condition for shortening (ending) the effect period of the repeated hit effect after the operation of the frame button 22 reaches the upper limit number of times during the repeat effect. In this control example, as an end condition for shortening (ending) the effect period of the continuous hit effect, it is possible to set an operation count end condition that is satisfied based on the number of times the frame button 22 is operated. ), different end times are defined based on the result of the special symbol lottery, the set upper limit number of times, and the acquired value of the third effect counter 223p3.

FIG. 163(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the effect result selection table 222b3. This effect result selection table 222b3 is a data table used when selecting the effect result of the repeated hit effect, and as a result of the special symbol lottery, depending on whether or not the effect period of the repeated hit effect is shortened, and the set upper limit number of times It is stipulated that a different effect result is selected in each case.

The random display selection table 222c has a data table that is referred to when selecting the effect mode of the random display effect, and as shown in FIG. , a permutation storage area 222c3, an ideographic mode selection table 222c4, and a display number selection table 222c5.

The effect icon storage area 222c1 is a storage area in which information corresponding to various icons used in the random display effect is stored. Here, the contents of the effect icon storage area 222c1 will be described with reference to FIG. 164(b). FIG. 164(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the effect icon storage area 222c1. As shown in FIG. 164(b), the effect icon storage area 222c1 is formed with six areas, first area za1 to sixth area za6, arranged in order.

One piece of icon information is stored for each area. Specifically, “square” icon information is stored in the first area za1, “triangle” icon information is stored in the second area za2, and “square” icon information is stored in the third area za3. The fourth area stores "circular" icon information, the fifth area stores "diamond-shaped" icon information, and the sixth area stores "V-sign-shaped" icon information.

In this control example, icon information is stored for each area formed in the icon storage area 222c1, and each area is assigned an order. Then, when the effect mode of the random display effect is determined, the icons are displayed according to the order of the regions of the icon storage area 222c1. By configuring in this way, it is possible to execute an effect according to a predetermined rule while imparting randomness to the icon display contents. Therefore, it is possible to make it easier to execute an effect according to the result of the special symbol lottery, as compared with the case where the effect contents are set completely at random.

In FIG. 164(b), only one region range (the first region za1 to the sixth region za6) is shown as the production icon storage area 222c1, but in reality, each region is stored in association with the region. Although it has a plurality of area ranges with different icon information, the explanation thereof is omitted for convenience of explanation. In this way, the effect icon storage area 222c1 is provided with a plurality of area ranges, and when the effect mode of the random display effect is selected, the area ranges to be used are varied, so that the effect modes are greatly varied. can be easily executed. For example, specific icon information that is stored only in a part of a plurality of area ranges is provided, and the area range in which the specific icon information is stored is selected when a special symbol lottery wins a jackpot. It should be configured to make it easier. By configuring in this way, it is possible to increase the expectation of winning the jackpot just by displaying the icon corresponding to the specific icon information.

Further, the icon information stored in the region range (the first region za1 to the sixth region za6) of the effect icon storage area 222c1 may be switched when a predetermined switching condition is satisfied. In this case, for example, as a predetermined switching condition, a switching condition that is established when a jackpot game is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, once or twice), or a timer that can clock the current time on the pachinko machine 10 ( For example, an RTC) is installed, and a switching condition that is established when a predetermined time (for example, 13 o'clock) comes, an operation means that the player can arbitrarily operate, and the operation executed based on the operation on the operation means In the pachinko machine 10 having an effect selection means capable of selecting the effect mode of the effect, it is preferable to provide a switching condition that is established based on the player's operation of the operation means. As a result, even if only one area range is provided, it is possible to diversify the variations of the presentation mode.

The display order selection table 222c2 is a data table used when selecting the display order of the icons to be displayed in the random display effect. This is to select which area of the storage area 222c1 to use.

Here, the contents of the display order selection table 222c2 will be described with reference to FIG. 164(b). FIG. 164(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the display order selection table 222c2. As shown in FIG. 164(b), the display order selection table 222c2 contains different areas (first areas) as areas corresponding to the top icon based on the result of the special symbol lottery and the value of the fourth effect counter 233p4. za1 to sixth area za6) are configured to be selectable.

In this control example, when the area (first area za1 to sixth area za6) corresponding to the leading icon is selected, the areas are selected in a predetermined order (first area za1 (A), second area za2 (B) , . . . sixth area za6(F), first area za1(A), . . . ). Therefore, when "A" is selected as the top icon and when "C" is selected, the same display mode will be displayed when the first icon is displayed in the random display effect. Become. Therefore, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the display mode of the icons that are displayed consecutively in the random display effect, specifically, the display mode of the second icon that is displayed.

Also, as shown in FIG. 164(c), when the result of the special symbol lottery is a big win, it is easier to display the "V sign shape" icon as the leading icon than when the result is a loss. It is configured as follows. Moreover, it is configured so that the ratio of selecting "C" is high. Therefore, during the random display effect, the "V sign shape" icon is more likely to be displayed when the jackpot is won than when the jackpot is not won. Therefore, the "V-sign shape" icon is a specific icon that increases the expectation of a big win just by being displayed.

The permutation storage area 222c3 is a storage area that stores information about positions at which icons are displayed in the random display effect. In this control example, a plurality of orders (permutations) in which the icons are displayed in the random display effect are prepared in advance, and when selecting the effect mode of the random display effect, the icons are displayed in the selected order. It is configured to By configuring in this way, it is possible to execute an effect according to a predetermined rule while imparting randomness to the icon display order. Therefore, it is possible to make it easier to execute an effect according to the result of the special symbol lottery, as compared with the case where the effect contents are set completely at random.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 165(a), the permutation storage area 222c3 stores effect data (permutation data) corresponding to the permutations A to D, and a display mode selection table 222c4, which will be described later, is stored. Permutation data selected using is read out.

Here, the contents defined in the display mode selection table 222c4 will be described with reference to FIG. 165(b). FIG. 165(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the display mode selection table 222c4. This symbol mode selection table 222c4 is a data table used when selecting the icon display position in the random display effect, and as shown in FIG. and the value of the fifth effect counter 223p5. Different permutation data are configured to be selected. Then, the permutation data selected using the display mode selection table 222c4 is read out from the permutation storage area 222c3 and determined as the effect mode of the random display effect.

The display number selection table 222c5 is a data table used when selecting the number of icons to be displayed in the random display effect. The contents of this display number selection table 222c5 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 166 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the display quantity selection table 222c5. As shown in FIG. 166, the display number selection table 222c5 is defined so that different numbers are selected based on the result of the special symbol lottery and the value of the sixth effect counter 223p6, and the result of the special symbol lottery. Each value is defined so that a larger number of coins is more likely to be selected when is a big win than when it is not a big win.

By configuring in this way, the more icons are displayed in the random display effect, the higher the expectation of winning the jackpot. As described above, in the random display effect in this control example, a plurality of effect elements are independently selected, and the result of the selection is combined to determine the effect mode. It is possible to increase the variation of the production mode by using.

In addition, when selecting each performance element, the presence/absence of winning a big win is included in the selection condition, so even in a combined performance mode, the performance mode can be determined in a balanced manner based on the presence/absence of winning a big win. For example, a "V-sign" icon as a displayed icon is set to be more likely to be displayed first in the random display effect when the jackpot is won, and when the jackpot is won, Since it is set so that the number of icons displayed in the random display effect can be increased, in the random display effect that is executed, the case of winning a jackpot is more complex than the case of winning an unsuccessful win. It is possible to easily display the "V sign shape" icon.

The delay effect selection table 222d is a data table used for selecting the effect mode of the delay effect to be executed when the delay effect is determined as the variable effect pattern, and is used to select the length of the delay period and the target of the delay effect. It is for selection.

Here, the contents of the delay effect selection table 222d will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 167 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the delay effect selection table 222d. As shown in FIG. 167, the delay effect selection table 222d defines different delay types corresponding to the result of the special symbol lottery and the value of the seventh effect counter 223p7.

In this control example, when executing the delay effect, a plurality of delay periods (time) are configured to be selectable. The degree of expectation for winning the jackpot is varied depending on the length of the delay period. In other words, as the player becomes more experienced in the game, he/she can gradually determine the presence or absence of the delay effect according to the relationship with other effects. Therefore, in the present control example, the delay period in the delay effect is configured to have a difference. As a result, it is possible to provide the enjoyment of discerning the delay type even to the player who can discriminate that the delay effect will be executed.

Furthermore, in this control example, it is possible to set the presence or absence of a delay effect and the delay period for each of a plurality of effects that can be executed at the same time. This makes it difficult to compare execution timings with surrounding effects.

As described above, in the case of executing a delayed effect, if it is configured so that different delayed effect modes can be set for each of a plurality of effects that can be executed at the same time, it usually includes a plurality of effects that are executed at the same time. 1 performance data was used as the delay performance. That is, the effect data including at least the effect information corresponding to the delay period set for each effect and the effect information during the delay period is used.

That is, regardless of whether or not there is a delayed effect in which the effect is executed with a predetermined delay in appearance for the player, the effect data corresponding to the same timing (for example, the start timing of the special symbol variation) is set and delayed. After the performance based on the performance data during the period is executed, the performance to be delayed is executed. When configured in this way, since the performance including the delayed performance is executed using the performance data started in accordance with the start timing of the special pattern variation, it is possible to facilitate execution of the performance without deviation. It was possible to enhance the effect.

However, since it is necessary to prepare performance data corresponding to the performance content of the delay performance, there is a problem that the amount of performance data increases just by slightly changing the delay period. On the other hand, in this control example, the timing for setting the effect data to be the target of the delayed effect, that is, the timing for setting the display command for the delayed effect by the sound lamp control device 113 is delayed. there is Therefore, when the delay period is to be varied, it is only necessary to change the value of the timer (delay timer 223s) for measuring the delay period of the audio ramp control device 113. FIG.

The gathering effect selection table 222e is a data table used when determining the effect mode of the gathering effect, and stores character information indicating characters used in the gathering effect as shown in FIG. 168(a). It has a character storage area 222e1 and a character number selection table 222e2, which is a data table used when selecting the number of characters obtainable in a gathering effect.

The battle effect selection table 222f is a data table used when determining the effect mode of the battle effect, and as shown in FIG. a final remaining HP selection table 222f2 used to select the final remaining physical strength (HP) of the enemy character in the battle production; and a battle mode selection table 222f3 to be used.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 227(b), the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 contains a special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223a, a special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223b, a normal reserved ball number counter 223c, and a fluctuation start flag. 223d, stop type selection flag 223e, winning information storage area 223f, state setting area 223g, effect selection information storage area 223h, operation effect in progress flag 223i, pressed flag 223k, pressing frequency counter 223m, operation valid timer 223n, effect counter group 223p, an upper limit count setting area 223q, an end count setting area 223r, a delay timer 223s, a continuous notice setting flag 223t, a continuous notice counter 223u, a continuous notice flag 223v, a round number counter 223x, and a memory area 223z. .

The special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223a is a variable display of the first special symbol performed by the first symbol display device 37 (and the third symbol display device 81), and is the first symbol reserved by the main controller 110. A counter that counts the number of pending balls (waiting times) for variable effects of special patterns up to 4 times for each type of special pattern. Update according to the timing of increase or decrease.

The special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223b, like the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223a, is a variable display of the second special symbol performed by the first symbol display device 37 (and the third symbol display device 81). , A counter that counts the number of pending balls (number of standby times) of the second special symbol variable effect suspended in the main control device 110 up to 4 times for each type of special symbol, and when a winning information command is received, It is updated according to the timing when the number of held balls increases or decreases, such as when a variation pattern command is received.

As described above, the voice ramp control device 113 directly accesses the main control device 110, and the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 Cannot get value. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 counts the number of reserved balls based on the number of reserved balls command transmitted from the main controller 110, and the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223a and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223b Then, the number of reserved balls is managed for each type of special symbol.

Specifically, in the main controller 110, when the start winning is detected and the number of pending balls of the variable display is added, or the variable display in the special symbol is executed in the main controller 110 and the number of the pending balls is subtracted. If so, it transmits to the sound lamp control device 113 a reserved ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d after addition or subtraction or the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e.

When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main controller 110, the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d of the main controller 110 or the special symbol 2 reserved ball from the reserved ball number command The value of the number counter 203e is acquired and stored in the counter corresponding to the command, out of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223b (see S2207 in FIG. 195). In this way, the voice lamp control device 113 updates the values of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223a and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223b according to the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main controller 110. While synchronizing with the values of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e of the main controller 110, the values can be updated.

The values of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223 a and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223 b are used to display the reserved ball number symbols on the third symbol display device 81 . That is, the voice lamp control device 113, in response to receiving the reserved ball number command, stores the reserved ball number indicated by the command in the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223b. , In order to notify the display control device 114 of the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223a or the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223b after storage, a display reserved ball number command is transmitted to the display control device 114. .

When the display control device 114 receives this display pending ball number command, the value of the pending ball number indicated by the command, that is, the special symbol 1 pending ball number counter 223a of the audio lamp control device 113, or the special symbol 2 pending ball number counter 223a The drawing of the image is controlled so as to display the number of pending ball symbols corresponding to the value of the number of ball counter 223b in the sub display area Ds of the third symbol display device 81. FIG. As described above, the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223a changes its value while synchronizing with the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d of the main control device 110, and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223b is mainly While synchronizing with the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e of the control device 110, the value is changed. Therefore, the number of reserved ball number symbols displayed in the sub display area Ds of the third pattern display device 81 is also the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e of the main control device 110. It can be changed while synchronizing. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can accurately display the number of held balls whose variable display is held.

The normal reserved ball number counter 223c has the same content as the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223a and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223b described above, but differs in that the target is changed from the special symbol to the normal symbol. Since the technical control concept is the same, detailed description is omitted.

The fluctuation start flag 223d is turned on when the first special symbol fluctuation pattern command or the second special symbol fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main controller 110 is received (see S2204 in FIG. 195), and the third symbol It is turned off when the variable display is set in the display device 81 (see S2602 in FIG. 199). When the fluctuation start flag 223d is turned on, a fluctuation pattern command for display is set based on the fluctuation pattern extracted from the received fluctuation pattern command.

The display variation pattern command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and the command output processing of the main processing (see FIG. 194) executed by the MPU 221 (see S2102 in FIG. 195) , and is transmitted to the display control device 114 . In the display control device 114, by receiving this display variation pattern command, the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command is used to perform the variation display of the third symbol on the third symbol display device 81. Display control of the variable effect is started.

The stop type selection flag 223e is turned on when receiving a special symbol stop type command transmitted from the main controller 110 (see S2204 in FIG. 195), and the stop type in the third symbol display device 81 is set. is turned off (see S2613 in FIG. 199). When the stop type selection flag 223e is turned on, the stop type is determined based on the stop type (jackpot type in the case of a jackpot) extracted from the received stop type command.

The winning information storage area 223f includes one execution area, four areas (first area to fourth area) corresponding to the first special symbol, and four areas (first area to fourth area) corresponding to the second special symbol. 4 areas) and four areas (first area to fourth area) corresponding to normal symbols, and winning information is stored in each of these areas. In the pachinko machine 10, when the main controller 110 detects the start winning for the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640, a special winning random number counter C1 obtained in response to the start winning, From each value of the special hit type counter C2 and the variation type counter CS1, various information (win or not, jackpot type in the case of a jackpot, fluctuation pattern) obtained when a special symbol lottery corresponding to the start winning is performed. The main controller 110 predicts (estimates), and the predicted various information is notified from the main controller 110 to the audio lamp controller 113 by means of winning information commands.

Also, when the passage of the ball through the through gate 67 is detected, from the value of the second winning random number counter C4 acquired according to the passage, when the normal symbol lottery corresponding to the passage is performed A lottery result is predicted in advance, and the predicted various information is notified from the main controller 110 to the audio lamp controller 113 by means of a winning information command.

In the voice lamp control device 113, when the winning information command is received, various information notified by the winning information command (in the case of special symbol winning information, success or failure, jackpot type in case of big hit, fluctuation pattern, normal symbol In the case of the winning information of (2), win or lose) is extracted as winning information, and the winning information is stored in the winning information storage area 223f. More specifically, the extracted winning information is the type of the ball entrance where the ball was detected (first ball entrance 64 or second ball entrance 640), or four areas corresponding to normal symbols ( 1st area to 4th area) are stored in order from the area with the smallest area number (1st to 4th area). That is, the smaller the area number is, the data corresponding to the oldest winning is stored, and the first area stores the data corresponding to the oldest winning.

In addition, in the first control example, in the main controller 110, based on various information obtained when a lottery of special symbols corresponding to the start winning is performed (win or not, jackpot type in the case of jackpot, variation pattern) Although the winning information command is set and notified to the audio lamp control device 113, other configurations may be used.

For example, when a starting prize is generated, various information already stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b in various information predicted corresponding to the start prize. a setting means for setting a winning information command by adding a winning information command, various information (winning information) already stored in the winning information storage area 223f when the winning information command is received, and information included in the received winning information command A determination means for determining whether or not the various information (winning information) matches may be provided. This makes it possible to determine whether the various information (winning information) stored in the winning information storage area 223f is properly stored.

In addition, in the first control example, when a new start winning occurs, a winning information command is set and notified to the sound lamp control device 113. However, the winning information command is sent to the sound lamp control device 113 The timing of notification is not limited to the timing described above (the timing at which the winning information command is set). (For example, 5-second intervals), when the game conditions are variable (for example, when the game state changes from the time-saving state to the normal state, when the jackpot game starts or ends, etc.), or when the special symbol starts to fluctuate (or A configuration may be used in which the winning information command stored in the storage means is notified to the audio lamp control device 113 when the game is stopped. With this configuration, it is possible to appropriately execute an effect (so-called prefetch effect) using the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223f.

In this control example, based on each piece of winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223f, setting of an effect mode such as a change in the display color of a reserved symbol is executed as a prefetch effect. In this way, by executing various effects (read-ahead effects) based on the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223f, the player can be notified of each reserved ball before the start of the variable display. It can give you a sense of anticipation for a big hit. Also, it is possible to execute a long-term effect using a plurality of variable display periods.

The state setting area 223g displays the current game state set in the pachinko machine 10 and the game state before a predetermined period of time (for example, if the jackpot game is currently in progress, the game state at the time the jackpot was won). This is a storage area to be set (stored).

In the state setting area 223g, when various state commands output from the main controller 110 are received by the command determination processing (see S2114 in FIG. 195), information indicating the gaming state included in the received state command is extracted. Then, the current game state is set. Also, in the command determination process (see S2114 in FIG. 195), when it is determined that the command indicating that the jackpot game is executed is received, the information set (stored) as the current gaming state is It is configured to be set (stored) as the set game state. As a result, it is possible to change the performance mode of the variable performance executed after the end of the big win game according to the game state set at the time of winning the big win. Further, for example, even if the jackpot is the same jackpot type, in the case of having a configuration in which the game state to be executed after the jackpot game ends is varied according to the game state at the time of winning, during the jackpot game A game state to be set after the end of the jackpot game can be predicted on the side of the voice lamp control device 113, and an effect during the jackpot game can be executed to suggest the prediction result.

The effect selection information storage area 223h is an area for temporarily storing the content (effect mode) selected as the variable effect pattern, and is the effect mode executed in the variable display setting process (see S2115 in FIG. 199). Various effects modes set in the setting process (see S2607 in FIG. 200) are stored. Then, when it is determined that the operation of the frame button 22 is valid, or when the effect mode being executed is changed, the data is read to grasp the effect mode of the currently set (executed) variable effect. be In the effect selection information storage area 223h, the effect mode (past effect mode) of the variable effect for the special symbol lottery that has already been executed, the effect mode of the variable effect currently being executed, and the winning information storage area 223f are stored. A performance mode (scheduled performance mode) of a variable performance scheduled to be executed for the winning information is temporarily stored, and the performance mode for a maximum of 5 special symbol lotteries is scheduled as a past performance mode. A maximum of four presentation modes corresponding to winning information can be stored as presentation modes.

By configuring in this way, for example, when selecting a new presentation mode, it is possible to set the presentation mode based on the presentation mode set (executed) in the past. In this case, for example, when the result of the special symbol lottery corresponding to the variable performance of this time is a jackpot winning, by intentionally setting a performance mode that overlaps with the performance mode set in the past. , it is preferable to increase the expectation of winning a big win when the same performance mode is continuously set. As a result, the player's willingness to play is lowered because the same performance mode is normally set continuously, and the new performance is not executed. It is possible to increase the player's willingness to play. Also, in this case, as an informing means for informing the player that the same effect mode has been set continuously, for example, a display mode such as "same reach" is displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81. It should be configured as follows. As a result, the player can be notified in an easy-to-understand manner that the same effect mode has been set continuously.

Further, it may be configured to set a performance mode different from the performance mode set in the past, or may be configured to set a plurality of story-like performance modes in order. By setting the effect mode related to the effect mode set (executed) in the past in this way, it is possible to make the player more interested in the effect to be executed, so that the player can It is possible to suppress early boredom with a game.

The pressed flag 223k indicates that the player has pressed (operated) the frame button 22 (operation means), and is set to ON when the frame button 22 is pressed during the operation effect. It is.

This pressed flag 223k indicates that the frame button is pressed during the operation valid period of the frame button 22 (when the value of the operation valid timer 223n is greater than 0) in the frame button input monitoring/effect processing (see S2107 in FIG. 208). It is set to ON when it is determined that it has been pressed (operated) (see S3404 in FIG. 208). Then, it is referred to in the operation effect management process (see S2111 in FIG. 210) (S3609 in FIG. 210). Then, after the effect mode of the operation effect based on the reference result is set, it is set to OFF (see S3610 in FIG. 210).

In this way, the depressed flag 223k is provided as a storage means for temporarily storing that the operation means (frame button 22) has been operated during the effective period of operation, and the depressed flag 223k indicates that the operation means has already been operated. When the status indicating that the operation has been performed is set (set to ON), a new operation to the operation means is not accepted, so that the operation effect executed based on the operation to the operation means can be reliably executed.

In addition, simply by setting the depressed flag 223k to ON, it is possible to prohibit acceptance of an operation to a new operation means. To easily change the period until performance is executed.

The number-of-presses counter 223m is a counter for counting the number of times the frame button 22 is pressed within the effective period of operation. number of times), the number of operations is measured in the case of an operation effect in which the effect mode is variable.

The operation valid timer 223n is a timer for measuring the operation valid period set during the operation effect, and when the operation valid period is set, the value indicating the length of the operation valid period set this time is set. Then, the set value is decremented as time elapses. When the value of the operation validity timer 223n is greater than 0, it is determined that the frame button 22 is operated effectively.

The effect counter group 223p is for counting the random value referred to when selecting the effect mode of the variable effect executed in this control example, and has a plurality of random value counters. Specifically, it has eleven kinds of counters from the first effect counter 223p1 to the eleventh effect counter 223p11, and when selecting the effect mode of the variable effect, various effect modes are selected using the dedicated effect counter. be done. In this way, by configuring to select the effect mode of the variable effect using different counter values, a plurality of effects can be generated within one main process, that is, at intervals shorter than the period at which the value of the effect counter is updated. Even if the process of selecting the effect mode is executed, it is possible to prevent a plurality of effect modes from being selected by referring to the same counter value.

These various effect counters are counters that are repeatedly updated within the range of 0-199. Although illustration is omitted, each time the main process (see FIG. 194) executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is executed, the update contents of various effect counters are updated so as to be difficult to synchronize. Specifically, it is configured such that the value of each effect counter is updated by a different prime number in one update process. By configuring in this way, in various effects in which the effect mode is selected using the effect counter, it is possible to easily set the effect contents to be executed at random.

In this control example, the values of a plurality of counters whose values are updated independently are used to select various effects modes. A configuration may be employed in which a predetermined calculation process is executed on the value, and the effect mode is selected using the value indicating the calculation result. By configuring in this way, the number of effect counters can be reduced.

In addition, in this control example, the value of the performance counter whose value is updated independently is used to select various modes of performance. Although it is increased, it is not limited to this, and for example, it may be configured to select a plurality of effect modes using the same value of the effect counter. By constructing in this way, it is possible to select an effect mode with a rule for a plurality of effect modes, and it is possible to easily provide a player with an easy-to-understand effect.

The upper limit number setting area 223q is an area for storing the number of times the frame button 22 is operated until the display mode corresponding to the maximum variable value set in the repeated hit effect is displayed. In the determination process, the upper limit number selected using the upper limit number selection table 222b1 is temporarily stored. Then, it is compared with information indicating the number of times the frame button 22 has been operated during the continuous hitting effect. As a result, it is determined whether or not the number of times the frame button 22 has been operated during the continuous hit effect has reached the upper limit number of times.

The number-of-ends setting area 223r indicates the number of times the frame button 22 is operated to shorten (end) the effect period of the repeated-hit effect after the display mode corresponding to the maximum variable value set in the repeated-hit effect is displayed. is stored, and temporarily stores the end count selected using the end count selection table 222b2 in the process of determining the effect mode of the continuous hit effect. Then, it is compared with information indicating the number of times the frame button 22 has been operated during the continuous hitting effect. As a result, it is determined whether or not the number of times the frame button 22 has been operated during the continuous hit effect has reached the end number.

223 s of delay timers are timers which measure the delay time set as delay production.

The continuous notice setting flag 223t includes information indicating execution of the continuous notice effect in the received winning information, and is a flag indicating that the continuous notice effect is executed from the variable effect to be executed next, It is set to ON when the received winning information includes information indicating that the continuous advance notice effect is to be executed.

Then, it is referred to when a variable display process for setting a new variable effect is executed.

The continuous notice counter 223u is a counter for indicating the number of times of the variable effect for continuously executing the continuous notice effect. If so, a value indicating the number of times until the special symbol variation corresponding to the winning information received this time is executed is set. Then, the value is subtracted each time the variable performance ends. As a result, it is possible to easily grasp the situation of the continuous advance notice effect being executed.

The continuous announcement flag 223v is a flag for indicating that the continuous announcement effect is being executed, and is set to ON when the continuous announcement effect is executed. Then, it is set to OFF when the continuous announcement effect ends. Referred to in the winning information related process (see S2210 in FIG. 196), while the continuous notice in-progress flag 223v is set to ON, that is, during the continuous notice effect, the continuous notice setting flag is not newly set to ON. Configure.

The round number counter 223x is a counter for measuring the number of rounds in the jackpot game, and is incremented when a new round is started during the jackpot game. Then, it is reset to 0 when the jackpot game ends.

The other memory area 223z is provided as an area for storing data other than the above data, and is an area for temporarily storing other counter values and the like used by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113. FIG.

The display control device 114 is connected to the sound lamp control device 113 and the third pattern display device 81, and based on the command received from the sound lamp control device 113, the third pattern display device 81 performs variable display (variation production) is controlled. Details of the display control device 114 will be described later with reference to FIG.

The power supply device 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to power failure, etc., and a RAM provided with a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3). and an erase switch circuit 253 . The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies necessary operating voltages to the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As an overview, the power supply unit 251 takes in a voltage of 24 volts supplied from the outside, various switches such as the various switches 208, solenoids such as the solenoid 209, a voltage of 12 volts for driving a motor, etc. A voltage of 5 volts for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, etc. are generated, and these 12 volts, 5 volts and backup voltages are supplied to the controllers 110 to 114 and the like as necessary voltages.

The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 at the time of power failure due to power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the voltage of stable DC 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power shutdown, power shutdown) has occurred when this voltage is less than 22 volts. Then, a power failure signal SG1 is output to the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute NMI interrupt processing. Even after the stable DC voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts, the power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is the driving voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient to execute the NMI interrupt processing. is configured to maintain a normal value. Therefore, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 251).

The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the main controller 110 clears the backup data when the RAM erase signal SG2 is input, and controls the payout initialization command for clearing the backup data in the payout control device 111. Send to device 111 .

Next, referring to FIG. 171, the electrical configuration of the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 171 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the display control device 114. As shown in FIG. The display control device 114 includes an MPU 231, a work RAM 233, a character ROM 234, a resident video RAM 235, a normal video RAM 236, an image controller 237, an input port 238, an output port 239, and bus lines 240 and 241. have.

The output side of the sound lamp control device 113 is connected to the input side of the input port 238 , and the MPU 231 , work RAM 233 , character ROM 234 and image controller 237 are connected to the output side of the input port 238 via the bus line 240 . . A resident video RAM 235 and a normal video RAM 236 are connected to the image controller 237 , and an output port 239 is connected via a bus line 241 . A third symbol display device 81 is connected to the output side of the output port 239 .

Even if the pachinko machine 10 is a different model with a different lottery probability of a special symbol jackpot or a different number of prize balls paid out for one special symbol jackpot, the symbols displayed by the third symbol display device 81 are different. Since there are models with exactly the same specifications, the display control device 114 is made a common component to reduce costs.

The MPU 231, character ROM 234, image controller 237, resident video RAM 235, and normal video RAM 236 will be described first, and then the work RAM 233 will be described below.

First, the MPU 231 controls the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display variation pattern command output from the audio ramp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command of the main control device 110 . The MPU 231 incorporates an instruction pointer 231a, reads and fetches the instruction code stored at the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a, and executes various processes according to the instruction code. The MPU 231 is designed so that a system reset is applied from the power supply 115 immediately after power is turned on (including recovery from a power failure; the same shall apply hereinafter). is automatically set to “0000H” by the hardware of the MPU 231 . Each time an instruction code is fetched, the value of the instruction pointer 231a is incremented by one. Further, when the MPU 231 executes an instruction pointer setting instruction, the value of the pointer indicated by the setting instruction is set in the instruction pointer 231a.

Although the details will be described later, in this embodiment, the control program executed by the MPU 231 and various fixed value data used in the control program are stored in a dedicated program ROM as in a conventional game machine. The image data to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 is stored in the character ROM 234 provided for storing the data.

Although the details will be described later, the character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a capable of increasing the capacity with a small area. As a result, not only image data but also control programs and the like can be sufficiently stored. If the control program and the like are stored in the character ROM 234, there is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing the control program and the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in failure rate due to an increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

On the other hand, the NAND flash memory has a problem that the read speed becomes slow especially when performing random access. For example, when reading data continuously arranged in a plurality of pages, the data of the second and subsequent pages can be read at high speed. It takes a long time before the data is output. Also, when reading discontinuous data, a long time is required each time the data is read. As described above, since the NAND flash memory has a slow read speed, if the MPU 231 is configured to directly read the control program from the character ROM 234 and execute various processes, it takes time to read the instructions that make up the control program. However, even if a high-performance processor is used as the MPU 231, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may deteriorate.

Therefore, in this embodiment, when the system reset of the MPU 231 is released, first, the control program stored in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234 is transferred to the work RAM 233 provided for temporary storage of various data. store. The MPU 231 then executes various processes according to the control program stored in the work RAM 233 . The work RAM 233 is composed of a DRAM (Dynamic RAM), as will be described later, and reads and writes data at high speed. Therefore, the MPU 231 can read instructions constituting the control program without delay. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and the third pattern display device 81 can be used to easily execute diversified and complicated effects.

The character ROM 234 is a memory that stores control programs executed by the MPU 231 and image data displayed on the third pattern display device 81 , and is connected to the MPU 231 via a bus line 240 . The MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, and transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the character ROM 234 to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. An image controller 237 is also connected to the bus line 240, and the image controller 237 transfers image data stored in a character storage area 234a2 of the character ROM 234 to a resident video RAM 235, which is connected to the image controller 237. Transfer to the normal video RAM 236 .

The character ROM 234 is constructed by modularizing a NAND flash memory 234a, a ROM controller 234b, a buffer RAM 234c, and a NOR ROM 234d.

The NAND type flash memory 234a is a non-volatile memory provided as a main storage unit in the character ROM 234, and stores most of the control program executed by the MPU 231 and fixed value data for driving the third symbol display device 81. It has at least a second program storage area 234a1 for storage and a character storage area 234a2 for storing data of an image (such as a character) to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. FIG.

Here, the NAND type flash memory has a feature that a large storage capacity can be obtained in a small area, and the capacity of the character ROM 234 can be easily increased. Thus, in this pachinko machine, by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a capacity of, for example, 2 gigabytes, many images can be stored in the character storage area 234a2 as images to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. can. Therefore, the images displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be diversified and complicated in order to increase the interest of the player.

In addition, the NAND flash memory 234a can store control programs and fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1 while storing a large amount of image data in the character storage area 234a2. In this way, the control program and fixed value data are provided to store the data of the image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 without providing and storing a dedicated program ROM as in the conventional game machine. Since the characters can be stored in the character ROM 234, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in the failure rate due to an increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

The ROM controller 234b is a controller for controlling the operation of the character ROM 234. For example, based on the address transmitted from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the corresponding data is retrieved from the NAND flash memory 234a or the like. is read out and output to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240 .

Here, the NAND type flash memory 234a, due to its nature, generates a relatively large number of error bits (bits in which erroneous data is written) when writing data, and generates defective data blocks into which data cannot be written. or Therefore, the ROM controller 234b applies known error correction to the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a, and avoids bad data blocks when reading and writing data to the NAND flash memory 234a. data address translation.

The ROM controller 234b corrects errors in the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a that contains error bits. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the MPU 231 from performing processing and the image controller 237 from generating various images.

In addition, the ROM controller 234b analyzes the defective data blocks of the NAND flash memory 234a and avoids access to the defective data blocks. Access to the character ROM 234 can be easily performed without considering the address position of the block. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, it is possible to prevent the access control to the character ROM 234 from becoming complicated.

The buffer RAM 234c is a memory used as a buffer for temporarily storing data read from the NAND flash memory 234a. When an address allocated to the character ROM 234 is designated from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the ROM controller 234b reads one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) of data corresponding to the designated address. is set in the buffer RAM 234c. If not set, one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) of data including the data corresponding to the specified address is read from the NAND flash memory 234a (or NOR ROM 234d) and temporarily set in the buffer RAM 234c. do. Then, the ROM controller 234 b outputs the data corresponding to the designated address to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 via the bus line 240 after performing known error correction processing.

The buffer RAM 234c is composed of two banks, and one page of data in the NAND flash memory 234a can be set in each bank. As a result, the ROM controller 234b, for example, outputs the data of the NAND flash memory 234a to the outside by using the other bank while data is set in one bank, or outputs the data specified by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237. One page of data including the data corresponding to the specified address is transferred from the NAND flash memory 234a to one bank and set, and the data corresponding to the address specified by the MPU 231 or image controller 237 is transferred to the other bank. The processing of reading from the bank and outputting to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 can be processed in parallel. Therefore, the responsiveness in reading the character ROM 234 can be improved.

The NOR type ROM 234d is a non-volatile memory provided as a sub-storage unit in the character ROM 234, and is intended to complement the NAND type flash memory 234a. ). Of the control programs stored in the character ROM 234, the NOR-type ROM 234d stores programs that are not stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND-type flash memory 234a. At least a first program storage area 234d1 is provided for storing a portion of the boot program to be executed.

The boot program is a control program for activating the display control device 114 so that various controls on the third pattern display device 81 can be executed, and the MPU 231 first executes this boot program after releasing the system reset. This allows the display control device 114 to execute various controls. The first program storage area 234d1 stores the boot program within the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c (that is, one page of the NAND flash memory 234a), which should be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. A predetermined number of instructions (for example, if the capacity of one page is 2 kilobytes, instructions for 1024 words (1 word=2 bytes)) are stored. The number of instructions of the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 only needs to be within the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, and is appropriately set according to the specifications of the display control device 114. There may be.

When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the value of the instruction pointer 231a to "0000H" by hardware and instructs the bus line 240 to specify the address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a. It is configured. On the other hand, when the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address "0000H" is specified on the bus line 240, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d is transferred to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. , and outputs the corresponding data (instruction code) to the MPU 231 .

When the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, it executes various processes according to the fetched instruction code, adds 1 to the instruction pointer 231a, and transfers the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. to specify. Then, the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 selects the program previously set in the buffer RAM 234c from the NOR ROM 234d while the address specified by the bus line 240 indicates the program stored in the NOR ROM 234d. , the instruction code of the corresponding address is read from the buffer RAM 234 c and output to the MPU 231 .

Here, in this embodiment, instead of storing all the control programs in the NAND flash memory 234a, a predetermined number of instructions from the boot program to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NOR ROM 234d. The reason for storing in is as follows. That is, as described above, the NAND flash memory 234a is unique to the NAND flash memory in that it takes a long time to read the data of the first page after the address is specified until the data is output. There's a problem.

When all the control programs are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 in order to fetch the instruction code that the MPU 231 should execute first after the system reset is released. If so, the character ROM 234 must read one page of data including the data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" from the NAND flash memory 234a and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. Due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a long time to read out and set the data in the buffer RAM 234c. You spend a lot of time waiting to receive your code. Therefore, the time taken to start the MPU 231 becomes longer, and as a result, there arises a problem that the control of the third pattern display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

On the other hand, since the NOR type ROM is a memory from which data can be read at high speed, a predetermined number of instructions from the boot program to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NOR type ROM 234d. Thus, when the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 immediately stores the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d into the buffer RAM 234c. , and the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231 . Therefore, the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after specifying the address "0000H", and the MPU 231 can be activated in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the control of the third pattern display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

The boot program is a control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, that is, a control program other than the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d. , fixed value data (for example, a display data table, a transfer data table, etc., which will be described later) used in the control program are stored in the program storage area of the work RAM 233 by a predetermined amount (for example, the capacity of one page of the NAND flash memory 234a). 233a and the data table storage area 233b. The MPU 231 first sets the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 according to the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 after the system reset is released. While using a bank different from the bank of the buffer RAM 234c that is stored, a predetermined amount is transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a.

Here, since the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 has a capacity corresponding to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, as described above, the address of the internal bus is designated as "0000H". When the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 is set in the buffer RAM 234c in response to this, the boot program is set only in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, when transferring the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a according to the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1, the first program set in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c is transferred to the program storage area 233a. The transfer process can be performed using the other bank while leaving the boot program in storage area 234d1. Therefore, after the transfer process, it is unnecessary to set the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 again in the buffer RAM 234c, so that the time required for the boot process can be shortened.

When a predetermined amount of the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 transfers the command pointer 231a to the program storage area 233a. It is programmed to be set to a first predetermined address. As a result, when the MPU 231 transfers a predetermined amount of the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a after the system reset is released, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first predetermined number in the program storage area 233a. Set to a street address.

Therefore, when a predetermined amount of the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 are stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 reads out the control programs stored in the program storage area 233a, Various processing can be executed. That is, the MPU 231 does not read the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetch the instruction, but rather reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction. and execute various processes. As will be described later, since the work RAM 233 is composed of a DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even if most of the control program is stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, which has a slow read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch instructions at high speed and execute processing for those instructions.

Here, the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 include remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. On the other hand, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 by a predetermined amount from the second program storage area 234a1. The instruction pointer 231a is programmed so as to include the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a as a first predetermined address.

As a result, the MPU 231 transfers a predetermined amount of the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a by the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1. Execute the rest of the boot program contained in the control program.

In this remaining boot program, the remaining control programs that have not been transferred to the program storage area 233a and fixed value data (for example, a display data table, a transfer data table, etc., which will be described later) used in the control programs are all stored in the second program. A process of transferring a predetermined amount from the area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b is executed. Also, at the end of the boot program, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address in the program storage area 233a. Specifically, the initialization process (see S6002 in FIG. 211) executed after the boot process (see S6001 in FIG. 211) by the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a as the second predetermined address. Set the start address of the program corresponding to .

By executing the remaining boot program, the MPU 231 transfers all the control programs and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b. When the boot program is executed to the end by the MPU 231, the command pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address, and thereafter the MPU 231 is transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Various processes are executed using the control program.

Therefore, even if most of the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the control program is transferred to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after the system reset is released. Thus, the MPU 231 can read the control program from the work RAM configured by the DRAM with a high read speed and perform various controls. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and the third pattern display device 81 can be used to easily execute diversified and complicated effects.

Further, as described above, instead of storing all the boot programs in the NOR type ROM 234d, a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. Even if it is stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start up the MPU 231 in a short time simply by adding a NOR type ROM 234d with a very small capacity. can be done.

The image controller 237 is a digital signal processor (DSP) that draws an image and causes the third pattern display device 81 to display the drawn image at a predetermined timing. The image controller 237 draws an image for one frame based on a drawing list (see FIG. 176) transmitted from the MPU 231 to be described later, and draws one frame of a first frame buffer 236b or a second frame buffer 236c to be described later. The image drawn in the buffer is developed, and the image information for one frame previously developed in the other frame buffer is output to the third pattern display device 81 to display the image on the third pattern display device 81.例文帳に追加. The image controller 237 performs the one-frame image drawing process and the one-frame image display process within the one-frame image display time (20 milliseconds in this embodiment) on the third pattern display device 81 . parallel processing in

The image controller 237 transmits a vertical synchronization interrupt signal (hereinafter referred to as “V interrupt signal”) to the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing processing for one frame is completed. Each time the MPU 231 detects this V interrupt signal, the MPU 231 executes V interrupt processing (see FIG. 213(b)) and instructs the image controller 237 to draw the image for the next one frame. In response to this instruction, the image controller 237 executes the drawing process of the image for the next one frame, and also executes the process of causing the third pattern display device 81 to display the image developed by the previous drawing.

In this manner, the MPU 231 executes the V interrupt process in response to the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 and issues a drawing instruction to the image controller 237. Therefore, the image controller 237 performs image drawing processing and display. An image drawing instruction can be received from the MPU 231 at each processing interval (20 milliseconds). Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive an instruction to draw the next image before the image drawing processing or display processing is completed. It is possible to prevent an image from being developed in accordance with a new drawing instruction in a frame buffer storing image information being displayed.

The image controller 237 also executes processing for transferring image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 based on transfer instructions from the MPU 231 and transfer data information included in the drawing list.

Image drawing is performed using image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 and normal video RAM 236 . That is, the image data required for drawing is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236 based on instructions from the MPU 231 before the drawing is performed.

Here, the NAND type flash memory makes it easy to increase the capacity of the ROM, but its read speed is slower than other ROMs (mask ROM, EEPROM, etc.). On the other hand, in the display control device 114, the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to transfer part of the image data stored in the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. is configured to As will be described later, the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 is controlled so as to be resident without being overwritten.

As a result, after the transfer of the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is completed after the power is turned on, the image is drawn by the image controller 237 while using the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235. can be processed. Therefore, if the image data used for drawing processing is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a, which has a slow read speed, when drawing the image. , the time required for reading the image can be omitted, and the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 .

In particular, image data of frequently displayed images and image data of images to be displayed immediately after display is determined by main controller 110 or display controller 114 are permanently resident in resident video RAM 235. Even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a, it is possible to maintain high responsiveness until some image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81. FIG.

Further, when the display control device 114 draws an image using non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235, before the drawing is performed, the display controller 114 stores necessary data for drawing from the character ROM 234 in the normal video RAM 236. The MPU 231 is configured to instruct the image controller 237 to transfer the image data. As will be described later, the image data transferred to the normal-use video RAM 236 may be deleted by overwriting after being used for image drawing. Since it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 composed of , and the time required for reading the data can be saved, the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. can.

Further, by storing the image data in the normal video RAM 236 as well, there is no need to keep all the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235, so there is no need to prepare a large-capacity resident video RAM 235. FIG. Therefore, an increase in cost due to the provision of the resident video RAM 235 can be suppressed.

The image controller 237 has a buffer RAM 237a composed of an SRAM of 132 kilobytes, which is the capacity of one block of the NAND flash memory 234a.

The image data transfer instruction given to the image controller 237 by the MPU 231 based on the transfer instruction or the transfer data information of the drawing list includes the head address (storage source head address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored. Final address (storage source final address), transfer destination information (information indicating whether to transfer to resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236), and top of transfer destination (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) Contains an address. Note that the data size of the image data to be transferred may be included instead of the storage source final address.

The image controller 237 reads one block of data from a predetermined address in the character ROM 234 according to various information of this transfer instruction, temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237a, and stores it in the buffer RAM 237a when the resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236 is not in use. , is transferred to the resident RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 . Then, the processing is repeatedly executed until all the image data stored in the storage source start address to the storage source end address indicated by the transfer instruction are transferred.

As a result, the image data read out from the character ROM 234 over time is temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a, and then the image data is transferred from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236 in a short time. can be done. Therefore, while the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is prevented from being occupied for a long time with the transfer of the image data. be able to. Therefore, since the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are occupied by the transfer of image data, these video RAMs 235 and 236 cannot be used for image drawing processing. , it is possible to prevent the display on the third pattern display device 81 from being too late.

In addition, transfer of image data from the buffer RAM 234c to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is performed by the image controller 237, so that the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 perform image drawing processing and third symbol display. It is possible to easily determine the period during which the display processing on the device 81 is not used, and to simplify the processing.

The resident video RAM 235 is used so that the image data transferred from the character ROM 234 can be retained while the power is turned on without being overwritten. 235e and an error message image area 235f are provided, and at least a power-on variation image area 235b and a third pattern area 235d are provided.

The power-on main image area 235a is the power-on main image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 after power is turned on until all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is stored. This is an area for storing corresponding data. In the power-on variation image area 235b, the game is started by the player while the main image at power-on is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the entry of a ball into the first start hole 64a is detected. This is an area for storing image data corresponding to a power-on varying image for displaying the results of the lottery performed by the main controller 110 in a varying effect.

The MPU 231 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on varying image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a when power supply from the power supply unit 251 is started. A transfer instruction is sent to the controller 237 (see FIG. 212).

Here, the power-on variation image will be described. Immediately after the power is turned on, the display control device 114 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on varying image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on varying image area 235b. Subsequently, the remaining image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 . While the remaining image data is being transferred, the display control device 114 displays the power-on main image (see FIG. 172) using the image data previously stored in the power-on main image area 235a. It is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 .

At this time, when receiving a display variation pattern command transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a variation pattern command from the main controller 110, which is an instruction command to start variation, the display control device 114 displays the main image when the power is turned on. On the display screen of , a variation image at the time of power-on with an "○" symbol at the lower right position of the screen, and a variation image at the time of power-on with an "X" symbol at the same position as the "○" symbol are displayed during the variation period. Medium, alternately displayed repeatedly. Then, based on the variation pattern command and the stop type command from the main controller 110, the lottery performed by the main controller 110 is selected from the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113. The result is determined, and if it is a ``jackpot with a special pattern'', an image showing it is displayed for a certain period after stopping the variable performance, and if it is a ``missing special pattern'', the image showing it is stopped from the variable performance. Display for a certain period of time.

The MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to use the image data stored in the power-on main image area 235a until all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235. Instructs to draw the main image when the power is turned on. As a result, while the rest of the image data to be resident is being transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the person involved in the hall can confirm the power-on main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. can. Therefore, the display control device 114 takes time to transfer the remaining image data to be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 while displaying the main image on the third pattern display device 81 when the power is turned on. be able to. Also, since the player or the like can recognize that some processing is being performed while the main image is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, the remaining image to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is displayed. To wait until the transfer of image data to the resident video RAM 235 is completed without worrying whether the operation is stopped until the data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235.例文帳に追加can be done.

Also, in an operation check at a factory or the like during manufacturing, since the main image is immediately displayed on the third pattern display device 81 when the power is turned on, the operation of the third pattern display device 81 is started without any problem when the power is turned on. Furthermore, by using the NAND type flash memory 234a with a slow read speed for the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress deterioration in the efficiency of the operation check.

Further, when the player starts the game while the power-on main image is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the entry of the first entrance ball 64 is detected, the power-on fluctuation image area is displayed. The power-on variation image is drawn using the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image resident in 235b, and the images showing "O" and "X" are alternately displayed on the third pattern display device 81. The MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 as follows. As a result, a simple variation effect can be performed using the power-on variation image. Therefore, even while the main image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 when the power is turned on, the player can confirm that the lottery has been surely performed by the simple variation performance.

Further, at the stage when the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation effect image is already resident in the power-on fluctuation image area 235b. When the entry of the first entrance ball 64 is detected while the main image is being displayed on the third pattern display device 81, the corresponding variation effect can be immediately displayed on the third pattern display device 81.例文帳に追加can.

Returning to FIG. 171, the description is continued. The back image area 235c is an area for storing image data corresponding to the back image displayed on the third pattern display device 81. FIG. The third symbol area 235d is an area for permanently storing the third symbol used in the variable effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81. FIG. That is, in the third pattern area 235d, image data corresponding to the above-mentioned 10 types of main patterns (see FIG. 128) with numerals "0" to "9", which are the third patterns, are resident. As a result, when the third pattern display device 81 performs a variable effect, it is not necessary to read the image data from the character ROM 234 one by one. It is possible to quickly start a variable production. Therefore, after the ball enters the first starting port 64a or the second starting port 64b, the third symbol display device 81 fluctuates even though the first symbol display device 37 has started the variation effect. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a state in which the performance is not started immediately.

The character design area 235e is an area for storing image data corresponding to character designs used in various effects displayed on the third design display device 81. FIG. In this pachinko machine 10, various characters such as "Boy" are displayed according to various effects, and data corresponding to these characters are resident in the character design area 235e to control the display. When the device 114 changes the character design based on the content of the command received from the sound lamp control device 113, instead of newly reading out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, the image data is stored in the character design area 235e of the resident video RAM 235. By reading the image data resident in advance, the image controller 237 can draw a predetermined image. As a result, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, so even if the character ROM 234 uses the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the character design can be changed immediately.

The error message image area 235f is an area for storing image data corresponding to an error message displayed when an error occurs in the pachinko machine 10. FIG. In the pachinko machine 10, for example, when vibration is detected by the sound ramp control device 113 from the output of a vibration sensor (not shown) attached to the back surface of the game board 13, the sound ramp control device 113 detects the occurrence of a vibration error. Notify the display controller 114 with an error command. Also, when the audio lamp control device 113 detects the occurrence of another error, the audio lamp control device 113 notifies the display control device 114 of the error occurrence together with the error type by an error command. The display control device 114 is configured to display an error message corresponding to the received error on the third symbol display device 81 when an error command is received.

Here, the error message is required to be displayed almost simultaneously with the occurrence of the error from the standpoint of preventing fraud by the player and protecting the player against errors. In the pachinko machine 10, image data corresponding to various error messages are pre-resident in the error message image area 235f. By reading the image data pre-resident in the image area 235f, the image controller 237 can immediately draw each error message image. This eliminates the need to sequentially read image data corresponding to error messages from the character ROM 234. Therefore, even if the NAND type flash memory 234a having a slow read speed is used as the character ROM 234, the corresponding error message is read after receiving an error command. It can be displayed immediately.

The normal video RAM 236 is used so that data is overwritten and updated as needed, and is provided with at least an image storage area 236a, a first frame buffer 236b and a second frame buffer 236c.

The image storage area 236a is an area for storing image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235, among the image data necessary for drawing an image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. FIG. The image storage area 236a is divided into a plurality of sub-areas, and the type of image data to be stored in each sub-area is determined in advance.

The MPU 231 extracts image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and that is required for subsequent image drawing from the character ROM 234 in the subarea provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. , instructs the image controller 237 to transfer the type of the image data to a predetermined sub-area for storing. As a result, the image controller 237 reads the image data instructed by the MPU 231 from the character ROM 234, and transfers the read image data to a specified sub-area of the image storage area 236a via the buffer RAM 237a.

The transfer instruction of the image data is performed by including the transfer data information in the later-described drawing list in which the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to draw the image. As a result, the MPU 231 can issue an image drawing instruction and an image data transfer instruction simply by transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, thereby reducing the processing load.

The first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c are buffers for developing an image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. FIG. The image controller 237 writes the one-frame image drawn according to the instruction from the MPU 231 to either one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, thereby rendering the one-frame image to the frame buffer. While the image is developed and the image is developed in one of the frame buffers, the image information for one frame previously developed is read out from the other frame buffer, and sent to the third pattern display device 81 together with the drive signal. By transmitting the image information with the third pattern display device 81, a process for displaying the image for one frame is executed.

In this way, by providing two frame buffers, the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, the image controller 237 can expand the one-frame image drawn in one of the frame buffers, and simultaneously , the image of one frame developed earlier can be read from the other frame buffer, and the image of the read one frame can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 .

A frame buffer for developing an image for one frame and a frame buffer for reading image information for one frame for displaying an image on the third pattern display device 81 are used for drawing processing of an image for one frame. Every 20 milliseconds of completion, the MPU 231 alternately designates either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c.

That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for developing the image for one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of is read. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. be.

After the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for developing the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. be done. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. be. After that, the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame are set to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By alternating designations, it is possible to continuously perform display processing of an image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing drawing processing for an image for one frame.

The work RAM 233 is a memory for storing control programs and fixed value data stored in the character ROM 234, and for temporarily storing work data and flags used when various control programs are executed by the MPU 231. Configured. The work RAM 233 includes a program storage area 233a, a data table storage area 233b, a simple image display flag 233c, a display data table buffer 233d, a transfer data table buffer 233e, a pointer 233f, a drawing list area 233g, a clock counter 233h, and a stored image data discrimination. It has at least a flag 233i and a drawing target buffer flag 233j.

The program storage area 233a is an area for storing control programs executed by the MPU 231 . When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 reads the control program from the character ROM 234, transfers it to the work RAM 233, and stores it in the program storage area 233a. After storing all the control programs in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 thereafter executes various controls using the control programs stored in the program storage area 233a. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of a DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third symbol display device 81 can be used to easily execute diversified and complicated effects.

The data table storage area 233b includes a display data table describing display contents to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 with the passage of time for one effect to be displayed based on a command from the main controller 110, and a display data table. This is an area for storing transfer data information of image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among the image data used in one effect displayed by the table and a transfer data table defining transfer timing.

These data tables are normally stored as a type of fixed value data in the second program storage area 434 provided in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234, and according to the boot program executed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. , these data tables are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the work RAM 233 and stored in the data table storage area 233b. After all the data tables are stored in the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 controls the display of the third symbol display device 81 using the data tables stored in the data table storage area 233b. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of a DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when various data tables are stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and the third symbol display device 81 can be used to easily execute diversified and complicated effects.

Here, details of various data tables will be described. First, the display data table is prepared one by one for each effect mode of each effect displayed on the third pattern display device 81 based on a command from the main control device 110. For example, a variable effect, a round effect, etc. , an ending effect, and a display data table corresponding to the demo effect are prepared.

The variation effect is an effect that is started in the third symbol display device 81 when a display variation pattern command from the sound lamp control device 113 is received. In addition, when the display variation pattern command is received, the display stop type command indicating the stop type of the variation effect is also received. For example, when the variable performance is started, if the stop type of the variable performance is off, the stop symbol indicating the failure is finally stopped and displayed, and the stop type of the variable performance is the jackpot A or the jackpot B. If it is either, the stop symbol indicating each jackpot is finally stopped and displayed. The player can recognize the jackpot type by visually recognizing the stop symbols in this variable effect, and can easily determine the game value to be given according to the jackpot type.

In addition, since the first starting port 64a is a prize winning port in which five balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball enters, a jackpot of normal symbols is generated and the electric accessory is released, and the balls enter the second starting port. If it becomes easier to enter 64b, the number of prize balls increases. As a result, the pachinko machine 10 is in a state in which it is difficult to reduce the number of balls in hand or in a state in which the number of balls in hand does not decrease even if a game is played, so that the player is in a state in which the number of balls in hand is difficult to decrease or the number of balls in hand does not decrease. You can get a sense of the period that you can get a special symbol jackpot without it. Therefore, since the player's desire to participate in the game can be enhanced, the player can continue to have the desire to participate in the game.

In addition, as described above, the demonstration effect is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 when the next variable effect associated with the start winning does not start even after a predetermined time has passed since one variable effect stopped. The third pattern composed of the main patterns with no numerals '0' to '9' is stopped and displayed, and only the rear image changes. If the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player and the persons involved in the hall can recognize that the pachinko machine 10 is not playing a game.

The data table storage area 233b stores one display data table each corresponding to the round effect, the ending effect, and the demonstration effect. In addition, if there are 32 variable performance patterns to be set, the variable display data table, which is a display data table for the variable performance, is prepared with one table for one variable performance pattern and a total of 32 tables.

Details of the display data table will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 174 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the variable display data table among the display data tables. The display data table should be displayed at that time in association with an address that represents the time (in this embodiment, 20 milliseconds) during which an image for one frame is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 as one unit. It defines in detail the content (drawing content) of an image for one frame.

The drawing contents specify the type of sprite for each sprite that is a display object that constitutes an image for one frame, and display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, and translucency according to the type of sprite. Rendering information for causing the third pattern display device 81 to render sprites, such as values, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information, is defined.

The sprite type is information for specifying the sprite to be displayed. The display position coordinates are information for specifying the coordinates on the third pattern display device 81 where the sprite should be displayed. The enlargement ratio is information for specifying an enlargement ratio with respect to a standard display size preset for the sprite, and the size of the sprite to be displayed is specified according to the enlargement ratio. If the magnification is greater than 100%, the sprite will be displayed larger than the standard size, and if the magnification is less than 100%, the sprite will be displayed smaller than the standard size. Is displayed.

The rotation angle is information for specifying the rotation angle when rotating and displaying the sprite. The translucency value is for specifying the transparency of the entire sprite, and the higher the translucency value, the more the image displayed behind the sprite can be seen through. The α-blending information is information for specifying known α-blending coefficients used when performing superimposition processing with other sprites. Color information is information for designating the color tone of the sprite to be displayed. The filter designation information is information for designating an image filter to be applied to the sprite when rendering the designated sprite.

In the variable display data table, the drawing contents for one frame defined corresponding to each address are one rear image, nine third patterns (design 1, design 2, . Rendering information for each sprite, such as an effect that expresses the insertion of a character, a character used for various effects such as boy images and characters, is defined for each address. One or a plurality of information regarding effects and characters are defined according to the content to be displayed in the frame.

Here, the display position of the rear image is fixed to the entire screen of the third pattern display device 81, and the magnification ratio, rotation angle, translucency value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information are changed over time. Since it is fixed, the variable display data table defines only the back face type, which is information for specifying the back face image type.

The MPU 231 selects one of the backgrounds corresponding to the background mode (sea, beach, preparation period background, time production background) according to the background type. A rear image corresponding to the specified stage is specified as a drawing target, and the range of the rear image to be displayed for that frame is specified according to the passage of time.

In the present embodiment, a description will be given of a case in which only the back surface type is defined as the drawing content of the back surface image in the display data table. may be defined as position information indicating whether the should be displayed. This position information may be, for example, information indicating the elapsed time since the rear image in the range corresponding to the initial position was displayed. In this case, the MPU 231 identifies the range of the back image to be displayed for that frame based on the elapsed time since the back image in the range corresponding to the initial position indicated by the position information was displayed.

Further, the position information may be information indicating the elapsed time since the drawing of the image based on this display data table (or the display of the third pattern display device 81) was started. In this case, the MPU 231 displays the range of the rear image to be displayed for that frame at the stage when the drawing of the image (or the display of the third pattern display device 81) is started based on the display database. It is specified based on the position of the back image and the elapsed time since the drawing of the image indicated by the position information (or the display of the third pattern display device 81) was started.

Furthermore, the position information is information indicating the elapsed time since the back image in the range corresponding to the initial position was displayed, and the image drawing based on the display data table (or the third pattern display device 81) according to the back surface type. display) may indicate any of the information indicating the elapsed time since the start of the display, or along with the back surface type and position information, the type information of the position information (for example, the range corresponding to the initial position It is information indicating the elapsed time since the back image was displayed, or information indicating the elapsed time since the drawing of the image based on the display database (or the display of the third pattern display device 81) was started. information indicating whether or not the background image is drawn) may be defined as the drawing content of the back image. Alternatively, the position information may be information indicating an address in which the range of the rear image to be displayed is stored, instead of information indicating the elapsed time.

The third symbols (symbol 1, symbol 2, . . . ) describe symbol type offset information as symbol type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed. This offset information is information representing the difference between the numbers attached to the respective third symbols. Rather than directly specifying the type of the third symbol, the offset information is specified because the display of the third symbol in the variable effect is the stop symbol of the variable effect performed one before and the variable effect performed this time. This is because it changes according to the stop pattern, and in the pattern offset information from the start of the variation until the predetermined time elapses, the offset information from the stop pattern of the previous variation performance is described. As a result, the variable performance is started from the stop symbol in the previous variable performance.

On the other hand, after a predetermined time has passed since the start of the fluctuation, the offset from the stop pattern set according to the stop type command (stop type command for display) received from the main control device 110 via the sound lamp control device 113 Include information. As a result, the variable effect can be stopped with a stop pattern corresponding to the stop type specified by the main controller 110. - 特許庁

In addition, since a unique number is attached to each third symbol, the variable symbol in the previous variable effect or the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type specified by the main control device 110 can be selected as the third symbol. , and the offset information is represented by the difference between the numbers attached to each third pattern, the third pattern to be displayed can be easily specified from the offset information.

In addition, in the pattern offset information, the third pattern fluctuates at high speed during the predetermined time when the offset information of the stop pattern of the variable performance performed immediately before is switched to the offset information of the stop pattern of the variable performance performed this time. It is set to be the displayed time. While the third pattern is being variably displayed at high speed, the third pattern is invisible to the player. By switching from the offset information to the offset information of the stop pattern of the variable performance being performed this time, even if the continuity of the numbers of the third pattern is interrupted, the player is not made to recognize the interruption of the continuity of the numbers. be able to.

"Start" information indicating the start of the data table is described at "0000H" which is the top address of the display data table, and the last address of the display data table ("02F0H" in the example of FIG. 174) is the data table. "End" information indicating the end of is described. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" in which the "Start" information is described and the address in which the "End" information is described, the drawing contents corresponding to the presentation mode to be defined in the display data table are displayed. is described.

The MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110, and displays the selected display data table. The data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and the pointer 233f is initialized. Each time drawing processing for one frame is completed, the pointer 233f is incremented by 1, and in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, based on the drawing content specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f, the next A drawing list (see FIG. 176), which will be described later, is created by specifying the image contents to be drawn. By transmitting this drawing list to the image controller 237, a drawing instruction for the image is given. As a result, as the pointer 233f is updated, the drawing contents are identified in the order specified in the display data table, so the image specified in the display data table is displayed on the third pattern display device 81.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 responds to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. Instead of changing the program to be executed by the MPU 231, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. .

Here, as in the conventional pachinko machine, when the program executed by the MPU 231 is started each time the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed, the effect images become more diverse. Therefore, the processing capacity of the display control device 114 is limited, and there is a risk that the diversification of controllable effect images will be limited. there were. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, it is possible to change the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 only by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. Regardless of the processing capability of the control device 114, various modes of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display 81. - 特許庁

In this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each effect mode, a display data table buffer is set according to the effect mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is created frame by frame according to the set data table. The reason why it can be created is that the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined in advance in the pachinko machine 10 based on the result of the lottery performed based on the starting prize. On the other hand, in game machines other than pachinko machines, the display contents change on the spot based on the user's operation, so the display contents cannot be predicted. It is not possible to have a display data table corresponding to the mode of presentation. In this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each presentation mode, a display data table buffer is set according to the presentation mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is created for each frame according to the set data table. This configuration can be realized only when the pachinko machine 10 is configured to determine the presentation mode to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 in advance based on the result of the lottery performed based on the starting prize.

Next, with reference to FIG. 175, details of the transfer data table will be described. FIG. 175 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a transfer data table. The transfer data table is prepared corresponding to the display data table prepared for each effect. Transfer data information for transferring image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 and its transfer timing are defined.

If all the image data of the sprites used in the effects specified in the display data table are stored in the resident video RAM 235, no transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is prepared. As a result, an increase in capacity of the data table storage area 233b can be suppressed.

The transfer data table contains transfer data information of sprite image data (hereinafter referred to as "transfer target image data") to be transferred at the time indicated by the address specified in the display data table in correspondence with the address. (corresponding to addresses "0001H" and "0097H" in FIG. 175). Here, the transfer start timing of the transfer target image data is set so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. In the transfer data table, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is defined in association with the address corresponding to the transfer start timing.

On the other hand, if there is no transfer target image data to start transferring at the time indicated by the address defined in the display data table, there is no transfer target image data to start transferring corresponding to that address. Null data is defined (corresponding to the address "0002H" in FIG. 175).

The transfer data information includes the start address (storage source start address) and end address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored, and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236). is included.

It should be noted that, similarly to the display data table, "Start" information indicating the start of the data table is described in "0000H", which is the top address of the transfer data table, and the end address of the transfer data table (in the example of FIG. 175, "02F0H") describes "End" information indicating the end of the data table. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" in which the "Start" information is described and the address in which the "End" information is described, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data to be defined in the transfer data table is described.

When the MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110, the display data table exists, the transfer data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and stored in a transfer data table buffer 233e of the work RAM 233, which will be described later. Then, each time the pointer 233f is updated, the drawing contents specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f are identified from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and a drawing list (see FIG. 176) to be described later is created. At the same time, from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite whose transfer is to be started at that time is acquired, and the transfer data information is added to the created drawing list. to add.

For example, in the example of FIG. 175, when the pointer 233f is "0001H" or "0097H", the MPU 231 creates the transfer data information specified for the address in the transfer data table based on the display data table. The drawing list is added, and the drawing list after the addition is transmitted to the image controller 237 . On the other hand, when the pointer 233f is "0002H", Null data is defined at the address "0002H" of the transfer data table. The drawing list is sent to the image controller 237 without adding transfer data information to the drawing list.

When transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. process.

Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is specified for a predetermined address, by transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table, When drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table, image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 required for drawing the sprite can be stored in the image storage area 236a without fail. Using the image data stored in the image storage area 236a, a predetermined sprite can be drawn based on the display data table.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236, so that the image can be displayed. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. - 特許庁Also, only the image data temporarily resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 by the description of the transfer data table.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 responds to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110, and displays the display data. When the table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. It is possible to reliably transfer from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing.

The transfer data table defines transfer data information so that image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to a sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. By controlling the transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 on a sprite-by-sprite basis, the transfer of image data can be controlled in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in the load applied to the transfer.

The transfer data table has a data structure similar to that of the display data table, and is associated with an address defined in the display data table. Since the data information is defined, the image data is reliably stored in the normal video RAM 236 before the image data of the predetermined sprite is used based on the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d. As described above, since the timing of starting transfer can be instructed, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, various effects images can be easily displayed on the third symbol display device 81. be able to.

The simple image display flag 233c is a flag indicating whether or not to display the power-on image (power-on main image and power-on fluctuation image) shown in FIG. This simple image display flag 233c is set after the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and power-on varying image is transferred to the power-on main image area 235a or power-on varying image area 235b of the resident video RAM. , is set to ON in the main process (see FIG. 211) executed by the MPU 231 (see S6005 in FIG. 211). Then, when all the resident object image data are stored in the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer processing of the image transfer processing, in order to display an image other than the power-on image on the third symbol display device 81, It is set to OFF (see S7505 in FIG. 223(b)).

The simple image display flag 233c is referenced in the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 each time the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 is detected (see S6301 in FIG. 213(b)). If the image display flag 233c is ON, the simple command determination process (see S6308 in FIG. 213(b)) and the simple display setting process (see S6308 in FIG. 213(b) S6309) is executed. On the other hand, when the simple image display flag 233c is off, command determination is performed so that various images are displayed according to commands transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on commands from the main control device 110 or the like. Processing (see FIGS. 214 to 219) and display setting processing (see FIGS. 220 to 222) are executed.

The simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the transfer setting process executed by the MPU 231 in the V interrupt process (see S7401 in FIG. 223(a)), and when the simple image display flag 233c is on. Since there is resident target image data that is not stored in the resident video RAM 235, resident image transfer setting processing (see FIG. 223(b)) is executed to transfer the resident target image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. However, if the simple image display flag 233c is off, normal image transfer setting processing (see FIG. 224) is executed to transfer image data necessary for drawing processing from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. FIG.

The display data table buffer 233d stores a display data table corresponding to an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in response to commands and the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on commands and the like from the main control device 110. It is a buffer for The MPU 231 determines the effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the command or the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113, and stores the display data table corresponding to the effect mode from the data table storage area 233b. It selects and stores the selected display data table in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the MPU 231 increments the pointer 233f by 1, and based on the drawing contents defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the image controller 237 A later-described drawing list (see FIG. 176) is generated in which the content of the image drawing instruction for is described. As a result, the third symbol display device 81 displays an effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d.

While incrementing the pointer 233f by one, the MPU 231 adds an image to the image controller 237 for each frame based on the drawing contents specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. A drawing list (see FIG. 176), which will be described later, is generated in which the content of the drawing instruction is described. As a result, an effect corresponding to the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 .

The transfer data table buffer 233e transfers a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d according to a command or the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. is a buffer for storing When the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 selects the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table from the data table storage area 233b, and transfers the selected transfer data table. Store in the data table buffer 233e. If all the sprite image data used in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is stored in the resident video RAM 235, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. Therefore, the MPU 231 clears the contents of the transfer data table buffer 233e by writing Null data indicating that there is no transfer target image data.

While incrementing the pointer 233f by one, the MPU 231 defines the transfer data information of the transfer target image data specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e. (that is, if Null data is not described), the transfer data information is added to a later-described rendering list (see FIG. 176) that describes the image rendering instruction contents for the image controller 237 generated for each frame. to add.

As a result, when the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the transfer process. Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Transfer data information of transfer target image data is defined for a predetermined address. Therefore, by transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in this transfer data table, when drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table, the image data necessary for drawing the sprite can be obtained. Image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236, so that the image can be displayed. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. - 特許庁Also, only the image data temporarily resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 by the description of the transfer data table.

The pointer 233f is an address at which transfer data information of corresponding drawing contents or transfer target image data should be obtained from the display data table and the transfer data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e, respectively. is for specifying The MPU 231 once initializes the pointer 233f to 0 when the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, display setting processing for V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 based on a V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when drawing processing for one frame of image is completed (FIG. 213(b)). ), the pointer update process (see S7205 in FIG. 222) is executed, and the value of the pointer 233f is incremented by one.

Every time the pointer 233f is updated in this manner, the MPU 231 identifies the drawing content defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and creates a drawing list, which will be described later. (see FIG. 176), acquires the transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite whose transfer is to be started at that time from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and obtains the transfer data Add information to the created drawing list.

As a result, an effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. FIG. Therefore, the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed only by changing the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Therefore, regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 114, various effects can be displayed.

In addition, when the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e is stored, the sprite is displayed based on the transfer data table before the corresponding display data table starts drawing a predetermined sprite. Image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 used for drawing can be stored in the image storage area 236a without fail. As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236, so that the image can be displayed. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. - 特許庁Also, only the image data temporarily resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 by the description of the transfer data table.

The drawing list area 233g is used by the image controller to draw an image for one frame generated based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e. This is an area for storing a drawing list that instructs H.237.

Details of the drawing list will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 176 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the drawing list. The drawing list is an instruction table for instructing the image controller 237 to draw an image for one frame, and as shown in FIG. Symbol 2, ...), effect (effect 1, effect 2, ...), character (character 1, character 2, ..., number of reserved balls pattern 1, number of reserved balls pattern 2, ..., error (symbol) describes detailed drawing information (detailed information) of the sprite for each sprite. The drawing list also describes transfer data information for causing the image controller 237 to transfer predetermined image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 .

The detailed drawing information (detailed information) of each sprite includes information indicating the type of RAM (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) in which the image data of the corresponding sprite (display object) is stored, and its type. The image controller 237 acquires the image data of the sprite from the memory area specified by the RAM type and address. The detailed drawing information (detailed information) includes display position coordinates, magnification, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information. A standard image generated from the image data of the sprite read from the video RAM is scaled according to the enlargement ratio, rotated according to the rotation angle, and translucent according to the translucency value. alpha blending information, compositing with other sprites, color tone correction according to color information, and filtering according to filter specification information. After that, an image obtained by performing various processes at the display position indicated by the display position coordinates is drawn. Then, the drawn image is developed by the image controller 237 in either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233j.

In the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 stores the drawing content defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f and the content of other images to be drawn (for example, the pending number of balls to be displayed). Image, warning image that notifies the occurrence of an error, etc.), generates detailed drawing information (detailed information) for all sprites used to draw the image for one frame, and provides the detailed information for each sprite. Create a draw list by sorting.

Here, among the detailed information of each sprite, the RAM type and address for storing the data of the sprite (display object) are the sprite type defined in the display data table or the sprite type specified from the contents of other images. Generated accordingly. That is, since the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed for each sprite, the MPU 231 can store the image data according to the sprite type. , the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and such information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

In addition, the MPU 231 sets other information (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucency value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information) among the detailed information of each sprite as defined in the display data table. copy the information as is.

Further, in generating the drawing list, the MPU 231 rearranges the sprites to be arranged in the order of the sprites to be arranged in the front side from the sprites to be arranged in the rearmost side in the image for one frame, and provides detailed drawing information for each sprite. Describe (detailed information). That is, in the drawing list, the detailed information corresponding to the back image is described first, followed by the third pattern (pattern 1, pattern 2, . . . ), effect (effect 1, effect 2, . . . ). , character (character 1, character 2, . . . , reserved ball pattern 1, reserved ball pattern 2, .

The image controller 237 executes the drawing process of each sprite according to the order described in the drawing list, and overwrites the drawn sprite in the frame buffer to develop it. Therefore, in the one-frame image generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged on the rearmost side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged on the frontmost side.

In the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the MPU 231, when the transfer data information is described at the address indicated by the pointer 233f, transfers the transfer data information (character in which the transfer target image data is stored). The storage source start address and storage source end address in the ROM 234, and the storage destination start address of the sub-area provided in the image storage area 236a where the image data to be transferred is to be stored are added to the end of the drawing list. If the transfer data information is included in the drawing list, the image controller 237 draws an image from a predetermined area of the character ROM 234 (the area indicated by the storage source start address and the storage source end address) based on the transfer data information. The data is read out and transferred to a predetermined sub-area (storage destination address) provided in the image storage area 236 a of the normal video RAM 236 .

The clock counter 233h is a counter that counts the effect time of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. When one display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 sets time data indicating the effect time of the effect to be displayed based on the display data table. This time data is a value obtained by dividing the performance time by the image display time for one frame (20 milliseconds in this embodiment) on the third pattern display device 81 .

Then, the MPU 231 executes V interrupt processing based on a V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when drawing processing and display processing for one frame of image are completed (FIG. 213(b)). )) is executed, the clock counter 233h is decremented by one (see S7207 in FIG. 220). As a result, when the value of the clock counter 233h becomes 0 or less, the MPU 231 determines that the presentation displayed by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d has ended, and performs the presentation in accordance with the completion of the presentation. perform various operations to

The storage image data determination flag 233i is set to indicate whether the image data corresponding to all sprites whose corresponding image data are not resident in the resident video RAM 235 are stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. It is a flag indicating a storage state indicating whether or not there is.

This stored image data determination flag 233i is generated by initial setting processing (see S6002 in FIG. 211) executed by the MPU 231 in the main processing when power is turned on. The storage image data determination flag 233i generated here is set to "OFF" indicating that the storage status for all sprites is not stored in the image storage area 236a.

The stored image data determination flag 233i is updated when an instruction to transfer image data to be transferred corresponding to one sprite is set during normal image transfer setting processing (see FIG. 224) executed by the MPU 231. will be In this update, the storage state corresponding to one sprite for which the transfer instruction is set is set to "on" indicating that the corresponding image data is stored in the image storage area 236a. Also, image data of other sprites to be stored in the same sub-area of the image storage area 236a as that one sprite will always be in a non-stored state when the image data of one sprite is stored. Therefore, the stored state corresponding to the other sprites is set to "off".

Also, when transferring the image data of a sprite whose image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, the MPU 231 refers to the stored image data determination flag 233i and determines the sprite to be transferred. It is determined whether image data has already been stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 235 (see S7613 in FIG. 224). If the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "OFF" and the corresponding image data is not stored in the image storage area 236a, an instruction to transfer the image data is set (see S7614 in FIG. 224). , causes the image controller 237 to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a. On the other hand, if the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "on", the corresponding image data is already stored in the image storage area 236a, so the transfer processing of that image data is stopped. As a result, unnecessary transfer from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 can be suppressed, and the processing load on each unit of the display control device 114 and the traffic on the bus line 240 can be reduced. can.

The drawing target buffer flag 233i is a frame buffer (hereinafter referred to as a "drawing target buffer") that develops an image drawn by the image controller 237 from among the two frame buffers (the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c). ), and when the drawing buffer flag 233j is 0, it designates the first frame buffer 236b as the drawing buffer, and when it is 1, it designates the second frame buffer 236c. Then, the information of the specified drawing target buffer is sent to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list (see S7702 in FIG. 225).

As a result, the image controller 237 executes the drawing process of developing the image drawn based on the drawing list on the specified drawing target buffer. In parallel with the drawing process, the image controller 237 reads the drawn image information previously developed from the frame buffer different from the drawing object buffer, and transmits the image to the third pattern display device 81 together with the drive signal. By transferring the information, display processing for displaying an image on the third pattern display device 81 is executed.

The drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated as the drawing target buffer information is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list. This update is done by inverting the value of the drawing target buffer flag 233j, that is, by setting the value to "1" if it was "0" and to "0" if it was "1". done by As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time the drawing list is transmitted. Also, the transmission of the drawing list is executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing and display processing of the image for one frame are completed. This is performed each time the drawing process of the process (see FIG. 213(b)) is executed (see S7702 in FIG. 225).

That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for developing the image for one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of is read. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. be.

After the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for developing the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. be done. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. be. After that, the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame are set to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By alternating designations, it is possible to continuously perform display processing of an image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing drawing processing for an image for one frame.

<Regarding control processing of main controller 110>
Next, each control process executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described with reference to flowcharts of FIGS. 177 to 192. FIG. The processing of the MPU 201 can be broadly classified into a start-up process that is started when the power is turned on, a main process that is executed after the start-up process, and a timer that is started periodically (at intervals of 2 milliseconds in this embodiment). There are interrupt processing and NMI interrupt processing that is activated by input of the power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. and main processing.

177 is a flow chart showing timer interrupt processing executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110. FIG. Timer interrupt processing is periodic processing that is executed, for example, every 2 milliseconds. In the timer interrupt process, first, various winning switch reading processes are executed (S101). That is, it reads the states of various switches connected to the main controller 110, determines the states of the switches, and saves detection information (winning detection information).

Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S102). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (599 in this embodiment). Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM203. Similarly, 1 is added to the second initial random number counter CINI2, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (239 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0, and the updated value of the second initial random number counter CINI2 is cleared. is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203 .

Further, the first winning random number counter C1, the first winning type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second winning random number counter C4 are updated (S103). Specifically, the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second hit random number counter C4 are each incremented by 1, and their counter values are the maximum values (in this embodiment 599, 99, 599, 239) are cleared to 0 respectively. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203. FIG.

Next, a special symbol variation process for setting the variation pattern of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 is executed (S104), and then, A starting winning process associated with entering a ball into the first ball entrance 64a (starting winning) is executed (S105). The details of the special symbol variation processing and the start winning processing will be described later with reference to FIGS. 178 to 182.

After the starting winning process is executed, the normal symbol variation process, which is the process for displaying on the second symbol display device 83, is executed (S106), and the through gate passage process accompanying the passage of the ball through the through gate 67 is executed. (S107). The details of the normal symbol variation processing and the through gate passage processing will be described later with reference to FIGS. 183 and 184. FIG. After executing the through gate passing process, the firing control process is executed (S108), other processes to be periodically executed are executed (S109), and the timer interrupt process is terminated. Note that the shooting control process is performed on the condition that the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 and that the stop switch 51b for stopping shooting is not operated. This is a process of determining on/off of the . Main controller 110 gives a ball launch instruction to launch controller 112 when ball launch is on.

Next, with reference to FIG. 178, the special symbol variation process (S104) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 178 is a flow chart showing this special symbol variation process (S104). This special symbol variation process (S104) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 177), and the variable display of the special symbol (first symbol) performed in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device This is a process for controlling the variable display of the third pattern performed in 81.

In this special symbol variation process, first, it is determined whether or not the special symbol is in the middle of a jackpot at the moment (S201). During the special symbol jackpot, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying the special symbol jackpot (including during the special symbol jackpot game), and during the special symbol jackpot. During the predetermined time after the end of the jackpot game. As a result of the determination, if the jackpot of the special symbol is in progress (S201: Yes), this processing is finished as it is.

If the special symbol jackpot is not being won (S201: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S202), and the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing. If not (S202: No), the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e (number of times N2 of suspension of variable display in special symbols) is acquired (S203). Next, it is determined whether the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is greater than 0 (S204), and if the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is not 0 ( S204: Yes), 1 is subtracted from the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e (S205), and a reserved ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e changed by calculation is set. (S206). The reserved ball number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed by the MPU 201 during the external output process (S901) of the main process (see FIG. 187), which will be described later. , is sent to the audio ramp controller 113 . When receiving the reserved ball number command, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e from the reserved ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b of the RAM 223. store in

After setting the reserved ball number command by the process of S206, the data stored in the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b is shifted (S207). In the process of S207, the data stored in the reservation first area to the reservation fourth area of the special symbol 2 reservation ball storage area 203b are sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the first holding area → execution area, the second holding area → the first holding area, the third holding area → the second holding area, the fourth holding area → the third holding area, etc. Shift data. After the process of S207 is executed, the process of S213 is executed.

On the other hand, in the process of S204, when it is determined that the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is 0 (S204: No), the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is acquired. (S208). It is determined whether the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d acquired in the process of S208 is 0 (S209). When it is determined that the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is 0 (S209: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the processing of S209, when it is determined that the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is not 0 (S209: Yes), the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is set to 1. Subtract (S210), and set a reserved ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d changed by the calculation (S211). The reserved ball number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed by the MPU 201 during the external output process (S901) of the main process (see FIG. 187), which will be described later. , is sent to the audio ramp controller 113 . When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command, it extracts the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d from the reserved ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223a of the RAM 223. store in

After setting the reserved ball number command by the processing of S211, the data stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a is shifted (S212). In the process of S212, the data stored in the reservation first area to the reservation fourth area of the special symbol 1 reservation ball storage area 203a are sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the first holding area → execution area, the second holding area → the first holding area, the third holding area → the second holding area, the fourth holding area → the third holding area, etc. Shift data. After shifting the data, a special symbol variation start process is executed for starting the variation display in the first symbol display device 37 (S213). The special symbol variation start process will be described later with reference to FIG.

In the processing of S202, if the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S202: Yes), it is determined whether or not the variation time of the variation display being executed in the first symbol display device 37 has elapsed. (S214). The variation time of the variation display executed in the first pattern display device 37 is determined according to the variation pattern selected by the variation type counter CS1 (determined according to the variation pattern command), and this variation time has not elapsed (S214: No), this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the processing of S214, if the variation time of the variable display being executed has passed (S214: Yes), the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is set (S215). The stop symbols are set in advance by special symbol variation start processing (S213), which will be described later with reference to FIG. When this special symbol variation start process (S213) is executed, the values of various counters stored in the execution area provided in common to the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a and the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b. Based on this, a lottery for special symbols will be held. More specifically, whether or not the special symbol jackpot is determined according to the value of the first winning random number counter C1, and in the case of the special symbol jackpot, depending on the value of the first winning type counter C2. Then, the jackpot type is determined.

In the present embodiment, when the jackpot A is achieved, the first symbol display device 37 turns on the blue LED, and when the jackpot B is achieved, the red LED is lit. If it is out, the red LED and the green LED are turned on. The display of each LED is turned off when the next variable display is started, but it may be turned on only for several seconds after the variable display is stopped.

After the process of S215 is completed, when the variable display being executed in the first design display device 37 is started, the lottery result of the special symbol performed by the special symbol variation start process (S213) (this lottery result ) is a special symbol jackpot (S216). If the lottery result of this time is a special symbol jackpot (S216: Yes), based on the jackpot type, the opening scenario of the specific winning opening is set (S217), and then the values of the probability variation counter 203t and the time reduction counter 203u are set to 0 (S218), and set the start of the jackpot (S219). Then, a stop command is set (S220), and the process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S216, when it is determined that the current lottery result is not a big win (S216: No), the game state update process (S221) is executed. The game state update process (S221) will be described later with reference to FIG. Then, a stop command is set (S220), and this processing ends.

Next, referring to FIG. 179, the game state update process (S221) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 179 is a flow chart showing the game state update process (S221). This game state update process (S221) is a process executed in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 178) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 177), and subtracts the value of the probability variation counter 203t and the time saving counter 203u. It is a process for executing a process to perform a process to update the game state based on the subtracted value.

In the game state update process (S221), first, it is determined whether or not the value of the variable probability counter 203t is greater than 1 (S351). When it is determined that the value of the variable probability counter 203t is smaller than 1 (that is, 0) (S351: No), the process proceeds to S355. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the variable probability counter 203t is greater than 1 (S351: Yes), the value of the variable probability counter 203t is subtracted by 1 (S352). Next, in the process of S352, it is determined whether or not the subtracted value of the variable probability counter 203t is 0 (S353). If it is determined that the value of the probability variation counter 203t is 0 (S353: Yes), it is time to end the probability variation, so a state command indicating the normal state is set (S354), and this process is terminated.

In this control example, as described above with reference to FIG. A value (200) is configured to be set. Therefore, when it is determined that the value of the variable probability counter 203t is 0 in the process of S352, the value of the time saving counter 203u is also 0, so the state command indicating the normal state is set.

In addition, in FIG. 179, when the value of the probability variation counter 203t is determined to be 0, the state command indicating the normal state is configured to be set. After updating the value and the value of the time saving counter 203u and updating both values, each value after update is determined, the current game state is determined, and a state command indicating the game state based on the determination result is issued. It may be configured to set By configuring in this way, for example, the value of the variable probability counter 203t is greater than 0, it is also possible to set a state command indicating a gaming state (potential probability state) in which the value of the time saving counter 203u is 0.

On the other hand, in the process of S353, when it is determined that the value of the variable probability counter 203t is not 0 (S353: No), it is determined whether the value of the time reduction counter 203u is greater than 1 (S355). If it is determined to be less than 1 (that is, 0) (S35: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S355, when it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 203u is greater than 1 (S355: Yes), the value of the time saving counter 203u is subtracted by 1 (S356). Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the time saving counter 203u subtracted in the process of S356 is 0 (S357). When it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 203u is 0 (S357: Yes), a state command indicating a transition to the normal state is set (S358), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the processing of S357, when it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 203u is not 0 (S357: No), this processing is terminated as it is.

Next, with reference to FIG. 180, the special symbol variation start process (S213) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 180 is a flow chart showing the special symbol variation start process (S213). This special symbol variation start process (S213) is a process executed in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 178) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 177), and the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol Based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area of the symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b, a lottery (win/fail determination) of "special symbol jackpot" or "special symbol omission" is performed, and the first symbol display device 37 and the third pattern display device 81 to determine the effect pattern of the variable effect (variable effect pattern).

In the special symbol variation start process (S213), first, the first hit random number counter C1 and the first hit type counter C2 stored in the execution area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b. , each value of the variation type counter CS1 is obtained (S301). Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the variable probability counter 203t is greater than 0 (whether the gaming state is during the variable probability period (high probability gaming state)) (S302). When it is determined that the value of the variable probability counter 203t is greater than 0 (S302: Yes), the pachinko machine 10 is in the variable probability state of the special symbols, so the process proceeds to S303. In the processing of S303, based on the value of the first winning random number counter C1 acquired in the processing of S301 and the first winning random number table 202a (see FIG. 155(a)) for high probability corresponding to the type of special symbol. Then, the lottery result as to whether or not the special symbol is a jackpot is obtained (S303). Specifically, the value of the first winning random number counter C1 is compared one by one with the 600 random numbers stored in the high probability first winning random number table 202a. As described above, as the random number value that becomes a special symbol jackpot in the variable probability game state (special game state), six "0 to 5" are set, and the value of the first per random number counter C1 and these When the random number value that becomes the hit matches, it is determined that it is a special symbol jackpot. When the lottery result of the special symbol is obtained, the process proceeds to S305.

On the other hand, in the process of S302, when it is determined that the value of the variable probability counter 203t is 0 (the pachinko machine 10 is in a state of low probability of special symbols) (S302: No), the process of S304 is executed. In the processing of S304, based on the value of the first winning random number counter C1 acquired in the processing of S301 and the first winning random number table 202a (see FIG. 155(a)) for low probability corresponding to the type of special symbol. Then, the lottery result as to whether or not the special symbol is a jackpot is acquired (S304). Specifically, the value of the first winning random number counter C1 is compared one by one with the 600 random numbers stored in the first winning random number table 202a for low probability. Two random numbers of "0, 1" are set as the random numbers that become the jackpot of special symbols in the normal game state (low-probability game state), and the value of the first winning random number counter C1 and the winning of these are set. When the random number matches, it is determined as a special symbol jackpot. When the lottery result of the special symbol is obtained, the process proceeds to S305.

In the process of S305, whether the special symbol lottery result acquired by the process of S303 or S304 is a special symbol jackpot (that is, the acquired value of the first winning random number counter C1 and the first winning random number table 202a (S305), and if it is determined to be a special symbol jackpot (S305: Yes), the first per type counter C2 acquired in the process of S301 Based on the value of , the display mode at the time of the big win is set (S306). More specifically, the value of the first winning type counter C2 acquired in the process of S301 is compared with the random number value stored in the first winning type selection table 202d, and three types of special symbol jackpots (jackpot Among A to C), it is determined what the jackpot type is. As described above, in the case of the first special symbol jackpot, if the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 49", it is determined to be a jackpot A, and in the range of "50 to 99" If so, it is determined to be a jackpot B, and in the case of a second special symbol jackpot, if the value of the first win type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 99", it is determined to be a jackpot C (Fig. 155 (b) )reference).

In the process of S306, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 (the lighting state of the LED 37a) is set according to the determined jackpot type (jackets A to C). In addition, the jackpot types (jackpots A to C) are set as the stop types so that the stop symbols corresponding to the jackpot types are stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81 .

Next, based on the value of the variation type counter CS1, the variation pattern at the time of the big win is determined (S307). When the variation pattern is set in the process of S307, the variation time (display time) of the variation effect in the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the third symbol display device 81 until it stops with the jackpot symbol. A pattern variation time is determined. At this time, based on the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203, the variation time of the symbol variation is determined. Although detailed description is omitted, the stop type of symbol variation (ready-to-win type, presence or absence of ready-to-win) is determined based on the value of the stop type selection counter C3. Although illustration of the relationship between the numerical value of the stop type selection counter C3 and the type of symbol variation is omitted, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of "0 to 50", normal reach, "51 to 250" If it is within the range of , determine the variation pattern of super reach.

In addition, in the variation pattern, main controller 110 determines the variation time until notification of the success/failure determination result, and notifies sound lamp control device 113 of it. The sound ramp control device 113 determines the content (variation pattern) of the variable display mode to be actually displayed on the third pattern display device 81 according to the variation time and the success/failure determination result. Even if the main controller 110 is in the out-of-reach display mode, the sound lamp control device 113 is configured to be able to switch between the out-of-reach display mode and the non-out-of-reach display mode if the fluctuation time is the same. As a result, various display modes can be displayed, and effects can be diversified.

For example, as fluctuation patterns for failure, "short failure", "long failure", various types of "missing normal reach", and various types of "missing super reach" are defined. As variation patterns shared by jackpot A, jackpot B, and jackpot D, various types of "normal reach" and various types of "super reach" are defined.

On the other hand, in the processing of S305, when it is determined that the special symbol is out (S305: No), the display mode at the time of being out corresponding to the special symbol is set (S308). In the process of S308, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is set to the display mode corresponding to the off symbol, and the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b is stored in the execution area. The variable time (variation pattern) to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is set based on the value of the stop type selection counter C3.

Next, the variation pattern at the time of deviation is determined (S309). Here, the display time of the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the variation time of the third symbol until the third symbol display device 81 stops at the lost symbol is determined. At this time, as in the processing of S308, the value of the stop type selection counter C3 stored in the execution area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b is confirmed, and the stop type selection counter is checked. Based on the value of C3, the variation time of pattern variations such as normal reach and super reach is determined.

When the process of S307 or the process of S309 is finished, the process returns to the special symbol variation process (S104).

Next, referring to FIG. 181, the starting winning process (S105) executed by MPU 201 of main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 181 is a flow chart showing this starting winning process (S105). This start winning process (S105) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 177) to determine whether or not there is a win to the first ball entrance 64 (start winning). , Reservation processing of values indicated by various random number counters, and processing for executing prefetching of lottery results in special symbols from the values indicated by the reserved various random number counters.

When the starting winning process is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the ball has won the first ball entrance 64 (starting winning) (S401). Here, the ball entering the first ball entrance 64 is detected over three times of timer interrupt processing. Then, when it is determined that the ball has won the first ball entrance 64 (S401: Yes), the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d (number of times N1 of holding variable display in the special symbol) is acquired (S402). ). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is less than the upper limit (4 in this control example) (S403).

Then, if there is no winning to the first ball entrance 64 (S401: No), or even if there is a winning to the first ball entrance 64, the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is 4. If not less than (S403: No), the process proceeds to S407. On the other hand, if there is a winning to the first ball entrance 64 (S401: Yes) and the value (N) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is less than 4 (S403: Yes), special symbol 1 reserved The value (N) of the ball number counter 203d is incremented by 1 (S404). Then, a first special symbol reserved ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d changed by the calculation is set (S405).

The pending ball number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed by the MPU 201 during the external output process (S901) of the main process (see FIG. 187), which will be described later. , is sent to the audio ramp controller 113 . When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command, it extracts the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d from the reserved ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223a of the RAM 223. Store.

After setting the pending ball number command by the processing of S405, the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the variation type counter CS1 updated in S103 of the timer interrupt processing described above Each value is stored in the first area among the empty reservation areas (reservation first area to reservation fourth area) of the special symbol 1 reservation ball storage area 203a of the RAM 203 (S406), and the process proceeds to S407. In the process of S406, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is referred to, and if the value is 0, the first reserved area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area.

Next, regarding S407 to S412, the processing for winning the first ball entrance 64 is changed to the processing for winning the second starting opening 64b in each of the processing of S401 to S406 described above. , the same processing is executed, so detailed description thereof will be omitted. In addition, when a game ball wins the second ball entrance 640 and is stored as a reserved ball, the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the variation type counter Each value of CS1 is acquired and stored in the empty reservation area of the corresponding special symbol 2 reservation ball storage area 203b.

In this way, for the second special symbol based on the ball entering the second ball entrance 640, the first winning random number counter C1, the first winning type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter similar to the first special symbol C3, by acquiring each value of the variation type counter CS1, the lottery can be executed using a common random number for the first special design and the second special design, so even the first special design and the second special design will win. Probability can be fixed.

After executing the process of S412, the prefetching process is executed (S413), and the process ends. Details of the look-ahead processing (S413) will be described with reference to FIG. Based on, the process of determining in advance each lottery result executed at the start of fluctuation is executed.

In this control example, the value of each counter is selected based on the incoming ball, but it may be configured to be selected at the start of variation. By configuring in this way, it is possible to suppress the use of the storage area of the RAM 203 without requiring a storage area for storing the values of each counter until the start of fluctuation. Also, of the counters, some counters (for example, only the fluctuation type counter CS1) may be configured to be acquired at the start of fluctuation. By configuring in this way, the counter related to the winning/failure determination can be acquired at the time of entering the ball, and the counter not related to the winning/failure determination can be acquired later, and the amount of data to be stored can be reduced while maintaining the fairness of the game. can be suppressed.

Next, referring to FIG. 182, the look-ahead process (S413), which is one process in the starting winning process (S105) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, will be described. FIG. 182 is a flow chart showing this prefetching process (S413).

In the look-ahead process (FIG. 182, S413), first, it is determined whether or not there is a new winning (a winning ball) at the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640 (S451). As a result of the determination, if there is no new winning (ball winning) at the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640 (S451: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that there is a new winning (entered ball) in the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640 (S451: Yes), the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball From the storage area 203b, each value of the first winning random number counter C1, the first winning type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the variation type counter CS1 corresponding to this winning is acquired (S452).

Next, the lottery results indicated by the acquired values of the first winning random number counter C1, the first winning type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the variation type counter CS1 are set to the first winning random number table 202a and the first winning type selection Table 202b, variation pattern selection table 202d (FIGS. 155 (a), (b), FIGS. 156 to 158) to make a preliminary determination (S453), the result of the hit/fail determination, the hit type, the stop type, and the variation type in advance A winning information command including information for indicating the determination result is set (S454), and this process is terminated.

Next, referring to FIG. 183, the normal symbol variation process (S106) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 183 is a flow chart showing this normal symbol variation process (S106). This normal symbol variation processing (S106) is executed in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 177), and is accompanied by the variation display of the second symbol performed in the second symbol display device 83 and the second entrance 640. This is a process for controlling the opening time of the electric accessory 640a.

In the normal symbol variation process, first, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol (second symbol) is currently hitting (S501). During the winning of the normal symbol (second symbol), the second symbol display device 83 is displaying the winning, and the opening and closing control of the electric accessory 640a attached to the second ball entrance 640 is performed. including while As a result of determination, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is in the process of winning (S501: Yes), this process is finished as it is.

On the other hand, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is not hit (S501: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is fluctuating (S502), and the second symbol display device is determined. If the display mode of 83 is not fluctuating (S502: No), the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f (the number of times of suspension of variable display in normal symbols M) is obtained (S503). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is greater than 0 (S504), and if the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is 0 (S504: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if the value (M) of the normal design reserved ball number counter 203f is not 0 (S504: Yes), the value (M) of the normal design reserved ball number counter 203f is subtracted by 1 (S505).

Next, the data stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c is shifted (S506). In the process of S506, the data stored in the first reservation area to the fourth reservation area of the normal symbol reservation ball storage area 203c are sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the first holding area → execution area, the second holding area → the first holding area, the third holding area → the second holding area, the fourth holding area → the third holding area, etc. Shift data. After shifting the data, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 stored in the execution area of the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c is obtained (S507).

Next, it is determined whether the value of the time saving counter 203u is greater than 1 (S508). In the process of S508, if it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 203u is greater than 1 (S508: Yes), the value of the second per random number counter C4 obtained in the process of S507 and the second per random number for the high probability time Based on the table 202c (see FIG. 155(c)), the lottery result as to whether or not the normal symbol wins is obtained (S509). Specifically, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the second winning random number table 202c for high probability. As described above, if the value of the second winning random number counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 204", it is determined that the winning is a normal symbol, and if it is in the range of "0 to 4,205 to 239", It is determined that it is out of the normal pattern.

On the other hand, in the process of S508, if it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 203u is 1 or less (S508: No), the value of the second per random number counter C4 obtained in the process of S507 and the second for low probability time Based on the 2-hit random number table 202c (see FIG. 155(c)), the lottery result as to whether or not the normal design is hit is acquired (S510). Specifically, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the second winning random number table 202c for low probability. As described above, if the value of the second winning random number counter C4 is in the range of "0", it is determined to be a winning of the normal design, and if it is in the range of "1 to 239", it is out of the normal design. and discriminate.

Next, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the normal symbol obtained by the process of S509 or S510 is a normal symbol win (S511), and when it is determined that the normal symbol win is determined (S511: Yes) , set the display mode at the time of winning (S512). In the process of S512, after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is completed, the symbol "O" is set to be lit and displayed as the stop symbol (second symbol), and the process proceeds to S514. .

On the other hand, in the processing of S511, when it is determined that the symbol is out of the normal pattern (S511: No), the display mode at the time of out is set (S513). In the process of S513, after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is completed, the symbol "x" is set to be lit and displayed as the stop symbol (second symbol). After the setting of the display mode at the time of detachment is completed, the process proceeds to S514.

In the process of S514, it is determined whether or not the value of the time saving counter 203u is 0 (S514), and if the value of the time saving counter 203u is not 0 (S514: Yes), the variable display in the second symbol display device 83 The variable time is set to 3 seconds (S515), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S514, when it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 203u is 0 (S514: No), the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display in the second pattern display device 83 is set to 30 seconds (S516), End this process. In this way, when the normal pattern has a high probability (time saving state), compared to the normal pattern when the probability is low (normal state), the time of fluctuation display is very short as "30 seconds → 3 seconds". As a result, the lottery frequency of normal symbols increases. Therefore, the frequency of wins in the normal pattern lottery increases, and the electric accessory 640a attached to the second ball entrance 640 is easily opened, so that the ball can easily enter the second ball entrance 640. state.

Although detailed explanation is omitted, the game state of normal symbols is configured to be set to the normal state when winning during the jackpot of special symbols. By configuring in this way, the game state of the normal symbols becomes advantageous during the big win which is advantageous to the player, and it is possible to suppress giving excessive benefits to the player. Also, the period during which the variable winning device 65 is easy to open (special symbol jackpot period) and the period during which the electric accessory 640a is easy to open (ordinary symbol winning period) overlap, and the variable winning is most advantageous to the player. It is possible to suppress a situation in which the electric accessory 640a being opened hinders the winning of the ball to the device 65. - 特許庁

To explain the above-mentioned details in detail, when the electric accessory 640a is provided in the first flow path through which the ball flows so that the variable winning device 65 can win a prize, the electric accessory 640a is opened during the jackpot period. As a result, the ball flowing down the first flow path wins the electric accessory 640a, and there is a problem that the ball cannot sufficiently win the variable prize winning device 65 during the jackpot period. Therefore, for example, the electric accessory 640a is arranged at the lower position (downstream side) of the variable winning device 65, and the ball flowing down the first flow path during the jackpot period (while the variable winning device 65 is open) Although the above-mentioned problem can be solved by using a configuration that facilitates winning by the variable winning device 65, in this case, there is a problem that the configuration of the pachinko machine 10 is restricted.

On the other hand, in this control example, normal symbols are shifted to a low-probability state (normal state) during the special symbol jackpot, so that the electric accessory 640a becomes difficult to open during the jackpot period, thereby solving the above-described problem. can do.

In the process of S502, if the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (S502: Yes), it is determined whether or not the variation time of the variation display executed in the second symbol display device 83 has elapsed. (S517). The variable time here is the time set in advance by the process of S515 or the process of S516 before the variable display is started on the second symbol display device 83 .

In the process of S517, if it is determined that the variable time has not elapsed (S517: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the processing of S517, when it is determined that the variation time of the variation display being executed has passed (S517: Yes), the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set (S518). In the process of S518, if the normal symbol lottery is won and the display mode is set by the process of S512, the "○" symbol as the second symbol is stopped and displayed (lighted up) on the second symbol display device 83. displayed). On the other hand, if the lottery for the normal symbol is lost and the display mode is set by the process of S513, the "x" symbol as the second symbol is stopped (lighted up) on the second symbol display device 83. is set to When the stop display is set by the process of S518, when the second symbol display update process (see S907) of the main process (see FIG. 187) is executed next, the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is changed. After completion, the stop symbol (normal symbol) is stop-displayed on the second symbol display device 83 in the display mode set in the process of S512 or the process of S513.

Next, when the variation display currently being executed in the second symbol display device 83 is started, the normal symbol lottery result (current lottery result) performed by the normal symbol variation process is a normal symbol hit. (S519). If the lottery result of this time is a normal symbol hit (S519: Yes), then it is determined whether the value of the time saving counter 203u is greater than 1 (S520), and if the value of the time saving counter 203u is greater than 1 If it is determined (S520: Yes), the opening time and number of openings of the electric accessory 640a associated with the second ball entrance 640 are set to "1 second x 2 times" (S522), and the process proceeds to S523. and migrate. On the other hand, in the process of S520, if it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 203u is 1 or less (S520: No), the opening time and the number of openings of the electric accessory 640a associated with the second entrance 640 are "0.2 seconds x 1 time" is set (S521), and the process proceeds to S523.

In the process of S523, the start of opening/closing control of the electric accessory 640a is set for the time and number of times of opening set in the process of S521 or S522 (S523), and the process ends. By the process of S523, when the start of opening and closing control of the electric accessory 640a is set, next when the electric accessory opening and closing process (see S905) of the main process (see FIG. 187) is executed, the electric accessory 640a The opening/closing control is started, and the opening/closing control of the electric accessory 640a is continued until the opening time and the number of times of opening set in the processing of S521 or S522 are completed. On the other hand, in the process of S519, when it is determined that the lottery result of this time is out of the normal symbol (S519: No), the process of S520 to S523 is skipped, and this process ends.

Next, the through gate passage processing (S107) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 184 is a flow chart showing this through gate passage processing (S107). This through gate passage processing (S107) is executed in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 177) to determine whether or not the ball has passed through the through gate 67. This is a process for acquiring and holding the value indicated by the random number counter C4.

In the through gate passing process, first, it is determined whether or not the ball has passed through the through gate 67 (S601). Here, passage of the ball through the through gate 67 is detected over three times of timer interrupt processing. Then, when it is determined that the ball has passed through the through gate 67 (S601: Yes), the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f (the number M of suspensions of variable display in normal symbols) is obtained (S602). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is less than the upper limit (4 in this control example) (S603).

The ball has not passed through the through gate 67 (S601: No), or even if the ball has passed through the through gate 67, the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f is less than 4 (S603 : No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, if the ball passes through the through gate 67 (S601: Yes) and the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is less than 4 (S603: Yes), the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f 1 is added to the value (M) (S604). Then, the value of the second hit random number counter C4 updated in S103 of the timer interrupt process described above is the first among the free reservation areas (reservation first area to reservation fourth area) of the normal symbol reservation ball storage area 203c of the RAM 203. area (S605), and the process ends. In the process of S605, the value of the normal symbol reserved ball counter 203f is referred to, and if the value is 0, the first reserved area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area.

Next, NMI interrupt processing executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 185 is a flow chart showing this NMI interrupt processing. The NMI interrupt process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 when the pachinko machine 10 is powered off due to power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, information on occurrence of power failure is stored in the RAM 203 . That is, when the pachinko machine 10 is powered off due to a power failure or the like, a power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 . Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control being executed, starts the NMI interrupt processing, stores the power interruption occurrence information in the RAM 203 as the setting of the power interruption occurrence information (S701), and ends the NMI interruption processing. do.

The above NMI interrupt processing is also executed in the payout launch control device 111 in the same manner, and information on occurrence of power failure is stored in the RAM 213 by such NMI interrupt processing. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to a power failure or the like, a power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control being executed. Then, NMI interrupt processing is started.

Next, with reference to FIG. 186, startup processing executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 when main controller 110 is powered on will be described. FIG. 186 is a flow chart showing this startup process. This start-up process is started by a reset when the power is turned on. In the start-up process, first, an initial setting process is executed upon power-on (S801). For example, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. Next, in order to wait for the sub-side control devices (peripheral control devices such as the sound lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) to become operable, a wait process (one second in this control example) is executed. (S802). Then, access to the RAM 203 is permitted (S803).

After that, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) provided in the power supply 115 is turned on (S804), and if it is turned on (S804: Yes), the process proceeds to S812. On the other hand, if the RAM erasing switch 122 is not turned on (S804: No), it is determined whether or not power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S805), and if not stored (S805: No). , there is a possibility that the process at the time of the previous power shutdown did not end normally, so in this case as well, the process proceeds to S812.

If power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S805: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (S806). If the determination value does not match the RAM determination value saved at the time of power shutdown, the backed-up data is destroyed. As will be described later in the processing of S914 in FIG. 187, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the work area address of the RAM 203. FIG. Instead of the RAM judgment value, the effectiveness of the backup may be judged based on whether or not the keyword written in the predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly saved.

In the processing of S812, a payout initialization command is transmitted in order to initialize the payout control device 111, which is a sub-side control device (peripheral control device) (S812). When the payout control device 111 receives this payout initialization command, it clears the area (work area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets the initial value, and becomes ready to start the game ball payout control. After transmitting the payout initialization command, main controller 110 executes the initialization processing of RAM 203 (S813, S814).

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, the power is turned on while the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed when the RAM data is initialized when the power is turned on, such as when the hall starts operating. Therefore, if the RAM erasing switch 122 is pushed during the start-up process, the RAM initialization process (S813, S814) is executed. Also, if power failure occurrence information is not set, or if backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.), the initialization processing of the RAM 203 (S813, S814) is similarly executed. . In the RAM initialization process (S813, S814), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S813), and then the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S814). After executing the initialization process of the RAM 203, the process proceeds to S810.

On the other hand, if the RAM erasing switch 122 is not turned on (S804: No), power failure occurrence information is stored (S805: Yes), and the RAM judgment value (checksum value, etc.) is normal ( S807: Yes), a state command is transmitted based on the long time open flag 203i (S808). Next, while retaining the data backed up in the RAM 203, the power failure occurrence information is cleared (S809), and the process proceeds to S810. When the payout control device 111 receives this payout return command, the game ball payout control can be started while retaining the data stored in the RAM 213 .

In the process of S810, an effect permission command is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113 (S810), and the audio lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 are permitted to execute various effects. Next, the interrupt is permitted (S811), and the process proceeds to main processing, which will be described later.

Next, with reference to FIG. 187, main processing executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 after the startup processing described above will be described. FIG. 187 is a flow chart showing this main process. Main processing of the game is executed in this main processing. As an overview, each process of S901 to S907 is executed as a periodical process with a period of 4 ms, and the counter update process of S910 and S911 is executed in the remaining time.

In the main process, first, during execution of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 177), output data such as commands stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203 is transferred to each sub-side control device (peripheral (S901). Specifically, it determines whether or not there is winning detection information detected in the switch reading process of S101 in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 177). Send a prize ball command to In addition, it transmits to the sound lamp control device 113 the reserved ball number command set in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 178) and the start winning process (see FIG. 181). In addition, it transmits to the sound lamp control device 113 the winning command set in the startup winning process and the look-ahead process (see FIG. 182). Further, by this external output processing, the variation pattern command, the stop type command, etc. necessary for the variation display of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 .

Next, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated (S902). Specifically, the variation type counter CS1 is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (198 in this control example). Then, the updated value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM203.

When the update of the variation type counter CS1 is finished, the prize ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S903), and then, in the case of the special symbol jackpot state, the execution of the jackpot production and the variable A jackpot control process for opening or closing the specific winning opening (large open opening) 65a of the winning device 65 is executed (S904). In the jackpot control processing, the specific prize winning port 65a is opened for each round in the jackpot state, and it is determined whether the maximum opening time of the specific prize winning port 65a has passed or whether a specified number of balls have won in the specific prize winning port 65a. Then, when any one of these conditions is established, the specific winning opening 65a is closed. The opening and closing of the specific winning opening 65a are repeated for a predetermined number of rounds. In this control example, the jackpot control process (S904) is executed in the main process, but it may be executed in the timer interrupt process.

Next, the electric accessary product opening/closing process for controlling the opening/closing of the electric accessary product 640a associated with the second entrance 640 is executed (S905). In the electric accessory opening/closing process, when the start of opening/closing control of the electric accessory 640a is set by the processes of S521 and S522 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 183), the opening/closing control of the electric accessory 640a is started. The opening/closing control of the electric accessory 640a is continued until the opening time and the number of times of opening set in the processing of S521 or S522 of FIG. 183 in the normal symbol variation processing are completed.

Next, a first symbol display update process for updating the display of the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S906). In the first symbol display update process, when a variation pattern is set by the process of S307 or the process of S309 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 180), the variation display corresponding to the variation pattern is displayed as the first symbol display. Start at device 37 . In this control example, among the LEDs 37a of the first pattern display device 37, from the start of the variation until the variation time elapses, for example, if the currently lit LED is red, the red LED is extinguished. At the same time, the green LED is lit, and if the green LED is lit, the green LED is extinguished and the blue LED is lit, and if the blue LED is lit, the blue LED is extinguished. At the same time, the red LED is lit.

Note that the main process is executed every 4 milliseconds, but if the lighting color of the LED is changed each time the main process is executed, the player cannot confirm the change in the lighting color of the LED. Therefore, a counter (not shown) is counted by 1 each time the main process is executed so that the player can confirm the change in the lighting color of the LED, and when the counter reaches 100, the LED change the lighting color of That is, the lighting color of the LED is changed every 0.4 seconds. The value of the counter is reset to 0 when the lighting color of the LED is changed.

In addition, in the first symbol display update process, when the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern set by the process of S307 or the process of S309 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 180) ends, the first symbol display device 37, the stop pattern (first pattern) is displayed on the first pattern display device in the display mode set by the processing of S306 or S308 of the special symbol variation start processing (see FIG. 180). 37 is stopped (lighted up).

Next, a second symbol display update process for updating the display of the second symbol display device 83 is executed (S907). In the second symbol display update process, when the variation time of the second symbol is set by the process of S515 or the process of S516 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 183), the variation display is started on the second symbol display device 83. do. As a result, the second symbol display device 83 performs a variable display in which the second symbol "O" symbol and the "X" symbol are alternately lit. Further, in the second symbol display update process, when the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set by the process of S518 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 183), the second symbol display device 83 is executed. After finishing the variation display, the stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device 83 in the display mode set by the process of S512 or S513 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 183) ( display).

After that, it is determined whether power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S908). SG1 is not output and the power is not cut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not it is time to execute the next main process, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 ms in this control example) has elapsed since the start of the main process (S909). If the predetermined time has already passed (S909: Yes), the process proceeds to S901, and the above-described processes after S901 are repeatedly executed.

On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet passed since the start of the main processing this time (S909: No), the next main processing is executed until the predetermined time, that is, within the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main processing. The first initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and the variation type counter CS1 are repeatedly updated (S910, S911).

First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S910). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are incremented by 1, and when the counter values reach the maximum values (299 and 239 in this control example), they are cleared to 0. . Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the change type counter CS1 is updated by the same method as the process of S902 (S911).

Here, since the execution time of each process of S901 to S907 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main process is not constant and fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using the remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (that is, , the initial value of the first winning random number counter C1, and the initial value of the second winning random number counter C4) can be randomly updated, and similarly, the fluctuation type counter CS1 can also be randomly updated.

Further, in the process of S908, if the RAM 203 stores power failure occurrence information (S908: Yes), the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the power is turned off, and the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252. As a result, the NMI interrupt process of FIG. 185 is executed, so the power-off process from S912 onwards is executed. First, to prohibit the occurrence of each interrupt processing (S912), to other control devices (peripheral control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the sound lamp control device 113) a power-off command indicating that the power has been cut off and transmit (S913). Then, a RAM determination value is calculated and stored (S914), access to the RAM 203 is prohibited (S915), and the infinite loop continues until the power supply is completely cut off and processing cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the stack area and work area backed up in the RAM 203 .

In addition, the processing of S908 is performed at the end of a series of processing corresponding to the game state change performed in S901 to S907, or at the end of one cycle of the processing of S910 and S911 performed within the remaining time. It is running. Therefore, in the main processing of the main controller 110, information on the occurrence of power failure is confirmed at the timing when each setting is completed. It can start from the processing of S901. That is, the process can be started from the process of S901 in the same way as the initialization in the start-up process. Therefore, even if the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 are not saved in the stack area or the value of the stack pointer is not saved in the process at power-off, the stack pointer is By setting to a predetermined value (initial value), the process of S901 can be started. Therefore, the control load on the main controller 110 can be reduced, and accurate control can be performed without the main controller 110 malfunctioning or running out of control.

Next, the jackpot control process (S904) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 188 is a flow chart showing this jackpot control process (S904). This jackpot control process (S904) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 177), and when the pachinko machine 10 is in a special pattern jackpot state, information for executing various effects according to the jackpot. It is a process for setting (command) and opening or closing a winning opening (specific winning opening (large open opening) 65a, V winning opening 650a).

In the jackpot control process (S904), first, it is determined whether it is time to start the jackpot of the special symbol (S1001). When it is determined that the special symbol jackpot is the start timing (S1001: Yes), an opening command is set (S1002), and this process is terminated.

It should be noted that the opening command may be configured to be delayed (variable) and transmitted according to the game state and the jackpot type. Specifically, an opening counter that is periodically updated (every 4 ms) is provided. Then, when a special symbol jackpot or a small hit is started, the opening counter is initialized to 0, and then the opening counter reaches a predetermined value (for example, 2500 for jackpot A and 5000 for jackpot B). When it becomes so, an opening command may be transmitted. By doing so, for example, when a big win is achieved in the left-handed game, the time until the start of the big win is lengthened, and when a big win is achieved in the right-handed game, the time until the start of the big win is lengthened. can be shortened. In this control example, when the jackpot is hit during the left-handed game, it is necessary to switch to the right-handed game as the jackpot game. According to the above configuration, it is possible to sufficiently secure the time to switch to the right-handed game (jackpot game) when the left-handed game results in a big hit. As a result, the operation burden on the player can be reduced.

On the other hand, in the process of S1001, if it is determined that it is not the special symbol jackpot start timing (S1001: No), then it is determined whether the special symbol jackpot is currently in progress (S1003). In the processing of this S1003, determination is performed by reading the game information regarding the winning game stored in the game state storage area 203m.

During the special symbol jackpot, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying the special symbol jackpot (including during the special symbol jackpot game), and during the special symbol jackpot. During the predetermined time after the end of the jackpot game. In the process of S1003, if it is determined that the special symbol jackpot is not in progress (S1003: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the special symbol jackpot is in progress (S1003: Yes), then it is determined whether it is time to start a new round (S1004).

When it is determined that it is time to start a new round in the process of S1004 (S1004: Yes), a big hit operation setting process is executed (S1005). Details of this jackpot operation setting process (S1005) will be described with reference to FIG. operation processing) is executed.

Here, with reference to FIG. 189, the jackpot operation setting process (S1005), which is one process in the jackpot control process (S904 in FIG. 188), will be described. FIG. 189 is a flow chart showing the contents of the jackpot operation setting process (S1005).

When the jackpot action setting process (S1005) is executed, first, among the opening action scenarios set corresponding to the jackpot of this time, the opening action corresponding to the number of rounds of the jackpot to be started this time is set. An operation scenario is read (S1101). Then, the opening operation of the flow path solenoid (probability variable solenoid) 650k (see FIG. 4) is set based on the data read in S1101 (S1102). Next, the opening operation of the opening/closing door 65f1 of the variable winning device 65 or the opening operation of the opening/closing door 650f1 of the V winning opening 650a is set by the data read in the process of S1101 (S1103), the winning number counter 203j is reset (S1104), A round number command is set (S1105). After that, this process is terminated.

In addition, the pachinko machine 10 of this control example performs a jackpot game (round game) that executes an opening operation for the first attacker (V winning device 650) as a jackpot game, and a second attacker (variable prize winning device 65). and a jackpot game (round game) in which an opening action is executed by pressing the first attacker (V winning device 650). It is defined only in the opening action scenario corresponding to the eye round game. Therefore, when executing a round game other than that, a scenario of opening the flow path solenoid (probability variable solenoid) 650k in the corresponding opening operation scenario (scenario of moving the switching member 650h and communicating the special discharge flow path 650e2) is not specified, the process of S1102 is skipped.

In this way, each operation of the variable prize winning device 65 is set at the start of each round, so even if an unexpected power failure occurs during the big win game, the big win game will end in the middle. Defects can be suppressed. Further, although detailed description is omitted, in this control example, when it is determined that it is time to start a new round (S1004 in FIG. 188: Yes), a round for indicating that a new round game is to be executed Configure the command to be set. The round command set here is output to the sound lamp control device 113, and the sound lamp control device 113 side is configured to be able to determine the progress of the jackpot game being executed. Therefore, based on the round command received from the main control device 110, it is possible to display in the main display area Dm of the third pattern display device 81 what round the game is currently in.

In addition, in this control example, as the round command set by the main controller 110, a round command including information indicating the number of rounds of the round game to be executed is set. Instead, it may be configured to set a round command including only information indicating that the round game has been newly started. In this case, means for measuring the number of round commands received during one jackpot game is provided on the audio ramp control device 113 side, and the audio ramp control device 113 side determines what round the round game to be executed this time is. may be calculated, and the display mode of the number of rounds displayed on the third symbol display device 81 may be set based on the calculation result. By configuring in this way, the amount of information included in the round command set by main controller 110 can be reduced, so that the load on main controller 110 can be reduced.

Returning to FIG. 188, the description continues. In the process of S1004, when it is determined that it is not the start timing of a new round (S1004: No), it is determined whether it is the operation timing of the opening/closing door 650f1 and the flow path solenoid (probability variable solenoid) 650k (S1006). If it is determined that it is time to operate (S1006: Yes), the open solenoid 650f2 is turned on (S1007). After that, this process ends.

On the other hand, in the processing of S1006, if it is determined that it is not the timing of the opening operation (S1006: No), it is determined whether it is the timing of starting the ending effect (S1008). The start timing of the ending production is the final round of the jackpot game (the 10th round in the case of jackpot A) is completed, the open/close door 650f1 is closed, and the waiting time (in this control example, , 3 seconds) has elapsed, it is determined that it is time to start the ending effect. When it is determined that it is time to start the ending effect (S1008: Yes), the opening solenoid 650f2 is turned off (S1009), ending processing is executed (S1010), and this processing ends.

Here, details of the jackpot ending process (S1012) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 190 is a flow chart showing the contents of the ending process (S1010).

When the ending process (S1010) is executed, first, an ending command indicating the start of the ending is set (S1201), and it is determined whether or not the variable probability setting flag 203h is ON (S1202). In the process of S1202, when it is determined that the variable probability setting flag 203h is ON (S1202: Yes), the value of the variable probability counter 203t is set to 200 (S1203), and the process proceeds to S1204.

In the process of S1204, a value corresponding to the jackpot type and the presence or absence of V winning is set in the time saving counter 203u (S1204), and the process ends.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the variable probability setting flag 203h is off in the process of S1202 (S1202: No), the process of S1203 is skipped and the process of S1204 described above is performed.

Returning to FIG. 188, the description continues. In the process of S1008, if it is determined that it is not the start timing of the ending effect (S1008: No), next, the winning process is executed (S1011). Here, with reference to FIG. 191, this winning process (S1011) will be described in detail. FIG. 191 is a flow chart showing the contents of this winning process (S1011).

In the winning process (S1011 in FIG. 191), first, it is determined whether or not the round valid period is reached (S1401). The round valid period is the period during which the round game is set, that is, the period from the open state of the open door 65f1 or the open door 650f1 to the end of the interval period (0.5 seconds). If it is determined that it is outside the round valid period (S1401: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is within the round valid period (S1401: Yes), it is determined whether the ball detection switch 650c1 of the V winning opening 650a has passed. When it is determined that the ball has passed through the ball detection switch 650c1 of the V winning opening 650a (S1402: Yes), the winning number counter 203j is updated by adding 1 (S1403). After that, the process of S1404 is executed. On the other hand, if it is determined that the ball detection switch 650c1 has not been passed (S1402: No), the process of S1403 is skipped and the process of S1404 is executed.

In the processing of S1404, it is determined whether or not the value of the winning number counter 203j is 10 or more (S1404). When it is determined that the value of the winning number counter 203j is 10 or more (S1404: Yes), the opening/closing door 650f1 of the V winning opening 650a is set to be closed (S1406). After that, the remaining ball timer flag 203n is set to ON (S1407), and the process of S1408 is executed. By setting the remaining ball timer flag 203n to ON, it can be determined that the ball is being swept after the opening/closing door 650f1 is closed.

On the other hand, in the process of S1404, if it is determined that the value of the prize number counter 203j is less than 10 (S1404: No), it is determined whether the round time (30 seconds in this control example) has elapsed (S1405). . If it is determined that the round time has elapsed (S1405: Yes), the process of S1406 is executed. On the other hand, if it is determined that the round time has not elapsed (S1405: No), the process of S1408 is executed.

In the process of S1408, it is determined whether the value of the operation counter 203k is greater than 0 (S1408). When it is determined that the value of the operation counter 203k is greater than 0 (S1408: Yes), the value of the operation counter 203k is decremented by 1 and updated (S1409). It is determined whether the ball has passed through the V switch 650e3 (S1410). When it is determined that the ball has passed through the V switch 650e3 (S1410: Yes), the value of the variable probability passage counter 203i is updated by adding 1 (S1411), and the variable probability setting flag 203h is set to ON (S1412).

After that, the process of S1413 is executed. On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S1410 that the ball has not passed through the V switch 650e3 (S1410: No), the process of S1413 is executed. In the process of S1413, it is determined whether the operation counter 203k is 0 (S1413). When it is determined that the operation counter 203k is 0, the flow path solenoid 650k is set to OFF (S1414), the variable probability effective flag 203q is set to ON (S1415), and then this process is terminated. Here, by setting the variable probability effective flag 203q to ON, even after the switching member 650h is switched, when the ball remaining in the special discharge flow path 650e2 passes through the V switch 650e3, special symbols can be controlled so that a high probability state of is set.

On the other hand, in the process of S1408, when it is determined that the operation counter 203k is 0 (S1408: No), it is determined whether the variable probability effective flag 203q is ON (S1416). If it is determined that the variable probability effective flag 203q is off (S1416: No), this process is terminated. Also, when it is determined that the probability variable effective flag 203q is ON in the process of S1416 (S1416: Yes), the value of the probability variable effective timer 203r is updated by adding 1 (S1417).

Then, it is determined whether the value of the probability variable effective timer 203r after updating has reached the upper limit (1.2 s in this control example) (S1418). When it is determined that the probability variable effective timer 203r is the upper limit value (S1418: Yes), the probability variable effective flag 203q is set to OFF (S1419), and the probability variable effective timer 203r is reset to 0, which is the initial value (S1420). . After that, this process ends. In the process of S1418, when it is determined that the variable probability effective timer 203r is not the upper limit value (S1418: No), the process proceeds to S1410.

As a result, it is possible to determine whether or not the ball has passed through the V switch 650e3 until the probability variable effective timer 203r reaches the upper limit, so a high probability of special symbols in consideration of the time of ball sweeping. State can be set. In addition, since there is an upper limit to the time that is determined to be effective, it is possible to prevent the ball from being illegally passed through the V switch 650e3 and the high probability state of the special symbol being given.

Returning to FIG. 188, the description continues. When the prize-winning process (S1011 in FIG. 191) ends, an abnormality process is executed (S1012), and this process ends. Here, details of the abnormality processing (S1012) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 192 is a flow chart showing the contents of this abnormality processing (S1012). This abnormality processing (S1012) is processing for monitoring whether or not the V switch 650e3 is illegally passed through.

In the abnormality processing (S1012), first, it is determined whether or not it is the round effective period (S1501). If it is outside the round valid period (S1501: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is within the round valid period (S1501: Yes), it is determined whether the ball has passed through the ball outlet switch (discharge confirmation switch) 650e4 (S1502). When it is determined that the ball has passed through the ball discharge port switch (discharge confirmation switch) 650e4 (S1502: Yes), the value of the discharge number counter 203s is incremented by 1 and updated (S1503). After that, the process of S1504 is executed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the ball has not passed through the ball outlet switch (discharge confirmation switch) 650e4 (S1502: No), the process of S1504 is executed.

In the process of S1504, it is determined whether the remaining ball timer flag 203n is ON (S1504). If it is determined that the remaining ball timer flag 203n is off (S1504: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the remaining ball timer flag 203n is ON (S1504: Yes), it is during the ball-draining time period, so the remaining ball timer 203p is updated by adding 1 (S1505). The remaining ball timer 203p determines whether or not the upper limit value (three seconds in this control example) has elapsed (S1506). If it is determined that the value is not the upper limit value (S1506: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined to be the upper limit value (S1506: Yes), the number of discharges (the total value of the variable probability passage counter 203i and the discharge number counter 203s) and the number of prizes (the value of the prize number counter 203j) match. (S1507).

If it is determined that they match (S1507: Yes), the process of S1509 is executed. On the other hand, if it is determined that they do not match (S1507: No), an error command is set (S1508). After that, the process of S1509 is executed. When the error command is received by the audio lamp control device 113, an error is displayed (for example, characters indicating a winning number mismatch error are displayed), and an error signal is output to the hall computer. Therefore, it is possible to prevent illegally leaving a game ball in the V winning device 650 and allowing the game ball to pass through the V switch 650e3.

In the process of S1509, the remaining ball timer flag 203n is set to OFF (S1509), and the remaining ball timer 203p is reset to 0, which is the initial value (S1510). After that, the winning prize number counter 203j, the discharge number counter 203s, and the variable probability passing counter 203i are reset to their initial values (S1511), and then this process is terminated.

<Control Processing Executed by Audio Ramp Control Device 113>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 193 to 210, each control process executed by the MPU 221 within the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. The processing of the MPU 221 can be broadly classified into startup processing that is started upon power-on and main processing that is executed after the startup processing.

First, with reference to FIG. 193, start-up processing executed by MPU 221 in sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 193 is a flow chart showing this startup process. This start-up process is started when the power is turned on.

When the start-up process is executed, first, an initial setting process is executed upon power-on (S2001). Specifically, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. After that, depending on whether or not the power-off processing flag is ON, the power-off processing in S2119 (see FIG. 194) is caused by a momentary voltage drop (instantaneous power failure, so-called "instantaneous power failure"). ) is started during execution (S2002). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 194, when the audio lamp control device 113 receives a power-off command from the main controller 110 (see S2116 in FIG. 194), it executes power-off processing in S2119. Before the power-off processing is executed, the power-off processing flag is turned on, and after the power-off processing is completed, the power-off processing flag is turned off. Therefore, whether or not the power-off processing of S2119 is being executed can be determined by the state of the power-off processing flag.

If the power-off processing flag is off (S2002: No), the startup process this time was started after the power was completely shut off, or after a momentary power failure occurred and the power was shut off in S2119. Either it was started after the execution of the process was completed, or it was started when only the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 was reset due to noise (without receiving a power off command from the main controller 110). be. Therefore, in these cases, it is checked whether the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S2003).

Destruction of data in the RAM 223 is confirmed as follows. That is, data as a keyword of "55AAh" is written in a specific area of the RAM 223 by the process of S2006. Therefore, the data stored in the specific area is checked, and if the data is "55AAh", there is no data destruction in the RAM 223. Conversely, if it is not "55AAh", it can be confirmed that the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed. If data destruction of RAM223 is confirmed (S2003: Yes), it will transfer to S2004 and will start initialization of RAM223. On the other hand, if destruction of data in the RAM 223 is not confirmed (S2003: No), the process proceeds to S2008.

It should be noted that if the startup process this time is started after the power is completely cut off, the keyword "55AAh" is not stored in the specific area of the RAM 223 (the memory of the RAM 223 is lost due to the power cut). ), it is determined that the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S2003: Yes), and the process proceeds to S2004. On the other hand, whether the current start-up processing was started after a momentary power failure occurred and after the execution of the power-off processing in S2118 was completed, or only the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 was reset due to noise or the like. If the process is started after the above, the keyword "55AAh" is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, so the data in the RAM 223 is determined to be normal (S2003: No), and the process proceeds to S2208.

If the power-off processing flag is on (S2002: Yes), the startup process this time is after a momentary power failure occurs, and during execution of the power-off process in S2119, the sound lamp control device 113 It is started by resetting the MPU 221 of . In such a case, the memory state of the RAM 223 is not necessarily correct because the power-off process is in progress. Therefore, in such a case, the control cannot be continued, so the process moves to S2004 and the initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

In the processing of S2004, the storage area of the entire range of RAM 223 is checked (S2004). As a checking method, first, "0FFh" is written for each byte, read for each byte to confirm whether it is "0FFh", and if it is "0FFh", it is determined that the data is normal. Such writing and confirmation for each byte is performed in the order of "0FFh", "55h", "0AAh", and "00h". All storage areas of the RAM 223 are cleared to 0 by this read/write check of the RAM 223 .

If the read/write check is normal for all storage areas of the RAM 223 (S2005: Yes), the keyword "55AAh" is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 to set RAM destruction check data (S2006). By confirming the keyword "55AAh" written in this specific area, it is checked whether or not the RAM 223 has data destruction. On the other hand, if an abnormality in the read/write check is detected in any storage area of the RAM 223 (S2005: No), the abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified (S2007), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is cut off. Abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified by the display lamp 34 . In addition, it is possible to output a sound by the sound output device 226 to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or to transmit an error command to the display control device 114 and display an error message on the third symbol display device 81. can be

In the process of S2008, it is determined whether or not the power-off flag is turned on (S2008). The power-off flag is turned on when the power-off process of S2119 is executed (see S2118 in FIG. 194). In other words, the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off processing of S2119 is executed. This is the case where the process is started after the power failure has occurred and the execution of the power-off process in S2119 has been completed. Therefore, in such a case (S2008: Yes), the work area of the RAM is cleared to initialize each process of the sound lamp control device 113 (S2009), and after setting the initial value of the RAM 223 (S2010), an interrupt Permission is set (S2011), and the process proceeds to the main process. The work area of the RAM 223 refers to an area other than the area for storing commands and the like received from the main controller 110 .

On the other hand, the process of S2008 is reached with the power-off flag turned off because the current start-up process was started after the power supply was completely shut off, for example. This is the case where the processing has been reached, or only the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 has been reset due to noise or the like (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110). Therefore, in such a case (S2008: No), S2009, which is the clearing process of the work area of the RAM 223, is skipped, the process proceeds to S2010, and after setting the initial value of the RAM 223 (S2010), interrupt permission is set (S2011), and the process proceeds to the main process.

In this way, when the power is turned on, the main control unit 110 outputs a command that can determine whether or not the normal symbol is in the long-term hit state, so that the sound lamp control unit 113 side can also determine the state. can be done.

The reason why the clearing process of S2009 is skipped is that when the process of S2008 is reached from S2004 via the process of S2006, all the storage areas of the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the process of S2004, When only the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like and start-up processing is started, the data in the work area of the RAM 223 is saved without being cleared, so that the audio lamp control device 113 This is because the control of can be continued.

Next, referring to FIG. 194, main processing executed by the MPU 221 in the audio ramp control device 113 after startup processing of the audio ramp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 194 is a flow chart showing this main process. When the main process is executed, first, it is determined whether or not 1 ms or more has passed since the main process was started or after the current process of S2101 was executed (S2101). If not (S2101: No), the process proceeds to S2114 without performing the processes of S2102 to S2113. In the process of S2101, it is determined whether or not 1 msec has elapsed because S2102 to S2113 are mainly processes related to display (effect), and there is no need to edit in a short cycle (within 1 msec). , the command determination processing in S2114, the variable display setting processing in S2115, and the processing for updating various counter values (not shown) are preferably executed in short cycles. That is, by executing the process of S2114 in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent the command transmitted from the main controller 110 from being missed in reception, and by executing the process of S2115 in a short cycle, the command is received by the command determination process. Based on the command, it is possible to make settings related to variable effects without delay.

If 1 millisecond or more has elapsed in the processing of S2101 (S2101: Yes), first, various commands for the display control device 114 set by the processing of S2103 to S2115 are transmitted to the display control device 114 (S2102 ). Next, the output of each lamp is set so as to set the lighting mode of the display lamp 34 and the lighting mode of the lamp edited in the process of S2108 described later (S2103), and then the power-on notification process is executed (S2104). In the power-on notification process, when the power is turned on, it is notified that the power has been turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds). will be Also, a command may be sent to the display control device 114 to notify that power is supplied on the screen of the third pattern display device 81 . Note that if the power is not turned on, the process proceeds to S2105 without notifying by the power-on notification process.

In the process of S2105, the customer waiting effect process is executed, and then the pending number display update process is executed (S2106). In the customer waiting effect process, when the pachinko machine 10 is not played by a player for a predetermined period of time, a setting such as switching the display of the third symbol display device 81 to a title screen is performed, and the setting is used as a command for display control. It is sent to device 114 . In the pending number display update process, the value of the special symbol 1 pending ball number counter 223a, the value of the special symbol 2 pending ball number counter 223b, and the value of the normal pending ball number counter 223c. is done.

After that, frame button input monitoring/effect processing is executed (S2107). In this frame button input monitoring and effect processing, input as to whether or not the frame button 22 operated by the player has been pressed is monitored in order to enhance the effect of the effect, and the input of the frame button 22 is confirmed. This is the process of setting to perform production. Details of the frame button input monitoring/effect processing (S2107) will be described later with reference to FIG.

When the frame button input monitoring/effect processing is completed, the lamp editing processing is executed (S2108), and then the sound editing/output processing is executed (S2109). In the lamp editing process, the lighting patterns of the illumination parts 29 to 33 are set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third pattern display device 81 . In the sound editing/output process, the output pattern of the voice output device 226 is set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third pattern display device 81, and the sound is output from the voice output device 226 according to the setting.

After the process of S2109, the liquid crystal effect execution management process is executed (S2110), and the process proceeds to S2111. In the liquid crystal effect execution management process, based on the variation pattern command transmitted from the main controller 110, the time required for the variation display performed by the third symbol display device 81 and the time synchronized therewith are set. The lamp editing process of S2108 is executed based on the time set in this liquid crystal effect execution monitoring process. The sound editing/output processing of S2109 is also executed at the time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed by the third pattern display device 81. FIG. The liquid crystal effect execution management process (S2110) described above will be described later in detail with reference to FIG.

When the processing of S2110 ends, an operation effect management processing is executed (S2111). This operation effect management processing (S2111) will be described later in detail with reference to FIG. A process for changing is executed.

After executing the operation effect management process (S2111), the action control process (S2112) is executed. In this operation control process (S2112), the operation control of various performance movable accessories provided in the pachinko machine 10 of the first control example is executed. The operation control of the various performance movable accessories is a performance that is set based on the results of the lottery of special symbols, the results of the lottery of normal symbols, the operation results of the operation means (frame button 22), the game results during the jackpot game, and the like. This is executed in accordance with the content of the action scenario of the movable accessory for use, and a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

After the process of S2112 is finished, the counter update process is executed (S2113). In this counter update process (S2113), a process for updating the value of a counter (timer) for timing information, for example, the operation valid timer 223n, which is necessary when executing various effects is executed.

After the processing of S2113 is completed, next command determination processing is executed (S2114). Details of this command determination process (S2114) will be described later with reference to FIG. After executing the command determination process (S2114), the variable display setting process is executed (S2115). In the variable display setting process, a variable pattern command for display is generated and set based on the variable pattern command received from the main controller 110 in order to cause the third symbol display device 81 to perform a variable effect. As a result, the command is sent to display controller 114 . The details of this variable display setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

When the process of S2115 is finished, it is determined whether or not the work RAM 233 stores power-off occurrence information (S2116). The power-off occurrence information is stored when a power-off command is received from main controller 110 . If power-off occurrence information is stored in the processing of S2116 (S2116: Yes), both the power-off flag and the power-off processing flag are turned on (S2118), and the power-off processing is executed (S2119). After the power-off processing is executed, the power-off processing flag is turned off (S2120), and then the processing is looped infinitely. In the power-off processing, interrupt processing is prohibited, each output port is turned off, and outputs from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are turned off. In addition, the memory of information on occurrence of power failure is also erased.

On the other hand, if the power-off occurrence information is not stored in the process of S2116 (S2116: No), it is determined whether or not the RAM 223 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (S2117), and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (S2117: No), the process returns to S2101, and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 is destroyed (S2117: Yes), the process is looped infinitely to stop execution of subsequent processes. Here, since the main processing is not executed when it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and the loop is infinitely looped, the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change after that. Therefore, since the player can know that an abnormality has occurred, the player can call the hall clerk or the like and ask them to repair the pachinko machine 10 or the like. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, the RAM destruction may be notified by the voice output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 .

Next, the command determination process (S2114) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 195 is a flow chart showing this command determination process (S2114). This command determination process (S2114) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 194) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp controller 113, and as described above, determines the command received from the main controller 110. .

In the command determination process (S2114: FIG. 195), first, among the unprocessed commands, the first command received from the main controller 110 is read from the command storage area provided in the RAM 223, analyzed, and It is determined whether or not a variation pattern command has been received (S2201). When a variation pattern command is received (S2201: Yes), the variation start flag 223d is set to ON (S2202), a variation pattern is extracted from the received command (S2003), and this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S2201, when the variation pattern command is not received (S2201: No), it is determined whether or not the stop type command is received (S2204). When the stop type command is received (S2204: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223e provided in the RAM 223 is turned on (S2205), the stop type is extracted from the received command (S2206), and this process is finished. .

In the processing of S2204, if the stop type command is not received (S2204: No), it is determined whether or not the pending ball count command is received (S2207). When the reserved ball number command is received (S2207: Yes), the number of reserved balls is extracted from the received command, and the corresponding special symbol reserved ball number counter (special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223a, special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223a The number is stored in the number counter 223b) (S2208), and the process ends. Here, the number of reserved balls corresponding to the first special symbol is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223a, and the number of reserved balls corresponding to the second special symbol is stored in the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223b. Stored. Further, when receiving a reserved ball number command indicating the reserved ball number of normal symbols, information for indicating the reserved ball number is stored in the normal reserved ball number counter.

On the other hand, in the process of S2207, if the command for the number of pending balls has not been received (S2207: No), it is determined whether or not the winning-related command has been received (S2209). If the winning-related command is received (S2209: Yes), the winning-information related process is started (S2210), and this process ends. Details of the winning information related processing (S2210) will be described later with reference to FIG. Based on, the winning information included in the winning command is pre-determined, the processing of executing the effect (pre-reading effect) based on the result of the pre-determination, and the processing of temporarily storing the result of the pre-determination are executed. be done.

In the process of S2209, if the winning-related command has not been received (S2209: No), then it is determined whether or not the jackpot-related command has been received (S2211), and if it is determined that it has been received (S2211: Yes) , a jackpot-related process is executed (S2212), and the process ends. This jackpot related process (S2212) will be described later with reference to FIG.

In the process of S2211, when it is determined that the jackpot-related command has not been received (S2211: No), it is determined whether a stop command has been received (S2213). If it is determined that a stop command has been received (S2213: Yes), stop processing is executed (S2214), and this processing is executed. This stop processing (S2214) will be described later with reference to FIG. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S2213 that the stop command has not been received (S2213: No), this processing ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 196, winning information related processing (S2210), which is part of the command determination processing (S2114: see FIG. 195) executed by MPU 221 in sound lamp control device 113, will be described. FIG. 195 is a flow chart showing this winning information related process (S2210). This winning information related process (S2210) is executed in the command determination process (see FIG. 195) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113. FIG.

In the winning information related process (S2210), first, the winning information included in the received winning information command is read (S2301), and the pending display mode is determined based on the winning/failure determination result included in the read winning information (S2302).

Then, a display command for indicating the pending display mode determined in the process of S2302 is set (S2303). Next, it is determined whether or not the continuous notice flag 223v is ON (S2304), and if it is determined that the continuous notice flag 223v is ON (S2304: Yes), this processing is terminated as it is, and the continuous notice is being executed. If it is determined that the flag 223v is off (S2304: No), the presence or absence of the continuous announcement effect is determined based on the winning information read in the process of S2301 (S2305), and the process proceeds to S2306.

In the process of S2306, it is determined whether or not there is a continuous announcement effect (S2306). If it is determined that there is no continuous announcement effect (S2306: No), this process is terminated as it is, and if it is determined that there is a continuous announcement effect (S2306: Yes), the continuous announcement setting flag 223t is set to ON ( S2307), the number of times until the special figure fluctuation corresponding to the target winning information is set to the value of the continuous notice counter 223u (S2308), and then this process is terminated.

Next, with reference to FIG. 197, the contents of the jackpot related process (S2212 in FIG. 197) will be described. FIG. 197 is a flow chart showing the contents of the jackpot related process (S2212). This jackpot-related processing (S2212) is executed in the command determination processing (see S2114 in FIG. 195) of the sound lamp control device 113, and is related to the hit (jackpot, small hit) from the main controller 110. It is executed when a command is received.

In this control example, when a big win C is won by lottery of special symbols and when a small win is won, the third electric accessory 82a (see FIG. 207) provided in the left area of the game board 13 is opened. A winning game (left winning game) is executed, and when big wins A, B, D and E are won by lottery of special symbols, a variable winning device 65 provided in the right area of the game board 13 is opened. It is configured to execute a winning game (right winning game), and in the jackpot related process (S2212 in FIG. 197), a display command for displaying information on the winning game on the third symbol display device 81 is set. It is configured such that a process and a different winning effect depending on the type of the winning game to be executed are executed.

When the jackpot related process (S2212 in FIG. 197) is executed, first, it is determined whether the command received this time is an opening command (S2401). If it is determined to be an opening command (S2401: Yes), an opening command for display is set (S2402), and this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the command received this time is not the opening command (S2401: No), then it is determined whether the command received this time is the number of rounds command (S2403), and it is determined that it is the number of rounds command. If so (S2403: Yes), the value of the round number counter 223x is incremented by 1 (S2404), a display round number command is set based on the value of the round number counter 223x (S2405), and this process ends.

In the processing of S2403, if it is determined that the command received this time is not the round number command (S2403: No), it is determined whether the command received this time is the ending command (S2406), and it is determined that it is the ending command. If so (S2406: Yes), a display ending command is set (S2407), the value of the round number counter 223x is set to 0 (S2408), and this processing ends. again. If it is determined in the process of S2406 that no ending command has been received (S2406: No), it is determined whether the command received this time is a V pass command (S2409). (S2409: Yes), a V effect command is set (S2410), and this process ends. If it is determined in the processing of S2409 that the V passage command has not been received (S2409: No), this processing ends.

Next, the contents of the stop processing (S2214) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 198 is a flow chart showing the contents of the stop processing (S2214). In this stop process (S2214), a process for setting the display mode of the third symbol to be stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the timing of stopping the fluctuation of the special symbol is executed.

When this stop process (S2214) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the value of the continuous notice counter 223u is greater than 0 (S2501). If it is determined that the value of the continuous notice counter 223u is 0 or less (S2501: No), the process proceeds to S2505. If it is determined that the value of the continuous notice counter 223u is greater than 0 (S2501: Yes), 1 is subtracted from the value of the continuous notice counter 223u (S2502), and then whether or not the value of the continuous notice counter 223u is 0 is determined (S2503). If it is determined that the value of the continuous notice counter 223u is not 0 (S2503: No), the process proceeds to S2505. When it is determined that the value of the continuous notice counter 223u is 0 (S2503: Yes), the continuous notice flag 223v is set to OFF (S2504), and the process proceeds to S2505. In the processing of S2505, the stop display of the corresponding third symbol is set (S2505), and then the processing is terminated.

Next, the variable display setting process (S2115) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 199 is a flow chart showing this variable display setting process (S2115). This variable display setting process (S2115) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 194) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, and in order to execute the variable effect in the third symbol display device 81, Based on the variation pattern command received from main controller 110, a variation pattern command for display is generated and set.

In the variable display setting process (S2115: FIG. 199), first, it is determined whether or not the variable start flag 223d provided in the RAM 223 is ON (S2601). Then, if it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223d is not ON (that is, it is OFF) (S2601: No), since the fluctuation pattern command is not received from the main controller 110, S2612 Go to processing. On the other hand, if it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223d is on (S2601: Yes), the fluctuation start flag 223d is turned off (S2602), and the fluctuation pattern type in the fluctuation effect extracted from the display fluctuation pattern command is Acquired from the RAM 223 (S2603).

Next, it is determined whether or not the continuous notice setting flag 223t is ON (S2604). If it is determined that the continuous notice setting flag 223t is ON (S2604: Yes), the continuous notice setting flag 223t is set to OFF. Then (S2609), the continuous notice flag 223v is set to ON (S2610), and the process proceeds to S2608.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S2604 that the continuous notice setting flag 223t is off (S2604: No), then it is determined whether or not the continuous notice flag 223v is on (S2605). If it is determined that the continuous notice flag 223v is ON (S2605: Yes), the effect mode is determined based on the acquired variation pattern and the continuous notice effect (S2611), and the process proceeds to S2608. In the process of S2605, if it is determined that the continuous notice flag 223v is off (S2605: No), the variation effect pattern selection table 222a (FIGS. 160(a) and (b)) is changed based on the acquired variation pattern. A variable effect pattern is selected by referring to it (2606). Next, the production mode setting process is executed (S2607), and based on the acquired variation pattern type, a display variation pattern command for notification to the display control device 114 is generated, and the command is transmitted to the display control device 114 (S2608). The details of the rendering mode setting process executed in the process of S2607 will be described later with reference to FIG.

In the display control device 114, by receiving this display variation pattern command, the third pattern display device 81 performs the variation display of the third pattern in the variation pattern indicated by this display variation pattern command, Display control of the variable effect is started.

Next, although not shown, the data stored in the winning information storage area 223f is shifted. In this process, the data stored in the first to fourth areas of the winning information storage area 223f are sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the data in each area is shifted in the order of 1st area→execution area, 2nd area→1st area, 3rd area→2nd area, 4th area→3rd area. After shifting the data, the process proceeds to S2612.

In the processing of S2612, it is determined whether or not the stop type selection flag 223e provided in the RAM 223 is ON (S2612). Then, if it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223e is not ON (that is, it is OFF) (S2612: No), this processing is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223e is on (S2612: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223e is turned off (S2613), and the stop type in the variable effect extracted from the stop type command is Acquired from the RAM 223 (S2614). Next, the stop type instructed by the stop type command from the main controller 110 is set as it is as the stop type of the variable effect in the third symbol display device 81 (S2615), and the process proceeds to S2616.

In the process of S2616, based on the set stop type, a display stop type command for notification to the display control device 114 is generated, and the command is set for transmission to the display control device 114 (S2616). . In the display control device 114, by receiving this stop type command for display, the stop pattern corresponding to the stop type indicated by this stop type command for display is stopped and displayed on the third pattern display device 81. The stop display of the variable production is controlled. After the process of S2616 is executed, this process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 200, the content of the presentation mode setting process (S2607), which is one process in the variable display setting process (see FIG. 199) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, will be described. . FIG. 200 is a flow chart showing the details of the rendering mode setting process (S2607). In this effect mode setting process (S2607), a process for setting a detailed effect mode (announcement content) of the variation effect of the third symbol corresponding to the variation of the special symbol is executed.

When the effect mode setting process (S2607) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the current game state is the normal state (S2701). Here, based on the information set in the state setting area 223g, it is determined whether or not the current game state is the variable probability state. In the process of S2701, when it is determined that the current state is not normal (S2701: No), the effect setting process during time saving and probability variation is executed (S2707), and the process proceeds to S2706. The details of the effect setting processing (S2707) during this time saving/probability variation will be described later with reference to FIG.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2701 that the current state is the normal state (S2701: Yes), then it is determined whether there is an operation effect in the variation effect pattern selected this time (S2702), and if there is an operation effect When it is determined (S2702: Yes), an operation effect setting process is executed (S2703), and the process proceeds to S2704. Details of the operation effect setting process (S2703) will be described later with reference to FIG.

In the processing of S2702, if it is determined that the currently selected variable performance pattern does not include an operation performance (S2702: No), then it is determined whether or not the currently selected variable performance pattern includes a battle performance (S2704). If it is determined that there is a battle effect (S2704: Yes), a battle effect setting process is executed (S2705), and the process proceeds to S2706. Details of the battle effect setting process (S2705) will be described later with reference to FIG.

In the process of S2704, if it is determined that the variable effect pattern selected this time does not include the battle effect (S2704: No), a display command for indicating various setting contents is set (S2706), and this process is executed. finish.

Next, with reference to FIG. 201, the contents of the operation effect setting process (S2703) executed in the effect mode setting process (see S2607 in FIG. 200) will be described. FIG. 201 is a flow chart showing the contents of the operation effect setting process (S2703). In this operation effect setting process (S2703), a preparatory process corresponding to the operation effect type included in the current variation pattern is executed.

When the operation effect setting process (S2703) is executed, first, the type of operation effect is extracted (S2801), and it is determined whether or not the current operation effect is a repeated hit effect (S2802), and it is determined that it is a repeated hit effect. If so (S2801: Yes), a repeated hit effect setting process is executed (S2803), and the process proceeds to S2807. The details of the repeated hit effect setting process (S2803) will be described later with reference to FIG.

On the other hand, in the processing of S2801, if it is determined that it is not a continuous hit effect (S2801: No), then it is determined whether the current operation effect is a delayed effect (S2804), and if it is determined that it is a delayed effect (S2804: Yes), a delay effect setting process is executed (S2805), and the process proceeds to S2807. The details of this delay effect setting process (S2805) will be described later with reference to FIG.

On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S2804 that the effect is not delayed (S2804: No), the process corresponding to the extracted other operation effect type is executed (S2806), and the process proceeds to S2807.

In the process of S2807, the operation effective period is determined based on the selected variable effect mode (S2807), and the process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 202, the content of the continuous hitting effect setting process (S2803) executed in the operation effect setting process (see FIG. 201, S2703) will be described. FIG. 202 is a flow chart showing the contents of the repeated hit effect setting process (S2803).

When the continuous hit effect setting process (S2803) is executed, first, based on the received variation pattern command, the success judgment result and the reach type are extracted (S2901), and the extracted success judgment result, the reach type, and the second effect counter and the upper limit number of times selection table 222b1 (see FIG. 162(b)) to determine the upper limit number of times and the final variable mode (S2902). Next, a value corresponding to the determined upper limit number of times is set in the upper limit number of times setting area 223q (S2903), and the extracted success/failure determination result, the determined upper limit number of times, and the value of the third effect counter are referred to, and the end number of times The selection table 222b2 (see FIG. 163(a)) is used to determine the end count (S2904), and a value corresponding to the determined upper limit count is set in the end count setting area 223r (S2905). Next, referring to the extracted success/failure determination result and the determined upper limit number of times, the effect result is determined (S2906), the effect mode of repeated hit effect corresponding to various determined contents is set (S2907), and the effect selection information is stored. Information about the mode of presentation set in the area is stored (S2908), and then this processing ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 203, the contents of the delay effect setting process (S2805) executed in the operation effect setting process (see FIG. 201, S2703) will be described. FIG. 203 is a flow chart showing the contents of the delay effect setting process (S2805).

When the delay effect setting process (S2805) is executed, first, the success/failure determination result is extracted based on the received variation pattern command (S3001), and the extracted success/failure determination result and the value of the seventh effect counter 223p7 are referred to. Then, using the delay effect selection table 222d (see FIG. 167), the delay period and the delay object are determined (S3002), and the information regarding the set effect mode is stored in the effect selection information storage area 223h (S3003). , and then terminate this process.

In this control example, as described above, the contents of the delay effect and the delay object are set at the start of the fluctuation, and the start timing of the delay effect is set in the frame button input monitoring/effect processing (see S2107 in FIG. 208), which will be described later. However, without being limited to this, it may be configured to set the start timing of the delay effect as the start timing of the fluctuation. By configuring in this way, more delayed effects can be executed, and various effects can be provided to the player.

Next, with reference to FIG. 204, the contents of the battle effect setting process (S2705) executed in the effect mode setting process (see S2607 in FIG. 200) will be described. FIG. 204 is a flow chart showing the contents of the battle effect setting process (S2705). In this battle effect setting process (S2705), first, the success/failure determination result and the variation time are extracted based on the received variation pattern command (S3101), and the extracted success/failure determination result, the variation time, and the eighth effect counter , the number of characters and the number of characters are determined using the character number selection table 222e2 (see FIG. 168(c)) (S3102). (S3103), the character storage area 222e1 (FIG. 168(b)) is referred to, and the pattern row arrangement information of the determined character type is compared with the number of effects (S3104). Next, it is determined whether or not there is a pattern row for which the number of characters determined is greater than the number of effects (S3105). If it is determined that there is a pattern row in which the number of characters determined is greater than the number of appearances (S3105: Yes), the effect mode corresponding to the last acquisition chance is determined (S3106), and the process proceeds to S3107. If it is determined that there is no symbol row for which the number of characters determined is greater than the number of appearances (S3105: No), the process of S3106 is skipped and the process proceeds to S3107.

In the processing of S3107, the effect mode of each effect is determined (S3107), the effect mode of the collective effect corresponding to various determined contents is set (S3108), and information on the effect mode set in the effect selection information storage area 223h is stored. Then (S3109), a battle second half effect setting process is executed (S3110), and then this process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 205, the contents of the battle second half effect setting process (S3110) executed in the battle effect setting process (see S2705 in FIG. 204) will be described. FIG. 205 is a flow chart showing the contents of the battle second half effect setting process (S3110). In this battle second half effect setting process (S3110), first, the number of characters to be acquired in the group effect is read out from the effect selection information storage area 223h (S3151), and the success/failure determination result, the number of characters, and the value of the ninth effect counter are read out. , the HP selection table 222f1 (see FIG. 169(b)) is used to determine the HP value of the battle opponent (S3152). The final remaining HP selection table 222f2 (see FIG. 169(c)) is referred to and the effect counter value is used to determine the remaining HP value (S3153). , and the value of the eleventh effect counter, the battle mode selection table 222f3 (see FIG. 170) is used to determine the number of battles (S3154). Next, based on the determined HP value and the remaining HP value, a reduced HP value to be decreased in the latter half of the battle production is determined (S3155), and based on the determined number of battles and the reduced HP value, each battle production is performed. is determined (S3156), the effect mode of repeated hitting effect corresponding to various determined contents is set (S3157), information on the effect mode set in the effect selection information storage area 223h is stored (S3158), and this process exit.

Next, with reference to FIG. 206, the contents of the effect setting process (S2707) for time reduction/probability variation executed in the effect mode setting process (see S2607 in FIG. 200) will be described. Figure 206 is the flowchart which shows the contents of production setting processing for time saving and probability variation (S2707). In this time saving/probability variation production setting process (S2707), first, it is determined whether or not the continuous production flag is ON (S3201). If it is determined that the continuous effect flag is ON (S3201: Yes), this process is terminated. If it is determined that the continuous effect flag is off (S3201: No), then it is determined whether or not the acquired variation pattern has a random display effect (S3202). If it is determined that there is no random display effect in the acquired variation pattern (S3202: No), this process is terminated. When it is determined that the acquired variation pattern has a random display effect (S3202: Yes), a random display effect setting process is executed (S3203), and this process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 207, the contents of the random display effect setting process (S3203) executed in the time saving/probability variable effect setting process (see S2707 in FIG. 207) will be described. FIG. 207 is a flow chart showing the contents of the random display effect setting process (S3203). In this random display effect setting process (S3203), first, the success/failure determination result is extracted based on the received variation pattern command (S3301). Using the display order selection table 222c2 (see FIG. 164(c)), the effect icon (top icon) to be displayed first is determined (S3302), and the extracted right/fail judgment result, the determined top icon, and the fifth effect Refer to the value of the counter, determine the permutation using the display mode selection table 222c4 (see FIG. 165(b)) (S3303), and refer to the extracted success/failure determination result and the value of the sixth effect counter. Then, using the display number selection table 222c5 (see FIG. 166), the number of display icons for the effect is determined (S3304), the effect mode of the random display effect corresponding to various determined contents is set (S3305), and the effect is selected. Information related to the effect mode set in the information storage area 223h is stored (S3306), and then this process is terminated.

Next, with reference to FIG. 208, the frame button input monitoring/effect processing (S2107), which is one of the main processing (see FIG. 194) executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113, will be described. FIG. 208 is a flow chart showing this frame button input monitoring/effect processing (S2107). In the frame button input monitoring/effect processing (S2107), it is determined whether or not the frame button 22 has been pressed, and execution of a notice effect or the like is set based on the depression.

In the frame button input monitoring/effect processing (S2107: see FIG. 208), first, it is determined whether or not the frame button 22 has been operated (S3401), and if it is determined that the frame button 22 has not been operated (S3401: No). , the process ends. If it is determined that the frame button 22 has been operated (S3401: Yes), it is determined whether the operation valid period is currently in effect (S3402). In the process of S3402, when the type of operation effect is set in the operation effect setting process (S2703 in FIG. 201), the operation effective period corresponding to the type is set in the operation effective timer 223n. indicates the operation validity period.

In the process of S3402, if it is determined that the operation valid period is not in effect (S3402: No), this process ends. If it is determined that the operation is valid (S3402: Yes), then it is determined whether the pressed flag 223k is set to ON (S3403), and if it is determined that the pressed flag 223k is ON (S3403: Yes), this process is terminated as it is. If it is determined that the pressed flag 223k is not set to ON (S3403: No), the pressed flag 223k is set to ON (S3404), and the operation content corresponding to the set operation valid period is read ( S3405), then, it is determined whether or not the operation content is a repeated hitting effect (S3406). If it is determined that the effect is repeated (S3406: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the number-of-presses counter 223m (S3407), and the process proceeds to S3411.

On the other hand, in the processing of S3406, if it is determined that the operation content is not the continuous hit effect (S3406: No), then it is determined whether or not the operation content is the delay effect (S3408). If it is determined that it is a delayed effect (S3408: Yes), a value corresponding to the delay period is set in the delay timer 223s (S3409), and then it is determined whether the voice mode of the delay effect content this time is delayed. (S3413). When it is determined that the voice mode is not delayed (that is, normal) (S3413: No), a voice command corresponding to the effect mode of delayed effect is set (S3414), and the process proceeds to S3411. On the other hand, when it is determined that the voice mode of the delay effect content this time is delayed (S3413: No), the process of S3414 is skipped and the process proceeds to S3411.

On the other hand, in the process of S3408, when it is determined that the operation content is not the delay effect (S3408: No), other processing corresponding to the operation content is executed (S3410), and the process proceeds to S3411. In the process of S3411, the operation mode corresponding to the current frame button operation is determined (S3411), the display command corresponding to the determined operation mode is set (S3412), and then this process ends.

In this control example, an example is shown in which a variable condition for varying the presentation mode of the operation presentation is established based on one operation (pressing) of the frame button 22, but the present invention is not limited to this. , the variable condition may be established when the frame button 22 is operated (pressed) a predetermined number of times (for example, 20 times) within the operation valid period, or an operation means having a plurality of operation methods may be provided, The variable condition may be established when the operation means is operated in a specific operation method.

Furthermore, in this control example, one flag (pressed flag 223k) is set to ON to indicate that the operation means has been operated. Alternatively, it may be configured to indicate different operation results, and to vary the presentation mode of the operation presentation in accordance with the type of the operation result.

Further, in this control example, the display effect displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is used as an example of the operation effect in which the effect mode is changed based on the operation of the operation means. However, without being limited to this, it may be configured to execute an effect of moving a decorative movable device provided in the pachinko machine 10 based on the operation of the frame button 22 (operating means).

In this control example, when the frame button 22 is operated when an operation effect other than the first operation effect or the second operation effect is being executed, an operation mode corresponding to the set operation effective period is determined. (see S3411 in FIG. 208), but other configurations may be used.

Specifically, within the effect period of the display effect executed by the third pattern display device 81, an operation valid period is set in which the operation of the frame button 22 (operation means) can be effectively determined, and the set operation is performed. The value of the operation valid timer 223n is set to determine the valid period. Then, storage means for storing the length of the set operation effective period and calculation means for calculating the remaining period of the operation effective period based on the value of the operation effective timer 223n at the time when the operation means is operated are provided. Further, it is preferable to provide an operation mode selection table in which different operation modes are defined according to the length of the remaining period calculated by the calculating means.

By configuring in this way, different operation modes are selected according to the timing at which the player operates the operation means (according to the remaining time at the time of operating the operation means), so that a variety of effects can be provided to the player. can provide.

In addition, an operation valid period setting means that can determine one operation valid period from among a plurality of operation valid periods and can be set within the effect period of the display effect, and an operation valid timer 223n at the time when the operation means is operated. and calculating means for calculating the progress rate (%) of the valid operation period based on the value of . By configuring in this way, it is possible to set different operation valid periods for display effects of the same display mode, and furthermore, based on the length of the set operation valid period and the timing of operating the operation means. The progress rate of the calculated valid period of operation, that is, the length of the entire valid period of operation is assumed to be 100, and the ratio of the period that has already passed (or the period that has not yet passed) is calculated as a percentage. The manner in which the operations are performed can be different.

As a result, even if the operation means are operated at the same timing based on the display performance executed by the third pattern display device 81, different operation modes can be set, thereby providing more diverse performances to the player. be able to.

Further, the operation mode is set according to the percentage value calculated by the calculating means instead of setting the operation mode according to the length of the remaining period (elapsed period) of the operation effective period. The range defined in the data table for selection can be limited to "1 to 100". In other words, when setting the operation mode according to the length of the remaining period (elapsed period) of the operation valid period, for example, when the length of the operation valid period can be set from 2 to 15 seconds, 6 seconds When the operation means is operated in the 3rd second when is set (remaining time 3 seconds), and when the operation means is operated in the 7th second when 14 seconds is set (remaining time 7 seconds) Since the remaining time differs between , and , different operation modes are set.

In addition, in the above-described examples, the operation means is operated at the midpoint of the operation effective period in any case, and the operation difficulty level is the same. It is necessary to define a data table so as to select an operation mode based not only on the remaining time of the effective period but also on the length of the set operation effective period and the remaining time of the operation effective period at the time when the operation means is operated. There is

In this case, if the length of the valid period of operation is set to be variable, the capacity of the data table described above will increase significantly, resulting in a situation where the data capacity is compressed. . On the other hand, by configuring the operation mode to be selected using a percentage value as described above, the same value can be used regardless of the length of the operation valid period, so that the operation mode can be selected. It is possible to reduce the data capacity of the data table for

In addition, as a dividing means for dividing the percentage value calculated by the calculating means into a plurality of ranges, for example, a first dividing means for dividing into "1% to 50%" and "51% to 99%", "1% to 10%", "11% to 20%", "21% to 30%", "41% to 50%", "51% to 60%", "61% to 70%" and "71 % to 80%", "81% to 90%", and "91% to 99%", and further, based on the presence or absence of establishment of predetermined conditions such as the result of lottery of special symbols. The percentage value calculated by the calculating means is divided by the dividing means determined by the determining means, and the operation mode is selected based on the divided information. It may be configured to

Further, in this way, when using a configuration in which the operation mode to be executed thereafter is varied according to the operation timing of the operation means, for example, the pachinko machine as the operation effect to be executed by operating the operation means It is preferable to use the effect of moving the movable accessory for effect provided in 10 . As a result, it is possible to perform the operation presentation without worrying about the period of the operation presentation executed based on the set operation mode and the display presentation period displayed on the display means.

Next, with reference to FIG. 209, the contents of the liquid crystal effect execution management process (S2110) will be described. FIG. 209 is a flow chart showing the contents of the liquid crystal presentation execution management process (S2110). In the liquid crystal effect execution management process (S2110), the process of updating the effect mode of the special figure variation effect being executed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a predetermined variation pattern, and the effect mode of the special figure variation effect A process for replacing with an effect (normal pattern effect) based on the normal symbol lottery is executed.

When the liquid crystal effect execution management process (S2110) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not there is an operation effect in the variable effect being executed (S3501). When it is determined that there is no operation effect in the variable effect being executed (S3501: No), the process proceeds to S3511. If it is determined that there is an operation effect in the variable effect being executed (S3501: Yes), then it is determined whether or not it is 3 seconds before the operation effective period (S3502). If it is determined that it is 3 seconds before the operation valid period (S3502: Yes), a display command indicating that the operation valid period is set is set (S3503), and the process proceeds to S3511. If it is determined that it is not 3 seconds before the valid operation period (S3502: No), then it is determined whether or not the valid operation period has started (S3504). If it is determined that the operation valid period has not started (S3504: No), the process of S3505 is skipped and the process proceeds to S3506. If it is determined that the valid operation period has started (S3504: Yes), a value corresponding to the length of the valid operation period set this time is set in the operation valid timer 223n (S3505), and the process proceeds to S3506. .

In the process of S3506, it is determined whether or not the value of the delay timer 223s is greater than 0 (S3506). If it is determined that the value of the delay timer 223s is 0 (S3506: No), the process proceeds to S3510. If it is determined that the value of the delay timer 223s is greater than 0 (S3506: Yes), 1 is subtracted from the value of the delay timer 223s (S3507), and then whether or not the subtracted value of the delay timer 223s is 0 is determined. It is determined (S3508). If it is determined that the subtracted value of the delay timer 223s is not 0 (S3508: No), the process proceeds to S3510. When it is determined that the value of the delay timer 223s is 0 (S3508: Yes), the start of the corresponding delay effect is set (S3509), and the process proceeds to S3510. In the process of S3510, another liquid crystal effect execution management process is executed (S3510), and this process ends.

In the process of S3511, another liquid crystal effect execution management process is executed (S3511), and this process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 210, the content of the operation effect management process (S2111) will be described. FIG. 210 is a flow chart showing the contents of the operation effect management process (S2111). In this operation effect management process (S2111), a process for setting an effect mode based on the operation of the frame button 22 is executed while the operation effect is being executed.

When the operation effect management process (S2111) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the value of the operation valid timer 223n is greater than 0 (S3601). Then, if it is determined that the value of the operation valid timer 223n is 0 (S3601: No), this process is terminated. If it is determined that the value of the operation valid timer 223n is greater than 0 (S3601: Yes), 1 is subtracted from the value of the operation valid timer 223n (S3602). (S3603). Then, when it is determined that the value of the operation valid timer 223n is not 0 (S3603: No), the process proceeds to S3609. If it is determined that the value of the operation valid timer 223n is 0 (S3603: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the shortening flag is ON (S3604). If it is determined that the shortening flag is ON (S3604: Yes), the shortening flag is set to OFF (S3605), and the process proceeds to S3606. If it is determined that the shortening flag is off (S3604: No), the process of S3605 is skipped and the process proceeds to S3606.

In the processing of S3606, it is determined whether or not the value of the delay timer 223s is greater than 0 (S3606). If it is determined that the value of the delay timer 223s is 0 (S3606: No), a display command indicating that the valid operation period has expired is set (S3607), and the process proceeds to S3609. If it is determined that the value of the delay timer 223s is greater than 0 (S3606: Yes), a display command is set to extend and display the display screen showing the effective period of operation (S3608), and the process proceeds to S3609. do.

In the process of S3609, it is determined whether the pressed flag 223k is set to ON (S3609). If it is determined that the pressed flag 223k is set to OFF (S3609: No), the process proceeds to S3623. If it is determined that the pressed flag 223k is set to ON (S3609: Yes), the pressed flag 223k is set to OFF (S3610), the value of the pressed count counter 223m is read (S3611), and then the pressed It is determined whether or not the value of the number counter 223m is greater than 0 (S3612). Then, when it is determined that the value of the number-of-presses counter 223m is greater than 0 (S3612: Yes), the value stored in the upper-limit number-of-times setting area 223q is compared with the value of the number-of-presses counter 223m (S3613), Next, it is determined whether or not the value stored in the limit number setting area 223q matches the value of the pressing number counter 223m (S3614). If it is determined that the value stored in the limit setting area 223q and the value of the pressing counter 223m match (S3614: Yes), a display command indicating that the upper limit has been reached is issued. set (S3515) and proceed to the processing of S3620. If it is determined that the value stored in the limit number setting area 223q and the value of the press counter 223m do not match (S3614: No), the value stored in the end number setting area 223r and the press The value of the number counter 223m is compared (S3616), and it is determined whether the value stored in the end number setting area 223r and the value of the number of depression counter 223m match (S3617). If it is determined that the value stored in the end count setting area 223r and the value of the press count counter 223m match (S3617: Yes), the value of the press count counter 223m is reset (S3618), and the shortening flag is set. is turned on (S3619), and the process proceeds to S3620. If it is determined that the value stored in the end count setting area 223r and the value of the press count counter 223m do not match (S3617: No), the processing of S3618 and S3619 is skipped and the process proceeds to S3620. .

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of 3612 that the value of the number-of-presses counter 223m is 0 (S3612: No), then it is determined whether or not the shortening flag is ON (S3621). When it is determined that the shortening flag is ON (S3621: Yes), the specific effect is determined (S3622), and the process proceeds to S3623. If it is determined that the shortening flag is off (S3621: No), the corresponding button effect is set (S3620), and the process proceeds to S3623.

In the process of S3623, a display effect command corresponding to each set effect mode is set (S3623), and this process ends.

<Regarding control processing in the display control device 114>
Next, each control executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIGS. 211 to 225. FIG. The processing of the MPU 231 can be broadly classified into main processing that is repeatedly executed after the power is turned on, command interrupt processing that is executed when a command is received from the audio lamp control device 113, and processing for one frame from the image controller 237. There is V interrupt processing that is executed when the MPU 231 detects a V interrupt signal that is transmitted every 20 milliseconds when image drawing processing is completed. The MPU 231 normally executes main processing, and executes command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing in accordance with reception of a command and detection of a V interrupt signal. If command reception and V interrupt signal detection are performed at the same time, command reception processing is preferentially executed. As a result, it is possible to quickly reflect the content of the command received from the sound lamp control device 113 and execute the V interrupt process.

First, with reference to FIG. 211, main processing executed by the MPU 231 in the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 211 is a flow chart showing this main process. The main processing is to execute initialization processing when the power is turned on.

Activation of this main process is specifically performed according to the following flow. When power is turned on from the power supply circuit 115 to the display control device 114 and the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the instruction pointer 231a provided in the MPU 231 to "0000H" and , the address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a is specified for the bus line 240. FIG. When the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address designated on the bus line 240 is "0000H", it sets the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d in the buffer RAM 234c. , and outputs the corresponding data (instruction code) to the MPU 231 . Then, the MPU 231 fetches the received instruction code from the character ROM 234, and starts the main process by starting the execution of the process according to the fetched instruction.

Here, if all the boot programs to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the character ROM 234 indicates that the address designated to the bus line 240 is "0000H". When detected, one page of data including the data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" must be read from the NAND flash memory 234a and set in the buffer RAM 234c. Due to the nature of the NAND type flash memory 234a, it takes a long time to read out and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. It will consume a lot of waiting time. Therefore, the time taken to start the MPU 231 becomes longer, and as a result, there arises a problem that the control of the third pattern display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

On the other hand, as in the present control example, the NOR ROM 234d stores a predetermined number of instructions from the boot program that should be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is canceled, thereby speeding up the NOR ROM. Since it is a memory from which data can be read, when the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 is immediately stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d. The stored boot program can be set in the buffer RAM 234 c and the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231 . Therefore, since the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after specifying the address "0000H", the MPU 231 can start the main process in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the control of the third pattern display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

When the main process is executed as described above, first, the boot process executed by the boot program is executed (S6001), and the display control device 114 is set so that various controls for the third symbol display device 81 can be executed. to start.

Here, referring to FIG. 212, the boot processing (S6001) will be described. FIG. 212 is a flowchart showing boot processing (S6001) executed in the main processing in the MPU 231 of the display control device 114. FIG.

As described above, in this control example, the control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 231 are stored in the third symbol display device 81 instead of being stored in a dedicated program ROM as in the conventional gaming machine. The character ROM 234 provided for storing the data of the image to be displayed is stored. The character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND-type flash memory 234a capable of increasing the capacity with a small area. There is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing programs and the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in failure rate due to an increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

On the other hand, the NAND flash memory has a slow read speed, especially when performing random access. Even if a high-performance processor is used, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may deteriorate. Therefore, in this boot process, the control program and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are stored in the program storage area 233a provided in the work RAM 233 constituted by DRAM and the data table. A process of transferring and storing in the storage area 233b is executed.

Specifically, first, based on the hardware operations of the MPU 231 and the character ROM 234 described above, the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR-type ROM 234d and set in the buffer RAM 234c after the system reset is canceled is executed. Of the control programs stored in the 2-program storage area 234a1, a predetermined amount is transferred to the program storage area 233a (S6101). The predetermined amount of control programs transferred here includes the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1.

Then, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, the head address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a (S6102). As a result, the MPU 231 starts executing the rest of the boot program included in the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a by the process of S6101.

By setting the command pointer 231a to a predetermined address in the program storage area 233a by the processing of S6102, the MPU 231 can execute various processes while reading the control program stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. become. That is, the MPU 231 does not read the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetch the instruction, but rather reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction. and execute various processing. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of a DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch the instruction at high speed and execute the process for the instruction.

After the command pointer 231a is set by the process of S6102, the remaining boot program whose execution is started by the set command pointer 231a is stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a. Of the control programs stored, the remaining control programs and fixed value data that have not been transferred to the program storage area 233a are transferred by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b (S6103). Specifically, the control program and some fixed data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233, and the above-mentioned various data tables (display data table, transfer data table) of the fixed value data are stored in the data table. Transfer to the storage area 233b.

After executing other processes necessary for the boot process (S6104), the instruction pointer 231a is moved to the second predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, after the boot process (see S6001 in FIG. 211) is completed. By setting the top address of the program corresponding to the initializing process (see S6002 in FIG. 211) (S6105), the execution of the boot program is finished, and the boot process ends.

By executing the boot process (S6001) in this way, the control program and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are stored in the work RAM 233, which is composed entirely of DRAM. It is transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table storage area 233b. At the end of the boot process, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address, and thereafter the MPU 231 reads the control program transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Various processing is executed using

Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a whose read speed is slow, the control program and fixed value data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 and the fixed value data after the system reset is released. By transferring to the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 can read the control program and fixed value data from the work RAM configured by the DRAM with a high read speed and perform various controls. High processing performance can be maintained, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed using the auxiliary effect part.

On the other hand, without storing the entire boot program in the NOR type ROM 234d, a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, and the rest of the boot program is stored in the NAND type flash memory 234a. , the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start up the MPU 231 in a short time simply by adding a NOR type ROM 234d with a very small capacity. can be done.

In the boot process shown in FIG. 212, the predetermined amount of control programs transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S6101 includes all remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. However, it is not necessarily limited to this. may be part of As for the boot program transferred here, a predetermined amount of the control program including all remaining boot programs is transferred to the program storage area 233a. 231a may be executed. Then, the processes of S6103 to S6105 may be executed by all the remaining boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a.

In addition, the boot program transferred by the process of S6101 transfers a part of the remaining boot program by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a, and then the beginning of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a. A process of setting an address to the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. In addition, part of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a by this processing is further transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount of part of the remaining boot program, and subsequently stored in the program storage area 233a. A process of setting the start address of the stored boot program to the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Then, a predetermined amount of a part of the remaining boot program is transferred to the program storage area 233a, and then the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a is set in the instruction pointer 231a in step S6101. and the processing of S6102 may be repeated a plurality of times, and then the processing of S6103 to S6105 may be executed.

As a result, even if the program size of the boot program is large and the rest of the boot program not stored in the first program storage area 234d1 cannot be transferred to the program storage area 233a at once, the MPU 231 is already stored in the program storage area 233a. Using the boot program, a predetermined amount can be transferred to the program storage area 233a.

Further, in this control example, the first program storage area 234d1 stores a part of the boot program that is first executed by the MPU 231 when the system reset is released. It may be stored in the 1-program storage area 234d1. In this case, the MPU 231 may perform the processes of S6103 to S6105 without performing the processes of S6101 and S6102 after starting the boot process. This eliminates the need to transfer the boot program to the program storage area 233a, reducing the number of times the program is transferred to the character ROM 234 or the program storage area 233a, thereby reducing the boot processing time. Therefore, it is possible to start the control of the auxiliary effect section in the MPU 231, which becomes possible after the boot process, more quickly.

Now, return to the description of FIG. 211 . After the boot process is completed, the initial setting process is executed according to the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 (S6002). Specifically, the value of the stack pointer is set in the MPU 231, and various settings are made for the registers in the MPU 231 and the I/O device. In addition, processing for clearing the memory of the work RAM 233, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 is performed. Further, various flags are provided in the work RAM 233, and initial values are set to the respective flags. As the initial value of each flag, "off" or "0" is set unless otherwise specified.

Further, in the initial setting process, after the image controller 237 is initialized, the image controller 237 is instructed to draw an image so that an image of a specific color is displayed on the entire screen of the third pattern display device 81. and instructs execution of display processing. As a result, immediately after the power is turned on, an image of a specific color is first displayed on the entire screen of the third pattern display device 81 . Here, the color of the image displayed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on is set to be a different color according to the model of the pachinko machine. As a result, in the operation check at the factory or the like at the time of manufacture, immediately after turning on the power, it is inspected whether or not the image of the color corresponding to the model is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the pachinko machine 10 It is possible to easily and immediately judge whether or not the activation can be started normally.

Next, a transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller 237 to transfer the image data corresponding to the power-on main image to the power-on main image area 235a of the resident video RAM 235 (S6003). This transfer instruction includes the leading and trailing addresses of the character ROM 234 storing the image data corresponding to the main image when the power is turned on, the transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination. The image controller 237 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 according to this transfer instruction. It is transferred to the image area 235a.

Then, when the transfer of all the image data indicated by the transfer instruction is completed, the image controller 237 transmits a transfer end signal indicating transfer end to the MPU 231 . By receiving this transfer end signal, the MPU 231 can grasp that the transfer of the image data designated by the transfer instruction has ended. When the transfer of all the image data indicated by the transfer instruction is completed, the image controller 237 stores transfer end information indicating transfer end in a register provided inside the image controller 237 or in a partial area of the built-in memory. It may be written. The MPU 231 reads information from this register or a partial area of the built-in memory at any time, and detects the writing of transfer end information by the image controller 237, thereby ascertaining that the transfer of the image data designated by the transfer instruction has ended. You may do so.

The image data transferred to the main image area 235a when the power is turned on is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off. When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on main image to the power-on main image area 235a is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 by the processing in S6003, the power-on variation image is transferred to the power-on main image area 235a. A transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller so as to transfer the image data corresponding to . This transfer instruction contains the head address of the character ROM 234 storing the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image, the data size of the image data, and information on the transfer destination (here, the resident video RAM 235). , and the head address of the power-on fluctuation image area 235b, which is the transfer destination. It is transferred to the change image area 235b when the power is turned on. The image data transferred to the power-on variation image area 235b is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off.

When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image to the power-on variation image area 235b is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 by the process of S6004, then the simple image display flag 233c is set. is turned on (S6005). As a result, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 in the transfer setting process (see FIG. 223(a)), which will be described later. Resident image transfer setting processing for instructing the image controller 237 to transfer is executed (see S7402 in FIG. 223(a)).

Further, the simple image display flag 233c indicates that all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 based on the transfer instruction to the image controller 237 by the resident image transfer setting process. Remains on until terminated. As a result, during this period, the V interrupt processing (see FIG. 213(b)) executes the simple command determination processing so that the power-on image (power-on main image and power-on fluctuation image) shown in . (See S6308 in FIG. 213B) and simple display setting processing (See S6309 in FIG. 213B) are executed.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 uses the NAND flash memory 234a for the character ROM 234. Due to its slow read speed, all the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is It takes a long time to transfer from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 . Therefore, as in this main processing, after the power is turned on, the power-on main image and the power-on varying image are first transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, and the main image at power-on is transferred to the third image. By displaying it on the symbol display device 81, while the remaining image data to be resident is being transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player and the people involved in the hall can see the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on. You can check the main image. Therefore, the display control device 114 takes time to transfer the remaining image data to be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 while displaying the main image on the third pattern display device 81 when the power is turned on. be able to. On the other hand, while the main image is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, the player or the like can recognize that some initialization processing is being performed, so that the rest of the resident video RAM 235 can be resident. It is possible to wait until the initialization is completed without worrying whether the operation is stopped while the image data to be processed is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 .

Also, in an operation check at a factory or the like during manufacturing, since the main image is immediately displayed on the third pattern display device 81 when the power is turned on, the operation of the third pattern display device 81 is started without any problem when the power is turned on. Therefore, it is possible to prevent deterioration of the operation check efficiency by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed for the character ROM 234. FIG.

In the display control device 114 of the pachinko machine 10, after the power is turned on, the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, so that the power-on main image is the third symbol. When the player starts the game while the display is displayed on the display device 81, a ball is entered into the first start port 64 (start winning), and an instruction to start the variable effect is issued from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device. 113, that is, when a display variation pattern command is received, a power-on variation image (not shown) is immediately displayed during the variation presentation period, and a simple variation presentation can be performed. can. Therefore, even while the main image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 when the power is turned on, the player can confirm that the lottery has been surely performed by the simple variation performance.

Further, as described above, while the remaining image data to be resident is being transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, the third pattern display device 81 continues to display the main image when the power is turned on. is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, it takes a long time to transfer the data. However, in this pachinko machine 10, since it is possible to perform a simple variation effect using the power-on fluctuation image transferred to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on, immediately after the power is turned on, for example, after the power is restored, Immediately after the power is turned on, even while the main image is being displayed, the player can play the game with peace of mind.

After the processing of S6005, interrupt permission is set (S6006), and thereafter, the main processing executes infinite loop processing until the power is turned off. Accordingly, after the interrupt permission is set by the process of S6006, the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process are executed according to the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal.

Next, command interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. 213(a). FIG. 213(a) is a flow chart showing the command interrupt processing. As described above, when a command is received from the audio lamp control device 113, the MPU 231 executes command interrupt processing.

In this command interrupt process, the received command data is extracted, and the extracted command data is sequentially stored in the command buffer area provided in the work RAM 233 (S6201), and the process ends. Various commands stored in the command buffer area by this command interrupt processing are read out by command determination processing or simple command determination processing of V interrupt processing to be described later, and processing corresponding to the command is performed.

Next, V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. 213(b). FIG. 213(b) is a flow chart showing the V interrupt processing. In this V interrupt process, various processes corresponding to the command stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process are executed, and after specifying the image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81, the image is drawn. By creating a list (see FIG. 176) and transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, the image controller 237 is instructed to execute drawing processing and display processing of the image.

As described above, this V interrupt process is started when the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 is detected. This V interrupt signal is a signal that is generated in the image controller 237 and sent to the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing processing for one frame is completed. Therefore, by executing the V interrupt process in synchronization with this V interrupt signal, a drawing instruction is issued to the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of the image for one frame is completed. become. Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive an instruction to draw the next image before the image drawing processing or display processing is completed. It is possible to prevent an image from being developed in accordance with a new drawing instruction in a frame buffer storing image information being displayed.

Here, first, an outline of the flow of V interrupt processing will be described, and then details of each processing will be described with reference to other drawings. In this V interrupt process, as shown in FIG. 213(b), first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S6301). If it is off (S6301: No), it means that the transfer of all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been completed. In order to display on the display device 81, command determination processing (S6302) is executed, and then display setting processing (S6303) is executed.

In the command determination process (S6302), the content of the command from the sound lamp control device 113 stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process is analyzed, and the process corresponding to the command is executed. When the display variation pattern command is stored, the demonstration display data table or the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern type is set in the display data table buffer 233d, and the transfer corresponding to the set display data table is performed. The data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

In this command determination process, all commands stored in the command buffer area at that time are analyzed and processed. This is because command determination processing is performed at intervals of 20 milliseconds when V interrupt processing is executed, and there is a high possibility that multiple commands are stored in the command buffer area during those 20 milliseconds. be. In particular, when main controller 110 decides to start a variable effect, there is a high possibility that a display variation pattern command, a display stop type command, and the like are stored in the command buffer area at the same time. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands all at once, it is possible to quickly comprehend the mode and stop type of the variable performance selected by the main control device 110 and the sound lamp control device 113, and generate a performance image corresponding to the mode. Drawing of an image can be controlled so as to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 . Details of this command determination process will be described later with reference to FIGS.

In the display setting process (S6303), based on the contents of the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the command determination process (S6302), etc., an image for one frame to be displayed next on the third pattern display device 81 is displayed. specifically identify the content of In addition, depending on the status of processing, etc., the effect mode to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 is determined, and the display data table corresponding to the determined effect mode is set in the display data table buffer 233d. Details of this display setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS.

After the display setting process is executed, task processing is executed (S6304). In this task processing, the image is configured based on the content of the image for the next one frame to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 specified by the display setting processing (S6303) or the simple display setting processing (S6309). The type of sprite (display object) to be displayed is specified, and various parameters required for drawing such as display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, and rotation angle are determined for each sprite.

Next, transfer setting processing is executed (S6305). In this transfer setting process, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, the image controller 237 is caused to transfer image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined area of the resident video RAM 235. Set instructions. While the simple image display flag 233c is off, predetermined image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image controller 237 based on the transfer data information of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. When a transfer instruction to transfer to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the video RAM 236 is set, and a continuous notice command (not shown) is received from the sound lamp control device 113, the continuous notice is sent to the image controller 237. A transfer instruction is set to transfer the image data of the continuous preview images used in the effect and the image data of the back image after change from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. FIG. Details of the transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 223 and 224. FIG.

Next, drawing processing is executed (S6306). In this drawing process, based on the types of sprites that make up one frame determined in the task process (S6304) and the parameters necessary for drawing each sprite, and the transfer instruction set in the transfer setting process (S6305), , generates a drawing list shown in FIG. As a result, the image controller 237 executes image drawing processing according to the drawing list. Details of the rendering process will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, update processing of various counters provided in the display control device 114 is executed (S6307). Then, the V interrupt process ends. As a counter updated by the process of S6307, for example, there is a stop symbol counter (not shown) for determining a stop symbol. The value of the stop symbol counter is stored in the work RAM 233, and is updated each time the V interrupt process is executed. Then, when the reception of the stop type command for display is detected in the command determination process, the stop type table corresponding to the stop type (jackpots A to D) indicated by the stop type command for display is compared with the stop type counter. , the stop symbol after the variable effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is finally set.

On the other hand, in the process of S6301, if it is determined that the simple image display flag 233c is ON (S6301: Yes), it means that the transfer of all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been completed. Therefore, in order to display the power-on image (not shown) on the third pattern display device 81, the simple command determination process (S6308) is executed, then the simple display setting process (S6309) is executed, and the process of S6304 is executed. Move to

Next, with reference to FIGS. 214 to 219, the details of the command determination process (S6302), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. First, FIG. 214 is a flow chart showing this command determination processing.

In this command determination process (FIG. 214, S6302), as shown in FIG. 214, first, it is determined whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area (S6401). (S6401: No), the command determination process is terminated and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, if there is an unprocessed new command (S6401: Yes), the new command flag for notifying the display setting process (S6303) that the new command has been processed in the ON state is set to ON (S6402). All unprocessed commands stored in the buffer area are analyzed for their command types (S6403).

Then, among the unprocessed commands, first, it is determined whether or not there is a display variation pattern command (S6404), and if there is a display variation pattern command (S6404: Yes), the variation pattern command process is executed. (S6405) and returns to the processing of S6401.

Here, the details of the variation pattern command process (S6405) will be described with reference to FIG. 215(a). FIG. 215(a) is a flow chart showing variation pattern command processing. In this variation pattern command processing, processing corresponding to the display variation pattern command received from the sound lamp control device 114 is executed.

In the variation pattern command process, first, the variation display data table corresponding to the variation effect pattern indicated by the variation pattern command for display is determined, and the determined variation display data table is read out from the data table storage area 233b to display the display data table. It is set in the buffer 233d (S6501).

Here, since the main controller 110 always determines the start of variation at a time interval of several seconds or more, it does not receive two or more display variation pattern commands within 20 milliseconds. When executing, it is impossible that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, but part of the command changes due to the influence of noise, etc., and another command is mistakenly used for display. There is a possibility that it will be interpreted as a variation pattern command. In the process of S6501, in preparation for such a case, if it is determined that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern with the shortest variation time is set in the display data table buffer 233d.

If a variation display data table corresponding to a variation pattern with a long variation time is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the main control device will actually produce a variation effect with a shorter variation time than the set display data table. 110, the next display variation pattern command is received from the main control device 110 while the variation performance according to the set variation display data table is being displayed on the third pattern display device 81. As a result, another variable display is suddenly started, which may make the player feel uncomfortable.

On the other hand, as in this control example, by setting the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern with the shortest variation time in the display data table buffer 233d, the variation longer than the set display data table can be actually obtained. Even if the variable effect with time is instructed by main controller 110, after the variable effect according to display data table buffer 233d is completed, main controller 110 will send the next display for display, as will be described later. Since the display of the third pattern display device 81 is controlled by the display setting process so that the demonstration effect is displayed until the pattern command is received, the player can feel the third pattern display on the third pattern display device 81 without any discomfort. 3 You can continue to see the variation of the pattern.

Next, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in S6501 is determined, read from the data table storage area 233b, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S6502). Then, among the data table discrimination flags provided for each variation display data table corresponding to each variation pattern, the data table discrimination flag corresponding to the variation display data table set by the processing of S6501 is turned on, and other variations The data table determination flag corresponding to the display data table is set to off (S6503). In the display setting process, by referring to the data table determination flag set by the process of S6503, it is possible to easily determine which variation pattern the variation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d corresponds to. can judge.

Next, based on the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S6501, time data representing the fluctuation time is set in the clock counter 233h (S6504), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S6505). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the fixed display flag 233z are set to OFF (S6506), the variation pattern command is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

By executing this variation pattern command process, in the display setting process, while updating the pointer 233f initialized by the process of S6505, the variable display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S6501 , extracts the drawing contents defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f, and specifies the contents of the image for one frame to be displayed next on the third pattern display device 81. At the same time, the transfer data table buffer 233e The transfer data information specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted from the transfer data table set to 1, and the sprite image data required in the set variable display data table is stored in advance from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. image storage area 236a.

In addition, in the display setting process, the time counter 233h to which the time data is set by the process of S6504 is used to measure the time of the variable presentation specified in the variable display data table, and when the variable presentation in the variable display data table ends. When it is determined, the setting of the stop display is controlled so that the stop pattern corresponding to the stop type command for display from the main control device 110 is displayed on the third design display device 81 .

Now, return to the description of FIG. In the process of S6404, if it is determined that there is no display variation pattern command (S6404: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display stop type command in the unprocessed commands (S6406), If there is a stop type command for display (S6406: Yes), the stop type command process is executed (S6407), and the process returns to S6401.

Details of the stop type command process (S6407) will now be described with reference to FIG. 215(b). FIG. 215(b) is a flowchart showing stop type command processing. This stop type command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the display variation type command received from the sound lamp control device 114 .

In the stop type command process, first, a stop type table corresponding to the stop type information (jackpots A to D) indicated by the stop type command for display is determined (S6601), and the stop type table and V interrupt processing (Fig. 213(b)) is executed, and the value of the stop type counter, which is updated each time, is compared to finally set the stop pattern after the variable effect displayed on the third pattern display device 81 (S6602). ).

Then, among the stop symbol discrimination flags provided for each of the stop symbols, the stop symbol discrimination flag corresponding to the stop symbol set by the processing of S6602 is turned on, and the stop symbol discrimination flag corresponding to the other stop symbols is turned on. It is set to off (S6603). After that, the processing returns to S6401 in FIG.

Here, as described above, in the variation display data table, after a predetermined time has passed since the variation based on the data table is started, the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is specified as the type information. , offset information (design offset information) from the stop design set by the processing of S6602. In the above-described task processing (S6304), after a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variation, the stop design set by the process of S6602 is specified from the stop design determination flag set by S6603, and the specified stop By adding the design offset information acquired by the display setting process to the design, the third design to be actually displayed is specified. Then, the address where the image data corresponding to the specified third pattern is stored is specified. Image data corresponding to the third design is stored in the third design area 235d of the resident video RAM 235, as described above.

Returning to FIG. 214, the description continues. In the process of S6406, if it is determined that there is no stop type command for display (S6406: No), then it is determined whether there is a jackpot related command in the unprocessed commands (S6408). When it is determined that the jackpot related command is received (S6408: Yes), the jackpot related command process for display is executed (S6409). Details of the display jackpot-related command processing (S6409) will be described in detail with reference to FIGS.

Here, with reference to FIG. 216, the display jackpot-related command processing (S6409) will be described. FIG. 216 is a flowchart showing this display jackpot-related command processing (S6409), and processing corresponding to the display opening command received from the sound lamp control device 113, the display round number command, and the display ending command. is executed.

In the display jackpot-related command processing (FIG. 216, S6409), first, it is determined whether or not there is an opening command for display (S6701). If it is determined in the process of S6701 that there is an opening command for display (S6701: Yes), the opening command process is executed (S6702), and the process proceeds to the process of S6703.

Details of the opening command processing (S6702) will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 217(a) is a flow chart showing the opening command process (S6702). This opening command process (S6702) is a process executed when it is determined that there is an opening command for display in the jackpot-related command process for display (see S6409 in FIG. 216). is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 .

In the opening command process (S6702), first, an opening display data table corresponding to the command (for example, corresponding to the jackpot type) is determined and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S6801). Next, the transfer data table corresponding to the opening display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S6802). After that, based on the opening display data table, time data is set in the clock counter 233h (S6803), the pointer 233f is initialized (S6804), and the demonstration display flag 233y and final display flag 233z are set off (S6805). , the process ends.

Returning to FIG. 216, the description continues. In the process of S6701, if it is determined that there is no display opening command (S6701: No), the process proceeds to S6703. After completing the processing of S6701 or S6702, it is determined whether or not there is a display round number command (S6703). In the process of S6703, if it is determined that there is a display round number command (S6703: Yes), the round number command process is executed (S6704), and the process proceeds to S6705.

Details of the round number command processing (S6704) will now be described with reference to FIG. 217(b). FIG. 217(b) is a flow chart showing the round number command processing (S6704). This round number command process (S6704) is a process executed when it is determined that the display round number command is received in the display jackpot related command process (see S6409 in FIG. 216). This is a process for causing the third symbol display device 81 to display an effect when the number of rounds is updated.

In the round number command processing (S6704), first, the round number display data table corresponding to the command is determined and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S6811). Next, the transfer data table buffer 233e is cleared (S6812), and time data is set in the clock counter 233h based on the round number display data table (S6813). After that, the pointer 233f is initialized (S6814), the demonstration display flag 233y and the fixed display flag 233z are set to OFF (S6815), and this process is terminated.

Returning to FIG. 216, the description continues. In the process of S6703, if it is determined that there is no display round number command (S6703: No), the process proceeds to S6705. After completing the processing of S6703 or S6704, it is determined whether or not a display ending command has been received (S6705). In the process of S6705, if it is determined that there is an ending command for display (S6705: Yes), the ending command process is executed (S6706), and the process proceeds to S6707.

Details of the ending command process (S6706) will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 218(a) is a flow chart showing the ending command process (S6706). This ending command process (S6706) is a process executed when it is determined that an ending command has been received in the display jackpot-related command process (see S6409 in FIG. 216). This is a process for displaying on the third symbol display device 81 .

In the ending command process (S6706), first, the ending display data table corresponding to the command is determined and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S6851). Next, the transfer data table buffer 233e is cleared (S6852), and time data is set in the clock counter 233h based on the ending display data table (S6853). After that, the pointer 233f is initialized (S6854), the demonstration display flag 233y and the fixed display flag 233z are set to off (S6855), and this processing ends.

Returning to FIG. 216, the description continues. In the process of S6705, if it is determined that there is no display ending command (S6705: No), the process proceeds to S6707. After completing the processing of S6705 or S6706, it is determined whether or not there is a display V effect command (S6707). In the process of S6707, if it is determined that there is no V effect command for display (S6707: No), this process ends. If it is determined that there is a display V effect command (S6707: Yes), V effect command processing is executed (S6708), and then this processing ends.

Details of the V effect command process (S6708) will now be described with reference to FIG. 218(b). This V effect command processing (S6708) is a process that is executed when it is determined that the V effect command is received in the display jackpot related command processing (see FIG. 216), and the probability that a jackpot game is awarded is This is a process for displaying on the third symbol display device 81 an effect suggesting that the price is high.

In the V effect command processing (S6708), first, the V effect display data table corresponding to the received command is determined and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S6901). Next, the transfer data table buffer 233e is cleared (S6902), and time data is set in the clock counter 233h based on the V effect display data table (S6903). After that, the pointer 233f is initialized (S6904), the demonstration display flag 233y and the fixed display flag 233z are set to off (S6905), and this processing ends.

Returning to FIG. 214, the description continues. In the process of S6408, if it is determined that there is no jackpot-related command (S6408: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a back image change command in the unprocessed commands (S6410), and the back image If there is a change command (S6410: Yes), back image change command processing is executed (S6411), and the process returns to S6401.

Details of the back image change command process (S6411) will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 219(a) is a flowchart showing back image change command processing. The back image change command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the back image change command received from the sound lamp control device 113 .

In the back image change command processing, first, the back image change flag for notifying the normal image transfer setting processing (see S7403 in FIG. 224) of the change in the back image accompanying the reception of the back image change command in the ON state is set to ON. (S7001). Then, among the back image determination flags provided for each back image type (back surface A to D), the back image determination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the back image change command is turned on, and the other back image is turned on. The back image determination flag corresponding to the type is set to OFF (S7002), the back image change command processing is terminated, and the command determination processing is returned to.

In the normal image transfer setting process, when it is detected that the back image change flag set by the process of S7609 is turned on, the back image type after change is specified from the back image discrimination flag set by the process of S7610. . Then, if the specified back image type is back B, as described above, part of the image data corresponding to those back images is not resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. Then, a transfer instruction is set for the image controller 237 so that the image data corresponding to the rear image of a predetermined range is transferred from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. FIG.

Further, in the task processing, if it is specified that one of the back faces A to D is to be displayed according to the back face type of the back face image defined in the display data table, the back face image determination flag set in S7002 is used to determine the The type of background image to be displayed at the time is specified, the range of the background image to be displayed is specified according to the passage of time, and the RAM type (resident video RAM 235 for normal use or video RAM 236 for normal use) and the address of that RAM.

Since the player does not continuously operate the frame button 22 for 20 milliseconds or less, two or more back image change commands are not received within 20 milliseconds, so the command determination process is executed. In this case, there should be no cases where two or more background image change commands are stored in the command buffer area. It could be interpreted as a command. In the process of S4702, if it is determined that two or more back image commands are stored in the command buffer area, the back image discrimination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the previously received back image command is turned on. Alternatively, the rear image discrimination flag corresponding to the rear image type indicated by the rear image command received later may be turned on. Alternatively, any one back image change command may be extracted and the back image determination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the command may be turned on. Since the change of the back image does not directly affect the game value of the pachinko machine 10, it is preferable to appropriately set it according to the characteristics and operability of the pachinko machine 10. FIG.

Now, return to the description of FIG. In the processing of S6410, if it is determined that there is no back image change command (S6410: No), then it is determined whether or not there is an error command among the unprocessed commands (S6412). Otherwise (S6412: Yes), the error command process is executed (S6413), and the process returns to S6401.

Details of the error command processing (S6413) will now be described with reference to FIG. 219(b). FIG. 219(b) is a flowchart showing error command processing. This error command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the error command received from the audio lamp controller 114 .

In the error command process, first, an error occurrence flag indicating that an error has occurred in the ON state is set to ON (S7101). Then, among the error determination flags provided for each error type, the error determination flag corresponding to the error type indicated by the error command is turned on, and the other error determination flags are set to off (S7102). End the processing and return to the command determination processing.

In the display setting process, when the occurrence of an error is detected based on the error occurrence flag set by the process of S7101, the type of error that has occurred is determined from the error determination flag set by the process of S7102, and the error type is handled. A process is executed to cause the third symbol display device 81 to display a warning image to be displayed.

If it is determined that two or more error commands are stored in the command buffer area, in the process of S7102, error discrimination flags corresponding to all error types indicated by the respective error commands are set to ON. As a result, the warning images corresponding to all the error types are displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the player and the people involved in the hall can correctly grasp the occurrence of the error.

Now, return to the description of FIG. If it is determined in the process of S6412 that there is no error command (S6412: No), then the process corresponding to other unprocessed commands is executed (S6414), and the process returns to the process of S6401.

In the process of S6401, which is executed again after each command has been processed, it is again determined whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, and if there is an unprocessed new command (S6401: Yes ), and the processing of S6402 to S6414 is executed again. Then, the processing of S6401 to S6414 is repeatedly executed until there is no unprocessed new command in the command buffer area. End the process.

The simple command determination process (S6308) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is ON in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 213(b)) is similar to the command determination process. However, in the simple command determination process, commands necessary for displaying the power-on image shown in FIG. Only type commands are extracted, and variation pattern command processing (see FIG. 215 (a)) and stop type command processing (see FIG. 215 (b)), which are processes corresponding to each command, are executed, and other A command is discarded without executing the process corresponding to the command.

Here, in the variation pattern command processing (see FIG. 215(a)) executed in this case, in the processing of S6501, the display data table buffer corresponding to the display of the variation image at power-on is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. The image data of the power-on main image and the power-on varying image that are set and required in that case are stored in the power-on main moving image area 235a and the power-on varying moving image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, in the process of S6502, the process of writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e and clearing the contents thereof is performed.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 220 to 222, the details of the display setting process (S6303), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 220 is a flow chart showing this display setting process.

In this display setting process, as shown in FIG. 220, it is determined whether or not the new command flag is on (S7201). It is determined that the new command has not been processed in the command determination process executed first, the processes of S7202 to S7204 are skipped, and the process proceeds to S7205. On the other hand, if the new flag is ON (S7201: Yes), it is determined that the new command has been processed in the previously executed command determination processing, and after setting the new command flag to OFF (S7202), S7203-S7204 , the process corresponding to the new command is executed.

In the process of S7203, it is determined whether or not the error occurrence flag is ON (S7203). Then, if the error occurrence flag is on (S7203: Yes), warning image setting processing is executed (S7204).

Here, with reference to FIG. 221, details of the warning image setting process will be described. FIG. 221 is a flowchart showing warning image setting processing. This process is a process for developing image data for displaying a warning image corresponding to an error that has occurred on the third pattern display device 81. First, the error determination flag is referred to, and all error determination flags set to ON are displayed. Warning image data for displaying an error warning image corresponding to the flag on the third pattern display device 81 is developed (S7251).

In task processing, based on this expanded warning image data, the types of sprites (display objects) that make up the warning image are identified, and for each sprite, the display coordinate position, magnification ratio, and rotation angle are determined. Determine the various parameters required.

Then, in the warning image setting process, after the process of S7251, the error occurrence flag is set to OFF (S7252), and the process returns to the display setting process.

Now, return to the description of FIG. 220 . After the warning image setting process (S7204), or if it is determined in the process of S7203 that the error occurrence flag is not ON, that is, it is OFF (S7203: No), then the process proceeds to S7205.

In S7205, pointer update processing is executed (S7205). Details of the pointer update processing will now be described with reference to FIG. 222 . FIG. 222 is a flowchart showing pointer update processing. This pointer updating process acquires the transfer data information of the corresponding drawing contents or transfer target image data from the display data table and the transfer data table stored in the respective buffers of the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e. This is the process of updating the pointer 233f that specifies the address to which it should be applied.

In this pointer update process, first, 1 is added to the pointer 233f (S7301). That is, the pointer 233f is basically updated so that it is incremented by 1 each time the V interrupt process is executed. Further, as described above, in the various data tables, the Start information is described at the address "0000H", and the substance of each data is defined after the address "0001H". When the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 in accordance with the storage in the data table buffer 233d, the value is updated to 1 by this pointer update processing. Substantial data can be read from the data table.

After the value of the pointer 233f is updated by the processing of S7301, it is then checked whether the data at the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d is End information. is determined (S7302). As a result, if it is End information (S7302: Yes), it means that the pointer 233f has been updated past the address where the substance data is described in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d.

Therefore, it is determined whether or not the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is a demonstration display data table (S7303). The time data corresponding to the performance time of the demonstration display data table set in the table buffer 233d is set in the clock counter 233h (S7304), the pointer 233f is initialized by setting it to 1 (S7305), and this processing is terminated. and return to the display setting process. Thus, in the display setting process, the drawing contents can be developed sequentially from the top of the demonstration display data table, so that the third symbol display device 81 can repeatedly display the demonstration effect.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S7303 that the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is not the demonstration display data table (S7303: No), the value of the pointer 233f is decremented by 1 ( S7306), this process is terminated, and the process returns to the display setting process. As a result, in the display setting process, when a display data table other than the demonstration display data table, for example, a variable display data table, is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the previous address in which the End information is described is displayed. is always expanded, the third pattern display device 81 can display the last image defined by the display data table in a stopped state. On the other hand, in the process of S7302, if the data at the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is not the End information (S7302: No), this process ends and returns to the display setting process.

Here, return to FIG. 220 to continue the description. After the pointer update process, the drawing contents of the address indicated by the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process are developed from the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d (S7206). In the task processing, the type of sprite (display object) that constitutes the image is specified based on the rendering content developed in the processing of S7206 together with the previously developed warning image, etc., and the display coordinates are determined for each sprite. Determine various parameters required for drawing such as position, magnification, and rotation angle.

Next, the value of the clock counter 233h is decremented by 1 (S7207), and it is determined whether or not the value of the clock counter 233h after the subtraction is 0 or less (S7208). Then, if the value of the clock counter 233h is 1 or more (S7208: No), the display setting process is terminated and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, if the value of the clock counter 233h is 0 or less (S7208: Yes), it means that the effect time corresponding to the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d has elapsed. At this time, if the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, it is time to end the variable display and perform the stop display. (S7209).

As a result, if the confirmed display flag 233z is off (S7209: No), the confirmed display effect has not yet been performed, and it is time to perform the confirmed display effect. (S7210), and then, by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e, the contents are cleared (S7211). Then, the time data corresponding to the presentation time of the fixed display data table is set in the clock counter 233h (S7212), and the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S7213). Then, after the confirmation display flag 233z indicating that the confirmation display effect is in progress is set to ON (S7214), the content of the stop symbol discrimination flag is copied as it is to the previous stop symbol discrimination flag provided in the work RAM 233. (S7215), and returns to the V interrupt process.

Thus, when the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, etc., the fixed display effect of the stop symbol in the variable effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the end of the effect. You can set the drawing contents like this. In addition, only by changing the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d to the fixed display data table, the effect displayed on the third pattern display device 81 can be easily changed to the fixed display effect. In addition, compared to the conventional case of changing the display contents by activating another program, the program does not become complicated and bloated, and therefore the MPU 231 is not overloaded. Regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 114, various modes of effect images can be displayed on the third pattern display 81. - 特許庁

It should be noted that the last stop symbol determination flag set by the process of S7215 is used to specify the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the next variation effect. That is, as described above, the display of the third symbol in the variable effect changes according to the stop symbol of the variable effect performed immediately before, and in the variable display data table, the variation based on the data table Until a predetermined time elapses after the start, the pattern offset information from the stop pattern of the fluctuation performance performed one before is described. In the task processing (S6304), until a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variation, from the last stop design determination flag set by S7215, the stop design of the fluctuation production performed one before is specified, and the The third symbol to be actually displayed is specified by adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the specified stop symbol. As a result, the variable performance is started from the stop symbol in the previous variable performance.

On the other hand, in the processing of S7209, if the fixed display flag 233z is ON instead of OFF (S7209: Yes), it is determined whether or not the demonstration display flag 233y is ON (S7216). If the demonstration display flag 233y is off (S7216: No), it means that the value of the clock counter 233h has become 0 or less with the end of the fixed display effect. The transfer data table buffer 233d is set in the table buffer 233d (S7217), and then the contents are cleared by writing Null data in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S7218). Then, the time data corresponding to the presentation time of the demonstration display data table is set in the clock counter 233h (S7219). Then, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S7220), the demonstration display flag 233y indicating that the demonstration is being performed in the ON state is set to ON (S7221), this process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. .

In the process of S7216, if the demonstration display flag 233y is ON (S7216: Yes), it means that the demonstration effect is performed after the fixed display effect is finished, and that demonstration effect is finished, so the display setting process is performed as it is. End and return to V interrupt processing. In this case, various settings are made so that the demonstration effect is started again by the pointer updating process executed in the next V interrupt process. The demonstration effect can be repeatedly displayed on the third symbol display device 81 until a new display variation pattern command is received.

The simple display setting process (S6309) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is ON in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 213(b)) also performs the same process as the display setting process. However, in the simple display setting process, one of the power-on variable images corresponding to the stop pattern set based on the stop type command for display is displayed for a predetermined time after the effect time of the power-on variable image ends. 172) is set in the display data table buffer 233d.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 223 and 224, the details of the transfer setting process (S6305), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. First, FIG. 223(a) is a flow chart showing this transfer setting process.

In this transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is ON (S7501). If the simple image display flag 233c is on (S7501: Yes), all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, so the resident image transfer setting is made. Processing is executed (S7502), the transfer setting processing is terminated, and the processing returns to the V interrupt processing. As a result, a transfer instruction is set for the image controller 237 to transfer the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 . Details of the resident image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

On the other hand, if the simple image display flag 233c is not turned on as a result of the processing of S7501, that is, if it is turned off (S7501: No), all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video data. It has been transferred to the RAM 235 . In this case, the normal image transfer setting process is executed (S7503), the transfer setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. As a result, the transfer instruction is set so that subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236 . Details of the normal image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, resident image transfer setting processing (S7502), which is part of the transfer setting processing (S6305) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to FIG. 223(b). FIG. 223(b) is a flow chart showing this resident image transfer setting process (S7502).

In this resident image transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not an instruction to transfer untransferred image data has been given to the image controller 237 (S7601). ), and further determines whether or not the image data transfer processing performed by the image controller 237 based on the transfer instruction has ended (S7602). In the processing of S7602, after instructing the image controller 237 to transfer the image data, if a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer processing is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer processing has ended. . If it is determined by the processing in S7602 that the transfer processing has not ended (S7602: No), the image transfer processing is continuously performed in the image controller 237, so this resident image transfer setting processing is executed. finish. On the other hand, if it is determined that the transfer process has ended (S7602: Yes), the process proceeds to S7603. Also, as a result of the processing of S7601, even if a transfer instruction for untransferred image data has not been transmitted to the image controller 237 (S7601: No), the process proceeds to S7603.

In the process of S7603, it is determined whether or not all resident target image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 have been transferred (S7603). A transfer instruction is set for the image controller 237 so as to transfer the resident image data to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 (S7604), and the resident image transfer setting process is terminated.

As a result, the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process includes the transfer data information about the resident target image data that has not been transferred, and the image controller 237 transfers the transfer data described in the drawing list. Based on the data information, the resident target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 236 . The transfer data information includes the head address and the end address of the character ROM 234 in which the resident target image data is stored, the transfer destination information (in this case, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination (where the data is transferred). The first address of the area provided in the resident video RAM 235 where the resident target image data is to be stored is included. The image controller 237 executes image transfer processing based on this transfer data information, reads the image data specified in the transfer processing from the character ROM 234, temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237a, and then stores it in the buffer RAM 237a while the resident video RAM 236 is not in use. , it is transferred to the specified address of the resident video RAM 236 . Then, when the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231 .

As a result of the process of S7603, if all the resident target image data have been transferred (S7603: Yes), the simple image display flag 233c is set to OFF (S7605), and the resident image transfer setting process ends. As a result, in the V interrupt processing (see FIG. 213(b)), the command Since the judgment processing (see FIGS. 214 to 219) and the display setting processing (see FIGS. 220 to 222) are executed, normal image drawing is set, and the third symbol display device 81 displays A normal image is displayed. Further, subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236 by normal image transfer setting processing (see FIG. 224) (see S7501: No in FIG. 223(a)).

By executing this resident image transfer setting process, the MPU 231 transfers all resident images to be resident in the resident video RAM 235, excluding the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image that have already been transferred in the main process. The target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 . Then, the MPU 231 controls the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 to be held without overwriting while the power is turned on. As a result, the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer setting process will be resident in the resident video RAM 235 while the power is turned on.

Therefore, after all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the display controller 114 uses the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235 while the image controller 237 can perform image drawing processing. As a result, if the image data used for drawing processing is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a whose read speed is slow when drawing the image. Therefore, the time required for reading the data can be omitted, and the image can be immediately drawn and displayed on the third pattern display device 81 .

In particular, the resident video RAM 235 stores image data of frequently displayed images such as rear images, third designs, character designs, and error messages, as well as main controller 110, sound lamp controller 113, and display controller 114. Since the image data of the image to be displayed is immediately resident after the display is determined by such as, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND type flash memory 234a, various operations performed by the player at any timing can be prevented. , high responsiveness can be maintained until the third pattern display device 81 displays some image.

Next, referring to FIG. 224, normal image transfer setting processing (S7503), which is part of the transfer setting processing (S6305) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 224 is a flow chart showing this normal image transfer setting process (S7503).

In this normal image transfer setting process, first, from the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process (S7205) of the previously executed display setting process (S6303) is used. Information described in the indicated address is obtained (S7701). Then, it is determined whether or not the acquired information is transfer data information (S7702). , and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are extracted and stored in the transfer data buffer provided in the work RAM 233 ( S7703), furthermore, a transfer start flag, which is provided in the work RAM 233 and indicates that there is image data whose transfer is to be started in the ON state, is set to ON (S7704), and the process proceeds to S7705.

In addition, in the process of S7702, if the acquired information is not the transfer data information but Null data (S7702: No), the process of S7703 and S7704 is skipped and the process proceeds to S7705. In the process of S7705, it is determined whether or not a new image data transfer instruction has been set for the image controller 237 after the previous image data transfer is completed (S7705), and the transfer instruction is set. If so (S7705: Yes), it is further determined whether or not the image data transfer performed by the image controller 237 based on the transfer instruction has ended (S7706).

In the process of S7706, after setting an image data transfer instruction to the image controller 237, if a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process has ended. . If it is determined by the process of S7706 that the transfer process has not ended (S7706: No), the image transfer process continues in the image controller 237, so this normal image transfer setting process is executed. finish. On the other hand, if it is determined that the transfer process has ended (S7706: Yes), the process proceeds to S7707. Also, as a result of the process of S7705, even if the image data transfer instruction is not set for the image controller 237 after the previous transfer process is completed (S7705: No), the process proceeds to S7707.

In the process of S7707, it is determined whether or not the transfer start flag is on (S7707). If the transfer start flag is on (S7707: Yes), image data to be transferred exists, so is turned off (S7708), the image data of the sprite indicated by the various information stored in the transfer data buffer by the processing of S7703 is set as the image data to be transferred, and then the processing proceeds to S7713. On the other hand, if the transfer start flag is not ON, but OFF (S7707: No), then it is determined whether or not the back image change flag is ON (S7709). If the back image change flag is not on, but off (S7709: No), there is no image data to start transferring, so the normal image transfer setting process ends.

On the other hand, if the back image change flag is on (S7709: Yes), it means that the back image has been changed. Of the discrimination flags, the image data of the back image corresponding to the back image discrimination flag in the ON state is specified, and the image data is set as the image data to be transferred (S7711). Furthermore, the head address (storage source head address) and the end address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the back image corresponding to the back image discrimination flag in the ON state is stored, and the transfer destination (usually (S7712), and the process proceeds to S7713.

When the back image discrimination flag in the ON state is for the back A, all the corresponding image data are resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, so the image to be transferred to the normal video RAM 236 is Data does not exist. Therefore, in the process of S7711, if the back image discrimination flag in the ON state is for the back A, the normal image transfer process ends.

In the process of S7713, it is determined whether or not the image data to be transferred has already been stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S7713). The determination in the process of S7713 is performed by referring to the stored image data determination flag 233j. That is, the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is read from the stored image data determination flag 233j, and if the storage state is "on", the image data of the sprite to be transferred is normal video If it is determined that the data is stored in the RAM 236 and the storage state is "OFF", it is determined that the image data of the sprite to be transferred is not stored in the normal video RAM 236. FIG.

As a result of the process of S7713, if the image data to be transferred is stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S7713: Yes), there is no need to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. , the normal image transfer setting process ends. As a result, it is possible to prevent unnecessary transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, thereby reducing the processing load on each unit of the display control device 114 and the traffic on the bus line 240. can be planned.

On the other hand, if the image data to be transferred is not stored in the normal video RAM 236 as a result of the process of S7713 (S7713: No), a transfer instruction for the image data to be transferred is set (S7714). As a result, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is included in the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process, and the image controller 237 receives the transfer data information described in the drawing list. Based on this, the image data of the image to be transferred can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 . The transfer data information includes the head address and the end address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the image to be transferred is stored, the transfer destination information (in this case, the normal video RAM 236), and the transfer destination (in this case, the transfer destination). The start address of the sub-area provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 in which the image data of the image to be transferred is to be stored. The image controller 237 executes image transfer processing based on this transfer data information, reads the image data specified in the transfer processing from the character ROM 234, and specifies the specified video RAM (here, the normal video RAM 236). forward to the specified address. Then, when the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231 .

After the process of S7714, the stored image data determination flag 233j is updated (S7715), and this normal image transfer setting process is terminated. The stored image data determination flag 233j is updated by, as described above, setting the storage state corresponding to the sprite that has become the image data to be transferred to "on", and by substituting the same image storage area 236a as the one sprite. This is done by setting the storage state corresponding to other sprites that are to be stored in the area to "off".

In this way, by executing the normal image transfer setting process, if the background image is changed based on the reception of the background image change command in the previously executed command determination process, the background image is changed. Of the image data used in , image data not stored in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay.

Further, in this control example, the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d in accordance with a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. , a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. By executing the normal image transfer setting process, the MPU 231 sends data to the image controller 237 in accordance with the transfer data information described in the area indicated by the pointer 233f of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Since the transfer instruction of the image data to be transferred is set, the sprite image data used in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d can be reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing. can be done.

Here, in the transfer data table, the image data to be transferred is stored in the image storage area 236a so that the image data corresponding to the given sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a before the drawing of the given sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information is defined for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information defined in the transfer data table, thereby obtaining the predetermined address according to the display data table. When the sprite is drawn, the image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 required for drawing the sprite can be stored in the image storage area 236a without fail.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236, so that the image can be displayed. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. - 特許庁Also, only the image data temporarily resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 by the description of the transfer data table.

The transfer data table defines transfer data information so that image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to a sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. By controlling the transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 on a sprite-by-sprite basis, the transfer of image data can be controlled in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in the load applied to the transfer.

Next, with reference to FIG. 225, details of the drawing process (S6306), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 225 is a flow chart showing this rendering process.

In the drawing process, the types of various sprites that make up one frame determined in task processing (S6304) and the parameters necessary for drawing each sprite (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucency value, α blending information , color information, filter designation information) and the transfer instruction set by the transfer setting process (S6305), a drawing list shown in FIG. 176 is generated (S7801). That is, in the processing of S7801, the type and address of the storage RAM in which the image data of the sprite is stored are specified for each sprite from the types of various sprites forming one frame determined in the task processing (S6304). Then, parameters necessary for the sprite determined by task processing are associated with the specified storage RAM type and address. Then, each sprite is rearranged in order from the sprite that should be placed on the backmost side to the sprite that should be placed on the front side in the image for one frame. As drawing information (detailed information), a drawing list is generated by describing the storage RAM type and address in which sprite image data is stored and the parameters necessary for drawing the sprite. When a transfer instruction is set by the transfer setting process (S6305), the top address (storage source top address) of the character ROM 234 where the image data to be transferred is stored as the transfer data information is displayed at the end of the drawing list. , the final address (storage source final address), and the top address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236).

As described above, since the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed for each sprite, the MPU 231 , according to the sprite type, the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and such information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

When the drawing list is generated, the generated drawing list and the drawing target buffer information specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233j are transmitted to the image controller (S7802). Here, when the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 0, the drawing target buffer flag 233j includes information instructing to expand the image drawn in the first frame buffer 236b as the drawing target buffer information. includes information instructing to develop the image drawn in the second frame buffer 236c as drawing target buffer information.

Based on the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 draws the image in order from the sprite described at the head of the drawing list, and develops it by overwriting in the frame buffer indicated by the drawing object buffer information. As a result, in the one-frame image generated by the drawing list, the first-drawn sprite can be arranged on the rearmost side, and the last-drawn sprite can be arranged on the frontmost side.

When transfer data information is included in the drawing list, the transfer data information is used to determine the start address (storage source start address) and end address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored. ), and the head address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236), and the image data stored from the head address of the storage source to the end address of the storage source are sequentially read from the character ROM 234 and temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a. After that, the image data stored in the buffer RAM 237a are sequentially transferred to the area indicated by the transfer destination top address of the normal video RAM 236 when the normal video RAM 236 is not in use. The image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is used based on the drawing list transmitted from the MPU 231 after that, and the image is drawn according to the drawing list.

The image controller 237 reads the image information of the previously developed image from a frame buffer different from the frame buffer designated by the drawing object buffer information, and sends the image information along with the drive signal to the third pattern display device 81. Send to As a result, the image developed in the frame buffer can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 . In addition, while developing the image drawn in one frame buffer, the image developed from one frame buffer can be displayed on the third pattern display 81, and the drawing process and the display process can be processed simultaneously in parallel. can be done.

In the rendering process, after the process of S7802, the rendering target buffer flag 233j is updated (S7803). Then, the drawing process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. The rendering target buffer flag 233j is updated by inverting its value, that is, by setting the value to "1" if it was "0" and to "0" if it was "1". done. As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time the drawing list is transmitted.

Here, the transmission of the drawing list is executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing and display processing of the image for one frame are completed. This is performed each time the drawing process of the load process (see FIG. 213(b)) is performed. As a result, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for developing the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. is executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for developing the image for one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing processing for the image for one frame is completed. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information for the first half is read. Therefore, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. .

After the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for developing the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. be done. Therefore, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. . After that, the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame are set to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By specifying these alternately, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing for the image for one frame.

In the above control example, the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 are provided separately, but instead, the respective devices 113 and 114 may be integrated and provided as one device.

In the above control example, first, a command is transmitted from the main controller 110 to the audio lamp control device 113, and when the command is received by the audio lamp control device 113, the audio lamp control device 113 transmits the command to the display control device 114. A command to be issued is determined and then sent from the audio lamp controller 113 to the display controller 114 . On the other hand, first, a command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the display control device 114, and when the command is received by the display control device 114, the command to be transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 is determined in the display control device 114. Then, a command may be transmitted from the display control device 114 to the audio lamp control device 113 .

In the control example described above, the image controller 237 transfers image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the MPU 231 may directly access the character ROM 234 , read image data from the character ROM 234 , and transfer it to the resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236 . In this case, the MPU 231 temporarily stores the image data read from the character ROM 234 in the buffer RAM 237a, and then the MPU 231 determines whether or not the transfer destination resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236 is unused. If unused, the image data may be transferred from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236 as the transfer destination.

In this case, whether or not the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 of the transfer destination is unused is judged by the image controller 237 accessing the resident video RAM 235 (that is, being in use). and a normal video RAM access flag (not shown) indicating that the image controller 237 is accessing the normal video RAM 236 (that is, that it is in use). ) is provided in the image controller 237, and the MPU 231 may check the access flag corresponding to the transfer destination buffer RAM.

Alternatively, the signals transmitted and received between the image controller 237 and the resident video RAM 235 or the signals transmitted and received between the image controller 237 and the normal video RAM 236 are monitored by the MPU 231, and the resident It may be confirmed whether or not the video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are unused. Alternatively, when the image controller 237 starts accessing the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, or terminates the access, the image controller 237 notifies the MPU 231 of the information at any time so that the MPU 231 can Based on the notification, it may be determined whether or not the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are unused.

Alternatively, when the image controller 237 scans the third pattern display device 81, the MPU 231 confirms the driving state of the image controller 237 or notifies from the image controller 237 whether or not the scanning is during the blank period. and when the scanning state is in the blank period, it may be determined that each of the video RAMs 235 and 236 is unused. As a result, the image controller 237 checks only the scanning state of the third pattern display device 81 and judges whether or not it is unused, so that judgment can be easily made.

In this case, the MPU 231 stores transfer data that is not null data at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e or the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d. If the information exists, image data may be read out from the character ROM 234 and transferred to the normal video RAM 236 according to the transfer data information. Here, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is stored in the normal video RAM 236 so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the normal video RAM 236 before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table or the like. Since it is defined for a predetermined address, by transferring the image data according to the transfer data information defined in this transfer data table, when drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table, etc., the sprite can be drawn. Image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 necessary for normal operation can be stored in the normal video RAM 236 without fail. Using the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236, a predetermined sprite can be drawn based on the display data table.

The process of reading image data from the character ROM 234 and transferring it to the normal video RAM 236 may be performed in the display main process executed by the MPU 231 or in a loop of the main process. As a result, the MPU 231 can execute image data transfer processing using the time during which important processing in the display control device 114, such as command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing, is not being performed. Further, since the command interrupt processing and the V interrupt processing are executed with priority over the display main processing and the like, the MPU 231 can process the image data without affecting the command interrupt processing and the V interrupt processing. transfer processing can be executed.

In the above control example, the MPU 231 does not use the addresses of the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 to manage each video RAM, but uses the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 in common. Each video RAM may be managed by assigning a different address area to each video RAM in the address system provided. In this way, the MPU 231 does not directly specify the video RAM (either the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236) to be accessed from the MPU 231 to the image controller 237, but simply specifies the address. Image controller 237 can determine whether the designated area is for resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236 . That is, when the MPU 231 designates the video RAM to be accessed and the address of the area of the video RAM to the image controller 237, it is only necessary to designate the address set in the common address system. It is possible to simplify the structure of the instruction that makes the specification. For example, in the drawing list sent from the MPU 231 to the image controller 237, as information indicating the storage location of the sprite data, the address set in the common address system is simply used without including the storage RAM type. Since it is only necessary to specify the storage destination address, the configuration of the drawing list can be simplified.

In the above control example, the case where the character ROM 234 is directly connected to the internal bus (bus line 240) that connects the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 has been described. 237 may be provided. A bridge circuit is provided to convert the input/output specifications of the character ROM 234 to the input/output specifications of the mask ROM. good too.

By providing this bridge circuit, the existing image controller 237 or internal bus (bus line 240) designed on the assumption that a general mask ROM is used as the character ROM can be used as it is, and the NAND type flash memory 234a can be used. A configured character ROM 234 can be connected. Even when the character ROM 234 is connected via the image controller 237 or a bridge circuit, the MPU 231 may be configured to directly access the character ROM 234 .

In the above control example, the case where the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a has been described, but it is not necessarily limited to this, and is composed of a large-capacity and inexpensive non-volatile storage means such as a hard disk. may be Such a large-capacity and inexpensive storage means generally has a slow read speed, but by configuring the display control device 114 as described in the above control example, the image can be displayed at the desired time without problems. be able to.

In the above control example, the NOR type ROM 234d is provided in the character ROM 234, and the first program storage area 234d1 stores a part of the boot program that is executed first in the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. The first program storage area is provided in a memory constituted by a non-volatile storage medium capable of read operation at a higher speed than the NAND flash memory 234a, and the first program storage area is stored in the area after the system reset is released in the MPU 231. part of the boot program to be executed in the . For example, in place of the NOR type ROM 234d, the character ROM 234 may be provided with FeRAM (Ferroelectric RAM), MRAM (Magnetoresistive RAM), or PRAM (Phase change RAM), and a first program storage area may be provided in the character ROM 234. A part of the boot program that is executed first may be stored.

In the above control example, the first program storage area 234d1 is provided in the NOR type ROM 234d connected to the internal bus (bus line 240), and a part of the boot program that is first executed in the MPU 231 after the system reset is released is stored in that area. However, the memory is not necessarily limited to this, and the internal bus (bus line 240) is a memory configured by a non-volatile storage medium capable of read operation at a higher speed than the NAND flash memory 234a. , the memory may be provided with a first program storage area, and a part of the boot program that is first executed in the MPU 231 after the system reset is released may be stored in the area. For example, in place of the NOR type ROM 234d, FeRAM (Ferroelectric RAM), MRAM (Magnetoresistive RAM), PRAM (Phase change RAM), or the like is provided on the internal bus (bus line 240), and a first program storage area is provided on the internal bus (bus line 240). may store part of the boot program that is executed first after the system reset is released.

In the above control example, when the ROM controller 234b detects that the address of the internal bus (bus line 240) is designated as "0000H", the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 is set in the buffer RAM 234c. After that, the case where the data (instruction code) corresponding to the designated address is read from the buffer RAM 234c and output to the MPU 231 via the internal bus (bus line 240) has been described. On the other hand, when the ROM controller 234b detects that power is turned on from the power supply device 115, the ROM controller 234b sets the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 in the buffer RAM 234c, and then When the ROM controller 234b detects that the address of the internal bus (bus line 240) is designated as "0000H", the data (instruction code) corresponding to the designated address is read out from the buffer RAM 234c and transferred to the internal bus (bus line 240). 240) to the MPU 231. In this case, when the MPU 231 designates the address "0000H" to the internal bus (bus line 240) after releasing the system reset, is the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 already set in the buffer RAM 234c? Since it is in the process of being set, the character ROM 234 can output the corresponding data (instruction code) with less delay after the MPU 231 designates the address "0000H". Therefore, since the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after specifying the address "0000H", the display main processing can be started in the MPU 231 in a short time. As a result, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the control of the auxiliary effect section in the display control device 114 or the third pattern display device 81 can be started immediately. can be done.

In addition, when the ROM controller 234b detects that the address specified in the internal bus (bus line 240) specifies the control program stored in the first program storage area 234d1, the first program storage area 234d1 The data (instruction code) corresponding to the specified address may be directly read out from the MPU 231 and output to the MPU 231 via the internal bus (bus line 240). As a result, the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after specifying the address "0000H", so that the display main processing can be started in the MPU 231 in a short time. As a result, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the control of the auxiliary effect section in the display control device 114 or the third pattern display device 81 can be immediately started. can be done. In this case, the process of setting the control program (boot program) stored in the first program storage area 234d1 in the buffer RAM 234c may not be performed. Thereby, power consumption in the character ROM 234 can be suppressed.

In the above control example, the case where the resident video RAM 235 is connected to the image controller 237 is described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. A direct connection to line 240) may also be provided. When the character ROM 234 is connected to the internal bus (bus line 240) or the image controller 237 via the bridge circuit, the resident video RAM 235 may be connected to the bridge circuit. By connecting the resident video RAM 235 to the bridge circuit, even if the existing image controller 237 or internal bus (bus line 240) is not configured to be directly connectable to the resident video RAM 235, the resident video RAM 235 can be connected. RAM 235 can be easily provided in display controller 114 .

In the above control example, the display control device 114 is provided with one resident video RAM 235 and one normal video RAM 236, but the number of various video RAMs is not limited to this, and more A video RAM may be provided. Alternatively, a plurality of resident video RAMs may be provided, image data corresponding to images corresponding to various modes may be resident in each of them, and the resident video RAM to be used may be selected according to the mode.

In the above control example, the case where the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are composed of a 1-port type (one input/output port) DRAM has been described. type of RAM may be used. As a result, writing to and reading from the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 can be performed at the same time. It is possible to parallelize the process of writing the image data to the normal video RAM 236 . Therefore, it is possible to suppress the possibility that the drawing process is delayed due to the writing of the image data.

In the above control example, the case where the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are composed of different memories has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. It may be divided so that the same contents as those of the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are stored in each area. When the resident area and the normal area are configured in one RAM, the input/output port of the memory is prevented from being occupied by either the resident area or the normal area during read or write processing. , it is desirable to use a multi-port type RAM.

The type of image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 in the above control example is an example, and the type may be appropriately set according to the content of the image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. . In this case, in response to a command received from main controller 110 or sound lamp controller 113 or other input from the outside, image data corresponding to an image to be immediately displayed on third pattern display device 81 is at least resident. It is preferably resident in video RAM 235 .

In the above control example, a part of the image data stored in the character ROM 234 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235 and made resident. You may In this case, since the image data stored in the temporary character ROM 234 does not exist in the resident video RAM 235, the normal video RAM 236 is used as a dedicated memory for storing drawn image data obtained by drawing by the image controller 237. may

In the above control example, the resident video RAM 235 retains its contents without being overwritten while the power is turned on. The image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 may be overwritten and updated on a predetermined occasion, such as when the image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 is greatly changed based on the command received from the good. In this case, while the image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed, a predetermined transition image may be displayed as a transition period. Further, the image data corresponding to the transition image is stored in the resident video RAM 235 when the power is turned on, and is kept held in the resident video RAM 235 without being updated even when other resident images are updated. You can leave it. While the transition image is being displayed, the MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 to read image data to be newly resident, and transfers the read image data to the resident video RAM 235 via the buffer RAM 237a. The data may be transferred while not in use (that is, while the image data corresponding to the transitional image is not read). Alternatively, while the transition image is being displayed, the MPU 231 transmits to the image controller 237 a transfer instruction (transfer data information) for image data to be newly resident, and the image controller 237 sends the transfer instruction (transfer data). image data to be resident is read from the character ROM 234 according to data information) and transferred via the buffer RAM 237a while the resident video RAM 235 is not in use (that is, while the image data corresponding to the transition image is not being read). You may make it

When the resident video RAM 235 is updated, the image data corresponding to the transition image is transferred in advance from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, and the transition image is updated using the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236. It may be displayed on the three-symbol display device 81 . While the transition image is being displayed, the MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234, reads out image data to be newly resident, and transfers the read image data via the buffer RAM 237a. good too. Alternatively, the image controller 237, which has received an instruction to transfer image data to be resident from the MPU 231, accesses the character ROM 234, reads image data to be newly resident, and transfers the read image data via the buffer RAM 237a. You may do so. By updating the contents of the resident video RAM 235 while the transition image is being displayed, the resident video RAM 235 can be updated without making the player feel uncomfortable.

In the above control example, after all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 are resident, a RAM judgment value for judging whether or not the data in the resident video RAM 235 is normal when the power failure is resolved is stored. In the display main processing or main processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 after power-on, the RAM determination value is checked before starting to transfer main image data at power-on from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, If the RAM determination value is a normal value, it means that image data to be resident in resident video RAM 235 continues to be stored normally. It may be configured to In this case, the transfer of image data to the resident video RAM 235 may be disabled by turning off the simple image display flag. As a result, even if a system reset is input to the display control device 114 due to the occurrence of an instantaneous power failure, and the MPU 231 starts executing the main display process or the main process, the data in the resident video RAM 235 can be stored normally. In this case, image data can be prevented from being wastefully transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, and the time required for recovery from power failure can be shortened. In particular, since the character ROM 234 is composed of the character ROM 234a with a slow read speed, it takes a long time to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. FIG. On the other hand, by storing the RAM determination value in the resident video RAM 235 as in the present modification, if the data in the resident video RAM 235 remains normal due to a momentary power failure or the like, it is possible to transfer the image data. Since the time can be shortened, the normal effect image can be immediately displayed on the third pattern display device 81.例文帳に追加Therefore, the player can immediately start the game. The RAM determination value may be a checksum value of image data stored in the resident video RAM 235, for example. Further, instead of the RAM determination value, whether or not the keyword written in the predetermined area of the resident video RAM 235 is correctly stored may be used to determine the validity of the data.

In the above example of control, the case where the buffer RAM 237a is provided inside the image controller 237 has been described, but it is not necessarily limited to this, and may be provided outside the image controller 237. FIG. For example, the buffer RAM may be configured independently and configured to be directly connected to the internal bus (bus line 240). Further, when the character ROM 234 is connected to the internal bus (bus line 240) or the image controller 237 via the bridge circuit, a buffer RAM may be provided in the bridge circuit. Furthermore, the resident video RAM 235 may be directly connected to the bridge circuit with the buffer RAM. In this case, the image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 connected to the bridge circuit to the resident video RAM 235 via the buffer RAM provided in the bridge circuit. transfer can be performed efficiently without being affected by

In the above control example, the storage capacity of the buffer RAM 237a is set to one block of the NAND flash memory 234a. For example, among the scanning periods of the display screen of the third pattern display device 81, the buffer The storage capacity of the buffer RAM 237a may be such that the image data transfer from the RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 can be completed. As a result, transfer of image data from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 can be reliably performed by utilizing the unused periods of the video RAMs 235 and 236 that occur during this blank period. .

In the above control example, a case where one buffer RAM 237a is provided has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and two or more buffer RAMs may be provided. In this case, while image data read from the character ROM 234 is stored in one buffer RAM, image data stored in another buffer RAM is transferred to the resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236. may be configured. Also, one buffer RAM is divided into two or more areas, and while image data read from the character ROM 234 is stored in one area, another area in which image data is stored is stored. The image data may be transferred from the area to the resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236 . In either case, the writing of the image data read from the character ROM 234 into the buffer RAM and the transfer of the image data written into the buffer RAM to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 are performed in parallel. The time required for the processing can be shortened.

In the above control example, the case where the image data corresponding to the power-on main image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a of the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on has been described. The corresponding image data may be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 after the power is turned on. As a result, image data corresponding to the power-on main image stored in the normal video RAM 236 is used to display the power-on main image while transferring the image data to be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 . can do. Since the image data is not read from the resident video RAM 235 during this period, the image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 without monitoring the use state of the resident video RAM 235. Transfer can be completed quickly, and processing can be simplified.

Similarly, in the above control example, image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on varying image are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on varying image area 235a of the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. 235b, the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and power-on varying image may be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 after the power is turned on. As a result, by using the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variable image stored in the normal video RAM 236, the third symbol display device 81 displays the power-on image while the character ROM 234 Image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be transferred. Since the image data is not read from the resident video RAM 235 during this period, the image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 without monitoring the use state of the resident video RAM 235. Transfer can be completed quickly, and processing can be simplified.

In the above control example, the case where the image data corresponding to the power-on main image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a of the resident video RAM 235 via the buffer RAM 237a has been described. Since the image data is not read from the resident video RAM 235 while the image data corresponding to . may be directly transferred to the main image area 235a when the power is turned on. After the power is turned on, the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, and the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on stored in the normal video RAM 236 is used to turn on the power. If the image data is not read from the resident video RAM 235 while the image data to be resident is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 by displaying the main image, Image data to be resident may be directly transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 without passing through the buffer RAM 237a. As a result, the transfer of image data can be completed more quickly without going through the buffer RAM 237a.

Similarly, in the above control example, the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variation image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on variation image of the resident video RAM 235 via the buffer RAM 237a. Although the case of transferring to the image area 235b has been described, while the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variation image is being transferred, image data is not read from the resident video RAM 235. The image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on varying image are directly transferred from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a and power-on varying image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235 without going through the buffer RAM 237a. good too. Further, image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on varying image are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 after the power is turned on, and the power-on main image and the power-on main image stored in the normal video RAM 236 are stored in the normal video RAM 236 . By causing the third pattern display device 81 to display the image at power-on using the image data corresponding to the variable image, the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. If the image data is not read out from the character ROM 234, the image data to be resident may be directly transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 without passing through the buffer RAM 237a. As a result, the transfer of image data can be completed more quickly without going through the buffer RAM 237a.

In the above control example, when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, the sound lamp control device 113 generates the back image change command and the frame button operation command, and the display control device 114 generates the back image change command and the frame button. Although the case of changing the back image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the effect mode of Super Reach based on the operation command has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the sound lamp control device 113 grasps the game state of the gaming machine 10 based on the content of the command received from the main control device 110, and according to the game state, for example, according to the change of the game state, A back image change command or a game state command may be generated. As a result, the display control device 114 can change the back image and the effect mode of super ready-to-win according to the game state based on the back image change command and the game state command. Further, the display control device 114 may directly grasp the game state of the gaming machine 10 and change the back image and the effect mode of super ready-to-win according to the game state. Then, the rear image after the change or image data corresponding to at least a partial range of the rear image corresponding to the super reach of the effect mode after the change is resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. , the rear image can be immediately displayed from the resident range using the image data resident in the rear image area 235c.

Further, the display control device 114 may change the rear image according to the specifications of the display data table, the transfer data table, the additional data table, and the composite data table. In this case, the image data corresponding to the rear image after change is transferred in advance from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in accordance with the transfer data information described in the transfer data table, composite data table, and display data table. You may Here, when the image data of the rear image is transferred according to the transfer data information described in the transfer data table, the synthesized data table, or the display data table, the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 in which the original rear image is stored is stored. The transfer data information of the transfer data table may be defined so that the new rear image is stored in the sub-area. The transfer data information in the transfer data table may be defined such that a new rear image is stored in another area. In the latter case, when returning the back image to the original back image that was selected and displayed by the player, there is no need to transfer the image data corresponding to the original back image. An increase in load can be suppressed.

In the above control example, the output signal of the vibration sensor is input to the sound lamp control device 113, and when the sound lamp control device 113 detects a vibration error, an error command is sent to the display control device 114. Although the case where the warning image is immediately displayed on the third pattern display device 81 by the display control device 114 has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. Control device 110 may detect a vibration error, and main control device 110 may transmit an error command notifying the error to either audio lamp control device 113 or display control device 114 . When an error command is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113, the audio lamp control device 113 receives the error command and further transmits an error command notifying the error to the display control device 114. may

On the other hand, the output signal of the vibration sensor may be input to the display control device 114 so that the display control device 114 detects the presence or absence of a vibration error. Then, when a vibration error is detected, the error occurrence flag is turned on, and the error determination flag corresponding to the vibration error is turned on, so that the error occurrence flag is turned on in the display setting process (see FIG. 220). A warning image may be immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by executing the warning image setting process (see FIG. 221) when is determined. In this case, since it becomes unnecessary to transmit and receive an error command from the sound lamp control device 113 to the display control device 114, the warning image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 more quickly.

Further, in the above control example, the case where the vibration sensor is attached to the back surface of the game board 13 has been described, but instead of the vibration sensor or together with the vibration sensor, a magnet sensor is attached to the back surface of the game board 13. good too. This magnet sensor is a sensor for detecting the magnetic field applied to the game board in order to prevent the flow of balls from being changed by a magnetic field such as a magnet and intentionally entering the ball entrance. , and the output signal of the magnet sensor may be input to any one of the main controller 110 , the sound lamp controller 113 and the display controller 114 . When the output signal of the magnet sensor is input to the main controller 110, when the main controller 110 determines that the magnetic field is applied to the game board 13 based on the output signal of the magnet sensor, the magnetic field error is corrected. A signaling error command may be sent from the main controller 110 via the audio lamp controller 113 or directly to the display controller 114 . Further, when the output signal of the magnet sensor is input to the sound ramp control device 113, when the sound ramp control device 113 determines that the magnetic field is applied to the game board 13 based on the output signal of the magnet sensor, the magnetic field An error command may be sent from the audio lamp controller 113 to the display controller 114 to communicate the error. In the error message image area 235f of the resident video RAM 235 of the display control device 113, image data corresponding to the error message image for notifying the magnetic field error by the display of the third pattern display device 81 is resident. , and when receiving an error command that conveys a magnetic field error from the main control device 110 or the sound lamp control device 113, the display control device 113 may display the warning image on the third pattern display device 81. Further, when the output signal of the magnet sensor is input to the display control device 110, when the display control device 114 determines that the magnetic field is applied to the game board 13 based on the output signal of the magnet sensor, the display control device 113 , the warning image may be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by turning on the error generation flag and setting the error type flag corresponding to the magnetic field error to on. As a result, when the display control device 114 receives an error command from the main control device 110 or the sound lamp control device 113, or grasps the occurrence of a magnetic field error based on the output signal from the magnet sensor, the character ROM 234 Even if the NAND type flash memory 234a is used, the error message image that is resident in the error message image area 235f of the resident video RAM 235 is used to display the error message image that notifies the magnetic field error without delay as the third symbol. It can be displayed on the display device 81 . Therefore, when a magnetic field is applied to the game board by the player, the magnetic field error is immediately notified by displaying an error message image by the third symbol display device 81, thereby preventing the player from making illegal actions. can be deterred.

In the case where the additional data table or the display data table defines the drawing contents necessary to change the color tone of part or all of one effect, the additional data table or the display data table can be used in the third pattern display device 81 to The type of sprite whose color tone is to be changed at that time and the type of sprite whose color tone is to be changed, and It may define color information that designates color tone. Then, the MPU 231 designates the type of sprite whose color tone is to be changed to the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the additional drawing contents specified in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 452d, and the color tone after the change in the sprite. If the color information to be used is specified, the color information of the corresponding sprite type specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the drawing contents specified in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed. A drawing list may be created by replacing with color information defined by the additional drawing contents of the data table. As a result, the image controller 237 can draw an image while changing the color tone of the sprite based on the color information defined by the additional data table.

In addition, when the display data table defines the drawing contents necessary for changing and displaying the image displayed in one effect, the display data table allows the third symbol display device 81 to display the image for one frame. is displayed as one unit (20 milliseconds in this control example). It may define the drawing information of the sprite to be displayed. Then, the MPU 231 stores the type of sprite to be replaced, the type of sprite to be newly displayed, and If the drawing information of the sprite to be newly displayed is defined, various sprites defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the drawing contents defined in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d. Of these, instead of the sprite to be replaced, the sprite type to be newly displayed and the drawing information of the sprite may be included in the drawing list. As a result, the image controller 237 can draw an image including a sprite to be newly displayed.

Further, in the above control example, the case where the display data table includes the transfer data information of the image data required when drawing an image according to the drawing contents defined in the display data table has been described. Transfer data information (additional transfer data information) of image data required when drawing an image according to the additional drawing content defined in the display data table may be included. In this case, the additional transfer data information is associated with identification information ("additional effect 1", "additional effect 2", etc.) for identifying effects that can be additionally displayed for each address, and is added. It may be defined together with the drawing content or separately from the additional drawing content. Then, when the effect to be additionally displayed is determined, the MPU 231 creates a drawing list including the additional drawing content and the additional transfer data information associated with the identification information corresponding to the determined effect. can be configured to

As a result, the image controller 237 can transfer the sprite image data to be used for drawing according to the additional drawing content to the normal video RAM 236 according to the drawing list in advance before the image data is used. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the effect to be additionally displayed can be easily and reliably displayed on the third symbol display device 81. FIG. Further, by using the additional transfer data information specified in the display data table, necessary image data can be transferred to the normal video RAM 236 while instructing the drawing of an image based on the additional drawing content. The drawing of many sprites can be specified by additional drawing contents. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the third pattern display device 81 can display various effects.

In the above control example, in the display table corresponding to the variation pattern that allows the player to select super reach, the drawing contents corresponding to all super reach that can be selected by the player are specified in the display data table, Although the case of specifying only the drawing content corresponding to the super reach selected by is described, it is not necessarily limited to this, and the drawing content corresponding to the selected super reach is added to the display data table. may As a result, it is possible to easily specify the drawing contents of the super reach selected by the player. In addition, since it is not necessary to prescribe drawing contents corresponding to all super reach in the display data table, it is possible to suppress the data size of the display data table from increasing.

In the above control example, the case where the display data table includes the drawing content and the transfer data information has been described, but the display data table is not necessarily limited to this, and the display data table defines the drawing content and the transfer data information. However, the additional drawing content of the effect to be additionally displayed may be defined in the additional data table. In this case, an additional data table buffer may be provided in the work RAM 233, and when a performance to be additionally displayed is determined, an additional data table corresponding to the performance may be set in the additional data table buffer. . Further, even if the additional data table defines not only the additional drawing content but also the transfer data information (additional transfer data information) of the image data necessary for drawing the image according to the additional drawing content. good. As a result, it is possible to specify the drawing content of the effect to be additionally displayed using the additional data table and the transfer data information of the image necessary for the drawing, so that the additional data table and the transfer data table for addition can be used to specify The processing load required for the specification can be reduced compared to the case of specifying the drawing content and the transfer data information respectively.

In the above control example, the case where the display data table is prepared for each variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command in the display control device 114 has been described. Prepare a display data table for each element such as "variation startup", "high-speed variation", "notice effect", "normal reach", "super reach", and according to the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command After specifying the elements necessary for the variable performance, the display data tables corresponding to the paper required for the specified variable performance are combined into one to generate the final periodic display data table corresponding to the variation pattern. You may do so. "Variable start-up", "High-speed fluctuation", "Normal reach", etc. are often displayed in common with each fluctuation pattern. Therefore, the data table can be provided efficiently by dividing the variable effect into elements and preparing the display data table corresponding to each element.

In the above control example, a common pointer 233f is used in the display data table and the transfer data table, and the drawing content and transfer data information are specified from the address indicated by the pointer 233f. A pointer may be provided.

In the above control example, a case where the image controller 237 transmits the V interrupt signal to the MPU 231 at each display interval (every 20 milliseconds in the above control example) of the image for one frame at which drawing processing ends is explained. However, the image controller 237 may transmit this V interrupt signal to the MPU 231 each time the third pattern display device 81 is driven to display an image for one frame. The third pattern display device 81 is driven so that one frame of image is always displayed at equal time intervals (20 millisecond intervals). By sending a , the time interval can be kept accurate without timing.

In the above control example, the image controller 237 identifies the frame buffer in which the rendered image should be developed based on the rendering target buffer information transmitted from the MPU 231, and also determines the image information rendered earlier from the other frame buffer. is read out and sent to the third pattern display device 81, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. are alternately selected, and the previously developed image information is read out from a frame buffer different from the selected frame buffer and transmitted to the third pattern display device 81 . In addition, every time the image controller 237 transmits image information for one frame to the third pattern display device 81, the image information is output to the frame buffer in which the drawn image should be developed and to the third pattern display device 81. You may make it replace with the frame buffer which carries out.

In the above control example, after the finalized display data table corresponding to the finalized display effect is set in the display data table buffer 233d, by the time the finalized display effect is completed, the main controller 110 via the sound lamp controller 113 When neither the variation pattern command (variation pattern command for display) nor the demonstration command (demonstration command for display) is received, the demonstration display data table corresponding to the demonstration effect is set in the display data table buffer 233d As explained above, the fixed display data table corresponding to the fixed display effect may be set in the display data table buffer 233d again. Also, in this case, until either the variation pattern command (variation pattern command for display) or the demo command (demonstration command for display) is received from the main control device 110 via the sound lamp control device 113, the finalized display effect is not performed. Each time it ends, the confirmed display data table corresponding to the confirmed display effect may be reset in the display data table buffer 233d. This allows the third symbol display device 81 to continue displaying the fixed display effect until the variation pattern command or the demonstration command is received from the main control device 110 .

In the above control example, the explanation was given for the case where the demonstration effect is to change the back image and to stop display the third pattern consisting of the main patterns to which the numbers "0" to "9" are not attached. The present invention is not limited to this, and a third pattern consisting of main patterns with numbers or main patterns with no numbers may be stopped and displayed in a translucent state. Alternatively, only the rear image may be changed without displaying the third pattern. Also, a character or a back image that is completely different from the third pattern or the back image used in the variable display may be displayed.

In the above control example, after the power is turned on, the display control means 114 first transfers image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on varying image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a of the resident video RAM 235 and the power-on main image area 235a. When transferring to the time-varying image area 235b, displaying the main image at power-on on the third pattern display device 81 after the transfer is completed, and then transferring the remaining image data to be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. has been described, but it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, after the power is turned on, the display control means 114 first transfers only the image data corresponding to the power-on main image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a of the resident video RAM 235. After the main image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81, the image data to be resident including the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image may be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. As a result, the main image when the power is turned on can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 sooner after the power is turned on. It can be immediately confirmed that the operation has started without any problems when the power is turned on.

In this case, the MPU 231 may monitor completion of transfer of image data corresponding to the power-on variation image to the power-on variation image area 235b. As a result, if a display variation pattern command is received from the sound lamp control device 113 after the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image is stored in the power-on variation image area 235b, the display variation pattern command is received. Based on this, it is possible to cause the third symbol display device 81 to display a simple variable display using the image data corresponding to the power-on variable image stored in the power-on variable image area 235b. It is desirable to transfer the image data corresponding to the power-on varying image to the power-on varying image area 235b immediately after the main image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. FIG. As a result, it is possible to quickly perform the variable display using the power-on variable image.

In the above control example, the display data table and the transfer data table correspond to the time expressed in units of 20 milliseconds. Although a case has been described in which image data information (transfer data information) is specified, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, as long as the display content is specified for each predetermined time interval. This predetermined time interval may be set according to the frame rate of the third pattern display device 81 . For example, when the frame rate of the third pattern display device 81 is 30 fps, that is, when the third pattern display device 81 displays an image of 30 frames per second, the third pattern display device 81 is 1/30 Since one frame image is displayed every second, the display data table may define the display contents for every 1/30 second interval.

Also, in the display data table, as the sprite type to be drawn defined at each predetermined time interval, the sprite type itself is not indicated, but the address of the character ROM 234 where the image data corresponding to the sprite type is stored. may be specified. In the display control device 114, the image data corresponding to the sprite type to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 is read from the character ROM 234. Therefore, the character ROM 234 stores the image data of the sprite type in association with each sprite type. manages the addresses of Therefore, in the display data table, if the address of the character ROM 234 storing the image data corresponding to the sprite type is defined as the display content defined for each predetermined time interval, the sprite can be associated with each sprite type. Since there is no need to manage both the information specifying the character and the address of the character ROM 234, the processing load can be reduced.

In the above control example, the work RAM 233 of the display control device 114 is provided with a stored image data discrimination flag 233i, and whether or not the corresponding image data is stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is stored for each sprite. Although the case has been described, instead of this, the work RAM 233 may store information indicating the sprite type stored in the image storage area 236a. In this case, when instructing transfer of image data of a predetermined sprite type, the MPU 231 refers to the information indicating the sprite type stored in the image storage area 236a stored in the work RAM 233, and transfers the predetermined image data. is already stored in the image storage area 236a, and if not stored, an instruction to transfer the image data of the predetermined sprite type may be set. When the MPU 231 sets a transfer instruction for image data of a predetermined sprite type, the MPU 231 stores information indicating the sprite type for which the transfer instruction is set in the work RAM 233, and the image data of the sprite type is stored. The information indicating the sprite type stored in the sub-area of the image storage area 236a may be deleted.

In the above control example, when image data of a predetermined sprite type is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal-use video RAM 236, the sprite-type image data is stored in the normal-use video RAM 236 based on the stored image data determination flag 233i. The MPU 231 determines whether or not the image data of the predetermined sprite type is stored in the normal video RAM 236, and if the image data of the predetermined sprite type is stored, the MPU 231 performs the processing of not executing the transfer processing. The processing may be performed by the image controller 237 . In this case, a flag equivalent to the stored image data determination flag 233i is prepared in the work RAM provided in the image controller 237, and whether or not the corresponding image data is stored in the normal video RAM 236 for each sprite is determined. may be stored. Also, the work RAM provided in the image controller 237 may store the sprite type stored in the image storage area 236 a of the normal video RAM 236 . In this case, if image data of a predetermined sprite type needs to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal-use video RAM 236, the MPU 231 sends the image controller 237 regardless of the image data storage state in the normal-use video RAM 236. On the other hand, transfer data information of the image data may be transmitted.

In the above control example, the case where only the image data corresponding to "back side A" among the plurality of back side images is made resident in the back side image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 has been described. Image data corresponding to two or more back images may be resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. FIG. For example, the image data of the rear image used in part of super reach may be resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. FIG. In particular, by making the back image of Super Reach, which appears frequently or is expected to be high, resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, image data transfer processing from the character ROM 737 to the normal video RAM 536 is executed. It is possible to suppress the number of times

In the above control example, the transfer data table or the display data table defines the image data transfer command in association with the address indicated by the pointer 233f, and the MPU 231 outputs the transfer command at a predetermined time defined by the display pointer. Although the case where the image controller 237 is controlled to transfer the image data instructed by the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 has been described, the display data table is not necessarily limited to this. Information about the sprite type required in the table is described, and the MPU 231 transfers the necessary image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 based on the information described at the top of the display data table. 237 may be controlled. Alternatively, based on the command received from the sound lamp control device 113, the MPU 231 determines the sprite type to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 in response to the command, and the image data of the image type is normally displayed from the character ROM 234. The image controller 237 may be controlled to transfer to the video RAM 236 for use.

In the above control example, the case where the color tone of a part of the image on the back surface C, which is the back image of the "island stage", changes with time has been described. good. In addition, the back image is not limited to one that scrolls or changes color tone over time. It may be something that moves or changes.

In the above control example, the main control device 110 receives the information of various counters (first per random number counter C1, first per type counter C2) obtained at the time of start winning notified to the sound lamp control device 113, the number of pending balls Although the case where it is included in the command has been described, it is not necessarily limited to this, and by another command, the information of various counters (first random number counter C1, first per type counter C2) obtained at the time of starting winning is displayed with a voice lamp. The controller 113 may be notified.

In the above control example, when executing the variable performance, the case of displaying the high-speed variation in which all the symbols Z1 to Z3 are scrolled at such a high speed that the player cannot visually recognize them has been described. , all the patterns Z1 to Z3 may be reduced to an unrecognizable degree and displayed, or all the patterns Z1 to Z3 may be displayed as snow noise-like images in which a large number of white dots are randomly displayed.

In the above control example, the case where the game board 13 is provided with one first start port 64a for starting the lottery for the special symbol jackpot when a ball enters the ball has been described, but this is not necessarily the case. Instead, the game board 13 may be provided with a plurality of (for example, two) first ball entrances, each of which is independently detected to start a jackpot lottery. In this case, when there is a hold at each of the first ball entrances, the number of held ball commands sent by the main controller 110 to the voice lamp controller 113 indicate which of the first ball entrances is being held. May contain information. In addition, the variation pattern command that the main controller 110 transmits to the sound lamp control device 113 when starting the variation also includes information indicating which of the first entrances is the suspended variation effect. good. As a result, in the voice lamp control device 113, a holding ball counter is prepared for each first ball entrance, and when a holding ball number command is received, the first ball entering indicated by the holding ball number command is received. When the number of held balls is set in the number of held balls counter for the mouth and a variation pattern command is received, if the number of held balls counter for the first entrance indicated by the variation pattern command is decremented by 1, the first entrance The number of held balls can be counted every time.

In the above control example, each time the value (N) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d in the main controller 110 is updated (that is, each time it increases or decreases), the main controller issues a reserved ball number command. Although the case of transmitting from the control device 110 to the audio lamp control device 113 has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, only when the value (N) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d in the main controller 110 increases, the main controller 110 transmits the reserved number command to the sound lamp controller 113 . Further, the voice lamp control device 113 is configured to decrease the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b by 1 when receiving the variation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110 . As a result, the number of times master controller 110 transmits a hold number command to audible lamp controller 113 and the number of times audible lamp controller 113 receives a hold number command can be reduced. The control load of the audio ramp control device 113 can be reduced.

In the above control example, winning to the first starting port 64a and passing through the through gate 67 are each suspended up to four times, but the maximum number of suspended balls is not limited to four. , 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). In addition, the number of pending balls for variable display based on the winning to the first starting port 64a is changed in part of the third pattern display device 81 by numbers or by the number of held balls in the areas divided into four. It may be displayed in a form (for example, color or lighting pattern), and a light-emitting member such as a lamp is provided separately from the first pattern display device 37, and the number of reserved balls is notified by the light-emitting member. may be configured.

Further, as shown in the above control example, the variable display, which is a type of dynamic display, is not limited to vertically scrolling the design as identification information on the display screen of the third design display device 81. It may be performed by moving and displaying a pattern along a predetermined path such as a direction or an L shape. Further, the dynamic display of the identification information is not limited to the variable display of the pattern. It also includes the production display etc. In this case, one or more characters are used as the third symbol.

<Second control example>
Next, a second control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 226 to 246. FIG. In the second control example, various production devices (the production member 700, the horizontal slide member 840, and the injection device 400 for injecting the granular member 320 (Figs. 6)) will be described in detail. Note that the pachinko machine 10 in the second control example differs from the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example in that the control details regarding the above-described various production devices are added, and the rest is the same. Identical contents are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

First, with reference to FIGS. 226 to 229, the contents of various effect devices in the second control example will be described. It should be noted that the specific configurations and operating principles of various production devices are the same as those of the first control example described above, and thus detailed description and illustration thereof will be omitted. In addition, for convenience of explanation, in the first control example described above, different reference numerals were assigned to the structures (structures having individual functions) that make up each effect device, but in this control example, each effect device , and the description will be made as if each effect device has each function described in the first control example. In addition, although the names of the effect devices assigned the same reference numerals as in the first control example described above are partially changed, the details are the same as those described in the first control example described above. is the same as the device (structure) denoted by the reference numeral .

FIG. 226(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing various devices of the pachinko machine 10 in this control example, and FIG. 226(b) is a schematic diagram showing the configuration of the injection device 400. be. The diagram shown in FIG. 226(a) is a simplified version of the diagram shown in FIG. 7 of the first control example. Detailed description is omitted.

As shown in FIG. 226( a ), in this pachinko machine 10 , an operation unit 500 is provided so as to surround the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 . The operation unit 500 is assembled to the pachinko machine 10 so that the display surface (liquid crystal display) of the third symbol display device 81 is positioned in the opening formed in the center. A production member 700 is provided on the upper side of the operation unit 500, and horizontal slide members (rotational members) 840 are provided on the left and right sides, respectively. Further, the injection device 400 is provided at the back side of the action unit 500, that is, at a position hidden behind the action unit 500 and not visible when the pachinko machine 10 is viewed from the front.

Since the detailed operation principle is the same as the first control example described above, the detailed description thereof will be omitted, but the effect member 700 is movable so as to move downward from the standby position shown in FIG. , and is configured to cover about 1/3 of the display surface of the third pattern display device 81 when positioned in the operating position moved downward (see FIG. 8). Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 9, the effect member 700 is configured so as to be able to execute a split motion. With this configuration, by moving the effect member 700 from the standby position to the operating position, the player who is gazing at the display surface of the third pattern display device 81 is interested in the effect member 700. By making it easier for the player to hold it and executing the divided motion after positioning the effect member 700 at the operating position, it is possible to make the player perform an unexpected effect while the player is watching. , can enhance the performance effect.

Further, each of the rotating members 840 can move independently in the vertical direction, and further, the rotating member 840 itself is configured to be rotatable around the central portion of the rotating member (see FIG. 11). In this way, by rotating the rotating member 840 while moving the position of the rotating member 840, it is possible to perform a powerful performance for the player.

Next, the configuration of the injection device 400 will be described with reference to FIG. 226(b). The ejection device 400 is a device for radially ejecting the granular members 320 upward (in the direction of the display surface of the third pattern display device 81), and the ejection device 400 itself is difficult to be visually recognized by the player. Therefore, it is assembled to the pachinko machine 10 so as to be hidden behind the operation unit 500. - 特許庁The injection device 400 is formed with a storage area ra for storing the granular member 320, and the bottom surface member of the storage area ra is formed in an arch shape. By driving the driving mechanism 400m, the bottom surface member is configured to be movable in the vertical direction. 320 is configured to be ejected upward. Since the specific operating principle of the injection device 400 is the same as that of the first control example described above, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In addition, in the second control example, a storage detection sensor sa is provided as detection means capable of detecting the amount (number) of the granular members 320 stored in the storage area ra. This storage detection sensor sa is formed by a weight sensor capable of detecting the load applied to the arch-shaped bottom surface, and based on the detection result of the weight sensor, it can be determined whether all the granular members 320 are stored in the storage area ra. configured to be identifiable. Based on the detection result of the detection means, it is possible to detect a state in which the granular member 320 injected by the injection device 400 is not stored in the storage area ra, for example, a state in which the granular material 320 is clogged without returning to the storage area ra. can.

The configuration of the detecting means for detecting whether or not the granular members 320 are normally stored in the storage area ra is not limited to the configuration described above. , the number of granular members 320 ejected in the direction of the display surface of the third pattern display device 81 beyond the detection line, and the number of granular members 320 ejected from the display surface side of the third pattern display device 81 to the storage area ra and the number of returning granular members 320 are provided, and whether or not all the granular members 320 are stored in the storage area ra can be determined based on the measurement result of the measuring device. You can Further, as in this control example, when the object to be injected from the injection device 400 has a rollable shape (spherical shape), the object to be injected injected by the injection device 400 moves into the storage area ra. A counting means capable of counting the number of shot members rolling on the alignment path is provided, and based on the counting result of the counting means, all the granular members 320 are placed in the storage area ra. It may be configured such that it can be determined whether or not it is stored.

In this way, by configuring the state of the granular member 320 so as to be discernible, it becomes possible to execute an appropriate effect. In other words, in a production device such as the production member 700 and the rotating member 840, the operation of which is mechanically controlled based on the driving of the driving means (motor or solenoid), the driving condition of the driving means (the number of rotations of the motor (the number of steps) ) and the energization state of the solenoid), it is possible to grasp the current state (position) of the production device. It is possible to determine the timing at which the ejected granular member 320 is stored again in the storage area ra, although it is possible to grasp the timing by determining the driving state of the drive mechanism 400m. That is, the area reached by the ejected granular members 320 is varied according to the direction of ejection and the degree of collision between the ejected granular members 320, and furthermore, the force of the ejected granular members 320 is weakened, and the force of gravity is reduced. When falling downward due to , the granular member 320 collides with each member provided in the ejection area or gets stuck in the gap between each member, resulting in a delay in the timing of returning to the storage area ra. There was fear. Furthermore, static electricity generated by collision or contact of the granular member 320 may cause the granular member 320 to be attracted, delaying the timing of returning to the storage area ra or making it impossible to return.

Although the details will be described later, in the second control example, in order to solve the above-described problem, the state of the ejected granular member 320 is determined, and based on the determination result, the granular member 320 is It is configured so that the timing and content of the execution of the production using can be variably controlled. Therefore, for example, it is possible to prevent the performance effect of injecting the granular members 320 from being executed by the injection device 400 in a state in which the granular members 320 are not stored in the storage area ra, thereby reducing the performance effect.

Furthermore, in the second control example, the determination value for determining that the number (amount) of the granular members 320 stored in the storage area ra is abnormal is changed according to the operation content (purpose of operation) of the injection device 400. It consists of By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the excessive determination of abnormality by the abnormality determination, making it difficult to execute the effect of injecting the granular member 320 from the injection device 400, and reducing the effect of the effect. can.

Furthermore, in the second control example, in a part of the state in which all the granular members 320 are not stored in the storage area ra, all the granular members 320 are intentionally ejected by the injection device 400. The granular member 320 is configured to be stored in the storage area ra. In this way, it is possible to try to normalize the accommodation state of the granular member 320 by using the motion control used for the presentation, so that the details of the motion control for the ejection device 400 can be simplified.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 227 to 229, the contents of effects using each effect device executed in the pachinko machine 10 of the second control example will be described. 227 to 229 are diagrams for simply explaining the flow of effects using the respective effect devices (effect member 700, rotating member 840, ejection device 400), and detailed configurations are omitted. However, since the specific structure and principle of operation are the same as those of the first control example described above, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 227(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a state in which the effect member 700 is positioned at the operating position, and FIG. 227(b) is a state in which the effect member 700 is positioned at the operating position. 2 is a schematic diagram schematically showing a state in which the injection device 400 is driven and the granular member 320 is injected while the dividing operation is being performed in . FIG. 228(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a state in which the production member 700 moves to the standby position and the granular member 320 returns to the storage area ra, and FIG. 8 is a schematic diagram schematically showing a state in which an injection device 400 is driven and a particulate member 320 is injected while an injection device 840 is being driven; FIG.

In this control example, a series of accessory effects using the effect member 700, the rotating member 840, and the injection device 400 are configured to be executable. In this series of performance effects, first, the first effect is executed to move the effect member 700 to the operating position (see FIG. 227(a)), and then the ejection device 400 is driven while the effect member 700 is split. A second effect is executed (see FIG. 227(b)), and after a predetermined waiting period has elapsed, a third effect is executed in which the rotation member 840 is operated and the injection device 400 is driven (see FIG. 228(b)). and are configured to be executable.

In this way, by executing an effect in which a plurality of various devices are interlocked, it is possible to execute a powerful effect with a sense of unity for the player. Further, as shown in FIG. 227(b), by driving the injection device 400 in correspondence with the division operation of the effect member 700, it is possible to give an illusion that the granular member 320 is protruding from the interior of the effect member 700. Therefore, the production effect can be enhanced.

In addition, in this control example, the operation state of the injection device 400 (the collection state of the granular members 320) can be determined during execution of the series of character effects. collection situation) is determined to be in a predetermined abnormal state, only the effect display executed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81 is performed without using the effect member 700, the rotating member 840, and the injection device 400. (See FIG. 29) By configuring in this way, the effect member 700, the rotating member 840, and the injection device 400 can be changed in a state in which the granular member 320 protrudes. While suppressing the occurrence of a situation in which various members are damaged due to the movement of the , it is possible to minimize the reduction in the performance effect of the series of character performances.

Here, with reference to FIG. 230, the flow of the series of character production will be described. FIG. 230 is a timing chart schematically showing the states of various devices of the pachinko machine 10 according to the passage of time when a series of performances are executed. FIG. 230(b) is the sound lamp control device 113, FIG. 230(c) is the liquid crystal display of the third pattern display device 81, FIG. ) is a timing chart schematically showing the situation of the falling accessory (effect member) 700, and FIG.

As shown in FIG. 230(a), in this control example, during the variation period of the special symbol variation (for example, variation time of 90 seconds) performed by the main controller 110, the above-described series of character effects are performed. It is configured as follows. That is, as shown in FIG. 230(c), on the display surface (liquid crystal display) of the third symbol display device 81, based on the start of the special symbol variation, the variation effect display of the third symbol is executed, Thereafter, 45 seconds after the variable performance display is executed, a series of character performance display corresponding to the series of character performance is executed.

As shown in FIG. 230(b), when executing a series of character effects, it is necessary to cause the projectile accessory 400 to perform a preparatory motion in advance, and five seconds before executing the series of character effects ( Preparatory control is executed with 5 seconds from the timing 40 seconds after the start of special symbol variation as a preparatory period. When the preparatory control is executed, the shooting accessory 400 performs a preparatory action (see FIG. 230(d)). performs the operation (see FIG. 226(b)). Then, when the first action of the shooting accessory 400 is completed, a preparatory action (moving from the firing position to the standby position) is performed for the next action, and a waiting period is set until the execution timing of the second action. be.

Then, when a predetermined period of time has passed after the action of the falling accessory 700 has ended, and when 60 seconds have passed since the variable effect display was executed, the rotating member 840 starts to operate, and the shooting role is performed in accordance with the timing. A second action of the object 400 is performed. In this way, the performance effect can be enhanced by executing motion control for each rendering device so that the motion timing of the shooting accessory 400 matches the motion contents of the falling accessory 700 and the rotating member 840. .

Here, as the preparatory operation of the projectile accessory 400, there is a driving process for moving the projectile accessory 400 to the standby position (see FIG. 227(a)), and it is determined whether or not the condition of the granular member 320 is normal. and a determination process are executed. Then, when it is determined that the granular member 320 is normal (normally stored in the storage area ra), the next operation of the projectile accessory 400 can be executed.

As shown in FIG. 230, in this control example, the projectile accessory 400 is configured to operate multiple times within a series of performance periods. We have a waiting period. This standby period is provided as a period during which part of the preparatory operation can be executed again when the preparatory operation has not been completed normally. Specifically, at the end timing of the preparation period, it is determined whether or not all of the granular members 320 are stored in the storage area ra. It is configured to be able to execute the process of determining again whether all of the granular members 320 are stored in the storage area ra after an interval.

As described above, the granular member 320 fired by the firing accessory 400 moves irregularly within the firing area (ejection area), so the time it takes to return to the storage area ra varies greatly depending on the case. It will be. Therefore, the process of determining whether all the granular members 320 are stored in the storage area ra can be executed a plurality of times at different timings, and even if a slight error occurs, the second operation of the projectile accessory 400 can be performed. is executable. By configuring in this way, it is possible to facilitate execution of a series of character productions, and to enhance the production effect.

Although detailed description will be given later, in this control example, it is determined that the storage condition of the granular member 320 is abnormal during the preparation period of the projectile accessory 400, and even when the waiting period has passed, When the determination is continued, the execution of the performance for moving the projectile accessory 400 is stopped and another performance is executed. By configuring in this way, even if the performance using the projectile accessory 400 cannot be normally executed, it is possible to execute a series of performances that do not make the player feel uncomfortable.

Next, with reference to FIG. 231, the content of the operation control in the case of turning on the pachinko machine 10 among the operation controls of the shooting accessory 400 will be described. FIG. 231 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the flow of operation control of the projectile accessory 400 (at the time of start-up). In this control example, when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, it is configured to check the operation of various effect devices provided in the pachinko machine 10 . In this manner, the operation confirmation of various performance devices is executed at the time when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, that is, at the time before the opening of the game parlor where the game using the pachinko machine 10 is performed. Therefore, when an abnormality occurs in the operation of various production devices, for example, when it is determined that it is an abnormal state in which normal operation cannot be performed due to a malfunction of the drive mechanism (motor, solenoid, drive gear, etc.) , it is possible to carry out the repair without bothering the player during the game.

As shown in FIG. 231, when the operation confirmation process for the projectile accessory 400 is executed when the power is turned on, first, granular member monitoring is performed to determine whether the granular member 320 is normally stored in the storage area ra. Processing is executed (see FIG. 231(b)). In this granular member monitoring process, it is determined whether the granular member 320 is normally stored in the storage area ra based on the detection result of the storage detection sensor sa shown in FIG. 226(b). Then, based on the determination result of the particulate member monitoring process, it is determined whether or not the current storage situation is abnormal (see FIG. 231(c)).

In this control example, in the abnormality determination for determining whether or not the determination result of the particulate member monitoring process is abnormal, the abnormality determination rank is changed according to the timing (situation) at which the abnormality determination is executed. ing. Although the details will be described later, the storage amount of the granular member determined to be abnormal is changed according to the abnormality determination timing (situation).

In the abnormality determination performed first in the operation confirmation process for the projectile accessory 400 at the time of power-up, the abnormality determination with the highest determination level (high level A) is performed. In this high level A abnormality determination, it is determined as "normal" only when the determination result of the granular member monitoring process is that all the granular members 320 are stored in the storage area ra. If it is a determination result, it is configured to be determined as "abnormal". Then, when it is determined as "abnormal" by the abnormality determination, the execution of the initial operation process at the time of power-up is interrupted, and an abnormality notification process for notifying the abnormal state to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 is executed. By configuring in this way, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of secondary damage due to the continuation of the initial operation process in a state where an abnormality has occurred in the projectile accessory 400 .

Then, when it is determined to be “normal” in the abnormality determination performed at the first timing of the initial operation process, then the preparatory operation and the firing operation are performed as drive control of the projectile accessory 400 . After that, after a standby period of 3 seconds, the second abnormality determination is performed. In this second abnormality determination, the abnormality determination (high level B) having the next highest determination level after the above-described high level A abnormality determination is performed.

In this high-level B abnormality determination, when the determination result of the granular member monitoring process is that all the granular members 320 are stored in the storage area ra, it is determined as "normal", and the amount is within a predetermined amount. "Retry" if it is abnormal LV1 indicating that the error (eg, error 10%), abnormal LV2 indicating that the error is a predetermined amount or more (eg, error is greater than 10%), or If it is abnormal LV3, it is configured to be determined as "abnormal".

Next, with reference to FIG. 232, the contents of the operation control when using the shooting accessory 400 as the effect of the pachinko machine 10 (for example, when performing a series of accessory effects) will be described. FIG. 232 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the flow of operation control of the projectile accessory 400 (during a series of accessory presentations). In this control example, similar to the initial operation process described above, even when executing a series of performances, abnormality determination is performed for various devices used for performances. And, according to the result of the abnormality determination, the contents of the series of character performances are changed. Furthermore, by varying the determination level of the abnormality determination in the abnormality determination, it is configured to facilitate the execution of the production using the shooting accessory 400 in the series of accessory production.

Next, the production mode of the series of role productions executed according to the abnormality determination result of the shooting accessory 400 in the series of role productions will be described with reference to FIG. 233 . FIG. 233 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the flow of effects executed in a series of role product effects. In this control example, as shown in FIG. 232, two abnormality determinations (first abnormality determination with a medium level determination level and second abnormality determination with a low level determination level) are performed during a series of character productions. 233(a), in the first half of the target effect period of the series of character object effects, the first launch effect of the projectile object 400 and the falling object 700 are displayed. , and are executed. Then, after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, the second firing effect of the projectile accessory 400 and the rotation effect of the rotating member 840 are executed. Incidentally, on the liquid crystal display of the third symbol display device 81, an effect display corresponding to a predetermined series of accessory effects is executed.

On the other hand, when it is determined as "abnormal (for example, abnormal LV2)" in the first abnormality determination, it means that the granular member 320 is not normally stored in the storage area ra. Even if the object 400 is moved, the rendering effect is low, so as shown in FIG. 233(b), a rendering mode different from the normal mode (see FIG. 233(a)) is set. Specifically, the execution of the first shooting effect of the shooting accessory 400 is stopped, and as the effect using the falling accessory 700, a specific falling effect is set instead of the normal falling effect. Thereafter, regardless of the result of the second abnormality determination to be executed, even in the second half of the series of performances, the execution of the second shooting performance using the shooting accessory 400 is stopped, and the rotation performance using the rotating member 840 is stopped. is executed.

Since the effect period of the specific falling effect is set longer than the effect period of the normal falling effect, the interval from the end of the effect of the falling accessory 700 to the start of the effect of the rotating member 840 is normal. It is constructed so as to be shorter than the series of role productions that are executed at the beginning. In other words, in a series of performances that are normally executed, the shooting role 400 is driven in correspondence with the operations of various performance devices (the falling role 700 and the rotating member 840). In order for the object 400 to be driven normally, it was necessary to leave an interval of a predetermined period.

On the other hand, in the effect mode of the series of role effects shown in FIG. 233(b), the shooting accessory 400 is not driven, so even if the effect period of the falling accessory 700 is lengthened, the player feels uncomfortable. there is nothing In addition, since the timing of executing the effect of the rotating member 840 is the same as in the normal state (see FIG. 233(a)), it is possible to share the control processing contents between the normal state and the abnormal state. can be reduced.

In the example shown in FIG. 233(b), when the result of the first abnormality determination is determined to be "abnormal", the result of the second abnormality determination is not considered, and the Although it is configured to set an effect mode that does not use the accessory 400, it is not limited to this, and when the result of the second abnormality determination is determined to be "normal," the second shot of the shot accessory 400 is performed. It may be configured to execute production. That is, in the case where the first abnormality determination of the series of performance effects is determined as "abnormal", for example, the granular members 320 are stored biased in the storage area ra, and all the granular members 320 are stored in the storage area ra. If it is not determined normally that the falling accessory 700 is present, or if it is determined to be "abnormal" because the granular member 320 is caught in the falling accessory 700, an effect using the falling accessory 700 is executed as a series of accessory effects. By doing so, all the granular members 320 may be normally stored in the storage area ra, so the second shooting performance of the shooting accessory 400 may be executed based on the result of the second abnormality determination. As a result, it is possible to facilitate the performance using the projectile accessory 400 .

Next, a description will be given of an effect mode of a series of character productions when an abnormality is determined in the second abnormality determination performed during the series of character productions. FIG. 233(c) is a diagram schematically showing a performance mode of a series of character performances when the second abnormality determination determines that the "slight abnormality" is determined.

When the same determination as "normal" is made in the first abnormality determination, the same first launch effect and drop effect as the series of accessory effects in the normal state are executed. After that, when it is determined as "slight abnormality (for example, abnormality LV2)" in the second abnormality determination, a delay period is set, and after the delay period elapses, retry processing is executed to execute abnormality determination again. . Then, when the result of the abnormality determination executed in the retry process is "normal", the same operation control as in the normal state is performed. The second launch effect of the projectile accessory 400, the rotation effect of the rotating member 840, and the effect display executed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81 are simultaneously executed based on the delay period elapsed timing.

In other words, it is configured to delay the execution timing of the second half production in the series of character production by the period (delay period) during which the retry process is executed. During the delay period, the specific display is executed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 without executing the operation control of various effect devices. By configuring in this way, the display content of the effect display that is continuously displayed during the execution of the series of character performances and the operation contents of various effect devices whose execution timing is variable depending on the presence or absence of delay are not deviated. It is possible to suppress the deterioration of the production effect.

Although detailed description is omitted, for example, in the pattern shown in FIG. A second specific display of the contents is displayed, and a series of performances of the character is executed in which various performance devices do not operate. By configuring in this way, it is possible to end a series of character performances using a performance display that does not give a sense of incongruity with respect to the display content of the specific display. In addition, it is possible to reduce the amount of data corresponding to the contents of operation control of various dedicated effect devices corresponding to special abnormality determination results.

Next, a description will be given of an effect mode of a series of character productions when an abnormality is determined in the second abnormality determination performed during the series of character productions. FIG. 233(d) is a diagram schematically showing a production mode of a series of character productions when the second abnormality judgment is "abnormal (for example, abnormal LV3)". When the determination result of the second abnormality determination is determined to be abnormal LV3, the special operation effect is executed without executing the retry process as shown in FIG. 233(c). This special operation effect sets an operation effective period during which the player can operate the operation means (frame button 22), and based on the player's operation of the operation means within the operation effective period, various effect devices are activated. It is a production that activates something.

In other words, based on the determination of "abnormality" by the abnormality determination, the operation of various production devices as the operation scenario of the series of character production is stopped, and instead, the operation production used as another production is incorporated. Configure. By configuring in this way, it becomes possible for the player to operate various production devices by operating the frame button 22 during execution of a series of character productions in which the production devices are operated a plurality of times. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from thinking that the performance mode is set due to the abnormal judgment of the projectile accessory 400.例文帳に追加

<Regarding the electrical configuration of the second control example>
Next, the electrical configuration in this second control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 234 to 236. FIG. First, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in this second control example will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 234 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in this second control example. The electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in this second control example is different from the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example described above (see FIG. 152). and the configuration of the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113. Specifically, the decorative accessory motors for driving various production devices are different. The difference is that the group Mz is connected. Since other configurations are the same as those of the first control example described above, they are denoted by the same reference numerals and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted. The decorative accessory motor group Mz includes various motors and solenoids for driving the falling accessory 700, the rotating member 840, the shooting accessory 400, etc., and their specific configurations and operations. Since the principle is the same as that of the first control example described above, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Next, referring to FIG. 235(a), the configuration of the ROM 222 of the sound ramp control device 113 in the second control example will be described. FIG. 235(a) is a diagram schematically showing the configuration of the ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the second control example. As shown in FIG. 235(a), this second control example differs from the above-described first control example in that a role product action table 222aa and an abnormality determination table 222ab are added. is. The same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

The accessory action table 222aa contains operation contents (operation scenario ) is stored, and action scenarios are defined corresponding to the action contents to be executed for each of various decorative accessories, and action scenarios corresponding to the action contents to be executed are defined It is read and an action based on the read action scenario is performed.

Here, the contents of the scenarios defined in this role product action table 222aa will be described with reference to FIG. 236(a). FIG. 236(a) is a schematic diagram showing various scenarios defined in the role product action table 222aa. As shown in FIG. 236(a), the role product motion table 222aa includes, in addition to the motion scenario referred to when executing the variable effect, when the pachinko machine 10 is turned on (at the time of start-up) Operational scenarios that are referenced during initial operation are also defined.

Specifically, the initial action scenario 222aa1, the launch accessory preparation action scenario 222aa2, the first launch accessory action scenario 222aa3, the second launch accessory action scenario 222aa4, the falling accessory action scenario 222aa5, and the rotating accessory action scenario 222aa6. is stored.

Next, the abnormality determination table 222ab is referred to when determining how much the granular member 320 fired by the projectile accessory 400 has returned to the storage area ra of the projectile accessory 400. It is configured such that the determination result of the abnormality determination is changed according to the error from the normal value. In this control example, the state in which all the granular members 320 (for example, 10 pieces) are stored in the storage area ra is defined as "10", and each time the number of stored granular members 320 decreases by one, an error is generated. It is configured to be determined in increments of 10%.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 236(b), when the error (%) is "0", the determination result is "normal", and when the error is "10%", the determination result is "abnormal LV1 ”, and when the error is “20% to 30%”, the determination result is “abnormal LV2”, and when the error is “40% or more”, the determination result is “abnormal LV3”. In this way, by stepwise determining the current state with respect to the state in which all the granular members 320 (for example, 10 pieces) are stored in the storage area ra, the step of determining an abnormality according to the situation. can be easily varied.

Next, with reference to FIG. 235(b), the configuration of the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the sound ramp control device 113 in the second control example will be described. FIG. 235(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113. As shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 235(b), this second control example differs from the above-described first control example in that a character delay timer 223aa and an effect level storage area 223ab are added, and the rest is the same. is. Identical contents are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

The role delay timer 223aa is a timer for measuring the period during which the operation control of the projecting role 400 is delayed. ) is set (see S3909 in FIG. 243). Then, the value is updated each time the performance management process (see S2151 in FIG. 242) is executed, and when the value of the timer becomes 0, the process for re-determining the abnormality of the projectile accessory 400 is performed. is executed (see S3810 in FIG. 244). During the period in which the value of the role delay timer 223aa is greater than 0, that is, during the delay period, operation instructions to various production devices other than the shooting role 400 executed by the sound lamp control device 113 are also delayed. .

By configuring in this way, it is possible to delay the operation instruction to other various production devices by the same length as the delay period set for the operation control of the projectile accessory 400. It is possible to facilitate execution of motion control with a sense of unity for various production devices including 400 . Also, even if the processing for extending the delay period of the projectile accessory 400 in the middle is configured to be executable, until the value of the accessory delay timer 223aa becomes 0, other various production devices are operated. Since no instructions are output, it is possible to facilitate execution of motion control with a sense of unity for various production devices including the projectile accessory 400 .

In addition, in this control example, in addition to the various effect devices, the process of instructing the display control contents related to the display effect displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 is also delayed. Regardless of the length of the delay period set for the projectile accessory 400, an effect device may be provided that outputs an action instruction without limitation. By providing such an effect device, by distinguishing between the operation contents of the projectile accessory 400 and the operation content of the effect device, the player can understand that the operation control of the projectile accessory 400 has been delayed. can be notified easily.

The effect level storage area 223ab is a storage area in which the effect level set according to the effect mode of the effect using the projectile accessory 400 is temporarily stored. In this control example, before executing the effect using the shooting accessory 400, that is, the firing effect of firing the granular member 320 toward the display surface side of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 227(b)) , a preparatory action must be performed to lower the bottom member of the projectile accessory 400 to the preparatory position. Since the preparatory operation is executed by driving the driving mechanism 400m (see FIG. 226(b)), when the player notices that the driving mechanism 400m has been driven, the shooting effect is executed. Since the player will know that the shooting effect will be executed before the game starts, there is a problem that it is difficult to provide the player with an unexpected effect.

Therefore, in this control example, even if the shooting effect is not executed, only the preparatory motion can be executed. As a result, even if the player notices that the drive mechanism 400m has been driven, it is difficult for the player to know whether or not the shooting performance will be executed, so that the player can easily be provided with an unexpected performance. be able to.

Then, in this control example, when setting an effect in which the preparatory action of the projectile accessory 400 is executed, the effect set this time is an effect mode in which only the preparatory action is executed, or an effect in which the firing effect is executed. It is configured such that it is possible to determine whether it is in a mode or not, and to determine the effect level according to the result of the determination. Specifically, in the case of an effect in which only the preparatory motion is executed, the effect level is determined as level 1, and in the case of an effect in which the firing effect is executed, the effect level is determined to be level 2, which are stored in the effect level storage area 223ab (FIG. 241). (see S3705 and S3706 of ).

The effect level stored in the effect level storage area 223ab is referred to when determining the abnormality level using the abnormality determination table 222ab. In this way, the effect of executing only the preparatory action, that is, the effect of not controlling the operation of the shooting accessory 400 even if the result of the abnormality determination is "normal" is executed, and the firing effect is executed. By making the determination result of the abnormality level by the abnormality determination different between the effect to be performed, for example, because the effect of only the preparation action was executed, the firing effect was not executed, or the result of the abnormality determination was "abnormal". , it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand whether the shooting effect was not executed.

<Regarding control processing contents of the audio ramp control device in the second control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 237 to 246, control processing contents of the sound ramp control device 113 in the second control example will be described. In the second control example, in contrast to the first control example described above, the start-up process 2 (see FIG. 237) is replaced with the start-up process (see FIG. 193), and the main process (see FIG. 194) is replaced with the main process. Processing 2 (see FIG. 239) is replaced with effect mode setting process (see S2607 in FIG. 200), and effect mode setting process 2 (see S2657 in FIG. 240) is replaced with liquid crystal effect execution management process (see S2110 in FIG. 209). The difference is that the liquid crystal effect execution management process 2 (see S2160 in FIG. 245) is replaced with the operation effect management process (see S2111 in FIG. 210) and the operation effect management process 2 (see S2161 in FIG. 246) is executed. , are otherwise identical. The same reference numerals are given to the same contents, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 237, start-up processing 2 (see FIG. 237) will be described. FIG. 237 is a flowchart schematically showing the contents of start-up processing 2. FIG. As shown in FIG. 237, the start-up process 2 differs from the above-described start-up process (see FIG. 193) in that an initial operation process (S2051) is added.

Specifically, when the start-up process 2 (see FIG. 237) is executed, the processes of S2001 to S2010, which are the same as those of the above-described start-up process (see FIG. 193), are executed. When the process of S2010 is completed, the initial operation process is then executed (S2051), then interrupt permission is set (S2011), and this process ends. Details of this initial operation process will be described later with reference to FIG. ) is the process for executing the operation check. In other words, in the second control example, the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, and during the period (startup period) until the main process can be executed in a loop, it is possible to check the operation of various effect devices. . Then, when an abnormality occurs during the confirmation of the operation of various production devices, the start-up process 2 is not terminated, and the abnormality is notified to the outside.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to grasp that various devices for decoration are out of order when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, so that various devices that are out of order while the player is playing. It is possible to suppress the fact that the performance is executed using , giving the player a sense of displeasure. Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of recent years, a plurality of performance devices are configured to be operated and controlled, and the content of the operation control is configured to differ according to the lottery result of the special symbol. Therefore, even when the pachinko machine 10 is being played, it is rare that all the operation control contents set for the various effect devices are executed. Even if an impossible production device occurs, if the production for controlling the operation of the production device is not executed, it is not possible to grasp that the production device is out of order. There was a problem that the cable was left disconnected for several days. On the other hand, in this control example, when the start-up process 2 of the pachinko machine 10 is executed, the operation control for confirming the operation is executed for various effect devices. It is possible to prevent the failure of the device from being overlooked for a long time.

Next, the contents of the initial operation process (S2051) executed in the start-up process 2 (see FIG. 237) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 237 is a flow chart schematically showing the contents of the initial operation process (S2051). In this initial operation process (S2051), a process for confirming the operation of the decorative production device (for example, the falling accessory 700, the rotating member 840, the shooting accessory 400, etc.) provided in the pachinko machine 10 is performed. This process is looped until all operations are confirmed. Note that FIG. 238 explains in detail the processing contents related to the operation confirmation of the projectile accessory 400, which is the characteristic configuration of this control example, but the other production devices are similarly subjected to the operation confirmation processing. ing. As for the other effect devices, the detailed description of the processing related to operation confirmation will be omitted.

When the initial action process (S2051) is executed, first, the initial action scenario 222aa1 is read from the role product action table 222aa (S2081). Then, operation control corresponding to the initial operation scenario 222aa1 is executed (S2082). Here, in the initial operation scenario 222aa1, an operation scenario is defined so that the operation control is sequentially executed for each effect device, and it is determined that the result of the operation check of one effect device is normal. In this case, it is configured to check the operation of the next production device. By independently controlling the operation of each rendering device in this way, it is possible to prevent the rendering devices in operation from colliding with each other and being damaged.

Furthermore, when the operation confirmation of all the production devices is completed normally, it is configured to execute the operation confirmation of simultaneously operating a plurality of production devices in the combination used in the actual production. In this case, the operation scenario for production stored in the role product operation table 222aa is read out, and the operation control for each production is executed. In this way, by checking the operation using the operation control of the contents actually executed in the production, it is possible to determine whether or not the operation instructions are properly output to the plurality of production devices, or to check whether the plurality of production When the devices are driven at the same time, it is possible to check whether an excessive electric power value is output or not, and the frequency of malfunction of the performance device during the game can be suppressed.

In this control example, the initial action process is executed using the action scenario for the initial action. may be executed. By configuring in this way, it is possible to reduce the amount of action scenarios for operating the production device.

In addition, in this control example, the initial action scenario 222aa1 is defined so that the action control is sequentially executed for each effect device. The contents of the initial action scenario 222aa1 may be defined so that the action control is performed redundantly for the effect devices. As a result, the time spent on the initial operation process can be shortened.

After the processing of S2082 is completed, it is next determined whether or not the motion control of the projectile accessory 400 is completed (S2083). If the operation control of the device is being executed, or if the operation control of the projectile accessory 400 is being executed (S2083: No), it is determined whether an abnormality has occurred in a production device other than the projectile accessory 400. Then (S2084), if it is determined that no abnormality has occurred (S2084: No), the initial operation scenario 222aa1 is updated (S2085), and it is determined whether the updated initial operation scenario 222aa1 indicates termination. However, if it is determined that the contents do not indicate the end (S2085: No), the process proceeds to the above-described S2082, and the processes of S2082 to S2086 are repeatedly executed until the initial operation scenario 222aa1 ends. If it is determined in the process of S2086 that the updated initial operation scenario 222aa1 indicates the end (S2084: Yes), this process ends.

On the other hand, in the processing of S2084, if it is determined that an abnormality has occurred in the production device other than the projectile accessory 400 (S2084: Yes), the notification indicating the accessory abnormality is executed (S2091), and the processing is looped. . By configuring in this way, the initial operation process does not end in a state in which the accessory abnormality has been notified. In this case, after the hall staff confirms the notification indicating the accessory abnormality and eliminates the cause of the accessory abnormality, the pachinko machine 10 is turned on again. In other words, the pachinko machine 10, which has been determined as having an abnormal accessory, needs to be worked by the hall staff in order to operate normally, so that the pachinko machine 10 can be brought into a normal state without fail.

In this control example, the initial operation process is always executed when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on. The configuration may be such that when the power is turned on in this state, the start-up process 2 can be terminated without executing the initial operation process (S2051). By configuring in this manner, for example, when the player has trouble during the game and it is necessary to turn on the power of the pachinko machine 10 again during the operation of the game hall, the initial operation process can be skipped. can be done. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can be quickly returned to a state in which the player can play.

Return to S2083 and continue the description. In the process of S2083, if it is determined that the content of the initial action scenario this time is to complete the action of the projectile accessory 400 (S2083: Yes), 3 seconds have passed since the action of the projectile accessory 400 was completed. (S2087), and if it is determined that 3 seconds have not passed (S2087: No), the process of S2087 is repeatedly executed until 3 seconds have passed. Then, in the process of S2087, when it is determined that 3 seconds have passed (S2087: Yes), the detection result of the detection sensor (storage detection sensor sa) is acquired (S2088), and the acquired detection result is used to detect the abnormality The determination table 222ab is referenced to determine the abnormality level (S2089).

Then, it is determined whether the abnormality level is 1 or more as determined in the process of S2089 (S2090), and if it is determined to be 1 or more (S2090: Yes), the notification indicating the accessory abnormality is executed (S2091 ) to loop the process. On the other hand, when it is determined that the abnormality level is not 1 or more (normal) (S2090: No), the process proceeds to S2085 described above.

Next, the contents of main processing 2 will be described with reference to FIG. 239 is a flowchart showing the control contents of main processing 2. FIG. This main processing 2 is a new addition of character effect management processing (S2151) to the main processing (see FIG. 194) of the sound lamp control device 113 described above, and liquid crystal effect execution management processing (S2110). The difference is that the liquid crystal effect execution management process 2 (S2160) is replaced with the operation effect management process (S2111) and the operation effect management process 2 (S2161) is executed. Also, the difference is that the contents of the processing executed in the command determination processing (S2114) and the variable display setting processing (S2115) are partially changed. Other than that, they are the same, and the same reference numerals are assigned to the same contents, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

When the main process 2 is executed, the processes from S2101 to S2109 which are the same as the above-described main process (see FIG. 194) are executed, then the character effect management process (S2151) is executed, and then liquid crystal effect execution management Processing 2 (S2160) and operation effect management processing 2 (S2161) are executed. After completing the processing of S2161, the processing of S2112 to S2120, which is the same as the main processing described above (see FIG. 194), is executed, and this processing ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 240, the contents of the effect mode setting process 2 (S2657) executed in the command determination process (see S2114) of the main process 2 (see FIG. 239) will be described. This effect mode setting process 2 (S2657) differs from the above-described effect mode setting process (see S2607 in FIG. 200) in that a process for setting the effect mode of the character effect is added. The contents other than that are the same, and the same contents are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

When the effect mode setting process 2 (S2657) is executed, first, the same processes of S2701 to S2705 and S2707 as the above-described effect mode setting process (see S2607 in FIG. 200) are executed. Then, when the processing of S2704, S2705, and S2707 is completed, it is next determined whether or not there is a character effect in the variable effect pattern selected this time (S2751). ), the role product effect setting process is executed (S2752), a display command for indicating various setting contents is set (S2706), and this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S2751, if it is determined that there is no role object effect (S2751: No), the process of S2706 is executed as it is, and this process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 241, the contents of the character object effect setting process (S2752) executed in the effect mode setting process 2 (see S2657 in FIG. 240) will be described. FIG. 241 is a flow chart showing the contents of the role product effect setting process (S2752). This character effect setting process (S2752) is for executing a process for setting the effect mode of the character effect, and sets the operation scenario of the character effect corresponding to the selected variable effect pattern. When setting the effect mode corresponding to the effect using the projectile accessory 400, the process of setting the effect level is executed. The production level set in this role production setting process (S2752) is referred to when executing the abnormality determination of the shooting accessory 400. FIG.

When the role production setting process (S2752) is executed, first, the type of the role production included in the variable production pattern selected this time is extracted (S3701), and the shooting accessory 400 is added to the type of the extracted role production. (S3702). In the process of S3702, when it is determined that the character effect using the projectile accessory 400 is included (S3702: Yes), the effect content of the projectile accessory effect is determined (S3703). Then, it is determined whether the shot accessory effect extracted this time is a shot accessory effect in which only the preparatory action is executed or a shot accessory effect in which the shot effect is executed (S3704).

In the process of S3704, when it is determined that the performance is a shooting accessory effect in which only the preparatory motion is executed (S3704: Yes), the effect level 1 is set in the effect level storage area 223ab, and the process proceeds to S3707. On the other hand, if it is determined that not only the preparatory motion, that is, the firing effect will also be executed (S3704: No), the effect level 2 is set in the effect level storage area 223ab, and the process proceeds to S3707.

In this control example, as the role production using the shooting accessory 400, it is possible to execute a shooting accessory production in which only the preparatory action is executed and a shooting accessory production in which the preparation action and the shooting action are executed. ing. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the player from knowing in advance that the shooting motion will be performed when the preparatory motion is performed.

Furthermore, in this control example, different production levels are set for the shooting accessory production for executing only the preparation motion and the shooting accessory production for executing the preparation motion and the shooting motion, and the set production It is configured to vary the degree of abnormality determination according to the level. Specifically, when the shooting accessory effect of executing the preparatory motion and the shooting motion is set, the shooting accessory 400 is more likely than the case of setting the shooting accessory effect of performing only the preparatory motion. is configured to make it difficult to determine that the situation is abnormal. By configuring in this way, it is possible to facilitate the execution of the shooting action using the shooting accessory 400 .

On the other hand, when the shooting action using the shooting accessory 400 is not performed and only the preparatory action is performed, it is likely that the situation of the shooting accessory 400 is abnormal. Because of this configuration, the abnormality determination of the projectile accessory 400 can be performed properly without lowering the frequency of execution of the shooting operation using the projectile accessory 400 .

In addition, in this control example, when it is determined that the situation of the projectile accessory 400 is abnormal, it is configured to be able to execute another character effect that does not use the projectile accessory 400 . Therefore, in the case of executing the shooting accessory presentation for executing only the preparatory motion of the shooting accessory 400, if it is determined that the situation of the shooting accessory 400 is abnormal, another accessory presentation is performed. As a result, it is possible to substantially enhance the performance effect as compared with the character performance in which only the preparatory motion is executed.

Returning to FIG. 241, the description continues. In the processing of S3707, the action scenario corresponding to the type extracted as the current role product performance is read from the role product motion table 222aa (S3707), the read motion scenario is set (S3708), and the performance corresponding to the set motion scenario is executed. The mode is stored in the effect selection information storage area 223h (S3709), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the processing of S3702, if it is determined that the type of the character product presentation does not have the shooting accessory presentation (S3702: No), the processing of S3703 to S3706 is skipped, and the processing of S3707 is performed. do.

Next, with reference to FIG. 242, the contents of the role product presentation management process (S2151 in FIG. 242) executed in the main process 2 (see FIG. 239) will be described. FIG. 242 is a flow chart showing the contents of the role product effect management process (S2151). In this role product performance management processing (S2151), as various management processes that are executed during the role product production, an abnormality determination process that is executed during the performance of the role product, and an error determination process when a value is set in the role product delay timer 223aa. Processing is performed.

When the role product performance management process (S2151) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the role product action scenario is set, that is, whether or not the role product action scenario is currently being performed (S3801), and the role product action scenario is set. If it is determined that it has not been done (S3801: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3801 that the role product action scenario is set (S3801: Yes), then it is determined whether the value of the role product delay timer 223aa is greater than 0 (S3802), If it is determined that it is not greater than 0 (it is 0) (S3802: No), the set role product action scenario is updated (S3803). Then, it is determined whether or not there is a role product action scenario corresponding to the given role product 400 in the currently set role product action scenario (S3804), and if it is determined that there is a role product action scenario corresponding to the given role product 400 (S3804: Yes), it is determined whether or not the content of the current action scenario is the timing for abnormality determination (S3805). (S3806), and the process ends.

On the other hand, in the processing of S3804, if it is determined that the role product action scenario of the projectile accessory 400 is not set (S3804: No), or in the processing of S3805, if it is determined that it is not the abnormality determination timing (S3805: If No), the operation control corresponding to the operation scenario is executed (S3807), and this processing ends.

Also, in the process of S3802, the value of the role delay timer 223aa is greater than 0, that is, the abnormality determination process for the projectile role 400 has already been executed, and as a result of the determination, the delay process for delaying the role performance is executed. If it is determined that a predetermined value (for example, a value corresponding to 2 seconds) is set in the role delay timer 223aa (S3802: Yes), the value of the role delay timer 223aa is updated ( Subtraction) (S3808), and it is determined whether the value of the role delay timer 223aa after the subtraction is 0 (S3809). Here, when it is determined that the value of the role delay timer 223aa is 0 (S3809: Yes), it is the timing when the delay period has passed, so the abnormality during the second effect is executed again to execute the abnormality determination. Determination processing is executed (S3810), and this processing ends.

On the other hand, in the processing of S3809, if it is determined that the value of the role product delay timer 223aa is not 0 (greater than 0) (S3809: No), this processing is terminated. If it is determined in the process of S3809 that the value of the character product delay timer 223aa is greater than 0, the processes of S3802, S3802, S3808, and S3809 are repeatedly executed, and the operation scenario regarding the currently set character product presentation is executed. The update process (S3803) is not executed. That is, in a situation where the value of the character product delay timer 223aa is greater than 0, the character product presentation does not proceed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the performance effect from being degraded due to the performance timing of a plurality of role product performances being shifted during the delay period.

Next, with reference to FIG. 243, the contents of the abnormality determination process (S3806) during production executed in the role product production management process (see S2151 in FIG. 242) will be described. FIG. 243 is a flow chart schematically showing the content of the abnormality determination process during rendering (S3806). In this performance abnormality determination process (S3806), abnormality determination in the role production (for example, a series of role production) in which the projectile accessory 400 is used is executed. Specifically, as described above with reference to FIG. Abnormality determination with a determination level of "low level" executed before operating the accessory 400 and abnormality determination with a determination level of "high level" performed after the second shot accessory 400 is operated are performed. be.

When the performance abnormality determination process (S3806) is executed, first, the detection result of the detection sensor (storage detection sensor sa) is acquired (S3901), and based on the acquired detection result, the abnormality determination table 222ab is referred to and the current is determined (S3902). Next, it is determined whether or not the current abnormality determination timing is the first abnormality determination timing (the timing at which abnormality determination with a determination level of "middle level" in FIG. 232 is executed) (S3903).

In the process of S3903, if it is determined that it is the first abnormality determination timing (S3903: Yes), it is determined whether the abnormality level determined in the process of S3902 is "2" or more (S3904), (S3904: Yes), the production mode indicating the specific production without using the projectile accessory 400 is determined (S3905), the operation scenario corresponding to the projectile accessory 400 is reset (S3906), and the role A notification command indicating an object abnormality is set (S3907), and this processing ends.

In other words, at the timing of the first abnormality determination, that is, at the abnormality determination timing executed before the performance using the projectile accessory 400 is executed, the amount of the granular members 320 stored in the storage area ra is less than 80%. , it is determined that the situation of the projectile accessory 400 is abnormal. As a result, it is possible to prevent the performance effect from being lowered when the performance using the projectile accessory 400 is executed. Also, in this case, as a specific effect that does not use the projectile accessory 400, for example, as shown in FIG. Since it is configured so as to execute the specific falling performance, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the performance effect of the series of character performance itself.

On the other hand, in the processing of S3903, if it is determined that the current timing is not the first abnormality determination timing (S3903: No), then the second abnormality determination timing (the abnormality determination with the determination level of "weak level" in FIG. 232 is performed). execution timing) (S3908). If it is determined in the process of S3908 that it is the second abnormality determination timing (S3908: Yes), then it is determined whether the abnormality level determined in the process of S3902 is "2" (S3909). (S3909: Yes), a value indicating 2 seconds is set to the character delay timer 223aa (S3910), a display command indicating the display mode during the delay period is set (S3911), and this End the process.

In the process of S3909, if it is determined that it is not "2" (S3909: No), then it is determined whether the abnormality level is "3" (S3912), and if it is determined that it is "3" (S3912: Yes), determines the effect mode indicating the second specific effect without using the projectile accessory 400 (S3913), resets the operation scenario corresponding to the projectile accessory 400 (S3914), and notifies that the accessory is abnormal. A command is set (S3915), and this processing ends.

In the process of S3908, if it is determined that it is not the second abnormality determination timing (S3908: No), then the abnormality determination at the third abnormality determination timing (the determination level is "high level B" in FIG. 232) is executed. timing) (S3916). If it is determined in the process of S3916 that it is the third abnormality determination timing (S3916: Yes), then it is determined whether the abnormality level determined in the process of S3902 is greater than "1" (S3917). ” (S3909: Yes), set a notification command indicating the abnormality of the accessory (S3918), and terminate this process. Since this third abnormality determination timing corresponds to the case where the operation scenario corresponding to the projectile accessory 400 ends, even if it is determined that there is an abnormality here, the operation corresponding to the projectile accessory 400 Scenarios never reset. On the other hand, in the process of S3917, if it is determined that the abnormality level is not greater than "1" (S3917: No), this process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 244, the contents of the second effect abnormality determination process (S3810) will be described. FIG. 244 is a flow chart showing the contents of the abnormality determination process during the second effect (S3810). This second production abnormality determination process (S3810) is executed in the role product production management process (S2151) described above with reference to FIG. If it is, that is, a process that is executed at the timing after the delay period has passed, and if the result of the abnormality determination of the projectile accessory 400 is a predetermined result, an abnormality determination (retry process) is performed again after a period of time. This is the processing to be executed when performing.

In the abnormality determination process during the second effect (S3810), first, the detection result of the detection sensor (storage detection sensor sa) is obtained (S4001), and the abnormality level is determined with reference to the abnormality determination table 222ab (S4002). Then, it is determined whether the determined abnormal level is "normal" or abnormal level "1" (S4003), and if it is determined to be "normal" or abnormal level "1" (S4003: Yes), This process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined that the abnormal level is not "normal" or abnormal level "1", that is, the abnormal level is "2" or "3" (S4003: No), the second specific effect that does not use the projectile accessory is determined (S4004), the action scenario corresponding to the projectile accessory 400 is reset (S4005), a notification command indicating the accessory abnormality is set (S3918), and this process ends.

If the result of the abnormality determination process during the second effect is normal, the action scenario for the various effect devices is updated again after the delay period has elapsed. The production of the character production will be resumed. On the other hand, if the result of the abnormality determination process during the second effect is abnormal, a new effect mode (second specific effect) is set when the delay period elapses, and the effect corresponding to the second specific effect continues. It is executed in the latter half of the production.

Next, with reference to FIG. 245, the contents of the liquid crystal effect execution management process 2 (S2160) will be described. This liquid crystal effect execution management process 2 (S2160) does not execute various processes related to the liquid crystal effect while the character object delay timer 223aa is measuring the delay period in contrast to the above-described liquid crystal effect execution management process (S2110). The difference is that a process for making it so is added, and otherwise the same process is executed. The same processing is assigned the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

When the liquid crystal effect execution management process 2 (S2160) is executed, first, it is determined whether the value of the character object delay timer 223aa is greater than 0 (S3551). Skip all the processes and end this process. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value is not greater than 0 (is 0) (S3551: No), the processing of S3501 to S3511, which is the same as the liquid crystal effect execution management processing (S2110) described above, is executed, and this processing ends. .

Next, with reference to FIG. 246, the contents of the operation effect management process 2 (S2161) will be described. FIG. 246 is a flow chart showing the contents of the operation effect management process 2 (S2161). In contrast to the operation effect management process (S2111) described above, this operation effect management process 2 (S2161) does not execute various processes related to the operation effect while the role delay timer 223aa is measuring the delay period. The difference is that a process for making it so is added, and otherwise the same process is executed. The same processing is assigned the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

When the operation effect management process 2 (S2161) is executed, first, it is determined whether the value of the role delay timer 223aa is greater than 0 (S3651). This process is terminated by skipping the process of . On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not greater than 0 (it is 0) (S3651: No), the processing of S3601 to S3624, which is the same as the operation effect management processing (S2111) described above, is executed, and this processing ends.

As described with reference to FIGS. 245 and 246, in this control example, when the delay period is set for re-executing the abnormality determination of the projectile accessory 400, the effect contents for other effects configured to prevent updates from running. That is, when the delay period is set, not only the effect for the projectile accessory 400 but also other effects are delayed. By configuring in this way, it is possible to suppress the deviation of the execution timing of the effects by the respective effect devices in the effect with a sense of unity using a plurality of effect devices (a series of character effects).

<First modification>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 247 to 249, a modification of the repeated button-hit effects executed by the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example described above will be described. The continuous hit effect in the first control example described above includes an operation (variable operation) for varying the effect mode, and after the effect mode is changed to the maximum variable value (a effect mode that cannot be changed any more), the continuous hit effect and an operation (shortening operation) for shortening the performance period of , and are configured to be pressing operations on the frame button 22, and for the player who has actively operated the frame button 22 multiple times, this time After displaying the effect mode corresponding to the maximum variable value of the repeated hitting effect to be executed, the repeated hitting effect can be ended (shortened) without continuing the useless effect period, so that the player can be actively encouraged. , the frame button 22 can be operated.

On the other hand, the repeated hit effect in this modified example differs from the above-described first control example in that the above-described variable operation and shortening operation can be executed with different operation contents. In other words, in the above-described first control example, since the variable operation and the shortened operation are configured to be executed with the same operation content (the operation content of pressing the frame button 22), the effect mode of the continuous hit effect is While the shortened operation can be executed only after changing to the effect mode corresponding to the maximum variable value, in this modified example, since the variable operation and the shortened operation are executed with different operation contents, The shortening operation can be executed before the effect mode of the effect is changed to the effect mode corresponding to the maximum variable value.

Therefore, it is possible to entertain the player as to when the shortening operation is to be executed during the period during which the continuous hit effect is being executed. In addition, as in the first control example described above, the maximum variable value can be set differently according to the repeated hit effect to be executed, so that the effect mode is the maximum variable value (the effect mode that does not change any more) ) can be obfuscated.

FIG. 247(a) is a schematic diagram showing the start screen of the repeated button-press effect in this modified example. Elements that are the same as those displayed in the repeated hit effect in the first control example described above are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted. FIG. 247(a) shows a display screen in which a continuous hitting effect (aura effect) that can be varied in a maximum of five stages (Lv5) is executed as the repeated hitting effect. It shows an aura effect whose value is set to the third level (Lv3). That is, in this aura effect, even if the player executes the variable operation multiple times, the aura effect can be varied only up to the third stage (Lv3) at maximum.

As shown in FIG. 247(a), when the aura effect is executed, an effect 851, which is a variable mode of the aura effect, is displayed around the character 801, and a variable information display mode showing the current variable stage is displayed in the display area HR51. "Lv1" is displayed as This variable information display mode is for showing the player the variable degree of the effect 851 based on the variable operation, and as the aura production progresses (as the effect 851 changes), a higher level is displayed. be. In this manner, not only the display mode of the effect 851 but also the current variable stage is displayed as a numerical value, thereby making it possible to execute an effect that is easy for the player to understand.

In the display area HR2, a button 803 and a time gauge 804 showing the same contents as those in the first control example are displayed, and in the sub-display area Ds, the repeated hit effect (aura effect) currently being executed is displayed. As a guidance display mode for indicating the contents, a comment "Save up energy by repeatedly hitting the button" is displayed.

Then, when the player presses the frame button 22 multiple times during execution of the aura effect and the variable mode of the effect 851 reaches the second stage, as shown in FIG. 247(b), the variable mode reaches the second stage. A display mode indicating that the operation has been performed is displayed. Furthermore, a display area HR52 is formed, and a shortened operation guidance display is displayed to the player to indicate that the shortened operation can be executed. In this display area HR52, a button 852 imitating the first button 22za is displayed as a guidance display mode for indicating the operation content of the shortened operation. An arrow indicating how to operate the button 852 is also displayed.

At this time, the valid operation period indicated by the time gauge 804 has not yet passed, so the display mode is displayed in the display area HR2 to indicate that variable operations are also acceptable. On the upper side of the main display area Dm, a notification display mode is provided for informing the player that the player is in a state where he/she can select whether to continuously execute the variable operation or to execute the shortened operation. , the comment "Choose whether to store more energy by repeatedly hitting or release it by pressing the first button" is displayed.

In this way, during the aura effect, which is a continuous hit effect, a period is provided in which both the variable operation (pressing operation on the frame button 22) and the shortening operation (pressing operation on the first button 22za) can be operated. By allowing the user to select which operation to perform, it is possible to easily increase the variations of the effect mode of the operation effect. In other words, if the shortening operation is executed in a state in which the maximum variable value has not been reached during the aura effect, the effect result of the aura effect is displayed without displaying the variable mode corresponding to the maximum variable value. , it is possible to make it difficult to suggest to the player the lottery result of the special symbol lottery referred to when setting the performance mode (maximum variable value) of the aura performance (continuous hitting performance).

In this modified example, the shortened operation is completed by performing the pressing operation once on the first button 22za. Then, when the shortening operation is executed, the effect result corresponding to the variable degree of the effect 851 by the aura effect at that time is displayed. Specifically, it is determined whether the display mode of the effect 851 displayed at the time when the shortening operation is executed is the display mode corresponding to the maximum variable value in the current aura effect, and the effect is performed according to the determination result. It is configured so that the results are displayed differently.

For example, when the display mode of the effect 851 at the time when the shortening operation is executed is the display mode corresponding to the maximum variable value, the display screen shown in FIG. 248(a) is displayed. FIG. 248(a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of display contents displayed when a shortening operation is performed after the variable mode of the aura effect (effect 851) is changed to a display mode corresponding to the maximum variable value. It is a diagram. As shown in FIG. 248(a), when the shortening operation is executed when the maximum variable value (Lv3) is reached, the player is notified in the sub-display area Ds that the shortening operation has been executed after reaching the maximum variable value. A comment "Nice timing!! Lv3 was the upper limit this time." As a result, the player can easily grasp the maximum variable value set for the aura effect executed this time, and can avoid the situation where the aura effect is continuously executed without executing the shortening operation. You can figure out what you have done.

In the main display area Dm, characters of "chance" are displayed as a result display mode 851a indicating the effect result of the current aura effect. Note that the display contents of the result display mode 851a are the same as those of the continuous hit effect of the first control example described above, and therefore detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Also, the display area HR2 is hidden, and a button 852 modeled after the first button 22za and the time gauge 804 are displayed in the display area HR52. In this modified example, as described above, when the continuous hit effect is executed, the player is made to perform operations on different operation means for the variable operation and the shortened operation. Then, when the shortening operation is executed, during the operation effective period after that (during the remaining period displayed on the time gauge 804), the operation means that can be operated by the player changes to the operation means that can execute the variable operation ( It is configured to switch from the frame button 22) to the operation means (first button 22za) that executed the shortened operation.

As shown in FIG. 248(a), by hiding the display area HR2 and displaying the time gauge 804 in the display area HR52, during the valid operation period for effectively determining the operation to the operation means in the continuous hit effect, , the operating means to be operated by the player (the type of operating means to be effectively determined) can be notified in an easy-to-understand manner. Also, in this way, by switching the operation means that the player can operate during the remaining period after the shortening operation is performed, the troublesomeness of having to operate the frame button 22 again after the shortening operation is performed is eliminated. be able to.

On the other hand, when the display mode of the effect 851 at the time when the shortening operation is executed is not the display mode corresponding to the maximum variable value, the display screen shown in FIG. 248(b) is displayed. FIG. 248(b) shows an example of the display contents displayed when the shortening operation is executed in a state where the variable mode of the aura effect (effect 851) is a display mode corresponding to a variable value different from the maximum variable value. It is a schematic diagram shown. As shown in FIG. 248(b), when the shortening operation is executed when the maximum variable value (Lv3) has not been reached, that is, when the variable value is at Lv2, the secondary display area Ds is displayed at the maximum variable value. As a notification display mode for notifying the player that the shortening operation has been executed in the state of not reaching, a comment "Insufficient power!! You should have saved more energy..." is displayed. As a result, the player can grasp that the aura effect executed this time has made the variable state more variable.

In the main display area Dm, a character "?" is displayed as a result display mode 851a indicating the effect result of the current aura effect. That is, since the effect content (display mode) preset as the effect result of the aura effect is the effect content when the maximum variable value is reached, the shortening operation is executed before the maximum variable value is reached. In this case, the effect content set in advance is configured not to be displayed as the effect result of the aura effect. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp the effect result of the aura effect.

On the other hand, it is difficult for the player to see the display screen shown in FIG. Since it is easy to understand that the maximum variable value was set to a value higher than the variable value (Lv2) at the time the shortening operation was executed, a higher value may have been set as the maximum variable value. You can enjoy the later production with a sense of anticipation. Furthermore, for a player who does not like repeated hit effects, the state in which the effect prompting the user to operate the frame button 22 a plurality of times is continuously displayed for a predetermined period can be resolved by executing the shortening operation. Any game desired by the player can be facilitated.

In the repeated hit effect (aura effect) of this modified example, as shown in FIG. It is configured so that an appropriate performance result is not displayed. Therefore, when the continuous hit effect is executed, there is a possibility that the timing of executing the shortening operation is delayed and only the variable operation is executed in order to display an appropriate effect result. In this case, although the maximum variable value has already been reached, the shortening operation is not executed, and the effective operation period elapses without changing the variable mode, resulting in a decrease in the performance effect.

On the other hand, in this modified example, when a predetermined condition is established in a state where the variable mode of the continuous hit effect reaches the maximum variable value, the guidance effect prompting the player to perform the shortening operation can be executed. there is By configuring in this way, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the player's willingness to play is lowered due to a period in which the variable mode of the repeated hit effect is not changed for a long period of time.

The effect contents of this induction effect will be described with reference to FIG. 249(a). FIG. 249(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the display screen displayed when the guidance effect is executed. In FIG. 249(a), the same aura effect as in FIG. 247(a) is executed, and the variable stage of the variable mode (effect 851) reaches the maximum variable value of "3". It shows the display screen when the remaining period of the valid operation period is 1 second.

As shown in FIG. 249(a), when the variable stage of the variable mode (effect 851) has reached the maximum variable value of "3" and the remaining period of the valid operation period becomes 1 second, the secondary In the display area Ds, a comment "Maybe you should press the first button now" is displayed as a guidance rendering mode for prompting the user to operate the first button 22za, and is also displayed in the display area HR52. button 852 is enlarged and displayed. This allows the player to understand that the currently displayed variable mode is the display mode corresponding to the maximum variable value in the current aura effect.

Therefore, it is possible to make it easier for the player to execute the shortening operation before the operation effective period elapses (before the period displayed on the time gauge 804 elapses).

In this modified example, as an execution condition for executing the above-described guidance effect, a time elapsing execution condition that is established when the remaining period of the operation valid period in the aura effect reaches a predetermined period (1 second) is set. However, without being limited to this, when the number of operations of the frame button 22 reaches a predetermined number after the end condition in the above-described first control example, that is, the display mode corresponding to the maximum variable value is displayed. It is also possible to set an operation result execution condition that is satisfied at

Also, even in the state in which the guidance effect shown in FIG. The display screen shown is displayed. FIG. 249(b) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the display screen displayed when the shortening operation is not executed during the aura effect. As shown in FIG. 249(b), when the shortening operation is not executed in a state where the variable mode (effect 851) is varied by the variable operation, the comment "The stored energy has disappeared" is displayed in the secondary display area Ds. is displayed, and the result display mode 851a (see FIG. 248(a)) indicating the effect result of the aura effect is not displayed, and the result effect of ending the aura effect is executed.

By configuring in this way, when the aura effect is executed, it is possible to motivate the game to execute the shortening operation. In this modified example, the result display screen shown in FIG. 249(b) is displayed when the shortening operation is not executed. (effect 851) is displayed in a display mode corresponding to the maximum variable value, and if the effective operation period has passed without executing the shortening operation, a display screen showing an appropriate effect result (See FIG. 248(a)) is displayed, and the shortening operation is executed in a state where the variable mode of aura production (effect 851) is displayed in a display mode corresponding to a variable value different from the maximum variable value. The display screen shown in FIG. 249(b) may be displayed only when the operation valid period has passed without any operation. With this configuration, in the aura effect, the player who has operated the frame button 22 (performed the variable operation) while expecting that the variable mode will change until the operation effective period elapses will receive an appropriate Since it is possible to provide an excellent performance result, it is possible to suppress the player's desire to play from declining.

<Third control example>
Next, a third control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 250 to 259. FIG. In the first control example described above, the sound lamp control device 113 is configured to execute all the execution management of various effects for indicating the result of the special symbol lottery. Specifically, in the performance period of various variable performances executed corresponding to the variation time of the special symbol variation, when the specific timing arrives, the display control device 114, the voice output device 226 and the performance device are driven. It was configured to output a command for instructing the execution of production to various solenoids for.

In this way, the sound lamp control device 113 centrally manages the execution timings of the various performance devices, so that the various performance devices can be made to perform performances without error, thereby providing a performance with a sense of unity. be able to.

However, in recent years, the pachinko machine 10 tends to increase the number of various effect devices and to output complicated performance execution instructions to various effect devices in order to enhance the effect. In such a pachinko machine 10, if the sound ramp control device 113 manages the execution of all effects, the processing load on the sound ramp control device 113 increases. Specifically, a process of stopping and displaying the third symbol to show the result of the special symbol lottery, a process of displaying the number of winning balls during the jackpot game, and a display for notifying the player that the game state is switched. There is a risk that the processing or the like will be delayed, and that the player's motivation to play will decrease.

On the other hand, in the third control example, the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, which is a control device for displaying various effects images on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81, has a function of managing the execution effects. This is different from the above-described first control example in that the processing load of the audio ramp control device 113 is reduced by increasing the number of steps. Other technical ideas are the same as those of the first control example described above, and the same contents are given the same reference numerals and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

In the third control example, when setting the display variation pattern command by the sound lamp control device 113, the display timer management command for managing the passage of time on the display control device 114 side can be set. are doing. When the timer management command is received by the display control device 114, the continuation period of the target effect is managed by the timer, and when the continuation period managed by the timer ends, the end of the continuation period is indicated. display end command can be output to the audio lamp control device 113 .

The sound lamp control device 113 receives the display end command output from the display control device 114, determines that the duration period has ended, and sets a command for the performance to be executed based on the end of the duration period. By configuring in this way, the audio ramp control device 113 does not need to have a measuring means (timer) for measuring the lapse of the continuation period, and the audio ramp control device 113 detects whether the elapsed time has elapsed or not. It is no longer necessary to constantly execute the process of determining the . Therefore, the processing load of the audio ramp control device 113 can be reduced.

Furthermore, in the third control example, whether or not a specific display mode is displayed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81 during the period of time management by the display control device 114 (in the specific display mode (whether or not the corresponding image data is used) can be determined, and information indicating whether or not the specific display mode is to be displayed can also be set when the above-described display end command is set. .

Then, the sound lamp control device 113 determines whether or not a command indicating the display of the special display mode has been output from the display control device 114, and based on the determination result, determines the performance mode of the performance to be executed after the end of the duration period. It is configured so that it can be set variably. As a result, it is possible to set an effect command for various effect devices with content (effect mode) corresponding to the execution content (display result) executed by the display control device 114 . Therefore, the production effect can be enhanced.

In addition, in this control example, when the frame button 22 is operated (pressed) during the period in which the continuation period is set, a press command indicating that the frame button 22 has been operated is sent to the display control device 114. , and the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 is configured to be able to variably control the display mode among the various presentation modes set by the sound lamp control device 113 .

By configuring in this way, it is possible to change the mode of presentation in the presentation (for example, repeated hitting presentation) executed outside the control of the sound lamp control device 113, so that the presentation effect can be enhanced.

<Regarding the electrical configuration of the third control example>
Next, with reference to FIG. 250, the electrical configuration of the display control device 114 in this third control example will be described. FIG. 250 is a diagram schematically showing the electrical configuration of the display control device 114. As shown in FIG. It should be noted that this control example differs from the electrical configuration of the display control device 114 in the above-described first control example in that an effect mode 233ba is added to the work RAM 233, and the rest is the same. The same reference numerals are assigned to the same elements, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The production timer 233ba is a timer for measuring the elapsed time of the timer management production included in the timer management command received from the sound lamp control device 113, and measures the duration of the timer management production at the timing when the timer management production is executed. A value corresponding to is set. Then, the value of the timer is updated every time the V-interrupt process executed in units of 20 milliseconds is executed, and when the value of the timer is updated to 0, it is determined that it is time to end the timer management effect.

<Regarding control processing contents of the third control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 251 to 259, the contents of control processing in this third control example will be described. In contrast to the above-described first control example, the third control example is part of the control processing executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 and part of the control processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114. They are different in that they are partially changed, and are otherwise the same. The same reference numerals are given to the same contents, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIGS. 251 to 254, the contents of control processing of the audio ramp control device 113 in the third control example will be described. The control processing of the audio ramp control device 113 of the third control example is performed by replacing the command determination processing (see S2114 in FIG. 195) with respect to the control processing of the audio ramp control device 113 of the first control example. The difference is that the process 3 (see S2164 in FIG. 251) is replaced with the variable display setting process (see S2115 in FIG. 199) and the variable display setting process 3 (see S2165 in FIG. 253) is executed. is. The same processing contents are assigned the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof is omitted.

FIG. 251 is a flow chart showing the contents of command determination processing 3 (S2164). This command determination process 3 (S2164) adds a process when a display end command output from the display control device 114 is received to the command determination process (see S2114 in FIG. 195) of the first control example described above. The difference is that the The same reference numerals are given to the same contents, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

When the command determination process 3 (S2164) is executed, first, the same processes from S2201 to S2214 as those of the command determination process of the first control example (see S2114 in FIG. 195) are executed. Then, in the processing of S2213, if it is determined that the stop command has not been received (S2213: No), then it is determined whether or not the display end command has been received (S2251), and if it is determined that it has been received ( S2251: Yes), end command reception processing is executed (S2252), and this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the display end command has not been received (S2251: No), this processing ends.

Next, referring to FIG. 252, the contents of the end command reception process (S2251) executed in the command determination process 3 (see S2164 in FIG. 251) will be described. FIG. 252 is a flow chart showing the contents of the end command reception process (S2251). In this end command reception process, a process for setting various presentation modes based on the passage of time managed by the display control device 114 is executed.

In the end command reception process (S2251), first, the corresponding effect selection information is read out from the effect selection information storage area 223h (S4101). In the process of S4101, the information regarding the timer management effect stored in the display variation pattern command setting process (see S2651 in FIG. 254), which will be described later, is read. As a result, the end command output from the display control device 114 and the timer management effect set by the sound lamp control device 113 are associated.

Next, information included in the display end command received this time is extracted (S4102). In the process of S4102, the type of the corresponding timer management effect and a specific display indicating that specific image data (effect data) was displayed as the image data (effect data) displayed during the effect period of the timer management effect are displayed. Information and period information indicating the continuation period of the current timer management effect are extracted.

Then, it is determined whether specific display information is included in the information read in the process of S4102 (S4103). Specific information is added and updated to the effect selection information (S4104), an end effect command corresponding to the added and updated effect selection information is set (S4105), and this processing is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the specific display information is not included in the processing of S4103 (S4103: No), the processing of S4104 is skipped, and the effect command for end corresponding to the effect selection information read out in S4101 is issued. It sets (S4105) and terminates this processing.

Next, referring to FIG. 253, the contents of the variable display setting process 3 (S2165) will be described. FIG. 253 is a flowchart schematically showing the content of the variable display setting process 3 (S2165). This variable display setting process 3 (S2165) differs from the above-described variable display setting process (see S2115 in FIG. 199) in that the process for setting the display variable pattern command is executed as a subroutine. are otherwise identical. The same reference numerals are assigned to the same processing contents, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In the variable display setting process 3 (S2165), first, the same processes of S2601 to S2607 and S2609 to S2611 as the variable display setting process described above (see S2115 in FIG. 199) are executed, and then the variable display command setting process for display is executed. (S2651). Then, when the process of S2651 is finished, the same processes of S2612 to S2616 as the variable display setting process (see S2115 in FIG. 199) are executed, and this process ends.

In the display variation pattern command setting processing executed in the processing of S2651, the display variation pattern command corresponding to the variation effect pattern selected this time is set, and timer management (time management) is performed on the display control device 114 side. A process to set a command for is executed.

Here, with reference to FIG. 254, the contents of the display variation pattern command setting process (S2651) executed in the variation display setting process 3 (see S2165 in FIG. 253) will be described. FIG. 254 is a flow chart showing the contents of the display variation pattern command setting process (S2651).

In the display fluctuation pattern command setting process (S2651), first, it is determined whether or not the currently selected fluctuation production pattern includes a timer management production (S4201). This timer management effect is an effect that manages the passage of time on the display control device 114 side, and corresponds to, for example, an effect that is executed for a predetermined period of a variable effect period during which a variable effect is executed. Mainly, when the timer management effect ends, another effect is executed based on the display result displayed during the timer management effect. Specific contents of this timer management effect will be described later.

In the processing of S4201, if it is determined that there is a timer management effect (S4201: Yes), a display timer management command indicating the execution timing and duration of the timer management effect is set (S4202), and the effect selection information is stored. In the area 223h, information about the timer management effect of this time is stored (S4203), a variation pattern command for display is set (S4204), and this processing ends. On the other hand, in the processing of S4201, if it is not determined that there is a timer management effect, that is, if it is determined that there is no variable effect corresponding to the timer management effect in the variable effect pattern selected this time (S4201: No), The processing of S4202 and S4203 is skipped, the processing of S4204 described above is executed, and this processing ends.

Here, regarding the flow of the variable effect using the timer management effect, for example, in the repeated hit effect (see FIGS. 130 to 132) executed in the pachinko machine 10 of the first control example, the player activates the frame button 22. A specific description will be given of a case where the effect executed during the effect period (10 seconds) in which the operation valid period is set to the timer management effect.

When setting a variable effect pattern command for executing a repeated effect, in the variable pattern command setting process for display (see S2651 in FIG. 254), the execution timing of the timer management effect (continuous effect) (after the variable effect starts 10 seconds later (see FIG. 146(c))) and the duration of the timer management effect (continuous hit effect) (10 seconds (see FIG. 146(c))). 254 S4202). At this time, the content of the performance selected this time and the performance mode of the performance (various ready-to-win performances) to be executed after the end of the timer management performance are stored in the performance selection information storage area 223h. By storing in the effect selection information storage area 223h in this way, when the sound lamp control device 113 determines that the timer management effect has ended, the control process to be executed next (the effect to be executed next) contents) can be easily read, and the processing load can be reduced.

When the display timer management command set by the sound lamp control device 113 is received on the display control device 114 side, based on the information included in the display timer management command, a continuous hit effect is performed in accordance with the execution timing of the timer management effect. Start (see FIG. 130(a)). When the player operates the frame button 22 during the continuous hit effect, a pressing command indicating that the player has operated (depressed) the frame button 22 is output from the sound lamp control device 113 to the display control device 114 and displayed. The control device 114 determines a variable mode in the continuous hitting effect based on the received pressing command, creates image data (effect data) corresponding to the determined variable mode, and displays it on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81. .

In this case, as shown in the upper limit frequency selection table (see FIG. 162(b)) of the first control example, when an effect pattern defining only a predetermined range is selected as the final variable mode, the It is preferable that the display control device 114 performs control to vary the variable mode within a range that does not deviate from the predetermined range and within the range in which the currently displayed variable mode progresses.

By configuring in this way, the rule according to the result of the special symbol lottery, that is, only the range that can be displayed as the final variable mode is determined by the sound lamp control device 113, and the detailed variable mode determination within that range is performed. Since it can be executed by the display control device 114, the processing load of the control processing executed by the sound lamp control device 113 can be further reduced.

Then, when the effect period of the timer management effect (continuous hit effect) elapses, the display control device 114 outputs end information indicating that the timer management effect has ended, and display information indicating the display contents of the variable mode at the end of the effect period. , and is output to the audio lamp controller 113 .

In the sound lamp control device 113, based on various information contained in the display end command output from the display control device 114, based on the information stored in the effect selection information storage area 223h, various types of information to be executed after the continuous hit effect is completed. An effect mode of the effect is determined, and various commands for executing the determined effect mode are output to the display control device 114, the audio output device 226, and various effect devices.

In addition, in the display end command output from the display control device 114, specific display information indicating that a specific variable mode has been displayed during the continuous hit effect period (for example, the upper limit of the range determined as the final variable mode) Only when information indicating that the display mode is displayed) is included, the performance mode of various performances to be executed after the end of the continuous hitting performance is determined as a specific performance mode different from usual, and the determined specific performance mode is executed. Various commands for this purpose are output to the display control device 114, the audio output device 226, and various effect devices.

In this way, the sound lamp control device 113 outputs a command indicating the start timing and duration of the timer management effect to the display control device 114, and the display control device 114 can execute time management of the timer management effect. , it is possible to reduce the load of the control processing related to the variation effect in the audio lamp control device 113 .

Further, information (command) indicating that the timer management effect has ended is received from the display control device 114, and based on the reception of the information (command), the effect to be executed after the timer management effect ends. Since the performance mode is determined and instructions for performance execution are given to various devices constituting the pachinko machine 10, even if the sound lamp control device 113 does not perform time management of the timer management performance, To instruct various devices to execute a performance at appropriate timing without deviation, and to suppress the deterioration of the performance effect due to the deviation of the execution timing of the performance executed by the various devices. can be done.

Furthermore, in this control example, the display mode displayed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81 during the timer management effect time-managed by the display control device 114 can be determined by the display control device 114. ing. Therefore, compared to the case of determining the display mode displayed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81 during the timer management production in the audio lamp control device 113, the load of the control processing related to the variation production in the audio lamp control device 113 can be reduced.

Furthermore, information on the display mode determined by the display control device 114 (information for indicating the display mode displayed at the end of the timer management effect) is included in the display end command indicating that the timer management effect has ended. It is configured to output to the audio lamp control device 113, and the audio lamp control device 113 determines the production mode of the production to be executed after the end of the timer management production based on the information included in the display end command. Since it is configured, it is possible to set the performance mode corresponding to the performance result of the timer management performance managed by the display control device 114 by the sound lamp control device 113, and the performance effect can be enhanced.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 255 to 259, the control processing contents of the display control device 114 in this third control example will be described. The contents of the control processing of the display control device 114 in the third control example are different from the contents of the control processing of the display control device 114 in the first control example described above, instead of the V interrupt processing (see FIG. 213(b)). 255) is replaced with command determination processing (see S6302 in FIG. 214), and command determination processing 3 (see S6352 in FIG. 256) is executed. be. The same processing contents are assigned the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof is omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 255, the contents of the V interrupt process 3 will be described. FIG. 255 is a flow chart showing the contents of the V-interrupt process 3. As shown in FIG. This V interrupt process 3 differs from the above-described V interrupt process (see FIG. 213(b)) in that a process for updating the effect timer 233ba is added, and the rest is the same. . The same processing contents are assigned the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof is omitted.

In the third control example, as in the first control example described above, the V interrupt signal is transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing processing for one frame is completed. It is configured so that interrupt processing 3 is executed. That is, the V-interrupt process 3 is a control process that is periodically executed. Therefore, by updating the value of the effect timer 233ba in accordance with the execution of the V interrupt process 3, the display control device 114 can perform appropriate time management using the effect timer 233ba.

In addition, in this control example, it is configured to execute the updating process of the effect timer 233ba using the V interrupt process 3, but without being limited to this, if any time can be measured, for example, The display control device 114 may be provided with a timing means so that the elapsed time can be measured based on the timing result of the timing means. The elapsed time may be configured to be measurable.

In the V interrupt process 3, first, the processes of S6301 to S6309 which are the same as the V interrupt process (see FIG. 213(b)) of the first control example described above are executed, and then the production timer update process is executed ( S6351), the process ends. The effect timer update process executed in S6351 is a process for updating (subtracting) the value set in the effect timer 233ba. This effect timer 233ba measures the effect period (continuation period) of the timer-managed effect, and a value corresponding to the effect period of the timer-managed effect is set in accordance with the timing at which the timer-managed effect is executed. The value is updated (decremented) each time interrupt process 3 is executed (every 20 milliseconds). Then, when the value of the effect timer 233ba becomes 0, the effect period of the timer management effect ends.

Next, referring to FIG. 256, the contents of command determination processing 3 (S6352) executed in V interrupt processing 3 (FIG. 255) will be described. FIG. 256 is a flowchart showing the contents of command determination processing 3 (S6532). In this command determination process 3 (S6532), a press command process (S6452) and a timer setting process (S6454) are added to the above-described command determination process (see S6302 in FIG. 214). The same reference numerals are given to the same processing contents that are the same except that they are different, and a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In the command determination process 3 (S6532), first, the processes of S6401 to S6413, which are the same as those in the above-described command determination process (see S6302 in FIG. 214), are executed. Then, in the process of S6412, if it is determined that there is no error command (S6412), then it is determined whether there is a press command (S6451), and if it is determined that there is a press command (S6451: Yes), Press command processing is executed (S6452), and the process proceeds to S6401.

Here, the press command determined in the process of S6451 is a command for indicating that the player has operated the frame button 22 within the operation valid period in which it can be effectively determined that the frame button 22 has been operated. In the case where the voice lamp control device 113 determines that the frame button 22 has been operated within the operation valid period, the command is displayed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81 based on the operation of the frame button 22. It is a command set by the sound lamp control device 113 when the frame button 22 is operated during an effect (timer management effect) in which processing for variably determining the displayed display mode is performed by the display control device 114. be.

When the display control device 114 receives this press command, it executes a process (press command process) for varying the effect mode of the timer management effect. In this way, the press command is set only when the display control device 114 needs information that the frame button 22 has been operated, not all cases where the player has operated the frame button 22. With this configuration, the number of commands output from the audio lamp control device 113 to the display control device 114 can be reduced, and the processing load of the audio lamp control device 113 can be reduced.

In this control example, the processing for variably setting the aspect of the effect being executed based on the operation of the frame button 22 is performed by the sound lamp control device 113 and by the display control device 114. Since it has effects to be executed, it is necessary for the sound lamp control device 113 to determine whether or not to set a press command. When the display control device 114 alone executes the processing for variably setting the mode, it is preferable to set a press command each time the frame button 22 is operated. Instead of setting a press command each time the frame button 22 is operated, information indicating that the frame button 22 has been operated is accumulated for a predetermined period (for example, one second), and the predetermined period has elapsed. In this case, it is also possible to set a press command including operation count information indicating the number of times the frame button 22 has been operated based on the accumulated information.

By configuring in this way, there is a slight error in the variable timing of the presentation mode for each operation of the frame button 22 by the player, but the number of commands output from the sound lamp control device 113 to the display control device 114 is can be reduced, and the processing load of the audio ramp control device 113 can be reduced. In this configuration, for example, based on the number of times the frame button 22 (operation means) is operated within a predetermined period of time, a single operation of the frame button 22 can be performed, such as an operation effect that changes the display mode after a predetermined period of time has elapsed. It is preferable to use it when executing an operation effect that does not change the display mode based on.

In addition, when executing such an operation effect, for example, a variable mode that varies according to the operation of the frame button 22 within a predetermined period (for example, a variable gauge display that rises each time the frame button 22 is operated) mode) can be set by the audio lamp control device 113, and the display mode after the elapse of the predetermined period can be set by the display control device 114. FIG. With this configuration, it is possible to reduce the number of commands output from the audio lamp control device 113 to the display control device 114 while changing the display mode each time the frame button 22 is operated. The processing load of the audio ramp control device 113 can be reduced.

In this control example, the operation of the frame button 22 is determined by the sound lamp control device 113. Alternatively, in a pachinko machine 10 having a plurality of frame buttons 22 (operating means), the control device that performs operation discrimination may be changed according to the type of operating means.

Next, with reference to FIG. 257, the details of the press command process (S6452) executed in the command setting process 3 (see S6352 in FIG. 256) will be described. FIG. 257 is a flow chart showing the details of the press command process (S6452). In this pressing command process (S6452), a process for changing the display mode displayed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81 is executed.

In the pressing command process (S6452), first, it is determined whether or not the continuous hit effect is currently being performed (timer management effect is being performed) (S7801). Yes), then it is determined whether the display mode is in a variable state (S7802). In the process of S7802, it is determined whether or not the currently displayed display mode is at the upper limit set as the final variable mode of the continuous hit effect (situation where the display mode cannot be changed any more).

In the process of S7802, if it is determined that the state is variable (the display mode being displayed can be changed) (S7802: Yes), the variable determination is executed (S7803), and the Image data based on the determination result of the variable determination is created (S7804), the created image data is set as effect image data (S7805), and this processing ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S7801, if it is determined that it is not in continuous hit effect (timer management effect) (S7801: No), or if it is determined in the process of S7802 that it is not in a variable state (S7802: No), This processing ends without creating new image data.

The effect image data set in the process of S7805 is stored in the resident video RAM 235, and is controlled to be displayed when the display timing in the display data table corresponding to the timer management effect is clocked. With this configuration, the display control device 114 can execute processing for varying the display mode.

Next, the contents of the timer setting process (S6454) executed in the command setting process 3 (see S6352 in FIG. 256) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 258 is a flow chart showing the contents of the timer setting process (S6454). In this timer setting process (S6454), the presence or absence of execution of the timer management effect and the process for setting the effect timer 233ba are executed.

In the timer setting process (S6454), first, the timer management command received this time is analyzed (S7901), the timer set timing included in the timer management command is set (S7902), and the timer period included in the timer management command is managed. A timer is set (S7903), and this processing ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 259, the content of the production timer update process (see S6351 in FIG. 259) executed in the V interrupt process 3 (see FIG. 255) will be described. FIG. 259 is a flow chart showing the content of the effect timer update process (S6351). In this effect timer update process (S6351), a process for updating the value of the effect timer 233ba set in the timer setting process (see S6454 in FIG. 258) is executed.

When the effect timer update process (S6351) is executed, first, it is determined whether the value of the effect timer 233ba is greater than 0 (S8001), and is not greater than 0, that is, it is determined that the timer management effect is not in progress. If so (S8001; No), this process ends. In the process of S8001, the value of the effect timer 233ba is greater than 0, that is, if it is determined that the timer management effect is in progress (S8001: Yes), the value of the effect timer 233ba is updated (S8002), and after the update It is determined whether the value of the production timer 233ba is 0 (S8003). In the process of S8003, when it is determined that the value of the effect timer 233ba is not 0 (larger than 0) (S8003: No), it is during the effect period of the timer management effect, so the process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, in the process of S8003, if it is determined that the value of the effect timer 233ba is 0 (S8003: Yes), it is the end timing of the timer management effect. Execute as end processing.

First, in the process of S8004, it is determined whether or not there is a specific image display during the presentation period (S8004), and if it is determined that there is a specific image display (S8004: Yes), a specific command indicating the specific image display is created. (S8005), creating an end command (indicating the end of the production timer) indicating that the value of the production timer 233ba has become 0 (timer management production has ended) (S8006), and a display end command including each created command is set (S8007), and the process ends.

Also, in the process of S8004, if it is determined that the specific image is not displayed during the effect period (S8004: No), the above-described process of S8005 is skipped. The process proceeds to S8006.

As described above, in the present third control example, by causing the display control device 114 to execute a part of the management processing related to the performance that was centrally managed by the sound lamp control device 113, the sound lamp control device 113 processing load can be reduced.

In the example described above, the object is the effect executed during the variation effect of the third symbol, but not limited to this, for example, a demonstration screen is displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81. The display control device 114 may be configured to manage the display periods for various display modes that are executed during a demonstration standby or during a jackpot game being executed.

In this case, for example, information related to the game result, such as the timing at which the variable effect is executed and the timing at which the variable effect is stopped, is displayed from the sound lamp control device 113 to the display control device 114 in order to appropriately notify the player. Information indicating a waiting period until the display control device 114 executes a specific effect at the timing of outputting a command for use, information indicating the effect period of the specific effect, information indicating the effect content of the specific effect, and information indicating the effect content of the specific effect. It is configured to output a performance management command including information indicating a performance cancellation condition not to be executed, and when the display control device 114 receives the performance management command, measurement of the waiting period is started, and until the waiting period elapses. A specific effect may be executed when the condition for discarding the effect is not satisfied during the period.

Specifically, at the timing when the variable effect of 30 seconds is executed, the waiting period is 40 seconds and the effect period is 10 seconds. set. In this case, after the 30-second fluctuation production is completed, if the next fluctuation production is immediately executed, that is, in the state of securing the special figure reservation, the production cancellation condition before the waiting period elapses is established, the specific effect is not executed. On the other hand, in a state in which the special figure reservation is not secured, the specific effect may be executed because the waiting period may elapse without the effect cancellation condition being satisfied.

In this way, when the specific performance is executed during the standby period in which the variable performance is not executed, the information regarding the specific performance is output to the display control device 114 in advance in accordance with the timing of outputting the command regarding the variable performance. , by enabling the display control device 114 to execute management processing of a specific effect, it becomes possible to aggregate the timing of outputting commands from the audio lamp control device 113 to the display control device 114, and the audio lamp control device 113 processing load can be reduced.

Furthermore, whether or not to set (output) the production management command described above can be set regardless of the variable production pattern. can be configured to be executable. By configuring in this way, for example, when the variable effect command corresponding to the variable effect pattern whose variable time is longer than 40 seconds and the effect management command are simultaneously output to the display control device 114, the standby period Since the variable performance for a period longer than (40 seconds) is executed, the performance cancellation condition is never established. Therefore, it is possible to reliably execute the specific effect.

In addition, in the above example, "start of a new variable effect" is provided as the condition for discarding the effect, but other condition for discarding the effect may be provided. It is also possible to provide an effect cancellation condition that is satisfied when the game is not started. In this case, since it is necessary to start the variable effect a plurality of times during the waiting period, for example, a large number of special reserved balls are stored, and the game is motivated to maintain a state in which a short variable time is easily selected. be able to.

As the specific effect executed in the above-described example, for example, a function (so-called setting function) that can set a plurality of stages of set values and varies the degree of advantage of the player according to the set values that have been set. In the case of the pachinko machine 10 having the specified setting value, the specific effect including the effect mode in which the player can predict the set value, or the specified effect including the effect mode in which the player can predict the currently set game state Execution of specific effects including effects and effects in which the player can predict ending conditions (the number of special symbol lotteries, the number of winning jackpots) until the end of a game state (for example, variable probability state) that is advantageous to the player. It should be configured as follows. As a result, the player plays the game while expecting that the specific effect will be executed, and the interest in the game can be improved.

Also, in this case, suggesting (notifying) means for suggesting (notifying) the length of the waiting period that has been set, and guidance means for guiding the player to a game method that does not satisfy the effect cancellation condition. It is preferable that a player can determine the conditions under which the specific effect is executed.

<Fourth control example>
Next, a fourth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 260 to 265. FIG. In the above-described first control example, the right to execute the special symbol variation (lottery right for the special symbol lottery) is reserved and stored with a predetermined number (4) as the upper limit in order to enable the execution of the special symbol variation continuously. To store the lottery right (special figure reservation) in the storage means even when the lottery right (special figure reservation) of the special pattern lottery is obtained during execution of the special pattern variation. can be done. Therefore, after the special symbol variation is stopped and displayed, it is possible to immediately execute the special symbol lottery based on the lottery right stored in the storage means, so that the special symbol variation can be continuously executed. It was possible to improve the interest of the game.

Furthermore, the fluctuation time of the special symbol variation for indicating the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is configured to vary according to the number of lottery rights (number of special symbol reservations) stored in the storage means. Specifically, the smaller the number of lottery rights (the number of reserved special symbols) stored in the storage means, the easier it is to execute the special symbol variation with a longer variation time. By constructing in this way, it is possible to reduce the period during which the special symbol variation is not executed, and to obtain a new lottery right when the number of lottery rights stored in the storage means has reached the upper limit. It was possible to suppress it from being lost.

In addition, in the above-described first control example, when the result of the special symbol lottery is a big hit, or when a variation pattern in which a variation time longer than 14 seconds is set is selected, the above-described 14 seconds It is configured so that a variable performance can be executed. In other words, even if the result of the special symbol lottery is lost and the prize is not won, by executing the above-described 14-second variable performance, the player's willingness to play who grasps that the 14-second variable performance is being executed. It was possible to suppress the decrease in

However, in the above-described first control example, the specific variation effect that is executed when the result of the special symbol lottery is a loss is performed in a pseudo manner even when the result of the special symbol lottery is a win. However, since the variation pattern is selected based on the result of the special pattern lottery, a specific variation performance is executed for the player who has been playing for a long time. There is a possibility that the degree of expectation for winning a big win in the case of winning is easily predicted, and the willingness to play the game is lowered. That is, the variation time of the special symbol variation in which the above-described specific variation effect is executed is selected in order to shorten the period in which the special symbol variation is not performed when the number of special symbol retention balls is 0, Since it is necessary to be selected at a predetermined frequency when the number of special figure reserved balls is 0, it is expected that the result of the special symbol lottery will be a big hit when the specific variation performance (pseudo specific variation performance) is executed. However, it is difficult to increase the degree, and it is impossible to increase the degree of expectation for winning the jackpot with respect to the specific variation performance, and there is a possibility that the willingness to play will decrease.

On the other hand, the fourth control example is different from the above-described first control example in that the variation pattern of the special symbol variation can be selected before executing the special symbol lottery. As a result, the player is prevented from predicting the result of the special symbol lottery by the variation performance pattern executed corresponding to the selected variation pattern, thereby suppressing the player's willingness to play. be able to.

Furthermore, in the fourth control example, the variation pattern of the special symbol variation is configured to be selectable based on the number of reserved balls of the special symbol (the number of special symbol reserved balls) when starting the special symbol variation. Specifically, when executing the first special symbol variation (special figure 1 variation), a variation pattern is selected based on the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol (number of special figure 1 reserved balls), and the second When performing special symbol variation (special figure 2 variation), it is configured to select a variation pattern based on the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol (number of special figure 2 reserved balls). And, when the number of corresponding special figure reservation balls is 0, the same technical idea as the first control example described above is configured so that a variation pattern with a variation time of 14 seconds is selected.

By configuring in this way, since the player does not predict the result of the special symbol lottery by the variation performance pattern executed corresponding to the selected variation pattern, the player's willingness to play is reduced. It is possible to shorten the period in which the special symbol variation is not executed when the number of special symbol reserved balls is 0 while suppressing the storage.

In addition, in this fourth control example, when the lottery condition is satisfied after the special symbol variation is executed with the variation pattern (variation time) selected based on the number of special figure pending balls (after a predetermined time has elapsed ), a special symbol lottery is executed, and based on the result of the lottery, the performance mode of the variable performance being executed is configured to be variable. Thereby, the variable performance executed regardless of the result of the special symbol lottery can be terminated with the performance result showing the result of the special symbol lottery. Therefore, finally, the player can be notified of the result of the special symbol lottery in an easy-to-understand manner.

Furthermore, in the fourth control example, the variation mode of the variation effect is made different based on the length of the remaining period of the special symbol variation when the special symbol lottery is executed. Specifically, when the length of the remaining period of the special symbol variation when the special symbol lottery is executed is equal to or longer than a predetermined period (10 seconds or longer), it is configured to vary the performance contents in the variable performance. When it is less than a predetermined period (less than 10 seconds), only the display mode showing the performance result of the variable performance being executed is changed without changing the performance contents of the variable performance.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to inform the player of the result of the special symbol lottery executed during the special symbol variation in an easy-to-understand manner.

<Regarding the electrical configuration in the fourth control example>
First, referring to FIG. 260, the electrical configuration in this fourth control example will be described. In this fourth control example, the variation pattern selection table 202d (see FIG. 156) is replaced with the variation pattern selection 4 table 202cd (see FIG. 260) with respect to the first control example described above. are identical. The same reference numerals are assigned to the same elements, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, the variation pattern selection 4 table 202cd will be described with reference to FIG. 260(a). FIG. 260(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the variation pattern selection 4 table 202cd. This variation pattern selection 4 table 202cd includes a normal 4 table 202cd1 used when the game state is set to a normal state (low probability state of special symbols, low probability state of normal symbols), and a time saving state (special symbols low probability state, high probability state of normal symbols), or 4 tables 202cd2 for time saving and probability variation used when probability variation state (high probability state of special symbols, high probability state of normal symbols) is set have.

Next, referring to FIG. 260(b), the contents defined in the normal 4-table 202cd1 will be described. FIG. 260(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the normal 4 table 202cd1, and according to the number of reserved balls of special symbols and the value of the acquired variation type counter CS1 It is configured so that different variation patterns are selected. This normal 4 table 202cd1 is different from the normal table 202d1 of the first control example described above in that it does not look at the result of the special symbol lottery when selecting the variation pattern, and regardless of the type of special symbol The major difference is that they are configured so that the same variation pattern is selected.

Specifically, the special symbol type is common, the number of corresponding special symbol reserved balls (number of reserved balls) is "0", and the value of the acquired variation type counter CS1 is in the range of "0 to 149" , a variation pattern with a variation time of 14 seconds (normal variation A) is selected, and a variation pattern with a variation time of 28 seconds (normal variation B) is selected for the range of "150 to 198".

In addition, when the number of held balls is "1, 2" and the value of the acquired variation type counter CS1 is in the range of "0 to 49", a variation pattern with a variation time of 10 seconds (normal variation C) is selected, For the range of "50 to 149", a variation pattern with a variation time of 20 seconds (normal variation D) is selected, and for the range of "150 to 198", a variation pattern with a variation time of 30 seconds (normal variation E ) is selected. Furthermore, when the number of pending balls is "3", a variation pattern with a variation time of 10 seconds (normal variation F) is selected regardless of the value of the variation type counter CS1 obtained.

As described above with reference to FIG. 260(b), in the fourth control example, when selecting the variation pattern of the special symbol variation, based on the number of reserved balls of the special symbol and the value of the variation type counter CS1, Since the variation pattern is selected by the variation pattern, it is possible to prevent the player from grasping in advance whether or not the big win is won in the special symbol lottery based on the selected variation pattern.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 configured to be able to select a variation pattern of a different variation time according to the number of reserved balls of special symbols (number of special reserved balls), when the number of special reserved balls is "0" By making it easier to select a variation pattern with a longer variation time than when the number of special figure pending balls is greater than "0", the special symbol variation ends when the number of special figure pending balls is "0". It is possible to make it easier to suppress the fact that

Next, with reference to FIG.260(c), the content of 4 table 202cd2 for time saving and probability variation is demonstrated. FIG.260(c) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content prescribed|regulated to 4 table 202cd2 for time saving and probability variation. As shown in FIG. 260 (c), even in the time-saving/positive variable 4 table 202cd2, similarly to the above-described normal 4 table 202cd1, the number of pending balls (special figure pending ball number) and the acquired variation type counter CS1 A variation pattern with different variation times is defined according to the value.

This 4 table 202cd2 for time saving and probability variation is configured to facilitate selection of a variation pattern in which a shorter variation time is set than the above 4 table 202cd1 for normal. By configuring in this way, the special symbol lottery can be executed more efficiently when the time saving state or the variable probability state is set than when the normal state is set. In addition, as described above with reference to FIG. 125, in the time-saving state and probability variable state in which the high probability state of the normal symbol is set, the ball is easily entered into the second ball entrance 640, so the normal state It becomes more difficult for the number of special figure pending balls to become 0. Therefore, even if a variation pattern with a short variation time is easily selected, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a long period in which no special symbol variation is performed.

In addition, in the present fourth control example, as described above, regardless of the type of special symbol, it is configured to select a variation pattern using the same data table. As in one control example, it may be configured such that different variation patterns can be selected according to the type of special symbol and the game state to be set.

<Regarding the control process of the main controller in the fourth control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 261 to 263, the contents of the control process executed by main controller 110 in this fourth control example will be described. This fourth control example is different from the above-described first control example in that the timing of starting the special symbol variation and the timing of executing the special symbol lottery are different. The content of control processing is made different. Other processing contents are the same, and the same processing contents are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 261, the contents of the special symbol variation process 4 (S154) will be described. FIG. 261 is a flow chart showing the contents of the special symbol variation process 4 (S154). This special symbol variation process 4 (S154) is a process that is executed instead of the special symbol variation process (see S104 in FIG. 178) of the first control example described above, and is a special symbol variation start process that is executed as a subroutine. (See S213 in FIG. 180), the special symbol variation start process 4 (see S251 in FIG. 262) is executed, and the process for executing the special symbol lottery during the variation of the special symbol is added. , and are otherwise identical. The same processing contents are assigned the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof is omitted.

In the special symbol variation process 4 (S154), first, the same S201 to S212 processes as the special symbol variation process of the first control example (see S104 in FIG. 178) are executed, and then the special symbol variation start process 4 is executed (S251), and the process ends. Details of the special symbol variation start process 4 (S251) will be described later with reference to FIG.

On the other hand, in the process of S202, when it is determined that the special symbol is changing (S202: Yes), it is determined whether the minimum time has passed (S252), and when it is determined that the minimum time has passed (S252 : Yes), the special symbol lottery process is executed (S253), and then the same S214 to S221 processes as the special symbol variation process of the first control example (see S104 in FIG. 178) are executed, and this process is executed. finish.

Here, in this control example, when the minimum time has elapsed after the special symbol variation is started, the special symbol lottery corresponding to the special symbol variation being executed is executed. That is, in this control example, before executing the special symbol lottery, the special symbol variation is executed. Therefore, the determination in the process of S252 becomes a lottery condition determination means for determining whether the lottery condition for the special symbol is satisfied, and the minimum elapsed time determined in the process of S252 becomes the lottery condition.

In this control example, a minimum time (for example, 5 seconds) is set as a lottery condition, and the same time is set as the minimum time regardless of the selected variation pattern. In other words, even the shortest variation time (5 seconds) that can be selected as the variation pattern is set as the minimum time that can be measured. By configuring in this way, there is no need to vary the lottery conditions according to the selected variation pattern, and the control processing of main controller 110 can be simplified.

In addition, in this control example, as the lottery condition for executing the special symbol lottery, the lottery condition established based on the elapsed time from the start of the special symbol variation is set, but the lottery condition during the special symbol variation is established, for example, a remaining time determination means capable of determining the remaining time of the special symbol fluctuation is provided, and the remaining time determined by the remaining time determination means is a specific condition (for example, 5 seconds ) may be set. In addition, when the ball launched into the game area during the special symbol fluctuation period enters the predetermined ball entrance, the lottery condition is established, or when the player performs any operation on the operation means. You may establish a lottery condition in .

In addition, in this control example, regardless of the selected variation pattern, it is configured to set the same lottery conditions, but not limited to this, different lottery conditions depending on the type of the selected variation pattern You may provide the lottery condition setting means to set. As a result, the execution timing of the special symbol lottery can be varied according to the selected variation pattern, so that, for example, the lottery suggestion performance suggesting the timing of the execution of the special symbol lottery is displayed during the execution period of the special symbol variation. It becomes possible to go to Therefore, during the period of the special symbol variation, it is possible to execute a novel performance of suggesting to the player the timing of execution of the special symbol lottery corresponding to the special symbol variation being executed, thereby improving the amusement of the game. can do

Next, with reference to FIG. 262, the contents of the special symbol variation start process 4 (S251) will be described. FIG. 262 is a flow chart showing the contents of the special symbol variation start process 4 (S251). This special symbol variation start process 4 (S251) differs from the special symbol variation start process (see S213 in FIG. 180) in the above-described first control example in that the process of executing the special symbol lottery is omitted. Otherwise, they are identical. Identical contents are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

When the special symbol variation start process 4 (S251) is executed, first, it is determined whether the special symbol variation 1 is started (whether the type of the special symbol variation executed this time is the first special symbol) (S351 ). Then, if it is determined that it is a special figure 1 fluctuation (S351: Yes), then the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223a is acquired (S352), and the acquired special figure reserved ball number ( A variation pattern is selected and determined using the variation pattern selection table 222cd1 based on the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223a) and the value of the acquired variation type counter CS1 (S353). Then, a variation pattern command indicating the determined variation pattern is set (S354), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S351, if it is determined that it is not special figure 1 variation (it is special figure 2 variation) (S351: No), then acquire the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223b Then (S355), the variation pattern is selected using the variation pattern selection table 222cd1 based on the acquired number of special symbols reserved balls (the value of the special symbol 2 reserved balls counter 223b) and the value of the acquired variation type counter CS1. , is determined (S353). Then, a variation pattern command indicating the determined variation pattern is set (S354), and this process is terminated.

As described above with reference to FIG. 260, the variation pattern selection table 222cd of this control example is defined so as not to refer to the result of the special symbol lottery. are configured to be selectable. Therefore, even if the player discriminates the variation pattern of the selected special symbol variation, the result of the special symbol lottery will not be grasped from the determination contents. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand the result of the special symbol lottery.

In addition, in this control example, the timing of executing the special symbol lottery is after the timing of selecting the variation pattern of the special symbol variation. After the special symbol lottery is executed, the variation pattern of the special symbol variation is selected, and in that case, variation is performed using the variation pattern selection 4 table 202cd1 of the fourth control example in which the result of the special symbol lottery is not referred to. It may be configured to select a pattern. In this case, for example, a special symbol variation is executed based on the selected variation pattern, and a variation pattern command indicating the selected variation pattern is output to the voice ramp control device 113, and after performing the variation production, a predetermined When it is determined that the output condition is established, a lottery result command indicating the result of the special symbol lottery is output to the sound lamp control device 113, thereby achieving the same technical idea as the fourth control example. A pachinko machine 10 can be configured.

Next, with reference to FIG. 263, the contents of the special symbol lottery process (S253) will be described. FIG. 263 is a flow chart showing the contents of the special symbol lottery process (S253). This special symbol lottery process (S253) is executed when a predetermined lottery condition is satisfied (when the minimum time has passed) after the special symbol variation is executed, and the special symbol variation being executed A special symbol lottery corresponding to is executed.

In the special symbol lottery process (S253), first, it is determined whether or not the result command has been set (S371). That is, it is determined whether or not the special symbol lottery has already been executed. In the process of S371, if it is determined that the result command has been set (S371: Yes), this process ends. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the special symbol lottery from being executed a plurality of times in one special symbol variation.

On the other hand, in the processing of S371, when it is determined that the result command is not set, that is, the special symbol lottery corresponding to the special symbol variation of this time is not executed (S371: No), next, the special symbol is reserved. The data of the execution area in the ball storage area is acquired (S372), and it is determined whether the value of the variable probability counter 203t is greater than 0, that is, whether the current game state is the variable probability state (high probability state of special symbols). (S373). By the process of S373, if it is determined that the value of the probability variation counter 203t is greater than 0 (S373: Yes), since the current state is a high probability state of the special symbol, for high probability corresponding to the type of special symbol A lottery result is obtained based on the first winning random number table 202a (S374). Also, in the process of S372, if it is determined that the value of the probability variation counter 203t is not greater than 0 (is 0) (S373: No), the current state is a low probability state of special symbols, so the type of special symbols A lottery result is acquired based on the first winning random number table 202a for low probability corresponding to (S375).

Then, it is determined whether the lottery result obtained in the process of S374 or S375 is a big hit (S376), and if it is determined to be a big hit (S376: Yes), the display mode at the time of the big hit corresponding to the special symbol is displayed. (S376), sets a result command indicating that the lottery result is a big win (S377), and terminates this process.

The result command set in the process of S377 is output in the external output process (see S901 in FIG. 187) of the main process (see FIG. 187) of main controller 110, similarly to various commands set in other processes. It is output to the audio ramp controller 113 . Then, in the sound lamp control device 113, based on the reception of the result command process, the process for varying the effect mode of the variable effect being executed is executed. Thus, the performance mode and the performance result of the variable performance corresponding to the special symbol variation executed before the special symbol lottery can be changed to the performance mode corresponding to the result of the special symbol lottery.

On the other hand, in the process of S376, when it is determined that the lottery result of this time is not a big hit (S376: No), the display mode at the time of loss corresponding to the special symbol is set (S378), and the lottery result is a loss. is set (S379), and the process ends.

<Regarding Control Contents of Audio Ramp Control Device 113 in Fourth Control Example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 264 and 265, the control processing contents of the audio ramp control device 113 in the fourth control example will be described. The control processing of the audio ramp control device 113 in the fourth control example is the control processing of the audio ramp control device 113 in the first control example described above, the command determination processing (see S2114 in FIG. 195), the command The difference is that determination processing 4 (see S2174 in FIG. 264) is executed, and the rest is the same.

The pachinko machine 10 of the fourth control example differs from the pachinko machine 10 of the first control example described above in the timing of the special symbol lottery executed by the main controller 110, and executes the special symbol variation. It is constructed so as to execute a special symbol lottery after it has been drawn. Therefore, based on various commands output from the main control device 110, the setting contents of the display mode (effect mode) of the variable display (variable effect) of the third symbol to be executed corresponding to the special symbol variation are also set in the above-described second 1 control example.

Specifically, the variation pattern (variation effect pattern) of the third symbol is determined based on the variation pattern command output at the execution timing of the special symbol variation, and the process to be executed is the same, but after that, the special symbol lottery The difference is that processing for varying (switching) the performance mode of the variable performance pattern being executed or the performance result is added when a result command for indicating the result of is received. Thus, by varying (switching) the effect mode of the variable effect pattern being executed or the effect result based on the reception of the result command, it is possible to provide the player with an easy-to-understand game. .

In addition, since the variable performance executed until the result command is received is not set based on the lottery result of the special symbol, the player will grasp the lottery result based on the performance mode. there is nothing It should be noted that, in the variation production that is executed until the result command is received, for example, it is preferable to display a suggestion mode that can suggest the length of the variation time of the special symbol variation set this time. By configuring in this way, the player can be made to predict the variation time of the special symbol variation being executed. Then, based on the prediction, it is possible to predict the timing of receiving the result command, that is, the timing of changing the effect mode of the variable effect based on the contents of the received result command.

When the command determination process 4 (S2174) is executed, first, the same processes of S2201 to S2214 as the command determination process of the first control example (see S2114 in FIG. 195) are executed. If it is determined that no command has been received (S2213: No), then it is determined whether a result command has been received (S2271).

In the process of S2271, if it is determined that the result command has been received (S2271: Yes), the result command process is executed (S2272), and this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2271 that the result command has not been received (S22271: No), this process ends.

Next, the contents of the result command process (S2272) executed in the command determination process 4 (S2174) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 265 is a flow chart showing the contents of the result command processing (S2272). In the result command processing (S2272), when the sound lamp control device 113 receives the result command, determination processing of whether or not to change the effect mode of the variable effect being executed, variable processing in the case of changing, is executed.

In the result command process (S2272), first, the lottery result included in the received result command is obtained (S4301), and it is determined whether or not the obtained lottery result is a big hit (S4302). If it is determined that the jackpot has been won (S4302: Yes), then the remaining variation time is calculated (S4303), and it is determined whether the calculated remaining variation time is longer than 10 seconds (S4304). Then, when it is determined that the remaining variation time is longer than 10 seconds (S4304: Yes), a display command for switching the set variation production pattern to the winning exclusive production pattern is set (S4305), and this End the process.

On the other hand, in the processing of S4304, if it is determined that the remaining variation time is within 10 seconds (S4304: No), the result display mode of the set variation effect pattern is changed to the winning result display mode indicating winning. A display command for switching is set (S4305), and this processing ends. Also, in the process of S4302, if it is determined that the result of this special symbol lottery (lottery result included in the result command) is not a jackpot election (no) (S4302: No), this process is performed as it is. finish.

In the second control example described above, a series of character effects using the effect member 700, the rotating member 840, and the ejection device 400 are configured to be executed according to the elapsed time of the variable display effect. It is not limited. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which a series of accessory effects are executed with the operation of the frame button 22 as a trigger. That is, in the variable display effect, an operation valid period may be set in which an operation to the frame button 22 is treated as valid when a specific period elapses, and a series of accessory effects may be executed based on pressing of the frame button 22 . In this case, the delay control in the first control example described above may be applied. That is, when an operation to the frame button 22 is detected in a state where a predetermined delay condition is established, a delay period is set for the delay timer 223s, thereby delaying the start of the series of performances. You may By configuring in this way, it is possible to further diversify the mode of presentation. Also, instead of delaying the start of the entire series of performances, only a part of the action may be delayed. In other words, the configuration may be such that only the start of the first operation is delayed, or only the start of the second operation is delayed. By configuring in this way, it is possible to further diversify the production mode of the series of accessory productions, so that the player's interest in the game can be further improved. In addition, the target of the effect of delaying the action of the role is not limited to the series of role effects, but the effect involving the variable action of at least one of the various roles provided in the pachinko machine 10. If so, it can be applied to any production. Further, in place of or in addition to the accessory, it may be possible to delay the start of part or all of the lighting mode of the presentation accompanied by the light emission of the light emitting means such as the decorative LED or the lamp. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make the presentation mode different depending on whether the delay is made or not, so that the presentation mode can be further diversified.

<Modification of First Control Example>
Next, a modification of the first control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 266 to 272. FIG. In the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example described above, as one type of effect mode in the variable display effect, it is configured to be able to execute a group effect of a effect mode in which a plurality of characters are gathered, and the number of characters gathered is expected to result in a big win. It is configured to suggest the degree to the player.

In addition to this, in this modified example, it is possible to suggest the degree of expectation for a big win by a combination of characters that are stop-displayed in one variable display in the collective effect. In addition, in this modified example, an accompanying pattern imitating one of the numbers "1" to "9" is provided as an accompanying pattern associated with the third pattern imitating each character. In this modified example, it is possible to indicate the degree of expectation for a big win even by a combination of accompanying symbols associated with the third symbol that is stopped and displayed. Furthermore, in this modification, it is configured such that in which symbol row the third symbol corresponding to each character is to be displayed is set after the execution of the collective effect is determined, and the execution of the collective effect is also determined for each accompanying symbol. After that, it is configured to set which symbol row to display. In other words, the type of character and the type of accompanying pattern are not fixed, and each time a variable display effect involving a group effect is executed, the correspondence relationship between the third pattern and the accompanying pattern (attached to each character number) can be changed. Then, when the third symbol and the accompanying symbol are in a specific combination, the expectation of a big win is increased. By configuring in this way, not only the total number of characters acquired in the gathering effect, but also the type of the third symbol stopped and displayed in each symbol row in each variable display in the gathering effect, the type of the accompanying symbol, and the Since the game can be played while paying attention to the combination of the three symbols and the accompanying symbols, the player's interest in the game can be further improved.

First, with reference to FIGS. 266 and 267, the effect mode of the group effect in this modified example will be described. FIG. 266(a) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen on which ally characters that can be obtained in a gathering effect are displayed. As shown in FIG. 266(a), in this modified example, a third pattern imitating an animal character (or the character "?") is displayed for each of the pattern rows L1 to L3 (see FIG. 129(a)). is displayed, and at the lower right of each third pattern, a number-like accompanying pattern is displayed. The accompanying pattern is always displayed accompanying the third pattern imitating the same character during one set performance. That is, while the third pattern is being variably displayed, it is variably displayed together with the third design. In this modification, at the time when this obtainable ally character is displayed, the combination of the third symbols stopped and displayed in each symbol row, the combination of the accompanying symbols, and the combination of the third symbols, the accompanying symbols, and the stop position. By means such as this, it is configured to be able to suggest to the player the degree of expectation for a big win.

FIG. 266(b) is a diagram showing an example of a combination of stop symbols (chance-up pattern) that increases the expectation of a big win. As shown in FIG. 266(b), the display of the third symbol simulating a bear in the middle third symbol display area 901b suggests to the player that the degree of expectation for a big win is high. As for the types of accompanying symbols associated with the third bear symbol, there is no difference in expectations except for the accompanying symbols imitating the number "7". Further, there is no difference in the degree of expectation between the types of the third symbols displayed in the left third symbol display area 901a and the right third symbol display area 901c. That is, as long as the third symbol simulating a bear is stopped and displayed in the middle third symbol display area 901b, there is a high expectation of a big win regardless of the type of the third symbols stopped and displayed in the left and right symbol rows. Become. Therefore, since the player can be made to pay attention to the type of the third symbol displayed in the middle third symbol display area 901b, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, although not shown in the drawings, as a chance-up pattern different from the mode in which the third pattern imitating a bear is displayed in the middle third pattern display region 901b, one of the third pattern display regions 901a to 901c On the other hand, even when the third symbol accompanied by the accompanying symbol imitating the numeral "7" is stopped and displayed, the expectation for the big win is increased. That is, by displaying an accompanying symbol imitating the number "7" in any of the accompanying symbol display areas 901a1 to 901c1, it is possible to suggest that the degree of expectation for a big win is high. As a result, it is possible to determine whether or not the chance-up pattern has been variably displayed simply by observing whether or not the accompanying symbol resembling "7" is stop-displayed in any of the accompanying symbol display areas 901a1 to 901c1. can be easily discriminated, it is possible to realize an effect mode that is easier for the player to understand.

In addition, in this modified example, there is also provided a stop type in which a big win is determined at the point of appearance. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 267, a third symbol simulating a bear is stopped and displayed in the middle third symbol display area 901b, and an accompanying symbol associated with the third symbol simulating the bear is displayed. In the case of the accompanying symbol simulating "7" (when the accompanying symbol simulating "7" is displayed in the middle accompanying symbol display area 901b1), it is determined that a jackpot will be won.

Thus, in this modification, not only the total number of characters acquired in the collective effect, but also the type of the third symbol stopped and displayed in each symbol row in each variable display in the collective effect, the type of the accompanying symbol, Since it is possible to suggest the degree of expectation for a big hit even by the combination of the third pattern and the accompanying pattern, it is possible to indicate not only whether the character is acquired in the gathering performance, but also whether the character is stopped and displayed. It is possible to realize a game property that draws attention to the character (and accompanying pattern) that is stopped and displayed at that point in time. Therefore, it is possible to further enhance the player's interest in the game.

In addition, in this modification, when the third symbol imitating a bear is stopped and displayed in the middle third symbol display area 901b, or when one of the third symbol display areas 901a to 901c is displayed with an accompanying symbol imitating "7" When the third symbol accompanied by is stopped and displayed, the degree of expectation for the big win increases, and the third symbol imitating a bear accompanied by the accompanying symbol imitating "7" in the middle third symbol display area 901b is stopped and displayed. However, the combination that improves the expectation of the big win or the combination that secures the big win is not limited to this, and may be determined arbitrarily. For example, when only the third symbol attached with an accompanying symbol imitating an odd number is stopped and displayed, the expectation of a big win may be increased, or a combination of elephant, bear and rhinoceros may be stopped and displayed. It may be configured so that the degree of expectation for a big win is increased by being played.

<Electrical configuration in the modification of the first control example>
Next, referring to FIG. 268, the configuration of the character storage area 223e1 in this modified example will be described. In this modified example, a character storage area 223e1 is provided for the sound lamp control device 113 instead of the character storage area 222e1 in the first control example. That is, the character storage area 223e1 can be overwritten (updated). More specifically, the third pattern type (character type) and the accompanying pattern type to be displayed in each pattern row in the collective effect can be newly set in each collective effect. there is Then, during one set effect, the variable display of the third pattern is executed in the arrangement set in the character storage area 222e1. By adopting a configuration in which the arrangement is reset for each performance, the player can always feel novelty, so that it is possible to provide a game that is difficult to idle.

As shown in FIG. 268, the character storage area 223e1 in this modification is defined in association with the range of addresses "0000H" to "000DH" in the RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113. Either data (character data) indicating the type of pattern or data (numeric data) indicating the type of accompanying pattern is stored. As shown in FIG. 268, the address "0000H" is a storage area for storing data (character data) indicating the type of the first third symbol to be displayed in the left symbol row, and the address "0001H". ' is a storage area for storing data (numerical data) indicating the type of accompanying symbol attached to the first third symbol to be displayed in the left symbol column. Similarly, addresses "0002H" and "0003H" are data (character data) indicating the type of the second third symbol to be displayed in the left symbol row, and data indicating the type of accompanying symbols (numeric data). ), and addresses "0004H" and "0005H" are data (character data) indicating the type of the first third symbol to be displayed in the right symbol row, respectively, and an accompanying symbol. Data (numerical data) indicating the type of the second and third symbols to be displayed in the right symbol column. (character data), and a storage area for storing data (numeric data) indicating the type of accompanying pattern. Addresses "0008H" and "0009H" are data (character data) indicating the type of the first third symbol to be displayed in the middle symbol row, and data (numeric data) indicating the type of accompanying symbols. , and the addresses "000AH" and "000BH" are data (character data) indicating the type of the second third symbol to be displayed in the middle symbol row, respectively, and the accompanying symbol data. This is a storage area for storing data (numeric data) indicating the type. Addresses "000CH" and "000DH" are data indicating the type of the third third symbol to be displayed in the middle symbol row. character data), and data (numeric data) indicating the type of accompanying pattern.

At the start of the group production, character data and numeric data different from each other are stored one by one in the addresses "0000H" to "000DH" forming the character storage area 223e1. The display mode of the pattern can be set. In this modified example, 7 types of character data and 9 types of numeric data are provided, while 14 addresses (7 addresses×2) are associated with the character storage area 223e1. Therefore, although all characters are set in one of the symbol rows for the character data, two numbers are left over for the number data. In other words, only seven kinds of accompanying symbols among the accompanying symbols imitating nine kinds of numbers are set as accompanying symbols of any of the third symbols in one collective effect. In this modified example, it is easier to set the accompanying symbol imitating the number "7" in the case of winning than in the case of losing. In other words, it is configured to make it difficult to set an accompanying symbol imitating the number "7" in the case of misalignment. As a result, it is possible to improve the player's expectation for a big win when the accompanying symbol imitating "7" is stopped and displayed.

Next, referring to FIG. 269, when character data is stored in each address of character storage area 223e1 in this modification, a lottery is performed to determine which data is to be stored in which address. The character lottery table 222e11 that is referred to for the execution will be described. This character lottery table 222 e 11 is a kind of data table provided in the ROM 222 of the sound lamp control device 113 . Here, in this modified example, only the character data to be stored at the head address of the character storage area 223e1 is determined by the character lottery table 222e11. The characters are arranged in a predetermined order (the order of elephant, lion, dugong, rhinoceros, bird, bear, and boar). , character data are stored in a predetermined order. For example, when a dugong is determined as a character to be stored at the top address, rhinoceros, bird, bear, wild boar, elephant, and lion are stored in the order of addresses in the character storage area 22231 . By configuring in this way, the processing load can be reduced compared to the case where character data to be stored in all addresses is determined by lottery.

As shown in FIG. 269, in the character lottery table 222e11, the type of character to be set for the first third symbol in the left symbol column (character data to be set to the top address of the character storage area 223e1) is stored for each success/failure determination result. ) and the value range of the twelfth effect counter 223p12 are defined in association with each other. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 269, when the hit/fail determination result is a win, the elephant character (character data “00H ”) are defined in association with each other. Of the 199 possible random numbers (counter values) of the twelfth effect counter 223p12, the number of random numbers (counter values) associated with the elephant character is 35, so the character data (00H) corresponding to the elephant ) is stored at the top address of the character storage area 223e1 is about 17.6% (35/199). When character data corresponding to an elephant is set at the top address, a third pattern imitating an elephant and a lion is displayed in the left pattern row, and a third pattern imitating a dugong and a rhinoceros is displayed in the right pattern row. A third pattern representing a bird, a bear, and a wild boar is displayed in the middle pattern row. That is, the arrangement is set so that the bear can be displayed in the middle symbol row (arrangement in which the bear can be stopped by a chance pattern or a definite pattern).

Further, as shown in FIG. 269, a lion character (character data "01H") is defined in association with the range of "35 to 69" of the value of the twelfth effect counter 223p12. Of the 199 possible random numbers (counter values) of the twelfth effect counter 223p12, the number of random numbers (counter values) associated with the lion character is 35, so the character data corresponding to the lion (01H ) is stored at the top address of the character storage area 223e1 is about 17.6% (35/199). When character data corresponding to a lion is set in the top address, a third pattern imitating a lion and a dugong is displayed in the left pattern column, and a third pattern imitating a rhinoceros and a bird is displayed in the right pattern column. In the middle pattern row, a third pattern imitating a bear, a wild boar, and an elephant is displayed. That is, the arrangement is set so that the bear can be displayed in the middle symbol row (arrangement in which the bear can be stopped by a chance pattern or a definite pattern).

Further, as shown in FIG. 269, the dugong character (character data "02H") is defined in association with the range of "70 to 92" of the value of the twelfth effect counter 223p12. Of the 199 possible random numbers (counter values) of the twelfth effect counter 223p12, the number of random numbers (counter values) associated with the dugong character is 23, so the character data (02H) corresponding to the dugong ) is stored at the top address of the character storage area 223e1 is about 11.6% (23/199). When the character data corresponding to the dugong is set at the top address, the third pattern imitating the dugong and the rhinoceros is displayed in the left pattern row, and the third pattern imitating the bird and the bear is displayed in the right pattern row. The middle pattern row displays a third pattern imitating a boar, an elephant, and a lion. In other words, the arrangement is set such that the bear cannot be displayed in the medium symbol row.

Further, as shown in FIG. 269, the value of the twelfth effect counter 223p12 ranges from "93 to 115" and is defined in association with the rhinoceros character (character data "03H"). Of the 199 possible random numbers (counter values) of the twelfth effect counter 223p12, the number of random numbers (counter values) associated with the character of rhinoceros is 23. Therefore, the character data corresponding to rhinoceros (03H ) is stored at the top address of the character storage area 223e1 is about 11.6% (23/199). When character data corresponding to a rhinoceros is set at the top address, a third pattern imitating a rhinoceros and a bird is displayed in the left pattern column, and a third pattern imitating a bear and a boar is displayed in the right pattern column. The middle pattern row displays a third pattern imitating an elephant, a lion, and a dugong. In other words, the arrangement is set such that the bear cannot be displayed in the middle symbol row.

Further, as shown in FIG. 269, the value of the twelfth effect counter 223p12 is defined in a range of "116 to 138" in association with the bird character (character data "04H"). Of the 199 possible random numbers (counter values) of the twelfth effect counter 223p12, the number of random numbers (counter values) associated with the bird character is 23. Therefore, the character data (04H) corresponding to the bird ) is stored at the top address of the character storage area 223e1 is about 11.6% (23/199). When the character data corresponding to the bird is set at the top address, the third symbol representing a bird and a bear is displayed in the left symbol row, and the third symbol representing a wild boar and an elephant is displayed in the right symbol row. In the middle pattern column, a third pattern representing a lion, a dugong, and a rhinoceros is displayed. In other words, the arrangement is set such that the bear cannot be displayed in the middle symbol row.

Further, as shown in FIG. 269, a bear character (character data "05H") is defined in association with the range of the value of the twelfth effect counter 223p12 from "139 to 162". Of the 199 possible random numbers (counter values) of the twelfth effect counter 223p12, 24 random numbers (counter values) are associated with the bear character. ) is stored at the head address of the character storage area 223e1 is about 12.1% (24/199). When character data corresponding to a bear is set in the head address, a third pattern imitating a bear and a boar is displayed in the left pattern column, and a third pattern imitating an elephant and a lion is displayed in the right pattern column. The middle pattern row displays a third pattern imitating a dugong, a rhinoceros, and a bird. In other words, the arrangement is set such that the bear cannot be displayed in the medium symbol row.

Further, as shown in FIG. 269, a wild boar character (character data "06H") is defined in association with the range of the value of the twelfth effect counter 223p12 from "163 to 1698". Of the 199 possible random numbers (counter values) of the twelfth effect counter 223p12, the number of random numbers (counter values) associated with the boar character is 36, so the character data (06H) corresponding to the boar ) is stored at the top address of the character storage area 223e1 is about 18.1% (36/199). When character data corresponding to a wild boar is set in the top address, a third pattern imitating a boar and an elephant is displayed in the left pattern column, and a third pattern imitating a lion and a dugong is displayed in the right pattern column. The middle pattern row displays a third pattern imitating a rhinoceros, a bird, and a bear. That is, the arrangement is set so that the bear can be displayed in the middle symbol row.

In this way, when the result of the judgment is a hit, the third pattern imitating a bear is arranged in the medium pattern at a rate of about 53.3%. That is, it is constructed so as to be capable of becoming a stop type more than a chance pattern.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 269, when the success/failure determination result is out, the elephant character (character data "00H") is displayed in the range of "0 to 19" for the value of the twelfth effect counter 223p12. A lion character (character data “01H”) is defined in association with the range “20 to 39”, and a dugong character (character data “01H”) is defined in association with the range “40 to 74”. data "02H") is defined in association with the range of "75 to 109", the character of rhinoceros (character data "03H") is defined in association with the range of "110 to 144". , a bird character (character data “04H”) are defined in association with each other, and a bear character (character data “05H”) is defined in correspondence with the range of “145 to 179”, and “145 to 198 , a wild boar character (character data "06H") is defined in association with the range.

Therefore, the rate at which the third bear pattern is set in the medium pattern row (the rate at which character data corresponding to any one of elephant, lion, and boar is set at the leading address of the character storage area 223e1) is about 29.6%. That is, compared to the case of a big hit, the third symbol imitating a bear is less likely to be arranged in the middle symbol row. As a result, the appearance rate of the chance pattern can be made higher in the case of a big win, so that the game can be played while paying attention to the stop symbols in the middle symbol row. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

Next, referring to FIG. 270, lottery is performed to determine which data is to be stored in which address when numerical data is stored in each address of character storage area 223e1 in this modification. The number lottery table 222e12 that is referred to for performing the lottery will be described. This number lottery table 222 e 12 is a kind of data table provided in the ROM 222 of the sound lamp control device 113 . Here, in this modified example, only the character data to be stored at the address "0001H" of the character storage area 223e1 is determined by the number lottery table 222e11. For other addresses, numerical data are stored in ascending numerical order starting from the number stored at the address "0001H". By configuring in this way, the processing load can be reduced compared to the case where the number data to be stored in all addresses is determined by lottery.

As shown in FIG. 270, in the number lottery table 222e12, the first third symbol in the left symbol row is displayed according to the result of the winning/failure determination and whether or not the third symbol imitating a bear is arranged in the middle symbol row. The type of accompanying symbol set in the symbol (number data set at the address "0001H" in the character storage area 223e1) and the value range of the thirteenth effect counter 223p13 are defined in association with each other. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 270, when the result of winning/failure determination is hit, the value of the thirteenth effect counter 223p13 is in the range of "0 to 24" regardless of the type of the middle symbol row. , and associated symbols (numeric data “00H”) imitating the numeral “1” are defined in association with each other. Of the 199 possible random numbers (counter values) of the thirteenth effect counter 223p13, the number of random numbers (counter values) associated with the accompanying symbol imitating the number "1" is 25. The ratio of number data (00H) corresponding to the accompanying symbol imitating the character "1" to the address "0001H" of the character storage area 223e1 is about 12.6%. When the number data corresponding to the accompanying symbol imitating "1" is set in the address "0001H", the accompanying symbols imitating "1" and "2" are displayed in the left symbol row, and the right symbol row is displayed. In the row, accompanying symbols imitating "3" and "4" are displayed, and in the middle symbol row, third symbols imitating "5", "6" and "7" are displayed. That is, the arrangement is set so that the third symbol attached with the accompanying symbol imitating "7" can be stop-displayed (can be stop-displayed in the chance UP pattern).

Also, as shown in FIG. 270, if the result of the winning/failure determination is a hit, the number " 2” (numerical data “01H”) is associated with and defined. Of the 199 possible random numbers (counter values) of the thirteenth effect counter 223p13, the number of random numbers (counter values) associated with the accompanying symbol imitating the number "2" is 25. The ratio of number data (01H) corresponding to the accompanying symbol imitating the character "2" to the address "0001H" of the character storage area 223e1 is about 12.6%. In addition, when numerical data corresponding to an accompanying symbol imitating "2" is set in the address "0001H", accompanying symbols imitating "2" and "3" are displayed in the left symbol row, and the right symbol row is displayed. "4" and "5" are displayed in the row, and the middle symbol row displays a third symbol in the image of "6", "7" and "8". That is, the arrangement is set so that the third symbol attached with the accompanying symbol imitating "7" can be stop-displayed (can be stop-displayed in the chance UP pattern).

Similarly, the value of the thirteenth effect counter 223p13 is defined in the range of "50 to 74" in association with an accompanying symbol imitating the number "3" (number data "01H"). ” is defined in correspondence with the accompanying pattern imitating the number “4”, and the range of “100 to 124” is defined in association with the accompanying pattern imitating the number “5”, The range of "125 to 174" is defined in association with an accompanying pattern imitating the number "6". Therefore, the rate at which the number data corresponding to the accompanying symbols imitating the numbers "3" to "6" are stored in the address "0001H" of the character storage area 223e1 is the accompanying symbols imitating "1" and "2". are about 12.6%, respectively. Even if the number data corresponding to the accompanying symbols imitating these "3" to "6" are set to the address "0001H", the accompanying symbols imitating the number "7" are set to any of the symbol rows. It is set as an accompanying symbol of the third symbol to be executed. That is, it becomes a combination that can be stop-displayed in the chance UP pattern.

On the other hand, the value of the thirteenth effect counter 223p13 is defined to correspond to the range of "175 to 186" with an associated pattern imitating the number "8", and to the range of "187 to 198", the number An accompanying symbol imitating the "9" of is associated with and defined. Since the number of random numbers (counter values) associated with the number data corresponding to these "8" and "9" is 12 respectively, the accompanying symbols imitating the numbers "8" and "9" The rate at which the numeric data corresponding to . When these accompanying symbols imitating "8" or "9" are set as the accompanying symbols of the first third pattern of the left symbols, the accompanying symbols imitating "7" cannot be set. The lottery ratio of the accompanying symbols ("8", "9") that are combinations that cannot display the chance UP pattern is changed to the lottery ratio of the accompanying symbols ("1" to "7") that are combinations that can display the chance UP pattern. By setting it lower than the percentage, it is possible to increase the expectation of a big win when the chance UP pattern appears.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 270, when the result of the judgment is "no", the selection ratio of each accompanying symbol depends on whether or not the third symbol imitating a bear is set in the middle symbol row. variable. That is, the third pattern imitating a bear is not set in the medium pattern row (“05H” is stored as character data in any of the addresses “0008H”, “000AH”, and “000CH” in the character storage area 223e1). If not), 14 random numbers (counter values) are defined in association with the accompanying symbols imitating the numbers "1" to "5", and "6" and "7" 15 random numbers (counter values) are defined in association with the accompanying symbols imitating numbers, and 49 random numbers (counter values) correspond to the accompanying symbols imitating the number "8". 50 random numbers (counter values) are defined in association with an accompanying symbol imitating the number "9". That is, compared to the case of winning, the number data corresponding to the accompanying symbols imitating the numbers "8" and "9" are more likely to be set at the address "0001H" of the character storage area 223e1. That is, the ratio of setting to a combination that does not include an accompanying symbol imitating the number "7" (a combination in which the chance UP pattern cannot be displayed) increases. Therefore, when the chance UP pattern is displayed, it is possible to improve the player's expectation for the big win.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 270, the result of the judgment is wrong, and the third pattern imitating a bear is set in the medium pattern row (addresses "0008H", " 000AH" and "000CH" as character data), a random number (counter value) is set for the accompanying symbols imitating the numbers "1" to "3". Not mapped. When the number data corresponding to the accompanying symbols imitating the numbers "1" to "3" are set at the address "0001H" in the character storage area 223e1, the addresses "0009"H and "000BH" corresponding to the middle symbol row are set. , ``000DH'', the number data ``06H'' corresponding to the accompanying symbol imitating the number ``7'' is set. There is a possibility that an accompanying symbol imitating "7" will be set on the screen, so this is the purpose of avoiding this (preventing stop display with a fixed pattern (see FIG. 267) despite being out) .

In addition, as shown in FIG. 270, 20 random numbers (counter values) are defined in association with the numeric data corresponding to the accompanying symbols imitating the numbers "4" to "7". 60 random numbers (counter values) are defined in association with the number data corresponding to the accompanying symbols imitating the number "8", and the numbers corresponding to the accompanying symbols imitating the number "9". 59 random numbers (counter values) are defined in association with the data. In other words, the lottery ratio of the accompanying symbols (“8”, “9”) that are combinations in which the chance-up pattern cannot be displayed is changed to the accompanying symbols (“4” to “7”) that are combinations in which the chance-up pattern can be displayed. Since the lottery ratio is set lower than the lottery ratio of , it is possible to increase the expectation of a big win when the chance UP pattern appears.

As described above, in this modification, the arrangement of the third symbols to be arranged in each symbol row and the accompanying symbols to be attached to each third symbol in the collective effect are drawn separately. As a result, since the display mode can be changed for each set performance, it is possible to realize a performance mode in which the players are less likely to get bored. In addition, since the degree of expectation for a big win can be suggested by the combination of the third symbols stopped and the combination of the accompanying symbols, and the combination of the third symbols and the accompanying symbols, the combinations of symbols are changed each time the symbols are stopped and displayed. can draw more attention to Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

<Control processing of the sound ramp control device in the modified example of the first control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 271 to 273, various control processes executed by the MPU 221 of the sound ramp control device 113 in this modified example will be described. First, with reference to FIG. 271, the details of the battle effect setting process 5 (S2755) in this modified example will be described. This battle effect setting process 5 (S2755) is a process that is executed in place of the battle effect setting process (see FIG. 204) in the first control example described above. This is a process for setting various production modes in the battle production.

In the battle effect setting process 5 (see FIG. 271), the processes of S3101 to S3110 are the same as the processes of S3101 to S3110 of the battle effect setting process (see FIG. 204) in the first control example described above. is executed. In addition, in the battle effect setting process 5 (see FIG. 271) in this modification, an array setting process is executed for setting a combination (array) of symbols to be displayed in each symbol row (S3151), and the process proceeds to S3101. and migrate. Details of this array setting process (S3151) will be described with reference to FIG.

FIG. 272 is a flow chart showing the arrangement setting process (S3151) described above. In this array setting process (S3151), first, the character lottery table 222e11 (see FIG. 269) is read, and the defined contents of the read character lottery table 222e11 (see FIG. Character data to be stored at the top address of the character storage area 223e1 (see FIG. 268) is determined according to the value of the effect counter 223p12 (S4402), and the determined character data is stored at the top address of the character storage area 223e1. Store (S4403).

Next, an address obtained by adding "0002H" to the setting destination address where the data is set this time is set as the next setting destination address (S4404), and the new setting destination address is stored in the previous setting destination address. Character data obtained by adding "01H" to the obtained character data is stored (S4405). In the process of S4405, if the previously set character data is the upper limit "06H" (character data corresponding to a boar), "00H" is stored.

After the processing of S4405 is completed, character data is then transferred to all destination addresses ("0000H", "0002H", "0004H", "0006H", "0008H", "000AH", and "000CH"). It is determined whether or not data is stored (S4406), and if there is a setting destination address in which data is not stored (S4406: No), the process proceeds to S4404. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S4406 that character data has been stored for all destination addresses, then number setting processing for setting number data to each address in character storage area 223e1 is performed. Execute (S4407) and terminate this process. Details of this number setting process (S4407) will be described with reference to FIG.

FIG. 273 is a flow chart showing the number setting process (S4407). In this number setting process (S4407), first, the number lottery table 222e12 (see FIG. 270) is read out, and the defined contents of the number lottery table 222e12 read out, the result of the win/loss judgment of this time, and the value of the thirteenth effect counter 223p13. , and the type of character data set in the middle pattern, determine the number data to be stored at the address "0001H" in the character storage area 223e1 (see FIG. 268) (S4502). Next, the numeric data determined in the processing of S4502 is stored in the address "0001H" (S4503), and the address obtained by adding "0002H" to the setting destination address where the data is set this time is set as the next setting destination address (S4503). S4504). Next, the numeric data obtained by adding "01H" to the numeric data stored in the previous setting destination address is stored in the new setting destination address (S4505). Note that in the process of S4505, if the previously set numeric data is the upper limit "08H" (the numeric data corresponding to the number "9"), "00H" (the number corresponding to the number "1") is set. numeric data).

After the processing of S4505 is completed, character data is then transferred to all destination addresses (“0001H”, “0003H”, “0005H”, “0007H”, “0009H”, “000BH”, and “000DH”). It is determined whether or not data is stored (S4506), and if there is a setting destination address in which data is not stored (S4506: No), the process proceeds to S4504. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4506 that character data has been stored for all destination addresses, this process ends.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 in the modification of the first control example, animal characters (or "?" characters) are simulated for each of the symbol rows L1 to L3 (see FIG. 129(a)). The third pattern is displayed, and at the lower right of each third pattern, an accompanying pattern imitating a number is also displayed. Then, when it is decided to execute the group effect, the arrangements of the characters and the accompanying symbols in each pattern row are set separately, so that the correspondence between the characters and the numbers can be varied for each effect. Configure. The degree of expectation for a big win is suggested to the player by the combination of the third symbols stop-displayed in each symbol row, the combination of the accompanying symbols, the combination of the third symbols, the accompanying symbols and the stop position. configured as possible. By constructing in this way, in each variable display in the gathering effect, not only whether or not the character is acquired but also the combination of the stop symbols can be paid more attention to the game. It is possible to further improve the interest of the player in the game.

In this modification, only the first third symbol in the left symbol row and the type of accompanying symbols associated with the third symbol are determined by lottery, and the remaining symbol types are determined by lottery. Although the symbols are arranged in a predetermined order starting from the type of symbol, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the characters and numbers to be set for all symbols may be determined by lottery. By configuring in this way, the randomness of each pattern can be further enhanced, so that the mode of presentation can be further diversified. Alternatively, the combination of selectable symbols may be defined in advance by a table or the like, and the selection ratio of each combination may be changed according to the lottery result of the special symbols. By configuring in this way, it is possible to reduce the processing load when setting the combination of symbols.

In the modified example of the first control example described above, in the variable control of the display mode of the third symbol when execution of the group effect is determined, based on the character lottery table 222e11 described above with reference to FIG. It is configured to vary the display mode of the third pattern. That is, the display mode is determined from the display modes (7 types of characters) of the types (numbers 0 to 9) of the third symbols that are variably displayed. However, without being limited to this, for example, the display mode of the third pattern to be used for the collective effect may be determined from among the display modes of the number of types larger than the number of the third symbols to be variably displayed.

Specifically, a character storage area storing 15 types of character information is provided for the 10 third symbols that are displayed in a variable manner. Therefore, the display mode used for the collective effect may be determined with respect to the ten third symbols. With this configuration, all the display modes can be configured so that they are not variably displayed, so that the player can enjoy predicting which display mode will be determined when the group effect is executed. can provide. Also, in this case, the identification information of the third symbol being displayed in a variable manner is changed to such an extent that the player can visually recognize it, or the notification (suggestion) for notifying (suggesting) the determined display mode type to the player. Suggestion) It is good to provide a means. As a result, it is possible to provide the player with the pleasure of predicting the display mode of the third symbol to be stop-displayed immediately after the start of the group effect.

Furthermore, the same display mode may be redundantly determined as the display mode of the plurality of third symbols that are variably displayed in the collective effect. By configuring in this way, even when the group effect is executed using display modes (character data) with a smaller number of types than the number of the third symbols that are variably displayed during the group effect, all the display modes are displayed. A production pattern that is not displayed in a variable manner can be executed. In addition, by determining only the specific display mode more than the other display modes, the display mode that is likely to be stop-displayed in the collective effect and the display mode that is difficult to be displayed during the variable display of the third pattern in the collective effect. It can be suggested to the player.

In the modified example of the first control example, when execution of the group effect is determined, the display mode of the third pattern is determined, and the determined display mode is used to execute the group effect to the end. However, without being limited to this, for example, when the third symbols are temporarily stopped during the collective effect and are displayed again in a variable manner, the display mode of each third symbol is again determined (updated). The configuration may be such that the mode update process can be executed.

By constructing in this way, every time the third pattern is temporarily stopped during the gathering performance, the display mode of the third pattern that can be stopped and displayed can be changed, so that the user does not get tired of the gathering performance in the middle. can be suppressed. In addition, the display mode corresponding to the character already acquired in the group effect may be continued as it is and used as the display mode of the third pattern, or the player may grasp that the display mode corresponds to the character already acquired. Acquired display modes in which the display mode is varied as much as possible (for example, a display mode in which a character is marked with "done") may be used. It may be configured so as to change to a display mode corresponding to the character.

Further, as in the modified example of the first control example described above, when executing an effect using identification information (symbols) having a plurality of information, for example, the first information (character information) given to each symbol , second information (numerical information), and third information (information indicating whether or not the effect has been successful (large set)) can be determined. After variably displaying a plurality of (three) columns, the first benefit is given based on the combination of the first information, the second benefit is given based on the combination of the second information, and the three statically displayed symbols have. In addition to imparting a third privilege based on the combination of the third information, the combination of the first information and the second information imparted to the specific symbols stopped and displayed, the combination of the first information and the third information, It is preferable that a specific privilege can be given based on a combination of the second information and the third information, or a combination of the first information, the second information and the third information. By constructing in this manner, the player is interested not only in the combination of each information given to a plurality of symbols stopped and displayed, but also in the combination of each information given to one pattern. There is an effect that the performance effect can be enhanced.

<Regarding a modified example of the icon display notice>
In the pachinko machine 10 of the first control example described above, as explained with reference to FIGS. By executing the icon display notice displayed by , the player is provided with a variety of notice contents. The icon display announcement executed in the above-described first control example is performed in the effect icon storage area 222c1 (or 164(b)), the top icon type is specified, and the icons are displayed in order from the top icon type (effect element 1).

Also, regarding the positions where the icons are displayed, one permutation is selected from the permutation storage area 222c3 (see FIG. 165) in which a plurality of specific permutation information indicating the display order is stored (effect element 2). ). Further, the number of icons to be displayed in the icon display notice is determined by lottery (effect element 3).

In this way, in the case of executing one production, by setting a plurality of production elements independently and making it possible to execute an production combining each of the set production elements, all production patterns that can be executed can be realized. Compared with the case of separately preparing separately as performance data in advance, the amount of performance data to be prepared in advance can be reduced.

Furthermore, as the permutation information indicating the display order, for example, permutation information in which the same display location is redundantly selected can also be selected. are displayed in the same display location, by setting a display rule to display only one of the icons, the number of icons different from the number of icons determined as the effect element 3 is displayed. The displayed effects can be executed, and more varied effects can be executed.

Furthermore, in the above-described first control example, when determining the content of each effect element, the content of the effect element is determined based on the result of the corresponding special symbol lottery (whether judgment result), so the icon display notice While randomly determining the effect mode, the executed icon display notice can suggest the result of the special symbol lottery, so that the player can be interested.

On the other hand, in this modified example, an effect element for executing an icon display notice with more variations will be described. In this modified example, as shown in FIG. 274, the size of the icon displayed in the icon display notice can be changed. FIG. 274 is a diagram schematically showing an example of a case where an enlarged icon is displayed in the icon display notice according to this modification. Note that the icon display notice of this modified example differs from the icon display notice of the first control example described above in that the size of the icon to be displayed can be changed, and the icon displayed at the display location 1 The difference is that display control is executed to prevent icons from being displayed at other display locations covered by , and the rest is the same. The same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

In FIG. 274, the icon 812a, which was first displayed in the area 811a, is displayed so as to cover (hide) the area 811b (see FIG. 133(a)) as the icon display notice effect. In this case, no icon is displayed in the area 811b (see FIG. 133(a)) in the current icon display announcement effect.

In this way, by configuring the enlargement ratio of the displayed icon to be selectable, the area covered by the displayed icon can be changed according to the enlargement ratio of the selected icon, the type of the icon, and the display location. becomes possible. By configuring the icons to be displayed in the order in which the already covered area (non-display area) is removed from the permutation selected as the effect element 2 described above, the icon display notice with more variations is executed. can do.

In addition, when the technique of the present modified example is used, a non-display area is set, so it becomes easy to select overlapping display locations for the icon display order. Therefore, by combining the technique of setting the non-display area and the technique of displaying only one icon when the display locations overlap, the number of icons set as the above-mentioned effect element 3 is greatly deviated. Icons can be easily displayed, and more variations of icon display announcements can be executed.

Next, of the configuration of the ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the sound ramp control device 113 of this modified example, the configuration different from that of the above-described first control example will be described with reference to FIG. In this modified example, as described above, when the effect of the icon display notice is executed, the enlargement ratio of the icon displayed (the icon displayed at the top) can be varied. It is different from the example.

Also, the configuration of the ROM 222 is different in that an enlargement ratio selection table 222A1 for selecting an icon enlargement ratio is provided. Since the configuration of the ROM 222 other than that is the same, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 275 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the magnification selection table 222A1. As shown in FIG. 275, the enlargement ratio selection table 222A1 defines different enlargement ratios in association with the result of special symbol lottery success/failure determination and the value of the A-th effect counter 223pA. Here, the A-th effect counter 223pA is a counter capable of updating a random value within the range of "0 to 198", similar to the various effect counters 223p used in the above-described control examples, It is a counter whose value is periodically updated in a process (for example, main process) that is periodically executed in the control process of the control device 113 . The value of this counter is configured to be updated with regularity so that the update value of the other effect counter 223p is not synchronized, and since the specific configuration is the same, a detailed description thereof will be given. omitted. As a result, it is possible to prevent the same combination of the effect modes of the various effects selected by referring to the values of the various effect counters 223 .

Specifically, the success/failure determination result is “hit (jackpot)”, and the value of the A production counter pA is in the range of “0 to 4”, the expansion rate is “50%”, and in the range of “5 to 99” is an enlargement rate of "100%", the range of "100-149" is an enlargement rate of "200%", the range of "150-179" is an enlargement rate of "500%", and the range of "180-198" defines an enlargement rate of "1000%".

In addition, if the success/failure judgment result is "off" and the value of the A effect counter pA is in the range of "0 to 14", the enlargement rate is "50%", and in the range of "15 to 164", the enlargement rate is "100%". , the enlargement rate of "200%" is specified in the range of "165 to 184", and the enlargement rate of "500%" is specified in the range of "185 to 198".

As described above, the enlargement ratio selection table 223A1 is referred to when selecting the enlargement ratio for displaying the top icon. The top icon is displayed in half the size of the icon display (see FIG. 134(a)) of the size of . When "100%" is selected, the top icon is displayed in the normal size shown in FIG. If "500%" is selected, the icon will be displayed at 5 times the normal size, and if "1000%" is selected, the icon will be displayed at 10 times the normal size. Icons are displayed in size.

Here, in this modified example, as in the first control example described above, a plurality of types of icons can be displayed. The display locations covered by the display icons are configured to differ depending on the rate.

For example, referring to FIGS. 133(a) and 164(b), when the top icon is displayed in the area 811a, the enlargement rate of 500% is selected for all icon types. Then, the area 811b is covered. Further, when the top icon is displayed in the area 811b, when the enlargement ratio is 200%, the other area (area 811a) is covered and enlarged only when the "V sign shape" icon is displayed. When the rate of 500% is selected, the areas 811c and 811d are covered with the "square" icon, and only the area 811f is covered with the "round", "triangle", and "rhombus" icons. The "V-shaped" icon is configured to cover the entire area. Henceforth, even if the display location where the top icon is displayed is any of the area 811c, area 811d, area 811e, and area 811f, the other area covered will differ depending on the type of icon to be displayed and the enlargement ratio. It consists of

When an enlargement ratio of 1000% is selected, all other areas are covered regardless of the type of the top icon and the display location.

With this configuration, it is possible to change the display location where the icon can be displayed in the icon display notice based on the selection result of the location where the leading icon is displayed, the icon type, and the enlargement ratio. An icon display notice with randomness can be easily executed.

In addition, in this modification, when the icon of "V sign shape", which is an icon type that is likely to be displayed when the result of the special symbol lottery is a big win, is displayed as the leading icon, other icons are displayed as the leading icon. It is configured so that other regions are more likely to be used than when it is used. Specifically, in order to make it easier for the player to understand that an icon with a high expectation of winning a jackpot is displayed, the size of the “V sign shape” icon (size at 100% magnification) is changed to another size. Configured to be larger than the icon. In this way, different areas can be easily covered when the same enlargement ratio is selected by providing different reference sizes for the icons to be displayed.

In this modified example, the same icon type as in the first control example described above is configured to be selectable. 811b), an icon type that easily covers other areas may be used only when the top icon is displayed. As a result, at the timing when the icon display notice is executed and the player is notified of only the portion where the first icon is displayed (see FIG. 133(b)), the player can have the pleasure of predicting which icon will be displayed. can provide.

In this modified example and the first control example described above, as shown in FIG. Although it is configured to be notified, it is not limited to this, and the type of the leading icon may be notified first, or the enlargement rate set for the leading icon may be notified first. Alternatively, the non-display area may be notified first.

Next, the flow of control processing in the sound lamp control device 113 when setting the effect mode of the icon display notice in this modification will be described. This modification differs from the above-described first control example in that a random display effect setting process A (see S3293 in FIG. 276) is executed instead of the random display effect setting process (see S3203 in FIG. 207). , are otherwise identical. Since the basic flow of control processing is the same as that of the first control example described above, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 276 is a flow chart showing the contents of the random display effect setting process A (S3293). In this random display effect setting process A (S3293), a process of determining the enlargement ratio of the icon displayed as the leading icon and a process of changing the display order of the icons based on the determined enlargement ratio are executed. , is different from the random display effect setting process described above (see S3203 in FIG. 207). Other processing contents are the same, and the same contents are denoted by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof is omitted.

When the random display effect setting process A (S3293) is executed, first, the same processes of S3301 to S3304 as the random display effect setting process (see S3203 in FIG. 207) are executed, and then the enlargement ratio selection table 223A1. is determined by referring to (S3391), and the non-display area is extracted based on the enlargement rate, display location, and type of the top icon (S3392). Note that in the process of S3392, a non-display area (area covered by the display of the top icon) is extracted based on the contents defined in advance in a determination table (not shown) stored in the ROM 222. FIG.

Then, it is determined whether or not there is a non-display area based on the extraction result of S3392 (S3394), and if it is determined that there is (S3394: Yes), the removal permutation obtained by removing the non-display area from the permutation determined by the processing of S3303 is set (S3394), and then the same S3305 and S3306 processes as the above-described random display effect setting process (see S3203 in FIG. 207) are executed, and this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3393 that there is no non-display area (S3394: No), the permutation determined in the process of S3303 can be used as it is, so the process of S3394 is skipped and the process proceeds to S3305. Transition.

By configuring in this way, even when the type and permutation of the top icon are determined in the same pattern, by varying the enlargement rate of the top icon, the location where the icon is displayed can be changed. Therefore, it is possible to execute an icon display notice (random display effect) rich in variations using a small amount of effect data.

In this modified example, when there is a non-display area, a removal permutation is set, and the number of icons determined in the process of S3304 is displayed based on the removal permutation. Without being limited to , it is also possible to configure such that the process of only not displaying the icon corresponding to the non-display area is executed without setting the removal order. Even in this case, a different number of icons will be displayed than the determined number of displayed icons, so an icon display notice (random display effect) rich in variation is executed using a small amount of effect data. can do.

<Modified example of shooting accessory production>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 277 to 280, a modified example of effect control using the projectile accessory 400 will be described. In this modification, it is configured such that the accessory presentation of the projectile accessory 400 is performed in the demonstration presentation that is performed during the standby state in which the special symbol lottery (special symbol variation) is not performed. . Then, as the operation contents of the shooting accessory 400, the operation positioned in the preparation operation A state and the preparation operation B state is executed as a preparatory operation until the actual shooting operation is performed, and the timing at which the demonstration effect ends. At (the timing at which the player enters the ball into the first ball entrance 64 and the special symbol variation is started), the action status of the projectile accessory is determined, and based on the determination result, the variable performance is executed. is different from the above-described second control example in that it is configured to vary, and the rest is the same. Identical contents are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 277, the contents of the presentation in the demo screen in this modified example will be described. FIG. 277(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example in which the projectile accessory 400 operates during the demonstration effect in which the demonstration screen is displayed. As shown in FIG. 277(a), a demo screen is displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81, and the projectile accessory 400 operates and the granular member 320 is projected so as to cover the display surface. .

In this way, by operating the projectile accessory 400 on the demo screen, it is possible to make the player interested in the game, and to enhance the operation of the game. Although detailed explanation is omitted, as an operation scenario for firing the shooting accessory 400 during the demonstration effect, for example, after a specific period of time has passed after the demonstration effect is executed, that is, the third symbol display device 81 An operation scenario for moving the projectile accessory 400 can be set in accordance with the timing at which an effect display having a sense of unity with the operation of the projectile accessory 400 is displayed on the display screen.

It should be noted that a plurality of production patterns during the demonstration production can be set. It is preferable to make it easy to set a performance pattern including an action scenario for operating the projectile accessory 400 . By configuring in this way, the granular member 320 can be normally housed in the projectile accessory 400 by the operation of the projectile accessory 400 executed during the demonstration effect, thereby improving the effect of presentation and the performance of the presentation device. optimization can be easily achieved at the same time. In addition, since the player is not playing the game while the demonstration effect is being executed, the shooting accessory 400 can be operated without making the player who is playing the game feel uncomfortable.

Also, when the projectile accessory 400 is to be operated during the demonstration effect, a comment (in the figure, "demonstration display") that allows the player to identify that the demonstration effect is being performed is displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81. ) is displayed. As a result, it is possible to inform the player in an easy-to-understand manner that the demonstration performance is currently being performed, so that a new player cannot perform the game by mistakenly assuming that the game is being played despite the fact that the demonstration performance is being performed. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of the state.

Next, with reference to FIG. 277(b), the contents of the effect when the special symbol variation is executed during the demonstration effect will be described. FIG. 277(b) shows a case where the shooting accessory 400 shoots the granular members 320 as a demonstration effect, and the special symbol variation starts before all the granular members 320 are stored in the shooting accessory 400. FIG. 11 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the content of the production in .

In this modified example, as the operation states of the shooting accessory 400, the preparatory operation A state for letting the player know that the granular member 320 stored in the storage area has moved downward, and the granular member 320 are made to shoot. A preparatory operation state B in which a resistance force is applied to the elastic member for this purpose, and a shooting operation state in which the resistance force to the elastic member is released and the granular member 320 is shot by the restoring force of the elastic member can be distinguished. there is

Then, when the special symbol variation is started when the shooting accessory 400 is in the shooting operation state (when the end condition of the demonstration presentation is satisfied), the shooting operation of the shooting accessory 400 executed during the demonstration presentation is completed. (Before the granular member 320 is stored in the projectile accessory 400), a situation occurs in which the special symbol variation is started, and to indicate to the player that the special symbol lottery has been lost. Even when the variation performance is executed in response to the special symbol variation, the granular member 320 is positioned on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81, giving the player a sense of unnecessary expectation. there were.

On the other hand, in this modified example, as shown in FIG. 277(b), until the firing operation of the projectile accessory 400 is completed (until the granular member 320 is stored in the storage area ra of the projectile accessory 400). During the period, it is configured to continue the demonstration production. By configuring in this way, it is possible to execute the variable performance after completing the operation of the launching accessory 400 in the demonstration performance, so that the plurality of performances (demonstration performance, variable performance) may be confused and the player may be confused. It is possible to suppress the provision of an incomprehensible presentation.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 277(b), in the state where the demonstration effect continues after the special symbol variation is started, a display area Dm2 is formed on the upper right side of the display surface of the third symbol display device 81, It is configured to be able to inform the player that the special symbol variation is being executed. That is, it is configured so that the player can be notified only that the special symbol variation is being executed without executing the variation performance. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from being misunderstood if the special symbol variation is not started even though the ball has entered the first ball entrance 64.例文帳に追加Further, the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 displays a comment "demonstration effect ending process in progress". As a result, the player can be informed in an easy-to-understand manner that the special symbol variation has started.

Next, referring to FIG. 278, the operational status of the projectile accessory 400 will be described. FIG. 278(a) schematically shows a state in which the projectile accessory 400 is positioned at the standby position (reference), and FIG. 278(c) schematically shows the state in which the projectile object 400 is positioned in the preparation A), and FIG. 278(c) schematically shows the state in which the projectile object 400 is positioned in the preparation operation B state (preparation B). It is a thing.

First, the projectile accessory 400 at the reference position will be described with reference to FIG. 278(a). When positioned at this reference position, the granular member 320 stored in the storage area ra of the projectile accessory 400 is assembled to the pachinko machine 10 so that the player playing the game can visually recognize it.

Then, when the action scenario of the projectile accessory 400 is set, first, the projectile accessory 400 moves to the position of preparation A shown in FIG. 278(b). The position of this preparation A is a position where the arch-shaped bottom surface is moved downward so that the granular member 320 stored in the storage area ra of the projectile accessory 400 is not visible to the player during the game. . The shooting accessory 400 in this modification has the same configuration as the ejection device (shooting accessory) 400 in the above-described first embodiment, and the arch-shaped bottom surface is formed by the operation of the drive motor 400, which is an electric drive source. moved downwards.

In the preparation A position, no drag force is applied to the elastic member. Therefore, for example, by driving the drive motor 400 in reverse, the granular member 320 is ejected from the preparation A position to the reference position. It is possible to move without moving.

The shooting accessory 400 needs to perform a preparatory motion when actually performing the firing motion. There is a problem that the player can easily grasp that the action will be executed.

On the other hand, in the above-described second control example, an effect pattern in which only the preparatory action is executed is provided so that the player cannot predict whether or not the shooting action will be executed only by executing the preparatory action. was configured to Furthermore, since the shooting accessory 400 is designed to shoot the granular member 320 by the restoring force of the elastic member, the operation state shifts to the state where the preparatory operation is completed, that is, the state where sufficient resistance is applied to the elastic member. If so, there is a problem that it becomes difficult to move the projectile accessory 400 to the reference position without performing the projecting operation.

Therefore, in this modified example, a preparatory action A for emphasizing that the preparatory action has been performed is made executable, and after the preparatory action A is completed, a preparatory action B (an action of applying a drag force to the elastic member) is performed. , and when an effect pattern for executing only the preparatory action is set, the action control for moving the projectile accessory 400 to the reference position is executed after the preparatory action A is completed. are doing.

By configuring in this way, when an effect pattern for executing only the preparatory action is set, the shooting accessory 400 moves downward and allows the player to grasp that the preparatory action has started. Moreover, the preparatory operation can be completed without applying a resistance force to the elastic member.

Also, by moving the projectile accessory 400 from the reference position (see FIG. 278(a)) to the preparation A (see FIG. 278(b)), the granular member 320 disappears from the field of vision of the player during play. Since the shooting accessory 400 is attached to the action unit 500 (see FIG. 277), it is possible to make it easier for the player to understand that the preparatory action has been executed.

Furthermore, although detailed description is omitted, when the drive motor 400m as the drive source starts to drive, a larger vibration is generated than when the drive motor 400m as the drive source continues to drive. Configure. Therefore, when the preparatory action is executed, the vibration generated from the drive motor 400m, which is the driving source, also allows the player to recognize that the preparatory action has been executed.

Next, referring to FIG. 278(c), the projectile accessory 400 positioned in the preparation operation B state (preparation B) will be described. When the state shown in FIG. 278(b) has passed for a predetermined period (for example, 2 seconds), the drive motor 400m, which is the drive source, operates again, and the projectile accessory 400 moves to the preparation B position. Since this movement from preparation A to preparation B is executed in a state where the granular member 320 is already positioned at a position that is difficult for the player to visually recognize, it can be made difficult for the player to notice. When moving to the preparation B, a resistance is applied to the elastic member of the projectile accessory 400 . In this state, when the driving motor 400m, which is the driving source, is operated to release the resistance to the elastic member (locking member (claw) that locks the elastic member), the granular member is moved by the restoring force of the elastic member. 320 is fired.

In addition, in this modification, the timing of moving from the state of preparation A to the state of preparation B in the effect of executing the shooting motion, and the state of preparation A to the reference state in the effect of only the preparation motion. The timing is configured to be the same timing. As a result, the drive motor 400m, which is the drive source, is driven at the same timing regardless of which effect is executed. It is possible to make it difficult for the player to predict.

Next, the relationship between the timing at which the condition for terminating the demonstration effect is established and the operation status of the projectile accessory 400 will be described. When the end condition of the demonstration effect is satisfied in the reference state shown in FIG. A normal variable performance is executed immediately after the end condition of the demonstration performance is satisfied.

When the end condition of the demonstration effect is satisfied in the preparation A state shown in FIG. The operation is interrupted, and the demonstration effect is extended and displayed (see FIG. 277(b)) until the projectile accessory 400 is moved to the reference state, and then the variable effect is executed. In addition, since the preparation A state is a state in which no resistance is applied to the elastic member, the variable performance may be executed while maintaining the preparation A state. In this case, when the performance using the projectile accessory 400 that is first executed as the variable performance is executed, the performance operation of the projectile accessory 400 is executed based on the action scenario from the time of being in the preparation A state. Let it be.

278(c), when the end condition of the demonstration effect is satisfied in the preparation B state shown in FIG. 400 cannot be moved to the reference state. Therefore, it is necessary to terminate the demonstration presentation while maintaining the preparation B state when the end condition of the demonstration presentation is satisfied. However, since the preparation B state is a state in which a resistance force is applied to the elastic member, if the preparation B state is maintained for a long time, an excessive resistance force is applied to the elastic member, resulting in restoration of the elastic member. There is a risk that the power will be reduced, leading to failure of the projectile accessory 400 .

Therefore, in this modified example, when the end condition of the demonstration effect is established in the preparation B state, the effect using the projectile accessory 400 is forcibly executed in the variable effect. By configuring in this way, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the preparation B state continues for a long time and the projectile accessory 400 breaks down.

Next, among the control processing contents of the sound ramp control device 113 in this modified example, the points that are different from the above-described second control example will be described. In this modified example, in place of the character product effect management process (see S2151 in FIG. 242), the character product effect management process B (see S2191 in FIG. 279) is replaced with the effect mode setting process (see S2191 in FIG. 200) is replaced with effect mode setting process B (see S2697 in FIG. 280), and the rest is the same. The same reference numerals are given to the same contents, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 279, the contents of the role product presentation management process B (S2191) will be described. This performance management process B (S2191) differs from the above-described second control example in that a control process is added when an interruption signal is received in a state where the action scenario of the projectile accessory 400 is set. . Other processing contents are the same as the above-described role product effect management process (see S2191 in FIG. 279), and the same contents are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 279, when the role product performance management process B (S2191) is executed, S3801 to S3804 and S3807, which are the same as the role product performance management process (see S2151 in FIG. 242) of the second control example described above, are executed. The processing of to S3810 is executed. Then, in the process of S3804, if it is determined that there is an operation scenario for the projectile accessory 400 (S3804: Yes), then it is determined whether or not an interruption signal has been received (S3891). In the processing of S3891, when a command (variation pattern command) indicating that a new special symbol variation is started is received, it is determined that an interruption signal has been received.

Here, in this modification, similar to the second control example described above, during the waiting period (demonstration period) in which the variation performance is executed during the special symbol variation period and the special symbol variation is not performed Both the demonstration effect to be executed and the effect using the projectile accessory 400 can be executed (the operation scenario of the projectile accessory 400 can be set). In addition, in this modification, while one special symbol (for example, the first special symbol) is fluctuating in the same manner as the second control example described above, another special symbol (for example, the second special symbol) is executed. configured to prevent

That is, in the performance management process B (S2191), in the state where it is determined that the action scenario of the projectile is set (the state where it is determined as Yes in the process of S3804), the interruption signal is received (variation If it is determined that the pattern command has been received), it means that the demonstration performance using the projectile accessory 400 is being executed.

Then, in the processing of S3891, if it is determined that the interrupt signal has been received (S3891: Yes), then the current operating status of the projectile accessory 400 is preparation A (see FIG. 278(b)). It is determined (S3892), and if it is determined that it is preparation A (S3892: Yes), interruption processing is executed (S3893), and this processing ends. In the processing of S3893, in order to interrupt the effect using the projectile accessory 400 that is executed during the demonstration effect, the projectile accessory 400 positioned at the position of preparation A is moved to the reference position (FIG. 278(a)). reference) is executed. Although a detailed explanation is omitted, an action scenario for moving the projectile accessory 400 from the position of preparation A to the reference position is defined in advance in the accessory action table 222aa (see FIG. 236(a)). , when executing the interruption process, the target action scenario is read from the role product action table 222aa (see FIG. 236(a)) and executed.

In this way, by executing the processing of S3893, the preparatory motion is executed to execute the effect using the accessory 400 during the demonstration effect, and in the state where the projectile accessory 400 is positioned at the position of preparation A, Since the demonstration performance can be terminated early when the end condition of the demonstration performance is executed, the player can easily enjoy the variable performance.

Returning to FIG. 279, the description continues. In the processing of S3892, if it is determined that the preparation A is not currently in progress (S3892: No), then it is determined whether the preparation B is currently being performed (see FIG. 278(c)) (S3894). If so (S3894: Yes), the emergency standby flag 223Ba is set to ON (S3895), the action scenario for the set projectile accessory 400 is cleared (S3896), and this process ends.

Here, the emergency standby flag 223Ba is a flag for indicating that the operation of the projectile accessory 400 is temporarily stopped, and is turned on when the operation of the projectile accessory 400 is temporarily stopped. , which is stored in the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 .

The setting status of the emergency standby flag 223Ba is referred to when executing the variable effect, and when the emergency standby flag 223Ba is set to ON, the emergency standby flag 223Ba is not set to ON. It is configured so that the performance using the projectile accessory 400 can be easily executed as the performance.

By configuring in this way, the state in which the emergency standby flag 223Ba is set to ON, that is, the state in which the projectile accessory 400 is positioned in preparation B (see FIG. 278(c)) is difficult to continue for a long time. It is possible to make it easier for the projectile accessory 400 to prevent failure.

In the processing of S3891, if it is determined that the interrupt signal has not been received (S3891: No), or if it is determined that the preparation B is not in the processing of S3894 (S3894), the role of the second control example described above is performed. The processing of S3805 to S3807 (S3897), which is the same as the object effect management processing (see S2151 in FIG. 242), is executed, and this processing ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 280, the contents of the rendering mode setting process B (S2697) will be described. FIG. 280 is a flow chart showing the contents of the rendering mode setting process B (S2697). The content of this rendering mode setting process B (S2697) is that a process corresponding to the setting status of the emergency standby flag 223Ba is added to the rendering mode setting process (see S2607 in FIG. 200) of the second control example. are different, and otherwise identical. The same reference numerals are given to the same contents, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

When the effect mode setting process B (S2697) is executed, first, it is determined whether the emergency standby flag 223Ba is set to ON (S2791), and if it is determined to be set to ON (S2791: Yes) , It is determined whether or not the variation pattern of this time can execute the shooting effect using the shooting accessory 400 (S2792). In the processing of S2792, the variation time of the current variation pattern is determined, and when the length of the variation time is equal to or longer than a predetermined time (30 seconds or longer), it is determined that the shooting effect is possible.

Then, when it is determined that the shooting effect is possible in the process of S2792 (S2792: Yes), the shooting effect is set (S2793), the emergency standby flag 223Ba is set to off (S2794), and this process ends.

On the other hand, in the processing of S2791, if it is determined that the emergency standby flag 223Ba is not set to ON (S2791: No), the processing of S2701 to S2707 which is the same as the above-described production mode setting processing (see S2607 in FIG. 200) is executed to terminate this process.

In this way, when the emergency standby flag 223Ba is set to ON, regardless of the result of the special symbol lottery, when the length of the fluctuation time satisfies the predetermined condition, the performance using the projectile accessory 400 is performed. By making it executable, when the emergency standby flag 223Ba is set to ON, the production using the shooting accessory 400 is executed as a variable production than when the emergency standby flag 223Ba is not set to ON. It is designed to be easy. This makes it difficult for the state of preparation B to continue for a long time, and makes it easier for the projectile accessory 400 to prevent failure.

The techniques used in each of the control examples described above may be combined as appropriate. may be configured to be executed by the display control device 114 as in the third control example.

Specifically, when setting the variable effect pattern in the audio lamp control device 113 (when executing the delay effect setting process (see S2805 in FIG. 203) in the display setting process (see S2115 in FIG. 199)), As in the first control example described above, only the delay period for the audio output device 226 (the delay mode for the audio effect) is set by the audio lamp control device 113, and the button effect is executed without setting the delay mode for the display effect. and the operation valid period (button valid period) in the button effect.

Based on the received display command, the display control device 114 extracts and sets the execution timing of the button effect and the operation effective period of the button effect. Then, when a pressing command indicating that the frame button 22 has been operated during the operation effective period of the button effect is received, whether or not to execute the delayed effect with respect to the display effect, and when to execute the delayed effect. , and set a delay period corresponding to the determined content in the delay timer.

After that, when the value of the delay timer becomes 0, the display effect is executed (image data corresponding to the display effect is generated, and the display mode showing the effect result of the button effect is displayed in the third mode based on the generated image data). displayed on the display surface of the pattern display device 81). Then, a display completion command indicating that the display effect has been executed is output to the sound lamp control device 113 .

Upon receiving the display completion command, the audio lamp control device 113 determines the delay period of the display effect in the button effect executed in the current button effect, and determines the effect mode to be executed next based on the determination result. set.

In this case, the display control device 114 does not output a command indicating information about the delay effect to the sound lamp control device 113 until the delay period managed by the display control device 114 has passed and the display effect is executed. Alternatively, a delay generation command indicating that a delay period has been set, that is, that a predetermined value has been set in the delay timer may be output to the sound lamp control device 113. good. As a result, the audio ramp control device 113 can recognize that the delay period will occur before the delay period elapses, so that control processing corresponding to the delay period can be executed.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example described above has operation means (frame button 22, first button 22za, second button 22zb) that can be operated by the player, and effect execution means ( As a part of the effect executed by the control processing by the sound lamp control device 113), it is configured to be able to execute the operation effect based on the operation to the operation means. When the operation effect is executed, an operation effective period is set for determining whether the operation performed by the player on the operation means is effective, and the operation is being executed according to the operation contents performed within the operation effective period. Since the effect mode of the operation effect of (1) is variable, the player can be motivated to play the game.

In the above-described first control example, the operation effect of changing the effect mode based on the operation content (for example, the number of times of operation) to the operating means within the continuously set operation valid period was described. For example, it may be possible to set a plurality of operation effective periods within the effect period in which the operation effect is executed. The effect mode is configured to be variable to the first effect mode based on the first The effect mode may be configured to be variable to a second effect mode different from the first effect mode. That is, it is sufficient that the operation effect is executed so that the effect mode is varied over a plurality of operation effective periods set within the effect period of the operation effect. Moreover, it may be configured such that the performance period of the operation performance is set so as to straddle a plurality of special symbol variations or a plurality of big winning games.

In the first control example described above, when all the effect modes set in the repeated hit effect, that is, when the effect mode is changed to the final effect mode based on the operation to the operation means, the subsequent operation to the operation means Depending on the contents, it is possible to end the continuous hit performance without waiting for the lapse of a predetermined period during which the repeated hit performance is executed. By constructing in this way, the player is made to execute the continuous hit effect for a long time without changing the effect mode, and the player's desire to play the game and, in turn, the desire to operate the operation means is reduced. You can prevent it from happening.

In addition, in the first control example described above, when the player intentionally operates the operation means within the operation effective period, it is configured so that the effect mode of the operation effect can be easily changed, but this is not the only option. Instead, it may be configured such that it is easier to change the presentation mode when the operating means is not operated. By configuring in this way, it is possible to provide the player with the enjoyment of selecting whether or not to operate the operation means during the valid period of operation.

Furthermore, in the above-described first control example, the operation effect result is displayed once based on the operation contents of the operation means within the operation effective period. may be configured to display the results of the operation effects a plurality of times within the window. For example, when an operation effective period of 10 seconds is set as the operation effective period, a predetermined operation condition When the operation condition that is satisfied when the operation is performed repeatedly) is satisfied, the first operation effect result is displayed, and after the first operation effect result is displayed, if there is a remaining period in the operation valid period, By establishing a predetermined operation condition, the second operation effect result may be displayed. Also, in this case, it is preferable to configure the display contents of the operation effect results displayed a plurality of times to be variable. It is preferable to provide a determining means for determining whether to display the operation effect result, and to display any operation effect result each time the operation condition is satisfied. In this way, by enabling the display of a plurality of operation effect results within one operation effective period, the player can be motivated to operate the operation means.

Further, in this case, a condition variable means for changing a predetermined operation condition each time the operation effect result is displayed, and a limiting means for limiting the number of times the operation effect result can be displayed within one operation valid period are provided. Also good. In addition, the number of times limited by the limiting means may be varied based on the operation contents of the operating means executed during the effect period of the operation effect. It may be configured so that the more the operation is performed, the more times the operation effect result can be displayed. It may be configured to increase the number of times of display. Further, the probability of displaying the true operation effect result may be varied based on the operation content of the operation means executed during the effect period of the operation effect.

In the above-described second control example, an abnormality determination process for executing an abnormality determination (abnormality determination as to whether or not the granular member 320 is accommodated) of the ejection accessory (ejection accessory) 400 is performed at a specific timing, and an abnormality determination is performed. According to the result of the processing, it is configured to execute an effect using the projectile accessory 400, execute a retry process for executing abnormality determination again, or execute a process of switching to another effect. However, without being limited to this, for example, after executing an effect using the projectile object (projectile object) 400, the projectile object (projectile object) 400 is in a normal state, that is, the granular member 320 is in a normal state. It may be configured to execute different processing depending on the length of time required for the projectile accessory 400 to be stored in the storage unit. When it is determined that the member 320 is normally housed, a predetermined effect (for example, a series of character effects) is continued, and 4 to 5 seconds after the effect using the projectile character 400 is executed. A delay period is set during this delay period, and execution of a series of performance effects can be delayed during this delay period. Alternatively, after the delay period has passed, the series of performances are resumed, and the granular member 320 is stored normally even after 5 seconds have passed since the performance using the projectile accessory 400 was executed (even after the delay period has passed). If not, it may be configured to change the production content of the series of role production to a production mode that does not use the shooting accessory 400.例文帳に追加Also, in this case, if it is determined that the granular member 320 is normally stored within 2 seconds after the performance using the projectile accessory 400 is executed, the shortened storage state is set, and the specific performance is maintained for a predetermined period (projection It may be configured to be executed for a period of four seconds after the performance using the role object 400 is executed.

By configuring in this way, different effects can be executed according to the length of the period from the execution of the effect using the projectile accessory 400 to the normal storage of the granular member 320. It is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the game early.

As described above, in the first to fourth control examples described above, the specific area (probability variable switch 65e3) provided in the variable winning device 65 during the jackpot game executed when the jackpot is won in the special symbol lottery. The pachinko machine 10 configured to set the high probability state (probability variable state) of the special symbol after the end of the jackpot game by passing is explained, but in this way, the privilege game that is advantageous to the player As a configuration that can provide the player with a special game different from the privilege game based on the fact that the ball has passed through the specific area while When a small win is won, a second privilege game (small win game) different from the privilege game (jackpot game) can be executed, and a variable ball entry means (variable prize winning device) opened during the second privilege game. 65, or other prize-winning devices may be separately provided), a specific area through which a ball can pass is provided, and when the ball passes through the specific area during the second bonus game, the second bonus is given. You may use the structure which can perform a privilege game (jackpot game) after the game (small hit game) is completed.

In each of the above control examples, whenever the value (N) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d in the main controller 110 is updated (that is, each time it increases or decreases), the reserved ball number command is transmitted from the main controller 110 to the audio lamp controller 113, but it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, only when the value (N) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203 d in the main controller 110 increases, the main controller 110 transmits the reserved number command to the sound lamp controller 113 . Further, the voice lamp control device 113 is configured to decrease the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223b by one when receiving the variation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110 . As a result, the number of times master controller 110 transmits a hold number command to audible lamp controller 113 and the number of times audible lamp controller 113 receives a hold number command can be reduced. The control load of the audio ramp control device 113 can be reduced.

In each of the control examples described above, it is configured such that winning through the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640 is suspended up to four times, and passage through the through gate 67 is suspended up to four times. The number of held balls is not limited to this, and may be set to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). In addition, the number of pending balls in the variable display based on the winning to the first ball entrance 64 is displayed numerically in a part of the third pattern display device 81, or the area divided into four is displayed by the number of pending balls. It may be displayed in a different manner (for example, color or lighting pattern), and a light-emitting member such as a lamp is provided separately from the first pattern display device 37, and the number of reserved balls is notified by the light-emitting member. can be configured to

Further, as shown in each of the above control examples, the variable display, which is a type of dynamic display, is not limited to vertically scrolling the pattern as identification information on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81. The pattern may be moved and displayed in the vertical direction or along a predetermined path such as an L-shape. Further, the dynamic display of the identification information is not limited to the variable display of the pattern. It also includes the production display etc. In this case, one or more characters are used as the third symbol. Further, it is difficult for the player to distinguish between the display mode of the dynamic display of the third symbol for indicating the lottery result of the special symbol and the display mode of the dynamic display of the decorative symbol for indicating the lottery result of the normal symbol. For example, each display mode may be set using common image data possessed by the display control device 114 .

In each control example described above, the third symbol display for showing the lottery result of each symbol to the player is executed by one display means (third symbol display device 81), but other configurations may be used. For example, among the third symbols, different display means may be provided for displaying the main symbol to be displayed in an emphasized manner to the player and for displaying the sub-symbols. Also, as the configuration of the display means, a configuration other than the liquid crystal display may be used.

In each control example described above, the target area (game area) of the game board 13 is configured to be different according to the game state, but the game state (time saving) that is advantageous to the player is not limited to this. state) and a game state (normal state) that is more disadvantageous to the player than the time-saving state, a left-handed game aiming at the left area of the game board 13 may be executed. . Also, a left-handed game may be executed during the time-saving state, and a right-handed game may be executed during the normal state.

In each of the control examples described above, the frame button 22 is used as the operating means that can be operated by the player. may be used, and an operation means configured in a lever shape that can determine whether the player has operated it by tilting it left or right or front and back, or can determine whether it has been operated by the player touching or approaching it. A touch sensor type operating means, or a wireless operating means that can determine that an operation has been performed by transmitting a predetermined radio wave, or the like may be used. In addition, the frame button 22 is electrically connected to the sound lamp control device 113, and the frame button 22 is used to change the performance mode of the performance executed by the pachinko machine 10 based on the player's operation. However, it is only necessary to be able to change the effect mode of various effects executed by the pachinko machine 10 based on the player's operation of the frame button 22. For example, the frame button 22 is displayed. It may be electrically connected to the control device 114, or an output signal from the operation means (the frame button 22) can be input, and the display control device 114, the sound lamp control device 113, the sound output device 226, the lamp display A controller capable of generating an effect setting signal that can be output to the device 227 may be provided. By configuring in this way, even when a plurality of operation means for effect are provided, the output signals (operation signals) output from the operation means for effect can be centrally managed. It is possible to smoothly set the effect mode for the player's operation of the means.

The present invention may be applied to a pachinko machine of a type different from the control examples described above. For example, once the jackpot hits, the expected value of the jackpot is increased until the jackpot state occurs multiple times (for example, 2 times, 3 times) including the pachinko machine (commonly known as 2 times rights product, 3 times rights product) may be implemented as Further, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game in which a predetermined game value is given to the player under the condition that the ball enters a predetermined area after the big winning pattern is displayed. Also, a pachinko machine having a prize winning device having a special area such as a V-zone and entering a special game state as a necessary condition for winning a ball in the special area may be implemented. In addition, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine in which a plurality of combinations of probabilities (commonly referred to as settings) relating to the jackpot lottery are provided, and the settings can be changed on the gaming parlor side. Furthermore, in addition to pachinko machines, various game machines such as arepachi, mammoth, slot machines, and so-called game machines in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are combined may be implemented.

In addition, as a pachinko machine with multiple stages of settings, the combination of jackpot probability (a combination of the jackpot probability in the low probability state and the jackpot probability in the variable probability state) can be set in multiple stages (for example, 6 stages) can be set as a representative example, but is not limited to this. In place of or in addition to combinations of jackpot probabilities, for example, a pachinko machine capable of varying the ratio of each jackpot pattern (each jackpot type) determined in the event of a jackpot according to settings. may That is, depending on the setting, the rate at which a jackpot type advantageous to the player is determined may be varied, or the rate at which a jackpot type disadvantageous to the player is determined may be varied. More specifically, for example, the ratio of determining the jackpot with a large number of rounds (eg, 16 rounds) is varied according to the setting, or the jackpot with a small number of rounds (eg, 2 rounds) is determined. A configuration may be adopted in which the degree of advantage for each setting can be varied by varying the ratio of each setting according to the setting. In addition, for example, the ratio of determining the jackpot with a large number of times of time reduction (for example, 100 times) after the end of the jackpot is varied according to the setting, or the jackpot with a small number of times of time reduction (for example, 0 times) may be varied according to the setting. Furthermore, after the end of the jackpot, the rate at which the jackpot that transitions to (or easily transitions to) an advantageous game state (eg, variable probability state) is determined can be changed according to settings, or a disadvantageous game state (eg, normal state) can be set. ) (or easily shifted) may be changed according to the setting. Moreover, it is good also as a structure which provides a big-hit classification in which the ratio determined only by specific setting increases significantly (almost never determined by other settings). Specifically, for example, six settings from 1 to 6 can be set, and setting 6 is the most advantageous setting. In setting 6, when a jackpot is won, a jackpot of 6 rounds is determined at a rate of 2%, while in other settings, a jackpot of 6 rounds is determined only at a rate of 0.01%. may be configured. By constructing in this way, when the big win ends in 6 rounds, the possibility that the setting is the most advantageous setting 6 is extremely high, so that the player is made to play the game paying attention to the number of rounds of the big win. be able to. Alternatively or in addition, for example, in setting 6, the ratio of the jackpot type in which 66 times of time saving is given after the jackpot ends may be higher than other settings. By configuring in this way, it is possible to play a game while paying attention to the number of times the time saving state ends. Alternatively, or in addition to these, for example, a jackpot type in which the jackpot (or accessories inside the jackpot, etc.) operates in an operation pattern different from other jackpot types during the execution of the jackpot game. It may be configured such that the jackpot type is easily determined by a specific setting (the rate of determination is increased). In addition, in the case of varying the combination of the probability of a big win according to the setting, in the low probability state, the higher the probability of the big win, the more advantageous the setting is for the player, while in the variable probability state, the setting is disadvantageous to the player. It is good also as a structure which makes a jackpot probability high as it is. This configuration is particularly of the type in which, in the variable probability state, it is easier to increase the number of balls held as the number of special symbol lotteries increases (the number of prize balls paid out tends to be greater than the number of game balls fired). Effective in game machines. More specifically, for example, it is a configuration that continues until the next big hit is won in the variable probability state, and by applying it to a game machine of a type that becomes a small hit with a high probability in the variable probability state, the high setting advantage You can increase your sexuality. That is, if the probability of winning a big win in the variable probability state is low, the number of lottery times until the next big win tends to increase, so the chances of getting a small win and winning balls also increase. Therefore, when the probability variable state occurs, it becomes easier for the player to win more prize balls until the next big win, which is advantageous for the player.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 10 that can be set in multiple stages, the type of the variation pattern selection table 202b that is referred to when selecting the variation pattern by the main controller 110 based on the set value that has been set It is made different, the type of the variation pattern selection table 222a referred to when selecting the variation pattern (variation effect) of the third symbol in the sound lamp control device 113 is different, or the detailed effect executed as the variation effect It is preferable to configure so that the types of various selection tables referred to when selecting a mode are made different. By configuring in this way, it is possible to predict the setting value set in the pachinko machine 10 according to the content of the variable performance to be executed, so that the variable performance that the player is interested in is executed. be able to.

In addition, when the data table referred to when selecting the effect mode of the operation effect is changed based on the setting value set in the pachinko machine 10, the set setting is used as the effect mode of the operation effect. The effect mode of "suggest setting" for suggesting a value is defined so that the selection ratio is the same in each data table used for each setting value, and the effect mode of "suggest setting" is executed. It is preferable to configure the content of the operation presentation to be different according to each set value, and to vary the selection ratio of other presentation modes according to the set value. By configuring in this way, when the operation effect of "setting suggestion" directly suggesting the setting value is executed, the content of the effect is displayed, and when the other operation effect is executed, each effect mode is displayed. Since it is possible to predict the setting value set in the pachinko machine 10 by comprehensively grasping the selection ratio of the pachinko machine 10, the player is interested in various operation effects to be executed. be able to.

Furthermore, as described above, since the selection ratio of each effect mode in the operation effect is configured to vary according to the set game state, In a pachinko machine 10 in which set values can be set in six stages up to setting "6" which is advantageous to a player, the first game is set to the settings "1" to "3" and is advantageous to the player. The selection ratio of the operation effect selected when the state (variable probability state) is set, the setting "4" to "6" are set, and the second game state is more disadvantageous to the player than the first game state The pachinko machine 10 having setting values disadvantageous to the player is played by making the selection ratio of the operation presentation to be selected when the 2-game state (time-saving state) is set to be the same. The player can be made to think that the setting value that is advantageous to the player is set.

In addition, as in the first control example described above, when the first game state (probability variable state) is set, and when the second game state (time saving state) is set, the same production mode By setting the "chance mode", when using a configuration that makes it difficult for the player to grasp the currently set game state, the above-mentioned effect can be made more remarkable. . Further, as in the above-described first control example, in the pachinko machine 10 in which the second game state is set after the first game state is completed, it is determined whether or not the first game state has actually been set. By making it difficult, a more remarkable effect can be achieved.

In this way, the setting value set in the pachinko machine 10 and other game situations (lottery result of jackpot, set game state, selected variation pattern (variation time)) By configuring the selection ratio to be variable, it is possible to prevent the setting values set in the pachinko machine 10 from being easily discriminated by the player.

In slot machines, for example, when a coin is inserted to determine a valid symbol line, the symbol is changed by operating an operation lever, and the symbol is stopped and fixed by operating a stop button. It is. Therefore, the basic concept of a slot machine is "provided with a display device that confirms and displays identification information after variably displaying an identification information string consisting of a plurality of pieces of identification information, The variable display of the identification information is started, and the variable display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the operation means for stopping (for example, a stop button) or after a predetermined period of time has passed, and the stop is displayed. It is a slot machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value under the condition that the combination of time identification information is a specific one. In this case, the game medium is represented by coins, medals, etc. Examples include:

Further, as a specific example of a game machine that combines a pachinko machine and a slot machine, it is equipped with a display device for displaying a symbol sequence consisting of a plurality of symbols in a variable manner and then confirming and displaying the symbols, and is equipped with a ball launching handle. There are things that are not. In this case, after throwing a predetermined amount of balls based on a predetermined operation (button operation), for example, the pattern starts to change due to the operation of the control lever, for example, due to the operation of the stop button, or a predetermined As time elapses, the fluctuation of the symbols is stopped, and a special game is generated in which a predetermined game value is given to the player under the condition that the determined symbols at the time of the stop are so-called jackpot symbols, and the player is given a special game. A lot of balls are paid out to the tray at the bottom. If such a game machine is used instead of a slot machine, only the balls can be treated as game value in the game hall. It is possible to solve the problems such as the burden on the equipment due to the separate handling of the medals and the balls and the restrictions on the installation location of the game machine.

All or part of the above-described embodiments and control examples may be combined.

In the following, concepts of various inventions included in the above-described embodiments in addition to the game machine of the present invention are shown.

<Production incorporating randomness>
A game machine comprising: an action means; a displacement means configured to be displaceable by receiving action from the action means; A1.

Among game machines such as pachinko machines, there is a game machine that is displaceably arranged on the front side of the liquid crystal display area and includes displacement means that is displaced according to the driving of a driving device such as a motor (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2016-153095). ). However, in the above-described conventional game machine, there is a problem that the operation pattern of the displacement means is poor, and the performance on the front side of the liquid crystal display area becomes monotonous, and the attention of the player gradually decreases.

On the other hand, according to the game machine A1, the displacement of the displacement means can be made complicated by the function of the auxiliary means of making the displacement mode of the displacement means into a plurality of modes. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored, and to keep the player's attention at a high level.

A specific example of the auxiliary means is not limited at all. For example, it may be a box-shaped space forming means that forms a space in which the displacement means can be displaced, or a driving device different from the acting means may be used to displace and push the displacement means, thereby changing the displacement mode of the displacement means. Any means is fine. Further, the driving device for the pushing means may also be used as the driving device for driving the action means.

In the gaming machine A1, the action means can be configured to have a first state in which a first action portion can act on the displacement means, and a second state in which a second action portion can act on the displacement means. A gaming machine A2 characterized by:

According to the game machine A2, in addition to the effects of the game machine A1, it is possible to change the part when the action means acts on the displacement means. The means can be displaced differently.

In the gaming machine A1 or A2, the action means comprises contact means for contacting and applying a load to the displacement means, and is configured to be capable of generating loads in a plurality of modes via the contact means. A gaming machine A3 characterized by:

According to the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A1 or A2, there are multiple types of load modes generated via the abutting means, so that multiple types of displacement modes of the displacement means can be provided.

In the game machine A3, the abutment means includes a first abutment portion configured to be displaceable and configured to abut against the displacement means, and a first abutment portion configured to be abuttable to the displacement means. and a second contact portion different from the portion, and the angle between the displacement direction of the contact means and the first contact portion (or the tangential line of the first contact portion) when viewed in a predetermined direction is A game machine A4, characterized in that the angle between the displacement direction of the abutment means and the second abutment portion (or a tangent to the second abutment portion) is different from the angle when viewed in the predetermined direction.

According to the game machine A4, in addition to the effects of the game machine A3, the direction of the load applied to the displacement means can be varied without changing the displacement direction of the contact means. can be generated in the direction of

In the gaming machine A4, the contact means is configured such that tangent lines drawn to the first contact portion and the second contact portion and parallel to each other are orthogonal to the displacement direction of the contact means. A gaming machine A5 characterized by:

According to the game machine A5, in addition to the effects of the game machine A4, a load can be applied to the displacement means in a direction parallel to the plane along the displacement direction of the contact means, so that the displacement means can be displaced with little energy loss. can be made Thereby, a large amount of displacement of the displacement means can be ensured.

In any one of the game machines A1 to A5, load generating means configured to generate a load for displacing the action means is provided, and the load generating means generates the load at a position where the displacing means are densely arranged. A game machine A6 characterized in that it is configured to generate

According to the game machine A6, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines A1 to A5, the load can be efficiently transmitted to the displacement means.

In any one of the game machines A1 to A6, the action means is supported in a support manner that allows a change in posture, and the change in posture occurs on the side of the displacement means that facilitates maintaining a balance of arrangement with respect to the action means. A gaming machine A7 characterized by:

According to the game machine A7, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines A1 to A6, it is possible to maintain the balance of the arrangement of the displacement means by changing the posture of the action means. can be avoided from occurring.

In addition, the cause of the attitude change of the action means is not limited at all. For example, it may be caused by balancing the load from the displacement means, or a drive device may be provided to change the posture of the action means. When the attitude of the action means is caused to change by balancing the load from the displacement means, the attitude of the action means can be easily changed by providing a plurality of lengths from the portion facing the displacement means to the support position of the action means. can be produced in multiple types.

In any one of the game machines A1 to A7, the auxiliary means includes guide means configured to be able to guide displacement of the displacement means, and the guide means can guide displacement of the displacement means in one direction. and a second guide portion capable of guiding displacement of the displacement means in another direction, wherein the first guide portion and the second guide portion face the displacement means. A game machine A8 characterized in that the formation mode of is different.

According to the game machine A8, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines A1 to A7, the displacement mode of the displacement means can be varied according to the displacement direction of the displacement means.

In any one of the game machines A1 to A8, the action means is configured to be displaceable, configured to change the easiness of keeping the balance of the displacement means depending on its arrangement, and the position where the balance of the displacement means is easy to keep. A gaming machine A9 characterized by being constructed so as to be able to act on the displacement means.

According to the gaming machine A9, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines A1 to A8, it is possible to easily maintain the balance of the displacement means with respect to the action means.

A game machine A10 in any one of the game machines A1 to A9, wherein the displacement means comprises one or more members, which are configured so as not to be coupled with each other.

According to the game machine A10, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines A1 to A9, when the displacement means is composed of a plurality of members, it is possible to prevent the plurality of members from joining together to form a lump. Therefore, it is possible to easily realize a configuration in which a plurality of members scatter.

A gaming machine A11 characterized in that in the gaming machine A10, the center of gravity of the one or more members is arranged at a position different from the center of the member.

According to the gaming machine A11, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A10, it is possible to stabilize the attitude of the displacement means when the displacement means is arranged in the action means.

Note that the method of forming the center of gravity is not limited at all. For example, a method of partially changing the density of the member or a method of partially forming holes in the member may be used.

<Change due to advancing/retreating means moving forward/backward within the displacement range of the displacement means>
Arranging means configured to be arranged in a predetermined range, and advance/retreat means configured to be displaceable in a forward/retreat direction with respect to the range, the advancing/retreating means moving into a predetermined portion of the range, A game machine B1 is characterized by being configured to be able to change the width of the width of the game machine B1 so that the width can be changed in a plurality of ways.

A gaming machine such as a pachinko machine comprising a first movable member that displaces to the left and right, and a second movable member that enters a range generated between the first movable members as the first movable member displaces. There is (for example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-231434). However, in the above-described conventional game machine, there is only one type of displacement when the second movable member enters the range, and there is room for improvement in the displacement of the second movable member.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine B1, since the advance/retreat means is configured with a plurality of types of change modes of the width of the range when entering the range, it is possible to configure with a plurality of types of displacement modes of the placement means, and the placement means can can be improved.

In addition, the mode of the arrangement means is not limited at all. For example, it may be a granular performance member made of a resin material, a powdery member, a liquid, or a game ball.

In addition, the method of configuring a plurality of types of change modes of the width of the range due to the displacement of the advance/retreat means is not limited at all. For example, the entrance side portion of the advancing/retreating means may be formed with an inclined surface, and the width of the range may be changed by providing a portion with a different width to enter the range, or the displacement width of the advancing/retreating means may be changed to change the range. may be made variable.

In the gaming machine B1, the range is formed inside a box-shaped means configured to prevent entry and exit of the placement means, and is configured to be changeable, and the advancing/retreating means enters the range in a non-changing state. The game machine B2 is characterized in that the box-shaped means has an opening through which the advance/retreat means can be inserted and the arrangement means cannot be inserted.

According to the game machine B2, in addition to the effects of the game machine B1, the advance/retreat means can enter the range through the opening portion, while the arrangement means can be prevented from falling out of the range.

In addition, the arrangement of the open portion is not limited at all. For example, it may be placed in a location that is difficult for the placement means to reach. In this case, it is possible to further reduce the possibility that the arranging means will fall out of the range by mistake. Also, the open portion may be arranged at a location where the load from the arrangement means is less likely to occur (for example, the upper side opposite to the direction of gravity). In this case, it is possible to prevent a load from the arranging means from being applied to the advancing/retreating means during displacement, hindering the displacement of the advancing/retreating means, or causing damage to the advancing/retreating means or the arranging means.

A gaming machine B3 characterized in that, in the gaming machine B1 or B2, the advance/retreat means is configured such that the direction of guiding the placement means is different corresponding to the direction of contact with the placement means.

According to the gaming machine B3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine B1 or B2, it is possible to make it appear to the player that the arrangement means are guided in different directions by the same advancing/retreating means. As a result, it is possible to increase the number of types of presentations, thereby improving the presentation effect of presentations using the arrangement means and the advance/retreat means.

In any one of the game machines B1 to B3, the advance/retreat means is configured such that when it enters the range, the gap between it and the facing surface of the range becomes shorter than the width of the arrangement means. A gaming machine B4 characterized by:

According to the game machine B4, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines B1 to B3, even if the arrangement means is arranged on the far side from the advance/retreat means, the advance/retreat means can be moved to the arrangement means in the entered state. can work.

In addition, it is also possible to configure so that there is no gap between the advance/retreat means and the facing surface of the range. Also, it may be configured such that there is a gap in one part and no gap in the other part.

In any one of the game machines B1 to B4, the advance/retreat means is configured to enter the range by rotational displacement about a predetermined axis, and at the tip on the entry side, the representative tip farthest from the axis is the A gaming machine B5 characterized in that it is configured so that the gap between the range and the range is the shortest.

According to the game machine B5, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines B1 to B4, the representative tip portion, which is most likely to be displaced from the axis, enters the range first, thereby reducing the distance from the axis. Misalignment can be addressed early, and the resistance of the subsequent entry motion can be reduced.

In the game machine B5, the representative tip portion is provided with a predetermined projecting portion, and is formed so as to be inclined away from the range as the distance from the projecting portion along the axial direction increases. Game machine B6 to play.

According to the game machine B6, in addition to the effects of the game machine B5, the arrangement means can be displaced away from the predetermined projecting portion in the process of entering the advance/retreat means.

In the gaming machine B6, the advancing/retreating means has a shape in which the range side is opened at a position away from the projecting portion in the axial direction.

According to the game machine B7, in addition to the effects of the game machine B6, the shape of the advance/retreat means is a shape in which the range side is opened at a position away from the overhanging part, so that the arrangement means pushed away by the overhanging part can be secured.

Various modes are exemplified as the shape in which the range side is open. For example, it may have a shape in which the range side is opened before the advance/retreat means enters, or a shape in which the range side is opened in a state in which the advance/retreat means has entered.

In any one of the game machines B5 to B7, it comprises a drive means capable of generating a driving force, and a transmission means capable of transmitting the driving force of the driving means to the advance/retreat means, wherein the transmission means and the advance/retreat means means that a driving force is transmitted by abutment, and the contact area of the abutment surface between the transmission means and the advancing/retreating means is configured to be variable, and the contact area varies depending on whether the advancing/retreating means enters the range. A gaming machine B8 characterized in that it is configured so that it becomes maximum at the beginning and then decreases.

According to the game machine B8, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines B5 to B7, the contact area is maximized at the initial stage of entry when a large load is likely to occur due to the advance and retreat means starting to contact the arrangement means. By doing so, the load per unit area of the contact surface can be reduced.
As a result, the durability of the advance/retreat means and the transmission means can be improved.

In addition, the mode of the advance/retreat means is not limited at all. For example, means for displacing outside the game area or means for displacing inside the game area may be used.

<Synchronize two members with a transmission cam>
driving means; displacement means configured to be displaceable and composed of one or more members; and transmission means configured to be capable of transmitting the driving force of the driving means to the displacement means, wherein the transmission means In a first aspect, a first transmission portion configured to be capable of transmitting the driving force of the driving means to a first target portion of the displacement means; and in a second aspect, different from the first aspect, the displacement means. A gaming machine C1 comprising a second transmission section configured to be capable of transmitting the driving force of the driving means to the second target section.

A driving device used for displacing displacement means in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, comprising a first driving device for vertically displacing the displacing means and a second driving device for rotationally displacing the displacing means. There is a game machine (see, for example, JP-A-2016-202210). However, in the above-described conventional game machine, even if the first driving device and the second driving device are synchronized to displace a plurality of displacement means in order to execute the motion presentation of the displacement means, the driving timing is shifted. There is a problem that the possibility cannot be excluded and the displacement of the displacement means tends to be unstable.

On the other hand, according to the game machine C1, the transmission means is provided with the first transmission portion and the second transmission portion, and the driving force is transmitted to the first target portion or the second target portion of the displacement means, respectively. With this configuration, the transmission of the driving force to the first target portion and the second target portion can be automatically synchronized, and the displacement of the displacement means can be stabilized.

In addition, the timing at which the driving force is transmitted is not limited at all. For example, the driving force may be transmitted to the first target portion and the second target portion at the same time, the driving force may be transmitted at different times, or a combination thereof (partially simultaneous transmission) may be used.

Further, when the driving force is transmitted to the first target portion and the second target portion at the same time, it is preferable that the direction in which at least part of the driving force is generated is along the direction of gravity. As a result, its own weight can be used for driving force transmission.

In the game machine C1, the game machine C2 is characterized in that the transmission of the driving force to the first target part and the transmission of the driving force to the second target part occur at different times.

According to the gaming machine C2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine C1, the driving force required for the driving means can be suppressed by keeping the maximum value of the driving resistance low.

Here, the term "driving force transmission" may refer to a load in the direction of travel in which the transmission means is displaced by the driving force. Also good.

In the game machine C1 or C2, the displacement means includes a first member having the first target portion and a second member having the second target portion, and the displacement trajectory of the first member and the second member The first member is configured to partially intersect with the displacement trajectory of, the first member is configured to be able to contact the second member in a predetermined arrangement, and in the contacting state, the A gaming machine C3 characterized by being configured to be able to transmit a driving force to the second member.

According to the game machine C3, in addition to the effects of the game machine C1 or C2, it is possible to configure a plurality of types of states in which the driving force is transmitted to the displacement means. In other words, it is possible to configure a case where the driving force is directly transmitted from the transmission means to the second member and a case where the driving force is indirectly transmitted through the first member.

In the gaming machine C3, the gaming machine C4 is characterized in that, in a state in which the first member is displaced toward the predetermined arrangement, the second member is configured to be retractable to a position where it does not come into contact with the first member. .

According to the game machine C4, in addition to the effects of the game machine C3, it is possible to avoid contact between the displacing first member and the second member. As a result, the contact between the second member and the first member occurs when the first member reaches the predetermined position and stops, so that the mode of driving force transmission to the second member can be switched smoothly. can be facilitated.

A game machine C5 characterized in that, in the game machine C3 or C4, the state of the first member is associated with the arrangement of the transmission means.

According to the game machine C5, in addition to the effects of the game machine C3 or C4, the switching of the transmission mode of the driving force can be performed by changing the arrangement of the transmission means, so that the displacement of the first member and the second member can be stabilized. and avoid unintended collision or contact of each member.

In any one of the gaming machines C3 to C5, an urging means configured to urge the second member in a predetermined direction is provided, and the driving force is transmitted to the second member in a direction opposing the urging force. The game machine C6 is characterized in that the first member is arranged on the predetermined direction side with respect to the second member in the predetermined arrangement.

According to the game machine C6, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines C3 to C5, the first member is arranged in a predetermined manner while the second member is arranged on the opposite side of the first member in a predetermined direction. can be done. Thereby, it is possible to form the timing for displacing the second member against the biasing force and the timing for stopping the second member against the biasing force as the transmission means is displaced.

In the game machine C6, the game machine C7 is characterized in that the first member is displaced toward the predetermined arrangement while the first transmission portion of the transmission means is displaced in the predetermined direction. .

According to the gaming machine C7, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine C6, part of the load necessary for displacing the first member can be generated by the biasing force of the biasing means. That is, the urging force can be used in an auxiliary manner.

In any one of game machines C3 to C7, the second transmission section is capable of forming a non-contact state in which the second member is not in contact, and in the non-contact state, the second member displaces. A gaming machine C8 characterized in that the second member is configured so that the second transmission section does not interfere with the.

According to the game machine C8, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines C3 to C7, the displacement state of the second member includes a displacement state of being pushed by the second transmission section and a displacement state of being separated from the second transmission section. and can be configured.

In any one of game machines C3 to C8, a straight line extending in parallel with the predetermined direction from a point of contact between the first member arranged in the predetermined manner and the transmission means controls the displacement of the transmission means in a predetermined manner. A game machine C9 characterized by passing through a regulating part that regulates.

According to the gaming machine C9, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines C3 to C8, the urging force transmitted to the transmission means via the first member is cut off by the restricting section, so that the drive means can be reached. can be prevented (to a lesser degree).

In addition, the aspect of a regulation part is not limited at all. For example, it may be a guide portion that limits the displacement mode to sliding displacement by restricting the displacement, or a shaft support portion that limits the displacement to rotational displacement.

In any one of the game machines C1 to C9, the first target portion of the displacement means receives the driving force of the drive means and is displaced or stopped, and receives the load from the second target portion. A gaming machine C10 characterized in that it is configured to be able to change its state between a second state in which it is displaced or stopped.

According to the game machine C10, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines C1 to C9, the displacement mode of the first target part can be complicated.

<By limiting the generation of load when the user is away from the vehicle, load transmission is cut off>
A game machine comprising a drive means, a displacement means configured to be displaceable, and a transmission means configured to transmit the driving force of the drive means to the displacement means, the contact contacting the displacement means and a non-contact state in which the displacement means is not in contact with the displacement means. A gaming machine D1 characterized by:

In a game machine such as a pachinko machine, there is provided a game machine in which displacement means composed of one movable body displaced by the driving force of a drive means contacts another movable body at a displacement end position (upper end position) and receives a load. There is (for example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-028623). However, in the above-described conventional game machine, there is a risk that a load from another movable body may be transmitted to the driving means via the displacement means, and the state of the driving means (for example, the rotation angle of the motor) and the There is room for improvement from the standpoint of stabilizing the drive state, since there is a possibility that the actual state of the drive means may differ.

Moreover, it is conceivable that the operating resistance of the driving means may increase or decrease unstably due to the load applied to the driving means, accelerating the deterioration of the driving means.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine D1, since the load transmission in the contact state can be suppressed, the driving state of the driving means can be stabilized. In addition, by suppressing unstable increases and decreases in the operating resistance of the driving means, the durability of the driving means can be improved.

Note that the method of suppressing load transmission in the contact state is not limited at all. For example, a member capable of absorbing the load may be interposed at the contact portion, and the displacement of the first means that causes the load (for example, the first means receiving an external force) may cause the first means to It may be configured so that it occurs only in the non-contact state.

In the game machine D1, the load received by the displacement means from the first means and the driving force received by the displacement means via the transmission means face the same side.

According to the gaming machine D2, the load received by the displacement means can be reduced compared to the case where the load from the first means and the driving force are directed to opposite sides.

The game machine D1 or D2 is provided with an arrangement means arranged to collide with the first means, and the collision of the arrangement means occurs when the transmission means and the displacement means are not in contact with each other. A gaming machine D3 characterized by:

According to the gaming machine D3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine D1 or D2, the collision of the arranging means occurs when the transmission means and the displacement means are not in contact with each other. can be blocked.

Incidentally, the collision of the arranging means may occur in the contact state of the first means, or may occur in the non-contact state. If the locating means collides in a non-contact state, load transmission between the first means and the displacing means can be interrupted. ), load transmission to the driving means can be suppressed.

In any one of the game machines D1 to D3, the transmission means includes a contact portion configured to be able to contact the displacement means, and the contact portion bends in the direction of the load caused by the contact ( A gaming machine D4 characterized by being flexibly constructed to such an extent that it can be deformed.

According to the game machine D4, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines D1 to D3, the load is absorbed by the bending (deformation) of the contact portion, thereby suppressing the load transmission between the displacement means and the transmission means. can do.

In any one of the game machines D1 to D4, the first means and the displacement means are provided with a second abutment portion configured to be able to abut against the second contact portion of at least one of the first means and the displacement means. The gaming machine D5, wherein the abutting portion is made of a material capable of absorbing impact.

According to the game machine D5, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines D1 to D4, the second contact portion can absorb the impact, so that the load transmission to the driving means can be suppressed.

In any one of the game machines D1 to D5, a biasing means for biasing the displacement means is provided, and a standby position of the displacement means is set at an end of a displacement range in the biasing direction of the biasing means. A game machine D6.

According to the game machine D6, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines D1 to D5, it is possible to avoid deviation of the standby position of the displacement means (the position where the load is generated from the transmission means). It is easy to arrange the stop position (high-speed rotation start position) of the transmission means in an appropriate position for controlling the transmission means to operate at high speed until the position where the 1 means and the displacement means are separated from each other. This makes it possible to easily and appropriately control the driving means.

In addition, by reducing the degree of freedom in the arrangement of the first means and the displacement means, it is possible to avoid accidental contact between the first means and the displacement means.

In any one of game machines D3 to D6, the game machine D7 is characterized in that the first means permits a change in posture due to a collision of the arrangement means.

According to the game machine D7, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines D3 to D6, the load from the arrangement means can be used for the change in the posture of the first means, so the load transmission to the drive means is suppressed. be able to.

In the game machine D6 or D7, the first means and the displacement means are in contact with each other, and the transmission means and the displacement means are not in contact with each other, so that the first means exerts the biasing force of the biasing means. a receiving biasing state, wherein the transmission means abuts against the displacement means and displaces the displacement means in a direction opposite to the direction of the biasing force of the biasing means; A gaming machine D8 characterized in that the game machine D8 is capable of changing states between an ineffective contact state in which transmission to means is disabled and a non-contact state in which said first means and said displacement means are separated from each other.

According to the game machine D8, in addition to the effects of the game machine D6 or D7, it is possible to configure a plurality of types of states of the first means (for example, the degree of ease with which the placement means changes its posture with respect to collision).

<Conditionally regulate one of forward and reverse rotation>
Displacement means configured to be displaceable along a path including a predetermined position is provided, and the displacement means is configured to be displaceable from the predetermined position to a reference position serving as a reference point for changing the displacement mode. A gaming machine E1 characterized in that it is constructed so as to be displaceable to the predetermined position in the manner of .

2. Description of the Related Art Among gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there are gaming machines that control the same movable accessory to perform different actions in a plurality of effects (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-73517). However, in the above-described conventional game machine, different actions correspond to the presence or absence of switching of the driving direction of the driving device. Since the player can predict about, there is a problem that there is room for improvement from the viewpoint of improving the interest of the player.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine E1, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to discriminate the performance to be executed from now on by the discriminating means. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the player.

In addition, the displacement mode of the displacement means is not limited at all. For example, the winning effect and the losing effect may be different effects involving displacement of the displacement means. In this case, if there is only one way of displacing the displacing means to a predetermined position, it will be known whether or not it is correct by the displacement from the predetermined position (for example, the generation of driving sound). On the other hand, by providing a plurality of displacement modes, it is possible to make it difficult to determine whether the displacement is correct or not even if displacement occurs (for example, driving sound occurs).

Moreover, the mode of displacement is not limited at all. For example, it may be a path, a displacement speed, or a displacement speed pattern.

The game machine E1 comprises driving means for generating a driving force for displacing the displacement means, and regulation means for regulating the displacement of the displacement means. A gaming machine E2, characterized in that the displacement of the displacement means can be regulated in a non-operating state.

According to the gaming machine E2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine E1, the driving sound of the driving means can be eliminated when the displacement means is restricted. It is possible to make it difficult to determine whether the direction is reverse.

Further, unlike the case where the driving means continues to generate driving force when performing a long performance (Long Reach, etc.) with the displacement of the displacement means restricted, it is possible to suppress heat generation by the driving means.

A gaming machine E3 in the gaming machine E1 or E2, wherein the restricting means is displaced to a position where it can act on the displacing means by the driving force of the driving means.

According to the gaming machine E3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine E1 or E2, the number of driving means can be reduced compared to the case where the driving means for driving the restricting means is provided separately.

In any one of the game machines E1 to E3, the game machine is characterized by comprising a discrimination participating means configured to have a section that makes it difficult to discriminate in which form among the plurality of types of modes the displacement is made. E4.

According to the gaming machine E4, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines E1 to E3, the determination participating means can be configured to make it difficult to determine the displacement mode of the displacement means in a predetermined section. Compared to the case where it is difficult to determine the displacement mode only in the case where it is difficult to determine the displacement mode, it is possible to facilitate the continuation of the displacement of the displacement means while it is difficult to determine the displacement mode.

A gaming machine E5 characterized in that, in the gaming machine E4, the arrangement of the displacement means can be maintained in the section.

According to the gaming machine E5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine E4, it is possible to switch the driving direction of the driving means while maintaining the displacement means. As a result, it is possible to prevent the type of displacement mode of the displacement means from being detected from the driving sound. Therefore, for example, it is possible to perform drive control such as starting the driving of the driving means before notification of acceptance or rejection.

Any one of the game machines E1 to E5 is provided with detection means capable of detecting the position of the displacement means, and the detection means determines switching of executable displacement among the displacements in the plurality of types of displacement modes. A game machine E6, which is also used as a determination means.

According to the game machine E6, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines E1 to E5, the sensor for detecting the position of the displacement means and the sensor for judging the switching of the displacement mode can be used together. It is possible to reduce the number of devices to be arranged.

<Sense of unity of multiple members>
A gaming machine configured such that a first member and a second member are displaceable, wherein the manner in which the first member and the second member approach each other is different between the first member and the second member. A game machine F1 characterized by being configured as follows.

In a game machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a game machine in which the first member and the second member configured to be displaceable are controlled to be vertically displaced while maintaining a close state (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-231434). ). However, in the above-described conventional game machine, the first member and the second member are displaced on the same straight line, so depending on the approaching speed, the first member and the second member may return after contact. Yes, it can look bad. In other words, there is a problem that there is room for improvement from the viewpoint of maintaining the effect mode regardless of the displacement speed.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine F1, the manner in which the first member and the second member approach each other is made different. For example, the displacement mode of the first member and the second member is not made to approach on the same straight line, but after approaching on another straight line, the direction is changed and the first member and the second member approach each other. It is possible to avoid reversal and make it easier to maintain the presentation mode.

In the gaming machine F1, the displacement of the first member and the second member is divided into at least a first section for approaching each other and a second section as a preparatory section for coming into contact with each other. The game machine F2 is characterized in that the second member is configured such that the attitudes of the first section and the second section are different.

According to the gaming machine F2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine F1, the postures of the first member and the second member can be changed according to the purpose of displacement.

A gaming machine F3 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine F1 or F2, it comprises a load generating means capable of generating a load directed to the side maintaining the close arrangement of the first member and the second member.

According to the gaming machine F3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine F1 or F2, the arrangement of the first member and the second member can be maintained by the load generating means.

It should be noted that the load generated by the load generating means is not limited to a load in a fixed direction or a load of a fixed magnitude. For example, if the load that is likely to be received (eg, a performance mode that generates an external force) changes depending on the situation (eg, game state), the direction and magnitude of the load generated by the load generating means may be changed accordingly.

Moreover, the load generated by the load generating means does not need to be generated all the time. For example, it may be possible to switch between load generation and load cancellation in accordance with the above-described change in the situation. Incidentally, the load generating means may be external.

In the game machine F3, displacement generating means is configured to displace at least one of the first member and the second member, and a predetermined state can be configured by the displacement, and the load generating means is configured to displace the displacement. A game machine F4 characterized in that it is configured integrally with a generating means.

According to the gaming machine F4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine F3, it is possible to appropriately maintain the relationship between the load generation timing by the load generating means and the arrangement of the first member and the second member. It is possible to prevent the load from occurring at

Also, the action of the load generating means and the action of the displacement generating means can complement each other. For example, the load of the load generating means can be used to assist the displacement of the first member or the second member caused by the displacement generating means.

In the game machine F4, the predetermined state is a contact state in which at least part of the first member contacts the second member.

According to the game machine F5, in addition to the effects of the game machine F4, it is possible to facilitate the execution of the mode of filling the gap between the first member and the second member.

In the game machine F4 or F5, the game machine F6 is characterized in that the load generating means is configured to generate a load in the predetermined state.

According to the game machine F6, in addition to the effects of the game machine F4 or F5, it is possible to prevent the load of the load generating means from affecting the first member and the second member even in states other than the predetermined state.

The game machine F7 is characterized in that, in any one of the game machines F3 to F6, the load generating means is configured to generate loads at a plurality of locations on the first member or the second member.

According to the game machine F7, in any one of the game machines F3 to F6, since the load generating means generates a load on the first member or the second member at a plurality of locations, it is possible not only to maintain the state against displacement in one direction, but also to It is also possible to maintain the state of the first member or the second member against changes in posture. Thereby, even when the first member and the second member are configured three-dimensionally, it is possible to avoid conspicuous displacement of the arrangement.

In the game machine F7, the first member or the second member includes a plurality of loaded portions that receive a load from the load generating means, and the plurality of loaded portions are the first loaded portion and the first loaded portion. and a second loaded portion having a larger displacement amount with respect to the load generating means than the loaded portion, wherein the load generating means applies the load to the first loaded portion before the second loaded portion. A gaming machine F8 characterized by:

According to the gaming machine F8, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine F7, the load from the load generating means can be applied to the first member or the second member in stages. Also, the role of the load applied to the first load receiving portion and the second load receiving portion can be divided. For example, it is possible to use the first load receiving part for positioning at a predetermined position and the second load receiving part for posture adjustment.

In any one of the game machines F3 to F8, the load generating means may be such that the portion that applies the load directed to the side facing gravity to the first member or the second member is greater than the other portions. Alternatively, the gaming machine F9 is characterized in that the facing surface facing the second member has a long facing length.

According to the game machine F9, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines F3 to F8, it is possible to easily cope with the sagging due to the weight of the first member or the second member. On the other hand, for other portions, the facing surface facing the first member or the second member can be formed short, so that the degree of freedom in designing the load generating means can be improved and the facing surface can be easily hidden.

A game machine F10 characterized in that, in any one of the game machines F3 to F9, the assembly of the first member and the second member is possible in a state in which the first member and the second member are separated. .

According to the game machine F10, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines F3 to F9, it is possible to easily avoid cracking or chipping of the first member or the second member due to the load caused by the assembly work. That is, compared to the case where the assembling work is performed in the abutting state, it is easier to avoid the occurrence of load transmission between the first member and the second member, so that the first member and the second member can be assembled without damage. can.

As a result, it is possible to provide the contact surfaces as designed on the first member and the second member, thereby preventing a situation in which the load generated by the load generating means, such as when there is a gap, is likely to cause misalignment. can do.

<Construction of multiple types of wobble states of the displacement means>
A gaming machine G0 comprising displacement means and action means for displacing the displacement means, wherein the action means is configured to suppress a change in posture of the displacement means in a predetermined direction.

Among gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there are gaming machines that are provided with displacement means configured to enable displacement constituted by arrangement change and rotation (see, for example, Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2016-116782). However, in the above-described conventional game machine, although the portion supporting the displacement means disposed at the tip of the arm is formed to have a large diameter, it is necessary to provide a gap in order to ensure the displacement, so that the posture of the displacement means is limited. There is a problem that the countermeasure against the change is not sufficient and there is room for improvement from the viewpoint of suppressing the change in the posture of the displacement means.

On the other hand, according to the game machine G0, it is possible to suppress the posture change of the displacement means by the configuration of the action means. Accordingly, even if the space in which the displacement of the displacement means is allowed is narrow, it is possible to easily avoid collision between the wall member forming the space and the displacement means.

It should be noted that the direction in which the displacement means changes its posture is not limited at all. For example, it may be tilted about a straight line along the lateral direction (horizontal direction, etc.), or may be swung laterally about a straight line along the vertical direction (vertical direction, etc.).

In the game machine G0, the action means is configured to be able to increase or decrease the action force for suppressing the posture change of the displacement means in accordance with the arrangement position of the displacement means.

According to the game machine G1, in addition to the effects of the game machine G0, it is possible to change the degree of suppression of the posture change of the displacement means according to the arrangement of the displacement means. As a result, the arrangement space of the displacement means can be narrowed while maintaining a high degree of freedom in performance of the displacement means.

For example, when the displacement means is reciprocatingly displaced, the attitude of the displacement means tends to collapse at the displacement end where the displacement direction is switched. By increasing it, it is possible to suppress the collapse of the posture of the displacement means.

Further, for example, even when the displacement means itself is enlarged, reduced, or rotated by the driving force mounted on the displacement means, the attitude of the displacement means tends to be easily lost. By increasing the acting force generating positions in , it is possible to suppress the collapse of the posture of the displacement means.

In game machine G0 or G1, game machine G2 is characterized in that said action means is configured to support said displacement means with a plurality of main support means arranged on a horizontal plane passing through the center of gravity of said displacement means.

According to the game machine G2, in addition to the effects of the game machine G0 or G1, the action means supports the displacement means by a plurality of main support means on the horizontal plane at the position of the center of gravity of the displacement means, thereby preventing the displacement means from tilting. can be made easier.

In the game machine G2, the action means includes auxiliary support means for supporting the displacement means at a position different from the horizontal plane on which the main support means is arranged.

According to the game machine G3, in addition to the effects of the game machine G2, the main support means and the auxiliary support means support the displacement means at three or more support points that are not arranged on a straight line, so that the displacement means Attitude change can be suppressed in all directions.

In the game machine G3, the auxiliary support means also functions as guide means for guiding the displacement of the displacement means with respect to the action means.

According to the game machine G4, in addition to the effects of the game machine G3, the auxiliary support means can be added not only as a supporting force generating position but also as a position for guiding displacement.

In the gaming machine G1, the displacement means can be displaced in such a manner that its area when viewed in a predetermined direction increases or decreases, and the action means is configured such that the acting force generation position is maximized at the end position of displacement of the displacement means. A gaming machine G5 characterized by:

According to the game machine G5, in addition to the effects of the game machine G1, it is possible to generate acting forces on the displacement means at a plurality of points at the displacement end position where the effect of increasing the area of the displacement means is most effective. , the change in posture of the displacing means can be effectively suppressed.

Furthermore, by relatively reducing the acting force generating positions during the displacement of the displacement means, the displacement resistance of the displacement means can be reduced and the displacement can be smoothed. That is, during the displacement of the displacement means, it is easy to maintain the posture due to the inertia associated with the displacement. Therefore, if the acting force generation position is increased recklessly, the acting force becomes excessive and the displacement resistance of the displacement means rises. , the problem that the driving device becomes large is assumed.

On the other hand, by reducing the acting force generation positions at positions other than the displacement end position, it is possible to avoid the displacement resistance of the displacement means from becoming excessive and to avoid an increase in the size of the driving device.

<Wiring Guide for Propeller Unit>
Displacement means, electric wiring connected to the displacement means, and electric wiring displacement means configured to be capable of displacing a predetermined portion of the electric wiring, wherein the electric wiring displacement means is such that the displacement means is the predetermined portion. The game machine H1 is characterized in that the predetermined portion can be displaced to the side avoiding the displacing means when the game machine H1 is displaced to the side approaching the .

In game machines such as pachinko machines, there is a game machine in which electrical wiring connected to the displacement means is aligned with a long member interlocking with the displacement means to limit the arrangement of the electrical wiring (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-157474). (see Gazette). However, in the above-described conventional game machine, in order to avoid contact between the displacement means and the electric wiring, it is difficult to configure the displacement means to continue to displace beyond the electric wiring. Since a space is required for arranging the electrical wiring on the outside, there is a problem that the degree of freedom in arranging the displacing means is low.

On the other hand, according to the game machine H1, the electric wire displacing means can displace a predetermined portion of the electric wiring to the side avoiding the displacing means. so that the displacement means can be arranged to displace over the electrical wiring. Therefore, it is possible to increase the degree of freedom in arranging the displacement means.

It should be noted that the case where the displacement means approaches the predetermined portion is not limited at all. For example, if the predetermined portion is stopped, there is a danger of contact between the displacement means and the predetermined portion, or the distance between the predetermined portion and the displacement means is shorter than the reference length.

In the gaming machine H1, the displacement means is configured to be displaceable in at least a first direction and a second direction, and the predetermined portion is displaceable in a third direction orthogonal to the first direction and the second direction. A gaming machine H2 characterized by comprising:

According to the game machine H2, in addition to the effects of the game machine H1, it is possible to avoid the electric wiring from restricting the amount of displacement of the displacement means in the predetermined plane defined by the first direction and the second direction.

In the game machine H2, the game machine H3 is characterized in that the first direction and the second direction are directions parallel to a plane orthogonal to a predetermined direction view.

According to the game machine H3, in addition to the effects of the game machine H2, the displacement direction of the predetermined portion can be set along the predetermined direction view. It is possible to reduce the effect on appearance.

In any one of the game machines H1 to H3, it comprises a stopping means for stopping a second predetermined portion of the electrical wiring arranged on the opposite side of the displacing means with respect to the predetermined portion, wherein the electrical wiring displacing means A gaming machine H4 characterized in that the second predetermined portion is configured to be easily displaceable with respect to the stopping means.

According to the game machine H4, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines H1 to H3, the durability of the second predetermined portion of the electrical wiring arranged in the stopping means can be improved.

In addition, the configuration in which the second predetermined portion is easily displaced with respect to the stopping means is not limited at all. For example, when the second predetermined portion is spirally arranged in the retaining means, the second predetermined portion may be pushed in along the tangential direction of the outer peripheral portion of the spiral, or the second predetermined portion may be attached to the movable member. When guided, the second predetermined portion or the movable member may be pushed so as to displace the movable member.

In the game machine H4, the game machine H5 is characterized in that the stopping means is arranged outside the displacement end of the displacement means in the first direction.

According to the game machine H5, in addition to the effects of the game machine H4, the stopping means is arranged outside the displacement terminal of the displacement means in the first direction, so that the stopping means is projected to the plane side where the displacement means is displaced. can be configured As a result, it is possible to increase the storage capacity of the electric wiring of the stopping means, so that the amount of displacement of the displacement means that compensates for the separation from the stopping means by the second predetermined portion can be increased.

In any one of the game machines H1 to H5, the electrical wiring displacing means is integrated with the displacing means, and includes correspondence changing means for changing the arrangement of the electrical wiring displacing means in accordance with the arrangement of the displacing means. A gaming machine H6 characterized by:

According to the game machine H6, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines H1 to H5, the correspondence changing means can appropriately manage the relative arrangement between the electric wiring and the displacement means.

<Flow path of sphere with electric tube>
It comprises a game area and a flow-down means for causing the game balls discharged from the game area to flow down, and the flow-down means has a section configured so that the game balls discharged from the game area can be visually recognized. gaming machine I0 to play.

2. Description of the Related Art Among gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there are gaming machines in which a base plate forming a game area is made of a plywood board (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-80178). However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, when the game ball discharged from the game area flows to the back side of the base plate, it is hidden by the base plate, and the player cannot see the game ball. Therefore, the player is likely to lose sight of the game ball, and if the player does not pay attention to the ejection timing, the player may get the impression that the game ball suddenly disappears from the game area.

Also, even if you pay attention to the ejection timing, in recent pachinko machines, the winning hole and the out hole are often arranged close to each other, and even though the ball actually entered the out hole, the ball did not reach the winning hole. There is a possibility that it may be mistaken for the one that entered the ball. In this case, there is a possibility that players will feel distrustful of the fact that no prize balls are paid out. In other words, the conventional game machine has a problem that there is room for improvement in discharging the game balls from the game area.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine I0, since the flowing-down means is configured to have a section in which the game balls discharged from the game area can be visually recognized, the player can visually observe the game balls flowing down in the section. By doing so, it is possible to confirm how the game balls are arranged from the game area. As a result, ejection of game balls from the game area can be improved.

It should be noted that the discharge of the game ball from the game area means the overall manner in which the game ball is discharged from the game area. For example, the balls may be discharged through a prize ball opening, or may be discharged through an outlet without prize balls.

In the gaming machine I0, the game ball that has flowed down in the game area is disposed so as to pass through, and the game ball is provided with a profit giving means configured to give a predetermined profit to the player based on the passage of the game ball. The means comprises a first constituent part configured to be able to guide a game ball toward the profit imparting means above the profit imparting means, and a first constituent part disposed downstream of the first constituent part. A gaming machine I1 characterized by comprising a second component configured to be able to guide a game ball to a side away from the profit giving means above the giving means.

According to the game machine I1, in addition to the effects of the game machine I0, the player can grasp how the game ball is discharged from the game area by visually recognizing the game ball flowing down the flowing-down means. It is possible to avoid the game ball from approaching the profit giving means on the lower side. As a result, the game balls already discharged from the game area and the game balls still flowing down the game area can be clearly distinguished in the vicinity of the profit imparting means, so that the player can comfortably play the game. We can try to make it possible.

Note that the predetermined profit is not limited at all. For example, it may be a payout of prize balls, a lottery of symbols such as a first symbol or a second symbol, or other profit.

The game machine I0 or I1 includes attention means formed inside the game area, and frame means arranged in a frame shape around the attention means, and the flow-down means is the frame when viewed from the front. A game machine I2 characterized by being constructed so as to cause game balls to flow down to the inner side of means.

According to the game machine I2, in addition to the effects of the game machine I0 or I1, the flow-down means can cause the game balls discharged from the game area to enter the field of view of the player who pays attention to the attention means. As a result, even in a situation where the player is paying attention to the attention means, it is possible to let the player know that the game ball has been ejected from the game area.

Note that the attention means is not limited at all, and various aspects are exemplified. For example, it may be a light guide plate (illumination plate), a liquid crystal display means for changing and displaying a pattern, a movable accessory configured to be displaceable by a driving means such as a motor, or a light emitting means such as an LED. good.

The game machine I3 is characterized in that in the game machine I2, the flow-down means comprises deceleration means for decelerating the game ball on the inner side of the attention means.

According to the gaming machine I3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine I2, it is possible to lengthen the period in which the game ball stays in the field of view of the player who pays attention to the attention means.

<Ingenuity around the board surface design part and light guide plate>
A predetermined substrate provided with a light emitting means, and an arranged means arranged in front of at least a part of the predetermined substrate when viewed from a predetermined direction, wherein the predetermined substrate has an area visually recognized when viewed from the predetermined direction of A gaming machine J0 characterized in that it is arranged so as to be smaller than an area where the light emitted from the light emitting means is visible.

In a game machine such as a pachinko machine, an illumination board having light emitting means such as LEDs is arranged on the back side of a base plate having a game area on the front side, and the plate surface of the illumination board and the plate surface of the base plate are arranged. There is a gaming machine in which are arranged substantially parallel (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2006-333887). However, in the above-described conventional game machine, since the area of the decorative board that is visually recognized when viewed from the front is large, when the decorative member arranged on the front side of the decorative board is irradiated with the LED light, the field of view of the decorative board is covered with electric lights. There is a possibility that the decorative board may enter and be visually recognized as if the decorative member and the decorative board are overlapped in the front and back.

On the surface of the decorative board, only functionally necessary components such as circuits and resistors are arranged, and usually the board does not have a high degree of design. Therefore, when the decorative member and the decorative board are visually superimposed in the front and rear, the appearance is poor, and there is a possibility that the interest of the player is lowered. In other words, in the conventional gaming machine, there is room for improvement in the presentation effect of the predetermined board.

On the other hand, according to the game machine J0, the predetermined substrate is arranged so that the area of the predetermined substrate that is visually recognized when viewed from the predetermined direction is smaller than the area of the irradiated light. A region in which only light can be visually recognized can be configured without overlapping with the substrate. As a result, it is possible to improve the rendering effect of the predetermined substrate.

In addition, the arrangement of the predetermined substrate is not limited at all. For example, the visible area may be reduced by partially hiding, or the visible area may be eliminated by completely shielding.

Incidentally, the optical axis of the light emitted from the light emitting means arranged on the predetermined substrate can be arbitrarily set. For example, the optical axis may be directed in the thickness direction of the predetermined substrate, the optical axis may be directed in the direction perpendicular to the thickness direction of the predetermined substrate, or the optical axis may be directed at an angle between them. Anything that can be done is fine.

The optical transparency of the arranging means is not limited at all. For example, it may be configured to have good light transmittance, may be configured to have low transmittance, or may have a different degree of light transmittance for each portion.

In the gaming machine J0, the arranged means includes a plurality of direction changing means arranged on both surface sides of the predetermined substrate for changing the traveling direction of the light emitted from the light emitting means. and a low transmission means having a lower light transmittance than the direction changing means is provided, and when viewed from a predetermined direction, at least a part of the predetermined substrate is arranged inside the low transmission means. Gaming machine J1.

According to the gaming machine J1, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine J0, the predetermined substrate can be hidden by the low transmission means. Thereby, the range in which the predetermined substrate is visible can be narrowed.

In addition, the direction changing means is not limited at all, and various aspects are exemplified. For example, it may be a light guide plate or an illumination plate, a movable accessory that can be displaced by a driving device, a game area or flow path where game balls flow down, a case member or a decorative member that is fixedly arranged. But it's okay.

A gaming machine J2 characterized in that, in the gaming machine J1, the low-transmittance means is at least part of a shape portion forming a shape of a predetermined pattern or figure.

According to the game machine J2, in addition to the effects of the game machine J1, the low-transmittance means can be blended into the shape of a predetermined pattern or figure, so that it is possible to avoid making the player feel uncomfortable.

Note that the shape of the predetermined pattern or figure is not limited at all. For example, it may be a frame-shaped frame such as a window frame, a frame connecting the shaft of a rotating body such as a tire and the rotating outer peripheral portion, or a series of meanings and contents composed of arbitrary character strings and patterns. It may be part of the design to be expressed (for example, a title logo).

A gaming machine J3 characterized in that, in any one of the gaming machines J0 to J2, the predetermined board is arranged with the end face of the board facing the predetermined direction.

According to the gaming machine J3, it is possible to minimize the area of the predetermined substrate when viewed in a predetermined direction.

The gaming machine J3 includes display means for executing display effects that can be visually recognized when viewed from a predetermined direction, and a game area arranged in front of the display means. A game machine J4 characterized in that it is arranged at a boundary with a game area when viewed from a predetermined direction.

According to the gaming machine J4, the predetermined board is arranged at the boundary, so that the light is emitted from the back of the game area to the front side, unlike the case where the light effect is performed as a whole, only the display area side from the predetermined board. It is possible to execute an effect of irradiating light on the side of the game area or an effect of irradiating light only on the game area side.

A gaming machine J5 characterized in that, in the gaming machine J4, the predetermined substrate is fixedly arranged on a gaming board forming the gaming area on the front side.

According to the game machine J5, since the predetermined board is fixedly arranged on the game board, the arrangement of the light-emitting means is smaller than in the case where the board is fixedly arranged on the inner surface of the back case where the movable accessories and the like are arranged. degree of freedom can be improved.

In addition, since the electric wiring for supplying electricity to the light emitting means can be guided along the back surface of the game board to the outside of the back case, even if the back case side is visible through the window of the game board, Also, since it is impossible to see the back side of the game board without looking around with a particularly wide field of view, it is possible to easily prevent the electric wiring from being seen by the player.

Furthermore, when the liquid crystal display device is arranged in the center of the rear case, the space for arranging the predetermined substrate is limited to the outside of the liquid crystal display device. If so, the predetermined substrate can be arranged at an arbitrary position without being restricted by the size of the liquid crystal display device. Therefore, it is possible to improve the degree of freedom in arranging the predetermined substrate.

<Locking member to prevent misalignment of accessories during shipment>
Displacement means and limitation means capable of limiting the displacement of the displacement means are provided, and the limitation means has a first state that can act on the displacement means and a second state that cannot act on the displacement means. A gaming machine K1 characterized in that it is configured to be able to change its state in the first state, and is configured to suppress the movement of the displacement means in a predetermined direction in the first state.

2. Description of the Related Art Among game machines such as pachinko machines, there is a game machine provided with a movable accessory (displacement means) that is displaced downward from a standby position to the front of a liquid crystal display area (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-231434). However, the above-described conventional game machine has a problem that there is room for improvement in terms of fixing and releasing the displacing means.

That is, while the game machine is configured so as to be able to operate normally after being installed, it is difficult to fix movable accessories even in a situation where a large vibration or external force may be applied to the game machine such as during shipping. Not configured to work.

Therefore, as a countermeasure for fixing the movable accessory at the time of shipment, the displacement of the movable accessory is suppressed by stuffing cushioning materials in the range where the movable accessory is displaced, and the cushioning material is removed after arriving at the game hall. However, if the opening in the center of the game board is closed, the cushioning material cannot be easily removed, and the burden on the game hall may be increased.

On the other hand, according to the game machine K1, by changing the state of the restricting means, the restriction on the displacement of the displacing means can be released, so that the displacing means can be fixed and released satisfactorily.

On the other hand, unlike the case where the cushioning material is pulled out, the limiting means is not pulled out, so it is difficult to continue the game if an external force that may occur during the game causes a change in state easily. On the other hand, by configuring the restricting means to suppress unintended state changes in the first state, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of troubles during the game.

In the gaming machine K1, the gaming machine K2 is characterized in that the limiting means is configured to be able to change between the first state and the second state when the power is not supplied.

According to the gaming machine K2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine K1, the state change of the limiting means can be caused when the gaming machine is not energized, so that the occurrence of malfunction of the limiting means can be suppressed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the worker's work from becoming difficult in the state of power failure and in the restoration work from the state of power failure.

In the game machine K1 or K2, an urging means for urging an operation portion of the restriction means in a predetermined direction is provided, and the restriction means displaces the operation portion by a predetermined amount from a reference position to the opposite side of the predetermined direction. The operating portion is displaceable away from the reference position in the predetermined direction by an urging force of the urging means, and in the second state, the operating portion is displaceable from the reference position in the predetermined direction. A game machine K3 characterized in that it is arranged at a spaced position away from.

According to the gaming machine K3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine K1 or K2, since the operation unit is arranged at the spaced position away from the reference position in the second state, opening and closing of the door, etc., are provided to the gaming machine after installation. It is possible to avoid the occurrence of a predetermined amount of displacement required for the state change of the limiter due to an external force that may be applied, and it is possible to easily prevent the state of the limiter from changing from the second state.

A game machine K4 characterized in that, in any one of the game machines K1 to K3, the operating portion of the limiting means is arranged outside the region forming means forming the region in which the displacement means can be displaced.

According to the game machine K4, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines K1 to K3, since the operation section is arranged outside the area forming means, even if the displacement means is displaced due to the operation of the operation means, Contact of the displacement means with the operator can be avoided.

In any one of game machines K1 to K4, biasing means for biasing the operation portion of the restriction means in a predetermined direction is provided, and the restriction means moves the operation portion from a reference position to the opposite side of the predetermined direction by a predetermined amount. The restricting means includes guiding means for guiding displacement of the operating portion in the predetermined direction, and the guiding means is configured to change the state along with the displacement. A gaming machine K5 characterized in that it is configured to ensure an allowable displacement width (orientation change width) of the part.

According to the game machine K5, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines K1 to K4, the operation means can be displaced in a direction intersecting with the predetermined direction. When an unknown load is applied, it is possible to easily prevent displacement in a predetermined direction, and it is possible to easily prevent the operation portion from being displaced by a predetermined amount. As a result, it is possible to prevent the state of the restricting means from changing due to an unintended external force caused by opening or closing the door.

In the gaming machine K5, the operating section includes an engaging section configured to be engageable with the guiding means, the biasing means is arranged at the center of the operating section, and the engaging section is connected to the operating section. A game machine K6 characterized in that it is arranged at a position away from the center of the part.

According to the gaming machine K6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine K5, even if an external force of unknown direction is applied to the limiting means in the first state of the limiting means, the operating portion is displaced about the engaging portion as a fulcrum. It is possible to prevent the occurrence of a predetermined amount of displacement required for the state change, which is limited to (posture change). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the state of the limiting means from changing from the first state to the second state due to external forces such as opening and closing of the door, vibrations during shipping, and the like.

In the gaming machine K6, the restricting means is disposed on the back side of the area configuring means configured to be rotatable on the support shaft on the left and right side, and the engaging portion is disposed on the opposite side of the support shaft. A gaming machine K7 characterized by:

According to the gaming machine K7, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine K6, the state of the restricting means can be easily changed by pushing the engaging portion of the restricting means. It is possible to facilitate the operation when operating the control means. That is, when the front door is opened, the engaging portion is arranged on the side where the opening width is large (opposite side of the support shaft), so that the operating position of the restricting means can be further forward.

A gaming machine K8 characterized in that, in the gaming machine K7, the limiting means is arranged on the support shaft side of the area configuring means.

According to the gaming machine K8, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine K7, the restricting means is arranged on the support shaft side, so that the operator who opens the front door for work is prevented from accidentally touching the restricting means. can do.

In addition, the load applied to the restricting means when the front door is opened and closed can be reduced compared to when the restricting means is arranged on the opposite side of the support shaft. change can be prevented.

A gaming machine K9 characterized in that, in any one of the gaming machines K1 to K8, the displacement means guides the displacement of the limiting means in the first state.

According to the gaming machine K9, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines K1 to K8, the displacement guidance accuracy when the restriction means acts on the displacement means in a state where the displacement guidance accuracy of the restriction means alone is reduced is can be improved.

A gaming machine K10 characterized in that any one of the gaming machines K1 to K9 is provided with prevention notification means for notifying to prevent continuation of the energized state when energized in the first state.

According to the game machine K10, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines K1 to K9, the prevention notification means can notify to switch the state of the restriction means from the first state.

In addition, the mode of notification is not limited at all. For example, the error display may be notified by displaying it on a liquid crystal display device, or by outputting a notification sound from a speaker, or by illuminating a predetermined lighting means (or keeping it off). You can notify us by

<Regarding the concept of the invention with the substrate boxes A100, A2100, A3100, and A4100 as examples>
A gaming machine comprising a container for containing an object, comprising an operation means disposed on the object and formed to be operable, and an opening formed in the container at a position corresponding to the operation means. A gaming machine L0 characterized by:

2. Description of the Related Art A game machine having a substrate box (accommodating body) that accommodates a control substrate (object) is known (Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2015-205029). The board box is sealed to prevent tampering with the control board.

However, in the above-described conventional game machine, when the operating means is provided on the control board, it is necessary to open the board box in order to operate the operating means. Therefore, there was a problem that it took time and effort.

According to the game machine L0, the operation means arranged on the object and formed to be operable is provided, and the container has an opening at a position corresponding to the operation means, so that the operation means can be operated through the opening. can be manipulated. That is, it is unnecessary to open the container when operating the operating means.
Therefore, labor can be suppressed.

<Regarding the Concept of the Invention Taking the Board Boxes A100 and A2100 (Coating Parts A270 and A2270) as Examples>
In the gaming machine L0, the operation means has a first surface facing the opening of the container, and the container has a facing portion facing the first surface of the operation means. M1.

According to the game machine M1, in addition to the effects of the game machine L0, the operation means has the first surface facing the opening of the container, and the container has the facing portion facing the first surface of the operation means. Therefore, since the area of the opening can be made smaller by the facing portion, it is possible to suppress insertion of a foreign object such as a wire into the container through the opening.

In the gaming machine M1, the operating means is operated by inserting and displacing an operator, and the opposing portion is at least a range of the first surface of the operating means excluding the displacement trajectory of the operator. A gaming machine M2 characterized in that it is arranged facing a part of it.

According to the game machine M2, in addition to the effects of the game machine M1, the facing portion is arranged to face at least a part of the range excluding the displacement trajectory of the manipulator in the first surface of the manipulator. In addition, the area of the opening can be made smaller by the opposing portion while suppressing the insertion of the operating element into the operating means and the displacement of the inserted operating element. Insertion can be suppressed.

In the game machine M1 or M2, the game machine M3 is characterized in that the facing portion is formed in a plate shape with a fixed base end and a free end.

According to the game machine M3, in addition to the effects of the game machine M1 or M2, the facing portion is formed in a plate shape with a fixed base end and a free end, so that the shape is simplified and moldability is improved. can be secured. As a result, the yield can be improved and the product cost can be reduced.

A game machine M4 characterized in that, in the game machine M3, a projection is provided in the facing portion.

According to the gaming machine M4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine M3, the opposing portion is provided with a projecting portion, so that the rigidity of the opposing portion can be increased and damage thereof can be suppressed.

In addition, the protrusion may be formed as a ridge extending in a streak shape.

In the game machine M4, the game machine M5 is characterized in that the projecting portion projects from a surface of the facing portion facing the first surface of the operating means.

According to the game machine M5, in addition to the effects of the game machine M4, the protrusion is provided so as to protrude from the surface of the opposing portion facing the first surface of the operation means, so that the first surface of the operation means and the opposing portion It is possible to suppress the insertion of a foreign object such as a wire into the inside of the container through the gap by reducing the gap between the surfaces.

A gaming machine M6, wherein the protrusion is brought into contact with the first surface of the operating means in the gaming machine M5.

According to the gaming machine M6, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine M5, the protrusion abuts against the first surface of the operation means, so that the contact portion and the first surface of the operation means are in contact with each other. It is possible to prevent a foreign object such as a wire from being inserted into the container by eliminating the gap between them.

Further, since the protrusion is in contact with the first surface of the operating means, even if the facing part is pushed by the operating element in the insertion direction when the operating element is inserted into the operating means, the facing part is pushed in the insertion direction. deformation can be suppressed. Therefore, it is possible to suppress damage to the base end side of the opposing portion.

In addition, since the opposing portion is formed in a plate-like shape with a fixed base end and a free end, elastic deformation of the opposing portion is used to form and maintain the state in which the protrusion is in contact ( That is, it is possible to increase the degree of close contact and suppress the insertion of a foreign object such as a wire.

A game machine M7 characterized in that, in any one of the game machines M3 to M5, the protrusion is formed as a ridge extending in a stripe shape.

According to the game machine M7, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines M3 to M5, the protrusion is formed as a ridge extending in a stripe shape, so that the rigidity of the facing part can be further increased. At the same time, it is possible to easily suppress insertion of a foreign object such as a wire into the container.

In any one of the game machines M1 to M7, the operation means is operated by being displaced by inserting an operation element, and the edge portion of the facing portion contacts the operation element inserted into the operation means. A gaming machine M8 characterized in that it is formed in such a way that:

Here, if the manipulator inserted into the operating means is tilted (for example, an operator carelessly manipulates the manipulator in the lateral direction or carelessly opens and closes the member in which the container is arranged) , and when the manipulator collides with another member and is pushed laterally, the manipulating means is also tilted, and the load on the base of the manipulating means (the part connected to the object) increases. In addition, when the displacement (for example, rotation) of the operator inserted into the operation means becomes excessive, the operation means is also displaced in the direction of the displacement, and the load on the base of the operation means (the part connected to the object) becomes large. Become. In these cases, there is a risk that the operating means will fall off from the object (for example, a connecting portion that connects the operating means and the object will break).

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine M8, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines M1 to M7, the opposing portion is formed such that the edge portion can abut against the operator inserted into the operating means. The manipulator (that is, the position farther from the fulcrum when the manipulator tilts) is brought into contact with the edge of the facing portion, thereby suppressing tilting and excessive displacement of the manipulator. As a result, tilting and excessive displacement of the operating means can be suppressed, and falling off of the operating means from the object can be suppressed.

A game machine M9 characterized in that, in any one of the game machines M1 to M8, the container includes a covering portion covering one end side of the operation means.

According to the game machine M9, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines M1 to M8, the containing body is provided with the covering portion covering one end side of the operating means, so that the gap between the operating means and the covering portion is eliminated. It can be bent. That is, it is possible to form a wall against which the tip of a foreign object such as a wire inserted through the opening abuts. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a foreign object such as a wire from being inserted into the container.

Here, in the case where the operating means is operated by inserting and displacing an operator, if the operator inserted into the operating means is tilted (for example, an operator carelessly When the operator is pushed laterally by colliding with another member by accidentally opening or closing the member in which the container is arranged, the operating means is also tilted, and the operating means is also tilted. The load on the base of the means (the part connected to the object) increases. In this case, there is a risk that the operating means will fall off from the object (for example, a connecting portion that connects the operating means and the object will break).

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine M9, since the covering portion covers one end side of the operating means, the operating means can be brought into contact with the inner surface of the covering portion, thereby suppressing the tilting of the operating means. As a result, it is possible to prevent the operating means from falling off from the object.

A game machine M10 characterized in that in the game machine M9, the outer shape of the base end side opposite to the one end side of the operating means is larger than the inner shape of the covering portion.

According to the game machine M10, in addition to the effects of the game machine M9, the outer shape of the operation means on the base end side opposite to the one end side is made larger than the inner shape of the cover, so that the operation means on the base end side and the covering portion can be curved. That is, it is possible to form a wall against which the tip of a foreign object such as a wire inserted through the opening abuts. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a foreign object such as a wire from being inserted into the container.

In the gaming machine M9 or M10, one of the covering portion and the operation means has a bulging portion formed by swelling, and the other of the covering portion and the operation means has a receiving portion for receiving the bulging portion. A gaming machine M11 characterized by comprising:

According to the gaming machine M11, in addition to the effects of either the gaming machine M9 or M10, one of the covering portion and the operation means has a bulging portion, and the other of the covering portion and the operation means Since the receiving portion is provided for receiving the bulging portion, the gap between the bulging portion and the receiving portion can be bent. That is, it is possible to form a wall against which the tip of a foreign object such as a wire inserted through the opening abuts. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a foreign object such as a wire from being inserted into the container.

A gaming machine M12 characterized in that, in the gaming machine M11, the bulging portion and the receiving portion are partially formed in the circumferential direction.

According to the gaming machine M12, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine M11, the bulging portion and the receiving portion are partially formed in the circumferential direction. Excessive displacement (in particular, displacement (rotation) in the circumferential direction) can be suppressed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the operating means from falling off from the object.

In any one of game machines M1 to M12, game machine M13 is characterized in that the container has an erected wall erected from the inner surface thereof and whose erected end abuts against the object.

According to the game machine M13, in addition to the effects of the game machines M1 to M12, the container is provided with an erected wall erected from the inner surface of the container, the erected tip of which contacts the object. It can function as a wall against which the tip of a foreign object such as a wire inserted through the opening abuts. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a foreign object such as a wire from being inserted into the container.

A gaming machine M14 characterized in that, in the gaming machine M13, the standing wall is formed in a form surrounding the operating means.

According to the game machine M14, in addition to the effects of the game machine M13, the erected wall is formed in a form surrounding the operation means, so that it is possible to block the path for entering the container. That is, even if a foreign object such as a wire is inserted through the opening, further insertion can be restricted. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a foreign object such as a wire from being inserted into the container.

In the game machine M13 or M14, the object is formed as a control board on which electronic parts are mounted, and the side on which the electronic parts are connected to the circuit of the control board by soldering is the side on which the operation means is arranged. is set on the opposite side of the gaming machine M15.

According to the game machine M15, in addition to the effects of the game machine M13 or M14, the object is formed as a control board on which electronic parts are mounted, and the surface of the control board for connecting the electronic parts to the circuit by soldering serves as the operation means. is set on the side opposite to the side on which the is arranged, so that the erected end of the erected wall can be easily brought into close contact with the object (control board), and the object (control board) and the erected wall It is possible to suppress the formation of a gap between Therefore, the erected wall can reliably function as a wall against which the tip of a foreign object such as a wire inserted through the opening abuts, thereby suppressing the insertion of the foreign object such as a wire into the container.

A gaming machine M16 characterized in that, in any one of the gaming machines M13 to M15, the erecting wall is formed in a plate shape, and the thickness dimension of the erecting tip is reduced.

According to the game machine M16, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines M13 to M15, the standing wall is formed in a plate shape and the thickness dimension of the tip of the standing wall is reduced, so that the wall is brought into contact with the object. In addition, it is possible to suppress the insertion of a foreign object such as a wire from between the object and the erected tip by increasing the surface pressure at the erected tip. As a result, it is possible to prevent a foreign object such as a wire from being inserted into the container.

A gaming machine M17 characterized in that, in the gaming machine M16, the erected tip of the erected wall has a tapered surface formed on the surface on the operation means side, thereby reducing the thickness dimension of the erected tip.

According to the gaming machine M17, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine M16, the thickness dimension of the standing tip of the standing wall is reduced by forming a tapered surface on the surface on the operating means side of the standing wall. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the insertion of a foreign matter such as a wire into the container while improving the moldability. That is, by forming the tapered surface, it is possible to moderate the shape change and ensure the fluidity of the resin in the mold. On the other hand, when the standing tip of the standing wall is brought into contact with the object, a groove can be formed by the tapered surface and the object. Therefore, the tip of a foreign object such as a wire inserted through the opening can be moved (guided) along the groove described above. That is, it can be made difficult to pass between the standing wall and the object.
As a result, it is possible to prevent a foreign object such as a wire from being inserted into the container.

In any one of the game machines M9 to M12, the container has one outer surface formed of a first region and a second region positioned closer to the object than the first region. A gaming machine M18 characterized in that the covering portion is protruded from two areas.

According to the game machine M18, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines M9 to M12, the container is one of the first region and the second region located closer to the object than the first region. Since the side outer surface is formed and the covering portion protrudes from the second region, the protruding height of the covering portion can be increased.
Therefore, the area in which the covering portion covers the operating means (the area that suppresses the insertion of a foreign object such as a wire, and the area that contacts the operating means to suppress tilting and displacement of the operating means) can be made larger. As a result, it is possible to prevent a foreign object such as a wire from being inserted into the container and to prevent the operating means from falling off from the object.

The gaming machine M19 is characterized in that, in any one of the gaming machines M9 to M12, the covering portion protrudes from the outer surface of the container, and the opening is formed on the projecting tip side of the covering portion.

According to the gaming machine M19, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines M9 to M12, the covering portion projects from the outer surface of the container, and an opening is formed on the projecting tip side of the covering portion, so that wires and the like can be removed. It is possible to make it difficult for the tip of a foreign object to reach the opening.

For example, when the opening cannot be visually recognized due to a shield, etc., and it is difficult to directly insert the tip of a foreign object such as a wire into the opening, the tip of the foreign object such as a wire is slid on the outer surface of the container to reach the opening. method is done. On the other hand, according to the gaming machine M19, when the tip of a foreign object such as a wire is slid on the outer surface of the container, the tip of the foreign object such as the wire is caused to hit the outer surface of the covering portion, progress can be stopped. In other words, the outer surface of the covering portion can be made to function as a wall that restricts the sliding of foreign objects such as wires. As a result, it is possible to prevent a foreign object such as a wire from being inserted into the container.

<Regarding the concept of the invention with the substrate box A100 (standing walls A280, A290) as an example>
In the gaming machine L0, the operating means is operated by inserting and displacing an operator, and the containing body is formed so as to be able to abut against the operating means or the outer surface of the operator. Game machine N1 to play.

Here, if the manipulator inserted into the operating means is tilted (for example, an operator carelessly manipulates the manipulator in the lateral direction or carelessly opens and closes the member in which the container is arranged) , and when the manipulator collides with another member and is pressed laterally), the manipulator is also displaced (tilted with respect to the object). In this case, there is a risk that the displaced (tilted) operation means will be damaged (for example, the connecting part that connects the operation means and the object will come off or break).

On the other hand, according to the game machine N1, in addition to the effects of the game machine L0, the container is formed so as to be able to come into contact with the outer surface of the operation means or the operation element, so that the operation means or the operation element can be placed in the container. It is possible to receive and suppress the displacement of the operating means. As a result, damage to the operating means can be suppressed.

In the game machine N1, the game machine N2 is characterized in that the containing body has an erected wall erected from the inner surface thereof and whose erected tip abuts against the object.

If the container receives the displaced (tilted) operating means, the container may be deformed and damaged.

On the other hand, according to the game machine N2, in addition to the effects of the game machine N1, the containing body is provided with an erected wall erected from the inner surface of the container and whose erected end contacts the object. serves as a support, and deformation of the container can be suppressed. As a result, damage to the container can be suppressed.

At the same time, the deformation of the container is suppressed by the support of the erected wall, so that tilting of the operation means can be suppressed more reliably. As a result, damage to the operating means can be easily suppressed.

The game machine N3 is characterized in that, in the game machine N2, the standing wall is formed in a form surrounding the operation means.

According to the game machine N3, in addition to the effects of the game machine N2, the erected wall is formed in a form surrounding the operation means, so that the erected wall is prevented from tilting in any direction of the operation means. As a support, deformation of the container can be suppressed. Therefore, breakage of the container can be suppressed.

In addition, the standing wall can block the path for entering the inside of the container. That is, even if a foreign object such as a wire is inserted through the opening, further insertion can be restricted. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a foreign object such as a wire from being inserted into the container.

In the game machine N3, the erected wall is connected to an inner surface different from the inner surface of the container on which the erected wall is erected.

According to the game machine N4, in addition to the effects of the game machine N3, the erected wall is connected to the inner surface of the container different from the inner surface of the container on which the erected wall is erected, so that the rigidity of the container is increased. can be used to increase the rigidity of the erected walls, and the connection between the inner surfaces can increase the rigidity of the entire container. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the function of the standing wall as a support portion (deformation suppressing means) for suppressing deformation of the container when the operation means is tilted. As a result, damage to the container can be suppressed.

A gaming machine N5 in any one of the gaming machines N1 to N4, wherein the containing body comprises a covering portion covering one end side of the operating means.

According to the game machine N5, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines N1 to N4, the containing body has a covering portion covering one end side of the operating means, so that the operating means is brought into contact with the inner surface of the covering portion. Therefore, tilting of the operation means can be suppressed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the operating means from falling off from the object.

Further, according to the gaming machine N5, the one end side of the operating means is covered with the covering part, so that the gap between the operating means and the covering part can be bent. That is, it is possible to form a wall against which the tip of a foreign object such as a wire inserted through the opening abuts. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a foreign object such as a wire from being inserted into the container.

In the gaming machine N5, the covering portion protrudes from the outer surface of the container, the container includes a ridge protruding from the outer surface and extending in a streak shape, and one end of the ridge extends from the outer surface of the container. A gaming machine N6, characterized by being connected to the cover.

According to the gaming machine N6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine N5, the covering portion protrudes from the outer surface of the housing body, and the housing body is provided with ridges that protrude from the outer surface and extend in a stripe shape. Since one end of the ridge is connected to the covering portion, the ridge functions as a rib and the covering portion can be supported by the ridge. Therefore, the operation means can be brought into contact with the inner surface of the covering portion, and tilting of the operation means can be suppressed, and breakage of the covering portion at that time can be suppressed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the operating means from falling off from the object.

In addition, since the covering portion protrudes from the outer surface of the container, the protruding height of the covering portion can be increased accordingly. Therefore, the area in which the covering portion covers the operating means (the area that suppresses the insertion of a foreign object such as a wire, and the area that contacts the operating means to suppress tilting and displacement of the operating means) can be made larger. As a result, it is possible to prevent a foreign object such as a wire from being inserted into the container and to prevent the operating means from falling off from the object.

In the game machine N6, the container has a display portion formed on its outer surface to display predetermined information, and the display portion is adjacent to the other end side of the protrusion.

According to the game machine N7, in addition to the effects of the game machine N6, the container has a display portion formed on its outer surface to display predetermined information, and the display portion is adjacent to the other end side of the protrusion. Therefore, the protrusion can also function as an indication line for indicating the position corresponding to the predetermined information displayed by the display unit. Therefore, the product cost can be reduced accordingly.

In the game machine N6 or N7, the operation means has a first surface facing the opening of the housing body, and the operation means is operated by inserting an operator into the first surface and displacing the housing body. A game characterized in that the body is provided with a facing portion facing the first surface of the operating means, and the facing portion is formed such that an edge portion can come into contact with the manipulator inserted into the operating means. Machine N8.

According to the game machine N8, in addition to the effects of the game machine N6 or N7, the operation means has a first surface facing the opening of the container, and the container has a facing portion facing the first surface of the operation means. Since the area of the opening can be made smaller by the facing portion, it is possible to suppress insertion of a foreign object such as a wire into the container through the opening.

In addition, since the edge of the opposing portion is formed so as to be able to abut against the operation element inserted into the operation means, the operation element (that is, the position farther from the fulcrum when the operation means tilts) can be brought into contact with the part to suppress tilting and excessive displacement of the manipulator. As a result, tilting and excessive displacement of the operating means can be suppressed, and falling off of the operating means from the object can be suppressed.

In the game machine N8, the facing portion is arranged to face at least part of a range of the first surface of the operation means excluding the displacement trajectory of the manipulator.

According to the gaming machine N9, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine N8, the opposing portion is arranged in at least a part of the range excluding the displacement trajectory of the operator in the first surface of the operator. The area of the opening can be made smaller by the opposing portion while suppressing interference with the insertion into the operation means and the displacement of the inserted operation element, so that a foreign object such as a wire can be inserted into the container through the opening. can be suppressed.

Also, by increasing the area of the facing portion that abuts the displaced manipulator, it is possible to easily suppress excessive displacement of the manipulator (in particular, displacement (rotation) in the circumferential direction). As a result, it is possible to suppress excessive displacement of the operating means and prevent the operating means from falling off from the object.

In the game machine N9, the operating means is formed to be able to displace the operator to a first position, and the position where one end of the protrusion is connected to the covering portion is displaced to the first position. A gaming machine N10 characterized in that the child and the facing portion are positioned at abutting positions.

In the game machine N9 or N10, the operation means is formed so as to be able to displace the operator to a second position different from the first position, and the position where one end of the protrusion is connected to the covering portion is the first position. A gaming machine N11 characterized in that the operating element displaced to position 2 and the facing portion are positioned to abut against each other.

According to the game machine N10 or N11, in addition to the effects of the game machine N9 or N10, the operation means is formed so that the operation element can be displaced between the first position and the second position, and one end of the protrusion is connected to the covering portion. is a position where the manipulator displaced to the first position or the second position and the facing portion abut against each other. The ridges can be used to effectively prevent the facing portion and the covering portion from being damaged when they come into contact with each other.

<Regarding the concept of the invention with the substrate boxes A100, A2100, A3100, A4100 (operation wall A210) as an example>
In the gaming machine L0, the container has one outer surface formed by a first region and a second region positioned closer to the object than the first region, and the opening is formed in the second region. is formed.

Here, since the operation means can be operated through the opening, it is unnecessary to open the container when operating the operation means. Therefore, labor can be suppressed. However, there is a risk that a foreign object such as a wire may be inserted through the opening.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine O1, the container has one outer surface formed of the first region and the second region positioned closer to the object than the first region. Since the opening is formed in the container, the opening can be arranged at a position recessed from the outer surface of the container, and a step (connection surface) connecting the first area and the second area can be arranged around the opening. As a result, the distance to the opening can be increased and the position of the opening can be made difficult to visually recognize. As a result, it is possible to prevent a foreign object such as a wire from being inserted into the container through the opening. That is, it is possible to suppress fraudulent activity.

In the gaming machine O1, at least part of a connecting surface connecting the first area and the second area is inclined downward from the first area toward the second area. O2.

Here, considering heat radiation from the object (control board), the container (board box) needs to secure a distance (internal space) between the object (control board) and the inner surface. On the other hand, if the opening is too far from the operating means, operability will deteriorate. Therefore, by forming the opening in the second region, it is possible to easily ensure the operability of the operating means, and to prevent foreign matter such as a wire from being inserted into the container through the opening as described above. . However, when operating the operating means, the operator's hand interferes with the step (connecting surface) between the first area and the second area, which interferes with the operation. Therefore, there is a possibility that the operability of operating the operating means may deteriorate.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine O2, since at least a part of the connecting surface connecting the first area and the second area is inclined downward from the first area toward the second area, the gaming machine In addition to the effect of O1, the downward slope expands the space connected to the second region, and the operability when operating the operating means can be improved.

In the gaming machine O2, the second area is formed as a generally rectangular area in a front view, the length dimension along one direction being larger than the length dimension along the other direction orthogonal to the one direction, and the operation means includes an operation A game machine O3 characterized in that the operation element is operated by being inserted and displaced, and the attitude of the operation element when the operation element is inserted into the operation means or pulled out from the operation means is the attitude along the other direction. .

According to the gaming machine O3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine O2, the second area is a generally rectangular area in a front view whose length dimension along one direction is greater than the length dimension along the other direction perpendicular to the one direction. , and the operation means is operated by inserting and displacing the operation element, and the attitude of the operation element when the operation element is inserted into or pulled out from the operation means is the attitude along the other direction. A space can be secured on the opposite side of the gripping surface by directing the surface for gripping the child in the longitudinal direction of the second region. Therefore, when the manipulator is inserted into or pulled out from the manipulator, it is possible to prevent the fingers holding the manipulator from interfering with the container. As a result, it is possible to improve the operability when operating the operating means.

In the gaming machine O3, the opening is disposed on one side of the longitudinal center of the second area, and the connection surface located on one longitudinal side of the second area extends from the first area to the second area. A gaming machine O4 characterized by being inclined downward toward an area.

According to the game machine O4, in addition to the effects of the game machine O3, the opening is arranged on one side of the longitudinal center of the second area, and the connection surface located on the one longitudinal side of the second area is the second area. Since it is inclined downward from the first region to the second region, it is possible to suppress interference of fingers other than the gripping fingers with the container when gripping and displacing the manipulator. For example, when the manipulator is gripped with the index finger and thumb and the manipulator is displaced (for example, rotated), the space formed by the downward inclination of the connection surface and the space on the other side in the longitudinal direction in the second region are A space for moving the little finger side can be secured, and interference between the little finger side and the container can be suppressed. As a result, it is possible to improve the operability when operating the operating means.

A game machine O5 characterized in that, in the game machine O4, the connection surface is formed on the other side in the longitudinal direction of the second area.

According to the gaming machine O5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine O4, the connecting surface is formed on the other side in the longitudinal direction of the second area. Means can be protected. For example, it is possible to suppress damage to the operating means by suppressing interference with other members during manufacturing. In addition, it is possible to prevent a foreign object such as a wire from being inserted into the container through the opening by making it difficult to visually recognize the position of the opening.

In addition, since the connection surface is formed on the other side in the longitudinal direction of the second region, the area of the first region can be expanded accordingly. The volume of the internal space of the container can be increased.

In any one of the game machines O3 to O5, the connection surface is formed on one side in the short direction of the second area, and the connection surface is not formed on the other side in the short direction of the second area. A gaming machine O6 characterized by:

According to the game machine O6, in any one of the game machines O3 to O5, a connection surface is formed on one side in the short direction in the second area, and no connection surface is formed on the other side in the short direction in the second area. , the other side of the second region in the short direction can be opened. Therefore, when the manipulator is gripped with fingers and operated (insertion into the operating means, withdrawal from the manipulating means, or displacement (eg, rotation) of the manipulator), the gripped fingers (eg, thumb and forefinger) The above-described open space can be used as a space for arranging or displacing a finger different from the finger. As a result, it is possible to improve the operability when operating the operating means.

In any one of game machines O3 to O6, the connecting surface located on one side in the longitudinal direction in the second area is inclined downward from the first area toward the second area, and the other connecting surfaces are inclined downward from the first area. A gaming machine O7 characterized by being substantially orthogonal to the area and the second area.

According to the game machine O7, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines O3 to O6, the connection surface located on one side in the longitudinal direction in the second area is inclined downward from the first area toward the second area, and the other Since the connection surface of is substantially orthogonal to the first region and the second region, it is possible to secure the effect of downwardly sloping the connection surface while coping with heat dissipation from the object (control board). The volume of the internal space can be secured. That is, it is possible to minimize the reduction in the volume of the internal space of the container due to the downward inclination of the connection surface.

The game machine O4 or O5 comprises a base body on which the container is disposed, and a rotating shaft that rotatably supports the base body, and the longitudinal direction of the second region is the axial direction of the rotating shaft. It is characterized by being substantially orthogonal and having a lateral direction substantially parallel to the axial direction of the rotating shaft, and one longitudinal side of the second region being arranged farther from the rotating shaft than the other longitudinal side. game machine O8.

According to the game machine O8, in addition to the effects of the game machine O4 or O5, the base body on which the container is arranged and the rotation shaft rotatably supporting the base body are provided, and the longitudinal direction in the second region is provided. The direction is substantially orthogonal to the axial direction of the rotating shaft, the lateral direction is substantially parallel to the axial direction of the rotating shaft, and one longitudinal side of the second region is arranged farther from the rotating shaft than the other longitudinal side. Therefore, when the operating means is operated in the space formed by rotating the base body around the rotation axis, the space formed by the downward inclination of the connecting surface can be effectively utilized. That is, it is possible to secure a space for allowing a worker's (operator's) hand to access the operation means by the amount of the space formed by the downward inclination of the connecting surface. As a result, it is possible to improve the operability when operating the operating means.

<Regarding the concept of the invention with the substrate boxes A100, A2100, A3100, and A4100 as examples>
A game machine having a container for containing an object, comprising: a display device arranged in a game area; A gaming machine P1 characterized in that information can be displayed on the display device.

2. Description of the Related Art A game machine having a substrate box (accommodating body) that accommodates a control substrate (object) is known (Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2015-205029). However, in the above-described conventional game machine, when the operating means are arranged on the control board (object), there is a problem that it is difficult to grasp the operating state of the operating means.

According to the gaming machine P1, it is provided with a display device arranged in a game area and operation means arranged on an object and formed to be operable, and information regarding operation of the operation means can be displayed on the display device. Therefore, it is possible to easily grasp the operation state of the operation means based on the display of the display device. In addition, by arranging the display means in the game area, the display means can also be used as a device for displaying information about the game, and the product cost can be reduced accordingly.

A game machine P2, wherein the container is formed to be displaceable in the game machine P1.

According to the gaming machine P2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine P1, since the container is formed displaceable, the container is arranged (displaced) at a position where the operation means can operate while viewing the display device. be able to. As a result, it is possible to operate while confirming the display (information), so that operability can be improved and operation errors can be suppressed. On the other hand, when the operation means is not operated, it can be arranged at a predetermined position (for example, a position that is difficult to be visually recognized from the outside), so that it is possible to suppress fraud.

In the game machine P2, the containing body can be displaced to a position where the surface of the containing body on which the operating means is arranged and the display surface of the display device can be viewed at the same time. P3.

According to the game machine P3, in addition to the effects of the game machine P2, the container can be displaced to a position where the surface on which the operating means of the container are arranged and the display surface of the display device can be viewed simultaneously. Therefore, it is possible to easily perform the work of operating the operating means while checking the display on the display device. As a result, improvement in operability and suppression of erroneous operations can be achieved more reliably.

In the game machine P3, the container is rotatably pivotally supported, and the operation means is arranged farther from the center of the container than the center of the container.

According to the gaming machine P4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine P3, the container is rotatably pivotally supported, and the operation means is arranged farther from the center of the container than the center of the container. In a state in which the container is displaced (rotated) to a position where the surface on which the operation means of the container are arranged and the display surface of the display device are visible at the same time, the operation means is moved to a position farther from the outer edge of the main body of the game machine. can be placed in Therefore, it is possible to prevent the fingers operating the operation means from interfering with the outer edge of the game machine main body.
As a result, operability can be improved.

In the gaming machine P4, the operating means is composed of a plurality of operating means, and the second operating means, which is operated more frequently than the first operating means, is farther from the pivotally supported position than the first operating means. A gaming machine P5 characterized in that it is arranged in the .

According to the game machine P5, in addition to the effects of the game machine P4, the operation means are composed of a plurality of means, and the second operation means, which has a higher frequency of operation than the first operation means, is operated more frequently than the first operation means. Since it is arranged on the far side from the pivotally supported position, the frequently operated operating means (first operating means) can be arranged at a position farther from the outer edge of the game machine main body. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the finger from interfering with the outer edge of the main body of the game machine when operating the operating means (first operating means) with high operating frequency. As a result, operability can be improved.

<Regarding the concept of the invention with the substrate boxes A100, A2100, A3100, and A4100 as examples>
A game machine comprising a container for containing an object, comprising an operating means disposed on the object and formed to be operable, wherein one or more electrical connection lines are connected to the object, and the A game machine Q1 characterized in that whether or not the operation means can be operated is changed according to the state of connection of an electrical connection line to the object.

2. Description of the Related Art A game machine having a substrate box (accommodating body) that accommodates a control substrate (object) is known (Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2015-205029). However, in the above-described conventional game machine, when the operation means is provided on the control board (object), there is room for improvement in terms of whether or not the operation means can be operated. That is, if operation is permitted regardless of the state of connection of one or more electrical connection lines to an object, there is a risk that the operation means will be more likely to be operated illegally. If the operation is prohibited regardless of the state, there is a risk that the workability of the operation associated with the operation of the operation means will be deteriorated.

According to the game machine Q1, an operation means is provided on an object and formed to be operable, one or more electrical connection lines are connected to the object, and the electrical connection line is connected to the object. Since whether or not the operation means can be operated is changed according to the state, fraud can be suppressed and workability can be improved.

A gaming machine Q2 characterized in that, in the gaming machine Q1, the container is formed to be displaceable.

According to the game machine Q2, in addition to the effects of the game machine Q1, the container is displaceable, so that the container can be arranged (displaced) at a position where the operation means can be easily operated.
As a result, operability can be improved. On the other hand, when the operation means is not operated, it can be arranged at a predetermined position (for example, a position that is difficult to be visually recognized from the outside), so that it is possible to suppress fraud. In this case, when displacing the container, at least one electrical connection wire is released (pulled out) from the object, so whether or not the operation means can be operated is changed according to the connection state of the electrical connection wire. This configuration is particularly effective in suppressing fraud and improving workability.

In the game machine Q1 or Q2, the operation of the operating means is permitted in a state in which at least a predetermined electrical connection line among the electrical connection lines is connected to the object. Q3.

According to the gaming machine Q3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine Q1 or Q2, the operation of the operating means is permitted in a state where at least a predetermined electrical connection line among the electrical connection lines is connected. It is possible to suppress fraud and improve workability. That is, if the predetermined electrical connection line is not connected to the object, the operation of the operating means is prohibited, so that fraud can be suppressed. On the other hand, if the connection of a predetermined electrical connection line to the object is secured and fraud can be suppressed, the operation means can be used even if other electrical connection lines are released (pulled out) from the object. By permitting the operation, it is possible to improve workability (ensuring versatility).

In particular, in a configuration in which the container is made displaceable, another electrical connection line released (unplugged) from the object in order to displace the container (i.e., arrange it for easy operation) can be connected to the container. After displacing the other electrical connection line that has been released (pulled out), for example, by interposing an extension line between the object and the other electrical connection line in order to allow the operation of the operation means avoids the trouble of reconnecting to the object.

In the game machine Q1 or Q2, when at least one of the electrical connection lines is disconnected from the object, the operation of the operating means is prohibited. Q4.

According to the game machine Q4, in addition to the effects of the game machine Q1 or Q2, when at least one of the electrical connection lines is disconnected from the object (that is, all electrical connections If the line is not connected to the object), the operation of the operating means is prohibited, so that the illegal operation of the operating means can be suppressed.

In addition, in a configuration in which the container is formed to be displaceable, another electrical connection line released (pulled out) from the object in order to displace the container (that is, to arrange it so that it is easy to operate) is connected to the container. After displacing , for example, by interposing an extension wire between the object and another electrical connection line and reconnecting the released (disconnected) other electrical connection line to the object, the operation Since it is possible to allow the operation of the means, it is possible to perform work by operating the operation means.

<Regarding the concept of the invention using the substrate boxes A3100 and A4100 as examples>
A game machine having a container for containing an object, comprising an operating means disposed on the object and formed to be operable, the container being formed to be displaceable and arranged during a game. The game machine R1 is characterized in that it can be displaced to a position where the operation means is easier to operate than the position.

2. Description of the Related Art A game machine having a substrate box (accommodating body) that accommodates a control substrate (object) is known (Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2015-205029). However, in the above-described conventional game machine, when the operating means is arranged on the control board (object), there is a problem that the operability of the operating means is insufficient.

According to the game machine R1, the operation means arranged on the object and formed to be operable is provided, and the container is formed to be displaceable, and the operation means is easier to operate than the position where it is arranged during the game. Since the position can be displaced, the operability of the operating means can be improved.

In the game machine R1, the container is rotatably pivotally supported and is displaced by rotation about the pivotally supported portion.

According to the game machine R2, in addition to the effects of the game machine R1, the container is rotatably pivotally supported and displaced by rotation about the pivotally supported portion, so that the container is displaced. Structure can be simplified. As a result, product costs can be reduced.

In the game machine R1 or R2, the game machine R3 is characterized in that, in the position where the container is disposed during the game, a separate member faces the operation means.

According to the game machine R3, in addition to the effects of the game machine R1 or R2, the container faces the operation means at the position where the container is arranged during the game, so that the operation means is illegally operated. can be suppressed.

In the gaming machine R3, the operating means is operated by inserting and displacing an operator, and in a state in which the operator is inserted, the operator is brought into contact with the separate member to operate the operating means. The game machine R4 is characterized in that the container cannot be displaced to the position where it is disposed during the game.

According to the game machine R4, in addition to the effects of the game machine R3, the operation means is operated by inserting the operator and displacing it, and when the operator is inserted, the operator contacts another member. By being in contact, the containing body cannot be displaced to the position where it is disposed during a game, so that it is possible to prevent forgetting to pull out the manipulator. Therefore, it is possible to suppress illegal use of the operator.

<Characteristic AA group> (Informs that the final display mode has been displayed within the effect period by repeatedly hitting the button)
It has an operating means operable by a player, an effect execution means capable of executing an effect based on the operation of the operating means within an effective period, and an effective period setting means capable of setting the effective period. In the gaming machine, the effect executing means can execute a first effect as the effect after the effective period has reached at least a first state based on the operation of the operating means during the effective period. and the valid period is variably set so as to be in the first state when it is determined that the first effect is to be executed by the effect executing means. A gaming machine AA1 characterized by:

Conventionally, when a special symbol lottery is executed, the lottery result is notified (stopped display) through a special symbol fluctuation period of a predetermined period, and after the special symbol lottery is executed, the lottery result is displayed. Many devices are devised so that the player does not get tired of the game early by executing various effects (variation effects) using the period until the stop display (special symbol fluctuation period). Among them, there is an effect (so-called continuous-hit effect) in which the player operates the operating means a plurality of times to change the display mode.

In the gaming machine configured in this manner, the presentation mode can be changed by the player's own operation, so that the interest in the game can be improved.

However, in the above-described repeated hitting effect, for example, the number of times (upper limit number of times) that the display mode can be changed in the repeated hitting effect is set in advance according to the result of the special symbol lottery. No matter how many times the player operates the operation means within the operation valid period in which the operation is set to be effective, when the display mode (upper limit display mode) changed by the preset upper limit number of times is displayed, Further, there is a problem that the display mode cannot be changed any more, and the remaining period of the operation effective period at the time when the upper limit display mode is displayed cannot be used for presentation. In addition, in general, when the result of the special symbol lottery is a big hit, the number of times (upper limit number of times) that the display mode can be changed in the continuous hit effect is larger than when it is a loss, In addition, it is configured so that the player cannot grasp the upper limit number of times set in the continuous hitting effect this time, and by making the player willingly operate the operation means, it is configured to improve the interest of the game. However, in this case, even though the upper limit display mode is displayed, the player continues to operate the operating means until the valid operation period elapses, and the operating means is operated multiple times. There is a problem that the display mode is not changed even though the operation is performed, and the player's willingness to play is lowered.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the enjoyment of a game by increasing the motivation of the player to play the game. there is

According to the gaming machine AA1, when it is determined that the first effect is to be executed by the effect executing means, the valid period is set so as to be in the first state. Willingly as determined to be carried out. There is an effect that the operation means can be operated and the amusement of the game can be improved.

Moreover, since the first performance can be executed even if the preset effective period does not pass, the performance executed by the performance execution means is delayed and the performance effect is lowered. has the effect of being able to suppress

The gaming machine AA1 has an operation determination means capable of determining the operation content of the operation means within the valid period, and the effect executing means, when the determination result of the operation determination means is a specific determination result, A gaming machine AA2 characterized by being capable of executing the first effect.

According to the gaming machine AA2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine AA1, when the determination result of the operation determination means is a specific determination result, the first effect can be executed. Therefore, it is possible to motivate the player to operate the operating means so as to obtain a specific determination result, thereby enhancing the interest in the game.

The game machine AA2 has an operation frequency measuring means capable of measuring the operation frequency of the operation means within the valid period, and the operation determination means determines that the operation frequency measured by the operation frequency measuring means is a specific operation frequency. A game machine AA3 characterized in that it is possible to determine that it is the specific determination result when it becomes.

According to the game machine AA3, in addition to the effects of the game machine AA2, when the number of times the operation means is operated reaches the specific operation number, the operation determination means determines that the result is a specific determination result. On the other hand, there is an effect that the operation means can be operated so that the specified number of operations can be performed quickly, and the interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, by intentionally operating the operating means, the number of operations becomes the specific number of operations, so that it is determined that the result of determination is a specific determination result. It is possible to suppress the fact that the determination result is not obtained and the desire to operate is lowered.

In the gaming machine AA2 or AA3, the effect execution means can execute the effect in a performance mode including at least a first mode and a second mode variable from the first mode, and the operation determination means The game machine AA4 is characterized in that it determines the content of the operation for the operation means after the performance is executed in the second mode.

According to the game machine AA4, in addition to the effects of the game machine AA2 or AA3, the operation determination means determines based on the operation contents after the effect mode of the effect executed by the effect execution means is changed to the second mode. is executed, the game can be played while anticipating that the effect executed by the effect executing means will change to the second mode. Therefore, there is an effect that the production effect can be enhanced and the interest of the game can be improved.

The gaming machine AA5, wherein the gaming machine AA4 has a suggesting means capable of suggesting that the effect mode of the effect executed by the effect executing means is the second mode.

According to the gaming machine AA5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine AA4, the suggesting means suggests that the performance is being executed in the second mode, so it is possible to provide an effect that is easy for the player to understand. There is

<Characteristic AB group> (display control of random display)
Discriminating means capable of performing discrimination, display means for displaying identification information for indicating the discrimination result by the discriminating means, and benefits advantageous to the player when specific identification information of the display means is displayed a symbol display means capable of displaying a plurality of different symbols on the display means; and a plurality of displays capable of displaying the plurality of symbols. display position setting means capable of setting a position; and pattern determination means for determining types of the patterns to be displayed at the plurality of display positions by the pattern display means, wherein the pattern determination means determines the plurality of display positions. A game characterized in that the types of symbols to be displayed at predetermined display positions among the positions are determined, and the types of symbols to be displayed at the remaining display positions are determined based on the determined types of symbols. Machine AB1.

Conventionally, when a special symbol lottery is executed, the lottery result is notified (stopped display) through a special symbol fluctuation period of a predetermined period, and after the special symbol lottery is executed, the lottery result is displayed. Many devices are devised so that the player does not get tired of the game early by executing various effects (variation effects) using the period until the stop display (special symbol fluctuation period). Among them, by randomly displaying a plurality of types of icons at a plurality of positions on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81, there is a configuration that enables execution of a variety of effects.

In the pachinko machine 10 capable of executing such an effect, in order to prevent the player from easily predicting the effect mode of the icon display effect, the locations where each icon is displayed in the icon display effect, A plurality of performance pattern data with different types of icons to be displayed are prepared in advance, and the performance mode of the icon display performance to be executed is determined according to the lottery result of the special pattern. However, in the case of using the method of preparing a plurality of effect pattern data in advance, there is a problem that the amount of effect data to be stored in advance increases according to the number of effect patterns.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of executing a suitable effect while suppressing an increase in the amount of effect data.

According to the gaming machine AB1, it is possible to determine the types of symbols to be displayed at the remaining display positions based on the types of symbols to be displayed at the predetermined display positions. There is an effect that it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of executing a presentation.

The gaming machine AB1 has pattern type order storage means for pre-storing the types of the plurality of patterns in a specific order, and the pattern determination means determines the specific order stored in the pattern type order storage means. The gaming machine AB2 is characterized in that the types of the symbols to be displayed at the remaining display positions are determined based on the order.

According to the gaming machine AB2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine AB1, the types of symbols to be displayed at the remaining display positions are determined based on a predetermined specific order, so the types of symbols are determined. There is an effect that it is possible to simplify the processing for

In the gaming machine AB2, the symbol type order storage means stores at least a first order and a second order different from the first order as the specific order. Game machine AB3.

According to the game machine AB3, in addition to the effects of the game machine AB2, since a plurality of orders are stored in advance in the symbol type order storage means, the order used when the symbol type is determined by the symbol determination means can be determined. By making them different, it is possible to execute a variety of presentations, and there is an effect that the presentation effect can be enhanced.

In the gaming machine AB3, the type of the symbols included in the first order and the type of at least a part of the types of the symbols included in the second order are different. .

According to the gaming machine AB4, different symbol types are determined depending on whether the symbol types are determined based on the first order or based on the second order. There is an effect that rich production can be executed and the production effect can be enhanced.

In the gaming machine AB4, the symbol determination means can determine the type of the symbol based on the second order when the determination result of the determination means is a determination result in which the specific identification information is displayed. A gaming machine AB5 characterized by:

According to the gaming machine AB5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine AB4, when the determination result is that a privilege is given by the privilege giving means, the type of symbol can be determined based on the second order. The player can play while expecting to see the types of symbols included only in the order. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from becoming bored with the game early.

<Characteristic AC group> (Button delay effect)
An operation means that can be operated by a player, a measurement means that can measure a predetermined period based on the operation of the operation means, and the length of the period measured by the measurement means satisfies a first condition. and a condition setting means capable of setting at least one of a plurality of different conditions as the first condition.

Conventionally, by changing only the execution timing without changing the contents of each effect to be executed (display effect that changes the display mode, sound effect that outputs sound), the player is given a sense of incompatibility. There is a gaming machine that executes an effect (so-called delayed effect) that enhances the effect. This delayed effect allows only the player who notices a sense of incompatibility to understand that the delayed effect has been executed, and as a benefit, benefits advantageous to the player (for example, winning a jackpot) are given with a high probability. In recent years, it has been used as a production to show that

However, as long as it is used as an effect in which a privilege that is advantageous to the player is given with a high probability, the occurrence frequency (execution frequency) is low, and even if the player plays the game all day long, it will be executed only once or twice. It was something. In contrast to the delay effects that are executed less frequently and the content of each effect does not change, conventionally, the effect data corresponding to the pattern of each delay effect, that is, the display effect is displayed after the frame button 22 is operated. Display data including display image data corresponding to the waiting period until the performance is executed, and effect data dedicated to the delay effect having audio data including the sound corresponding to the waiting period until the sound effect is performed are prepared in advance. Therefore, there is a problem that the capacity of the effect data increases with respect to the execution frequency.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION The present invention has been made to solve the problems exemplified above, and an object of the present invention is to execute the above-described delayed effect without increasing the capacity of the effect data.

According to the game machine AC1, by setting different conditions by the condition setting means, it is possible to easily change the period from the operation of the operating means to the execution of the effect, so that the effect rich in variations can be achieved. There is an effect that it can be executed without increasing the volume of performance data.

The game machine AC1 has a first display mode display means capable of displaying on the display means a first display mode indicating that the operation means has been operated based on the operation of the operation means. The game machine AC2 is characterized in that the first display mode display means is constructed so that the display is continued at least until the effect execution means executes the effect.

According to the gaming machine AC2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine AC1, even if there is an interval before the performance is executed, the first display mode is continuously displayed, so that the operation of the operating means can be performed by the gaming machine. It is possible to identify that the player is accepted by the player, so that the player can play the game with peace of mind.

The gaming machine AC1 or AC2 has valid period setting means for setting the operation of the operating means to be valid, and the effect executing means is configured to be able to execute the effect even after the valid period has passed. A gaming machine AC3 characterized by:

According to the game machine AC3, in addition to the effect of the game machine AC1 or AC2, since the effect can be executed even after the effective period has passed, there is an effect that the interest can be improved.

<Characteristic AD group> (gauge reduction control)
Determination means capable of performing determination, display means for displaying identification information for indicating the result of determination by the determination means, and when the identification information for indicating the specific result of determination is displayed on the display means , a privilege granting means capable of imparting a privilege advantageous to a player, wherein an effect executing means capable of executing a variable effect corresponding to numerical information, and subtracting or adding said numerical information. and setting means capable of determining, for each number of times, number information to be subtracted or added to one time corresponding to the number of times determined by the number of times determining means. A gaming machine AD1 characterized by:

Conventionally, when a special symbol lottery is executed, the lottery result is notified (stopped display) through a special symbol fluctuation period of a predetermined period, and after the special symbol lottery is executed, the lottery result is displayed. Many devices are devised so that the player does not get tired of the game early by executing various effects (variation effects) using the period until the stop display (special symbol fluctuation period). Among them, predetermined number information is displayed, and based on the result of adding or subtracting the number information a plurality of times, an addition/subtraction suggestion effect is executed to suggest the lottery result.

In a game machine capable of executing such an addition/subtraction suggestion performance, a predetermined lottery result is displayed by varying the number of additions or subtractions of numerical information in order to suggest the lottery result by the performance result of the addition/subtraction suggestion performance. Therefore, there is a problem that the content of the presentation of the moderation suggestive presentation becomes one-pattern, and the presentation effect is lowered. Also, if the amount of addition or subtraction is determined at random each time the numerical information is added or subtracted, the effect result cannot suggest the result of the lottery, and meaningless effect is executed. There is a problem that the effect is lowered.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine that enhances the enjoyment of games by enhancing the effect of presentation using numerical information. do.

According to the game machine AD1, after determining the number of times the number information is subtracted or added, the number information to be subtracted or added each time is set. Appropriate number information can be set. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to enhance the production effect of the production that changes the number information.

In the game machine AD1, the effect execution means is configured to be capable of executing an effect corresponding to a predetermined lower limit value or upper limit value of the numerical information when the determination result by the determination means is the specific determination result. A game machine AD2 characterized in that it is a game machine AD2.

According to the gaming machine AD2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine AD1, it is possible for the player to predict the determination result of the determination means according to the variable result of the numerical information. can be brought to attention. Therefore, there is an effect that the production effect can be enhanced.

In the gaming machine AD1 or AD2, after determining the number of times the minimum number information is subtracted or the number of times the minimum number information is added among the number information to be subtracted or added at one time, subtraction or addition is performed. The gaming machine AD3 is characterized in that the number information to be subtracted or the number information to be added to the remaining number of times is set based on the number information that can be added.

According to the game machine AD3, in addition to the effects of the game machine AD1 or AD2, since the number of times the minimum number information is subtracted or added is determined first, the number information to be subtracted or added exceeding the lower limit or upper limit is determined. is set.

<Characteristic AE group> (symbol display control)
Discriminating means capable of performing discrimination, display means for displaying identification information for indicating the discrimination result by the discriminating means, and benefits advantageous to the player when specific identification information of the display means is displayed wherein the identification information is provided with a plurality of predetermined identification symbols, and the gaming machine creates a symbol corresponding to each of the identification symbols. Determinable pattern determining means, and pattern updating means capable of displaying the pattern newly determined by the pattern determining means based on the establishment of a predetermined condition in correspondence with the corresponding identification symbol. A gaming machine AE1 characterized by having:

Conventionally, when a special symbol lottery is executed, the lottery result is notified (stopped display) through a special symbol fluctuation period of a predetermined period, and after the special symbol lottery is executed, the lottery result is displayed. Many devices are devised so that the player does not get tired of the game early by executing various effects (variation effects) using the period until the stop display (special symbol fluctuation period). Among them, identification information (for example, numbers) indicating the lottery result of the special pattern and characters identifiable by the player are associated with each other. there is something

In a game machine capable of executing such a variable effect, a plurality of characters are variably displayed, and thus the effect of the effect can be enhanced more than the effect in which only numbers are variably displayed. Since the combination with the identification information is fixed, there is a problem that when the game is played continuously, the novelty is lost and the performance effect is lowered.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a game machine which enhances the performance effect by providing a novel performance to a player.

According to the gaming machine AE1, the pattern determination means determines the pattern corresponding to the identification symbol, and the pattern update means displays the new pattern, so that the pattern display that surprises the player can be executed. , there is an effect that the production effect can be enhanced.

In the gaming machine AE1, the identification information is composed of a plurality of symbol rows for displaying the symbols corresponding to the identification symbols in a predetermined order, and the privilege imparting means includes a predetermined combination of the identification symbols. A gaming machine AE2 is characterized in that the privilege is provided when the identification information is stopped and displayed in AE2.

According to the game machine AE2, in addition to the effects of the game machine AE1, a privilege is given when a predetermined identification symbol is stopped and displayed, so it is determined which identification symbol the pattern corresponding to is displayed. By doing so, it is possible to provide the enjoyment of predicting the identification symbols that can be stopped and displayed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from becoming bored with the game during the period until the identification information is stop-displayed, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

The game machine AE3 is characterized in that the game machine AE1 or AE2 has specific effect executing means capable of executing a specific effect when the combination of the symbols stopped and displayed as the identification information is a specific combination. .

According to the gaming machine AE3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine AE1 or AE1 or 2, a specific effect is executed according to the combination of symbols. There is an effect that the game can be played while making the player interested in each of the symbols, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

<Characteristic AF group> (Pseudo-outfall fixed fluctuation)
discrimination means capable of performing discrimination; display means for displaying identification information for indicating the discrimination result of the discrimination means; and dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying the identification information on the display means. a bonus giving means capable of giving a bonus that is advantageous to a player when the identification information for indicating the specific determination result is stopped and displayed after the identification information is dynamically displayed; an effect execution means capable of executing an effect within a dynamic display period in which the identification information is dynamically displayed by the target display means, wherein the identification information is dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means. dynamic display mode determination means for determining a dynamic display mode, wherein the dynamic display mode determination means determines whether the determination result is a specific determination result or when the determination result is other than the specific determination result. A specific period dynamic display mode composed of the same dynamic display period can be determined, and in the specific period dynamic display mode, a common specific effect is executed until the execution of the dynamic display is started. A gaming machine AF1 characterized by being configured as follows.

Conventionally, there is a storage means capable of holding and storing a predetermined number (four) of the right to execute a special symbol lottery (lottery right of a special symbol lottery). Thereby, even when the lottery right (special figure reservation) of the special symbol lottery is acquired during the execution of the special pattern variation, the lottery right (special figure reservation) can be stored in the storage means. Therefore, after the special symbol variation is stopped and displayed, it is possible to immediately execute the special symbol lottery based on the lottery right stored in the storage means, so that the special symbol variation can be continuously executed. It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, the variation time of the special symbol variation for indicating the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is configured to vary according to the number of lottery rights (the number of special symbols reserved) stored in the storage means. be. Specifically, when the number of lottery rights stored in the storage means (special figure pending number) is 0 and the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is out, the long fluctuation time is performed. Some are designed to make things easier. By configuring in this way, it is possible to reduce the period in which the special symbol variation is not executed, and to suppress the decrease in the player's willingness to play due to the continuation of the state in which the special symbol variation is not performed. .

However, according to the conventional gaming machine using the above-described configuration, at the time when the long variation time lost variation is executed, the player can easily know that the lottery result of the special symbol variation being executed is lost. As a result, there is a problem that the player's willingness to play decreases during the special symbol fluctuation period.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the enjoyment of a game by increasing the motivation of the player to play the game. there is

According to the gaming machine AF1, the start of the dynamic display mode of the similar period causes the player to predict the determination result, and the player's motivation to play is reduced before the determination result is reported. There is an effect that it can be suppressed.

In the gaming machine AF1, the dynamic display mode determination means includes a first state for determining the dynamic display mode based on the determination result of the determination means, and the dynamic display mode regardless of the determination result of the determination means. A gaming machine AF2 characterized in that it is configured to be able to set a second state for determining the .

According to the gaming machine AF2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine AF1, the determination method of the dynamic display mode is switched between the first state and the second state, so that the discrimination result is identified to the player at the start of the dynamic display. There is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from making the player more likely to be discriminated against, and to make the player play the game while making the player interested in the determination result until the identification information is stopped and displayed.

In the gaming machine AF2, when the second state is set, the content of the dynamic display mode is determined by determining the determination result at a predetermined timing when the determined dynamic display mode is executed. A gaming machine AF3, characterized in that it is variable based on the determination result.

According to the game machine AF3, in addition to the effect of the game machine AF2, the content is changed based on the determination result, so that there is an effect that the game can be played in anticipation of the timing to be changed.

In the game machine AF3, a remaining period determining means capable of determining a remaining dynamic display period at the time when the determination by the determining means is executed; A gaming machine AF4 characterized by having dynamic display mode changing means for varying the target display mode.

According to the gaming machine AF4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine AF3, the dynamic display mode can be varied according to the remaining dynamic display period. There is an effect that it is possible to play the game by making the player interested in both the length of the

In any of game machines AF1 to AF4, at least a first period and a second period longer than the first period are set as dynamic display periods in which the identification information is dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means. dynamic display period setting means, wherein the dynamic display period setting means can set the first period when the determination result of the determination means is other than the specific determination result; The dynamic display mode determination means can determine the specific period dynamic display mode corresponding to the length of the first period, and the effect execution means determines the dynamic display mode in which the second period is set. A gaming machine AF5 characterized in that an effect including the dynamic display mode for the specific period can be executed as a part of the effect corresponding to the .

According to the game machine AF5, in addition to the effects of the game machines AF1 to AF4, even if a dynamic display period longer than the dynamic display period corresponding to the specific period dynamic display mode is set, the specific period Since an effect using the dynamic display mode is executed, there is an effect that the game can be played with interest in the determination result until the identification information is stopped and displayed.

In the game machine AF5, the effect executing means is capable of executing the effect in which the specific period dynamic display mode is set multiple times as the effect corresponding to the dynamic display in which the second period is set. A game machine AF6 characterized by.

According to the gaming machine AF6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine AF5, the specific period dynamic display mode can be executed multiple times for one dynamic display period, so the effect of enhancing the production effect. There is

<Characteristic AG group> (seconds management on the liquid crystal side)
In a gaming machine having a first control means for executing an effect and a second control means different from the first control means, the first control means is a first control means capable of setting the effect content of the effect. setting means; and first output means capable of outputting a first signal based on the effect set by the first setting means to the second control means, wherein the second control means 1 second effect executing means capable of executing the second effect in response to the first signal output from the output means; and a period for executing the second effect executed by the second effect executing means. and a second output means capable of outputting a second signal to the first control means when a specific condition is satisfied by the measurement means, wherein the first control means A gaming machine AG1 characterized by being capable of executing a specific effect based on the second signal output from a second output means.

Conventionally, there are gaming machines capable of executing an effect for a predetermined period in order to show the result of a special symbol lottery. In such a game machine, the player can spend a predetermined period of time until the result of the special symbol lottery is displayed while enjoying the contents of the performance to be executed, thereby preventing the player from getting tired of the game early. It was possible.

Furthermore, in recent gaming machines, as an effect for showing the result of the special symbol lottery, in addition to the liquid crystal display, it has become mainstream to execute an effect using multiple movable accessories for decoration. There is a problem that the processing content of the control device that centrally manages is increased.

The present invention has been made to solve the problems exemplified above. The purpose is to suppress concentration of processing load.

According to the game machine AG1, the first control means does not need to measure the period required for execution of the second effect, and there is an effect that the control load of the first control means can be reduced.

In the game machine AG1, the game machine AG2 is characterized in that the measuring means is configured to be able to measure the end timing of the second effect.

According to the game machine AG2, in addition to the effects of the game machine AG1, the end timing of the second effect is measured by the measuring means, so that the control for managing the end timing by the first control means becomes unnecessary. There is an effect that the control load due to can be reduced.

In the game machine AG1 or AG2, the second control means has mode variable means capable of varying the mode of the second effect when the variable condition is established, and the second output means is adapted to change the second measurement mode. When the performance period measured by the means satisfies a termination condition, an information command for indicating at least part of the performance mode of the second performance executed by the second performance execution means is also provided by the first control means. and the first control means determines the effect mode of the specific effect to be executed after the second effect based on the information command output from the second output means. A gaming machine AG3 characterized by having means.

According to the game machine AG3, in addition to the effects produced by the game machine AG1 or AG2, the first control means can determine the effect mode of the second effect that is varied by the second control means, and specified based on the result of the determination. The production mode of the production is varied. As a result, the performance effect can be enhanced.

<Characteristics AH group> (Control delay of the character by pressing the button)
Determination means capable of performing determination, display means for displaying identification information for indicating the result of determination by the determination means, and the identification information for indicating the specific result of determination by the display means is stopped and displayed. In this case, in a gaming machine having a privilege imparting means capable of imparting an advantageous privilege to a player, an operation means operable by the player and an effect can be executed based on the operation of the operation means. and a determining means capable of varying and determining the execution timing of the performance executed by the effect executing means.

Conventionally, by changing only the execution timing without changing the contents of each effect to be executed (display effect that changes the display mode, sound effect that outputs sound), the player is given a sense of incompatibility. There is a gaming machine that executes an effect (so-called delayed effect) that enhances the effect. This delayed effect allows only the player who notices a sense of incompatibility to understand that the delayed effect has been executed, and as a benefit, benefits advantageous to the player (for example, winning a jackpot) are given with a high probability. In recent years, it has been used as a production to show that

However, as long as it is used as an effect in which a privilege that is advantageous to the player is given with a high probability, the occurrence frequency (execution frequency) is low, and even if the player plays the game all day long, it will be executed only once or twice. It was something. In contrast to the delay effects that are executed less frequently and the content of each effect does not change, conventionally, the effect data corresponding to the pattern of each delay effect, that is, the display effect is displayed after the frame button 22 is operated. Display data including display image data corresponding to the waiting period until the performance is executed, and effect data dedicated to the delay effect having audio data including the sound corresponding to the waiting period until the sound effect is performed are prepared in advance. Therefore, there is a problem that the capacity of the effect data increases with respect to the execution frequency.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION The present invention has been made to solve the problems exemplified above, and an object of the present invention is to execute the above-described delayed effect without increasing the capacity of the effect data.

According to the game machine AH1, since the performance execution timing is variably determined by the determining means, there is no need to set a plurality of performance data in advance corresponding to the difference in the performance execution timing, and the data volume is increased. There is an effect that it is possible to suppress the trouble that occurs.

In the game machine AH1, movable means configured to be movable as the effect, and the movable means are configured to be movable in a predetermined movement pattern by the effect executing means. A gaming machine AH2 characterized by:

According to the game machine AH2, there is an effect that the interest of the player can be improved by moving the movable means.

A game machine AH3 characterized in that the game machine AH1 or AH2 has a notification mode executing means capable of executing a notification mode during a period from when the operation means is operated until the performance is started. .

According to the gaming machine AH3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine AH1 or AH2, the notification mode is executed during the period until the performance is started, so that the player can recognize that the operation of the operating means is effective. There is an effect that an easy-to-understand game can be performed.

Any one of the game machines AH1 to AH3 has timer means capable of starting time measurement based on the operation of the operation means, and the determination means determines the performance execution timing based on the time data of the timer means. A game machine AH4 characterized in that it discriminates the .

According to the game machine AH4, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines AH1 to AH3, it is possible to time the period elapsed after the operation means is operated by the time measuring means, so the period during which the operation means is operated can be counted. The execution timing of the presentation can be set according to the time, and the player can be interested in the length of the period from the operation of the operation means to the start of execution.

In the gaming machine AH4, the effect executing means comprises at least output means capable of outputting a signal instructing execution of the effect, and setting means for setting the execution of the effect based on the signal from the output means. 2. The game machine AH5, wherein the output means outputs the signal when the clock data of the clock means becomes a value corresponding to the content determined by the determination means.

According to the game machine AH5, in addition to the effects of the game machine AH4, since the signal is not output until the clock data reaches a corresponding value, the decision means determines if the execution start of the effect is executed at the timing when the signal is received. It is possible to easily execute the game at the specified timing, and there is an effect that the game can be easily controlled.

<Characteristic AI group> (crash control)
It is advantageous to a player when a discrimination means, a display means for displaying identification information for indicating a discrimination result by the discrimination means, and when the identification information for indicating a specific discrimination result is displayed on the display means. In a gaming machine having a privilege granting means capable of granting a privilege of a second setting that is executed after the first setting is executed; can be released, and the setting executing means is configured to be able to execute the first setting by the setting executing means even when the performance is not executed.

Conventionally, there are gaming machines capable of executing an effect for a predetermined period in order to show the result of a special symbol lottery. In such a game machine, the player can spend a predetermined period of time until the result of the special symbol lottery is displayed while enjoying the contents of the performance to be executed, thereby preventing the player from getting tired of the game early. It was possible.

Furthermore, in recent gaming machines, as an effect for showing the result of the special symbol lottery, in addition to the liquid crystal display, it has become mainstream to execute an effect using a plurality of movable accessories for decoration. By using the movable accessory, it is possible to provide a powerful performance to the player and enhance the performance effect.

However, in order to prevent the movable accessory from malfunctioning, if the movable accessory is not positioned at the execution position at the execution timing of the performance using the movable accessory, the movable accessory Since it is configured to prohibit the execution of the performance using the movable accessory, there is a problem that the frequency of performance of the performance using the movable accessory is lowered.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION The present invention has been made to solve the problems exemplified above, and aims to provide a game machine capable of enhancing the effect of production by suitably executing the production using movable accessories. purpose.

According to the game machine AI1, since the first setting is executed even when the performance is not executed, preparations for executing the performance can be completed early, and the performance can be executed in a short period of time. It has the effect of being able to

A game machine AI2 characterized in that the game machine AI1 is configured to be able to identify that the first setting has been executed.

According to the game machine AI2, in addition to the effect of the game machine AI1, even when the first setting is executed and the effect is not executed, the game machine AI2 makes it possible to expect the effect to be executed, thereby improving the interest. be.

The gaming machine AI1 or AI2 has movable means that can be moved as at least a part of the effect, and the first setting is to drive the driving section for moving the movable means. A gaming machine AI3 characterized by:

According to the game machine AI3, in addition to the effects of the game machine AI1 or AI2, the driving unit is driven to move the movable means, but the first setting is executed even when the movable means is not moved. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the problem of early determination that the movable means is movable by the first setting.

<Characteristic AJ group> (Large set)
discrimination means capable of executing discrimination; display means for displaying an identification pattern for indicating the discrimination result of the discrimination means; and dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying the identification pattern on the display means. a benefit granting means capable of granting a benefit advantageous to a player when the identification pattern for indicating the specific determination result is displayed after the identification pattern is dynamically displayed; and the privilege granting means. and a privilege type determining means capable of determining the privilege type to be granted by the means, wherein the dynamic display means dynamically displays a pattern row composed of the plurality of identification symbols. The gaming machine comprises storage means storing identification display modes of more types than the plurality of identification patterns, and selecting the identification patterns from among the identification display modes stored in the storage means. determining means capable of determining that different identification display modes are displayed for each; A game machine AJ1 characterized by comprising an effect executing means capable of stopping and displaying the identification pattern in which the identification display mode is displayed and executing an effect corresponding to the stop-displayed identification display mode. .

Conventionally, when a special symbol lottery is executed, the lottery result is notified (stopped display) through a special symbol fluctuation period of a predetermined period, and after the special symbol lottery is executed, the lottery result is displayed. Many devices are devised so that the player does not get tired of the game early by executing various effects (variation effects) using the period until the stop display (special symbol fluctuation period). Among them, identification information (for example, numbers) indicating the lottery result of the special pattern and characters identifiable by the player are associated with each other. there is something

In a game machine capable of executing such a variable effect, a plurality of characters are variably displayed, and thus the effect of the effect can be enhanced more than the effect in which only numbers are variably displayed. Since the combination with the identification information is fixed, there is a problem that when the game is played continuously, the novelty is lost and the performance effect is lowered.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a game machine which enhances the performance effect by providing a novel performance to a player.

According to the gaming machine J1, since the presentation to be executed when the specific condition is satisfied is varied depending on the identification display mode determined by the determining means, the player is interested in the identification display mode displayed in the identification pattern. By having it held, there is an effect that the interest in the game can be improved even if the identification pattern indicating the specific determination result is not displayed.

In the game machine AJ1, when the specific condition is satisfied, the effect execution means can dynamically display the identification pattern displaying the identification display mode again after stopping and displaying the identification pattern a plurality of times. wherein the determination means is configured to be able to update the type of the identification display mode displayed in the identification pattern when the identification pattern is re-dynamically displayed by the effect execution means. A game machine AJ2 characterized in that

According to the gaming machine AJ2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine AJ1, the identification display mode is updated when the dynamic display is performed again. There is an effect that it is possible to enable the performance to be performed.

In the game machine AJ2, the effect executing means identifies, as the effect, information corresponding to the stopped identification display mode each time the identification pattern is stopped and displayed when the specific condition is satisfied. It is configured to be able to execute a possible notification effect, and is configured to be able to execute a specific effect corresponding to the identification display mode notified by the notification effect based on the establishment of the effect condition. A game machine AJ3 characterized by

According to the game machine AJ3, in addition to the effects of the game machine AJ2, the specific effect is varied depending on the identification display mode displayed each time the stop display is performed. There is an effect that the combination of aspects can be made interesting.

<Feature AK group> (Large set system derivation)
Display means for displaying a plurality of identification display modes, display control means capable of displaying a predetermined number of identification display modes on the display means, and the identification display modes of types greater than the predetermined number are stored. storage means capable of determining a predetermined number of the identification display modes to be displayed on the display means from among the identification display modes stored in the storage means; and a specific condition being established. and an effect execution means capable of executing an effect corresponding to the identification display mode displayed on the display means when the game machine AK1 is on.

Conventionally, when a special symbol lottery is executed, the lottery result is notified (stopped display) through a special symbol fluctuation period of a predetermined period, and after the special symbol lottery is executed, the lottery result is displayed. Many devices are devised so that the player does not get tired of the game early by executing various effects (variation effects) using the period until the stop display (special symbol fluctuation period). Among them, identification information (for example, numbers) indicating the lottery result of the special pattern and characters identifiable by the player are associated with each other. there is something

In a game machine capable of executing such a variable effect, a plurality of characters are variably displayed, and thus the effect of the effect can be enhanced more than the effect in which only numbers are variably displayed. Since the combination with the identification information is fixed, there is a problem that when the game is played continuously, the novelty is lost and the performance effect is lowered.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION The present invention has been made to solve the problems exemplified above, and provides a gaming machine capable of enhancing the interest of a game by providing a novel presentation to a player and enhancing the presentation effect. intended to provide.

According to the gaming machine AK1, the predetermined number of identification display modes to be displayed on the display means are determined by the determination means, and the effect corresponding to the displayed identification display modes is executed by the effect execution means, so that the display means displays the The type of identification display mode can be of interest. Therefore, there is an effect that the amusement of the game can be improved.

The game machine AK1 has dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying the predetermined number of identification display modes determined by the determination means, and the effect execution means dynamically The game machine AK2 is characterized in that it is constructed so as to be able to execute an effect corresponding to the identification display mode stopped and displayed at a predetermined position after being displayed.

According to the game machine AK2, in addition to the effects of the game machine AK1, the stop position of the identification display mode can also be made interesting, so there is an effect that the amusement of the game can be further improved.

In the game machine AK1 or AK2, the dynamic display means is configured to be able to dynamically display the identification display mode again after stopping and displaying the identification display mode. A game machine AK3 characterized in that it is constructed such that the type displayed is updated when the target display is performed.

According to the gaming machine AK3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine AK1 or AK2, when the stationary display of the identification display mode is re-displayed dynamically, the type of the identification display mode is updated. Each time, the type of identification display mode to be displayed can be aroused new interest. Therefore, there is an effect that the amusement of the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine AK2 or AK3, the effect executing means can execute, as the effect, a notification effect in which information corresponding to the stopped and displayed identification display mode can be identified each time the identification display mode is stopped and displayed. and is configured to be able to execute a specific effect corresponding to the identification display mode notified by the notification effect based on establishment of the effect condition. .

According to the gaming machine AK4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine AK2 or AK3, the stop-displayed identification display mode is notified, so that an effect that is easy for the player to understand can be executed. Therefore, there is an effect that the production effect can be enhanced.

<Feature AL group> (Large set system derivation 2)
display means for displaying a plurality of identification display modes; display control means capable of displaying a predetermined number of identification display modes on the display means; storage means for storing a plurality of types of the identification display modes; determination means capable of determining a predetermined number of the identification display modes to be displayed on the display means from among the identification display modes stored in the storage means; and display on the display means within a predetermined period of time. and effect executing means capable of executing a specific effect when the number of types of the identified display modes obtained reaches a predetermined number.

Conventionally, when a special symbol lottery is executed, the lottery result is notified (stopped display) through a special symbol fluctuation period of a predetermined period, and after the special symbol lottery is executed, the lottery result is displayed. Many devices are devised so that the player does not get tired of the game early by executing various effects (variation effects) using the period until the stop display (special symbol fluctuation period). Among them, a plurality of identification information (for example, numbers) for indicating the lottery result of special symbols are variably displayed, and the result of the special symbol lottery is notified to the player by the combination of the identification information that is stopped and displayed. The variable display of identification information is also interesting.

In a game machine capable of executing such a variable performance, while a plurality of pieces of identification information are being variably displayed, the variable performance is performed while expecting that the identification information indicating the lottery result advantageous to the player is stopped and displayed. Although it can be enjoyed, if the statically displayed identification information is a combination indicating a lottery result other than winning, interest in the statically displayed identification information is lost and the performance effect is reduced. There was a problem that

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION The present invention has been made to solve the problems exemplified above, and provides a gaming machine capable of enhancing the interest of a game by providing a novel presentation to a player and enhancing the presentation effect. intended to provide.

According to the gaming machine AL1, when the number of types of the displayed identification display modes reaches a predetermined number, the specific effect is executed. Since there is a possibility that the specific effect will be executed until the period elapses, there is an effect that the effect of the effect can be enhanced and the amusement of the game can be improved.

The game machine AL1 has dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying the predetermined number of identification display modes determined by the determination means, and the effect execution means dynamically The game machine AL2 is characterized in that it is constructed so as to be able to execute an effect corresponding to the identification display mode stopped and displayed at a predetermined position after being displayed.

According to the game machine AL2, in addition to the effects of the game machine AL1, the stop position of the identification display mode can also be made interesting, so there is an effect that the amusement of the game can be further improved.

In the gaming machine AL1 or AL2, the dynamic display means is configured to be able to dynamically display the identification display mode again after stopping and displaying the identification display mode. A game machine AL3 characterized in that it is configured such that the type displayed is updated when the target display is performed.

According to the gaming machine AL3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine AL1 or AL2, when the statically displayed identification display mode is re-dynamically displayed, the type of the identification display mode is updated. Each time, the type of identification display mode to be displayed can be aroused new interest. Therefore, there is an effect that the amusement of the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine AL2 or AL3, the effect executing means can execute, as the effect, a notification effect in which information corresponding to the stopped and displayed identification display mode can be identified each time the identification display mode is stopped and displayed. and is configured to be able to execute a specific effect corresponding to the identification display mode notified by the notification effect based on establishment of the effect condition. .

According to the gaming machine AL4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine AL2 or AL3, the stop-displayed identification display mode is notified, so that an effect that is easy for the player to understand can be executed. Therefore, there is an effect that the production effect can be enhanced.

A gaming machine Z1 characterized in that the gaming machine is a slot machine in any one of the gaming machines described above. Among them, the basic configuration of the slot machine is "provided with variable display means for displaying the identification information in a fixed manner after dynamically displaying an identification information string consisting of a plurality of identification information, As a result, the dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has passed, and the stop time and a special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on the condition that the definite identification information of is the specific identification information. In this case, typical examples of game media include coins and medals.

A gaming machine Z2 characterized in that the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine in any one of the gaming machines described above. Above all, the basic structure of a pachinko game machine is provided with an operating handle, and in response to the operation of the operating handle, balls are shot into a predetermined game area, and the balls are ejected into actuating openings arranged at predetermined positions in the game area. For example, the identification information dynamically displayed on the display means is determined and stopped after a predetermined period of time, with the requirement of winning a prize (or passing through an activation opening). In addition, when a special game state occurs, a variable prize winning device (specific prize winning port) arranged at a predetermined position in the game area is opened in a predetermined manner to allow the balls to win prizes, and a value corresponding to the number of prizes won Values (including not only prize balls but also data written to magnetic cards, etc.) can be given.

A gaming machine Z3 characterized in that, in any one of the gaming machines described above, the gaming machine is a combination of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the integrated game machine is "provided with variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string consisting of a plurality of identification information, and an operation means for starting (such as an operation lever) The identification information starts to change due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined period of time has passed. a special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on condition that the fixed identification information at the time of stop is the specific identification information; the ball is used as a game medium; A gaming machine configured to require a predetermined number of balls at the start of dynamic display, and to pay out a large number of balls at the occurrence of a special game state.

10 Pachinko machines (game machines)
22 frame button (operation means)
81 Third pattern display device (display means)
S3302 Determination means S3509 Effect execution means

The present invention relates to a game machine represented by a pachinko machine.

2. Description of the Related Art Some game machines, such as pachinko machines, execute a variable presentation that variably displays a plurality of pieces of identification information in order to indicate the result of a lottery performed based on the winning of a game ball into a starting winning hole. Among such gaming machines, there are those that aim to increase the player's interest in the game by suggesting to the player that the lottery result is winning according to the content of the variable performance to be executed. .

Japanese Patent No. 2514417

However, it has been required to reduce the processing load of display control .

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a game machine capable of reducing the processing load of display control .

In order to achieve this object, the game machine according to claim 1 comprises a discrimination means capable of carrying out discrimination, a display means for displaying identification information for indicating the result of discrimination by the discrimination means, and the display means. and a privilege giving means capable of giving a privilege advantageous to the player when the specific identification information is displayed in the identification information, and the identification information includes at least a plurality of predetermined identification symbols is provided, and the gaming machine is configured to be able to display different symbols corresponding to the identification symbols based on the establishment of a predetermined condition.

According to the gaming machine of claim 1, there is provided a determination means capable of performing determination, a display means for displaying identification information for indicating the result of the determination by the determination means, and the specific said and privilege giving means capable of giving a privilege advantageous to the player when the identification information is displayed , wherein at least a plurality of predetermined identification symbols are given to the identification information. The game machine is configured to be able to display different symbols corresponding to the identification symbols based on the establishment of a predetermined condition.

As a result, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

1 is a front view of a pachinko machine according to a first embodiment; FIG. 1 is a front view of a game board of a pachinko machine; FIG. It is a rear view of the pachinko machine. 1 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a pachinko machine; FIG. It is an exploded front perspective view of the game board and the operation unit. It is an exploded back perspective view of the game board and the operation unit. FIG. 4 is a front view of the operating unit; FIG. 4 is a front view of the operating unit; FIG. 4 is a front view of the operating unit; FIG. 4 is a front view of the operating unit; FIG. 4 is a front view of the operating unit; (a) and (b) are cross-sectional views of the game board and the action unit along line XIIa-XIIa in FIG. 10(a) and 10(b) are cross-sectional views of the game board and the action unit taken along line XIIIa-XIIIa in FIG. 9. FIG. FIG. 10 is a cross-sectional view of the game board and action units taken along line XIV-XIV in FIG. 9; (a) is a rear perspective view of the displacement restricting device, (b) is a front perspective view of the displacement restricting device, and (c) is a front perspective view of the displacement restricting device. It is an exploded rear perspective view of the displacement restricting device. It is an exploded front perspective view of a displacement restricting device. (a) is a rear view of a contact member, (b) is a front view of a guide member, and (c) is a front view of an operating member. 1 is a front perspective view of a pachinko machine; FIG. It is a rear view of a game board and an operation unit. 21(a) and 21(b) are cross-sectional views of the game board and the action unit taken along line XXIa-XXIa of FIG. 20; It is an exploded front perspective view of the game board and the firing effect unit. It is an exploded rear perspective view of the game board and the firing effect unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of the firing effect unit. It is an exploded rear perspective view of the firing effect unit. (a) is a side view of the first light irradiation device as viewed in the direction of arrow R in FIG. 25, and (b) is a side view of the second light irradiation device as viewed in the direction of arrow L in FIG. FIG. 3 is a cross-sectional view of the game board and the firing unit taken along line XXVII-XXVII of FIG. 2; It is a front exploded perspective view of an injection device. It is a front exploded perspective view of an injection device. It is a front exploded perspective view of an injection device. It is a back exploded perspective view of an injection device. It is a back exploded perspective view of an injection device. It is a back exploded perspective view of an injection device. 34(a) is a plan view of the transmission arm member and the lid member as viewed in the direction of arrow XXXIVa in FIG. 28, and FIG. 34(b) is a side view of the transmission arm member and the lid member as viewed in the direction of arrow XXXIVb in FIG. 34(a); and (c) is a partial cross-sectional view of the transmission arm member and the lid member taken along line XXXIVc-XXXIVc of FIG. 34(b). 35(a) is a plan view of the transmission arm member and the lid member as viewed in the direction of arrow XXXIVa in FIG. 28, and (b) is a side view of the transmission arm member and the lid member as viewed in the direction of arrow XXXVb in FIG. 35(a); and (c) is a partial cross-sectional view of the transmission arm member and the lid member taken along line XXXVc-XXXVc of FIG. 35(b). 36(a) is a plan view of the transmission arm member and the lid member as viewed in the direction of arrow XXXIVa in FIG. 28, and FIG. 36(b) is a side view of the transmission arm member and the lid member as viewed in the direction of arrow XXXVIb in FIG. 36(a); and (c) is a partial cross-sectional view of the transmission arm member and the lid member taken along line XXXVIc-XXXVIc of FIG. 36(b). (a) is a plan view of the front transmission member viewed in the direction of arrow XXXVIIa in FIG. 28, and (b) is a plan view of the rear transmission member viewed in the direction of arrow XXXVIIb in FIG. FIG. 29 is a plan view of the injection device as viewed in the direction of arrow XXXVIIa in FIG. 28; FIG. 29 is a plan view of the injection device as viewed in the direction of arrow XXXVIIa in FIG. 28; FIG. 29 is a plan view of the injection device as viewed in the direction of arrow XXXVIIa in FIG. 28; FIG. 29 is a plan view of the injection device as viewed in the direction of arrow XXXVIIa in FIG. 28; 29(a) to (f) are plan views of the linear motion member, the collision member, the contact member, and the front side transmission member as viewed in the direction of arrow XXXVIIa in FIG. 28. FIG. 29(a) to (e) are plan views of the linear motion member, the collision member, the contact member, and the front side transmission member as viewed in the direction of arrow XXXVIIa in FIG. 28. FIG. 29(a) to (f) are plan views of the rear transmission member, the transmission arm member, and the lid member as viewed in the direction of arrow XXXVIIb in FIG. 28. FIG. FIG. 29 is a plan view of the injection device as viewed in the direction of arrow XXXVIIa in FIG. 28; The output state of the detection sensor, the arrangement of the linear motion member, the arrangement of the collision member, the arrangement of the projecting part of the abutment member, and the arrangement of the cylindrical projection of the transmission arm member in accordance with the rotation of the front transmission member and the rear transmission member It is a diagram showing a time-measurement change of. Fig. 10 is a front perspective view of the scaling unit; Fig. 10 is a front perspective view of the scaling unit; FIG. 4 is a rear perspective view of the scaling unit; FIG. 4 is a rear perspective view of the scaling unit; FIG. 4 is a front exploded perspective view of the enlarging/reducing unit; FIG. 4 is a rear exploded perspective view of the enlarging/reducing unit; It is a front exploded perspective view of a production member. It is a rear exploded perspective view of a production member. It is a front view of a function board part. It is a front view of a rotating plate. It is a side view of a rotating plate. (a) is a front perspective view of the telescopic displacement member and the shielding design member, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the telescopic displacement member and the shielding design member. (a) is a front perspective view of the telescopic displacement member and the shielding design member, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the telescopic displacement member and the shielding design member. It is a front view of a function board part. It is a front view of a function board part. It is a front view of a scaling unit. It is a front view of a scaling unit. It is a front view of a scaling unit. FIG. 4 is a rear view of the scaling unit; FIG. 4 is a rear view of the scaling unit; FIG. 4 is a rear view of the scaling unit; It is a front view of a scaling unit. FIG. 4 is a rear view of the scaling unit; It is a front view of a scaling unit. FIG. 4 is a rear view of the scaling unit; (a) and (b) are rear views of the production member. It is a rear view of a production|presentation member. (a) is a back view of the production member, and (b) is a top view of the production member as viewed in the direction of arrow LXXIVb in FIG. 74(a). (a) is a back view of the production member, and (b) is a top view of the production member as viewed in the direction of arrow LXXVb in FIG. 75(a). FIG. 76 is a cross-sectional view of the effect member taken along line LXXVI-LXXVI of FIG. 75; Fig. 2 is a front perspective view of a displacement rotation unit; FIG. 11 is a rear perspective view of the displacement rotation unit; FIG. 3 is a front exploded perspective view of a displacement rotation unit; FIG. 4 is a rear exploded perspective view of the displacement/rotation unit; FIG. 4 is an exploded front perspective view of a lateral slide member; FIG. 4 is an exploded rear perspective view of a lateral slide member; FIG. 8 is a partial cross-sectional view of the displacement rotation unit taken along line LXXXIII-LXXXIII of FIG. 7; It is a perspective view of a wiring arm member. 4 is a perspective view of a path forming member of the wiring guide member; FIG. 86(a) is a side view of the displacement/rotation unit viewed in the direction of arrow L in FIG. 77, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the displacement/rotation unit taken along line LXXXVIb-LXXXVIb of FIG. 86(a). 87(a) is a side view of the displacement/rotation unit viewed in the direction of arrow L in FIG. 77, and (b) is a sectional view of the displacement/rotation unit taken along line LXXXVIIb-LXXXVIIb of FIG. 87(a). 88(a) is a side view of the displacement/rotation unit viewed in the direction of arrow L in FIG. 77, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the displacement/rotation unit taken along line LXXXVIIIb-LXXXVIIIb in FIG. 88(a). 89(a) is a side view of the displacement/rotation unit viewed in the direction of arrow L in FIG. 77, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the displacement/rotation unit taken along line LXXXIXb-LXXXIXb in FIG. 89(a). It is an exploded front perspective view of the game board. It is an exploded rear perspective view of the game board. FIG. 4 is an exploded front perspective view of a center frame, light guide plate rendering means, and decoration means; FIG. 4 is an exploded front perspective view of a center frame, light guide plate rendering means, and decoration means; 4 is an exploded rear perspective view of the center frame, light guide plate rendering means, and decoration means; FIG. 4 is an exploded rear perspective view of the center frame, light guide plate rendering means, and decoration means; FIG. FIG. 3 is a cross-sectional view of the game board and the action unit taken along line XCVI-XCVI in FIG. 2; 3 is a partially enlarged front view of the first decorative member in the range XCVII of FIG. 2; FIG. It is a front view of the game board in the second embodiment. FIG. 11 is a front view of an enlarging/reducing unit in the third embodiment; It is a front view of a rotating plate. The output state of the detection sensor, the arrangement of the linear motion member, the arrangement of the collision member, the arrangement of the protruded portion of the contact member, and the circle of the transmission arm member according to the rotation of the front transmission member and the rear transmission member in the fourth embodiment. It is the figure which showed the chronological change of arrangement|positioning of a columnar protrusion. The output state of the detection sensor, the arrangement of the linear motion member, the arrangement of the collision member, the arrangement of the projecting portion of the contact member, and the circle of the transmission arm member accompanying the rotation of the front transmission member and the rear transmission member in the fifth embodiment. It is the figure which showed the chronological change of arrangement|positioning of a columnar protrusion. FIG. 10 is a cross-sectional view of the game board and the shooting unit in the sixth embodiment taken along line XXVII-XXVII of FIG. 2; It is a rear view of the pachinko machine in 7th Embodiment. FIG. 21 is a front perspective view of a board box in a seventh embodiment; Fig. 2 is a rear perspective view of the board box; (a) is a front view of a board box, and (b) is a side view of the board box. Fig. 4 is a front perspective view of a box cover; It is a back perspective view of a box cover. 109. (a) is a partially enlarged front view of the box cover as viewed in the direction of arrow CXa in FIG. 108, and (b) is a partially enlarged rear view of the box cover as viewed in the direction of arrow CXb in FIG. (a) is a front perspective view of a box base, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the box base. (a) is a front perspective view of a main controller, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the main controller. FIG. 113 is a partially enlarged front perspective view of the main controller in section CXIII of FIG. 112(a); (a) is a front view of the main controller viewed in the direction of arrow CXIVa in FIG. 112(a), and (b) is a side view of the main controller viewed in the direction of arrow CXIVb in FIG. 114(a); 114(c) is a side view of the main controller viewed in the direction of arrow CXIVc in FIG. 114(a). (a) is a partially enlarged front view of the board box with the key operated to the off position, and (b) is a partially enlarged front view of the board box with the key operated to the on position. 115(a) is a partially enlarged side view of the board box viewed in the direction of arrow CXVIa in FIG. 115(a), and (b) is a partially enlarged side view of the board box viewed in the direction of arrow CXVIb in FIG. 115(b). be. 115(a) is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the substrate box along the cutting line CXVIIa-CXVIIa of FIG. 115(a), and (b) is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the substrate box along the cutting line CXVIIb-CXVIIb of FIG. 115(a); It is a diagram. 115(a) is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the substrate box along the cutting line CXVIIIa-CXVIIIa in FIG. 115(a), and (b) is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the substrate box along the cutting line CXVIIIb-CXVIIIb in FIG. 115(a); It is a diagram. 116(a) is a partially enlarged sectional view of the board box taken along the cutting line CXIXa-CXIXa of FIG. 116(a), and (b) is a partially enlarged sectional view of the board box taken along the cutting line CXIXb-CXIXb of FIG. 116(a); It is a diagram. 1 is a front perspective view of a pachinko machine; FIG. 121(a) is a partially enlarged rear view of the board box in the eighth embodiment, and (b) is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the board box taken along the cutting line CXXIb-CXXIb of FIG. 121(a). (a) is a front view of a board box in a ninth embodiment, and (b) is a schematic front view of a pachinko machine. (a) is a front view of a board box in a tenth embodiment, and (b) is a schematic front view of a pachinko machine. It is a front view of the pachinko machine in the first control example. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the first control example. It is an exploded perspective view of a variable winning device. (a) is a La-La sectional view of the variable winning device, (b) is an Lb-Lb sectional view of the variable winning device, and (c) is a top view of the variable winning device. (a) is a rear view of the back cover body showing a state in which the switching member is actuated so that game balls are distributed to the special discharge channel; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a state in which the guide piece of the switching member blocks the opening surface of the entrance of the discharge channel; (a) is a diagram schematically showing area division setting and valid line setting of a display screen, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of an actual display screen. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode of a start screen for repeated button-press effects, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode of a screen for reaching the upper limit of repeated button-press effects. (a) is a view showing an example of the display mode of the button repeated effect result screen No. 1, and (b) is a view showing an example of the display mode of the button repeated effect result screen No. 2. FIG. (a) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode of the continuous button press effect after reaching the upper limit, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode of the follow-up screen during the button repeated effect. It is a figure and (c) is the figure which showed the content of effect setting. (a) is a diagram showing an icon displayable area, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of a suggested mode display screen for icon display effects. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a screen on which the first icon is displayed in the icon display effect, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of the effect result of the icon display effect. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a screen showing another pattern of icon display effect; (a) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode of a button effect start screen, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode of a normal pattern when pressing a button effect. (a) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode of the delay pattern when the button effect is pressed, and (b) is a view showing an example of the display mode of the delay pattern 0.8 seconds after the button effect is pressed. It is a diagram. It is a diagram showing an example of a display mode when the effective period has elapsed during the button effect delay waiting. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a group effect start screen, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of an obtainable character display screen. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a character acquisition screen, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of a group effect end screen. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a last acquisition chance screen, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of a last GET screen. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a battle production start screen, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of a weak attack screen during a battle production. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a strong attack screen during battle production, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of a boss defeat screen during battle production. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a boss escape screen in a battle presentation, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of a co-fighting screen in a battle presentation. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a 14-second pseudo-off effect, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of restart from a pseudo-off stop. It is the timing chart which showed the flow of the button operation content and production|presentation in repeated hit production|presentation. It is the timing chart which showed the flow of each aspect of button production|presentation. It is a timing chart showing the flow of each aspect of the collective production. It is a timing chart showing the flow of the battle production. It is a timing chart showing the flow of pseudo-out performance. FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the game flow of the pachinko machine in the first control example; It is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine in the first control example. 3 is a schematic diagram schematically showing counters and the like provided in a RAM 203 of the main controller 110. FIG. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the ROM of the main controller in the first control example, and (b) schematically shows the configuration of the RAM of the main controller in the first control example. It is a schematic diagram. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a first winning random number table in the first control example, and (b) schematically shows the contents of the first winning type selection table in the first control example. FIG. 10C is a schematic diagram showing a second winning random number table in the first control example; FIG. FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of a variation pattern selection table in the first control example; FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a normal table in the first control example; It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the table for time saving and probability variation in a 1st control example. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the ROM of the audio ramp control device in the first control example, and (b) is the schematic diagram showing the configuration of the RAM of the audio ramp control device in the first control example. 2 is a schematic diagram shown in FIG. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of a variable effect pattern selection table in the first control example, and (b) schematically shows the contents of a normal effect pattern table in the first control example. It is a schematic diagram. FIG. 11 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a time saving/probability variable production pattern table in the first control example; (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of a repeated hit effect selection table in the first control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the upper limit number of times selection table in the first control example. It is a diagram. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the number of times of ending selection table in the first control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the effect result selection table in the first control example. It is a diagram. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of a random display effect selection table in the first control example, and (b) schematically shows the contents of the effect icon storage area in the first control example. FIG. 4C is a schematic diagram, and FIG. 4C is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a display order selection table in the first control example; (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a permutation storage area in the first control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a display mode selection table in the first control example. is. FIG. 10 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a display number selection table in the first control example; It is a schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the delay production|presentation selection table in a 1st control example. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of a group effect selection table in the first control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a character storage area in the first control example. , and (c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the character number selection table in the first control example. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of a battle effect selection table in the first control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the HP selection table in the first control example. and (c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a final remaining HP selection table in the first control example. FIG. 11 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a battle mode selection table in the first control example; 2 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a display control device in a first control example; FIG. (a) to (c) are explanatory diagrams for explaining a power-on image. (a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the rear surface A, and (b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the rear surfaces BD. FIG. 5 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a display data table in the first control example; FIG. 5 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a transfer data table in the first control example; FIG. 10 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a drawing list in the first control example; 7 is a flow chart showing timer interrupt processing executed by the MPU in the main control unit in the first control example; It is the flowchart which showed the special design fluctuation|variation process performed by MPU in the main-control apparatus in the 1st example of control. FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing a game state update process executed by an MPU in the main control device in the first control example; FIG. It is the flowchart which showed the special design fluctuation|variation start processing performed by MPU in the main-control apparatus in the 1st example of control. FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing a starting prize-winning process executed by an MPU in a main controller in the first control example; FIG. 8 is a flowchart showing prefetching processing executed by the MPU in the main controller in the first control example; It is a flow chart showing normal symbol variation processing executed by the MPU in the main control device in the first control example. 4 is a flow chart showing through gate passage processing executed by the MPU in the main controller in the first control example; 4 is a flowchart showing NMI interrupt processing executed by the MPU in the main control unit in the first control example; 7 is a flow chart showing startup processing executed by an MPU in the main controller in the first control example; 7 is a flow chart showing main processing executed by the MPU in the main controller in the first control example; It is the flowchart which showed the jackpot control processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in the 1st example of control. It is the flowchart which showed the big-hit operation|movement setting process performed by MPU in the main-control apparatus in a 1st control example. 4 is a flow chart showing an ending process executed by an MPU in the main controller in the first control example; FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing a winning process executed by an MPU in the main controller in the first control example; FIG. 7 is a flowchart showing abnormality processing executed by the MPU in the main controller in the first control example; FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing startup processing executed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device in the first control example; FIG. 8 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the first control example; 8 is a flowchart showing command determination processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the first control example; 10 is a flow chart showing winning information related processing executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the first control example. It is the flowchart which showed the jackpot related processing performed by MPU in the sound lamp control apparatus in a 1st control example. 8 is a flowchart showing stop processing executed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device in the first control example; 8 is a flowchart showing a variable display setting process executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the first control example; FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing an effect mode setting process executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the first control example; FIG. 9 is a flow chart showing operation effect setting processing executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the first control example; FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing repeated hit effect setting processing executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the first control example; FIG. It is the flowchart which showed the delay production setting process which is executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the first control example. 10 is a flow chart showing battle effect setting processing executed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device in the first control example; FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing a second half battle effect setting process executed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device in the first control example; FIG. It is the flowchart which showed the production|presentation setting processing for time reduction and probability variation performed by MPU in the audio|voice lamp control apparatus in a 1st control example. 10 is a flowchart showing random display effect setting processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the first control example; 10 is a flow chart showing frame button input monitoring/effect processing executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the first control example. It is the flowchart which showed the liquid crystal production|presentation execution management process performed by MPU in the sound lamp control apparatus in a 1st control example. FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing operation effect management processing executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the first control example; FIG. 8 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example; 8 is a flowchart showing boot processing executed by an MPU in the display control device in the first control example; (a) is a flowchart showing command interrupt processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example; (b) is a flow chart executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example; 4 is a flow chart showing V interrupt processing. 8 is a flowchart showing command determination processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example; (a) is a flowchart showing a variation pattern command process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example, (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example 10 is a flowchart showing stop type command processing. 10 is a flow chart showing a display jackpot-related command process executed by an MPU in the display control device in the first control example; (a) is a flowchart showing opening command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example, (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example; FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing round number command processing; FIG. (a) is a flowchart showing ending command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example, (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example; 10 is a flow chart showing V effect command processing. (a) is a flowchart showing rear image change command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example; (b) is a flowchart executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example; 10 is a flow chart showing error command processing performed. 8 is a flowchart showing display setting processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example; 9 is a flowchart showing warning image setting processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example; 8 is a flowchart showing pointer update processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example; (a) is a flowchart showing a transfer setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example, (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example; 10 is a flowchart showing resident image transfer setting processing; 10 is a flowchart showing normal image transfer setting processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example; 8 is a flowchart showing drawing processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example; (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing various devices of a pachinko machine in a second control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of an injection device. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a state in which the effect member is positioned at the operating position, and (b) is a state in which the effect member is positioned at the operating position and the divided motion is executed. FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram schematically showing a state in which the injection device is driven and the granular member is injected. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a state in which the production member moves to the standby position and the granular member returns to the storage area, and (b) is a state in which the rotating member is being driven; 2 is a schematic diagram schematically showing a state in which an injection device is driven and granular members are injected; FIG. FIG. 10 is a schematic diagram schematically showing various devices and effect contents of the pachinko machine in the second control example; FIG. 11 is a timing chart schematically showing states of various devices of the pachinko machine according to the lapse of time when a series of accessory effects are executed in the second control example; FIG. FIG. 11 is a timing chart schematically showing the flow of operation control of the launching accessory at the time of start-up in the second control example; FIG. FIG. 11 is a timing chart schematically showing the flow of motion control of a shooting accessory during a series of role presentations in the second control example; FIG. FIG. 11 is a timing chart schematically showing an abnormality determination result during a series of character performances and the flow of performances to be executed in the second control example; FIG. It is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine in the second control example. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the ROM of the audio ramp control device in the second control example, and (b) is the schematic diagram showing the configuration of the RAM of the audio ramp control device in the second control example. 2 is a schematic diagram shown in FIG. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of a role product action table in the second control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of an abnormality determination table in the second control example. is. FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing startup processing 2 executed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device in the second control example; FIG. 9 is a flow chart showing initial operation processing executed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device in the second control example; 9 is a flow chart showing main processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the second control example; FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing effect mode setting processing 2 executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the second control example; FIG. 13 is a flow chart showing character product effect setting processing executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the second control example; 13 is a flow chart showing a role product effect management process executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the second control example; It is the flowchart which showed the abnormality determination processing during the production|presentation performed by MPU in the sound lamp control apparatus in a 2nd control example. It is the flowchart which showed the abnormality determination process during the 2nd production|presentation performed by MPU in a sound lamp control apparatus in a 2nd control example. It is the flowchart which showed the liquid crystal production|presentation execution management process 2 performed by MPU in the sound lamp control apparatus in a 2nd control example. FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing operation effect management processing 2 executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the second control example; FIG. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode of a screen for starting a repeated button-press effect in a first modified example, and (b) is a view showing an example of a display mode of a screen prompting a specific operation during the repeated button-press effect. It is a diagram. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode when a specific operation is performed after reaching the upper limit in the first modification, and (b) is a view showing an example of a display mode when a specific operation is performed before reaching the upper limit. Fig. 3 shows. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode immediately before the valid period expires without execution of a specific operation in the first modification, and (b) is a display mode when the valid period ends without execution of a specific operation. It is the figure which showed an example. It is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine in the third control example. 13 is a flowchart showing command determination processing 3 executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the third control example; FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing end command reception processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the third control example; FIG. FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing variable display setting processing 3 executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the third control example; FIG. FIG. 13 is a flow chart showing display variation pattern command setting processing executed by an MPU in the sound lamp control device in the third control example; FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing V interrupt processing 3 executed by the MPU in the display control device in the third control example; 13 is a flowchart showing command determination processing 3 executed by the MPU in the display control device in the third control example; FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing press command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the third control example; FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing timer setting processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the third control example; It is the flowchart which showed the production|presentation timer update process performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in a 3rd control example. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the variation pattern selection 4 table in the fourth control example, and (b) schematically shows the contents of the normal 4 table in the fourth control example It is a schematic diagram, and (c) is a schematic diagram which showed typically 4 tables for time saving and probability variation in a 4th control example. It is the flowchart which showed the special design fluctuation|variation process 4 performed by MPU in the main-control apparatus in the 4th control example. It is the flowchart which showed the special design fluctuation|variation start processing 4 performed by MPU in the main control unit in the 4th control example. It is the flowchart which showed the special design lottery process performed by MPU in the main control unit in the 4th control example. FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing command determination processing 4 executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the fourth control example; FIG. FIG. 14 is a flow chart showing result command processing executed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device in the third control example; FIG. (a) is a diagram showing an example of an obtainable character display screen in a modification of the first control example, and (b) is an obtainable character display screen of a chance UP pattern in a modification of the first control example. It is the figure which showed an example. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an example of an obtainable character display screen of a combination that confirms a big win in a modified example of the first control example; FIG. 11 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of a character storage area in a modified example of the first control example; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing the defined contents of the character lottery table in the modified example of the first control example; It is the figure which showed the defined content of the number lottery table in the modification of the 1st control example. 10 is a flowchart showing battle effect setting processing 5 executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the modified example of the first control example; FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing array setting processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the modified example of the first control example; FIG. FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing number setting processing executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the modified example of the first control example; FIG. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a display mode in a modified example of icon display effect; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing the prescribed contents of an enlargement rate selection table in a modified example of icon display effect; 13 is a flow chart showing a random display effect setting process A executed by an MPU in the sound lamp control device in a modified example of icon display effect; (a) is a diagram showing an example of a demonstration effect state in the modified example of the effect of the projectile accessory. (b) is a diagram showing an example of the end processing of the demonstration effect state in the modified example of the effect of the projectile accessory. (a) is a diagram showing a state in which the projectile accessory is positioned at the reference position in the modification of the performance of the projectile accessory. (b) is a diagram showing a state in which the projectile accessory is positioned at the preparation A position in the modification of the performance of the projectile accessory. (c) is a diagram showing a state in which the projectile accessory is positioned at the preparation B position in the modification of the performance of the projectile accessory. 14 is a flow chart showing a role performance management process B executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the modified example of the performance of the shooting role. It is the flowchart which showed the production|presentation mode setting process B performed by MPU in a sound lamp control apparatus in the production|presentation modification of a shooting accessory.

BEST MODE FOR CARRYING OUT THE INVENTION Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, an embodiment in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko game machine (hereinafter simply referred to as "pachinko machine") 10 will be described as a first embodiment with reference to FIGS. 1 to 97. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of a game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10. FIG.

In the following description, with respect to the pachinko machine 10 in the state shown in FIG. 1, the front side of the paper is defined as the front (front) side, and the back side of the paper is defined as the rear (rear) side. Also, with respect to the pachinko machine 10 in the state shown in FIG. ) side. Further, arrows UD, LR, and FB in the drawing (see, for example, FIG. 2) indicate the up-down direction, left-right direction, and front-rear direction of the pachinko machine 10, respectively.

As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer frame 11 whose outer shell is formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer frame 11 formed in substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11. and an inner frame 12 supported so as to be openable and closable. In order to support the inner frame 12, the outer frame 11 is provided with metal hinges 18 at two upper and lower positions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1). A frame 12 is supported toward the front side so that it can be opened and closed.

A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning slots 63 and 64, etc. is detachably attached to the inner frame 12 from the back side. Balls (game balls) flow down in front of the game board 13 to play a pinball game. The inner frame 12 includes a ball shooting unit 112a (see FIG. 4) that shoots a ball to the front area of the game board 13, and a shooting unit that guides the ball shot from the ball shooting unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13. A rail (not shown) or the like is attached.

On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 covering the front upper side and a lower tray unit 15 covering the lower side are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower tray unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached at two upper and lower positions on the left side of the front view (see FIG. 1). 14 and a lower tray unit 15 are supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side. The locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are respectively released by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

The front frame 14 is assembled with decorative resin parts, electric parts, and the like, and has a window portion 14c having a substantially elliptical opening at its substantially central portion. A glass unit 16 having two sheet glasses is arranged on the back side of the front frame 14, and the front side of the game board 13 can be visually recognized on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.例文帳に追加

The front frame 14 has an upper tray 17 for storing balls projected to the front side and formed in a substantially box-like shape with an open upper surface, and the upper tray 17 discharges prize balls, rental balls, and the like. The bottom surface of the upper tray 17 is inclined downward to the right when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the inclination guides the ball thrown into the upper tray 17 to the ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 4). A frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17 . The frame button 22 is operated by the player when, for example, the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) is changed, or the content of the super ready-to-win effect is changed. be.

The front frame 14 is provided with light-emitting means such as various lamps around its periphery (for example, corner portions). These light emitting means are controlled to change the light emitting mode by lighting or blinking in response to changes in the game state such as when a big win is made or when a predetermined ready-to-win state is reached, and play a role of enhancing the effect during the game. Illuminated portions 29 to 33 containing light emitting means such as LEDs are provided on the periphery of the window portion 14c. In the pachinko machine 10, these electric decoration parts 29 to 33 function as production lamps such as big win lamps, and the respective electric decoration parts 29 to 33 are lit by lighting or blinking of built-in LEDs at the time of a big win or a ready-to-win production. Alternatively, it flashes to indicate that the jackpot is in progress or that the player is in the process of reaching one step before the jackpot. In addition, an indicator lamp 34 is provided at the upper left portion of the front frame 14 when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1). The display lamp 34 has a built-in light emitting means such as an LED and can indicate that prize balls are being paid out and that an error has occurred.

In addition, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized on the lower side of the right electrical decoration part 32, and a pasting space K1 (Fig. 2) can be visually recognized from the front of the pachinko machine 10. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, a plated member 36 made of ABS resin, which is plated with chromium, is attached to the area around the electric decorations 29 to 33 in order to create more splendor.

A ball rental operation unit 40 is arranged below the window portion 14c. The ball rental operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41 , a ball rental button 42 and a return button 43 . When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated with banknotes, cards, etc. inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the balls are released according to the operation. Lending is done. Specifically, the frequency display section 41 is an area in which the balance information of the card or the like is displayed, and the built-in LED is turned on to display the remaining amount in numbers as the balance information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain lending balls based on information recorded on a card or the like (recording medium), and lending balls are supplied to the top tray 17 as long as the card or the like has a balance. be done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of the card or the like inserted in the card unit. A pachinko machine in which balls are directly lent to the upper tray 17 from a ball leasing device or the like without going through the card unit, that is, a so-called cash machine, does not require the ball leasing operation unit 40. A decorative seal or the like may be added to the installation portion to make the parts configuration common. It is possible to achieve commonality between a pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine.

In the lower tray unit 15 positioned below the upper tray 17, a lower tray 50 for storing balls that could not be stored in the upper tray 17 is formed in a substantially box-like shape with an open upper surface. there is On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 is provided which is operated by the player to hit the ball in front of the game board 13. As shown in FIG.

Inside the operating handle 51, there are a touch sensor 51a for permitting the driving of the ball shooting unit 112a, a shooting stop switch 51b for stopping the shooting of the ball during the pressing operation, and a rotation of the operating handle 51. A variable resistor (not shown) for detecting a dynamic operation amount (rotational position) based on a change in electrical resistance is incorporated. When the operating handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes corresponding to the amount of rotation operation. A ball is shot with a strength (shooting intensity) corresponding to , and is hit in front of the game board 13 with a flying distance corresponding to the player's operation. Further, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the firing stop switch 51b are turned off.

A ball extraction lever 52 is provided at the lower front portion of the lower tray 50 for operation when discharging the balls stored in the lower tray 50 downward. The ball extracting lever 52 is always biased to the right, and when it is slid to the left against the bias, the bottom opening formed in the bottom of the lower tray 50 is opened. The ball naturally falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball extracting lever 52 is normally performed with a box (generally called a "senryo box") placed below the lower tray 50 to receive the balls ejected from the lower tray 50 . The operation handle 51 is arranged on the right side of the lower tray 50 as described above, and the ashtray 53 is attached on the left side of the lower tray 50 .

As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 includes a base plate 60 which is cut into a substantially square shape when viewed from the front. , 62, a general prize-winning port 63, a first prize-winning port 64, a second prize-winning port 640, a variable prize-winning device 65, a through gate 67, a variable display device unit 80, etc. 1) is attached to the back side (or front side).

The base plate 60 is formed from a wooden plate member. The general winning port 63, the first winning port 64, the second winning port 640, and the variable display device unit 80 are arranged in through holes (see, for example, FIG. 5) formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and are arranged on the game board. It is fixed by a tapping screw or the like from the front side of 13 . Note that the base plate 60 may be made of a light-transmitting resin material. In this case, it is possible for the player to visually recognize various structures arranged on the back side of the base plate 60 from the front side.

The front central portion of the game board 13 can be viewed from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. As shown in FIG. Mainly referring to FIG. 2, the configuration of the game board 13 will be described below.

In front of the game board 13, an outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially circular arc is planted, and a strip-shaped metal plate is placed inside the outer rail 62 in the same manner as the outer rail 62. An arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed by is erected. The front outer periphery of the game board 13 is surrounded by the inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62, and the front and rear sides are surrounded by the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1). A game area is formed in which a game is played by the behavior of . The game area is the front surface of the game board 13 and is defined by two rails 61 and 62 and a resin outer edge member 73 connecting the rails (a winning opening is provided and a shot is fired). area where the ball flows down).

The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the balls shot from the ball shooting unit 112a (see FIG. 4) to the upper part of the game board 13. As shown in FIG. A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the tip of the inner rail 61 (upper left part in FIG. 2) to prevent the ball once guided to the upper part of the game board 13 from returning into the ball guide passage again. be done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flying portion of the ball. is attenuated and rebounded toward the center.

First pattern display devices 37A and 37B having a plurality of LEDs as light emitting means and a 7-segment display are arranged in the lower left part of the game area when viewed from the front (lower left part in FIG. 2). The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B are for displaying according to each control performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4), and mainly display the game state of the pachinko machine 10. FIG. In this embodiment, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B are configured to be used properly depending on whether the ball has won the first prize winning port 64 or the second prize winning port 640.例文帳に追加Specifically, when the ball enters the first winning hole 64, the first symbol display device 37A operates, while when the ball enters the second winning hole 640, the first The pattern display device 37B is configured to operate.

In addition, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B use LEDs to indicate whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the variable probability, the time saving mode, or the normal state by the lighting state, or indicate whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the changing state by the lighting state. Whether the stop pattern is a pattern corresponding to the probability variable jackpot, a pattern corresponding to the normal jackpot, or a missing pattern is indicated by the lighting state, the number of pending balls is indicated by the lighting state, and a 7-segment display device indicates the round during the jackpot. Display numbers and errors. The plurality of LEDs are configured so that each LED has a different emission color (for example, red, green, and blue), and depending on the combination of the emission colors, it is possible to suggest various game states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs. can.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, a lottery is performed when a prize is won in the first prize winning port 64 and the second prize winning port 640.例文帳に追加In the lottery, the pachinko machine 10 determines whether or not it is a big win (big win lottery), and also determines the kind of big win when it is determined as a big win. As the jackpot type determined here, a 15R probability variable jackpot, a 4R probability variable jackpot, and a 15R normal jackpot are prepared. The first pattern display devices 37A and 37B not only indicate whether or not the result of the lottery is a jackpot as a stop pattern after the end of variation, but also indicate a pattern corresponding to the jackpot type when the jackpot is won. .

Here, the “15R probability variable jackpot” is a probability variable jackpot that shifts to a high probability state after the maximum number of rounds is 15 rounds, and the “4R probability variable jackpot” is a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 4 rounds. It is a variable jackpot that shifts to a high probability state after . In addition, "15R normal jackpot" is a jackpot that shifts to a low probability state after a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 15 rounds, and a time-saving state during a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 fluctuations). be.

In addition, the "high probability state" refers to a state in which the probability of a subsequent jackpot is increased as an added value after the end of the jackpot, a time during so-called probability fluctuation (probability change), in other words, a game that is easy to shift to a special game state It is the state of The high-probability state (during probability variation) in the present embodiment includes a game state in which the winning probability of the second symbol (to be described later) is increased and the ball is likely to enter the second winning hole 640 . "Low probability state" refers to a state in which the odds are not variable, and the jackpot probability is normal, that is, a state in which the jackpot probability is lower than when the odds are variable. In addition, the time-saving state (during time-saving) of the "low-probability state" is a state in which the jackpot probability is normal, and the jackpot probability remains the same, but only the winning probability of the second symbol is increased, and the second winning port 640 It refers to the state of the game in which the ball is likely to win a prize. On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state, it means that the game is in a state of neither variable probability nor time reduction (state in which neither the jackpot probability nor the second pattern winning probability is increased).

During the probability change or the time reduction, not only the winning probability of the second symbol is increased, but also the time when the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is opened is changed, and the time is longer than during normal. set. When the electric accessory 640a is in the open state (open state), the balls enter the second winning port 640 more than when the electric accessory 640a is in the closed state (closed state). becomes easy. Therefore, during the probability change or the time reduction, the ball is likely to enter the second winning hole 640, and the number of times the big winning lottery is performed can be increased.

The state change between the open state and the closed state of the electric accessory 640a is caused by the opening/closing operation of the opening/closing plate which has a rotating shaft at the lower end and is rotationally displaced in a manner of tilting or standing toward the game area. When the electric accessory 640a is in the open state, the ball is easily guided to the second winning port 640 along the upper surface of the opening/closing plate, and when the electric accessory 640a is in the closed state, the opening/closing plate separates the game area and the second prize winning port 640. By closing the space between the second prize winning port 640 and the second prize winning port 640, it is difficult for the ball to enter the second prize winning port 640.例文帳に追加

In addition, instead of changing the opening time of the electric accessory 640a associated with the second winning opening 640 during the probability change or the time saving, or in addition to changing the opening time, A change may be made to increase the number of times the accessory 640a is released more than during normal times. In addition, the winning probability of the second symbol is not changed during the probability change or the time reduction, and the electric accessory 640a is opened at the time when the electric accessory 640a associated with the second winning opening 640 is opened and once. At least one of the number of times may be changed. In addition, during the probability change or the time reduction, the time for opening the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 and the number of times the electric accessory 640a is opened per time are not changed. Only the winning probability may be changed so as to be increased compared to normal.

The game area is provided with a plurality of general winning holes 63 through which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls win. A variable display device unit 80 is arranged at a position (behind the window portion of the base plate 60) that can be viewed through the central portion of the game area. In the variable display device unit 80, the winning (starting winning) to the first winning port 64 and the second winning port 640 is used as a trigger, and while synchronizing with the variable display on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the third symbol is displayed. It is composed of a third pattern display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply referred to as a "display device") that performs variable display, and an LED that variably displays the second pattern triggered by the passage of the ball through the through gate 67. A second pattern display device (not shown) is provided. A center frame 86 is arranged on the base plate 60 so as to surround the third pattern display device 81 when viewed from the front.

The third pattern display device 81 is composed of a large liquid crystal display with a size of about 9 inches to 19 inches. Three symbol rows, middle and bottom, are displayed. Each pattern row is composed of a plurality of patterns (third patterns), and these third patterns are horizontally scrolled for each pattern row to variably display the third pattern on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81.例文帳に追加It's like In the third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment, the game state is displayed by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B under the control of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4). Decorative display according to the display of the pattern display devices 37A and 37B is performed. Incidentally, instead of the display device, for example, the third symbol display device 81 may be constructed using a reel or the like.

The second pattern display device alternately lights up a symbol "O" and a symbol "X" as a display symbol (second symbol (not shown)) for a predetermined time each time the ball passes through the through gate 67. This is for variable display. In the pachinko machine 10, when it is detected that the ball has passed through the through gate 67, a winning lottery is performed. As a result of the winning lottery, if the winning lottery is won, the second symbol display device stops and displays the symbol "○" after the second symbol is variably displayed. Further, if the result of the winning lottery is a loss, the symbol "x" is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variable display of the third symbol.

In the pachinko machine 10, when the variable display on the second symbol display device stops at a predetermined symbol ("○" symbol in this embodiment), the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning hole 640 is displayed for a predetermined period of time. is configured to be activated (opened) only.

The time required for the variable display of the second symbol is set so as to be shorter during the variable probability or during the time saving than during the normal gaming state. As a result, the variable display of the second symbol is performed in a short time during the probability change and the time reduction, so that more winning lotteries can be performed than during normal times.
Therefore, the chance of winning in the winning lottery increases, so that the player can be given more opportunities to open the electric accessary 640a of the second winning opening 640.例文帳に追加Therefore, it is possible to create a state in which the ball is likely to enter the second winning hole 640 during the probability variation and the time saving.

In addition, during the probability change or the time reduction, other methods such as increasing the winning probability, increasing the opening time or the number of openings of the electric accessory 640a for one hit, etc. When the ball is in a state where it is easy to win a prize, the time required for the variable display of the second symbol may be fixed regardless of the game state. On the other hand, if the time required for the variable display of the second symbol is set shorter than normal during the variable probability or during the time saving, the winning probability may be constant regardless of the game state, and one winning The opening time and the number of openings of the electric accessory 640a may be constant regardless of the game state.

The through gate 67 is assembled to the game board 13 in the area on the right side of the variable display device unit 80, and is configured so that a part of the balls shot to the game board 13 can pass through. When the ball passes through the through gate 67, a winning lottery for the second symbol is performed. After the winning lottery, the variable display is performed on the second symbol display device, and if the result of the winning lottery is a win, the symbol "○" is displayed as a stop symbol of the variable display, and if the result of the winning lottery is a loss. For example, an "x" symbol is displayed as a variable display stop symbol.

The number of times the ball passes through the through gate 67 is suspended up to a total of four times, and the number of suspended balls is displayed by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B described above, and is displayed on the second symbol suspension lamp (not shown). is also displayed. Four second pattern holding lamps are provided for the maximum number of holdings, and are arranged symmetrically below the third pattern display device 81 .

The variable display of the second pattern is performed by switching between lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second pattern display device as in the present embodiment. A part of the pattern display device 81 may be used. Similarly, the lighting of the second symbol reservation lamp may be performed by a part of the third symbol display device 81 .

Also, the maximum number of held balls to pass through the through gate 67 is not limited to four times, and may be set to three times or less, or five times or more (for example, eight times). Also, the number of through gates 67 to be assembled is not limited to one, and may be, for example, two.

Also, the mounting position of the through gate 67 is not limited to the right side of the variable display device unit 80, but may be, for example, the right and left sides of the variable display device unit 80, or the lower side. In addition, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the lighting display may not be performed by the second symbol reservation lamp.

Below the variable display device unit 80, a first winning hole 64 through which balls can win is arranged. When the ball enters the first winning hole 64, a first winning hole switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main controller 110 is caused to turn on the first winning hole switch. (See FIG. 4), a lottery for a big hit is made, and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37A.

On the other hand, on the lower right side of the through gate 67 when viewed from the front, a second winning hole 640 through which a ball can win is arranged. When the ball enters the second winning hole 640, a second winning hole switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main controller 110 is caused to turn on the second winning hole switch. (See FIG. 4), a lottery for a big win is made, and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37B. It should be noted that the arrangement of the second winning openings 640 is not limited to this. For example, it may be below the first prize winning opening 64 when viewed from the front, or it may be on the left side of the left-right center of the game area.

In addition, the first prize winning port 64 and the second prize winning port 640 are also one of the prize winning ports from which five balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls win. In this embodiment, the number of prize balls paid out when the balls enter the first prize winning port 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when the balls enter the second prize winning port 640 are configured to be the same. , the number of prize balls paid out when the balls enter the first prize winning port 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when the balls enter the second prize winning port 640 are different numbers, for example, the number of balls to the first prize winning port 64 The number of prize balls to be paid out when is won may be set to three, and the number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball enters the second prize winning port 640 may be set to be five.

An electric accessory 640a is attached to the second prize winning port 640. - 特許庁This electric accessory 640a is configured to be openable and closable, and normally the electric accessory 640a is in a closed state (reduced state), making it difficult for the ball to enter the second winning opening 640. On the other hand, as a result of the variable display of the second symbol triggered by the passage of the ball through the through gate 67, when the symbol "○" is displayed on the second symbol display device, the electric accessory 640a is in the open state (enlarged state), which makes it easier for the ball to enter the second winning hole 640.例文帳に追加

As described above, during the probability variation and during the time saving, the probability of hitting the second symbol is higher than during normal, and the time required for the variation display of the second symbol is short, so in the variation display of the second symbol "○ ” is more likely to be displayed, and the number of times the electric accessory 640a is in the open state (enlarged state) increases. Furthermore, the time during which the electric accessory 640a is opened is also longer during the variable probability and the shorter working hours than during the normal time. Therefore, it is possible to create a state in which the ball is more likely to enter the second winning hole 640 during the variable probability and the shorter working hours compared to the normal time.

Here, when the ball enters the first prize winning port 64 and when the ball enters the second prize winning port 640, the probability of winning the jackpot is the same in both the low probability state and the high probability state. However, the probability of winning a 15R probability variable jackpot as the type of jackpot selected in the event of a jackpot is higher when the ball enters the second winning port 640 than when the ball enters the first winning port 64. is set. On the other hand, the first prize winning port 64 does not have the electric accessory 640a like the second prize winning port 640, and is in a state where balls can always win prizes.

Therefore, during normal operation, the electric accessory 640a associated with the second winning opening 640 is often closed, and it is difficult to win the second winning opening 640. Therefore, the first winning opening 64 without the electric accessory 640a , so that the ball passes through the left side of the variable display device unit 80 (so-called "left shot"), and by winning in the first prize opening 64, there are many chances of winning a big lottery. It is advantageous for the player to aim to be.

On the other hand, during the probability change or the time reduction, by passing the ball through the through gate 67, the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning port 640 is likely to be in an open state, and the second winning port 640 is in a state where it is easy to win. Therefore, the ball is shot toward the second winning hole 640 so that the ball passes the right side of the variable display device 80 (so-called "right hitting"), passes through the through gate 67, and opens the electric accessory 640a. It is advantageous for the player to aim for a 15R probability variable jackpot by winning the second prize winning port 640 while setting the state.

It should be noted that, unlike the pachinko machine 10 in the present embodiment, when the configuration of the game board 13 is left-right symmetrical, aiming at the first winning hole 64 with "right-handed hitting" or "left-handed hitting" at the second It is also possible to aim at the winning opening 640 . Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment provides the player with information on how to shoot balls according to the game state of the pachinko machine 10 (whether the game is in variable probability, short time, or normal). It is possible to eliminate the need to change the to "left-handed" and "right-handed". Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the annoyance of changing the way the ball is hit.

On the other hand, the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment is configured so that it is not possible to aim at the first winning hole 64 with a "right-handed" shot, and a ball shot with a "left-handed" shot does not pass through the through gate 67. It is configured. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment provides the player with information on how to shoot balls according to the game state of the pachinko machine 10 (whether the game is in variable probability, short time, or normal). can be requested to be changed to "left-handed" and "right-handed." Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game from becoming sluggish by adding the playability of changing the way the ball is hit.

A variable prize winning device 65 (see FIG. 2) is disposed on the right side of the first prize winning port 64, and a specific prize winning port 65a is provided substantially in the center thereof. In the pachinko machine 10, when the jackpot lottery performed due to the winning of the first prize winning port 64 or the second prize winning port 640 results in a jackpot, after a predetermined time (fluctuation time) elapses, the jackpot stop symbol is displayed. The first symbol display device 37A or the first symbol display device 37B is turned on so as to cause the first symbol display device 37A or the first symbol display device 37B to be lit, and the third symbol display device 81 is caused to display the stop symbol corresponding to the big win, thereby indicating the occurrence of the big win. After that, the game state transitions to a special game state (jackpot) in which the balls are likely to win. As this special game state, the specific winning opening 65a which is normally closed is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have passed or until 10 balls have been won).

The specific winning opening 65a is closed after a predetermined period of time has passed, and after the closure, the specific winning opening 65a is opened again for a predetermined period of time. The opening and closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a can be repeated up to 15 times (15 rounds), for example. The state in which this opening and closing operation is performed is one form of a special game state that is advantageous to the player, and the player is given a game value (game value) by paying out a larger amount of prize balls than usual. is done.

Incidentally, the special game state is not limited to the form described above. A large opening that is opened and closed separately from the specific winning opening 65a is provided in the game area, and when the LED corresponding to the big win is lit in the first pattern display devices 37A and 37B, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time, and the A special game is a game state in which a large opening provided separately from the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time and a predetermined number of times when a ball enters the specific winning opening 65a while the specific winning opening 65a is open. You may make it form as a state. In addition, the number of specific winning holes 65a is not limited to one, and one or a plurality of two or more (for example, three) may be arranged. For example, it may be the lower right side of the first prize winning port 64, the lower left side of the first prize winning port 64, the left or right side of the variable display device unit 80, or the upper side.

An affixing space K1 for affixing a certificate stamp, an identification label, or the like is provided at the right corner of the lower side of the game board 13. 35 (see FIG. 1).

The game board 13 is provided with an out port 71 . Balls that flow down the game area and do not win in any of the winning openings 63, 64, 65a, 640 are guided through an out opening 71 to a ball discharge path (not shown). The out ports 71 are arranged in pairs on the left and right sides of the second prize winning port 640 .

The game board 13 is provided with a large number of nails for properly dispersing and adjusting the falling direction of the balls, and various members (accessories) such as windmills.

As shown in FIG. 3, the back side of the pachinko machine 10 is mainly provided with control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 . The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main controller 110), an audio lamp control board (audio lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control device 111), a launch control board (launch control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

The back pack unit 94 includes a back pack 92 forming a protective cover and a dispensing unit 93 as a unit. In addition, each control board has an MPU as a 1-chip microcomputer that manages each control, a port that communicates with various devices, a random number generator that is used for various lotteries, and is used for time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit or the like is mounted as required.

The main control device 110, the sound lamp control device 113, the display control device 114, the payout control device 111, the firing control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. . Each of the board boxes 100 to 104 has a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other to accommodate each controller and each board.

In addition, the board box 100 (main controller 110) and the board box 102 (dispensing control device 111 and firing control device 112) connect the box base and the box cover in an unopenable manner (caulking structure) by a sealing unit (not shown). consolidation). A sealing seal (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover over the box base and the box cover. The sealing seal is made of a brittle material, and if the sealing seal is peeled off in order to open the circuit board boxes 100, 102, or if the circuit board boxes 100, 102 are forcibly opened, the box base and the box cover may be damaged. cut to the side. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether the substrate boxes 100, 102 have been opened.

The dispensing unit 93 includes a tank 130 located at the top of the back pack unit 94 and open upward, a tank rail 131 connected to the lower side of the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a tank rail 131 downstream of the tank rail 131. a case rail 132 vertically connected to the side of the case rail 132; ing. The tank 130 is successively replenished with balls supplied from the island facilities of the game hall, and a payout device 133 pays out the required number of balls as appropriate. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131 .

The payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the firing control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor control knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erasure switch 122. The state recovery switch 120 is operated to eliminate ball clogging (return to normal state) when a dispensing error such as a ball clogging in the dispensing motor 216 (see FIG. 4) occurs. The operating knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on when the pachinko machine 10 is to be returned to its initial state.

Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. As shown in FIG.

The main control unit 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 storing various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the MPU 201, and a memory for temporarily storing various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 202. A RAM 203 and other various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission/reception circuit are incorporated. In the main control unit 110, the MPU 201 performs main processing of the pachinko machine 10, such as the setting of the jackpot lottery, the display settings of the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B and the third symbol display device 81, and the lottery of the display results of the second symbol display device. to run.

In addition, various commands are transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sub-controllers by the data transmission/reception circuit in order to instruct the sub-controllers such as the payout controller 111 and the sound lamp controller 113 to operate. Such commands are sent in only one direction from the main controller 110 to the sub-controllers.

The RAM 203 stores various areas, counters, flags, contents of internal registers of the MPU 201, return addresses of control programs executed by the MPU 201, etc., and a stack area for storing various flags, counters, I/O, and the like. and a work area (work area) in which values are stored. The RAM 203 is configured to retain (back up) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply 115 even after the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, and all the data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

When power is interrupted due to power failure or the like, the RAM 203 stores the stack pointer and the values of each register at the time of power interruption (including power failure; the same applies hereinafter). On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including when the power is turned on due to the cancellation of the power failure; the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power was cut off based on the information stored in the RAM 203 . Writing to the RAM 203 is executed by the main process (not shown) when the power is turned off, and restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed by the start-up process (not shown) when the power is turned on. The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured to receive a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when power is shut off due to a power failure or the like. , NMI interrupt processing (not shown) is immediately executed as power failure processing.

An input/output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 via a bus line 204 comprising an address bus and a data bus. In the input/output port 205, the payout control device 111, the sound lamp control device 113, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the second symbol display device, the second symbol reservation lamp, and the opening/closing plate of the specific winning opening 65a are arranged in the front-rear direction. A solenoid 209 including a large opening solenoid for driving opening and closing and a solenoid for driving the electric accessory 640a is connected, and the MPU 201 transmits various commands and control signals to these via the input/output port 205. .

The input/output port 205 also includes various switches 208 including a group of switches (not shown) and a group of sensors including a slide position detection sensor S and a rotation position detection sensor R, and a RAM erasure switch circuit 253 provided in the power supply 115, which will be described later. , and the MPU 201 executes various processes based on the signals output from the various switches 208 and the RAM erasing signal SG2 output from the RAM erasing switch circuit 253 .

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and rental balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 212 storing control programs executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 used as a work memory and the like.

The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area for storing the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211, and various flags and counters. , and a work area (work area) in which values such as I/O are stored. The RAM 213 is configured to retain (back up) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply 115 even after the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, and all the data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. As with the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is also configured to receive a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when power is shut off due to a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, NMI interrupt processing (not shown) is immediately executed as power failure processing.

An input/output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 215 is connected to the main controller 110, the dispensing motor 216, the launch controller 112, and the like. Although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected with a prize ball detection switch for detecting paid prize balls. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout controller 111 but not to the main controller 110 .

The shooting control device 112 controls the ball shooting unit 112a so that the shooting strength of the ball corresponds to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 when the main controller 110 issues an instruction to shoot the ball. . The ball shooting unit 112a has a shooting solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the operation is performed on the condition that the shooting stop switch 51b for stopping the shooting of the ball is turned off (not operated). A shooting solenoid is energized corresponding to the amount of rotation operation (rotation position) of the handle 51 , and the ball is shot with strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51 .

The audio lamp control device 113 outputs audio from an audio output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, outputs lighting and extinguishing from a lamp display device (electrical parts 29 to 33, display lamp 34, etc.) 227, and changes production (variation It controls the setting of the display mode of the third pattern display device 81 performed by the display control device 114 such as display) and advance notice effect. The MPU 221, which is an arithmetic device, has a ROM 222 storing control programs executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 used as a work memory and the like.

An input/output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 comprising an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 225 is connected to the main control device 110, the display control device 114, the audio output device 226, the lamp display device 227, the other device 228, the frame button 22, and the like. Other devices 228 include drive motors MT1, MT2, MT3, MT4, MT5, and the like.

Sound lamp control device 113, based on various commands (fluctuation pattern command, stop type command, etc.) received from main control device 110, determines the display mode of third symbol display device 81, and sends the determined display mode to the command The display control device 114 is notified by (display variation pattern command, display stop type command, etc.). In addition, the sound lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, changes the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 or super reach. The display control device 114 is instructed to change the effect contents of the hour. When the stage is changed, a rear image change command including information about the stage after the change is transmitted to the display control device 114 in order to display the rear image corresponding to the stage after the change on the third pattern display device 81. . Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third design, which is the main image to be displayed on the third design display device 81 . The display control device 114 displays various images on the third pattern display device 81 in accordance with commands transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 .

Also, the sound lamp control device 113 receives a command (display command) representing the display content of the third pattern display device 81 from the display control device 114 . In the audio lamp control device 113, based on the display command received from the display control device 114, in accordance with the display content of the third pattern display device 81, output the audio corresponding to the display content from the audio output device 226, Lighting and extinguishing of the lamp display device 227 are controlled in accordance with the display contents.

The display control device 114 is connected to the sound lamp control device 113 and the third pattern display device 81, and based on the command received from the sound lamp control device 113, the third pattern display device 81 changes the third pattern, etc. It controls the display. Further, the display control device 114 appropriately transmits a display command for notifying the display contents of the third pattern display device 81 to the sound lamp control device 113 . The sound lamp control device 113 outputs sound from the sound output device 226 in accordance with the display contents indicated by this display command, so that the display of the third pattern display device 81 and the sound output from the sound output device 226 are matched. be able to.

The power supply device 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to power failure, etc., and a RAM provided with a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3). and an erase switch circuit 253 . The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies necessary operating voltages to the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As an overview, the power supply unit 251 takes in a voltage of 24 volts supplied from the outside, various switches such as the various switches 208, solenoids such as the solenoid 209, a voltage of 12 volts for driving a motor, etc. A voltage of 5 volts for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, etc. are generated, and these 12 volts, 5 volts and backup voltages are supplied to the controllers 110 to 114 and the like as necessary voltages.

The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 at the time of power failure due to power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the voltage of stable DC 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power shutdown, power shutdown) has occurred when this voltage is less than 22 volts. Then, a power failure signal SG1 is output to the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute NMI interrupt processing. Even after the stable DC voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts, the power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is the driving voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient to execute the NMI interrupt processing. is configured to maintain a normal value. Therefore, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (not shown).

The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the main controller 110 clears the backup data when the RAM erase signal SG2 is input, and controls the payout initialization command for clearing the backup data in the payout control device 111. Send to device 111 .

Next, the structures of the game board 13 and the operation unit 500 will be described. 5 is an exploded front perspective view of the game board 13 and the action unit 500, and FIG. 6 is an exploded rear perspective view of the game board 13 and the action unit 500. FIG. 5 and 6, illustration of the liquid crystal display device (variable display device unit 80) disposed in the opening 511a of the rear case 510 is omitted, and the rear side can be seen through the opening 511a. Further, FIG. 2 will be referred to as needed in the description of FIGS.

The operation unit 500 includes a box-shaped rear case 510 whose front side is opened from a bottom wall portion 511 and an outer wall portion 512 erected from the outer edge of the bottom wall portion 511 . A rectangular opening 511 a is formed in the center of the bottom wall portion 511 of the rear case 510 , so that the rear case 510 is formed in a rectangular frame shape when viewed from the front. The opening 511a is formed in a size corresponding to the outer shape (outer edge) of the display area of the third pattern display device 81 (that is, the display area of the third pattern display device 81 can be divided when viewed from the front).

The back case 510 extends as a plane plate along the back surface of the game board 13 (for example, arranged in parallel) at the front end of the outer wall part 512, and faces the game board 13 in the assembled state (see FIG. 2). A support plate portion 513 for supporting is provided.

The support plate portion 513 includes a positioning convex portion 513a that protrudes toward the front side in a shape that can be fitted into a fitting concave portion (not shown) formed in the base plate 60 of the game board 13, and the base plate 60. and a plurality of insertion holes 513b through which fastening screws to be fastened can be inserted.

The rear case 510 is positioned with respect to the base plate 60 by fitting the positioning projections 513a into the fitting recesses of the base plate 60, and the fastening screws are inserted through the insertion holes 513b and screwed into the base plate 60. Since the game board 13 and the action unit 500 can be integrally fixed, the rigidity of the game board 13 and the action unit 500 as a whole can be improved.

The shape of the positioning convex portion 513a is not limited at all, and various aspects are exemplified. For example, the protrusion may have an outer shape slightly smaller than the inner shape (circular or oval in this embodiment) of the fitting recess of the base plate 60, or the fitting gap may be large in consideration of workability during assembly. A protrusion having a shape (smaller outer shape) may be used. Further, when the inner shape of the fitting recess is formed in a rectangular shape, it is naturally assumed that the shape of the positioning protrusion 513a is also formed in a rectangular shape correspondingly.

As described above, the game board 13 has a base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape as viewed from the front, and a large number of nails (not shown) and pinwheels (not shown) for guiding balls, as well as rails 61 and 62 . , the general winning port 63, the first winning port 64, the second winning port 640, the through gate 67, the variable winning device 65, the window portion 60a (see FIG. 90) opened in the base plate 60 can be fitted from the front side. A center frame 86 configured with a shape, a ball flow-down unit 150 configured so that the ball discharged from the game area can flow down, and a granular member 320 (see FIG. 54) is launched toward the front side of the third pattern display device 81. The firing effect unit 300 or the like that can be configured is assembled, and is attached to the inner frame 12 in such a manner that the peripheral portion thereof is arranged opposite to the surface of the inner frame 12 (see FIG. 1) and fixed.

The base plate 60 is formed in a plate shape from a light-transmitting resin material, and is configured so that various structures arranged on the back side of the base plate 60 can be easily viewed by the player from the front side. As a result, regardless of the shape and arrangement of the base plate 60, the structure arranged on the back side thereof can be visually recognized and used for various effects.

For example, even if the ball flow down unit 150 is arranged on the back side of the base plate 60, the back side can be seen through the base plate 60, so the ball flowing down the ball flow down unit 150 can be visually recognized. . In the present embodiment, the ball flow down unit 150 is designed in consideration of the effects produced by the visually recognized ball, details of which will be described later.

If there is a part that the player does not want to see, it may be dealt with by attaching a seal member with low light transmittance (or no light transmittance).

The center frame 86 is arranged in a through hole formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and fixed to the base plate 60 from the front side of the game board 13 by tapping screws or the like.

The shooting effect unit 300 receives the granular member 320 (see FIG. 54), and the partitioning member 310 that partitions the range in which the granular member 320 can scatter is arranged inside the center frame 86, so that the granular member 320 is placed inside the center frame. It is made possible to shoot toward the inside of 86 . Therefore, the granular members 320 scattered on the front side of the third symbol display device 81 can be effectively recognized by the player who visually recognizes the display of the third symbol display device 81 through the inner window portion of the center frame 86. can. Details of the shooting effect unit 300 will be described later.

The operation unit 500 is arranged on the back side of the game board 13, and various light emitting means and various operation units are arranged inside. That is, the operation unit 500 includes a rear case 510, an enlargement/reduction unit 600 arranged inside the upper part of the rear case 510, and a displacement rotation unit 800 arranged symmetrically on the left and right sides inside the rear case 510. Prepare.

Specifically, the enlargement/reduction unit 600 is arranged above the opening 511a, and the displacement/rotation unit 800 is arranged on the left and right sides of the opening 511a on the bottom wall 511 of the rear case 510, respectively. First, an overview of operation control of the operation unit 500 will be described.

7 to 11 are front views of the operation unit 500 showing an example of operation control of the operation unit 500 in chronological order. 7 shows the enlargement/reduction unit 600 and the displacement rotation unit 800 in the waiting state for effect, and FIG. FIG. 9 shows the enlargement/reduction unit 600 in the enlargement state and the displacement/rotation unit 800 in the waiting state for rendering.

FIG. 10 shows the enlargement/reduction unit 600 in the rendering standby state and the displacement rotation unit 800 in the rendering upper end state. In FIG. The unit 800 is in the lower end state of the production.

As illustrated in FIGS. 7 to 11, the displacement trajectory of the scaling unit 600 and the displacement trajectory of the displacement rotation unit 800 partially overlap when viewed from the front. Therefore, for example, when the displacement/rotation unit 800 is in the rendering upper end state (see FIG. 10), if the enlargement/reduction unit 600 changes state from the rendering standby state, there is a possibility of collision.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the change in state of the enlargement/reduction unit 600 from the effect standby state is controlled to be executable on the condition that the displacement rotation unit 800 is in the effect standby state, or the displacement rotation unit 800 By controlling the state change from the presentation standby state to be executable on the condition that the enlargement/reduction unit 600 is in the presentation standby state, it is possible to prevent the enlargement/reduction unit 600 and the displacement/rotation unit 800 from overlapping in front view. can be avoided.
Therefore, it is possible to improve the degree of freedom of arrangement of the scaling unit 600 and the displacement/rotation unit 800 (overlapping front and rear positions can be allowed).

As shown in FIGS. 7 to 9, the enlargement/reduction unit 600 is configured such that it can be displaced downward while the effect members 700 are collectively arranged in one place. The components of the production member 700 are separated from each other in the state of being arranged in the state of being arranged, and the operation is controlled so that the area visually recognized in the front view becomes large (see FIG. 9).

After that, the enlargement/reduction unit 600 is controlled so that the production members 700 are assembled again (see FIG. 8), displaced upward while being collectively arranged in one place, and returned to the production standby state shown in FIG.

The state changes shown in FIGS. 10 and 11 are executed when the scaling unit 600 is in the rendering standby state. As shown in FIGS. 7, 10 and 11, the displacement/rotation unit 800 is configured such that the lateral slide member 840 can be displaced from the waiting state for rendering in a direction having not only a vertical component but also a horizontal component.

In this embodiment, the lateral slide member 840 is displaced along a route curve S1 set by a mechanism described later. The route curve S1 includes a common circular arc portion S1a having a circular arc shape centering on each center point C1, and an advancing/retreating route portion S1b extending from the lower end of the common circular arc portion S1a to the left, right, and downward.

In FIG. 10, a pair of left and right horizontal slide members 840 are arranged at the upper end position of the common arc portion S1a, and in FIG. The lateral slide member 840 is arranged at a position above the lower end position of the common circular arc portion S1a.

11, the left lateral slide member 840 is displaced downward and the right lateral slide member 840 is displaced upward. It is possible for the player to visually recognize as if it were rotationally displaced around a center point C1 arranged near the center.

In other words, the horizontal slide member 840 can be visually recognized as a part of the rotating performance body having the same size as the display area of the third pattern display device 81, and the degree of freedom in performance using the horizontal slide member 840 is improved. be able to.

12(a) and 12(b) are cross-sectional views of the game board 13 and the action unit 500 along line XIIa-XIIa in FIG. 7, and FIGS. 14 is a cross-sectional view of the game board 13 and the action unit 500 along the XIIIa-XIIIa line, and FIG. 14 is a cross-sectional view of the game board 13 and the action unit 500 along the XIV-XIV line in FIG.

7 and 9 do not show the game board 13, but FIGS. 12 to 14 show the state where the game board 13 is attached to the front side of the operation unit 500 (see FIG. 2).

12(a) and 13(a) show an example of a state in which the granular member 320 stays downward, and in FIGS. 12(b) and 13(b), the granular member 320 is shot and scattered. An example of such a state is illustrated.

The effect member 700 of the scaling unit 600 is arranged such that the center portion of the collective arrangement is arranged above the partition member 310 of the firing effect unit 300 in the effect standby state shown in FIGS. Most of the display area of the third pattern display device 81 is configured to be visible through 310 .

On the other hand, in the expanded state shown in FIGS. 13(a) and 13(b), the effect member 700 is arranged close behind the partition member 310 of the firing effect unit 300, and is hidden by the effect member 700 (see FIG. 9). ), most of the display area of the third pattern display device 81 is blocked invisibly.

Since the displacement trajectory of the scaling unit 600 does not interfere with the partitioning member 310, regardless of the arrangement of the scaling unit 600, the firing effect unit 300 is operated to execute the action effect of shooting the granular member 320 at the partitioning member 310. It is possible to control

As shown in FIG. 12( a ), the granular member 320 is arranged below the lower edge of the display area of the third pattern display device 81 , and is fired along a route that slopes upward toward the front. , is struck against the front wall portion of the partitioning member 310 and rises while rebounding within the range formed by the partitioning member 310 .

As a result, the granular member 320 can be made to appear to the player as if it is coming toward him or her, so that the player's attention to the presentation using the granular member 320 can be improved.

In addition, by configuring in this way, the range in which the granular members 320 are scattered can be brought closer to the player side, and the configuration members arranged in the game area such as the first winning port 64 (see FIG. 2) can be reduced. It is possible to avoid lowering the degree of freedom of arrangement.

In other words, as a standby position for the granular members 320 fired toward the partitioning member 310 of this embodiment, a position directly below the partitioning member 310 or a position closer to the front can be adopted. However, in this case, since the shooting effect unit 300 is arranged in the space on the back side of the first prize winning port 64, it is possible to secure a space for arranging the guide path for the ball that has entered the first prize winning port 64. It becomes difficult, and it may be necessary to move the position of the first winning hole 64 to deal with it.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the dividing member 310 is arranged at the frontmost position, and the standby position of the granular member 320 is arranged at an oblique rear side. The guide path for the ball can be arranged without any problem, and the situation in which the first prize winning opening 64 cannot be arranged freely can be prevented.

In the state shown in FIG. 12(a), when control is performed to shoot the granular members 320, as shown in FIG. It can be shown to the player together with the display in the display area. As a result, the player can visually recognize a combination of the two-dimensional display and the movement of the granular member 320 that displaces three-dimensionally.

In the state shown in FIG. 13(a), when control is performed to shoot the granular members 320, as shown in FIG. It can be shown to the player together with the change. In this case, for example, by synchronizing the timing of scattering of the granular members 320 with the timing of displacing the rendering members 700 of the scaling unit 600 in a discrete manner, the granular members 320 can be displaced on the front side of the scaling unit 600 whose state changes. It is possible to visually recognize how the particles are scattered, and to strengthen the power of the state change of the enlargement/reduction unit 600.例文帳に追加

Here, a method of switching the display of the third pattern display device 81 together with the state change of the enlarging/reducing unit 600 is also conceivable as a method of producing effects in conjunction with the state change of the enlarging/reducing unit 600 .

However, in a situation where the third pattern display device 81 is arranged on the back side of the scaling unit 600 and most of the display area of the third pattern display device 81 is shielded by the scaling unit 600, as in the present embodiment. , even if the display of the third pattern display device 81 is switched, it is difficult to show the display, and it is difficult to produce it effectively.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the division member 310 that forms the range in which the granular members 320 that produce motion effects scatter along with the state change of the enlargement/reduction unit 600 is provided on the front side of the enlargement/reduction unit 600. Therefore, even in a situation where the enlargement/reduction unit 600 blocks most of the display area of the third pattern display device 81, the granular member 320 is not difficult for the player to see.

Furthermore, by configuring the granular member 320 with a small member, it is possible to prevent the enlarging/reducing unit 600 from becoming difficult to see as compared with the configuration of the granular member 320 with a large member.

Therefore, even in a state where most of the display area of the third pattern display device 81 is blocked by the scaling unit 600, the effect of the scaling unit 600 can be improved.

Also, the effect of visually recognizing the scattering of the granular members 320 in combination with the scaling unit 600 can be used as it is for the effect of visually recognizing the scattering of the granular members 320 in combination with the displacement/rotation unit 800 .

That is, the displacement/rotation unit 800, similarly to the enlargement/reduction unit 600, has a state in which the horizontal slide member 840 is retracted from the display area of the third symbol display device 81 (drawing standby state, see FIG. 7), and a horizontal state. Since the slide member 840 can be changed between the state where the slide member 840 is arranged on the front side of the display area of the third pattern display device 81 (lower end state of production, upper end state of production, see FIGS. 10 and 11), , an effect of visually recognizing the combination of the scattering granular members 320 and the display of the third pattern display device 81, and an effect of visually recognizing the combination of the scattering granular members 320 and the horizontal slide member 840 of the displacement rotation unit 800. be able to.

In this case, it has been explained that the enlargement/reduction unit 600 can effectively produce an effect by scattering the granular members 320 in accordance with the dispersing mode of the production member 700, but the displacement/rotation unit 800 can rotate By scattering the particulate members 320 in accordance with the rotation of the wing-like members 854 disposed in the wing-like members 854, an air flow is generated by the rotation of the wing-like members 854. It can be visually recognized as if it is rotating at high speed), and the presentation effect of the displacement/rotation unit 800 can be improved.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, the scattering of the granular members 320 is visually recognized in combination with the display area of the third pattern display device 81, and is visually recognized in combination with the scaling unit 600 or the displacement rotation unit 800. can be used in combination with

As shown in FIG. 14, the rear end line BL1 of the first light irradiation device 330, which is part of the shooting effect unit 300 and is arranged directly above the horizontal slide member 840 of the displacement rotation unit 800, is shown in FIG. It is arranged on the rear side of the front end line FL1 of the displacement/rotation unit 800 on the cross section. Therefore, depending on the displacement trajectory of the lateral slide member 840 of the displacement/rotation unit 800 (for example, when the lateral slide member 840 continues to displace directly upward from the state shown in FIG. 14), the first light irradiation device 330 and the displacement/rotation unit 800 may collide.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the advancing/retreating path portion S1b is set as a path that can avoid the collision between the firing effect unit 300 and the displacement/rotation unit 800. FIG. That is, by setting the advancing/retreating path portion S1b as a path passing through a gap provided in an oblique direction between the ejection device 400 of the firing effect unit 300 and the first light irradiation device 330, the rear end line BL1 and the front end line FL1 are separated. It is possible to improve the degree of freedom of setting, and it is configured to be capable of upward displacement beyond the first light irradiation device 330 that sets the trailing edge line BL1, so that a large displacement width of the displacement/rotation unit 800 can be ensured. .

As shown in FIG. 13, when the effect member 700 is displaced, the effect member 700 and the partition member 310 are arranged close to each other in the front-rear direction. In the playable state, the effect member 700 and the partitioning member 310 are arranged to the extent that the space can be secured, but the space between the effect member 700 and the partitioning member 310 must be secured until the time of transportation. Nothing to consider. Therefore, during transport, it is desirable to maintain the effect member 700 at the upper end position of the displacement range, and to restrict the partition member 310 and the effect member 700 from being arranged close to each other.

Returning to FIG. 6, description will be made. The motion unit 500 includes a displacement restricting device 180 fastened and fixed to the rear case 510 . The displacement restricting device 180 is configured to be able to change its state by manual operation from the back side of the rear case 510, and in the restricting state, restricts the downward displacement of the enlargement/reduction unit 600 from the presentation standby state.

By adopting the displacement restricting device 180, it is possible to facilitate shipment and transportation of the pachinko machine 10 even when the center opening of the base plate 60 is closed as in the present embodiment.

In detail, conventionally, a means of suppressing the displacement of the movable role by stuffing a cushioning material (cushion member such as cotton) in the range where the movable role is displaced, and removing the cushioning material after arriving at the game hall. This sometimes prevents displacement of the movable accessories during shipment or transportation. However, if the central opening of the base plate 60 is closed as in the present embodiment (see FIG. 12(a)), there is no through-hole for extracting the cushioning material. The cushioning material cannot be removed without disassembling, which may impose a heavy burden on the game hall.

As a countermeasure against this, the displacement forming device 180 is employed in this embodiment. As a result, the state of the displacement regulating device 180 can be changed between a regulated state in which the upward/downward displacement of the enlargement/reduction unit 600 is regulated without releasing the fixation of the game board 13 and the rear case 510, and a regulated state in which the regulation is released. You can switch. Hereinafter, the details of the configuration of the displacement forming device 180 will be described first, and then the details of the state change will be described.

15(a) is a rear perspective view of the displacement restricting device 180, FIG. 15(b) is a front perspective view of the displacement restricting device 180, and FIG. 15(c) is a front perspective view of the displacement restricting device 180. It is a diagram.

15(a) and 15(b) illustrate the displacement restricting device 180 in the restricted state, and FIG. 15(c) illustrates the displacement restricting device 180 in the restricted state. As shown in FIGS. 15(a) to 15(c), the displacement restricting device 180 is switched between the restricted state and the restricted state by the cylindrical portion 183d protruding from the contact member 181. As shown in FIG. In the regulated state of the displacement regulating device 180, the cylindrical portion 183d protrudes to the inside of the back case 510 and is configured to engage with the regulated hole 657 of the enlargement/reduction unit 600, details of which will be described later.

16 is an exploded rear perspective view of the displacement restricting device 180, FIG. 17 is an exploded front perspective view of the displacement restricting device 180, and FIG. 18(b) is a front view of the guide member 182, and FIG. 18(c) is a front view of the operation member 183. FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 16 to 18, the displacement restricting device 180 includes an abutting member 181 arranged to abut on the rear case 510 (see FIG. 6), and a abutting member 181 arranged on the rear side of the abutting member 181. A guide member 182 that is fastened and fixed to 181 and guides the operation member 183 in the front-rear direction; It is mainly provided with a coil spring 184 configured to be able to apply an urging force directed toward the back side to the operating member 181 .

As the operation member 183 is formed in a substantially elliptical shape elongated in the left and right direction when viewed from the rear, the abutment member 181 and the guide member 182 which accommodate the operation member 183 also have a substantially elliptical shape elongated in the left and right direction when viewed from the rear. Since it is formed, the external shape of the displacement restricting device 180 is a substantially elliptical shape elongated left and right when viewed from the rear.

The abutment member 181 is mainly designed in a plate shape so as to increase the holding force by increasing the contact area with the rear case 510. The plate end of the abutment member 181 extends toward the rear side to hold the guide member 182. The wall portion is extended, and insertion holes 181a are drilled at the left and right ends and through which the fastening portions protruding from the back case 510 are inserted. It has a cylindrical holding portion 181b protruding to the side, and an engaged portion 181c that forms a well-known latch mechanism in relation to the operating member 183 and is configured to be engageable with the operating member 183. As shown in FIG.

The guide member 182 includes a body portion 182a extending in the front-rear direction in an elliptical ring along the outer periphery of the contact member 181, and a screw through which a fastening screw is inserted into a fastening portion that is inserted through the insertion hole 181a. An insertion portion 182b, a fastening portion 182c into which a fastening screw to be inserted through the contact member 181 is screwed, a retainer portion 182d projecting radially inward at the back side end portion of the main body portion 182a, and the main body portion 182a. The upper and lower inner portions are provided with projections 182e projecting radially inward in the front-rear direction.

From this configuration, by fastening and fixing the abutment member 181 and the guide member 182, the operation member 183 can be arranged between the abutment member 181 and the guide member 182 and held so as not to fall off. In the embodiment, the conditions in which the contact member 181 and the guide member 182 can be disassembled are limited by setting the fastening direction.

In other words, in this embodiment, the fastening screw for fastening and fixing the contact member 181 and the guide member 182 is inserted from the front side of the contact member 182 (the side covered by the rear case 510). Therefore, when the displacement restricting device 180 is attached to the rear case 510, the fastening screws cannot be touched. Therefore, the contact member 181 and the guide member 182 can be disassembled only when the displacement restricting device 180 is removed from the rear case 510 .

The fastening screws for fastening and fixing the displacement restricting device 180 to the back case 510 are inserted through the screw insertion portions 182b from the back side of the guide member 182, so that the back side of the back case 510 is exposed (FIG. 19). ) can be easily touched, and the displacement restricting device 180 can be easily removed from the rear case 510 .

The operation member 183 has a main body portion 183a formed in a cup shape with an elliptical shape slightly smaller than the retainer portion 182d of the guide member 182 when viewed from the rear, the front side being open, and a front edge portion of the main body portion 183a. a flange portion 183b projecting radially outward from the flange portion 183b; a groove portion 183c recessed in the flange portion 183b; An arc-shaped protrusion 183e projecting toward the front side in an arc shape having a diameter larger than the outer diameter of the coil spring 184 centered on the portion 183d and a position where it can be engaged with the engaged portion 181c of the contact member 181. and an engaging portion 183f that can constitute a well-known latch mechanism in relation to the engaged portion 181c.

An elliptical seal is attached to the rear surface of the operation member 183 . This seal has a concave shape formed on one of the ends in the short direction (see FIG. 15(a)), and by arranging this concave shape upward, it is possible to easily prevent vertical orientation errors during assembly. can do.

By making the main body portion 183a oval, it is possible to easily prevent the operation member 183 from being rotationally displaced. That is, even if the operating member 183 is about to be rotationally displaced, the rotation is regulated by coming into contact with the main body portion 182a of the guide member 182 .

The flange portion 183b is larger than the retaining portion 182d of the guide member 182 when viewed from the rear, thereby preventing the operation member 183 from falling off the guide member 182. As shown in FIG. That is, the operating member 183 can be displaced in the front-rear direction while the flange portion 183b is held between the contact member 181 and the guide member 182. As shown in FIG.

The groove portion 183c is formed at a position corresponding to the protrusion 182e of the guide member 182, and has a function of smoothly moving the operating member 183 back and forth. In the present embodiment, the grooves 183c are also formed at two locations on the upper side and one location on the lower side as the ridges 182e are formed at two locations on the upper side and one location on the lower side. As a result, it is possible to prevent erroneous assembly in which the operation member 183 is mistakenly placed upside down.

The cylindrical portion 183 d is a portion that is inserted through the center of the coil spring 184 , and is configured to be able to be inserted through the central opening of the cylindrical holding portion 181 b of the contact member 181 . When the cylindrical portion 183d protrudes from the central opening of the abutting member 181, the cylindrical portion 183d engages with the restricted hole 657 of the enlargement/reduction unit 600 to restrict the up-and-down displacement of the effect member 700, as will be described later.

That is, in the present embodiment, the cylindrical portion 183d can be used both as a portion that regulates the vertical displacement of the effect member 700 of the enlargement/reduction unit 600 and as a portion that supports the coil spring 184. FIG.

The arc-shaped ridge portion 183e is arranged so as to face the outer diameter side of the coil spring 184, and faces the large diameter side cylindrical portion of the cylindrical holding portion 181b of the contact member 181 in the front-rear direction.
When the operation member 183 is pushed, the arc-shaped ridge 183e and the cylindrical holding portion 181b come into contact with each other before other parts, so that the load generating area can be increased, and the load is locally increased. It is possible to prevent the load from occurring.

The arc-shaped protrusion 183e is not circular, but is formed in an arc-like shape where the circle is interrupted, and the engaging portion 183f is arranged at the interrupted position. As a result, it is possible to avoid excessive separation between the engaging portion 183f and the cylindrical portion 183d and the coil spring 184. FIG.

State changes of the operating member 183 will be described. The operating member 183 is biased toward the rear side by the coil spring 184. When the operating member 183 is pushed forward against the biasing force, the engaging portion 183f and the engaged portion 181c are formed. The latch mechanism is activated, and each time it is pushed in by a stroke greater than the minimum stroke for which the latch mechanism acts, it is alternately switched between the regulated state and the regulated state.

In this way, since the state can be changed by the latch mechanism, the operation member 183 is not limited to the case where the operation member 183 is intentionally operated. If it is displaced by the stroke, there is a possibility that the state of the displacement restricting device 180 will change unintentionally.

For example, in the regulated state of the displacement regulating device 180, if the state of the displacement regulating device 180 unintentionally changes due to an impact during shipping or vibration during transportation, the scaling unit 600 will be placed in an effect standby state (effect member 700 is located at the upper displacement end).
When the effect member 700 displaced from the effect standby state is placed close to the partitioning member 310 (see FIG. 13), the effect member 700 is subjected to the impact during shipping or the vibration during transportation, and the effect member 700 becomes the partitioning member of the firing effect unit 300. 310, and the effect member 700 and the partition member 310 may be damaged.

In contrast, in the present embodiment, the engaging portion 183f is arranged at a position (position eccentric to the right) away from the position (central position) where the biasing force is applied to the operating member 183, and the operating member 183f The gap dimension between the groove portion 183c of the guide member 183 and the projection 182e of the guide member 182 is set large, and the posture maintenance capability of the operation member 183 is intentionally lowered.

As a result, the attitude of the operation member 183 with respect to the guide member 182 can be tilted in advance, so that the displacement resistance of the operation member 183 can be increased. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the amount of displacement of the operating member 183 in the front-rear direction due to an unintended external force.

A relationship between the displacement restricting device 180 and the operation unit 500 will be described. 19 is a front perspective view of the pachinko machine 10 with the front frame 14 opened, and FIG. 20 is a rear view of the game board 13 and the operation unit 500, FIGS. 21(a) and 21(b). 20] is a cross-sectional view of the game board 13 and the operation unit 500 taken along line XXIa-XXIa of FIG.

21(a) illustrates the restricted state of the displacement restricting device 180, and FIG. 21(b) illustrates the released state of the displacement restricting device 180. As shown in FIG.

As shown in FIG. 19, the displacement regulating device 180 is arranged on the opening/closing base end side (left side) of the inner frame 12, and by opening the back pack 92 with respect to the inner frame 12, the operator can extend his hand. configured to be touchable. Since this position is opposite to the side (opening/closing front end side, right side) where a worker who works with the inner frame 12 open enters, the worker may unintentionally move the displacement restricting device when the inner frame 12 is opened. Touching 180 can be avoided.

As shown in FIGS. 21(a) and 21(b), the engaging portion 183f and the engaged portion 181c that constitute the latch mechanism are formed on the right side of the displacement restricting device 180. As shown in FIGS. Since the operating member 183 is loosely supported, not all of the load pushing the operating member 183 is used to move the operating member 183 back and forth, but is also used to change the posture of the operating member 183 .

For example, when the right side of the operating member 183 is pushed, even if the right side moves back and forth sufficiently, the posture of the operating member 183 may change and the left side may not be pushed sufficiently.

Therefore, for the purpose of pushing the displacement restricting device 180 to switch the state, it is easier for the operator to cause the necessary displacement of the displacement restricting device 180 by pinpointing the forming portion of the latch mechanism. It can be said that it is easy to succeed in switching the state of the regulation device 180 .

In this embodiment, as described above, the engaging portion 183f and the engaged portion 181c, which constitute the latch mechanism, are formed on the right side of the displacement restricting device 180, and the operator enters from the right side to displace the displacement restricting device. Since the operator operates the device 180, the operator can reach the displacement restricting device 180 with a minimum of movement. Therefore, the operator can easily perform an operation of pinpointing the forming portion of the latch mechanism.

Also, the posture change when the operation member 183 is pushed occurs in such a manner that the pressing surface (the surface formed on the base end side of the cylindrical portion 183d) faces the pushed side. Therefore, the pressing load of the operator can be easily transmitted to the operating member 183 as the amount of pressing increases.

In the regulated state shown in FIG. 21( a ), the cylindrical portion 183 d of the operating member 183 is inserted through the regulated hole 657 of the transmission gear 650 to restrict displacement of the transmission gear 650 . This can prevent the state of the scaling unit 600 from changing.

Since the displacement direction of the transmission gear 650 (the rotation direction about the longitudinal axis) and the displacement direction of the operation member 183 (the front-rear direction) are perpendicular to each other, the operation member 183 receives the load from the transmission gear 650 in the displacement direction. can be prevented from being received. As a result, the displacement of the transmission gear 650 can be effectively restricted without making the formation portion of the latch mechanism rigid.

Since the state of the enlargement/reduction unit 600 can be maintained by placing the displacement restricting device 180 in the restricted state, the application of the displacement restricting device 180 is not limited to transportation. For example, after installation in a game machine store, the displacement regulation device 180 is set in the regulation state to maintain the state of the enlargement/reduction unit 600 during maintenance, so that maintenance of the displacement/rotation unit 800, which will be described later, can be performed safely and easily.

That is, in the case where the displacement trajectory of the scaling unit 600 and the displacement trajectory of the displacement/rotation unit 800 partially overlap as in the present embodiment, the drive motor of the scaling unit 600 is operated during maintenance work on the displacement/rotation unit 800. Even if MT2 malfunctions, the state (arrangement) of the enlargement/reduction unit 600 can be maintained by the displacement control device 180, so that the enlargement/reduction unit 600 and the displacement rotation unit 800 can be prevented from colliding. can be done.

When the displacement restricting device 180 is in the restricting state before the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the displacement restricting device 180 is switched to the deregulation state by pushing the operating member 183 of the displacement restricting device 180. (See FIG. 21(b)). As a result, the transmission gear 650 can be displaced, and the enlargement/reduction unit 600 can be caused to perform an effect operation accompanied by a state change.

Here, before the power is turned on, the front frame 14 and the inner frame 12 are slightly opened with respect to the outer frame 11, and the displacement restricting device 180 is released from restriction by looking in from the open tip side (right side). It will be described that it is configured to be able to confirm whether or not

As shown in FIG. 21(a), in the restricted state of the displacement restricting device 180, the operation member 183 is arranged in front of the shape of the bottom wall portion 511 of the rear case 510, so that when viewed from the right side, , the operation member 183 is hidden by the shape portion of the bottom wall portion 511 .

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 21(b), when the displacement restricting device 180 is in the released state, the operation member 183 is arranged to protrude further toward the rear than the shape of the bottom wall 511 of the rear case 510. When viewed from the right side, the operation member 183 is visible at a position protruding from the bottom wall portion 511 .

Therefore, even if the operator does not fully open the front frame 14 and the inner frame 12 with respect to the outer frame 11, the operator can slightly open the front frame 14 and the inner frame 12 with respect to the outer frame 11 as confirmation work before turning on the power. By visually confirming that the operation member 183 protrudes from the bottom wall portion 511 when viewed from the right side, it is possible to confirm that the displacement restricting device 180 is in the released state.

In this embodiment, the rear case 510 is made of a colorless transparent resin material, and the operation member 183 is made of a red transparent resin material, so that the visibility of the operation member 183 can be improved.

Here, a case where the power is turned on while the cylindrical portion 183d is inserted into the restricted hole 657 of the transmission gear 650 of the enlargement/reduction unit 600 in the restricted state of the displacement restricting device 180 (see FIG. 21(a)) will be described. . In this embodiment, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on while the displacement regulating device 180 is in the regulated state, the detection sensor SC7 (see FIG. 52) detects that the enlargement/reduction unit 600 has not changed in the power-on operation. is determined from the output of , and the position detection error display associated with this determination is displayed by the third pattern display device 81 .

By showing this position detection error display to the store clerk of the game machine store, it is possible to make the store clerk notice that the state of the displacement control device 180 may not have been changed. It should be noted that this error display is displayed by detecting whether or not there is a change in the state of the enlargement/reduction unit 600, not by detecting the state of the displacement restricting device 180. FIG.

That is, in the present embodiment, an alarm regarding the state of the displacement regulating device 180 is issued using the position detection error display normally provided in the enlargement/reduction unit 600 without preparing an additional error display program or display material. can be output. As a result, the design cost can be reduced.

In this embodiment, the power is turned on while the cylindrical portion 183d is inserted through the regulated hole 657 of the transmission gear 650 of the enlargement/reduction unit 600 in the regulated state of the displacement regulating device 180 (see FIG. 21(a)). In this case, the pressing operation of the operation member 183 is disabled while the power is on, and it is required to turn off the power once, but this is not necessarily the case. For example, the operating member 183 may be configured to be operable even during power-on.

In addition, the configuration for disabling the pushing operation of the operating member 183 can be arbitrarily set. For example, it may be configured such that the pushing operation is disabled due to friction generated between the transmission gear 650 and the operation member 183, or a large-diameter portion is provided on the base end side of the cylindrical portion 183d of the operation member 183 to displace the transmission gear 650. Inside, the back surface of the transmission gear 650 and the large-diameter portion of the cylindrical portion 183d may be engaged with each other to limit the displacement of the operating member 183. As shown in FIG.

As a different situation, an example in which the operating member 183 of the displacement restricting device 180 is pressed during maintenance at a game machine store will be described. In this embodiment, the pushing operation of the operating member 183 is not possible only when the regulated hole 657 of the enlarging/reducing unit 600 is aligned with the cylindrical portion 183d in the front and rear.

For example, during maintenance, even if the operation member 183 is pushed while the enlargement/reduction unit 600 is in the extended state (see FIG. 8), the displacement restricting device 180 changes its state to the restricting state. In this case, the cylindrical portion 183d is arranged on the displacement trajectory of the transmission gear 650 of the enlargement/reduction unit 600. Therefore, when the transmission gear 650 is displaced by the driving force after the maintenance is completed, the displacement is the cylindrical portion 183d. is limited to

In this embodiment, it is configured to be able to determine that the displacement of the transmission gear 650 is restricted, and by performing an error display (notification of abnormality) based on this determination, the displacement restricting device 180 remains in the restricted state. This can be notified to the clerk of the game machine store, the details of which will be described later.

As a result, the state of the displacement restricting device 180 can be determined by using the device for detecting the state of the enlargement/reduction unit 600 without providing a separate device for detecting the state of the displacement restricting device 180 .

The displacement control device 180 can be operated before or after the game board 13 and the motion unit 500 are assembled to the inner frame 12 . After assembly to the inner frame 12, it is necessary not only to open the inner frame 12, but also to open the back pack 92 with respect to the inner frame 12. Therefore, if possible, before assembling to the inner frame 12, the displacement regulation is performed. Preferably, the device 180 has been operated.

Returning to FIG. 5 and FIG. 6, description will be made. In this embodiment, in addition to the third symbol display device 81, the above-described shooting effect unit 300, enlargement/reduction unit 600, and displacement/rotation unit 800 are provided as effect devices for livening up the game. These rendering devices will be described in order from the firing rendering unit 300. FIG.

22 is an exploded front perspective view of the game board 13 and the firing effect unit 300, and FIG. 23 is an exploded rear perspective view of the game board 13 and the firing effect unit 300. FIG. As shown in FIGS. 22 and 23 , the partitioning member 310 is arranged to face the light guide plate 161 in the assembled state of the shooting effect unit 300 . That is, it is possible to execute an effect in which the light guide plate 161 and the partitioning member 310 are superimposed and visually recognized by the player.

Since the partitioning member 310 is made of a colorless and light-transmitting resin material, the granular member 320 scattered inside can be visually recognized by the player. Thus, an effect can be executed in which the light guide plate 161 and the scattering granular members 320 are superimposed and visually recognized.

24 is an exploded front perspective view of the firing effect unit 300, and FIG. 25 is an exploded rear perspective view of the firing effect unit 300. FIG. 24 and 25, the partition member 310 is shown exploded.

As shown in FIGS. 24 and 25, the firing effect unit 300 includes a partitioning member 310 arranged inside the center frame 86 (see FIGS. 22 and 23) and forming a box shape with an open bottom, and a partitioning member 310 for the partition. A plurality of granular members 320 displaceably arranged inside the member 310, an injection device 400 arranged in such a manner as to close the lower open portion so that the granular members 320 do not drop out of the partitioning member 310, and the partitioning member. A first light irradiation device 330 arranged on the right side of the partition member 310 and a second light irradiation device 340 arranged on the left side of the partition member 310 are provided.

The partitioning member 310 is formed of a light-transmitting resin material, and includes a front plate portion 311 that is a plate-like portion arranged on the forefront, and a curved plate portion 312 that is integrally formed below the front plate portion 311 . A bottom plate portion parallel to the front plate portion 311 is arranged on the rear side of the front plate portion 311, and blocking walls extending from the left, right, and top of the bottom plate portion toward the front side so as to block the gap are provided. Communicates with a back partition 313 and an internal space IE1 (see FIG. 12(a)) integrally formed below the back partition 313 and configured between the front panel 311 and the back partition 313. It has a rear section lower part 314 that allows a path to be configured between the curved plate part 312 and a deformed penetrating part 315 penetrating through the rear section lower part 314 .

Although the size of the partitioning member 310 is not limited at all, in the present embodiment, the size of the window portion surrounding the light guide plate 161 inside the center frame 86 and the size of the partitioning member 310 when viewed from the front are about the same. is formed to be That is, the light guide plate 161 and the front plate portion 311 are formed to have substantially the same shape.

Thereby, the component for hiding the edge of the light guide plate 161 can also be used for hiding the edge of the partition member 310 . A dedicated component for hiding the edge of the partitioning member 310 is not required, and the number of members is reduced. can be avoided, the visibility of the display by the third pattern display device 81 can be maintained.

The internal space IE1 serves as a range in which the granular members 320 can scatter. need to do more. Therefore, forming a space narrower to some extent makes it possible to perform a powerful presentation by visually recognizing a small number of granular members 320 with a high density.

On the other hand, if the space is made too narrow, there is a risk that the granular member 320 will be clogged. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the front-rear width of the internal space IE1 is ensured to be approximately the same as the front-rear width between the left-right central portion 312b of the curved plate portion 312 and the rear section lower portion 314 . Therefore, compared to the case where the front-to-rear width is shortened, it is possible to avoid clogging of the granular member 320 in the internal space IE1 and rapid deceleration during injection.

Furthermore, since the left and right portions 312a of the curved plate portion 312 are arranged closer to the rear section lower portion 314 than the left and right central portion 312b, the movement path of the granular member 320 near the left and right central portions 312b is relatively large. can be narrowed.

That is, when the granular member 320 is injected into the internal space IE1 by the injection device 400, the movement path of the granular member 320 can be concentrated near the left-right central portion 312b, and the granular member 320 can be positioned in the internal space IE1. It is possible to make it easier to reach the vicinity of the central portion. This makes it easier for the player to visually recognize the granular member 320 .

In addition, after the granular member 320 reaches the vicinity of the central portion of the internal space IE1, the granular member 320 collides with the front plate portion 311 and scatters in the internal space IE1. As a result, the player can visually recognize as if the granular members 320 explode from the vicinity of the center of the internal space IE1 and scatter in all directions. can be improved.

The curved plate portion 312 functions as a portion that receives the granular member 320 when the granular member 320 injected into the internal space IE1 falls. From this point of view, in this embodiment, the curved plate portion 312 is designed to be inclined downward toward the rear side and inclined downward toward the left-right center.

As a result, regardless of where in the internal space IE1 the granular member 320 is arranged, the granular member 320, which is displaced downward by its own weight, can be displaced toward the lower side of the rear side while being moved toward the left-right center.

Further, the degree of downward inclination of the left and right portions 312a of the curved plate portion 312 is configured so that the downward inclination toward the left and right central side is steeper than the downward inclination toward the rear side. As a result, as the downward displacement tendency of the granular member 320, it is possible to cause displacement toward the left-right central side with priority over displacement toward the rear surface side. Therefore, due to the configuration of the injection device 400, which will be described later, at the right and left end positions where the granular members 320 are likely to be densely packed, the granular members 320 tend to be displaced to the rear side all at once, and the granular members 320 stay (clog) in the middle of downward displacement. can be avoided.

In addition, the degree of downward inclination toward the rear side of the left and right central portions 312b of the curved plate portion 312 is steeper than the degree of downward inclination toward the left and right central portions of the left and right portions 312a of the curved plate portion 312. is configured as This makes it easier to avoid the granular members 320 from crowding together while flowing down.

On the other hand, in the rear section lower part 314, the plate portion arranged to face the rear side of the curved plate portion 312 is approximately the same as the left and right central portions 312b of the curved plate portion 312 (see FIG. 12A) in a side view (see FIG. 12A). It is formed in a flat plate shape with an inclination angle such that the distance from the left and right center portions 312b is slightly widened toward the front side, that is, the angle with respect to the horizontal direction is large.

In the present embodiment, the inclination angle of the rear section lower portion 314 with respect to the vertical direction is the same (slightly larger angle) than the inclination angle with respect to the vertical direction of the displacement direction of the collision member 420 that ejects the granular member 320 .

Therefore, the incident angle of the granular members 320 with respect to the rear section lower portion 314 is the same regardless of the ejection direction of the granular members 320 that can change to the left and right, so that the resistance given to the granular members 320 from the rear section lower portion 314 is substantially uniform. can do.

The deformed penetrating portion 315 is formed into a shape into which the lid member 480 can be inserted. Prepare. The penetrating direction is inclined upward from the back side toward the front side with respect to the plate surface of the back section lower portion 314 (see FIG. 12(a)). As a result, the acute-angled portion of the rear section lower portion 314 that constitutes the deformed through portion 315 (the lower portion of the deformed through portion 315 in FIG. 12A ) is not arranged to face the ejection direction of the granular member 320 .

This can reduce the possibility that the granular member 320 collides with an acute-angled portion when the granular member 320 is injected, thereby avoiding the occurrence of a local load on the granular member 320 and the rear section lower part 314, thereby preventing the granular member 320 from being locally loaded. It is possible to prevent the member 320 and the rear section lower part 314 from being cracked or chipped.

24 and 25, the granular member 320 is made of a relatively soft resin material (at least softer than the resin material forming the partition member 310) and formed into a substantially soccer ball shape (12 regular pentagons). and 20 regular hexagons formed into a quasi-regular polyhedron) and provided with non-penetrating recesses 321 recessed along a plurality of mutually parallel straight lines.

The non-penetrating concave portion 321 can reduce the weight of the granular member 320 and deviate the center of gravity of the granular member 320 from the central position of the shape. That is, in the linear direction in which the non-penetrating recesses 321 are formed, the meat portion remains on the side where the non-penetrating recesses 321 are not formed, so the center of gravity can be biased toward the side where the non-penetrating recesses 321 are not formed. .

Thereby, the standby posture of the granular member 320 can be adjusted. That is, the standby posture of the granular member 320 can be adjusted to a posture in which the non-penetrating concave portion 321 faces upward (see FIG. 24).

In this case, the load from the injection device 400 can be received by the surface (see FIG. 25) on the side where the non-penetration recess 321 is not formed, so damage and chipping of the granular member 320 can be easily avoided. . Furthermore, since the non-penetrating concave portion 321 is directed toward the injection direction side when being injected with a load from the injection device 400, the surface on which the non-penetrating concave portion 321 is formed should collide with the front plate portion 311. can be done. As a result, the deformation of the granular member 320 can easily absorb the load upon collision with the front plate portion 311, and the possibility of damaging the front plate portion 311 can be reduced.

The first light irradiation unit 330 includes a fixed plate portion 331 fastened and fixed to the back side of the rear partition portion 313, an electrical board 332 fastened and fixed to the right side of the fixed plate portion 331, and the electrical board 332. A lid portion 333 is provided on the right side, is fastened and fixed to the fixing plate portion 331 , and is formed so as to accommodate the electrical board 332 between the fixing plate portion 331 and the fixing plate portion 331 .

Light irradiation units 332a such as LEDs are arranged on both left and right sides of the electrical board 332, and light having an optical axis is emitted from the light irradiation units 332a in the left-right direction. The fixing plate portion 331 and the lid portion 333 are made of a resin material with low light transmittance, and are provided with through holes 331a and 333a at positions corresponding to the light irradiation portion 332a. Thereby, it can be visually recognized as light divided into particles.

Of the light emitted from the illumination board 332, the light emitted to the right side often illuminates the right side path (right-handed path) of the game area where the through gate 67 and the like (see FIG. 2) are arranged. one purpose. The light emitted to the left will be described later.

The fixing plate portion 331 and the lid portion 333 are made of a resin material with low light transmittance (or no light transmittance), and are provided with through holes 331a and 333a at positions corresponding to the light irradiation portion 332a. As a result, the light emitted from the light irradiation section 332a can be visually recognized as light divided into granules. It is possible to avoid being shielded by and visually recognized.

The second light irradiation unit 340 includes a fixed plate portion 341 fastened and fixed to the rear side of the rear partition portion 313, an electrical board 342 fastened and fixed to the left side of the fixed plate portion 341, and the electrical board 342. A lid portion 343 is provided on the left side, is fastened and fixed to the fixed plate portion 341 , and is formed so as to accommodate the electrical board 342 between the fixed plate portion 341 and the fixed plate portion 341 .

The fixing plate portion 341 is made of a resin material with low light transmittance (or non-light transmittance), while the lid portion 343 is made of a colorless and light transmittance resin material. Therefore, the electrical board 342 is visible when viewed from the left, but in the present embodiment, the left side of the center frame 86 (see FIG. 2) protrudes leftward. As a result, the field of view of the player can be narrowed in advance, and the left side of the decorative board 342 can be prevented from being seen when viewed from the front.

As a result, light can be emitted through the transparent lid portion 343 while avoiding the decorative electrical substrate 342 from being visually recognized.

Light irradiation units 342a such as LEDs are arranged on both the left and right sides of the electrical board 342 . Light having an optical axis directed forward is emitted from the light emitting portion 342a arranged on the left side surface. One purpose of this light is to illuminate the left side of the center frame 86 while not illuminating the left path of the game area.

Here, the reason for adopting a configuration different from the configuration in which the light emitted from the light emitting portion 342a of the electric decoration board 332 on the right side is positively directed to the game area is the playability of the pachinko machine 10 (normally It is considered that the game is played with the left hand, and the game is played with the right hand during the probability variation, the time reduction, and the jackpot game). This is explained below.

Since the game area of the pachinko machine 10 has a high degree of freedom in the ball flow path on the left side of the game area, during normal play, the ball shooting intensity is adjusted so that the ball will flow down the desired path. The operation of doing is performed by the player. Therefore, if the light emission intensity on the left side of the game area is increased too much, the visibility of the ball becomes poor, which hinders the adjustment of the shooting intensity of the ball and may cause dissatisfaction of the player.

On the other hand, when shooting the ball to the right side of the playing area, basically, the player launches the ball with maximum shooting strength. The momentum of the shot ball is suppressed by the return rubber 69, and the degree of freedom of selection of the downstream path of the ball on the downstream side is significantly reduced, and the same path is exclusively used.

More specifically, in the present embodiment, a single guide path DL1 (see FIG. 2) is formed downstream of the second prize winning port 640 and has a width through which one ball can pass. All the balls that did not hit go through the guide path DL1 and go to the variable winning device 65 and the general winning opening 63 arranged on the downstream side.

As described above, since there is little need to adjust the shooting intensity of the ball, even if the visibility of the ball becomes poor in the right side of the game area (especially the part where the guide path DL1 is formed), the game will not be hindered. Since the possibility of causing this is low, it is possible to perform an effect with a high emission intensity in this range.

For this reason, in the present embodiment, the illumination board 332 arranged on the right side is provided with the light irradiation part 332a so as to direct the light to the game area, while the illumination board 342 arranged on the left side Then, the light irradiation part 342a is arranged so as not to direct the light to the game area.
As a result, it is possible to execute an effective lighting effect while suppressing the dissatisfaction of the player.

Light having an optical axis directed to the right is emitted from the light emitting portion 342a arranged on the right side. A through hole 341a is formed in the fixed plate portion 341 at a position corresponding to the light irradiation portion 342a. As a result, the light emitted from the light irradiation unit 342a can be visually recognized as light divided into granules, and the decorative substrate 342 is shielded by the fixed plate portion 341 in a range away from the light irradiation unit 342a. You can avoid being seen. The object illuminated by the light irradiation section 342a arranged on the right side will be described later.

26(a) is a side view of the first light irradiation device 330 viewed in the direction of arrow R in FIG. 25, and FIG. 26(b) is a side view of the second light irradiation device 340 viewed in the direction of arrow L in FIG. It is a diagram. In FIGS. 26(a) and 26(b), the outer shape of the partition member 310 is illustrated by imaginary lines.

As shown in FIG. 26( a ), the light irradiation unit 332 a provided on the left side of the first light irradiation device 330 includes an LED whose optical axis passes through the partitioning member 310 and an LED whose optical axis passes through the partitioning member 310 . an LED through which the axis passes.

As a result, not only is the effect of irradiating light onto the granular member 320 inside the partitioning member 310 , but also other movable means (enlargement/reduction unit 600 and displacement/rotation unit 800 ) arranged on the rear side of the partitioning member 310 are illuminated with light. It is possible to execute the effect to irradiate.

As shown in FIG. 26(b), the light irradiation unit 342a arranged on the right side of the second light irradiation device 340 has no LED whose optical axis passes through the partitioning member 310, and the rear side of the partitioning member 310. It consists only of LEDs through which the optical axis passes.

As a result, while suppressing the light emission intensity into the partitioning member 310, the illumination intensity of the light directed to the other movable means (the enlargement/reduction unit 600 and the displacement/rotation unit 800) arranged on the rear side of the partitioning member 310 is reduced. can be improved.

In the second irradiation device 340, by suppressing the emission intensity to the inside of the partitioning member 310, it is possible to improve the comfort of the game in the normal state. That is, in the game in the normal state, the player's line of sight is not fixed, but is mainly directed to the left side of the game area, the display of the third symbol display device 81, or the vicinity of the first winning hole 64, In many cases, the player is looking at the area to the left of the center of the game area.

In this case, when the interior of the partitioning member 310 is irradiated with light from the second irradiation device 340, it shines at a position near the front to the same degree as the game area. As a result, there is a possibility that the visibility of the game area may be deteriorated for the player.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the light irradiation unit 342a of the second irradiation device 340 is arranged toward the back side, and the light irradiation unit 342a is separated from the game area. can weaken the degree of influence on the visibility of the game area.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, the light emitted from the light irradiation unit 342a of the second irradiation device 340 emits light that illuminates the inner side of the center frame 86 in front view with high intensity while reducing the degree of lighting the game area. can perform the performance. Therefore, it is possible to perform an effect of lighting up the enlargement/reduction unit 600 and the displacement/rotation unit 800 (see FIG. 5) without lowering the visibility of the game area.

27 is a cross-sectional view of the game board 13 and the shooting unit 300 along line XXVII-XXVII of FIG. That is, in FIG. 27, the game board 13 and the shooting unit 300 are illustrated, and the illustration of the operation unit 500 is omitted. Also, the directions of light emitted from the first light irradiation device 330 and the second light irradiation device 340 are schematically indicated by arrows.

As shown in FIG. 27, the second light irradiation device 340 is arranged on the left side and the rear side of the vertically placed substrate unit 167, avoiding the later-described vertically placed substrate unit 167 that irradiates the light guide plate 161 with light. As a result, the light emitted from the light irradiation unit 342a can be prevented from entering the light guide plate 161, and the light emission effect can be performed. It can be separated from performance.

When the light guide plate 161 is employed as in the present embodiment, the light guide plate 161 may unintentionally emit light depending on the light irradiation path, which may reduce the presentation effect. In particular, since the light irradiated around the light guide plate 161 (for example, the front side of the center frame 86) tends to illuminate the light guide plate 161, it may be necessary to suppress the light emission intensity, which may reduce the degree of freedom in rendering. was

In contrast, according to the present embodiment, the light from the light irradiation unit 342a is configured to travel while avoiding the light guide plate 161, so that the degree of freedom in setting the irradiation intensity of the light from the light irradiation unit 342a is improved. be able to. As a result, the degree of freedom of the lighting effect around the light guide plate 161 can be improved.

Returning to FIG. 24 and FIG. 25, description will be made. The injection device 400 is disposed below the partition member 310, and is a device on which the granular member 320 that has flowed downward from the internal space IE1 (see FIG. 12(a)) of the partition member 310 rides.

28, 29 and 30 are front exploded perspective views of the injection device 400, and FIGS. 31, 32 and 33 are rear exploded perspective views of the injection device 400. FIG. 28 and 31 show an overview of the configuration of the injection device 400, and FIGS. 29 and 32 show details of the configuration of a part of the injection device 400 arranged near the front side. 30 and 33 show details of the configuration of a portion of the injection device 400 arranged closer to the rear side. 24 and 25 will be referred to as necessary in the description of FIGS. 28 to 33. FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 28 to 33, the injection device 400 includes, as fixed members, a fixing member 350 fastened and fixed to the partition member 310 (see FIG. 24), and a fixed member 350 fastened and fixed on the rear side of the fixed member 350. A space forming member 360 configured to be able to form a space capable of accommodating other movable members between itself and the fixed member 350, and an electric wiring and transmission arm member 470 which are fastened and fixed on the back side of the space forming member 360 and which will be described later. and an intermediate member 401 disposed between the fixing member 350 and the space forming member 360 and having a keyhole-shaped opening 402 at its center.

A fastening screw used to fasten and fix the fixing member 350 to the partitioning member 310 is inserted through the partitioning member 310 from the front side. Therefore, when removing the fixing member 350 from the partitioning member 310, it is necessary to loosen this fastening screw with a screwdriver and remove it, but the game board 13 and the shooting unit 300 are assembled (see FIG. 12(a)). , the base plate 60 is arranged on the front side of the fixing member 350, and is configured so that a screwdriver cannot be inserted into the fastening screw.

Therefore, as a preparation before removing the fixing member 350 from the partitioning member 310, the operation of removing the shooting unit 300 from the game board 13 can be performed. This prevents the occurrence of a situation in which the fixing member 350 is mistakenly removed from the partitioning member 310 and the granular member 320 is ejected from the fixing member 310 while the shooting unit 300 is attached to the game board 13.例文帳に追加be able to.

Injection device 400 is configured such that a plurality of metal rods MB1 fixed to the front side of intermediate member 401 are inserted as members displaceably arranged between intermediate member 401 and fixed member 350 so as to be linearly displaceable. a linear motion member 410 arranged above the linear motion member 410 and supported so as to be displaceable along the displacement direction of the linear motion member 410; A contact member 430 is provided below the motion member 410 and configured to be capable of changing its state between a contactable state and a non-contactable state in the displacement direction of the linear motion member 410 .

The injection device 400 is a member disposed between the intermediate member 401 and the space forming member 360 so as to be displaceable. and a drive shaft of a driving motor MT1 fastened and fixed to a fixing member 350 and engaged with the gear teeth of the front transmission member 440. A gear 450 and a rear transmission member 460 disposed on the side opposite to the flange portion 444 of the front transmission member 440 with respect to the drive gear 450 and fastened and fixed to the rotation transmission member 440 are provided.

The injection device 400 is a member arranged displaceably on the back side of the space forming member 360 and is pivotally supported so as to be rotationally displaceable about a rotation axis parallel to the rotation axis of the front transmission member 440 . A transmission arm member 470 configured to be displaceable by action, and a cover member 480 that is rotatably displaceable about a horizontal straight line as a rotation axis and is displaced by a load received from the transmission arm member 470 .

A design concept of the injection device 400 having the above configuration will be described. In the injection device 400 , the fixed intermediate member 401 and the space forming member 360 divide the arrangement range of the constituent members into three along the projecting direction of the shaft portion 362 projecting from the space forming member 360 . Among the arrangement ranges divided in this way, the driving force of the driving motor MT1 is generated in the intermediate range where the driving gear 450 rotated by the driving force of the driving motor MT1 is arranged, and the driving force is distributed between the front range and the rear range. are respectively transmitted to the range of , displacement of each component occurs in the front range and the rear range.

Based on this design concept, the intermediate member 401 and the space forming member 360 are each provided with openings for transmitting driving force. That is, the intermediate portion 401 has a keyhole-shaped opening 402 , and the space forming member 360 has a lemon-shaped (substantially elliptical) opening 361 .

Since the transmission of driving force is completed in the front range of the intermediate portion 401 and the rear range of the space forming member 360, the details of the configuration will be described in the order of the front range and the rear range. , the details of the construction of the intermediate range are described, and the mode of operation is described.

First, description will be made focusing on the front range. As shown in FIGS. 29 and 32, the intermediate member 401 includes the opening 402 described above, a plurality of cylindrical projections 403 projecting from the upper end to the front side, and the cylindrical projections 403 a plurality of coil springs SP1 whose upper ends are supported by the base, a plurality of rod fixing portions 404 arranged in left-right symmetrical positions so as to be able to fix a plurality of metal rods MB1, and a columnar shape protruding toward the front side near the lower end. The lower end of the coil spring SP1 is hooked on each of a plurality of claws 411 formed on the lower end of the direct-acting member 410 .

The natural length of the coil spring SP1 is formed to be shorter than the distance between the cylindrical projection 403 and the claw 411 when the linear motion member 410 is arranged at the upper end position. Therefore, the linear motion member 410 is always biased by the coil spring SP1, and the linear motion member 410 is arranged at the upper end position by the biasing force before the driving force is transmitted from the intermediate range. The coil spring SP1 is arranged obliquely below the direct-acting member 410. This is also intended to concentrate the biasing force of the coil spring SP1 on the side where the granular members 320 tend to accumulate.

The direct-acting member 410 includes the claw portion 411 described above, a plurality of insertion portions 412 formed so that the metal rod MB1 can be inserted therethrough, a trapezoidal projecting portion 413 projecting in a trapezoidal shape from the upper end portion in the left-right center, A linear protrusion 414 extending in the left-right direction at a substantially central position in the vertical width direction on the back side, and a lower protrusion formed as a shorter protrusion than the protrusion 414 on the lower side of the protrusion 414. 415, and a displacement restricting portion 416 protruding from the lower end portion in the center in the left-right direction toward the front side.

Trapezoidal protruding portion 413 is formed so as to be able to abut against collision member 420 in a state in which direct-acting member 410 is arranged at the upper end position. In other words, the direct-acting member 410 is formed such that only the trapezoidal projecting portion 413 can contact the collision member 420, and the portion other than the trapezoidal projecting portion 413 is not in contact with the collision member 420. be.

The ridge portion 414 and the lower ridge portion 415 are portions that receive loads from other constituent members during load transmission, and the details will be described later.

The displacement restricting portion 416 is a portion of the fixed member 350 that abuts against the cushioning member 352 in the displacement direction, and this abutment restricts displacement of the direct-acting member 410 (upward-side displacement end is set).

The collision member 420 includes a curved plate portion 421 forming an arch-shaped collision surface, and a flat plate-shaped portion extending from the back side end portion of the curved plate portion 421 parallel to the plane in which the linear motion member 410 displaces. A plate portion 422, a plurality of elongated guide holes 423 extending along the extending direction of the plate portion 422, and a trapezoidal projecting portion 413 at the lower end of the left and right central portion of the plate portion 422 in the displacement direction. A cushioning member 424 is fixed at a position facing each other and arranged so as to be able to abut against the trapezoidal projecting portion 413 .

The cylindrical protrusion 403 is inserted through the guide hole 423 . That is, the columnar protrusion 403 is used both as a portion that supports the upper end portion of the coil spring SP1 and as a portion that guides the displacement of the collision member 420 .

The cushioning member 424 is formed as a small piece with a square outer shape from a highly durable and flexible resin material. Although not particularly limited, for example, nylon resin, urethane resin, or the like can be used. In this case, the load and impact when the cushioning member 424 and the trapezoidal projecting portion 413 of the direct-acting member 410 come into contact can be softened by the characteristics of the resin material, and the trapezoidal projecting portion 413 can be prevented from being damaged or chipped. can be suppressed.

The contact member 430 is formed in a substantially triangular elongated plate shape, and has a support hole 431 formed as a circular opening through which the support column portion 405 can be inserted at one end of the elongated plate, and the other end of the elongated plate. and a hook-shaped protrusion 433 having a hook-shaped cross section and protruding toward the front side at a position between the support hole 431 and the protrusion 432. Prepare.

The support hole 431 is an opening through which the support column portion 405 is inserted, whereby the contact member 430 is pivotally supported by the support column portion 405 so as to be rotatably displaceable.

The protruding portion 432 and the hook-shaped protruding portion 433 are portions that receive loads from other constituent members during load transmission, the details of which will be described later.

The fixing member 350 includes a motor fixing portion 351 to which the drive motor MT1 is arranged and fixed, a cushioning member 352 arranged to contact the displacement restricting portion 416, and a tip end of the circular protrusion 403. a plurality of fastening recesses 353 formed as recesses configured so that a fastening screw inserted from the front side through a through-hole inside the recess can be screwed into a female thread formed in the circular protrusion 403 to be fastened and fixed; and a guide portion 354 which is formed of an inclined surface tapered from the front side and the left and right directions and guides the displacement of the granular member 320 (see FIG. 24).

The cushioning member 352 is formed as a small piece having a square outer shape from a highly durable and flexible resin material. Although not particularly limited, for example, nylon resin, urethane resin, or the like can be used. In this case, the load and impact when the cushioning member 352 and the displacement restricting portion 416 of the linear motion member 410 come into contact can be softened by the characteristics of the resin material, and the occurrence of breakage and chipping of the displacement restricting portion 416 can be suppressed. be able to.

As described above, in this embodiment, the buffer members 352 and 424 are arranged at a plurality of locations with which the linear motion member 410 abuts at the end of displacement in the biasing direction. As a result, as will be described later, the linear motion member 410 is displaced upward at high speed by the biasing force of the coil spring SP1. can be absorbed by the deformation of the cushioning members 352 and 424, and the load can be distributed to a plurality of locations.

The columnar protrusion 403 and the fixing member 350 are connected via the fastening recess 353, and in order to release this connection, the fastening screw inserted through the coupling recess 353 needs to be turned and removed. On the other hand, since the fastening screw is inserted from the front side of the fixing member 350, it is possible to insert a screwdriver into the fastening screw when the game board 13 and the shooting effect unit 300 are assembled (see FIG. 12). configured to prevent

As a result, in a state where the game board 13 and the shooting performance unit 300 are assembled, the tightening screws are erroneously loosened to prevent loosening of the tightening between the fixing member 350 and the intermediate member 401. - 特許庁can be done.

Next, description will be made focusing on the rear range. As shown in FIGS. 30 and 33, the space forming member 360 includes the above-described opening 361, a shaft portion 362 projecting in a columnar shape toward the front side from approximately the center position of the rear plate portion, and a rear plate portion. A pair of left and right guide inclined surfaces 363 formed as inclined surfaces on the upper surface of the plate-shaped portion extending toward the front side at the left and right ends of the upper end position of the face plate portion, and arranged below the left and right inner side of the guide inclined surfaces 363 A pair of left and right protruding support portions 364 protruding from the back plate portion toward the front side, and both left and right end portions are formed in a cylindrical shape and arranged on the same line, and are formed in a size capable of pivotally supporting the lid member 480 . A plurality of support column portions 365, a torsion spring SP2 that is wound around the left support column portion 364 and generates a biasing force toward the retracting side of the lid member 480, and a columnar projection on the back side at the upper left portion of the opening 361. and a cylindrical projection 366 that is

The shaft portion 362 is a portion that rotatably supports the front transmission member 440 and the rear transmission member 460 as will be described later. Correspondingly, a wall portion having an arc-shaped inner surface centered on the shaft portion 362 extends from the rear plate portion of the space forming member 360 toward the front side. This wall portion can cover the front transmission member 440 and the rear transmission member 460 inside.

The guide inclined surface 363 is configured so that the inclination of the left and right inner side surfaces is flush with the left and right inner gully surfaces of the guide portion 354 (see FIG. 32), and the granular member 320 flowing down is directed to the collision member 420 side (left and right central side). It is formed so that it can be guided toward.

The protruding support part 364 is formed so that the protruding tip contacts the back surface of the intermediate member 401 and the upper surface is flush with the intermediate member 401 . This flush upper surface supports the left and right ends of the curved plate portion 421 in a state where the collision member 420 is arranged at the lower end position.

The support column portion 365 has different shapes on the left and right. That is, the right side is formed in a small-diameter cylindrical shape that protrudes outward to the left and right, and the left side is formed in a cylindrical shape having an inner diameter capable of receiving the cylindrical portion of the left cover member 489 .

The cylindrical protrusion 366 is a portion that rotatably supports the transmission arm 470 by being inserted through the transmission arm 470 . A screw having a large head diameter is fixed to a female screw formed at the tip of the cylindrical protrusion 366, thereby supporting the transmission arm 470 so that it cannot fall off.

The transmission arm member 470 is an elongated member having an approximately V-shape in appearance, and is a support that is bored with a diameter slightly larger than the outer diameter of the cylindrical projection 366 and through which the cylindrical projection 366 is inserted. A hole 471, a cylindrical protrusion 472 projecting from one end in the longitudinal direction toward the front side in parallel with the axial direction of the support hole 471, and the other end in the longitudinal direction perpendicular to the axis of the support hole 471. and a transmission protrusion 473 that protrudes in a cylindrical shape along the plane.

The columnar protrusion 472 extends through the opening 361 of the space forming member 360 toward the front side and is formed to be engageable with the rear transmission member 460 . In the present embodiment, the position of the transmission arm member 470 is changed by changing the arrangement of the columnar protrusion 472 as the rear transmission member 460 changes its position, which will be described later in detail.

A restricting member 370 is provided on the rear side of the columnar protrusion 472 . That is, the restricting member 370 is a plate-like member that is fastened and fixed to the back side of the space forming member 360, and includes a covering plate portion 371 that covers the movement path of the cylindrical protrusion 472 from the back side and an electrical wiring. Alternatively, a plurality of pressing claw portions 372 formed in a claw shape for the purpose of bundling are provided.

The covering plate portion 371 is arranged close to the back side of the transmission arm member 470, and restricts the displacement of the cylindrical protrusion 472 toward the back side (the back side in the rotation axis direction of the transmission arm member 470). As a result, it is possible to prevent the columnar projection 472 from separating from the rear transmission member 460, so that the engagement between the columnar projection 472 and the rear transmission member 460 can be prevented from being released. can.

The pressing claw portion 372 is a portion that temporarily fastens the electrical wiring connected to the drive motor MT1 and the detection sensor SC4 to the rear side plate of the space forming member 360 . As a result, it is possible to prevent the arrangement of the electrical wiring from shaking (for example, the arrangement of the electrical wiring changes due to vibration, etc.). It can be configured to displace lateral slide member 840 and wings 854 (see FIGS. 10 and 12) of displacement rotary unit 800 in a path that includes positions proximate device 400 .

The transmission protrusion 473 is a portion that is inserted through the lid member 480 to transmit driving force to the lid member 480 .

The lid member 480 is a member configured to be movable forward and backward in and out of the partitioning member 310 through the deformed through portion 315 (see FIG. 12A) of the partitioning member 310, and is formed in a curved plate shape. 481, a plurality of extension plate portions 485 extending in the same direction from both left and right ends of the advancing/retracting portion 481, and a plurality of extension plate portions 485 coaxially received at the extending end portions of the extension plate portions 485. , a transmission hole 487 formed in the left extension plate portion 485 in a curved elongated hole shape and through which the transmission projection 473 of the transmission arm member 470 is inserted, and a cylindrical shape surrounding the right reception portion 486 and has an insertion hole through which a fastening screw to be fastened to a female screw formed at the tip of the support column portion 365 can be inserted while surrounding the receiving portion 486 . a left cover member 489 having a cylindrical portion inserted into the left receiving portion 486 and an elongated hole-shaped portion continuously connected to the transmission hole 487 .

The left cover member 489 is provided with abutment surfaces 489a to 489c that are functionally formed rather than drilled along the axial direction, details of which will be described later.

The cross-sectional shape of the advance/retreat portion 481 of the lid member 480 is arc-shaped around the rotation axis assumed for the receiving portion 486, so that the load from the outer diameter side (the load applied from the granular member 320) can be rotated. Although it is configured to face the axis, it is not a simple pipe divided shape, but the radius of the arc and the length of formation are changed according to the left and right positions. This design intent will be explained.

First, the advance/retreat portion 481 includes an overhang portion 482 projecting toward the entrance side at the lateral center position. The projecting portion 482 is formed so that the projecting width becomes shorter toward the left and right outer sides, and the end surface on the entry side is formed to be inclined toward the left and right outer sides. As a result, when the overhanging portion 482 and another component (in this embodiment, the granular member 320 (see FIG. 24) is assumed) come into contact with each other, the load directed to the left and right outer sides of the component is reduced. can be provided, and the component can be driven to the left and right outside.

Secondly, as described above, the advancing/retracting portion 481 is configured to be able to enter the partitioning member 310 through the deformed through portion 315 (see FIG. 25) of the partitioning member 310. Since it enters the member 310, the arc radius of the advance/retreat portion 481 is shortened at the lateral center position where the overhang portion 482 is formed.

As a result, it is possible to suppress the positional deviation that may occur at the point where it starts to enter the deformed penetrating portion 315 (the center of the projecting portion 482 in the left and right direction). can be suppressed.

Third, the radius of the arc is increased near the left and right outer sides of the retractable portion 481 , as opposed to the center position of the projecting portion 482 . The main purpose of this is to avoid contact with the particulate material 320 . That is, in this embodiment, the granular member 320 (see FIG. 12A) arranged on the upper surface of the collision member 420 stays on the left and right outer sides due to the shape of the curved plate portion 421 .

This retention method is not completely uniform on the left and right, and may become non-uniform on the left and right. For example, there is a possibility that an extremely large number of granular members 320 will stay on the right side, and if sufficient space is not secured, there is a possibility that the unevenly accumulated granular members 320 and the advancing/retreating portion 481 will collide. .

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the arc radius of the advance/retreat portion 481 is increased near the left and right outer portions where a large amount of the granular members 320 tend to stay. As a result, it is possible to secure a sufficiently long distance between the advancing/retreating portion 481 and the curved plate portion 421 in advance. Collisions can be avoided.

Another design concept will be described. The extension plate portion 485 is formed on a plane perpendicular to the rotation axis of the lid member 480, and the end face on the entrance side is recessed toward the retraction side. As a result, the extended plate portion 485 can be prevented from colliding with the staying granular member 320 .

In addition, even if the cover member 480 is arranged at the end of displacement on the entrance side before the granular member 320 completely flows down, the granular member 320 is positioned between the recess forming portion of the extension plate portion 485 and the curved portion of the partition member 310 . The particle members 320 can be collected above the collision member 420 by configuring the particle members 320 to be large enough to pass through the gap between the plate portion 312 (see FIG. 25).

The right and left receiving portions 486 have different shapes. That is, the left receiving portion 486a on the left side is formed in a circular cylinder shape, and the right receiving portion 486b on the right side is formed in a semi-cylindrical shape (half-pipe shape).

Returning to FIG. 28 and FIG. 31, description will be made. The support column portion 365 that supports the lid member 480 extends laterally outward, particularly on the right side. It is necessary to divide the advance/retreat portion 481 in order to assemble it to the column portion 365 .

As described above, in this embodiment, the lid member 480 moves forward and backward through the deformed through portion 315 (see FIG. 25). The deformed penetrating part 315 needs to be configured to allow the lid member 480 to move back and forth with respect to the partitioning member 310 , and to be configured to prevent the particulate member 320 from being ejected from the partitioning member 310 . In other words, the deformed through portion 315 cannot be increased indefinitely, and the degree of freedom in designing the deformed through portion 315 is limited.

Here, if the lid member 480 loses its shape to such an extent that it cannot pass through the deformed through portion 315, it becomes impossible to move forward and backward. On the other hand, when the advancing/retracting portion 481 of the lid member 480 is configured by coupling a plurality of members, there is a possibility that the shape may be lost due to factors such as assembly errors.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the shape of the receiving portion 486 is made different on the left and right, so that the moving portion 481 does not need to be divided. As an assembly process, first, the left receiving portion 486a is arranged on the axially outer side (left side) of the support column portion 365, and the cylindrical portion of the left cover member 489 is inserted into the support column portion 365 while being inserted into the left receiving portion 486a. Thus, the left receiving portion 486a can be arranged coaxially with the support column portion 365. As shown in FIG.

At this time, the right receiving portion 486b is arranged to face the support column portion 365 on the open side of the half cylinder. The left cover member 489 is fastened and fixed to the extended plate portion 485 by inserting fastening screws through the plurality of screw insertion holes formed in the left cover member 489 and screwing them into the extended plate portion 485 on the left side of the lid member 480 . can do.

After that, the right cover member 488 is attached from the outside in the axial direction, and the screw head of the fastening screw that is screwed into the female screw formed at the tip of the right support column portion 365 is used to support the lid member 480 into a space. It can be rotatably supported relative to the forming member 360 .

The design concept of the transmission protrusion 473 of the transmission arm member 470 and the left cover member 489 will be described with reference to FIGS. 34 to 36. FIG. 34 to 36 show the displacement of the transmission arm member 470 and the lid member 480 in chronological order.

34(a) is a plan view of the transmission arm member 470 and the lid member 480 viewed in the direction of arrow XXXIVa in FIG. 28, and FIG. 34(b) is a transmission arm member viewed in the direction of arrow XXXIVb in FIG. 34(a). 34(c) is a partial cross-sectional view of the transmission arm member 470 and the lid member 480 taken along line XXXIVc-XXXIVc of FIG. 34(b).

35(a) is a plan view of the transmission arm member 470 and the lid member 480 as seen in the direction of arrow XXXIVa in FIG. 28, and FIG. 35(b) is a plan view of the transmission arm member as seen in the direction of arrow XXXVb in FIG. 35(a). 35(c) is a partial cross-sectional view of the transmission arm member 470 and the lid member 480 taken along line XXXVc-XXXVc of FIG. 35(b).

36(a) is a plan view of the transmission arm member 470 and the lid member 480 viewed in the direction of arrow XXXIVa in FIG. 28, and FIG. 36(b) is a transmission arm member viewed in the direction of arrow XXXVIb in FIG. 36(a). 36(c) is a partial cross-sectional view of the transmission arm member 470 and the lid member 480 taken along line XXXVIc-XXXVIc in FIG. 36(b).

35 and 36 illustrate a process in which the transmission protrusion 473 of the transmission arm member 470 is displaced upward from the state shown in FIG. 34, and the advance/retreat portion 481 of the lid member 480 is displaced toward the entrance side. Specifically, FIG. 36 illustrates a state in which the lid member 480 is arranged at the entry-side end of the displacement range, and FIG. The arranged state is shown, and FIG. 35 shows the state where the lid member 480 is arranged at the intermediate position of the displacement range.

As shown in FIGS. 34 to 36, in this embodiment, the rotation axis of transmission arm member 470 and the rotation axis of cover member 480 are not parallel. Specifically, a plane orthogonal to the rotation axis of the transmission arm member 470 (a plane shown in FIG. 34(a)) and a plane orthogonal to the rotation axis of the lid member 480 (a plane shown in FIG. 34(b)) ) are orthogonal to each other.

Therefore, without countermeasures, the contact area of the transmission protrusion 473 that contacts the left cover member 489 normally changes as the posture changes. For example, when the inner surface of the opening of the left cover member 489 is formed by a surface extending parallel to the axial direction of the lid member 480, the longitudinal direction of the transmission protrusion 473 extends in the left-right direction as shown in FIG. 34(a). On the other hand, in the inclined state, the upper side surface of the transmission protrusion 473 is considered to abut on the left cover member 489 at a rightward position (near the support hole 471 of the transmission arm member 470).

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 36( a ), when the longitudinal direction of the transmission projection 473 extends along the left-right direction, the upper side surface of the transmission projection 473 is considered to be in contact with the left cover member 489 across the width direction. be done.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 34(c), 35(c) and 36(c), the upper surface of the transmission projection 473 changes in accordance with the posture change of the transmission projection 473. The left cover member 489 is designed in such a shape that the upper side surface of the opening of the left cover member 489 can abut across the lateral width direction.

That is, the left cover member 489 has a first contact surface 489a that contacts the transmission protrusion 473 in a state where the lid member 480 is arranged at the displacement end position on the retracting side, and the first contact surface 489a is relatively small. A second contact surface 489b formed with a small inclination in the left-right direction, and a lid member 480 formed with a small inclination in the left-right direction compared to the second contact surface 489b are arranged at the displacement end position on the entrance side. and a third contact surface 489c that contacts the transmission protrusion 473 in a state.

As described above, in this embodiment, the inclination of the shape of the upper side surface of the opening of the left cover member 489 with respect to the left-right direction is maximized at the first contact surface 489a and gradually decreases toward the rotation axis of the lid member 480. designed to

More specifically, as the transmission arm member 470 rotates, the contact position between the transmission protrusion 473 and the upper side surface of the opening of the left cover member 489 changes in the axial radial direction of the cover member 480 . The inclination at the contact position of the left cover member 489 with the upper side surface of the opening is designed at an inclination angle along the upper surface of the transmission protrusion 473 in the contact state.

As a result, when the transmission arm member 470 and the left cover member 489 are in contact with each other, the contact area between the transmission protrusion 473 and the left cover member 489 can always be ensured regardless of the posture of the transmission arm member 470 . Therefore, it is possible to prevent a local load (overload) from being applied to the transmission protrusion 473 from the left cover member 489 .

Furthermore, in this embodiment, at the timing when a large load is generated, that is, the timing at which the cover member 480 starts to be displaced against gravity, the inclination angle of the transmission projection 473 is set with respect to the left-right direction (the width direction of the left cover member 489). Therefore, the contact area (contact length) between the transmission protrusion 473 and the left cover member 489 can be maximized.

As a result, the area that bears the load applied to the transmission protrusion 473 can be increased, and the load applied per unit area can be reduced, so that the durability of the transmission protrusion 473 can be improved.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, when the lid member 480 is arranged at the displacement end on the entry side, the inclination angle of the transmission protrusion 473 is along the left-right direction (the width direction of the left cover member 489). In addition to the reduced contact area (contact length) between the portion 473 and the left cover member 489, the biasing force of the torsion spring SP2 is maximized, and there is a possibility that the transmission protrusion 473 will be overloaded. be.

As a countermeasure, in the present embodiment, when the cover member 480 is arranged at the displacement end position on the entry side, the proportion of the weight of the cover member 480 that is applied to the transmission protrusion 473 is reduced. ing.

That is, as shown in FIG. 36(b), when the lid member 480 is arranged at the displacement end position on the entrance side, the advance/retreat portion 481, which accounts for most of the weight of the lid member 480, is the rotational axis of the lid member 480. It is arranged on the opposite side (front side) of the transmission protrusion 473 in the front-rear direction with respect to O1. Therefore, most of the weight of the lid member 480 is generated in the direction of displacing the lid member 480 toward the entrance side, and the load applied to the transmission protrusion 473 can be reduced.

In this case, the biasing force of the torsion spring SP2 applied to the lid member 480 is the maximum, but since most of the weight of the lid member 480 is generated against the biasing force of the torsion spring SP2, the biasing force is at least Part of this can be offset by the weight of the lid member 480 itself.

As a result, the load applied to the transmission protrusion 473 is greater than that in the case where most of the biasing force of the torsion spring SP2 is transmitted to the transmission protrusion 473 in the state where the cover member 480 is arranged at the displacement end position on the entry side. can be reduced.

Further, as described above, in the present embodiment, the contact position between the transmission protrusion 473 and the left cover member 489 changes in the axial radial direction of the rotation axis O1 of the lid member 480 . More specifically, the distance between the abutment position between the transmission protrusion 473 and the left cover member 489 and the rotation axis of the cover member 480 in the process of displacing the cover member 480 from the retreating position to the entering position is The member 480 is configured to be the longest when it is arranged at the displacement end position on the withdrawal side.

In addition, the first contact surface 489a has a normal line at the contact position with the transmission protrusion 473 on a plane orthogonal to the rotation axis O1 of the lid member 480, which is an arc centered on the rotation axis O1 of the lid member 480. Since the inclination of the first contact surface 489a is designed so as to follow (the inclination angle becomes smaller), the load transmitted from the transmission protrusion 473 to the lid member 480 is shifted to the rotation axis O1 of the lid member 480. It can occur along an arc.

This lengthens the arm length of the moment generated in the lid member 480 when the load starts to be transmitted from the transmission projection 473 to the lid member 480, thereby reducing the load required to rotate the lid member 480. can do.

As a contrivance of the shape of the transmission projection 473 itself, as shown in FIG. 34(c), the transmission projection 473 has a groove 473a formed along the longitudinal direction. That is, the transmission projection 473 is formed with a groove 473a extending in the longitudinal direction from the front side to the rear side to a position beyond the center in the width direction.

As a result, the transmission protrusion 473 can be compressed and deformed in the direction of contact with the left cover member 489, so that the load applied during contact can be relieved by deformation, and the contact area can be easily increased by deformation. can do.

As shown in FIGS. 34(b), 35(b), and 36(b), the curved plate portion 312 arranged to face the advancing/retracting portion 481 of the lid member 480 is formed in a shape along the same plane across the left and right. be done.
Therefore, the distance between the lid member 480 and the curved plate portion 312 becomes shorter toward the center in the left-right direction due to the shape of the retractable portion 481 and the projecting portion 482 .

The radius of the projecting portion 482 of the lid member 480 at the center position in the left-right direction is designed to be less than the distance (length) from the rotation axis O1 to the curved plate portion 312 . As a result, it is possible to prevent the projecting portion 482 having the maximum approach width from colliding with the curved plate portion 312, so that the lid member 480 is slightly over-rotated (caused by design error of each member). In this case, the lid member 480 and the curved plate portion 312 can be prevented from colliding and being damaged.

Returning to FIGS. 28 and 31, description will be made focusing on the intermediate range. The drive gear 450 is meshed with the front transmission member 440, and the rear transmission member 460 is fastened and fixed to the front transmission member 440. As a result, as the drive gear 450 rotates, the front transmission member 440 and the rear transmission member 440 rotate. The transmission member 460 integrally rotates about the shaft portion 362 of the space forming member 360 . In the following description, rotation in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front (viewed from the side of the front transmission member 440) is defined as forward rotation.

The front side transmission member 440 and the rear side transmission member 460 have a structure for ensuring mutual relative position and rigidity on the sides arranged opposite to each other, and the opposite side surface is used for driving force transmission. A shape is formed. The details of the shape portion used for this driving force transmission will be described below.

37(a) is a plan view of the front transmission member 440 as viewed in the direction of arrow XXXVIIa in FIG. 28, and FIG. 37(b) is a plan view of the rear transmission member 460 as viewed in the direction of arrow XXXVIIb in FIG. . The arrow XXXVIIa direction and the arrow XXXVIIb direction are set as directions parallel to the rotation axes of the front transmission member 440 and the rear transmission member 460 .

As shown in FIG. 37( a ), the front transmission member 440 includes a substantially disk-shaped body plate portion 441 and an axially protruding center portion of the body plate portion 441 from the edge of the body plate portion 441 . A groove forming portion 442 that is recessed, a support hole 443 that is a circular opening that is bored in the center of the main body plate portion 441 and has a size that allows the shaft portion 362 to pass through, and a gear that is formed in the main body plate portion 441. A flange portion 444 covering the teeth, a detected portion 445 extending radially outward from the flange portion 444 and formed so as to be able to enter the detection groove of the detection sensor SC4 (see FIG. 32), and groove formation. a transmission protrusion 446 protruding parallel to the rotation shaft from a position eccentric to the support hole 443 on the support hole 443 side of the groove formed in the portion 442 .

The groove forming portion 442 is recessed with a groove having a groove width slightly longer than the diameter of the projecting portion 432 so that the projecting portion 432 of the contact member 430 (see FIG. 28) can enter. The groove is a first groove portion 442a formed along a first circular arc shape, and the front transmission member 440 rotates forward in a state in which the projecting portion 432 of the contact member 430 is arranged in the first groove portion 442a. A second groove portion 442b in which the protruding portion 432 is guided, and an arc shape formed on the opposite side of the first groove portion 442a with respect to the second groove portion 442b and having a larger diameter than the arc serving as a reference for the first groove portion 442a. and a fourth groove portion 442d connecting the third groove portion 442c and the first groove portion 442a.

While the second groove portion 442b and the fourth groove portion 442d have a common role of connecting between the first groove portion 442a and the third groove portion 442c, their forming angle range is not common. That is, the formation angle range of the fourth groove portion 442d is smaller than that of the second groove portion 442b. designed to be

The transmission projection 446 does not have a simple cylindrical shape, but has a groove 446a formed in a straight line connecting the central portion and a point on the outer diameter side along the projecting direction. Thereby, the degree of deformation of the transmission protrusion 446 with respect to the load input from the radial direction can be changed according to the input angle of the load. That is, the transmission protrusion 446 can be formed so that the degree of deformation is maximized when a load is input in a direction perpendicular to the straight line that serves as a reference for the groove 446a.

As shown in FIG. 37(b), the rear transmission member 460 includes a body plate portion 461 formed in a substantially disk shape with a diameter approximately equal to that of the flange portion 444 of the front transmission member 440, and and a groove forming portion 462 projecting in the axial direction of the body plate portion 461 and having a groove recessed therein; and a non-contact opening 463 formed to avoid contact with the

The main body plate portion 461 includes a weight portion 461a that is enlarged in the radial direction in a range in which a recessed groove portion is not formed in the groove forming portion 462 and does not function as a groove. The weight portion 461a is an adjustment portion formed for the purpose of correcting the amount of deviation of the center of gravity of the rotationally displaced rear transmission member 460 from the rotation axis.

In the present embodiment, the center of gravity is calculated when the rear transmission member 460 and the front transmission member 440, which are integrally rotationally displaced, are viewed as an integrated body, and the weight 461a is arranged and arranged for the purpose of correcting the center of gravity to the shape of the rotation axis. It is weighted and formed integrally with the rear transmission member 460 . As a result, the center of gravity of the front transmission member 440 and the rear transmission member 460 can be aligned with the rotation axis, so that the posture change of the front transmission member 440 and the rear transmission member 460 with respect to the rotation axis can be suppressed. .

The groove forming portion 462 is formed with a groove having a groove width slightly longer than the diameter of the cylindrical projection 472 so that the cylindrical projection 472 of the transmission arm member 470 (see FIG. 28) can enter. , the groove includes a first groove portion 462a formed along a first circular arc shape, and the rear transmission member 460 in a state where the cylindrical protrusion 472 of the transmission arm member 470 is arranged in the first groove portion 462a. A second groove portion 462b in which the cylindrical protrusion 472 is guided by forward rotation (rotation in the clockwise direction when viewed from the back), and a second groove portion 462b formed on the opposite side of the first groove portion 462a with respect to the second groove portion 462b. A third groove 462c formed along an arc having a larger diameter than the reference arc of 462a, and a fourth groove 462d connecting the third groove 462c and the first groove 462a.

While the second groove portion 462b and the fourth groove portion 462d have a common role of connecting between the first groove portion 462a and the third groove portion 462c, their forming angle range is not common. That is, compared to the second groove portion 462b, the formation angle range of the fourth groove portion 462d is remarkably large (approximately 180 degrees). It is designed so that the change in the distance between is slow.

An example of a displacement mode enabled by the injection device 400 will be described below. First, an overview of the displacement mode of the injection device 400 will be described.

38, 39, 40 and 41 are plan views of the injection device 400 viewed in the direction of arrow XXXVIIa in FIG. 38, 39, 40 and 41, the illustration of the fixing member 350 is omitted so that the internal structure of the injection device 400 can be visually recognized. In order to facilitate understanding, the coil spring SP1 is shown in phantom lines as a schematic diagram to the extent that changes in length can be grasped.

38 to 41 illustrate the displacement of the injection device 400 in chronological order. 38 shows the state immediately after the granular member 320 flows down toward the collision member 420 and stops, FIG. 39 shows the waiting state of the injection device 400 for effect, and FIG. A firing standby state, which is a state of waiting for the firing timing of the device 400, is illustrated, and FIG. 41 illustrates a firing state, which is a state immediately after the ejection device 400 executes the firing effect. 41 shows a state in which the granular member 320 is still riding on the collision member 420, the granular member 320 scatters in the normal direction of the curved plate portion 421 immediately after this.

In the state shown in FIG. 38, the collision member 420 is supported by the direct-acting member 410, and the cover member 480 is arranged at the displacement end position on the retreating side. A state in which the cover member 480 is displaced from the state shown in FIG. 38 to the end of displacement on the entrance side will be described as the effect waiting state of the injection device 400 (see FIG. 39).

In the effect waiting state shown in FIG. 39, the cover member 480 is arranged at the displacement end position on the entry side, so that the player's line of sight to the granular member 320 can be partially blocked by the cover member 480 . As a result, the player's attention to the granular member 320 can be reduced, so that the player's eyes can be taken away from the subsequent displacement of the granular member 320 and the collision member 420 arranged therebelow.

In the firing standby state shown in FIG. 40, the collision member 420 is suspended in such a manner that the cylindrical projection 403 abuts against the upper inner surface of the guide hole 423, and the cover member 480 is arranged at the displacement end position on the retreat side. . In addition, as will be described later, the displacement of the linear motion member 410 is restricted by the contact member 430, and the biasing force of the coil spring SP1 is accumulated.

In the firing state shown in FIG. 41, the arrangement of the cover member 480 is maintained at the displacement end position on the retreating side, the collision member 420 is bounced by the direct-acting member 410 and rises, and the cylindrical projection 403 moves into the guide hole. It stops at a position where it abuts against the lower inner surface of 423 . After that, the collision member 420 is displaced downward by its own weight or the weight of the granular member 320, and returns to the arrangement shown in FIG.

The flowing down of the granular members 320 splashed and scattered by the collision member 420 is guided toward the collision member 420 after being gathered to the left and right central sides due to the shape of the curved plate portion 312 (see FIG. 25) of the partition member 310. (See arrows schematically shown in FIG. 38).

In the present embodiment, when the granular member 320 is guided toward the collision member 420, the collision member 420 is arranged relatively upward. and the upper surface of the curved plate portion 421 is set shallow.

Therefore, due to the shape, there is a possibility that the plurality of granular members 320 cannot be received unevenly. In this embodiment, the partitioning member 310 accommodates the number of granular members 320 that cannot be received unevenly.

As a result, for example, even if a large number of the granular members 320 begin to return to the right side of the collision member 420, when the granular members 320 return after that, the granular members 320 that have returned first will cause the collision member 420 to move. Since a slope that slopes downward toward the left side is formed on the right side, the granular material 320 that returns later flows along the slope to the left. That is, it flows to the left while riding on the granular member 320 .

As a result, the left and right bias of the granular members 320 accumulated on the upper surface of the curved plate portion 421 of the collision member 420 can be reduced, so that the bias in the arrangement of the granular members 320 (differences in the scattering mode) in each firing performance can be reduced. can do.

Further, when the granular member 320 is guided to the collision member 420 side, the collision member 420 is arranged in the middle position of the displacement section, and the lower direct-acting member 410 and the trapezoidal projecting portion 413 are located at one point. They are only in contact with each other. Therefore, the collision member 420 is allowed to change its posture by the gap generated between the cylindrical protrusion 403 and the guide hole 423 . In other words, it is allowed to change its posture in a manner of rotating around an axis parallel to the axis of one cylindrical protrusion 403 .

As described above, for example, when a large number of granular members 320 begin to return to the right side of the collision member 420, the collision member 420 changes its posture in such a manner that the right side descends compared to the left side. However, in this case, the uppermost portion of the curved plate portion 421 is relatively displaced to the right.

Therefore, it becomes easier to guide the granular member 320, which flows down near the left-right center position of the guide portion 354 (see FIG. 32) and returns to the collision member 420 side, to the left side. For example, before the collision member 420 changes its posture, the left-right center position of the guide portion 354 and the uppermost position of the curved plate portion 421 match when viewed from the front. As to which direction the granular members 320 flow down, it is considered that the granular members 320 and the curved plate portion 421 are distributed almost evenly to the left and right depending on the difference in contact points between the granular members 320 and the curved plate portion 421 .

On the other hand, when the collision member 420 changes its posture, the position of the uppermost portion of the curved plate portion 421 is shifted to the right with respect to the left-right center position of the guide portion 354, and the guide portion 354 flows downward at the left-right center position. It is considered that the granular member 320 is guided leftward along the slope of the curved plate portion 421 .
As a result, it becomes easier for the granular members 320 that have returned later to flow down to the side where there are fewer staying granular members 320, so that the granular members 320 can be distributed substantially evenly to the left and right.

It should be noted that the attitude change of the collision member 420 is not always permitted. For example, in the firing standby state of the injection device 400 (see FIG. 40), the cylindrical protrusions 403 are arranged at the upper end positions of both of the pair of guide holes 423, and the collision member 420 is suspended at two symmetrical points. Therefore, compared with the effect standby state of the injection device 400, the posture change of the collision member 420 is suppressed.

Further, for example, in the firing state of the injection device 400 (see FIG. 41), the cylindrical projections 403 are arranged at the lower end positions of both of the pair of guide holes 423, and the collision member 420 moves upward at two symmetrical points. is restricted, the change in posture of the collision member 420 is suppressed compared to the effect standby state of the injection device 400 .

In addition, when the collision member 420 receives the load from the linear motion member 410, the load is the biasing force generated by the pair of coil springs SP1 that expand and contract in the direction parallel to the longitudinal direction of the pair of guide holes 423. The posture of the collision member 420 is easily stabilized.

Therefore, it is possible to suppress the attitude change of the collision member 420 from the firing standby state to the firing state. This makes it possible to stabilize how the granular members 320 scatter under the load from the collision member 420 when the staying state of the granular members 320 (left-right imbalance in the number of particles) is the same.

As described above, when the injection device 400 executes the shooting effect, the granular members 320 scatter, flow down along the internal shape of the partitioning member 310 (see FIG. 25), and the curved plate portion 421 of the collision member 420 , and return to the production standby state again. That is, in this embodiment, the injection device 400 is configured to be able to repeatedly execute the state changes of FIGS. 38 to 41 . The relationship between the structures of injection device 400 to enable this state change is described in detail below.

FIGS. 42(a) to 42(f) and FIGS. 43(a) to 43(e) show the linear motion member 410, the collision member 420, the contact member 430 and the front transmission member as viewed in the direction of the arrow XXXVIIa in FIG. 440 is a plan view of FIG.

42(a) to 42(f) and FIGS. 43(a) to 43(e), the outlines of the linear motion member 410, the collision member 420 and the contact member 430 are illustrated by imaginary lines. 414 and 415 of the linear motion member 410, the cushioning member 424 of the collision member 420, the projecting portion 432 of the contact member 430 and the hook-shaped The outer shape of the protrusion 433 is illustrated by a solid line, the interior thereof is illustrated transparently, and the front transmission member 440 arranged on the rear side thereof is illustrated without being hidden.

Also, in order to facilitate understanding of the displaceable section of the collision member 420, the outer shape of the cylindrical projection 403 is shown in solid lines, and the inside thereof is shown transparently. is illustrated without being hidden.

In addition, the arrangement of the detection sensor SC4 is illustrated by imaginary lines in order to facilitate understanding of the relationship with drive control.

42 and 43, the linear motion member 410, the collision member 420, and the contact member 430 (hereinafter also referred to as "each component member" in the description of FIGS. ) are shown in chronological order. They will be described in order below.

FIG. 42(a) shows the layout of each component in the injection device 400 in the waiting state for the effect. As shown in FIG. 42(a), when the ejection device 400 is in the presentation standby state, the detected portion 445 of the front transmission member 440 begins to enter the detection groove of the detection sensor SC4.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, the MPU 221 (see FIG. 4) of the sound lamp control device 113 detects the front transmission member 440 in the detection groove of the detection sensor SC4 in a state where the drive motor MT1 is driven and controlled to rotate forward. By detecting a change from a state in which the portion 445 is not arranged to a state in which the portion 445 to be detected is inserted, it can be determined that the ejection device 400 is in the effect standby state.

FIG. 42(b) shows the arrangement of each component in a state where the transmission projection 446 of the front transmission member 440 abuts on the projection 414 of the linear motion member 410 and starts pushing down the linear motion member 410. FIG. From the state shown in FIG. 42(b), the front transmission member 440 starts pushing down the linear motion member 410 against the biasing force of the coil spring SP1 (see FIG. 38).

Therefore, from FIG. 42(a) to FIG. 42(b), since the linear motion member 410 and the front side transmission member 440 are not in contact with each other, direct load transmission between the members is interrupted. Therefore, for example, even if the granular member 320 (see FIG. 38) flows down and collides with the collision member 420 and the collision member 420 vibrates slightly, the vibration and load are directly transmitted to the front transmission member 440. is configured to be interruptible.

FIG. 42(c) shows the arrangement of each component in a state where the collision member 420 is arranged at the lower end position of the displacement range and the contact between the linear motion member 410 and the collision member 420 begins to be released.

From the state shown in FIG. 42(b) to the state shown in FIG. 42(c), the linear motion member 410 and the collision member 420 are integrally displaced downward. In this state, the collision member 420 and the linear motion member 410 are in contact with each other, and the linear motion member 410 and the front transmission member 440 are in contact with each other. , indirectly to the front transmission member 440 .

On the other hand, the load generated when the granular member 320 collides with the collision member 420 is a load in the direction of pushing down the linear motion member 410. This is the direction away from the protrusion 446 . Therefore, the influence of the load and vibration transmitted to the front transmission member 440 on the positive rotational displacement of the transmission member 440 can be reduced.

It should be noted that the influence on forward rotation displacement is not limited at all. For example, there are influences such as the difference between the speed that is driven and controlled as rotational displacement and the actual speed, and the influence that hinders the rotational displacement and causes the drive motor MT1 (see FIG. 38) to generate heat.

FIG. 42(d) shows the arrangement of each component in a state in which the projecting portion 432 of the contact member 430 is arranged at the end position of the first groove portion 442a of the front transmission member 440, and the contact member 430 begins to tilt. be done.

The abutting member 430 is a member that does not receive an urging force from other urging means and changes its posture according to the shape of the grooved portion 442 . From FIG. 42(d) onward, the number of members displaced by the front transmission member 440 increases to two, namely, the linear motion member 410 and the contact member 430. Since it is the same, substantially, the state of the load received by the front transmission member 440 is little changed from the state before FIG.

FIG. 42(e) illustrates the arrangement of each structural member in a state where the linear motion member 410 is arranged at the lower terminal position of the displacement range. As shown in FIG. 42(e), when the linear motion member 410 is located at the lower end position, the linear motion member 410 and the contact member 430 are still separated from each other.

After the state shown in FIG. 42(e), the transmission protrusion 446 of the front transmission member 440 starts to be displaced upward. Therefore, the biasing force of the coil spring SP1 (see FIG. 38) applied to the linear motion member 410 is generated in the direction of pushing the transmission projection 446. The load required for posture change can be assisted by the biasing force of the coil spring SP1. As a result, the load on the drive motor MT1 (see FIG. 38) can be reduced.

FIG. 42(f) shows the arrangement of each component in a state where the projecting portion 432 of the contact member 430 is arranged at the end position of the second groove portion 442b of the front transmission member 440, and the contact member 430 has finished tilting. be done.

As shown in FIG. 42(f), the linear motion member 410 and the contact member 430 are still arranged apart from each other, but after the state shown in FIG. is arranged in the third groove portion 442c, the posture of the contact member 430 is maintained (posture change is prevented).

Therefore, regarding the contact between the linear motion member 410 and the contact member 430 after this, compared to the case where the linear motion member 410 and the contact member 430 are brought into contact with each other at a speed in the direction facing each other, the speed of contact is greater. Aspects can be softened.

In order to facilitate understanding, FIG. 43(a) shows the same state as FIG. 42(f). In FIG. 43(b), as the transmission projection 446 of the front transmission member 440 is displaced upward, the linear motion member 410 is displaced upward. The arrangement of each component is illustrated in a state where the hook-shaped protrusion 433 of 430 starts to abut.

The state shown in FIG. 43(a) to the state immediately before the state shown in FIG. 43(d) corresponds to the firing standby state (for example, see FIG. 40).

The lower protrusion 415 and the hook-shaped protrusion 433 are provided with projecting portions projecting toward the mutually opposing sides at the tip portions on the mutually opposing sides. As a result, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of slippage at the contact position between the lower protruding portion 415 and the hook-shaped protrusion 433, so that the lower protruding portion 415 and the hook-shaped protruding portion 433 can stably contact each other. can be brought into contact.

In the state shown in FIG. 43(b), the end position of the detected portion 445 of the front transmission member 440 is arranged in the detection groove of the detection sensor SC4. Therefore, when the front transmission member 440 rotates forward from the state shown in FIG. 43B, the detected portion 445 is retracted from the detection groove of the detection sensor SC4. output.

That is, in the present embodiment, the MPU 221 (see FIG. 4) of the sound lamp control device 113 detects the front transmission member 440 to be detected by the detection groove of the detection sensor SC4 in a state in which the drive motor MT1 is driven and controlled to rotate forward. Control is performed to determine that the injection device 400 has transitioned to the firing standby state by detecting a change from the state in which the portion 445 is arranged to the state in which the detected portion 445 retreats from the detection groove of the detection sensor SC4. be done.

After the state shown in FIG. A coil spring SP1 (see FIG. 38) exerts a biasing force on the direct-acting member 410, and a load is applied to the contact member 430 in a direction that causes the contact member 430 to stand up. The displacement of the setting portion 432 is restricted by being blocked by the groove forming portion 442 .

The contact between the protruding portion 432 and the groove forming portion 442 is the contact between the circularly curved surface (the outer side surface of the protruding portion 432) and the arcuate surface (the inner side surface of the third groove portion 442c). The resulting load is directed towards the center of the circle.

That is, in the state shown in FIG. 43(b), the load applied from the projecting portion 432 to the groove forming portion 442 is directed toward the rotation shaft of the front transmission member 440, so the load applied from the projecting portion 432 is applied to the front side. It is possible to prevent the rotation of the transmission member 440 from being affected, and to restrict the displacement of the projecting portion 432 regardless of the driving state of the front transmission member 440 .

Therefore, in the firing standby state shown in FIG. 43(b), the state shown in FIG. 43(b) can be maintained even after the drive motor MT1 (see FIG. 38) is de-energized. As a result, the heat generation of the drive motor MT1 can be suppressed, for example, compared to a configuration in which the drive motor MT1 must be constantly energized in the firing standby state, so the degree of freedom in setting the drive control of the drive motor MT1 can be increased. can be improved.

For example, when the injection device 400 is driven and controlled in conjunction with the display effect on the third symbol display device 81, the setting of the length of the display effect from the firing standby state to the firing state is restricted. does not occur from the viewpoint of heat generation of the drive motor MT1.

FIG. 43(c) shows the arrangement of the constituent members in a state where the protruding portion 432 of the contact member 430 is arranged at the end position of the third groove portion 442c of the front transmission member 440, and the contact member 430 begins to stand up. be done.

After the state shown in FIG. 43(c), the position of the grooved portion 442 in contact with the projecting portion 432 changes from the third grooved portion 442c. The axis of rotation of the member 440 is displaced.

Therefore, in order to deenergize the drive motor MT1 (see FIG. 38) and maintain the firing standby state, the drive motor MT1 must be turned off before the state shown in FIG. 43(b) changes to the state shown in FIG. must be de-energized.

In FIG. 43(d), the hook-shaped protrusion 433 of the contact member 430 retreats from the displacement trajectory of the lower projection 415 of the linear motion member 410, so that the upward displacement restriction of the linear motion member 410 is released. , and coil spring SP1 (see FIG. 38), the linear motion member 410 is displaced upward by the biasing force accumulated, and the collision member 420 is bounced upward. The state shown in FIG. 43(d) corresponds to the firing state (see FIG. 41).

Since the displacement of the contact member 430 in the upright direction basically occurs along the shape of the grooved portion 442 of the front transmission member 440, its driving force is generated from the drive motor MT1 (see FIG. 38). . On the other hand, since the displacement of the linear motion member 410 is not restricted by the transmission projection 446 of the front transmission member 440, the coil spring SP1 transmitted to the contact member 430 via the linear motion member 410 The urging force (see FIG. 38) also acts to assist the displacement of the contact member 430 in the upright direction.

In this embodiment, both the direction of displacement of the contact member 430 caused by the driving force of the drive motor MT1 and the direction of displacement of the contact member 430 caused by the biasing force of the coil spring SP1 given via the linear motion member 410 are Since they are configured to be the same in the erecting direction, the driving force and the urging force applied to the contact member 430 can be generated in a mutually assisting manner.

FIG. 43(e) shows the arrangement of each component in a state where the projecting portion 432 of the contact member 430 is arranged at the end position of the fourth groove portion 442d of the front transmission member 440, and the contact member 430 finishes standing. be done.

After the state shown in FIG. 43(e), the position of the grooved portion 442 that contacts the projecting portion 432 of the contact member 430 is the first grooved portion 442a. As a result, the load applied from the projecting portion 432 to the grooved portion 442 is directed toward the rotation shaft of the front transmission member 440 , so that the load applied from the projecting portion 432 to the grooved portion 442 is applied to the front transmission member 440 . The influence on rotation can be reduced.

For example, in the present embodiment, the biasing force accumulated in the coil spring SP1 (see FIG. 38) was applied to the contact member 430 until immediately before the state shown in FIG. ) It is expected that the load generated in the direction in which the contact member 430 is erected in subsequent displacements will also increase. Therefore, without countermeasures, the rotation of the front transmission member 440 may be hindered due to the standing displacement of the contact member 430 .

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as soon as the contact member 430 finishes standing up, the projecting portion 432 of the contact member 430 is arranged in the first groove portion 442 a, and the contact member 430 moves through the projecting portion 432 . The load applied to the front transmission member 440 is directed toward the rotation shaft of the front transmission member 440 . This makes it easier to avoid hindrance to the rotation of the front transmission member 440 due to the upright displacement of the contact member 430 .

43(e), the drive motor MT1 (see FIG. 38) is driven in the direction to rotate the front transmission member 440 forward, and when it is detected that the detected portion 445 has entered the detection groove of the detection sensor SC4. , the injection device 400 can be returned to the effect standby state by controlling the drive motor MT1 to stop, and the MPU 221 ( 4) is designed.

In the above description with reference to FIGS. 42 and 43, as an example of the control of the ejection device 400, the ejection execution control of making one rotation of the front transmission member 440 in the forward rotation direction from the standby state of the ejection device 400 for rendering has been described. In the shooting execution control, in the shooting state, the collision member 420 is bounced off by the linear motion member 410 which is lifted by the biasing force of the coil spring SP1, and the granular member 320 scatters.

This effect is flashy because the granular members 320 are scattered in the field of view of the player, and can improve the attention of the player. At the timing near the end of the following long reach, if a big hit is achieved, the player's amusement can be improved by shifting to a shooting state and scattering the granular members 320 for presentation.

On the other hand, if it is not a big win (if it is a miss), executing the effect of scattering the granular members 320 may mislead the player into thinking that it is a big win, which is not preferable.

Also, if the driving motor MT1 (see FIG. 38) of the injection device 400 is not driven at all when the ejection state does not shift (in the case of a miss), the driving sound of the driving motor MT1 indicates that long reach during execution results in a big hit. The player will be able to grasp whether it will be or will be lost, and there is a risk that the player's interest will be reduced.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, in the case of misalignment, after the injection device 400 is placed in the firing standby state, the drive motor MT1 is controlled to rotate the front transmission member 440 in the reverse direction. It is configured to be able to return to the performance standby state of the injection device 400 without going through the firing state.

That is, for example, from the state shown in FIG. 43(c), by driving and controlling the driving motor MT1 in the direction of rotating the front side transmission member 440 in the reverse direction (clockwise), each constituent member is displaced in the reverse direction of the time series. can be made

In this case, before the contact member 430 starts to be displaced in the upright direction (see FIG. 42(e)), the linear motion member 410 is pushed down to bring the linear motion member 410 and the contact member 430 into contact with each other. is released (see FIG. 42(f)), it is possible to avoid rubbing between the linear motion member 410 and the contact member 430 when the contact is released.

42(e) onward, the biasing force of the coil spring SP1 (see FIG. 38) applied to the transmission projection 446 of the front transmission projection 440 via the linear motion member 410 causes the front transmission projection 440 to rotate. Since it works in the assisting direction, it is possible to reduce the magnitude of the drive force required for the drive motor MT1 (see FIG. 38).

In this case, the upward displacement of the linear motion member 410 is not instantaneous due to the elastic return of the coil spring SP1 (see FIG. 38), but is configured as a gradual displacement accompanying the displacement of the transmission protrusion 446. FIG.

As a result, it is possible to prevent the linear motion member 410 from knocking off the collision member 420, so that the injection device 400 is placed in the effect waiting state (see FIG. 42(a)) without executing the effect in which the granular member 320 scatters. can be returned to

In order to achieve the state shown in FIG. 42(a) after the front transmission member 440 reversely rotates, the detection sensor SC4 is rotated after detecting that the detected portion 445 has retreated from the detection groove of the detection sensor SC4. The drive motor MT1 (see FIG. 38) may be driven and controlled so as to rotate the front transmission member 440 forward until it is detected that the groove 445 to be detected has again entered the detection groove.

As a result, both the effect control to scatter the granular members 320 and the effect control not to scatter the granular members 320 can be performed with the same preparatory motion associated with the driving of the drive motor MT1. Therefore, it is possible to make it possible for the player to easily understand whether the game is a big hit or not, and it is possible to prevent the player from being able to predict the result of winning or not due to the difference in the driving sound.

In particular, according to this embodiment, in the firing standby state (see FIG. 43(c)), the drive motor MT1 (see FIG. 38) is de-energized, and the drive sound of the drive motor MT1 can be temporarily eliminated. . As a result, compared to the case where control is performed to switch the driving direction from a state in which the driving of the driving motor MT1 is continued, it is possible to make it difficult to recognize from the driving sound whether the driving direction is the same or the opposite direction. .

Therefore, even if the drive motor MT1 is driven and controlled prior to the winning/failure notification timing in the performance, and the driving sound is generated, it is difficult to determine the driving direction, thereby avoiding a situation in which the player grasps the winning/failing result. be able to.

As a result, the drive control of the drive motor MT1 can be started prior to the timing of the success/fail notification without running the risk of the player grasping the win/fail result by the driving sound. It is possible to give width to the stop timing. In other words, it is possible to eliminate the need to stop the drive motor MT1 in a state immediately before the firing state, and even if the drive motor MT1 is stopped in a state sufficiently before the firing state, there is no hindrance to the performance thereafter. Therefore, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the drive motor MT1 overrotates against the control and unintentionally enters a firing state.

FIGS. 44(a) to 44(f) are plan views of the rear transmission member 460, the transmission arm member 470, and the lid member 480 as viewed in the direction of the arrow XXXVIIb in FIG.

In FIG. 44, the change in arrangement of the transmission arm member 470 and the lid member 480 (hereinafter also referred to as “each constituent member” in the description of FIG. 44) associated with forward rotation (clockwise rotation) of the rear transmission member 460 is Illustrated in chronological order. They will be described in order below.

FIG. 44(a) shows the arrangement of each component in the injection device 400 in the presentation standby state (see FIG. 42(a)). As shown in FIG. 44( a ), when the ejection device 400 is in the performance standby state, the cylindrical projection 472 of the transmission arm member 470 is arranged at the end position of the third groove 462 c of the rear transmission member 460 , and the cover member 480 is placed at the displacement end position on the entry side.

Since the lid member 480 receives a biasing force directed toward the retreating side from the torsion spring SP2 (see FIG. 33), a load is generated via the lid member 480 in the direction of pushing down the transmission protrusion 473 of the transmission arm member 470. The transmission to the rear transmission member 460 may affect the rotation of the rear transmission member 460 without countermeasures.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, in the state after FIG. 44(a), the cylindrical projection 472 of the transmission arm member 470 contacts the third groove 462c of the groove forming portion 462, and When a load is applied to the rear transmission member 460, the contact between the circular curved surface and the arc-shaped surface causes the load generated by the contact to move toward the center of the circle.

Therefore, the load applied to the grooved portion 462 via the cylindrical protrusion 472 is directed toward the rotation shaft of the rear transmission member 460, so the load applied to the grooved portion 462 via the cylindrical protrusion 472 is transferred to the rear side. The influence on the rotation of the side transmission member 460 can be reduced.

In FIG. 44(b), the cylindrical projection 472 of the transmission arm member 470 is arranged at the terminal position of the third groove 462c of the rear transmission member 460, and the lid member 480 is still arranged at the displacement terminal position on the entry side. The placement of each component in the state is illustrated.

In FIG. 44(c), the columnar projection 472 of the transmission arm member 470 is arranged at the middle position of the fourth groove 462d of the rear transmission member 460, and the lid member 480 is arranged at substantially the middle position of the displacement range. The arrangement of each component in is illustrated.

Since the posture change of the transmission arm member 470 basically occurs along the shape of the grooved portion 462 of the rear side transmission member 460, the driving force for the posture change drives the rear side transmission member 460 to rotate. It is generated from the drive motor MT1 (see FIG. 38).

On the other hand, the biasing force of the torsion spring SP2 (see FIG. 33) works in the direction of pushing down the transmission projection 473 of the transmission arm member 470 via the cover member 480, and at the same time, this biasing force pushes the cylindrical projection 472 upward. Since the biasing force of the torsion spring SP2 also acts to assist the posture change of the transmission arm member 470, it acts in the direction of displacement.

In this embodiment, the direction in which the posture of the transmission arm member 470 changes due to the driving force of the drive motor MT1 and the direction in which the posture of the transmission arm member 470 changes due to the biasing force of the torsion spring SP2 applied via the lid member 480 are Since both are configured identically in the clockwise direction, the driving force and the biasing force applied to the transmission arm member 470 can be generated in a mutually supportive manner.

In FIG. 44(d), the columnar projection 472 of the transmission arm member 470 is arranged at the end position of the fourth groove portion 462d of the rear transmission member 460, and the cover member 480 is arranged at the displacement end position on the withdrawal side. The arrangement of each component in is illustrated.

In the state shown in FIG. 44(d), the lid member 480 is maintained at the end of displacement on the retreating side by the biasing force of the torsion spring SP2 (see FIG. 33). Further, the transmission protrusion 473 of the transmission arm member 470 and the left cover member 489 are arranged without contact.

As a result, it is possible to prevent a load from being applied to the transmission protrusion 473 even when it is not necessary to displace the cover member 480 toward the entrance side, and it is possible to reduce the degree of accumulation of fatigue in the transmission arm member 470 . .

In FIG. 44(e), the columnar projection 472 of the transmission arm member 470 is arranged in the middle of the first groove 462a of the rear transmission member 460, and the lid member 480 is still arranged at the displacement end on the retreat side. The arrangement of each component in is illustrated.

After the state shown in FIG. 44(e), the firing standby state (see FIG. 43(b)) is configured. From the firing standby state to the firing state, the cover member 480 is arranged at the displacement end on the retracting side, and is configured to be able to avoid collision with the ejected granular member 320 (see FIG. 41).

In FIG. 44(f), the cylindrical projection 472 of the transmission arm member 470 is arranged at the terminal position of the first groove 462a of the rear transmission member 460, and the lid member 480 is still arranged at the displacement terminal position on the retreating side. The placement of each component in the state is illustrated.

From the state shown in FIG. 44(e) to the state shown in FIG. 44(f), the injection device 400 goes through the firing state (see FIG. 41). Then, by continuing forward rotation from the state shown in FIG. 44(f), the cover member 480 is arranged at the displacement end position on the entry side, and returns to the effect waiting state (see FIG. 44(a)).

Here, since the state shown in FIG. 44(f) is the state after execution of the shooting effect, there is no load transmission from the linear motion member 410 or the contact member 430 to the front side transmission member 440 (for example, FIG. 43 ( e) see). Therefore, the amount of the drive force of the drive motor MT1 (see FIG. 38) distributed to the front transmission member 440 side can be greatly reduced.

As a result, even if a large driving force is required because the lid member 480 is displaced in a direction opposing the biasing force of the torsion spring SP2 (see FIG. 33), the driving force of the drive motor MT1 is maintained. can be used as a driving force for rotating other components that abut on the rear transmission member 460, so a sufficient driving force can be secured.

FIG. 45 is a plan view of the injection device 400 viewed in the direction of arrow XXXVIIa in FIG. 45, illustration of the fixing member 350 is omitted so that the internal structure of the injection device 400 can be visually recognized.

In FIG. 45, the linear motion member 410, the collision member 420 and the contact member 430 are illustrated in a manner similar to that described in FIGS. Also, in order to facilitate understanding of the displaceable section of the collision member 420, the outer shape of the cylindrical projection 403 is shown in solid lines, and the inside thereof is shown transparently. is illustrated without being hidden.

In FIG. 45, in a state in which the linear motion member 410 is arranged at the displacement end position on the rising side (for example, the waiting state for effect, see FIG. 42(a)), the front transmission member 440 is driven in the reverse rotation direction, and the front transmission The figure shows a state in which the transmission projection 446 of the member 440 contacts the lower projection 415 of the direct-acting member 410 from below, and further rotational displacement is restricted.

Thus, in the present embodiment, a limit is set for the displacement mode that is allowed for the front transmission member 440 . That is, as shown in FIGS. 42 and 43, in forward rotation, the front transmission member 440 can be continuously driven without being restricted in displacement. When the displacement angle exceeds the allowable angle, the displacement of the transmission projection 446 is restricted by the linear motion member 410, and further continuous driving is restricted.

If the drive motor MT1 continues to be driven while the displacement is restricted, the drive motor MT1 may generate heat and may be damaged. is provided to avoid damage to the drive motor MT1, the details of which will be described later.

FIG. 46 shows the output state of the detection sensor SC4, the arrangement of the linear motion member 410, the arrangement of the collision member 420, and the arrangement of the projecting portion 432 of the contact member 430 as the front transmission member 440 and the rear transmission member 460 rotate. and a change over time of the arrangement of the cylindrical protrusion 472 of the transmission arm member 470. FIG.

It should be noted that FIG. 46 does not describe the relative relationship between the variation widths of the arrangement changes of the respective configurations, but shows the reference of the relative relationship of the timing at which the arrangement change occurs. Also, the change in the arrangement of the direct-acting member 410 corresponds to the change in the biasing force accumulated in the coil spring SP1.

In addition, in FIG. 46, the standard rotation angle of forward rotation from the effect standby state (FIGS. 42(a) and 44(a)) is shown on the horizontal axis. That is, 0 degrees corresponds to FIG. 42(a), 66 degrees corresponds to FIG. 42(b), 125 degrees corresponds to FIG. 42(c), 162 degrees corresponds to FIG. 42(d), 202 degrees corresponds to FIG. 42(e), 219 degrees corresponds to FIGS. 42(f) and 43(a), 228 degrees corresponds to FIG. 43(b), and 266 degrees corresponds to FIG. 43(c). , 287 degrees corresponds to FIG. 43(d), and 295 degrees corresponds to FIG. 43(e).

46, 0 degrees corresponds to FIG. 44(a), 21 degrees corresponds to FIG. 44(b), 96 degrees corresponds to FIG. 44(c), and 173 degrees corresponds to FIG. 44(d). , 304 degrees corresponds to FIG. 44(e), and 360 degrees corresponds to FIG. 44(f).

In FIG. 46, the rotation angles of forward rotation of the front transmission member 440 and the rear transmission member 460 are shown on the horizontal axis with the production standby state as a reference (the angle is 0 degrees), and the components described above corresponding to the angles are shown. State changes in are described. It should be noted that the change in layout of each component due to drive control in forward rotation corresponds to the change toward the right in FIG. 46, and the change in layout of each component due to drive control in reverse rotation corresponds to the change to the left in FIG. respond to changes.

As shown in FIG. 46, the displacement speed when the collision member 420 is upwardly displaced by rotating the front transmission member 440 and the rear transmission member 460 in the reverse direction before entering the firing state (angle of 287 degrees) is It becomes slower than the displacement speed when the collision member 420 reaches the firing state and is displaced upward. That is, in the present embodiment, the speed of upward displacement of the collision member 420 can be configured in a plurality of ways.

In addition, since the collision member 420 has already been raised after the firing state is exceeded, the reverse rotation of the front transmission member 440 and the rear transmission member 460 is restricted halfway (see FIG. 45). On the other hand, whether the arrangement of the front side transmission member 440 and the rear side transmission member 460 is between the firing state (angle of 287 degrees) and the effect waiting state (angle of 360 degrees) is determined only from the output state of the detection sensor SC4. Can not.

For example, when the arrangement of the front side transmission member 440 and the rear side transmission member 460 is between the firing state (angle of 287 degrees) and the presentation standby state (angle of 360 degrees), the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on again. Even so, the MPU 221 (see FIG. 4) cannot determine whether the reverse rotation of the front transmission member 440 and the rear transmission member 460 is restricted.

In contrast, in this embodiment, when the power is turned on again, the arrangement of the front transmission member 440 and the rear transmission member 460 is suspected to be between the firing state (angle of 287 degrees) and the effect standby state (angle of 360 degrees). , that is, when the detected portion 445 is not arranged in the detection sensor SC4 (when the output of the detection sensor SC4 is OFF), the front transmission member 440 and the rear transmission member 460 are driven in the forward rotation direction. Motor MT1 is controlled to rotate.

Due to this rotation, the injection device 400 is temporarily returned to the production standby state, and then the execution control of each production is performed. As a result, the rotation of the front transmission member 440 and the rear transmission member 460 is unintentionally restricted after the control is interrupted such as when the power is turned on again, thereby preventing the drive motor MT1 from generating heat. can be done.

In this embodiment, the position of the granular member 320 (see FIG. 38) is changed from the firing state (angle of 287 degrees) to the state (angle of 304 degrees) where the cylindrical protrusion 472 of the transmission arm member 470 begins to change its position. The front transmission member 440 and the rear transmission member 460 are rotationally driven at a rotational speed at which is stabilized.

For example, if the arrangement is stabilized 2 seconds after the launch, the front transmission member 440 and the rear transmission member 460 are driven and controlled to rotate at 8 degrees per second (45 seconds/rotation), so that the particles in the middle of the flow are controlled. This prevents the member 320 from being caught in the lid member 480 (see FIG. 38).

Note that the rotational speeds of the front transmission member 440 and the rear transmission member 460 are not limited to these, and can be arbitrarily set. For example, it may be rotated at a quadruple speed. In this case, the lid member 480 can start to be displaced to the entrance side at the timing when the granular member 320 starts to flow down. In this case, the displacement of the lid member 480 can be completed before the granular members 320 are arranged in the advancing direction of the lid member 480 .

In this state, by stopping the drive in the performance waiting state, the granular members 320 can be deposited above the lid member 480, so that the granular members 320 can be gathered to the left-right central side along the shape of the lid member 480. can be done. After that, by driving and controlling the forward transmission member 440 and the rear transmission member 460 in the forward rotation direction, the granular member 320 falls from the lid member 480 as the lid member 480 is displaced to the retreat side, and the collision member 420 is moved. ride on.

In this way, by controlling the rotation speeds of the front transmission member 440 and the rear transmission member 460 differently, it is possible to configure a plurality of modes until the granular member 320 reaches the collision member 420 .

Thereby, the relative position of each granular member 320 (each spherical member) with respect to the collision member 420 can be changed for each firing execution control. Therefore, for example, by configuring the granular members 320 with a plurality of spherical members having different shapes and colors, it is possible to change the appearance of the fired granular members 320 (arrangement and displacement direction of each granular member 320). , the performance effect can be improved.

Returning to FIG. 5 and FIG. 6, description will be made. In this embodiment, in addition to the third symbol display device 81, the above-described shooting effect unit 300, enlargement/reduction unit 600, and displacement/rotation unit 800 are provided as effect devices for livening up the game. Next, the scaling unit 600 will be described.

47 and 48 are front perspective views of the scaling unit 600, and FIGS. 49 and 50 are rear perspective views of the scaling unit 600. FIG. 47 and 49 show the rendering standby state of the scaling unit 600, and FIGS. 48 and 50 show the extended state of the scaling unit 600. FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 47 to 50, the enlarging/reducing unit 600 includes an effect member 700 which can move up and down at the central position in the left-right direction and which is capable of emitting light, and a hemispherical lighting unit fixedly arranged apart from the right and left sides of the effect member 700. a device 613;

By performing a light emission effect with the effect member 700 and the hemispherical lighting device 613, the light is emitted from the front side of the third pattern display device 81 (see FIG. 7) to the player, and the effect is executed to make the player visually glamorous. be able to.

51 is a front exploded perspective view of the scaling unit 600, and FIG. 52 is a rear exploded perspective view of the scaling unit 600. FIG. 51 and 52, the effect member 700 is illustrated in an assembled state. As shown in FIGS. 47 and 49, in the assembled state, the tip of the lower arm member 630 connected to the effect member 700 is arranged on the front side of the rear plate portion 611, but in FIGS. , is arranged on the rear side of the rear plate portion 611 for convenience.

As shown in FIGS. 51 and 52, the enlargement/reduction unit 600 includes a main body member 601 having a left and right elongated shape fastened and fixed to a bottom wall portion 511 of a rear case 510 (see FIG. 5), and a front surface of the main body member 601. A front cover member 610 arranged on the side and having a design surface, a pair of upper arm members 620 rotatably supported by the columnar shaft portion 603 of the main body member 601 and interlocked in a meshing relationship, and the upper arm member 620 and the middle. A pair of lower arm members 630 that are connected by a joint and change in posture as the upper arm member 620 rotates, a drive motor MT2 that is fastened and fixed to the back side of the main body member 601, and a drive gear and teeth of the drive motor MT2. A transmission gear 650 is rotatably supported by the main body member 601, and the annular portion is assembled to the main body member 601, A torsion spring SP3 that applies a biasing force in the upward direction to the upper arm member 620, and an effect member 700 that is connected to the tip of the lower arm member 630 are provided.

The main body member 601 is formed in the shape of an elongated left and right plate, and includes a pair of guide holes 602, which are elongated left and right holes arranged in a straight line from left to right, and a pair of cylindrical guide holes 602 projecting in both front and rear directions from left and right symmetrical positions. A columnar shaft portion 603, a pair of arcuate holes 604 formed in an arc with the columnar shaft portion 603 as the center axis, a columnar shaft portion 605 projecting from the left side to the rear side in a columnar shape, An arc-shaped hole 606 is drilled in an arc with the cylindrical shaft portion 605 as the center axis, and a detection groove in a circular shape centered on the cylindrical shaft portion 605 is directed toward the cylindrical shaft portion 605 side and is placed on the back side. and a detection sensor 607 that is fastened and fixed.

The guide hole 602 is formed with a vertical width that is slightly longer than the outer diameter of the cylindrical protrusion 632 of the lower arm member 630 . The guide hole 602 functions as an elongated hole that guides the displacement of the lower arm member 630 by inserting the cylindrical protrusion 632 of the lower arm member 630 .

A portion of the cylindrical shaft portion 603 that protrudes toward the front side is inserted into the support hole 621 of the upper arm member 620 to rotatably support the upper arm member 620 . A screw with a large head diameter is screwed into a female screw formed at the tip of the cylindrical shaft portion 603 to support the upper arm member 620 so that it cannot fall off.

A portion of the columnar shaft portion 603 protruding toward the rear side is inserted through the winding-shaped body portion of the torsion spring SP3, thereby stabilizing the arrangement of the torsion spring SP3.

One arm of the torsion spring SP3 is pressed from above by a protruding portion 601a that protrudes in a V-shape from the back side of the main body member 601, and the other arm is pressed against the biased portion 625 of the upper arm member 620. engaged. As a result, the elastic recovery force of the torsion spring SP3 functions in the direction of pushing down the urged portion 625, so that the upper arm member 620 is urged in the direction in which the connecting portion 623 is displaced upward.

The arcuate hole 604 is a through hole for passing the urged portion 625 of the upper arm member 620 to the rear side of the main body member 601 . Thereby, the urged portion 625 of the upper arm member 620 and the torsion spring SP3 can be configured to be engaged.

The cylindrical shaft portion 605 is inserted through the support hole 653 of the transmission gear 650 to rotatably support the transmission gear 650 . A screw with a large head diameter is screwed into a female screw formed at the tip of the cylindrical shaft portion 605, thereby supporting the transmission gear 650 so that it cannot fall off.

The arcuate hole 606 is a through hole for passing the cylindrical protrusion 654 of the transmission gear 650 to the front side of the main body member 601 . Thereby, the transmission hole 624 of the upper arm member 620 and the transmission gear 650 can be configured to be engaged. A screw having a large head diameter is screwed into a female screw formed at the tip of the cylindrical protrusion 654 of the transmission gear 650 , so that the upper arm member 620 is supported by the transmission gear 650 so as not to fall off.

The detection sensor 607 has a detection groove into which the plate portion 655 to be detected of the transmission gear 650 can enter, and is arranged at a position where the transmission gear 650 puts the enlargement/reduction unit 600 in the rendering standby state, or at another position. It is configured to be able to determine whether the

The front cover member 610 is a thin-walled member made of a resin material with low light transmittance and fastened to the main body member 601. The front cover member 610 includes a rear plate portion 611 formed in the left-right central portion, and the rear plate portion 611. A front plate portion 612 is formed on the left and right outside from the connection position with the left and right upper end portions and is formed to protrude toward the front side from the rear plate portion 611, and is fastened and fixed to the front side of the front plate portion 612 so as to be capable of emitting light. and a hemispherical illumination device 613 .

The rear plate portion 611 is arranged on the front side of the columnar shaft portion 603 of the main body member 601 and shields the field of view so that the columnar shaft portion 603 is not visually recognized. On the rear side of the rear plate portion 611, avoiding the movement locus of the gear portion 622 of the upper arm member 620, the rear plate portion 611 protrudes toward the rear side by a dimension slightly longer than the front-to-rear width of the gear portion 622, and contacts the main body member 601 with a surface. It has an overhanging abutting portion 611a that makes contact.

As a result, the fastening state of the rear plate portion 611 to the main body member 601 can be stabilized, and the upper arm member 620 can be displaced in the space divided by the rear plate portion 611 and the main body member 601 . can. In other words, a change in posture of the upper arm member 620 (for example, a change in posture such that it bends with respect to the rotation shaft) can be suppressed on both sides in the axial direction, so the state of the upper arm member 620 can be stabilized. .

The front plate portion 612 is a plate-like portion that is arranged on the front side of the upper arm member 620 and the lower arm member 630 and is configured so as not to allow the players to visually recognize the structural parts of these members. A sliding surface 612a formed as a pair of left and right planes parallel to the front plate portion, and a wiring passage formed as a recess opening to the back side in the plate portion projecting from the left upper end toward the back and a recess 612b.

The sliding surface 612a is assembled to the lower arm member 630 from the front side and fastened and fixed, and is configured as a flat surface on which the pressing member PC1, which is formed with low friction due to its shape and material, can slide. That is, the pressing member PC1 fixed midway in the longitudinal direction of the lower arm member 630 is a planar plate surface formed along a locus that is displaced as the lower arm member 630 is displaced.

The shape of the side of the pressing member PC1 facing the sliding surface 612a is a substantially semicircular shape protruding toward the sliding surface 612a. is configured to be Thereby, the resistance generated between the pressing member PC1 and the sliding surface 612a can be reduced, and the lower arm member 630 can be smoothly displaced easily.

The sliding surface 612a and the pressing member PC1 are not always in contact with each other, and a gap is provided between them. On the other hand, before the amount of frontward displacement of the lower arm member 630 exceeds the permissible amount, the sliding surface 612a and the pressing member PC1 contact each other to limit the frontward displacement of the lower arm member 630. be.

In this embodiment, the permissible amount of displacement of the lower arm member 630 toward the front side is set according to the dimensional relationship between the rear side plate portion of the partitioning member 310 (see FIG. 13A) and the effect member 700 . That is, the permissible amount of displacement of the lower arm member 630 toward the front side is set to such a degree that the effect member 700 arranged as expected from the arrangement of the lower arm member 630 does not come into contact with the partitioning member 310 .

That is, according to the present embodiment, the sliding surface 612a abuts against the pressing member PC1 to limit the displacement of the lower arm member 630 toward the front side. Contact can be prevented.

The sliding portion 612a arranged on the right side is formed in an arc shape along the trajectory of the pressing member PC1, but the sliding portion 612a arranged on the left side includes an arc shape as the trajectory of the pressing member PC1. Although formed as a large flat surface, the functions of the left and right sliding portions 612a are common. That is, at least the circular arc shape as the trajectory of the pressing member PC1 should be formed in a plane shape, and the shape of other portions can be set arbitrarily. For example, as in the right side portion of the present embodiment, the sliding portion 612a is formed in a limited circular arc shape as the trajectory of the pressing member PC1, and the other portion protrudes toward the back side (the design portion on the front side is It may be configured such that it protrudes toward the back side due to the effect of being arranged closer to the back side), or like the left side portion of the present embodiment, the periphery of the sliding portion 612a may also be configured in a similar planar shape. good.

The forward displacement of the lower arm member 630 is restricted by the contact between the pressing member PC1 and the sliding portion 612a. Forward displacement is regulated by the fixed fastening screw. That is, in addition to limiting the forward displacement of the lower arm member 630, by limiting the displacement of the upper arm member 620, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of a large local load.

The wiring through recess 612b is a recess that functions as a path for the electrical wiring to be passed through the base end side through hole 635a of the lower arm member 630. As shown in FIG. That is, the electric wiring reaching between the rear case 510 and the enlargement/reduction unit 600 passes through the wiring passage recess 612b, passes through the base end side through hole 635a of the lower arm member 630, and then reaches the tip side of the lower arm member 630. It is guided and passed through the production member 700. - 特許庁

In this way, by setting the path for the electrical wiring to be inserted into the enlargement/reduction unit 600 from the upper side, the long lower arm member 630 connected to the effect member 700 is displaced significantly in the left-right direction as it is displaced. (In this embodiment, the displacement is about half the width of the rear case 510), it is possible to easily prevent the electric wiring from loosening and hanging downward.

The hemispherical lighting device 613 has a hemispherical lens member, and is a device for irradiating the front side through the hemispherical lens member with light emitted from a light emitting means such as an LED disposed on the back side thereof. . In this embodiment, the optical axis of the light emitted from the light emitting means is configured to incline downward toward the center in the left-right direction.

As a result, compared to the case where the optical axis of the light emitted from the hemispherical lighting device 613 is oriented in the front-rear direction, the player's attention to the light emitted from the hemispherical lighting device 613 can be easily improved. can. For example, it is possible to make it easier for the player who is visually recognizing the center of the third pattern display device 81 to enter the light, or to make the player notice the light by irradiating the production member 700 in the overhanging state or the enlarged state with the light. can be

The upper arm member 620 is formed in the shape of an elongated plate, and has a support hole 621 formed as a circular hole having a slightly larger diameter than the outer diameter of the cylindrical shaft portion 603 so that the cylindrical shaft portion 603 can be inserted therethrough. , a gear portion 622 which is formed on a circular arc centering on the support hole 621 and is configured to be meshable with a pair of upper arm members 620, and a lower arm member 630 which is circularly drilled at the end portion in the longitudinal direction. and a long hole formed only in the left upper arm member 620 and having a width slightly longer than the outer diameter of the cylindrical projection 654 of the transmission gear 650. A transmission hole 624 is formed, and a biased portion 625 protrudes from the back side of the upper arm member 620 and has a hook-shaped tip.

The transmission hole 624 has a transmission portion 624a formed along a straight line passing through the center of the support hole 621 and a margin continuously extending from one end of the transmission portion 624a along an arc centered on the rotation axis of the transmission gear 650. and a portion 624b.

The transmission portion 624a functions as a portion for receiving the driving force transmitted through the transmission gear 650, and the allowance portion 624b functions as a portion for blocking the transmission of the driving force, details of which will be described later.

The urged portion 625 is a portion to which one end of the arm portion of the torsion spring SP3 is engaged. Arm member 620 receives.

In addition, the forward displacement of the upper arm member 620 can be restricted by the engagement between the hooked end of the biased portion 625 and the torsion spring SP3 (see FIG. 49).

The lower arm member 630 is composed of a long plate member in a substantially bilaterally symmetrical manner, except that the left arm has a path through which electrical wiring is passed. A columnar protrusion 631, a columnar protrusion 632 projecting from the left and right outer sides of the columnar protrusion 631 to the rear side in a columnar shape, and a left and right inner position of the columnar protrusion 631 in the front-rear direction. and a plurality of arc-shaped holes 634 penetrating along a pair of arcs centered on the support hole 633 .

The columnar protrusion 631 is inserted through the connecting portion 623 of the upper arm member 620, and a screw with a large head diameter is screwed into the female screw formed at the tip of the columnar protrusion 631 from the back side. A lower arm member 630 is non-droppably supported on the upper arm member 620 .

The columnar protrusion 632 is inserted through the guide hole 602 of the main body member 601 through the collar member C1 formed in a cylindrical shape for resistance reduction, and is attached to the female screw formed at the tip of the columnar protrusion 632 on the rear side. The lower arm member 630 is supported by the main body member 601 so as not to fall off by screwing a screw having a large head diameter through the lower arm member 630 .

The support hole 633 and the arc-shaped hole 634 are used for connection with the effect member 700 . Due to the relationship with the placement portion 635, which will be described later, the thickness of the portion where the arc-shaped hole 634 is formed is thicker in the lower portion than in the upper portion. Thereby, when the production member 700 is arranged at the lower end position, the production member 700 can be supported so as to be held from the left and right at the thick part, so that the production member 700 can be effectively changed to the forward leaning posture. can be regulated.

In addition, the left lower arm member 630 has a placement portion 635 that is formed open to the back side in order to form a space for passing electrical wiring over the longitudinal direction of the arm body, and the back side of the placement portion 635 . and a thin lid portion 636 disposed on the side and functioning as a lid for the placement portion 635 .

The arranging portion 635 includes a base-side through-hole 635a drilled in the front-rear direction at the end portion on the side of the cylindrical projection 632 .

The proximal side through-hole 635a is a through-hole for passing the electrical wiring arranged in the arrangement portion 635 in the front-rear direction. That is, the electrical wiring arranged in the placement portion 635 passes through the base end side through hole 635 a from the front side, is guided to the placement portion 635 , and exits from the placement portion 635 to the distal end side of the lower arm member 630 .

The lower arm member 630 has a boundary along the longitudinal direction of the lower arm member 630, and a lower meat portion 637 arranged below the boundary in the standby state for presentation is formed recessed on the back side. be done. In other words, the upper side of the tangent line is formed as a thin plate.

This lower meat portion 637 is reinforced by a plurality of ribs extending in the lateral direction in the right lower arm member 630 . In addition, the lower meat portion 637 constitutes the upper wall portion of the placement portion 635 in the left lower arm member 630, is configured to be able to guide the electric wiring inside, and is arranged as a lid on the guide path. It is reinforced by fastening and fixing the thin-walled lid portion 636 that is attached to the frame.

Since the electric wiring is guided to the direction member 700 side through the inside of the lower arm member 630 (between the placement portion 635 and the thin lid portion 636), members arranged in front and behind the lower arm member 630 (for example, It is possible to prevent the contact between the upper arm member 620) and the electrical wiring. As a result, it is possible to avoid damage to the electrical wiring due to tangling or rubbing of the electrical wiring with these members.

The lower arm member 630 includes, in addition to the above-described pressing member PC1 assembled from the front side, a pressing member PC1 composed of the same members and assembled from the rear side. Through this pressing member PC1, the lower arm member 630 is configured to be able to abut on the body plate-like portion of the body member 601 in the front and rear. The main body member 601 and the pressing member PC1 are not always in contact with each other, but have a slight gap, so that when the lower arm member 630 is displaced to the back side, they come into contact with each other to limit the displacement. function is the same as in the case of the front pressing member PC1.

That is, the lower arm member 630 has the pressing members PC1 attached to both front and rear sides thereof, and is configured to be able to contact the main body member 601 or the front cover member 610 via the pressing members PC1. It is possible to facilitate the restriction of displacement and to reduce the resistance generated against the up-and-down displacement during the restriction of displacement.

The tip of the pressing member PC1 assembled from the back side, which projects toward the back side, is arranged closer to the back side than the end portion of the upper arm member 620 on the back side. As a result, even when the tip of the pressing member PC1 is displaced to the rear side to such an extent that it abuts on the body member 601, the upper arm member 620 can be prevented from abutting on the body member 601. FIG. Therefore, according to the present embodiment, it is possible to prevent the upper arm member 620 from coming into contact with the body member 601 or the front cover member 610 arranged in the front-rear direction.

This configuration is particularly effective when the lower arm member 630 is likely to be unintentionally displaced in the front-rear direction. For example, in the present embodiment, the tip of the lower arm member 630 is arranged near the rear end surface of the effect member 700, and the center of gravity of the effect member 700 and the connection position between the effect member 700 and the lower arm member 630 Since the lower arm member 630 is displaced in the direction, it can be said that the lower arm member 630 is likely to be displaced in the front-rear direction. In addition, due to the displacement mode of the lower arm member 630 and the driving displacement of the effect member 700 itself, the lower arm member 630 is configured to easily cause displacement in the front-rear direction.

The transmission gear 650 includes a semicircular main body portion 651 formed in a substantially semicircular plate shape, a gear portion 652 carved radially outward of the semicircular main body portion 651, and a semicircular main body portion. A support hole 653 is formed as a circular hole through which the cylindrical shaft portion 605 can be inserted through the central axis of the semicircular shape of 651, and a cylindrical shape projecting from the outer diameter end portion of the semicircular body portion 651 toward the front side. a cylindrical projecting portion 654, a plate portion 655 to be detected formed in a thin plate shape that can enter the detection groove of the detection sensor 607 at the circumferential end portion of the semicircular body portion 651, and the plate portion to be detected A thickened portion 656 formed to extend between 655 and the support hole 653 , and a regulated hole 657 formed through the thickened portion 656 on the support hole 653 side in the front-rear direction.

The gear portion 652 is arranged in mesh with the driving gear of the driving motor MT2, and the driving force of the driving motor MT2 is directly transmitted.

The cylindrical projection 654 passes through the arc-shaped hole 606 of the main body member 601 and is arranged inside the transmission hole 624 of the upper arm member 620 . Accordingly, as the transmission gear 650 rotates, the driving force can be transmitted to the upper arm member 620 via the cylindrical protrusion 654 . The columnar protrusion 654 is inserted through a collar member whose outer diameter is slightly shorter than the width of the transmission hole 624, and a female threaded portion formed at the projecting tip of the columnar protrusion 654 has a fastening screw with a large head diameter. By being screwed in, the collar member and the upper arm member 620 are supported so as not to fall off, and the forward displacement of the upper arm member 620 is restricted.

The thickened portion 656 and the restricted hole 657 are configured to be engageable with the displacement restricting device 180 (see FIG. 6) described above. By disposing the regulated hole 657 on the side of the support hole 653 (position close to the support hole 653), when the displacement regulating device 180 is in the regulated state (see FIG. 21A), the displacement from the transmission gear 650 to the displacement regulating device 180 It is configured such that the transmitted load (moment) is reduced.

Further, as a design concept for the thickness of the transmission gear 650 , a thickened portion 656 is set as a portion where it is necessary to withstand the load caused by engagement with the displacement restricting device 180 . That is, by forming thin parts where engagement with the displacement restricting device 180 cannot occur, the material cost required for the transmission gear 650 can be reduced.

53 is a front exploded perspective view of the effect member 700, and FIG. 54 is a rear exploded perspective view of the effect member 700. FIG. 51 and 52 will be referred to in the description of FIGS. 53 and 54 as needed.

As shown in FIGS. 53 and 54, the effect member 700 includes a plate-like main body 710 connected to the tip of the lower arm member 630, and a functional plate portion 720 fastened and fixed to the front side of the plate-like main body 710. , a rotating plate 730 arranged between the function plate portion 720 and the plate-like main body 710 and supported so as to be rotatably displaceable with respect to the function plate portion 720 , and between the rotating plate 730 and the function plate portion 720 A telescopic displacement member 740 is provided and configured to be displaceable in the same manner as a magic hand in conjunction with the rotation of the rotating plate 730, and a driving gear MG3 is fastened and fixed to the front side of the function plate portion 720. A drive motor MT3 arranged on the back side, a light emitting effect device 750 that is fastened and fixed to the front side of the function plate portion 720 and executes the light emitting effect, and a plurality of extensible displacement members 740 that are respectively fastened and fixed to the end portions of the extensible displacement members 740 to wait for the effect. and a plurality of shielding design members 760 combined so as to shield the passage of light on the front side of the light emitting effect device 750.

The plate-shaped main body 710 has a pair of cylindrical projections 711 projecting from a symmetrical position toward the rear side in a cylindrical shape having an outer diameter slightly shorter than the inner diameter of the support hole 633 of the lower arm member 630, and the cylindrical projections. A plurality of auxiliary protrusions 712 projecting in a columnar shape having an outer diameter slightly shorter than the width of the arcuate upper hole 634 of the lower arm member 630 and a pair of columnar protrusions. A through-hole 713 drilled in the front-rear direction at a position between 711, a wiring guide member 714 arranged below the through-hole 713 and opened only on the front side, and a pressure member arranged on the back surface of the plate. and a member PC1.

The through hole 713 is a through hole for passing the electrical wiring DK1, which passes through the lower arm member 630 and is guided to the tip side of the lower arm member 630 between the placement portion 635 and the thin lid portion 636, to the front side. . A wire guide member 714 guides the electric wire DK1 in a section from the tip of the lower arm member 630 to the through hole 713 . As a result, even in the limited section from the lower arm member 630 to the through hole 713, the electric wiring DK1 can be prevented from coming into contact with other members or being visually recognized by the player.

The wiring guide member 714 has the function of guiding the electric wiring DK1, and is formed with an inclined surface that slopes down toward the rear surface side. It also has the function of softening the contact of the

That is, when the upper surface of the wiring guide member 714 is arranged to face the rear plate portion 611 of the front cover member 610 when the effect member 700 is displaced upward, the effect member 700 is displaced toward the back side. Even so, the wiring guide member 714 abuts on the rear plate portion 611 , so that the effect member 700 can be returned to the front side in the middle of the upward displacement along the slope of the upper surface of the wiring guide member 714 .

Like the wiring guide member 714, the pressing member PC1 is also disposed slidably on the rear plate portion 611 of the front cover member 610. As shown in FIG. That is, in the present embodiment, the pressing member PC1 arranged at the upper end portion and the wiring guide member 714 arranged at the lower portion can come into contact with the rear plate portion 611 of the front cover member 610 during the upward displacement process of the effect member 700. , the position where the load for maintaining the attitude of the effect member 700 is generated can be divided.

55 is a front view of the function plate portion 720. FIG. In the description of FIG. 55, FIGS. 53 and 54 are referred to as appropriate.

The functional plate portion 720 is made of a resin material and has a substantially plate-like shape. An arc-shaped hole 722 drilled along the coaxial arc shape, a sensor placement portion 723 formed at one end of the arc-shaped hole 722 so that the detection sensor SC7 can be arranged, and a drive shaft of the drive motor MT3 can be inserted. a motor fixing portion 724 having an opening and capable of fastening and fixing the drive motor MT3; A plurality of (in this embodiment, five) guide holes 725 each including a pair of intersecting elongated holes 725b that intersect perpendicularly with each other, and radially outwardly extending on extension lines of the radially elongated holes 725a. A plurality of (in this embodiment, five) extension plate portions 726, and the rear side end portion of the planar portion disposed at the extension base end of the extension plate portion 726 and the width direction both ends of the extension plate portion 726 A pair of auxiliary protrusions 727 (in this embodiment, a pair for each of the extended plate portions 726) protruding from the support, and a pair of columnar protrusions protruding from the vicinity of the radially outward end toward the back side in a columnar shape. 728;

The cylindrical portion 721 is arranged so that the back side end abuts on the plate-like main body 710 , and is fastened and fixed to the plate-like main body 710 in a state in which the internal through-hole communicates with the through-hole 713 of the plate-like main body 710 . be done. At this time, the fastening screw is inserted through the plate-like main body 710 from the rear side of the plate-like main body 710 , and the threaded portion is screwed into the female screw formed at the rear-side end portion of the cylindrical portion 721 .

As a result, the functional plate portion 720 is fastened and fixed to the plate-like main body 710, and a through hole is formed in the central portion thereof. In this embodiment, the electric wiring DK1 is guided to the front side through this through hole. .

The electric wiring DK1 (see FIG. 76) guided to the front side is connected to the detection sensor SC7 fastened and fixed to the sensor placement portion 723 and the driving motor MT3 fastened and fixed to the motor fixing portion 724. FIG. As a result, the detection sensor SC7 and the drive motor MT3 can be energized.

The circular arc-shaped hole 722 is a through hole for allowing the detection target portion 731a of the rotating plate 730 to extend toward the front side. It is possible to determine the posture.

The guide holes 725 are a group of through holes formed with a width that allows the guided protrusions 741b, 741c, and 742a of the expansion/contraction displacement member 740 to be arranged. A long hole-shaped radial long hole 725a is formed, and on both sides of the outer diameter side end of the long hole-shaped long hole 725a, a long hole-shaped hole is formed along a straight line orthogonal to the straight line that is the reference of the radial long hole 725a. and a pair of cross slots 725b formed in the .

The radially elongated holes 725a and the intersecting elongated holes 725b function to limit the displacement of the telescopic displacement member 740, and the extension plate portion 726 and the auxiliary protrusions 727 correct the posture of the telescopic displacement member 740 in the collective arrangement state. function as described below in detail.

The columnar projecting portion 728 is configured such that the rear end thereof can come into contact with the plate-like main body 710 . In the abutting state, a fastening screw that is inserted through the plate-like body 710 from the rear side is screwed into a female thread formed on the distal end side of the columnar projecting portion 728, so that the function plate portion 720 is connected to the plate-like body. 710 is fastened and fixed.

In the assembled state, the columnar projecting portion 728 is inserted through the arc-shaped hole 732 of the rotating plate 730 to limit the rotation angle of the rotating plate 730 . That is, the columnar projecting portion 728 is used both as a portion for fastening and fixing the function plate portion 720 to the plate-like main body 710 and as a portion for limiting the rotation angle of the rotating plate 730 .

56 is a front view of rotating plate 730, and FIG. 57 is a side view of rotating plate 730. FIG. 53 and 54 will be referred to in the description of FIGS. 56 and 57 as appropriate.

The rotating plate 730 is made of a resin material and has a substantially disk shape. A plurality of arc-shaped holes 732 drilled along the coaxial arc shape and long through-holes formed at positions on the outer diameter side of the cylindrical portion 731 and on the inner diameter side of the arc-shaped hole 732 . and a plurality of guide holes 733 (five in this embodiment), and extended hook portions 734 extending radially outward in a hook shape at positions corresponding to the guide holes 733 .

The cylindrical portion 731 is designed to have an inner diameter slightly longer than the outer diameter of the cylindrical portion 721 of the function plate portion 720, and extends from the front end to the front side so that the detection sensor SC7 passes through the arc-shaped hole 722 of the function plate portion 720. and a gear portion 731b formed on the outer peripheral side in a gear shape that can mesh with the drive gear MG3 of the drive motor MT3.

The arc-shaped hole 732 is an opening in which the columnar projecting portion 728 of the function plate portion 720 is arranged, and is formed with a length that can ensure the rotation angle of the rotating plate 730 at approximately 120 degrees or less.

The guide holes 733 are formed in the same shape. A small-diameter arc portion 733a formed in an arc shape centering on the central axis of the tubular portion 731 and a center of the tubular portion 731 from the small-diameter arc portion 733a. A large-diameter arc portion 733b having a long length from the axis and a connecting portion 733c connecting the large-diameter arc portion 733b and the small-diameter arc portion 733a are provided.

Although the aspect of the connecting portion 733c is not limited in any way, in the present embodiment, it is formed so that the change in the length from the central axis of the cylindrical portion 731 per unit angle changes according to the position. be. In particular, in the present embodiment, the change in length from the central axis of the tubular portion 731 per unit angle near the small-diameter arc portion 733a and the large-diameter arc portion 733b is designed to be relatively small.

As a result, it is possible to reduce the resistance generated when the load is transmitted to the telescopic displacement member 740, and to improve the performance effect by making the displacement speed of the telescopic displacement member 740 non-uniform.

The extended claw portion 734 is formed in a claw shape that protrudes clockwise in a front view, is configured to be able to engage with the telescopic displacement member 740 arranged on the front side, and is formed closer to the rear side in the thickness direction. It has a rear side claw portion 734a and a front side claw portion 734b formed on the front side of the rear side claw portion 734a. In the present embodiment, the extended claw portion 734 is divided into the rear claw portion 734a and the front claw portion 734b at a substantially intermediate position in the thickness dimension.

The extended claw portion 734 functions as a portion that engages with the first guided protrusion 743 b and the second guided protrusion 744 b of the telescopic displacement member 740 . The front-side claw portion 734b and the back-side claw portion 734a correspond to the second guided projection portion 744b and the first guided projection portion 743b, which have different projecting tip positions from the telescopic displacement member 740, respectively. It is guided radially inward, the details of which will be described later.

In the present embodiment, the extension claw portion 734 is arranged such that the extension claw portion 734 arranged on the lower side has a longer extension length than the extension claw portion 734 arranged on the upper side. formed in In this embodiment, the extension length is increased in both the circumferential direction and the radial direction. Thereby, the influence of gravity can be mitigated.

That is, even if the telescopic displacement members 740 are configured to have the same shape, the displacement caused by the action of gravity is different for each telescopic displacement member 740 because the relationship between the displaceable direction and the direction of gravity is different. For example, the telescopic displacement member 740 disposed on the lower side hangs down due to its own weight and is displaced in the direction away from the rotation axis of the rotary plate 730 . There is a possibility that the first guided projection 743b of 740 will be arranged, and the radially inward guidance by the extended claw 734 will fail.

In contrast, in the present embodiment, the extension length of the extension claw portion 734 arranged on the lower side is designed to be sufficiently long in consideration of the sagging of the telescopic displacement member 740. The radially inward guidance by the portion 734 can be stably performed.

On the other hand, even if the telescopic displacement member 740 disposed on the upper side is displaced due to its own weight, the displacement is in the direction of approaching the rotation axis of the rotary plate 730, so the extension claw 734 is guided radially inward. is unlikely to fail. Therefore, the extended claw portion 734 arranged on the upper side should not be extended longer than necessary, and should be formed short, thereby reducing the material cost and miniaturizing the rotating plate 730. can be done.

The elastic displacement member 740 and the shielding design member 760 will be described with reference to FIGS. 58 and 59. FIG. 53 and 54 will be referred to in the description of FIGS. 58 and 59 as appropriate.

58(a) is a front perspective view of the telescopic displacement member 740 and the shielding design member 760, FIG. 58(b) is a rear perspective view of the telescopic displacement member 740 and the shielding design member 760, and FIG. ) is a front perspective view of the telescopic displacement member 740 and the shielding design member 760, and FIG.

In FIGS. 58(a) and 58(b), of the five sets of telescopic displacement members 740 and shielding design members 760, one set arranged at the top is illustrated in a state in which it is collectively arranged. In 59(a) and 59(b), the same set is illustrated as if it were to be discrete.

The telescopic displacement member 740 is a member that constitutes a link mechanism composed of a plurality of long members arranged in two layers, front and rear. The plane in which the first elongate member can be displaced is also called a front layer plane, and the plane in which a plurality of elongate members arranged on the rear side can be displaced is also called a rear layer plane.

The expansion/contraction displacement member 740 is arranged in two layers, front and rear, and has a pair of proximal side members 741 that are pivotally supported at the lower end so as to be relatively rotatable, and a pair of proximal side members 741 that are pivotally supported at the upper end of the proximal side member 741 so as to be relatively rotatable. A pair of first elongated members 742, a pair of second elongated members 743 pivotally supported at upper ends of the first elongated members 742 so as to be relatively rotatable, and upper ends of the second elongated members 742 are and a distal adjustment member 744 having a guide slot 744a extending linearly to allow guidance.

The proximal side member 741, the first elongated member 742, and the second elongated member 743, which are configured as a pair of front and rear members, are designed to have the same length in the longitudinal direction and the same support position.

The base end member 741 includes a transmission target projection 741a projecting from the lower end of the member on the rear plane side toward the rear surface side in a cylindrical shape, and a circular transmission receiving projection 741a projecting from the rear surface toward the front surface where the cylindrical projection 741a projects. A guided protrusion 741b that protrudes in a columnar shape and is inserted into the member on the front layer plane side, and a lower end portion of a first elongated member 742 that protrudes in a columnar shape from the upper end portion of the member on the rear layer plane side toward the front side. and a guided protrusion 741c that is inserted into a through hole that is drilled in.

The transmitted projection 741a is arranged in a guide hole 733 (see FIG. 56) of the rotating plate 730 and configured to be displaced in the radial direction as the rotating plate 730 rotates.

The guided projection 741b and the guided projection 741c are arranged in the guide hole 725 of the function plate portion 725 and guided in the longitudinal direction thereof. The guided protrusion 741b is arranged in the radially elongated hole 725a, and the guided protrusion 741c is arranged in the intersecting elongated hole 725b (see FIG. 55).

The first elongated member 742 is rotatably supported about a front-rear axis at a substantially intermediate position in the longitudinal direction. A guided protrusion 742a is provided to be inserted through the upper end of the base end member 741 on the side.

The guided protrusion 742a is arranged in the intersecting elongated hole 725b of the function plate portion 725 and guided in its longitudinal direction (see FIG. 55).

The second elongated member 743 is rotatably supported about a front-rear axis at a substantially intermediate position in the longitudinal direction. From the upper end of the member on the floor plane side, a diameter of about the width of the member is projected flush with the front end surface of the member on the front layer plane side, and a pair of cylindrical projections are projected from the projecting tip to the front side. It has a support protrusion 743a and a first guided protrusion 743b that protrudes in a columnar shape toward the back side from a substantially intermediate position of the member on the rear plane side.

The first guided protrusion 743b is guided by the rear side claw portion 734a of the extended claw portion 734 of the rotary plate 730, and receives a radially inward load due to this guidance (see FIG. 56).

The front end adjustment member 744 is a member to which the shielding design member 760 is fastened and fixed on the front side, and has a length that extends along the straight direction with a width that allows the support protrusion 743a of the second long member 743 to be inserted. It is provided with a pair of guide long holes 744a drilled in a hole shape, and a second guided projection 744b projecting from the central position in the longitudinal direction to the back side in a cylindrical shape.

The projecting tip of the second guided projection 744b is disposed forward of the projecting tip of the first guided projection 743b, and is guided by the front claw 734b of the extended claw 734 of the rotary plate 730, This guide receives a radially inward load (see FIG. 57).

The second guided projection 744b does not have a circular shape at the tip of the projecting part, and has an inclination that approaches as the rotating plate 730, which has the center of rotation on the side of the transmitted projection 741a, is rotationally displaced in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the rear. The surface on the side opposite to the surface 734c (see FIG. 57) (the left surface in FIG. 59(b)) has a chamfered inclined surface.

Due to this inclined surface, even if the arrangement of the telescopic displacement member 740 is slightly deviated in the front-rear direction, it is possible to avoid excessive resistance when the rotating plate 730 abuts against the extended claw portion 734. can be done.

As shown in FIGS. 58(b) and 59(b), when the telescopic displacement members 740 are collectively arranged and when they are separated, the telescopic displacement members 740 are arranged at the tips of the second elongated members 743. The support projections 743 a are arranged at both outer and inner ends of the guide elongated hole 744 a of the tip adjustment member 744 . Thereby, the arrangement (arrangement in the longitudinal direction) of the distal end adjusting member 744 with respect to the pair of support protrusions 743a can be stabilized.

The shielding design member 760 is fastened and fixed to the front side of the distal end adjustment member 744, extends toward the front side from the fastening portion as an end, and extends toward the front side from the extended distal end toward the side covering the telescopic displacement member 740. It is a substantially triangular member in front view and has a shape portion extending in parallel with a plane (front layer plane or rear layer plane) in which the expansion/contraction displacement member 740 is displaced from the extension end thereof. be.

The shielding design member 760 is configured to shield the decorative member 752 on the back side invisibly by attaching a colored (red in this embodiment) reflective sheet to the front and back sides of the shielding design member 760. It has an extension plate portion 761 extending in a plate shape to the right side in such a manner that a plate surface is formed on the top.

The extended plate portion 761 has colored (red in this embodiment) reflective sheets attached to its front and back surfaces in the same manner as the main body portion of the shielding design member 760, and is arranged on the right side (clockwise side) in front view. It is arranged to face the rear side of the left end portion of the design member 760, and when the shielding design member 760 is displaced to the rear side, it abuts and is configured to be able to suppress the displacement.

The arrangement of the extension plate portion 761 is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the front surface of the plate may be arranged so as to be shifted toward the rear surface side from the rear surface of the main body of the shielding design member 760 . In this case, when the plurality of shielding design members 760 are displaced to the collective arrangement position, the main body portion of the shielding design member 760 and the extension plate portion 761 are aligned in the displacement direction (displacement plane) of the shielding design member 760 or the expansion/contraction displacement member 740 . abutment (collision) can be avoided along the

This effect becomes more pronounced as the extension plate portion 761 is placed farther from the body portion of the shielding design member 760. However, at least the positional deviation of the shielding design member 760 in the front-rear direction is allowed for the shielding design member 760. By arranging the extension plate portion 761 apart, the extension plate portion 761 and the body portion of the shielding design member 760 abut along the displacement direction (displacement plane) of the shielding design member 760 or the telescopic displacement member 740. (collision) can be avoided.

Further, the shape of the front surface of the extension plate portion 761 may be formed as an inclined surface, or may be formed as a flat surface whose normal is oriented in the front-rear direction. In this embodiment, it is configured as an inclined surface that approaches the back side as the distance from the shielding design member 760 increases.

As a result, for example, the shielding design member 760 is assembled in a state in which the shielding design member 760 adjacent to the top shielding design member 760 on the right side in the front view is slightly displaced toward the rear side with respect to the top shielding design member 760. Even if it is displaced to the arrangement (see FIG. 63) position, along the front inclination of the extended plate portion 761 of the uppermost shielding design member 760, the front-rear position of the shielding design member 760 adjacent to the right in the front view. Deviations can be corrected. This makes it easier to align the relative longitudinal positions of the adjacent shielding design members 760 .

In addition, as shown in FIG. 58(b), the second long member 743 of the elastic displacement member 740 supporting the shielding design member 760 has a member supporting the right side of the shielding design member 760 arranged on the rear layer plane. , the member supporting the left side of the shielding design member 760 is arranged on the front layer plane, and the middle portions of the pair of second elongated members 743 intersect so that they are overlapped back and forth, so that the left side becomes the right side. It is configured so that the shielding design member 760 can be easily tilted toward the forward side in comparison.

Since the configuration of the extensible displacement members 740 that support the shielding design members 760 is common to all five sets, each shielding design member 760 is common, and the left side is the right side (the side where the extended plate portion 761 is formed). It is configured so that it can be easily tilted to a posture that is arranged on the front side in comparison.

Due to the inclination of the attitude of the shielding design member 760, the extension plate portion 761 can be positioned away from the rear side of the shielding design member 760 arranged to face the extension plate portion 761 side. In this state, the shielding design member 760 is displaced to the collective arrangement position, so that the main body portion of the shielding design member 760 and the extension plate portion 761 move in the displacement direction (displacement plane) of the shielding design member 760 or the telescopic displacement member 740. ) can be avoided.

In the state where the five sets of shielding design members 760 are collectively arranged (see FIG. 53), the shielding design members 760 are arranged in a circle, and all the shielding design members 760 are adjacent to the left side (counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front). The extended plate portion 761 of the shielding design member 760 suppresses positional deviation to the rear side.

According to this configuration, the shielding design member 760 is prevented from being displaced to the front side by the extension plate portion 761 coming into contact with the shielding design member 760 on the right side (adjacent in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front). Therefore, by arranging the five sets of shielding design members 760 to face each other in the front-rear direction, it is possible to suppress displacement in the front-rear direction for each of the five sets of shielding design members 760 .

Interlocking between the rotating plate 730 and the telescopic displacement member 740 will be described with reference to FIGS. 60 and 61. FIG. 60 and 61 are front views of the function plate portion 720. FIG. 60 and 61, the guide hole 733 of the rotating plate 730 is illustrated by imaginary lines, and an example of the outer shape arrangement of the transmitted projection 741a, the guided projections 741b, 741c, and 742a of the expansion/contraction displacement member 740 is illustrated. be.

FIG. 60 shows a state in which the telescopic displacement members 740 are collectively arranged (see FIG. 58), and in FIG. 61, the rotary plate 730 rotates about 120 degrees counterclockwise in front view, and the telescopic displacement members 740 are dispersed. A state (see FIG. 59) is illustrated.

In this embodiment, the guided projections 741b, 741c, and 742a are guided along the guide hole 725, and the transmitted projection 741a is arranged in the guide hole 733 as the rotary plate 730 rotates. The state of the telescopic displacement member 740 changes by displacing it in a direction approaching the rotating shaft side of 730 .

In this state change, since the guided projections 741c and 742a are still maintained on the outer diameter side of the function plate portion 720, the shielding design member 760 is stretched to the outer diameter side with reference to the positions of the guided projections 741c and 742a. It is configured to be displaceable so that it can be pulled out, the details of which will be described later.

Returning to FIGS. 53 and 54, description will be made. The light emitting device 750 includes an electrical board 751 having an opening in the center, and a decorative member 752 arranged on the front side of the electrical board 751 and made of a light-transmitting resin material. An opening is formed in the central portion of the electrical decoration board 751, and the decorative member 752 is formed in a dome shape projecting toward the front side, so that an arrangement area for the drive motor MT3 can be secured.

The illumination board 751 has an opening 751a formed in the center. Inside the opening 751a, the drive motor MT3 and electrical wiring guided through the lower arm member 630 are arranged. The larger the opening 751a, the easier it is to arrange the drive motor MT3 and the electrical wiring, but the area for arranging the LED as the light emitting means is limited. desirable.

Since an LED cannot be arranged in the opening 751a, the front side thereof is dark and easily visible. In contrast, in the present embodiment, the configuration of the decorative member 752 is divided into two.

That is, the decorative member 752 is composed of a light-transmitting member 752a formed of a colorless and light-transmitting resin material, and a light-transmitting member 752a assembled from the front side to the light-transmitting member 752a and having a mirror surface (for example, silver-plated coating). ) and a mirror member 752b.

An opening is formed in the central portion of the light transmitting member 752a, and the central portion of the mirror surface member 752b is closed, so that the mirror surface member 752b can be arranged at a position where the drive motor MT3 is arranged in a front view. . As a result, even if there is no light irradiation from the LED from the back side, the reflected light by light irradiation from another direction (for example, light irradiation from the hemispherical lighting device 613) can be visually recognized by the player. , the front side portion of the opening 751a can be prevented from being viewed darkly.

The vertical displacement of the rendering member 700 of the scaling unit 600 will be described. 62 to 64 are front views of the enlargement/reduction unit 600 showing the downward displacement of the effect member 700 in chronological order. 62 to 64, illustration of the front cover member 610 is omitted for easy understanding.

FIG. 62 shows the effect waiting state of the enlargement/reduction unit 600, FIG. 63 shows the effect member 700 descending from the effect standby state, and FIG. illustrated.

63 is illustrated as a state in which the rotation angle of the lower arm member 630 is half the rotation angle of the lower arm member 630 from the presentation standby state to the extended state. In this embodiment, the rotation angle of the upper arm member 620 is also halved.

As shown in FIG. 62, in the rendering standby state of the scaling unit 600, the columnar protrusion 654 is arranged at the boundary between the transmission portion 624a and the allowance portion 624b of the upper arm member 620. As shown in FIG.
That is, the state in which the cylindrical projection 654 immediately enters the transmission portion 624a and the effect member 700 is placed at a position where the downward displacement can be started is the effect standby state of the scaling unit 600.

This effect standby state suggests that the effect member 700 of the enlargement/reduction unit 600 is displaced downward by the effect member including the third pattern display device 81 (see FIG. 7) disposed in the pachinko machine 10, for example. Before the suggestive effect is executed, the columnar protrusion 654 is arranged on the margin 624b side.

As described above, the clearance portion 624b is a shaped portion continuously extending from one end of the transmission portion 624a along the arc centered on the rotation axis of the transmission gear 650. In the state shown in FIG. 606 in the front-rear direction.

Therefore, the load applied to the cylindrical protrusion 654 through the transmission hole 624 of the upper arm member 620 is directed toward the rotation shaft of the transmission gear 650 and does not function as a load to rotate the transmission gear 650 . Therefore, the displacement of the upper arm member 620 can be restricted regardless of whether or not the driving motor MT2 (see FIG. 51) is energized, whereby the upper arm member 620 is connected to the lower arm member 630 which is connected to the upper arm member 620. Displacement of the production member 700 can be regulated.

Note that even if the effect suggesting that the effect member 700 is displaced downward is the effect mode in which the effect member 700 is not finally displaced downward, in the present embodiment, the enlargement/reduction unit 600 is placed in the effect standby state. is controlled to change state to

In this case, immediately after the player is notified that the effect member 700 will not be displaced downward, the transmission gear 650 rotates counterclockwise in front view in order to return the cylindrical protrusion 654 to the margin 624b side. The drive motor MT2 (see FIG. 51) is driven.

As a result, when an effect suggesting downward displacement of the effect member 700 is executed, it is possible to avoid predicting the subsequent effect regarding the effect member 700 due to the difference in the driving sound of the drive motor MT2. .

The margin portion 624b also has a function of lowering the accuracy required for the drive stop position when the drive motor MT2 is rotationally driven in the direction in which the effect member 700 is lifted. 62, the effect member 700 has already been placed at the displacement end position on the upper end side, and the subsequent displacement of the cylindrical protrusion 654 is limited to the allowance portion. 624b is a displacement that only slides.

Further, the function of restricting the displacement of the upper arm member 620 does not differ regardless of the position of the columnar projection 654 in the margin 624b. Therefore, it is allowed that the setting accuracy of the stop position of the columnar projection 654 is lowered, so that the transmission gear 650 can be stopped immediately when the plate portion 655 to be detected enters the detection sensor 607 (see FIG. 52). The rotation speed of the drive motor MT2 (see FIG. 51) can be set to be large when the effect member 700 is displaced upward without being limited to the speed. Thereby, the rising speed of the production member 700 can be set to be large.

In addition, even if the rising speed is excessive, when the upper arm member 620 comes into contact with the columnar protrusion 654 , the load applied to the columnar protrusion 654 is directed in the radial direction of the transmission gear 650 . Therefore, it does not function to displace the cylindrical protrusion 654 in the rotational direction. Therefore, even if the rising speed is excessive, the displacement of the upper arm member 620 can be restricted at the position where it abuts on the columnar protrusion 654 .

Furthermore, even if the ascending speed is excessive, the upward displacement of the lower arm member 630 is restricted by the upper arm member 620, which will be described later in detail.

As shown in FIGS. 62 to 64, the change in the lateral distance between the ends of the pair of lower arm members 630 (the lateral distance between the ends arranged in the guide holes 602 of the main body member 601) changes from the effect standby state. It is set larger from the halfway down state to the overhanging state compared to the halfway down state.

In this way, by increasing the displacement speed between the ends of the pair of lower arm members 630 accompanying the downward displacement of the effect member 700, the lower arm member 630 supporting the effect member 700 is violently displaced in the width direction. It is possible to make the player visually recognize as if the displacement speed of the production member 700 is rapidly increasing, and the production effect of the up-and-down displacement of the production member 700 can be visually recognized. can be improved.

65 to 67 are rear views of the enlargement/reduction unit 600 showing the downward displacement of the effect member 700 in chronological order. In addition, in FIG. 65, FIG. 65(b) is also shown as a diagram in which illustration of the main body member 601 and the front cover member 610 is omitted for easy understanding.

65(a) and 65(b) show the production standby state of the enlargement/reduction unit 600, FIG. 66 shows the lowering state in which the production member 700 descends from the production standby state, and FIG. The expanded state of the scaling unit 600 is shown.

As shown in FIG. 65( a ), when the enlarging/reducing unit 600 is in the rendering standby state, the detected plate portion 655 of the transmission gear 650 is retracted from the detection groove of the detection sensor 607 . That is, in the present embodiment, the drive motor MT2 is stopped in a state in which the detection plate portion 655 is arranged in the detection groove of the detection sensor 607 before execution of the effect suggesting that the effect member 700 is displaced downward. At this point, the driving motor MT2 is driven and controlled in accordance with the execution of the above-described suggestive effect, and the driving motor MT2 is temporarily stopped at a position where it is determined that the plate portion 655 to be detected has retreated from the detection groove of the detection sensor 607. It is controlled to change the state of the enlargement/reduction unit 600 to the presentation standby state.

Conversely, when the transmission gear 650 is rotationally driven to the side of upwardly displacing the effect member 700, when it is determined that the detected plate portion 655 has entered the detection groove of the detection sensor 607, the drive motor MT2 is energized. is released, the transmission gear 650 can be stopped at a position slightly entering the margin 624b from the position of the cylindrical projection 654 in the standby state for the effect, and as described above, the upper arm member 620 , the displacement of the lower arm member 630 and the effect member 700 can be regulated.

In this embodiment, when it is determined that the plate portion 655 to be detected has entered the detection groove of the detection sensor 607, the driving of the driving motor MT2 is not stopped immediately, but regardless of whether the driving speed is maintained or decelerated, The driving of the drive motor MT2 is controlled to stop after a time delay sufficient for the position of the columnar protrusion 654 to be arranged at the end of the margin 624b.

As a result, the stop position of the transmission gear 650 can be set to a position where the cylindrical protrusion 654 is located at the end of the margin 624b. At this position, the cylindrical portion 183 of the displacement restricting device 180 can be inserted into the restricted hole 657 of the transmission gear 650 (see FIG. 21(a)). Even if the stop position of the transmission gear 650 is slightly deviated, the tapered surface is formed at the tip of the cylindrical portion 183 (see FIG. 15(c)), so that the cylindrical portion 183 can be easily inserted into the restricted hole 657. can do.

The position of the regulated hole 657 when the cylindrical portion 183 can be inserted is a position slightly rotated clockwise from the state shown in FIG. It is set at a position that partially overlaps with the regulation hole 657 .

Therefore, for example, in the state shown in FIG. 66 or FIG. 67, the operation member 183 of the displacement restricting device 180 is pushed to set the displacement restricting device 180 in the restricting state (see FIG. 15(c)), and then the transmission gear 650 is disengaged. Even if the transmission gear 650 is rotationally controlled in the direction to move the production member 700 upward by drive control, the cylindrical portion 183 interferes with the displacement of the transmission gear 650, and the state shown in FIG. 65(a) is not reached.

The plate portion 655 to be detected does not enter the detection groove of the detection sensor 607 even though the drive motor MT2 continues to be driven, so that the MPU 221 (see FIG. 4) determines that the transmission gear 650 is defective in displacement. can be done.

Based on this determination, the abnormality can be notified by a method such as displaying an error indicating the displacement failure of the enlargement/reduction unit 600 on the third pattern display device 81 (see FIG. 4). store clerk to understand that the displacement restricting device 180 may remain in the restricting state.

As a result, the error display or the like regarding the displacement of the enlargement/reduction unit 600 can be used to convey information regarding the state of the displacement restricting device 180 to the store clerk of the gaming machine store. Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the need to separately provide a device for detecting the state of the displacement restricting device 180 .

Here, since the stop position of the transmission gear 650 has a margin corresponding to the length of the margin 624b of the transmission hole 624, the rotational speed of the transmission gear 650 can be set to a large value. If the rotation speed of the transmission gear 650 is excessive when the transmission gear 700 is displaced upward, the upward speed of the lower arm member 630 suspended from the upper arm member 620 will be excessive, and the lower arm member 630 will move to the upper arm member 620. There is a possibility of collision.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the direction in which the effect member 700 is displaced toward the effect standby state is set in the direction opposite to the direction of gravity (upward direction), downward acceleration is always applied to the lower arm member 630. It is possible to reduce the vertical load at the contact position when the lower arm member 630 collides with the upper arm member 620 .

In addition, as shown in FIG. 65(b), since the upper side surface shape of the lower meat portion 637 of the lower arm member 630 is formed along the lower side surface shape of the upper arm member 620, the lower arm member 630 can increase the contact area in the case of collision with the upper arm member 620 . As a result, it is possible to prevent the upper arm member 620 and the lower arm member 630 from being locally subjected to a large load, and prevent the upper arm member 620 or the lower arm member 630 from being damaged or broken.

In this way, since the lower arm member 630 is configured to be able to contact the lower surface of the upper arm member 620 with a sufficiently wide contact area, the rotation speed of the transmission gear 650 is excessive when the effect member 700 is displaced upward. Even if the rising speed of the lower arm member 630 suspended from the upper arm member 620 becomes excessive, the upper arm member 620 whose displacement is restricted by the columnar protrusion 654 as described above allows the lower arm member 630 to move upward. The upward displacement of the member 630 can be restricted. Thereby, the production member 700 can be prevented from being displaced upward beyond the arrangement in the production standby state.

In the state shown in FIGS. 66 and 67, the upper arm member 620, the lower arm member 630 and the effect member 700 are displaced downward from the effect standby state against the biasing force of the torsion spring SP3 by the driving force of the drive motor MT2. corresponds to the state

In the state shown in FIG. 66, the auxiliary protrusion 712 of the effect member 700 is arranged at the intermediate position of the arcuate hole 634 of the lower arm member 630, and in the state shown in FIG. An auxiliary protrusion 712 of 700 is located at the end of the arcuate hole 634 of the lower arm member 630 .

Thereby, the extent to which the lower arm member 630 holds the effect member 700 (the extent to which the posture is stabilized) can be changed. That is, the lower arm member 630 can hold the effect member 700 to a higher extent in the effect standby state or the overhanging state than in the mid-descent state.

In other words, it is possible to easily prevent the effect member 700 from changing its posture in the direction of rotation about the cylindrical protrusion 711 . For example, when the auxiliary projection 712 is arranged in the middle position of the arc-shaped hole 732 and the displacement in the rotational direction is not restricted (see FIG. 66), the effect member 700 rotates in the rotational direction around the right cylindrical projection 711. Attitude may change.

In the present embodiment, the effect member 700 is supported by the pair of left and right lower arm members 630 at two points including the left cylindrical projection 711, but it rotates around the right cylindrical projection 711. The displacement direction of the left columnar protrusion 711 when the performance member 700 changes its posture is the lateral direction of the lower arm member 630, that is, the direction in which the lower arm member 630 is displaced. Therefore, there is a possibility that the change in posture of the effect member 700 will be visibly caused without being restricted by the lower arm member 630, which may give the player a sense of discomfort.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, in the overhanging state, the direction of displacement of the left cylindrical protrusion 711 when the direction of the production member 700 changes in the direction of rotation around the right cylindrical protrusion 711 is downward. Lower arm member 630 is arranged along the longitudinal direction of arm member 630 . As a result, the lower arm member 630 can effectively limit the change in the posture of the effect member 700, and the change in the posture of the effect member 700 to the extent that the effect member 700 can be identified can be prevented.

In addition, in the overhanging state, the pair of auxiliary protrusions 712 arranged on the right side is arranged at the end position of the arc-shaped hole 732, so that the contact between the auxiliary protrusions 712 and the arc-shaped hole 732 causes the right side It is possible to prevent the attitude of the effect member 700 from changing in the clockwise direction when viewed from the back around the cylindrical projection 711 of . As described above, the change in posture in the counterclockwise direction in rear view is restricted by the displacement direction of the left cylindrical protrusion 711 along the longitudinal direction of the left lower arm member 630 .

Similarly, in the overhanging state, the pair of auxiliary projections 712 arranged on the left side are arranged at the terminal positions of the arc-shaped holes 732, so that the contact between the auxiliary projections 712 and the arc-shaped holes 732 causes the left side It is possible to prevent the attitude of the effect member 700 from changing in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the rear around the cylindrical protrusion 711 . As described above, the change in posture in the clockwise direction in the rear view is restricted by the fact that the displacement direction of the right cylindrical protrusion 711 is along the longitudinal direction of the right lower arm member 630 .

Furthermore, the auxiliary protrusion 712 not only changes the attitude of the production member 700 in the direction of rotation (the direction of rotation about the axis extending in the front-rear direction), but also in the direction of tilting (the direction of rotation about the axis extending in the left-right direction). It functions to suppress posture changes and posture changes in the lateral swing direction (rotation direction around an axis extending in the vertical direction).

For example, the lower arm member 630 and the directing member 700 are not connected only by the pair of left and right cylindrical projections 711, but the auxiliary projections 712 arranged above the cylindrical projections 711, or the cylindrical projections 711. Since the lower arm member 630 and the effect member 700 can be connected at three upper and lower positions by being connected also by the auxiliary protrusions 712 arranged on the lower left and right outer sides, the posture change in the tilting direction of the effect member 700 can be controlled. can be suppressed.

In addition, since the auxiliary projection 712 arranged above the cylindrical projection 711 is arranged in the middle of the elongated body portion of the lower arm member 630 (the root side of the arc-shaped hole 634), the effect member 700 tilts. The long main body of the lower arm member 630 can withstand the load caused by the change in orientation.

Further, the pressing member PC1 is disposed on the elongated body portion of the lower arm member 630 as described above (see FIGS. 64 and 67), and the body member 601 or the front cover member 610 is moved downward by the pressing member PC1. The longitudinal displacement of the arm member 630 is restricted.

In this way, when the load due to the change in posture of the effect member 700 is applied to the long main body portion of the lower arm member 630 and the lower arm member 630 receives the load in the bending direction along the lengthwise direction, the lower arm member 630 By using the configuration that regulates the displacement, it is possible to strongly prevent the attitude change of the effect member 700 .

In addition, as described above, the auxiliary projections 712 arranged on the left and right outer sides (below) of the cylindrical projections 711 can increase the number of connection positions between the lower arm member 630 and the effect member 700, and the effect member 700 can move downward. It is possible to suppress the posture change in the lateral swing direction with respect to the arm member 630 .

In this embodiment, the connecting position between the lower arm member 630 and the effect member 700 is arranged on a horizontal plane passing through the vertical center of the plate-shaped main body 710 of the effect member 700 . In addition, in this embodiment, the center of gravity of the production member 700 is arranged on the same horizontal plane.

As a result, it is possible to minimize the amount of displacement in the front-rear direction when the posture of the effect member 700 is changed in such a manner that the effect member 700 falls forward about the connecting portion with the lower arm member 630 . It is possible to minimize the amount of displacement in the front-rear direction when the posture of the effect member 700 is changed in such a manner that the effect member 700 falls backward about the connecting portion.

In other words, even if there is a possibility that the production member 700 may undergo a plurality of posture changes, the front-rear direction displacement of the production member 700 is suppressed even if any one of the plurality of posture changes occurs. Therefore, any posture change can be dealt with.

As a result, even when the effect member 700 and the partition member 310 (see FIG. 13(a)) are arranged with a narrow front-to-rear space, the effect member 700 is prevented from rubbing against or colliding with the partition member 310. Since this can be avoided, it is possible to make it difficult for the performance member 700 to be damaged, the design portion to be deteriorated, and visibility deterioration (transparency deterioration) due to damage or abrasion to the partitioning member 310 to occur.

In a state where the effect member 700 is arranged at the lower end position, the transmission gear 650 abuts on the shape portion of the main body member 601 in the rotational direction and is restricted from further rotation. Therefore, even if the drive motor MT2 continues to drive, it is possible to prevent the upper arm member 620, the lower arm member 630, and the effect member 700 from being excessively displaced simply by accumulating the driving force in the transmission gear 650.

In this embodiment, in the overhanging state shown in FIG. 67, a driving force slightly exceeding the biasing force of the torsion spring SP3 is continuously applied to prevent the production member 700 from rebounding upward and displacing it. controlling.

As a result, the effect member 700 can be stably stopped at the lower end position while setting the biasing force of the torsion spring SP3 to a large value (for example, a magnitude that allows the effect member 700 to be lifted).

On the other hand, when the effect member 700 starts to be displaced upward, the urging force of the torsion spring SP3 can be used, so it is possible to avoid excessive load on the drive motor MT2.

For example, when starting to displace upward, after releasing the driving force for stably arranging the effect member 700 at the lower end position, the upward displacement of the effect member 700 is prevented by the biasing force of the torsion spring SP3. By generating the driving force of the driving motor MT2 after waiting (by providing a waiting time until the driving of the driving motor MT2 is started), the driving force can be applied to the effect member 700 after the start of displacement.

This makes it possible to reduce the burden on the drive motor MT2 compared to the case where the effect member 700 in the stopped state is displaced upward.

65 to 67, imaginary lines show changes in the arrangement of the electric wiring DK1 passing through the lower arm member 630, and hidden lines show the shape of the inner surface of the wiring guide member 714 for guiding the electric wiring DK1. be done.

As shown in FIG. 65(b), the electrical wiring DK1 passes through the front side of the thin lid portion 636 of the lower arm member 630, passes through the inner diameter side of the arcuate hole 634, and is guided to the inside of the wiring guide member 714. It passes through the through hole 713 to the front side.

As shown in FIGS. 65 to 67, the tension of the electrical wiring DK1 that may occur due to the relative displacement of the lower arm member 630 with respect to the effect member 700 is offset by the excess length of the electrical wiring DK1 previously arranged inside the wiring guide member 714. I am trying to As a result, the displacement of the electric wire DK1 can be completed near the wire guide member 714, so that the displacement of the electric wire DK1 on the front side of the through hole 713 and inside the lower arm member 630 can be suppressed.

The shape of the inner surface of the wiring guide member 714 is formed in an arc shape centered on the electric wiring DK1 side. Thereby, the load that the electric wiring DK1 receives from the wiring guide member 714 can be reduced.

In addition, the shape portion of the lower arm member 630 in which the arc-shaped hole 634 is formed functions to guide the displacement of the electrical wiring DK1. For example, when the effect member 700 is displaced upward from the extended state of the enlargement/reduction unit 600 (see FIG. 67), the shape portion in which the arc-shaped hole 634 of the lower arm member 630 is formed is the electrical wiring DK1. DK1 can be pushed into the wiring guide member 714 side.

As a result, the electric wiring DK1 can be stably put in and taken out of the wiring guide member 714, and the state change of the enlargement/reduction unit 600 can be stably caused.

As shown in FIGS. 65 to 67, the auxiliary projections 712 arranged in the arc-shaped holes 634 arranged on the front side of the thin lid portion 636 and mostly hidden by the thin lid portion 636 are in an overhanging state. is arranged at a position visible from the rear (see FIG. 67).

The auxiliary protrusion 712 is a portion guided by the arc-shaped hole 634 and a fastening portion used for connecting the lower arm member 630 and the effect member 700 . Therefore, in order to assemble (or disassemble) the lower arm member 630 and the effect member 700, it is necessary to screw the fastening screw into (or remove) the auxiliary protrusion 712. FIG.

Therefore, in this embodiment, the state in which the lower arm member 630 and the effect member 700 are assembled (or disassembled) can be limited to the extended state of the enlargement/reduction unit 600 . As a result, assembly efficiency and maintenance efficiency can be improved. In addition, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation in which the production member 700 and other constituent members are damaged as a result of performing assembly or maintenance while the production member 700 is arranged in an incomplete position.

Next, the displacement (enlargement/reduction displacement) associated with the state change of the expansion/contraction displacement member 740 of the effect member 700 will be described. In this embodiment, the degree of expansion/contraction displacement of the effect member 700 is controlled so as to be variable depending on the arrangement of the effect member 700 .

68 is a front view of the scaling unit 600, and FIG. 69 is a rear view of the scaling unit 600. FIG. In FIGS. 68 and 69, illustration of the front cover member 610 is omitted for easy understanding.

FIGS. 68 and 69 illustrate a state in which the enlarging/reducing unit 600 is in the process of being lowered. As shown in FIGS. 68 and 69, in the midway down state of the scaling unit 600, the effect member 700 is not controlled to be enlarged and displaced until the expansion/contraction member 740 reaches its maximum diameter. It is controlled to allow expansion displacement.

In other words, the rotation angle of the rotary plate 730 is limited by shortening the drive time of the drive motor MT3 (see FIG. 53). Therefore, since it is possible to avoid the effect member 700 from becoming excessively large when viewed from the front, the allowable posture change amount of the effect member 700 from the viewpoint of avoiding contact with the partitioning member 310 (see FIG. 22). can be increased.

At an intermediate position of the expansion displacement of the effect member 700, the decorative member 752 is partially covered with the shielding design member 760 (outer diameter side portion is covered). As for the arrangement of the decorative members 752 in a front view, the light transmitting member 752a is arranged at a position (gap position) not covered by the effect member 700, and the mirror surface member 752b is arranged at a position covered by the effect member 700, including the light transmitting member. 752a is arranged at a position other than the position where it is visually recognized.

As a result, it is possible to improve the visibility of the light emitted through the light transmitting member 752a from the LEDs or the like arranged on the electrical board 751 (see FIG. 53), and the light transmitting member 752a is transmitted through the light transmitting member 752a to provide a shielding design. By reflecting the light reflected on the back side of the member 760 by the mirror surface member 752b, the effect of the mirror surface member 752b can be improved.

For example, as an effect mode of the mirror surface member 752b, when light is not emitted from the LEDs of the electrical board 751 (see FIG. 53), the background color of the shielding design member 760 (red in this embodiment) is applied to the mirror surface member 752b. can be reflected and made visible to the player.

On the other hand, when light is emitted from the LEDs of the electrical board 751, the color reflected from the mirror surface member 752b is mixed with the color of the background of the shielding design member 760 and the color of the light emitted from the LEDs. can be any color. Therefore, the appearance of the mirror surface member 752b can be changed by the light passing through the portion other than the mirror surface member 752 (for example, the light transmitting member 752a).

Note that the control mode is not limited at all. For example, after the shielding design member 760 is stopped in the state shown in FIG. 68, it may be controlled to return to the assembled state, or the driving direction of the drive motor MT3 (see FIG. 53) may be changed from the state shown in FIG. The shielding design member 760 may be controlled to vibrate in the radial direction by switching between normal and reverse in small steps.

When controlling the shielding design member 760 to vibrate, the displacement of the shielding design member 760 can be further complicated. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 69, the position of the support protrusion 743a arranged at the tip of the second elongated member 743 of the telescopic displacement member 740 in the state of the enlarged displacement to the intermediate position is the position of the tip adjustment member. 744 and the intermediate position of the guide slot 744a. As a result, the distal end adjusting member 744 can be displaced in the longitudinal direction of the guide long hole 744a, so that the shielding design member 760 can be displaced not only in the radial direction but also in the circumferential direction.

While such a displacement is achievable, when the shielding design members 760 are collectively arranged or displaced to expand in the radial direction to the maximum, the support projection 743a arranged at the tip of the second long member 743 are placed at both end positions of the guide long hole 744a of the tip adjustment member 744, the circumferential arrangement of the shielding design member 760 can be returned (see FIGS. 58(b) and 59(b). ).

In addition, the midway position that is allowed as the expansion displacement of the effect member 700 is not limited to the position shown in FIG. 69, and can be set arbitrarily. For example, it may be a position slightly shifted from the collective arrangement state, or a position slightly before the position of maximum expansion displacement.

Here, in a state in which the extended plate portion 761 is enlarged and displaced to a position slightly deviated from the collective arrangement state (for example, a position where the extended plate portion 761 overlaps the shielding design member 760 arranged oppositely in a front view and is visually recognized), the extended plate Since the portion 761 fills the gap between the shielding design members 760, it is possible for the player to visually recognize that the collective arrangement state is maintained.

In this embodiment, a red reflective sheet is attached to the extension plate portion 761 in the same manner as the main body portion of the shielding design member 760, so the red color of the extension plate portion 761 is visible in the gap between the shielding design members 760. Even if the red color is the color of the extended plate portion 761 or the color of the shielding design member 760, it can be difficult to distinguish.

It should be noted that unlike the present embodiment, the effect member 700 is expanded and displaced to a position slightly displaced from the collective arrangement state by means such as painting the extension plate portion 761 with another color (for example, gold). The extension plate portion 761 that is visually recognized in the gap between the shielding design members 760 may be conspicuous.

Although the case where the light transmitting member 752a is made of a colorless and light transmitting resin material has been described in the present embodiment, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be formed from a red resin material.

In this case, even if the shielding design members 760 are displaced beyond the overlapping margin with the extended plate portion 761 from the collective arrangement state, the light transmitting members 752a visible in the gaps between the shielding design members 760 are shielded. Since it is visually recognized in red like the design member 760, it is possible for the player to visually recognize that the shielding design members 760 are at least partially connected to each other.

On the other hand, when light is emitted from the LEDs of the illumination board 751 (see FIG. 53), the light transmitting members 752a visible in the gaps between the shielding design members 760 can be made to emit light to make them stand out. It is possible to improve the production effect of.

70 is a front view of the scaling unit 600, and FIG. 71 is a rear view of the scaling unit 600. FIG. In FIGS. 70 and 71, illustration of the front cover member 610 is omitted for easy understanding.

70 and 71 show the extended state of the scaling unit 600 and the expanded state of the effect member 700. FIG. As shown in FIGS. 70 and 71, in the extended state of the scaling unit 600, the effect member 700 is controlled to be enlarged and displaceable until the expansion/contraction displacement member 740 is dispersed with the maximum diameter.

Therefore, the size of the effect member 700 when viewed from the front is maximized, and the allowable posture change amount of the effect member 700 is minimized from the viewpoint of avoiding contact with the partition member 310 (see FIG. 22). In addition, the device for suppressing the posture change of the effect member 700 is as described above.

In the expanded state of the production member 700, the shielding design member 760 is arranged to retreat from the decorative member 752 in front view. Therefore, it is possible to change the mode of reflection on the mirror surface member 752b when light is emitted from the LEDs of the illumination board 751 (see FIG. 53) to the case where the effect member 700 is arranged in the middle of the expansion displacement.

That is, it is possible to suppress the reflection of the background color of the shielding design member 760 and make it easier for the player to visually recognize the background color (silver in this embodiment) of the mirror surface member 752b. Therefore, even in a control mode in which light of the same color is continuously emitted from the LEDs of the decorative board 751 (see FIG. 53) when the elastic displacement member 740 is displaced and the shielding design member 760 is expanded and displaced, the decorative member 752 is visually recognized. It is possible to change the color of the light visually recognized by the player who plays the game in time series.

In more detail, for example, when white light is emitted from the electrical board 751, the background color (red) of the shielding design member 760 is visible near the start of enlargement, while the shielding design member changes with the displacement of the enlargement. The color of the character 760 is weakened (the range is narrowed), and the background color (silver) of the mirror surface member 752b becomes more visible at the end position of the expansion displacement. As a result, the color of the light visually recognized by the player can be changed without changing the color of the emitted light.

68 and 69 and the expansion displacements shown in FIGS. 70 and 71 do not occur continuously in this embodiment. , is controlled to execute the expansion displacement of the effect member 700 .

That is, the vertical displacement of the effect member 700 is controlled to be executable only when the effect member 700 is collectively arranged. This can prevent the shielding design member 760 from colliding with other components such as the hemispherical front device 613 (see FIG. 47).

In addition, after considering the avoidance of collisions with other constituent members, or by configuring so as not to cause problems in displacement due to collisions with other constituent members, the production member 700 is expanded and displaced in the middle of the vertical displacement. It may be controlled as much as possible.

The radial contraction displacement of the shielding design member 760 will be described with reference to FIGS. 72 to 75 . 72(a), 72(b), 73, 74(a), and 75(a) are rear views of the effect member 700 showing contraction displacement of the effect member 700 in chronological order. 74(b) is a top view of the effect member 700 as viewed in the direction of arrow LXXIVb in FIG. 74(a), and FIG. 75(b) is a top view of the effect member 700 as viewed in the direction of arrow LXXVb in FIG. 75(a). It is a diagram.

In FIGS. 72(a), 72(b), 73, 74(a), and 75(a), illustration of the plate-like main body 710 is omitted for ease of understanding, and FIG. , the rotating plate 730 rotates counterclockwise in rear view. In FIGS. 74(b) and 75(b), the illustration of the rotating plate 730b is further omitted.

FIG. 72(a) shows a state in which the shielding design members 760 of the production member 700 are dispersed with the maximum diameter (see FIGS. 70 and 71), and FIG. 72(b) shows the shielding design members 760 of the production member 700 A state of being expanded and displaced to the halfway position (see FIGS. 68 and 69) is illustrated.

In the state shown in FIG. 72(a), the transmitted projection 741a of the expansion/contraction displacement member 740 is arranged at the boundary between the small-diameter arc portion 733a and the connecting portion 733c of the rotary plate 730, and in the state shown in FIG. , the transmitted projection 741 a of the expansion/contraction displacement member 740 is arranged in the middle of the connecting portion 733 c of the rotary plate 730 .

FIG. 73 shows a state in which the first guided protrusion 743b of the telescopic displacement member 740 arranged on the lower side starts contacting the back-side claw portion 734a of the rotary plate 730, and FIG. The first guided protrusion 743b of the telescopic displacement member 740 is guided by the back-side claw 734a of the rotating plate 730 and reaches the position just before the collective arrangement state.

Due to the difference in the influence of gravity between the members arranged on the upper side and the members arranged on the lower side, the displacement modes of the telescopic displacement member 740 and the shielding design member 760 are arranged on the members arranged on the upper side and the members arranged on the lower side. It differs depending on the material.

As shown in FIG. 73, the telescopic displacement member 740 and the shielding design member 760 arranged on the upper side are arranged close to the rotating plate 730 by their own weight, and the telescopic displacement member 740 arranged on the lower side is rotated by its own weight. Since it acts in the direction away from the plate 730, it hangs down in the direction away from the rotating plate 730 to the extent allowed by the gap between the guide hole 733 and the transmitted projection 741a.

This hanging portion is lifted by the load from the extended claw portion 734 of the rotating plate 730, and the lower telescopic displacement member 740 and the shielding design member 760 reach the collectively arranged position. Therefore, the five shielding design members 760 do not arrive at the collective arrangement state at the same time, and at least the upper three are earlier than the lower two.

As a result, the production members 700 can be stably displaced to the collective arrangement state. That is, when the lower telescopic displacement member 740 and the shielding design member 760 are arranged first, the upper telescopic displacement member 740 and the shielding design member 760 vigorously reach the collectively arranged state, whereby the lower telescopic displacement member is arranged. 740 and the shielding design member 760, fatigue accumulates in the lower expansion/contraction displacement member 740 and the shielding design member 760, which may cause premature failure.

On the other hand, when the upper elastic displacement member 740 and the shielding design member 760 are arranged first as in the present embodiment, and then the lower elastic displacement member 740 and the shielding design member 760 are arranged in a collective arrangement state. Since its own weight is generated in a direction against the displacement of the lower telescopic displacement member 740 and the shielding design member 760, the momentum of colliding with the upper telescopic displacement member 740 and the shielding design member 760 can be suppressed. As a result, it is possible to suppress the accumulation of fatigue caused by collision between the elastic displacement member 740 and the shielding design member 760 .

In FIG. 74, the transmitted protrusion 741a of the expansion/contraction displacement member 740 is arranged at the boundary between the large-diameter arc portion 733b of the rotating plate 730 and the connecting portion 733c. Immediately after this, the expansion/contraction displacement member 740 is fully pushed by the back side claw portion 734a, and is brought into a collective arrangement state. On the other hand, the second guided projection 744b of the distal end adjusting member 744 is arranged apart from the front claw 734b.

In FIG. 75 , a collective arrangement state of the effect members 700 is illustrated. That is, the figure shows a state in which the rotary plate 730 is rotated counterclockwise in rear view to the end position where the columnar projecting portion 728 of the function plate portion 720 is arranged at the end portion of the arc-shaped hole 732 of the rotary plate 730 .

FIG. 76 is a cross-sectional view of the effect member 700 along line LXXVI-LXXVI of FIG. As shown in FIG. 76, when the production member 700 is collectively arranged, the central axis side surface of the rear claw portion 734a abuts against the first guided projection 743b of the expansion/contraction member 740, and the diameter of the expansion/contraction member 740 increases. Directionally outward displacement is restricted.

In addition, the central axis side surface of the front claw portion 734b abuts against the second guided projection 744b of the telescopic displacement member 740, and the radially outward displacement of the telescopic displacement member 740 is restricted. At this time, the second guided projection 744b and the first guided projection 743b abut on each other in the radial direction with a front-to-rear width in the projecting direction. You can stabilize your posture.

Furthermore, the front surface of the distal end adjustment member 744 is configured to be slidable on the rear surface of the extension plate portion 726 .
During this sliding process, the projecting tip of the second guided protrusion 744b of the telescopic displacement member 740 abuts on the inclined surface 734c of the rotary plate 730 in the front-rear direction, and the inclined surface 734c is inclined in the rotational direction. (The closer it is to the collectively arranged state, the more it is inclined in such a manner that it protrudes toward the front side.) Therefore, the inclined surface 734c can apply a load toward the front side to the second guided projection 744b.

As a result, in the configuration in which the distal end adjusting member 744 is sandwiched between the extended plate portion 726 of the functional plate portion 720 and the inclined surface 734c of the rotating plate 730, as the rotating plate 730 rotates and the effect members 700 approach the collective arrangement state, the leading end The distal end adjusting member 744 can be displaced toward the front side in such a manner that the adjusting member 744 is gradually brought into close contact with the extension plate portion 726 .

Therefore, while preventing excessive increase in the resistance caused by the rotation of the rotating plate 730, the front-rear direction position and posture of the front-rear adjustment member 744 are gradually increased. can be stabilized, the longitudinal position and posture of the shielding design member 760 can be stabilized, and the shielding design member 760 can be arranged in close contact without gaps in the collective arrangement state.

With reference to FIGS. 74(b) and 75(b), the fact that the load applied to the second guided protrusion 744b can correct the posture inclination of the shielding design member 760 will be described. All of the shielding design members 760 have a common configuration, and the telescopic displacement member 740 that displaces the shielding design members 760 also has a common configuration.

As described above, the shielding design member 760 is located on the side where the extended plate portion 761 (see FIG. 59(a)) is formed in the width direction (the right side in the case of the shielding design member 760 arranged at the top, FIG. (b)) is arranged on the rear side compared to the opposite side so that the posture can be easily inclined.

This is due to the form of the second elongated member 743, and this attitude inclination also occurs in the distal end adjusting member 744 to which the shielding design member 760 is fastened and fixed. Due to the inclination of the attitude of the tip adjusting member 744, the tip position of the second guided protrusion 744b is located on the rear surface compared to the tip position of the first guided protrusion 743b (the protrusion direction is along the front-rear direction). The position tends to shift in the clockwise direction (to the left in the case of the shielding design member 760 arranged at the top, see FIG. 74(b)).

On the other hand, the rotating plate 730 has the extended claw portion 734 arranged to face the second guided protrusion 744b in the clockwise direction in the rear view, and is arranged to face the second guided protrusion 744b in the counterclockwise direction in the rear view. It rotates and displaces so that a load can be applied.

That is, for example, when the inner diameter side surface of the front claw portion 734b and the front side surface of the inclined surface 734c (see FIGS. 56 and 57) come into contact with the second guided protrusion 744b, the second guided protrusion 744b Since the tip position can be returned to the counterclockwise direction side in rear view, the degree of inclination of the postures of the tip adjustment member 744 and the shielding design member 760 can be relaxed (the inclination can be eliminated). As a result, it is possible to easily eliminate the attitude inclination of the shielding design member 760 at the collective arrangement position of the effect members 700 .

The load applied to the second guided protrusion 744b is configured to occur from the state shown in FIG. 74 to the state shown in FIG. Therefore, in the process of changing the state of the production member 700 shown in chronological order from FIG. 72 to FIG. 75, until the shielding design member 760 is arranged at the small diameter side end (reduction side end) of the displacement allowable range (see FIG. 74). , the posture inclinations of the distal end adjusting member 744 and the shielding design member 760 are maintained, and then the posture change to eliminate (correct) the posture inclinations of the distal end adjusting member 744 and the shielding design member 760 can be caused.

That is, while the shielding design members 760 are approaching each other, by maintaining the attitude inclination of the tip adjustment member 744 and the shielding design member 760, the body portion of the shielding design member 760 and the extended plate portion 761 come into contact (collision). ), on the other hand, after the shielding design members 760 have come close to each other, by canceling (correcting) the posture inclination of the tip adjustment member 744 and the shielding design member 760, the shielding design member The plate portion arranged in the forefront of the shielding design members 760 can be arranged flush with each other, and a sense of unity of the shielding design members 760 in the collectively arranged state can be easily produced.

The state shown in FIG. 74(b) is illustrated as a state in which the posture deviation of the shielding design member 760 is maximized. In addition, the posture deviation on the opposite side of the posture deviation shown in FIG. This makes it easier to avoid the extension plate portion 761 from colliding with the main body portion of the shielding design member 760 arranged to face it.

Further, an auxiliary protrusion 727 (see FIG. 54) arranged on the opposite side of the extended plate portion 726 is configured to be able to come into contact with the contraction side wall portion of the distal end adjustment member 744 during expansion/contraction displacement. Since a pair of auxiliary projections 727 are formed on the left and right sides of the extension plate portion 726, the tip adjustment member 744 is moved by contacting the left and right ends of the tip adjustment member 744 that have reached the contraction side ends of the displacement range. Posture deviation can be corrected.

As a result, it is possible not only to correct the posture by engaging with another shielding design member 760, but also to stabilize the posture when the distal end adjusting member 744 reaches the contraction side end of the displacement range by itself. can.

Returning to FIG. 5 and FIG. 6, description will be made. In this embodiment, in addition to the third symbol display device 81, the above-described shooting effect unit 300, enlargement/reduction unit 600, and displacement/rotation unit 800 are provided as effect devices for livening up the game. Next, the displacement/rotation unit 800 will be described.

Since the displacement/rotation unit 800 is a pair of units arranged symmetrically and configured to have symmetrical shapes, the configuration of the displacement/rotation unit 800 on the left side will be described below, and the explanation of the displacement/rotation unit 800 on the right side will be described below. omitted. Note that FIG. 5 will be referred to as needed in the following description.

77 is a front perspective view of the displacement rotation unit 800, and FIG. 78 is a rear perspective view of the displacement rotation unit 800. FIG. 77 and 78 show the effect standby state of the displacement rotation unit 800. FIG.

79 is a front exploded perspective view of the displacement rotation unit 800, and FIG. 80 is a rear exploded perspective view of the displacement rotation unit 800. FIG. 79 and 80, the lateral slide member 840 is shown in an assembled state.

As shown in FIGS. 79 and 80, the displacement/rotation unit 800 includes a base plate portion 810 fastened and fixed to the bottom wall portion 511 of the rear case 510, and a metal plate portion fixed to the base plate portion 810 with a member such as a screw. A rod MB2, a vertical slide member 820 configured to be vertically slidable through which the metal rod MB2 is inserted, and a drive fastened and fixed to the rear side of the vertical slide member 820 and fastened and fixed to the base plate portion 810. A transmission member 830 configured to transmit the driving force of the motor MT4, a metal rod MB3 fixed to the vertical slide member 820 with a member such as a screw, and a configuration in which the metal rod MB3 is inserted and slidable in the left-right direction. a transmission means 860 configured to transmit the driving force of the drive motor MT4 to the horizontal slide member 840 via the vertical slide member 820 as the vertical slide member 820 is displaced in the vertical direction; A wiring arm member 870 fastened and fixed to the vertical slide member 820 so as to be rotatably displaceable at the upper end position of the vertical slide member 820 on the side of the metal rod MB2, and a wiring guide member 880 for guiding the wiring arm member 870 and the electric wiring. .

The base plate portion 810 includes a pair of both end fixing portions 811 on which the metal rod MB2 is arranged, a slide guide portion 812 formed so as to be able to guide the transmission member 830 arranged on the front side, and a long length on the back side. A transmission guide portion 813 formed in a groove shape so as to be able to guide the columnar protrusion 862b of the transmission means 860, a drive motor MT4 fastened and fixed to the back side, and a rack member 862 guided by the transmission guide portion 813. and a fall prevention plate 814 arranged on the rear side to prevent the falling of the device.

The vertical slide member 820 includes a flat plate portion 821, a wall portion 822 extending from the edge of the flat plate portion 821 toward the rear side, and a circular portion extending from a substantially central position of an area surrounded by the wall portion 822 toward the rear side. A cylindrical protrusion 823 protruding in a columnar shape, omission portions 824a and 824b having a size that allows insertion of a connector portion of an electrical wiring and omitting the formation of a wall portion, and the left end portion of the flat plate portion 821 A pair of upper and lower metal rod insertion portions 825 formed in a cylindrical shape (or a cylindrical member is disposed) through which the metal rod MB2 can be inserted, and a normal plate portion 821 at the upper and lower central portions of the plane plate portion 821 through which the metal rod MB3 can be inserted. A pair of left and right metal rod insertion portions 826 formed (or a cylindrical member is disposed) on the left and right, and near the ends of the metal rod insertion portions 826, are fastened and fixed to the flat plate portion 821 to prevent the metal rod MB3 from falling off. a support portion 828 formed in a columnar shape projecting from the back side of the plane plate portion 821 and capable of supporting a two-stage pinion 861; and a support protrusion 829 that protrudes cylindrically toward the left side of FIG. 79).

The wall portion 822 is a portion for ensuring the durability of the electrical wiring by structuring inside a region in which the electrical wiring disposed between the wiring arm member 870 and the lateral slide member 840 can be displaced.
The omission portions 824a and 824b formed as discontinuous portions of the wall portion 822 are composed of a first omission portion 824a formed as an opening and a second omission portion 824b formed as a concave portion opened to the rear side.

The metal rod insertion portion 825 extends in a plate shape from the upper side thereof toward the rear side, and the upper detection sensor SC8 and the lower detection sensor SC8 are fastened and fixed to the base member 810 in a posture in which the detection groove faces the front side of the base member 810. A detection target plate portion 825a configured to be arranged in the detection groove of the sensor SC9 is provided.

The transmission member 830 includes a main body portion 831 formed in a plate shape elongated in the vertical direction, and a female screw formed at the tip of a columnar protrusion 823 of the vertical slide member 820 on the upper side of the main body portion 831 . An insertion hole 832 that is formed so that a fastening screw that can be screwed into it can be inserted, and a plate portion in which the insertion hole 832 is drilled. A lid-shaped portion 833 that covers from the side, and a linear gear portion 834 in which gear teeth are linearly formed in the vertical direction on the left side surface of the main body portion 831 are provided.

The columnar protrusion 823 has both a role as a portion into which the fastening screw inserted through the insertion hole 832 is screwed, and a role as a winding center of the electrical wiring, as will be described later.

The linear gear portion 834 meshes with the drive gear MG4 of the drive motor MT4. That is, the transmission member 830 is vertically displaced as the drive motor MT4 is controlled to rotate. As a result, the vertical slide member 820 is vertically displaced.

81 is an exploded front perspective view of the lateral slide member 840, and FIG. 82 is an exploded rear perspective view of the lateral slide member 840. FIG. As shown in FIGS. 81 and 82, the horizontal slide member 840 includes a body plate member 841 formed in a substantially circular plate shape through which a metal rod MB3 is inserted to limit displacement in the left-right direction, and a rear surface of the body plate portion 841. A wiring guide member 844 that is fastened and fixed to the upper part of the side and constitutes a guide path for electric wiring, a circular member 847 arranged on the front side of the main body plate member 841 and formed in a circular plate shape when viewed from the front, and the circular member 847. and the main body plate member 841, an annular decorative member 853 fastened and fixed to the front side of the circular member 847, and the circular member 847 via a cylindrical collar member C8. and an intermediary member 857 fitted from the front side into the opening of the wing-like member 854 in order to match the central opening diameter of the wing-like member 854 with the opening diameter of the collar member C8. , and a central design member 858 in which a columnar member having an outer diameter that can be inserted into the central opening of the intermediary member 857 protrudes from the rear side.

The main body plate member 841 has a rod arrangement portion 842 in which the drive motor MT5 is fastened and fixed on the back side, the drive gear MG5 is arranged on the front side, and the metal rod MB3 is arranged. and a rack gear portion 843 in which gear teeth are engraved along the left-right direction.

The wiring guide member 844 is a member for guiding lateral displacement of the electrical wiring, and is formed in a shape that allows the electrical wiring to bypass. As a result, it is possible to prevent the electrical wiring from rubbing against other components, which will be described later in detail.

The circular member 847 is made of a light-transmitting resin material, and is configured such that a wing-like member 854 and the drive gear MG5 which are formed to be able to mesh with each other are assembled from front and back directions different from each other.

The circular member 847 includes a cup-shaped receiving portion 848 of a size capable of receiving the feather-shaped member 854 and recessed toward the rear side, and a cylindrically protruding portion from the center of the receiving portion 848 toward the front side. and a cylindrical protrusion 849 that is

The receiving portion 848 has a through-hole portion 848a which is formed so as to have a shape that overlaps with the cylindrical column centered on the drive shaft of the drive motor MT5. Exposed to a position visible from the back.

In this manner, the exposed portion of the gear portion 855 can mesh with the drive gear MG5, and the drive motor MT5 rotates, thereby transmitting the drive force and controlling the rotation of the vane member 854. FIG. Rotational driving of the vane member 854 is possible regardless of the state of the displacement/rotation unit 800 . That is, the shape of the wall portion 882a of the path forming member 882 is designed so that it is possible even in the waiting state for the effect.

The cylindrical protrusion 849 has a linear notch 849a at its tip. This is a shaped portion for facilitating maintenance of the posture of the central design member 858 by arranging the radially protruding portion 858b of the central design member 858, the details of which will be described later.

83 is a partial cross-sectional view of displacement rotation unit 800 taken along line LXXXIII-LXXXIII in FIG. In the description of FIG. 83, FIGS. 81 and 82 are referred to as appropriate.

The electrical decoration board 850 includes a circular opening with an inner diameter slightly larger than the outer diameter of the receiving portion 848 of the circular member 847, an elongated opening extending upward, and a deformed opening 851 formed by the deformed opening. Front side light emitting means 852a composed of a plurality of LEDs etc. arranged on the front side in the vicinity of the opening 851, and a plurality of LEDs etc. and a rear side light emitting means 852b.

The deformed opening 851 allows the receiving portion 848 of the circular member 847 to be arranged inside the opening, and the gear portion 855 of the feather member 854 is arranged on the rear side of the deformed opening 851 in the assembled state.

The elongated hole portion extending upward from the deformed opening 851 is formed for the purpose of avoiding contact with the rotation shaft of the drive gear MG5. As a result, the driving gear MG5 can be brought closer to the electrical board 850, and the gear portion 855 of the feather-shaped member 854 can be easily meshed with the driving gear MG5.

The front side light emitting means 852a is composed of an LED or the like whose optical axis faces the front-rear direction. As a result, the light can be emitted to the front side along the arrow D8a in the vicinity of the rotation axis of the feather member 854 .

The rear side light emitting means 852b is composed of an LED or the like whose optical axis faces radially outward. As a result, light can be emitted toward the outer diameter side of the circular member 847 along the arrow D8b.
By reflecting (refracting) this light to the front side by the uneven shape formed on the plate back surface of the circular member 847 , the light can travel to the front side at a position far from the rotation axis of the feather member 854 . In addition, in this embodiment, since a plurality of elongated concave-convex shapes formed along arcs concentric with the rotational axis of the feather-shaped member 854 are densely formed on the back surface of the circular member 847, the player can In contrast, arc-shaped (or circular) light can be visually recognized when viewed from the front.

That is, according to the present embodiment, even if the front side of the electrical board 850 is not arranged with an LED or the like whose optical axis is oriented in the front-rear direction at a position far from the rotation axis of the feather-shaped member 854, the player can The position at which light is visually recognized can be moved radially outward. In other words, while using the electrical board 850 having a smaller diameter than the outermost diameter of the wing-shaped member 854, the outer side of the surface on which the electrical board 850 is formed, that is, the outermost diameter of the wing-shaped member 854, is used. , the light can be seen (see FIG. 14).

As a result, even without increasing the size of the electrical board 850, it is possible to perform an effect in which light is visually recognized radially outward of the feather-shaped member 854. FIG. In this embodiment, as will be described later, when the wing-shaped member 854 rotates at high speed, the rear side of the wing-shaped member 854 becomes a shadow, and there is a possibility that it may be difficult to effectively perform the lighting effect in this range. . In order to solve this problem, it is considered effective to irradiate the light from the outside in the radial direction of the rotational locus of the vane member 854, but this requires increasing the layout area of the LEDs and the like. In other words, it is necessary to increase the area of the electrical board, which increases the manufacturing cost of the board.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, while maintaining the size of the electrical board 850 smaller than the rotational locus of the wing-shaped member 854, only the visible position of the light is positioned radially outward from the rotational trajectory of the wing-shaped member 854. can be displaced. As a result, the effect of the lighting effect can be improved without increasing the manufacturing cost.

Returning to FIGS. 81 and 82, description will be made. The decorative member 853 is a member that is formed from a light-impermeable resin material and that is coaxially fastened to the front side of the circular member 847 . Therefore, since the light passing through the circular member 847 is separated by the decorative member 853, it is possible to effectively perform an effect in which the appearance of the light is changed between the inner side and the outer side of the decorative member 853 as a boundary.

For example, blue light is emitted from the front side light emitting means 852a while red light is emitted from the rear side light emitting means 852b. can be clearly separated by the decorative member 853 .

The feather-like member 854 is made of a light-transmitting resin material, and has a circular opening 854a formed in the central portion in the front-rear direction, and radially outwardly extending at equal intervals in the circumferential direction around the circular opening 854a. a gear portion 855 formed in a gear shape coaxial with the circular opening 854a on the back side; and a plurality of recessed portions 856 recessed on the back side at an intermediate position between the adjacent blade portions 854b. And prepare.

The circular opening 854a is formed with an inner diameter slightly longer than the outer diameter of the collar member C8.

The wing-shaped member 854 is configured to be rotatable via a drive gear MG5 that is rotationally driven by the drive motor MT5. The attitude of the vane member 854 is controlled depending on the length of the driving time. In this configuration, the wing-shaped member 854 is configured so that the rotation axis and the center of gravity are aligned, and by minimizing idling after de-energization of the drive motor MT5, the drive motor MT5 It is possible to reduce the deviation between the attitude of the wing-shaped member 854 assumed by the driving time of , and the actual attitude of the wing-shaped member 854 . It should be noted that the orientation of the vane member 854 may be detectable by configuring the drive motor MT5 with a stepping motor.

The intermediary member 857 is formed so as to be fitted into the front opening of the circular opening 854 a , and the inner diameter of the opening 857 a is slightly longer than the outer diameter of the cylindrical protrusion 849 of the circular member 847 . Thereby, the intermediary member 857 can be rotatable around the cylindrical protrusion 849 .

The central design member 858 includes a central projection 858a projecting from the central portion toward the back side in a cylindrical shape, a radially projecting portion 858b projecting radially outward from the central projection 858a, and a circular body portion. and a design projected streak portion 858c projecting upward from the .

The central protrusion 858a is a portion that is inserted into the cylindrical protrusion 849 in such a manner that the radial protrusion 858b is inserted into the notch 849a. The central design member 858 is fastened and fixed to the circular member 847 by screwing the inserted fastening screw.

In addition to functioning as a design portion, the design rib portion 858 c can also function to abut against the wing-shaped member 854 and adjust the rotation mode of the wing-shaped member 854 . That is, when the rear surface of the design projection 858c and the front surface of the wing-shaped member 854 are arranged close to each other to such an extent that they rub against each other, the stop posture of the wing-shaped member 854 is stabilized by utilizing the increase in resistance caused by this rubbing. can be planned.

As a result, the drive control mode of the feather-shaped member 854 is a drive mode in which the rotation continues for a long period of time, and a drive mode in which the rotation of about one rotation occurs intermittently (an irregular operation at the beginning of rotation is produced). drive mode), it is possible to stabilize the intermittent stop posture of the feather member 854 in the latter drive mode.

Returning to FIGS. 79 and 80, description will be made. The transmission means 860 meshes with a two-stage pinion 861 rotatably supported by the vertical slide member 820 and a small-diameter pinion 861a of the two-stage pinion 861, and is supported by the vertical slide member 820 so as to be slidable in the left-right direction. and a drop prevention member 863 that prevents the rack member 862 from dropping from the vertical slide member 820 .

The two-stage pinion 861 is formed as a small-diameter pinion 861a that meshes with the gear teeth of the rack member 862 and a pinion that has a longer pitch radius than the small-diameter pinion 861a. The small pinion 861a and the large pinion 861b are integrally formed.

The rack member 862 is formed to be long in the left and right direction, and has a gear portion 862a formed as a rack gear that can mesh with the small-diameter pinion 861a of the two-stage pinion 861. A columnar protrusion 862b that protrudes in a columnar shape from the end toward the front side.

In the present embodiment, the gear teeth of the gear portion 862a of the rack member 862 and the gear teeth of the rack gear portion 843 of the lateral slide member 840 are configured with gear teeth of the same shape, and the pitch circle radius of the small diameter pinion 861a , and the pitch circle radius of the large-diameter pinion 861b is designed to be 9:16. Therefore, the ratio of the amount of lateral displacement of the rack member 862 and the amount of lateral displacement of the lateral slide member 840 is maintained at 9:16.

The columnar protrusion 862b has an outer diameter that allows it to be placed inside the transmission guide portion 813 of the base member 810 . In addition, the plate thickness of the rack member 862 on the side where the columnar projection 862b is formed is such that when the columnar projection 862b is arranged in the transmission guide portion 813, the rear side end portion of the rack member 862 is prevented from falling off. The thickness of the plate is such that the columnar projection 862b does not fall off the transmission guide portion 813 even if the plate 814 is brought into contact with the rear surface side.

This can prevent the rack member 862 from falling off from the transmission guide portion 813 when the fall prevention plate 814 is in the assembled state.

In the present embodiment, the gear teeth of the gear portion 862a and the gear teeth of the rack gear portion 843 of the horizontal slide member 840 are formed as gear teeth of the same shape, so that the displacement amount of the rack member 862 is larger than that of the small-diameter pinion 861a. The lateral slide member 840 is laterally displaced by a displacement amount calculated by multiplying the gear ratio with the radial pinion 861b.

Therefore, the amount of displacement of the lateral slide member 840 can be increased compared to the amount of displacement of the rack member 862 . As a result, it is possible to ensure a large lateral displacement width of the lateral slide member 840 while keeping the lateral width of the transmission guide portion 813 small, which will be described later in detail.

84 is a perspective view of the wiring arm member 870, and FIG. 85 is a perspective view of the path forming member 882 of the wiring guide member 880. FIG. 79 and 80 will be referred to in the description of FIGS. 84 and 85 as appropriate.

As shown in FIG. 84, the wiring arm member 870 is a long member made of a resin material. A circular support hole 872 is drilled at one end in the longitudinal direction of the wire, and a wire placement hole 873 is placed close to the support hole 872 and drilled in the same direction so that electrical wires can be placed. , a plurality of claw portions 874 extending from one wall portion toward the other wall portion at the open side end portion of the long main body portion 871, and a resin mold for forming the claw portions 874 can be removed. and a circular projecting portion 876 projecting in parallel with the axial direction of the support hole 872 from near the other end of the long body portion 871 in the longitudinal direction.

The long body portion 871 is a portion where the electric wiring guided to the open side portion through the wiring arrangement hole 873 is arranged, and has a constricted portion 871a having a reduced width length in the intermediate portion thereof. The electric wiring is arranged along the longitudinal direction of the elongated body portion 871 and guided to the outside from the other end portion (the end portion opposite to the side where the support hole 872 is formed) in the elongated direction.

The constricted portion 871a functions as a portion that loosely sandwiches the electrical wiring arranged on the open side of the long body portion 871 to the extent that disconnection does not occur, and prevents the arrangement of the electrical wiring from being excessively shifted. The narrowed portion 871a can prevent the electrical wiring arranged on the open side portion of the long main body portion 871 from being displaced beyond the narrowed portion 871a.

The support hole 872 is formed with a size that allows the support protrusion 829 of the vertical slide member 820 (see FIG. 79) to be inserted thereinto, so that the wiring arm member 870 is rotatably supported by the vertical slide portion 820 .

The wiring arrangement hole 873 is a through hole through which the electric wiring arranged on the wiring arm member 870 passes when passing over to the vertical slide member 820 . In the present embodiment, since the wire placement hole 873 is arranged close to the support hole 872, the positional deviation amount of the wire placement hole 873 when the wire arm member 870 rotates can be reduced. As a result, the load applied to the electrical wiring due to the rotation of the wiring arm member 870 can be reduced.

The claw portion 874 prevents the electrical wiring arranged in a mode of being housed in the open portion side of the long main body portion 871 from falling off from the long main body portion 871 . In addition, since the through-hole 875 with a minimum area secures the space for extracting the resin mold required for forming the claw portion 874, the electrical wiring can It is possible to prevent it from slipping out from the side (the side where the through hole 875 is formed in this embodiment).

The circular projecting portion 876 is formed with an outer diameter and projecting length that can be placed in the guide recess 886 of the wiring guide portion 880 (see FIG. 79). In this embodiment, the guide recess 886 of the wire guide portion 880 is designed from the viewpoint of appropriately causing the displacement of the wire arm member 870 .

As shown in FIG. 79, the wiring guide member 880 comprises a prevention plate 881 for preventing the wiring arm member 870 from falling off from the guide recess 886, and the prevention plate 881 is fastened and fixed to form an internal path. and a passage forming member 882 that is fastened and secured to the base member 810 .

As shown in FIG. 85, the path forming member 882 is formed in the shape of a box with one side open, and a prevention plate 881 is fastened and fixed to the open portion so that the path forming member 882 is opened to the rear side at a vertically spaced position. A path through the upper opening 883 and the lower opening 884 is formed.

That is, the path forming member 882 has a wall portion 882a projecting to one side at the edge, and an upper opening portion 883 that forms an upper opening portion of the path by missing the wall portion 882a, and the lower end of the path forming member 882. A lower opening portion 884 drilled in the wall portion 882a with a size that enables insertion of a connector of an electrical wiring, and a portion extending from the wall portion 882a toward the upper opening portion 883 within a range not overlapping the prevention plate 881 when viewed in the left-right direction. An extension part 885 that extends, a guide recess 886 that is recessed in a long groove shape in a range that does not overlap with the extension part 885 when viewed in the left-right direction, and a lower edge of the guide recess 886 A columnar projecting portion 887 is provided so as to protrude on the side of the prevention plate 881 , and into which a fastening screw inserted through the prevention plate 881 is screwed into a female screw formed at the tip.

A space in which the vertical slide member 820 can be displaced in the vertical direction is formed on the back side of the path forming member 882, and the horizontal slide member 840, which is displaced in the horizontal direction along with the displacement, has a wall portion 882a that is closest to the front side. At the position where it is arranged (the position near the lower end of displacement), it enters the rear side of the wall portion 882a (see FIG. 86(a)).

That is, the lateral slide member 840 is arranged on the rear side of the wiring guide member 880 forming the route along which the electric wiring is guided at a position near the lower end of displacement. As a result, it is possible to prevent the electrical wiring from coming into contact with or rubbing against the horizontal sliding member 840 while allowing the electrical wiring and the horizontal sliding member 840 to overlap each other in the front view.

In the assembled state, the wiring arm member 870 is guided along the path of the wiring guide member 880 through the upper opening 883 . and is regulated by the prevention plate 881 . Furthermore, the widthwise length of the path of the wiring guide member 880 is designed to be shorter than the sum of the widthwise lengths of the long main body portion 871 of the wiring arm member 870 and the circular projecting portion 876 . As a result, it is possible to prevent the circular protrusion 876 of the wiring arm member 870 from falling out of the guide recess 886 in the assembled state.

The lower open portion 884 functions as a wire through hole through which an electrical wire arranged so as to be wound around the columnar projecting portion 887 is passed to the rear side.

The guide recess 886 includes a front vertical recess 886a extending vertically upward from the lower end, a rear vertical recess 886b extending vertically downward from the upper end, and a connecting recess 886c connecting the lower end of the rear vertical recess 886b and the upper end of the front vertical recess 886a. and

The columnar projecting portion 887 has a role of a restricting portion that restricts the displacement of the electrical wiring and a role of a fastening portion for fixing the prevention plate 881 to the path forming member 882 .

With reference to FIGS. 86 to 89, the displacement mode of displacement/rotation unit 800 will be described.
FIGS. 86 to 89 show how the displacing/rotating unit 800 changes state from the waiting state for presentation to the upper end state for presentation in chronological order.

86(a) is a side view of the displacement/rotation unit 800 as viewed in the direction of arrow L in FIG. 77, and FIG. 86(b) is a sectional view of the displacement/rotation unit 800 taken along line LXXXVIb-LXXXVIb of FIG. 86(a). 87(a) is a side view of the displacement/rotation unit 800 as viewed in the direction of arrow L in FIG. 77, and FIG. 87(b) is a side view of the displacement/rotation unit 800 along line LXXXVIIb-LXXXVIIb of FIG. 87(a). 88(a) is a side view of the displacement/rotation unit 800 viewed in the direction of arrow L in FIG. 77, and FIG. 88(b) is a displacement along line LXXXVIIIb-LXXXVIIIb in FIG. 88(a). FIG. 89(a) is a cross-sectional view of the rotation unit 800, FIG. 89(a) is a side view of the displacement/rotation unit 800 viewed in the direction of arrow L in FIG. 77, and FIG. 89(b) is LXXXIXb-LXXXIXb in FIG. 89(a). 8 is a cross-sectional view of the displacement rotation unit 800 along the line; FIG.

In FIG. 86, the displacement and rotation unit 800 is shown in a waiting state for effect. In FIG. 88, the vertical slide member 820 is arranged at an intermediate position between the middle right end state and the upper end state of the effect, and the horizontal slide member 840 is arranged between the middle right end state and the upper end state of the effect. In FIG. 89, the upper end state of the production of the displacement rotation unit 800 is shown.

In FIGS. 86(a), 87(a), 88(a) and 89(a), for ease of understanding, the wire guide member 880 includes a wall portion 882a, a guide recess 886 and a cylindrical projecting portion. The wiring arm member 870 and the horizontal slide member 840 can be visually recognized by omitting the illustration of the other shaped portions while the outer shape of the portion 887 is shown in imaginary lines. In addition, by partially breaking the shape portion near the upper end of the base plate 810, the vertical slide member 820 is prevented from being hidden during vertical displacement.

In FIGS. 86(b), 87(b), 88(b) and 89(b), the shape line of the transmission guide portion 813 of the base member 810 is illustrated by imaginary lines. A circular imaginary line along the outer shape of the body plate member 841 is shown for the purpose of showing only the horizontal displacement width.

86 to 89, imaginary lines illustrate how the electrical wiring DK2 connected to the drive motor MT5 is displaced according to the state change of the displacement/rotation unit 800. FIG. The electric wiring DK2 is guided into the wiring guide member 880 from the lower opening 884 (see FIG. 85) of the wiring guide member 880, passes through the wiring arm member 870, and then reaches the wall portion 822 of the vertical slide member 820. It is guided through the enclosed space to the lateral slide member 840, the details of the displacement of which will be described later.

The displacement/rotation unit 800 is configured such that the vertical slide member 820 can be vertically reciprocated. First, the upward displacement of the vertical slide member 820 and the horizontal slide member 840 will be described.

In this embodiment, the vertical slide member 820 is arranged at the lower end position in the vertical direction (see FIG. 86). In the effect standby state, the plate portion 825a to be detected of the vertical slide member 820 is arranged in the detection groove of the lower detection sensor SC9, so that the displacing rotation unit 800 is in the effect standby state by the output of the lower detection sensor SC9. The MPU 221 (see FIG. 4) can determine that.

In addition, in the performance standby state, the horizontal slide member 840 is arranged at the left end (left and right outer ends) of the displacement path, while the lower end side of the wiring arm member 870 is arranged at the front side. That is, by arranging the wiring arm member 870 on the front side so as to retreat from the displacement trajectory of the horizontal slide member 840, the horizontal displacement of the horizontal slide member 840 is prevented from being restricted by the horizontal position of the wiring arm member 870. can do. Therefore, the lateral slide member 840 can be displaced fully to the left and right outer sides.

The state in which the driving motor MT4 is driven and controlled in the direction of upwardly displacing the vertical slide member 820 from the effect standby state, and the detection plate portion 825a is arranged in the upper detection sensor SC8 corresponds to the middle right end state (see FIG. 87). ). Therefore, the MPU 221 (see FIG. 4) can determine that the displacing/rotating unit 800 is in the middle right end state from the output of the upper detection sensor SC8.

In the intermediate right end state, while the horizontal slide member 840 is displaced upward and to the right from the effect standby state, the wiring arm member 870 is only displaced upward and the posture is maintained.

84) of the wiring arm member 870 is still arranged in the front vertical recess 886a of the guide recess 886, the wiring arm member 870 is supported as a support point. The distance in the longitudinal direction between the projecting portion 829 and the circular projecting portion 876 (see FIG. 84) of the wiring arm member 870 is maintained from the effect standby state.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the lateral slide member 840 is displaced to the right along with the upward displacement of the vertical slide member 820 from the effect standby state to the middle right end state without changing the posture of the wiring arm member 870. be. As a result, it is possible to avoid a collision between the members due to displacement timing deviation, which tends to occur when both the lateral slide member 840 and the wiring arm member 870 are displaced.

As shown in FIGS. 86(b) and 87(b), as the vertical slide member 820 is displaced upward, the horizontal slide member 840 is displaced in the horizontal direction. In this displacement, the direction of displacement is switched along the shape of the transmission guide portion 813 , but the displacement in the left-right direction exceeds the lateral width of the transmission guide portion 813 .

This is because the displacement of the lateral slide member 840 is transmitted via the two-stage pinion 861 . That is, it is the rack member 862 of the transmission means 860 that is guided by the transmission guide portion 813, and the gear portion 862a of the rack member 862 and the rack gear portion 843 of the lateral slide member 840 are connected to the two-stage pinion 861. combined. Therefore, the ratio of the pitch circle radii of the two-stage pinion 861 corresponds to the ratio of the displacement width of the rack member 862 and the displacement width of the lateral slide member 864 .

In this embodiment, the ratio of the pitch circle radius of the small diameter pinion 861a and the pitch circle radius of the large diameter pinion 861b of the two-stage pinion 861 (see FIG. 80) is 9:16. is multiplied by a constant (that is, 16/9=approximately 1.78).

As shown in FIG. 88(b), in the intermediate left end state, the horizontal slide member 840 is not displaced to the right and left outwards as much as in the effect waiting state. In other words, the horizontal slide member 840 is not displaced to the position where it overlaps the wiring arm member 870 when viewed in the front-rear direction.

In such an arrangement, as shown in FIG. 88(a), the posture of the wiring arm member 870 changes. That is, in the process from the midway right end state to the midway left end state, the circular projecting portion 876 (see FIG. 84) of the wiring arm member 870 is connected to the connecting recess 886c formed on the rear side of the front vertical recess of the guide recess 886. The distance in the longitudinal direction between the supporting projection 829 as a supporting point of the wiring arm member 870 and the circular projecting portion 876 (see FIG. 84) of the wiring arm member 870 is shortened compared to the effect standby state.

Therefore, in this embodiment, the posture of the wiring arm member 870 is changed after the horizontal slide member 840 does not overlap the wiring arm member 870 when viewed in the front-rear direction. In the downward displacement, the reverse is established (after the wiring arm member 870 does not change its posture, the lateral slide member 840 is arranged at a position overlapping the wiring arm member 870 when viewed in the front-rear direction).

As a result, even if there is a deviation between the displacement timing of the lateral slide member 840 and the displacement timing of the wiring arm member 870, the lateral slide member 840 and the wiring arm member 870 can be prevented from colliding with each other.

The wiring arm member 870 is arranged at the left end (outer end in the left-right direction) of the displacement/rotation unit 800, and displacement is limited to up-and-down displacement and posture change in the front-rear direction. That is, regardless of the state of the displacing/rotating unit 800, the wiring arm member 870 can be continuously arranged at the left and right outer ends where the player is unlikely to notice, so that the wiring arm member 870 and the wiring arm member 870 guide the wiring arm member 870. It is possible to avoid the electric wiring DK2 from entering the field of view of the player.

As shown in FIGS. 89(a) and 89(b), during the period until the displacing/rotating unit 800 reaches the effect upper end state, the circular projecting portion 876 (see FIG. 84) of the wiring arm member 870 is A support protrusion 829 as a support point for the wiring arm member 870 and a circular protrusion 876 of the wiring arm member 870 ( 84) is maintained at a minimum.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the wiring arm member 870 configured to be able to change its posture as the vertical slide member 820 is displaced vertically is used to arrange the electric wiring DK2 at different front and rear positions corresponding to the vertical position. By constructing such a structure, there is an advantageous effect that a space for arranging the constituent members can be secured.

For example, when the electrical wiring DK2 is arranged at a rearward position, lateral displacement of the lateral slide member 840 is restricted. Specifically, in order to avoid contact with the electrical wiring DK2, the horizontal slide member 840 is set to the right side (left and right inner side) in the waiting state for the effect. In this embodiment, since the injection device 400 (see FIG. 6) is arranged at the right side (left and right inner side) of the horizontal slide member 840, the size of the displacement/rotation unit 800 is reduced in order to avoid contact. There is a possibility that it will be necessary to deal with That is, the degree of freedom in designing the displacement/rotation unit 800 is reduced.

Further, for example, when the electric wiring DK2 is arranged at a position closer to the front, while the horizontal displacement of the horizontal slide member 840 can be sufficiently ensured, the game board 13 arranged on the front side of the displacement/rotation unit 800 can be displaced. The degree of freedom in arranging the constituent members on the back side of the is lowered.

In this embodiment, since the displacement/rotation unit 800 is arranged symmetrically, in order to drive the electric accessory 640a (see FIG. 2) of the second prize winning port 640 arranged in the right side area of the game board 13. The degree of freedom in designing the configuration of the solenoid, etc., tends to be low.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the wiring arm member 870 is configured to displace the electrical wiring DK2 in the front-rear direction, thereby avoiding the limitation of the lateral displacement of the lateral slide member 840, thereby allowing the game to be played. It is possible to avoid lowering the degree of freedom in arranging the constituent members on the back side of the board 13 .

That is, at the lower end position where the horizontal slide member 840 is to be retracted to the right and left outer sides, the lower end of the wiring arm member 870 is arranged forward, so that the electrical wiring DK2 is arranged in front of the horizontal slide member 840, and the horizontal slide member 840 is moved forward. is avoided from being limited by the electrical wiring DK2.

In addition, the horizontal slide member 840 is displaced inward to the left and right, and in the upper position where the second winning hole 640 (see FIG. 2) is desired to be arranged, the lower end portion of the wiring arm member 870 is arranged rearward, thereby The DK2 is placed closer to the back, leaving a space on the front side. As a result, it is possible to improve the degree of freedom in arranging members arranged on the game board 13 as components such as solenoids for driving the electric accessory 640a (see FIG. 2) of the second prize winning opening 640. FIG.

State changes of the electric wiring DK2 in the state changes shown in FIGS. 86 to 89 will be described. The change in the state of the electric wiring DK2 here means a change in the winding state of the electric wiring DK2 in the state where the electric wiring DK2 is wound around the pillar.

In the electrical wiring DK2, the upper portion of the lower winding portion DK2b (the side close to the wiring arm member 870) exclusively extends vertically and is not preferred to be curved. In particular, during the downward displacement, it is necessary to slide the electrical wiring DK2 into the front side of the cylindrical projecting portion 887 (see FIG. 86(a)). A higher value is preferred.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, a cable tube made of resin is wound around the upper portion of the lower winding portion DK2b so that the behavior is such that the rigidity is higher than that of the portion that undergoes winding displacement.

In the state shown in FIG. 89(a), the cable tube is arranged between the wall portion 882a and the electrical wiring DK2, thereby avoiding friction between the electrical wiring DK2 and the wall portion 882a. there is

In addition, since the opening direction of the lower end of the wiring arm member 870 is configured to face vertically downward, the displacement direction of the electric wiring DK2 at the start of downward displacement can be directed vertically downward. Thereby, it is possible to avoid unnecessary bending deformation of the electric wiring DK2.

As shown in FIGS. 86 to 89, the electrical wiring DK2 is arranged such that the upper winding portion DK2a is wound around the cylindrical protrusion 823 between the wiring arm member 870 and the lateral slide member 840, Winding portion DK2b is arranged to be wound around cylindrical projecting portion 887 below wiring arm member 870 .

Of the electrical wiring DK2, the upper winding portion DK2a arranged so as to be wound around the cylindrical protrusion 823 can be displaced in a radial direction along a plane orthogonal to the central axis of the cylindrical protrusion 823. configured to

Of the electrical wiring DK2, the lower winding portion DK2b arranged so as to be wound around the cylindrical projecting portion 887 is displaced in a radial direction along a plane perpendicular to the central axis of the cylindrical projecting portion 887. configured as possible.

That is, the plane in which the electrical wiring DK2 is displaced between the wiring arm member 870 and the lateral slide member 840 is configured to be different from the plane in which the electrical wiring DK2 is displaced below the wiring arm member 870 . In this embodiment, the planes are perpendicular to each other, and the planes in which the electrical wiring DK2 is displaced between the wiring arm member 870 and the lateral slide member 840 are the first omitted portion 824a, the second omitted portion 824b, and the wiring arrangement hole. 873.

Displacement of the electrical wiring DK2 is suppressed by sandwiching the portion of the wiring arm member 870 that is disposed inside the long main body portion 871 between the constricted portions 871a as described above. Therefore, relative displacement of the electrical wiring DK2 with respect to the wiring arm member 870 is suppressed.

Thus, in the present embodiment, the displacement required for the electric wire DK2 due to the change in the state of the displacement/rotation unit 800 is completed independently in the upper winding portion DK2a and the lower winding portion DK2b. Therefore, they will be described separately below.

First, displacement of the upper winding portion DK2a will be described. The upper winding portion DK2a includes a portion that is wound counterclockwise around the columnar protrusion 823 from a portion that passes through the wiring arrangement hole 873 of the wiring arm member 870 to the right side, and is on the left side of the wiring guide member 844. It means the part up to the point guided by the tip.

The upper winding portion DK2a is configured to be displaceable in the radial direction around the center of the cylindrical protrusion 823 with the space surrounded by the wall portion 822 as a limit, and is in the radially widest production standby state (see FIG. 86(b)). , a wall portion 822 is formed at a position (or a position with a slight gap) along the arrangement of the electric wiring DK2 arranged without load. As a result, the load applied from the wall portion 822 to the electrical wiring DK2 can be reduced in the presentation standby state.

When the horizontal slide member 840 is displaced to the right side from the production standby state, the side guided by the wiring guide member 844 is displaced to the right side, thereby pulling the upper winding portion DK2a and moving it radially inward about the columnar protrusion 823. The displacement length of the horizontal slide member 840 is complemented by the surplus length generated by the displacement of the upper winding portion DK2a. Thereby, it is possible to avoid applying a tensile force to the electric wiring DK2.

On the other hand, when the lateral slide member 840 is displaced leftward, the side guided by the wiring guide member 844 is displaced leftward, thereby pushing the upper winding portion DK2a and winding it radially outward around the cylindrical protrusion 823. The portion DK2a is displaced. At this time, a guide piece 844a is protruded from the left end of the wire guide member 844 and inclined downward toward the left, so that the upper winding portion DK2a moves outward (between the vertical slide member 820 and the wire guide member 844). ) can be prevented from protruding upward), and the upper winding portion DK2a can be appropriately pushed in along the shape of the wall portion 822.

Next, displacement of the lower winding portion DK2b will be described. The lower winding portion DK2b is wound clockwise around the columnar projecting portion 887 from a portion that hangs downward from the wiring arm member 870 when viewed from the left side (viewed from the outside of the left and right sides). 88 (see FIG. 85).

The lower winding portion DK2b is configured to be displaceable in the radial direction around the center of the columnar projecting portion 887 with the space surrounded by the wall portion 882a as the limit, and the radially widest effect standby state (see FIG. 86(a)). ), a wall portion 882a is formed at a position (or a position with a slight gap) along the arrangement of the electric wiring DK2 arranged without load. As a result, the load applied from the wall portion 882a to the electrical wiring DK2 can be reduced in the presentation standby state.

When the wiring arm member 870 is displaced upward due to the upward displacement of the vertical slide member 820 from the effect standby state, the side guided by the wiring arm member 870 is displaced upward, thereby pulling the lower winding portion DK2b upward. , the displacement length of the wiring arm member 870 is complemented by the surplus length generated by the displacement of the lower winding portion DK2b inward in the radial direction centering on the columnar projecting portion 887 . Thereby, it is possible to avoid applying a tensile force to the electric wiring DK2.

On the other hand, when the wiring arm member 870 is displaced downward, the side arranged on the wiring arm member 870 is displaced downward, so that the lower winding portion DK2b is pushed downward in the radial direction around the columnar projecting portion 887. The side winding portion DK2b is displaced. At this time, the lower end portion of the wiring arm member 870 is opened in the direction of inclination toward the front side as it goes downward, so that the lower winding portion DK2b is positioned between the cylindrical projecting portion 887 and the wall portion 882a (a cylindrical portion). (above the projecting portion 887) can be prevented, and the lower winding portion DK2b can be appropriately pushed in along the shape of the wall portion 882a.

In this embodiment, the space in which the lower winding portion DK2b is arranged is arranged below the position of the lower end of the displacement range of the lateral slide member 840. As shown in FIG. As a result, it is possible to prevent the size of the space in which the lower winding portion DK2b is radially displaced from being restricted by the arrangement of the horizontal slide member 840. See) can be displaced by using the full front-to-rear width.

Accordingly, since a large space for accommodating the lower winding portion DK2b can be secured below the wiring arm member 870, the length of the lower winding portion DK2b can be sufficiently increased, and the wiring arm member 870 can be The allowable vertical displacement amount can be lengthened.

90 is an exploded front perspective view of the game board 13, and FIG. 91 is an exploded rear perspective view of the game board 13. FIG. As shown in FIGS. 90 and 91, the game board 13 includes a center frame 86 disposed on the front side of a window 60a formed in the base plate 60, and a plurality of flow channels whose front sides are opened from resin members. and a spherical flow down unit 150 formed in a channel shape and arranged in the lower part of the back side of the base plate 60 .

The ball flow down unit 150 is formed so as to be able to receive the ball that has flowed down the flow path lower end LB1 of the game ball entering the second prize winning port 640 in the vicinity of the upper end portion of the fixed plate portion 151 fastened and fixed to the base plate 60. A first receiving channel 152 and a second receiving channel which is an elongated box-shaped member with an open front side and is fastened and fixed to the fixed plate portion 151 from the back side in a manner connected to the downstream side of the receiving channel 151 . It has a channel member 153 and a plurality of ridges 154 projecting inward from the inner side portions of the left and right walls of the second receiving channel member 153 in a direction perpendicular to the flowing direction of the ball.

The plurality of ridges 154 are alternately arranged on the left and right sides of the left and right wall portions with an interval approximately equal to the diameter of a sphere. As a result, it is possible to decelerate the flow of the balls flowing down the second receiving channel member 153 .

Functions of the first receiving channel 152 and the second receiving channel member 153 will be described. The first receiving channel 152 and the second receiving channel member 153 have a function of guiding a game ball that has entered the second winning port 640 to a ball discharge channel (not shown), There is a function to improve the production effect by allowing the player to visually recognize the later game balls. Note that FIG. 2 will be referred to as needed in the following description.

The second winning hole 640 is provided with a detection sensor for ball passage detection near the lower edge shown in FIG. As a result, the payout of prize balls and the pending display on the third symbol display device 81 can be executed immediately, and a comfortable game can be provided to the player. Even if the player does not see the ball entering the second winning hole 640, the player can notice the ball entering the second winning hole 640 by visually recognizing the ball flowing down the first receiving channel 152. For example, it is possible to make it easy to notice a situation in which the payout is not performed due to a problem on the gaming machine side.

As will be described below, it is clear that the ball has entered the second winning port 640 by visually recognizing the ball flowing down the intermediate flow path LM1. , the timing of paying out the prize balls and the timing of the pending display may be delayed.

A game ball that enters the second winning hole 640 is placed inside the guide path DL1 in the left-right direction along which the ball deviating from the second winning hole 640 can be visually recognized in the front view. 27) flows down.

Like the guiding flow path DL1, the intermediate flow path LM1 is formed so as to be able to guide the sphere vertically downward while displacing the sphere in a zigzag pattern to the left and right. That is, since the ball flowing down the intermediate flow path LM1 and the ball flowing down the guide flow path DL1 appear to flow in the same way, the ball in the right path of the third symbol display device 81 during a right-handed game , it is possible to make it difficult to determine whether the ball is flowing down the intermediate flow path LM1 or the guide flow path DL1.

Here, the information as to which path the ball is flowing down in a right-handed game is information directly linked to the profit of the player, and the number of nails (not shown) implanted in the base plate 60. This is a portion where individual differences of the pachinko machine 10 occur depending on the state.

In this embodiment, the meat portion of the base plate 60 is left near the through gate 67, and the ball before passing through the through gate 67 collides with this position, and the ball before entering the second winning hole 640 Since the nail that the ball collides with is planted, it depends on each pachinko machine 10 whether the ball tends to flow down the middle flow path LM1 or the guide flow path DL1 during a right-handed game. different.

A ball that does not enter the second winning hole 640 during the probability change or the time saving during the right-handed game flows down the guide route DL1, unless it enters the general winning hole 63 arranged on the downstream side. The ball is discharged from the game area through the out port 71 and does not benefit the player (it becomes a useless ball).

From here, whether or not the ball enters the second winning hole 640 and whether or not the ball flows down the guide path DL1 are uniquely related. The degree of freedom of the target position is higher when focusing on the guide route DL1 than when focusing only on the second winning hole 640, because the guide route DL1 extends in the vertical direction. Clear.

Therefore, some players check the frequency of balls flowing down the guidance path DL1, and calculate the frequency of balls entering the second winning hole 640, the frequency of waste balls in right-handed games, and the like. It is expected that they will consider whether to continue the game or not.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, it is possible to make it difficult to distinguish between a ball flowing down the guide path DL1 and a ball entering the second winning hole 640 and flowing down the intermediate flow path LM1. This makes it seem as if the frequency of entering the second winning hole 640 is high, and encourages the continuation of the game.

On the other hand, the ball flowing down the intermediate flow path LM1 has already entered the second winning hole 640 and has been ejected from the game area. If the ball falls down to a position overlapping with , it is difficult to distinguish it from a ball that can actually enter the specific winning hole 65a, which may interfere with the game.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, by causing the ball to flow down to the left and right inside through the first receiving channel 152 above the specific winning opening 65a, it is possible to prevent the ball from reaching a position overlapping the specific winning opening 65a in a front view. (See Figure 2). As a result, it is possible to easily distinguish between a ball that can actually enter the specific winning opening 65a and a ball that has already entered the second winning opening 640 and cannot enter the specific winning opening 65a. .

The first receiving flow path 152 passes from the right side of the display area of the third pattern display device 81 (see FIG. 7) when viewed from the front, passes near the lower edge of the display area of the third pattern display device 81 when viewed from the front, and reaches the display area. Let the ball flow down to the left and right center position side. That is, the ball guided to the first receiving flow path 152 enters the field of view of the player who pays attention to the display of the third symbol display device 81, so the player is paying attention to the display of the third symbol display device 81. , the player who does not pay attention to the right-handed path can be made to recognize whether or not the ball has entered the second winning hole 640 .

As a result, the player can recognize whether or not the ball has entered the second winning hole 640 without moving the field of view while paying attention to the third symbol display device 81 . Therefore, when the eye is averted from the third pattern display device 81 for viewing the second prize winning opening 640, the important display is executed, and it is possible to avoid the occurrence of the situation where the player misses the display, and the game can be played comfortably. can be provided.

The ball flowing down the second receiving flow channel member 153 flows down diagonally leftward and downward on the right side of the first winning opening 64 in a front view. Since this ball is decelerated by the ridges 154, the staying time of the falling ball can be extended. As a result, it is possible to easily increase the number of game balls visually recognized in the game area when viewed from the front.

Further, by securing a long lateral width of the flow-down path of the ball, the line of sight directed to the display area of the third pattern display device 81 and the flow-down path of the second receiving flow path member 153 are likely to intersect. As a result, the ball flowing down the inside of the second receiving channel member 153 can easily enter the field of view of the player.

92 and 93 are exploded front perspective views of the center frame 86, the light guide plate effecting means 160 and the decorating means 170, and FIGS. 94 and 95 are exploded views of the center frame 86, the light guide plate effecting means 160 and the decorating means 170. It is a rear perspective view.

As shown in FIGS. 92 to 95, the light guide plate rendering means 160 is fastened and fixed to the light guide plate 161 and the center frame 86 from the back side, and is configured to be able to contact the front side and the top side of the light guide plate 161. An upper supporting member 162 made of an impermeable resin material for positioning the light guide plate 161, and a center frame 86 made of a light transmissive resin material to press the lower side of the light guide plate 161 from the rear side. a lower support member 163 that can be fastened and fixed; a spherical flow path forming member 164 that is fastened and fixed to the lower support member 163 and is made of a light-transmitting resin material to form a spherical flow path; and a plurality of left and right side support members 165 which are configured to be capable of being fastened and fixed to the center frame 86 in such a manner as to press the left and right side portions of the light guide plate 161 from the rear side, and a plurality of left and right side support members 165 which are formed in a left and right long shape to support the upper side. A horizontal substrate unit 166 that is fastened and fixed to the center frame 86 in a state of extending to the front side of the center frame 86 through the upper side of the member 162, and a horizontal substrate unit 166 that is formed in a vertically elongated shape and extends from the front side of the center frame 86 to the center frame 86. and a vertical substrate unit 167 arranged along the left inner wall and fastened and fixed.

The decoration means 170 includes a first decoration member 171 made of a light-transmitting resin material and arranged in the left-right central position near the upper part of the center frame 86, and a left side of the first decoration member 171 made of a light-transmitting resin material. a second decorative member 174 arranged on the front side of the left frame portion of the center frame 86; and a third decorative member 177 arranged.

The first decorative member 171 includes a horizontally long rectangular central decorative member 172 that can be fastened and fixed to its central portion, a margin member 173 that is composed of a separate member as a margin portion such as a title representing the pachinko machine 10, Prepare.

As shown in FIG. E4, the first decorative member 171 has a laterally elongated groove portion 171a recessed on the back side. The horizontally elongated groove portion 171a is formed with a groove width that allows the electrical decoration substrate of the horizontal substrate unit 166 of the light guide plate rendering means 160 to be arranged.

The first decorative member 171 is arranged at a position slightly overlapping with the lower side of the opening 86a formed in the upper portion of the center frame 86 in the front-rear direction. In the present embodiment, the effect member 700 in the effect standby state is configured to be visible through the opening 86a (see FIG. 2).

Thus, in this embodiment, the front position of the third pattern display device 81 is closed by the light guide plate 161 inside the center frame 86, while the front position of the effect member 700 in the effect standby state is open. It is opened by the portion 86a. Therefore, it is possible for the player to visually recognize the light emission effect by the effect member 700 in the effect standby state without being shielded by the light guide plate 161 .

The relationship between the oblong groove portion 171a and the horizontal substrate unit 166 will be described with reference to FIG. 96 is a cross-sectional view of the game board 13 and the action unit 500 taken along line XCVI--XCVI in FIG. In addition, in FIG. 96, the vicinity of the oblong groove portion 171a is illustrated as an enlarged view separately. 92 to 95 will be referred to as appropriate in the description of FIG.

In this embodiment, light emitting means 166a such as LEDs are arranged on the front and back sides of the electrical board of the horizontal board unit 166, and light is emitted vertically along arrows D1a and D1b. 1 The light reaching the reflective shape portion 171b formed in a horizontally long wedge shape on the upper and lower sides of the horizontally long groove portion 171a on the back side of the decorative member 171 can be conspicuously recognized.

As a result, even when the arrangement of the light emitting means is concentrated on the horizontal board unit 166, the form of the light emitting effect (light emitting range or light emitting shape) visually recognized by the player depends on the forming range or forming shape of the reflective shape portion 171b. can be visually recognized differently.

In this embodiment, light emitting means 166a such as LEDs are arranged in a row on the upper surface of the horizontal substrate unit 166, and light emitting means 166a such as LEDs are arranged in a row on the lower surface. They are arranged in two horizontal rows, one row corresponding to the top and bottom and another row parallel to the row and formed on the back side. Among the rows in which the LEDs as the light emitting means 166a are arranged, the upper row and the lower front row are arranged inside the oblong groove 171a, and the lower rear row is arranged outside the oblong groove 171a.

With this configuration, the LEDs arranged in the row on the upper surface and the front row on the lower surface can irradiate light onto the reflective shape portion 171b, and the LEDs arranged in the rear row on the lower surface can irradiate light to another light-emitting target. Light can be applied.

In this embodiment, the light emitting means 166b such as LEDs arranged in the rear row on the bottom surface is arranged above the light guide plate 161, and the emitted LED light is incident from the edge of the light guide plate 161. FIG. That is, the light emitting means 166b such as LEDs arranged in the rear row on the lower surface of the horizontal substrate unit 166 are used to illuminate the light guide plate 161. FIG.

The upper support member 162 is arranged between the front and rear two rows of the LEDs arranged on the lower surface of the horizontal substrate unit 166 . Thus, the upper support member 162 can separate the light emitted from the front and rear LEDs.

The horizontal substrate unit 166 is arranged right above the upper edge of the light guide plate 161, that is, near the upper edge of the display area of the third pattern display device 81 in front view. In other words, it is arranged at the boundary position between the display area and the game area when viewed from the front. As a result, it is possible to clearly separate the light that irradiates the display area side and the light that irradiates the game area side without irradiating the display area side.

The central decorative member 172 is arranged in the same front and rear positions as the reflective shape portion 171b, and has flat front and rear surfaces. As a result, even when light is emitted from the horizontal board unit 166, it is possible to avoid intense reflection of the light and maintain visibility.

In this embodiment, a pattern such as a star shape is drawn on the front surface of the central decorative member 172, and the number of star shapes indicates the type of performance of the pachinko machine 10 (for example, the type of spec, so-called another spec). It is configured so that By constructing the central decorative member 172 as a separate member from the first decorative member 171, when manufacturing the pachinko machine 10 with different types of performance, the pachinko machine 10 can be manufactured by replacing only the central decorative member 172.例文帳に追加Can be configured.

The blank member 173 is configured as a separate member from the first decorative member 171, and the front and rear surfaces of the blank member 173 have a shape different from the shape formed on the reflective shape portion 171b (in this embodiment, striped grooves). ) is formed, the appearance of the reflected light is different from that of the reflective shape portion 171b.

97 is a partially enlarged front view of the first decorative member 171 in the range XCVII of FIG. 2. FIG. In the present embodiment, when light is emitted in the vertical direction of the horizontal substrate unit 166 along the arrows D1a and D1b, the light that reaches the reflective shape portion 171b travels toward the front side by reflection and refraction, and shines. While the light that reaches the blank member 173 is not mainly reflected, it is configured so that most of the light is transmitted and proceeds as it is, so it is visually recognized slightly darker.

As a result, the shape of the blank member 173 can be visually recognized as a shadow while adopting a configuration in which the light emitted from the horizontal board unit 166 travels in the vertical direction. It can be visually recognized as if In other words, it is possible to visually recognize as if LEDs are arranged on the back side and a light emission effect is performed.

The second decorative member 174 includes a shielding member 175 which is a thin plate member (sheet-shaped member) with low permeability and is colored in an arbitrary manner, and the shielding member 175 is fixed to the back side of the second decorative member 174. . As a result, the rear side of the second decorative member 174 can be configured to be difficult to see.

As a result, the game area formed on the front side of the base plate 60 (especially the left side) and the formation area of the light guide plate 161 in front view (including the area overlapping the display area of the third pattern display device 81 in the front and rear). can be clearly separated. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the visibility of the balls flowing down the game area from being lowered by the light accompanying the performance of the light guide plate 161 and the light emitted from the third pattern display device 81 .

The third decorative member 177 has a plurality of hexagonal decorative patterns three-dimensionally formed on the front side, and a plurality of hexagonal-shaped portions displaced back and forth on the back side thereof. It has a plurality of three-dimensional decoration members 178 which are formed in a uniform manner.

Similarly to the third decorative member 177, the three-dimensional decorative member 178 is made of a light-transmitting resin material, and is arranged in the space arranged between the portion of the center frame 86 where the light guide plate 161 is arranged and the guide path DL1. be.

Thereby, it is possible to perform a three-dimensionally visible light effect instead of a planarly visible light effect between the portion where the light guide plate 161 is arranged and the guide route DL1. That is, when viewed from the front, it is possible to execute a light emitting effect with depth.

For example, when the three-dimensional decoration member 178 is irradiated with light from the back side, depending on which position of the three-dimensional decoration member 178 in the front view is irradiated with the light, which position of the three-dimensional decoration member 178 in the front-rear direction is It changes whether it becomes brighter. Therefore, it is possible to perform a light effect in which the front side is illuminated and the back side is illuminated from the player's point of view.

In this embodiment, the third pattern display device 81, the front side light emitting means 852a of the displacement rotation unit 800, etc. (see FIG. 81) are assumed as means for irradiating the three-dimensional decoration member 178 with light from the back side. , the light emission position can be changed. Therefore, compared with the case where light is emitted toward the three-dimensional decorative member 178 from light emitting means such as LEDs that are fixedly arranged, it is possible to easily increase the types of light effects.

Further, for example, when the three-dimensional decoration member 178 is irradiated with light from the left-right direction or the top-bottom direction, the position of the three-dimensional decoration member 178 in the front-rear direction depends on the position of the three-dimensional decoration member 178 in the front view where the light is irradiated. which position is brighter changes. Therefore, it is possible to perform a light effect in which the front side is illuminated and the back side is illuminated from the player's point of view.

In this embodiment, the first light irradiation device 330 of the firing effect unit 300 is assumed as means for irradiating the three-dimensional decorative member 178 with light from the left and right directions (see FIG. 27). Due to its arrangement, the first light irradiation device 330 functions to block at least part of the light directed toward the three-dimensional decorative member 178 among the light irradiated from the display area of the third pattern display device 81 .

As a result, it is possible to reduce the extent to which the form of light visually recognized through the three-dimensional decorative member 178 depends on the display effect form of the third pattern display device 81 . For example, when the color of the light emitted from the third pattern display device 81 is blue, even if the color of the light emitted from the first light irradiation device 330 is red, the game is played through the three-dimensional decoration member 178. It is possible to easily avoid the color of the light visually recognized by the person becoming purple (a color in which blue light and red light are mixed). That is, the light visually recognized through the three-dimensional decoration member 178 can be easily visually recognized independently of the display of the third pattern display device 81 .

A second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the first embodiment, the ball flowing down the ball flow unit 150 is configured to be visible from the front, and the entire ball is configured to flow down the same route. However, the ball flow unit of the second embodiment At 2150, the falling sphere is configured to flow down any of a plurality of paths. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

FIG. 98 is a front view of the game board 2013 in the second embodiment. In FIG. 98, an example of how the granular member 320 looks just after firing is illustrated. As shown in FIG. 98, the spherical flow downward unit 2150 is formed so as to be inclined downward from the lower end of the first receiving channel 152 toward the left, as a difference from the spherical flow downward unit 150 described in the first embodiment. A third receiving channel 2155 formed in a size that allows the ball to flow down is provided.

The third receiving channel 2155 is formed on the upstream side and has a lower inclination angle than the first receiving channel 152, and the lower end (left end) of the inclined portion 2155a is set on the left side of the first winning port 64 when viewed from the front. , and a discharge portion 2155b extending vertically downward in front view from the lower end (left side) of the inclined portion 2155a.

The flow speed of the balls flowing down the inclined portion 2155a is lower than the flow speed of the balls in the first receiving channel 152 due to the shallowness of the inclination angle. The ball flowing down the inclined portion 2155a is configured to be visible to the player, and the inclined portion 2155a is arranged near the lower edge of the light guide plate 161 when viewed from the front. Therefore, the ball flowing down the inclined portion 2155a can be kept in the player's field of vision for a long time.

As a result, the ball flowing down the inclined portion 2155a can enter the field of view of the player playing the game while viewing the third pattern display device 81 (see FIG. 12(a)) through the light guide plate 161. . In other words, it is possible to increase the attention to the ball flowing down the slope 2155a without causing discomfort.

Guidance of the ball to the inclined portion 2155a will be described. In this embodiment, the ball entering the second winning port 640 similarly flows down to the lower end of the first receiving channel 152, and at the lower end of the first receiving channel 152, along the second receiving channel member 153. The switching means switches between flowing down in the first direction D<b>21 and flowing down in the second direction D<b>22 along the third receiving channel 2155 .

In this embodiment, the flow resistance of the ball flowing through the second receiving channel member 153 is increased by the protrusion 154 (see FIG. 90) formed on the second receiving channel member 153 . Therefore, when the next ball reaches the lower end of the first receiving channel 152 while the ball is flowing down the second receiving channel member 153, the ball is guided to the third receiving channel 2155. .

Such a situation is likely to occur, for example, when a plurality of balls enter the second winning hole 640 in succession in a short period of time. Therefore, by visually recognizing the state of the balls flowing down the third receiving channel 2155, the player can understand that a plurality of balls have entered the second winning hole 640 in a row.

In addition, the aspect of a switching means is not limited at all. For example, the ball flow-down unit 2150 is provided with an opening/closing plate configured to be switchable between a state in which the ball is allowed to flow down in the first direction D21 and a state in which it is restricted using a driving means such as a solenoid. Alternatively, an electromagnet that can generate a magnetic force is disposed at the branch point between the first direction D21 and the second direction D22, and the generated magnetic force is used as a pulling force or a repulsive force to move the ball downward. The route may be switched.

According to these methods, it is possible not only to switch the flowing-down path of the ball to the first direction D21 or the second direction D22, but also to stop the ball or reverse the ball. Unlike the ball that flows down the game area, even if the flow path of the ball that enters the second winning hole 640 is changed, it does not affect the subsequent game results. It is possible to switch the flow path of

As described above, when switching the flow path of a ball in a device using electricity, the MPU 221 (see FIG. 4) can control whether the ball flows down in the first direction D21 or in the second direction D22. can. Therefore, the result of the lottery by the ball entering the second winning hole 640 can be associated with the switching of whether the ball flows down in the first direction D21 or in the second direction D22.

For example, if the switching means is controlled so that the ball flows down the third receiving channel 2155 in 60% of the cases where the lottery due to the ball entering the second prize winning port 640 is a jackpot, the third receiving channel It is possible to improve the player's sense of expectation for the big win, seeing the ball flowing down the 2155. - 特許庁

In this case, the player's line of sight is most likely to be gathered at the lower end position of the first receiving channel 152, which is the guide path to the third receiving channel 2155, and as a result, the discharge ball (game It can improve attention to the balls that have already been ejected from the area).

As described above, the ball flowing down the third receiving flow path 2155 is expected value of the lottery jackpot due to the ball entering the second prize winning port 640 when the frequency of the ball entering the second prize winning port 640 is high. is high.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, a detection sensor SC21 capable of detecting the passage of the ball is arranged in the middle of the discharge portion 2155b, and when the passage of the ball is determined, the granular member 320 is controlled to be shot. .

As described above, in order to shoot the granular member 320, it is necessary to change the state of the injection device 400 in advance from the presentation standby state (see FIG. 38) to the shooting standby state (FIG. 40). time consuming. On the other hand, at the timing when the ball enters the second winning hole 640, it is decided whether or not to execute the firing of the granular member 320, and it takes a certain amount of time for the ball to reach the ejection part 2155b. The injection device 400 is controlled to change its state by using this flow time.

As a result, it is possible to control the particulate member 320 to shoot at the same time when the detection sensor SC21 determines that the ball has passed. By controlling in this way, the granular member 320 is fired after a certain time delay expected for the ball to flow down the third receiving channel 2155 after entering the second winning hole 640. It is possible to make it easier to match the falling timing of the ball and the firing timing of the granular member 320, as compared with the case of controlling to .

For example, there is a case where the oil attached to the balls adheres to the first receiving channel 152, causing the falling speed of the balls to decrease. If controlled in this way, the granular member 320 will be launched before the ball reaches the third receiving flow path 2155, and there is a possibility that the rendering effect will be reduced.

On the other hand, at the same time when the detection sensor SC21 determines that the ball has passed, by controlling the granular member 320 to shoot, the player can see that the ball reaches the third receiving channel 2155. After concentrating the attention on the third receiving flow path 2155, the granular member 320 is fired to execute a powerful effect that spreads over the area of the light guide plate 161, thereby improving the effect of a series of effects. can.

The arrangement of the third receiving channel 2155 through which the balls flow down and the arrangement of the display area of the third pattern display device 81 (see FIG. 12(a)) visually recognized through the light guide plate 161 are partially different when viewed from the front. , the above-described series of effects can be visually recognized without requiring the player to change his line of sight.

It should be noted that control may also be combined so that the granular member 320 is not fired when the ball passes through the detection sensor SC21. For example, if a big win occurs when the granular member 320 is not fired, control may be performed to increase the possibility of the variable probability big win described above.

In this case, since it is possible to increase the number of types of effects after the ball is guided to the third receiving channel 2155, at the stage when the ball is guided to the third receiving channel 2155 It is possible to avoid that the attention of the

In addition, when the granular member 320 is not fired, it is possible to increase attention to the subsequent display effects on the third pattern display device 81 .

A detection sensor having a function similar to that of the detection sensor SC21 may be arranged at another location. For example, it may be placed at a location through which a ball entering the specific winning hole 65a can pass. In this case, an effect of shooting the granular member 320 can be executed at the timing when the ball that enters the specific winning hole 65a passes. In this case, the detection sensor SC21 may be arranged in a specific area where the profit given to the player becomes more advantageous as the game ball passes through.

A third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 99 and 100. FIG. In the first embodiment, the effect member 700 of the enlargement/reduction unit 600 is configured to be displaced in the radial direction so as to be symmetrical and discrete, but the effect member 3700 of the third embodiment , is configured to be able to form a section that is not left-right symmetrical in the expansion/reduction displacement in the radial direction. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

FIG. 99 is a front view of the scaling unit 3600 in the third embodiment. The difference from the first embodiment of the scaling unit 3600 is only in the rendering member 3700, and the main body member 601, the front cover member 610, the upper arm member 620, the lower arm member 630, and the transmission gear 650 have the same configuration. Therefore, the description is omitted.

FIG. 99 illustrates a state in which the shielding design member 760 of the effect member 3700 is arranged in the middle position (intermediate position) of the radial enlargement/reduction displacement. As shown in FIG. 99, this embodiment employs five shielding design members 760, which is the same as in the first embodiment. While the sheets are displaced radially to a similar length, the top one and the top right sheet are still in a collective arrangement (not radially displaced). A configuration for realizing this displacement will be described.

100 is a front view of rotating plate 3730. FIG. Rotating plate 3730 has the same configuration as rotating plate 730 described in the first embodiment, except that some guide holes 733 are changed to separate guide holes 3733 .

As shown in FIG. 100, the rotary plate 730 includes separate guide holes 3733 instead of the upper and upper right guide holes 733 in front view. The separate guide hole 3733 includes the above-described small-diameter arc portion 733a, large-diameter arc portion 733b, and an adjustment connecting portion 3733c that connects the small-diameter arc portion 733a and the large-diameter arc portion 733b.

The adjustment connection portion 3733c extends along the same arc shape from the connection portion with the large-diameter arc portion 733b to near the intermediate position, and on the opposite side of the large-diameter arc portion 733b (the guide hole 733 or (at a position close to the separate guide hole 3733) is formed so as to abruptly approach the small-diameter arc portion 733a side.

That is, in the displacement mode in which the telescopic displacement member 740 is displaced from the collective arrangement state (see FIG. 63), the telescopic displacement member 740 guided by the connecting portion 733c expands and displaces in the radial direction from an early stage, while the adjusting connecting portion 3733c is displaced. The expansion/contraction displacement member 740 guided in the radial direction does not expand while being guided in the same arc shape as the large-diameter arc portion 733b. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 99, the arrangement of the shielding design member 760 can be shifted. The effect caused by the misalignment of the shielding design member 760 will be described.

As shown in FIG. 99, by asymmetrically disposing the shielding design member 760, the center of gravity of the effect member 3700 can be shifted from the center in the horizontal direction or the center in the vertical direction. In particular, in the state shown in FIG. 99, since the shielding design member 760 arranged at the upper right position is still in the collective arrangement state, the center of gravity G31 of the effect member 3700 is shifted to the lower left position by that amount.

As a result, a load in the direction of correcting the deviation of the center of gravity G31, that is, a load in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front is applied to the effect member 3700 by its own weight. Due to this load, it is possible to cause the attitude of the effect member 3700 to change in the rotational direction about the longitudinal axis. can be displaced in a combination of directions.

As a result, a direction (that is, a , rotational direction).

In this embodiment, the connecting portion 733c and the adjusting connecting portion 3733c are different, and the guide hole 733 and the separate guide hole 3733 have the same shape. The arrangement of the portion 733b is the same between the guide hole 733 and the separate guide hole 3733. FIG.

Therefore, after the position of the center of gravity G31 is displaced in the state shown in FIG. 99, the shielding design member 760 is placed in a collective arrangement state or arranged at the end position of radial expansion displacement. Since they are arranged symmetrically, the center of gravity G31 returns to the horizontal center position and the vertical center position of the effect member 3700 again. As a result, the position of the center of gravity G31 is maintained in a displaced position, and the occurrence of problems can be prevented.

An example of effect using the return of the center of gravity G31 will be described. In the first embodiment, the vertical displacement and the radial displacement of the effect member 700 are not performed at the same time, but are performed separately. .

In the present embodiment, a contrivance is adopted to avoid collision with other structures, and the vertical displacement and radial displacement of the effect member 3700 are controlled so as to be executable at the same time. That is, from the state shown in FIG. 99, the shielding design member 760 can be expanded and displaced in the radial direction while the effect member 3700 is displaced downward.

In this case, in addition to the downward displacement of the effect member 3700 and the expansion displacement of the shielding design member 760 in the radial direction, the return of the center of gravity G31 of the effect member 3700 occurs. It is possible to cause a posture change in a direction opposite to the direction of rotation assumed from the state (counterclockwise when viewed from the front).

In this way, since rotational displacement in the forward and reverse directions can be added to the radial expansion displacement of the effect member 3700, a simple configuration specialized for expanding and contracting the shielding design member 760 in the radial direction is provided. while adopting, as a result, it is possible to make a complicated motion with a displacement in the rotational direction. As a result, the effect of the effect produced by the effect member 3700 can be improved.

A fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the first embodiment, the drive motor M1 is driven in the forward rotation direction from the effect standby state, and the linear motion member 410 and the transmission arm member 470 are simultaneously displaced. The shape of the grooved portion 462 of the rear transmission member 460 is changed, and the displacement of the transmission arm member 470, that is, the displacement of the lid member 480 is completed prior to the displacement of the linear motion member 410. FIG. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

FIG. 101 shows the output state of the detection sensor SC4, the arrangement of the linear motion member 410, the arrangement of the collision member 420, and the projection of the contact member 430 associated with the rotation of the front transmission member 440 and the rear transmission member 460 in the fourth embodiment. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing changes over time in the placement of the installation portion 432 and the placement of the cylindrical protrusion 472 of the transmission arm member 470;

Note that FIG. 101 does not describe the relative relationship between the change widths of the arrangement changes of the respective components, but shows the relative relationship of the timing at which the arrangement change occurs. Also, the change in the arrangement of the direct-acting member 410 corresponds to the change in the biasing force accumulated in the coil spring SP1.

As shown in FIG. 101, in the fourth embodiment, the displacement of the transmission arm member 470 is completed prior to the displacement of the linear motion member 410 and the collision member 420 . Therefore, since the downward displacement of the direct-acting member 410 and the collision member 420 is started in a state in which the lid member 480 is arranged at the displacement end position on the retreating side, the player can see without the lid member 480 blocking his line of sight. It is possible to visually recognize the displacement of the granular member accompanying the downward displacement of the collision member 420 (see FIGS. 12(a) and 38).

In this situation, by reciprocating the direct-acting member 410 between an angle of 66 degrees and an angle of 125 degrees shown in FIG.

In this embodiment, since the biasing force of the coil spring SP1 is strong, when the driving of the drive motor M1 is canceled, the linear motion member 410 and the collision member 420 are displaced upward by the biasing force of the coil spring SP1.

Therefore, by intermittently energizing the drive motor MT1, the linear motion member 410 can be reciprocated. This eliminates the need to switch the driving direction of the drive motor MT1, thereby facilitating control.

In addition, in such a manner that the granular member 320 is vibrated (micro-displaced) and visually recognized by the player, the load (fatigue) received by the torsion spring SP2 can be reduced compared to the case where the cover member 480 is displaced together. can be done.

Note that the manner in which the collision member 420 is displaced in order to vibrate (micro-displace) the granular member 320 is not limited to this. For example, vibration may be transmitted from another vibration device to the collision member 420 to cause the collision member 420 to vibrate. In this case, the other vibrating device is preferably arranged below the collision member 420 in the direction of displacement. As a result, it is possible to prevent other vibration devices from receiving a load when the collision member 420 is displaced by the biasing force of the coil spring SP1.

A fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the first embodiment, the drive motor M1 is driven in the forward rotation direction from the effect standby state, and the linear motion member 410 and the transmission arm member 470 are simultaneously displaced. The shape of the grooved portion 462 of the rear transmission member 460 is changed, and after the displacement of the direct-acting member 410 is completed, the displacement of the transmission arm member 470, that is, the displacement of the lid member 480 starts. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

FIG. 102 shows the output state of the detection sensor SC4, the arrangement of the linear motion member 410, the arrangement of the collision member 420, and the projection of the contact member 430 associated with the rotation of the front transmission member 440 and the rear transmission member 460 in the fifth embodiment. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing changes over time in the placement of the installation portion 432 and the placement of the cylindrical protrusion 472 of the transmission arm member 470;

Note that FIG. 102 does not describe the relative relationship between the variation widths of the layout changes of the respective components, but shows the relative relationship of the timing at which the layout changes occur. Also, the change in the arrangement of the direct-acting member 410 corresponds to the change in the biasing force accumulated in the coil spring SP1.

As shown in FIG. 102, in the fifth embodiment, the displacement of the transmission arm member 470 starts after the displacement of the linear motion member 410 and the collision member 420 is completed. Further, after firing the granular member 320, the displacement of the lid member 480 is completed before the granular member 320 reaches the impact member 420 (see near the angle of 290 degrees).

Therefore, at least part of the granular member 320 can be put on the upper side of the lid member 480 and retained. Although it is conceivable that the particulate member 320 collides with the lid member 480 and hinders the rotation of the lid member 480, in the present embodiment, the advancing/retracting portion 481 of the lid member 480 is formed in an arc shape centering on the rotation axis. Therefore, the load received from the granular member 320 can be directed toward the rotating shaft. As a result, it is possible to prevent the rotation of the lid member 480 from being hindered.

If the drive motor MT1 continues to rotate in the normal direction while the granular member 320 remains on the lid member 480, the transmission arm member 470 is displaced toward the retracted side (the smaller diameter side in FIG. 102), causing the granular member 320 to collide. It falls on member 420 .

On the other hand, at this timing, the contact between the collision member 420 and the linear motion member 410 is released, so that the load transmitted from the granular member 320 to the collision member 420 can be prevented from being transmitted to the linear motion member 410. .

Further, when the drive motor MT1 is rotationally driven in the reverse rotation direction from the firing standby state, if it is set to a high speed, the rising speed of the linear motion member 410 and the collision member 420 can be increased, and the granular member 320 can be fired.

In this case, since the lid member 480 is arranged at the displacement end position on the entrance side at the time of firing, the firing of the granular member 320 is inhibited at the left-right central portion where the projecting portion 482 is arranged, and the firing in the left-right direction is prevented. It can be made visible to become the owner.

That is, the direction in which the granular member 320 is ejected can be changed between the shooting mode when the drive motor MT1 is rotated in the forward direction and the shooting mode when the drive motor MT1 is rotated in the reverse direction. As a result, variations can be provided in the shooting direction of the granular member 320, and the performance effect can be improved.

A sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the first embodiment, the case where the first light irradiation device 330 and the second light irradiation device 340 are provided with flat substrates and irradiate light in the front-back direction and the left-right direction has been described. It has an electrical board on which the first light irradiation device 6330 and the second light irradiation device 6340 are bent. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

FIG. 103 is a cross-sectional view of the game board 13 and the launching unit 6300 in the sixth embodiment along the line corresponding to line XXVII-XXVII of FIG. That is, in FIG. 103, the game board 13 and the shooting unit 6300 are illustrated, and the illustration of the operation unit 500 is omitted. Also, the directions of light emitted from the first light irradiation device 6330 and the second light irradiation device 6340 are schematically illustrated by arrows.

As shown in FIG. 103, the first light irradiating device 6330 has a front end close to the front end of the electrical board 332 and a back end of the electrical board 332 . It has a second electrical decoration board 6334 that is tilted away from 332 .

The second electrical board 6334 has a light emitting means such as an LED arranged so as to be able to irradiate light from at least the front side surface. This light emitting means makes it easier to direct light to the partitioning member 310, and can improve the presentation effect of lighting the granular members 320 scattering in the internal space IE1 of the partitioning member 310. FIG.

In addition to the electrical board 342, the second light irradiating device 6340 is inclined in such a manner that the back side end is close to the back side end of the electrical board 342 and the front side end is away from the electrical board 342. A second electrical board 6344 is provided.

The second decorative board 6344 has a light emitting means such as an LED arranged so as to be able to irradiate light from at least the rear side surface. This light emitting means makes it easier to direct light to the effect member 700 of the enlargement/reduction unit 600, the displacement/rotation unit 800, and the like arranged on the back side of the emission unit 6300, thereby improving the effect of the light emission effect.

It should be noted that the arrangement of the electrical board is not limited to this. For example, only the second electrical boards 6334 and 6344 may be employed and the electrical boards 332 and 342 may be omitted, or other combinations may be employed. Further, the light emitting means may be arranged on the side where the light emitting means is not arranged in the second electrical board 6334, 6344, or the light may be irradiated from both sides.

In addition, for the purpose of obliquely irradiating light, a device in which the attitude of the light emitting means can be changed may be constructed without adopting the method of increasing the number of decorative boards. Also, light emitting means may be arranged at intersections of the electrical boards 332, 342 and the second electrical boards 6334, 6344 so as to emit light.

A board box A100 according to the seventh embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS. 104 to 120. FIG. First, with reference to FIGS. 104 to 107, a schematic configuration of the board box A100 will be described. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

104 is a rear view of the pachinko machine A10 in the seventh embodiment, FIG. 105 is a front perspective view of the board box A100 in the seventh embodiment, and FIG. 106 is a rear perspective view of the board box A100. 107(a) is a front view of the board box A100, and FIG. 107(b) is a side view of the board box A100.

Note that arrows F, B, arrows L, R, and arrows U, D in FIGS. 105 to 107 respectively indicate the front-rear direction, the left-right direction, and the up-down direction of the board box A100. It should be noted that the same applies to each of the following figures, so the description thereof will be omitted.

Also, the pachinko machine A10 in the seventh embodiment has the same configuration as the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment except for the board box A100. Therefore, other descriptions are omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 104 to 107, the board box A100 includes a box cover A200, a box base A300 whose opening is covered by the box cover A200, and the box cover A200 and the box base A300 unopenably connected (caulked structure). and a sub-cover A500 disposed at the end opposite to the sealing unit A400 of the box cover A200 and the box base A300 connected by the sealing unit A400, and a main control device A110 (see FIG. 112) is stored.

A rotating shaft A410 is formed in the sealing unit A400. The rotation axis A410 is a shaft for rotatably supporting the board box A100 on the back side of the inner frame 12 (see FIG. 120), and extends in the lateral direction (arrows U, D direction) and orthogonal to the longitudinal direction (directions of arrows L and R) of the board box A100 (box cover A200).

Further, the rotation axis A410 is positioned on one side in the longitudinal direction of the board box A100 (box cover A200) when viewed from the front (viewed in the direction of arrow B) (on the side opposite to the first connection wall A220 across a covering portion A270 described later). R direction side). Note that the rotation axis A410 may be arranged on the other longitudinal direction side (arrow L direction side) opposite to the one longitudinal direction side of the substrate box A100 (box cover A200).

A switch device A120 and a key device A130 are arranged (mounted) in the main controller A110. The main controller A110 is configured by further disposing (mounting) a switch device A120 and a key device A130 to the main controller 110 in the first embodiment. That is, the main control device A110 and the main control device 110 in the first embodiment have the same configuration except for the presence or absence of the switch device A120 and the key device A130. Therefore, other explanations are omitted.

The switch device A120 is a momentary push button that is operated (turned on) by pushing the operation part A122 from the initial position and turned off by releasing the push (the operation part A122 is returned to the initial position). It is configured as a switch and used for input to main controller A110. The switch device A120 and the key device A130 correspond to some of the various switches 208 (see FIG. 4) in the main controller A110 (main controller 110).

The switch device A120 is configured to generate a predetermined click feeling (change in pushing force) when the operating portion A122 is pushed to the operating position (on position). The operator can detect completion of input to device A110.
Therefore, it is effective when it is necessary to operate the operation unit A122 in a situation where the operation unit A122 cannot be visually recognized.

The key device A130 is configured such that the key A140 can be inserted and removed at the initial position (hereinafter referred to as the "off position"), and the inserted key A140 is rotated (right in this embodiment) to a predetermined position (hereinafter referred to as the "on position"). A key-operated selector switch (which is referred to as a "position") is operated (turned on) and is turned off by turning the key A140 (counterclockwise in this embodiment) to the off position (mode switch).

In addition, in this embodiment, the phase difference between the OFF position and the ON position is set to approximately 90 degrees. Further, the key device A130 allows the key A140 to be inserted and removed in the off position, while the key device A130 disables the removal of the key A140 in the on position.

Also, the function of the switch device A120 can be switched according to the ON/OFF state of the key device A130. For example, in this embodiment, when the key device A130 is turned off, the switch device A120 functions as a reset switch (RAM clear switch) for initializing the main control device A110 (executing RAM erasure). When the A130 is turned on, the switch device A120 functions as a setting change switch for changing the value of the winning probability in the lottery (hereinafter referred to as "setting change"), as will be described later. .

Here, as described above, since the substrate box A100 (the box cover A200 and the box base A300) is unopenably connected, in order to operate the main control device A110 (for example, the switch device A120 and the key device A130), , it is necessary to open the board box A100, which is troublesome.

On the other hand, according to the substrate box A100 of this embodiment, the openings A250 and A260 are formed in the box cover A200, and the switch device A120 and the key device A130 can be operated through these openings A250 and A260. That is, it is unnecessary to open the board box A100, and the labor can be reduced. Details will be described later.

Legs A121 and A131 (electrical connection terminals, see FIG. 114) are provided on the rear side of the switch device A120 and the key device A130 (the push direction side of the operation part A122, the insertion direction side of the key A140, and the arrow B direction side). The protruding legs A121 and A131 are inserted from the front side into holes opening in the main control device A110 (printed circuit board A119), and the portions protruding to the rear side are soldered to form the switch device A120 and the key device. A130 is arranged on the front side of main controller A110 (printed circuit board A119).

In this case, an external force applied to the switch device A120 and the key device A130 (for example, a force that displaces the operation unit A122 or the key A140 in a direction perpendicular to the pushing direction (insertion direction), a plane containing the arrows U and D and the arrows L and R When a force in a parallel direction is applied and tilted with respect to the main controller A110 (printed circuit board A119), the legs of one side (the side lifted from the printed circuit board A119 by tilting) of the switch device A120 and the key device A130 While a tensile force is applied to A121 and A131, a compressive force is applied to the legs A121 and A131 on the other side (the side pressed against the printed circuit board A119 due to tilting). As a result, the legs A121 and A131 may break or bend, the legs A121 and A131 may come out of the holes, and the solder may peel off, resulting in disconnection or poor contact. On the other hand, the board box A100 adopts means for solving such problems. Details will be described later.

The main controller 100 is provided with a plurality (four in this embodiment) of 7-segment displays (not shown), and such 7-segment displays are mounted on the printed circuit board A119. Since the box cover A200 is made of a light-transmissive resin material, the operator can visually recognize the display of the 7-segment display through the box cover A200.

Here, a method of changing settings using the switch device A120 and the key device A130 will be described.

First, in a state where the pachinko machine A10 is powered off, the key A140 inserted into the key device A130 is placed in the ON position, and then the operating portion A122 of the switch device A120 is pushed to the operating position, and the pachinko machine A10 is operated. power on. As a result, the setting change mode is activated, and the setting is changed each time the operating portion A122 of the switch device A120 is pressed.

In the present embodiment, six values from the first to the sixth are specified as set values, and these values are circulated (for example, by pressing the operation unit A122, the set value is changed from the first value to the first value). When the operation unit A122 is pressed from the state where the sixth value is set, the set value advances to the first value).

The set value is displayed on the third pattern display device 81, which is a liquid crystal display (display device), and when the operating portion A122 of the switch device A120 is pressed (when the set value is changed), the third pattern display device is displayed. The setting value displayed at 81 is also changed. In this embodiment, the set value is also displayed on the 7-segment display.

In addition, the information regarding the setting change displayed on the third pattern display device 81 is not limited to the setting value, and may include other information. Other information includes, for example, the current mode (setting change mode, setting confirmation mode), previous set values, and the like. In this way, by using the third pattern display device 81, it is possible to secure (larger) the amount of information that can be displayed compared to, for example, the case of using a 7-segment display. As a result, it becomes easier to grasp the operation state, and it is possible to improve the operability and suppress operation errors. Further, by also using a device (third symbol display device 81) for displaying information about games, the product cost can be reduced accordingly.

Moreover, the display of the setting value may be displayed only on one of the third pattern display device 81 and the 7-segment display, and may not be displayed on the other. Alternatively, neither the third pattern display device 81 nor the 7-segment display may be displayed.

After changing the desired set value, the key A140 inserted into the key device A130 is placed at the OFF position. As a result, the setting change mode is terminated (set values are fixed). In this case, the off-edge of the key device A 130 is detected, the detection triggers the execution of the power restoration process, and the normal mode is activated with the set (changed) set value.

After changing the desired set value, the power of the pachinko machine A10 is turned off without placing the key A140 inserted in the key device A130 in the OFF position (that is, while it is placed in the ON position). When the power of the pachinko machine A10 is turned on while the key A140 of the key device A130 is placed at the OFF position, the normal mode is started with the set (changed) set values.

Also, in the setting change mode, RAM erasure is executed. Such RAM erasure is confirmed by placing the key A140 inserted in the key device A130 in the OFF position. Examples of the timing for executing the RAM erasing include the timing when the power of the pachinko machine A10 is turned on, the timing when a predetermined time has passed since that timing, and the timing when the key A140 is placed at the OFF position. That is, the timing for executing RAM erasure can be set as appropriate.

Also, during the setting change mode (that is, in a state in which the setting value can be changed by pressing the operating portion A122 of the switch device A120, the key A140 inserted into the key device A130 is not placed at the OFF position ( In other words, when the power of the pachinko machine A10 is turned off while the key device A10 remains in the ON position, the key A140 is removed from the key device A130, or the key A140 inserted into the key device A130 When the power of the pachinko machine A10 is turned on while the pachinko machine A10 is arranged in the off position, the normal mode is not started, an error state occurs, and an error display is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Simultaneously with the third pattern display device 81 or instead of this, an error display may be displayed on the 7-segment display.

Next, to confirm the setting values set in the setting change mode, first turn off the power of the pachinko machine A10, place the key A140 inserted in the key device A130 in the ON position, and then turn on the power of the pachinko machine A10. to turn on. Thereby, the setting confirmation mode for confirming the setting value is activated, and the setting value set at that time is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 and the 7-segment display.

In addition, the display of the setting value in the setting confirmation mode may be displayed only on one of the third pattern display device 81 or the 7-segment display, and may not be displayed on the other. Alternatively, neither the third pattern display device 81 nor the 7-segment display may be displayed.

In this setting confirmation mode, the key A140 inserted into the key device A130 is placed at the OFF position. This terminates the setting confirmation mode. Further, the off-edge of the key device A 130 is detected, and the power recovery process is executed with the detection as a trigger, and the normal mode with the setting value set at that time is activated.

In the setting confirmation mode, turning off the power of the pachinko machine A10, placing the key A140 inserted in the key device A130 in the OFF position, and then turning on the power of the pachinko machine A10 also Normal mode is activated with the set values.

In this embodiment, when the change of the setting value in the setting change mode is completed (confirmed), the 7-segment display is issued in a predetermined manner. As a predetermined mode, for example, a mode in which a predetermined display (for example, "7") blinks at regular time intervals is exemplified.

In addition, four 7-segment displays are arranged side by side to enable display of four digits, and the mode is displayed by the first two digits (two) (for example, "01" in setting change mode). However, in the setting confirmation mode, "02" is displayed respectively), and the setting value is displayed by the latter two digits (two pieces) (for example, the first value is "01", the second value is " 02”, . . . , and the sixth value is displayed as “06”).

Next, with reference to FIGS. 108 to 114, each part (box cover A200, box base A300, and main controller A110) constituting the board box A100 will be described in order. First, the box cover A200 will be described with reference to FIGS. 108 to 110. FIG.

108 is a front perspective view of the box cover A200, FIG. 109 is a rear perspective view of the box cover A200, and FIG. 110(a) is a partially enlarged front view of the box cover A200 as viewed in the direction of arrow CXa in FIG. 110(b) is a partially enlarged rear view of the box cover A200 as viewed in the direction of arrow CXb in FIG. 109. FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 108 to 110, the box cover A200 includes a front wall portion A201 formed in a substantially horizontally long rectangular plate shape when viewed from the front, and four sides of the front wall portion A201 extending toward the rear side (in the direction of arrow B). The wall portions (upper wall portion A202, lower wall portion A203, left wall portion A204 and right wall portion A205 connecting the upper wall portion A202 and the lower wall portion A203) which are erected and formed in a plate shape are mainly used. In preparation for this, these wall portions A201 to A205 form a box shape with an open back side. The box cover A200 is made of a light-transmissive resin material and molded using a resin molding die.

A two-stage step is formed on the upright end surfaces (surfaces on the arrow B direction side) of the upper wall portion A202, the lower wall portion A203, the left wall portion A204, and the right wall portion A205. The steps are such that a first surface (first step) is formed on the inner space side of the board box A100 (box cover A200), and a second surface is formed on the outer side of the first surface (opposite side to the inner space). A face (first step) is formed. The first surface is lower than the second surface (the standing height from the front wall portion A201 is small), and is a surface on which the main controller A110 (printed circuit board A119) is placed (hereinafter "seat surface A206"). ) is formed as

The seat surface A206 is formed in a substantially rectangular frame shape in front view in which surfaces (first surfaces) of the wall portions A201 to A205 are continuous, and is formed as a surface parallel to the front wall portion A201. Four corner portions of the seat surface A206 (portions where the surfaces (first surfaces) of the wall portions A201 to A205 are connected) are recessed with fastening holes A206a having internal threads threaded on the inner circumference. be done.

Therefore, main controller A110 (printed circuit board A119) has the outer edge side of its front surface in contact with seat surface A206, and screw ASC (Fig. 117(b) and FIG. 118(b)) is screwed into the fastening hole A206a, so that it is fastened and fixed to the box cover A200 (seat surface A206) in a posture parallel to the front wall A201, and attached to the board box A100. be housed.

A plurality of engaging pieces A207 are arranged side by side at predetermined intervals on the upper wall portion A202 and the lower wall portion A203. The engaging piece A207 has a base portion erected from the upper wall portion A202 and the lower wall portion A203 toward the rear side (in the direction of the arrow B), and extends in one direction (in the direction of the arrow R) from the erected tip of the base portion. It is formed in a substantially L-shaped bent shape from the extended portion, and is engaged with the engaged portion A307 of the box base A300, as will be described later.

A part of the front wall portion A201 is recessed toward the rear side (in the direction of arrow B). The recessed portion includes a plate-shaped operation wall portion A210 located backward (toward the main controller 110 side) from the front wall portion A201, and each side of the operation wall portion A210 is formed by the front wall portion. The front wall portion A201 is formed by the plate-like wall portions (first connection wall portion A220, second connection wall portion A230, and third connection wall portion A240) connected to A201.

That is, the outer surface on the front side of the board box A100 (surface in the direction of the arrow F) is positioned closer to the main controller A110 than the first area formed by the front wall portion A201 and the first area. and a second region formed by the wall portion A210.

The operation wall portion A210 is a portion that forms the operation surface of the switch device A120 and the key device A130, and has a substantially oblong rectangular shape in front view (the length in the directions of arrows L and R is longer than the length in the directions of arrows U and D). It is formed in a rectangular shape with an elongated dimension) and arranged in a posture substantially parallel to the front wall portion A201.

Note that the operation wall portion A210 is arranged on one side (rotational axis A410 side of the sealing unit A400) of the center in the longitudinal direction of the box cover A200 when viewed from the front (viewed in the direction of arrow B).

The first connection wall portion A220 is a wall portion that connects one side of the operation wall portion A210 in the longitudinal direction (arrow L direction side) to the front wall portion A201. It is formed to incline (downward) in the direction of approaching the main controller A110 as it goes. Therefore, on the front side (arrow F direction side) of the first connection wall portion A220, a space can be formed that continues to the space on the front side (arrow F direction side) of the operation wall portion A210. As a space including the space on the front side of the operation wall A210, the space as a whole (space that can be used when operating the key device A130) can be expanded.

In addition, in this embodiment, the inclination angle of the first connection wall portion A220 with respect to the front wall portion A201 and the operation wall portion A210 is set to approximately 45 degrees. As a result, it is possible to achieve both expansion of the space on the front side (arrow F direction side) of the operation wall portion A210 and securing of space inside the board box A100.

The second connection wall portion A230 extends along one side of the operation wall portion A210 in the short direction (arrow U direction side), and the third connection wall portion A240 extends along the other longitudinal direction side of the operation wall portion A210 (arrow R direction side). direction side) are connected to the front wall A201, and are arranged in a posture substantially perpendicular to the front wall A201 and the operation wall A210.

The operation wall portion A210 has an opening A250 for projecting the operation portion A122 to the outside of the board box A100, an opening A260 for allowing the key A140 to be inserted into and removed from the key device A130, and the main controller A110 ( Openings AOP1 to AOP8 are formed to allow connection to connectors (not shown) mounted on the printed circuit board A119).

The opening A250 has a front view shape corresponding to the outer shape of the operation portion A122 (in this embodiment, a substantially square shape when viewed from the front), and is substantially square in the longitudinal direction (directions of arrows L and R) of the operation wall portion A210. placed in the center. Around the opening A250, a guide wall A251 is erected from the front surface (outer surface, arrow F direction side) of the operation wall portion A210.

The guide wall A251 guides the displacement of the operation part A122 in the pushing direction (direction of arrow B) and also displaces it in a direction orthogonal to the pushing direction (direction parallel to the plane containing arrows U, D and arrows L, R). It is a portion for restricting (tilting), and is formed in a substantially square frame shape surrounding the opening A250 when viewed from the front, and the inner peripheral surface thereof is formed to smoothly connect to the inner peripheral surface of the opening A250.

In this embodiment, the height of the guide wall A251 standing from the operation wall A210 is higher than the tip of the operation part A122 pushed to the operation position (turned on position) from the operation wall A210. The dimension is set so that the tip is at a low position (the tip of the operation portion A122 protrudes outward (in the direction of the arrow F) from the standing tip of the guide wall A251). As a result, it is possible to prevent the guide wall A251 from interfering with the push-in operation of the operation portion A122, thereby improving the operability of the operation portion A122.

However, the standing height of the guide wall A251 from the operation wall A210 is higher than the tip of the operation part A122 pushed to the operation position (turned on position). The dimension may be set to a position (the tip of the operation portion A122 is retracted inward (arrow B direction side) from the standing tip of the guide wall A251). As a result, it is possible to prevent the operating portion A122 from being unintentionally pushed (turned on) to the operating position due to careless operation by the operator or contact (interference) with another member.

In addition, the tip of the operation part A122 pushed in to the operating position (turned-on position) of the guide wall A251 from the operation wall A210 is substantially the erection tip from the operation wall A210. The dimensions may be set at the same height position. When the operating portion A122 is pushed in, the fingers are brought into contact with the standing tip of the guide wall A251, so that the operator can recognize that the operating portion A122 has been pushed up to the operating position based on such abutment. . This is effective when it is necessary to operate the operation unit A122 in a situation where the operation unit A122 cannot be visually recognized.

A covering portion A270 protrudes from the operation wall portion A210 from the front surface (the outer surface, the surface in the direction of the arrow F). The covering portion A270 is a portion that covers a portion of the front end side (arrow F direction side) of the key device A130 (see FIG. 112(a)), and is a peripheral wall that is erected from the operation wall portion A210 and formed in a cylindrical shape. A portion A271 and a plate-like end wall portion A272 that closes (forms an end face) the protruding tip of the peripheral wall portion A271, and a part of the tip side of the key device A130 is accommodated in the inner space thereof. be.

The peripheral wall portion A271 includes a base portion A271a formed in a cylindrical shape having a substantially circular cross section, and a pair of projections projecting radially outward from two opposing locations (positions with a phase difference of approximately 180 degrees) on the base portion A271a. A part A271b. The peripheral wall portion A271 (base portion A271a and projection portion A271b) is formed to have substantially the same cross-sectional shape as a whole along the axial direction (directions of arrows F and B). Therefore, the operation wall portion A210 has substantially the same shape as the cross-sectional shape of the peripheral wall portion A271 (the base portion A271a and the protrusion A271b) (that is, a circular shape in which two opposing portions protrude radially outward). is formed (see FIG. 110(b)).

The opening A260 is formed in the projecting tip surface of the covering portion A270, that is, in the end surface wall portion A272. As a result, the end wall portion A272 is formed in a plate shape extending radially inward from the inner peripheral surface of the projecting tip of the peripheral wall portion A271. That is, the end wall portion A272 is formed as a plate (cantilever beam) having a base end fixed to the inner peripheral surface of the peripheral wall portion A271 and one end (opening A260 side) being free.

Here, the opening A260 is provided only in a region corresponding to the displacement trajectory of the key A140 when the key A140 is displaced (rotated) between the OFF position and the ON position (the region necessary to allow the displacement). It is formed. Specifically, the opening A260 includes a first fan-shaped opening with a center angle of approximately 90 degrees for allowing displacement of a portion on one side of the rotation center of the key A140, and an opening on the other side of the rotation center of the key A140. A second fan-shaped opening with a central angle of approximately 90 degrees for allowing displacement of the portion (one side and the opposite side) is formed in a shape that is combined with a phase difference of approximately 180 degrees.

As a result, the end wall portion A272 has an annular portion A272a extending radially inward from the inner peripheral surface of the projecting tip of the peripheral wall portion A271 and formed in a substantially annular shape when viewed from the front (as viewed in the direction of arrow B). A square portion A272b extending radially inward from the inner edge of the annular portion A272a and having a substantially triangular shape when viewed from the front (as viewed in the direction of arrow B) is formed. The rectangular portion A272b is arranged in a posture tapering inward in the radial direction when viewed from the front (viewed in the direction of arrow B), and is formed at two locations with a phase difference of approximately 180 degrees.

Note that the key A140 has different dimensions for the turning radius of the portion on one side of the center of rotation and the radius of rotation of the portion on the other side of the center of rotation. Therefore, the opening A260 has a different size (radius) between the first fan-shaped opening and the second fan-shaped opening.

A first protrusion A211 and a second protrusion A212 protrude from the front surface (the outer surface, the surface facing the arrow F direction) of the operation wall A210. These first ridges A211 and second ridges A212 are ridges extending in a stripe shape while maintaining a substantially rectangular cross-sectional shape, and one end is connected to the outer peripheral surface (outer surface) of the covering portion A270. .

Specifically, one end of the first protrusion A211 is connected to the outer peripheral surface (outer surface) of the protrusion A271b of the peripheral wall A271 at a position (phase) facing the edge of the key A140 in the OFF position. One end of the ridge A212 is connected to the outer peripheral surface (outer surface) of the base A271a of the peripheral wall A271 at a position (phase) facing the edge of the key A140 in the ON position. That is, one end of the first ridge A211 and one end of the second ridge A212 are connected to the outer peripheral surface (outer surface) of the covering portion A270 at positions with a phase difference of approximately 180 degrees.

In addition, on the front surface (outer surface, arrow F direction side) of the operation wall portion A210, a display portion is provided at a position adjacent to the other end of the first protrusion A211 and the second protrusion A212 (on the extension line of the other end). are respectively formed. The display section is a part that shows information on the operation position (rotational position) of the key A140, and "OFF" and "ON" are displayed. That is, the key A140 with its edge toward one end of the first protrusion A211 is placed at the OFF position (see FIG. 115(a)), and the key with its edge toward one end of the second protrusion A212. A140 is placed in the ON position (see FIG. 115(b)).

The opening AOP1 is formed in the operation wall A210, and the openings AOP2 to AOP8 are formed (in parallel) in series (one line) along the edge of the front wall A201.

Standing walls A280 and A290 are erected on the rear surface (inner surface, surface on the arrow B direction side) of the operation wall portion A210. The erected wall A280 includes a first erected wall A281, a second erected wall A282, a third erected wall A283, and a fourth erected wall A284. A250 is surrounded (see FIG. 110(b)). Therefore, when the main controller A110 is housed in the board box A100, the switch device A120 is surrounded by the standing wall A280.

The first erected wall A281 is arranged between the opening A250 and the second connection wall portion A230, and formed in a plate shape substantially parallel to each of the second connection wall portion A230 and the lower wall portion A203. The second erected wall A282 and the third erected wall A283 are opposed to each other with the opening A250 interposed therebetween, and are formed in a plate shape substantially orthogonal to the first erected wall A281. The fourth erected wall A284 is arranged between the opening A250 and the lower wall portion A203, and is formed in a plate shape substantially parallel to the first erected wall A281.

The second erected wall A282 and the third erected wall A283 are connected to the first erected wall A281 on one side and to the lower wall portion A203 on the other side. That is, the first erected wall A281 is connected to the lower wall portion A203 via the second erected wall A282 and the third erected wall A283. The fourth standing wall A284 is connected to the second standing wall A282 on one side and to the third standing wall A283 on the other side.

The erected wall A290 includes a first erected wall A291, a second erected wall A292, and a third erected wall A293, and the opening A260 is surrounded by these erected walls A291, A292, and A293 (see FIG. 110). (b)). Therefore, when the main controller A110 is housed in the board box A100, the key device A130 is surrounded by the standing wall A290.

The first erected wall A291 is arranged between the opening A260 and the second connection wall A230, and formed in a plate shape substantially parallel to the second connection wall A230 and the bottom wall A203. The second erected wall A292 and the third erected wall A293 are opposed to each other with the opening A260 interposed therebetween, and are formed in a plate shape substantially perpendicular to the first erected wall A291.

The second erected wall A292 and the third erected wall A293 are connected to the first erected wall A291 on one side and to the lower wall portion A203 on the other side. That is, the first erected wall A291 is connected to the lower wall portion A203 via the second erected wall A292 and the third erected wall A293. The fourth standing wall A284 is connected to the second standing wall A292 on one side and the third standing wall A293 on the other side.

The standing wall A290 is formed in a size surrounding the covering portion A270 (a position outside the covering portion A270) when viewed from the front (as viewed in the direction of arrow B). Specifically, when viewed from the front (viewed in the direction of arrow B), the outer surface (arc) of the base portion A271a of the peripheral wall portion A271 of the covering portion A270 is aligned with the inner surface (straight line) of the second erected wall A292 and the third erected wall A293. The outer surface (circular arc) of the protrusion A271b in the peripheral wall portion A271 of the covering portion A270 is inscribed in the inner surfaces (straight lines) of the first standing wall A291 and the lower wall portion A203, respectively.

The first erected walls A281 and A291, the second erected walls A282 and A292, and the third erected walls A283 and A293 of the erected walls A280 and A290 are the rear surface (inner surface, arrow B direction side) of the operation wall portion A210. The standing height from the surface) is the same, and the standing tip surfaces (surfaces on the arrow B direction side) of the respective standing walls A281, A291, A282, A292, A283, and A293 are the bearing surface A206. placed at the same height as

Therefore, the erected walls A280 and A290 are such that the erected tip surfaces of the second erected walls A282, A292 and the third erected walls A283, A293 are connected to the seat surface A206, and the seat surface A206 and the respective erected walls A281, A293 , A282, A292, A283, and A293 are positioned on the same plane (form the same plane). As a result, when the main controller A110 (printed circuit board A119) is fastened and fixed to the box cover A200 (seat A206), the first standing walls A281 and A291, the second standing walls A282 and A292 and the third standing walls A282 and A292 are fixed. The upright tip surfaces (surfaces in the direction of arrow B) of the walls A283 and A293 are brought into contact with the front surface (surface in the direction of arrow F) of the main controller A110 (printed circuit board A119).

Here, in the erected wall A280, the length dimensions of the second erected wall A282 and the third erected wall A283 (the dimensions in the directions of arrows U and D) are the length dimensions of the first erected wall A281 (the dimensions of the arrows L and R-direction dimension). Therefore, as will be described later, when the outer surface of the tilted switch device A120 abuts against the inner surface of the erected wall A280 (the second erected wall A282 and the third erected wall A283), the second erected wall A282 and the third standing wall A283 may be deformed and the tilting of the switch device A120 may not be suppressed.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the opposing portions of the second erected wall A282 and the third erected wall A283 are connected by the fourth erected wall A284, the second erected wall A282 and the third erected wall Deformation of A283 can be suppressed. As a result, tilting of the switch device A120 can be suppressed.

On the other hand, since the fourth standing wall A284 is arranged at a position close to the lower wall portion A203, the material volume in the vicinity of the fourth standing wall A284 increases. This corresponds to the formation of a part with a large thickness dimension, and due to the difference in shrinkage rate from other parts, the part with a large thickness dimension and its vicinity may cause molding defects. give rise to

On the other hand, the erected height of the fourth erected wall A284 is smaller (lower) than the erected heights of the first erected wall A281, the second erected wall A282, and the third erected wall A283. As a result, while securing the function of suppressing the deformation of the second erected wall A282 and the third erected wall A283, the material volume in the vicinity of the fourth erected wall A284 is reduced, and molding defects due to the difference in shrinkage rate are eliminated. can be suppressed.

In addition, since the fourth standing wall A284 is provided at a position closer to the opening A250 than the lower wall portion A203, the switch device A120 is prevented from tilting in the direction of the arrow D, as will be described later. The outer surface of the device A120 can be brought into contact with the inner surface of the fourth standing wall A284, and its tilting can be suppressed within an appropriate range (that is, tilting at a smaller angle than when it is brought into contact with the lower wall portion A203). .

On the inner surfaces of the first erected walls A281, A291, the second erected walls A282, A292, and the third erected walls A283, A293 of the erected walls A280, A290, the erected tip side (arrow B direction), tapered surfaces A280a and A290a, which are inclined surfaces approaching the outer surface side, are formed. As a result, the thickness dimension (plate thickness dimension) of each of the erected walls A281, A291, A282, A292, A283, and A293 at the erected distal end is gradually reduced toward the erected distal end side, and each of the erected walls A281 is reduced accordingly. , A291, A282, A292, A283, and A293 are reduced in area.

Note that the tapered surfaces A280a and A290a may be omitted. The tapered surfaces A280a and A290a are formed on the outer surfaces of the first erected walls A281 and A291, the second erected walls A282 and A292, and the third erected walls A283 and A293 of the erected walls A280 and A290. You can set it.

An erecting wall A208 is erected on the rear surface (the inner surface, the surface on the arrow B direction side) of the front wall portion A201. In addition to the erected walls A280 and A290 described above, an erected wall A209 is erected on the rear surface (the inner surface, the surface facing the arrow B direction) of the operation wall portion A210.

The standing wall A208 is formed in a box-like shape with four sides of plate-shaped bodies connected to each other and the side opposite to the front wall portion A201 is open. 4). The standing wall A209 has an inner shape corresponding to the opening AOP1, and is formed in a box-like shape with an open side opposite to the operation wall A210. is formed at a position corresponding to Therefore, when the main controller A110 is housed in the board box A100, the arithmetic unit (MPU201) is surrounded by the standing wall A208, and the connector is surrounded by the standing wall A209.

Here, the plurality of erected walls A208, A209, A280, and A290 surrounding the plurality of objects are arranged such that the height positions of the erected tip surfaces of one or more of the erected walls correspond to the height positions of the remaining erected walls. It is set at a height position different from the height position of the tip surface. In this embodiment, the height position of the upright end face of the upright wall A209 is retreated from the height position of the upright end face of the upright walls A208, A280, A290 (that is, separated from the printed circuit board A119). side). As a result, even if there are dimensional tolerances of the standing walls A208, A209, A280, and A290, mounting tolerances of the printed circuit board A119 to the box cover A200, or dimensional tolerances of the printed circuit board A119 (for example, variation in flatness), , the standing walls A208, A280, and A290 can be easily brought into close contact with the printed circuit board A119 compared to the standing wall A209. That is, it is possible to ensure that the erected wall surrounding the object of high importance is in close contact with the printed circuit board A119.

Next, with reference to FIG. 111, the box base A300 will be described. FIG. 111(a) is a front perspective view of the box base A300, and FIG. 111(b) is a rear perspective view of the box base A300.

As shown in FIG. 111, the box base A300 includes a rear wall portion A301 formed in a plate shape of a substantially horizontally long rectangle when viewed from the front, and four sides of the rear wall portion A301 extending toward the front side (in the direction of arrow F). Mainly provided and plate-shaped wall portions (upper wall portion A302, lower wall portion A303, left wall portion A304 and right wall portion A305 connecting the upper wall portion A302 and the lower wall portion A303), These walls A301 to A305 form a box shape with an open front side. The box base A300 is made of a resin material and molded using a resin molding die.

A plurality of engaged portions A307 are arranged side by side at predetermined intervals on the upper wall portion A302 and the lower wall portion A303. The engaged portion A307 is a portion with which the engaging piece A207 of the box cover A200 is engaged, and is formed to protrude downward (arrow D direction side).

To connect the box base A300 and the box cover A200, first, the phase is shifted by the extension length of the extension portion on the side opposite to the extension direction of the extension portion of the engagement piece A207 (arrow L direction side). They face each other at a shifted position, and push the box cover A200 toward the box base A300. As a result, the engaging piece A207 enters the space between the adjacent engaged portions A307. arrow R direction).
As a result, the engaging piece A207 enters the rear side (the arrow B direction side) of the engaged portion A307, and the two are engaged (displacement of the box cover A200 in the arrow F direction is restricted).

Next, main controller A110 will be described with reference to FIGS. 112 to 114. FIG. FIG. 112(a) is a front perspective view of main controller A110, FIG. 112(b) is a back perspective view of main controller A110, and FIG. FIG. 11 is a partially enlarged front perspective view of the control device A110;

114(a) is a front view of main controller A110 as viewed in the direction of arrow CXIVa in FIG. 112(a), and FIG. 114(b) is a front view of main controller A110 as viewed in the direction of arrow CXIVb in FIG. 114(a). 114(c) is a side view of main controller A110 as seen in the direction of arrow CXIVc in FIG. 114(a).

112 to 114, in order to simplify the drawings and facilitate understanding, only the major electronic components mounted on the printed circuit board A119 are illustrated, and other illustrations are omitted. .

As shown in FIGS. 112 to 114, the main controller A110 includes a printed circuit board A119, and a switch device A120 and a key device A130 mounted on the printed circuit board A119. The printed circuit board A119 has various electronic components (IC, resistors, capacitors and transistors) mounted on a board made of an insulating resin material, and the circuits (patterns) connecting these electronic components are conductors such as copper foil. , and insertion holes A112 are formed in four corner portions.

The printed circuit board A119 is installed in the circuit board box A100 with the front surface (the surface on which the switch device A120 and the key device A130 are mounted, the surface in the direction of the arrow F) facing the rear surface of the box cover A200 (front wall portion A201). stored in.

In this case, of the front face of the printed circuit board A119, at least the areas AS1 and AS2 on which the standing walls A280 and A290 of the box cover A200 and the seat surface A206 of the lower wall A203 abut (Fig. 114 (see (a)), no electronic components are mounted or no circuits are formed, and the areas AS1 and AS2 are formed as flat surfaces. It should be noted that FIG. 114(a) shows only the portion of the area where the seat surface A206 abuts, which continues to the standing walls A280 and A290.

The switch device A120 includes a main body A123 that holds the operating part A122 displaceably (pushing operation), and a coil spring ( an urging means (not shown), a contact (not shown) disposed inside the main body A123 and whose contact is switched according to the displacement of the operation portion A122, and a leg A121 electrically connected to the contact. Prepare.

The main body A123 is formed in a substantially cubic shape and includes a base A123a mounted on the front of the printed circuit board A119, and a cylindrical protrusion A123b protruding from the front of the base A123a (surface on the arrow F direction side), The outer diameter dimension of the protrusion A123b is made larger than the maximum dimension (diagonal length) of the opening A250 (the inner edge of the guide wall A251). When the main controller A110 is housed in the board box A100, the front surface of the protrusion A123b faces the rear surface of the operation wall portion A210 (surface in the arrow B direction).

In the present embodiment, the portion that protrudes from the bottom surface of the base A123a (the portion that is part of the bottom surface of the base A123a and from which the leg A121 protrudes) abuts the front surface of the printed circuit board A119. However, a gap may be formed between the bottom surface of the base portion A123a (a part of the bottom surface of the base portion A123a and from which the leg A121 protrudes) and the front surface of the printed circuit board A119. That is, the base A123a may be raised from the front of the printed circuit board A119 by the legs A121.

Further, in this embodiment, a predetermined gap is formed between the front surface of the protrusion A123b and the rear surface (the surface on the arrow B direction side) of the operation wall portion A210. However, the front surface of the projecting portion A123b and the back surface of the operation wall portion A210 (the surface on the arrow B direction side) may be in contact with each other.

The legs A121 protrude from the rear surface of the base portion A123a of the main body A123 (the surface facing the arrow B direction, the surface facing the printed circuit board A119), and as described above, are inserted from the front side into the holes opening in the printed circuit board A119. The part protruding to the back side is soldered. As a result, the switch device A120 is arranged (mounted) on the front side of the printed circuit board A119.

The key device A130 has a cylinder portion A132 formed as a lock that allows the rotation of the inner cylinder A132a with respect to the outer cylinder A132b when a suitable key A140 is inserted into the inner cylinder A132a, and the cylinder portion A132 is arranged inside. A main body A133 that holds the main body A133, a support A134 that supports the outer peripheral surface (outer surface) of the main body A133, and a contact whose contact is switched according to the state of the cylinder part A132 (rotational position of the inner cylinder A132a with respect to the outer cylinder A132b) (not shown) and a leg A131 electrically connected to the contact.

The main body A133 has a base portion A133a which is formed in a substantially cylindrical shape and holds the cylinder portion A132 on the inner peripheral side (inside) of the base portion A133a. ), and an end portion A133c forming an end face on the tip side (arrow F direction side) of the base portion A133a.

In this embodiment, the portion that protrudes from the bottom surface of the main body A133 (the portion that is part of the bottom surface of the main body A133 and from which the legs A131 protrude) abuts the front surface of the printed circuit board A119. However, a gap may be formed between the bottom surface of the main body A133 (a portion of the bottom surface of the main body A133 and from which the leg A131 protrudes) and the front surface of the printed circuit board A119. That is, the main body A133 may be raised from the front of the printed circuit board A119 by the legs A131.

The end surface of the protrusion A133b on the arrow F direction side is formed at a position one step lower (arrow B direction side) from the end surface (surface on the arrow F direction side) formed by the end portion A133c. The end portion A133c is formed with a circular opening in a front view at a position substantially concentric with the base portion A133a, through which the key A140 can be inserted into and removed from the cylinder portion A132 (inner cylinder A132a). .

When the main controller A110 is housed in the board box A100, a part of the main body A133 on the front end side (arrow F direction side) is housed in the inner space of the covering section A270.

Specifically, the outer diameter of the base portion A133a of the main body A133 is set to a value equal to or slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the base portion A271a in the peripheral wall portion A271 of the covering portion A270, and the protruding shape of the protrusion A133b of the main body A133 The projection A271b of the peripheral wall portion A271 in the portion A270 is formed to have a size equal to or slightly smaller than the recessed shape of the protrusion A271b of the peripheral wall portion A271. The protrusion A133b of the A133 is accommodated on the inner peripheral side (inside) of the protrusion A271b of the peripheral wall portion A271.

Further, in this case, a predetermined gap is formed between the front surface (end surface, surface in the direction of arrow F) of the end portion A133c of the main body A133 and the rear surface (surface in the direction of arrow B) of the end surface wall portion A272 of the covering portion A270. It is formed. Note that the front surface of the end portion A133c and the back surface of the end wall portion A272 may be configured to contact each other.

The legs A131 protrude from the rear surface of the base portion A133a of the main body A133 (the surface facing the arrow B direction, the surface facing the printed circuit board A119), and as described above, are inserted from the front side into the holes that open to the printed circuit board A119. The part protruding to the back side is soldered. As a result, the key device A130 is arranged (mounted) on the front side of the printed circuit board A119.

The support body A134 includes a base part A134a in which an opening is formed substantially in the center through which the main body A133 (a base part A133a and a projection part A133b) is inserted. A pair of extending portions A134b and a pair of reinforcing portions A134c extending from the remaining two sides of the base portion A134a toward the printed circuit board A119 are provided. formed in

The extension length of the extension portion A134b from the base portion A134a is larger than the extension length of the reinforcement portion A134c from the base portion A134a, and the extension tip surface of the extension portion A134b (surface on the arrow B direction side) abuts on the front surface of the printed circuit board A119 (the surface on the arrow F direction side). In addition, a leg A134b1 is protrudingly provided on the extension tip surface of the extension portion A134b. The support A134 is arranged on the front side of the printed circuit board A119 and stands on its own by inserting the leg A134b1 from the front side into the hole opening in the printed circuit board A119 and soldering the portion projecting to the rear side. As a result, the main body A133 can be supported by the support A134, and the support A134 can prevent the main body A133 from tilting with respect to the printed circuit board A119.

A gap may be provided between the extended end surface of the extended portion A134b (surface on the arrow B direction side) and the front surface of the printed circuit board A119 (surface on the arrow F direction side). That is, the support A134 may be raised from the front of the printed circuit board A119 by the legs A131. In this case, the heat dissipation of the key device A130 can be enhanced by the gap.

On the other hand, the extension length from the base portion A134a of the extension portion A134b and the extension length from the reinforcement portion A134c may be the same. That is, the extending tip surface of the reinforcing portion A134c (surface on the arrow B direction side) may also be configured to contact the front surface of the printed circuit board A119 (surface on the arrow F direction side). In this case, the main body A133 is supported by both the extended portion A134b and the reinforcing portion A134c, and the tilting of the main body A133 with respect to the printed circuit board A119 can be suppressed more firmly. Also, it is possible to prevent foreign objects such as wires from entering the leg A131 side of the key device A130.

Also, the soldering of the leg A134b1 is omitted, and the leg A134b1 is formed to have a substantially dogleg or S-shaped cross-sectional shape, and the leg A134b1 is inserted into the hole of the printed circuit board A119 in an elastically deformed state. It is good also as a structure to carry out. That is, the elastic recovery force of the leg A134b1 may be used to elastically engage the leg A134b1 with the inner peripheral surface (inner surface) of the hole of the printed circuit board A119. Since soldering can be omitted, the manufacturing cost can be reduced. Alternatively, in addition to elastic engagement of the leg A134b1 with the hole, soldering may also be performed. It is possible to more strongly prevent the leg A134b1 from coming out of the hole. Therefore, the function of the support A134 that supports the inclination of the main body A133 can be further enhanced.

The leg A134b1 has a width dimension (dimensions in the directions of arrows L and B, dimensions in the left-right direction in FIG. The hole of the printed circuit board A119 through which the leg A134b1 is inserted is formed in a rectangular shape. As a result, when the rigidity of the leg A134b1 is increased and the tilting of the main body A133 is supported by the support body A134, deformation or breakage of the base of the leg A134b1 (connected portion with the extended portion A134b) can be suppressed.

However, the width dimension of the leg A134b1 may be substantially the same as the thickness dimension. That is, the cross-sectional shape of the leg A134b1 may be square.

In addition, by forming the reinforcing portions A134c on the two opposing sides of the support A134, it is possible to restrict the bending and twisting of the base portion A134a. As a result, the rigidity of the support body A134 as a whole can be increased, and the function of supporting the main body A133 can be enhanced, so that tilting of the main body A133 with respect to the printed circuit board A119 can be more strongly restricted (suppressed).

Next, the detailed configuration of the board box A100 will be described with reference to FIGS. 115 to 119. FIG.

FIG. 115(a) is a partially enlarged front view of the board box A100 with the key A140 operated to the off position, and FIG. 115(b) is a board box A100 with the key A140 operated to the on position. 116(a) is a partially enlarged side view of the board box A100 as viewed in the direction of arrow CXVIa in FIG. 115(a), and FIG. 116(b) is a partially enlarged front view of FIG. 115(b). FIG. 10 is a partially enlarged side view of the board box A100 as viewed in the direction of arrow CXVIb;

117(a) is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the substrate box A100 taken along the section line CXVIIa-CXVIIa of FIG. 115(a), and FIG. 117(b) is a substrate taken along the section line CXVIIb-CXVIIb of FIG. 115(a). 118(a) is a partially enlarged sectional view of the substrate box A100 taken along the cutting line CXVIIIa-CXVIIIa of FIG. 115(a), and FIG. 118(b) is a partially enlarged sectional view of the box A100 of FIG. FIG. 10 is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the board box A100 taken along the cutting line CXVIIIb-CXVIIIb of a).

119(a) is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the substrate box A100 taken along the section line CXIXa-CXIXa in FIG. 116(a), and FIG. 119(b) is a substrate taken along the section line CXIXb-CXIXb in FIG. FIG. 10 is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of Box A100;

117 to 119, in order to simplify the drawing and facilitate understanding, the internal structure is not shown, and the cross section is hatched by single hatching to schematically show the switch device A120 and the key device A130. diagrammatically.

As shown in FIGS. 115 to 118, the board box A100 has a covering portion A270 projecting from the front surface (the surface facing the arrow F direction) of the operation wall portion A210 of the box cover A200. An opening A260 is formed in an end wall portion A272 that forms a tip surface (a surface on the arrow F direction side). This makes it difficult for the tip of a foreign object such as a wire to reach the opening A260.

For example, if the opening A260 cannot be visually recognized by an unauthorized person due to a shield or the like, and it is difficult to directly insert the tip of a foreign object such as a wire into the opening A260, the tip of the foreign object such as a wire can be inserted into the box cover A200 (for operation). A method of sliding on the front surface (outer surface, arrow F direction side surface) of the wall portion A210) to reach the opening A260 is performed.

On the other hand, since the covering portion A270 projects from the front surface (outer surface) of the operation wall portion A210, the tip of a foreign object such as a wire slides on the front surface (outer surface) of the operation wall portion A210. , the tip of the foreign matter such as a wire can be brought into contact with the outer surface of the covering portion A270 (the outer peripheral surface of the peripheral wall portion A271) to stop further progress (sliding). That is, the outer surface of the covering portion A270 (peripheral wall portion A271) can function as a wall that restricts the sliding of foreign objects such as wires. As a result, it is possible to prevent a foreign object such as a wire from being inserted through the opening A260.

The covering part A270 has an internal space, and a part of the front end side (one end side, arrow F direction side) of the key device A130 of the main control device A110 is housed in the internal space. That is, the covering portion A270 covers a portion of the tip side of the key device A130.

Thereby, the gap between the inner surface of the covering portion A270 and the outer surface of the key device A130 can be bent. That is, when a foreign object such as a wire is inserted into the board box A100 through the opening A260, the route through which the foreign object such as the wire passes (the gap between the end wall portion A272 and the end portion A133c and the peripheral wall portion A271 and the base A133a and the protrusion A133b) is bent, and the wall with which the tip of a foreign object such as a wire hits (a wire passing through the gap between the end wall A272 and the end A133c A wall against which the tip of the foreign matter abuts (that is, the inner surface of the peripheral wall portion A271) can be formed in the path. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the main controller A110 from being tampered with by an inserted foreign object such as a wire (see FIGS. 117(a) and 117(b)).

The key device A130 is formed by inserting a substantially cylindrical main body A133 into a support A134 having a substantially rectangular parallelepiped outer shape. In this case, the width dimension of the support A134 (horizontal dimension in FIGS. 117(a) and 117(b)) corresponds to the inner diameter dimension of the covering portion A270 (peripheral wall portion A271) (FIGS. 117(a) and 117(b)). is set to a value larger than the left-right dimension of

As a result, the upper surface of the support A134 (the surface facing the arrow F direction) can face the inner surface of the operation wall portion A210 (the surface facing the arrow B direction). Therefore, the gap between the inner surface of the covering portion A270 and the outer surface of the key device A130 can be bent.

That is, when a foreign matter such as a wire is inserted into the board box A100 from the opening A260, the path through which the foreign matter such as the wire passes (formed by the gap between the peripheral wall portion A271 and the base portion A133a and the projection portion A133b) path) is bent to form a wall against which the tip of a foreign object such as a wire strikes (a wall against which the tip of a foreign object such as a wire passing through the gap between the peripheral wall portion A271 and the base A133a and the protrusion A133b strikes, that is, the support A134). In addition, for a foreign matter such as a wire that collides with the upper surface of the support A 134 and changes its traveling direction, each standing wall A291, A292, A293 and the inner surface of the lower wall portion A203) are formed in the path. be able to. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the main controller A110 from being tampered with by an inserted foreign object such as a wire (see FIGS. 117(a) and 117(b)).

A protruding portion A271b is formed on the peripheral wall portion A271 of the covering portion A270, and a protruding portion A133b is formed on the main body A133. The protrusions A133b of the main body A133 are accommodated on the inner peripheral side (inner side) of the protrusions A271b of the peripheral wall portion A271.

As a result, the circumferential outer surface of the projection A133b (the surface facing the arrows L and R) and the circumferential inner surface of the projection A271b (the surface facing the arrows L and R) can face each other. Therefore, the gap between the inner surface of the covering portion A270 and the outer surface of the key device A130 can be bent.

That is, when a foreign object such as a wire is inserted into the board box A100 from the opening A260, the route through which the foreign object such as the wire passes The tip of foreign matter such as a wire that passes along the circumferential direction through the gap between the peripheral wall portion A271 and the base portion A133a and the protrusion A133b. Abutting walls, that is, the circumferential outer surface of the protrusion A133b and the circumferential inner surface of the protrusion A271b) can be formed in the path. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the main controller A110 from being tampered with by an inserted foreign object such as a wire (see FIG. 118(a)).

In the switch device A120, the outer diameter dimension of the protrusion A123b is set to a value larger than the maximum dimension (diagonal length) of the opening A250 (the inner edge of the guide wall A251). As a result, the upper surface of the protrusion A123b (the surface facing the arrow F direction) can face the inner surface of the operation wall portion A210 (the surface facing the arrow B direction). Therefore, it is possible to bend the gap between the inner surface of the guide wall A251 and the operation wall portion A210 and the outer surface of the switch device A120.

That is, when a foreign object such as a wire is inserted into the board box A100 from the opening A250, the route through which the foreign object such as a wire passes path formed by the gap between the guide wall A251 and the operation part A122) is bent to form a wall against which the tip of a foreign object such as a wire hits (a wall against which the tip of a foreign object such as a wire passing through the gap between the guide wall A251 and the operation part A122 hits, that is, The upper surface of the protrusion A123b.In addition, foreign matter such as a wire that collides with the upper surface of the protrusion A123b and changes its traveling direction is routed through each of the standing walls A281, A282, A283 and the inner surface of the lower wall portion A203. can be formed in Therefore, it is possible to prevent the main controller A110 from being tampered with by an inserted foreign object such as a wire (see FIGS. 118(a) and 118(b)).

As described above, the covering part A270 has an internal space, and a part of the front end side (one end side, arrow F direction side) of the key device A130 of the main control device A110 is accommodated in the internal space. That is, the covering portion A270 covers a portion of the tip side of the key device A130.

As a result, the inner surface of the covering portion A270 and the outer surface of the key device A130 can face each other in a direction perpendicular to the inserting direction of the key A140 (direction parallel to a plane including arrows U, D and arrows L, R). Therefore, for example, an operator's careless operation or rough operation of the key A140 inserted into the key device A130, collision of another member with the key A140 during the operation of opening the inner frame 12 from the outer frame 11, etc. When an external force is applied to the key A140 in a direction orthogonal to the insertion direction, the outer surface of the key device A130 is brought into contact with the inner surface of the covering portion 170 to suppress (regulate) tilting of the key device A130.

Therefore, as described above, it is possible to prevent the leg A131 from being broken or bent, the leg A131 coming out of the hole of the printed circuit board A119, and the solder from peeling off. As a result, it is possible to prevent the key device A130 from falling off from the main control device A110 (printed circuit board A119), and the disconnection or poor contact of the key device A130 (leg A131).

An end face wall portion A272 is formed at the projecting tip (arrow F direction side) of the covering portion A270, and this end face wall portion A272 faces the end portion A133c of the key device A130. As a result, the area of the opening A260 (in addition to the area of the opening A260 when viewed from the front (viewed in the direction of arrow B), the cross-sectional area of the path through which a foreign object such as a wire passes) can be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a foreign object such as a wire from being inserted into the board box A100 and the main controller A110 being tampered with.

In particular, the end wall portion A272 of the covering portion A270 has square portions A272b extending radially inward from two points on the inner edge of the annular portion A272a. That is, the projecting tip surface of the covering portion A270 (the surface facing the direction of arrow F) is open only in the region that allows the displacement of the key A140 (the region corresponding to the displacement locus of the key A140). The rest of the tip surface (the surface on the arrow F direction side) is entirely the end surface wall portion A272. Therefore, by minimizing the area of the opening A260, it is possible to make it difficult to insert a foreign object such as a wire into the opening A260. In addition, since the facing area between the inner surface of the end wall portion A272 and the outer surface of the key device A130 (end portion A133c) can be maximized, even if a foreign object such as a wire is inserted through the opening A260, the foreign object such as the wire can pass through. It can be difficult.

In this way, in order to make the opening A260 an irregular shape (a shape in which a pair of fan shapes are opposed to each other), the end face wall portion A272 has a relatively complicated shape in which a pair of rectangular portions A272b protrude from the inner edge of an annular portion A272a. formed into a shape. In this case, the end wall portion A272 (annular portion A272a and square portion A272b) has a plate shape with a constant thickness (a cantilever with a base end fixed to the peripheral wall portion A271 and one end (extending tip) free). shape), the shape can be simplified and its formability can be ensured. As a result, the yield can be improved and the product cost can be reduced.

Here, only the peripheral wall portion A271 is formed in the covering portion A270 and the end wall portion A272 is not formed. configuration), when an external force is applied to the key A140 in a direction perpendicular to the insertion direction, the outer surface of the key device A130 is brought into contact with the inner surface of the peripheral wall portion A271 to suppress the tilting of the key device A130. (regulation) can be done.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, an end wall portion A272 is formed on the projecting tip side (arrow F direction side) of the covering portion A270, and the key A140 is formed on the inner edge of the end wall portion A272 (the portion forming the opening A260). can be abutted. That is, the position (key A140) farther from the fulcrum (leg A131) when the key device A130 tilts due to the action of the above-described external force can be brought into contact with the end wall portion A272. As a result, tilting of the key device A130 can be suppressed (regulated), and breakage of the box cover A200 (coating portion A270) can be suppressed.

In addition, the protrusion A133b of the main body A133 and the protrusion A271b of the peripheral wall A271 are partially formed in the circumferential direction, and the protrusion A133b of the main body A133 is accommodated on the inner peripheral side (inside) of the protrusion A271b of the peripheral wall A271. Therefore, as described above, the circumferential outer surface of the projection A133b (the surface facing the arrows L and R) and the circumferential inner surface of the projection A271b (the surface facing the arrows L and R) face each other. (See FIG. 118(a)).

Therefore, for example, an operator's careless operation or rough operation of the key A140 inserted into the key device A130, collision of another member with the key A140 during the operation of opening the inner frame 12 from the outer frame 11, etc. When an external force in the direction of rotation is applied to the key A140, the outer circumferential surface of the projection A133b (the surface facing the arrows L and R) is aligned with the inner circumferential surface of the projection A271b (the surface facing the arrows L and R). ) to restrict the rotation (displacement in the circumferential direction) of the key device A130.

Therefore, as described above, it is possible to prevent the leg A131 from being broken or bent, the leg A131 coming out of the hole of the printed circuit board A119, and the solder from peeling off. As a result, it is possible to prevent the key device A130 from falling off from the main control device A110 (printed circuit board A119), and the disconnection or poor contact of the key device A130 (leg A131).

Here, for example, the operation portion A122 of the switch device A120 or the key A140 inserted into the key device A130 is carelessly or violently operated by the operator, and the operation portion A122 when the inner frame 12 is opened from the outer frame 11. Or, due to a collision of another member against the key A140, an external force is applied to the operation part A122 or the key A140 in a direction orthogonal to the pushing direction or the insertion direction (direction parallel to the plane containing arrows U, D and arrows L, R). When this is applied, the switch device A120, the key device A130 or the key A140 tilts, and there is a risk that the box cover A200 (in particular, the operation wall portion A210 and the covering portion A270) will be deformed and damaged due to their contact. .

On the other hand, erected walls A280 and A290 are erected on the rear surface (inner surface, surface facing the arrow B direction) of the operation wall portion A210. 117(a) and 117(b).

As a result, the standing walls A280 and A290 are erected (functioning as ribs) to improve the rigidity of the operation wall portion A210. The erected walls A280 and A290 can function as means).
As a result, deformation of the box cover A200 (in particular, the operation wall portion A210 and the covering portion A270) can be suppressed, and damage thereof can be suppressed.

Further, when the switch device A120 or the key device A130 is tilted by the action of an external force, the outer surfaces of the switch device A120 or the key device A130 are brought into contact with the inner surfaces of the erected walls A280 and A290, thereby It is possible to suppress (regulate) the tilting of the key device A130. That is, the portion that abuts on the switch device A120 or the key device A130 to suppress its tilting is shared not only by the operation wall portion A210 or the cover portion A270 but also by the erected walls A280 and A290, and the load is increased accordingly. can be dispersed. From this point as well, damage to the box cover A200 can be suppressed.

Furthermore, since the erected end surfaces of the erected walls A280 and A290 are in contact with the front surface of the printed circuit board A119, even if a foreign object such as a wire inserted through the openings A250 and A260 reaches the printed circuit board A119, The erected walls A280 and A290 can function as walls against which the tips of foreign objects such as wires hit (walls that restrict further movement). Thus, it is possible to prevent the main controller A110 (printed circuit board A119) from being tampered with.

The standing walls A280 and A290 are formed in a form surrounding the switch device A120 and the key device A130 together with the lower wall portion A203 (see FIG. 118(b)). That is, an area AS1 where the upright end surfaces (surfaces in the direction of arrow B) of the erected walls A280 and A290 and the seating surface A206 of the lower wall portion A203 and the front surface (surface in the direction of arrow F) of the printed circuit board A119 contact each other. , AS2 are formed in a substantially rectangular frame shape, and are formed as an endless continuous shape (closed shape) (see FIG. 114(a)).

Therefore, the standing walls A280 and A290 can block (divide) a path for foreign objects such as wires to enter the board box A100. That is, even if a foreign object such as a wire inserted through the openings A250 and A260 reaches the printed circuit board A119, it is restricted from advancing outside the space surrounded by the erected walls A280 and A290 and the lower wall portion A203. can be done. Thus, it is possible to prevent the main controller A110 (printed circuit board A119) from being tampered with.

In addition, the standing walls A280 and A290 are formed to surround the switch device A120 and the key device A130 together with the lower wall portion A203. ), not only can the rigidity of the operation wall portion A210 be further improved by function as a supporting portion (deformation suppressing means) for supporting the operation wall portion A210 and the covering portion A270 can be reliably exerted even when an external force acts in any direction within the plane including. As a result, deformation of the box cover A200 (in particular, the operation wall portion A210 and the covering portion A270) can be suppressed, and damage thereof can be suppressed.

Note that the first standing wall A291 is arranged in a posture perpendicular to the key A140 in the OFF position and parallel to the key A140 in the ON position. The three erected walls A293 are arranged in a posture orthogonal to the key A140 in the ON position and parallel to the key A140 in the OFF position. Therefore, the standing wall A290 can efficiently function as a support portion (deformation suppressing means) that supports the operation wall portion A210 and the covering portion A270.

That is, of the external forces parallel to the plane containing the arrows U and D and the arrows L and R, when the external forces in the directions of the arrows U and D or the directions of the arrows L and R are applied to the key A140, the standing wall While the load received by A290 (withstand load to be exerted by standing wall A290 as a support portion) is maximized, an external force acts in a direction inclined by a predetermined angle from arrows U and D or arrows L and R. In this case, there is a high possibility that the key A140 will rotate due to the inclination of the direction in which the external force acts. load capacity) is lower. As a result, by arranging the posture of the standing wall A290 as described above, the standing wall A290 can efficiently function as a support portion (deformation suppressing means) that supports the operation wall portion A210 and the covering portion A270. be able to.

The erected walls A280, A290 (the second erected walls A282, A292 and the third erected walls A283, A293) are connected to the lower wall portion A203. The rigidity of A280 and A290 can be increased, and the rigidity of the entire box cover A200 can be increased by connecting the inner surfaces of the operation wall portion A210 and the lower wall portion A203 via the standing walls A280 and A290. Therefore, the function of the erected walls A280 and A290 as supporting portions (deformation suppressing means) for supporting the operation wall portion A210 and the covering portion A270 can be enhanced. As a result, damage to the box cover A200 can be suppressed.

The surface of the printed circuit board A119 to which electronic components are connected by soldering is the surface facing the box base A300 (the side opposite to the surface on which the switch device A120 and the key device A130 are mounted). , A290 and the bearing surface A206 of the lower wall portion A203 (see FIG. 114(a)), no electronic components are mounted or circuits are formed, and the area AS1 , AS2 are formed as flat surfaces.

Therefore, the standing walls A280 and A290 can be easily brought into close contact with the front surface (the arrow F direction side) of the printed circuit board A119, so that the standing walls A280 and A290 and the standing walls A280 and A290 It is possible to suppress the formation of a gap with the printed circuit board A119. Therefore, the standing walls A280 and A290 can reliably function as walls against which the tips of foreign objects such as wires inserted through the openings A250 and A260 abut.

The first erected walls A281, A291, the second erected walls A282, A292, and the third erected walls A283, A293 of the erected walls A280, A290 are formed with tapered surfaces A280a, A290a. The area of the surface (surface on the arrow B direction side) is reduced (see FIGS. 117 and 118). As a result, it is possible to increase the surface pressure of the upright end surface that abuts on the printed circuit board A119, thereby suppressing insertion of a foreign object such as a wire between the printed circuit board A119 and the upright walls A280 and A290.

In this case, the tapered surfaces A280a and A290a are formed on the inner surfaces of the erected walls A280 and A290 on the side of the erected tips (surfaces on the side facing the switch device A120 and the key device A130), thereby improving moldability. At the same time, it is possible to prevent a foreign object such as a wire from being inserted into the board box A100.

That is, by reducing the area of the upright tip surface by the inclined surfaces (tapered surfaces A280a and A290a) that gradually approach the outer surface side toward the upright tip side (in the direction of arrow B), the shape of the upright walls A280 and A290 can be changed. By making the change moderate, the fluidity of the resin in the mold can be ensured. Therefore, moldability can be improved.

Furthermore, when the erected end surfaces of the erected walls A280 and A290 are brought into contact with the front surface of the printed circuit board A119, a groove having a substantially V-shaped cross section can be formed by the tapered surfaces A280a and A290a and the front surface of the printed circuit board A119 ( See FIGS. 117(a) and 117(b)). Therefore, the tip of a foreign object such as a wire inserted through the openings A250 and A260 can be moved (guided) along the groove described above. In other words, it is possible to make it difficult for the liquid to pass through (into) the space between the erected end surfaces of the erected walls A280 and A290 and the front surface of the printed circuit board A119. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a foreign object such as a wire from being inserted into the board box A100.

A first protrusion A211 and a second protrusion A212 protrude from the front surface (the outer surface, the surface facing the arrow F direction) of the operation wall A210. One end of the first protrusion A211 and the second protrusion A212 is connected to the outer peripheral surface (outer surface) of the covering portion A270 (the base portion A271a or the protrusion A271b of the peripheral wall portion A271) (FIGS. 115(a) and 115( b) see).

Thereby, the first protrusion A211 and the second protrusion A212 can be made to function as ribs for increasing rigidity, and the covering portion A270 can be supported by the first protrusion A211 and the second protrusion A212. As a result, when the outer surfaces of the switch device A120 and the key device A130 are brought into contact with the inner surface of the covering portion A270, the rigidity of the ridges A211 and 222 is used to prevent the switch device A120 and the key device A130 from tilting. While being able to suppress reliably, damage to covering part A270 can be suppressed.

In addition, on the front surface (outer surface, arrow F direction side) of the operation wall portion A210, a display portion is provided at a position adjacent to the other end of the first protrusion A211 and the second protrusion A212 (on the extension line of the other end). (“ON” and “OFF”) are formed respectively. As a result, the first protrusion A211 and the second protrusion A212 can also function as an indication line for indicating the position corresponding to the predetermined information displayed by the display unit. Therefore, the product cost can be reduced accordingly.

In this case, the position where one end of the first protrusion A211 is connected to the outer peripheral surface (outer surface) of the covering portion A270 (the protrusion A271b of the peripheral wall portion A271) corresponds to the end surface of the key A140 in the OFF position (the surface gripped with the fingers). (narrow surface along the outer edge of the key A140) and the same phase position (position facing the end surface of the key A140) (see FIG. 115(a)). The position connected to the outer peripheral surface (outer surface) of the base A271a) is at the same phase position as the end surface of the key A140 in the ON position (see FIG. 115(b)).

As a result, an external force acts on the key A140 in the OFF position, and the key A140 covers the end face in the direction of the arrow U (the narrow face along the outer edge of the face gripped by the fingers) with the covering portion A270 (end face wall portion A272). ), the first projection A211 is positioned on the extension line of the load input from the key A140 (see FIG. 115(a)), and the ON position When an external force acts on the key A140 located in the key A140 and the key A140 is tilted in a direction (arrow L direction) in which the end surface of the key A140 on the arrow L direction side contacts the cover portion A270 (end surface wall portion A272), the The second ridge A212 is positioned on the extension of the load input from the key A140 (see FIG. 115(b)).

As a result, when the key device A130 is tilted by the action of an external force, the load is input from the end surface of the key A140 (the narrow surface along the outer edge of the surface gripped by the fingers) (the end surface of the key A140 abuts). The portion to be covered) can be efficiently reinforced by the first protrusion A211 and the second protrusion A212. As a result, damage to the covering portion A270 can be suppressed.

It should be noted that the second connection wall A230 can prevent the key A140 in the off position from being subjected to an external force in the direction opposite to that described above (a force displacing the key A140 in the direction of arrow D) (see FIG. 115(a)). )), the first connection wall portion A220 can suppress the application of an external force in the direction opposite to the above-described case (the force displacing the key A140 in the direction of arrow R) to the key A140 in the on position (see FIG. 115 (b)).

That is, as will be described later, the operation wall portion A210 is formed in a horizontally long rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and the other side (arrow D direction side) is open (connection wall is not formed). Further, the key device A130 is positioned on one side (first connection wall A220 side) of the center in the longitudinal direction (directions of arrows L and R) of the operation wall portion A210 (second region), and the third region from the key device A130. The distance to the connection wall portion A240 is increased.

Therefore, since there is a space on the open side and a space on the side of the third connection wall A240, the operator's hand or other components on the side of those spaces collide with the key A140, causing the key A140 to move toward the arrow D. An external force displacing in the direction or the arrow L direction is likely to act. Therefore, by forming the first protrusion A211 and the second protrusion A212 on the side of suppressing (receiving) the tilting of the key device A130 against such an external force, it is possible to reduce the material cost and secure the rigidity. can be done efficiently.

As described above, the square portions A272b of the end wall portion A272 are arranged at two locations with a phase difference of approximately 180 degrees, and are formed in a substantially triangular shape when viewed from the front (as viewed in the direction of arrow B). In this case, the two sides (the outer edge and the edge forming the opening A260) of the triangular portion A272b are set to different lengths (that is, the front view shape is formed as a scalene triangle).

Specifically, with respect to the key A140 in the off position, the rectangular portion A272b on the side closer to the first connection wall portion A220 is the side (outer edge) of the side facing the gripping surface (surface gripped with fingers) of the key A140. The length of the key A140 is longer (larger), and the rectangular portion A272b on the far side (opposite side across the key A140) from the first connection wall portion A220 with respect to the key A140 in the OFF position is the gripping surface of the key A140. The length of the side (outer edge) on the side facing is shortened (reduced) (see FIG. 115(a)).

Therefore, in other words, the rectangular portion A272b on the side closer to the first connection wall portion A220 has the length dimension of the side (outer edge) on the side facing the gripping surface (surface gripped with fingers) of the key A140 in the ON position. is shortened (reduced), and the side (outer edge) of the rectangular portion A272b on the far side from the first connection wall A220 is long (large) on the side facing the gripping surface of the key A140 in the ON position. (See FIG. 115(b)).

As described above, due to the space on the open side and the space on the side of the third connection wall A240, the operator's hand or other components in those spaces collide with the key A140, and the key A140 is likely to be displaced in the direction of arrow D or in the direction of arrow L, according to the square portion A272b of this embodiment, the side of the side that receives the key A140 to which the external force in the direction of arrow D or arrow F is applied Since the length dimension of the (outer edge) is increased, the rigidity of the rectangular portion A272b is efficiently increased, and tilting of the key A140 (key device A130) can be reliably suppressed. In addition, it is possible to suppress damage to the square portion A272b by suppressing the surface pressure.

The outer surface on the front side of the board box A100 (the surface in the direction of the arrow F) includes a first area formed by the front wall portion A201 and an operation wall positioned closer to the main controller A110 than the first area. A second region formed by a portion A210, and openings A250 and A260 are formed in the second region.

As a result, the openings A250 and A260 are arranged at positions recessed from the outer surface of the board box A100 (the box cover A200) (the first area formed by the front wall portion A201), and the first area and the second area are connected. Stepped portions (first connection wall portion A220, second connection wall portion A230, and third connection wall portion A240) can be arranged around the openings A250 and A260. As a result, compared to the case where the openings A250 and A260 are formed in the front wall portion A201 (the first region), the distance to the openings A250 and A260 can be increased for a person who commits fraud. By making the openings A250 and A260 difficult to see, it is possible to make it difficult to directly insert the tip of a foreign object such as a wire into the opening A260.

Considering heat dissipation from the main controller A110, the board box A100 has a distance from the main controller A110 (for example, a distance between the front surface of the printed circuit board A119 and the inner surface of the box cover A200 (internal space )) must be ensured. On the other hand, if the openings A250 and A260 are too far from the switch device A120 and the key device A130, the operability deteriorates.

In this case, by forming the openings A250 and A260 in the operation wall portion A210 (second region), it is possible to easily ensure the operability of the switch device A120 and the key device A130, and as described above, the openings A250, A260 are formed. It is possible to prevent a foreign object such as a wire from being inserted from A260 into the board box A100. However, when the switch device A120 or the key device A130 is operated, the steps connecting the first area and the second area (the first connection wall A220, the second connection wall A230 and the third connection wall A240) are difficult to work on. The hand of the person (operator) interferes and interferes with the operation. Therefore, operability deteriorates when operating the switch device A120 and the key device A130.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the first connection wall A220 is formed to be inclined (downwardly inclined) toward the main controller A110 as it goes from the front wall A201 toward the operation wall A210. , the space on the front side (arrow F direction side) of the operation wall portion A210 can be expanded by the amount of this inclination (the space on the front side of the first connection wall portion A220). As a result, it is possible to improve operability when operating the switch device A120 and the key device A130.

The operation wall portion A210 (second region) has a length dimension along one direction (directions of arrows L and R) that is perpendicular to the other direction (arrows U and D 115(a) and 115(b).

The key device A130 is arranged such that the posture of the key A140 in the OFF position is aligned with the above-described other directions (directions of arrows U and D) (see FIG. 115(a)). That is, the key A140 in the off position faces the longitudinal direction (directions of arrows L and R) of the operation wall portion A210 (the second region), and the key A140 in the front view (direction of arrow B). The longitudinal direction of is along the lateral direction (directions of arrows U and D) of the operation wall portion A210 (second region).

As a result, it is possible to secure a space on the sides (right and left sides in FIG. 115(a)) desired to be gripped with fingers of the key A140 in the OFF position. Therefore, when the key A140 is inserted into the key device A130 or pulled out from the key device A130, the fingers holding the key A140 (for example, thumb and forefinger) connect the first area and the second area (first connection wall). Interference with the portion A220, the second connection wall portion A230, and the third connection wall portion A240) can be suppressed. As a result, it is possible to improve the operability when operating the key device A130.

In this case, the key device A130 is located on one side (first connection wall A220 side) of the center of the operation wall A210 (second region) in the longitudinal direction (directions of arrows L and R). Thus, since the first connection wall portion A220 is formed to be inclined downward, when the key A140 is gripped with fingers and operated (rotated from the OFF position to the ON position or vice versa), the key A140 can be Fingers different from the gripping fingers can be prevented from interfering with the steps (the first connection wall A220, the second connection wall A230, and the third connection wall A240) connecting the first area and the second area. As a result, it is possible to improve the operability when operating the key device A130.

For example, when holding the key A140 in the OFF position with the index finger and thumb, the little finger and the ring finger can be placed using the space secured by the downward slope of the first connection wall A220, and the key A140 can be moved from the OFF position to the ON position. When operating (rotating) the F key A140, the little finger and ring finger can be displaced (moved) using the space secured by the downward inclination of the first connection wall portion A220.

When the key A140 in the ON position is gripped with the index finger and the thumb, the operation wall portion A210 (second area) is formed into a horizontally long rectangle in front view, and the key device A130 is used for operation. Positioned on one side of the longitudinal center of the wall portion A210 (second region), and arranged using the space on the other longitudinal direction side (arrow R direction side) secured on the front side of the operation wall portion A210. When operating (rotating) the key A140 from the off position to the on position, the little finger and ring finger can be displaced (moved) using the space on the other side in the longitudinal direction (arrow R direction side). can.

In the switch device A120, the projecting tip surface (face in the direction of arrow F) of the operating portion A122 in the initial position (height from the operation wall portion A210) is aligned with the projecting portion of the covering portion A270. It is set at a lower position (smaller dimension) than the position of the tip surface (the front surface of the end wall portion A272, the surface in the direction of the arrow F) (standing height from the operation wall portion A210). Therefore, interference between the operation unit A122 and fingers when operating the key A140 can be suppressed.

The operation wall portion A210 (second region) has connection surfaces (first connection wall portion A220 and third connection wall A220 and portion A240) is formed, and a connection surface (second connection wall portion A230) is formed on one side in the short direction (direction of arrow U), and on the other side in the short direction (direction of arrow D) , the connection surface is non-formed.

Thereby, the other side (arrow D direction side) in the short direction of the operation wall portion A210 (second region) can be opened. That is, by such opening, the space on the front side of the operation wall portion A210 (second area) can be communicated with the outside space. Therefore, when the key A140 is gripped with fingers and operated (inserted into the key device A130, pulled out from the key device A130, rotated from the off position to the on position, or vice versa), the key A140 is Use the space (external space) communicated with the above-mentioned opening as a space for arranging and displacing (moving) fingers (little finger and ring finger) different from the gripping fingers (for example, thumb and index finger). can be done. As a result, it is possible to improve the operability when operating the key device A130.

Here, as described above, considering the heat radiation from the main controller A110, the substrate box A100 is located at a distance from the main controller A110 (for example, between the front surface of the printed circuit board A119 and the inner surface of the box cover A200). distance (internal space)) must be secured.

In this case, the steps (first connection wall A220, second connection wall A230 and third connection wall A240) connecting the front wall A201 (first area) and the operation wall A210 (second area) , the first connection wall portion A220 is inclined downward from the first region to the second region, while the second connection wall portion A230 and the third connection wall portion A240 are formed by the front wall portion A201 (first region) and the It is formed in a form substantially orthogonal to the operation wall portion A210 (second region).

That is, by inclining the first connection wall portion A220 downward, interference with the fingers is suppressed, and the operability of the key device A130 is improved, while the second connection wall portion A230 and the third connection wall portion A240 are moved downward. By not tilting (only the first connection wall A220 is tilted downward), the volume of the internal space of the board box A100 for coping with heat dissipation from the main controller A110 can be secured.

In this way, even if only the first connection wall portion A220 is inclined downward and the others (the second connection wall portion A230 and the third connection wall portion A240) are not inclined, interference with the fingers can be suppressed. The operation wall portion A210 (second region) has a horizontally long rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and one side (first connection wall portion A220 side) of the longitudinal center of the operation wall portion A210 (second region) ) in which the key device A 130 is placed close to the key device A 130 .

In addition, by forming the third connection wall portion A240 on the other longitudinal direction side (the side opposite to the first connection wall portion A220) of the operation wall portion A210 (second region), the third connection wall portion A240 It is possible to protect the switch device A120 and the key device A130 (key A140). For example, it is possible to prevent the robot arm that handles the substrate box A100 from colliding with the switch device A120 and the key device A130 during manufacturing.

FIG. 120 is a front perspective view of the pachinko machine A10, showing a state in which the inner frame 12 is opened with respect to the outer frame 11. FIG. In addition, in FIG. 120, in order to simplify the drawing and facilitate understanding, illustration of a part of the configuration (for example, various electrical connection lines connected to the main controller A110) is omitted. Symbols are illustrated only for the main components.

As shown in FIG. 120, the pachinko machine A10 has hinges 18 (rotating shafts) for supporting the inner frame 12 on the outer frame 11 as described above. The inner frame 12 is supported by the outer frame 11 so as to be openable and closable toward the front side, with the side on which is provided as an opening/closing axis.

Here, in a state in which the inner frame 12 is opened toward the front side with the hinge 18 as the opening/closing axis, the opening angle can be sufficiently increased (for example, as shown in FIG. 120, approximately 90 degrees). 115 to 119), the operator can stand at a position facing the front of the board box A100 and operate the switch device A120 and the key device A130 can be operated and the operability can be ensured.

On the other hand, if the release angle cannot be sufficiently increased (for example, only about 45 degrees can be secured for the release angle, and the space formed on the back side of the inner frame 12 is opened, the outer frame 11 and the inner frame are separated from each other). 12), the operability of the switch device A120 and the key device A130 is ensured.

That is, the substrate box A100 is configured such that the longitudinal direction of the operation wall A210 (second region) (for example, the directions of arrows R and L in FIG. 115(a)) is substantially orthogonal to the axial direction of the hinge 18 (rotating shaft). 115(a), the lateral direction (arrow U, D direction in FIG. 115(a)) is directed in a direction substantially parallel to the axial direction of the hinge 18 (rotating shaft), and the longitudinal direction one side (arrow in FIG. 115(a) L direction side) is positioned on the hinge 18 side. Therefore, the first connection wall portion A220 is arranged on the side closer to the hinge 18 than the key device A130, and the switch device A120 is arranged on the side farther from the hinge 18 than the key device A130.

As a result, when a hand is inserted between the outer frame 11 and the inner frame 12 to the back of the inner frame 12 (the front of the board box A100) at the same height position as the operation wall A210 (second area), The space between the key device A130 and the third connection wall portion A240 (ie, the operation wall portion A210 (second region)) is formed in the thumb and the palm near the base of the thumb in a horizontally long rectangular shape when viewed from the front. A space on the other longitudinal direction side (arrow R direction side) secured on the front side of the operation wall portion A210 by positioning A130 on one side of the longitudinal direction center of the operation wall portion A210 (second region)) can be placed using

In such a state, it is possible to operate (depress) the operating portion A122 of the switch device A120 with the thumb or forefinger, and to rotate the key A140 of the key device A130. As a space for displacing (moving) the thumb and forefinger holding the key A140, the space secured by downwardly inclining the first connection wall portion A220 can be used. As a result, the operability of the switch device A120 and the key device A130 can be ensured.

Note that the above-described setting change (operation of the switch device A120 and the key device A130) may be performed while the board box A100 is rotated around the rotation axis A410 from the state shown in FIG. Since the switch device A120 and the key device A130 can be positioned closer to the front side (the front side of the outer frame 11), the operability of the switch device A120 and the key device A130 can be improved.

With the inner frame 12 opened toward the front side with the hinge 18 as the opening/closing axis, the circuit board box A100 is further opened toward the front side (the front side of the paper in FIG. 120) with the rotation axis A410 as the opening/closing axis. Also good. As a result, the operator can stand facing the front of the board box A100 at a position where it does not interfere with the outer frame 11, and the switch device A120 and The key device A130 can be operated and its operability can be ensured.

In this case, the main control device A110 (input/output port 205) has various devices (power supply device 115, payout control device 111, sound lamp control device 113, various switches 208, solenoid 209, third The other end (connector) of the electrical connection line, one end of which is connected to the 1-symbol display device 37, the 2-symbol display device 83, the 2-symbol retention lamp 84 (see FIG. 4), is connected respectively.

If operation of the switch device A120 and the key device A130 is permitted regardless of the state of connection of these electrical connection lines to the main control device A110, there is a risk that the switch device A120 and the key device A130 will be more likely to be illegally operated. On the other hand, if the operation of the switch device A120 and the key device A130 is uniformly prohibited regardless of the connection state of a plurality of electrical connection lines, the work (setting change) associated with the operation of the switch device A120 and the key device A130 It may lead to sexual deterioration.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the operability of the switch device A120 and the key device A130 is changed according to the connection state of the electrical connection line with the main control device A110. As a result, fraud can be suppressed and workability can be improved.

Specifically, in the present embodiment, the other end (connector) of the electrical connection lines, of which one end is connected to at least the power supply device 115 and the sound lamp control device 113, is connected to the main control device A110. (input/output port 205), regardless of the connection state of other electrical connection lines (that is, connected, disconnected, or mixedly connected and disconnected) ), the switch device A120 and the key device A130 are allowed to operate. As a result, fraud can be suppressed and workability can be improved.

That is, if a predetermined electrical connection line (the electrical connection line connecting the power supply device 115 and the sound lamp control device 113 to the main control device A110) is not connected to the main control device A110, the switch device A120 and the key device A130 are not connected to the main control device A110. is prohibited, it is possible to prevent the switch device A120 and the key device A130 from being illegally operated.

On the other hand, when the connection of a predetermined electrical connection line (the electrical connection line connecting the power supply device 115 and the sound lamp control device 113 to the main control device A110) to the main control device A110 is ensured and fraud can be suppressed , other electrical connection lines (payout control device 111, various switches 208, solenoid 209, first symbol display device 37, second symbol display device 83, and second symbol reservation lamp 84 are connected to the main controller A110 Even if the main control device A110 is disconnected (extracted) from the main control device A110, the operation (setting change) of the switch device A120 and the key device A130 is allowed, thereby improving workability (ensuring versatility). ) can be achieved.

That is, when the main controller A110 is opened to the front side (the front side of the paper surface of FIG. 120) with the rotation axis A410 as the opening/closing axis, the main control The electrical connection must be released (pulled out) so that the rotation of the device A110 is not restricted).

Therefore, in a configuration in which operation (change of settings) of the switch device A120 and the key device A130 is not permitted unless all of the electrical connection lines are connected to the main controller A110, the main controller A110 is set to a predetermined position (switch device A120 and key device A130 are rotated to a position where it is easy to operate), and then the electrical connection line released (disconnected) from the main controller A110 needs to be reconnected to the main controller A110.

In particular, when the main controller A110 is displaced (rotated) away from the back surface of the inner frame 12 and the length of the electrical connection wire is insufficient, an extension wire is interposed to release (remove) the electrical connection wire. It is necessary to reconnect the electrical connection line to the main controller A110, which is troublesome.

In contrast, in this embodiment, if a predetermined electrical connection line (electrical connection line connecting the power supply device 115 and the sound lamp control device 113 to the main controller A110) is connected to the main controller A110, Since the operation (change of setting) of the switch device A120 and the key device A130 is permitted, other electrical connection lines (payout control device 111, various switches 208, solenoid 209, first symbol display device 37, second symbol display It is unnecessary to reconnect (reconnect) the device 83 and the electrical connection line that connects the second symbol holding lamp 84 to the main controller A110 by interposing an extension line.

As a result, it is possible to arrange the main controller A110 in a position where it is easy to operate the switch device A120 and the key device A130, and at the same time, it is possible to reduce labor and improve workability associated with the operation (setting change) of the switch device A120 and the key device A130. can be improved.

Next, with reference to FIG. 121, the board box A2100 in the eighth embodiment will be described. In the seventh embodiment, the entire back surface of the end wall portion A272 is formed as a flat surface, but the end wall portion A2272 in the eighth embodiment has a ridge A2273 projecting from the back surface. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

121(a) is a partially enlarged rear view of the board box A2100 in the eighth embodiment, and FIG. 121(b) is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the board box A2100 taken along the cutting line CXXIb-CXXIb of FIG. 121(a). is.

Note that FIG. 121(a) corresponds to FIG. 110(b). Also, in FIG. 121(b), only the cross-sectional view is shown in order to simplify the drawing and facilitate understanding.

As shown in FIG. 121, an end wall portion A2272 of the covering portion A2270 of the eighth embodiment is provided with a ridge A2273 protruding from the rear surface (the inner surface, the surface on the arrow B direction side). The protrusion A2273 is a portion (protrusion) that extends in a striped shape while maintaining a substantially semicircular cross-sectional shape, and is located at the outer edge of the end wall portion A2272 (the tip of the projecting direction projecting radially inward from the peripheral wall portion A271). side edge) in a predetermined range.

Specifically, the range in which the ridge A2273 is formed is the position facing the end A133c (see FIG. 113) of the main body A133 of the key device A130 and the range along the outer edge of the rectangular portion A272b (position The range between the positions AP1 and AP3 including the AP2, and the range between the positions AP4 and AP6 including the position AP5) and one side of the rectangular portion A272b (radially inward from the peripheral wall portion A271). (the side with a larger overhang dimension) along the inner edge of the annular portion A272a (the range between the positions AP3 and AP4), and in this range (the range between the positions AP1 and AP6) Formed continuously.

The projecting dimension from the rear surface of the end wall portion A2272 (annular portion A272a and square portion A272b) of the ridge A2273 is set to a constant value in the range between the position AP3 and the position AP4, The value gradually changes toward the position AP2 toward the position AP1 and gradually changes to a smaller value toward the position AP2, and is set to the same value as the position AP3 at the position AP2. Similarly, the projecting dimension gradually changes to a larger value from the position AP4 to the position AP5, and gradually changes to a smaller value from the position AP5 to the position AP6, reaching the same value as the position AP4 at the position AP6. set. Also, the position AP2 and the position AP5 are set to the same value (projection dimension).

Thus, the rigidity of the end wall portion A2272 can be increased by protruding the ridge A2273 from the end wall portion A2272. Therefore, the key A140 inserted into the key device A130 receives a force in a direction perpendicular to the insertion direction (in a direction parallel to the plane containing the arrows U, D and the arrows L, R), and the key device A130 tilts. , the breakage of the end wall portion A2272 can be suppressed when the key A140 abuts against the inner edge of the end wall portion A2272.

Since the ridge A2273 is formed at a position facing (opposing) the end A133c (see FIG. 113) of the main body A133 of the key device A130, the back surface of the end wall A2272 and the key device A130 (the end A133c of the main body A133) ) can be made smaller to prevent a foreign object such as a wire from being inserted into the board box A2100 through the gap.

Here, in the present embodiment, the projecting length A2273 in the range between the positions AP3 and AP4 is the distance between the rear surface of the end wall portion A2272 and the front surface of the end portion A133c of the main body A133 of the key device A130. It is set to a value approximately equal to the facing distance between the two. Therefore, the protruding tip (arrow B direction side) of the projection A2273 contacts the front of the end A133c (see FIG. 113) of the main body A133 of the key device A130.

This eliminates the gap between the rear surface of the end wall portion A2272 and the front surface of the key device A130 (the end portion A133c of the main body A133), so that a foreign object such as a wire can be inserted into the board box A2100 through the gap. can be suppressed.

In particular, at positions AP2 and AP5, the projecting dimension of the projection A2273 is set to a large value, so that the elastic deformation of the rectangular portion A272b formed as a plate (cantilever beam) with a free outer edge side is used. As a result, the protrusion A2273 in the range from position AP1 to position AP3 and from position AP4 to position AP6 can be brought into firm contact with the front surface of the key device A130 (end A133c of main body A133). As a result, it is possible to more reliably prevent a foreign object such as a wire from being inserted into the board box A2100 through the gap between the rear surface of the end wall portion A2272 and the front surface of the key device A130 (the end portion A133c of the main body A133). .

Also, in this way, the protruding tip (arrow B direction side) of the projection A2273 is in contact with the front of the end A133c (see FIG. 113) of the main body A133 of the key device A130, so that the key device A130 Even if the end wall A2272 is accidentally pushed in the insertion direction by the key A140 when the key A140 is inserted into the key A140, deformation of the end wall A2272 in the insertion direction can be suppressed. Therefore, it is possible to suppress damage to the base end side of the end wall portion A2272 (the side connected to the peripheral wall portion A271).

Next, with reference to FIG. 122, the board box A3100 in the ninth embodiment will be described. In the seventh embodiment, the switch device A120 and the key device A130 are arranged closer to the rotation axis A410 (arrow R direction side) than the longitudinal direction (arrow L, R direction) center of the board box A100 (box cover A200). However, the switch device A120 and the key device A130 in the ninth embodiment are arranged farther from the rotation axis A410 than the longitudinal center of the board box A3100 (box cover A3200). In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

FIG. 122(a) is a front view of the board box A3100 in the ninth embodiment, and FIG. 122(b) is a schematic front view of the pachinko machine A3010. Note that FIG. 122(b) shows a state in which the substrate box A3100 is displaced (rotated) to the maximum movable position (second position) within the movable range (rotatable range). In addition, in FIG. 122(b), only the main configuration is schematically illustrated in order to simplify the drawing and facilitate understanding.

Here, the circuit board box A3100 in the ninth embodiment differs from the circuit board box A100 in the seventh embodiment in terms of the formation position of the operation wall part A210 and the opening A260 (cover part A270, key While the arrangement of the device A130) and the opening A250 (the guide wall A251, the switch device A120) is different, the other configurations are the same, so the description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 122, in the board box A3100 of the ninth embodiment, the operation wall portion A210 is formed on the far side (arrow L direction side) from the rotation axis A410 relative to the longitudinal center of the box cover A3200. Three sides of the front wall portion A210 are connected to the front wall portion A201 by a first connection wall portion A220, a second connection wall portion A230, and a third connection wall portion A240.

An opening AOP1, an opening A260 (covering portion A270) and an opening A250 (guide wall A251) are formed in the operation wall portion A210, and the switch device A120 and the key device A130 can be operated through these openings A250 and A260. be done.

In this case, in the present embodiment, the switch device A120 is arranged farther from the rotation axis A410 (the side closer to the first connection wall A220, the arrow L direction side) than the key device A130.
That is, the arrangement is the reverse of the arrangement in the seventh embodiment.

Here, the movable range (rotatable range) when the substrate box A3100 is rotated around the rotation axis A410 is the first position (disposed during the game) that is disposed on the back side of the inner frame 12. position, see FIG. 120), the second position ( That is, it is set within a range of approximately 180° up to a position facing the same side as the display surface of the third pattern display device 81 (see FIG. 122(b)).

As a result, the substrate box A3100 is arranged (displaced) at a position where the switch device A120 and the key device A130 can be operated while viewing the information displayed on the third pattern display device 81 (for example, information about setting changes, set values). )be able to. As a result, it is possible to operate while confirming the display (information), so that it is possible to easily grasp the operation state of the switch device A120 and the key device A130 based on the display (information). As a result, operability can be improved, and operation errors can be suppressed.

On the other hand, when the switch device A120 and the key device A130 are not operated, it can be placed on the back side of the pachinko machine A3010 (inner frame 12) (that is, a position that is difficult to be visually recognized from the outside, see FIG. 120), so fraud is performed. (unauthorized operation of the switch device A120 and the key device A130).

In particular, in this embodiment, the surface on which the switch device A120 and the key device A130 of the board box A3100 are arranged (the front surface of the operation wall portion A210) and the display surface of the third pattern display device 81 are oriented in the same direction (arrow The substrate box A3100 can be displaced (rotated) to a position in which the direction B) is desired (both sides are substantially parallel in this embodiment). The angle between the front surface of the operation wall A210 and the display surface of the third pattern display device 81 is preferably set within a range of approximately 0° to approximately 45°.

In other words, the substrate is placed at a position where the surface on which the switch device A120 and the key device A130 of the substrate box A3100 are arranged (the front surface of the operation wall portion A210) and the display surface of the third pattern display device 81 can be visually recognized at the same time. Box A3100 can be displaced (rotated). As a result, it is possible to eliminate the need to take an unreasonable posture such as putting the hand around the back side of the pachinko machine A3010 in order to operate the switch device A120 and the key device A130 while viewing the third pattern display device 81. .

As a result, it becomes easier to operate the switch device A120 and the key device A130 while confirming the information displayed on the third pattern display device 81 (for example, information about setting changes), thereby improving the operability and preventing mistakes in operation. can be achieved more reliably.

Further, as described above, the operation wall portion A210 is formed on the far side (arrow L direction side) from the rotation axis A410 from the longitudinal center of the box cover A3200, and the switch device A120 and the keys are mounted on the operation wall portion A210. An apparatus A130 is provided.

As a result, the board box A3100 is placed in a position where the switch device A120 and the key device A130 are arranged (the front face of the operation wall portion A210) and the display surface of the third pattern display device 81 can be viewed at the same time. With the box A3100 displaced (rotated) (see FIG. 122(b)), the switch device A120 and the key device A130 are positioned further from the outer edge of the pachinko machine A10 (inner frame 12) (right side of FIG. 122(b)). can be placed in Therefore, it is possible to prevent the fingers operating the switch device A120 (operation unit A122) and the key device A130 (key A140) from interfering with the outer edge of the pachinko machine A10 (inner frame 12). As a result, operability can be improved.

Here, in the setting change mode, it is necessary to repeatedly press the switch device A120 (operation unit A122), and the frequency of operation of the switch device A120 is higher than that of the key device A130.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the switch device A120, which is operated more frequently than the key device A130, is located farther from the rotation axis A410 (that is, closer to the first connection wall A220) than the key device A130. are placed. As a result, the switch device A120, which is frequently operated, can be arranged at a position farther from the outer edge of the pachinko machine A10 (inner frame 12) (right side in FIG. 122(b)). Therefore, it is possible to more reliably prevent the finger operating the switch device A120 (operation unit A122) from interfering with the outer edge of the pachinko machine A10 (inner frame 12). As a result, operability can be improved.

Furthermore, since the switch device A120 is arranged adjacent to the first connection wall portion A220, the space formed by the inclination of the first connection wall portion A220 is also used when operating the switch device A120 (operation portion A122). It can be used as a space (a space for avoiding interference between fingers and the box cover A3200). As a result, the operability can be improved also from this point.

Here, the pachinko machine A3010 in the ninth embodiment has the board box A3100 up to the second position described above (the position where the front of the operation wall A210 faces the front of the pachinko machine A3010, see FIG. 122(b)). When displaced (rotated), it engages with the board box A3100 to restrict the displacement (rotation) of the board box A3100 in the direction toward the first position (i.e., fix the board box A3100 to the second position). ). This eliminates the need to hold the board box A3100 by hand when operating the switch device A120 and the key device A130, thereby improving operability.

The restricting means uses the magnetic force (attractive force) of the magnet to fix (hold) the board box A3100 at the second position (when a force exceeding the attractive force is applied, the first a projecting member that is allowed to be displaced (rotated) in a direction toward a position), and has a projecting member that is located at the projecting position by the elastic recovery force of an elastically deformed biasing means (for example, a coil spring), and is located at the projecting position The projecting member engaged with the board box A3100 placed at the second position restricts the displacement (rotation) of the board box A3100 in the direction toward the first position (biasing means from the projecting position). When the protruding member is retracted against the urging force of , displacement (rotation) of the board box A3100 in the direction toward the first position is permitted).

Next, with reference to FIG. 123, the board box A4100 in the tenth embodiment will be described. In the seventh embodiment, the case where the rotation axis A410 of the board box A100 is arranged along the vertical direction (arrow U, D direction) of the pachinko machine A10 has been described, but the rotation axis A4410 in the tenth embodiment is It is arranged in a posture along the width direction (horizontal direction, arrow L, R direction) of the pachinko machine A4010. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

FIG. 123(a) is a front view of the board box A4100 in the tenth embodiment, and FIG. 123(b) is a schematic front view of the pachinko machine A4010. Note that FIG. 123(b) shows a state in which the substrate box A4100 is displaced (rotated) to the maximum movable position (second position) within the movable range (rotatable range), and is displaced to the first position. The (rotated) board box A4100 is shown in dashed lines. In addition, in FIG. 123(b), only the main configuration is schematically illustrated in order to simplify the drawing and facilitate understanding.

Here, the circuit board box A4100 in the tenth embodiment differs from the circuit board box A100 in the seventh embodiment in the arrangement (placement position and direction) and the number of rotation shafts A4410, but other configurations are the same. Therefore, description thereof is omitted.

As shown in FIG. 123, the substrate box A4100 in the tenth embodiment includes a pair of rotating shafts A4410 protruding from the sealing unit A400 and the sub-cover A500 in the direction of separating from each other. The pair of rotation shafts A4410 are located on one side of the board box A4100 in the short direction (directions of arrows U and D) (opposite side of the operation wall portion A210, direction of arrow U), (L, R directions) are formed in a posture protruding outward along the longitudinal direction of the board box A4100 from both ends. Also, the pair of rotation shafts A4410 are arranged coaxially.

Here, the movable range (rotatable range) when the board box A4100 is rotated about the rotation axis A4410 is the first position (disposed during game play) at which the movable range (rotatable range) is arranged on the back side of the inner frame 12 123(b)) in a direction away from the back surface of the inner frame 12 (direction of arrow B), and the front surface of the box cover 4200 (operation wall portion A210) is vertical. It is set within a range of approximately 90° up to the second position facing upward (in the direction of arrow U) (that is, the position where the board box A4100 protrudes most toward the rear side of the inner frame 12, see FIG. 123(b)). .

As a result, in the second position, the operation wall portion A210 can be directed upward, and the release side thereof (opposite side to the second connection wall portion A230) can be directed toward the side where the operator is present. And the operability of the key device A130 can be improved.

On the other hand, at the first position, the front surface of the operation wall portion A210 can face the rear surface of another component provided on the inner frame 12. As shown in FIG. Therefore, the separate parts can face the switch device A120 and the key device A130, and the switch device A120 and the key device A130 can be arranged at positions where it is difficult to operate. As a result, it is possible to prevent tampering (unauthorized operation of the switch device A120 and the key device A130).

Further, in the present embodiment, when the key A140 is inserted into the key device A130, even if the board box A4100 is displaced (rotated) toward the first position, the key A140 contacts another member of the inner frame 12. The contact prevents the board box A4100 from being placed at the first position. As a result, forgetting to pull out the key A140 can be suppressed. Therefore, it is possible to suppress illegal acquisition of the key A140 that has been forgotten to be pulled out.

In particular, in the present embodiment, the second position of the board box A4100 is positioned lower than the first position in the direction of gravity (vertical direction), so as described above, the key A140 is inserted into the key device A130. When the board box A4100 is displaced (rotated) toward the first position in this state, the board box A4100 can then be displaced (rotated) to the second position by its own weight. Therefore, the operator can easily recognize that the board box A4100 cannot be placed at the first position.

In addition, when the substrate box A4100 is displaced (rotated) to the first position, a part of the separate member is closer to the front side of the operation wall portion A210 than the front wall portion A201 of the box cover 4200. It is preferable to have a shape to enter into. As a result, the space formed on the front side of the operation wall portion A210 can be reduced, and unauthorized operation of the switch device A120 and the key device A130 can be suppressed.

Although the present invention has been described based on the above embodiments, the present invention is by no means limited to the above embodiments, and it will be easily understood that various modifications and improvements are possible without departing from the scope of the present invention. It can be inferred.

In each of the above embodiments, part or all of the configuration in one embodiment may be combined with or replaced with part or all of the configuration in another embodiment to form another embodiment.

In the above-described first embodiment, a case has been described in which the projecting portion 154 decelerates the ball flowing down the ball falling unit 150, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the flow resistance of the sphere may be increased by placing an adhesive member on the inner surface, air may be sent into the flow path, or the flow speed of the sphere may be adjusted by magnetic force. You can

In the first embodiment, the case where the displacement restricting device 180 is disposed on the rear case 510 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the displacement restricting device 180 may be arranged on the side of the movable accessory. A displacement regulating device 180 may be provided on the back side of the effect member 700 so that the extension width to the back side can be changed by a pushing operation.

In this case, it is possible to restrict the displacement of the effect member 700 by configuring the body portion 183a of the operating member 183 of the displacement restricting device 180 to be inserted through the rear case 510 in a state in which the overhang width is long. can. On the other hand, the production member 700 can be displaced by disengaging the operation member 183 from being inserted into the rear case 510 in a state in which the operation member 183 is operated to shorten the overhang width. Along with the displacement, the displacement restricting device 180 is also displaced. Therefore, by adding a designed shape to the displacement regulating device 180 or arranging a light emitting device such as an LED, the displacement regulating device 180 can be visually recognized by the player.

In the first embodiment described above, the case where the state change of the displacement restricting device 180 is caused by manual operation has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the displacement restricting device 180 may include a driving device, and the arrangement of the operating member 183 may be electrically switched. In this case, by controlling the displacement restricting device 180 to be in the restricted state prior to the initial operation after the power is turned on, it is possible to prevent the enlargement/reduction unit 600 from starting to move while the displacement restricting device 180 remains in the restricted state. can do. As a result, it is possible to prevent the operation member 183 from being overloaded.

Further, a cushioning material having a high cushioning property may be arranged around the cylindrical portion 183d of the operation member 183. FIG. Further, when a detection sensor capable of detecting the arrangement of the operation member 183 is provided without driving the displacement restricting device 180, and the detecting sensor determines that the displacement restricting device 180 is in the restricting state. Alternatively, the enlargement/reduction unit 600 may be controlled not to start driving.

In the first embodiment, the case where the displacement restricting device 180 is arranged on the back side of the back case 510 has been described, but it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be arranged on at least one of the upper and lower sides of the rear case 510, may be arranged on at least one of the left and right sides of the rear case 510, or may be a combination thereof.

For example, in order to maintain the arrangement of the production member 700, it is sufficient to prevent the arrangement change of the lower arm member 630. Therefore, a recess is provided in the upper surface of the lower arm member 630 in the production standby state, and from the upper side of the back case 510 By constructing the cylindrical portion 183d of the operation member 183 to engage with a recess provided in the lower arm member 630 when the cylindrical portion 183d of the operation member 183 protrudes, the lower arm member 630 is prevented from being displaced in the left-right direction. can be done.

In the above-described first embodiment, the case where the displacement restricting device 180 is provided as an example of a device for restricting the displacement of the scaling unit 600 arranged above the game area has been described, but it is not necessarily limited to this. . For example, by disposing a device for regulating (restricting) the displacement of the granular member 320 (a member capable of freely displacing the internal space IE1) of the injection device 400, the granular member 320 displaces the internal space IE1 at the time of shipment. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the partition member 310 from rubbing against the wall surface of the partition member 310 , cracking the granular member 320 , and scratching the partition member 310 .

For example, the granular member 320 can be prevented from exceeding the lid member 480 and displacing the internal space IE1 by shipping the lid member 480 in the state of being placed at the displacement end position on the entry side (the effect standby state). Therefore, it is possible to limit the range of the partitioning member 310 with which the granular members 320 can come into contact at the time of shipment. can.

Further, as another example, a granular member 320 is disposed on the lower support member 163 of the light guide plate rendering means 160, configured to be able to protrude into the internal space IE1 of the partition member 310, and arranged in the internal space IE1 in the protruding state. A protruding member configured to limit the displacement of is also provided.

The projecting member can be pushed from the front side of the lower support member 163 (the front side of the game board 13), and can be switched between the projecting state and the non-projecting state each time the pushing operation is performed. After the pachinko machine 10 is installed in the game machine parlor, the projecting member can be operated from the front side by opening the front frame 14, so that the operability of the projecting member can be improved.

In addition, the aspect of the state change of the projecting member is not limited at all. For example, like the displacement restricting device 180, the state may be changed by a latch mechanism, or the state may be changed by engaging and disengaging claws.

As another example, the arrangement of the granular members 320 may be maintained by shipping the partitioning member 310 in a state where the internal air pressure is increased. In this case, by installing the pachinko machine 10 in a game machine parlor and lowering the air pressure inside the partitioning member 310 before starting operation, the granular members 320 can be arranged freely.

As another example, the granular member 320 may be formed by mixing ferromagnetic metal powder with the resin material of the granular member 320, and the magnet may be arranged near the lower end of the partition member 310 at the time of shipment. Accordingly, the arrangement of the granular members 320 can be maintained by the magnetic force of the magnet during shipment. On the other hand, during operation, the granular member 320 can be freely arranged by removing the magnet.

Note that the magnet is not limited to one that needs to be removed during operation. For example, a magnet may be arranged on a part of another movable accessory, and as an example, a magnet may be arranged on the lid member 480 .

In addition, in a mode in which ferromagnetic metal powder is mixed in the granular member 320, for example, after execution of the shooting effect, an operation is performed so as to generate a magnetic force near the partitioning member 310 (for example, to bring the magnet closer to the partitioning member 310). By arranging the performance accessories that operate, it is possible to include a performance mode in which the granular member 320 is stopped in the air (visible as if it is floating) in the shooting performance.

In the first embodiment described above, the case where the displacement restricting device 180 that restricts the displacement of the scaling unit 600 is fixed to the back case 510 has been described, but this is not necessarily the case.
For example, an insertion hole is formed in the rear case 510 so as to be aligned with the central axis of the regulated hole 657 when the transmission gear 650 of the enlargement/reduction unit 600 is located at the predetermined end position. A metal rod or resin rod is inserted into the regulated hole 657 through the insertion hole and fixed with a tape or the like. The scaling unit 600 may be configured to be displaceable.

On the other hand, with this method, there is a possibility that the pachinko machine 10 may become dirty with the tape for fixing, and it is not possible to throw away the metal rod or resin rod for delivery of the pachinko machine 10 to another store, so storage is not possible. It may be necessary to do so.

Also, if the storage of the metal sticks or resin sticks is entrusted to each game machine store, the possibility of loss increases. may not be possible. It can also be recognized that the displacement restricting device 180 that is fastened and fixed to the rear case 510 is an improvement in this point of view.

In the first embodiment described above, the front-rear width of the internal space IE1 and the front-rear width between the left-right central portion 312b of the curved plate portion 312 and the rear section lower portion 314 are approximately the same, but this is not necessarily the case. isn't it. For example, the front-to-rear width between the left-right central portion 312b and the rear section lower portion 314 may be configured to be as narrow as the front-to-rear width between the left and right portions 312a and the rear section lower portion 314. FIG. In this case, since the movement resistance of the granular member 320 can be increased in the lower side of the internal space IE1 regardless of the lateral position, the momentum of the injected granular member 320 can be reduced. It is possible to reduce the probability that the granular member 320 will be damaged or damaged due to collision.

Also, for example, the front-to-rear width between the left and right portions 312a and the rear section lower portion 314 may be widened to the same extent as the front-to-rear width of the internal space IE1. In this case, the granular member 320 can enter the internal space IE1 without reducing the momentum of the granular member 320 to be injected.

Also, the front-to-rear width of the internal space IE1 does not have to be constant. For example, it may be tapered toward the moving direction (upper side) of the ejected granular member 320 . In this case, the momentum of the granular members 320 can be gradually reduced, so that localized excessive loads on the partitioning members 310 can be easily avoided. Furthermore, by bringing the tapering direction to the front side, the scattering granular members 320 can be easily brought to the front side.

Further, for example, a bump-shaped portion projecting toward the rear side in a manner of protruding toward the rear side may be provided at a portion of the front plate portion 311 where it is expected that the injected granular members 320 will collectively arrive. good. This hump-like portion may be formed by fixing a separate member to the rear surface of the front plate portion 311, or by forming a metal plate so that a portion of the front plate portion 311 protrudes toward the rear surface side. The mold may be configured to have a convex portion.

In the above-described first embodiment, the granular member 320 is configured in the shape of a soccer ball, but the configuration is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may have a spherical shape, a rugby ball shape, or a star shape (a shape in which protrusions are formed three-dimensionally). By configuring the members with a certain size, gaps can be generated between the members, so that the granular members 320 can be violently scattered when the shooting effect is executed.

In the first embodiment, the ejection device 400 is arranged below the back side of the light guide plate 161 and is configured to eject the granular members 320 obliquely forward and upward, but this is not necessarily the case. For example, the injection device 400 may be arranged on the left and right sides of the light guide plate 161 or on the upper side. Even in this case, an effect of shooting the granular member 320 obliquely forward can be executed. When the injection device 400 is arranged at the upper position, it is preferable to add a device for lifting the granular member 320 to the presentation standby position.

In the first embodiment described above, the granular member 320 is formed of a single-color (red in this embodiment) resin member, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, one granular member 320 may be configured by two-color molding or combining two members of different colors. In this case, the appearance at the time of deposition can be devised by color-coding in consideration of the position of the center of gravity. For example, by changing the color at the horizontal position in the stable posture of the granular member 320 in consideration of the position of the center of gravity, it is possible to visually recognize the layer of color when the granular member 320 is deposited.

Also, the number of granular members 320 is not limited, and may be one. For example, a member having approximately the same size as the collision member 420 may be employed as the granular member 320 , and the outer surface may be configured to have a concave curved shape approximately the same as the curved plate portion 421 of the collision member 420 . As a result, how the granular member 320 flies and how it looks changes depending on whether the shooting effect is executed in a state where the curved shape fits well or when the firing effect is executed in a state where the curved shape does not fit. be able to.

In the above-described first embodiment, the granular members 320 are disposed in the internal space IE1 so as to be able to scatter, and gather on the collision member 420 due to gravity, but this is not necessarily the case. For example, an urging means for urging the granular member 320 toward the initial position side (position side of the standby state for the effect) is provided, and the granular member 320 is returned to the initial position side by the urging force of the urging means. can be In this case, it is possible to avoid limiting the initial position side of the granular member 320 to the lower side.

Examples of the urging means include a spring, an elastic rubber-like member, a net-like member whose ends are fixedly arranged, an elastic sheet that partially covers the path of the granular member 320, and the like.

The relationship between the biasing means and the granular member 320 is not limited at all. For example, the granular member 320 and the urging means may be adhered to each other, or they may not be adhered but are not separated, and a part of the urging means is arranged inside the granular member 320 and integrated. Alternatively, the urging means may be supported in the internal space IE1 while being able to be arranged apart from the granular member 320 .

Also, the biasing means is not limited to an object that can come into contact with the granular member 320 . For example, in the same way as the gravitational force acting on the granular member 320 in the first embodiment, air pressure adjustment means for adjusting the air pressure in the internal space IE1 may be employed. In this case, the arrangement of the granular members 320 can be affected by increasing or decreasing the atmospheric pressure of the internal space IE1.

For example, when the atmospheric pressure of the internal space IE1 is increased by injecting gas into the internal space IE1 from above, the granular member 320 can be easily maintained below the internal space IE1, and conversely, above the internal space IE1. When the atmospheric pressure of the internal space IE1 is lowered in a manner in which gas is extracted from the internal space IE1, the granular member 320 can be displaced (displaced to float) toward the upper side of the internal space IE1. Further, the direction of gas injection and the direction of gas extraction are not limited to the upper side, and can be set to any side of up, down, left, right, front and back.

It should be noted that it is preferable to close the deformed through portion 315 when the air pressure is to be changed.
It is easily possible to provide the lid member 480 with the function of closing the deformed through portion 315 . For example, when a soft, thin, deformable member (for example, a sponge-like member or a low-friction rubber-like member) is attached to the lid member 480 and the lid member 480 enters the deformed through portion 315, the lid The gap between the member 480 and the deformed through portion 315 may be filled with a deformable member. As a result, the deformed penetrating portion 315 can be closed or opened according to the displacement of the cover member 480 with respect to the deformed penetrating portion 315 .

In the above-described first embodiment, the case where the ridge portion 414 of the direct-acting member 410 is formed along a straight line has been described, but this is not necessarily the case. For example, the surface of the right distal end facing the transmission projection 446 may be formed as a curved surface along the displacement locus of the transmission projection 446 of the front transmission member 440 . In this case, the linear motion member 410 can be maintained at the displacement lower end position throughout the period of contact with the curved surface, not limited to the case where the transmission protrusion 446 is arranged at the lower end position. It is possible to shift to the firing state while maintaining the maximum biasing force.

In the above-described first embodiment, the collision member 420 has a curved shape in which the left-right center portion of the collision member 420 protrudes upward, but this is not necessarily the case. For example, it may be shaped like a slope that descends in the left-right direction with a sharp central portion, or it may be shaped like a hipped roof. In this case, compared to a curved shape, it is possible to make it more difficult for the granular member 320 to pass through the central sharp point in the left-right direction. Therefore, the left-right arrangement bias of the granular members 320 can be increased.

Further, for example, a planar shape orthogonal to the displacement direction may be used, or a curved shape in which the left and right central portions are recessed downward may be used. In this case, unlike the first embodiment, it is possible to configure a displacement mode in which the granular members 320 are displaced as a lump until they collide with the inner wall of the partitioning member 310, and dispersed upon collision.

When changing the shape of the collision member 420, it is preferable to change the shape of the lid member 480 accordingly. For example, when the upper surface of the collision member 420 is configured to have a curved shape in which the central portion of the left and right sides are concave downward, the retractable portion 481 of the cover member 480 preferably has a curved shape in which the central portion of the left and right portions is convex upward. Therefore, collision between the granular member 320 and the lid member 480 can be easily avoided.

In the first embodiment described above, the curved plate portion 421 of the collision member 420 has a flat shape when viewed from the side, but this is not necessarily the case. For example, the lower half may protrude and be bent when viewed from the side. In this case, the dense position of the granular members 320 can be shifted to the upper half side.

In the above-described first embodiment, the case where the size of the partitioning member 310 in front view is approximately the same as the size of the light guide plate 161 has been described, but this is not necessarily the case. For example, the size of the partitioning member 310 when viewed from the front is designed to be about the size of, or larger than, the visual recognition area in which the player can visually recognize the display in the display area of the third pattern display device 81. You can do it. As a result, it is possible to avoid the situation where the edges of the partitioning member 310 are superimposed on the display of the third pattern display device 81 and visually recognized, so that the visibility of the display of the third pattern display device 81 can be improved. can.

In the above-described first embodiment, the single collision member 420 is used as the member that applies the load to the granular member 320, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a plurality of collision members 420 arranged to apply a load to the granular member 320 may be employed and may be operated in concert or individually by separate driving devices.

In the above-described first embodiment, the linear motion member 410 is in contact with the collision member 420 and the front transmission member 440 is not in contact with the collision member 420, but this is not necessarily the case.
For example, a pillar portion projecting from the plate portion 422 to the rear side may pass through the intermediate member 401 and may contact the front transmission member 440 . In this case, the abutting portion of the front transmission member 440 with the pillar is unevenly formed in such a manner that the length in the radial direction changes according to the angular arrangement. can be changed. By utilizing this, the collision member 420 may be slightly displaced up and down to cause the granular member 320 to vibrate (slightly displace).

In the above-described first embodiment, the case where the cover member 480 enters the partition member 310 by rotational displacement has been described, but the displacement mode of the cover member 480 is not limited in any way, and is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be entered by sliding displacement along a straight line. In this case, the shape of the deformed through portion 315 can be easily formed.

In the first embodiment, the case where the extension plate portions 485 arranged on the left and right sides of the lid member 480 are formed in a shape recessed toward the back side has been described, but this is not necessarily the case. For example, the recess may not be formed. In this case, it is possible to easily prevent the granular members 320 from flowing into the collision member 420 from the left and right.

In the above-described first embodiment, the granular member 320 is separated and stored under the cover member 480 in the waiting state of the injection device 400, but this is not necessarily the case.
For example, a protruding portion may be formed from the lower surface (inner diameter side surface) of the lid member 480 toward the inner diameter side, and the protruding portion may contact the granular member 320 . In this case, when the granular members 320 are locally deposited, the accumulation of the granular members 320 can be broken as the lid member 480 is displaced toward the entrance side by pushing the granular members 320 with the projecting portion. . Thereby, uniformity of the arrangement of the granular members 320 can be achieved.

The shape of the projecting portion of the lid member 480 is not limited at all. For example, it may be configured such that a plurality of protrusions are scattered. In this case, regardless of the position where the particulate members 320 are deposited, the protrusions can be brought into contact with the deposited particulate members 320, and the deposition of the particulate members 320 can be broken.

Alternatively, the projections may be configured as a pair of protrusions that are arranged so as to incline left and right outward toward the retraction side tip of the retractable portion 481 from the left-right central portion of the entry-side tip of the projecting portion 482 as a starting point. . In this case, as the lid member 480 is displaced on the approach side, a load can be applied to the granular member 320 in a direction that pushes the granular member 320 outward to the left and right.

Also, the direction of the protrusions is not limited to this. For example, the inclination may be reversed, the ridge may be formed along a single inclination direction instead of a pair of inclination directions, or a combination of ridges with different degrees of inclination may be used. A ridge (a ridge extending on a plane orthogonal to the rotation axis or a ridge extending on a plane parallel to (or overlapping) the rotation axis) may be used. Also, the number of protrusions is not limited to this, and can be set arbitrarily.

In addition, the projecting length of the projecting portion is not limited at all. For example, the projecting tip may project until it reaches a circle having the same diameter and coaxial with the rotating shaft of the lid member 480, or the projecting length of the lid member 480 from the advance/retreat portion 481 may be constant. Also good. In the latter case, the surface connecting the projecting tips of the projecting portions has a shape along the lower surface (inner diameter side surface) of the advancing/retreating portion 481, so that the same effect as the above-described effect obtained from the shape of the lid member 480 can be obtained from the projecting portion. It can be played by the department.

When the protrusion is formed on the lid member 480, the action timing of the protrusion is not limited to when the granular member 320 stops and the lid member 480 is displaced toward the entrance side. For example, in a state where the granular member 320 is accommodated under the lid member 480, the drive motor MT1 is rotated in small increments in the forward and reverse directions when the front side transmission member 440 rotates 66 degrees in the forward rotation direction with reference to the effect standby state. By rotating (for example, reciprocating between 56 degrees and 76 degrees), the linear motion member 410 and the collision member 420 can be vertically displaced in small steps, and the granular member 320 on the collision member 420 can be displaced in small increments. can be vertically displaced.

Since the granular member 320 is not fixed to the collision member 420 , the vertical displacement of the collision member 420 causes the granular member 320 to bounce up and collide with the projecting portion of the lid member 480 . Due to this collision, the arrangement of the granular members 320 can be changed, and the stacking of the granular members 320 can be collapsed.

In addition, when the collision member 420 flips up the granular member 320 (when displaced upward), the cover member 480 is displaced toward the entrance side, so that the load is easily applied to the granular member 320 via the projecting portion. be able to.

The execution of the forward and reverse rotation of the driving motor MT1 in small increments may be controlled so that the driving force is reversed in the forward and reverse directions, or may be rotated in the forward direction at short time intervals. In this case, the biasing force of the coil spring SP1 displaces the transmission protrusion 446 of the front transmission member 440 in the reverse rotation direction via the linear motion member 410, thereby causing the drive motor MT1 to rotate in the reverse direction.

In the above-described first embodiment, the curved plate portion 312 arranged to face the advancing/retracting portion 481 of the lid member 480 is formed in a shape along the same plane across the left and right. Although the case where the interval between 480 and curved plate portion 312 changes has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the curved plate portion 312 arranged to face the lid member 480 is not flat but has an uneven (wavy shape) shape, and the relative relationship between the shape of the lid member 480 and the shape of the curved plate portion 312 causes the lid member to It may be configured such that the interval between 480 and the curved plate portion 312 is changed. Alternatively, the entrance-side end of the advance/retreat portion 481 of the lid member 480 may be formed parallel to the axis of the rotation shaft O1.

In the above-described first embodiment, the case where the contact area between the transmission arm member 470 and the left cover member 489 is secured by changing the inclination angles of the contact surfaces 489a to 489c of the left cover member 489 has been described. It is not limited to this. For example, a roller member whose posture can be changed may be provided on the transmission protrusion 473 of the transmission arm member 470, and the contact area with the inner surface of the left cover member 489 may be secured by changing the posture of the roller member. In this case, the inner wall of the left cover member 489 can be formed as a simple through hole.

In the first embodiment, the driving force of the drive motor MT1 is transmitted via the front transmission member 440 and the rear transmission member 460, and the plurality of members (the linear motion member 410, the collision member 420, the contact member 430, the transmission arm In the situation in which the member 470 and the lid member 480) are displaced, the displacement timing is devised so that all the members are not displaced at the same time, but this is not necessarily the case. For example, there may be a timing for displacing all of the plurality of members by the driving force of the drive motor MT1. In this case, the size of the drive motor MT1 to be employed should be slightly increased.

In the above-described first embodiment, the front transmission member 440 contacts the linear motion member 410 to transmit the driving force, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, when at least part of the transmission protrusion 446 of the front transmission member 440 is made of a magnetic material and the projection 414 of the direct-acting member 410 is made of a magnetic material, and a repulsive force is generated therebetween, the front side A load can be transmitted to the direct-acting member 410 when the transmission member 440 and the direct-acting member 410 are not in contact with each other.

For example, the half of the transmission projection 446 in the circumferential direction facing the projection 414 of the direct-acting member 410 is provided with a magnetic material having a magnetic pole that generates an attractive force between itself and the projection 414 . On the other hand, on the opposite half of the circumference, a magnetic material having a magnetic pole that generates a repulsive force with respect to the protrusion 414 is disposed, so that the repulsive force moves the direct-acting member 410 to the lower end position. Since it can be configured to be generated on the side to be maintained at , the load at the start of contact between the linear motion member 410 and the contact member 430 can be reduced.

In the above-described first embodiment, the driving force is transmitted at two positions, the grooved portion 442 formed on the front surface of the front transmission member 440 and the grooved portion 462 formed on the rear surface of the rear transmission member 460. Although explained, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a groove may be formed in the circumferential surface of at least one of the front transmission member 440 and the rear transmission member 460, and driving force may be transmitted through this groove to increase the number of driving force transmission targets.

In the first embodiment described above, there is a possibility that it may become unclear whether or not it is time to reversely rotate the front transmission member 440 based on detection by the detection sensor SC4, but this is not necessarily the case. For example, in addition to the detection sensor SC4, a detection sensor that detects the arrangement of the linear motion member 410 or the collision member 420 is provided, and the detection result of the detection sensor and the detection sensor SC4 determines whether the front side transmission member 440 reversely rotates. You may judge whether it is possible or not. As a result, it is possible to determine whether or not the firing state has been passed by driving in the forward rotation direction. It can be determined that it is possible.

Although the case where the front transmission member 440 and the rear transmission member 460 are rotationally displaced has been described in the first embodiment, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, at least one of the front transmission member 440 and the rear transmission member 460 may be displaced by displacement other than rotation (for example, direct sliding).

In the above-described first embodiment, by making the shape of the extension claw portion 734 of the effect member 700 different between the upper and lower sides, problems related to the displacement of the expansion/contraction displacement member 740 and the shielding design member 760 toward the collective arrangement state can be prevented. Although the case where it is configured has been described, it is not necessarily limited to this.

For example, by varying the shape of the extension claw portion 734, the start timing of the radial expansion displacement can be adjusted to the upper expansion/contraction displacement member 740 and the shielding design member 760 compared to the lower expansion/contraction displacement member 740 and the shielding design member 760. The design member 760 may be configured to be faster. As a result, the expansion/contraction displacement member 740 and the shielding design member 760 on the lower side are balanced with the acceleration of the start of displacement due to their own weight. You can make it look like the displacement is starting.

In the above-described first embodiment, by bringing the rotating plate 730 into contact with the telescopic displacement member 740, a load is generated in the radial direction of a circle about the rotation axis of the rotating plate 730. However, this does not necessarily apply to this case. It is not limited. For example, a spring member that applies a biasing force to the telescopic displacement member 740 may be disposed to apply the biasing force to the telescopic displacement member 740, or a magnet may be disposed to apply a magnetic force to the telescopic displacement member 740. good.

In the above-described first embodiment, the rotating plate 730 is used both as means for transmitting the load to the telescopic displacement member 740 and as means for displacing the telescopic displacement member 740, but this is not necessarily the case. For example, means for applying a load to the expansion/contraction displacement member 740 and means for displacing the expansion/contraction displacement member 740 may be provided separately.

In the first embodiment, when the telescopic displacement member 740 is displaced toward the collective arrangement state, the first guided protrusion 743b receives the load first, and the first guided protrusion 743b receives the load radially outward from the first guided protrusion 743b. Although the case where the arranged second guided protrusion 744b receives a load later has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the shape of the extended claw portion 734 of the rotating plate 730 may be configured so that the order is reversed, and load transmission to the first guided projection 743b and the second guided projection 744b occurs simultaneously. It may be configured as follows.

In the first embodiment described above, the expansion/contraction displacement member 740 has two protrusions, the first guided protrusion 743b and the second guided protrusion 744b, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, one protrusion may be configured to protrude obliquely with respect to the rotating shaft of the rotating plate 730 . In this case, in addition to the function of changing the arrangement of the expansion/contraction displacement member 740 , the function of generating a load for adjusting the posture of the shielding design member 760 can be generated in one protrusion.

In the above-described first embodiment, a case has been described in which the extended claw portion 734 arranged on the outer side of the circumference is configured to assist the displacement of the telescopic displacement member 740 toward the collective arrangement state, but this is not necessarily the case. It is not limited. For example, a protruding portion is formed on the outer circumference of the rotating plate 730, and the protruding portion can push the first guided projection 743b radially outward. It can assist with directed displacement.

In the above-described first embodiment, the lower arm member 630 suppresses the change in posture of the effect member 700 at the lower end position of the displacement, and the degree of change in the posture of the effect member 700 permitted at the upper and lower intermediate positions is reduced. However, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be configured such that the degree of allowable change in the posture of the effect member 700 increases toward the displacement lower end position.

Also, although the degree of posture change is configured by increasing or decreasing the position where the force acting on the effect member 700 is generated, it is not limited to this. For example, it may be configured by increasing or decreasing the area where the acting force is generated.

That is, the contact area between the arc-shaped hole 634 and the auxiliary protrusion 712 may be configured to be variable. For example, the thickness (hole depth) of the arcuate hole 634 can be changed by changing the thickness of the tip of the lower arm member 630 for each part, so that the arcuate hole 634 and the auxiliary protrusion 712 can be changed. contact area can be changed.

The degree of posture change of the effect member 700 is not specified only by the connecting position between the lower arm member 630 and the effect member 700 . For example, the front surface of the body member 601 facing the pressing member PC1 of the lower arm member 630 or the sliding portion 612a of the front cover 610 may be provided with unevenness to change the distance from the pressing member PC1. good. In this case, in the process of displacing the lower arm member 630, it is easy to allow the attitude change of the effect member 700 in the front surface of the main body member 601 and in the portion where the distance between the sliding portion 612a of the front cover 610 and the pressing member PC1 is wide. This makes it easier to suppress posture changes in portions where the distance is narrow. Alternatively, the interval may be gradually narrowed as the effect member 700 approaches the end of the descent.

In the above-described first embodiment, a case has been described in which the connection position between the lower arm member 630 and the effect member 700 is configured so as not to change, but this is not necessarily the case. For example, at the connection position between the lower arm member 630 and the effect member 700, a resistance increasing/decreasing device capable of increasing/decreasing the displacement resistance of the relative displacement between the lower arm member 630 and the effect member 700 may be provided. The resistance increasing/decreasing device may be a brake device capable of increasing/decreasing frictional resistance, a device increasing/decreasing displacement resistance by magnetic force, or a device projecting to a position where the displacement of the lower arm member 630 can be mechanically regulated. . In the case of a device using magnetic force, it can be easily configured by arranging a magnetic material in a portion (for example, an auxiliary arm portion in which an arc-shaped hole 634 is formed) that is arranged close to the tip side portion of the lower arm member 630. be able to.

In the above-described first embodiment, the effect member 700 is permitted to undergo a large displacement as a displacement in the expansion direction as the arrangement position moves downward. Although the case in which displacement occurs has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the effect member 700 may be controlled to be displaced in the expanding direction while being displaced in the vertical direction. In this case, by displacing the telescopic displacement member 740 and the shielding design member 760 in the direction of contracting the effect member 700 (displaced radially inward) while the effect member 700 is displaced downward, the lower arm member 630 moves left and right. It is possible to cancel the influence of the change from the extremely long posture to the vertically long posture, and suppress the change in the posture of the production member 700 in the forward tilting direction.

In the above-described first embodiment, the case where the effect member 700 is vertically displaced has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be displaced back and forth. In this case, an opening is provided in the central portion of the center frame 86, and the effect members 700 project to the front side of the center frame 86 in a collectively arranged state, and change the state to a discrete state on the front side of the center frame 86, thereby opening. It may be configured to change to a larger state than .

In this case, in order to avoid collision between the glass unit 16 and the effect member 700, it is preferable to form an opening in the front side portion of the center frame 86 of the glass unit 16. That is, it is preferable to provide a second layer of glass unit covering the front side of the glass unit 16 separately from the glass unit 16 covering the front surface of the game area. In addition, from the viewpoint of maintaining the size of the upper tray 17, the glass unit of the second layer is inclined from the same front-rear position as the lower end of the glass unit 16 toward the front as it goes upward. preferred from

In the above-described first embodiment, the case where the shielding design member 760 and the tip adjustment member 744 tend to tilt due to the positional relationship of the second elongated member 743 has been described, but this is not necessarily the case. For example, an urging means such as a spring that generates an urging force is provided between the second elongated member 743 and the tip adjustment member 744, and the orientation of the tip adjustment member 744 and the shielding design member 760 is adjusted by the urging force. It may be configured to change. In this case, since the attitude inclination of the distal end adjusting member 744 and the shielding design member 760 can be intentionally formed, the effect of the attitude inclination of the distal end adjusting member 744 and the shielding design member 760 can be easily exhibited.

In the above-described first embodiment, the case where the cable tube is wound around the wiring DK2 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a cable tube may be wound around the electrical wiring DK1. In particular, by winding the cable tube around the portion arranged above the base-end through-hole 635a, it is possible to prevent the main body member 601 or the front cover member 610 from rubbing against the electrical wiring DK1.

In the first embodiment described above, in the displacing/rotating unit 800, the wiring arm member 870 is displaced along the shape of the guide recess 886, but this is not necessarily the case. For example, a driving device such as a solenoid for changing the arrangement of the wiring arm member 870 may be provided. By controlling the operation of the driving device based on the detection of the position of the vertical slide member 820, the arrangement of the wiring arm member 870 can be appropriately changed.

In the first embodiment, the case where the electric wiring DK2 is temporarily fastened by being sandwiched between the narrowed portions 871a of the wiring arm member 870 has been described, but this is not necessarily the case. For example, the electrical wiring DK2 may be fixed to the wiring arm member 870 with a fixture such as a binding band, or the displacement direction of the electrical wiring DK2 may be restricted.

Moreover, the fastening position of the electrical wiring DK2 can be set arbitrarily. For example, in the electrical wiring DK2 arranged through the connection position between the wiring arm member 870 and the vertical slide member 820, a fastening position (for example, a narrowed portion 871a) may be provided on the wiring arm member 870 side of the connection position. , the fastening position may be provided on the vertical slide member 820 side of the connecting position.

Further, the means for fastening the electrical wiring DK2 is not limited to use for the electrical wiring DK2. For example, it may be used to fasten the electric wiring DK1 of the enlargement/reduction unit 600. FIG. That is, by narrowing the width of a portion of the placement portion 635 in which the electrical wiring DK1 is arranged, the electrical wiring DK1 may be sandwiched to limit the displacement. Alternatively, the electrical wiring DK1 may be temporarily fixed with a fastener such as a binding band at a position upstream or downstream of the placement portion 635 as the wiring path of the electrical wiring DK1.

In this case, the target to which the electrical wiring DK1 is temporarily fastened may be the lower arm member 630 including the placement portion 635, or the effect member 700 arranged on the tip side (one end side) of the lower arm member 630. However, the body member 601 or the front cover member 610 disposed on the base end side (other end side) of the lower arm member 630 may be used, or the rear case 510 to which the body member 601 is fastened and fixed may be used.

In the first embodiment, in the displacement/rotation unit 800, the wiring arm member 870 is displaced in the direction (front-rear direction) toward and away from the up-down, left-right plane in association with the displacement of the lateral slide member 840 on the up-down, left-right, plane. Although the case where it does is explained, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, when the lateral slide member 840 is displaced on the front, rear, left, and right plane, it is naturally possible to displace the wiring arm member 870 in the vertical direction. It is good also as the direction which inclines and is displaced.

Although the relationship between the small diameter pinion 861a and the large diameter pinion 861b in the displacement/rotation unit 800 has been described in the first embodiment, the relationship is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the magnitude relationship may be reversed, or the small diameter pinion 861a and the large diameter pinion 861b may be configured to have the same diameter.

In the first embodiment described above, in the displacement/rotation unit 800, the electric wiring DK2 is spirally displaced at the upper winding portion DK2a and the lower winding portion DK2b, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a plurality of arm members whose posture can be changed along with the vertical displacement of the vertical slide member 820 are arranged in accordance with the arrangement of the upper winding portion DK2a and the lower winding portion DK2b, and electrical wiring is passed through the plurality of arm members. Thus, the arrangement of the electrical wiring may be changed by changing the posture of the arm member.

In the above-described first embodiment, the vertical slide member 820 and the wiring arm member 870 are integrally displaced in the displacing/rotating unit 800, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the vertical slide member 820 and the wiring arm member 870 may be arranged apart from each other.

In this case, by disposing a driving device such as a solenoid for displacing the wiring arm member 870, the wiring arm member 870 can be displaced even when the vertical slide member 820 is stopped. Therefore, for example, by further separating the wiring arm member 870 from the vertical slide member 820 during rotational displacement of the feather-shaped member 854, the wiring arm member 870 can be displaced if necessary even while the vertical slide member 820 is stopped. It can be driven and controlled as follows.

In the above-described first embodiment, a case has been described in which the effect member 700 of the enlargement/reduction unit 600 changes its state to the extended state or enlarged state while the displacing/rotating unit 800 is in the effect waiting state. do not have. For example, when the vane-like member 854 of the displacing/rotating unit 800, which has the same position in the front-rear direction with respect to the effect member 700, is arranged in the gap between the shielding design members 760 of the effect member 700 in the discrete state, the effect member 700 can be changed to the expanded state.

In this case, collision between the effect member 700 and the displacement/rotation unit 800 can be avoided, and it is possible to avoid predicting a state change of the effect member 700 from the arrangement of the displacement/rotation unit 800 . In this case, it is preferable to add a detection sensor for detecting the vertical arrangement of the vane member 854 of the displacement/rotation unit 800 .

In the first embodiment described above, the intermediate flow path LM1 has the same shape as the guide path DL1, but the shape is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be formed as a flow path that bends with a longer lateral width than the guide path DL1, may bend in the front-rear direction, or may be formed as a flow path that extends vertically without bending. .

In the above-described first embodiment, the intermediate flow path LM1 is configured as a path through which the ball that enters the second winning hole 640 flows down, but this is not necessarily the case. For example, the intermediate flow path LM1 may be used as a path for a ball entering the general winning opening 63, may be used as a path for a ball entering the specific winning opening 65a, or may be used in combination. good. Further, the intermediate flow path LM1 may be configured as a sphere path passing through the out port 71 .

Further, since the winning openings 63, 64, 640, 65 are set at arbitrary positions within the game area, the middle flow path LM1 can also be set arbitrarily. For example, the intermediate flow path LM1 may be arranged on the left side of the game area.

Further, the intermediate flow path LM1 is not limited to being arranged on the back side of the game area.
For example, they may be arranged side by side on the left and right of the game area, or may be arranged on the front side of the game area (inside the glass unit 16, etc.). Also in this case, it is preferable that the intermediate flow path LM1 has a section that flows down along the path in the front view of the ball that flows down the game area.

Further, for the purpose of bringing the ball flowing down the intermediate flow path LM1 into the field of view of the player, it is sufficient that the intermediate flow path LM1 is formed so as to be closer to the left-right center side of the game area. Therefore, a path that does not reach the inside of the center frame 86 when viewed from the front may be used.

In the above-described first embodiment, a description has been given of the case where the electrical boards of the horizontal board unit 166 are arranged in a posture in which the thickness direction coincides with the vertical direction, but this is not necessarily the case. For example, like the hemispherical lighting device 613, the illumination board may be arranged so as to be inclined with respect to the vertical direction.

In addition, the entire range of the electrical board is not limited to that covered by the first decorative member 171 . For example, a part of the electrical board may not be shielded, and the light emitted from the light emitting means such as an LED may be directly visible.

In the above-described third embodiment, a case has been described in which the displacement start timing of the expansion/contraction displacement member 740 is changed by changing the shape of the guide hole 733, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, by forming the shape of the guide hole 733 in a stepped shape, it may be configured such that a section in which the elastic displacement member 740 is displaced and a section in which it stops alternately occur.

Further, by fixing the stepped guide holes 733 to some of the guide holes 733, the shielding design member 760 can be displaced so as to approach or abut on different displacement trajectories or different displacement timings.

In the sixth embodiment, the case where the first light irradiation device 6330 and the second light irradiation device 6340 arranged on the left and right sides of the firing effect unit 6300 are provided with a plurality of decorative substrates has been described, but this is not necessarily the case. isn't it. For example, the horizontally placed board unit 166 and the vertically placed board unit 167 of the light guide plate rendering means 160 may employ a configuration of a plurality of decorative boards. In addition, the portion corresponding to the oblong groove portion 171a of the decoration means 170 (the left and right long portion) is configured so as to have good light transmission, and the oblong groove portion 171a is adopted as an intersection position of a plurality of electrical decoration substrates. By arranging a light emitting means such as an LED, it may be configured such that light can be visually recognized through the oblong groove portion 171a.

In addition, from the viewpoint of increasing the irradiation direction of light, it is not limited to the case of using a plurality of rigid electrical boards. For example, a flexible substrate (flexible printed circuit board) may be provided with light emitting means such as an LED. In this case, the surface of the flexible substrate can be oriented in various directions by winding the flexible substrate or fixing it at parts. As a result, the optical axis of the light emitting means such as an LED arranged on the surface of the flexible substrate can be directed in various directions, and the number of light irradiation directions can be increased. Also, in this case, it can be configured with a single substrate.

In each of the above-described embodiments, regardless of whether the number of configurations is singular or plural, the configuration may be omitted (if there are multiple configurations, the number of configurations may be reduced). Similarly, the number of configurations may be increased.

For example, in each of the above-described embodiments, the key device A130 has two protrusions A133b, but the number of protrusions A133b may be reduced to one. Similarly, in each of the above embodiments, the case where one key device A130 is arranged in the main control device A110 has been described, but the number of such key devices A130 (the number of arrangement) may be increased to two or more. .

Further, in each of the above-described embodiments, the arrangement position of each configuration with respect to other configurations, the arrangement direction (orientation, attitude, phase) of each configuration with respect to other configurations, or the arrangement based on the other configuration of each configuration You can change the order of The order of arrangement may be changed for all configurations, or only some configurations may be exchanged. That is, the arrangement position, arrangement direction, and order of arrangement of each component are arbitrary.

For example, in each of the above embodiments, the opening A260 (key device A130) is located on one side (first connection wall A220 side) of the center in the longitudinal direction (directions of arrows L and R) of the operation wall A210 (second region). However, the opening A260 (key device A130) may be arranged in the longitudinal center of the operation wall A210 (second area). It may be arranged on the other side in the longitudinal direction (the side of the third connecting wall portion A240).

Further, for example, in each of the above-described embodiments, the key device A130 (coating portion A270) connects the pair of protrusions A133b (protrusion A271b) in the longitudinal direction (arrow L , R direction), but the direction connecting the pair of protrusions A133b (protrusions A271b) is the operation wall A210 ( The arrangement direction (posture, phase) parallel to the longitudinal direction (directions of arrows L, R) of the second region), and the longitudinal direction (directions of arrows L, R) of the operation wall portion A210 (second region) and a predetermined The key device A130 (coating part A270) may be arranged in an arrangement direction (posture, phase) having an angle of (larger than 0° and smaller than 90°).

Further, for example, in each of the above embodiments, the opening A260 (coating portion A270), the opening A250 (the guide wall A251), and the opening AOP1 are arranged in this order from the side closer to the first connecting wall portion A220. For example, the order of arranging the opening AOP1, the opening A250 (the guide wall A251), and the opening A260 (the covering portion A270) in order from the side closer to the first connection wall portion A220 is opposite to the order of arrangement in each of the above embodiments. ), and the order of arrangement of only a part may be changed (for example, the order of arrangement in which the opening AOP1 is positioned between the opening A250 (guide wall A251) and the opening A260 (covering portion A270) is exemplified. is done).

In each of the above-described embodiments, the case where the covering portion A270 protrudes from the front surface of the operation wall portion A210 (the surface on the arrow F direction side) has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the operation wall portion A210 is formed at the same height position as the end wall portions A272 and A2272 (that is, the end surface wall portions A272 and A2272 are also used by the operation wall portion A210), and a configuration corresponding to the peripheral wall portion A271 is provided. It may be provided on the back side (arrow B direction side) of the operation wall portion A210.

In the above embodiments, the opening A250 is formed in the operation wall A210, and the opening A260 is formed in the covering portion A270 (end wall portion A272). may be formed at the site of That is, it does not need to be formed on the lowered portion of the outer surface of the board boxes A100, A2100, A3100, and A4100. Other parts include, for example, the parts forming the outer surfaces of the board boxes A100, A2100, A3100 and A4100, that is, the front wall A201, upper wall A202, lower wall A203 and left wall of the box covers A200 and A3200. Examples include A204 or right wall A205, back wall A301, upper wall A302, lower wall A303, left wall A304 or right wall A305 of box base A300. Moreover, similarly, as another part, the 1st connection wall part A220, the 2nd connection wall part A230, or the 3rd connection wall part A240 is illustrated, for example.

In each of the above-described embodiments, the case where the covering portion A270 protrudes from the front surface of the operation wall portion A210 (the surface on the arrow F direction side) has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the operation wall portion A210 is formed at the same height position as the end wall portions A272 and A2272 (that is, the end surface wall portions A272 and A2272 are also used by the operation wall portion A210), and a configuration corresponding to the peripheral wall portion A271 is provided. It may be provided on the back side (arrow B direction side) of the operation wall portion A210.

In this case, the switch device A120 may extend the length dimension of the operation portion A122 to a position protruding from the front surface (the surface on the arrow F direction side) of the operation wall portion A210. In addition, it is preferable to provide the guide wall A251 also on the back surface (the surface on the arrow B direction side) of the operation wall portion A210 along with the extension of the length dimension of the operation portion A122.

In each of the above-described embodiments, a recess is formed in the outer surface (front face) of the box covers A200 and A3200, and the portion forming the recessed bottom surface of the recess is the operation wall A210 (that is, the front wall A201 (when the operation wall A210 is positioned at the lower position (on the side of the main controller A110)), but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. A projecting portion may be formed, and the portion forming the projecting tip surface of the projecting portion may be used as the operation wall portion A210 (that is, the operation is performed at a position one step higher than the front wall portion A201 (on the side opposite to the main controller A110). position the wall A210).

In each of the above-described embodiments, the case where the main controller 100 is housed in the board boxes A100, A2100, A3100, and A4100 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and at least the board boxes A100, A2100, A3100, and A4100 Any item can be stored as long as the manipulator can be operated through the opening. For example, it may be one that does not have an electrical configuration. For example, such a storage item has a connecting portion connected to an open/close lid that opens and closes a discharge port for discharging balls from the ball flow path, and the open/close lid is operated by operating the connecting portion as an operator. A member (structure, device) that opens and closes is exemplified.

In each of the above-described embodiments, the operation means (the switch device A120, the key device A130) has been described as a case where a push button switch or a key-operated selector switch is employed. You may adopt the operation means of. Other types of operating means include, for example, tactile switches, rocker switches, dip switches, thumb rotary switches, toggle switches, and the like.

In each of the above-described embodiments, the operating mode of the operator (operation unit A122, key A140) is described as pushing and rotating. Any operation mode may be employed as long as it is arranged so as to be operable through the openings (the openings A250 and A260 in each of the above-described embodiments). Other modes of operation include pull-out, slide, seesaw displacement (for example, a mode in which the operation button is displaced like a seesaw by alternately pressing both ends like the operation button of a rocker switch), tilting (for example, toggle A mode in which the operation lever is displaced so as to fall to one side with the base end side as a fulcrum, like the operation lever of a switch, is exemplified.

In this case, the sliding direction of the manipulator, the direction connecting both ends of the seesaw-displaced manipulator, and the tilting direction of the tilting manipulator are in the longitudinal direction (directions of arrows L and R) of the operation wall portion A210 (second region). It is preferable to dispose the operating means in a parallel posture. This is because the space formed along the longitudinal direction of the operation wall portion A210 (second area) can be effectively used to improve the operability of the operation means.

In any of the operation modes described above, the front view shape of the openings A250 and A260 is assumed to be a shape formed only in a region corresponding to the displacement trajectory of the manipulator (a region necessary for allowing displacement). Also good.

In each of the above-described embodiments, a case where a predetermined gap is formed between the surface and end surface of the key A140 gripped with fingers and the end surface wall portions A272 and A2272 (the outer edges of the annular portion A272a and the square portion A272b) has been described. However, it is not necessarily limited to this. In a state where no external force is applied to the key A140 or the key device A130, at least one of the surface or the end surface of the key A140 gripped by fingers and the end surface wall portions A272 and A2272 (annular The outer edge of the portion A272a or the rectangular portion A272b may be in contact. That is, at least one of the finger gripped surface and the end surface of the key A140 in the OFF position or ON position is brought into contact with the end wall portions A272, A2272 (outer edges of the annular portion A272a or the square portion A272b), and the key A140 is operated. When (rotated), the end surface of the key A140 may slide against the end surface wall portions A272 and A2272 (the outer edge of the annular portion A272a).

The gap between the surface and end surface of the key A140 gripped by the fingers and the end wall portions A272 and A2272 (outer edges of the annular portion A272a and the rectangular portion A272b), and the gap between the outer surface of the key device A130 and the inner surface of the covering portion A270. The gap between the outer surface of the key device A130 and the inner surface of the erected wall A290 and the lower wall portion A203 is such that the inclination of the key device A130 with respect to the printed circuit board A119 is a specified angle (an angle that allows the inclination of the key device A130 That is, it is set to a value at which at least one of the gaps disappears (with which the key A140 or the key device A130 abuts) before reaching the angle at which the leg A131 is unlikely to come off or be damaged or the solder peels off. . The specified angle is preferably 10 degrees or less, more preferably 7 degrees or less, and even more preferably 5 degrees or less. In this embodiment, it is set to 7 degrees.

In each of the above embodiments, the protrusion A271b of the covering portion A270 and the protrusion A133b of the key device A130 are formed at two locations in the circumferential direction. , A133b may be formed at only one position, or at three or more positions. Moreover, when forming in two or more places, those circumferential directions positions (phase) are arbitrary. That is, they may be formed at equal intervals in the circumferential direction as in each of the above embodiments, or may be formed at unequal intervals in the circumferential direction.

In each of the above embodiments, the protrusion A271b of the covering portion A270 and the protrusion A133b of the key device A130 are formed intermittently in the circumferential direction. , A133b may be formed continuously in the circumferential direction.

In each of the above-described embodiments, the projection A271b of the covering portion A270 and the projection A133b of the key device A130 project radially outward, and the projection A133b of the device A130 is arranged in the space formed by the projection A271b. Although the case has been described, it is not necessarily limited to this. A configuration may be adopted in which a concave recess is provided, and the projection of the covering portion A270 is arranged in the internal space of the recess of the key device A130. In this case, if the recess is continued to the end surface (the surface in the direction of the arrow F) of the base A133a (the projection It is only necessary to form an opening in the end face for inserting the part into the recess).

In each of the above embodiments, the case where the first protrusion A211 and the second protrusion A212 are connected to the covering portion A270 has been described, but this is not necessarily the case. may be concatenated.

In each of the above-described embodiments, the case where two protrusions (the first protrusion A211 and the second protrusion A212) are connected to the covering portion A270 has been described, but the number of protrusions formed is not necessarily limited to this. , may be one, or three or more. When forming a plurality of wires, the connection position between one end thereof and the covering portion A270 is arbitrary. However, it is preferable to connect the other protrusions to the positions where the phases of the first protrusion A211 and the second protrusion A212 are different from each other by approximately 180 degrees. This is because the load input from the key A140 in the off position/on position to the covering portion A270 can be efficiently received.

In addition, the cross-sectional shape of the first protrusion A211 and the second protrusion A212, the other protrusions, the height dimension of the cross-sectional shape (the standing dimension from the front surface of the operation wall A210 (the surface on the arrow F direction side) ) and the width dimension (the dimension in the direction perpendicular to the height direction of the vanishing cross section) are arbitrary and can be set as appropriate. Examples of the shape of the end surface include a rectangular shape, a semicircular shape, a triangular shape, and a combination of these shapes. The relationship between the height dimension and the width dimension of the cross-sectional shape is arbitrary, and either one may have a larger value.

In each of the above embodiments, the height dimension of the first protrusion A211 and the second protrusion A212 (standing dimension from the front of the operation wall portion A210 (surface on the arrow F direction side)) is along the extension direction Although a case has been described in which the width is constant along the extending direction, the width is not necessarily limited to this, and may be varied along the extending direction.

It should be noted that the height dimension may be configured to gradually decrease as the distance from the one end connected to the covering portion A270 increases. In this case, the rigidity of the covering portion A270 can be efficiently increased while reducing the material cost.

In each of the above-described embodiments, the case where the rotation angle (phase difference between the ON position and the OFF position) of the key A140 is set to 90° has been described. phase difference). That is, the rotation angle of the key A140 may be set to an angle smaller than 90° or may be set to an angle larger than 90°.

In this case, the shape of the opening A260 (the shape of the edge of the end wall portion A272) corresponds to the displacement trajectory of the key A140 when the key A140 is displaced (rotated) between the off position and the on position. It is preferably formed only in (regions necessary to allow displacement). That is, when the rotation angle of the key A140 is θ, the opening A260 is a first fan-shaped opening having a central angle of approximately θ for allowing displacement of a portion on one side of the rotation center of the key A140, A second fan-shaped opening having a center angle of approximately θ for allowing displacement of the portion on the other side (the side opposite to the one side) of the rotation center of the key A140 is coupled with a phase difference of approximately 180 degrees. It is formed into a shape.

In each of the above embodiments, the key A140 has a radius of rotation (distance from the center of rotation to the end face (a narrow surface along the outer edge of the surface gripped by fingers)) on one side of the center of rotation, and Although the description has been given of the case where the radius of rotation of the other side is different, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. The distance to the narrow surface) along the outer edge of the surface) may be substantially the same. That is, the first fan-shaped opening and the second fan-shaped opening of the opening A260 may have approximately the same size (radius).

In each of the above-described embodiments, the case where the front view shape of the operation wall portion A210 is formed in a substantially horizontally elongated rectangle (rectangular shape) has been described, but it is not necessarily limited to this, and other front view shapes may be used. good. Other shapes in front view include, for example, a substantially square shape, a substantially circular shape, a substantially elliptical shape, a substantially triangular shape, a substantially polygonal shape with five or more sides, and a shape combining these shapes.

In each of the above embodiments, the longitudinal direction of the operation wall A210 is substantially parallel to the longitudinal direction of the board boxes A100, A2100, A3100, A4100 (box covers A200, A3200). It is not limited and may be non-parallel. Alternatively, they may be substantially perpendicular (that is, the longitudinal direction of the operation wall portion A210 may be along the directions of arrows U and D).

In each of the above embodiments, part of the outer edge of the operation wall A210 (three sides in each of the above embodiments) is connected to the connection walls (the first connection wall A220, the second connection wall A230 and the third connection wall). A240) and the remaining portion of the outer edge (one side in each of the above embodiments) is not surrounded (opened), but this is not necessarily the case. The entire outer edge of the operation wall A210 may be surrounded by the connection wall.

That is, in the front view of the box covers A200 and A3200, in each of the above-described embodiments, the operation wall A210 is positioned at a position where a part of the outer edge of the operation wall A210 coincides with a part of the outer edge of the box covers A200 and A3200. is arranged (formed), the operation wall A210 may be arranged (formed) at a position where the outer edges of the operation wall A210 do not match the outer edges of the box covers A200 and A3200.

In each of the above embodiments, the opening AOP1, the opening A250 (the guide wall A251), and the opening A260 (the covering portion A270) are arranged substantially in series (substantially in one row). Other arrangements may be used. Examples of other arrangements include a staggered arrangement, an arrangement distributed to positions having no regularity, and a grid arrangement (arrangement at intersections of a plurality of mutually orthogonal straight lines). When they are arranged substantially in series (substantially in one row), the direction of the series may be non-parallel to the longitudinal direction of the operation wall A210 (box covers A200 and A3200), or may be substantially perpendicular to the longitudinal direction. can be

In each of the above embodiments, the case where the front surfaces of the end wall portions A272 and A2272 (surfaces in the direction of the arrow F) are formed as flat surfaces has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and the end wall portions A272 and A2272 One or a plurality of protrusions or ribs may be erected from the front surface of (the surface on the arrow F direction side).

In this case, the ridge (rib) (for example, a portion formed by extending in a streak shape while maintaining a substantially semicircular or substantially rectangular cross-sectional shape) is, when viewed from the front (as viewed in the direction of arrow B), the end wall It is preferable to extend radially outward from the center of the portions A272 and A2272 (the axis of the peripheral wall portion A271). Moreover, it is preferable that a plurality of such ridges (ribs) are arranged at predetermined intervals in the circumferential direction. As a result, when the key A140 is pulled out, the key A140 engages with the edges of the end wall portions A272 and A2272, and even if the end wall portions A272 and A2272 are lifted in the direction in which the key A140 is pulled out (direction of arrow F), This is because damage to the end wall portions A272 and A2272 can be suppressed by utilizing the rigidity of the ridges (ribs).

Alternatively, the ridges (ribs) may be formed in an annular shape continuous in the circumferential direction when viewed from the front.
A plurality of such protrusions (ribs) may be arranged with different diameters (that is, at predetermined intervals in the radial direction). In addition, it may be intermittent (non-continuous) in the circumferential direction.

In each of the above-described embodiments, the height position of the upright end face of the upright wall A209 is set back from the height position of the upright end face of the upright walls A208, A280, and A290 (that is, from the printed circuit board A119). However, it is not necessarily limited to this, and the other standing walls A208, A280, A290 may be retreated.

Further, the amount of retreat of each standing wall A208, A209, A280 and A290 from the reference plane may be different from the amount of retreat from the reference plane of the other standing walls A208, A209, A280 and A290. Furthermore, in one standing wall A208, A209, A280, A290, the retreat amount may be changed.

In this case, it is preferable that the farther the erected wall is from the fastening hole A206a, the smaller the receding amount of the erected tip surface from the reference plane. In the printed circuit board A119, the area farther from the fastening hole A206a is less regulated by the screw ASC than the area closer to the fastening hole A206a. It becomes easy to deform (displace) in the direction to move toward the front of the printed circuit board A119, and the degree of adhesion to the front surface of the printed circuit board A119 is weakened. This is because it is possible to easily ensure close contact between the erected front end surfaces of the erected walls and the front surface of the printed circuit board A119 in all the erected walls.

For example, in the present embodiment, assuming that the standing tip surface of the standing wall A209 closest to the fastening hole A206a is the reference plane, the fastening hole A206a ( Since the distance from the erected wall A209) increases, the amount of retreat from the above-described reference plane is decreased in this order according to the distance from the fastening hole A206a (that is, the erected tip surface of the erected wall A208 is preferably minimized from the reference plane).

Further, each standing wall A208, A209, A280, and A290 may be changed so that the amount of retreat from the reference plane described above decreases as the distance from the fastening hole A206a increases. That is, the erected end surfaces of the erected walls A208, A209, A280, and A290 may be inclined with respect to the front wall portions A201 of the box covers A200 and A3200, respectively.

In each of the above-described embodiments, in the setting change mode, the case where the set value is displayed on at least one of the third pattern display device 81 or the 7-segment display has been described, but this is not necessarily the case, and instead Alternatively, or in addition, it may be displayed on another display device.
Other display devices include, for example, the first symbol display device 37, the second symbol display device 83, the second symbol reservation lamp 84, and the like.

Moreover, the configuration may be such that the set value is not displayed on either the third pattern display device 81 or the 7-segment display.

In this case, when the setting change mode is activated, the set value is updated to a predetermined initial value (for example, the first value) regardless of the set value before activation, and the operation portion A122 of the switch device A120 is pushed. A configuration may be adopted in which the operator recognizes the set value based on the number of times. Unauthorized acquisition of setting values by unauthorized means (for example, means for photographing the display of the third pattern display device 81 with a hidden camera installed in the hall) can be suppressed. In addition, it is possible to prevent the player from recognizing the setting value when changing the setting during the game. In this case, the setting confirmation mode may be omitted.

Although not described in each of the above embodiments, a first detection sensor is provided to detect the relative position of the inner frame 12 with respect to the outer frame 11 (rotational position about the hinge 18). When the first detection sensor detects that the frame 12 is opened (rotated) by a predetermined angle or more, the setting change described above is permitted, and the inner frame 12 is opened by a predetermined angle or more with respect to the outer frame 11. If the opening (rotation) is not detected by the first detection sensor, the setting change may be prohibited (for example, input from the switch device A120 or the key device A130 may be disabled). . This is because it is possible to prevent unauthorized setting changes.

A second detection sensor is provided to detect the relative positions of the board boxes A100, A2100, A3100, and A4100 with respect to the inner frame 12 (rotational positions about the rotation axis A410). , A2100, A3100, and A4100 are opened (rotated) by a predetermined angle or more, the above-described setting change is prohibited (for example, switch device A120 or key device input from A130 is invalidated) and opening (rotation) of the substrate boxes A100, A2100, A3100, and A4100 with respect to the inner frame 12 by a predetermined angle or more is not detected by the second detection sensor, the setting change is performed. It may be configured to allow. This is because it is possible to prevent unauthorized setting changes.

Both the first detection sensor and the second detection sensor may be provided, or only one of them may be provided (the other may be omitted). When both are provided, the opening (rotation) of the inner frame 12 with respect to the outer frame 11 by a predetermined angle or more is detected by the first detection sensor, and the board boxes A100, A2100, A3100, A4100 with respect to the inner frame 12 are detected by the predetermined angle. The above-described setting change may be allowed when the second detection sensor does not detect the opening (rotation) beyond the angle. Examples of the first detection sensor and the second detection sensor include a rotary sensor that detects a rotation angle and a limit switch whose mechanical detection portion is displaced when opened or closed.

In each of the above embodiments, if a predetermined electrical connection line (electrical connection line connecting the power supply device 115 and the sound lamp control device 113 to the main controller A110) is connected to the main controller A110, the switch device A120 and the operation (setting change) of the key device A130 is permitted (that is, the setting change is prohibited unless a predetermined electrical connection line is connected to the main control device A110), but this is not necessarily the case. , and the predetermined electrical connection line can be arbitrarily set (selected).

For example, the predetermined electrical connection line may be only the electrical connection line that connects the power supply device 115 to the main controller A110. That is, as long as at least the power supply device 115 is connected to the main controller A110 by an electrical connection line, regardless of the connection state of the other electrical connection lines (that is, whether it is connected or disconnected) , connection and disconnection are mixed), the operation (setting change) of the switch device A120 and the key device A130 may be permitted.
In this case, the set value associated with the setting change cannot be confirmed on the third pattern display device 81, but can be confirmed on the 7-segment display of the main controller A110.

In each of the above embodiments, if a predetermined electrical connection line (electrical connection line connecting the power supply device 115 and the sound lamp control device 113 to the main controller A110) is connected to the main controller A110, the switch device A120 and the case where the operation (setting change) of the key device A130 is permitted (that is, if a predetermined electrical connection line is not connected to the main control device A110, the setting change is prohibited), but this is not necessarily the case. However, if a predetermined electrical connection line is not disconnected from the main controller A110, regardless of the connection state of other electrical connection lines (that is, even if it is connected, it is disconnected) (Even if connection and disconnection are mixed), the operation (setting change) of the switch device A120 and the key device A130 is not permitted (that is, if a predetermined electrical connection line is connected to the main control device A110 setting change is prohibited). Also in this case, the predetermined electrical connection line can be arbitrarily set (selected).

For example, the payout control device 111 is exemplified as the predetermined electrical connection line. According to this, since the power supply of the payout control device 111 is turned off, it is possible to prevent the payout control device 111 from operating illegally and the game balls from being paid out.

In the above-described eighth embodiment, the case where the projecting ridges A2273 extend in a stripe shape has been described as the form of the portion protruding from the back surface (the surface on the arrow B direction side) of the end wall portion A2272, but this is not necessarily the case. is not limited to For example, a plurality of protrusions may be arranged side by side at predetermined intervals between positions AP1 to AP6 including positions AP2 to AP5.
Alternatively, the protrusion A2273 may be intermittently formed between positions AP1 to AP6 including positions AP2 to AP5.

The range in which the ridge A2273 or the plurality of protrusions are formed is not limited to the range from the position AP1 to the position AP6 including the positions AP2 to AP5, and the range may be reduced or expanded. . Such a range may be the entire outer edge of the annular portion A272a and the rectangular portion A272b.

In the ninth embodiment, the substrate box A3100 rotates around the rotation axis A410 to move to the second position (the position where the front of the operation wall A210 faces the front of the pachinko machine A3010, as shown in FIG. 122 ( Although the case where it is arranged in b) is explained, it is not necessarily limited to this, and it is of course possible to adopt other displacement forms.

As another form of displacement, for example, the substrate box is arranged so as to be slidable in the width direction (directions of arrows L and R) with respect to the inner frame 12, and is slidably displaced in the direction opposite to the hinge 18 (direction of arrow L). By doing so, the board box is arranged at the second position, the rotation axis A410 is formed as an axis along the front-rear direction (arrow F, B direction) of the pachinko machine A10 (inner frame 12), and the rotation axis A mode in which the substrate box is arranged at the second position by being displaced (rotated) around A410 is exemplified.

In the tenth embodiment, the case where the rotation axis A4410 is formed in each of the sealing unit A400 and the sub-cover A500 has been described. It may be formed on the box cover A200, A3200 or the box base A300. In this case, each of the box covers A200 and A3200 and the box base A300 is provided with a division of the rotation axis A4410. A4410 may be formed.

The seventh to ninth embodiments are the same, and the case where the rotation axis A410 is formed in the sealing unit A400 has been described. can be Further, as in the case described above, in a state where the box covers A200 and A3200 are connected to the box base A300, one rotary shaft A410 may be formed from divisions formed respectively.

<First control example>
Next, various control contents executed by the pachinko machine 10 in each embodiment described above will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 124 to 225. FIG. In addition, in the first control example, the configuration is partially changed with respect to each of the above-described embodiments, and the control example thereof will be described. Description is omitted. It should be noted that some of the configurations used in this control example are assigned different reference numerals to the same configurations as those in the above-described embodiments. , and since the specific contents of the configuration are the same as those corresponding to the above-described embodiments, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

<Regarding the configuration of the pachinko machine in the first control example>
First, the configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 124 to 128. FIG. The configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example differs from the configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the above-described first embodiment in that the configuration of the operation means (for example, the frame button 22) that can be operated by the player is changed. are different, and otherwise identical. The detailed description of the same configuration will be omitted, and the differences from the configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment and the points omitted in the first embodiment will be described in detail.

FIG. 124 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example. As shown in FIG. 124, in this first control example, a first frame button 22za and a second frame button 22zb are added to the front view (see FIG. 1) of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment described above. are the same except that The same reference numerals are assigned to the same configurations, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The first frame button 22za and the second frame button 22zb, like the frame button 22 described above, serve as operating means that can be operated by the player. In this first control example, as in the above-described first embodiment, the player can arbitrarily select an effect mode for various effects executed by the pachinko machine 10. The difference from the embodiment is that the number of operation means that can be operated by the player is increased from one to three.

As shown in FIG. 124, the frame button 22 is arranged on the substantially horizontal surface of the top plate 17, whereas the first frame button 22za and the second frame button 22zb are arranged on the substantially vertical surface of the top plate 17. It is configured to be placed in Further, the frame button 22 is arranged at a position spaced apart from the operating handle 51 (a position spaced 300 mm to the left from the operating handle 51) in the width direction when the pachinko machine 10 is viewed from the front (viewpoint in FIG. 124). The first frame button 22za and the second frame button 22zb are arranged at a position closer than the frame button 22 (at a position spaced 100 to 150 mm leftward from the operation handle 51). there is

That is, when the player operates the operation handle 51 with the right hand, the frame button 22 is configured to be easier to operate with the left hand than the first frame button 22za and the second frame button 22zb. In addition, since the operation button 22 arranged on the horizontal plane can be operated by moving the left hand in the direction of gravity, it can be operated more easily than the first frame button 22za and the second frame button 22zb arranged on the vertical plane. is designed for easy operation.

Although a detailed description will be given later, in this control example, it is possible to execute an effect (so-called continuous hit effect) in which the player can operate the operation means multiple times within one effect executed by the pachinko machine 10. are doing. In this case, by using the frame button 22 as the operating means for the player to operate in the repeated hitting effect, it is possible to make the player easily participate in the repeated hitting effect.

Further, during execution of the above-described repeated hit effect, an operation for terminating the repeated hit effect that is being executed can be executed. By operating the operating means (the first frame button 22za or the second frame button 22zb) arranged at a spaced position, the repeated hit effect can be terminated in the middle. By configuring in this way, a player who is actively participating in the repeated hitting effect, that is, a player who has operated the frame button 22 multiple times, can accidentally end the repeated hitting effect. 1-frame button 22za or second-frame button 22zb) can be suppressed from being operated. In addition, since the frame button 22, the first frame button 22za, and the second frame button 22zb are moved in different directions with the left hand when they are operated, it is possible to prevent the player from erroneously operating the operation means. can be suppressed more. Furthermore, since the first frame button 22za and the second frame button 22zb are arranged at positions that are more difficult to operate with the left hand than the frame button 22, it is possible to further prevent the player from erroneously operating the operation means. can.

Next, with reference to FIG. 125, the configuration of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example will be described. FIG. 125 is a front view showing the game board of the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example. As shown in FIG. 125, the configuration of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example is the same as the configuration of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment described above (see FIG. 2). The same reference numerals are assigned to the same configurations, and detailed description thereof will be omitted. In addition, in this control example, in order to explain in detail the contents of the control of the game executed based on the balls shot to the game board 13 among the configuration of the game board 13, in FIG. The configuration necessary for explaining the content of the flow is described, and the rest is simplified, but in reality, the same configuration as the game board 13 described in FIG. 2 is provided.

The pachinko machine 10 of this first control example, as shown in FIG. A game (left-handed game) in which the player operates the operation handle 51 so that the shot ball flows down the left side area (left-handed game), and a game where the shot ball is on the right side. It is configured to be able to execute a game (right-handed game) that has the strength to flow down the area.

Two general ball entrances 63 are provided in the left area, and a first ball entrance 64 is provided at a position where a ball flowing down the left area can enter. Of the balls that have flowed down the left side area, the balls that have not entered the general ball entrance 63 and the first ball entrance 64 flow into an out port 71 provided at the most downstream part of the game area and are not shown. It is configured to flow down the discharge route and be discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 10.例文帳に追加

On the other hand, in the right area, there are a through gate 67, a second ball entrance 640, an open state associated with the second ball entrance 640 in which a ball can enter the second ball entrance 640, and the open state. An electric accessory 640a that can be changed between a closed state and a closed state that makes it difficult for a ball to enter, a specific winning hole 65a, and an open state associated with the specific winning hole 65a that allows a ball to enter the specific winning hole 65a. A variable prize winning device 65 is provided which is variable between its open state and its closed state in which it is difficult to enter a ball.

In the pachinko machine 10 of this control example having the game board 13 configured as described above, a special symbol lottery is executed based on the ball entering the first ball entrance 64, and based on the lottery result. Then, the variable display (dynamic display) of the third symbol is executed in the third symbol display device 81 . Then, when the variably displayed third symbol is stop-displayed in a predetermined stop-display mode (for example, "7.7.7"), a jackpot game (privilege game) advantageous to the player is executed.

When the jackpot game is executed, the specific winning port 65a of the variable winning device 65 is opened a predetermined number of times (for example, 16 times). , is called a right-handed game), and the ball is entered into the specific winning hole 65 a of the variable winning device 65 . When one ball enters the specific winning hole 65a, 15 balls are paid out as prize balls, so the player can win many prize balls during the jackpot game.

As described above, in the normal state, which is a gaming state in which no jackpot game is executed, a game is performed in which the ball is entered into the first ball entrance 64, and in the jackpot game state in which the jackpot game is executed, the variable is a right-handed game. The winning device 65 is aimed. Therefore, by varying the area from which the ball is shot according to the game state, the player can be made to feel that he/she is playing the game.

Further, the variable prize winning device 65, which is opened during the jackpot game, is provided with a probability variable switch 65e3 through which a ball entering the specific prize winning port 65a can pass. Details will be described later with reference to FIGS. 126 to 128, but the variable winning device 65 is provided with two paths through which a ball can pass. It is configured to pass through the variable probability switch 65e3. Then, when the ball passes through the variable probability switch 65e3 during the jackpot game, the probability variable state (high probability of special symbols) is a game state that is advantageous to the player after the jackpot game is finished. state) is given.

In addition, the pachinko machine 10 of this control example is configured to be able to execute a normal symbol lottery as a lottery different from the special symbol lottery. It is configured so that the right of the normal pattern lottery can be acquired. As with the special symbols, the normal symbols are also configured so that a state (high probability state) in which it is easy to win a win and a state (low probability state) in which it is difficult to win a win can be set, and a jackpot is won in a special symbol lottery. When the jackpot game executed based on the fact that the game is played is completed, a normal pattern high probability state is set, and when a predetermined end condition is satisfied, a normal pattern low probability state is set. .

Although the details will be described later, when the normal symbol lottery wins and wins, the electric accessory 640a is in an open state for a predetermined period of time, and a normal pattern winning game is executed. This normal pattern per game is configured to be executed with different operation contents according to the state of the normal pattern at the time when the normal pattern per game is executed, and the normal pattern per game is executed during the low probability state of the normal pattern. When the normal pattern winning game is executed during the high probability state of the normal pattern than when is executed, the normal pattern winning game in which the period in which the electric accessory 640a is in the open state is longer is executed. are doing.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of this control example configured to be variable between the state of the special symbol lottery and the state of the normal symbol lottery, the game state is the normal state (low probability state of special symbols, low probability of normal symbols). probability state), time-saving state (low probability state for special patterns, high probability state for normal patterns), and variable state (high probability state for special patterns, high probability state for normal patterns). , and the normal state in which the low probability state of the normal symbol is set is a state in which it is difficult to enter the ball into the second ball entrance 640, so the left-handed game is better than the right-handed game. It becomes a game method that is advantageous to the person.

On the other hand, the time saving state in which the high probability state of the normal symbol is set, and the variable probability state are states that make it easier to enter the ball into the second ball entrance 640, so the right-handed game is better than the left-handed game. The game method is advantageous to the player. In this way, by varying the game method that is advantageous to the player according to the set game state, the player can play the game while changing the firing intensity by operating the operating handle 51. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game from becoming monotonous. In addition, the high-probability state of the normal symbol can be set after the end of the jackpot game, and furthermore, as described above, during the jackpot game, the player is made to play the right-handed game. During a period in which a state advantageous to the player (jackpot game state, normal symbol high probability state) is continuously set, the game (right-handed game) can be played with the same firing intensity. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player's willingness to play from being lowered due to complicated operation of the operation handle 51 .

Next, the flow of the game when the ball is shot in each game method will be described. When the player executes a left-handed game, about 1/20 of the balls flowing down the left side enter the general ball entrance 63, and about 1/20 enter the first ball entrance 64. When the ball enters the general ball entrance 63, a privilege of paying out three balls as prize balls is provided. In addition, when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64, four balls are paid out as prize balls, and a privilege of obtaining the lottery right of the first special pattern is given. In other words, entering the ball into the first ball entrance 64 gives the player a privilege that is more advantageous than entering the ball into the general ball entrance 63 .

That is, when the player executes a left-handed game and shoots 250 balls, an average of 3.5 prize balls can be obtained for the 10 shot balls. It is constructed so that about 20 balls can be entered into the first ball inlet 64 before 250 balls including prize balls are exhausted. In this way, a ball entrance (general ball entrance 63) that can acquire only prize balls, a ball entrance (first ball entrance 64) that can acquire the right of a special symbol lottery in addition to prize balls, By constructing a game aiming at , the period required to digest all the specified number of balls (for example, 250) is lengthened, and at the same time, the special symbol lottery that can be obtained for the specified number of balls is performed. Since the number of rights can be suppressed, it is possible to prevent excessive granting of special symbol lottery rights to players in a short period of time. In addition, since the pachinko machine 10 in this control example is configured so that the ball that has flowed down the left side area cannot enter the second ball entrance 640, The privilege to be given is always constant regardless of the game state.

On the other hand, when the player executes a right-handed game, about 1/2 of the balls flowing down the right side region pass through the through gate 67, or the balls that have passed through the through gate 67 or avoid the through gate 67. Approximately 1/2 of the balls flowing down the right area reach the electric accessory 640a. The electric accessory 640a is buried in the game board 13 in the closed state, and the ball can pass through the electric accessory 640a in the closed state and flow down to the downstream side of the right area.

Then, about 1/4 of the ball that has flowed down to the downstream side of the right area (below the electric accessory 640a) enters the general ball entrance 63 provided on the upper right side of the variable winning device 65, and about 3 /4 is configured to reach the variable winning device 65 . The configuration of the variable winning device 65 will be described later with reference to FIGS. 126 to 128. When the variable winning device 65 is in the closed state, the balls flow down on the upper surface of the variable winning device 65 in the closed state, It flows into the out port 71 as it is. When a plurality of balls flowing down the right side area collide and the trajectories of the balls become irregular, a part (approximately 1/400) of the balls flowing down the right side area will enter the first ball entrance 64. It is configured so that it can enter the ball.

In other words, when a right-handed game is played in a state where the normal state is set as the game state, about 1/4 of the fired ball enters the general ball entrance 63 (three prize balls), Since the ball can very rarely enter the first ball entrance 64, when the normal state is set, the left-handed game is more advantageous to the player than the right-handed game. becomes.

As a game state, when a time-saving state or a variable probability state is set and a right-handed game is executed, a game per normal pattern with a longer open period than the normal state is executed with a high probability, and flows down the right side area. It is configured so that about half of the balls that do enter the second ball entrance 640 . In addition, in this control example, since it is configured to be able to store up to four normal symbol lottery rights, the rate at which the ball fired by the right-handed game passes through the through gate 67 is about 1/2. Even if it is designed for , the normal pattern lottery can be continued without interruption.

When the ball enters the second ball entrance 640, one prize ball is given and a privilege of obtaining the right of the second special symbol lottery is given. Therefore, when the high probability state of the normal pattern is set, the ball is placed in the second ball entrance 640 (winning ratio about 1/2, 1 prize ball) and the general ball entrance 63 by the right-handed game. (winning ratio 1/4, 3 prize balls) can be entered, and a special symbol lottery (second special symbol lottery) can be executed without almost reducing the number of balls in hand. Therefore, when the high probability state of the normal symbol is set, the right-handed game is more advantageous to the player than the left-handed game.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 125, a plurality of nails are planted in the right area, and the ball that flows down the right area reaches the electric accessory 640a and the flow path r1 that can reach the electric accessory 640a. At least an unobtainable flow path r2 is formed. The ball that has flowed down the flow path r2 is more likely to enter the general ball entrance 63 than the ball that has flowed down the flow path r1 and passed through the electric accessory 640a. Therefore, when the ball launched by the right-handed game flows down the flow path r1, the second special symbol lottery is efficiently executed by making it easier for the ball to enter the second ball entrance 640. - 特許庁Therefore, when the ball flows down the flow path r2, the ball enters the general ball entrance 63 where more prize balls are awarded than when the ball enters the second ball entrance 640. It is configured so that it can be easily done. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being put in an excessively disadvantageous situation in accordance with the flow-down situation of the ball shot in the right-handed game.

In this control example, as shown in FIG. 125, the ball flowing down the left side area is configured so as not to enter any of the through gate 67, the second ball entrance 640, and the specific prize winning opening 65a. However, it is sufficient if it is configured so that it is more difficult to enter than the balls that flow down the right side area. For example, about 1/100 of the balls that flow down the left side area can pass through the through gate 67. , to reach the electric accessory 640a.

Also, a variable winning device 65 is provided below the variable display unit 80 (above the out port 71), and the balls flowing down the left side region and the balls flowing down the right side region enter the specific winning port 65a at the same rate. It may be configured to allow When constituted in this way, even when a big win is won in a normal state, and when a big win is won in a time-saving state or a variable-probability state, a big win game can be executed without changing the game method being executed.

Next, a case where a right-handed game is executed during a jackpot game will be described. In this control example, when a jackpot game is executed, a normal symbol low probability state is set. As a result, when a right-handed game is executed during a jackpot game, the ball flowing down the right side area enters the second ball entrance 640, and the ball is efficiently entered into the specific winning opening 65a. It is possible to prevent the occurrence of unavoidable situations. In addition, during the jackpot game in which the balls are likely to enter the specific winning opening 65a where many winning balls (15 winning balls) are provided, it is made easier to enter the second ball opening 640.例文帳に追加It is possible to suppress excessive awarding of the prize balls to the player due to overuse.

Therefore, when a right-handed game is played during a jackpot game, most of it flows down to the downstream side of the right region. Although the details will be described later, the specific winning opening 65a of the variable winning device 65 is configured to be switched between an open state and a closed state by the opening/closing operation of the opening/closing door 65f. When the opening/closing door 65f is closed, a flow path is formed on the upper surface of the opening/closing door 65f in the closed state, through which the balls can flow down. The sphere flows down to the downstream side of 65f (left side from the viewpoint of FIG. 125). In this control example, during one jackpot game, the opening/closing door 65f is opened until a predetermined period (30 seconds) elapses or until a predetermined number (10) of balls enter the specific winning opening 65a. A round game can be executed a plurality of times, and an interval period (a period in which the open/close door 65f is closed) of a predetermined period (for example, 0.5 seconds) is set between the round games. there is The period (for example, 0.8 seconds) required for the ball to flow down the flow path formed on the upper surface of the open/close door 65f in the closed state is longer than the above-described interval period (for example, 0.5 seconds). It is configured to be Therefore, during the jackpot game, even if the player continues to play the right-handed game and a ball reaches the variable winning device 65 during the interval period, the ball will flow down the upper surface of the opening/closing door 65f. Since the next round game is started while the game is being held, the balls shot during the jackpot game can enter the specific winning hole 65a without waste.

Thus, in the pachinko machine 10 configured so that most of the balls that reach the variable winning device 65 out of the balls that are shot in the right-handed game during the jackpot game can enter the specific winning hole 65a, The total number of prize balls that can be obtained during the jackpot game varies depending on the number of balls entering the general ball entrance 63 among the balls shot in the right-handed game. Therefore, it is possible for the player to pay attention to what kind of flow path the ball shot in the right-handed game flows down during the jackpot game.

When the jackpot game ends, when the ball passes through the probability variable switch 65e3 provided in the variable prize winning device 65 during the jackpot game, the variable probability state is set, while the variable prize winning device 65 is activated during the jackpot game. When the ball does not pass through the variable probability switch 65e3, the time saving state is set.

Here, in the variable probability state in this control example, as described above, the probability that the result of the special symbol lottery will be a big hit is high, and the lottery that the normal symbol that the lottery is executed by passing through the through gate 67 is a win. The probability is set to be high. Furthermore, the time until the lottery results of the special symbols and normal symbols are determined (hereinafter referred to as fluctuation time) is also set to be shorter than in the normal game state. In addition, the variable probability state in this control example is set so as to continue until the result of the lottery of the special symbol is 200 times in a row after the end of the jackpot game, and the lottery of the special symbol is 200 times. It is set so as to shift from the probability variable state to the normal game state after consecutively hitting other than the jackpot. In this way, by setting a limit on the period in which the variable probability state that is advantageous to the player continues, the player can be motivated to play the game so as to win a big win, and the interest in the game can be improved. It has the effect of being able to In addition, the period during which the variable probability state continues may be set to other contents, for example, it may be continued until the next jackpot is won, or at the same timing as the timing when the special symbol lottery is executed. A shift lottery may be performed to shift the variable probability state to the normal game state. Moreover, you may set the period during which a probability change state continues with time.

Furthermore, in the variable probability state of this control example, the opening pattern of the electric accessory 640a that is driven to open when winning in the normal symbol lottery executed by the ball passing through the through gate 67 is the normal game state. It is set to be an opening pattern that is more advantageous to the player than. Details will be described later with reference to FIG. It is set so that the period of the open state in which the ball is possible is long.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 in this control example executes a right-handed game in the variable probability state, and aims at the through gate 67 and the second ball entrance 640 so that the game can be executed efficiently. is configured to Therefore, during the period from the start of the jackpot game to the end of the variable probability state, the right-handed game may be continuously executed, and it is possible to provide the player with easy-to-understand game characteristics.

On the other hand, when the time-saving state is set after the jackpot game ends, the probability that the result of the lottery of the special symbols will be a jackpot is the same low probability state as in the normal state, but the lottery is performed by passing through the through gate 67. The lottery probability that the executed normal symbol wins is set to be as high as the variable probability state. Furthermore, the time until the lottery results of the special symbols and normal symbols are determined (hereinafter referred to as fluctuation time) is also set to be shorter than in the normal state. In addition, the time-saving state in this control example is set to continue until the result of the lottery of the special symbol is 100 times in a row after the end of the big win game, and the lottery of the special symbol is 100 times. It is set to shift from the time-saving state to the normal state after consecutive hits other than the jackpot. In this way, by setting a limit on the period in which the time saving state that is advantageous to the player continues, the player can be motivated to play the game so as to win a big win, and the interest of the game can be improved. It has the effect of being able to In addition, the period during which the time saving state continues may be set to other contents, for example, it may be continued until the next jackpot is won, or at the same timing as the timing when the special symbol lottery is executed. A transition lottery for shifting the working hours state to the normal state may be performed. Moreover, you may set the period during which a time saving state continues with time. Furthermore, depending on the type of jackpot game that triggers the setting of the time saving state, the period (time saving number of times) during which the time saving state is set may be varied.

Furthermore, in the time-saving state of this control example, the opening pattern of the electric accessory 640a that is driven to be opened when winning in the normal symbol lottery executed by the ball passing through the through gate 67 is the normal game state. It is set to be an opening pattern that is more advantageous to the player than. Details will be described later with reference to FIG. 183, but the opening pattern of the electric accessory 640a set during the time-saving state allows the ball to enter the second ball entrance 640 more than the opening pattern set during the normal state. It is set so that the period of the open state in which the ball is possible is long.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 in this control example executes a right-handed game in the time-saving state, and aims at the through gate 67 and the second ball entrance 640 so that the game can be executed efficiently. is configured to Therefore, during the period from the start of the jackpot game to the end of the time-saving state, the right-handed game may be continuously executed, and it is possible to provide the player with easy-to-understand game characteristics.

<Regarding the variable winning device in the first control example>
Next, the configuration of the variable winning device 65 in this control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 126 to 128. FIG. 126 is an exploded perspective view of the variable winning device 65. FIG. As shown in FIG. 126, the variable winning device 65 is an opening forming member 65b arranged to protrude from the front side of the game board 13, and the variable winning device 65 is combined with the rear side of the opening forming member 65b. A base member 65c for screwing to the game board 13, and a plurality of LEDs arranged on the back side of the base member 65c for lighting the front side of the pachinko machine 10 from the back side of the base member 65c. It has an arranged LED board 65d, a back cover body 65e that sandwiches the LED board 65d with a base member 65c, and an opening/closing door 65f1 for opening and closing the specific prize winning opening 65a formed in the opening forming member 65b. The open/close unit 65f, the flow path cover body 65g combined with the back side of the back cover body 65e to form a flow path, and the flow path formed by the back cover body 65e and the flow path cover body 65g protrude into the game. A switching member 65h for switching the flow path of the sphere, a link member 65i engaged with the switching member 65h, a rear surface cover body 65j arranged on the rear surface side of the flow path cover body 65g, and a rear surface of the rear surface cover body 65j. It is composed of a channel solenoid 65k fixed to the side to operate the link member 65i, and a fixing cover body 65m for covering the channel solenoid 65k from the back side and fixing it to the back cover body 65j with screws. there is

127 is a sectional view of the variable winning device 65. FIG. 127(c) is a top view of the variable winning device 65, and FIG. 127(b) is a cross-sectional view of the variable winning device 65 taken along line Lb-Lb. As shown in FIG. 127(b), the variable winning device 65 is formed with a specific winning opening 65a, which is an opening into which game balls can enter. The specific winning hole 65a is formed with a substantially rectangular opening above the pachinko machine 10, and is inclined downward to the left so that game balls passing through the opening are guided leftward in FIG. 127(b). A bottom surface is formed. A detection port 65a1 composed of a magnetic sensor 65c1 for detecting winning of a game ball is arranged at the left end of the bottom surface. A game ball that has passed through the detection port 65a1 is guided to a sorting channel formed on the back side of the back cover body 65e shown in FIG. 128(b).

In addition, as shown in FIG. 127(b), the opening of the specific winning hole 65a has an open state in which a game ball can enter and a ball in which a game ball cannot enter by an open/close door 65f1 which is configured by a shutter mechanism which can be retracted from the game board 13 side. Possible (difficult to enter) closed state and variable. In the closed state, the opening is completely covered with the open/close door 65f1, and the game balls can roll on the top of the open/close door. In the open state, the opening/closing door 65f1 is retracted inside the base member 65c (inside the game board 13) to be retracted from the specific winning opening 65a.

With this configuration, when the opening of the variable winning device 65 is closed, the game ball rolls on the upper surface of the variable winning device 65 and is guided toward the second ball entrance 640 side. is configured as Therefore, even during the time saving state (including during the variable probability state), it is possible to enter the game ball into the second ball entrance 640 while the right-handed game is being executed, and the left-handed game can be played immediately after the jackpot game. It is possible to reduce the trouble of changing the game method. Therefore, the game can be played more easily.

In addition, in the open state, since the surface perpendicular to the direction in which the game balls flow down can be configured as the opening of the variable winning device 65, more game balls can efficiently win in the specific winning hole 65a. Therefore, the time required for the jackpot game can be shortened, and the efficiency of the game can be improved.

FIG. 127(a) is a cross-sectional view along La-La shown in FIG. 127(b). As shown in FIG. 127(a), a magnetic sensor 65c1 having a detection port 65a1 is fixed to the base member 65c so that the detection port 65a1 is inclined toward the distribution channel side of the back cover body 65e.

With reference to FIG. 128, a configuration for distributing game balls guided to the distributing flow path of the back cover body 65e to a normal discharge flow path 65e1 and a special discharge flow path 65e2, which will be described later, will be described.

FIG. 128(a) is a back view of the back cover body 65e showing a state in which the switching member 65h is operated so that game balls are distributed to the special discharge channel 65e2. As shown in FIG. 128(a), the switching member 65h has a locking hole 65h1 into which the protrusion of the link member 65i is inserted and a guiding piece 65h2 for guiding the game ball. is rotatably supported from the rear side. Here, the channel cover 65g is provided with an opening through which the guide piece 65h2 can be inserted, and the guide piece 65h2 is rotated into the distribution channel from the rear side of the channel cover 65g. It is configured so that it can be arranged as much as possible.

As shown in FIG. 128(a), the game ball guided into the distribution channel from the detection port 65a1 is guided to the upper surface of the guide piece 65h2 arranged diagonally downward to the left and guided to the special discharge channel 65e2. be. A game ball that has passed through the special discharge channel 65e2 is detected by a variable probability switch 65e3 that is configured by a magnetic sensor capable of detecting the passage of the game ball provided in the special discharge channel 65e2, and is discharged out of the pachinko machine 10 as an out ball. be done.

Here, although the details will be described later, in the pachinko machine 10 in this control example, the game ball passes through the variable probability switch 65e3 described above during the jackpot game, so that the game state after the jackpot game. high probability state) is set. That is, the variable probability switch 65e3 is configured as a specific region for giving (setting) a variable probability state. Further, the switching member 65h is configured to distribute the state of the special symbol to a high probability state (probability variable state) or a low probability state (time saving state) after the end of the jackpot game.

In this way, the game state set after the end of the big win game is varied according to the downflow route of the game ball that has entered the specific winning hole 65a during the big win game, so that the interest of the player can be improved even during the big win game. can. The time required to pass from the opening of the variable winning device 65 to the entrance of the special discharge channel 65e2 (opening surface closed by the guide piece 65h2 of the switching member 65h) is 1 second at the shortest. The operation timing and the operation time of the switching member 65h are set according to the jackpot type. In this embodiment, when the jackpot A is won, the switching member 65h is operated for 0.5 seconds in accordance with the opening timing of the variable winning device 65 at the start of the fifth round. Further, when the jackpot B or jackpot C is won, the switching member 65h is operated for 5 seconds in accordance with the opening timing of the variable winning device 65 at the start of the fifth round.

Therefore, in the jackpot B and the jackpot C, the game ball that has won the variable winning device 65 is configured to be able to pass through the variable probability switch 65e3, but in the jackpot A, it is impossible to pass through the variable probability switch 65e3 ( so that it is difficult to pass through). Therefore, it is possible to control the rate at which the variable probability state is given according to the jackpot type, and it is possible to prevent excessive advantages and disadvantages from occurring.

In addition, in this control example, by changing the switching control contents of the switching member 65h according to the jackpot type, a jackpot game (variable jackpot game) in which the ball easily passes through the variable probability switch 65e3, and a ball rather than the jackpot game. Although it is possible to set a jackpot game (normal jackpot game) in which it is difficult to pass the variable probability switch 65e3, but not limited to this, for example, the switching control content of the switching member 65h is the same regardless of the jackpot type. By setting and controlling the operation so that the opening and closing timing of the opening and closing door 65f1 in the jackpot game is different, the ball is entered into the specific winning opening 65a during the period in which the ball can be passed through the variable probability switch 65e3. It may be configured to set a jackpot game that is easy to hit the ball (probability variable jackpot game) and a jackpot game that is hard to hit (normal jackpot game). By varying the length of the period (opening period) until the round game (round game of the first round) is executed and the length of the interval period, it is possible to set the above-mentioned probability variable jackpot game and normal jackpot game. Good to configure.

With reference to FIG. 128(b), the case where the game ball is guided to the normal discharge channel 65e1 will be described. FIG. 128(b) is a diagram showing a state in which the channel solenoid 65k is inactive and the guide piece 65h2 of the switching member 65h blocks the entrance opening of the special discharge channel 65e2.

The game ball guided to the distribution channel from the detection port 65a1 is guided to the upper surface of the guide piece 65h2 of the switching member 65h and guided to the normal discharge channel 65e1. A discharge confirmation switch 65e4 composed of a magnetic sensor capable of detecting the passage of a game ball is provided at the end of the normal discharge channel 65e1. As a result, it is possible to determine whether or not all the game balls entering the variable winning device 65 have been discharged by the sum of the discharge confirmation switch 65e4 and the variable probability switch 65e3.

Therefore, it is possible to suppress the problem that the player wins in the 5th round while the game ball that won 5 rounds ago is not discharged, and even if the jackpot A is won, the variable probability switch 65e3 wins.

In this way, the game ball that has entered the specific winning hole 65a in the variable winning device 65 is detected by the magnetic sensor 65c1, and based on this, the player receives a prize ball (in this embodiment, 15 balls for each winning ball). prize balls) can be paid out. In addition, by using the game ball after being detected, it is possible to distribute whether or not it passes through the variable probability switch 65e3, so that a lottery can be executed as to whether or not to give the variable probability game state. . Therefore, there is no need to provide a dedicated prize winning port for imparting the variable probability game state separately from the variable prize winning device 65, and the space of the game board 13 can be effectively used.

Returning to FIG. 125, the description continues. A center frame 86 is arranged in a variable display device unit 80 provided substantially in the central portion of the game board 13 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third pattern display device 81 . The third pattern display device 81 can be visually recognized through an opening formed in the center of the center frame 86 . The center frame 86 protrudes toward the front side of the game board 13 and surrounds the third symbol display device 81 to prevent the third symbol display device 81 from contacting the game ball.

The third pattern display device 81 is composed of a large liquid crystal display of 15-inch size, and the third pattern is variably displayed in synchronism with the variable display of the identification information (first pattern) indicating the result of the special pattern lottery. is a display means to be displayed. The variable display of the third pattern is controlled by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 152). As a result, the player can visually recognize the third symbol that is variably displayed in various variable display modes, so that the period until the lottery result of the special symbol is displayed (variation display period of the special symbol) elapses. It is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the game by.

Further, in this control example, it is possible to set different lengths of variation time as the variation time of the first symbol based on the result of the special symbol lottery. Specifically, when the result of the special symbol lottery is a big win, it is easier to set a longer fluctuation time than when it is a loss. Since the variation time of the third symbol whose display is controlled by the display control device 114 is synchronized with the variation time of the first symbol, the longer the third symbol is variably displayed, the more the corresponding special symbol lottery is won. can increase the likelihood that

Therefore, the display control device 114, as the third pattern variation that is variably displayed on the display surface (liquid crystal display) of the third pattern display device 81, controls the length of the variation time of the third symbol variation that is being executed. A variable display mode, ie, a variable display mode indicating whether or not the third symbol variation is displayed in a stopped state, is configured to be executable. By constructing in this manner, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand the variation time of the third symbol variation, and to play the game while expecting the third symbol to be variably displayed in a longer variation time. can.

Here, the display contents of the third pattern displayed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81 will be briefly described. In this control example, one symbol row is formed by a plurality of types of third symbols, and three symbol rows of left, middle and right are displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 . Each pattern row is formed by a plurality of patterns (third patterns), and these third patterns are vertically scrolled for each pattern row, and the third pattern is variably displayed (variable) on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81. display). Each symbol row that is variably displayed is stopped in a predetermined order (for example, the order of left, right, and middle), and at the time when all the symbol rows are stopped and displayed, a predetermined number visible to the player is displayed. The result of the special symbol lottery is notified to the player by the combination of the third symbols stopped and displayed at the position (active line).

Specifically, when the third symbol of the same type as the third symbol of each symbol row is stopped and displayed on the active line, that is, "7.7.7" is displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81. It is configured to notify that the result of the special symbol lottery is a jackpot winning when the stop display is made.

In addition, in a state where at least one symbol row is variably displayed, other symbol rows are stopped and displayed in a combination that can indicate a big win, specifically, a left symbol row and a right symbol row are displayed. A state in which "7" is stopped and displayed, and the middle symbol row is being displayed in a variable manner, that is, a state in which the third symbol can be stopped and displayed in a combination indicating a jackpot winning is defined as a "ready-to-win state". It is configured to execute a performance with a high expectation of winning a jackpot.

In this way, by varying the degree of expectation for winning the jackpot depending on the variation mode of the third symbol variation to be performed, it is possible to make the players interested in the contents of the variation mode of the third symbol variation to be performed, and to improve the game. It can prevent monotony. In the above example, the left symbol row and the right symbol row are stopped at "7", and the middle symbol row is displayed in a variable state, that is, the third symbol stops at a combination indicating a jackpot winning. A state in which it is possible to display is referred to as a "reach state", but a state in which it is possible to suggest to the player that there is a high possibility of winning a jackpot in the special symbol lottery corresponding to the third symbol variation being executed. For example, once the left symbol row and the right symbol row are stopped and displayed in the above-mentioned "reach state", all the symbol rows are displayed without the middle symbol row being stopped and displayed. The state of being variably displayed again may be referred to as a "reach state", and even if the third symbol is not stop-displayed as part of a combination for winning a big win, the player is shown that the degree of expectation for a big win is high. Therefore, even when the third symbol is stopped and displayed in a predetermined display mode (for example, a display mode in which "development of reach" is displayed), the "reach state" may be set.

In the third symbol display device 81 of this control example, the display of the game state accompanying the control of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 152) is performed by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B. Decorative display according to the display of the pattern display devices 37A and 37B is performed. In place of the display device, for example, a reel or the like may be used to form the third pattern display device 81. Alternatively, a plurality of liquid crystal displays may be used to stop display the third pattern. A device 81 may be configured.

Next, the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 in this control example will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 129(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 in this control example, and FIG. 129(b) is the third symbol display device 81 in this control example. FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram schematically showing display contents; The third pattern display device 81 is composed of a 15-inch liquid crystal display, and the display contents are controlled by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 152), for example, three patterns of left, middle and right. A row of symbols is displayed. By configuring the third symbol display device 81 with a liquid crystal display in this way, various effects can be easily executed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the amusement of the game can be improved.

As shown in FIG. 129(a), the display screen of the third pattern display device 81 is roughly divided into two upper and lower parts. The lower 1/3 is a sub-display area Ds for displaying a notice effect, a character, the number of pending balls, and the like.

The third pattern (identification information for indicating the lottery result of the special pattern) displayed on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81 is 10 kinds of main patterns imitating numbers "0" to "9". It is configured. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of this control example, when the lottery result by the main controller 110 (see FIG. 152) is a big hit, the same main symbols are aligned (stopped display). A variable display in which "7.7.7" is stopped and displayed) is performed, and the jackpot game is executed after the variable display is finished. That is, the third symbol is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a symbol for showing the lottery result of the special symbol by the main control device 110 .

Specifically, the main display area Dm displays three pattern lines L1, L2, and L3 on the left, middle, and right, respectively. The above-described third symbols are displayed in a prescribed order in each of the symbol rows L1 to L3. That is, the main symbols are arranged in ascending or descending numerical order in each of the symbol rows L1 to L3, and each symbol row L1 to L3 is periodically scrolled from top to bottom for variable display.

Also, in the main display area Dm, the third symbol of each symbol row is stopped and displayed on the activated line Z1. When the third pattern is stop-displayed on the effective line Z1 in a combination of big winning patterns (combination of the same main patterns in this first control example), a big winning moving image showing winning of big winning is displayed.

In addition, the aspect of the variable display of the third symbols in the third symbol display device 81 is not limited to the above-described one, and is arbitrary. The number of third symbols forming each symbol row can be changed as appropriate. Further, the third pattern that is variably displayed by the third pattern display device 81 is not limited to the above. . Further, the area where the third symbol is variably displayed may be configured to be variable. For example, when a specific effect is executed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, the variable display area of the third symbol or moving the variable display area to a position that is difficult for the player to visually recognize (for example, a corner of the display screen), making it difficult for the player to understand whether the third symbol is changing. You may make it Also, during the period when the special symbol is fluctuating, the fluctuation of the third symbol may be temporarily stopped (temporarily stopped) and then changed again.

Furthermore, in this control example, the display mode of the third symbol corresponding to the variation of the first special symbol and the display mode of the third symbol corresponding to the variation of the second special symbol are the same (to the extent that the player can hardly distinguish ), but the display mode and display area of the third symbol may be changed so as to correspond to the type of special symbol that is fluctuating.

In addition, in the first control example, among the plurality of symbol rows, the specific symbol can be stopped and displayed as the third symbol to be variably displayed in the medium symbol row L2 which is stopped and displayed last. . This specific pattern is constructed in a display mode to which identification information (for example, "development") that is not used for a combination indicating a jackpot winning is added, and this specific pattern is stopped on the activated line Z1. By displaying, it is possible to inform that the lottery result of the special symbol is a specific lottery result (for example, a lottery result with a fluctuation time of 60 seconds or more). Then, it is configured to be able to notify that the variable display of each symbol row is executed again.

By configuring in this way, for example, even if the third symbol is stopped and displayed in a combination other than the combination indicating the winning of the jackpot in the symbol rows L1 and L3 that were stopped and displayed earlier, the special symbol lottery that is being executed can be processed. Since the expectation of winning the jackpot can be kept in the player until the medium pattern row L2 is stopped and displayed, the player can be prevented from becoming bored with the game early.

In this control example, when a predetermined condition is established, for example, when the third symbols indicating the same number are displayed in a stopped state in the left symbol row L1 and the right symbol row L3, the middle symbol row L2 during fluctuation is specified. It is configured such that a specific pattern is displayed by interrupting a portion (for example, a portion between numbers "0" and "9"). As a result, the specific symbol is suddenly displayed after the lapse of the predetermined period of variable display of the third symbol, so that it is possible to provide the player with an unexpected variation effect.

The conditions for displaying the specific symbols may be conditions other than those described above. For example, it is necessary to indicate that the numbers indicated by the third symbols stopped and displayed in the left symbol row L1 and the right symbol row L3 are a predetermined combination. Alternatively, the condition may be that the player operates the operating means while the third symbol is displayed in a variable manner. Moreover, it is good also as a condition satisfied based on the lottery result of a special design. In addition, a variable effect in which a specific pattern is displayed after a predetermined period of time has passed since the variable display of the third symbol is started may be set in advance at the time of setting the variable effect (at the time of start of variation).

In addition, when displaying a specific pattern, it is possible to use a method other than the method of interrupting and displaying a predetermined pattern row, for example, replacing it with one third pattern preset in the pattern row. good. In this case, for example, among the third symbols set in the middle symbol row L2, when a specific third symbol is stopped and displayed, the combination of the third symbols indicating a special symbol jackpot winning is stopped and displayed. If it is in a ready-to-win state, it is preferable to display the specific pattern by replacing it with a third pattern set before or after the specific third pattern. As a result, even if any of the plurality of continuous third symbols are stopped and displayed, a lottery result that is advantageous to the player is shown, so that the player can be made to pay attention to the variable presentation while having a sense of expectation. .

In this control example, it is possible to set two types of special symbol lottery results, "big win" and "loss". By varying the game content of the big win game according to the set big win type, a variable probability big winning game in which the ball easily passes through the variable probability switch 65e3 during the big winning game and a variable probability big winning game in which the ball easily passes through the variable probability switch 65e3 during the big winning game A normal jackpot game in which it is difficult to pass the variable probability switch 65e3 can be executed. The combination of the third symbols stop-displayed on the third symbol display device 81 notifies the lottery result of the special symbols and suggests (notifies) the player the type of jackpot to be set. .

Specifically, if the lottery result of the special symbol is "jackpot B" or "jackpot C", which sets the jackpot type that is most advantageous to the player, the main symbol of odd number "3, 7" is selected. A variable display is performed in which any one of them is aligned in a grid and stopped. Further, if it is a "jackpot A", a variable display is performed in which any of the even numbers "4, 6, 8" among the main symbols "0 to 9" are aligned in a grid. In addition, in order to notify the player of only winning the jackpot and to make it difficult for the player to grasp the set jackpot type, one of "jackpot A", "jackpot B", and "jackpot C" is set. Even in the case of 1, 2, 5, 9, 0, a fluctuating display in which any one of "1, 2, 5, 9, 0" is aligned is performed.

In this control example, one symbol row is formed by the ten main symbols described above, but the present invention is not limited to this. A sub-symbol (for example, a display mode of a star) may be provided. Information other than the lottery result of the special symbols may be notified to the player according to the combination of the main symbols and the sub-symbols that are stopped and displayed. If the main symbol or sub-symbol is stopped and displayed in a specific combination (first stop display mode) other than the above, the reserved and stored special symbol lottery right includes the lottery right that can win a jackpot. or when the main symbol or sub-symbol is stop-displayed in a second stop display mode different from the first stop display mode, the variation time of the special symbol variation being executed is predetermined. It may be configured to suggest that it is longer than the period. By configuring in this way, information other than the result of the special symbol lottery being executed (result of winning/failure determination) is provided to the player according to the result of the third symbol variation executed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 in which the jackpot probability is set lower than the loss probability, only the fact that the result of the special symbol lottery is a loss is continuously reported, and the willingness to play is reduced. It can be suppressed.

Returning to FIG. 129(a), the description is continued. The sub-display area Ds displays the number of lottery rights (the number of reserved symbols) of reserved and stored special symbols. In this control example, both the first special symbol and the second special symbol are configured to be able to retain and store up to four lottery rights. It is configured so that the corresponding reserved pattern is displayed. In addition, it is configured to display comments for explaining the effect content of the variable effect executed in the main display area Dm and for explaining the result of the effect.

Although detailed description is omitted, in this control example, the second special symbol lottery is preferentially executed over the first special symbol lottery, and a high probability state of normal symbols is set. It is configured to make it easier to acquire the second special symbol pending memory (special figure 2 pending) during the probability variable state or the time saving state. In other words, the first special symbol lottery is mainly executed in the normal state in which the normal symbol low probability state is set, and the second special symbol lottery is mainly executed in the variable probability state and the time saving state. Therefore, the type of reserved symbols displayed in the sub display area Ds is configured to be switched according to the set game state, and when the normal state is set, the first special symbol is reserved. Identification information (special figure 1 reserved pattern) indicating the number of memories (special figure 1 reserved ball number) is displayed, and when the variable state and time saving state are set, the number of reserved memories of the second special pattern (special figure It is configured to display identification information (special figure 2 reserved pattern) indicating 2 reserved balls). As a result, it is possible to inform the player in an easy-to-understand manner how many reserved balls corresponding to the special symbol lottery mainly executed in the current game state have been acquired.

Next, the contents actually displayed on the third pattern display device 81 will be described with reference to FIG. 129(b). As shown in FIG. 129(a), in the upper left of the main display area Dm when viewed from the front, a first display is displayed in which a guidance display mode is displayed for guiding the player to the game method corresponding to the set game state. A region Dm1 is formed. As described above, in this control example, when the normal state (low probability state of special symbols, low probability state of normal symbols) is set as the game state, the left-handed game is more to the player than the right-handed game Advantageous, if the time saving state (low probability state of special design, high probability state of normal design) is set, or the variable state (high probability state of special design, high probability state of normal design) is set In this case, the right-handed game is more advantageous to the player than the left-handed game. Moreover, even during the jackpot game, the right-handed game is more advantageous to the player than the left-handed game.

In this way, in the case of having a game property that changes the game method that is advantageous to the player according to the game situation (set game state, presence/absence of a big win game), the game method can be changed so that the player can Although it is possible to suppress the early boredom of the game, the player cannot grasp the advantageous game method in the current situation, and the player is disadvantaged by executing the game with a disadvantageous game method. Therefore, there is a problem that the desire to play is lowered.

On the other hand, in the present control example, guidance display is provided in the first display area Dm1 (see FIG. 129(a)) to guide the game method (right-handed game or left-handed game) that is currently advantageous to the player. It is configured so that the mode can be displayed. As a result, it is possible to inform the player of an advantageous game method in an easy-to-understand manner. In this control example, the guide display mode is hidden for the game method (left-handed game) that is advantageous in the normal state set when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on. As a result, when a game situation is set in which a right-handed game is advantageous to the player, a guide display mode (for example, a display mode of "right-handed") is displayed in the first display area Dm1 which was not displayed. Therefore, it is possible to inform the player in an easy-to-understand manner that the advantageous game method has been switched.

Further, although the detailed description is omitted, in this control example, a pre-guidance notification mode is provided to notify in advance that the game method advantageous to the player will be switched before the game method advantageous to the player is switched. is configured to be configurable. As a result, it is possible for the player to grasp that effect before the game method is actually switched, so that a suitable game can be easily executed immediately after the game method is switched.

In this way, a notification mode (guidance display mode) for notifying the player of a game method that is advantageous to the player and advance guidance notification that notifies in advance that the game method that is advantageous to the player will be switched. By making it possible to display the modes, it is possible to provide a game that does not give stress to the player.

In this control example, when a period in which a right-handed game is advantageous to the player is set, the guidance display mode is displayed. In a state (for example, normal state) that is more advantageous than a right-handed game, the display mode of "left-handed" may be displayed as a guidance display mode.

Further, as a mode for guiding the player to the display contents of the guidance display mode, a first mode and a second mode for guiding the player with emphasis on the first mode may be set. For example, for two seconds after switching to a game method that is advantageous to the player, an enhanced guidance display mode, which is an enlarged version of the guidance display mode displayed in the first display area Dm1, may be displayed. Further, detection means for detecting the game method being executed by the player (for example, detection means capable of detecting that the ball has flowed down the left side area and detection means capable of detecting that the ball has flowed down the right side area). is provided, and based on the detection result of the detection means, the game is not executed in the advantageous side game method even after a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the game method advantageous to the player was switched, or the game is not performed in the disadvantageous side game method. If it is determined that a game is being executed in , the above-described second mode may be set. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make the player play the game more reliably with a game method that is advantageous to the player.

In addition, when it is determined that the game is played in a game method that is advantageous to the player while the guide display is being performed in the above-described second mode, the guide display is changed from the second mode to the first mode. It is preferable to configure so as to switch the display contents of the mode. As a result, the game method is excessively guided to the player who is playing the game with the appropriate game method, and the effect of various effects executed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 is reduced. It is possible to suppress the decrease.

In the above example, only the guidance display mode using the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 was described as the guidance mode for guiding the game method to the player. , corresponding to the display timing of the guidance display mode, the voice output device 226 outputs the voice of "Right shot" as a guidance voice for guiding the game method, and the lamp display device 227 is provided in the pachinko machine 10. It may also be configured such that light emission control for guiding the game method is executed by sequentially lighting or extinguishing a plurality of light emitting means. As a result, the player can easily grasp the fact that the game method has been switched or the game method to be executed by senses other than sight (hearing, etc.).

Furthermore, the above-described first display area Dm1 is configured such that the display position is difficult to change with respect to other display areas. By configuring in this way, the game method of the game to be executed can be grasped simply by confirming a specific portion (for example, the upper left side) of the display surface of the third pattern display device 81 in any game situation. be able to. Therefore, it is possible to provide a game that is easy for the player to understand.

Next, on the upper right side of the main display area Dm in the front view, the fourth pattern interlocked with the variable display of the first special pattern or the fourth pattern interlocked with the variable display of the second special pattern is variably displayed. A second display area Dm2 is formed. This fourth pattern is a pattern for notifying the player of the lottery result of each special pattern lottery, similarly to the above-described third pattern, and is configured to be less conspicuous than the above-described third pattern. . When the special symbol lottery is executed, the fourth symbol is always variably displayed in the second display area Dm2. By configuring in this way, in order to enhance the effect of the third symbol variation, even when the effect using the entire main display area Dm is executed, whether or not the special symbol lottery is being executed can be determined. It is possible to inform the player in an easy-to-understand manner.

In addition, the pachinko machine 10 of this control example is provided with a movable means (performance accessory) that can be moved so as to cover at least a part of the display surface of the third pattern display device 81, as in the above-described embodiments. However, the above-described second display area Dm2 is formed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81 at a position that does not (difficultly) overlap with the movable range of any movable means. Therefore, even if the movable means is moved during the third symbol variation, the player can be notified of the variation display mode of the fourth symbol in an easy-to-understand manner.

In the schematic diagram shown in FIG. 129(b), the first display area Dm1 and the second display area Dm2 are shown to be large enough to be visually recognized by the player. It is formed in a difficult degree of size. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the variation effect of the third symbol executed in the main display area Dm.

In addition, when an effect using the entire display screen is executed as a variable effect of the third pattern, or a movable accessory for effect provided near the third pattern display device 81 (for example, a falling accessory 700 or a rotating accessory 840 (see FIG. 7)) is moved to cover the display screen of the third pattern display device 81, the sizes of the first display area Dm1 and the second display area Dm2 are reduced, The display position may be changed, or the display may be temporarily hidden. As a result, it is possible to provide a powerful performance without a sense of incongruity.

Furthermore, instead of the first display area Dm1 and the second display area Dm2, a fourth dynamic display is performed outside the third symbol display device 81 in conjunction with the variable display of the first special symbol, the second special symbol, and the normal symbol. It may be configured to display a pattern. In this case, it is preferable to provide LEDs for the fourth symbol corresponding to each symbol at the same location as the many decorative LEDs provided on the pachinko machine 10 . Thus, the variation of the fourth symbol corresponding to the variation display of each symbol can be executed in a way that is difficult for the player to understand.

<Regarding the production content in the first control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 130 to 145, the contents of various effects executed in the first control example will be specifically described. First, with reference to FIGS. 130 to 132, the contents of the operation presentation for allowing the player to operate the operation means (frame button 22) in multiple numbers will be described.

Conventionally, an operation means (for example, frame button 22) that can be operated by a player is provided, and the effect mode is changed step by step according to the number of times the operation means is operated during a predetermined period during which a specific effect is executed. There is a pachinko machine 10 that executes a variable operation effect (so-called repeated hitting effect). In such a continuous hit effect, the effect mode is generally configured to be changed in stages, and when changing to a specific effect mode, it is more likely than not to change to the specific effect mode. are also constructed so as to produce an effect effect that is advantageous to the player.

According to the gaming machine capable of executing such a continuous hitting effect, the player can actively operate the operation means to change the effect mode of the effect to be executed, so that the player can motivate the player. You can participate in games. However, since the effect mode set in the continuous hit effect is preset according to the result of the special symbol lottery, for example, if the special symbol lottery is lost and won, the operating means can be operated multiple times within a predetermined period. Even if is operated, the effect mode indicating that the result of the special symbol lottery is the big win is not set. In addition, in the case where the performance contents are set so that the degree of expectation of winning a big hit in the special symbol lottery increases as the performance mode changes during the continuous hitting performance, the special symbol lottery loses and wins. It is necessary to execute a repeated hitting effect in which the effect mode is difficult to change in the repeated hitting effect that is actually executed.

In this case, even if the player operates the operating means a plurality of times within the predetermined period during which the continuous hitting effect is executed, the period in which the effect mode is not changed continues, and the player's motivation to operate the operating means decreases. There was a problem.

On the other hand, in this control example, all the effect modes set in the repeated hit effect, that is, when the effect mode is changed to the final effect mode based on the operation to the operation means, the subsequent operation means Depending on the operation content of , the continuous hit effect can be terminated without waiting for the lapse of a predetermined period for executing the repeated hit effect. By constructing in this way, the player is made to execute the continuous hit effect for a long time without changing the effect mode, and the player's desire to play the game and, in turn, the desire to operate the operation means is reduced. You can prevent it from happening.

Next, the effect contents of the repeated hitting effect executed in the pachinko machine 10 of this control example will be specifically described. FIG. 130(a) is a diagram schematically showing the start screen of the continuous hit effect. As shown in FIG. 130(a), in this control example, as the continuous hit effect, a effect in which the main character 801 fights against a plurality of enemy characters 802 is executed, and the number of enemy characters 802 is displayed according to the operation of the frame button 22. It is configured so that a production that reduces the

First, when the repeated hit effect is executed, "100" is displayed as a display mode indicating the number of enemy characters 802 in the display area HR1, and a message prompting the user to operate the frame button 22 is displayed in the display area HR2. A button 803, which is a display mode, and a time gauge 804 for indicating the period of repeated hit effects (the period during which it is determined that the operation of the frame button 22 is effective) are displayed. More specifically, the button 803 has an operation mode (represented by a downward arrow in the drawing) showing a pressing action as an animation prompting the player to press the frame button 22, and a normal state (non-operating state) of the button 803. It is displayed by an animation having a pressing state (operating state) and an action mode of repeating.

Here, the enemy character 802 is configured to be displayed in a plurality of display modes, and in the example shown in FIG. ing. In this control example, the privilege given according to the remaining number of enemy characters displayed in the display area HR1 (the result of the special symbol lottery, the type of variable effect executed after the end of the continuous hit effect) is advantageous to the player. It is configured to be able to suggest whether or not it is a thing, and it is configured so that the fewer the number of remaining enemy characters 802 displayed in the display area HR1, the easier it is for the player to receive an advantageous privilege. Furthermore, when the remaining number displayed in the display area HR1 is the same, the type of the enemy character 802 displayed corresponding to the remaining number can also indicate the degree of advantage of the privilege given to the player. Configure.

Specifically, it is configured such that the player is more likely to receive benefits that are advantageous to the player when the strong enemy character 802a is defeated than when the strong enemy character 802a remains. With this configuration, the player can watch the continuous hitting effect while expecting that the number of remaining enemy characters 802 will be reduced in the repeated hitting effect, and further, expecting that a specific enemy character 802 will be defeated. , can enhance the performance effect.

In addition, the character 801 is equipped with a sword 801k as a weapon for defeating the enemy character 802, and by swinging the sword 801k, an effect of reducing the number of remaining enemy characters 802 is executed. The display mode of the sword 801k is configured to vary as the variable mode of the continuous hit effect approaches the upper limit value (maximum variable value). Specifically, it is configured so that the display mode can be varied so that the player can grasp that the sharpness of the sword 801k is steadily decreasing. In other words, the sword 801k is a suggesting means that enables the player to predict how many enemy characters 802 can be reduced at maximum in this continuous hitting effect.

With this configuration, when a specific number (for example, 10) of enemy characters 802 are displayed in the middle of the continuous hit effect, the number of remaining enemy characters 802 can be determined by looking at the display mode of the sword 801k. can be further reduced. Therefore, it is possible to provide the enjoyment of predicting the performance result of the continuous hitting performance, and enhance the performance effect.

The display mode of the time gauge 804 is varied in accordance with the elapsed time of the repeated hit effect, and the remaining time area 804b indicating the remaining period of the repeated hit effect decreases from the left end of the time gauge 804. Is displayed. Then, as the remaining time area 804b decreases, the time gauge 804 displays an increased elapsed time area 804a. With this configuration, the player can see at a glance the time that has already passed (the display mode of the elapsed time area 804a) and the remaining time (the display mode of the remaining time area 804b) in the entire period of the continuous hit effect. can be grasped by Further, in this control example, the length of the period set as the continuous hit effect is not displayed numerically. In other words, the length of the period set as the repeated hitting effect is given to the player based on the elapsed time since the repeated hitting effect was executed and the variable state of the display mode of the time gauge 804 displayed in the display area HR2. It is structured so that it can be grasped intuitively.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to provide the enjoyment of predicting the length of the period set as the continuous hit effect. Moreover, even when different lengths of periods are set as the period during which the continuous hit effect is executed, it is only necessary to change the variable mode of the time gauge 804, thereby simplifying the processing related to the display control. In this control example, the display mode of the time gauge 804 is configured so that the player can visually determine the display ratio between the elapsed time area 804a and the remaining time area 804b, thereby grasping the effect period of the continuous hit effect. In addition to this, for example, as information indicating the ratio to the display area of the time gauge 804, for example, a value of "100" is displayed at the left end of the time gauge 804, and a value of "50" is displayed at the center of the time gauge 804. , and a value of “0” may be displayed at the right end of the time gauge 804 . As a result, the display ratio between the elapsed time area 804a and the remaining time area 804b in the time gauge 804 can be notified to the player in an easy-to-understand manner.

In this control example, the remaining time area 804b is configured to be variably displayed at a constant speed. When the remaining time area 804b is displayed until the remaining time area 804b is smaller than when the remaining time area 804b is displayed on the right end side of the time gauge 804, the remaining time per unit time It may be configured such that the degree of decrease in the region 804b is greater. As a result, the degree of decrease in the remaining time region 804b can be made slower as the remaining period of the repeated hitting effect decreases, so the repeated hitting effect can be executed without giving up until the end.

Further, for example, when the remaining time region 804b is large, that is, the remaining time region 804b is displayed to the left end of the time gauge 804, the remaining time region 804b is smaller, that is, the right end of the time gauge 804 is displayed. The degree of decrease in the remaining time area 804b per unit time may be smaller than in the case where the remaining time area 804b is displayed in , or the continuous hit effect period after the time gauge 804 is displayed is The length of the period until the end is set in advance, and the remaining time area 804b is not displayed at the timing when the period has passed. Display control may be executed as follows. By constructing in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to predict the period during which the repeated hitting effect is set, so that the player is motivated to operate the frame button 22 (operating means) immediately after the repeated hitting effect is executed. be able to.

Returning to FIG. 130(a), the description is continued. In the sub-display area Ds, a comment "defeat the enemy with repeated button hits" is displayed as a display mode indicating that the repeated hit effect has started. As a result, the execution of the repeated hitting performance and the operation contents to be executed during the repeated hitting performance can be notified to the player in an easy-to-understand manner, so that the player can easily participate in the repeated hitting performance.

Then, when the player operates the frame button 22 a plurality of times during the continuous hitting effect, a display screen as shown in FIG. 130(b) is displayed. FIG. 130(b) is a diagram showing an example of the display screen displayed after the frame button 22 is operated a plurality of times during the continuous hitting effect. As shown in FIG. 130(b), when the player operates the frame button 22 a plurality of times during the continuous hit effect, the number of enemy characters 802 decreases according to the number of times the operation is performed. An effect is executed in which the number of enemy characters 802 is reduced to a variable value). FIG. 130(b) shows a continuous hit effect in which "3" is set as the maximum variable value, and the number of remaining enemy characters 802 on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 is three. is displayed in the display mode of the enemy characters 802, and the characters "3 remaining" indicating the number of remaining enemy characters 802 are displayed in the display area HR1. In the example shown in FIG. 130(b), since the display mode of the enemy character 802 has reached the upper limit (maximum variable value), the sword As the display mode of 801k, a display mode in which the blade is tattered is displayed.

It should be noted that even if the effect mode of the continuous hitting effect is varied up to the maximum variable value, the player is not immediately notified that the maximum variable value has been reached. The display of the time gauge 804 indicating the effect period of the repeated hit effect and the display of the button 803 are continuously displayed. As a result, the player who is executing the repeated hitting effect can play the game expecting that the effect mode of the repeated hitting effect will be more varied.

The variable degree of the effect mode of the continuous hit effect in this control example is configured so that the maximum variable value is likely to differ according to the lottery result of the special symbol, and the smaller the maximum variable value (displayed in the display area HR1 The smaller the number of remaining enemy characters 802 to be drawn, the higher the possibility of winning a big win in the special symbol lottery.

Then, the effect result of the repeated hit effect is displayed in a different display mode according to the number of the enemy characters 802 at the end of the repeated hit effect. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 130(c), when the number of enemy characters 802 (remaining number displayed in the display area HR1) at the end of the continuous hit effect is "0", the special symbol lottery of this time is displayed in the sub-display area Ds (see FIG. 131(a)), indicating that the result is likely to be a jackpot. , but the characters of ``chance'' are displayed in the secondary display area Ds (see FIG. 131(b)), and ``10 to 89 is displayed in the secondary display area Ds as a display mode that does not show the result of the special symbol lottery. By configuring in this manner, the player can be motivated to play the game to reduce the number of enemy characters 802 during the continuous hitting effect.

If the number of enemy characters 802 (remaining number displayed in the display area HR1) at the end of the repeated hit effect is "90 to 100", it means that the player is not actively participating in the repeated hit effect. Therefore, instead of the lottery result of the special symbol, the characters "more hits!!" are displayed in the secondary display area Ds as the effect result of the repeated hits effect to encourage participation in the repeated hits effect. As a result, it is possible to reinform the player who has forgotten to operate the frame button 22 during execution of the repeated hitting effect or who has not understood how to operate it, of the contents of the game to be executed during the repeated hitting effect. Therefore, the frame button 22 can be easily operated when the repeated hitting effect is executed next time.

In addition, in this control example, when the frame button 22 is operated a predetermined number of times (e.g., eight times) after the effect mode of the repeated hit effect reaches the maximum variable value, the conditions for ending the repeated hit effect are established, and the repeated hit effect is completed. It is constructed so that the performance result of the continuous hitting performance is displayed before the performance period of . More specifically, as shown in FIG. 132(a), when the end condition is established in a state where the effect mode of the continuous hit effect reaches the maximum variable value (3), the remaining time area 804b of the time gauge 804 remains. , the effect result similar to the effect result of the continuous hit effect executed when the remaining number of enemy characters 802 is "3" (see FIG. 131(b)) is displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81. be done.

By configuring in this manner, the maximum variable value of the repeated hitting effect currently being executed can be notified to the player in an easy-to-understand manner before the end of the effect period of the repeated hitting effect. Although detailed explanation is omitted, in this control example, when the effect result of the repeated hit effect is displayed before the effect period of the repeated hit effect elapses, the remaining effect period (remaining period of the time gauge 804) ) has elapsed, an effect different from the continuous hit effect is executed according to the operation of the frame button 22 . By configuring in this way, even when the effect result of the repeated hitting effect is displayed early, the player can be motivated to operate the frame button 22 .

Furthermore, in this control example, in a part of the case where the end condition is satisfied while the effect mode of the continuous hit effect reaches the maximum variable value (3), the special effect result is as shown in FIG. 132(b). A performance is performed. FIG. 132(b) is a diagram showing an example of the display screen when a special effect result is set as the effect result of the continuous hitting effect.

FIG. 132(b) shows, as the effect result of the continuous hit effect, when the end condition is established in a state where the effect mode of the repeated hit effect reaches the maximum variable value (3) (see FIG. 130(b)), the above-described maximum This shows a special effect result in which a follow-up effect is executed to further change the variable value (3), the number of enemy characters 802 is reduced to 0, and the characters "great chance" are displayed in the secondary display area Ds. In the display area Dm, the characters "Follow-up Attack" are displayed, and an animation is displayed in which the character 801 makes an additional attack on the enemy character 802 and defeats the remaining enemy characters 802 . Then, the characters "0 remains" are displayed in the display area HR1. In addition, the button 803 is hidden in the display area HR2, and the player is notified that the effect mode will not change even if the frame button 22 is pressed any more, and the player is informed of the timing at which the follow-up effect is executed. A time gauge 804 is displayed to notify the time.

In this way, the pachinko machine 10 configured to be able to display the performance result of the repeated hitting performance before the performance period of the repeated hitting performance elapses, that is, the pachinko machine provided with a termination condition other than the lapse of the period as the termination condition of the repeated hitting performance. In the machine 10, by making it possible to display a performance result different from the normal one partly when the end condition is satisfied, the player is motivated to end the repeated hit performance under various end conditions. can participate in

Further, in this control example, as described above, the condition for ending the repeated hit effect is to operate the frame button 22 a predetermined number of times (eight times) after the effect mode of the repeated hit effect has been varied up to the maximum variable value, in addition to the lapse of the effect period. It has an end condition (shortened end condition) that is satisfied when the game is completed, and a special effect result is displayed in part when the shortened end condition is satisfied. As a result, when the continuous hit performance is executed, the player who has intentionally operated the frame button 22 is more likely to execute the special performance result than the player who has not intentionally operated the frame button 22.例文帳に追加be able to.

In this control example, the shortening end condition is established according to the number of times the player has operated the frame button 22 . For example, every time the frame button 22 is operated after the effect mode of the continuous hit effect is varied up to the maximum variable value, a predetermined A lottery may be executed, and if the lottery is won, the shortened termination condition may be established. Even in the case of such a configuration, it is possible to make it easier for the player to satisfy the shortened end condition when the frame buttons 22 are operated more often than when the player does not operate the frame buttons 22 more often. In addition, in this case, immediately after the effect mode of the continuous hitting effect is varied to the maximum variable value (by the first operation of the frame button 22 after the effect mode is varied to the maximum variable value), the shortening end condition is established. Therefore, the shortened end condition can be satisfied without making the player predict the maximum variable value set in the continuous hit effect being executed.

In addition, in the above-described control example, it is configured so that the termination condition can be established after the effect mode of the repeated hit effect is varied to the maximum variable value. In the case where the mode can be changed to three or more performance modes, it is constructed so that the end condition of the continuous hitting performance can be established before the performance mode of the continuous hitting performance is changed to the performance mode corresponding to the maximum variable value. can be Specifically, when the frame button 22 is operated while the first effect mode (first effect mode) in the repeated hit effect is being executed, the change to the next effect mode occurs with a probability of about 1/2. A variable lottery (first lottery) is executed to allow the game to be played, and a termination lottery (second lottery) is executed to end the consecutive hitting performance with a probability of about 1/100. Then, when the variable lottery (first lottery) is won before the end lottery (second lottery), the performance mode is changed to the second performance mode (performance mode corresponding to the semi-variable value). When the frame button 22 is operated in a state in which the continuous hit performance is being executed in the second performance mode, the first lottery is executed with a probability of about 1/10, and the second lottery is executed with a probability of about 1/10. Execute. In other words, it is constructed so that it is easier to win the second lottery when the repeated hit performance is executed in the second performance mode than when the repeated hit performance is executed in the first performance mode, and the continuous hit performance is being performed. Depending on the results of various lotteries executed based on the operation of the frame button 22 in , the effect mode of the continuous hitting effect may be varied.

In this way, when the frame button 22 is operated during the repeated hitting effect, the effect mode of the repeated hitting effect is changed by satisfying the first condition, and the repeated hitting effect is caused by satisfying the second condition different from the first condition. Further, the more the effect mode of the repeated hitting effect is changed, the more likely the second condition is satisfied than the first condition, so that the repeated hitting effect executed this time is preliminarily executed. While making it difficult for the player to predict the maximum variable value that has been set, it is possible to execute continuous hitting performance in a performance mode rich in variation based on the operation of the frame button 22.例文帳に追加

Also in this case, the maximum variable value in the continuous hitting performance is set in advance, and when the maximum variable value is reached, even if the first lottery is won, the performance mode is not changed, and the second lottery is entered. It is only necessary to continue the continuous hitting effect without changing the effect mode until winning. Further, when winning the first lottery while reaching the maximum variable value, a process for increasing the probability of winning the second lottery may be executed without changing the presentation mode. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the period during which the second lottery is not won from being unnecessarily long during the continuous hitting effect.

In the above-described example, both the first condition and the second condition are established according to the result of a predetermined lottery. At least one of the first condition and the second condition may be established according to the number of times the (operation means) is operated. In this way, the condition that is established according to the number of times the frame button 22 is operated during the repeated hit effect and the lottery result of the predetermined lottery that is executed when the frame button 22 is operated during the repeated hit effect. and a condition to be satisfied by each condition, and depending on the degree of establishment of each condition, the effect mode of the repeated hit effect is varied, or the end timing of the repeated hit effect is set. It is possible to make it difficult to understand whether the performance mode of is variable and at what timing the continuous hitting performance ends, so that the performance effect can be enhanced.

Furthermore, in this control example, it is possible to notify the player that the possibility of winning a big hit in the special symbol lottery increases as the performance mode changes during the continuous hitting performance, but this is not the only option. For example, even if the player operates the operation means (the frame button 22) a predetermined number of times (for example, 10 times) during the repeated hitting performance, the special symbol lottery will win a big hit in the case where the performance mode of the repeated hitting performance does not change. It may be configured to notify that the possibility of winning is high. By configuring in this way, even when a state is set in which it is difficult to change the effect mode during the continuous hit effect, the player can enjoy the effect mode until the end. In addition, when the effect result of the continuous hit effect is displayed in the effect mode that has not been changed from the initial state, the current effect result is the effect result executed because the frame button 22 was not operated, or the frame button 22 is not operated. It is possible to make it difficult for a nearby player to grasp whether the performance result is based on the result of operating 22.例文帳に追加

In addition, a plurality of performance modes that can be set during the continuous hit performance are provided, and when a variable condition for varying the performance mode during the continuous hit performance is satisfied, one of the plurality of performance modes is selected. In a game machine which can be set at random, it may be configured such that when the result of a special symbol lottery is a big hit, a specific performance mode is more likely to be set than when it is a loss. By configuring in this way, it is possible to eliminate the relationship between the variable number of times of the performance mode during the repeated hitting performance and the degree of expectation of winning the jackpot. In contrast, the frame button 22 can be voluntarily operated.

In this case, an upper limit is set for the number of times the effect mode is changed during the repeated hit effect, and when the number of times the effect mode is changed during the repeated hit effect reaches the upper limit value, the maximum It may be configured to execute the same processing as when the display mode is changed to the variable value display mode. Thus, by positively operating the frame button 22 during the continuous hit effect, the variable number of times of the effect mode is set to the upper limit while the remaining period of the repeated hit effect (period for validly determining the operation of the frame button 22) remains. When the value is reached, it is possible to shorten the effect period of the continuous hit effect.

Next, the display contents of the icon display effects will be described with reference to FIGS. 133 to 135. FIG. FIG. 133(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an area in which icon display can be performed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81. FIG. FIG. 133(b) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the display screen displayed when the icon display effect is started.

In this control example, a plurality of types of icons can be displayed at a plurality of locations on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81, and the locations where the icons are displayed and the icon display effect (icon display effect in which the display order is random). display notice) is configured to be executable. In this icon display effect, the result of the special symbol lottery can be suggested to the player according to the location where each icon is displayed and the type of icon to be displayed.

In the pachinko machine 10 capable of executing such an effect, in order to prevent the player from easily predicting the effect mode of the icon display effect, the locations where each icon is displayed in the icon display effect, A plurality of performance pattern data with different types of icons to be displayed are prepared in advance, and the performance mode of the icon display performance to be executed is determined according to the lottery result of the special pattern. However, in the case of using the method of preparing a plurality of effect pattern data in advance, there is a problem that the amount of effect data to be stored in advance increases according to the number of effect patterns.

On the other hand, in this control example, when the icon display effect is executed, the icon display effect can be executed in a manner in which a plurality of lottery results are combined. That is, instead of pre-storing effect pattern data indicating a series of effect contents in the icon display effect, the effect contents are determined for each part of the icon display effect, and the icons are displayed in an effect mode combining the determined contents. It is configured to execute a production. By configuring in this way, icon display effects can be executed in various effects modes using a limited amount of effect data.

Although a specific description will be given later, in this control example, when determining the effect mode of the icon display effect, the number of icons displayed by the current icon display effect, the order in which the icons are displayed, and the display positions of the icons are determined separately. are selected by lottery, and the icon display effect is executed in the effect mode combining each selected content. That is, for example, when the number of icons to be displayed is four, the first icon type is displayed, the second icon type is displayed, the third icon type is displayed, and the fourth icon type is displayed. The icon type displayed in is selected, and furthermore, the display location where the first icon is displayed, the display location where the second icon is displayed, the display location where the third icon is displayed, and four A display location where an eye icon is displayed is selected.

Furthermore, the icon display locations are configured so that the same display location can be selected more than once, and if the same display location is selected more than once, the latter icon will not be displayed. Configure. By configuring in this way, it is possible to display a number of icons different from the number of icons selected as the effect mode of the icon display effect, so the icon display effect is executed simply by combining a plurality of effect contents. It is possible to execute the icon display effect in a more diverse manner than in the case of doing so, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

As shown in FIG. 133(a), in this control example, five areas 811a to 811d are set in advance as areas where icons can be displayed in the icon display effect. Then, when the icon display effect is executed, a suggestive mode suggesting a place where the icon is displayed is displayed for the five areas 811a to 811d.

FIG. 133(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the display screen when the suggestion mode is displayed in the icon display effect. As shown in FIG. 133(b), when the icon display effect is executed and the suggestive mode is displayed, the areas 811a and 811b are displayed as display locations where icons may be displayed in the current icon display effect. , and a display mode (a circle in the figure) indicating the area 811c is displayed. An area 811a is displayed in a highlighted display mode (a double circle in the figure) for indicating the area in which the icon is displayed next (first) among the areas displayed in the suggestive mode.

In this way, when the icon display effect is executed, by displaying the suggestion mode suggesting the place where the icon is displayed before the icon is actually displayed, the player can see the icon It is possible to provide the enjoyment of predicting the presentation mode of the display presentation. Furthermore, in this control example, when the result of the special symbol lottery is a jackpot, there is provided a display portion (specific display portion) where the icon is more likely to be displayed than when the result is a loss. Therefore, when the specific display location is suggested as the suggestion mode, the player can have a sense of anticipation that he or she has won a special symbol jackpot.

In this control example, a plurality of display locations are displayed as a suggestive mode displayed in the icon display effect. By configuring in this way, it is possible to notify the display locations where the icons are displayed in the icon display effect to be executed this time without suggesting the display order. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with the enjoyment of predicting the presentation mode of the icon display presentation, specifically in which display order the icons will be displayed.

In this control example, the icon is always displayed at the display location where the suggestion mode is displayed. It is sufficient that the icon is more likely to be displayed than the non-displayed display location, and when a plurality of display locations are displayed in a suggestive mode, some of the plurality of display locations may not display the icon. It may be configured not to be displayed. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult to predict the effect mode of the icon display effect to be executed.

Now, with reference to FIG. 134, the flow of actual icon display in the icon display effect will be described. FIG. 134(a) is a diagram showing an example of the display screen when the first icon is displayed in the icon display effect, and FIG. 134(b) is a diagram showing all the icons in the icon display effect. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a display screen when

As shown in FIG. 134(a), the icon 812a displayed first as the icon display effect is displayed in the area 811a displayed in the highlighted display mode in FIG. 133(b). In this control example, the icon 812a is displayed after the icon display area is destroyed in the main display area Dm, and the icon pops out from the area. The mode, that is, the display mode showing the area where the icon is displayed is made different from the display mode showing the other areas.

Then, the area 811c is displayed in a highlighted display mode for suggesting the display location where the icon will be displayed next, and is not displayed in the suggested mode on the display screen shown in FIG. Area 811d is displayed in a suggestive manner. In this way, as the icon display effect progresses, by adding information about the order in which the icons are displayed in the icon display effect and the display locations where the icons are displayed, even after the icon display effect is executed, It is possible to provide the enjoyment of predicting the final result of the icon display effect.

In addition, since it is possible to comprehend the content of the suggestive mode while comprehending the type of icon to be displayed, the icon display effect can be enjoyed in a complex manner. Although a detailed description will be given later, in the example shown in FIG. 134(a), the most common icon display mode, "square", is displayed as the first icon display mode in the icon display effect. there is In this control example, the ease of display is also changed for the types of icons displayed in the icon display effect. It is configured so that it is easier to display in the case of a big win. As a result, in the icon display effect, the player can be interested not only in the number of icons to be displayed and the display locations, but also in the types of icons to be displayed.

In addition, the degree of expectation for winning the jackpot can be varied based on the combination of the display location of the icon and the icon type, or the degree of expectation for winning the jackpot can be varied based on the combination of the number of icons displayed and the icon type. It may be configured such that the degree of expectation for winning the jackpot is varied based on the combination of the icon types to be used. As a result, it is possible to predict the result of the effect as the repeated hit effect progresses, that is, while grasping the type and display position of the actually displayed icon, so that the player can be more interested. has the effect of

Then, after a predetermined period of time has passed from the diagram shown in FIG. 134(a), icons are displayed for all of the four areas (areas 811a to 811e) displayed in the suggestive mode. Specifically, the icon displayed second is the area 811c adjacent to the area 811a, and then the icons 811b and 811d are displayed in this order. In the example shown in FIG. 134(b) of this control example, the display order of icons is set in the order of area 811a, area 811c, area 811b, and area 811d. An icon 812a has an icon type of "rhombus shape" in the area 811b, an icon 812c has a "round shape" as an icon type in the area 811c, and an icon of "V sign shape" as an icon type in the area 811d. 812d is displayed.

Although the details will be described later, in this control example, the "V sign shape" icon 812d is displayed more when the jackpot is won in the special symbol lottery than when the jackpot is not won (when the jackpot is not won). It is designed to be easily displayed. In order to make it difficult for the player to understand at what timing and in which display position the icon 812d of the "V sign shape" is displayed, the icon type, the display position, and the display order are separated. It is configured so that it is possible to select independently and execute an icon display effect combining the selected contents. Therefore, it is possible to keep the player interested in the effect content of the icon display effect.

In this control example, each icon displayed in the icon display effect is configured to be displayed continuously until the icon display effect ends. The icon may be erased after a predetermined period of time has passed. For example, the previously displayed icon may be erased after the next icon is displayed. By configuring in this way, while suppressing the occurrence of a period during which no icon is displayed during the icon display effect, the effect of the icon display effect is not obtained unless the icon display effect is continuously observed. Since it can be made difficult to grasp, the production effect can be enhanced.

Next, with reference to FIG. 135, another pattern of icon display effects will be described. FIG. 135 is a diagram showing an example of a display screen when overlapping icon display locations are set as icon display effects. The icon display effects shown in FIG. 135 are the same as those in FIG. 134B described above in the number of icons to be displayed and the icon types, but are different only in the order of icon display. Specifically, in FIG. 134(b) described above, the display order of the icons is set in the order of area 811a, area 811c, area 811b, and area 811d, whereas in FIG. Areas 811a, 811c, 811a, 811c are set in this order.

In this control example, when the icon display locations are selected in duplicate, only the icon types corresponding to the previously selected display order are displayed. Therefore, an icon display effect is executed in which the third icon (“rhombus shape” icon 812b) and the fourth icon (“V sign shape” icon 812d) selected as the icon type are not displayed. It will be. As a result, the possibility of winning a jackpot in the special symbol lottery, that is, the icon display effect that allows the display of four icons and the icon 812d of "V sign shape" can be displayed internally. Only two icons are displayed as a performance mode of the icon display performance to be actually executed in spite of being in a state in which the icon display performance for showing a high value can be executed, and the degree of expectation of winning the jackpot. An icon display effect is executed in which only the icon types for which the value is not high are displayed.

Therefore, it is possible to set the effect mode of the icon display effect to be executed in a complicated manner with respect to the result of the special symbol lottery. In addition, as an icon display effect executed when the result of the special symbol lottery is a loser, only two icons can be displayed internally, and only icon types that are not highly expected to win a big win are displayed. Even when the icon display performance to be displayed is executed, the icon display positions in the icon display performance are duplicated, so that the player is made to think that the icon display performance in which only two icons are displayed is executed. be able to. As a result, the player can play the game while feeling the expectation of winning the big prize until the icon display performance is finished.

According to the example shown in FIG. 135, when the icon display locations in the icon display effect overlap, the icon set first is displayed. Alternatively, a discriminating means capable of discriminating the types of icons whose display portions are duplicated is provided, and icons discriminated as easily selected icon types are displayed. Alternatively, it may be configured to display an icon that is determined to be an icon type that is difficult to select. Alternatively, a fused icon may be generated by merging icons having overlapping display locations, and the fused icon may be displayed.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 136 to 138, the contents of the delay effect in this control example will be described. In this control example, the player is caused to operate the frame button 22, and while the display mode displayed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81 is varied according to the operation result, voice is output corresponding to the variable mode. An effect (operation effect) for outputting a sound from the device 226 is configured to be executable. Furthermore, when the operation effect is executed, a predetermined delay condition (for example, a delay condition established when the determination means for determining whether or not to execute the delayed effect determines to execute the delayed effect) is established. , the operation of the frame button 22 can be executed by delaying one or both of the variable timing of the display mode and the audio output timing.

The above-mentioned delayed effect makes the player feel uncomfortable by changing only the execution timing without changing the contents of each effect to be executed (display effect for changing the display mode, audio effect for outputting sound). Only the player who notices the discomfort can grasp that the delayed effect has been executed, and as a benefit, benefits advantageous to the player (for example, winning a jackpot) are given with a high probability. In recent years, it has been used as a production to show that

However, as long as it is used as an effect in which a privilege that is advantageous to the player is given with a high probability, the occurrence frequency (execution frequency) is low, and even if the player plays the game all day long, it will be executed only once or twice. It was something. In contrast to the delay effects that are executed less frequently and the content of each effect does not change, conventionally, the effect data corresponding to the pattern of each delay effect, that is, the display effect is displayed after the frame button 22 is operated. Display data including display image data corresponding to the waiting period until the performance is executed, and effect data dedicated to the delay effect having audio data including the sound corresponding to the waiting period until the sound effect is performed are prepared in advance. Therefore, there is a problem that the capacity of the effect data increases with respect to the execution frequency.

On the other hand, in this control example, in the case of executing the delayed effect, it is possible to set a waiting period from when the frame button 22 is operated until the effect corresponding to the operation of the frame button 22 is executed. , when it is determined that the set waiting period has passed, the operation effect is executed. In other words, the timing at which the operation effect is executed is delayed from the timing at which the frame button 22 is operated.

By configuring in this way, the delay effect can be executed without providing the effect data dedicated to the delay effect. In addition, in this control example, different lengths of waiting periods can be set as the waiting period from when the frame button 22 is operated until the operation effect is executed. In addition, in this control example, the standby period described above can be set for each of the display effect and the sound effect. That is, when the delay effect is executed, the length of the delay period of the display effect and the length of the delay period of the sound effect can be made different. In this way, only by changing the length of the waiting period, it is possible to set a plurality of delay timings in the delay performance and increase the variation of the delay performance, so that the interest in the game can be improved.

First, with reference to FIG. 136, an example of an operation effect executed in this control example will be described. FIG. 136(a) is a diagram showing an example of the display screen displayed when the operation effect is executed, and FIG. 136(b) is an example of the display screen displayed as the effect result of the operation effect. It is a figure showing. First, when an operation effect is executed, as shown in FIG. 136(a), a treasure chest 810 is displayed in the center of the main display area Dm, and a message "PUSH the button to open the treasure chest!!" ” comment is displayed. In the display area HR2 formed in the main display area Dm, a button 803, which is a display mode prompting the operation of the frame button 22, and a time gauge 804 for indicating the period during which the operation of the frame button 22 is effectively accepted. and is displayed. The display mode displayed in the display area HR2 is the same as the display mode in the repeated hit effect (see FIG. 130(a)) described above, so the same reference numerals are given and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

A schematic diagram showing the state of the frame button 22 and the audio output device 226 is shown next to the diagram simulating the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 in FIG. 136(a). The situation is a schematic diagram showing a situation in which the frame button 22 is not operated and a situation in which the audio output device 226 does not output a sound indicating the effect result of the operation effect.

After the operation effect is executed, when the player operates the frame button 22, the treasure box 810 displayed in the center of the main display area Dm opens as shown in FIG. A character of "chance" is displayed as a result display mode 810a for indicating. Then, the comment "Chance!!" is also displayed in the sub-display area Ds. The state shown in FIG. 136(b) is a state in which the frame button 22 has been operated, and a state in which a sound (“pakkan”) indicating the effect result of the operation effect is output from the audio output device 226, and the display is performed. The display mode that prompts the user to operate the frame button 22 from the area HR2 is deleted.

As described above, if it is a normal operation effect, the player operates the frame button 22 during the operation effect (while the remaining time area 804b is displayed on the time gauge 804), and immediately after that, the operation is performed. As a performance result of the performance, a display performance of opening the treasure box 810 and a voice ("pakkan") indicating the opening of the treasure box 810 are outputted at the timing corresponding to the variable state of the display mode in the display performance. As a result, it is possible to execute an effect with a sense of unity between sight and sound.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 137 and 138, the content of the effect when the delayed effect is executed with respect to the operation effect (when the delay pattern is set) will be described. FIG. 137(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the display screen when the frame button 22 is operated when a delay pattern is set for the operation effect, and FIG. 8 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the display screen 0.8 seconds after the frame button 22 is operated when a delay pattern is set for the operation presentation. FIG.

First, when the frame button 22 is pressed in a state where a delay pattern is set for the operation effect, as shown in FIG. "Pakkan") is output, but the display mode displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 is the display mode displayed when the operation effect is executed and the frame button 22 is not operated (Fig. 136). (a) reference) is continuously displayed. Then, when the delay period (0.8 seconds) set as the current delay pattern has elapsed, as shown in FIG. It is displayed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81 .

That is, the delay pattern explained with reference to FIG. 137 is a delay pattern in which the display effect is delayed by 0.8 seconds and the sound effect is delayed by 0 seconds (not delayed). By executing the delayed effect in this way, it is possible to cause the player to execute an effect that gives the player a sense of discomfort. In addition, since the production situation after the display mode shown in FIG. 137(b) is displayed is the same as the production situation (see FIG. 136(b)) when the delayed production is not executed, the player can It is necessary to determine whether or not the delay performance is executed in a short period in which the display performance is not executed and only the voice performance is executed, and the player can be made to pay attention to the performance contents of the operation performance. .

Further, in the effect example shown in FIG. 137, since the sound is output from the sound output device 226 immediately after the player operates the frame button 22 (because the sound effect is executed), the frame button 22 is properly operated. However, without being limited to this, it is also possible to set a delay period for both the display effect and the sound effect as a delay pattern of the operation effect. good.

The state shown in FIG. 137(a) is actually the state in which the frame button 22 has already been pressed. Configure. Then, the display mode of the time gauge 804 is changed in the same manner as when the frame button 22 is not operated. That is, a display mode in which the remaining time area 804b is reduced is displayed. In other words, the display mode is continuously displayed when the frame button 22 is not operated. In this way, when the delay pattern of the operation effect is set, when the frame button 22 is operated, the same display mode as when the frame button 22 is not operated is continuously displayed during the delay period. By configuring so as to be such that, as the effect mode during the delay period, the effect mode that does not give the player a sense of discomfort can be executed without using a new effect. Also, even if a different length of delay period is set, it is only necessary to change the length of the period during which the same display mode as when the frame button 22 is not operated is maintained.

Here, for example, the frame button 22 is operated in a state in which there is almost no remaining effect period of the operation effect (a period indicated by the remaining time area 804b of the time gauge 804) (specifically, less than 0.8 seconds), and a delay occurs. When the pattern is set, the remaining performance period of the operation performance becomes 0 during the delay period, so the same display mode as when the frame button 22 is not operated is continuously displayed during the delay period. I have a problem that I can't.

Therefore, in this control example, it is made possible to determine whether or not the present is in the delay period. When it is determined that there is, a specific effect is configured to be executable.

Next, the effect contents of this specific effect will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 138 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the effect content of the specific effect. As shown in FIG. 138, when the specific effect is executed, a comment "during delay" is displayed in the sub-display area Ds to notify the player that the delay period is currently in progress. , a special effect (indicated by a star in the figure) is displayed around the closed treasure chest 810 in the center of the main display area Dm, and a special effect (indicated by a star in the figure) is also displayed around the button 803 displayed in the display area HR2. (indicated by an asterisk) is displayed. Further, since the effect period of the operation effect is 0 at the timing when this specific effect is executed, the time gauge 804 without the remaining time region 804b is displayed. Then, in accordance with the execution timing of the specific effect, the sound of "Chance" is output from the sound output device 226 as a sound mode based on the result of the special symbol lottery which is the target of the operation effect of this time. This voice mode is variable based on the actual result of the special symbol lottery, and when the result of the special symbol lottery is a big win, the voice for suggesting the result of the special symbol lottery (for example, chance, When the result of the special symbol lottery is a loss, a voice (for example, the occurrence of a delay, etc.) is output to notify the player that the delay effect is being executed. It should be configured so that it can be easily output.

With such a configuration, it is possible to provide the player with the pleasure of selecting at what timing the frame button 22 should be operated during the operation performance. In this control example, when the effect period of the operation effect (valid period during which the frame button 22 can be operated) has elapsed during the set delay period, the specific effect described above is executed. However, without being limited to this, even during the delay period, the delay period may be reset at the point when the presentation period of the operation presentation has passed, and the presentation result of the operation presentation may be displayed. Such a configuration eliminates the need to use new performance data, and furthermore, the length of the delay period can be made more complicated.

In addition, a separate execution condition for the above-described specific effect may be provided. For example, if the remaining period of the effect period of the operation effect is longer than or equal to a predetermined period, an execution condition that is established when the delay period is set may be provided. Alternatively, it may be configured such that only the operation performance executed during the special symbol variation in which the result of the special symbol lottery is a big hit is the specific performance.

An example of the delay effect in this control example has been described above with reference to FIGS. A delay pattern may be set so that the timing is delayed. Further, in this control example, when a delay pattern is set for the operation performance executed within one special symbol variation period, the operation performance of the delay pattern is completed within the special symbol variation period. However, without being limited to this, when the delay pattern is set, it may be configured so that the operation effect is executed so as to straddle a plurality of special symbol variations. In this case, for example, a pre-determination process for pre-determining the winning information of the special figure reservation newly acquired during the execution of the operation effect is executed, and if the result of the pre-determination process is that the jackpot is won, It may be configured to set a delay pattern. Further, the delay period set as the delay pattern can be set up to the specific timing of the special symbol variation corresponding to the special symbol holding which is the result of the preliminary determination that the jackpot is won in the preliminary determination at the longest. It is possible to execute a delay performance with a surprising length for In addition, when the delayed performance is executed across a plurality of special symbol variations, the same operation performance may be executed as the performance corresponding to the special symbol variation in which the delayed performance is executed. As a result, the effect result of the operation effect to be executed after the delay period has elapsed can be provided to the player without discomfort.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 139 to 144, the contents of the gathering effect and the battle effect will be described. In this control example, as an effect for showing the lottery result of the special symbol, it is configured to be able to execute a variation effect corresponding to the variation period of the special symbol variation. Furthermore, as one of the variable effects, a variable display effect using the display surface of the third pattern display device 81 is configured to be executable. As one of the variable display effects, a group effect and a battle effect are configured to be executable.

In this control example, as the variable display effect executed within the special symbol variation period for showing the result of one special symbol lottery, the group effect is executed in the first half of the variable display effect, and the second half of the variable display effect. During the period, the battle performance is executed in a performance mode corresponding to the performance result of the collective performance. In this way, the variable display effect that is continuously executed for a predetermined period is configured to vary the effect mode that is executed in the latter half according to the result of the effect that is executed in the first half of the variable display effect. can be watched continuously.

First, among the variable display effects executed in the pachinko machine 10 of this control example, the contents of the group effects executed in the first half period will be described with reference to FIGS. 139 to 141. FIG. The group production is a production for gathering a plurality of characters (ally characters), and the battle production in the latter half period is executed in a production mode according to the number of grouped ally characters in this group production. In this control example, the larger the number of allied characters gathered in the gathering effect, the more likely the result of the corresponding special symbol lottery is to win the jackpot than the smaller number. Therefore, when the gathering effect is executed, the player can play the game while expecting more allied characters to gather.

In this control example, the display mode of the third pattern that is variably displayed on the display surface (main display area Dm) of the third pattern display device 81 is varied to execute a group effect. Each of the symbol rows L1 to L3 variably displayed in the display area Dm is variably displayed with the third symbols corresponding to the ally characters of different types. Then, among the third symbols that are stopped during the group effect (this concept includes a temporary stop display that looks like it has stopped, and the same applies to the stop display described below), there is a third symbol that corresponds to the ally character. is included, an effect is executed to indicate that the stopped-displayed allied characters have gathered.

The number of times the third pattern is stop-displayed in the collective performance differs according to the performance period of the collective performance, and the third pattern is stopped when a longer performance period is set as the performance period of the collective performance. It is configured to be displayed more often. In this way, the number of times the third symbol is stopped and displayed can be changed according to the gathering effect to be executed, so that the game can be played to determine how many friendly characters can be obtained (collected). Since it is possible to make it difficult for other players to understand, it is possible to play the game while anticipating that more allied characters will gather until the end of the gathering effect.

Furthermore, in this control example, different types of ally characters are set for each of the symbol rows L1 to L3 that are variably displayed. By configuring in this manner, it is possible to make the player interested in which display mode each of the symbol rows L1 to L3 is stopped and displayed. In addition, in this control example, the number of allied characters set for each symbol row is made different. Specifically, for the middle symbol row L2, the other symbol rows It is configured so that more ally characters are set than in the symbol column L3).

By configuring in this way, the player watches the gathering effect while being strongly aware that the third symbol corresponding to the ally character is stopped and displayed in the symbol row in which many ally characters are set. Therefore, the production effect can be enhanced. For example, the number of times that the third pattern is stopped and displayed as a group effect is set to 2 times, and one friendly character (character 1) in the left pattern row L1 and one friendly character (character 2) in the right pattern row L3 are displayed in the middle pattern. When two types of allied characters (character 3 and character 4) are set in column L2, in order to collect four types of allied characters (character 1 to character 4) in this variation effect, the first At the 3-symbol stop display timing, at least character 3 or character 4 must be stop-displayed in middle pattern row L2, and it is not necessary to stop-display ally characters in left pattern row L1 and right symbol row L3. . Therefore, it is possible to make the player interested in which teammate character is stop-displayed in which pattern row at which timing, and the production effect can be enhanced.

Next, the concrete effect content of the collective effect executed in this control example will be described. FIG. 139(a) is a diagram schematically showing an example of the display screen displayed when the gathering effect is started, and FIG. FIG. 140(a) is a diagram showing an example of the display screen displayed, FIG. 140(b) is a diagram showing an example of the display screen when an ally character is obtained in the gathering effect; [FIG. 11] is a diagram showing an example of an end screen of a collective effect.

As shown in FIG. 139(a), when the group effect is executed, the display mode of the third symbols set in the symbol rows L1 to L3 is varied, and the third symbols in the left symbol row L1 are displayed stationary. A left preliminary symbol display area 900a in which a preliminary symbol is displayed is formed so as to accompany the left third symbol display area 901a. Similarly, a middle preliminary symbol display area 900b in which a middle preliminary symbol is displayed is formed so as to accompany the middle third symbol display area 901b in which the third symbol of the middle symbol row L2 is stop-displayed, and the right symbol row L3. A right preliminary symbol display area 900c in which a right preliminary symbol is displayed is formed so as to accompany the right third symbol display area 901c in which the third symbol is stopped and displayed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 139(a), the character "large" is displayed in the left preliminary symbol display area 900a, the character "collection" is displayed in the middle preliminary symbol display area 900b, and the right preliminary symbol display area 900c. On the other hand, when the characters "go" are stopped and displayed, the group effect is started, and the characters "group effect start" indicating that the group effect is executed are displayed in the sub-display area Ds.

In the example shown in FIG. 139(a), the start timing of the collective effect is displayed. Although the displayed display screen has been described, each of the preliminary symbol display areas 900a to 900c may be used in other effects, for example, an effect that spans continuously executed variable effects (continuous effect ), each preliminary symbol display area 900a ~ 900c in order to indicate that the continuous effect is being executed (for example, characters "continuous") to stop display each preliminary symbol, Each preliminary symbol may be stop-displayed in a display mode (for example, characters of "probability change") to indicate the currently set game state.

In addition, a preliminary pattern may be used as an effect to incite whether or not the collective effect is to be executed. is stop-displayed, the left preliminary symbol display area 900a that is first stop-displayed is "Large", and then the right preliminary symbol display area 900c that is stop-displayed is "Composite". It is also possible to configure so that the preliminary symbol of "X" is stopped and displayed in the intermediate preliminary symbol display area 900b which is stopped and displayed. By configuring in this way, it is possible to provide the player with the pleasure of predicting whether or not the collective effect will be executed according to the stop display mode of each of the preliminary symbol display areas 900a to 900c.

In addition, in this control example, at the start timing of the collective effect shown in FIG. 139(a), the third symbol is stopped and displayed in a normal display mode. The preliminary symbols are stopped and displayed irrespective of the stopped display mode of the third symbols. By configuring in this way, as the display control when the collective effect is started, it is not necessary to use the dedicated stop display control for the third symbol or the dedicated third symbol type, and the processing load of the display control is eliminated. can be reduced.

In this control example, the third symbol is also stop-displayed (temporarily stopped) at the stop display timing of the preliminary symbol indicating the start of the collective effect, so that the player can understand that the collective effect will start. However, without being limited to this, it may be configured such that only the preliminary symbols are stopped and displayed while the third symbols are being variably displayed. With this configuration, the preliminary symbols can be stop-displayed regardless of the stop-display timing of the third symbol, so that the collective effect can be started at various timings. Further, there is no need to execute stop display control for stopping (temporarily stopping) the third symbol in accordance with the start timing of the collective effect, and the processing load of display control can be reduced.

In addition, in this control example, the display screen showing the start of the group effect shown in FIG. 139(a) can be displayed at a plurality of timings. When executing the group effect from the start timing of the special pattern variation, the preliminary pattern stops in a display mode indicating the start of the group effect at the stop display timing of the third pattern corresponding to the stop timing of the special symbol variation being executed. In the case of executing the set performance with the special symbol variation being displayed and being executed, the preliminary symbols can be stopped and displayed at a plurality of timings during the variation display of the third symbol corresponding to the special symbol variation. It consists of By configuring in this way, it is possible to easily vary the effect period of the collective effect. In addition, in FIG. 139(a), since the preliminary symbol is stopped and displayed at a specific timing during the variable display of the special symbol variation, the display area Dm1 formed on the upper right side of the main display area Dm Then, the fourth symbol corresponding to the special symbol variation is variably displayed.

Next, when the collective effect is started, the display screen of the collective effect is displayed as shown in FIG. 139(b). When the collective effect is started, a display area HR5 is formed on the left side of the main display area Dm. This display area HR5 is a display area in which acquired (collected) ally characters are displayed, and is an obtainable display frame corresponding to the maximum number of ally characters that can be acquired, according to the effect mode of the gathering effect to be executed. (in the figure, seven display frames are indicated by dotted lines) are displayed. At the time shown in FIG. 139(b), no allied character has been acquired, and therefore no acquired allied character is displayed in the display area HR5.

By forming the display area HR5 in this manner and displaying the obtainable display frame and the acquired allied characters, the player is notified in advance of the maximum number of allied characters that can be acquired in the gathering effect this time. Therefore, it is possible to easily evaluate the performance contents of the collective performance. Furthermore, since the number and type of allied characters that have already been acquired can be displayed as a history, it is possible to provide an effect that is easy for the player to understand. In addition, a display area HR6 is formed on the lower right side of the main display area Dm, and the maximum number of allied characters that can be obtained in this gathering effect and the number of allied characters that have already been obtained are displayed as numerical information. In the state shown in FIG. 139(b), the maximum number of obtainable allied characters is "7" and the number of allied characters already obtained is "0". "0/7" is displayed as an information display mode indicating the status.

When the collective effect is executed, a display mode dedicated to the collective effect is set as the display mode of the third symbols stopped and displayed in the respective third symbol display areas 901a to 901c. Specifically, the third symbols in the display mode corresponding to each teammate character and the third symbols in the display mode not corresponding to the teammate character are stopped and displayed. Then, the third symbols variably displayed in the third symbol display areas 901a to 901c stop and display before the preliminary symbols variably displayed in the preliminary symbol display areas 900a to 900c.

In FIG. 139(b), the third symbol (displayed as "?" in the figure) in a display mode not corresponding to the ally character is stopped and displayed in the left third symbol display area 901a and the right third symbol display area 901c. In the middle third symbol display area 901b, as the third symbol corresponding to the ally character, the third symbol imitating a "bird" is stopped and displayed. At this time, as described above, the preliminary symbols are being displayed in a variable manner, so although the ally character stopped and displayed in the third symbol in the gathering effect has not been acquired, it indicates that the ally character will be acquired. When the preliminary symbols are stopped and displayed in the display mode, a state is entered in which the ally character to be acquired is notified in advance.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to notify the player in advance of the number and type of allied characters to be acquired when allied characters are successfully acquired in the gathering effect. , the performance contents of the group performance to be executed this time can be notified step by step. In addition, during execution of the gathering effect, by displaying a plurality of display modes corresponding to the ally character in the third pattern and displaying the preliminary symbol in a display mode indicating that the acquisition of the ally character has failed, , it is possible to stop and display the third symbol corresponding to the ally character that cannot actually be acquired. Therefore, it is possible to execute an effect that effectively uses the image data of the third symbol, which is a display mode dedicated to the collective effect.

After that, when the preliminary symbols are stop-displayed in a display mode indicating acquisition of an ally character, the display screen shown in FIG. 140(a) is displayed. In FIG. 140(a), as the display mode of preliminary symbols indicating acquisition of an ally character, the left preliminary symbol display area 900a is "Large", the middle preliminary symbol display area 900b is "Collective", and the right preliminary symbol display area 900c. The character "go" is stopped and displayed. Then, as a gathering effect, the secondary display area Ds is displayed as a guide display indicating that a friendly character (tri-character) corresponding to the display mode imitating the "bird" that has already been stopped and displayed in the middle third symbol display area 901b has been obtained. A comment "Tori GET!!" is displayed.

In addition, in the display area HR5, a simple display mode imitating a "bird" is displayed in the fifth display frame from the top to indicate the acquired ally character. Here, in this control example, a predetermined order is assigned in advance to the ally characters that can be obtained, and among the plurality of display frames displayed in the display area HR5, the order corresponds to the order assigned in advance. It is configured so that the acquired ally character is displayed at the position. That is, in the state of the display area HR5 shown in FIG. 139(b), the player is notified only of the total number of allied characters that can be acquired in the current gathering effect, but as shown in FIG. 140(a). , when one ally character is acquired, the player can predict the type of ally character that can be acquired in the gathering effect being executed, depending on the position of the display frame where the acquired ally character is displayed. Become.

Therefore, as the collective performance progresses, it becomes possible to predict the performance mode of the collective performance in more detail, so that the players can continue to be interested in the content of the performance to be executed.

In this control example, all the display frames displayed in the display area HR5 have the same shape. The shape of the display frame may be varied to some extent. In addition, it is also possible to display supplementary information that makes it possible to predict the friendly character corresponding to each display frame. By configuring in this way, it is possible to provide the player with the enjoyment of predicting the types of allied characters that can be acquired in the current gathering presentation immediately after the gathering presentation is started.

In addition, in this control example, as described above, the acquired allied characters are displayed at positions corresponding to the order given in advance, but this is not the only option. It may be configured to be displayed side by side, or if the possibility of winning the jackpot in the special symbol lottery is different depending on the type of allied characters that have been acquired, It may be configured so that the acquired ally characters are displayed side by side.

Furthermore, in this control example, the total number of allied characters that can be acquired in the gathering performance being executed in the display area HR5 is notified to the player immediately after the gathering performance is started. Without limitation, only part of the total number of allied characters obtainable in the collective performance being executed is notified to the players, and as the collective performance progresses, the number of display frames displayed in the display area HR5 is increased. By doing so, the number of allied characters that can be acquired in the gathering effect may be increased. As a result, even if the number of obtainable allied characters is reported to be small immediately after the gathering effect is executed, the number of reported characters may increase in the middle, which reduces the motivation to play. can be suppressed.

In this example of control, the timing for acquiring a teammate character, that is, the preliminary symbols can be stopped and displayed a plurality of times during the performance period of the gathering performance. Then, after acquiring a teammate character a plurality of times, as shown in FIG. 140(b), when the preliminary symbols are displayed in a display mode different from the "large gathering", the gathering effect ends.

In FIG. 140(b), as shown in the display areas HR5 and HR6, the state in which a total of four allied characters, "elephant", "dugong", "bird", and "bear" have been acquired is shown. and "4/7" is displayed as the information display mode. A third symbol indicating "?" is displayed in the left third symbol display area 901a, "wild boar" in the middle third symbol display area 901b, and "rhinoceros" in the right third symbol display area 901c. "Large" in the symbol display area 900a, "X mark" in the middle preliminary symbol display area 900b, and "Complete" in the right preliminary symbol display area 900c are stop-displayed.

In other words, while each preliminary symbol is displayed in a variable manner, each third symbol is stopped and displayed, and after arousing the player that it is possible to obtain "wild boar" and "rhinoceros" as friendly characters, the left, right, and middle symbols are displayed in this order. The preliminary symbols that are stopped and displayed are "Large" and "Go", and after emphasizing that it is possible to obtain an ally character, a state is shown in which a "X mark" is finally stopped and displayed. By making it difficult for the player to predict until the end whether the gathering performance will end or whether the gathering performance will be continued by acquiring a teammate character, It is possible to prevent the player from getting bored early.

As shown in FIG. 140(b), in the group effect in this control example, one of the display modes (“Large”, “X mark”, “Agreement”) of the preliminary pattern for notifying that the group effect is finished is displayed. The part is the same as the display mode ("large", "collection", "combination") when acquiring an ally character, but it is not limited to this, for example, to notify that the group effect is over. The display mode of the preliminary symbols is set to a display mode that is completely different from the display mode when acquiring an ally character (for example, "E", "N", "D"), and to notify that the gathering effect is over. A continuous display mode (for example, 'E', '?', 'D') in which the display mode of the preliminary symbols and a part of the display mode are different can be displayed.

In this case, when "E" is stop-displayed in the left preliminary symbol display area 900a during the gathering effect, it is confirmed that the ally character cannot be acquired, and whether or not the gathering effect ends. Only then will the player be interested. That is, it is possible to provide an advantageous effect to the player even if the effect does not increase the number of allied characters. Therefore, in the case of performing a collective performance in which only a limited upper limit number of ally characters can be acquired, it is possible to increase the number of times the preliminary symbols are stopped and displayed, and the performance effect can be enhanced.

Further, when the preliminary symbols can be stopped and displayed in the continuous display mode, the display control may be executed so that only the preliminary symbols are stopped and displayed while the third symbols are not stopped and displayed. As a result, it is possible to increase the frequency of stop-displaying the preliminary symbols. Furthermore, when the continuous display mode described above is stopped and displayed a predetermined number of times (for example, twice) in succession, the display mode ("Large", It is preferable to configure so that the stop display (the possibility of the stop display is increased) is performed by "collection" and "matching"). By configuring in this way, when the preliminary symbols are stopped and displayed in the continuous display mode, not only the gathering effect is continued but also the degree of expectation for acquiring the ally character can be increased, so that the gathering effect can be performed. The production effect can be further enhanced.

As shown in FIG. 140(b), when it is notified that the group effect is over in the stop display mode of the preliminary symbols, the sub display area Ds displays the A comment of "battle start" is displayed as a guidance display mode for guiding that the effect will be executed. Then, a battle production is executed. Details of the battle effect will be described later with reference to FIGS. 142 to 144. FIG.

Here, in the present control example, when executing a collective effect, various effects are selected independently, and the collective effect is executed in an effect mode in which a plurality of independently selected effect contents are combined. are doing. As a result, compared to the case where performance data (image data) is provided for each performance pattern executed in the collective performance, it is possible to execute a variety of collective performances using a small amount of performance data.

Specifically, the types of allied characters that can be displayed in each of the symbol rows L1 to L3 are set in advance, and the allied characters are acquired during the gathering performance according to the variation pattern in which the gathering performance is executed. The number of times to do is set in advance. The total number and type of allied characters to be obtained in the gathering effect this time are configured to be independently selected according to the result of the special symbol lottery (type of variation pattern command).

Therefore, for example, there are situations where the number of allied character types that are set only in the symbol row 1 out of the allied character types acquired in this set production is greater than the number of times allied characters are acquired during the gathering production. may occur. In other words, when various effects are independently selected and a predetermined effect is executed in a mode of effect combining a plurality of independently selected effects, there is a combination of effects that are impossible (difficult) to execute. There is a problem that arises.

On the other hand, in this control example, it is determined whether or not the result of combining a plurality of independently selected performance contents is a feasible performance mode. When it is determined that it is a performance mode, a dedicated performance is executed, and the result of combining a plurality of independently selected performance contents can be provided to the player without discomfort. By constructing in this manner, compared to the case where performance data (image data) is provided for each performance pattern executed in the collective performance, the player can enjoy a variety of collective performances without problems by using less performance data. can be provided to

Here, with reference to FIG. 141, the content of the above-described dedicated effect will be described. FIG. 141(a) is a diagram showing an example of a suggestion screen suggesting the last winning chance in the collective effect, and FIG. 141(b) shows an example of a display screen showing the result of the last winning chance in the collective effect. It is a diagram.

In this control example, it is determined whether or not the result of combining a plurality of independently selected performance contents is a feasible rendering mode. As a dedicated effect to be executed when it is determined, it is configured to be able to execute a last acquisition chance effect. In this last acquisition chance effect, the effect of acquiring an ally character is executed regardless of whether the third symbol is displayed in a variable display or a stop display. With reference to 139 and FIG. 140, an effect is executed for obtaining a teammate character that could not be obtained with the effect contents of the group effect described above.

Specifically, after the end screen of the group effect shown in FIG. 140(b) is displayed, the third pattern is oscillatingly displayed as shown in FIG. 141(a). Then, in the sub-display area Ds, a comment "Get a chance when it starts to move" is displayed as a guidance display mode suggesting that the last chance to win effect will be executed. In the state shown in FIG. 141(a), when the variable display of the third symbol is resumed, the last acquisition chance effect is executed, and as shown in FIG. In (b)), an effect is executed to acquire the ally character that was stopped and displayed. Furthermore, allied characters that are not stop-displayed are additionally displayed on the end screen of the gathering effect (see FIG. 140(b)), and an effect is executed in which the additionally displayed allied characters are also acquired.

When the last chance to win effect ends, as shown in FIG. 141(b), the display area HR5 and the display region HR6 show the result of the group effect including the effect of the last chance to win "Elephant" and "Dugong". , ``Rhinoceros'', ``Bird'', ``Bear'', and ``Wild Boar'' are displayed, and ``6/7'' is displayed as the information display mode. In the secondary display area Ds, the number of allied characters acquired in the last acquisition chance, and a guide display mode for guiding the performance to be executed after the gathering performance, "Last 2 characters get!! Battle start". comment is displayed.

In this way, by enabling execution of the last winning chance performance, when a group performance is executed by combining a plurality of independently selected performance contents, the result of the combination is provided without making the player feel uncomfortable. can do. In the example of the effect described above with reference to FIG. 141, the last chance to win effect is executed after the suggestion effect (see FIG. 141(a)) suggesting that the last chance to win effect is executed. Although an example is shown, after the suggestive effect (see FIG. 141(a)) suggesting that the last winning chance effect will be executed is executed, the third symbol is stopped and displayed again, so that the last winning chance effect is executed. It is configured so that the collective production ends without executing

Thus, in the case where the suggestive effect (see FIG. 141(a)) suggesting that the last chance to win effect is executed is executed, the game is played while making the player interested in whether or not the last chance to win effect will be executed. can be done.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 142 to 144, the details of the battle effects will be described. This battle effect is an effect executed after the end of the group effect, and the effect is executed according to the effect result of the group effect, that is, the number of ally characters acquired in the group effect. In this battle effect, an effect is executed in which the ally character acquired in the gathering effect battles with the enemy character.

FIG. 142(a) is a diagram showing an example of the display screen when the battle effect is started. In addition, in FIG. 142(a), a description will be given of the battle effect executed after the above-described last acquisition chance effect (see FIG. 141(b)) is executed. As shown in FIG. 142(a), when the battle effect is executed, a display area HR7 is formed on the left side of the main display area Dm. A total of six ally characters of "elephant", "dugong", "rhino", "chicken", "bear", and "wild boar" are displayed as a display mode in which the characters can be distinguished from each other. A display area HR8 is formed above the display area HR7, and "attack times 6" is displayed as a display mode indicating the number of battles to be executed in the current battle effect. In other words, in this battle presentation, the player is notified that a battle presentation will be executed in which the six ally characters acquired in the gathering presentation will individually battle the enemy characters. In this way, by making it possible for the player to grasp the effect content of the battle effect in advance, the progress of the battle effect can be properly determined, and an easy-to-understand effect can be executed.

In addition, an enemy character (boss character) 910 for battle production is displayed on the right side of the main display area Dm, and a physical strength gauge 911 indicating the physical strength (HP) of the boss character 910 is displayed near (below) it. This physical strength gauge 911 is composed of a numerical display mode (displayed as "1000" in the figure) showing the current physical strength value (HP) numerically, and a gauge display mode showing a gauge. remaining HP display mode 911a showing the physical strength (HP) of the player, and consumed HP display mode 911b (see FIG. 142(b)) showing already consumed HP.

The physical strength gauge 911 indicates that the remaining physical strength (HP) is full as a guide display for the player to easily grasp how much the remaining physical strength (HP) is. "MAX", "200" indicating that the remaining physical strength (HP) is a predetermined value, and "0" indicating that the remaining physical strength (HP) is 0 are displayed. Then, according to the physical strength (HP) of the boss character 910 reduced in the battle production, the remaining physical strength is displayed as a guide display for guiding the player about the production mode to be executed after the battle production and the degree of expectation of winning the jackpot. When (HP) decreases to a predetermined value (200), after the battle effect, "SP reach" indicating that the SP reach with a high expectation of big hit will be executed, and the remaining physical strength value (HP ) becomes 0, that is, when the boss character 910 is subjugated in the battle presentation, "great chance" is displayed to indicate that the expectation of winning the jackpot is high.

By configuring in this way, the effect result of the battle effect and the subsequent game content can be associated with each other and grasped, so that it is possible to provide the player with an effect that is easy to understand. In addition, even if the boss character 910 is not defeated in the battle production, the player can grasp in advance that the expectation of winning the jackpot increases by reducing the remaining physical strength value (HP) to a predetermined value. It is possible to provide a presentation that is easy for the player to understand.

In the battle effect executed in this control example, an attack effect is basically executed in which one ally character attacks the boss character 910, and either a weak attack or a strong attack is executed as the attack pattern of the ally character. It consists of When a weak attack is executed, the physical strength (HP) of the boss character 910 decreases by the minimum unit (eg, 100), and when a strong attack is executed, the physical strength (HP) of the boss character 910 decreases by the minimum unit (eg, , 100) (eg, 200).

142(b) and FIG. 143(a), description will be given of the effect contents of the attack effect in which the ally character attacks the boss character 910 in the battle effect. FIG. 142(b) is a diagram showing an example of the display screen displayed when the weak attack effect is executed, and FIG. 143(a) is a display displayed when the strong attack effect is executed. It is the figure which showed an example of a screen.

As shown in FIG. 142(b), when the attack effect is started in the battle effect, among the friendly characters displayed in the display area HR7, the attack is executed in order from the friendly character first obtained in the gathering effect. attack production is executed. Then, the display mode indicating the teammate character used for the attack effect is erased from the display area HR7, and "remaining 5 times" is displayed in the display area HR8 with the number of remaining attacks subtracted. In FIG. 142(b), "Tori" is executing a weak attack as the ally character 820, and "-100" is displayed in the display area HR9 to indicate the health value of the boss character 910 that has decreased due to this attack (light attack). At the same time, the numerical display mode of the physical strength gauge 911 is reduced to "900", and the remaining HP display mode 911a and the consumed HP display mode 911b correspond to the current physical strength value (HP) of the boss character 910, which is "900". displayed in the display mode Also, in the sub-display area Ds, "Attack of Birds!!" is displayed as a guide display mode for guiding that the current attack is a weak attack. The display mode of the boss character 910 displayed in the main display area Dm is configured to be slightly variable (represented by sweat in the figure) from the state in which the boss character 910 is not attacked (see FIG. 142(a)). ing. The display mode of the boss character 910 is configured to be variably displayed in different display modes according to the magnitude of the physical strength value that is reduced (consumed) by one attack effect or the remaining physical strength value. By variably displaying the display mode of the boss character 910 in this way, it is possible to allow the player to visually grasp the content of the battle production, so that it is possible to provide the player with an easy-to-understand production.

Next, the contents of the strong attack effect executed after the attack effect shown in FIG. 142(b) will be described with reference to FIG. 143(a). As shown in FIG. 143(a), a "bear" is executing a strong attack as an ally character 820, and the display area HR9 shows the physical strength of the boss character 910, which has decreased due to this attack (strong attack), "-". 200" is displayed, the numerical value display mode of the physical strength gauge 911 is subtracted from "700", and the remaining HP display mode 911a and the consumed HP display mode 911b are the current physical strength (HP) of the boss character 910, which is "700". is displayed in a display mode corresponding to ". Also, in the sub-display area Ds, "CRITICAL HIT!!" is displayed as a guidance display mode for guiding that the current attack is a strong attack.

In addition, the display mode indicating the teammate character used for the attack effect is erased from the display area HR7, and "5 times remaining" is displayed in the display area HR8 with the number of remaining attacks subtracted. Then, when the physical strength value (HP) of the boss character 910 becomes 0 as a result of execution of the attack presentation for a predetermined number of times in the battle presentation, the display screen shown in FIG. 143(b) is displayed. FIG. 143(b) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen displayed when the boss character 910 is subjugated as a result of the battle production. As shown in FIG. 143(b), as the final attack presentation (sixth attack presentation) in the battle presentation, the ally character 820 "Sai" executes a strong attack, and the boss character 910's physical strength (HP) reaches 200. Due to the decrease, an effect display is executed in which the boss character 910 is subjugated.

On the other hand, if the boss character 910 cannot be subjugated as a result of the battle production, a different production is executed according to the remaining physical strength (HP). When the physical strength value (HP) is 200 or less, as shown in FIG. 144(a), an effect display is executed in which the boss character 910 escapes. When the remaining physical strength value (HP) of the boss character 910 is larger than 200, a counterattack performance in which the boss character 910 counterattacks is executed, the battle performance is finished, and the corresponding special pattern variation is stopped and displayed.

In addition, in this control example, as an effect mode of the battle effect, when a predetermined condition is satisfied, a joint battle effect (see FIG. 144(b)) is executed in which a plurality of allied characters attack the boss character 910 at the same time. are doing. In this case, the physical strength value (HP) of the boss character 910, which is decreased by one attack effect, becomes larger than that of the strong attack, and the effect is advantageous to the player. For example, in the battle production start screen shown in FIG. It is configured to suggest that the production is executed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 145, the contents of the pseudo-loss effect will be described. In this control example, in order to be able to execute the special symbol variation continuously, the right to execute the special symbol variation (lottery right of the special symbol lottery) can be retained and stored up to a predetermined number (4). have the means. Thereby, even when the lottery right (special figure reservation) of the special symbol lottery is acquired during the execution of the special pattern variation, the lottery right (special figure reservation) can be stored in the storage means. Therefore, after the special symbol variation is stopped and displayed, it is possible to immediately execute the special symbol lottery based on the lottery right stored in the storage means, so that the special symbol variation can be continuously executed. It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Furthermore, the fluctuation time of the special symbol variation for indicating the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is configured to vary according to the number of lottery rights (number of special symbol reservations) stored in the storage means. Specifically, the smaller the number of lottery rights (the number of reserved special symbols) stored in the storage means, the easier it is to execute the special symbol variation with a longer variation time. By constructing in this way, it is possible to reduce the period during which the special symbol variation is not executed, and to obtain a new lottery right when the number of lottery rights stored in the storage means has reached the upper limit. can be suppressed.

Specifically, in this control example, when the number of reserved and stored special figure reservations is 0, and the result of the special symbol lottery to be executed is out, the number of special figure reservations is greater than 0. A variation pattern with a variation time of 14 seconds is more likely to be set than when the result of a special symbol lottery executed in a state where there are a large number of symbols is lost. Then, when a variation pattern with a variation time of 14 seconds is set, a variation performance of 14 seconds is executed to indicate that the special figure lottery result is out.

In other words, when the variable production executed in response to the special symbol lottery executed in the state where the number of special figure reservations is 0 is the above-described 14-second variable production, the production result of the variable production is There is a problem that the player can easily discriminate that the result of the special symbol lottery of this time is a loss before the result is displayed, and the motivation for playing the game is lowered.

In addition, in order to solve the above-mentioned problem, for example, it is possible to set a plurality of types of production modes of the fluctuation production corresponding to the fluctuation pattern with a fluctuation time of 14 seconds, but in this case, the result of the special symbol lottery Since the performance data for the variable performance for indicating that the is out is increased, a new problem arises that the data amount of the entire variable performance increases. Furthermore, a plurality of variation times (eg, 14 seconds, 16 seconds, 18 seconds) as a variation pattern selected when the result of the special symbol lottery executed with the number of special figure reservations being 0 is out. However, in this case, the load is applied to the control processing for selecting the variation time of the special symbol variation, and the type of variation time to be set increases. , there is a problem that a load is applied to the variable display processing of the special symbol and the variable display processing of the third symbol.

On the other hand, in this control example, when the result of the special symbol lottery is a big hit, or when a variation pattern in which a variation time longer than 14 seconds is set is selected, the above-described variation of 14 seconds It is configured so that production can be executed. In other words, even if the result of the special symbol lottery is lost and the prize is not won, by executing the above-described 14-second variable performance, the player's willingness to play who grasps that the 14-second variable performance is being executed. can be suppressed.

In addition, since there is a case where the result of the special symbol lottery is a big win, even if the player grasps that the 14-second variable performance is being executed, the player's willingness to play may decrease. Therefore, there is no need to configure a plurality of types of variable performance effects corresponding to the variation pattern with a variable time of 14 seconds to be able to set. Therefore, it is possible to suppress an increase in the amount of data for the entire variable effect. In addition, when the result of the special symbol lottery executed with the number of special figure reservations being 0 is out, it is not necessary to select a plurality of variation time variation patterns, so special A load is applied to the control processing for selecting the variation time of the symbol variation, and as the type of variation time to be set increases, the load is increased for the special symbol variation display processing and the third symbol variation display processing. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of the problem of hanging.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 146 to 150, the flow of various effects executed by the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example will be described.

First, with reference to FIG. 146, the flow of the continuous hit effect (see FIGS. 130 to 132) will be described. As described above with reference to FIGS. 130 to 132, this repeated hit effect is an effect executed using a partial period of the effect period of the variable effect executed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81. When the player operates the operating means (frame button 22), an effect (operation effect) is executed in which a specific display mode displayed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81 can be changed. be.

Specifically, for example, as a special symbol variation (special figure variation) executed by the main controller 110, when a special figure variation in which a variation time of 60 seconds is set is performed (see FIG. 146 (a) ), the variation production is executed by the voice lamp control device 113 in the production period (60 seconds) of the length corresponding to the fluctuation time (60 seconds) of the special figure fluctuation (see FIG. 146 (b)).

When the performance mode of the variable performance set by the voice lamp control device 113 includes the repeated hit performance, the player presses the frame button 22 for 10 seconds after 10 seconds have elapsed since the start of the variable performance. A button effective period (operation effective period) for validly determining the operation (pressing) of is set (see FIG. 146(c)), and a continuous hit effect is executed corresponding to the operation effective period (FIG. 146 (d- 2) See).

In this continuous hit effect, the display mode (in FIG. 130(a), the display mode of the enemy character 802 and the display mode of the display area HR1) is changed based on the number of times the frame button 22 is operated during the operation valid period. A production is executed. This display mode suggests to the player whether or not a privilege advantageous to the player (for example, an effect that makes it easy to win a jackpot (SP reach), a jackpot win) will be given after the continuous hit effect is completed. In the control example, the upper limit value (maximum variable value) at which the display mode is varied during the continuous hit production is set based on the corresponding special figure variation propriety determination result (big hit lottery result).

In the example shown in FIG. 146, the maximum variable value is set to 20 operations of the frame button 22 (upper limit of 20 operations). is not variable. In addition, in this control example, after the number of times the frame button 22 is operated during the effective period of operation reaches the maximum variable value, if the frame button 22 is continued to be operated and the end condition is satisfied, the continuous hit effect is produced. It is configured so that the timing for displaying the results can be shortened. In the example shown in FIG. 146, as the end condition for shortening the timing for displaying the effect result of the continuous hit effect, the end condition is established when the number of times the frame button 22 is operated after reaching the maximum variable value reaches eight times. 8 is set for the end count.

Here, with reference to FIGS. 146(d) and 146(e), the details of the player's operation of the frame button 22 during the continuous hitting effect period and the effect to be executed will be described. FIG. 146(d) shows the flow of effects executed when the end condition is not met during the valid period of operation, and FIG. It shows the flow of the performance to be executed.

As shown in FIG. 146(d), after the continuous hit effect is executed, until the frame button 22 is operated 20 times, the effect of changing the display mode according to the operation of the frame button 22 is executed. (Period A). After that, the number of times the frame button 22 is operated exceeds 20 times, and the number of times the frame button 22 is operated is 21, 22, and 23 (period B). Since it exceeds, it becomes a period during which the display mode is not changed. Then, when the continuous hit effect ends (when the remaining period of the operation valid period becomes 0), the result effect for 10 seconds is executed.

On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 146(e), the end condition is met before the repeated hit effect is completed (before the remaining period of the operation valid period becomes 0). When the number of operations of has reached 28, the result effect is executed. In this case, since the result effect is executed while the operation effective period remains, the display mode displayed as the result effect is varied by the player operating the frame button 22 during that period (period C). Also, in order to liven up the result performance, a lively performance is executed in which a light-emitting means (LED or the like) provided in the pachinko machine 10 is illuminated, or voice is output from the voice output device 226.例文帳に追加

As described above, in this control example, if the end condition is satisfied based on the operation of the operation means during the period in which the repeated hit effect is executed, the repeated hit effect is executed before the end condition based on the passage of time is satisfied. The effect is terminated, and the effect result of the continuous hitting effect is displayed. With this configuration, when the repeated hitting effect is executed, the player can operate the operation means for changing the display mode of the repeated hitting effect and the operation for shortening the effect period of the repeated hitting effect. The player can be motivated to operate the operating means.

In addition, in this control example, based on the result of the special symbol lottery corresponding to the continuous hit effect, by setting a limit on the variable content (variable number of times) in the continuous hit effect, the variable content of the repeated hit effect suggests the result of the special symbol lottery. configured as possible. Therefore, depending on the result of the special symbol lottery, an effect is executed in which the number of times the display mode is changed is small (according to the example of FIG. 130(a), the number of remaining enemy characters 802 is less likely to decrease). In this case, if the performance period of the continuous hit effect is fixed, the period during which the display mode does not change when the operating means is operated in the repeated hitting effect will continue for a long time, and the player cannot operate the operating means. I had a problem with losing motivation.

On the other hand, in this control example, after the number of variable times of the display mode reaches the upper limit (maximum variable value) in the continuous hit effect, the end condition is satisfied, so that the effect period of the repeated hit effect can be shortened. , the occurrence of the above-described problems can be suppressed. Furthermore, in this control example, since the contents of the operation to the operation means executed to change the display mode in the continuous hit effect and the contents of the operation for establishing the end condition are the same, , the termination condition can be satisfied without causing a sense of discomfort.

In addition, in this control example, even if the effect period of the continuous hit effect is shortened, the effective operation period is not shortened. During the period, it is possible to execute an effect (an effect indicating the result of the repeated hit effect) to be executed after the repeated hit effect, and it is possible to execute a dedicated operation effect. In other words, the effect mode of the effect to be executed next can be changed according to the type of the end condition to be satisfied (the end condition to be satisfied with the lapse of time, the end condition to be satisfied based on the operation of the operating means).

In this control example, the operation for changing the display mode during the repeated hit effect and the operation for ending the repeated hit effect are the same operation (pressing the frame button 22), but the present invention is not limited to this. , different operations may be set. In addition, the operation content of the operation means that is determined to be valid during the valid operation period is not limited to whether or not the frame button 22 is operated (pressed). It is also possible to determine the length (so-called long press), or determine the press interval at which the frame button 22 is continuously pressed. Further, it may be configured to determine a period during which the frame button 22 is not pressed, that is, the player has selected an operation of not pressing the frame button 22 .

In this way, by recognizing and discriminating a plurality of operation contents as the operation contents for the operation means, it is possible to set different presentation modes according to the operation contents executed by the player. It is possible to improve the interest of the game. For example, when it is determined that the frame button 22 is continuously pressed without an interval of a predetermined period or more (for example, 1 second) during the continuous hit effect, it is determined that the operation means has been operated, and the display mode is determined. may be executed, and then, when the frame button 22 is held down for a predetermined period of time (for example, two seconds), the process of satisfying the end condition may be executed.

Further, it may be configured such that the end condition is established when the player does not press the frame button 22 for a predetermined period (for example, 1 second) during the continuous hit effect. In this case, if the frame button 22 is not pressed even once after the continuous-hit effect is executed, the condition for ending the continuous-hit effect is satisfied without changing the display mode, so the continuous-hit effect is executed. A suitable game can be provided to a player who does not want to play. In addition, as long as the player who operates the frame button 22 during the continuous hit effect does not continue to operate the frame button 22, the end condition can be met midway (before the maximum variable value is reached). , the player can voluntarily operate the frame button 22.例文帳に追加

Furthermore, in this case, on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81, it is preferable to execute a guidance display that guides the player in an easy-to-understand manner as to the conditions under which the end condition is satisfied. If it continues for more than 1 second, the continuous hit effect will end." and a time gauge indicating the remaining time until the end condition is satisfied. As a result, it is possible to prevent the repeated hitting effect from ending at a timing unintended by the player.

In this control example described above, only one termination condition is set as the termination condition for terminating the operation while the operation valid period remains. can be In this case, for example, it may be configured so that the end condition that is likely to be satisfied is changed according to the effect situation of the continuous hit effect. The termination condition that can be satisfied when the frame button 22 is not pressed is likely to be satisfied, and if the remaining period of the operation valid period is less than 5 seconds, the termination condition that can be satisfied when the frame button 22 is pressed is easily satisfied. Good to configure.

In addition, the content of the end condition may be changed according to the display mode displayed as the continuous hit effect. For example, the display mode when the maximum variable value is reached is the first display mode (remaining number is 50 or more). may be made more difficult to be established than the case of the second display mode (remaining number is less than 50) in which the remaining number is smaller than that of the first display mode. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it more difficult to satisfy the end condition when the number of remaining enemy characters 802 is large. It can be lengthened, and the production effect can be enhanced.

Next, with reference to FIG. 147, the flow of the button effect (delayed effect) described with reference to FIGS. 136 to 138 will be described.

When the production period of the variable production is 60 seconds and the button production is set as the production mode, the button production period of 15 seconds is set 10 seconds after the start of the variable production (Fig. 147). (a)). This button effect period is formed from a button valid period (operation valid period) of 10 seconds and an effect period of 5 seconds.

As described above with reference to FIGS. 136 to 138, this button effect is displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 when the frame button 22 is pressed during the operation valid period. (For example, the treasure box 810) is to be changed, and the sound effect to output a sound (for example, "Pakkan") from the sound output device 226 is executed, and the delay effect mode is not set. (In the case of normal button effect), the display effect and the sound effect are executed synchronously (at the same timing). executed.

Here, with reference to FIG. 147(b), the flow of the effect when the normal button effect is executed will be described. As shown in FIG. 147(b), when the button effect is executed, as shown in FIG. 136(a), a button operation suggestion display prompting the player to operate the frame button 22 is executed. This button operation suggestion display is continuously displayed for a period (period A) until the player operates the frame button 22 . Then, when the player operates the frame button 22, the display effect and the sound effect are executed simultaneously, and the operation result display (see FIG. 136(b)) showing the effect result of the button effect ends. is displayed continuously for a period (period B). After that, the variable production is executed (period C).

Next, referring to FIG. 147(c), among the cases where the delay button effect is executed, the timing at which the player operates the frame button 22 is just before the end of the operation valid period, specifically, the delay period ( For example, 0.8 seconds) have passed, and the effect when the frame button 22 is operated at the timing when the operation valid period ends (for example, the timing 0.5 seconds before the operation valid period ends) Explain the flow. As shown in FIG. 147(c), when the button effect is executed, the effect is executed in the same effect mode as the normal button effect. Then, when the player operates the frame button 22 0.5 seconds before the expiration of the button valid period (operation valid period), a delay period of 0.8 seconds is set, and 0.8 seconds after the frame button 22 is operated. After 8 seconds, the display effect and the sound effect are executed.

Here, in this control example, if the operation valid period remains even after the delay period has elapsed, the button operation indication that was displayed before the frame button 22 was operated is displayed during the delay period of 0.8 seconds. It is configured so that the display mode of the production is continuously displayed. In other words, in this control example, when a delay period of 0.8 seconds is set, the display control device 114 delays the execution timing of various effects based on the operation of the frame button 22 by 0.8 seconds. Since the timing of setting (outputting) the display command is delayed, the display control device 114 waits until the display command is received, that is, until 0.8 seconds have passed since the frame button 22 was operated. , since the information indicating that the frame button 22 has been operated cannot be received, the display mode of the button operation suggestion effect is continuously displayed.

By constructing in this way, when the delayed performance is executed in the button performance, it is not necessary to separately set a display command for displaying the corresponding display mode during the delay period, and the delayed performance is executed. It is possible to reduce the control processing for In addition, various variations of the delay effect can be executed only by setting different lengths of the delay period, so that control processing for executing the delay effect can be reduced. Furthermore, in this control example, the delay period can be set for each of the display effect and the sound effect. be able to.

It should be noted that the above-described normal button effect, that is, when the frame button 22 is operated, the display effect and sound effect are executed without setting the delay period. The delay period may be set to 0 seconds. With this configuration, when setting the button effect, the same processing is executed when setting the normal button effect and when setting the delayed button effect. Since button effects can be set without changing the content, control processing can be simplified.

Returning to FIG. 147(c), the description is continued. In the example shown in FIG. 147(c), the frame button 22 is operated when the remaining period of the valid operation period is 0.5 seconds, and the valid operation period ends ( Therefore, if the button operation suggestive display is continuously displayed during the delay period, the remaining period display area 804b of the time gauge 804 disappears during the delay period, and an unnatural effect is executed. I had a problem with it. On the other hand, in this control example, if it is determined that the valid operation period ends (elapses) during the delay period, a dedicated effect (see FIG. 138) is performed during the delay period (period D). configured to run.

With this configuration, different effects can be executed depending on whether or not the delay period is set during the button effect and the operation timing of the frame button 22. can be operated. In this control example, the effect mode of the variable effect is set in advance, that is, whether or not to execute the button effect as the variable effect to be executed this time when the variable effect is executed, and whether or not to set the delay period. , is determined, and if the frame button 22 is operated during the button presentation, the presentation based on the contents of the button presentation determined in advance is executed. At the time when the variable performance is executed, only the presence or absence of execution of the button performance is determined, and when the frame button 22 is operated during the button performance, the presence or absence of the delay performance and the delay mode (delay target, delay period) are determined. In this case, for example, a plurality of operations can be executed for the button effect, and the execution probability and delay mode of the delay effect are determined according to the operation contents executed during the button effect. may be configured to be determinable with different values.

Specifically, the delay period can be set more easily when the player performs the second operation than when the player performs the first operation, or the delay period can be set based on the first operation. In the case where the delay period is set based on the second operation, the possibility of winning the corresponding special symbol lottery may be increased. By configuring in this way, it is possible to vary the degree of expectation and the execution frequency of the delay effect according to the operation content executed by the player.

In this control example, a period of 5 seconds (last 5 seconds of the button effect period) is provided as the result display period during which the operation result display for showing the effect result of the button effect is displayed. After the frame button 22 is operated and the performance result is displayed until the result display period elapses, the operation result display is displayed. In this way, by configuring the length of the result display period to be longer than the maximum period (1.5 seconds) that can be set as the delay period, as shown in FIG. Even when the frame button 22 is operated just before the end of the period and the delay period of the longest period is set, the period for displaying the operation result can be secured, so that the player can easily understand the presentation. can be done.

In this control example, the effect mode of the delayed effect is set before the button effect is executed. The display period of the operation result display differs depending on the operation timing of . Therefore, for example, when executing a specific animation display as the operation result display, it was necessary to change the display mode of the animation according to the length of the display period of the operation result display. In other words, if the display mode of the operation result display is, for example, a 1-second animation, and the display period of the operation result display is other than a multiple of 1 second, the operation result display ends in the middle of the animation. There is a risk that the performance effect will be reduced.

In this case, a method of executing control for extending or shortening the display period of the operation result display in accordance with the timing at which the animation being executed ends is conceivable. Thereby, the display period of the operation result display can be terminated at the timing when the animation is terminated. However, when the length of the display period of the operation result display is made variable, the effect period of the variable effect that is executed after the display period of the operation result display has passed must also be varied accordingly. There was a possibility that the performance of the game would cause a sense of incongruity.

In order to solve such a problem, for example, at the operation timing of the frame button 22 during the operation valid period, the remaining period of the operation valid period or the remaining period of the button effect is determined, and based on the determination result , to determine the length of the delay period. Specifically, in accordance with the operation timing of the frame button 22, the basic delay period (delay period set in advance as a variable effect) is changed so that the display period of the operation result display is a multiple of 1 second. , a correction delay period may be added and set. By configuring in this way, the display period of the operation result display can be terminated at the timing when the animation is terminated. In addition, since different delay periods are set depending on the operation timing of the frame button 22, the presentation effect can be enhanced.

In addition, as another method, for example, when an animation is being executed at the timing when the display period of the operation result display ends, the remaining animation is overlapped and executed while executing the variable effect. Also good. In this case, since the player is more interested in the newly executed variable effect rather than the animation, the area in which the animation is displayed is made smaller than during the display period of the operation result display, or the transparency of the animation is changed. The rest of the animation may be executed while performing display control such as increasing .

In this control example, as shown in FIG. 147, since it is configured to be able to execute the delay production in the middle period of the special symbol fluctuation, even if the delay period is set by the delay production, the set delay Regardless of the length of the period, it is possible to change the production mode of the variable display so that the display mode showing the result of the special symbol lottery is stopped at the timing of stopping the special symbol variation. When the delayed performance can be executed in the variable performance executed immediately before the stop timing of the variation, there is a possibility that the delayed performance is executed across the stop timing of the special symbol fluctuation.

In this case, for example, when it is determined that it is the stop timing of the special symbol variation (stop timing of the variation effect), it is determined whether or not the delay period is set, and if the delay period is set, Until the delay period elapses (ends), it is preferable to perform display control so as not to notify the player of the stop display of the special symbol variation or the lottery result of the special symbol variation (special symbol lottery). In this case, when it is determined that the next special symbol variation will be executed after the special symbol variation being executed is stopped and displayed, a predetermined period after the start of the next special symbol variation is used. Then, the variation effect (delay effect) for showing the lottery result of the previous special symbol variation is executed, and if the next special symbol variation is not executed, the previous time using the waiting period until the demo screen is displayed Executes a variable production (delayed production) to show the lottery result of the special symbol fluctuation, and when the jackpot game is started, the period until the first round game is started (opening period) Using It may be configured to execute a variation performance (delay performance) for showing the lottery result of the last special symbol variation.

Also, the length of the period (fixed display period) during which the special symbol variation is stopped and displayed may be longer than the maximum period (1.5 seconds) that can be set as the delay period. Confirmed display of the minimum period (for example, 0.3 seconds) required to confirm and display the special pattern and the maximum period (1.5 seconds) that can be set as the delay period (1.8 seconds) It should be set as a period. In addition, it may be configured such that the fixed display period of the special symbol variation is lengthened only when the delay performance can be executed as the variation performance.

As described above, when executing a delayed effect using another effect period (next variable display period, standby period, jackpot game period, fixed display period), the actual game content executed during the effect period should be displayed so that the player can understand it. As a result, since the player can grasp the actual game content, it is possible to suppress the execution of an unintended game.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 148 and 149, the flow of effects executed in the gathering effect (see FIGS. 139-141) and the battle effect (see FIGS. 142-144) will be described.

As shown in FIG. 148, in this control example, during one variable effect period, it is configured to execute a set effect and a battle effect. , the effect period of the collective effect (the number of times the effect for obtaining a character is executed) is defined in advance. In addition, the execution timing of the group production in the variable production is configured to be able to set multiple times, and as shown in FIG. The display mode showing the result of the variation production corresponding to (the first special figure variation), that is, the stop display mode of the third symbol for indicating the lottery result of the first special figure variation "Large set" is stopped and displayed. , The special symbol variation of the production mode (the second special symbol variation) is started (with the variation production being started), and the collective production is executed. By configuring in this way, compared to the case of executing the group production from the middle of the second fluctuation production of the special figure fluctuation (see FIG. 148 (b)), when the timing of ending the group production is the same, that is, In the case of executing the battle performance and various ready-to-win performances in the same period in the second special figure variation, the performance period of the collective performance can be made different.

In this case, for example, at least before the second special figure variation is executed, based on the winning information, the result of the special symbol lottery corresponding to the second special figure variation is determined in advance, and the result of the preliminary determination is a jackpot, it is preferable to configure the effect mode shown in FIG. 148(a) so that it is easy to set.

Also, as shown in FIG. 148, in addition to the configuration in which the start timing of the group effect is different, it is preferable to configure the end timing of the group effect to be set multiple times. As a variable performance, a case where a collective performance is executed from the start timing of the variable performance, and a case where a collective performance is executed from the middle timing of the variable performance as a variable performance corresponding to the special figure fluctuation with a variable time of 90 seconds. , it is preferable to configure so that the collective effect of the same length (the number of times the character acquisition effect is executed) is executed. By configuring in this way, when the group performance is executed, the player can be interested in the length of the variable performance period, and the group performance of the same mode can be changed in different variable performance periods. It becomes possible to use it for production, and it is possible to simplify the control processing for executing the variable production.

Next, referring to FIG. 149, the flow of setting the content of the battle effect will be described. In this control example, one special symbol variation (special symbol variation) period is used to enable execution of a set effect and a battle effect. That is, it is configured to determine the performance result of the battle performance and the performance result of the group performance according to the result of one special symbol lottery. That is, when the special figure fluctuation is started (when the fluctuation production is started), it is configured to determine the production mode of the battle production.

Specifically, the battle period (the number of attacks) and the effect result (enemy HP, remaining HP) are determined as the effect mode of the battle effect based on the variation pattern (variation time) for which the variable effect is determined. It is configured to By configuring in this way, it is possible to execute the collective effect and the battle effect in the effect mode corresponding to the effect result of the battle effect.

In addition, without being limited to this, the effect mode of the battle effect may be determined after the end of the collective effect based on the result of the effect of the collective effect. In this case, for example, when the number of characters that can be acquired in the group production is configured to vary according to the operation result of the operation means during the group production, the number of characters acquired during the group production can be changed. Even if it is configured, it is possible to suitably execute a battle effect corresponding to the gathering effect.

Next, with reference to FIG. 150, the flow of the pseudo-loss effect (see FIG. 145) will be described. In this control example, when the number of reserved balls of the special symbol is 0, in order to suppress the period during which the special symbol variation is not executed from continuing for a long time, even if the result of the special symbol lottery is out, the long period It is configured to select a specified non-specific variation pattern in which a variation time of (14 seconds) is set, and is configured to execute a specific non-specified performance (14 seconds) as a variation performance corresponding to the specified non-specific variation pattern. (See FIG. 150(a)).

However, in this specified non-specific performance, a variable performance in which the third pattern does not become a ready-to-win state is executed for a predetermined period, and the variable performance currently being executed is the specified non-specific performance before the end of the variable performance. The player can easily grasp this fact. That is, there is a problem that the player can easily determine that the result of the special symbol lottery executed with the number of special symbols reserved being 0 is a loss, and the player's willingness to play decreases.

On the other hand, in this control example, when a variation pattern with a variation time of special symbol variation of 14 seconds or more is selected, a part of the variation time is used to execute the above-described specific out-of-specification effect. (see FIG. 150(c)). Also, when a variation pattern with a variation time of 28 seconds is selected, the specific out-of-specification effect is executed twice (see FIG. 150(b)).

In this control example configured in this manner, even when the player determines that the specific non-specific production is executed, the timing of displaying the production result of the specific non-specific production and the special symbol fluctuation are stopped. It becomes difficult to predict whether or not the displayed timing matches. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to determine whether or not the result of the special symbol lottery is a loss until the end of the specified failure effect, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the desire to play.

In addition, in this control example, as shown in FIG. 145, when the specific out-of-specification effect is executed by making it different from the stop display timing of the special symbol lottery (first specific out-of-specification effect in FIG. 150 (b), FIG. 150 ( c) Specified out-of-specification production) is configured to display the third symbol by swinging (temporarily stopping), but without being limited to this, specific out-of-specification production executed at the time of 14-second deviation fluctuation The same effect data may be used to execute the same effect.

Also, as shown in FIG. 150 (b), in the case of executing two specific out production during one special figure fluctuation period, for example, in accordance with the start timing of the special figure fluctuation, fluctuation for 14 seconds Set the production (first specific out production), when it is determined that the first specific out production is completed, determine the remaining period of the special figure fluctuation, and if the determination result is 14 seconds or more, It may be configured such that the variable effect for 14 seconds (the second non-specified effect) is executed again.

By configuring in this way, it is not necessary to store in advance the performance data for 28 seconds in which the specified non-specified performance is executed twice, so the data capacity of the performance data can be reduced. In addition, by dividing the setting process of the variable production corresponding to one special figure fluctuation period into multiple times (for example, the first half period and the second half period), it is possible to set the variable production in the first half period. Since it is possible to vary the performance mode in the second half period based on the performance conditions established in the second half, it is possible to enhance the performance effect.

Furthermore, as described above, using a configuration that can be set by dividing the setting process of the fluctuation effect corresponding to one special figure fluctuation period into multiple times (for example, the first half period and the second half period), FIG. 150 (c) In the case of setting the variable performance that will be the flow of , first, only the 30-second variable performance (normal hit performance) in the second half period and the 16-second interrupt performance in the first half period are decided, and the interrupt performance is being executed. When a predetermined effect condition (for example, a new special figure reservation ball is not acquired) is established, it is preferable to configure so as to set a specific out-of-specification effect. By configuring in this way, when the special figure fluctuation is started, the special figure reservation ball is 0, and the special figure fluctuation is started even when the execution condition of the specific out-of-effect is satisfied. When a new special figure reservation is acquired at the time when 16 seconds have passed since, it is possible to suppress the execution of the specific out-of-specification performance.

<Regarding the game flow of the pachinko machine in the first control example>
Next, with reference to FIG. 151, the game flow in this control example will be described. FIG. 151 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the game flow in the pachinko machine 10 of the first control example. Pachinko machine 10 of this control example, as shown in FIG. 3 types of game states, ie, a high probability state of symbols) and a time-saving state (low probability state of special symbols, high probability state of normal symbols), are configured to be settable, and an initial state (when the pachinko machine 10 is shipped). or after the power is turned on while the RAM erase switch 122 is operated (depressed), the normal state is set.

Then, during the normal state, a game mainly including the first special symbol lottery executed by entering the ball into the first ball entrance 64 is executed. In the normal state in which the low probability state of the special symbols is set, the probability of the big win of the special symbols is set to 1/300, and when the big win is won, the type of the big win is "jackpot A" (selection rate of 1/2). and "jackpot B" (selection rate 1/2) is selected. When "jackpot B" is selected, a jackpot game (probability variation jackpot game) that makes it easy for the ball to pass through the specific area (probability variation switch 65e3 (see FIG. 128)) is executed during the jackpot game, and "jackpot A" is executed. is selected, a jackpot game (normal jackpot game) is executed in which it is difficult for the ball to pass through the specific area (probability variable switch 65e3 (see FIG. 128)) during the jackpot game.

Then, when the ball passes through the specific area (probability variation switch 65e3 (see FIG. 128)) during the jackpot game, the probability variation state is set after the jackpot game ends. In this variable probability state, when the number of executions of the special symbol lottery (variation) reaches 200 times, or when a jackpot is won, the end condition is satisfied and the state shifts to another game state. Specifically, when the number of executions of the special symbol lottery reaches 200 times in a state where the variable probability state is set, the game state changes to the normal state before the 201st special symbol lottery is executed. and migrated. It should be noted that, in this control example, the process of shifting the game state from the variable probability state to the normal state, that is, the process of shifting the high probability state of the special symbol to the low probability state, and the high probability state of the normal symbol to the normal symbol The process of shifting to the low probability state is configured to be executed at the timing when the special symbol variation corresponding to the 200th special symbol lottery is stopped and displayed, but the 201st special symbol lottery is the special symbol lottery. It should not be executed in the state where the high probability state and the high probability state of normal symbols are set, for example, immediately after executing the 200th special symbol lottery (at the start of the 200th special symbol variation) Alternatively, it may be shifted to immediately before the execution of the 201st special symbol lottery (at the timing when the execution condition of the 201st special symbol lottery is satisfied but the special symbol lottery is not executed).

Furthermore, the timing of shifting the probability state of the special symbols and the timing of shifting the probability state of the normal symbols may be different, for example, the high probability of the special symbols immediately after the 200th special symbol lottery is executed. Only the state may be shifted to the low probability state, and after the result of the 200th special pattern lottery is stopped and displayed, the normal pattern high probability state may be shifted to the low probability state. By configuring in this way, it is possible to set the time saving state (low probability state of special symbols, low probability state of normal symbols) as a game state during the 200th special symbol variation period.

Since the probability variable state is a high probability state of the normal pattern, the electric accessory 640 is more likely to be opened by the normal pattern winning game than the normal state of the low probability state of the normal pattern, and the game mainly based on the second special pattern lottery. is executed. In the probability variable state in which the high probability state of the special pattern is set, the probability of the special pattern jackpot is set to 1/100, and when the jackpot is won in the second special pattern lottery, "jackpot C" is selected as the jackpot type. selected.

The “jackpot C” is a jackpot type in which 16 rounds of probability variable jackpot games are executed. In other words, when the jackpot is won in the second special symbol lottery, the probability variable jackpot game is always executed. Therefore, the second special symbol lottery is more advantageous to the player than the first special symbol lottery in terms of the execution probability of the probability variable jackpot game.

Further, in detail, in this control example, when a jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery, a 6-round game is always executed, and when a jackpot is won in the second special symbol lottery, a 16-round game is always executed. be done. Therefore, the second special symbol lottery is more advantageous to the player than the first special symbol lottery in terms of the average number of prize balls that can be obtained during the jackpot game.

Next, the time-saving state (low-probability state of special symbols, high-probability state of normal symbols) will be described. When the ``jackpot A'' is won in the first special symbol lottery executed during the normal state, or when the ball cannot be passed through the specific area (V gate) 65v during the probability variable jackpot game. , the time-saving state is set. This time-saving state is configured to disappear until the number of special symbol lotteries executed after the end of the previous big win game reaches 100 times, or when a big win is won before reaching 100 times. . That is, when the time saving state is set after the end of the jackpot game (when the jackpot A is elected), the time saving state is set for the period from the end of the jackpot game until the special symbol variation is executed 100 times (time saving 100 times is set).

During this time saving state, since it is a game state in which a high probability state of normal symbols is set similarly to the variable probability state described above, the electric accessory 640 is easily opened, and the game in which the second special symbol lottery is mainly executed. state. In addition, the lottery probability of the special symbol lottery executed during the time saving state is the same as in the normal state. Therefore, in the time saving state, the second special symbol lottery is more likely to be executed than in the normal state, and the special symbol lottery is executed with the same jackpot probability as in the normal state. That is, from the point of view of the ease of execution of the second special symbol lottery, the game state is more advantageous to the player than the normal state.

On the other hand, in the time-saving state, the special symbol lottery is executed with a jackpot probability lower than that in the variable probability state, and the ease of execution of the second special symbol lottery is the same as in the variable probability state. That is, from the point of the jackpot winning probability by the special symbol lottery, the time saving state is a game state more disadvantageous to the player than the variable probability state. In addition, in this control example, in the variable probability state and the time saving state, it is configured so that the ease of execution of the second special symbol lottery is the same, but not limited to this, for example, during the variable probability state The variation time of the second special symbol lottery to be executed is made different from the variation time of the second special symbol lottery to be executed during the time saving state, for example, the variation time is shorter during the probability variable state than during the normal state. , it may be configured to be able to execute the special symbol variation.

<Regarding the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example>
As described above with reference to FIG. 152, main controller 110 is equipped with MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic device. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 storing various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the MPU 201, and a memory for temporarily storing various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 202. A RAM 203 and other various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission/reception circuit are incorporated. In addition, various commands are transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sub-controller by the data transmission/reception circuit in order to instruct the operation of the sub-controller such as the payout controller 111 and the sound lamp controller 113. Such commands are sent in only one direction from the main controller 110 to the sub-controllers.

The main controller 110 executes the main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as special symbol lottery, normal symbol lottery, display setting in the first symbol display device 37 and display setting in the second symbol display device 83 . The RAM 203 is provided with various counters for controlling these processes.

Here, with reference to FIG. 153, counters and the like provided in RAM 203 of main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 153 is a schematic diagram schematically showing counters and the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main controller 110 in the first control example. These counters, etc. are the special symbol lottery, the normal symbol lottery, the setting of the display in the first design display device 37, the setting of the display in the second design display device 83, and the setting of the display in the third design display device 81. etc., it is used in the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 .

In order to select the special symbol lottery and the setting of the display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, the first winning random number counter C1 used for the special symbol lottery and the special symbol jackpot type. The first hit type counter C2 used for, the stop type selection counter C3 for determining the stop type of special symbols (type per reach, type other than reach, type out of reach), variation type counter used for selection of variation pattern CS1 and an initial value random number counter CINI1 used to set the initial value of the first hit random number counter C1 are used. Also, the second winning random number counter C4 is used for the lottery of normal symbols, and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is used for setting the initial value of the second winning random number counter C4. Each of these counters is a loop counter that adds 1 to the previous value each time it is updated and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

Each counter is updated, for example, at intervals of 2 milliseconds, which is the execution interval of timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 177), and some counters are updated irregularly during the main processing (see FIG. 187). Then, the updated value is appropriately stored in a counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 203 . The RAM 203 has a special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a consisting of four reserved areas (reserved first to fourth areas) for storing the lottery right (reserved ball) of the first special symbol, and a second special symbol holding ball storage area 203a. A special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b consisting of four reserved areas (reserved first to fourth areas) for storing the lottery right (reserved ball) is provided, and the first special symbol and the second special A special symbol holding ball execution area common to the symbol is provided. In each area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, a first hit random number counter C1, a first hit type counter C2, a stop type selection counter C3, a variable Each value of the type counter CS1 is stored. Similarly, for each area of the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b, similar values are stored in accordance with the ball entry timing to the second ball entrance 640. FIG.

In addition, the RAM 203 is provided with a normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c consisting of one execution area and four reserved areas (first to fourth reserved areas). The value of the second random number counter C4 is stored at the timing when the gate 67 is passed.

Next, each counter will be described in detail. The first hit random number counter C1 is incremented by 1 in order within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 599), and reaches 0 after reaching the maximum value (for example, 599 in the case of a counter that can take a value of 0 to 599). It is configured to return to In particular, when the first winning random number counter C1 completes one cycle, the value of the initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the special winning random number counter C1.

The initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter that is updated within the same range as the first winning random number counter C1. That is, for example, if the first random number counter C1 is a loop counter that can take values from 0 to 599, the initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter that ranges from 0 to 599. This initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once each time the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 177) is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main processing (see FIG. 187).

The value of the first winning random number counter C1 is, for example, periodically updated (once per timer interrupt processing in this embodiment), and is the timing at which the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640. is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203. The value of the random number that becomes the special symbol jackpot is set by the first winning random number table 202a (see FIG. 155(a)) stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110, and the obtained first winning random number counter If the value of C1 matches the value of the random number set by the first winning random number table 202a as a big win, it is determined as a special symbol big win. In addition, this first hit random number table 202a has a low probability of special symbols (a period in which the probability of special symbols is low) and a high probability of winning a special symbol from the low probability (special symbol The value (number) of the random number that becomes a big hit is set to be different between the high probability state period).

In this way, by varying the number of random numbers that result in a big win, the probability of a big win is changed between when the probability of special symbols is low and when the probability of special symbols is high. In addition, the first winning random number table 202a (see FIG. 155(a)) for when the special symbol is high probability and the first winning random number table 202a (see FIG. 155(a)) for when the special symbol is low probability , are provided in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110 .

The first win type counter C2 determines the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 when a special symbol jackpot is won, and adds 1 in order within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 99). and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (for example, 99 in the case of a counter that can take values from 0 to 99). The value of the first hit type counter C2 is, for example, periodically updated (once per timer interrupt processing in this control example), and the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640. It is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203 at the timing.

Here, if the value of the first winning random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b is not a random number that becomes a special symbol jackpot, that is, the special symbol If it is a random number that will result in a loss, the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37 will be the one when the special symbol is lost.

On the other hand, if the value of the first winning random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b is a random number for a special symbol jackpot, the first symbol display device. The display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed in 37 is the one at the time of the special symbol jackpot. In this case, the specific display mode at the time of the big hit is the display mode indicated by the value of the first winning type counter C2 stored in the same special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b. Become. In this control example, three types of "jackpot A", "jackpot B", and "jackpot C" are set as the jackpot types, and any one of them is determined by the first hit type counter C2. Then, a display mode indicating the jackpot type is displayed on the first symbol display device 37 as a jackpot symbol.

The first hit random number counter C1 in the pachinko machine 10 of this control example is configured as a 2-byte loop counter in the range of 0-599. In this first winning random number counter C1, there are two random numbers that become a jackpot with special symbols when the probability of special symbols is low. It is stored in the table 202a. In this way, when the probability of special symbols is low, the total number of random numbers that will be a big hit is 2 among the total number of random numbers of 600, so the probability of a special symbol being a big hit is "2/600 (1/300)". becomes.

On the other hand, when the probability of the special symbol is high, there are 6 random numbers for the special symbol jackpot, and the values "0 to 5" are stored in the first winning random number table 202a for the high probability. . In this way, when the probability of a special symbol is high, the total number of random numbers that will be a big hit is 6 among the total number of random numbers of 600, so the probability of a special symbol to be a big hit is "6/600 (1/100)". becomes.

In addition, in this control example, the random number for the jackpot stored in the first winning random number table 202a for the low probability and the random number for the jackpot stored in the first random number table 202a for the high probability It is configured so that the same random number is defined by the numerical value. By configuring in this way, for example, when "0" is acquired as the value of the first winning random number counter C1, the game state when executing the jackpot determination using the value of the first winning random number counter C1 Regardless, you can win the jackpot. Therefore, when the ball is entered into the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640 and the reserved ball of the special symbol is acquired, the value of the first winning random number counter C1 for winning the jackpot is obtained. Since it can be easily discriminated before the execution of the special pattern lottery, the suggestion performance for suggesting the determination of the big win can be executed without grasping the set game state, and the performance effect can be obtained. can be enhanced.

In addition, the value of the first winning random number counter C1 that is determined to be a big hit when the probability of special symbols is low and the value of the first random number counter C1 that is determined to be a big hit when the probability of special symbols is high are not duplicated. may be configured. In this case, depending on the situation (that is, depending on whether the pachinko machine 10 is in a special symbol high probability state or a special symbol low probability state), a random number determined to be a big hit (the value of the first winning random number counter C1 ) are different, it is possible to make it difficult to predict the random number value that will be the jackpot of the special symbol. Therefore, when the special pattern has a high probability (high probability state) and when the special pattern has a low probability (low probability state), the random number value that is determined to be a big hit is duplicated. can be suppressed.

Further, the value of the first win type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of this control example is configured as a loop counter within the range of 0-99. Then, as shown in FIG. 155(b), the first hit type selection table 202b for determining the jackpot type includes the data table referred to in correspondence with the lottery of the first special design and the second special design. and a data table to be referred to corresponding to the lottery of .

Here, the contents of the first winning type selection table 202b will be described with reference to FIG. 155(b). FIG. 155(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the first winning type selection table 202b. This first hit type selection table 202b is a data table referred to when selecting a jackpot type that is set when a jackpot is won in a special symbol lottery, and includes a special symbol type and the acquired first hit type. Different jackpot types (jackpot A to jackpot C) are selected based on the value of the counter C2.

In this control example, the game content (the number of rounds) of the jackpot game and the game state set after the jackpot game ends are configured to differ according to the set jackpot type. Therefore, it is possible to make a player who is playing a game with the aim of winning a big win interested in not only the winning of the big win but also the type of the big win. Furthermore, in this control example, it is configured such that a privilege with a different degree of advantage is granted to the player depending on the set jackpot type. As a result, it is possible to make the player more interested in the type of jackpot to be set.

Next, referring to FIG. 155(b), the contents defined in the first winning type selection table 202b will be described in detail. In the case of the first special symbol (special figure 1), the value of the acquired first hit type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 49", and the jackpot type "jackpot A" is "50 to 99". , the jackpot type “jackpot B” is defined respectively. Also, when the symbol type is the second special symbol (special figure 2), the jackpot type "jackpot C" is defined regardless of the acquired first hit type counter C2 value.

When "jackpot A" is set as the jackpot type, the round game is six rounds, and a jackpot game (usually a 6R jackpot game) in which it is difficult for the ball to pass through the specific area (V prize opening) during the jackpot game is executed. be. Then, when the ball does not win the V prize during the jackpot game, a special pattern lottery is executed 100 times in a time-saving state (low probability state for special patterns, high probability state for normal patterns) after the end of the jackpot game. In order to set the game state (time saving 100 times) that continues until, "100" is set to the value of the time saving counter 203u, and "0" is set to the value of the variable probability counter 203t. On the other hand, when the ball wins V during the jackpot game, the latent state (high probability state of special symbols, low probability state of normal symbols) continues until 200 special symbol lotteries are executed ( In order to set the probability 200 times), "0" is set to the value of the time reduction counter 203u, and "200" is set to the value of the probability variable counter 203t.

That is, the above-mentioned "jackpot A" is a jackpot type in which a normal jackpot game is executed in which the ball is difficult to pass through the specific area (V winning opening) during the jackpot game, and when the game is normally executed. , the ball does not pass through the V prize opening during the jackpot game. However, if an illegal game is executed during the jackpot game, for example, a game that destroys the structure in the variable prize winning device 65 and forces the ball to win a V prize, the ball may be played during the "jackpot A" jackpot game. may pass through the specific area (V winning opening). In this control example, when the ball is made to win V by a fraudulent game, the player is more likely than the probability variable state (high probability state of special symbols, high probability state of normal symbols) which is the most advantageous gaming state for the player. It is configured to set a latent state (high probability state of special symbols, low probability state of normal symbols) as a game state to be disadvantageous. As a result, a penalty can be imposed on a player who has played an illegal game.

Further, as a penalty to be imposed on a player who has executed an illegal game, for example, an illegal variation pattern is selected as a variation pattern of the special symbol variation executed when the latent state is set. Also, for example, when a game state (for example, latent state) that cannot be set when a normal game is executed is set, a variation pattern with a variation time of 10 minutes is selected. can be configured to By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the special symbol lottery from being efficiently executed for a player who has played an illegal game.

In this control example, the ease with which the ball can pass through the V winning opening varies depending on the type of jackpot game to be executed. When the ball enters the specific area (V prize opening) during the jackpot game, the high probability state of the special pattern is set after the jackpot game is finished, but it is not limited to this. For example, even if the ball enters the V winning hole during the normal jackpot game, the high probability state of the special symbol may not be set after the jackpot game ends.

When "jackpot B" is set as the jackpot type, the round game is 6 rounds, and a jackpot game (probable variable 6R jackpot game) in which the ball easily passes through a specific area (V winning opening) during the jackpot game is executed. be. Then, when the ball wins V during the jackpot game, the variable probability state (high probability state of special symbols, high probability state of normal symbols) continues until the special symbol lottery is executed 200 times (variable probability 200 times), "200" is set to the value of the time reduction counter 203u, and "200" is set to the value of the variable probability counter 203t. On the other hand, when the ball does not win the V prize during the jackpot game, a special pattern lottery is executed 100 times in a time-saving state (low probability state for special patterns, high probability state for normal patterns) after the end of the jackpot game. In order to set the game state (time saving 100 times) that continues until, "100" is set to the value of the time saving counter 203u, and "0" is set to the value of the variable probability counter 203t.

When "jackpot C" is set as the jackpot type, the round game is 16 rounds, and a jackpot game (probability variable 16R jackpot game) in which the ball easily passes through a specific area (V winning opening) during the jackpot game is executed. be. Then, when the ball wins V during the jackpot game, the variable probability state (high probability state of special symbols, high probability state of normal symbols) continues until the special symbol lottery is executed 200 times (variable probability 200 times), "200" is set to the value of the time reduction counter 203u, and "200" is set to the value of the variable probability counter 203t. On the other hand, when the ball does not win the V prize during the jackpot game, a special pattern lottery is executed 100 times in a time-saving state (low probability state for special patterns, high probability state for normal patterns) after the end of the jackpot game. In order to set the game state (time saving 100 times) that continues until, "100" is set to the value of the time saving counter 203u, and "0" is set to the value of the variable probability counter 203t.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of this control example determines which of the three types of jackpot types is determined according to the type of the special symbol that has won the jackpot and the value of the first winning type counter C2 that has been acquired. is configured to In addition, the first special pattern and the second special pattern are different in the type of the jackpot to be selected when the judgment result is a jackpot, and the first special pattern is selected when the jackpot is won in the second special pattern lottery. It is configured to make it easier for the player to select a jackpot type that is advantageous to the player, ie, a jackpot type in which a probability variable jackpot game is executed, than when the jackpot is won in a lottery. Therefore, it is possible to make the player interested in whether the lottery is executed with the first special symbol or the second special symbol.

The fluctuation type counter CS1 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 198 and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198). A rough variation mode is determined by the stop type selection counter C3 and the variation type counter CS1 described above. Specifically, the variation time of the special symbol variation is determined based on the value of the variation type counter CS1, and the short time off, long time off, normal reach, super reach, etc. are roughly determined based on the value of the stop type selection counter C3. A display mode is determined. Then, based on the variation mode determined by the value of the variation type counter CS1 and the value of the stop type selection counter C3, the third symbol display device 81 displayed by the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 The reach type of 3 patterns and detailed pattern variation mode are determined. The value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated once each time the main process (see FIG. 187) described later is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process. In addition, the variation pattern selection table 202d (see FIG. It is provided in the ROM 202 .

Next, referring to FIG. 156, the contents of the variation pattern selection table 202d will be described. FIG. 156 is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the variation pattern selection table 202d. As shown in FIG. 156, the variation pattern selection table 202d includes a normal table 202d1 used during normal design low probability state (normal state), and normal design high probability state (time saving state, probability variable state) during The time/probability variation table 202d2 to be used is defined, and a variation pattern is selected using the corresponding data table according to the game state at the time when the special symbol lottery is executed. In this control example, the special symbol lottery can be executed more efficiently when the normal symbol high probability state is set than when the normal symbol low probability state is set. Compared to selecting a variation pattern using the table 202d1, when selecting a variation pattern using a time saving / probability variation table 202d2, a variation pattern with a short variation time is configured to be easily selected. .

In this control example, when the time saving state is set as the gaming state and when the probability variation state is set, the same data table (time saving / probability variation table 202d2) is used to select the variation pattern , it is difficult for the player to understand the game state currently set based on the selected variation pattern. Various effects executed by the third symbol display device 81 allow the player to grasp the currently set game state. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make the player interested in various effects executed by the third symbol display device 81 .

In addition, if the special symbol lottery can be efficiently executed when the high probability state of the normal symbol is set than when the low probability state of the normal symbol is set, it is limited to this. Alternatively, the variable pattern may be selected using different data tables for the time saving state and the variable probability state. In addition, when the high probability state of the normal symbols is set, it is sufficient that the special symbol lottery can be efficiently executed than when the low probability state of the normal symbols is set. Of the various variation patterns defined in the data table (normal table 202d1) used when the low probability state of the normal design is set, the high probability state of the normal design is higher than the variation pattern with the longest variation time. Of the various variation patterns defined in the data table (time saving/probability variation table 202d2) used when is set, the variation pattern with the longest variation time may be specified with a long variation time. .

The selection of the variation pattern in the voice ramp control device 113 will be described later in more detail. Based on the value of the counter CS1, rough fluctuation pattern contents (reach, super reach, non-reach, etc.) and fluctuation time are determined, and a fluctuation pattern command indicating the determined contents is set.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 157 and 158, the contents of various tables defined in the variation pattern selection table 202d used when main controller 110 selects a variation pattern will be described. FIG. 157 is a data table schematically showing the contents of the normal table 202d1. In the normal table 202d1, various variation patterns are set corresponding to the lottery results of the special symbols, and the value of the variation type counter CS1 is assigned to each of the variation patterns.

Next, with reference to FIG. 158, it is the data table which showed typically the content of table 202d2 for time reduction and probability variation. In the time reduction/probability variation table 202d2, various variation patterns are set corresponding to the lottery results of the special symbols, and values of the variation type counter CS1 are assigned to each of the variation patterns.

In addition, in this control example, the variation pattern is defined in correspondence with the value of the variation type counter CS1, but is not limited to this. Each variation pattern may be defined corresponding to the jackpot type selected by.

The second hit random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter that increments by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 239, for example, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 239). Further, when the second winning random number counter C4 completes one cycle, the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the second winning random number counter C4. In this control example, the value of the second hit random number counter C4 is updated, for example, periodically for each timer interrupt process, and is acquired when it is detected that the ball has passed through the through gate 67, and the normal symbol is reserved in the RAM 203. It is stored in the ball storage area 203c.

Then, the value of the random number that is the normal winning pattern is set by the second winning random number table 202c (see FIG. 155(c)) stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller, and the value of the second winning random number counter C4. is equal to the winning random number value set by the second winning random number table 202c, it is determined that the winning is a normal symbol. Also, this second hit random number table 202c (see FIG. 155(c)) is for normal design low probability time (normal design normal state period) and normal design hit probability from the low probability time. It is divided into two types, one for high probability (a period in which normal symbols are in a time-saving state), and the number of random numbers included in each is set differently.

Here, in this control example, in the normal pattern winning game executed based on the winning of the normal symbol, the electric accessory 640a (see FIG. 125) attached to the second ball entrance 640 is variable to the open state. A game is executed to cause the That is, normally, the electric accessory 640a, which is positioned in the closed state for restricting the entry of the ball into the second ball entrance 640, performs the second ball entry when the normal figure winning game is executed. A normal game is executed so that the opening state is changed to allow the ball to enter the mouth 640 . By configuring in this way, it is possible to vary the ease with which the ball enters the second ball entrance 640 according to the lottery result of the normal symbol lottery. That is, according to the result of the normal symbol lottery, the frequency of execution of the second special symbol lottery, which is more advantageous to the player than the first special symbol lottery, can be varied, so the normal symbols are executed independently. A game in which the lottery and the special pattern lottery are associated with each other can be played.

Furthermore, in this control example, it is configured so as to vary the game content of the normal per game according to the set game state, specifically, the state in which the high probability state of the normal symbol is set. When the normal pattern per game is executed, the ball is entered into the second ball entrance 640 than when the normal pattern per game is executed in the state where the low probability state of the normal pattern is set. It is configured so that an easy-to-play normal game is executed.

More specifically, when the normal pattern winning game is executed in a state where the high probability state of the normal symbol is set, the long winning in which the electric accessory 640a is opened in the opening time of 4 seconds is executed. , When the normal pattern winning game is executed in a state where the low probability state of the normal pattern is set, the electric accessary 640a is opened with an opening time of 0.2 seconds so that the short winning is executed. Configure. By configuring in this way, when the high probability state of the normal pattern is set, it is easier to win in the normal pattern lottery than when the low probability state of the normal pattern is set, and the normal pattern Since the ball can be easily entered into the second ball entrance 640 in the winning game, it is possible to motivate the player to play the game for executing the second special symbol lottery.

In addition, in this control example, in the state in which the low probability state of normal symbols is set, only the short hit is executed. In a part of the case of winning per figure, it may be configured so that the above-mentioned long per normal per game is executed, or normal per normal pattern which is executed in the state where the high probability state of the normal symbol is set In a part of the winning game, it may be configured so that the normal figure winning game per short described above is executed. In addition, in this control example, the game type of the game per normal pattern is two types of per short and per long, but the game type of the game per normal pattern may be configured to be able to set three or more types.

The normal initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated within the same range as the second random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 239), and is updated once per timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 177). Together with this, it is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main processing (see FIG. 187).

In this way, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters and the like, and the main controller 110 controls the big winning lottery and the display on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 according to the values of the counters and the like. Main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as setting and lottery of the display result in the second pattern display device 83 can be executed.

Returning to FIG. 152, the description is continued. The RAM 203 stores the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201, the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 201, etc., in addition to the various counters shown in FIG. and a work area (work area) in which the value of is stored.

The RAM 203 is configured to retain (back up) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply 115 even after the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, and all the data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

When power is interrupted due to power failure or the like, the RAM 203 stores the stack pointer and the values of each register at the time of power interruption (including power failure; the same applies hereinafter). On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including when the power is turned on due to the cancellation of the power failure; the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power was cut off based on the information stored in the RAM 203 . Writing to the RAM 203 is executed by the main process (see FIG. 187) when the power is turned off, and restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed by the start-up process (see FIG. 186) when the power is turned on. The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured to receive a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when power is shut off due to a power failure or the like. , NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 185) is immediately executed as power failure processing.

As shown in FIG. 154(a), the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 stores the above-described first winning random number table 202a (see FIG. 155), first winning type selection table 202b (see FIG. 155), A per-two random number table 202c (see FIG. 155) and a fluctuation pattern selection table 202d (see FIG. 156) are set. Although omitted in this control example, the ROM 202 stores various data necessary for the game (for example, action scenario data for a jackpot game, etc.), programs, etc., in addition to the above-described data.

For example, the action scenario data of the jackpot game is defined in a data table in which game action contents during the jackpot game are associated with the determined win type, and based on the information (scenario) stored in the data table. It is constructed so that movement control of various devices (variable winning device 65, etc.) during the jackpot game is executed.

Also, as shown in FIG. 154(b), the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 has a special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, a special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b, and a normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c. , special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d, special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e, normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f, probability variable setting flag 203h, probability variable passage counter 203i, prize number counter 203j, operation counter 203k , a notification counter 203m, a remaining ball timer flag 203n, a remaining ball timer 203p, a variable probability effective flag 203q, a variable probability effective timer 203r, a discharge number counter 203s, a variable probability counter 203t, a time reduction counter 203u, and other memories It has an area 203z.

The special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a has one execution area for the first special symbol and four reserved areas (first reserved area to fourth reserved area). Each value of the first winning random number counter C1, the first winning type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 is stored.

More specifically, at the timing when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 (start winning), each value of each counter C1 to C3 is acquired, and the acquired data is stored in four holding areas (holding number Area 1 to reserved area 4) are stored in ascending order of area numbers (first to fourth). That is, the smaller the area number, the data corresponding to the oldest winning is stored, and the first reserved area stores the data corresponding to the oldest winning. If data is stored in all four holding areas, nothing is newly stored.

After that, in the main control device 110, when a special symbol lottery is performed, each value of each counter C1 to C3 stored in the first reserved area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a is transferred to the execution area. Based on the values of the respective counters C1 to C3 which are shifted (moved) and stored in the execution area, determination such as lottery for special symbols is performed.

When data is shifted from the first reservation area to the execution area, the first reservation area becomes empty. Therefore, there is a shift process that packs the winning data stored in the other reservation areas (second reservation area to fourth reservation area) to the reservation area with the area number 1 smaller (first reservation area to third reservation area). done. In this control example, in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, data is shifted only for the reserved areas (second reserved area to fourth reserved area) in which winning data is stored. In addition, since the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b differs from the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a only in that it is a storage area corresponding to the second special symbol, detailed description thereof is omitted. do.

Like the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c has one execution area and four reserved areas (first reserved area to fourth reserved area). Each of these areas stores a normal random number counter C4.

More specifically, at the timing when the ball passes through the through gate 67, the value of the counter C4 is acquired, and the acquired data is stored in the four reserved areas (first reserved area to fourth reserved area). Among the areas in which the data is stored, the areas having the smallest area numbers (first to fourth) are stored in order. That is, similarly to the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, the data corresponding to the winning is stored while the winning order is maintained. If data is stored in all four holding areas, nothing is newly stored.

After that, in the main controller 110, when the normal symbol winning lottery is performed, the value of the counter C4 stored in the first reserved area of the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c is shifted to the execution area ( (moved), and based on the value of the counter C4 stored in the execution area, a determination such as a lottery for winning a normal symbol is performed.

In addition, when the data is shifted from the first reserved area to the execution area, the first reserved area becomes vacant. is shifted to a reserved area with an area number smaller by one. Also, the data shift is performed only for the reserved areas in which the winning data are stored.

The special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is a counter that counts up to four times the lottery right of the first special symbol lottery executed based on the ball entering the first ball entrance 64 (start winning). The initial value of this special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is set to zero. When the lottery right for the middle line in the pattern is acquired, 1 is added until the maximum value of 4 is reached. On the other hand, the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is decremented by 1 each time a special symbol variable display is newly executed.

The value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d (the number of times N of holding the variable display in the special symbol) is notified to the sound lamp control device 113 by the reserved ball number command. The reserved ball number command is a command transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sound lamp controller 113 every time the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is changed.

The special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is a counter that counts the reserved balls based on the winning of the second ball entrance 640, and other configurations are the same as the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d. A detailed description thereof is omitted.

The voice lamp control device 113, every time the values of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e are changed, the main controller 113 according to the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main controller 110. It is possible to acquire the value of the number of pending balls in the variable display that is held in 110 . As a result, the number of holding balls in the variable display managed by the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 223a and the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 223b of the sound lamp control device 113 is held by the main controller 110 due to the influence of noise and the like. Even if there is a deviation from the actual number of held balls in the displayed variable display, the deviation can be corrected by the next received number of held balls command.

In addition, the voice lamp control device 113 manages the number of held balls based on the number of held balls command, and every time the number of held balls changes, the display control device 114 is notified of the number of held balls. Send a pitch command. The display control device 114 displays the reserved ball number pattern in the sub-display area Ds of the third pattern display device 81 based on the reserved ball number notified by the display reserved ball number command.

The normal design reserved ball number counter 203f counts the number of reserved balls (number of standby times) of the variable display of the normal design (second design) performed by the second design display device 83 based on the passage of the ball through the through gate 67 up to 4 times. A counter that counts up to The initial value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is set to zero, and each time a ball passes through the through gate 67 and the number of reserved balls of variable display increases, 1 is added up to a maximum value of 4. On the other hand, the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is decremented by 1 each time the variable display of the normal symbol (second symbol) is newly executed.

When the ball passes through the through gate 67, if the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f (the number M of holding variable display in normal symbols) is less than 4, the value of the normal per random number counter C4 is acquired, The acquired data is stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c. On the other hand, when the ball passes through the through gate 67 and the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is 4, nothing is newly stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c.

The variable probability setting flag 203h is a flag indicating whether or not to set the high probability state of the special symbol after the jackpot game. In this pachinko machine 10, whether or not the high probability state of the special symbol is set depends on whether the ball enters (passes) the probability variable switch 65e3 (see FIG. 128) provided in the variable winning device 65 during the jackpot game. ). Here, when it is detected that the ball has entered (passed) this variable probability switch 65e3 during the jackpot game (hereinafter referred to as V winning), the variable probability setting flag 203h is set to ON (see S1412 in FIG. 191). . On the other hand, this variable probability setting flag 203h is referred to at the end of the jackpot game (see S1202 in FIG. 190), and when it is determined that it is set to ON, after setting 200 to the value of the variable probability counter 203t, it is turned OFF. It is set (see S1205 in FIG. 190). The variable probability setting flag 203h is backed up when the power is turned off, and is set to the state immediately before the power is turned off when the power is restored (when the power is turned on). Moreover, it is set to OFF when the pachinko machine 10 is initialized.

In addition, when the probability variation setting flag 203h is set to ON when the power is turned on, it is determined whether the probability variation switch has passed before the power is turned off. may be configured to formally set to ON and return. In this case, whether or not the variable probability switch 65e3 is passed before the power is turned off can be determined by whether the variable probability passage counter 203h, which will be described later, is a value greater than zero. By configuring in this way, in a state where the power is turned off, it is possible to reduce the damage on the side of the amusement arcade by determining fraud such as rewriting the probability variable setting flag 203h to ON and turning on the power again. can.

The variable probability passage counter 203i is a counter for counting the number of balls that have passed through the variable probability switch 65e3 (flowed down a specific area) in one round (one round of the jackpot in this control example) during the jackpot game. By the sum of the value of the variable probability passage counter 203i and the value of the ejection number counter 203s described later, it is possible to determine whether or not all the winning balls have been ejected. This variable probability passing counter 203i is updated by adding one by one when the ball passes through the variable probability switch 65e3 (V winning). Also, after executing the determination processing of whether or not the number of winning balls in the variable winning device 65 and the number of discharged balls match, the value is reset to "0" which is the initial value. It should be noted that this probability variable passing counter 203i is backed up when the power is turned off. It is set to 0 in the initialized state.

The winning number counter 203j is a counter for counting the number of balls that have won in the specific winning opening 65a of the variable winning device 65 in one round in the jackpot game. Based on this, 1 is added and updated. On the other hand, when one round is completed, the number of prizes won by the variable prize device 65 (the value of the prize number counter 203j) and the number of discharges (the total value of the discharge number counter 203s and the probability variable passage counter 203i) are the same. After it is determined whether they match, the initial value is reset to "0". The value of the winning number counter 203j is backed up when the power is turned off. It is set to 0 in the initialized state.

The operation counter 203k is for measuring (counting) the operation time of various devices (the opening/closing door 65f, the switching valve 65h) that are variably controlled during the jackpot game. solenoid) 65k is set to ON (excited). In the pachinko machine 10, the flow path solenoid 65k is set to ON for 0.5 seconds at the start of 5 rounds for the jackpot A, and the flow path solenoid 65k is turned on at the start of 5 rounds for the jackpots B and C. Set on for 5 seconds. In the operation counter 203k, a counter value corresponding to 0.5 seconds is set as start data of 5 rounds for the jackpot A, and a counter value corresponding to 5 seconds is set for the jackpots B and C. On the other hand, in the winning process executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the number is decremented by one and updated. Further, based on the determination that the value of the operation counter 203k is 0, the flow path solenoid 65k is set to OFF. The operation counter 203k is backed up when the power is turned off, and is set to 0 as an initial value in the initialized state. Thus, by setting the operation counter 203k and controlling the flow path solenoid 65k, winning to the variable probability switch 65e3 can be controlled according to the jackpot type.

The notification counter 203m is a counter for determining the timing of outputting a notification effect for attracting the player's attention (in this control example, a voice saying "look at the liquid crystal"). In this control example, a value corresponding to one second is set in the notification counter 203m at the end timing of the fourth round (10 balls won by the variable winning device 65 or 30 seconds have passed). This notification counter 203m is updated by being decremented by one each time the big win control process (see S904 in FIG. 188) of the main controller 110 is executed. A notification command to be output to the sound lamp control device 113 is set based on the value of the notification counter 203m becoming zero. Upon receiving this command, the sound lamp control device 113 executes the processing for outputting the sound described above.

By configuring in this manner, the sound "Look at the liquid crystal" is output before the start of the fifth round in which the flow path solenoid 65k is operated, so that the player can easily see the third symbol display device corresponding to the liquid crystal. Watch 81. Here, details will be described later, but in the fifth round of the jackpot game, for example, a girl character is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 to urge the player to look at the third pattern display device 81. The word "attention", which is a notification, is displayed. Since the channel solenoid 65k is activated in the fifth round, when the player watches the operation, the type of jackpot being executed is determined by the operating period of the channel solenoid 65k. Therefore, in order for the player to continue to expect that the variable probability game state will be provided until the end of the jackpot game, the movement of the switching member 65h (the flow path solenoid 65k) in the variable winning device 65 is controlled by the player. A notification effect that makes it difficult to see is being executed. However, when the fifth round ends, there is a risk that the player will look at the switching member 65h during the interval display, so the player is notified by voice to watch the third symbol display device 81 during the interval period. A notification effect is executed. As a result, the player's attention can be attracted to the displayed display contents after the interval effect is executed, and the player's attention can be diverted from the operation of the switching member 65h.

In this control example, the player's attention is diverted from the switching member 65h by announcing that the third symbol display device 81 is shown. By notifying that the player's hand is held over the device 65, the movement of the switching member 65h may be notified so as to be hidden by the player's hand. Also, not only the third symbol display device 81 but also the decorative lamp 34 may be notified to the player to look at, thereby diverting the player's attention. Furthermore, it is also possible to divert the player's attention by displaying a two-dimensional code or the like during the four rounds to notify the player to read it with a mobile phone. In this control example, regardless of the jackpot type of the jackpot game being executed, the above-described distraction effect is executed for the longest time (5 seconds from the start of round 5) until the operation of the switching member 65h ends. It is configured as follows. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from determining the jackpot type of the jackpot game of this time due to the length of the notification time.

The remaining ball timer flag 203n is a flag indicating whether or not it is a ball sweeping period after one round is finished and the specific winning hole 65a is closed. When the remaining ball timer flag 203p is set to ON, it means that it is the ball sweeping period. While the remaining ball timer flag 203n is set to ON, the remaining ball timer 203p, which will be described later, is incremented by one and updated. The remaining ball timer 203p is a counter for determining the time after the specific winning hole 65a is closed, and determines whether the time required for the game balls in the variable winning device 65 to be discharged has passed. is a counter for

The remaining ball timer 203p is the time required for the winning balls to be discharged to the variable prize winning device 65 when one preset round is completed and the specific prize winning port 65a of the variable prize winning device 65 is closed. is a counter for determining whether or not has elapsed. In this embodiment, it takes 0.5 seconds for the variable winning device 65 to discharge the winning ball. is set as the upper limit of When the remaining ball timer 203p reaches the upper limit value (0.8 seconds in this embodiment), it is determined whether or not the number of winning prizes to the variable prize winning device 65 and the number of discharged prizes match. be. If they do not match, an error command is set to notify you. Therefore, it is possible to notify early that game balls are clogged in the variable prize winning device 65.例文帳に追加

In addition, if the winning number and the discharge number do not match, a dedicated flag is set to ON, and if the flag is ON, the probability variation setting flag 203h is turned on even if the game ball passes through the probability variation switch may be configured not to be set to . By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the variable probability state from being improperly imparted.

Probability variation effective flag 203q, after the switching member 65h is switched to an arrangement that cannot be distributed to the specific region (probability variation switch 65e3), when the game ball passes through the specific region (probability variation switch 65e3) (when V wins ), it is a flag for determining whether or not the passage (V winning) is valid. When this variable probability effective flag 203q is set to ON, it indicates that the game ball passing through the specific area (variable probability switch 65e3) is a normal period.

The variable probability effective timer 203r is a counter for counting the time after the variable probability effective flag 203q is set to ON. After the switching member 65h is switched to an arrangement in which the ball cannot flow down the specific area (variable probability switch 65e3) by this variable probability effective timer 203r, it is possible to determine the period necessary for normally passing through the variable probability switch 65e3. In this control example, the time required for the ball reaching the switching member 65h to pass through the variable probability switch 65e3 is 0.3 seconds. The upper limit value of the variable probability valid timer 203r is set to a counter value corresponding to 0.5 seconds, and even if the specific area (variable probability switch 65e3) is passed (V winning) after that, it is determined to be illegal and passed. do not.

As a result, the ball is illegally entered into a specific area (variable probability switch 65e3) (V prize), pushed up the game ball with a piano wire or the like from below the variable probability switch 65e3 and passed, or passed through the magnetic sensor by radio waves etc. It is possible to suppress damage caused by fraud such as false detection.

The discharged number counter 203s is a counter for counting the number of game balls discharged from the variable winning device 65 in one round. The discharge number counter 203s is reset to 0, which is the initial value, after it is determined that the number of winning balls in the variable winning device 65 matches the discharge number.

The variable probability counter 203t is a counter for indicating a state in which a special symbol high probability state is set, and is set to a value corresponding to a case in which a special symbol high probability state is set. A value is set in this variable probability counter 203t after the big winning game is completed based on the ball passing through the specific area (variable probability switch 65e3) during the big winning game (see S1203 in FIG. 190). Then, every time the special symbol lottery is executed (every time the special symbol variation time elapses and the special symbol during variable display is stopped and displayed), 1 is subtracted from the set value. Also, it is cleared to 0 when winning the jackpot game. As a result, since the high probability state of the special symbol is not set during the jackpot game, it is possible to suppress giving excessive benefits to the player during the jackpot game.

In addition, in this control example, when the high probability state of the special symbol is set, the value of the probability variation counter 203t is set, based on the special symbol lottery (fluctuation), the value of the probability variation counter 203t is subtracted, and the probability variation counter 203t When the value of becomes 0, the high probability state of the special pattern is terminated, and it is configured to shift to the low probability state of the special pattern, but not limited to this, for example, the next jackpot game is executed (until the jackpot is won), the special symbol high probability state may be continued. In this case, "10000" may be set as the value of the variable probability counter 203t.

In addition, in this embodiment, as a condition for ending the high probability state of the special symbol, as a condition for subtracting the value of the probability variation counter 203t, the value of the probability variation counter 203i based on the number of special symbol lottery (variation) Although only the condition for subtraction is set, the value of the variable probability counter 203t is subtracted when, for example, an end condition that can be satisfied depending on the processing contents of various processes executed by the main controller 110 is satisfied without being limited to this. It may be configured to Specifically, when the lottery result of each symbol lottery executed in the state where the high probability state of the normal symbol is set becomes a predetermined lottery result (for example, special winning election), or the normal symbol lottery Also when the result is a predetermined lottery result (for example, winning per special normal figure), the value of the probability variation counter 203t may be subtracted.

Furthermore, the winning jackpot type and the value set in the variable probability counter 203t may be changed based on the passing situation of the ball to the specific area (variable probability switch 65e3), and the content of subtracting the value of the time saving counter 203u Similarly, the value of the probability variable counter 203t may be configured to be subtractable according to conditions other than the number of times of variation of the special symbol, and when the subtraction condition for subtracting the value of the probability variable counter 203t is satisfied, the probability variable counter 203t may be configured so that a plurality of values of can be subtracted at once. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for a player to grasp how long the high probability state of the special pattern continues, so that the player can watch the result of the special pattern lottery executed during the high probability state of the special pattern without getting bored. can be done.

In addition, in this control example, as a condition for ending the variable probability state, that is, as a condition for subtracting the value of the variable probability counter 203t, the value of the variable probability counter 203t is subtracted based on the number of special symbol lotteries (fluctuations). Although only the conditions are set, the value of the variable probability counter 203t is subtracted when, for example, the end conditions that can be satisfied depending on the processing contents of the various processes executed by the main controller 110 are satisfied without being limited to this. can be configured to Specifically, when the lottery result of each symbol lottery executed in the state where the high probability state of the special symbol is set becomes a predetermined lottery result (for example, special lost winning), or normal symbol lottery Even if the result is a predetermined lottery result (for example, winning a special normal figure), the value of the probability variable counter 203t may be subtracted, or the ball may enter a specific entrance (for example, the first 1 entrance 64, second entrance 640, etc.), the value of the variable probability counter 203t may be subtracted.

In addition, in this control example, the value of the variable probability counter 203t is configured to be decremented by one. It may be configured to be subtracted, or may be configured to be subtracted so that the value of the variable probability counter 203t becomes "0" regardless of the current value of the variable probability counter 203t. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand how long the variable probability state continues, and it is possible to make the player interested in the game during the variable probability state.

Furthermore, the conditions for ending the variable probability state may be varied according to the content of establishment of the conditions for which the variable probability state is set (jackpot type). As a result, not only the execution of the jackpot game but also the jackpot type corresponding to the executed jackpot game can be made interesting to the player, and the interest in the game can be improved. .

The time saving counter 203u is a counter for indicating a state in which a high probability state of normal symbols is set, and a value corresponding to a case where a high probability state of normal symbols is set is set. A value corresponding to the winning jackpot type is set to the time saving counter 203u after the jackpot game ends (see S1205 in FIG. 190). Then, it is cleared to 0 when the jackpot game is won. As a result, since the high probability state of normal symbols is not set during the jackpot game, it is possible to suppress giving excessive benefits to the player during the jackpot game.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the high probability state of the normal design is set, the value of the time reduction counter 203u is set, based on the special design lottery (fluctuation), the value of the time reduction counter 203u is subtracted, and the time reduction counter 203u When the value of becomes 0, the high probability state of the normal pattern ends, and it is configured to shift to the low probability state of the normal pattern, but not limited to this, for example, the next jackpot game is executed (until the jackpot is won), the normal symbol high probability state may be continued. In this case, "10000" may be set as the value of the time saving counter 203u.

In addition, in this embodiment, as a condition for terminating the high probability state of normal symbols and a condition for subtracting the value of the time saving counter 203u, the value of the time saving counter 203h is set based on the number of special symbol lotteries (fluctuations). Although only the conditions for subtraction are set, the value of the time saving counter 203u is subtracted when, for example, an end condition that can be satisfied depending on the processing contents of various processes executed by the main controller 110 is satisfied without being limited to this. It may be configured to Specifically, when the lottery result of each symbol lottery executed in the state where the high probability state of the normal symbol is set becomes a predetermined lottery result (for example, special winning election), or the normal symbol lottery Even when the result is a predetermined lottery result (for example, winning per special normal figure), the value of the time saving counter 203u may be subtracted.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the value of the time-saving counter 203u is configured to be decremented by 1, but according to the type of the established end condition, a plurality of values of the time-saving counter 203u are collectively (for example, 2) It may be configured to be subtracted, or may be configured to be subtracted so that the value of the time saving counter 203u becomes "0" regardless of the current value of the time saving counter 203u. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand how long the time saving state will continue, and it is possible to make the player interested in the game during the time saving state.

Furthermore, the conditions for ending the time saving state may be varied according to the contents of establishment of the conditions for which the time saving state is set (jackpot type). As a result, not only the execution of the jackpot game but also the jackpot type corresponding to the executed jackpot game can be made interesting to the player, and the interest in the game can be improved. .

The other memory area 203z is set (stored) with other data necessary for the game, counters, flags, and the like.

Returning to FIG. 152, the description is continued. An input/output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 via a bus line 204 comprising an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 205 includes the payout control device 111, the sound lamp control device 113, the first symbol display device 37, the second symbol display device 83, the second symbol reservation lamp 84, and the lower side of the opening/closing plate of the specific winning opening 65a. A solenoid 209 consisting of a large opening solenoid for driving opening and closing to the front side and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory is connected. to send.

The input/output port 205 is connected to various switches 208 including a switch group and a sensor group (not shown), and a RAM erasure switch circuit 253 provided in the power supply 115, which will be described later. , and the RAM erasing signal SG2 output from the RAM erasing switch circuit 253, various processes are executed.

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and rental balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 212 storing control programs executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 used as a work memory and the like.

The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area for storing the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211, and various flags and counters. , and a work area (work area) in which values such as I/O are stored. The RAM 213 is configured to retain (back up) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply 115 even after the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, and all the data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. As with the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is also configured to receive a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when power is shut off due to a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 185) is immediately executed as power failure processing.

An input/output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 215 is connected to the main controller 110, the dispensing motor 216, the launch controller 112, and the like. Although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected with a prize ball detection switch for detecting paid prize balls. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout controller 111 but not to the main controller 110 .

The shooting control device 112 controls the ball shooting unit 112a so that the shooting strength of the ball corresponds to the amount of rotation of the operating handle 51 when the main controller 110 issues a ball shooting instruction. The ball shooting unit 112a has a shooting solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 290 detects that the player is touching the operating handle 51, and the operating handle 51b is turned off (not operated) to stop the shooting of the ball. A shooting solenoid is energized corresponding to the amount of rotation of the operating handle 51, and the ball is shot with strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operating handle 51.

The audio lamp control device 113 outputs audio from an audio output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, outputs lighting and extinguishing from a lamp display device (electrical parts 29 to 33, display lamp 34, etc.) 227, and changes production (variation It controls the setting of the display mode of the third pattern display device 81 performed by the display control device 114 such as display) and continuous advance notice effect. The MPU 221, which is an arithmetic device, has a ROM 222 storing control programs executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 used as a work memory and the like.

An input/output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 comprising an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 225 is connected to the main controller 110, the display controller 114, the audio output device 226, the lamp display device 227, the frame button 22, and the like.

The sound lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, changes the background mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81, or changes the background mode displayed at the time of super reach. The voice output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are controlled, and the display control device 114 is instructed so as to change the content of the presentation.

The audio lamp control device 113 determines an error according to the command from the main control device 110 and the status of various devices connected to the audio lamp control device 113, and displays and controls the error command including the error type. Send to device 114 . The display control device 114 controls the third pattern display device 81 to display an error message image corresponding to the error type (for example, vibration error) indicated by the received error command without delay.

As shown in FIG. 159(a), the ROM 222 of the sound lamp control device 113 contains a variable effect pattern selection table 222a, a repeated hit effect selection table 222b, a random display selection table 222c, a delay effect selection table 222d, and a group effect selection table 222e. , and a battle effect selection table 222f are stored.

The variation effect pattern selection table 222a is a selection table for determining a variation pattern based on a variation pattern command output from the main controller 110. FIG. A plurality of variation patterns are set corresponding to the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern command and the variation pattern type, and one variation pattern is determined by acquiring a counter value for selection (not shown).

Here, with reference to FIG. 160, the contents of the variable effect pattern selection table 222a will be described. FIG. 160(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the variable effect pattern selection table 222a. As shown in FIG. 160(a), the variation effect pattern selection table 222a is referred to when a variation pattern command (normal time variation pattern command) selected by the main controller 110 using the normal table 202d1 is received. The normal production pattern table 222a1 and the time saving/probability variation referred to when the variation pattern command (time saving/probability variation pattern command) selected using the time saving/probability variation table 202d2 in the main control device 110 is received It has an effect pattern table 222a2.

In each production pattern table, various production data corresponding to the variation pattern command (variation time) selected by the main control device 110 are defined, and the variation production executed by the third pattern display device 81 is specified. It is used when selecting the contents of the presentation.

Next, the contents of the normal effect pattern table 222a1 will be described with reference to FIG. 160(b). FIG. 160(b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents defined in the normal effect pattern table 222a1. As shown in FIG. 160(b), the normal production pattern table 222a1 includes the type of the normal fluctuation pattern command output from the main control device 110, the number of reserved special symbols, and the acquired first production. Various production patterns (fluctuation production) are defined corresponding to the value of the counter 223p1. In the schematic diagram shown in FIG. 160(b), for convenience of explanation, there is a range indicated as "various reach effects" as the effect pattern, but this actually corresponds to the acquired first effect counter 223p1. This indicates that different types of production patterns are defined for each.

More specifically, the content defined in the normal effect pattern table 222a1 will be described as follows. When the number of reserved corresponding special symbols is "0", regardless of the value of the acquired first effect counter 223p1, "pseudo-off effect" is used as the effect pattern, and the number of reserved corresponding special symbols is "1 to 3". , "various ready-to-win effects" according to the acquired value of the first effect counter 223p1 are defined. In addition, when the type of the received variation pattern is "type B (90 seconds)" and the number of reserved special symbols is "0 to 3", the value of the acquired first effect counter 223p1 is "0 to 149 , and the range of ``150 to 198'' defines ``series of character effects''.

Here, when the "pseudo failure effect" is selected as the effect pattern, an effect including a specific failure effect for 14 seconds (see FIG. 145(a)) is executed. By constructing in this way, since the number of reserved special symbols is '0', the final result of the special symbol lottery is a jackpot win even though the player thinks that the specified non-specified performance has been executed. can be provided to the player. Therefore, even when the 14-second specific failure performance executed when the result of the special symbol lottery is lost, the lottery result can leave the possibility of a big win, so the contents of the variable performance to be executed. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the fact that the result of the special symbol lottery is grasped in advance.

In addition, when "a series of character effects" is selected as the effect pattern, an effect using a plurality of effect devices of the pachinko machine 10 is executed. Although a detailed description of this production device is omitted, it is a movable means (a member for production that operates using an electric drive source) provided in the pachinko machine 10, and a production is performed according to the result of the special symbol lottery. The device is movable from at least a first position to a second position different from the first position for use. Some of these effect devices require a preparatory action (for example, an action to move to a standby position) in advance in order to actually move to a different position. Therefore, as in this control example, by setting the effect pattern of the variable effect, it is possible to reliably execute the preparatory motion. Incidentally, for an effect device requiring a preparatory action, an effect pattern in which only the preparatory action is executed may be provided in addition to the case where the effect is actually executed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from knowing in advance whether or not the effect using the effect device will be executed based on the presence or absence of the preparatory motion.

If the result of the determination is "out", the type of the received variation pattern is "type D (14 seconds)", and the number of reserved special symbols is "0", the value of the acquired first effect counter 223p1 Regardless, if the production pattern is "unspecified production", the type of the received variation pattern is "type E (28 seconds)", and the number of pending special symbols is "0 to 3", the acquired Regardless of the value of the first effect counter 223p1, the effect pattern is "second specified non-specific effect", the type of the received variation pattern is "type F (60 seconds)", and the number of reserved special symbols is "0". ~ 3", the "various reach effects" according to the value of the acquired first effect counter 223p1, the type of the received variation pattern is "type F (60 seconds)", and the corresponding number of special symbols held is "0 to 3", the "various reach effects" according to the value of the acquired first effect counter 223p1, the type of the received variation pattern is "type F (60 seconds)", the corresponding special symbol If the number of pending is "0 to 3", the value of the acquired first effect counter 223p1 is "various reach effects" in the range of "0 to 194" and "series of reach effects" in the range of "195 to 198" Role performance" is stipulated.

Next, with reference to FIG. 161, the contents of the effect pattern table 222a2 for time reduction/probability variation will be described. FIG. 161 is a schematic diagram showing the contents defined in the production pattern table 222a2 for time saving/probability variation. As shown in FIG. 161, the time saving/probability variation effect pattern table 222a2 includes the type of the time saving time variation pattern command output from the main control device 110, the number of corresponding special symbols on hold, and the acquired first effect counter 223p1 value and various effect patterns (variable effect) are defined. In the schematic diagram shown in FIG. 161, for convenience of explanation, there is a range indicated as "various types of ready-to-win effects" as effect patterns. This indicates that the production pattern of is specified. In addition, regarding the specified detailed contents, it is different from the above-described normal production pattern table 222a1 (see FIG. 160(b)) in that the specific distribution numerical values are different and the corresponding production patterns are different. Since the difference is that the two are the same, the detailed description is omitted.

The repeated hit effect selection table 222b is a list of repeated hit effects executed when "continuous hit effect" is selected as the variable effect pattern selected by the variable effect pattern selection table 222a based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110. It is for selecting the effect mode, and includes an upper limit frequency selection table 222b1, an end frequency selection table 222b2, and an effect result selection table 222b3.

It should be noted that this "continuous hit effect" is included in the effect patterns described as "various reach effects" in the variable effect pattern selection table 222a described above with reference to FIGS. 160 and 161. , the effect of the effect described with reference to FIGS. 130 to 132 is executed.

First, with reference to FIG. 162(b), the contents of the upper limit count selection table 222b1 will be described. FIG. 162(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the upper limit number of times selection table 222b1. The upper limit number selection table 222b1 is referred to when selecting the number of times the frame button 22 is operated (upper limit number) required until the display mode changes to the maximum variable value in the continuous hit effect.

Specifically, when the result of the corresponding special symbol lottery is "win (big win)" and the reach type is "SP reach", the acquired value of the second effect counter 223p2 is "0 to 39". , "20" is selected as the upper limit number of times. In this case, the final variable mode (maximum variable value) of the repeated hit effect is "0". When the obtained value of the second effect counter 223p2 is "40 to 198", "15" is selected as the upper limit number of times. In this case, the final variable mode (maximum variable value) of the repeated hit effect is "5 bodies".

In addition, when the result of the corresponding special symbol lottery is "hit (big hit)" and the reach type is "super reach", regardless of the value of the acquired second effect counter 223p2, the upper limit number of times is set to " 15” is selected. In this case, the final variable mode (maximum variable value) of the repeated hit effect is "11 to 40 bodies".

Here, the final variable mode of "11 to 40 bodies" is a case where only the possible range is selected without determining a specific numerical value when selecting the effect mode of the continuous hit effect. When this "11 to 40 bodies" is selected, when the operation command for the frame button 22 is received on the display control device 114 side, the currently displayed variable mode is changed within a range in which the variable mode is not reversed. A determination is made as to whether or not to vary, and if the determination is won, the variable mode is configured to be varied within the above-described range. In this way, by configuring the sound lamp control device 113 so as not to determine the details of the effect mode of the repeated hitting effect, variations can be given to the effect mode of the repeated hitting effect that is actually executed.

When the result of the corresponding special symbol lottery is "loss" and the reach type is "SP reach", "15" is selected as the upper limit number of times regardless of the acquired value of the second effect counter 223p2. . In this case, the final variable mode (maximum variable value) of the repeated hit effect is "5 bodies". When the reach type is "super reach", "15" is selected as the upper limit number regardless of the acquired value of the second effect counter 223p2. In this case, the final variable mode (maximum variable value) of the repeated hit effect is "11 to 40 bodies". When the ready-to-win type is "other than ready-to-win", regardless of the acquired value of the second effect counter 223p2, "10" is selected as the upper limit number of times. In this case, the final variable mode (maximum variable value) of the repeated hit effect is "11 to 40 bodies".

Next, the contents of the number-of-ends selection table 222b2 will be described with reference to FIG. 163(a). FIG. 163(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the number-of-ends selection table 222b2. The end number selection table 222b2 selects an end condition for shortening (ending) the effect period of the repeated hit effect after the operation of the frame button 22 reaches the upper limit number of times during the repeat effect. In this control example, as an end condition for shortening (ending) the effect period of the continuous hit effect, it is possible to set an operation count end condition that is satisfied based on the number of times the frame button 22 is operated. ), different end times are defined based on the result of the special symbol lottery, the set upper limit number of times, and the acquired value of the third effect counter 223p3.

FIG. 163(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the effect result selection table 222b3. This effect result selection table 222b3 is a data table used when selecting the effect result of the repeated hit effect, and as a result of the special symbol lottery, depending on whether or not the effect period of the repeated hit effect is shortened, and the set upper limit number of times It is stipulated that a different effect result is selected in each case.

The random display selection table 222c has a data table that is referred to when selecting the effect mode of the random display effect, and as shown in FIG. , a permutation storage area 222c3, an ideographic mode selection table 222c4, and a display number selection table 222c5.

The effect icon storage area 222c1 is a storage area in which information corresponding to various icons used in the random display effect is stored. Here, the contents of the effect icon storage area 222c1 will be described with reference to FIG. 164(b). FIG. 164(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the effect icon storage area 222c1. As shown in FIG. 164(b), the effect icon storage area 222c1 is formed with six areas, first area za1 to sixth area za6, arranged in order.

One piece of icon information is stored for each area. Specifically, “square” icon information is stored in the first area za1, “triangle” icon information is stored in the second area za2, and “square” icon information is stored in the third area za3. The fourth area stores "circular" icon information, the fifth area stores "diamond-shaped" icon information, and the sixth area stores "V-sign-shaped" icon information.

In this control example, icon information is stored for each area formed in the icon storage area 222c1, and each area is assigned an order. Then, when the effect mode of the random display effect is determined, the icons are displayed according to the order of the regions of the icon storage area 222c1. By configuring in this way, it is possible to execute an effect according to a predetermined rule while imparting randomness to the icon display contents. Therefore, it is possible to make it easier to execute an effect according to the result of the special symbol lottery, as compared with the case where the effect contents are set completely at random.

In FIG. 164(b), only one region range (the first region za1 to the sixth region za6) is shown as the production icon storage area 222c1, but in reality, each region is stored in association with the region. Although it has a plurality of area ranges with different icon information, the description thereof will be omitted for the sake of convenience. In this way, the effect icon storage area 222c1 is provided with a plurality of area ranges, and when the effect mode of the random display effect is selected, the area ranges to be used are varied, so that the effect modes are greatly varied. can be easily executed. For example, specific icon information that is stored only in a part of a plurality of area ranges is provided, and the area range in which the specific icon information is stored is selected when a special symbol lottery wins a jackpot. It should be configured to make it easier. By configuring in this way, it is possible to increase the expectation of winning the jackpot just by displaying the icon corresponding to the specific icon information.

Further, the icon information stored in the region range (the first region za1 to the sixth region za6) of the effect icon storage area 222c1 may be switched when a predetermined switching condition is satisfied. In this case, for example, as a predetermined switching condition, a switching condition that is established when a jackpot game is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, once or twice), or a timer that can clock the current time on the pachinko machine 10 ( For example, an RTC) is installed, and a switching condition that is established at a predetermined time (for example, 13:00), an operation means that the player can arbitrarily operate, and the operation executed based on the operation on the operation means In the pachinko machine 10 having an effect selection means capable of selecting the effect mode of the effect, it is preferable to provide a switching condition that is established based on the player's operation of the operation means. As a result, even if only one area range is provided, it is possible to diversify the variations of the presentation mode.

The display order selection table 222c2 is a data table used when selecting the display order of the icons to be displayed in the random display effect. This is to select which area of the storage area 222c1 to use.

Here, the contents of the display order selection table 222c2 will be described with reference to FIG. 164(b). FIG. 164(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the display order selection table 222c2. As shown in FIG. 164(b), the display order selection table 222c2 contains different areas (first areas) as areas corresponding to the top icon based on the result of the special symbol lottery and the value of the fourth effect counter 233p4. za1 to sixth area za6) are configured to be selectable.

In this control example, when the area (first area za1 to sixth area za6) corresponding to the leading icon is selected, the areas are selected in a predetermined order (first area za1 (A), second area za2 (B) , . . . sixth area za6(F), first area za1(A), . . . ). Therefore, when "A" is selected as the top icon and when "C" is selected, the same display mode will be displayed when the first icon is displayed in the random display effect. Become. Therefore, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the display mode of the icons that are displayed consecutively in the random display effect, specifically, the display mode of the second icon that is displayed.

Also, as shown in FIG. 164(c), when the result of the special symbol lottery is a big win, it is easier to display the "V sign shape" icon as the leading icon than when the result is a loss. It is configured as follows. Moreover, it is configured so that the ratio of selecting "C" is high. Therefore, during the random display effect, the "V sign shape" icon is more likely to be displayed when the jackpot is won than when the jackpot is not won. Therefore, the "V-sign shape" icon is a specific icon that increases the expectation of a big win just by being displayed.

The permutation storage area 222c3 is a storage area that stores information about positions at which icons are displayed in the random display effect. In this control example, a plurality of orders (permutations) in which the icons are displayed in the random display effect are prepared in advance, and when selecting the effect mode of the random display effect, the icons are displayed in the selected order. It is configured to By configuring in this way, it is possible to execute an effect according to a predetermined rule while imparting randomness to the icon display order. Therefore, it is possible to make it easier to execute an effect according to the result of the special symbol lottery, as compared with the case where the effect contents are set completely at random.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 165(a), the permutation storage area 222c3 stores effect data (permutation data) corresponding to the permutations A to D, and a display mode selection table 222c4, which will be described later, is stored. Permutation data selected using is read out.

Here, the contents defined in the display mode selection table 222c4 will be described with reference to FIG. 165(b). FIG. 165(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the display mode selection table 222c4. This symbol mode selection table 222c4 is a data table used when selecting the icon display position in the random display effect, and as shown in FIG. and the value of the fifth effect counter 223p5. Different permutation data are configured to be selected. Then, the permutation data selected using the display mode selection table 222c4 is read out from the permutation storage area 222c3 and determined as the effect mode of the random display effect.

The display number selection table 222c5 is a data table used when selecting the number of icons to be displayed in the random display effect. The contents of this display number selection table 222c5 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 166 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the display quantity selection table 222c5. As shown in FIG. 166, the display number selection table 222c5 is defined so that different numbers are selected based on the result of the special symbol lottery and the value of the sixth effect counter 223p6, and the result of the special symbol lottery. Each value is defined so that a larger number of coins is more likely to be selected when is a big win than when it is not a big win.

By configuring in this way, the more icons are displayed in the random display effect, the higher the expectation of winning the jackpot. As described above, in the random display effect in this control example, a plurality of effect elements are independently selected, and the result of the selection is combined to determine the effect mode. It is possible to increase the variation of the production mode by using.

In addition, when selecting each performance element, the presence/absence of winning a big win is included in the selection condition, so even in a combined performance mode, the performance mode can be determined in a balanced manner based on the presence/absence of winning a big win. For example, a "V-sign" icon as a displayed icon is set to be more likely to be displayed first in the random display effect when the jackpot is won, and when the jackpot is won, Since it is set so that the number of icons displayed in the random display effect can be increased, in the random display effect that is executed, the case of winning a jackpot is more complex than the case of winning an unsuccessful win. It is possible to easily display the "V sign shape" icon.

The delay effect selection table 222d is a data table used for selecting the effect mode of the delay effect to be executed when the delay effect is determined as the variable effect pattern, and is used to select the length of the delay period and the target of the delay effect. It is for selection.

Here, the contents of the delay effect selection table 222d will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 167 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the delay effect selection table 222d. As shown in FIG. 167, the delay effect selection table 222d defines different delay types corresponding to the result of the special symbol lottery and the value of the seventh effect counter 223p7.

In this control example, when executing the delay effect, a plurality of delay periods (time) are configured to be selectable. The degree of expectation for winning the jackpot is varied depending on the length of the delay period. In other words, as the player becomes more experienced in the game, he/she can gradually determine the presence or absence of the delay effect according to the relationship with other effects. Therefore, in the present control example, the delay period in the delay effect is configured to have a difference. As a result, it is possible to provide the enjoyment of discerning the delay type even to the player who can discriminate that the delay effect will be executed.

Furthermore, in this control example, it is possible to set the presence or absence of a delay effect and the delay period for each of a plurality of effects that can be executed at the same time. This makes it difficult to compare execution timings with surrounding effects.

As described above, in the case of executing a delayed effect, if it is configured so that different delayed effect modes can be set for each of a plurality of effects that can be executed at the same time, it usually includes a plurality of effects that are executed at the same time. 1 performance data was used as the delay performance. That is, the effect data including at least the effect information corresponding to the delay period set for each effect and the effect information during the delay period is used.

That is, regardless of whether or not there is a delayed effect in which the effect is executed with a predetermined delay in appearance for the player, the effect data corresponding to the same timing (for example, the start timing of the special symbol variation) is set and delayed. After the performance based on the performance data during the period is executed, the performance to be delayed is executed. When configured in this way, since the performance including the delayed performance is executed using the performance data started in accordance with the start timing of the special pattern variation, it is possible to facilitate execution of the performance without deviation. It was possible to enhance the effect.

However, since it is necessary to prepare performance data corresponding to the performance content of the delay performance, there is a problem that the amount of performance data increases just by slightly changing the delay period. On the other hand, in this control example, the timing for setting the effect data to be the target of the delayed effect, that is, the timing for setting the display command for the delayed effect by the sound lamp control device 113 is delayed. there is Therefore, when the delay period is to be varied, it is only necessary to change the value of the timer (delay timer 223s) for measuring the delay period of the audio ramp control device 113. FIG.

The gathering effect selection table 222e is a data table used when determining the effect mode of the gathering effect, and stores character information indicating characters used in the gathering effect as shown in FIG. 168(a). It has a character storage area 222e1 and a character number selection table 222e2, which is a data table used when selecting the number of characters obtainable in a gathering effect.

The battle effect selection table 222f is a data table used when determining the effect mode of the battle effect, and as shown in FIG. a final remaining HP selection table 222f2 used to select the final remaining physical strength (HP) of the enemy character in the battle production; and a battle mode selection table 222f3 to be used.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 227(b), the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 contains a special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223a, a special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223b, a normal reserved ball number counter 223c, and a fluctuation start flag. 223d, stop type selection flag 223e, winning information storage area 223f, state setting area 223g, effect selection information storage area 223h, operation effect in progress flag 223i, pressed flag 223k, pressing frequency counter 223m, operation valid timer 223n, effect counter group 223p, an upper limit count setting area 223q, an end count setting area 223r, a delay timer 223s, a continuous notice setting flag 223t, a continuous notice counter 223u, a continuous notice flag 223v, a round number counter 223x, and a memory area 223z. .

The special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223a is a variable display of the first special symbol performed by the first symbol display device 37 (and the third symbol display device 81), and is the first symbol reserved by the main controller 110. A counter that counts the number of pending balls (waiting times) for variable effects of special patterns up to 4 times for each type of special pattern. Update according to the timing of increase or decrease.

The special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223b, like the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223a, is a variable display of the second special symbol performed by the first symbol display device 37 (and the third symbol display device 81). , A counter that counts the number of pending balls (number of standby times) of the second special symbol variable effect suspended in the main control device 110 up to 4 times for each type of special symbol, and when a winning information command is received, It is updated according to the timing when the number of held balls increases or decreases, such as when a variation pattern command is received.

As described above, the voice ramp control device 113 directly accesses the main control device 110, and the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 Cannot get value. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 counts the number of reserved balls based on the number of reserved balls command transmitted from the main controller 110, and the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223a and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223b Then, the number of reserved balls is managed for each type of special symbol.

Specifically, in the main controller 110, when the start winning is detected and the number of pending balls of the variable display is added, or the variable display in the special symbol is executed in the main controller 110 and the number of the pending balls is subtracted. If so, it transmits to the sound lamp control device 113 a reserved ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d after addition or subtraction or the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e.

When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main controller 110, the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d of the main controller 110 or the special symbol 2 reserved ball from the reserved ball number command The value of the number counter 203e is acquired and stored in the counter corresponding to the command, out of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223b (see S2207 in FIG. 195). In this way, the voice lamp control device 113 updates the values of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223a and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223b according to the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main controller 110. While synchronizing with the values of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e of the main controller 110, the values can be updated.

The values of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223 a and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223 b are used to display the reserved ball number symbols on the third symbol display device 81 . That is, the voice lamp control device 113, in response to receiving the reserved ball number command, stores the reserved ball number indicated by the command in the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223b. , In order to notify the display control device 114 of the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223a or the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223b after storage, a display reserved ball number command is transmitted to the display control device 114. .

When the display control device 114 receives this display pending ball number command, the value of the pending ball number indicated by the command, that is, the special symbol 1 pending ball number counter 223a of the audio lamp control device 113, or the special symbol 2 pending ball number counter 223a The drawing of the image is controlled so as to display the number of pending ball symbols corresponding to the value of the number of ball counter 223b in the sub display area Ds of the third symbol display device 81. FIG. As described above, the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223a changes its value while synchronizing with the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d of the main control device 110, and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223b is mainly While synchronizing with the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e of the control device 110, the value is changed. Therefore, the number of reserved ball number symbols displayed in the sub display area Ds of the third pattern display device 81 is also the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e of the main control device 110. It can be changed while synchronizing. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can accurately display the number of held balls whose variable display is held.

The normal reserved ball number counter 223c has the same content as the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223a and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223b described above, but differs in that the target is changed from the special symbol to the normal symbol. Since the technical control concept is the same, detailed description is omitted.

The fluctuation start flag 223d is turned on when the first special symbol fluctuation pattern command or the second special symbol fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main controller 110 is received (see S2204 in FIG. 195), and the third symbol It is turned off when the variable display is set in the display device 81 (see S2602 in FIG. 199). When the fluctuation start flag 223d is turned on, the display fluctuation pattern command is set based on the fluctuation pattern extracted from the received fluctuation pattern command.

The display variation pattern command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and the command output processing of the main processing (see FIG. 194) executed by the MPU 221 (see S2102 in FIG. 195) , and is transmitted to the display control device 114 . In the display control device 114, by receiving this display variation pattern command, the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command is used to perform the variation display of the third symbol on the third symbol display device 81. Display control of the variable effect is started.

The stop type selection flag 223e is turned on when receiving a special symbol stop type command transmitted from the main controller 110 (see S2204 in FIG. 195), and the stop type in the third symbol display device 81 is set. is turned off (see S2613 in FIG. 199). When the stop type selection flag 223e is turned on, the stop type is determined based on the stop type (jackpot type in the case of a jackpot) extracted from the received stop type command.

The winning information storage area 223f includes one execution area, four areas (first area to fourth area) corresponding to the first special symbol, and four areas (first area to fourth area) corresponding to the second special symbol. 4 areas) and four areas (first area to fourth area) corresponding to normal symbols, and winning information is stored in each of these areas. In the pachinko machine 10, when the main controller 110 detects the start winning for the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640, a special winning random number counter C1 obtained in response to the start winning, From each value of the special hit type counter C2 and the variation type counter CS1, various information (win or not, jackpot type in the case of a jackpot, fluctuation pattern) obtained when a special symbol lottery corresponding to the start winning is performed. The main controller 110 predicts (estimates), and the predicted various information is notified from the main controller 110 to the audio lamp controller 113 by means of winning information commands.

Also, when the passage of the ball through the through gate 67 is detected, from the value of the second winning random number counter C4 acquired according to the passage, when the lottery of the normal symbol corresponding to the passage is performed A lottery result is predicted in advance, and the predicted various information is notified from the main controller 110 to the audio lamp controller 113 by means of a winning information command.

In the voice lamp control device 113, when the winning information command is received, various information notified by the winning information command (in the case of special symbol winning information, success or failure, jackpot type in case of big hit, fluctuation pattern, normal symbol In the case of the winning information of (2), win or lose) is extracted as winning information, and the winning information is stored in the winning information storage area 223f. More specifically, the extracted winning information is the type of the ball entrance where the ball was detected (first ball entrance 64 or second ball entrance 640), or four areas corresponding to normal symbols ( 1st area to 4th area) are stored in order from the area with the smallest area number (1st to 4th area). That is, the smaller the area number is, the data corresponding to the oldest winning is stored, and the first area stores the data corresponding to the oldest winning.

In addition, in the first control example, in the main controller 110, based on various information obtained when a lottery of special symbols corresponding to the start winning is performed (win or not, jackpot type in the case of jackpot, variation pattern) Although the winning information command is set and notified to the audio lamp control device 113, other configurations may be used.

For example, when a starting prize is generated, various information already stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b in various information predicted corresponding to the start prize. a setting means for setting a winning information command by adding , various information (winning information) already stored in the winning information storage area 223f when the winning information command is received, and information included in the received winning information command A determination means for determining whether or not the various information (winning information) matches may be provided. This makes it possible to determine whether the various information (winning information) stored in the winning information storage area 223f is properly stored.

In addition, in the first control example, when a new start winning occurs, a winning information command is set and notified to the sound lamp control device 113. However, the winning information command is sent to the sound lamp control device 113 The timing of notification is not limited to the timing described above (the timing at which the winning information command is set). (For example, 5-second intervals), when the game conditions are variable (for example, when the game state changes from the time-saving state to the normal state, when the jackpot game starts or ends, etc.), or when the special symbol starts to fluctuate (or A configuration may be used in which the winning information command stored in the storage means is notified to the audio lamp control device 113 when the game is stopped. With this configuration, it is possible to appropriately execute an effect (so-called prefetch effect) using the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223f.

In this control example, based on each piece of winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223f, setting of an effect mode such as a change in the display color of a pending symbol is executed as a prefetch effect. In this way, by executing various effects (read-ahead effects) based on the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223f, the player can be notified of each reserved ball before the start of the variable display. It can give you a sense of anticipation for a big hit. Also, it is possible to execute a long-term effect using a plurality of variable display periods.

The state setting area 223g displays the current game state set in the pachinko machine 10 and the game state before a predetermined period of time (for example, if the jackpot game is currently in progress, the game state at the time the jackpot was won). This is a storage area to be set (stored).

In the state setting area 223g, when various state commands output from the main controller 110 are received by the command determination processing (see S2114 in FIG. 195), information indicating the gaming state included in the received state command is extracted. Then, the current game state is set. Also, in the command determination process (see S2114 in FIG. 195), when it is determined that the command indicating that the jackpot game is executed is received, the information set (stored) as the current gaming state is It is configured to be set (stored) as the set game state. As a result, it is possible to change the performance mode of the variable performance executed after the end of the big win game according to the game state set at the time of winning the big win. Further, for example, even if the jackpot is the same jackpot type, in the case of having a configuration in which the game state to be executed after the jackpot game ends is varied according to the game state at the time of winning, during the jackpot game A game state to be set after the end of the jackpot game can be predicted on the side of the voice lamp control device 113, and an effect during the jackpot game can be executed to suggest the prediction result.

The effect selection information storage area 223h is an area for temporarily storing the content (effect mode) selected as the variable effect pattern, and is the effect mode executed in the variable display setting process (see S2115 in FIG. 199). Various effects modes set in the setting process (see S2607 in FIG. 200) are stored. Then, when it is determined that the operation of the frame button 22 is valid, or when the effect mode being executed is changed, the data is read to grasp the effect mode of the currently set (executed) variable effect. be In the effect selection information storage area 223h, the effect mode (past effect mode) of the variable effect for the special symbol lottery that has already been executed, the effect mode of the variable effect currently being executed, and the winning information storage area 223f are stored. A performance mode (scheduled performance mode) of a variable performance scheduled to be executed for the winning information is temporarily stored, and the performance mode for a maximum of 5 special symbol lotteries is scheduled as a past performance mode. A maximum of four presentation modes corresponding to winning information can be stored as presentation modes.

By configuring in this way, for example, when selecting a new presentation mode, it is possible to set the presentation mode based on the presentation mode set (executed) in the past. In this case, for example, when the result of the special symbol lottery corresponding to the variable performance of this time is a jackpot winning, by intentionally setting a performance mode that overlaps with the performance mode set in the past. , it is preferable to increase the expectation of winning a big win when the same performance mode is continuously set. As a result, the player's willingness to play is lowered because the same performance mode is normally set continuously, and the new performance is not executed. It is possible to increase the player's willingness to play. Also, in this case, as an informing means for informing the player that the same effect mode has been set continuously, for example, a display mode such as "same reach" is displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81. It should be configured as follows. As a result, the player can be notified in an easy-to-understand manner that the same effect mode has been set continuously.

Further, it may be configured to set a performance mode different from the performance mode set in the past, or may be configured to set a plurality of story-like performance modes in order. By setting the effect mode related to the effect mode set (executed) in the past in this way, it is possible to make the player more interested in the effect to be executed, so that the player can It is possible to suppress early boredom with a game.

The pressed flag 223k indicates that the player has pressed (operated) the frame button 22 (operation means), and is set to ON when the frame button 22 is pressed during the operation effect. It is.

This pressed flag 223k indicates that the frame button is pressed during the operation valid period of the frame button 22 (when the value of the operation valid timer 223n is greater than 0) in the frame button input monitoring/effect processing (see S2107 in FIG. 208). It is set to ON when it is determined that it has been pressed (operated) (see S3404 in FIG. 208). Then, it is referred to in the operation effect management process (see S2111 in FIG. 210) (S3609 in FIG. 210). Then, after the effect mode of the operation effect based on the reference result is set, it is set to OFF (see S3610 in FIG. 210).

In this way, the depressed flag 223k is provided as a storage means for temporarily storing that the operation means (frame button 22) has been operated during the effective period of operation, and the depressed flag 223k indicates that the operation means has already been operated. When the status indicating that the operation has been performed is set (set to ON), a new operation to the operation means is not accepted, so that the operation effect executed based on the operation to the operation means can be reliably executed.

In addition, simply by setting the depressed flag 223k to ON, it is possible to prohibit acceptance of an operation to a new operation means. To easily change the period until performance is executed.

The number-of-presses counter 223m is a counter for counting the number of times the frame button 22 is pressed within the effective period of operation. number of times), the number of operations is measured in the case of an operation effect in which the effect mode is variable.

The operation valid timer 223n is a timer for measuring the operation valid period set during the operation effect, and when the operation valid period is set, the value indicating the length of the operation valid period set this time is set. Then, the set value is decremented as time elapses. When the value of the operation validity timer 223n is greater than 0, it is determined that the frame button 22 is operated effectively.

The effect counter group 223p is for counting the random value referred to when selecting the effect mode of the variable effect executed in this control example, and has a plurality of random value counters. Specifically, it has eleven kinds of counters from the first effect counter 223p1 to the eleventh effect counter 223p11, and when selecting the effect mode of the variable effect, various effect modes are selected using the dedicated effect counter. be done. In this way, by configuring to select the effect mode of the variable effect using different counter values, a plurality of effects can be generated within one main process, that is, at intervals shorter than the period at which the value of the effect counter is updated. Even if the process of selecting the effect mode is executed, it is possible to prevent a plurality of effect modes from being selected by referring to the same counter value.

These various effect counters are counters that are repeatedly updated within the range of 0-199. Although illustration is omitted, each time the main process (see FIG. 194) executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is executed, the update contents of various effect counters are updated so as to be difficult to synchronize. Specifically, it is configured such that the value of each effect counter is updated by a different prime number in one update process. By configuring in this way, in various effects in which the effect mode is selected using the effect counter, it is possible to easily set the effect contents to be executed at random.

In this control example, the values of a plurality of counters whose values are updated independently are used to select various effects modes. A configuration may be employed in which a predetermined calculation process is executed on the value, and the effect mode is selected using the value indicating the calculation result. By configuring in this way, the number of effect counters can be reduced.

In addition, in this control example, the value of the performance counter whose value is updated independently is used to select various modes of performance. Although it is increased, it is not limited to this, and for example, it may be configured to select a plurality of effect modes using the same value of the effect counter. By constructing in this way, it is possible to select an effect mode with a rule for a plurality of effect modes, and it is possible to easily provide a player with an easy-to-understand effect.

The upper limit number setting area 223q is an area for storing the number of times the frame button 22 is operated until the display mode corresponding to the maximum variable value set in the repeated hit effect is displayed. In the determination process, the upper limit number selected using the upper limit number selection table 222b1 is temporarily stored. Then, it is compared with information indicating the number of times the frame button 22 has been operated during the continuous hitting effect. As a result, it is determined whether or not the number of times the frame button 22 has been operated during the continuous hit effect has reached the upper limit number of times.

The number-of-ends setting area 223r indicates the number of times the frame button 22 is operated to shorten (end) the effect period of the repeated-hit effect after the display mode corresponding to the maximum variable value set in the repeated-hit effect is displayed. is stored, and temporarily stores the end count selected using the end count selection table 222b2 in the process of determining the effect mode of the continuous hit effect. Then, it is compared with information indicating the number of times the frame button 22 has been operated during the continuous hitting effect. As a result, it is determined whether or not the number of times the frame button 22 has been operated during the continuous hit effect has reached the end number.

223 s of delay timers are timers which measure the delay time set as delay production.

The continuous notice setting flag 223t includes information indicating execution of the continuous notice effect in the received winning information, and is a flag indicating that the continuous notice effect is executed from the variable effect to be executed next, It is set to ON when the received winning information includes information indicating that the continuous advance notice effect is to be executed.

Then, it is referred to when a variable display process for setting a new variable effect is executed.

The continuous notice counter 223u is a counter for indicating the number of times of the variable effect for continuously executing the continuous notice effect. If so, a value indicating the number of times until the special symbol variation corresponding to the winning information received this time is executed is set. Then, the value is subtracted each time the variable performance ends. As a result, it is possible to easily grasp the situation of the continuous advance notice effect being executed.

The continuous announcement flag 223v is a flag for indicating that the continuous announcement effect is being executed, and is set to ON when the continuous announcement effect is executed. Then, it is set to OFF when the continuous announcement effect ends. Referred to in the winning information related process (see S2210 in FIG. 196), while the continuous notice in-progress flag 223v is set to ON, that is, during the continuous notice effect, the continuous notice setting flag is not newly set to ON. Configure.

The round number counter 223x is a counter for measuring the number of rounds in the jackpot game, and is incremented when a new round is started during the jackpot game. Then, it is reset to 0 when the jackpot game ends.

The other memory area 223z is provided as an area for storing data other than the above data, and is an area for temporarily storing other counter values and the like used by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113. FIG.

The display control device 114 is connected to the sound lamp control device 113 and the third pattern display device 81, and based on the command received from the sound lamp control device 113, the third pattern display device 81 performs variable display (variation production) is controlled. Details of the display control device 114 will be described later with reference to FIG.

The power supply device 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to power failure, etc., and a RAM provided with a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3). and an erase switch circuit 253 . The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies necessary operating voltages to the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As an overview, the power supply unit 251 takes in a voltage of 24 volts supplied from the outside, various switches such as the various switches 208, solenoids such as the solenoid 209, a voltage of 12 volts for driving a motor, etc. A voltage of 5 volts for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, etc. are generated, and these 12 volts, 5 volts and backup voltages are supplied to the controllers 110 to 114 and the like as necessary voltages.

The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 at the time of power failure due to power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the voltage of stable DC 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power shutdown, power shutdown) has occurred when this voltage is less than 22 volts. Then, a power failure signal SG1 is output to the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute NMI interrupt processing. Even after the stable DC voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts, the power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is the driving voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient to execute the NMI interrupt processing. is configured to maintain a normal value. Therefore, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 251).

The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the main controller 110 clears the backup data when the RAM erase signal SG2 is input, and controls the payout initialization command for clearing the backup data in the payout control device 111. Send to device 111 .

Next, referring to FIG. 171, the electrical configuration of the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 171 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the display control device 114. As shown in FIG. The display control device 114 includes an MPU 231, a work RAM 233, a character ROM 234, a resident video RAM 235, a normal video RAM 236, an image controller 237, an input port 238, an output port 239, and bus lines 240 and 241. have.

The output side of the sound lamp control device 113 is connected to the input side of the input port 238 , and the MPU 231 , work RAM 233 , character ROM 234 and image controller 237 are connected to the output side of the input port 238 via the bus line 240 . . A resident video RAM 235 and a normal video RAM 236 are connected to the image controller 237 , and an output port 239 is connected via a bus line 241 . A third symbol display device 81 is connected to the output side of the output port 239 .

Even if the pachinko machine 10 is a different model with a different lottery probability of a special symbol jackpot or a different number of prize balls paid out for one special symbol jackpot, the symbols displayed by the third symbol display device 81 are different. Since there are models with exactly the same specifications, the display control device 114 is made a common component to reduce costs.

The MPU 231, character ROM 234, image controller 237, resident video RAM 235, and normal video RAM 236 will be described first, and then the work RAM 233 will be described below.

First, the MPU 231 controls the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display variation pattern command output from the audio ramp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command of the main control device 110 . The MPU 231 incorporates an instruction pointer 231a, reads and fetches the instruction code stored at the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a, and executes various processes according to the instruction code. The MPU 231 is designed so that a system reset is applied from the power supply 115 immediately after power is turned on (including recovery from a power failure; the same shall apply hereinafter). is automatically set to “0000H” by the hardware of the MPU 231 . Each time an instruction code is fetched, the value of the instruction pointer 231a is incremented by one. Further, when the MPU 231 executes an instruction pointer setting instruction, the value of the pointer indicated by the setting instruction is set in the instruction pointer 231a.

Although the details will be described later, in this embodiment, the control program executed by the MPU 231 and various fixed value data used in the control program are stored in a dedicated program ROM as in a conventional game machine. The image data to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 is stored in the character ROM 234 provided for storing the data.

Although the details will be described later, the character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a capable of increasing the capacity with a small area. As a result, not only image data but also control programs and the like can be sufficiently stored. If the control program and the like are stored in the character ROM 234, there is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing the control program and the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in failure rate due to an increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

On the other hand, the NAND flash memory has a problem that the read speed becomes slow especially when performing random access. For example, when reading data continuously arranged in a plurality of pages, the data of the second and subsequent pages can be read at high speed. It takes a long time before the data is output. Also, when reading discontinuous data, a long time is required each time the data is read. As described above, since the NAND flash memory has a slow read speed, if the MPU 231 is configured to directly read the control program from the character ROM 234 and execute various processes, it takes time to read the instructions that make up the control program. However, even if a high-performance processor is used as the MPU 231, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may deteriorate.

Therefore, in this embodiment, when the system reset of the MPU 231 is released, first, the control program stored in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234 is transferred to the work RAM 233 provided for temporary storage of various data. store. The MPU 231 then executes various processes according to the control program stored in the work RAM 233 . The work RAM 233 is composed of a DRAM (Dynamic RAM), as will be described later, and reads and writes data at high speed. Therefore, the MPU 231 can read instructions constituting the control program without delay. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and the third pattern display device 81 can be used to easily execute diversified and complicated effects.

The character ROM 234 is a memory that stores control programs executed by the MPU 231 and image data displayed on the third pattern display device 81 , and is connected to the MPU 231 via a bus line 240 . The MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, and transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the character ROM 234 to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. An image controller 237 is also connected to the bus line 240, and the image controller 237 transfers image data stored in a character storage area 234a2 of the character ROM 234 to a resident video RAM 235, which is connected to the image controller 237. Transfer to the normal video RAM 236 .

The character ROM 234 is constructed by modularizing a NAND flash memory 234a, a ROM controller 234b, a buffer RAM 234c, and a NOR ROM 234d.

The NAND type flash memory 234a is a non-volatile memory provided as a main storage unit in the character ROM 234, and stores most of the control program executed by the MPU 231 and fixed value data for driving the third symbol display device 81. It has at least a second program storage area 234a1 for storage and a character storage area 234a2 for storing data of an image (such as a character) to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. FIG.

Here, the NAND type flash memory has a feature that a large storage capacity can be obtained in a small area, and the capacity of the character ROM 234 can be easily increased. Thus, in this pachinko machine, by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a capacity of, for example, 2 gigabytes, many images can be stored in the character storage area 234a2 as images to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. can. Therefore, the images displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be diversified and complicated in order to increase the interest of the player.

In addition, the NAND flash memory 234a can store control programs and fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1 while storing a large amount of image data in the character storage area 234a2. In this way, the control program and fixed value data are provided to store the data of the image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 without providing and storing a dedicated program ROM as in the conventional game machine. Since the characters can be stored in the character ROM 234, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in the failure rate due to an increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

The ROM controller 234b is a controller for controlling the operation of the character ROM 234. For example, based on the address transmitted from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the corresponding data is retrieved from the NAND flash memory 234a or the like. is read out and output to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240 .

Here, the NAND type flash memory 234a, due to its nature, generates a relatively large number of error bits (bits in which erroneous data is written) when writing data, and generates defective data blocks into which data cannot be written. or Therefore, the ROM controller 234b applies known error correction to the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a, and avoids bad data blocks when reading and writing data to the NAND flash memory 234a. data address translation.

The ROM controller 234b corrects errors in the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a that contains error bits. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the MPU 231 from performing processing and the image controller 237 from generating various images.

In addition, the ROM controller 234b analyzes the defective data blocks of the NAND flash memory 234a and avoids access to the defective data blocks. Access to the character ROM 234 can be easily performed without considering the address position of the block. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, it is possible to prevent the access control to the character ROM 234 from becoming complicated.

The buffer RAM 234c is a memory used as a buffer for temporarily storing data read from the NAND flash memory 234a. When an address allocated to the character ROM 234 is designated from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the ROM controller 234b reads one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) of data corresponding to the designated address. is set in the buffer RAM 234c. If not set, one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) of data including the data corresponding to the specified address is read from the NAND flash memory 234a (or NOR ROM 234d) and temporarily set in the buffer RAM 234c. do. Then, the ROM controller 234 b outputs the data corresponding to the designated address to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 via the bus line 240 after performing known error correction processing.

The buffer RAM 234c is composed of two banks, and one page of data in the NAND flash memory 234a can be set in each bank. As a result, the ROM controller 234b, for example, outputs the data of the NAND flash memory 234a to the outside by using the other bank while data is set in one bank, or outputs the data specified by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237. One page of data including the data corresponding to the specified address is transferred from the NAND flash memory 234a to one bank and set, and the data corresponding to the address specified by the MPU 231 or image controller 237 is transferred to the other bank. The processing of reading from the bank and outputting to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 can be processed in parallel. Therefore, the responsiveness in reading the character ROM 234 can be improved.

The NOR type ROM 234d is a non-volatile memory provided as a sub-storage unit in the character ROM 234, and is intended to complement the NAND type flash memory 234a. ). Of the control programs stored in the character ROM 234, the NOR-type ROM 234d stores programs that are not stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND-type flash memory 234a. At least a first program storage area 234d1 is provided for storing a portion of the boot program to be executed.

The boot program is a control program for activating the display control device 114 so that various controls on the third pattern display device 81 can be executed, and the MPU 231 first executes this boot program after releasing the system reset. This allows the display control device 114 to execute various controls. The first program storage area 234d1 stores the boot program within the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c (that is, one page of the NAND flash memory 234a), which should be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. A predetermined number of instructions (for example, if the capacity of one page is 2 kilobytes, instructions for 1024 words (1 word=2 bytes)) are stored. The number of instructions of the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 only needs to be within the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, and is appropriately set according to the specifications of the display control device 114. There may be.

When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the value of the instruction pointer 231a to "0000H" by hardware and instructs the bus line 240 to specify the address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a. It is configured. On the other hand, when the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address "0000H" is specified on the bus line 240, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d is transferred to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. , and outputs the corresponding data (instruction code) to the MPU 231 .

When the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, it executes various processes according to the fetched instruction code, adds 1 to the instruction pointer 231a, and transfers the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. to specify. Then, the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 selects the program previously set in the buffer RAM 234c from the NOR ROM 234d while the address specified by the bus line 240 indicates the program stored in the NOR ROM 234d. , the instruction code of the corresponding address is read from the buffer RAM 234 c and output to the MPU 231 .

Here, in this embodiment, instead of storing all the control programs in the NAND flash memory 234a, a predetermined number of instructions from the boot program to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NOR ROM 234d. The reason for storing in is as follows. That is, as described above, the NAND flash memory 234a is unique to the NAND flash memory in that it takes a long time to read the data of the first page after the address is specified until the data is output. There's a problem.

When all the control programs are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 in order to fetch the instruction code that the MPU 231 should execute first after the system reset is released. If so, the character ROM 234 must read one page of data including the data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" from the NAND flash memory 234a and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. Due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a long time to read out and set the data in the buffer RAM 234c. You spend a lot of time waiting to receive your code. Therefore, the time taken to start the MPU 231 becomes longer, and as a result, there arises a problem that the control of the third pattern display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

On the other hand, since the NOR type ROM is a memory from which data can be read at high speed, a predetermined number of instructions from the boot program to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NOR type ROM 234d. Thus, when the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 immediately stores the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d into the buffer RAM 234c. , and the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231 . Therefore, the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after specifying the address "0000H", and the MPU 231 can be activated in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the control of the third pattern display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

The boot program is a control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, that is, a control program other than the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d. , fixed value data (for example, a display data table, a transfer data table, etc., which will be described later) used in the control program are stored in the program storage area of the work RAM 233 by a predetermined amount (for example, the capacity of one page of the NAND flash memory 234a). 233a and the data table storage area 233b. The MPU 231 first sets the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 according to the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 after the system reset is released. While using a bank different from the bank of the buffer RAM 234c that is stored, a predetermined amount is transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a.

Here, since the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 has a capacity corresponding to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, as described above, the address of the internal bus is designated as "0000H". When the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 is set in the buffer RAM 234c in response to this, the boot program is set only in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, when transferring the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a according to the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1, the first program set in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c is transferred to the program storage area 233a. The transfer process can be performed using the other bank while leaving the boot program in storage area 234d1. Therefore, after the transfer process, it is unnecessary to set the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 again in the buffer RAM 234c, so that the time required for the boot process can be shortened.

When a predetermined amount of the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 transfers the command pointer 231a to the program storage area 233a. It is programmed to be set to a first predetermined address. As a result, when the MPU 231 transfers a predetermined amount of the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a after the system reset is released, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first predetermined number in the program storage area 233a. Set to a street address.

Therefore, when a predetermined amount of the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 are stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 reads out the control programs stored in the program storage area 233a, Various processing can be executed. That is, the MPU 231 does not read the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetch the instruction, but rather reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction. and execute various processes. As will be described later, since the work RAM 233 is composed of a DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even if most of the control program is stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, which has a slow read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch instructions at high speed and execute processing for those instructions.

Here, the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 include remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. On the other hand, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 by a predetermined amount from the second program storage area 234a1. The instruction pointer 231a is programmed to be included, and the start address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a is set as the first predetermined address.

As a result, the MPU 231 transfers a predetermined amount of the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a by the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1. Execute the rest of the boot program contained in the control program.

In this remaining boot program, the remaining control programs that have not been transferred to the program storage area 233a and fixed value data (for example, a display data table, a transfer data table, etc., which will be described later) used in the control programs are all stored in the second program. A process of transferring a predetermined amount from the area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b is executed. Also, at the end of the boot program, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address in the program storage area 233a. Specifically, the initialization process (see S6002 in FIG. 211) executed after the boot process (see S6001 in FIG. 211) by the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a as the second predetermined address. Set the start address of the program corresponding to .

By executing the remaining boot program, the MPU 231 transfers all the control programs and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b. When the boot program is executed to the end by the MPU 231, the command pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address, and thereafter the MPU 231 is transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Various processes are executed using the control program.

Therefore, even if most of the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the control program is transferred to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after the system reset is released. Thus, the MPU 231 can read the control program from the work RAM configured by the DRAM with high read speed and perform various controls. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and the third pattern display device 81 can be used to easily execute diversified and complicated effects.

Further, as described above, instead of storing all the boot programs in the NOR type ROM 234d, a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. Even if it is stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start up the MPU 231 in a short time simply by adding the NOR type ROM 234d with a very small capacity. can be done.

The image controller 237 is a digital signal processor (DSP) that draws an image and causes the third pattern display device 81 to display the drawn image at a predetermined timing. The image controller 237 draws an image for one frame based on a drawing list (see FIG. 176) transmitted from the MPU 231 to be described later, and draws one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c to be described later. The image drawn in the buffer is developed, and the image information for one frame previously developed in the other frame buffer is output to the third pattern display device 81 to display the image on the third pattern display device 81.例文帳に追加. The image controller 237 performs the one-frame image drawing process and the one-frame image display process within the one-frame image display time (20 milliseconds in this embodiment) on the third pattern display device 81 . parallel processing in

The image controller 237 transmits a vertical synchronization interrupt signal (hereinafter referred to as “V interrupt signal”) to the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing processing for one frame is completed. Each time the MPU 231 detects this V interrupt signal, the MPU 231 executes V interrupt processing (see FIG. 213(b)) and instructs the image controller 237 to draw the image for the next one frame. In response to this instruction, the image controller 237 executes the drawing process of the image for the next one frame, and also executes the process of causing the third pattern display device 81 to display the image developed by the previous drawing.

In this manner, the MPU 231 executes the V interrupt process in response to the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 and issues a drawing instruction to the image controller 237. Therefore, the image controller 237 performs image drawing processing and display. An image drawing instruction can be received from the MPU 231 at each processing interval (20 milliseconds). Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive an instruction to draw the next image before the image drawing processing or display processing is completed. It is possible to prevent an image from being developed in accordance with a new drawing instruction in a frame buffer storing image information being displayed.

The image controller 237 also executes processing for transferring image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 and normal video RAM 236 based on transfer instructions from the MPU 231 and transfer data information included in the drawing list.

Image drawing is performed using image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 and normal video RAM 236 . That is, the image data required for drawing is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236 based on instructions from the MPU 231 before the drawing is performed.

Here, the NAND type flash memory makes it easy to increase the capacity of the ROM, but its read speed is slower than other ROMs (mask ROM, EEPROM, etc.). On the other hand, in the display control device 114, the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to transfer part of the image data stored in the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. is configured to As will be described later, the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 is controlled so as to be resident without being overwritten.

Thus, after the transfer of the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is completed after the power is turned on, the image is drawn by the image controller 237 while using the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235. can be processed. Therefore, if the image data used for drawing processing is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed when drawing the image. , the time required for reading the image can be omitted, and the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 .

In particular, image data of frequently displayed images and image data of images to be displayed immediately after display is determined by main controller 110 or display controller 114 are permanently resident in resident video RAM 235. Even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a, it is possible to maintain high responsiveness until some image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81. FIG.

Further, when the display control device 114 draws an image using non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235, before the drawing is performed, the display controller 114 stores necessary data for drawing from the character ROM 234 in the normal video RAM 236. The MPU 231 is configured to instruct the image controller 237 to transfer the image data. As will be described later, the image data transferred to the normal-use video RAM 236 may be deleted by overwriting after being used for image drawing. Since it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 composed of , and the time required for reading the data can be saved, the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. can.

Further, by storing the image data in the normal video RAM 236 as well, there is no need to keep all the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235, so there is no need to prepare a large-capacity resident video RAM 235. FIG. Therefore, an increase in cost due to the provision of the resident video RAM 235 can be suppressed.

The image controller 237 has a buffer RAM 237a composed of an SRAM of 132 kilobytes, which is the capacity of one block of the NAND flash memory 234a.

The image data transfer instruction given to the image controller 237 by the MPU 231 based on the transfer instruction or the transfer data information of the drawing list includes the head address (storage source head address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored. Final address (storage source final address), transfer destination information (information indicating whether to transfer to resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236), and top of transfer destination (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) Contains an address. Note that the data size of the image data to be transferred may be included instead of the storage source final address.

The image controller 237 reads one block of data from a predetermined address in the character ROM 234 according to various information of this transfer instruction, temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237a, and stores it in the buffer RAM 237a when the resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236 is not in use. , is transferred to the resident RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 . Then, the processing is repeatedly executed until all the image data stored in the storage source start address to the storage source end address indicated by the transfer instruction are transferred.

As a result, the image data read out from the character ROM 234 over time is temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a, and then the image data is transferred from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236 in a short time. can be done. Therefore, while the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is prevented from being occupied for a long time with the transfer of the image data. be able to. Therefore, since the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are occupied by the transfer of image data, these video RAMs 235 and 236 cannot be used for image drawing processing. , it is possible to prevent the display on the third pattern display device 81 from being too late.

In addition, transfer of image data from the buffer RAM 234c to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is performed by the image controller 237, so that the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 perform image drawing processing and third symbol display. It is possible to easily determine the period during which the display processing on the device 81 is not used, and to simplify the processing.

The resident video RAM 235 is used so that the image data transferred from the character ROM 234 can be retained while the power is turned on without being overwritten. 235e and an error message image area 235f are provided, and at least a power-on variation image area 235b and a third pattern area 235d are provided.

The power-on main image area 235a is the power-on main image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 after power is turned on until all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is stored. This is an area for storing corresponding data. In the power-on variation image area 235b, the game is started by the player while the main image at power-on is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the entry of a ball into the first start hole 64a is detected. This is an area for storing image data corresponding to a power-on varying image for displaying the results of the lottery performed by the main controller 110 in a varying effect.

The MPU 231 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on varying image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a when power supply from the power supply unit 251 is started. A transfer instruction is sent to the controller 237 (see FIG. 212).

Here, the power-on variation image will be described. Immediately after the power is turned on, the display control device 114 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on varying image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on varying image area 235b. Subsequently, the remaining image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 . While the remaining image data is being transferred, the display control device 114 displays the power-on main image (see FIG. 172) using the image data previously stored in the power-on main image area 235a. It is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 .

At this time, when receiving a display variation pattern command transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a variation pattern command from the main controller 110, which is an instruction command to start variation, the display control device 114 displays the main image when the power is turned on. On the display screen of , a variation image at the time of power-on with an "○" symbol at the lower right position of the screen, and a variation image at the time of power-on with an "X" symbol at the same position as the "○" symbol are displayed during the variation period. Medium, alternately displayed repeatedly. Then, based on the variation pattern command and the stop type command from the main controller 110, the lottery performed by the main controller 110 is selected from the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113. The result is determined, and if it is a ``jackpot with a special pattern'', an image showing it is displayed for a certain period after stopping the variable performance, and if it is a ``missing special pattern'', the image showing it is stopped from the variable performance. It will be displayed for a certain period of time later.

The MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to use the image data stored in the power-on main image area 235a until all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235. Instructs to draw the main image when the power is turned on. As a result, while the rest of the image data to be resident is being transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the person involved in the hall can confirm the power-on main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. can. Therefore, the display control device 114 takes time to transfer the remaining image data to be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 while displaying the main image on the third pattern display device 81 when the power is turned on. be able to. Also, since the player or the like can recognize that some processing is being performed while the main image is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, the remaining image to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is displayed. To wait until the transfer of image data to the resident video RAM 235 is completed without worrying whether the operation is stopped until the data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235.例文帳に追加can be done.

Also, in an operation check at a factory or the like at the time of manufacture, since the main image is immediately displayed on the third pattern display device 81 when the power is turned on, the operation of the third pattern display device 81 is started without any problem when the power is turned on. Furthermore, by using the NAND type flash memory 234a with a slow read speed for the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress deterioration in the efficiency of the operation check.

Further, when the player starts the game while the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the entry of the first entrance ball 64 is detected, the power-on fluctuation image area is displayed. The power-on variation image is drawn using the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image resident in 235b, and the images showing "O" and "X" are alternately displayed on the third pattern display device 81. The MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 as follows. As a result, a simple variation effect can be performed using the power-on variation image. Therefore, even while the main image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 when the power is turned on, the player can confirm that the lottery has been surely performed by the simple variation performance.

Further, when the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation effect image is already resident in the power-on fluctuation image area 235b. When the entry of the first entrance ball 64 is detected while the main image is being displayed on the third pattern display device 81, the corresponding variation effect can be immediately displayed on the third pattern display device 81.例文帳に追加can.

Returning to FIG. 171, the description continues. The back image area 235c is an area for storing image data corresponding to the back image displayed on the third pattern display device 81. FIG. The third symbol area 235d is an area for permanently storing the third symbol used in the variable effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81. FIG. That is, in the third pattern area 235d, image data corresponding to the above-mentioned 10 types of main patterns (see FIG. 128) with numerals "0" to "9", which are the third patterns, are resident. As a result, when the third pattern display device 81 performs a variable effect, it is not necessary to read the image data from the character ROM 234 one by one. It is possible to quickly start a variable production. Therefore, after the ball enters the first starting port 64a or the second starting port 64b, the third symbol display device 81 fluctuates even though the first symbol display device 37 has started the variation effect. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a state in which the performance is not started immediately.

The character design area 235e is an area for storing image data corresponding to character designs used in various effects displayed on the third design display device 81. FIG. In this pachinko machine 10, various characters such as "Boy" are displayed according to various effects, and data corresponding to these characters are resident in the character design area 235e to control the display. When the device 114 changes the character design based on the content of the command received from the sound lamp control device 113, instead of newly reading out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, the image data is stored in the character design area 235e of the resident video RAM 235. By reading the image data resident in advance, the image controller 237 can draw a predetermined image. As a result, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, so even if the character ROM 234 uses the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the character design can be changed immediately.

The error message image area 235f is an area for storing image data corresponding to an error message displayed when an error occurs in the pachinko machine 10. FIG. In the pachinko machine 10, for example, when vibration is detected by the sound ramp control device 113 from the output of a vibration sensor (not shown) attached to the back surface of the game board 13, the sound ramp control device 113 detects the occurrence of a vibration error. Notify the display controller 114 with an error command. Also, when the audio lamp control device 113 detects the occurrence of another error, the audio lamp control device 113 notifies the display control device 114 of the error occurrence together with the error type by an error command. The display control device 114 is configured to display an error message corresponding to the received error on the third symbol display device 81 when an error command is received.

Here, the error message is required to be displayed almost simultaneously with the occurrence of the error from the standpoint of preventing fraud by the player and protecting the player against errors. In the pachinko machine 10, image data corresponding to various error messages are pre-resident in the error message image area 235f. By reading the image data pre-resident in the image area 235f, the image controller 237 can immediately draw each error message image. This eliminates the need to sequentially read image data corresponding to error messages from the character ROM 234. Therefore, even if the NAND type flash memory 234a having a slow read speed is used as the character ROM 234, the corresponding error message is read after receiving an error command. It can be displayed immediately.

The normal video RAM 236 is used so that data is overwritten and updated as needed, and is provided with at least an image storage area 236a, a first frame buffer 236b and a second frame buffer 236c.

The image storage area 236a is an area for storing image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235, among the image data necessary for drawing an image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. FIG. The image storage area 236a is divided into a plurality of sub-areas, and the type of image data to be stored in each sub-area is determined in advance.

The MPU 231 extracts image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and that is required for subsequent image drawing from the character ROM 234 in a sub-area provided in the image storage area 236 a of the normal video RAM 236 . , instructs the image controller 237 to transfer the type of the image data to a predetermined sub-area for storing. As a result, the image controller 237 reads the image data instructed by the MPU 231 from the character ROM 234 and transfers the read image data to the designated predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a via the buffer RAM 237a.

The transfer instruction of the image data is performed by including transfer data information in a later-described drawing list in which the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image. As a result, the MPU 231 can issue an image drawing instruction and an image data transfer instruction simply by transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, thereby reducing the processing load.

The first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c are buffers for developing an image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. FIG. The image controller 237 writes the one-frame image drawn according to the instruction from the MPU 231 to either one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, thereby rendering the one-frame image to the frame buffer. While the image is developed and the image is developed in one of the frame buffers, the image information for one frame previously developed is read out from the other frame buffer, and sent to the third pattern display device 81 together with the drive signal. By transmitting the image information with the third pattern display device 81, a process for displaying the image for one frame is executed.

In this way, by providing two frame buffers, the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, the image controller 237 can expand the one-frame image drawn in one of the frame buffers, and simultaneously , the image of one frame developed earlier can be read from the other frame buffer, and the image of the read one frame can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 .

A frame buffer for developing an image for one frame and a frame buffer for reading image information for one frame for displaying an image on the third pattern display device 81 are used for drawing processing of an image for one frame. Every 20 milliseconds of completion, the MPU 231 alternately designates either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c.

That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for developing the image for one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of is read. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. be.

After the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for developing the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. be done. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. be. After that, the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame are set to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By alternately specifying the parameters, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing for the image for one frame.

The work RAM 233 is a memory for storing control programs and fixed value data stored in the character ROM 234, and for temporarily storing work data and flags used when various control programs are executed by the MPU 231. Configured. The work RAM 233 includes a program storage area 233a, a data table storage area 233b, a simple image display flag 233c, a display data table buffer 233d, a transfer data table buffer 233e, a pointer 233f, a drawing list area 233g, a clock counter 233h, and a stored image data discrimination. It has at least a flag 233i and a drawing target buffer flag 233j.

The program storage area 233a is an area for storing control programs executed by the MPU 231 . When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 reads the control program from the character ROM 234, transfers it to the work RAM 233, and stores it in the program storage area 233a. After storing all the control programs in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 thereafter executes various controls using the control programs stored in the program storage area 233a. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of a DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third symbol display device 81 can be used to easily execute diversified and complicated effects.

The data table storage area 233b includes a display data table describing display contents to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 with the passage of time for one effect to be displayed based on a command from the main controller 110, and a display data table. This is an area for storing transfer data information of image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among the image data used in one effect displayed by the table and a transfer data table defining transfer timing.

These data tables are normally stored as a type of fixed value data in the second program storage area 434 provided in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234, and according to the boot program executed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. , these data tables are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the work RAM 233 and stored in the data table storage area 233b. After all the data tables are stored in the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 controls the display of the third symbol display device 81 using the data tables stored in the data table storage area 233b. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of a DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when various data tables are stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and the third symbol display device 81 can be used to easily implement diversified and complicated effects.

Here, details of various data tables will be described. First, the display data table is prepared one by one for each effect mode of each effect displayed on the third pattern display device 81 based on a command from the main control device 110. For example, a variable effect, a round effect, etc. , an ending effect, and a display data table corresponding to the demo effect are prepared.

The variation effect is an effect that is started in the third symbol display device 81 when a display variation pattern command from the sound lamp control device 113 is received. In addition, when the display variation pattern command is received, the display stop type command indicating the stop type of the variation effect is also received. For example, when the variable performance is started, if the stop type of the variable performance is off, the stop symbol indicating the failure is finally stopped and displayed, and the stop type of the variable performance is the jackpot A or the jackpot B. If it is either, the stop symbol indicating each jackpot is finally stopped and displayed. The player can recognize the jackpot type by visually recognizing the stop symbols in this variable effect, and can easily determine the game value to be given according to the jackpot type.

In addition, since the first starting port 64a is a prize winning port in which five balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball enters, a jackpot of normal symbols is generated and the electric accessory is released, and the balls enter the second starting port. If it becomes easier to enter 64b, the number of prize balls increases. As a result, the pachinko machine 10 is in a state in which it is difficult to reduce the number of balls in hand, or in which the number of balls in hand does not decrease even if the game is played, so that the player is in a state in which the number of balls in hand is difficult to decrease or the number of balls in hand does not decrease. You can get a sense of the period that you can get a special symbol jackpot without it. Therefore, since the player's desire to participate in the game can be enhanced, the player can continue to have the desire to participate in the game.

In addition, as described above, the demonstration effect is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 when the next variable effect associated with the start winning does not start even after a predetermined time has passed since one variable effect stopped. The third pattern composed of the main patterns with no numerals '0' to '9' is stopped and displayed, and only the rear image changes. If the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player and the persons involved in the hall can recognize that the pachinko machine 10 is not playing a game.

The data table storage area 233b stores one display data table each corresponding to the round effect, the ending effect, and the demonstration effect. Further, if there are 32 variable performance patterns to be set, the variable display data table, which is a display data table for the variable performance, is prepared with one table for one variable performance pattern, and a total of 32 tables.

Details of the display data table will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 174 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the variable display data table among the display data tables. The display data table should be displayed at that time in association with an address that represents the time (in this embodiment, 20 milliseconds) during which an image for one frame is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 as one unit. It defines in detail the content (drawing content) of an image for one frame.

The drawing contents specify the type of sprite for each sprite that is a display object that constitutes an image for one frame, and display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, and translucency according to the type of sprite. Rendering information for causing the third pattern display device 81 to render sprites, such as values, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information, is defined.

The sprite type is information for specifying the sprite to be displayed. The display position coordinates are information for specifying the coordinates on the third pattern display device 81 where the sprite should be displayed. The enlargement ratio is information for designating an enlargement ratio with respect to a standard display size preset for the sprite, and the size of the sprite to be displayed is specified according to the enlargement ratio. If the magnification is greater than 100%, the sprite will be displayed larger than the standard size, and if the magnification is less than 100%, the sprite will be displayed smaller than the standard size. Is displayed.

The rotation angle is information for specifying the rotation angle when rotating and displaying the sprite. The translucency value is for specifying the transparency of the entire sprite, and the higher the translucency value, the more the image displayed behind the sprite can be seen through. The α-blending information is information for specifying known α-blending coefficients used when performing superimposition processing with other sprites. Color information is information for designating the color tone of the sprite to be displayed. The filter designation information is information for designating an image filter to be applied to the sprite when rendering the designated sprite.

In the variable display data table, the drawing contents for one frame defined corresponding to each address are one rear image, nine third patterns (design 1, design 2, . Rendering information for each sprite, such as an effect that expresses the insertion of a character, a character used for various effects such as boy images and characters, is defined for each address. One or a plurality of information regarding effects and characters are defined according to the content to be displayed in the frame.

Here, the display position of the rear image is fixed to the entire screen of the third pattern display device 81, and the magnification ratio, rotation angle, translucency value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information are changed over time. Since it is fixed, only the back surface type, which is information for specifying the back image type, is defined in the variable display data table.

The MPU 231 selects one of the backgrounds corresponding to the background mode (sea, beach, preparation period background, time production background) according to the background type. A rear image corresponding to the specified stage is specified as a drawing target, and the range of the rear image to be displayed for that frame is specified according to the passage of time.

In the present embodiment, a description will be given of a case in which only the back surface type is defined as the drawing content of the back surface image in the display data table. may be defined as position information indicating whether the should be displayed. This position information may be, for example, information indicating the elapsed time since the rear image in the range corresponding to the initial position was displayed. In this case, the MPU 231 identifies the range of the back image to be displayed for that frame based on the elapsed time since the back image in the range corresponding to the initial position indicated by the position information was displayed.

Further, the position information may be information indicating the elapsed time since the drawing of the image based on this display data table (or the display of the third pattern display device 81) was started. In this case, the MPU 231 displays the range of the rear image to be displayed for that frame at the stage when the drawing of the image (or the display of the third pattern display device 81) is started based on the display database. It is specified based on the position of the back image and the elapsed time since the drawing of the image indicated by the position information (or the display of the third pattern display device 81) was started.

Furthermore, the position information is information indicating the elapsed time since the back image in the range corresponding to the initial position was displayed according to the back surface type, and the drawing of the image based on the display data table (or the third pattern display device 81 display) may indicate any of the information indicating the elapsed time since the start of the display, or along with the back surface type and position information, the type information of the position information (for example, the range corresponding to the initial position It is information indicating the elapsed time since the back image was displayed, or information indicating the elapsed time since the drawing of the image based on the display database (or the display of the third pattern display device 81) was started. information indicating whether or not the background image is drawn) may be defined as the drawing content of the back image. Alternatively, the position information may be information indicating an address in which the range of the rear image to be displayed is stored, instead of information indicating the elapsed time.

The third symbols (symbol 1, symbol 2, . . . ) describe symbol type offset information as symbol type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed. This offset information is information representing the difference between the numbers attached to the respective third symbols. Rather than directly specifying the type of the third symbol, the offset information is specified because the display of the third symbol in the variable effect is the stop symbol of the variable effect performed one before and the variable effect performed this time. This is because it changes according to the stop pattern, and in the pattern offset information from the start of the variation until the predetermined time elapses, the offset information from the stop pattern of the previous variation performance is described. As a result, the variable performance is started from the stop symbol in the previous variable performance.

On the other hand, after a predetermined time has passed since the start of the fluctuation, the offset from the stop pattern set according to the stop type command (stop type command for display) received from the main control device 110 via the sound lamp control device 113 Include information. As a result, the variable effect can be stopped with a stop symbol corresponding to the stop type specified by the main controller 110. - 特許庁

In addition, since each third symbol is assigned a unique number, the variable symbol in the previous variable effect or the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type specified by the main controller 110 can be selected as the third symbol. , and the offset information is represented by the difference between the numbers attached to each third pattern, the third pattern to be displayed can be easily specified from the offset information.

In addition, in the pattern offset information, the third pattern fluctuates at high speed for a predetermined time in which the offset information of the stop pattern of the variable performance performed immediately before is switched to the offset information of the stop pattern of the variable performance performed this time. It is set to be the displayed time. While the third pattern is being variably displayed at high speed, the third pattern is invisible to the player. By switching from the offset information to the offset information of the stop pattern of the variable performance being performed this time, even if the continuity of the numbers of the third pattern is interrupted, the player does not recognize the interruption of the continuity of the numbers. be able to.

"Start" information indicating the start of the data table is described at "0000H", which is the top address of the display data table, and the last address of the display data table ("02F0H" in the example of FIG. 174) is the data table. "End" information indicating the end of is described. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" in which the "Start" information is described and the address in which the "End" information is described, the drawing contents corresponding to the rendering mode to be defined in the display data table are displayed. is described.

The MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110, and displays the selected display data table. The data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and the pointer 233f is initialized. Each time drawing processing for one frame is completed, the pointer 233f is incremented by 1, and in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, based on the drawing content specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f, the next A drawing list (see FIG. 176), which will be described later, is created by specifying the image contents to be drawn. By transmitting this drawing list to the image controller 237, a drawing instruction for the image is given. As a result, as the pointer 233f is updated, the drawing contents are identified in the order defined in the display data table, so the image as defined in the display data table is displayed on the third pattern display device 81.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 responds to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. Instead of changing the program to be executed by the MPU 231, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. .

Here, as in the conventional pachinko machine, when the program executed by the MPU 231 is started each time the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed, the effect images become more diverse. Therefore, the processing capacity of the display control device 114 is limited, and there is a risk that the diversification of controllable effect images will be limited. there were. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, it is possible to change the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 only by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. Regardless of the processing capability of the control device 114, various modes of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display 81. - 特許庁

In this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each effect mode, a display data table buffer is set according to the effect mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is created frame by frame according to the set data table. The reason why it can be created is that the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined in advance in the pachinko machine 10 based on the result of the lottery performed based on the starting prize. On the other hand, in game machines other than pachinko machines, the display contents change on the spot based on the user's operation, so the display contents cannot be predicted. It is not possible to have a display data table corresponding to the mode of presentation. In this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each presentation mode, a display data table buffer is set according to the presentation mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is created for each frame according to the set data table. This configuration can be realized only when the pachinko machine 10 is configured to determine the presentation mode to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 in advance based on the result of the lottery performed based on the starting prize.

Next, with reference to FIG. 175, details of the transfer data table will be described. FIG. 175 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a transfer data table. The transfer data table is prepared corresponding to the display data table prepared for each effect. Transfer data information for transferring image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 and its transfer timing are defined.

If all the image data of the sprites used in the effects specified in the display data table are stored in the resident video RAM 235, no transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is prepared. As a result, an increase in capacity of the data table storage area 233b can be suppressed.

The transfer data table contains transfer data information of sprite image data (hereinafter referred to as "transfer target image data") to be transferred at the time indicated by the address specified in the display data table in correspondence with the address. (corresponding to addresses "0001H" and "0097H" in FIG. 175). Here, the transfer start timing of the transfer target image data is set so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. In the transfer data table, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is defined in association with the address corresponding to the transfer start timing.

On the other hand, if there is no transfer target image data to start transferring at the time indicated by the address specified in the display data table, there is no transfer target image data to start transferring corresponding to that address. Null data is defined (corresponding to the address "0002H" in FIG. 175).

The transfer data information includes the start address (storage source start address) and end address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored, and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236). is included.

It should be noted that, similarly to the display data table, "Start" information indicating the start of the data table is described in "0000H", which is the top address of the transfer data table, and the end address of the transfer data table (in the example of FIG. 175, "02F0H") describes "End" information indicating the end of the data table. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" in which the "Start" information is described and the address in which the "End" information is described, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data to be defined in the transfer data table is described.

When the MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110, the display data table exists, the transfer data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and stored in a transfer data table buffer 233e of the work RAM 233, which will be described later. Then, each time the pointer 233f is updated, the drawing contents specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f are identified from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and a drawing list (see FIG. 176) to be described later is created. At the same time, from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite whose transfer is to be started at that time is acquired, and the transfer data information is added to the created drawing list. to add.

For example, in the example of FIG. 175, when the pointer 233f is "0001H" or "0097H", the MPU 231 creates the transfer data information specified for the address in the transfer data table based on the display data table. The drawing list is added, and the drawing list after the addition is transmitted to the image controller 237 . On the other hand, when the pointer 233f is "0002H", Null data is defined at the address "0002H" of the transfer data table. The drawing list is sent to the image controller 237 without adding transfer data information to the drawing list.

When transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the processing to be performed.

Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is specified for a predetermined address, by transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table, When drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table, image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 required for drawing the sprite can be stored in the image storage area 236a without fail. Using the image data stored in the image storage area 236a, a predetermined sprite can be drawn based on the display data table.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the image required for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance and transferred to the normal video RAM 236 without delay, so that the image can be displayed. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. - 特許庁Also, only the image data temporarily resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 by the description of the transfer data table.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 responds to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110, and displays the display data. As the table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. The character ROM 234 can be reliably transferred to the normal video RAM 236 at the desired timing.

The transfer data table defines transfer data information so that image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to a sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. By controlling the transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 on a sprite-by-sprite basis, the transfer of image data can be controlled in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in the load applied to the transfer.

The transfer data table has a data structure similar to that of the display data table, and is associated with an address defined in the display data table. Since the data information is defined, the image data is reliably stored in the normal video RAM 236 before the image data of the predetermined sprite is used based on the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d. Thus, since the timing of the start of transfer can be instructed, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND-type flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the third pattern display device 81 can easily display various effects images. be able to.

The simple image display flag 233c is a flag indicating whether or not to display the power-on image (power-on main image and power-on fluctuation image) shown in FIG. This simple image display flag 233c is set after the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and power-on varying image is transferred to the power-on main image area 235a or power-on varying image area 235b of the resident video RAM. , is set to ON in the main process (see FIG. 211) executed by the MPU 231 (see S6005 in FIG. 211). Then, when all the resident object image data are stored in the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer processing of the image transfer processing, in order to display an image other than the power-on image on the third symbol display device 81, It is set to OFF (see S7505 in FIG. 223(b)).

The simple image display flag 233c is referenced in the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 each time the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 is detected (see S6301 in FIG. 213(b)). If the image display flag 233c is ON, the simple command determination process (see S6308 in FIG. 213(b)) and the simple display setting process (see S6308 in FIG. 213(b) S6309) is executed. On the other hand, when the simple image display flag 233c is off, command determination is performed so that various images are displayed according to commands transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on commands from the main control device 110 or the like. Processing (see FIGS. 214 to 219) and display setting processing (see FIGS. 220 to 222) are executed.

Further, the simple image display flag 233c is referenced in the transfer setting process executed by the MPU 231 during the V interrupt process (see S7401 in FIG. 223(a)), and when the simple image display flag 233c is on. Since there is resident object image data not stored in the resident video RAM 235, resident image transfer setting processing (see FIG. 223(b)) is executed to transfer the resident object image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. However, if the simple image display flag 233c is off, normal image transfer setting processing (see FIG. 224) is executed to transfer image data necessary for drawing processing from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. FIG.

The display data table buffer 233d stores a display data table corresponding to an effect mode to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 in response to a command or the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. It is a buffer for The MPU 231 determines the effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the command or the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113, and stores the display data table corresponding to the effect mode from the data table storage area 233b. It selects and stores the selected display data table in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the MPU 231 increments the pointer 233f by 1, and based on the rendering content defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the image controller 237 A later-described drawing list (see FIG. 176) is generated in which the content of the image drawing instruction for is described. As a result, the third symbol display device 81 displays an effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d.

While incrementing the pointer 233f by 1, the MPU 231 adds an image to the image controller 237 for each frame based on the drawing contents defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. A drawing list (see FIG. 176), which will be described later, is generated in which the content of the drawing instruction is described. As a result, the effect corresponding to the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 .

The transfer data table buffer 233e transfers a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d according to a command or the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. is a buffer for storing When the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 selects the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table from the data table storage area 233b, and transfers the selected transfer data table. Store in the data table buffer 233e. If all the sprite image data used in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is stored in the resident video RAM 235, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. Therefore, the MPU 231 clears the contents of the transfer data table buffer 233e by writing Null data, which means that there is no transfer target image data.

While incrementing the pointer 233f by one, the MPU 231 defines the transfer data information of the transfer target image data specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e. (that is, if Null data is not described), the transfer data information is added to a later-described rendering list (see FIG. 176) describing the image rendering instruction contents for the image controller 237 generated for each frame. to add.

As a result, when the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the transfer process. Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Transfer data information of transfer target image data is defined for a predetermined address. Therefore, by transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in this transfer data table, when drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table, the image data necessary for drawing the sprite can be obtained. Image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the image required for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance and transferred to the normal video RAM 236 without delay, so that the image can be displayed. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. - 特許庁Also, only the image data temporarily resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 by the description of the transfer data table.

The pointer 233f is an address at which transfer data information of corresponding drawing contents or transfer target image data should be obtained from the display data table and the transfer data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e, respectively. is for specifying The MPU 231 once initializes the pointer 233f to 0 when the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, display setting processing for V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 based on a V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when drawing processing for one frame of image is completed (FIG. 213(b)). ), the pointer update process (see S7205 in FIG. 222) is executed, and the value of the pointer 233f is incremented by one.

Every time the pointer 233f is updated in this manner, the MPU 231 identifies the drawing content defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and creates a drawing list, which will be described later. (see FIG. 176), acquires the transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite whose transfer is to be started at that time from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and obtains the transfer data Add information to the created drawing list.

As a result, an effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. FIG. Therefore, the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed only by changing the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Therefore, regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 114, various effects can be displayed.

In addition, when the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e is stored, the sprite is displayed based on the transfer data table before the corresponding display data table starts drawing a predetermined sprite. Image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 used for drawing can be stored in the image storage area 236a without fail. As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236, so that the image can be displayed. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. - 特許庁Also, only the image data temporarily resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 by the description of the transfer data table.

The drawing list area 233g is used by the image controller to draw an image for one frame generated based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e. This is an area for storing a draw list instructing 237.

Details of the drawing list will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 176 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the drawing list. The drawing list is an instruction table for instructing the image controller 237 to draw an image for one frame, and as shown in FIG. Symbol 2, ...), effect (effect 1, effect 2, ...), character (character 1, character 2, ..., number of reserved balls pattern 1, number of reserved balls pattern 2, ..., error (symbol) describes detailed drawing information (detailed information) of the sprite for each sprite. The drawing list also describes transfer data information for causing the image controller 237 to transfer predetermined image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 .

The detailed drawing information (detailed information) of each sprite includes information indicating the type of RAM (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) in which the image data of the corresponding sprite (display object) is stored, and its type. The image controller 237 acquires the image data of the sprite from the memory area specified by the RAM type and address. The detailed drawing information (detailed information) includes display position coordinates, magnification, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information. A standard image generated from the image data of the sprite read from the video RAM is scaled according to the enlargement ratio, rotated according to the rotation angle, and translucent according to the translucency value. alpha blending information, compositing with other sprites, color tone correction according to color information, and filtering according to filter specification information. After that, an image obtained by performing various processes at the display position indicated by the display position coordinates is drawn. Then, the drawn image is developed by the image controller 237 in either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233j.

In the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 stores the drawing content defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f and the content of other images to be drawn (for example, the pending number of balls to be displayed). Image, warning image that notifies the occurrence of an error, etc.), generates detailed drawing information (detailed information) for all sprites used to draw the image for one frame, and provides the detailed information for each sprite. Create a draw list by sorting.

Here, among the detailed information of each sprite, the RAM type and address for storing the data of the sprite (display object) are the sprite type defined in the display data table or the sprite type specified from the contents of other images. Generated accordingly. That is, since the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed for each sprite, the MPU 231 can store the image data according to the sprite type. , the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and such information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

In addition, the MPU 231 sets other information (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, alpha blending information, color information, and filter designation information) among the detailed information of each sprite as defined in the display data table. copy the information as is.

Further, in generating the drawing list, the MPU 231 rearranges the sprites to be arranged in the order of the sprites to be arranged in the front side from the sprites to be arranged in the rearmost side in the image for one frame, and obtains detailed drawing information for each sprite. Describe (detailed information). That is, in the drawing list, the detailed information corresponding to the back image is described first, followed by the third pattern (pattern 1, pattern 2, . . . ), effect (effect 1, effect 2, . . . ). , character (character 1, character 2, . . . , reserved ball pattern 1, reserved ball pattern 2, . . . , error pattern), detailed information corresponding to each sprite is described.

The image controller 237 executes the drawing process of each sprite according to the order described in the drawing list, and overwrites the drawn sprite in the frame buffer to develop it. Therefore, in the one-frame image generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged on the rearmost side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged on the frontmost side.

In the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the MPU 231, when the transfer data information is described at the address indicated by the pointer 233f, transfers the transfer data information (character in which the transfer target image data is stored). The storage source start address and storage source end address in the ROM 234, and the storage destination start address of the sub-area provided in the image storage area 236a where the image data to be transferred is to be stored are added to the end of the drawing list. If the transfer data information is included in the drawing list, the image controller 237 draws an image from a predetermined area of the character ROM 234 (the area indicated by the storage source start address and the storage source end address) based on the transfer data information. The data is read out and transferred to a predetermined sub-area (storage destination address) provided in the image storage area 236 a of the normal video RAM 236 .

The clock counter 233h is a counter that counts the effect time of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. When one display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 sets time data indicating the effect time of the effect to be displayed based on the display data table. This time data is a value obtained by dividing the performance time by the image display time for one frame (20 milliseconds in this embodiment) on the third pattern display device 81 .

Then, based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when drawing processing and display processing for one frame of image are completed, the MPU 231 executes V interrupt processing (see FIG. 213(b)). )) is executed, the clock counter 233h is decremented by one (see S7207 in FIG. 220). As a result, when the value of the clock counter 233h becomes 0 or less, the MPU 231 judges that the presentation displayed by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d has ended, and performs the presentation at the end of the presentation. perform various operations to

The stored image data determination flag 233i is set to indicate whether image data corresponding to all sprites whose corresponding image data are not resident in the resident video RAM 235 are stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. It is a flag indicating a storage state indicating whether or not there is.

This stored image data determination flag 233i is generated by initial setting processing (see S6002 in FIG. 211) executed by the MPU 231 in the main processing when power is turned on. The storage image data determination flag 233i generated here is set to "OFF" indicating that the storage status for all sprites is not stored in the image storage area 236a.

The stored image data determination flag 233i is updated when an instruction to transfer image data to be transferred corresponding to one sprite is set during normal image transfer setting processing (see FIG. 224) executed by the MPU 231. will be In this update, the storage state corresponding to one sprite for which the transfer instruction is set is set to "on" indicating that the corresponding image data is stored in the image storage area 236a. Also, image data of other sprites to be stored in the same sub-area of the image storage area 236a as that one sprite will always be in a non-stored state when the image data of one sprite is stored. Therefore, the stored state corresponding to the other sprites is set to "off".

Also, when transferring the image data of a sprite whose image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, the MPU 231 refers to the stored image data determination flag 233i and determines the sprite to be transferred. It is determined whether image data has already been stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 235 (see S7613 in FIG. 224). If the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "OFF" and the corresponding image data is not stored in the image storage area 236a, an instruction to transfer the image data is set (see S7614 in FIG. 224). , causes the image controller 237 to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a. On the other hand, if the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "on", the corresponding image data is already stored in the image storage area 236a, so the transfer processing of that image data is stopped. As a result, unnecessary transfer from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 can be suppressed, and the processing load on each unit of the display control device 114 and the traffic on the bus line 240 can be reduced. can.

The drawing target buffer flag 233i is a frame buffer (hereinafter referred to as a "drawing target buffer") that develops an image drawn by the image controller 237 from among the two frame buffers (the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c). ), and when the drawing buffer flag 233j is 0, it designates the first frame buffer 236b as the drawing buffer, and when it is 1, it designates the second frame buffer 236c. Then, the information of the specified drawing target buffer is sent to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list (see S7702 in FIG. 225).

As a result, the image controller 237 executes a drawing process of developing an image drawn based on the drawing list on the specified drawing target buffer. In parallel with the drawing process, the image controller 237 reads the drawn image information previously developed from the frame buffer different from the drawing target buffer, and transmits the image to the third pattern display device 81 together with the drive signal. By transferring the information, display processing for displaying an image on the third pattern display device 81 is executed.

The drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated as the drawing target buffer information is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list. This update is done by inverting the value of the drawing target buffer flag 233j, that is, by setting the value to "1" if it was "0" and to "0" if it was "1". done by As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time the drawing list is transmitted. Also, the transmission of the drawing list is executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing and display processing of the image for one frame are completed. This is performed each time the drawing process of the process (see FIG. 213(b)) is executed (see S7702 in FIG. 225).

That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for developing the image of one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process of the image of one frame is completed. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of is read. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. be.

After the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for developing the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. be done. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. be. After that, the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame are set to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By alternating designations, it is possible to continuously perform display processing of an image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing drawing processing for an image for one frame.

<Regarding control processing of main controller 110>
Next, each control process executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described with reference to flowcharts of FIGS. 177 to 192. FIG. The processing of the MPU 201 can be broadly classified into a start-up process that is started when the power is turned on, a main process that is executed after the start-up process, and a timer that is started periodically (at intervals of 2 milliseconds in this embodiment). There are interrupt processing and NMI interrupt processing that is activated by input of the power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. and main processing.

177 is a flow chart showing timer interrupt processing executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110. FIG. Timer interrupt processing is periodic processing that is executed, for example, every 2 milliseconds. In the timer interrupt process, first, various prize-winning switches are read (S101). That is, it reads the states of various switches connected to the main controller 110, determines the states of the switches, and saves detection information (winning detection information).

Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S102). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (599 in this embodiment). Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM203. Similarly, 1 is added to the second initial random number counter CINI2, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (239 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0, and the updated value of the second initial random number counter CINI2 is cleared. is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203 .

Further, the first winning random number counter C1, the first winning type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second winning random number counter C4 are updated (S103). Specifically, the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second hit random number counter C4 are each incremented by 1, and their counter values are the maximum values (in this embodiment 599, 99, 599, 239) are cleared to 0 respectively. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203. FIG.

Next, a special symbol variation process for setting the variation pattern of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 is executed (S104), and then, A starting winning process associated with entering a ball into the first ball entrance 64a (starting winning) is executed (S105). The details of the special symbol variation processing and the start winning processing will be described later with reference to FIGS. 178 to 182.

After the start winning process is executed, the normal symbol variation process, which is the process for displaying on the second symbol display device 83, is executed (S106), and the through gate passage process accompanying the passage of the ball through the through gate 67 is executed. (S107). The details of the normal symbol variation processing and the through gate passage processing will be described later with reference to FIGS. 183 and 184. FIG. After executing the through gate passing process, the firing control process is executed (S108), other processes to be periodically executed are executed (S109), and the timer interrupt process is terminated. Note that the shooting control process is performed on the condition that the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 and that the stop switch 51b for stopping shooting is not operated. This is a process of determining on/off of the . Main controller 110 gives a ball launch instruction to launch controller 112 when ball launch is on.

Next, with reference to FIG. 178, the special symbol variation process (S104) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 178 is a flow chart showing this special symbol variation process (S104). This special symbol variation process (S104) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 177), and the variable display of the special symbol (first symbol) performed in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device This is a process for controlling the variable display of the third pattern performed in 81.

In this special symbol variation process, first, it is determined whether or not the special symbol is in the midst of a big hit at the moment (S201). During the special symbol jackpot, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying the special symbol jackpot (including during the special symbol jackpot game), and during the special symbol jackpot. During the predetermined time after the end of the jackpot game. As a result of the determination, if the jackpot of the special symbol is in progress (S201: Yes), this process is finished as it is.

If the special symbol jackpot is not being won (S201: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S202), and the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing. If not (S202: No), the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e (number of times N2 of suspension of variable display in special symbols) is obtained (S203). Next, it is determined whether the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is greater than 0 (S204), and if the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is not 0 ( S204: Yes), 1 is subtracted from the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e (S205), and a reserved ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e changed by calculation is set. (S206). The reserved ball number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed by the MPU 201 during the external output process (S901) of the main process (see FIG. 187), which will be described later. , is sent to the audio ramp controller 113 . When receiving the reserved ball number command, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e from the reserved ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b of the RAM 223. store in

After setting the reserved ball number command by the process of S206, the data stored in the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b is shifted (S207). In the process of S207, the data stored in the reservation first area to the reservation fourth area of the special symbol 2 reservation ball storage area 203b are sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the first holding area → execution area, the second holding area → the first holding area, the third holding area → the second holding area, the fourth holding area → the third holding area, etc. Shift data. After the process of S207 is executed, the process of S213 is executed.

On the other hand, in the process of S204, when it is determined that the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is 0 (S204: No), the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is acquired. (S208). It is determined whether the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d acquired in the process of S208 is 0 (S209). When it is determined that the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is 0 (S209: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the processing of S209, when it is determined that the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is not 0 (S209: Yes), the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is set to 1. Subtract (S210), and set a reserved ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d changed by the calculation (S211). The reserved ball number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed by the MPU 201 during the external output process (S901) of the main process (see FIG. 187), which will be described later. , is sent to the audio ramp controller 113 . When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command, it extracts the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d from the reserved ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223a of the RAM 223. store in

After setting the reserved ball number command by the processing of S211, the data stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a is shifted (S212). In the process of S212, the data stored in the reservation first area to the reservation fourth area of the special symbol 1 reservation ball storage area 203a are sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the first holding area → execution area, the second holding area → the first holding area, the third holding area → the second holding area, the fourth holding area → the third holding area, etc. Shift data. After shifting the data, a special symbol variation start process is executed for starting the variation display in the first symbol display device 37 (S213). The special symbol variation start process will be described later with reference to FIG.

In the process of S202, if the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S202: Yes), it is determined whether or not the variation time of the variation display being executed in the first symbol display device 37 has elapsed. (S214). The variation time of the variation display executed in the first pattern display device 37 is determined according to the variation pattern selected by the variation type counter CS1 (determined according to the variation pattern command), and this variation time has not elapsed (S214: No), this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S214, if the variation time of the variable display being executed has passed (S214: Yes), the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is set (S215). The setting of the stop symbol is performed in advance by special symbol variation start processing (S213), which will be described later with reference to FIG. When this special symbol variation start process (S213) is executed, the values of various counters stored in the execution area provided in common to the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a and the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b. Based on this, a lottery for special symbols will be held. More specifically, whether or not the special symbol jackpot is determined according to the value of the first winning random number counter C1, and in the case of the special symbol jackpot, depending on the value of the first winning type counter C2. Then, the jackpot type is determined.

In the present embodiment, when the jackpot A is achieved, the first symbol display device 37 turns on the blue LED, and when the jackpot B is achieved, the red LED is lit. In addition, when it is out, the red LED and the green LED are turned on. The display of each LED is turned off when the next variable display is started, but it may be turned on only for several seconds after the variable display is stopped.

After the process of S215 is completed, when the variation display being executed in the first symbol display device 37 is started, the lottery result of the special symbol performed by the special symbol variation start process (S213) (this lottery result ) is a special symbol jackpot (S216). If the lottery result of this time is a special symbol jackpot (S216: Yes), based on the jackpot type, set the opening scenario of the specific winning opening (S217), then set the value of the probability variable counter 203t and the time saving counter 203u to 0 (S218), and set the start of the jackpot (S219). Then, a stop command is set (S220), and this processing ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S216, when it is determined that the current lottery result is not a big win (S216: No), the game state update process (S221) is executed. The game state update process (S221) will be described later with reference to FIG. Then, a stop command is set (S220), and this processing ends.

Next, referring to FIG. 179, the game state update process (S221) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 179 is a flow chart showing the game state update process (S221). This game state update process (S221) is a process executed in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 178) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 177), and subtracts the value of the probability variation counter 203t and the time saving counter 203u. It is a process for executing a process to perform a process to update the game state based on the subtracted value.

In the game state update process (S221), first, it is determined whether or not the value of the variable probability counter 203t is greater than 1 (S351). When it is determined that the value of the variable probability counter 203t is smaller than 1 (that is, 0) (S351: No), the process proceeds to S355. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the variable probability counter 203t is greater than 1 (S351: Yes), the value of the variable probability counter 203t is subtracted by 1 (S352). Next, in the processing of S352, it is determined whether or not the subtracted value of the variable probability counter 203t is 0 (S353). If it is determined that the value of the probability variation counter 203t is 0 (S353: Yes), it is time to end the probability variation, so a state command indicating the normal state is set (S354), and this process is terminated.

In this control example, as described above with reference to FIG. A value (200) is configured to be set. Therefore, when it is determined that the value of the variable probability counter 203t is 0 in the process of S352, the value of the time saving counter 203u is also 0, so the state command indicating the normal state is set.

In addition, in FIG. 179, when the value of the probability variation counter 203t is determined to be 0, the state command indicating the normal state is configured to be set. After updating the value and the value of the time saving counter 203u and updating both values, each value after update is determined, the current game state is determined, and a state command indicating the game state based on the determination result is issued. It may be configured to set By configuring in this way, for example, the value of the variable probability counter 203t is greater than 0, it is also possible to set a state command indicating a gaming state (potential probability state) in which the value of the time reduction counter 203u is 0.

On the other hand, in the process of S353, when it is determined that the value of the variable probability counter 203t is not 0 (S353: No), it is determined whether the value of the time reduction counter 203u is greater than 1 (S355). If it is determined to be less than 1 (that is, 0) (S35: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S355, when it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 203u is greater than 1 (S355: Yes), the value of the time saving counter 203u is subtracted by 1 (S356). Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the time saving counter 203u subtracted in the process of S356 is 0 (S357). When it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 203u is 0 (S357: Yes), a state command indicating a transition to the normal state is set (S358), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the processing of S357, when it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 203u is not 0 (S357: No), this processing is terminated as it is.

Next, with reference to FIG. 180, the special symbol variation start process (S213) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 180 is a flow chart showing the special symbol variation start process (S213). This special symbol variation start process (S213) is a process executed in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 178) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 177), and the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol Based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area of the symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b, a lottery (win/fail determination) of "special symbol jackpot" or "special symbol omission" is performed, and the first symbol display device 37 and the third pattern display device 81 to determine the effect pattern of the variable effect (variable effect pattern).

In the special symbol variation start process (S213), first, the first hit random number counter C1 and the first hit type counter C2 stored in the execution area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b. , each value of the variation type counter CS1 is acquired (S301). Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the variable probability counter 203t is greater than 0 (whether the gaming state is during the variable probability period (high probability gaming state)) (S302). When it is determined that the value of the variable probability counter 203t is greater than 0 (S302: Yes), the pachinko machine 10 is in the variable probability state of the special symbols, so the process proceeds to S303. In the processing of S303, based on the value of the first winning random number counter C1 acquired in the processing of S301 and the first winning random number table 202a (see FIG. 155(a)) for high probability corresponding to the type of special symbol. Then, the lottery result as to whether or not the special symbol is a jackpot is acquired (S303). Specifically, the value of the first winning random number counter C1 is compared one by one with the 600 random numbers stored in the high probability first winning random number table 202a. As described above, as the random number value that becomes a special symbol jackpot in the variable probability game state (special game state), six "0 to 5" are set, and the value of the first per random number counter C1 and these When the random number value that becomes the hit matches, it is determined that it is a special symbol jackpot. When the lottery result of the special symbol is obtained, the process proceeds to S305.

On the other hand, in the process of S302, when it is determined that the value of the variable probability counter 203t is 0 (the pachinko machine 10 is in a state of low probability of special symbols) (S302: No), the process of S304 is executed. In the processing of S304, based on the value of the first winning random number counter C1 acquired in the processing of S301 and the first winning random number table 202a (see FIG. 155(a)) for low probability corresponding to the type of special symbol. Then, the lottery result as to whether or not the special symbol is a jackpot is acquired (S304). Specifically, the value of the first winning random number counter C1 is compared one by one with the 600 random numbers stored in the first winning random number table 202a for low probability. Two random numbers of "0, 1" are set as the random numbers that become the jackpot of special symbols in the normal game state (low-probability game state), and the value of the first winning random number counter C1 and the winning of these are set. When the random number matches, it is determined that the special symbol is a jackpot. When the lottery result of the special symbol is obtained, the process proceeds to S305.

In the process of S305, whether the special symbol lottery result acquired by the process of S303 or S304 is a special symbol jackpot (that is, the acquired value of the first winning random number counter C1 and the first winning random number table 202a (S305), and if it is determined to be a special symbol jackpot (S305: Yes), the first per type counter C2 acquired in the process of S301 Based on the value of , the display mode at the time of the big win is set (S306). More specifically, the value of the first winning type counter C2 acquired in the process of S301 is compared with the random number value stored in the first winning type selection table 202d, and three types of special symbol jackpots (jackpot Among A to C), it is determined what the jackpot type is. As described above, in the case of the first special symbol jackpot, if the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 49", it is determined to be a jackpot A, and in the range of "50 to 99" If so, it is determined to be a jackpot B, and in the case of a second special symbol jackpot, if the value of the first win type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 99", it is determined to be a jackpot C (Fig. 155 (b) )reference).

In the processing of S306, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 (lighting state of the LED 37a) is set according to the determined jackpot type (jackpots A to C). Also, in order to stop and display the stop symbols corresponding to the big win types on the third symbol display device 81, the big win types (jackpots A to C) are set as the stop types.

Next, based on the value of the variation type counter CS1, the variation pattern at the time of the big win is determined (S307). When the variation pattern is set in the process of S307, the variation time (display time) of the variation effect in the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the third symbol display device 81 until it stops with the jackpot symbol. A pattern variation time is determined. At this time, based on the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203, the variation time of the symbol variation is determined. Although detailed description is omitted, the stop type of symbol variation (ready-to-win type, presence or absence of ready-to-win) is determined based on the value of the stop type selection counter C3. Although illustration of the relationship between the numerical value of the stop type selection counter C3 and the type of symbol variation is omitted, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of "0 to 50", normal reach, "51 to 250" If it is within the range of , determine the variation pattern of super reach.

In addition, in the variation pattern, main controller 110 determines the variation time until notification of the success/failure determination result, and notifies it to sound lamp controller 113 . The sound ramp control device 113 determines the content (variation pattern) of the variable display mode to be actually displayed on the third pattern display device 81 according to the variation time and the success/failure determination result. Even if the main controller 110 is in the out-of-reach display mode, the sound lamp control device 113 is configured to be able to switch between the out-of-reach display mode and the non-out-of-reach display mode as long as the fluctuation time is the same. As a result, various display modes can be displayed, and effects can be diversified.

For example, as fluctuation patterns for failure, "short failure", "long failure", various types of "missing normal reach", and "missing super reach" are defined. As variation patterns shared by jackpot A, jackpot B, and jackpot D, various types of "normal reach" and various types of "super reach" are defined.

On the other hand, in the process of S305, when it is determined that the special symbol is out (S305: No), the display mode at the time of the deviation corresponding to the special symbol is set (S308). In the process of S308, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is set to the display mode corresponding to the off symbol, and the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b is stored in the execution area. The variable time (variation pattern) to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is set based on the value of the stop type selection counter C3.

Next, the variation pattern at the time of deviation is determined (S309). Here, the display time of the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the fluctuation time of the third symbol until the third symbol display device 81 stops at the lost symbol is determined. At this time, as in the processing of S308, the value of the stop type selection counter C3 stored in the execution area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b is confirmed, and the stop type selection counter is checked. Based on the value of C3, the fluctuation time of pattern fluctuation such as normal reach and super reach is determined.

When the process of S307 or the process of S309 is finished, the process returns to the special symbol variation process (S104).

Next, with reference to FIG. 181, the starting winning process (S105) executed by MPU 201 of main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 181 is a flow chart showing this starting winning process (S105). This start winning process (S105) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 177) to determine whether or not there is a win to the first ball entrance 64 (start winning). , Reservation processing of values indicated by various random number counters, and processing for executing prefetching of lottery results in special symbols from the values indicated by the reserved various random number counters.

When the starting winning process is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the ball has won the first ball entrance 64 (starting winning) (S401). Here, the ball entering the first ball entrance 64 is detected over three times of timer interrupt processing. Then, when it is determined that the ball has won the first ball entrance 64 (S401: Yes), the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d (number of times N1 of holding variable display in the special symbol) is acquired (S402). ). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is less than the upper limit (4 in this control example) (S403).

Then, if there is no winning to the first ball entrance 64 (S401: No), or even if there is a winning to the first ball entrance 64, the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is 4. If not less than (S403: No), the process proceeds to S407. On the other hand, if there is a winning to the first ball entrance 64 (S401: Yes) and the value (N) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is less than 4 (S403: Yes), special symbol 1 reserved The value (N) of the ball number counter 203d is incremented by 1 (S404). Then, a first special symbol reserved ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d changed by the calculation is set (S405).

The reserved ball number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed by the MPU 201 during the external output process (S901) of the main process (see FIG. 187), which will be described later. , is sent to the audio ramp controller 113 . When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command, it extracts the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d from the reserved ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223a of the RAM 223. Store.

After setting the pending ball number command by the processing of S405, the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the variation type counter CS1 updated in S103 of the timer interrupt processing described above Each value is stored in the first area among the empty reservation areas (reservation first area to reservation fourth area) of the special symbol 1 reservation ball storage area 203a of the RAM 203 (S406), and the process proceeds to S407. In the process of S406, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is referred to, and if the value is 0, the first reserved area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area.

Next, regarding S407 to S412, the processing for winning the first ball entrance 64 is changed to the processing for winning the second start opening 64b in each processing of S401 to S406 described above. , the same processing is executed, so detailed description thereof will be omitted. In addition, when a game ball wins the second ball entrance 640 and is stored as a reserved ball, the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, the variation type counter Each value of CS1 is acquired and stored in the empty reservation area of the corresponding special symbol 2 reservation ball storage area 203b.

In this way, for the second special symbol based on the ball entering the second ball entrance 640, the first winning random number counter C1, the first winning type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter similar to the first special symbol C3, by acquiring each value of the variation type counter CS1, the lottery can be executed using a common random number for the first special design and the second special design, so even the first special design and the second special design will win. Probability can be fixed.

After executing the process of S412, the prefetching process is executed (S413), and the process ends. Details of the look-ahead processing (S413) will be described with reference to FIG. Based on, the process of determining in advance each lottery result executed at the start of fluctuation is executed.

In this control example, the value of each counter is selected based on the incoming ball, but it may be configured to be selected at the start of variation. By configuring in this way, it is possible to suppress the use of the storage area of the RAM 203 without requiring a storage area for storing the values of each counter until the start of fluctuation. Further, among the counters, some counters (for example, only the fluctuation type counter CS1) may be configured to be acquired at the start of fluctuation. By configuring in this way, a counter related to winning/failure determination can be acquired when a ball is entered, and a counter not related to winning/failure determination can be acquired later, and the amount of data to be stored can be reduced while maintaining the fairness of the game. can be suppressed.

Next, referring to FIG. 182, the look-ahead process (S413), which is one process in the starting winning process (S105) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, will be described. FIG. 182 is a flow chart showing this prefetching process (S413).

In the look-ahead process (FIG. 182, S413), first, it is determined whether or not there is a new winning (a winning ball) at the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640 (S451). As a result of determination, if there is no new winning (ball winning) at the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640 (S451: No), this processing is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that there is a new winning (entered ball) at the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640 (S451: Yes), the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball From the storage area 203b, each value of the first winning random number counter C1, the first winning type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the variation type counter CS1 corresponding to the winning of this time is acquired (S452).

Next, the lottery results indicated by the acquired values of the first winning random number counter C1, the first winning type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the variation type counter CS1 are set to the first winning random number table 202a and the first winning type selection Table 202b, variation pattern selection table 202d (FIGS. 155 (a), (b), FIGS. 156 to 158) to make a preliminary determination (S453), the result of the hit/fail determination, the hit type, the stop type, and the variation type in advance A winning information command including information for indicating the determination result is set (S454), and this process is terminated.

Next, referring to FIG. 183, the normal symbol variation process (S106) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 183 is a flow chart showing this normal symbol variation process (S106). This normal symbol variation process (S106) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 177), and is accompanied by the variation display of the second symbol performed in the second symbol display device 83 and the second entrance 640. This is a process for controlling the opening time of the electric accessory 640a.

In the normal symbol variation process, first, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol (second symbol) is currently hitting (S501). During the winning of the normal symbol (second symbol), the second symbol display device 83 is displaying the winning, and the opening and closing control of the electric accessory 640a attached to the second ball entrance 640 is performed. including while As a result of determination, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is in the process of winning (S501: Yes), this process is finished as it is.

On the other hand, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is not hit (S501: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is fluctuating (S502), and the second symbol display device is determined. If the display mode of 83 is not fluctuating (S502: No), the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f (the number of times of suspension of variable display in normal symbols M) is obtained (S503). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is greater than 0 (S504), and if the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is 0 (S504: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if the value (M) of the normal design reserved ball number counter 203f is not 0 (S504: Yes), the value (M) of the normal design reserved ball number counter 203f is subtracted by 1 (S505).

Next, the data stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c is shifted (S506). In the process of S506, the data stored in the first reservation area to the fourth reservation area of the normal symbol reservation ball storage area 203c are sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the first holding area → execution area, the second holding area → the first holding area, the third holding area → the second holding area, the fourth holding area → the third holding area, etc. Shift data. After shifting the data, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 stored in the execution area of the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c is obtained (S507).

Next, it is determined whether the value of the time saving counter 203u is greater than 1 (S508). In the process of S508, if it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 203u is greater than 1 (S508: Yes), the value of the second per random number counter C4 obtained in the process of S507 and the second per random number for the high probability time Based on the table 202c (see FIG. 155(c)), the lottery result as to whether or not the normal symbol wins is acquired (S509). Specifically, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the second winning random number table 202c for high probability. As described above, if the value of the second winning random number counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 204", it is determined that the winning is a normal symbol, and if it is in the range of "0 to 4,205 to 239", It is determined that it is out of the normal pattern.

On the other hand, in the process of S508, if it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 203u is 1 or less (S508: No), the value of the second random number counter C4 obtained in the process of S507 and the second for low probability time Based on the 2-hit random number table 202c (see FIG. 155(c)), the lottery result as to whether or not the normal design is hit is obtained (S510). Specifically, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the second winning random number table 202c for low probability. As described above, if the value of the second winning random number counter C4 is in the range of "0", it is determined that the normal design is a hit, and if it is in the range of "1 to 239", it is out of the normal design. and discriminate.

Next, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the normal symbol acquired by the process of S509 or S510 is a normal symbol win (S511), and when it is determined that the normal symbol win is determined (S511: Yes) , set the display mode at the time of winning (S512). In the process of S512, after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is completed, the symbol "O" is set to be illuminated as the stop symbol (second symbol), and the process proceeds to S514. .

On the other hand, in the processing of S511, when it is determined that the symbol is out of the normal pattern (S511: No), the display mode at the time of out is set (S513). In the process of S513, after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is completed, the symbol "x" is set to be lit and displayed as the stop symbol (second symbol). After the setting of the display mode at the time of detachment is completed, the process proceeds to S514.

In the process of S514, it is determined whether or not the value of the time saving counter 203u is 0 (S514). The variable time is set to 3 seconds (S515), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S514, when it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 203u is 0 (S514: No), the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display in the second pattern display device 83 is set to 30 seconds (S516), End this process. In this way, when the normal pattern has a high probability (time saving state), compared to the normal pattern when the probability is low (normal state), the time of the fluctuation display is very short as "30 seconds → 3 seconds". As a result, the lottery frequency of normal symbols increases. Therefore, the frequency of wins in the normal pattern lottery increases, and the electric accessory 640a attached to the second ball entrance 640 is easily opened, so that the ball can easily enter the second ball entrance 640. state.

Although detailed explanation is omitted, the game state of normal symbols is configured to be set to the normal state when winning during the jackpot of special symbols. By constructing in this way, the game state of the normal symbols becomes advantageous during the big winning that is advantageous to the player, and it is possible to suppress giving excessive benefits to the player. Also, the period during which the variable winning device 65 is easy to open (special symbol jackpot period) and the period during which the electric accessory 640a is easy to open (ordinary symbol winning period) overlap, and the variable winning is most advantageous to the player. It is possible to suppress a situation in which the electric accessory 640a being opened hinders the winning of the ball to the device 65. - 特許庁

To explain the above-mentioned details in detail, when the electric accessory 640a is provided in the first flow path through which the ball flows so that the variable winning device 65 can win a prize, the electric accessory 640a is opened during the jackpot period. As a result, the ball flowing down the first flow path wins the electric accessory 640a, and there is a problem that the ball cannot sufficiently win the variable prize winning device 65 during the jackpot period. Therefore, for example, the electric accessory 640a is arranged at the lower position (downstream side) of the variable winning device 65, and the ball flowing down the first flow path during the jackpot period (while the variable winning device 65 is open) Although the above-mentioned problem can be solved by using a configuration that makes it easier for the variable winning device 65 to win, in this case, there is a problem that the configuration of the pachinko machine 10 is restricted.

On the other hand, in this control example, normal symbols are shifted to a low-probability state (normal state) during the special symbol jackpot, so that the electric accessory 640a becomes difficult to open during the jackpot period, thereby solving the above-described problem. can do.

In the process of S502, if the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (S502: Yes), it is determined whether or not the variation time of the variation display executed in the second symbol display device 83 has elapsed. (S517). The variable time here is the time set in advance by the process of S515 or the process of S516 before the variable display is started on the second symbol display device 83 .

In the process of S517, if it is determined that the variable time has not elapsed (S517: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the processing of S517, when it is determined that the variation time of the variation display being executed has passed (S517: Yes), the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set (S518). In the process of S518, if the normal symbol lottery is won and the display mode is set by the process of S512, the "○" symbol as the second symbol is stopped and displayed (lighted up) on the second symbol display device 83. displayed). On the other hand, if the lottery for the normal symbol is lost and the display mode is set by the process of S513, the "x" symbol as the second symbol is stopped (lighted up) on the second symbol display device 83. is set to When the stop display is set by the process of S518, when the second symbol display update process (see S907) of the main process (see FIG. 187) is executed next, the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is changed. After completion, the stop symbol (normal symbol) is stop-displayed on the second symbol display device 83 in the display mode set in the process of S512 or the process of S513.

Next, when the variation display currently being executed in the second symbol display device 83 is started, the normal symbol lottery result (current lottery result) performed by the normal symbol variation process is a normal symbol hit. (S519). If the lottery result of this time is a normal symbol hit (S519: Yes), then it is determined whether the value of the time reduction counter 203u is greater than 1 (S520), and if the value of the time reduction counter 203u is greater than 1 If it is determined (S520: Yes), the opening time and number of openings of the electric accessory 640a associated with the second ball entrance 640 are set to "1 second x 2 times" (S522), and the process proceeds to S523. and migrate. On the other hand, in the process of S520, if it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 203u is 1 or less (S520: No), the opening time and number of openings of the electric accessory 640a associated with the second entrance 640 are "0.2 seconds x 1 time" is set (S521), and the process proceeds to S523.

In the process of S523, the start of opening/closing control of the electric accessory 640a is set for the time and number of times of opening set in the process of S521 or S522 (S523), and the process ends. By the process of S523, when the start of opening and closing control of the electric accessory 640a is set, next when the electric accessory opening and closing process (see S905) of the main process (see FIG. 187) is executed, the electric accessory 640a The opening/closing control is started, and the opening/closing control of the electric accessory 640a is continued until the opening time and the number of times of opening set in the processing of S521 or S522 are completed. On the other hand, in the process of S519, when it is determined that the lottery result of this time is out of the normal symbol (S519: No), the process of S520 to S523 is skipped, and this process ends.

Next, the through gate passage processing (S107) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 184 is a flow chart showing this through gate passage processing (S107). This through gate passage processing (S107) is executed in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 177) to determine whether or not the ball has passed through the through gate 67. This is a process for acquiring and holding the value indicated by the random number counter C4.

In the through gate passage processing, first, it is determined whether or not the ball has passed through the through gate 67 (S601). Here, passage of the ball through the through gate 67 is detected over three times of timer interrupt processing. Then, when it is determined that the ball has passed through the through gate 67 (S601: Yes), the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f (the number of times of suspension of variable display in normal symbols M) is acquired (S602). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is less than the upper limit (4 in this control example) (S603).

The ball has not passed through the through gate 67 (S601: No), or even if the ball has passed through the through gate 67, the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f is less than 4 (S603 : No), this process ends. On the other hand, if the ball passes through the through gate 67 (S601: Yes) and the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is less than 4 (S603: Yes), the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f 1 is added to the value (M) (S604). Then, the value of the second hit random number counter C4 updated in S103 of the timer interrupt process described above is the first among the free reservation areas (reservation first area to reservation fourth area) of the normal symbol reservation ball storage area 203c of the RAM 203. area (S605), and the process ends. In the processing of S605, the value of the normal symbol reserved ball counter 203f is referred to, and if the value is 0, the first reserved area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the second reserved area is the first area, if the value is 2, the third reserved area is the first area, and if the value is 3, the fourth reserved area is the first area.

Next, NMI interrupt processing executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 185 is a flow chart showing this NMI interrupt processing. The NMI interrupt process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 when the pachinko machine 10 is powered off due to power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, information on occurrence of power failure is stored in the RAM 203 . That is, when the pachinko machine 10 is powered off due to a power failure or the like, a power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 . Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control being executed, starts the NMI interrupt processing, stores the power interruption occurrence information in the RAM 203 as the setting of the power interruption occurrence information (S701), and ends the NMI interruption processing. do.

The above NMI interrupt processing is also executed in the payout launch control device 111 in the same manner, and information on occurrence of power failure is stored in the RAM 213 by such NMI interrupt processing. That is, when the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to a power failure or the like, a power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control being executed. Then, NMI interrupt processing is started.

Next, referring to FIG. 186, startup processing executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 when main controller 110 is powered on will be described. FIG. 186 is a flow chart showing this startup process. This start-up process is started by a reset when the power is turned on. In the start-up process, first, an initial setting process is executed upon power-on (S801). For example, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. Next, in order to wait for the sub-side control devices (peripheral control devices such as the sound lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) to become operable, a wait process (one second in this control example) is executed. (S802). Then, access to the RAM 203 is permitted (S803).

After that, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) provided in the power supply 115 is turned on (S804), and if it is turned on (S804: Yes), the process proceeds to S812. On the other hand, if the RAM erasing switch 122 is not turned on (S804: No), it is further determined whether or not power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S805), and if not stored (S805: No). , there is a possibility that the process at the time of the previous power shutdown did not end normally, so in this case as well, the process proceeds to S812.

If power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S805: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (S806). If the determination value does not match the RAM determination value saved at the time of power shutdown, the backed-up data is destroyed. As will be described later in the processing of S914 in FIG. 187, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the work area address of the RAM 203. FIG. Instead of the RAM judgment value, the effectiveness of the backup may be judged based on whether or not the keyword written in the predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly saved.

In the process of S812, a payout initialization command is transmitted to initialize the payout control device 111 which is a sub-side control device (peripheral control device) (S812). When the payout control device 111 receives this payout initialization command, it clears the area (work area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets the initial value, and becomes ready to start the game ball payout control. After transmitting the payout initialization command, main controller 110 executes the initialization process of RAM 203 (S813, S814).

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, the power is turned on while the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed when the RAM data is initialized when the power is turned on, such as when the hall starts operating. Therefore, if the RAM erasing switch 122 is pushed during the start-up process, the RAM initialization process (S813, S814) is executed. Also, if power failure occurrence information is not set, or if backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.), the initialization processing of the RAM 203 (S813, S814) is similarly executed. . In the RAM initialization process (S813, S814), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S813), and then the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S814). After executing the initialization process of the RAM 203, the process proceeds to S810.

On the other hand, if the RAM erasing switch 122 is not turned on (S804: No), power failure occurrence information is stored (S805: Yes), and the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.) is normal ( S807: Yes), a state command is transmitted based on the long time open flag 203i (S808). Next, while retaining the data backed up in the RAM 203, the power failure occurrence information is cleared (S809), and the process proceeds to S810. When the payout control device 111 receives this payout return command, the game ball payout control can be started while retaining the data stored in the RAM 213 .

In the process of S810, an effect permission command is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113 (S810), and the audio lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 are permitted to execute various effects. Next, the interrupt is permitted (S811), and the process proceeds to main processing, which will be described later.

Next, with reference to FIG. 187, main processing executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 after the startup processing described above will be described. FIG. 187 is a flow chart showing this main process. Main processing of the game is executed in this main processing. As an overview, each process of S901 to S907 is executed as a periodical process with a period of 4 ms, and the counter update process of S910 and S911 is executed in the remaining time.

In the main process, first, during execution of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 177), output data such as commands stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203 is transferred to each sub-side control device (peripheral (S901). Specifically, it determines whether or not there is winning detection information detected in the switch reading process of S101 in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 177). Send a prize ball command to In addition, it transmits to the sound lamp control device 113 the reserved ball number command set in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 178) and the start winning process (see FIG. 181). In addition, it transmits to the sound lamp control device 113 the winning command set in the startup winning process and the look-ahead process (see FIG. 182). Further, by this external output processing, the variation pattern command, the stop type command, etc. necessary for the variation display of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 .

Next, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated (S902). Specifically, the variation type counter CS1 is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (198 in this control example). Then, the updated value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM203.

When the update of the variation type counter CS1 is finished, the prize ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S903), and then, in the case of the special symbol jackpot state, the execution of the jackpot production and the variable A jackpot control process for opening or closing the specific winning opening (large open opening) 65a of the winning device 65 is executed (S904). In the jackpot control process, the specific prize winning port 65a is opened for each round in the jackpot state, and it is determined whether the maximum opening time of the specific prize winning port 65a has elapsed or whether a specified number of balls have won the specific prize winning port 65a. Then, when any one of these conditions is established, the specific winning opening 65a is closed. The opening and closing of the specific winning opening 65a are repeated for a predetermined number of rounds. In this control example, the jackpot control process (S904) is executed in the main process, but it may be executed in the timer interrupt process.

Next, the electric accessary product opening/closing process for controlling the opening/closing of the electric accessary product 640a associated with the second entrance 640 is executed (S905). In the electric accessory opening/closing process, when the start of opening/closing control of the electric accessory 640a is set by the processes of S521 and S522 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 183), the opening/closing control of the electric accessory 640a is started. The opening/closing control of the electric accessory 640a is continued until the opening time and the number of times of opening set in the processing of S521 or S522 of FIG. 183 in the normal symbol variation processing are completed.

Next, a first symbol display update process for updating the display of the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S906). In the first symbol display update process, when a variation pattern is set by the process of S307 or the process of S309 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 180), the variation display corresponding to the variation pattern is displayed as the first symbol display. Start at device 37 . In this control example, among the LEDs 37a of the first pattern display device 37, from the start of the variation until the variation time elapses, for example, if the currently lit LED is red, the red LED is extinguished. At the same time, the green LED is lit, and if the green LED is lit, the green LED is extinguished and the blue LED is lit, and if the blue LED is lit, the blue LED is extinguished. At the same time, the red LED is lit.

Note that the main process is executed every 4 milliseconds, but if the lighting color of the LED is changed each time the main process is executed, the player cannot confirm the change in the lighting color of the LED. Therefore, a counter (not shown) is counted by 1 each time the main process is executed so that the player can confirm the change in the lighting color of the LED, and when the counter reaches 100, the LED change the lighting color of That is, the lighting color of the LED is changed every 0.4 seconds. The value of the counter is reset to 0 when the lighting color of the LED is changed.

In addition, in the first symbol display update process, when the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern set by the process of S307 or the process of S309 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 180) ends, the first symbol display device 37, the stop pattern (first pattern) is displayed on the first pattern display device in the display mode set by the processing of S306 or S308 of the special pattern variation start processing (see FIG. 180). 37 is stopped (lighted up).

Next, a second symbol display update process for updating the display of the second symbol display device 83 is executed (S907). In the second symbol display update process, when the variation time of the second symbol is set by the process of S515 or the process of S516 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 183), the variation display is started on the second symbol display device 83. do. As a result, the second symbol display device 83 performs a variable display in which the symbol "o" and the symbol "x" as the second symbol are alternately lit. Further, in the second symbol display update process, when the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set by the process of S518 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 183), it is executed in the second symbol display device 83. After finishing the variable display, the stop design (second design) is stopped on the second design display device 83 in the display mode set by the processing of S512 or S513 of the normal design variation processing (see FIG. display).

After that, it is determined whether power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S908). SG1 is not output and the power is not cut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not it is time to execute the next main process, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 ms in this control example) has elapsed since the start of the main process (S909). If the predetermined time has already passed (S909: Yes), the process proceeds to S901, and the above-described processes after S901 are repeatedly executed.

On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet passed since the start of the main processing this time (S909: No), the next main processing is executed until the predetermined time, that is, within the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main processing. The first initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and the variation type counter CS1 are repeatedly updated (S910, S911).

First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S910). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are incremented by 1, and when the counter values reach the maximum values (299 and 239 in this control example), they are cleared to 0. . Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the change type counter CS1 is updated by the same method as the process of S902 (S911).

Here, since the execution time of each process of S901 to S907 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main process is not constant and fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using the remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (that is, , the initial value of the first winning random number counter C1, and the initial value of the second winning random number counter C4) can be randomly updated, and similarly, the variation type counter CS1 can also be randomly updated.

Further, in the process of S908, if the RAM 203 stores power failure occurrence information (S908: Yes), the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the power is turned off, and the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252. As a result, the NMI interrupt process of FIG. 185 is executed, so the power-off process from S912 onwards is executed. First, to prohibit the occurrence of each interrupt processing (S912), to other control devices (peripheral control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the sound lamp control device 113) a power-off command indicating that the power has been cut off and transmit (S913). Then, a RAM determination value is calculated and stored (S914), access to the RAM 203 is prohibited (S915), and the infinite loop continues until the power supply is completely cut off and processing cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the stack area and work area backed up in the RAM 203 .

In addition, the processing of S908 is performed at the end of a series of processing corresponding to the game state change performed in S901 to S907, or at the end of one cycle of the processing of S910 and S911 performed within the remaining time. It is running. Therefore, in the main processing of the main controller 110, information on the occurrence of power failure is confirmed at the timing when each setting is completed. It can start from the processing of S901. That is, the process can be started from the process of S901 in the same way as the initialization in the start-up process. Therefore, even if the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 are not saved in the stack area or the value of the stack pointer is not saved in the process at power-off, the stack pointer is By setting to a predetermined value (initial value), the process of S901 can be started. Therefore, the control load on the main controller 110 can be reduced, and accurate control can be performed without the main controller 110 malfunctioning or running out of control.

Next, the jackpot control process (S904) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 188 is a flow chart showing this jackpot control process (S904). This jackpot control process (S904) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 177), and when the pachinko machine 10 is in a special pattern jackpot state, information for executing various effects according to the jackpot. It is a process for setting (command) and opening or closing a winning opening (specific winning opening (large open opening) 65a, V winning opening 650a).

In the jackpot control process (S904), first, it is determined whether it is time to start the jackpot of the special symbol (S1001). When it is determined that the special symbol jackpot is the start timing (S1001: Yes), an opening command is set (S1002), and this process is terminated.

It should be noted that the opening command may be configured to be delayed (variable) and transmitted according to the game state and the jackpot type. Specifically, an opening counter that is periodically updated (every 4 ms) is provided. Then, when a special symbol jackpot or a small hit is started, the opening counter is initialized to 0, and then the opening counter reaches a predetermined value (for example, 2500 for jackpot A and 5000 for jackpot B). When it becomes so, an opening command may be transmitted. By doing so, for example, when a big win is achieved in the left-handed game, the time until the start of the big win is lengthened, and when a big win is achieved in the right-handed game, the time until the start of the big win is lengthened. can be shortened. In this control example, when the jackpot is hit during the left-handed game, it is necessary to switch to the right-handed game as the jackpot game. According to the above configuration, it is possible to sufficiently secure the time to switch to the right-handed game (jackpot game) when the left-handed game results in a big hit. As a result, the operation burden on the player can be reduced.

On the other hand, in the process of S1001, if it is determined that it is not the special symbol jackpot start timing (S1001: No), then it is determined whether the special symbol jackpot is currently in progress (S1003). In the processing of this S1003, determination is performed by reading the game information regarding the winning game stored in the game state storage area 203m.

During the special symbol jackpot, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying the special symbol jackpot (including during the special symbol jackpot game), and during the special symbol jackpot. During the predetermined time after the end of the jackpot game. In the process of S1003, if it is determined that the special symbol jackpot is not in progress (S1003: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the special symbol jackpot is in progress (S1003: Yes), then it is determined whether it is time to start a new round (S1004).

When it is determined that it is time to start a new round in the process of S1004 (S1004: Yes), a big hit operation setting process is executed (S1005). Details of this jackpot operation setting process (S1005) will be described with reference to FIG. operation processing) is executed.

Here, with reference to FIG. 189, the jackpot operation setting process (S1005), which is one process in the jackpot control process (S904 in FIG. 188), will be described. FIG. 189 is a flow chart showing the contents of the jackpot operation setting process (S1005).

When the jackpot action setting process (S1005) is executed, first, among the opening action scenarios set corresponding to the jackpot of this time, the opening action corresponding to the number of rounds of the jackpot to be started this time is set. An operation scenario is read (S1101). Then, the opening operation of the flow path solenoid (probability variable solenoid) 650k (see FIG. 4) is set based on the data read in S1101 (S1102). Next, the opening operation of the opening/closing door 65f1 of the variable winning device 65 or the opening operation of the opening/closing door 650f1 of the V winning opening 650a is set by the data read in the process of S1101 (S1103), the winning number counter 203j is reset (S1104), A round number command is set (S1105). After that, this process is terminated.

In addition, the pachinko machine 10 of this control example performs a jackpot game (round game) that executes an opening action for the first attacker (V winning device 650) as a jackpot game, and a second attacker (variable prize winning device 65). and a jackpot game (round game) in which an opening action is executed by pressing the first attacker (V winning device 650). It is defined only in the opening action scenario corresponding to the eye round game. Therefore, when executing a round game other than that, a scenario of opening the flow path solenoid (probability variable solenoid) 650k in the corresponding opening operation scenario (scenario of moving the switching member 650h and communicating the special discharge flow path 650e2) is not specified, the process of S1102 is skipped.

In this way, each operation of the variable prize winning device 65 is set at the start of each round, so even if an unexpected power failure occurs during the big win game, the big win game will end in the middle. Defects can be suppressed. Further, although detailed description is omitted, in this control example, when it is determined that it is time to start a new round (S1004 in FIG. 188: Yes), a round for indicating that a new round game is to be executed Configure the command to be set. The round command set here is output to the sound lamp control device 113, and the sound lamp control device 113 side is configured to be able to determine the progress of the jackpot game being executed. Therefore, based on the round command received from the main control device 110, it is possible to display in the main display area Dm of the third pattern display device 81 what round the game is currently in.

In addition, in this control example, as the round command set by the main controller 110, a round command including information indicating the number of rounds of the round game to be executed is set. Instead, it may be configured to set a round command including only information indicating that the round game has been newly started. In this case, means for measuring the number of round commands received during one jackpot game is provided on the audio ramp control device 113 side, and the audio ramp control device 113 side determines what round the round game to be executed this time is. may be calculated, and the display mode of the number of rounds displayed on the third symbol display device 81 may be set based on the calculation result. By configuring in this way, the amount of information included in the round command set by main controller 110 can be reduced, so that the load on main controller 110 can be reduced.

Returning to FIG. 188, the description continues. In the processing of S1004, when it is determined that it is not the start timing of a new round (S1004: No), it is determined whether it is the operation timing of the opening/closing door 650f1 and the flow path solenoid (probability variable solenoid) 650k (S1006). When it is determined that it is time to operate (S1006: Yes), the open solenoid 650f2 is turned on (S1007). After that, this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S1006, when it is determined that it is not the timing of the opening operation (S1006: No), it is determined whether it is the timing of starting the ending effect (S1008). The start timing of the ending production is the final round of the jackpot game (the 10th round in the case of jackpot A) is completed, the open/close door 650f1 is closed, and the waiting time (in this control example, , 3 seconds) has elapsed, it is determined that it is time to start the ending effect. When it is determined that it is time to start the ending effect (S1008: Yes), the opening solenoid 650f2 is turned off (S1009), ending processing is executed (S1010), and this processing ends.

Here, the details of the jackpot ending process (S1012) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 190 is a flow chart showing the contents of the ending process (S1010).

When the ending process (S1010) is executed, first, an ending command indicating the start of the ending is set (S1201), and it is determined whether or not the variable probability setting flag 203h is ON (S1202). In the process of S1202, when it is determined that the variable probability setting flag 203h is ON (S1202: Yes), the value of the variable probability counter 203t is set to 200 (S1203), and the process proceeds to S1204.

In the process of S1204, a value corresponding to the jackpot type and the presence or absence of V winning is set in the time saving counter 203u (S1204), and the process is terminated.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the variable probability setting flag 203h is off in the process of S1202 (S1202: No), the process of S1203 is skipped and the process of S1204 described above is performed.

Returning to FIG. 188, the description continues. In the process of S1008, if it is determined that it is not the start timing of the ending effect (S1008: No), next, the winning process is executed (S1011). Here, with reference to FIG. 191, this winning process (S1011) will be described in detail. FIG. 191 is a flow chart showing the contents of this winning process (S1011).

In the winning process (S1011 in FIG. 191), first, it is determined whether or not the round valid period is reached (S1401). The round effective period is the period during which the round game is set, that is, the period from the open state of the open door 65f1 or the open door 650f1 to the end of the interval period (0.5 seconds). If it is determined that it is outside the round valid period (S1401: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is within the round effective period (S1401: Yes), it is determined whether the ball detection switch 650c1 of the V winning opening 650a has passed. When it is determined that the ball has passed through the ball detection switch 650c1 of the V winning opening 650a (S1402: Yes), the winning number counter 203j is updated by adding 1 (S1403). After that, the process of S1404 is executed. On the other hand, if it is determined that the ball detection switch 650c1 has not been passed (S1402: No), the process of S1403 is skipped and the process of S1404 is executed.

In the processing of S1404, it is determined whether or not the value of the winning number counter 203j is 10 or more (S1404). When it is determined that the value of the winning number counter 203j is 10 or more (S1404: Yes), the opening/closing door 650f1 of the V winning opening 650a is set to be closed (S1406). After that, the remaining ball timer flag 203n is set to ON (S1407), and the process of S1408 is executed. By setting the remaining ball timer flag 203n to ON, it can be determined that the ball is being swept after the opening/closing door 650f1 is closed.

On the other hand, in the process of S1404, if it is determined that the value of the prize number counter 203j is less than 10 (S1404: No), it is determined whether the round time (30 seconds in this control example) has elapsed (S1405). . When it is determined that the round time has elapsed (S1405: Yes), the process of S1406 is executed. On the other hand, if it is determined that the round time has not elapsed (S1405: No), the process of S1408 is executed.

In the process of S1408, it is determined whether the value of the operation counter 203k is greater than 0 (S1408). When it is determined that the value of the operation counter 203k is greater than 0 (S1408: Yes), the value of the operation counter 203k is decremented by 1 and updated (S1409). It is determined whether the ball has passed through the V switch 650e3 (S1410). When it is determined that the ball has passed through the V switch 650e3 (S1410: Yes), the value of the variable probability passage counter 203i is updated by adding 1 (S1411), and the variable probability setting flag 203h is set to ON (S1412).

After that, the process of S1413 is executed. On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S1410 that the ball has not passed through the V switch 650e3 (S1410: No), the process of S1413 is executed. In the process of S1413, it is determined whether the operation counter 203k is 0 (S1413). When it is determined that the operation counter 203k is 0, the flow path solenoid 650k is set to OFF (S1414), the variable probability effective flag 203q is set to ON (S1415), and then this process is terminated. Here, by setting the variable probability effective flag 203q to ON, even after the switching member 650h is switched, when the ball remaining in the special discharge flow path 650e2 passes through the V switch 650e3, special symbols can be controlled so that a high probability state of is set.

On the other hand, in the process of S1408, when it is determined that the operation counter 203k is 0 (S1408: No), it is determined whether the variable probability effective flag 203q is ON (S1416). When it is determined that the variable probability effective flag 203q is off (S1416: No), this process is terminated. Also, when it is determined that the probability variable effective flag 203q is ON in the process of S1416 (S1416: Yes), the value of the probability variable effective timer 203r is updated by adding 1 (S1417).

Then, it is determined whether the value of the probability variable effective timer 203r after updating has reached the upper limit (1.2 s in this control example) (S1418). When it is determined that the probability variable effective timer 203r is the upper limit value (S1418: Yes), the probability variable effective flag 203q is set to OFF (S1419), and the probability variable effective timer 203r is reset to the initial value 0 (S1420). . After that, this process ends. In the process of S1418, when it is determined that the variable probability effective timer 203r is not the upper limit value (S1418: No), the process proceeds to S1410.

As a result, it is possible to determine whether or not the ball has passed through the V switch 650e3 until the probability variable effective timer 203r reaches the upper limit, so a high probability of special symbols in consideration of the time of ball sweeping. State can be set. In addition, since there is an upper limit to the time that is determined to be effective, it is possible to prevent the ball from being illegally passed through the V switch 650e3 and the high probability state of the special symbol being given.

Returning to FIG. 188, the description continues. When the prize-winning process (S1011 in FIG. 191) ends, an abnormality process is then executed (S1012), and this process ends. Here, details of the abnormality processing (S1012) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 192 is a flow chart showing the contents of this abnormality processing (S1012). This abnormality processing (S1012) is processing for monitoring whether or not the V switch 650e3 is illegally passed through.

In the abnormality processing (S1012), first, it is determined whether or not it is the round effective period (S1501). If it is outside the round valid period (S1501: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is within the round effective period (S1501: Yes), it is determined whether the ball has passed through the ball outlet switch (discharge confirmation switch) 650e4 (S1502). When it is determined that the ball has passed through the ball outlet switch (discharge confirmation switch) 650e4 (S1502: Yes), the value of the discharge number counter 203s is incremented by 1 and updated (S1503). After that, the process of S1504 is executed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the ball has not passed through the ball outlet switch (discharge confirmation switch) 650e4 (S1502: No), the process of S1504 is executed.

In the processing of S1504, it is determined whether or not the remaining ball timer flag 203n is ON (S1504). If it is determined that the remaining ball timer flag 203n is off (S1504: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the remaining ball timer flag 203n is ON (S1504: Yes), it is during the ball sweeping time period, so the remaining ball timer 203p is updated by adding 1 (S1505). The remaining ball timer 203p determines whether or not the upper limit value (three seconds in this control example) has elapsed (S1506). If it is determined that the value is not the upper limit value (S1506: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined to be the upper limit value (S1506: Yes), the number of discharges (the total value of the probability variable passing counter 203i and the discharge number counter 203s) and the winning number (the value of the winning number counter 203j) match. (S1507).

If it is determined that they match (S1507: Yes), the process of S1509 is executed. On the other hand, if it is determined that they do not match (S1507: No), an error command is set (S1508). After that, the process of S1509 is executed. When the error command is received by the audio lamp control device 113, an error is displayed (for example, characters indicating a winning number mismatch error are displayed), and an error signal is output to the hall computer. Therefore, it is possible to prevent illegally leaving a game ball in the V winning device 650 and allowing the game ball to pass through the V switch 650e3.

In the process of S1509, the remaining ball timer flag 203n is set to OFF (S1509), and the remaining ball timer 203p is reset to 0, which is the initial value (S1510). After that, the winning prize number counter 203j, the discharge number counter 203s, and the variable probability passing counter 203i are reset to their initial values (S1511), and then this process is terminated.

<Control Processing Executed by Audio Ramp Control Device 113>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 193 to 210, each control process executed by the MPU 221 within the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. The processing of the MPU 221 is roughly classified into startup processing that is activated upon power-on and main processing that is executed after the startup processing.

First, referring to FIG. 193, start-up processing executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 193 is a flow chart showing this startup process. This start-up process is started when the power is turned on.

When the start-up process is executed, first, an initial setting process is executed upon power-on (S2001). Specifically, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. After that, depending on whether or not the power-off processing flag is turned on, the power-off processing in S2119 (see FIG. 194) is caused by a momentary voltage drop (instantaneous power failure, so-called "instantaneous power failure"). ) is started during execution (S2002). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 194, when the audio lamp control device 113 receives a power-off command from the main controller 110 (see S2116 in FIG. 194), it executes power-off processing in S2119. Before the power-off processing is executed, the power-off processing flag is turned on, and after the power-off processing is completed, the power-off processing flag is turned off. Therefore, whether or not the power-off processing in S2119 is being executed can be determined by the state of the power-off processing in-progress flag.

If the power-off processing flag is off (S2002: No), the startup process this time was started after the power was completely shut off, or after a momentary power failure occurred and the power was shut off in S2119. Either it was started after the execution of the process was completed, or it was started when only the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 was reset due to noise (without receiving a power off command from the main controller 110). be. Therefore, in these cases, it is checked whether the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S2003).

Destruction of data in the RAM 223 is confirmed as follows. That is, data as a keyword of "55AAh" is written in a specific area of the RAM 223 by the process of S2006. Therefore, the data stored in the specific area is checked, and if the data is "55AAh", there is no data destruction in the RAM 223. Conversely, if it is not "55AAh", it can be confirmed that the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed. If data destruction of RAM223 is confirmed (S2003: Yes), it will transfer to S2004 and will start initialization of RAM223. On the other hand, if destruction of data in the RAM 223 is not confirmed (S2003: No), the process proceeds to S2008.

It should be noted that if the startup process this time is started after the power is completely cut off, the keyword "55AAh" is not stored in the specific area of the RAM 223 (the memory of the RAM 223 is lost due to the power cut). ), it is determined that the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S2003: Yes), and the process proceeds to S2004. On the other hand, whether the current start-up processing was started after a momentary power failure occurred and after the execution of the power-off processing in S2118 was completed, or only the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 was reset due to noise or the like. If the process is started after the above, the keyword "55AAh" is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, so the data in the RAM 223 is determined to be normal (S2003: No), and the process proceeds to S2208.

If the power-off processing flag is on (S2002: Yes), the startup process this time is after a momentary power failure occurs, and during execution of the power-off process in S2119, the sound lamp control device 113 It is started by resetting the MPU 221 of . In such a case, the memory state of the RAM 223 is not necessarily correct because the power-off process is in progress. Therefore, in such a case, the control cannot be continued, so the process moves to S2004 and the initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

In the processing of S2004, the storage area of the entire range of RAM 223 is checked (S2004). As a checking method, first, "0FFh" is written for each byte, read for each byte to confirm whether it is "0FFh", and if it is "0FFh", it is determined that the data is normal. Such writing and confirmation for each byte is performed in the order of "0FFh", "55h", "0AAh", and "00h". All storage areas of the RAM 223 are cleared to 0 by this read/write check of the RAM 223 .

If the read/write check is normal for all storage areas of the RAM 223 (S2005: Yes), the keyword "55AAh" is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 to set RAM destruction check data (S2006). By confirming the keyword "55AAh" written in this specific area, it is checked whether or not the RAM 223 has data destruction. On the other hand, if an abnormality in the read/write check is detected in any storage area of the RAM 223 (S2005: No), the abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified (S2007), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is cut off. An abnormality in the RAM 223 is notified by the display lamp 34 . In addition, it is possible to output a sound by the sound output device 226 to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or to transmit an error command to the display control device 114 and display an error message on the third symbol display device 81. can be

In the process of S2008, it is determined whether or not the power-off flag is turned on (S2008). The power-off flag is turned on when the power-off process of S2119 is executed (see S2118 in FIG. 194). That is, since the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off processing of S2119 is executed, the reason why the process of S2008 is reached with the power-off flag turned on is that the startup processing this time is instantaneous. This is the case where the process is started after the power failure has occurred and the execution of the power-off process in S2119 has been completed. Therefore, in such a case (S2008: Yes), the work area of the RAM is cleared to initialize each process of the sound lamp control device 113 (S2009), and after setting the initial value of the RAM 223 (S2010), an interrupt Permission is set (S2011), and the process proceeds to the main process. The work area of the RAM 223 refers to an area other than the area for storing commands and the like received from the main controller 110 .

On the other hand, the process of S2008 is reached with the power-off flag turned off because the current start-up process was started after the power supply was completely shut off, for example. This is the case where the processing has been reached, or only the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 has been reset due to noise or the like (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110). Therefore, in such a case (S2008: No), S2009, which is the clearing process of the work area of the RAM 223, is skipped, the process proceeds to S2010, and after setting the initial value of the RAM 223 (S2010), interrupt permission is set (S2011), and the process proceeds to the main process.

In this way, when the power is turned on, the main control unit 110 outputs a command that can determine whether or not the normal symbol is in the long-term hit state, so that the sound lamp control unit 113 side can also determine the state. can be done.

The reason why the clearing process of S2009 is skipped is that when the process of S2008 is reached from S2004 via the process of S2006, all the storage areas of the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the process of S2004, When only the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like and start-up processing is started, the data in the work area of the RAM 223 is saved without being cleared, so that the audio lamp control device 113 This is because the control of can be continued.

Next, referring to FIG. 194, main processing executed by the MPU 221 in the audio ramp control device 113 after startup processing of the audio ramp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 194 is a flow chart showing this main process. When the main process is executed, first, it is determined whether or not 1 ms or more has passed since the main process was started or after the current process of S2101 was executed (S2101). If not (S2101: No), the process proceeds to S2114 without performing the processes of S2102 to S2113. In the process of S2101, it is determined whether or not 1 msec has elapsed because S2102 to S2113 are mainly processes related to display (effect), and there is no need to edit in a short cycle (within 1 msec). , the command determination processing in S2114, the variable display setting processing in S2115, and the processing for updating various counter values (not shown) are preferably executed in short cycles. That is, by executing the process of S2114 in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent the command transmitted from the main controller 110 from being missed in reception, and by executing the process of S2115 in a short cycle, the command is received by the command determination process. Based on the command, it is possible to make settings related to variable effects without delay.

If 1 millisecond or more has elapsed in the processing of S2101 (S2101: Yes), first, various commands for the display control device 114 set by the processing of S2103 to S2115 are transmitted to the display control device 114 (S2102 ). Next, the output of each lamp is set so as to set the lighting mode of the display lamp 34 and the lighting mode of the lamp edited in the process of S2108 described later (S2103), and then the power-on notification process is executed (S2104). In the power-on notification process, when the power is turned on, it is notified that the power has been turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds). will be Also, a command may be sent to the display control device 114 to notify that power is supplied on the screen of the third pattern display device 81 . Note that if the power is not turned on, the process proceeds to S2105 without notifying by the power-on notification process.

In the process of S2105, the customer waiting effect process is executed, and then the pending number display update process is executed (S2106). In the customer waiting effect process, when the pachinko machine 10 is not played by a player for a predetermined period of time, a setting such as switching the display of the third symbol display device 81 to a title screen is performed, and the setting is used as a command for display control. It is sent to device 114 . In the pending number display update process, a process of lighting a pending lamp (not shown) according to the value of the special symbol 1 pending ball number counter 223a, the value of the special symbol 2 pending ball number counter 223b, or the value of the normal pending ball number counter 223c. is done.

After that, frame button input monitoring/effect processing is executed (S2107). In this frame button input monitoring and effect processing, input as to whether or not the frame button 22 operated by the player has been pressed is monitored in order to enhance the effect of the effect, and the case where the input of the frame button 22 is confirmed is dealt with. This is a process of setting to perform production. Details of the frame button input monitoring/effect processing (S2107) will be described later with reference to FIG.

When the frame button input monitoring/effect processing is completed, the lamp editing processing is executed (S2108), and then the sound editing/output processing is executed (S2109). In the lamp editing process, the lighting patterns of the illumination parts 29 to 33 are set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third pattern display device 81 . In the sound editing/output process, the output pattern of the voice output device 226 is set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third pattern display device 81, and the sound is output from the voice output device 226 according to the setting.

After the process of S2109, the liquid crystal effect execution management process is executed (S2110), and the process proceeds to S2111. In the liquid crystal effect execution management process, based on the variation pattern command transmitted from the main controller 110, the time required for the variation display performed by the third symbol display device 81 and the time synchronized therewith are set. The lamp editing process of S2108 is executed based on the time set in this liquid crystal effect execution monitoring process. The sound editing/output processing of S2109 is also executed at the time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed by the third pattern display device 81. FIG. The liquid crystal effect execution management process (S2110) described above will be described later in detail with reference to FIG.

After the process of S2110 is completed, an operation effect management process is executed (S2111). This operation effect management processing (S2111) will be described later in detail with reference to FIG. A process for changing is executed.

After executing the operation effect management process (S2111), the action control process (S2112) is executed. In this operation control process (S2112), the operation control of various performance movable accessories provided in the pachinko machine 10 of the first control example is executed. The operation control of the various performance movable accessories is a performance that is set based on the results of the lottery of special symbols, the results of the lottery of normal symbols, the operation results of the operation means (frame button 22), the game results during the jackpot game, and the like. This is executed in accordance with the content of the action scenario of the movable accessory for use, and a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

When the processing of S2112 ends, counter update processing is executed (S2113). In this counter update process (S2113), a process for updating the value of a counter (timer) for timing information, for example, the operation valid timer 223n, which is necessary when executing various effects is executed.

After the processing of S2113 is completed, next command determination processing is executed (S2114). Details of this command determination process (S2114) will be described later with reference to FIG. After executing the command determination process (S2114), the variable display setting process is executed (S2115). In the variable display setting process, a variable pattern command for display is generated and set based on the variable pattern command received from the main controller 110 in order to cause the third symbol display device 81 to perform a variable effect. As a result, the command is sent to display controller 114 . The details of this variable display setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

When the process of S2115 is finished, it is determined whether or not power-off occurrence information is stored in the work RAM 233 (S2116). The power-off occurrence information is stored when a power-off command is received from main controller 110 . If power-off occurrence information is stored in the processing of S2116 (S2116: Yes), both the power-off flag and the power-off processing flag are turned on (S2118), and the power-off processing is executed (S2119). After the power-off processing is executed, the power-off processing flag is turned off (S2120), and then the processing is looped infinitely. In the power-off processing, interrupt processing is prohibited, each output port is turned off, and outputs from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are turned off. Also, the memory of information on occurrence of power failure is erased.

On the other hand, if the power-off occurrence information is not stored in the process of S2116 (S2116: No), it is determined whether or not the RAM 223 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (S2117), and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (S2117: No), the process returns to S2101, and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 is destroyed (S2117: Yes), the process is looped infinitely to stop execution of subsequent processes. Here, since the main processing is not executed when it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and the loop is infinitely looped, the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change after that. Therefore, since the player can know that an abnormality has occurred, the player can call the hall clerk or the like and ask them to repair the pachinko machine 10 or the like. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, the RAM destruction may be notified by the voice output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 .

Next, the command determination process (S2114) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 195 is a flow chart showing this command determination process (S2114). This command determination process (S2114) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 194) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp controller 113, and as described above, determines the command received from the main controller 110. .

In the command determination process (S2114: FIG. 195), first, among the unprocessed commands, the first command received from the main controller 110 is read from the command storage area provided in the RAM 223, analyzed, and It is determined whether or not a variation pattern command has been received (S2201). When a variation pattern command is received (S2201: Yes), the variation start flag 223d is set to ON (S2202), a variation pattern is extracted from the received command (S2003), and this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S2201, when the variation pattern command is not received (S2201: No), it is determined whether or not the stop type command is received (S2204). When the stop type command is received (S2204: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223e provided in the RAM 223 is turned on (S2205), the stop type is extracted from the received command (S2206), and this process is finished. .

In the process of S2204, when the stop type command is not received (S2204: No), it is determined whether or not the pending ball count command is received (S2207). When the reserved ball number command is received (S2207: Yes), the number of reserved balls is extracted from the received command, and the corresponding special symbol reserved ball number counter (special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223a, special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223a The number is stored in the number counter 223b) (S2208), and the process ends. Here, the number of reserved balls corresponding to the first special symbol is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223a, and the number of reserved balls corresponding to the second special symbol is stored in the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223b. Stored. Further, when receiving a reserved ball number command indicating the reserved ball number of normal symbols, information for indicating the reserved ball number is stored in the normal reserved ball number counter.

On the other hand, in the process of S2207, if the command for the number of pending balls has not been received (S2207: No), it is determined whether or not the winning-related command has been received (S2209). If the winning-related command is received (S2209: Yes), the winning-information related process is started (S2210), and this process ends. Details of the winning information related processing (S2210) will be described later with reference to FIG. Based on, the winning information included in the winning command is pre-determined, the processing of executing the effect (pre-reading effect) based on the result of the pre-determination, and the processing of temporarily storing the result of the pre-determination are executed. be done.

In the process of S2209, if the winning-related command has not been received (S2209: No), then it is determined whether or not the jackpot-related command has been received (S2211), and if it is determined that it has been received (S2211: Yes) , a jackpot-related process is executed (S2212), and the process ends. This jackpot related process (S2212) will be described later with reference to FIG.

In the process of S2211, when it is determined that the jackpot-related command has not been received (S2211: No), it is determined whether a stop command has been received (S2213). If it is determined that a stop command has been received (S2213: Yes), stop processing is executed (S2214), and this processing is executed. This stop processing (S2214) will be described later with reference to FIG. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S2213 that the stop command has not been received (S2213: No), this processing ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 196, winning information related processing (S2210), which is part of the command determination processing (S2114: see FIG. 195) executed by MPU 221 in sound lamp control device 113, will be described. FIG. 195 is a flow chart showing this winning information related process (S2210). This winning information related process (S2210) is executed in the command determination process (see FIG. 195) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113. FIG.

In the winning information related process (S2210), first, the winning information included in the received winning information command is read (S2301), and the pending display mode is determined based on the winning/failure determination result included in the read winning information (S2302).

Then, a display command for indicating the pending display mode determined in the process of S2302 is set (S2303). Next, it is determined whether or not the continuous notice flag 223v is ON (S2304), and if it is determined that the continuous notice flag 223v is ON (S2304: Yes), this processing is terminated as it is, and the continuous notice is being executed. If it is determined that the flag 223v is off (S2304: No), the presence or absence of the continuous announcement effect is determined based on the winning information read in the process of S2301 (S2305), and the process proceeds to S2306.

In the process of S2306, it is determined whether or not there is a continuous announcement effect (S2306). If it is determined that there is no continuous announcement effect (S2306: No), this process is terminated as it is, and if it is determined that there is a continuous announcement effect (S2306: Yes), the continuous announcement setting flag 223t is set to ON ( S2307), the number of times until the special figure fluctuation corresponding to the target winning information is set to the value of the continuous notice counter 223u (S2308), and then this process is terminated.

Next, with reference to FIG. 197, the contents of the jackpot related process (S2212 in FIG. 197) will be described. FIG. 197 is a flow chart showing the contents of the jackpot related process (S2212). This jackpot-related processing (S2212) is executed in the command determination processing (see S2114 in FIG. 195) of the sound lamp control device 113, and is related to the hit (jackpot, small hit) from the main controller 110. It is executed when a command is received.

In this control example, when a big win C is won by lottery of special symbols and when a small win is won, the third electric accessory 82a (see FIG. 207) provided in the left area of the game board 13 is opened. A winning game (left winning game) is executed, and when big wins A, B, D and E are won by lottery of special symbols, a variable winning device 65 provided in the right area of the game board 13 is opened. It is configured to execute a winning game (right winning game), and in the jackpot related process (S2212 in FIG. 197), a display command for displaying information on the winning game on the third symbol display device 81 is set. It is configured such that a process and a different winning effect depending on the type of the winning game to be executed are executed.

When the jackpot related process (S2212 in FIG. 197) is executed, first, it is determined whether the command received this time is an opening command (S2401). If it is determined to be an opening command (S2401: Yes), an opening command for display is set (S2402), and this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the command received this time is not the opening command (S2401: No), then it is determined whether the command received this time is the number of rounds command (S2403), and it is determined that it is the number of rounds command. If so (S2403: Yes), the value of the round number counter 223x is incremented by 1 (S2404), a display round number command is set based on the value of the round number counter 223x (S2405), and this process ends.

In the processing of S2403, if it is determined that the command received this time is not the round number command (S2403: No), it is determined whether the command received this time is the ending command (S2406), and it is determined that it is the ending command. If so (S2406: Yes), the ending command for display is set (S2407), the value of the round number counter 223x is set to 0 (S2408), and this processing ends. again. If it is determined in the process of S2406 that no ending command has been received (S2406: No), it is determined whether the command received this time is a V pass command (S2409). (S2409: Yes), a V effect command is set (S2410), and this process ends. If it is determined in the process of S2409 that the V passage command has not been received (S2409: No), this process ends.

Next, the contents of the stop processing (S2214) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 198 is a flow chart showing the contents of the stop processing (S2214). In this stop process (S2214), a process for setting the display mode of the third symbol to be stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the timing of stopping the fluctuation of the special symbol is executed.

When this stop process (S2214) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the value of the continuous notice counter 223u is greater than 0 (S2501). When it is determined that the value of the continuous notice counter 223u is 0 or less (S2501: No), the process proceeds to S2505. If it is determined that the value of the continuous notice counter 223u is greater than 0 (S2501: Yes), 1 is subtracted from the value of the continuous notice counter 223u (S2502), and then whether or not the value of the continuous notice counter 223u is 0 is determined (S2503). If it is determined that the value of the continuous notice counter 223u is not 0 (S2503: No), the process proceeds to S2505. When it is determined that the value of the continuous notice counter 223u is 0 (S2503: Yes), the continuous notice flag 223v is set to OFF (S2504), and the process proceeds to S2505. In the process of S2505, the stop display of the corresponding third symbol is set (S2505), and then the process is terminated.

Next, the variable display setting process (S2115) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 199 is a flowchart showing this variable display setting process (S2115). This variable display setting process (S2115) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 194) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, and in order to execute the variable effect in the third symbol display device 81, Based on the variation pattern command received from main controller 110, a variation pattern command for display is generated and set.

In the variable display setting process (S2115: FIG. 199), first, it is determined whether or not the variable start flag 223d provided in the RAM 223 is ON (S2601). Then, if it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223d is not ON (that is, it is OFF) (S2601: No), since the fluctuation pattern command is not received from the main controller 110, S2612 Go to processing. On the other hand, if it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223d is on (S2601: Yes), the fluctuation start flag 223d is turned off (S2602), and the fluctuation pattern type in the fluctuation effect extracted from the display fluctuation pattern command is Acquired from the RAM 223 (S2603).

Next, it is determined whether or not the continuous notice setting flag 223t is ON (S2604). If it is determined that the continuous notice setting flag 223t is ON (S2604: Yes), the continuous notice setting flag 223t is set to OFF. Then (S2609), the continuous notice flag 223v is set to ON (S2610), and the process proceeds to S2608.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S2604 that the continuous notice setting flag 223t is off (S2604: No), then it is determined whether or not the continuous notice flag 223v is on (S2605). If it is determined that the continuous notice flag 223v is ON (S2605: Yes), the effect mode is determined based on the acquired variation pattern and the continuous notice effect (S2611), and the process proceeds to S2608. In the process of S2605, if it is determined that the continuous notice flag 223v is off (S2605: No), the variation effect pattern selection table 222a (FIGS. 160(a) and (b)) is changed based on the acquired variation pattern. A variable effect pattern is selected by referring to it (2606). Next, the production mode setting process is executed (S2607), and based on the acquired variation pattern type, a display variation pattern command for notification to the display control device 114 is generated, and the command is transmitted to the display control device 114 (S2608). The details of the rendering mode setting process executed in the process of S2607 will be described later with reference to FIG.

In the display control device 114, by receiving this display variation pattern command, the third pattern display device 81 performs the variation display of the third pattern in the variation pattern indicated by this display variation pattern command, Display control of the variable effect is started.

Next, although not shown, the data stored in the winning information storage area 223f is shifted. In this process, the data stored in the first to fourth areas of the winning information storage area 223f are sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the data in each area is shifted in the order of 1st area→execution area, 2nd area→1st area, 3rd area→2nd area, 4th area→3rd area. After shifting the data, the process proceeds to S2612.

In the processing of S2612, it is determined whether or not the stop type selection flag 223e provided in the RAM 223 is ON (S2612). Then, if it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223e is not ON (that is, it is OFF) (S2612: No), this processing is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223e is on (S2612: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223e is turned off (S2613), and the stop type in the variable effect extracted from the stop type command is Acquired from the RAM 223 (S2614). Next, the stop type instructed by the stop type command from the main controller 110 is set as it is as the stop type of the variable effect in the third symbol display device 81 (S2615), and the process proceeds to S2616.

In the process of S2616, based on the set stop type, a display stop type command for notification to the display control device 114 is generated, and the command is set for transmission to the display control device 114 (S2616). . In the display control device 114, by receiving this stop type command for display, the stop pattern corresponding to the stop type indicated by this stop type command for display is stopped and displayed on the third pattern display device 81. The stop display of the variable production is controlled. After the process of S2616 is executed, this process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 200, the content of the presentation mode setting process (S2607), which is one process in the variable display setting process (see FIG. 199) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, will be described. . FIG. 200 is a flow chart showing the contents of the rendering mode setting process (S2607). In this effect mode setting process (S2607), a process for setting a detailed effect mode (announcement content) of the variation effect of the third symbol corresponding to the variation of the special symbol is executed.

When the effect mode setting process (S2607) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the current game state is the normal state (S2701). Here, based on the information set in the state setting area 223g, it is determined whether or not the current game state is the variable probability state. In the process of S2701, when it is determined that the current state is not normal (S2701: No), the effect setting process during time saving and probability variation is executed (S2707), and the process proceeds to S2706. The details of the effect setting processing (S2707) during this time saving/probability variation will be described later with reference to FIG.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2701 that the current state is the normal state (S2701: Yes), then it is determined whether or not there is an operation effect in the variation effect pattern selected this time (S2702), and if there is an operation effect When it is determined (S2702: Yes), an operation effect setting process is executed (S2703), and the process proceeds to S2704. Details of the operation effect setting process (S2703) will be described later with reference to FIG.

In the processing of S2702, if it is determined that the currently selected variable performance pattern does not include an operation performance (S2702: No), then it is determined whether or not the currently selected variable performance pattern includes a battle performance (S2704). If it is determined that there is a battle effect (S2704: Yes), a battle effect setting process is executed (S2705), and the process proceeds to S2706. Details of the battle effect setting process (S2705) will be described later with reference to FIG.

In the process of S2704, if it is determined that the variation effect pattern selected this time does not include the battle effect (S2704: No), a display command for indicating various setting contents is set (S2706), and this process is executed. finish.

Next, with reference to FIG. 201, the contents of the operation effect setting process (S2703) executed in the effect mode setting process (see S2607 in FIG. 200) will be described. FIG. 201 is a flow chart showing the contents of the operation effect setting process (S2703). In this operation effect setting process (S2703), a preparatory process corresponding to the operation effect type included in the current variation pattern is executed.

When the operation effect setting process (S2703) is executed, first, the type of the operation effect is extracted (S2801), and it is determined whether or not the current operation effect is a repeated hit effect (S2802), and it is determined that it is a repeated hit effect. If so (S2801: Yes), a repeated hit effect setting process is executed (S2803), and the process proceeds to S2807. The details of the repeated hit effect setting process (S2803) will be described later with reference to FIG.

On the other hand, in the processing of S2801, if it is determined that it is not a continuous hit effect (S2801: No), then it is determined whether the current operation effect is a delayed effect (S2804), and if it is determined that it is a delayed effect (S2804: Yes), a delay effect setting process is executed (S2805), and the process proceeds to S2807. The details of this delay effect setting process (S2805) will be described later with reference to FIG.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2804 that the effect is not delayed (S2804: No), the process corresponding to the extracted other operation effect type is executed (S2806), and the process proceeds to S2807.

In the process of S2807, the operation effective period is determined based on the selected variable effect mode (S2807), and the process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 202, the content of the continuous hitting effect setting process (S2803) executed in the operation effect setting process (see FIG. 201, S2703) will be described. FIG. 202 is a flow chart showing the contents of the repeated hit effect setting process (S2803).

When the continuous hit effect setting process (S2803) is executed, first, based on the received variation pattern command, the success judgment result and the reach type are extracted (S2901), and the extracted success judgment result, the reach type, and the second effect counter and the upper limit number of times selection table 222b1 (see FIG. 162(b)) to determine the upper limit number of times and the final variable mode (S2902). Next, a value corresponding to the determined upper limit number of times is set in the upper limit number of times setting area 223q (S2903), and the extracted success/failure determination result, the determined upper limit number of times, and the value of the third effect counter are referred to, and the end number of times The selection table 222b2 (see FIG. 163(a)) is used to determine the end count (S2904), and a value corresponding to the determined upper limit count is set in the end count setting area 223r (S2905). Next, referring to the extracted success/failure determination result and the determined upper limit number of times, the effect result is determined (S2906), the effect mode of repeated hit effect corresponding to various determined contents is set (S2907), and the effect selection information is stored. Information about the mode of presentation set in the area is stored (S2908), and then this process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 203, the contents of the delay effect setting process (S2805) executed in the operation effect setting process (see FIG. 201, S2703) will be described. FIG. 203 is a flow chart showing the contents of the delay effect setting process (S2805).

When the delay effect setting process (S2805) is executed, first, the success/failure determination result is extracted based on the received variation pattern command (S3001), and the extracted success/failure determination result and the value of the seventh effect counter 223p7 are referred to. Then, using the delay effect selection table 222d (see FIG. 167), the delay period and the delay object are determined (S3002), and information on the effect mode set in the effect selection information storage area 223h is stored (S3003). , and then terminate this process.

In this control example, as described above, the contents of the delay effect and the delay object are set at the start of the fluctuation, and the start timing of the delay effect is set in the frame button input monitoring/effect processing (see S2107 in FIG. 208), which will be described later. However, without being limited to this, it may be configured to set the start timing of the delay effect as the start timing of the fluctuation. By configuring in this way, more delayed effects can be executed, and various effects can be provided to the player.

Next, with reference to FIG. 204, the contents of the battle effect setting process (S2705) executed in the effect mode setting process (see S2607 in FIG. 200) will be described. FIG. 204 is a flow chart showing the contents of the battle effect setting process (S2705). In this battle effect setting process (S2705), first, the success/failure determination result and the variation time are extracted based on the received variation pattern command (S3101), and the extracted success/failure determination result, the variation time, and the eighth effect counter , the number of characters and the number of characters are determined using the character number selection table 222e2 (see FIG. 168(c)) (S3102). (S3103), the character storage area 222e1 (FIG. 168(b)) is referred to, and the pattern row arrangement information of the determined character type is compared with the number of effects (S3104). Next, it is determined whether or not there is a pattern row for which the number of characters determined is greater than the number of effects (S3105). If it is determined that there is a pattern row in which the number of characters determined is greater than the number of appearances (S3105: Yes), the effect mode corresponding to the last acquisition chance is determined (S3106), and the process proceeds to S3107. If it is determined that there is no symbol row for which the number of characters determined is greater than the number of appearances (S3105: No), the process of S3106 is skipped and the process proceeds to S3107.

In the process of S3107, the effect mode of each effect is determined (S3107), the effect mode of the collective effect corresponding to various determined contents is set (S3108), and information on the effect mode set in the effect selection information storage area 223h is stored. Then (S3109), a battle second half effect setting process is executed (S3110), and then this process is terminated.

Next, with reference to FIG. 205, the contents of the battle second half effect setting process (S3110) executed in the battle effect setting process (see S2705 in FIG. 204) will be described. FIG. 205 is a flow chart showing the contents of the battle second half effect setting process (S3110). In this battle second half effect setting process (S3110), first, the number of characters to be acquired in the group effect is read out from the effect selection information storage area 223h (S3151), and the success/failure determination result, the number of characters, and the value of the ninth effect counter are read out. , the HP selection table 222f1 (see FIG. 169(b)) is used to determine the HP value of the battle opponent (S3152). The final remaining HP selection table 222f2 (see FIG. 169(c)) is referred to and the effect counter value is used to determine the remaining HP value (S3153). , and the value of the eleventh effect counter, the battle mode selection table 222f3 (see FIG. 170) is used to determine the number of battles (S3154). Next, based on the determined HP value and the remaining HP value, a reduced HP value to be decreased in the latter half of the battle production is determined (S3155), and based on the determined number of battles and the reduced HP value, each battle production is performed. is determined (S3156), the effect mode of repeated hitting effect corresponding to various determined contents is set (S3157), information on the effect mode set in the effect selection information storage area 223h is stored (S3158), and this process exit.

Next, with reference to FIG. 206, the contents of the effect setting process (S2707) for time reduction/probability variation executed in the effect mode setting process (see S2607 in FIG. 200) will be described. Figure 206 is the flowchart which shows the contents of production setting processing for time saving and probability variation (S2707). In this time saving/probability variation production setting process (S2707), first, it is determined whether or not the continuous production flag is ON (S3201). If it is determined that the continuous effect flag is ON (S3201: Yes), this process is terminated. If it is determined that the continuous effect flag is off (S3201: No), then it is determined whether or not the acquired variation pattern has a random display effect (S3202). If it is determined that there is no random display effect in the acquired variation pattern (S3202: No), this process is terminated. When it is determined that the acquired variation pattern has a random display effect (S3202: Yes), a random display effect setting process is executed (S3203), and this process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 207, the contents of the random display effect setting process (S3203) executed in the time saving/probability variable effect setting process (see S2707 in FIG. 207) will be described. FIG. 207 is a flow chart showing the contents of the random display effect setting process (S3203). In this random display effect setting process (S3203), first, the success/failure determination result is extracted based on the received variation pattern command (S3301). Using the display order selection table 222c2 (see FIG. 164(c)), the effect icon (top icon) to be displayed first is determined (S3302), and the extracted right/fail judgment result, the determined top icon, and the fifth effect Refer to the value of the counter, determine the permutation using the display mode selection table 222c4 (see FIG. 165(b)) (S3303), and refer to the extracted success/failure determination result and the value of the sixth effect counter. Then, using the display number selection table 222c5 (see FIG. 166), the number of display icons for the effect is determined (S3304), the effect mode of the random display effect corresponding to various determined contents is set (S3305), and the effect is selected. Information related to the effect mode set in the information storage area 223h is stored (S3306), and then this process is terminated.

Next, with reference to FIG. 208, the frame button input monitoring/effect processing (S2107), which is one of the main processing (see FIG. 194) executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113, will be described. FIG. 208 is a flow chart showing this frame button input monitoring/effect processing (S2107). In the frame button input monitoring/effect processing (S2107), it is determined whether or not the frame button 22 has been pressed, and based on the pressing, the execution of the notice effect or the like is set.

In the frame button input monitoring/effect processing (S2107: see FIG. 208), first, it is determined whether the frame button 22 has been operated (S3401), and if it is determined that the frame button 22 has not been operated (S3401: No). , the processing ends. If it is determined that the frame button 22 has been operated (S3401: Yes), it is determined whether the operation is currently valid (S3402). In the process of S3402, when the type of operation effect is set in the operation effect setting process (S2703 in FIG. 201), the operation effective period corresponding to the type is set in the operation effective timer 223n. indicates the operation valid period.

In the process of S3402, if it is determined that the operation valid period is not in effect (S3402: No), this process ends. If it is determined that the operation is valid (S3402: Yes), then it is determined whether the pressed flag 223k is set to ON (S3403), and if it is determined that the pressed flag 223k is ON (S3403: Yes), this processing ends. If it is determined that the pressed flag 223k is not set to ON (S3403: No), the pressed flag 223k is set to ON (S3404), and the operation content corresponding to the set operation valid period is read ( S3405), then, it is determined whether or not the operation content is a repeated hitting effect (S3406). If it is determined that the effect is repeated (S3406: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the number-of-presses counter 223m (S3407), and the process proceeds to S3411.

On the other hand, in the processing of S3406, if it is determined that the operation content is not the continuous hit effect (S3406: No), then it is determined whether or not the operation content is the delay effect (S3408). If it is determined that it is a delayed effect (S3408: Yes), a value corresponding to the delay period is set in the delay timer 223s (S3409), and then it is determined whether the voice mode of the delay effect content this time is delayed. (S3413). When it is determined that the voice mode is not delayed (that is, normal) (S3413: No), a voice command corresponding to the effect mode of delayed effect is set (S3414), and the process proceeds to S3411. On the other hand, when it is determined that the voice mode of the delay effect content this time is delayed (S3413: No), the process of S3414 is skipped and the process proceeds to S3411.

On the other hand, in the process of S3408, when it is determined that the operation content is not the delay effect (S3408: No), other processing corresponding to the operation content is executed (S3410), and the process proceeds to S3411. In the process of S3411, the operation mode corresponding to the current frame button operation is determined (S3411), the display command corresponding to the determined operation mode is set (S3412), and then this process ends.

In this control example, an example is shown in which a variable condition for varying the presentation mode of the operation presentation is established based on one operation (pressing) of the frame button 22, but the present invention is not limited to this. , the variable condition may be established when the frame button 22 is operated (pressed) a predetermined number of times (for example, 20 times) within the operation valid period, or an operation means having a plurality of operation methods may be provided, The variable condition may be established when the operation means is operated in a specific operation method.

Furthermore, in this control example, one flag (pressed flag 223k) is set to ON to indicate that the operation means has been operated. Alternatively, it may be configured to indicate different operation results, and to vary the presentation mode of the operation presentation in accordance with the type of the operation result.

Further, in this control example, the display effect displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is used as an example of the operation effect in which the effect mode is changed based on the operation of the operation means. However, without being limited to this, it may be configured to execute an effect of moving the decorative movable device provided in the pachinko machine 10 based on the operation of the frame button 22 (operating means).

In this control example, when the frame button 22 is operated when an operation effect other than the first operation effect or the second operation effect is being executed, an operation mode corresponding to the set operation effective period is determined. (see S3411 in FIG. 208), but other configurations may be used.

Specifically, within the effect period of the display effect executed by the third pattern display device 81, an operation valid period is set in which the operation of the frame button 22 (operation means) can be effectively determined, and the set operation is performed. The value of the operation valid timer 223n is set to determine the valid period. Then, storage means for storing the length of the set operation effective period and calculation means for calculating the remaining period of the operation effective period based on the value of the operation effective timer 223n at the time when the operation means is operated are provided. Further, it is preferable to provide an operation mode selection table in which different operation modes are defined according to the length of the remaining period calculated by the calculating means.

By configuring in this way, different operation modes are selected according to the timing at which the player operates the operation means (according to the remaining time at the time of operating the operation means), so that the player can be provided with a variety of effects. can provide.

In addition, an operation valid period setting means that can determine one operation valid period from among a plurality of operation valid periods and can be set within the effect period of the display effect, and an operation valid timer 223n at the time when the operation means is operated. and calculating means for calculating the progress rate (%) of the valid operation period based on the value of . By configuring in this way, it is possible to set different operation valid periods for display effects of the same display mode, and furthermore, based on the length of the set operation valid period and the timing of operating the operation means. The progress rate of the operation effective period to be calculated, that is, the length of the entire operation effective period is assumed to be 100, and the ratio of the period that has already passed (or the period that has not yet passed) is calculated as a percentage. The manner in which the operations are performed can be different.

As a result, even if the operation means are operated at the same timing based on the display performance executed by the third pattern display device 81, different operation modes can be set, thereby providing more diverse performances to the player. be able to.

Further, the operation mode is set according to the percentage value calculated by the calculating means instead of setting the operation mode according to the length of the remaining period (elapsed period) of the operation effective period. The range defined in the data table for selection can be limited to "1 to 100". In other words, when setting the operation mode according to the length of the remaining period (elapsed period) of the operation valid period, for example, when the length of the operation valid period can be set from 2 to 15 seconds, 6 seconds When the operation means is operated in the 3rd second when is set (remaining time 3 seconds), and when the operation means is operated in the 7th second when 14 seconds is set (remaining time 7 seconds) Since the remaining time differs between , and , different operation modes are set.

In addition, in the above-described examples, the operation means is operated at the midpoint of the operation effective period in any case, and the operation difficulty level is the same. It is necessary to define a data table so as to select an operation mode based not only on the remaining time of the effective period but also on the length of the set operation effective period and the remaining time of the operation effective period at the time when the operation means is operated. There is

In this case, if the length of the valid period of operation is set to be variable, the capacity of the data table described above will increase significantly, resulting in a situation where the data capacity is compressed. . On the other hand, by configuring the operation mode to be selected using a percentage value as described above, the same value can be used regardless of the length of the operation valid period, so that the operation mode can be selected. It is possible to reduce the data capacity of the data table for

In addition, as a dividing means for dividing the percentage value calculated by the calculating means into a plurality of ranges, for example, a first dividing means for dividing into "1% to 50%" and "51% to 99%", "1% to 10%", "11% to 20%", "21% to 30%", "41% to 50%", "51% to 60%", "61% to 70%" and "71 % to 80%", "81% to 90%", and "91% to 99%", and further, based on the presence or absence of establishment of predetermined conditions such as the result of lottery of special symbols. The percentage value calculated by the calculating means is divided by the dividing means determined by the determining means, and the operation mode is selected based on the divided information. It may be configured to

Further, in this way, when using a configuration in which the operation mode to be executed thereafter is varied according to the operation timing of the operation means, for example, the pachinko machine as the operation effect to be executed by operating the operation means It is preferable to use the effect of moving the movable accessory for effect provided in 10 . As a result, it is possible to perform the operation presentation without worrying about the period of the operation presentation executed based on the set operation mode and the display presentation period displayed on the display means.

Next, with reference to FIG. 209, the contents of the liquid crystal effect execution management process (S2110) will be described. FIG. 209 is a flow chart showing the contents of the liquid crystal effect execution management process (S2110). In the liquid crystal effect execution management process (S2110), the process of updating the effect mode of the special figure variation effect being executed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a predetermined variation pattern, and the effect mode of the special figure variation effect A process for replacing with an effect (normal pattern effect) based on the normal symbol lottery is executed.

When the liquid crystal effect execution management process (S2110) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not there is an operation effect in the variable effect being executed (S3501). When it is determined that there is no operation effect in the variable effect being executed (S3501: No), the process proceeds to S3511. If it is determined that there is an operation effect in the variable effect being executed (S3501: Yes), then it is determined whether or not it is 3 seconds before the operation effective period (S3502). If it is determined that it is 3 seconds before the operation valid period (S3502: Yes), a display command indicating that the operation valid period is set is set (S3503), and the process proceeds to S3511. If it is determined that it is not three seconds before the valid operation period (S3502: No), then it is determined whether or not it is the start of the valid operation period (S3504). If it is determined that the operation valid period has not started (S3504: No), the process of S3505 is skipped and the process proceeds to S3506. If it is determined that the valid operation period has started (S3504: Yes), a value corresponding to the length of the valid operation period set this time is set in the operation valid timer 223n (S3505), and the process proceeds to S3506. .

In the process of S3506, it is determined whether or not the value of the delay timer 223s is greater than 0 (S3506). If it is determined that the value of the delay timer 223s is 0 (S3506: No), the process proceeds to S3510. If it is determined that the value of the delay timer 223s is greater than 0 (S3506: Yes), 1 is subtracted from the value of the delay timer 223s (S3507), and then whether or not the subtracted value of the delay timer 223s is 0 is determined. It is determined (S3508). If it is determined that the subtracted value of the delay timer 223s is not 0 (S3508: No), the process proceeds to S3510. When it is determined that the value of the delay timer 223s is 0 (S3508: Yes), the start of the corresponding delay effect is set (S3509), and the process proceeds to S3510. In the process of S3510, another liquid crystal effect execution management process is executed (S3510), and this process ends.

In the process of S3511, another liquid crystal effect execution management process is executed (S3511), and this process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 210, the contents of the operation effect management process (S2111) will be described. FIG. 210 is a flow chart showing the contents of the operation effect management process (S2111). In this operation effect management process (S2111), a process for setting an effect mode based on the operation of the frame button 22 is executed while the operation effect is being executed.

When the operation effect management process (S2111) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the value of the operation valid timer 223n is greater than 0 (S3601). Then, if it is determined that the value of the operation valid timer 223n is 0 (S3601: No), this process is terminated. If it is determined that the value of the operation valid timer 223n is greater than 0 (S3601: Yes), 1 is subtracted from the value of the operation valid timer 223n (S3602). (S3603). Then, when it is determined that the value of the operation valid timer 223n is not 0 (S3603: No), the process proceeds to S3609. If it is determined that the value of the operation valid timer 223n is 0 (S3603: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the shortening flag is ON (S3604). If it is determined that the shortening flag is ON (S3604: Yes), the shortening flag is set to OFF (S3605), and the process proceeds to S3606. If it is determined that the shortening flag is off (S3604: No), the process of S3605 is skipped and the process proceeds to S3606.

In the processing of S3606, it is determined whether or not the value of the delay timer 223s is greater than 0 (S3606). If it is determined that the value of the delay timer 223s is 0 (S3606: No), a display command indicating that the valid operation period has expired is set (S3607), and the process proceeds to S3609. If it is determined that the value of the delay timer 223s is greater than 0 (S3606: Yes), a display command is set to extend and display the display screen showing the valid period of operation (S3608), and the process proceeds to S3609. do.

In the process of S3609, it is determined whether the pressed flag 223k is set to ON (S3609). If it is determined that the pressed flag 223k is set to OFF (S3609: No), the process proceeds to S3623. If it is determined that the pressed flag 223k is set to ON (S3609: Yes), the pressed flag 223k is set to OFF (S3610), the value of the pressed count counter 223m is read (S3611), and then the pressed It is determined whether or not the value of the number counter 223m is greater than 0 (S3612). Then, when it is determined that the value of the number-of-presses counter 223m is greater than 0 (S3612: Yes), the value stored in the upper-limit number-of-times setting area 223q is compared with the value of the number-of-presses counter 223m (S3613), Next, it is determined whether or not the value stored in the limit number setting area 223q matches the value of the pressing number counter 223m (S3614). If it is determined that the value stored in the limit setting area 223q and the value of the pressing counter 223m match (S3614: Yes), a display command indicating that the upper limit has been reached is issued. set (S3515) and proceed to the processing of S3620. If it is determined that the value stored in the limit number setting area 223q and the value of the press counter 223m do not match (S3614: No), the value stored in the end number setting area 223r and the press The value of the number counter 223m is compared (S3616), and it is determined whether the value stored in the end number setting area 223r and the value of the number of depression counter 223m match (S3617). If it is determined that the value stored in the end count setting area 223r and the value of the press count counter 223m match (S3617: Yes), the value of the press count counter 223m is reset (S3618), and the shortening flag is set. is turned on (S3619), and the process proceeds to S3620. If it is determined that the value stored in the end count setting area 223r and the value of the press count counter 223m do not match (S3617: No), the processing of S3618 and S3619 is skipped and the process proceeds to S3620. .

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of 3612 that the value of the number-of-presses counter 223m is 0 (S3612: No), then it is determined whether or not the shortening flag is ON (S3621). When it is determined that the shortening flag is ON (S3621: Yes), the specific effect is determined (S3622), and the process proceeds to S3623. If it is determined that the shortening flag is off (S3621: No), the corresponding button effect is set (S3620), and the process proceeds to S3623.

In the process of S3623, a display effect command corresponding to each set effect mode is set (S3623), and this process is terminated.

<Regarding control processing in the display control device 114>
Next, each control executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIGS. 211 to 225. FIG. The processing of the MPU 231 can be broadly classified into main processing that is repeatedly executed after the power is turned on, command interrupt processing that is executed when a command is received from the audio lamp control device 113, and processing for one frame from the image controller 237. There is V interrupt processing that is executed when the MPU 231 detects a V interrupt signal that is transmitted every 20 milliseconds when image drawing processing is completed. The MPU 231 normally executes main processing, and executes command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing in accordance with reception of a command and detection of a V interrupt signal. If command reception and V interrupt signal detection are performed at the same time, command reception processing is preferentially executed. As a result, it is possible to quickly reflect the content of the command received from the sound lamp control device 113 and execute the V interrupt process.

First, with reference to FIG. 211, main processing executed by the MPU 231 in the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 211 is a flow chart showing this main process. The main processing is to execute initialization processing when the power is turned on.

Activation of this main process is specifically performed according to the following flow. When power is turned on from the power supply circuit 115 to the display control device 114 and the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the instruction pointer 231a provided in the MPU 231 to "0000H" and , the address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a is specified for the bus line 240. FIG. When the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address designated on the bus line 240 is "0000H", it sets the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d in the buffer RAM 234c. , and outputs the corresponding data (instruction code) to the MPU 231 . Then, the MPU 231 fetches the received instruction code from the character ROM 234, and starts the main process by starting the execution of the process according to the fetched instruction.

Here, if all the boot programs to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the character ROM 234 indicates that the address designated to the bus line 240 is "0000H". When detected, one page of data including the data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" must be read from the NAND flash memory 234a and set in the buffer RAM 234c. Due to the nature of the NAND type flash memory 234a, it takes a long time to read out and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. It will consume a lot of waiting time. Therefore, the time taken to start the MPU 231 becomes longer, and as a result, there arises a problem that the control of the third pattern display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

On the other hand, as in the present control example, the NOR ROM 234d stores a predetermined number of instructions from the boot program that should be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is canceled, thereby speeding up the NOR ROM. Since it is a memory from which data can be read, when the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 is immediately stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d. The stored boot program can be set in the buffer RAM 234 c and the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231 . Therefore, since the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after specifying the address "0000H", the MPU 231 can start the main process in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the control of the third pattern display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

When the main process is executed as described above, first, the boot process executed by the boot program is executed (S6001), and the display control device 114 is set so that various controls for the third symbol display device 81 can be executed. to start.

Here, referring to FIG. 212, the boot processing (S6001) will be described. FIG. 212 is a flowchart showing boot processing (S6001) executed in the main processing in the MPU 231 of the display control device 114. FIG.

As described above, in this control example, the control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 231 are stored in the third symbol display device 81 instead of being stored in a dedicated program ROM as in the conventional gaming machine. The character ROM 234 provided for storing the data of the image to be displayed is stored. The character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND-type flash memory 234a capable of increasing the capacity with a small area. There is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing programs and the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in failure rate due to an increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

On the other hand, the NAND flash memory has a slow read speed, especially when performing random access. Even if a high-performance processor is used, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may deteriorate. Therefore, in this boot process, the control program and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are stored in the program storage area 233a provided in the work RAM 233 constituted by DRAM and the data table. A process of transferring and storing in the storage area 233b is executed.

Specifically, first, based on the hardware operations of the MPU 231 and the character ROM 234 described above, the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR-type ROM 234d and set in the buffer RAM 234c after the system reset is canceled is executed. Of the control programs stored in the 2-program storage area 234a1, a predetermined amount is transferred to the program storage area 233a (S6101). The predetermined amount of control programs transferred here includes the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1.

Then, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, the head address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a (S6102). As a result, the MPU 231 starts executing the rest of the boot program included in the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a by the process of S6101.

By setting the command pointer 231a to a predetermined address in the program storage area 233a by the processing of S6102, the MPU 231 can execute various processes while reading the control program stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. become. That is, the MPU 231 does not read the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetch the instruction, but rather reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction. and execute various processing. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of a DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch the instruction at high speed and execute the process for the instruction.

After the command pointer 231a is set by the process of S6102, the remaining boot program whose execution is started by the set command pointer 231a is stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a. Of the control programs stored, the remaining control programs and fixed value data that have not been transferred to the program storage area 233a are transferred by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b (S6103). Specifically, the control program and some fixed data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233, and the above-mentioned various data tables (display data table, transfer data table) of the fixed value data are stored in the data table. Transfer to the storage area 233b.

After executing other processes necessary for the boot process (S6104), the instruction pointer 231a is moved to the second predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, after the boot process (see S6001 in FIG. 211) is completed. By setting the top address of the program corresponding to the initializing process (see S6002 in FIG. 211) (S6105), the execution of the boot program is finished, and the boot process ends.

By executing the boot process (S6001) in this way, the control program and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are stored in the work RAM 233, which is composed entirely of DRAM. It is transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table storage area 233b. At the end of the boot process, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address, and thereafter the MPU 231 reads the control program transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Various processing is executed using

Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a whose read speed is slow, the control program and fixed value data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 and the fixed value data after the system reset is released. By transferring to the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 can read the control program and fixed value data from the work RAM configured by the DRAM with a high read speed and perform various controls. High processing performance can be maintained, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed using the auxiliary effect part.

On the other hand, without storing the entire boot program in the NOR type ROM 234d, a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, and the rest of the boot program is stored in the NAND type flash memory 234a. , the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start up the MPU 231 in a short time simply by adding a NOR type ROM 234d with a very small capacity. can be done.

In the boot process shown in FIG. 212, the predetermined amount of control programs transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S6101 includes all remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. However, it is not necessarily limited to this. may be part of As for the boot program transferred here, a predetermined amount of the control program including all remaining boot programs is transferred to the program storage area 233a. 231a may be executed. Then, the processes of S6103 to S6105 may be executed by all the remaining boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a.

In addition, the boot program transferred by the process of S6101 transfers a part of the remaining boot program by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a, and then the beginning of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a. A process of setting an address to the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. In addition, part of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a by this processing is further transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount of part of the remaining boot program, and subsequently stored in the program storage area 233a. A process of setting the start address of the stored boot program to the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Then, a predetermined amount of a part of the remaining boot program is transferred to the program storage area 233a, and then the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a is set in the instruction pointer 231a in step S6101. and the processing of S6102 may be repeated a plurality of times, and then the processing of S6103 to S6105 may be executed.

As a result, even if the program size of the boot program is large and the rest of the boot program not stored in the first program storage area 234d1 cannot be transferred to the program storage area 233a at once, the MPU 231 is already stored in the program storage area 233a. Using the boot program, a predetermined amount can be transferred to the program storage area 233a.

Further, in this control example, the first program storage area 234d1 stores a part of the boot program that is first executed by the MPU 231 when the system reset is released. It may be stored in the 1-program storage area 234d1. In this case, the MPU 231 may perform the processes of S6103 to S6105 without performing the processes of S6101 and S6102 after starting the boot process. This eliminates the need to transfer the boot program to the program storage area 233a, reducing the number of times the program is transferred to the character ROM 234 or the program storage area 233a, thereby reducing the boot processing time. Therefore, it is possible to start the control of the auxiliary effect section in the MPU 231, which becomes possible after the boot process, more quickly.

Now, return to the description of FIG. 211 . After the boot process is completed, the initial setting process is executed according to the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 (S6002). Specifically, the value of the stack pointer is set in the MPU 231, and various settings are made for the registers in the MPU 231 and the I/O device. In addition, processing for clearing the memory of the work RAM 233, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 is performed. Further, various flags are provided in the work RAM 233, and initial values are set to the respective flags. As the initial value of each flag, "off" or "0" is set unless otherwise specified.

Further, in the initial setting process, after initializing the image controller 237, the image controller 237 is instructed to draw an image so that an image of a specific color is displayed on the entire screen of the third pattern display device 81. and instructs execution of display processing. As a result, immediately after the power is turned on, an image of a specific color is first displayed on the entire screen of the third pattern display device 81 . Here, the color of the image displayed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on is set to be a different color depending on the model of the pachinko machine. As a result, in the operation check at the factory or the like at the time of manufacture, immediately after the power is turned on, it is inspected whether or not the image of the color corresponding to the model is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the pachinko machine 10 It is possible to easily and immediately judge whether or not the activation can be started normally.

Next, a transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller 237 to transfer the image data corresponding to the power-on main image to the power-on main image area 235a of the resident video RAM 235 (S6003). This transfer instruction includes the leading and trailing addresses of the character ROM 234 storing the image data corresponding to the main image when the power is turned on, the transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination. The image controller 237 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 according to this transfer instruction. It is transferred to the image area 235a.

Then, when the transfer of all the image data indicated by the transfer instruction is completed, the image controller 237 transmits a transfer end signal indicating transfer end to the MPU 231 . By receiving this transfer end signal, the MPU 231 can grasp that the transfer of the image data designated by the transfer instruction has ended. When the transfer of all the image data indicated by the transfer instruction is completed, the image controller 237 stores transfer end information indicating transfer end in a register provided inside the image controller 237 or in a partial area of the built-in memory. It may be written. The MPU 231 reads information from this register or a partial area of the built-in memory at any time, and detects the writing of transfer end information by the image controller 237, thereby ascertaining that the transfer of the image data designated by the transfer instruction has ended. You may do so.

The image data transferred to the main image area 235a when the power is turned on is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off. When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on main image to the power-on main image area 235a is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 by the processing in S6003, the power-on variation image is transferred to the power-on main image area 235a. A transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller so as to transfer the image data corresponding to . This transfer instruction contains the head address of the character ROM 234 storing the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image, the data size of the image data, and information on the transfer destination (here, the resident video RAM 235). , and the head address of the power-on fluctuation image area 235b, which is the transfer destination. It is transferred to the change image area 235b when the power is turned on. The image data transferred to the power-on variation image area 235b is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off.

When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image to the power-on variation image area 235b is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 by the processing of S6004, then the simple image display flag 233c is set. is turned on (S6005). As a result, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 in the transfer setting process (see FIG. 223(a)), which will be described later. Resident image transfer setting processing for instructing the image controller 237 to transfer is executed (see S7402 in FIG. 223(a)).

Further, the simple image display flag 233c indicates that all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 based on the transfer instruction to the image controller 237 by the resident image transfer setting process. Remains on until terminated. As a result, during this period, the V interrupt processing (see FIG. 213(b)) executes the simple command determination processing so that the power-on image shown in (power-on main image and power-on fluctuation image) is drawn. (See S6308 in FIG. 213B) and simple display setting processing (See S6309 in FIG. 213B) are executed.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 uses the NAND flash memory 234a for the character ROM 234. Due to its slow read speed, all the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is It takes a long time to transfer from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 . Therefore, as in this main processing, after the power is turned on, the power-on main image and the power-on varying image are first transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, and the main image at power-on is transferred to the third image. By displaying it on the symbol display device 81, while the remaining image data to be resident is being transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player and the people involved in the hall can see the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on. You can check the main image. Therefore, the display control device 114 takes time to transfer the remaining image data to be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 while displaying the main image on the third pattern display device 81 when the power is turned on. be able to. On the other hand, while the main image is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, the player or the like can recognize that some initialization processing is being performed, so that the rest of the resident video RAM 235 can be resident. It is possible to wait until the initialization is completed without worrying whether the operation is stopped while the image data to be processed is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 .

Also, in an operation check at a factory or the like during manufacturing, since the main image is immediately displayed on the third pattern display device 81 when the power is turned on, the operation of the third pattern display device 81 is started without any problem when the power is turned on. Therefore, it is possible to prevent deterioration of the operation check efficiency by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed for the character ROM 234. FIG.

In the display control device 114 of the pachinko machine 10, after the power is turned on, the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, so that the power-on main image is the third symbol. When the player starts the game while the display is displayed on the display device 81, a ball is entered into the first start port 64 (start winning), and an instruction to start the variable effect is issued from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device. 113, that is, when a display variation pattern command is received, a power-on variation image (not shown) is immediately displayed during the variation presentation period, and a simple variation presentation can be performed. can. Therefore, even while the main image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 when the power is turned on, the player can confirm that the lottery has been surely performed by the simple variation performance.

Further, as described above, while the remaining image data to be resident is being transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, the third pattern display device 81 continues to display the main image when the power is turned on. is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, it takes a long time to transfer the data. However, in this pachinko machine 10, since it is possible to perform a simple variation effect using the power-on fluctuation image transferred to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on, immediately after the power is turned on, for example, after the power is restored, Immediately after the power is turned on, even while the main image is being displayed, the player can play the game with peace of mind.

After the processing of S6005, interrupt permission is set (S6006), and thereafter, the main processing executes infinite loop processing until the power is turned off. Accordingly, after the interrupt permission is set by the process of S6006, the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process are executed according to the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal.

Next, command interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. 213(a). FIG. 213(a) is a flow chart showing the command interrupt processing. As described above, when a command is received from the audio lamp control device 113, the MPU 231 executes command interrupt processing.

In this command interrupt process, the received command data is extracted, and the extracted command data is sequentially stored in the command buffer area provided in the work RAM 233 (S6201), and the process ends. Various commands stored in the command buffer area by this command interrupt processing are read out by command determination processing or simple command determination processing of V interrupt processing to be described later, and processing corresponding to the command is performed.

Next, V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. 213(b). FIG. 213(b) is a flow chart showing the V interrupt processing. In this V interrupt process, various processes corresponding to the command stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process are executed, and after specifying the image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81, the image is drawn. By creating a list (see FIG. 176) and transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, the image controller 237 is instructed to execute drawing processing and display processing of the image.

As described above, this V interrupt process is started when the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 is detected. This V interrupt signal is a signal that is generated in the image controller 237 and sent to the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing processing for one frame is completed. Therefore, by executing the V interrupt process in synchronization with this V interrupt signal, a drawing instruction is issued to the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of the image for one frame is completed. become. Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive an instruction to draw the next image before the image drawing processing or display processing is completed. It is possible to prevent an image from being developed in accordance with a new drawing instruction in a frame buffer storing image information being displayed.

Here, first, an outline of the flow of V interrupt processing will be described, and then details of each processing will be described with reference to other drawings. In this V interrupt process, as shown in FIG. 213(b), first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S6301). If it is off (S6301: No), it means that the transfer of all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been completed. In order to display on the display device 81, command determination processing (S6302) is executed, and then display setting processing (S6303) is executed.

In the command determination process (S6302), the content of the command from the sound lamp control device 113 stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process is analyzed, and the process corresponding to the command is executed. When the display variation pattern command is stored, the demonstration display data table or the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern type is set in the display data table buffer 233d, and the transfer corresponding to the set display data table is performed. The data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

In this command determination process, all commands stored in the command buffer area at that time are analyzed and processed. This is because command determination processing is performed at intervals of 20 milliseconds when V interrupt processing is executed, and there is a high possibility that multiple commands are stored in the command buffer area during those 20 milliseconds. be. In particular, when main controller 110 decides to start a variable effect, there is a high possibility that a display variation pattern command, a display stop type command, and the like are stored in the command buffer area at the same time. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands all at once, it is possible to quickly comprehend the mode and stop type of the variable performance selected by the main control device 110 and the sound lamp control device 113, and generate a performance image corresponding to the mode. Drawing of an image can be controlled so as to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 . Details of this command determination process will be described later with reference to FIGS.

In the display setting process (S6303), based on the contents of the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the command determination process (S6302), etc., an image for one frame to be displayed next on the third pattern display device 81 is displayed. specifically identify the content of In addition, depending on the status of processing, etc., the effect mode to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 is determined, and the display data table corresponding to the determined effect mode is set in the display data table buffer 233d. Details of this display setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS.

After the display setting process is executed, task processing is executed (S6304). In this task processing, the image is configured based on the content of the next one-frame image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 specified by the display setting processing (S6303) or the simple display setting processing (S6309). The type of sprite (display object) to be displayed is specified, and various parameters required for drawing such as display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, and rotation angle are determined for each sprite.

Next, transfer setting processing is executed (S6305). In this transfer setting process, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, the image controller 237 is caused to transfer image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined area of the resident video RAM 235. Set instructions. While the simple image display flag 233c is off, predetermined image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image controller 237 based on the transfer data information of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. When a transfer instruction to transfer to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the video RAM 236 is set, and a continuous notice command (not shown) is received from the sound lamp control device 113, the continuous notice is sent to the image controller 237. A transfer instruction is set to transfer the image data of the continuous preview images used in the effect and the image data of the back image after change from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. FIG. Details of the transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 223 and 224. FIG.

Next, drawing processing is executed (S6306). In this drawing process, based on the types of sprites that make up one frame determined in the task process (S6304) and the parameters necessary for drawing each sprite, and the transfer instruction set in the transfer setting process (S6305), , generates a drawing list shown in FIG. As a result, the image controller 237 executes image drawing processing according to the drawing list. Details of the rendering process will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, update processing of various counters provided in the display control device 114 is executed (S6307). Then, the V interrupt process ends. As a counter updated by the process of S6307, for example, there is a stop symbol counter (not shown) for determining a stop symbol. The value of the stop symbol counter is stored in the work RAM 233, and is updated each time the V interrupt process is executed. Then, when the reception of the stop type command for display is detected in the command determination process, the stop type table corresponding to the stop type (jackpots A to D) indicated by the stop type command for display is compared with the stop type counter. , the stop symbol after the variable effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is finally set.

On the other hand, in the process of S6301, if it is determined that the simple image display flag 233c is ON (S6301: Yes), it means that the transfer of all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been completed. Therefore, in order to display the power-on image (not shown) on the third pattern display device 81, the simple command determination process (S6308) is executed, then the simple display setting process (S6309) is executed, and the process of S6304 is executed. Move to

Next, with reference to FIGS. 214 to 219, details of the command determination process (S6302), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. First, FIG. 214 is a flowchart showing this command determination processing.

In this command determination process (FIG. 214, S6302), as shown in FIG. 214, first, it is determined whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area (S6401). (S6401: No), the command determination process is terminated and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, if there is an unprocessed new command (S6401: Yes), the new command flag for notifying the display setting process (S6303) that the new command has been processed is set to ON (S6402). The command types are analyzed for all unprocessed commands stored in the buffer area (S6403).

Then, among the unprocessed commands, it is first determined whether or not there is a display variation pattern command (S6404), and if there is a display variation pattern command (S6404: Yes), the variation pattern command process is executed. (S6405) and returns to the processing of S6401.

Here, the details of the variation pattern command process (S6405) will be described with reference to FIG. 215(a). FIG. 215(a) is a flow chart showing variation pattern command processing. In this variation pattern command processing, processing corresponding to the display variation pattern command received from the sound lamp control device 114 is executed.

In the variation pattern command process, first, the variation display data table corresponding to the variation effect pattern indicated by the variation pattern command for display is determined, and the determined variation display data table is read out from the data table storage area 233b to display the display data table. It is set in the buffer 233d (S6501).

Here, since the main controller 110 always determines the start of variation at a distance of several seconds or more, it does not receive two or more display variation pattern commands within 20 milliseconds. When executing, it is impossible that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, but part of the command changes due to the influence of noise, etc., and another command is mistakenly used for display. It could be interpreted as a variation pattern command. In the process of S6501, in preparation for such a case, if it is determined that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern with the shortest variation time is set in the display data table buffer 233d.

If a variation display data table corresponding to a variation pattern with a long variation time is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the main control device will actually produce a variation effect with a shorter variation time than the set display data table. 110, the next display variation pattern command is received from the main control device 110 while the variation performance according to the set variation display data table is being displayed on the third pattern display device 81. As a result, another variable display is suddenly started, which may make the player feel uncomfortable.

On the other hand, as in this control example, by setting the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern with the shortest variation time in the display data table buffer 233d, the variation longer than the set display data table can be actually obtained. Even if the variable effect with time is instructed by main controller 110, after the variable effect according to display data table buffer 233d is completed, main controller 110 will send the next display for display, as will be described later. Since the display of the third pattern display device 81 is controlled by the display setting process so that the demonstration effect is displayed until the pattern command is received, the player can feel the third pattern display on the third pattern display device 81 without any discomfort. 3 You can continue to see the variation of the pattern.

Next, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in S6501 is determined, read from the data table storage area 233b, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S6502). Then, among the data table discrimination flags provided for each variation display data table corresponding to each variation pattern, the data table discrimination flag corresponding to the variation display data table set by the processing of S6501 is turned on, and other variations The data table determination flag corresponding to the display data table is set to off (S6503). In the display setting process, by referring to the data table determination flag set by the process of S6503, it is possible to easily determine which variation pattern the variation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d corresponds to. can judge.

Next, based on the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S6501, time data representing the fluctuation time is set in the clock counter 233h (S6504), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S6505). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the fixed display flag 233z are set to OFF (S6506), the variation pattern command is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

By executing this variation pattern command process, in the display setting process, while updating the pointer 233f initialized by the process of S6505, the variable display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S6501 , extracts the drawing contents specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f, and specifies the contents of the image for one frame to be displayed next on the third pattern display device 81. At the same time, the transfer data table buffer 233e The transfer data information specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted from the transfer data table set to 1, and the sprite image data required in the set variable display data table is stored in advance from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. image storage area 236a.

In addition, in the display setting process, the time counter 233h to which the time data is set by the process of S6504 is used to measure the time of the variable presentation specified in the variable display data table, and when the variable presentation in the variable display data table ends. When it is determined, the setting of the stop display is controlled so that the stop pattern corresponding to the stop type command for display from the main control device 110 is displayed on the third design display device 81 .

Now, return to the description of FIG. 214 . In the process of S6404, if it is determined that there is no display variation pattern command (S6404: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display stop type command in the unprocessed commands (S6406), If there is a stop type command for display (S6406: Yes), the stop type command process is executed (S6407), and the process returns to S6401.

Details of the stop type command process (S6407) will now be described with reference to FIG. 215(b). FIG. 215(b) is a flowchart showing stop type command processing. This stop type command processing is for executing processing corresponding to the display variation type command received from the sound lamp control device 114 .

In the stop type command process, first, a stop type table corresponding to the stop type information (jackpots A to D) indicated by the stop type command for display is determined (S6601), and the stop type table and V interrupt processing (Fig. 213(b)) is executed, and the value of the stop type counter updated each time is executed to finally set the stop design after the variable effect displayed on the third design display device 81 (S6602). ).

Then, among the stop symbol discrimination flags provided for each of the stop symbols, the stop symbol discrimination flags corresponding to the stop symbols set by the processing of S6602 are turned on, and the stop symbol discrimination flags corresponding to the other stop symbols are turned on. It is set to off (S6603). After that, the process returns to S6401 in FIG.

Here, as described above, in the variation display data table, the type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 after a predetermined time has passed since the variation based on the data table is started. , offset information (design offset information) from the stop design set by the processing of S6602. In the above-described task processing (S6304), after a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variation, the stop design set by the process of S6602 is specified from the stop design determination flag set by S6603, and the specified stop By adding the design offset information acquired by the display setting process to the design, the third design to be actually displayed is specified. Then, the address where the image data corresponding to the specified third pattern is stored is specified. Image data corresponding to the third design is stored in the third design area 235d of the resident video RAM 235, as described above.

Returning to FIG. 214, the description continues. In the process of S6406, if it is determined that there is no stop type command for display (S6406: No), then it is determined whether there is a jackpot related command in the unprocessed commands (S6408). When it is determined that the jackpot related command is received (S6408: Yes), the jackpot related command process for display is executed (S6409). Details of the display jackpot-related command processing (S6409) will be described in detail with reference to FIGS.

Here, with reference to FIG. 216, the display jackpot-related command processing (S6409) will be described. FIG. 216 is a flowchart showing the display jackpot-related command processing (S6409), and processing corresponding to the display opening command received from the sound lamp control device 113, the display round number command, and the display ending command. is executed.

In the display jackpot-related command processing (FIG. 216, S6409), first, it is determined whether or not there is an opening command for display (S6701). If it is determined in the process of S6701 that there is an opening command for display (S6701: Yes), the opening command process is executed (S6702), and the process proceeds to the process of S6703.

Details of the opening command processing (S6702) will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 217(a) is a flow chart showing the opening command process (S6702). This opening command process (S6702) is a process executed when it is determined that there is an opening command for display in the jackpot-related command process for display (see S6409 in FIG. 216). is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 .

In the opening command process (S6702), first, an opening display data table corresponding to the command (for example, corresponding to the jackpot type) is determined and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S6801). Next, the transfer data table corresponding to the opening display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S6802). After that, based on the opening display data table, time data is set in the clock counter 233h (S6803), the pointer 233f is initialized (S6804), and the demonstration display flag 233y and final display flag 233z are set off (S6805). , the process ends.

Returning to FIG. 216, the description continues. In the process of S6701, if it is determined that there is no display opening command (S6701: No), the process proceeds to S6703. After completing the processing of S6701 or S6702, it is determined whether or not there is a display round number command (S6703). In the process of S6703, if it is determined that there is a display round number command (S6703: Yes), the round number command process is executed (S6704), and the process proceeds to S6705.

Details of the round number command processing (S6704) will now be described with reference to FIG. 217(b). FIG. 217(b) is a flow chart showing the round number command processing (S6704). This round number command process (S6704) is a process executed when it is determined that the display round number command is received in the display jackpot related command process (see S6409 in FIG. 216). This is a process for causing the third symbol display device 81 to display an effect when the number of rounds is updated.

In the round number command processing (S6704), first, the round number display data table corresponding to the command is determined and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S6811). Next, the transfer data table buffer 233e is cleared (S6812), and time data is set in the clock counter 233h based on the round number display data table (S6813). After that, the pointer 233f is initialized (S6814), the demonstration display flag 233y and the fixed display flag 233z are set to OFF (S6815), and this process is terminated.

Returning to FIG. 216, the description continues. In the process of S6703, if it is determined that there is no display round number command (S6703: No), the process proceeds to S6705. After completing the processing of S6703 or S6704, it is determined whether or not a display ending command has been received (S6705). In the process of S6705, if it is determined that there is an ending command for display (S6705: Yes), the ending command process is executed (S6706), and the process proceeds to S6707.

Details of the ending command processing (S6706) will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 218(a) is a flow chart showing the ending command process (S6706). This ending command process (S6706) is a process executed when it is determined that an ending command has been received in the display jackpot related command process (see S6409 in FIG. 216), and an effect suggesting the end of the jackpot game is performed. This is processing for displaying on the third pattern display device 81 .

In the ending command process (S6706), first, the ending display data table corresponding to the command is determined and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S6851). Next, the transfer data table buffer 233e is cleared (S6852), and time data is set in the clock counter 233h based on the ending display data table (S6853). After that, the pointer 233f is initialized (S6854), the demonstration display flag 233y and the fixed display flag 233z are set to off (S6855), and this processing ends.

Returning to FIG. 216, the description continues. In the process of S6705, if it is determined that there is no display ending command (S6705: No), the process proceeds to S6707. After completing the processing of S6705 or S6706, it is determined whether or not there is a display V effect command (S6707). In the process of S6707, if it is determined that there is no V effect command for display (S6707: No), this process ends. If it is determined that there is a display V effect command (S6707: Yes), V effect command processing is executed (S6708), and then this processing ends.

Details of the V effect command process (S6708) will now be described with reference to FIG. 218(b). This V effect command processing (S6708) is a process that is executed when it is determined that the V effect command is received in the display jackpot related command processing (see FIG. 216), and the probability that a jackpot game is awarded is This is a process for displaying on the third symbol display device 81 an effect suggesting that the price is high.

In the V effect command processing (S6708), first, the V effect display data table corresponding to the received command is determined and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S6901). Next, the transfer data table buffer 233e is cleared (S6902), and time data is set in the clock counter 233h based on the V effect display data table (S6903). After that, the pointer 233f is initialized (S6904), the demonstration display flag 233y and the fixed display flag 233z are set to off (S6905), and this processing ends.

Returning to FIG. 214, the description continues. In the process of S6408, if it is determined that there is no jackpot-related command (S6408: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a back image change command in the unprocessed commands (S6410), and the back image If there is a change command (S6410: Yes), the back image change command process is executed (S6411), and the process returns to S6401.

Here, with reference to FIG. 219(a), details of the back image change command process (S6411) will be described. FIG. 219(a) is a flowchart showing back image change command processing. The back image change command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the back image change command received from the sound lamp control device 113 .

In the back image change command processing, first, the back image change flag for notifying the normal image transfer setting processing (see S7403 in FIG. 224) of the change in the back image accompanying the reception of the back image change command in the ON state is set to ON. (S7001). Then, among the back image determination flags provided for each back image type (back surface A to D), the back image determination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the back image change command is turned on, and the other back image is turned on. The back image determination flag corresponding to the type is set to OFF (S7002), the back image change command processing is terminated, and the command determination processing is returned to.

In the normal image transfer setting process, when it is detected that the back image change flag set by the process of S7609 is turned on, the back image type after change is specified from the back image discrimination flag set by the process of S7610. . Then, if the specified back image type is back B, as described above, part of the image data corresponding to those back images is not resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. Then, a transfer instruction is set for the image controller 237 so that the image data corresponding to the rear image of a predetermined range is transferred from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. FIG.

Further, in the task processing, if it is specified that one of the back faces A to D is to be displayed according to the back face type of the back face image defined in the display data table, the back face image determination flag set in S7002 is used to determine the The type of the background image to be displayed at the time is specified, the range of the background image to be displayed is specified according to the passage of time, and the RAM type (resident video RAM 235 for normal use or video RAM 236 for normal use) and the address of that RAM.

Since the player does not continuously operate the frame button 22 for 20 milliseconds or less, two or more back image change commands are not received within 20 milliseconds, so the command determination process is executed. In this case, there should be no cases where two or more background image change commands are stored in the command buffer area. It could be interpreted as a command. In the process of S4702, if it is determined that two or more back image commands are stored in the command buffer area, the back image discrimination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the previously received back image command is turned on. Alternatively, the rear image discrimination flag corresponding to the rear image type indicated by the rear image command received later may be turned on. Alternatively, any one back image change command may be extracted and the back image determination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the command may be turned on. Since the change of the back image does not directly affect the game value of the pachinko machine 10, it is preferable to appropriately set it according to the characteristics and operability of the pachinko machine 10. FIG.

Now, return to the description of FIG. 214 . In the processing of S6410, if it is determined that there is no back image change command (S6410: No), then it is determined whether or not there is an error command among the unprocessed commands (S6412). Otherwise (S6412: Yes), the error command process is executed (S6413), and the process returns to S6401.

Details of the error command processing (S6413) will now be described with reference to FIG. 219(b). FIG. 219(b) is a flowchart showing error command processing. This error command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the error command received from the audio lamp controller 114 .

In the error command process, first, an error occurrence flag indicating that an error has occurred in the ON state is set to ON (S7101). Then, among the error determination flags provided for each error type, the error determination flag corresponding to the error type indicated by the error command is turned on, and the other error determination flags are set to off (S7102). End the process and return to the command determination process.

In the display setting process, when the occurrence of an error is detected based on the error occurrence flag set by the process of S7101, the type of error that has occurred is determined from the error determination flag set by the process of S7102, and the error type is handled. A process is executed to cause the third symbol display device 81 to display a warning image to be displayed.

If it is determined that two or more error commands are stored in the command buffer area, in the process of S7102, error discrimination flags corresponding to all error types indicated by the respective error commands are set to ON. As a result, the warning images corresponding to all the error types are displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the player and the people involved in the hall can correctly grasp the occurrence of the error.

Now, return to the description of FIG. 214 . If it is determined in the process of S6412 that there is no error command (S6412: No), then the process corresponding to other unprocessed commands is executed (S6414), and the process returns to the process of S6401.

In the process of S6401, which is executed again after each command has been processed, it is again determined whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, and if there is an unprocessed new command (S6401: Yes ), and the processing of S6402 to S6414 is executed again. Then, the processing of S6401 to S6414 is repeatedly executed until there is no unprocessed new command in the command buffer area. End the process.

The simple command determination process (S6308) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is ON in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 213(b)) is similar to the command determination process. However, in the simple command determination process, commands necessary for displaying the power-on image shown in FIG. Only type commands are extracted, and variation pattern command processing (see FIG. 215 (a)) and stop type command processing (see FIG. 215 (b)), which are processes corresponding to each command, are executed, and other A command is discarded without executing the process corresponding to the command.

Here, in the variation pattern command processing (see FIG. 215(a)) executed in this case, in the processing of S6501, the display data table buffer corresponding to the display of the variation image at power-on is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. The image data of the power-on main image and the power-on varying image that are set and required in that case are stored in the power-on main moving image area 235a and the power-on varying moving image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, in the process of S6502, the process of writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e and clearing the contents thereof is performed.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 220 to 222, the details of the display setting process (S6303), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 220 is a flow chart showing this display setting process.

In this display setting process, as shown in FIG. 220, it is determined whether or not the new command flag is on (S7201). It is determined that the new command has not been processed in the command determination process executed first, the processes of S7202 to S7204 are skipped, and the process proceeds to S7205. On the other hand, if the new flag is ON (S7201: Yes), it is determined that the new command has been processed in the previously executed command determination processing, and after setting the new command flag to OFF (S7202), S7203-S7204 , the process corresponding to the new command is executed.

In the processing of S7203, it is determined whether or not the error occurrence flag is ON (S7203). Then, if the error occurrence flag is on (S7203: Yes), warning image setting processing is executed (S7204).

Here, with reference to FIG. 221, details of the warning image setting process will be described. FIG. 221 is a flowchart showing warning image setting processing. This process is a process for developing image data for displaying a warning image corresponding to an error that has occurred on the third pattern display device 81. First, the error determination flag is referred to, and all error determination flags set to ON are displayed. Warning image data for displaying an error warning image corresponding to the flag on the third pattern display device 81 is developed (S7251).

In task processing, based on this expanded warning image data, the types of sprites (display objects) that make up the warning image are identified, and for each sprite, the display coordinate position, magnification ratio, and rotation angle are determined. Determine the various parameters required.

Then, in the warning image setting process, after the process of S7251, the error occurrence flag is set to OFF (S7252), and the process returns to the display setting process.

Now, return to the description of FIG. After the warning image setting process (S7204), or if it is determined in the process of S7203 that the error occurrence flag is not ON, that is, it is OFF (S7203: No), then the process proceeds to S7205.

In S7205, pointer update processing is executed (S7205). Here, the details of the pointer update processing will be described with reference to FIG. 222 . FIG. 222 is a flowchart showing pointer update processing. This pointer updating process acquires the transfer data information of the corresponding drawing contents or transfer target image data from the display data table and the transfer data table stored in the respective buffers of the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e. This is the process of updating the pointer 233f that specifies the address to which it should be applied.

In this pointer update process, first, 1 is added to the pointer 233f (S7301). That is, the pointer 233f is basically updated so that it is incremented by 1 each time the V interrupt process is executed. Further, as described above, in the various data tables, the Start information is described at the address "0000H", and the substance of each data is defined after the address "0001H". When the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 in accordance with the storage in the data table buffer 233d, the value is updated to 1 by this pointer update processing. Substantial data can be read from the data table.

After the value of the pointer 233f is updated by the processing of S7301, it is then checked whether the data at the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d is End information. is determined (S7302). As a result, if it is End information (S7302: Yes), it means that the pointer 233f has been updated past the address where the substance data is described in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d.

Therefore, it is determined whether or not the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is a demonstration display data table (S7303). The time data corresponding to the performance time of the demonstration display data table set in the table buffer 233d is set in the clock counter 233h (S7304), the pointer 233f is initialized by setting it to 1 (S7305), and this processing is terminated. and return to the display setting process. Thus, in the display setting process, the drawing contents can be developed sequentially from the top of the demonstration display data table, so that the third symbol display device 81 can repeatedly display the demonstration effects.

On the other hand, in the process of S7303, if it is determined that the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is not the demonstration display data table (S7303: No), the value of the pointer 233f is decremented by 1 ( S7306), this process is terminated, and the process returns to the display setting process. As a result, in the display setting process, when a display data table other than the demonstration display data table, for example, a variable display data table, is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the previous address in which the End information is described is displayed. is always developed, the third pattern display device 81 can display the last image defined by the display data table in a stopped state. On the other hand, in the process of S7302, if the data at the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is not the End information (S7302: No), this process is terminated and the process returns to the display setting process.

Here, return to FIG. 220 to continue the description. After the pointer update process, the drawing contents of the address indicated by the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process are developed from the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d (S7206). In the task processing, the type of sprite (display object) that constitutes the image is specified based on the rendering content developed in the processing of S7206 together with the previously developed warning image, etc., and the display coordinates are determined for each sprite. Determine various parameters necessary for drawing such as position, magnification, and rotation angle.

Next, the value of the clock counter 233h is decremented by 1 (S7207), and it is determined whether or not the value of the clock counter 233h after the subtraction is 0 or less (S7208). Then, if the value of the clock counter 233h is 1 or more (S7208: No), the display setting process is terminated and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, if the value of the clock counter 233h is 0 or less (S7208: Yes), it means that the effect time corresponding to the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d has elapsed. At this time, if the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, it is time to end the variable display and perform the stop display. (S7209).

As a result, if the confirmed display flag 233z is off (S7209: No), the confirmed display effect has not yet been performed, and it is time to perform the confirmed display effect. (S7210), and then, by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e, the contents are cleared (S7211). Then, the time data corresponding to the presentation time of the fixed display data table is set in the clock counter 233h (S7212), and the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S7213). Then, after the confirmation display flag 233z indicating that the confirmation display effect is in progress is set to ON (S7214), the content of the stop symbol discrimination flag is copied as it is to the previous stop symbol discrimination flag provided in the work RAM 233. (S7215), and returns to the V interrupt process.

Thus, when the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, etc., the fixed display effect of the stop symbol in the variable effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the end of the effect. You can set the drawing contents like this. In addition, only by changing the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d to the fixed display data table, the effect displayed on the third pattern display device 81 can be easily changed to the fixed display effect. In addition, compared to the conventional case of changing the display contents by activating another program, the program does not become complicated and bloated, and therefore the MPU 231 is not overloaded. Regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 114, various modes of effect images can be displayed on the third pattern display 81. - 特許庁

It should be noted that the last stop symbol determination flag set by the process of S7215 is used to specify the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the next variation effect. That is, as described above, the display of the third symbol in the variable effect changes according to the stop symbol of the variable effect performed immediately before. Until a predetermined time elapses after the start, the symbol offset information from the stop symbol of the variable effect performed one before is described. In the task processing (S6304), until a predetermined time has passed since the start of the variation, from the last stop design determination flag set by S7215, the stop design of the fluctuation production performed one before is specified, and the The third symbol to be actually displayed is specified by adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the specified stop symbol. As a result, the variable performance is started from the stop symbol in the previous variable performance.

On the other hand, in the processing of S7209, if the fixed display flag 233z is ON instead of OFF (S7209: Yes), it is determined whether or not the demonstration display flag 233y is ON (S7216). If the demonstration display flag 233y is off (S7216: No), it means that the value of the clock counter 233h has become 0 or less with the end of the fixed display effect. The transfer data table buffer 233d is set in the table buffer 233d (S7217), and then the contents are cleared by writing Null data in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S7218). Then, the time data corresponding to the presentation time of the demonstration display data table is set in the clock counter 233h (S7219). Then, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S7220), the demonstration display flag 233y indicating that the demonstration is being performed in the ON state is set to ON (S7221), this process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. .

In the process of S7216, if the demonstration display flag 233y is ON (S7216: Yes), it means that the demonstration effect is performed after the fixed display effect is finished, and that demonstration effect is finished, so the display setting process is performed as it is. End and return to V interrupt processing. In this case, various settings are made so that the demonstration effect is started again by the pointer updating process executed in the next V interrupt process. The demonstration effect can be repeatedly displayed on the third symbol display device 81 until a new display variation pattern command is received.

The simple display setting process (S6309) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is ON in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 213(b)) also performs the same process as the display setting process. However, in the simple display setting process, one of the power-on variable images corresponding to the stop pattern set based on the stop type command for display is displayed for a predetermined time after the effect time of the power-on variable image ends. 172) is set in the display data table buffer 233d.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 223 and 224, the details of the transfer setting process (S6305), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. First, FIG. 223(a) is a flowchart showing this transfer setting process.

In this transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is ON (S7501). If the simple image display flag 233c is on (S7501: Yes), all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, so the resident image transfer setting is made. Processing is executed (S7502), the transfer setting processing is terminated, and the processing returns to the V interrupt processing. As a result, a transfer instruction is set for the image controller 237 to transfer the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 . Details of the resident image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

On the other hand, if the simple image display flag 233c is not turned on as a result of the processing of S7501, that is, if it is turned off (S7501: No), all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video data. It has been transferred to the RAM 235 . In this case, the normal image transfer setting process is executed (S7503), the transfer setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. As a result, the transfer instruction is set so that subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236 . Details of the normal image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, resident image transfer setting processing (S7502), which is part of the transfer setting processing (S6305) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to FIG. 223(b). FIG. 223(b) is a flow chart showing this resident image transfer setting process (S7502).

In this resident image transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not an instruction to transfer untransferred image data has been given to the image controller 237 (S7601). ), and further determines whether or not the image data transfer processing performed by the image controller 237 based on the transfer instruction has ended (S7602). In the processing of S7602, after instructing the image controller 237 to transfer the image data, if a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer processing is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer processing has ended. . If it is determined by the processing in S7602 that the transfer processing has not ended (S7602: No), the image transfer processing is continuously performed in the image controller 237, so this resident image transfer setting processing is executed. finish. On the other hand, if it is determined that the transfer process has ended (S7602: Yes), the process proceeds to S7603. Also, as a result of the processing of S7601, even if a transfer instruction for untransferred image data has not been transmitted to the image controller 237 (S7601: No), the process proceeds to S7603.

In the process of S7603, it is determined whether or not all resident target image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 have been transferred (S7603). A transfer instruction is set for the image controller 237 so as to transfer the resident image data to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 (S7604), and the resident image transfer setting process is terminated.

As a result, the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process includes the transfer data information about the resident target image data that has not been transferred, and the image controller 237 transfers the transfer data described in the drawing list. Based on the data information, the resident target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 236 . The transfer data information includes the head address and the end address of the character ROM 234 in which the resident target image data is stored, the transfer destination information (in this case, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination (where the data is transferred). The first address of the area provided in the resident video RAM 235 where the resident target image data is to be stored is included. The image controller 237 executes image transfer processing based on this transfer data information, reads the image data specified in the transfer processing from the character ROM 234, temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237a, and then stores it in the buffer RAM 237a while the resident video RAM 236 is not in use. , it is transferred to the specified address of the resident video RAM 236 . Then, when the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231 .

As a result of the process of S7603, if all the resident target image data have been transferred (S7603: Yes), the simple image display flag 233c is set to OFF (S7605), and the resident image transfer setting process ends. As a result, in the V interrupt processing (see FIG. 213B), the command is executed instead of the simple command determination processing (see S6308 in FIG. Since the judgment processing (see FIGS. 214 to 219) and the display setting processing (see FIGS. 220 to 222) are executed, normal image drawing is set, and the third symbol display device 81 displays A normal image is displayed. Further, subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236 by normal image transfer setting processing (see FIG. 224) (see S7501: No in FIG. 223(a)).

By executing this resident image transfer setting process, the MPU 231 transfers all resident images to be resident in the resident video RAM 235, excluding the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image that have already been transferred in the main process. The target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 . The MPU 231 then controls the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 to be held without being overwritten while the power is turned on. As a result, the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer setting process will be resident in the resident video RAM 235 while the power is turned on.

Therefore, after all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the display controller 114 uses the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235 while the image controller 237 , the image drawing process can be performed. As a result, if the image data used for drawing processing is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a whose read speed is slow when drawing the image. Therefore, the time required for reading the data can be omitted, and the image can be immediately drawn and displayed on the third pattern display device 81 .

In particular, the resident video RAM 235 stores image data of frequently displayed images such as rear images, third designs, character designs, and error messages, as well as main controller 110, sound lamp controller 113, and display controller 114. Since the image data of the image to be displayed is immediately resident after the display is determined by such as, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND type flash memory 234a, various operations performed by the player at any timing can be prevented. , high responsiveness can be maintained until the third pattern display device 81 displays some image.

Next, referring to FIG. 224, normal image transfer setting processing (S7503), which is part of the transfer setting processing (S6305) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 224 is a flow chart showing this normal image transfer setting process (S7503).

In this normal image transfer setting process, first, from the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process (S7205) of the previously executed display setting process (S6303) is used. Information described in the indicated address is acquired (S7701). Then, it is determined whether or not the acquired information is transfer data information (S7702). , and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are extracted and stored in the transfer data buffer provided in the work RAM 233 ( S7703), furthermore, a transfer start flag, which is provided in the work RAM 233 and indicates that there is image data whose transfer is to be started in the ON state, is set to ON (S7704), and the process proceeds to S7705.

In addition, in the process of S7702, if the acquired information is not the transfer data information but Null data (S7702: No), the process of S7703 and S7704 is skipped and the process proceeds to S7705. In the process of S7705, it is determined whether or not a new image data transfer instruction has been set for the image controller 237 after the previous image data transfer is completed (S7705), and the transfer instruction is set. If so (S7705: Yes), it is further determined whether or not the image data transfer performed by the image controller 237 based on the transfer instruction has ended (S7706).

In the process of S7706, after setting an image data transfer instruction to the image controller 237, if a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process has ended. . If it is determined by the process of S7706 that the transfer process has not ended (S7706: No), the image transfer process continues in the image controller 237, so this normal image transfer setting process is executed. finish. On the other hand, if it is determined that the transfer process has ended (S7706: Yes), the process proceeds to S7707. Also, as a result of the process of S7705, even if the image data transfer instruction is not set for the image controller 237 after the previous transfer process is completed (S7705: No), the process proceeds to S7707.

In the process of S7707, it is determined whether or not the transfer start flag is on (S7707). If the transfer start flag is on (S7707: Yes), image data to be transferred exists, so is turned off (S7708), the image data of the sprite indicated by the various information stored in the transfer data buffer by the processing of S7703 is set as the image data to be transferred, and then the processing proceeds to S7713. On the other hand, if the transfer start flag is not ON, but OFF (S7707: No), then it is determined whether or not the back image change flag is ON (S7709). If the back image change flag is not on, but off (S7709: No), there is no image data to start transferring, so the normal image transfer setting process ends.

On the other hand, if the back image change flag is on (S7709: Yes), it means that the back image has been changed. Of the discrimination flags, the image data of the back image corresponding to the back image discrimination flag in the ON state is specified, and the image data is set as the image data to be transferred (S7711). Furthermore, the head address (storage source head address) and the end address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the back image corresponding to the back image discrimination flag in the ON state is stored, and the transfer destination (usually (S7712), and the process proceeds to S7713.

When the back image discrimination flag in the ON state is for the back A, all the corresponding image data are resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, so the image to be transferred to the normal video RAM 236 is Data does not exist. Therefore, in the process of S7711, if the back image determination flag in the ON state is for the back A, the normal image transfer process is terminated.

In the process of S7713, it is determined whether or not the image data to be transferred has already been stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S7713). The determination in the process of S7713 is performed by referring to the stored image data determination flag 233j. That is, the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is read from the stored image data determination flag 233j, and if the storage state is "on", the image data of the sprite to be transferred is normal video If it is determined that the data is stored in the RAM 236 and the storage state is "OFF", it is determined that the image data of the sprite to be transferred is not stored in the normal video RAM 236. FIG.

If the image data to be transferred is stored in the normal video RAM 236 as a result of the process of S7713 (S7713: Yes), there is no need to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. , the normal image transfer setting process ends. As a result, it is possible to prevent unnecessary transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, thereby reducing the processing load on each unit of the display control device 114 and the traffic on the bus line 240. can be planned.

On the other hand, if the image data to be transferred is not stored in the normal video RAM 236 as a result of the process of S7713 (S7713: No), a transfer instruction for the image data to be transferred is set (S7714). As a result, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is included in the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process, and the image controller 237 receives the transfer data information described in the drawing list. Based on this, the image data of the image to be transferred can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 . The transfer data information includes the head address and the end address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the image to be transferred is stored, the transfer destination information (in this case, the normal video RAM 236), and the transfer destination (in this case, the transfer destination). The start address of the sub-area provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 in which the image data of the image to be transferred is to be stored. The image controller 237 executes image transfer processing based on this transfer data information, reads the image data specified in the transfer processing from the character ROM 234, and specifies the specified video RAM (here, the normal video RAM 236). forward to the specified address. Then, when the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231 .

After the process of S7714, the stored image data determination flag 233j is updated (S7715), and this normal image transfer setting process is terminated. The stored image data determination flag 233j is updated by, as described above, setting the storage state corresponding to the sprite that has become the image data to be transferred to "ON", and by substituting the same image storage area 236a as the one sprite. This is done by setting the storage state corresponding to other sprites that are to be stored in the area to "off".

In this way, by executing the normal image transfer setting process, if the background image is changed based on the reception of the background image change command in the previously executed command determination process, the background image is changed. Of the image data used in , image data not stored in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay.

Further, in this control example, the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d in accordance with a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. , a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. By executing the normal image transfer setting process, the MPU 231 sends data to the image controller 237 in accordance with the transfer data information described in the area indicated by the pointer 233f of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Since the transfer instruction of the image data to be transferred is set, the sprite image data used in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d can be reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing. can be done.

Here, the transfer data table stores the image data to be transferred so that the image data corresponding to the given sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a before the drawing of the given sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information is defined for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information defined in the transfer data table, thereby obtaining the predetermined address according to the display data table. When the sprite is drawn, the image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 required for drawing the sprite can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236, so that the image can be displayed. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. - 特許庁Also, only the image data temporarily resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 by the description of the transfer data table.

The transfer data table defines transfer data information so that image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to a sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. By controlling the transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 on a sprite-by-sprite basis, the transfer of image data can be controlled in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in the load applied to the transfer.

Next, with reference to FIG. 225, details of the drawing process (S6306), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 225 is a flow chart showing this rendering process.

In the drawing process, the types of various sprites that make up one frame determined in task processing (S6304) and the parameters necessary for drawing each sprite (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucency value, α blending information , color information, filter designation information) and the transfer instruction set by the transfer setting process (S6305), a drawing list shown in FIG. 176 is generated (S7801). That is, in the processing of S7801, the type and address of the storage RAM in which the image data of the sprite is stored are specified for each sprite from the types of various sprites forming one frame determined in the task processing (S6304). Then, parameters necessary for the sprite determined by task processing are associated with the specified storage RAM type and address. Then, each sprite is rearranged in order from the sprite that should be placed on the backmost side to the sprite that should be placed on the front side in the image for one frame. As drawing information (detailed information), a drawing list is generated by describing the storage RAM type and address in which sprite image data is stored and the parameters necessary for drawing the sprite. When a transfer instruction is set by the transfer setting process (S6305), the top address (storage source top address) of the character ROM 234 where the image data to be transferred is stored as the transfer data information is displayed at the end of the drawing list. , the final address (storage source final address), and the top address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236).

As described above, since the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed for each sprite, the MPU 231 , according to the sprite type, the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and such information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

When the drawing list is generated, the generated drawing list and the drawing target buffer information specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233j are transmitted to the image controller (S7802). Here, when the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 0, the drawing target buffer flag 233j includes information instructing to expand the image drawn in the first frame buffer 236b as the drawing target buffer information. includes information instructing to develop the image drawn in the second frame buffer 236c as drawing target buffer information.

Based on the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 draws the image in order from the sprite described at the head of the drawing list, and develops it by overwriting in the frame buffer indicated by the drawing object buffer information. As a result, in the one-frame image generated by the drawing list, the first-drawn sprite can be arranged on the rearmost side, and the last-drawn sprite can be arranged on the frontmost side.

When transfer data information is included in the drawing list, the transfer data information is used to determine the start address (storage source start address) and end address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored. ), and the head address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236), and the image data stored from the head address of the storage source to the end address of the storage source are sequentially read from the character ROM 234 and temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a. After that, the image data stored in the buffer RAM 237a are sequentially transferred to the area indicated by the transfer destination start address of the normal video RAM 236, when the normal video RAM 236 is in an unused state. The image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is used based on the drawing list transmitted from the MPU 231 after that, and the image is drawn according to the drawing list.

The image controller 237 reads the image information of the previously developed image from a frame buffer different from the frame buffer designated by the drawing object buffer information, and sends the image information along with the drive signal to the third pattern display device 81. Send to As a result, the image developed in the frame buffer can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 . Further, while expanding the image drawn in one frame buffer, the image drawn from one frame buffer can be displayed on the third pattern display 81, and drawing processing and display processing can be processed simultaneously in parallel. can be done.

In the rendering process, after the process of S7802, the rendering target buffer flag 233j is updated (S7803). Then, the drawing process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. The rendering target buffer flag 233j is updated by inverting its value, that is, by setting the value to "1" if it was "0" and to "0" if it was "1". done. As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time the drawing list is transmitted.

Here, the transmission of the drawing list is executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing and display processing of the image for one frame are completed. This is performed each time the drawing process of the load process (see FIG. 213(b)) is performed. As a result, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for developing the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. is executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for developing the image for one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing processing for the image for one frame is completed. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information for the first half is read. Therefore, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. .

After the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for developing the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. be done. Therefore, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. . After that, the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame are set to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By specifying these alternately, it is possible to perform display processing of an image for one frame continuously in units of 20 milliseconds while drawing processing for an image for one frame is being performed.

In the above control example, the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 are provided separately, but instead, the respective devices 113 and 114 may be integrated and provided as one device.

In the above control example, first, a command is transmitted from the main controller 110 to the audio lamp control device 113, and when the command is received by the audio lamp control device 113, the audio lamp control device 113 transmits the command to the display control device 114. A command to be issued is determined and then sent from the audio lamp controller 113 to the display controller 114 . On the other hand, first, a command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the display control device 114, and when the command is received by the display control device 114, the command to be transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 is determined in the display control device 114. Then, a command may be transmitted from the display control device 114 to the audio lamp control device 113 .

In the control example described above, the image controller 237 transfers image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the MPU 231 may directly access the character ROM 234 , read image data from the character ROM 234 , and transfer it to the resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236 . In this case, the MPU 231 temporarily stores the image data read from the character ROM 234 in the buffer RAM 237a, and then the MPU 231 determines whether or not the transfer destination resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236 is unused. If unused, the image data may be transferred from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236 as the transfer destination.

In this case, whether or not the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 of the transfer destination is unused is judged by the image controller 237 accessing the resident video RAM 235 (that is, being in use). and a normal video RAM access flag (not shown) indicating that the image controller 237 is accessing the normal video RAM 236 (that is, that it is in use). ) is provided in the image controller 237, and the MPU 231 may check the access flag corresponding to the transfer destination buffer RAM.

Alternatively, the signals transmitted and received between the image controller 237 and the resident video RAM 235 or the signals transmitted and received between the image controller 237 and the normal video RAM 236 are monitored by the MPU 231, and the resident It may be confirmed whether or not the video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are unused. Alternatively, when the image controller 237 starts accessing the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, or terminates the access, the image controller 237 notifies the MPU 231 of the information at any time so that the MPU 231 can Based on the notification, it may be determined whether or not the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are unused.

Alternatively, when the image controller 237 scans the third pattern display device 81, the MPU 231 confirms the driving state of the image controller 237 or notifies the image controller 237 whether or not the scanning is during the blank period. , and if the scanning state is in the blank period, it may be determined that each of the video RAMs 235 and 236 is unused. As a result, the image controller 237 checks only the scanning state of the third pattern display device 81 and judges whether or not it is unused, so that judgment can be easily made.

In this case, the MPU 231 stores transfer data that is not null data at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e or the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d. If the information exists, image data may be read out from the character ROM 234 and transferred to the normal video RAM 236 according to the transfer data information. Here, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is stored in the normal video RAM 236 so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the normal video RAM 236 before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table or the like. Since it is defined for a predetermined address, by transferring the image data according to the transfer data information defined in this transfer data table, when drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table, etc., the sprite can be drawn. Image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 necessary for normal operation can be stored in the normal video RAM 236 without fail. Using the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236, a predetermined sprite can be drawn based on the display data table.

The process of reading out the image data from the character ROM 234 and transferring it to the normal video RAM 236 may be performed in the display main process executed by the MPU 231 or in the loop of the main process. As a result, the MPU 231 can execute image data transfer processing using the time during which important processing such as command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing in the display control device 114 is not being performed. Further, since the command interrupt processing and the V interrupt processing are executed with priority over the display main processing and the like, the MPU 231 can process the image data without affecting the command interrupt processing and the V interrupt processing. transfer processing can be executed.

In the above control example, the MPU 231 does not use the addresses of the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 to manage each video RAM, but uses the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 in common. Each video RAM may be managed by assigning a different address area to each video RAM in the address system provided. In this way, the MPU 231 does not directly specify the video RAM (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) to be accessed from the MPU 231 to the image controller 237, but simply specifies an address. Image controller 237 can determine whether the designated area is for resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236 . That is, when the MPU 231 designates the video RAM to be accessed and the address of the area of the video RAM to the image controller 237, it is only necessary to designate the address set in the common address system. It is possible to simplify the structure of the instruction that makes the specification. For example, in the drawing list sent from the MPU 231 to the image controller 237, as information indicating the storage location of the sprite data, the address set in the common address system is simply used without including the storage RAM type. Since it is only necessary to specify the storage destination address, the configuration of the drawing list can be simplified.

In the above control example, the case where the character ROM 234 is directly connected to the internal bus (bus line 240) connecting the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 has been described. 237 may be provided. A bridge circuit is provided to convert the input/output specifications of the character ROM 234 to the input/output specifications of the mask ROM, and the character ROM 234 is connected to the internal bus (bus line 240) or the image controller 237 via the bridge circuit. good too.

By providing this bridge circuit, the existing image controller 237 or internal bus (bus line 240) designed on the assumption that a general mask ROM is used as the character ROM can be used as it is, and the NAND type flash memory 234a can be used. A configured character ROM 234 can be connected. Even when the character ROM 234 is connected via the image controller 237 or a bridge circuit, the MPU 231 may be configured to directly access the character ROM 234 .

In the above control example, the case where the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a has been described, but it is not necessarily limited to this. may be Such a large-capacity and inexpensive storage means generally has a slow read speed, but by configuring the display control device 114 as described in the above control example, the image can be displayed at the desired time without problems. be able to.

In the above control example, the NOR type ROM 234d is provided in the character ROM 234, and the first program storage area 234d1 stores a part of the boot program that is executed first in the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. The first program storage area is provided in a memory constituted by a non-volatile storage medium capable of read operation at a higher speed than the NAND flash memory 234a, and the first program storage area is stored in the area after the system reset is released in the MPU 231. part of the boot program to be executed in the . For example, in place of the NOR type ROM 234d, the character ROM 234 may be provided with FeRAM (Ferroelectric RAM), MRAM (Magnetoresistive RAM), or PRAM (Phase change RAM), and a first program storage area may be provided in the character ROM 234. A part of the boot program that is executed first may be stored.

In the above control example, the first program storage area 234d1 is provided in the NOR type ROM 234d connected to the internal bus (bus line 240), and a part of the boot program that is first executed in the MPU 231 after the system reset is released is stored in that area. However, the memory is not necessarily limited to this, and the internal bus (bus line 240) is a memory configured by a non-volatile storage medium capable of read operation at a higher speed than the NAND flash memory 234a. , the memory may be provided with a first program storage area, and a part of the boot program that is first executed in the MPU 231 after the system reset is released may be stored in the area. For example, in place of the NOR type ROM 234d, FeRAM (Ferroelectric RAM), MRAM (Magnetoresistive RAM), PRAM (Phase change RAM), or the like is provided on the internal bus (bus line 240), and a first program storage area is provided on the internal bus (bus line 240). may store part of the boot program that is executed first after the system reset is released.

In the above control example, when the ROM controller 234b detects that the address of the internal bus (bus line 240) is designated as "0000H", the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 is set in the buffer RAM 234c. After that, the case where the data (instruction code) corresponding to the designated address is read from the buffer RAM 234c and output to the MPU 231 via the internal bus (bus line 240) has been described. On the other hand, when the ROM controller 234b detects that power is turned on from the power supply device 115, the ROM controller 234b sets the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 in the buffer RAM 234c, and then When the ROM controller 234b detects that the address of the internal bus (bus line 240) is designated as "0000H", the data (instruction code) corresponding to the designated address is read out from the buffer RAM 234c and transferred to the internal bus (bus line 240). 240) to the MPU 231. In this case, when the MPU 231 designates the address "0000H" to the internal bus (bus line 240) after releasing the system reset, is the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 already set in the buffer RAM 234c? Since it is in the process of being set, the character ROM 234 can output the corresponding data (instruction code) with less delay after the MPU 231 designates the address "0000H". Therefore, since the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after specifying the address "0000H", the display main processing can be started in the MPU 231 in a short time. As a result, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the control of the auxiliary effect section in the display control device 114 or the third pattern display device 81 can be immediately started. can be done.

In addition, when the ROM controller 234b detects that the address specified in the internal bus (bus line 240) specifies the control program stored in the first program storage area 234d1, the first program storage area 234d1 The data (instruction code) corresponding to the specified address may be directly read out from and output to the MPU 231 via the internal bus (bus line 240). As a result, the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after specifying the address "0000H", so that the display main processing can be started in the MPU 231 in a short time. As a result, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the control of the auxiliary effect section in the display control device 114 or the third pattern display device 81 can be started immediately. can be done. In this case, the process of setting the control program (boot program) stored in the first program storage area 234d1 in the buffer RAM 234c may not be performed. Thereby, power consumption in the character ROM 234 can be suppressed.

In the above control example, the case where the resident video RAM 235 is connected to the image controller 237 is described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. A direct connection to line 240) may also be provided. When the character ROM 234 is connected to the internal bus (bus line 240) or the image controller 237 via the bridge circuit, the resident video RAM 235 may be connected to the bridge circuit. By connecting the resident video RAM 235 to the bridge circuit, even if the existing image controller 237 or internal bus (bus line 240) is not configured to be directly connectable to the resident video RAM 235, the resident video RAM 235 can be connected. RAM 235 can be easily provided in display controller 114 .

In the above control example, the display control device 114 is provided with one resident video RAM 235 and one normal video RAM 236. However, the number of various video RAMs is not limited to this, and may be increased. A video RAM may be provided. Alternatively, a plurality of resident video RAMs may be provided, image data corresponding to images corresponding to various modes may be resident in each of them, and the resident video RAM to be used may be selected according to the mode.

In the above control example, the case where the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are composed of a 1-port type (one input/output port) DRAM has been described. type of RAM may be used. As a result, writing to and reading from the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 can be performed at the same time. It is possible to parallelize the process of writing the received image data to the normal video RAM 236 . Therefore, it is possible to suppress the possibility that the drawing process is delayed due to the writing of the image data.

In the above control example, the case where the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are configured by separate memories has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. It may be divided so that the same contents as those of the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are stored in each area. In addition, when the resident area and the normal area are configured in one RAM, the input/output port of the memory is prevented from being occupied by either the resident area or the normal area during read or write processing. , it is desirable to use a multi-port type RAM.

The type of image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 in the above control example is an example, and the type may be appropriately set according to the content of the image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. . In this case, in response to a command received from main controller 110 or sound lamp controller 113 or other input from the outside, image data corresponding to an image to be immediately displayed on third pattern display device 81 is at least resident. It is preferably resident in video RAM 235 .

In the above control example, a part of the image data stored in the character ROM 234 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235 and made resident. You may In this case, the image data stored in the temporary character ROM 234 does not exist in the resident video RAM 235, so the normal video RAM 236 is used as a dedicated memory for storing drawn image data obtained by drawing by the image controller 237. may

In the above control example, the resident video RAM 235 retains its contents without being overwritten while the power is turned on. The image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 may be overwritten and updated on a predetermined occasion, such as when the image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 is greatly changed based on the command received from the good. In this case, while the image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed, a predetermined transition image may be displayed as a transition period. Further, the image data corresponding to the transition image is stored in the resident video RAM 235 when the power is turned on, and is kept held in the resident video RAM 235 without being updated even when other resident images are updated. You can leave it. While the transition image is being displayed, the MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 to read image data to be newly resident, and transfers the read image data to the resident video RAM 235 via the buffer RAM 237a. The data may be transferred while not in use (that is, while the image data corresponding to the transitional image is not read). Alternatively, while the transition image is being displayed, the MPU 231 transmits to the image controller 237 a transfer instruction (transfer data information) for image data to be newly resident, and the image controller 237 sends the transfer instruction (transfer data). image data to be resident is read from the character ROM 234 according to data information) and transferred via the buffer RAM 237a while the resident video RAM 235 is not in use (that is, while the image data corresponding to the transition image is not being read). You may make it

When the resident video RAM 235 is updated, the image data corresponding to the transition image is transferred in advance from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, and the transition image is updated using the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236. It may be displayed on the 3-symbol display device 81 . While the transition image is being displayed, the MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234, reads out image data to be newly resident, and transfers the read image data via the buffer RAM 237a. good too. Alternatively, the image controller 237, which has received an instruction to transfer image data to be resident from the MPU 231, accesses the character ROM 234, reads image data to be newly resident, and transfers the read image data via the buffer RAM 237a. You may do so. By updating the contents of the resident video RAM 235 while the transition image is being displayed, the resident video RAM 235 can be updated without making the player feel uncomfortable.

In the above control example, after all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 are resident, a RAM judgment value for judging whether or not the data in the resident video RAM 235 is normal when the power failure is resolved is stored. In the display main processing or main processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 after power-on, the RAM determination value is checked before starting to transfer main image data at power-on from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, If the RAM determination value is a normal value, it means that image data to be resident in resident video RAM 235 continues to be stored normally. It may be configured to In this case, the transfer of image data to the resident video RAM 235 may be disabled by turning off the simple image display flag. As a result, even if a system reset is input to the display control device 114 due to the occurrence of an instantaneous power failure, and the MPU 231 starts executing the main display process or the main process, the data in the resident video RAM 235 can be stored normally. In this case, image data can be prevented from being wastefully transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, and the time required for recovery from power failure can be shortened. In particular, since the character ROM 234 is composed of the character ROM 234a with a slow read speed, it takes a long time to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. FIG. On the other hand, by storing the RAM determination value in the resident video RAM 235 as in the present modification, if the data in the resident video RAM 235 remains normal due to a momentary power failure or the like, it is possible to transfer the image data. Since the time can be shortened, the normal effect image can be immediately displayed on the third pattern display device 81.例文帳に追加Therefore, the player can immediately start the game. The RAM determination value may be a checksum value of image data stored in the resident video RAM 235, for example. Further, instead of the RAM determination value, whether or not the keyword written in the predetermined area of the resident video RAM 235 is correctly stored may be used to determine the validity of the data.

In the above control example, the case where the buffer RAM 237a is provided inside the image controller 237 has been described, but it is not necessarily limited to this, and may be provided outside the image controller 237. FIG. For example, the buffer RAM may be configured independently and configured to be directly connected to the internal bus (bus line 240). Further, when the character ROM 234 is connected to the internal bus (bus line 240) or the image controller 237 via the bridge circuit, a buffer RAM may be provided in the bridge circuit. Furthermore, the resident video RAM 235 may be directly connected to the bridge circuit with the buffer RAM. In this case, the image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 connected to the bridge circuit to the resident video RAM 235 via the buffer RAM provided in the bridge circuit. transfer can be performed efficiently without being affected by

In the above control example, the storage capacity of the buffer RAM 237a is set to one block of the NAND flash memory 234a. For example, among the scanning periods of the display screen of the third pattern display device 81, the buffer The storage capacity of the buffer RAM 237a may be a data capacity sufficient to complete transfer of image data from the RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236. FIG. As a result, transfer of image data from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 can be reliably performed by utilizing the unused periods of the video RAMs 235 and 236 that occur during this blank period. .

In the above control example, the case where one buffer RAM 237a is provided has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and two or more buffer RAMs may be provided. In this case, while the image data read from the character ROM 234 is stored in one buffer RAM, the stored image data is transferred from another buffer RAM to the resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236. may be configured. Also, one buffer RAM is divided into two or more areas, and while image data read from the character ROM 234 is stored in one area, another area in which image data is stored is stored. The image data may be transferred from the area to the resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236 . In either case, the writing of the image data read out from the character ROM 234 to the buffer RAM and the transfer of the image data written in the buffer RAM to the resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236 are performed in parallel. The time required for the processing can be shortened.

In the above control example, the case where the image data corresponding to the power-on main image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a of the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on has been described. The corresponding image data may be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 after the power is turned on. As a result, the image data corresponding to the power-on main image stored in the normal video RAM 236 is used to display the power-on main image while transferring the image data to be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 . can do. Since the image data is not read from the resident video RAM 235 during this period, the image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 without monitoring the use state of the resident video RAM 235. Transfer can be completed quickly, and processing can be simplified.

Similarly, in the above control example, the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on varying image are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on varying image area 235a of the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. 235b, the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on varying image may be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 after the power is turned on. As a result, by using the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variation image stored in the normal video RAM 236, the third symbol display device 81 is caused to display the power-on image, while the character ROM 234 Image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be transferred. Since the image data is not read from the resident video RAM 235 during this period, the image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 without monitoring the use state of the resident video RAM 235. Transfer can be completed quickly, and processing can be simplified.

In the above control example, the case where the image data corresponding to the power-on main image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a of the resident video RAM 235 via the buffer RAM 237a has been described. Since the image data is not read from the resident video RAM 235 while the image data corresponding to . may be directly transferred to the main image area 235a when the power is turned on. After the power is turned on, the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, and the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on stored in the normal video RAM 236 is used to turn on the power. If the image data is not read from the resident video RAM 235 while the image data to be resident is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 by displaying the main image, The image data to be resident may be directly transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 without passing through the buffer RAM 237a. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be completed more quickly without going through the buffer RAM 237a.

Similarly, in the above control example, the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variation image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on variation image of the resident video RAM 235 via the buffer RAM 237a. Although the case of transferring to the image area 235b has been described, while the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variation image is being transferred, image data is not read from the resident video RAM 235. The image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on varying image are directly transferred from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a and power-on varying image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235 without going through the buffer RAM 237a. good too. Further, image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on varying image are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 after the power is turned on, and the power-on main image and the power-on main image stored in the normal video RAM 236 are stored in the normal video RAM 236 . By causing the third pattern display device 81 to display the image at power-on using the image data corresponding to the variable image, the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. If the image data is not read out from the character ROM 234, the image data to be resident may be directly transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 without passing through the buffer RAM 237a. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be completed more quickly without going through the buffer RAM 237a.

In the above control example, when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, the sound lamp control device 113 generates the back image change command and the frame button operation command, and the display control device 114 generates the back image change command and the frame button. Although the case of changing the back image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the effect mode of Super Reach based on the operation command has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the sound lamp control device 113 grasps the game state of the gaming machine 10 based on the content of the command received from the main control device 110, and according to the game state, for example, according to the change of the game state, A back image change command or a game state command may be generated. As a result, the display control device 114 can change the back image and the effect mode of super ready-to-win according to the game state based on the back image change command and the game state command. Further, the display control device 114 may directly grasp the game state of the gaming machine 10 and change the back image and the effect mode of super ready-to-win according to the game state. Then, the rear image after the change or image data corresponding to at least a partial range of the rear image corresponding to the super reach of the effect mode after the change is resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. , the rear image can be immediately displayed from the resident range using the image data resident in the rear image area 235c.

Further, the display control device 114 may change the rear image according to the specifications of the display data table, the transfer data table, the additional data table, and the composite data table. In this case, the image data corresponding to the changed rear image is transferred in advance from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in accordance with the transfer data information described in the transfer data table, composite data table, and display data table. You may Here, when the image data of the rear image is transferred according to the transfer data information described in the transfer data table, the synthesized data table, or the display data table, the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 in which the original rear image is stored is stored. The transfer data information of the transfer data table may be defined so that the new rear image is stored in the sub-area. The transfer data information in the transfer data table may be defined such that a new rear image is stored in another area. In the latter case, when returning the back image to the original back image that was selected and displayed by the player, there is no need to transfer the image data corresponding to the original back image. An increase in load can be suppressed.

In the above control example, the output signal of the vibration sensor is input to the sound lamp control device 113, and when the sound lamp control device 113 detects a vibration error, an error command is sent to the display control device 114. Although the case where the warning image is immediately displayed on the third pattern display device 81 by the display control device 114 has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. Control device 110 may detect a vibration error, and main control device 110 may transmit an error command notifying the error to either audio lamp control device 113 or display control device 114 . When an error command is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113, the audio lamp control device 113 receives the error command and further transmits an error command notifying the error to the display control device 114. may

On the other hand, the output signal of the vibration sensor may be input to the display control device 114, and the display control device 114 may detect the presence or absence of a vibration error. When a vibration error is detected, the error occurrence flag is turned on, and the error determination flag corresponding to the vibration error is turned on, so that the error occurrence flag is turned on in the display setting process (see FIG. 220). A warning image may be immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by executing the warning image setting process (see FIG. 221) when is determined. In this case, since it becomes unnecessary to send and receive an error command from the sound lamp control device 113 to the display control device 114, the warning image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 more quickly.

Further, in the above control example, the case where the vibration sensor is attached to the back surface of the game board 13 has been described, but instead of the vibration sensor or together with the vibration sensor, a magnet sensor is attached to the back surface of the game board 13. good too. This magnet sensor is a sensor for detecting the magnetic field applied to the game board in order to prevent the flow of balls from being changed by a magnetic field such as a magnet and intentionally entering the ball entrance. , and the output signal of the magnet sensor may be input to any one of the main controller 110 , the sound lamp controller 113 and the display controller 114 . When the output signal of the magnet sensor is input to the main controller 110, when the main controller 110 determines that the magnetic field is applied to the game board 13 based on the output signal of the magnet sensor, the magnetic field error is corrected. A signaling error command may be sent from the main controller 110 via the audio lamp controller 113 or directly to the display controller 114 . Further, when the output signal of the magnet sensor is input to the sound ramp control device 113, when the sound ramp control device 113 determines that the magnetic field is applied to the game board 13 based on the output signal of the magnet sensor, the magnetic field An error command may be sent from the audio lamp controller 113 to the display controller 114 to communicate the error. In the error message image area 235f of the resident video RAM 235 of the display control device 113, image data corresponding to the error message image for notifying the magnetic field error by the display of the third pattern display device 81 is resident. , and when receiving an error command that conveys a magnetic field error from the main control device 110 or the sound lamp control device 113, the display control device 113 may display the warning image on the third pattern display device 81. Further, when the output signal of the magnet sensor is input to the display control device 110, when the display control device 114 determines that the magnetic field is applied to the game board 13 based on the output signal of the magnet sensor, the display control device 113 , the warning image may be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by turning on the error occurrence flag and setting the error type flag corresponding to the magnetic field error to on. As a result, when the display control device 114 receives an error command from the main control device 110 or the sound lamp control device 113, or grasps the occurrence of a magnetic field error based on the output signal from the magnet sensor, the character ROM 234 Even in the case of the NAND flash memory 234a, the error message image resident in the error message image area 235f of the resident video RAM 235 is used to display the error message image informing the magnetic field error without delay as the third pattern. It can be displayed on the display device 81 . Therefore, when the player applies a magnetic field to the game board, the error message image is displayed by the third symbol display device 81 to notify the player of the magnetic field error immediately. can be deterred.

When the additional data table or the display data table defines the drawing contents necessary to change the color tone of part or all of one effect, the additional data table or the display data table can be used in the third symbol display device 81 for one The type of sprite whose color tone is to be changed at that time and the type of sprite after the change in that sprite are associated with addresses that are expressed in units of the time during which an image for a frame is displayed (20 milliseconds in this control example). It may define color information that designates color tone. Then, the MPU 231 designates the type of sprite whose color tone is to be changed to the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the additional drawing content defined in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 452d, and the color tone after the change in the sprite. If the color information to be used is specified, the color information of the corresponding sprite type specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the drawing contents specified in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed. A drawing list may be created by replacing with color information defined by the additional drawing contents of the data table. As a result, the image controller 237 can draw an image while changing the color tone of the sprite based on the color information defined by the additional data table.

In addition, when the display data table defines the drawing contents necessary for changing and displaying the image displayed in one effect, the display data table allows the third symbol display device 81 to display the image for one frame. is displayed as one unit (20 milliseconds in this control example). It may define the drawing information of the sprite to be displayed. Then, the MPU 231 stores the sprite type to be replaced, the sprite type to be newly displayed, and If the drawing information of the sprite to be newly displayed is defined, various sprites defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the drawing contents defined in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d. Instead of the sprite to be replaced, the sprite type to be newly displayed and the drawing information of the sprite may be included in the drawing list. As a result, the image controller 237 can draw an image including a sprite to be newly displayed.

Further, in the above control example, the case where the display data table includes the transfer data information of the image data required when drawing an image according to the drawing contents defined in the display data table has been described. Transfer data information (additional transfer data information) of image data required when drawing an image according to the additional drawing content defined in the display data table may be included. In this case, the additional transfer data information is associated with identification information ("additional effect 1", "additional effect 2", etc.) for identifying effects that can be additionally displayed for each address, and is added. It may be defined together with the drawing content or separately from the additional drawing content. Then, when the effect to be additionally displayed is determined, the MPU 231 creates a drawing list including the additional drawing content and the additional transfer data information associated with the identification information corresponding to the determined effect. can be configured to

As a result, the image controller 237 can transfer the sprite image data to be used for drawing according to the additional drawing content to the normal video RAM 236 according to the drawing list in advance before the image data is used. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the effect to be additionally displayed can be easily and reliably displayed on the third symbol display device 81. FIG. Further, by using the additional transfer data information specified in the display data table, necessary image data can be transferred to the normal video RAM 236 while instructing the drawing of an image based on the additional drawing content. The drawing of many sprites can be specified by additional drawing contents. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the third pattern display device 81 can display various effects.

In the above control example, in the display table corresponding to the variation pattern that allows the player to select super reach, the drawing contents corresponding to all super reach that can be selected by the player are specified in the display data table, Although the case where only the drawing contents corresponding to the super reach selected by is specified is described, it is not necessarily limited to this, and the drawing contents corresponding to the selected super reach are added to the display data table. may As a result, it is possible to easily specify the drawing contents of the super reach selected by the player. In addition, since it is not necessary to prescribe drawing contents corresponding to all super reach in the display data table, it is possible to suppress the data size of the display data table from increasing.

In the above control example, the case where the display data table includes the drawing content and the transfer data information has been described, but the display data table is not necessarily limited to this, and the display data table defines the drawing content and the transfer data information. However, the additional drawing content of the effect to be additionally displayed may be specified in the additional data table. In this case, an additional data table buffer may be provided in the work RAM 233, and when a performance to be additionally displayed is determined, an additional data table corresponding to the performance may be set in the additional data table buffer. . Further, even if the additional data table defines not only the additional drawing content but also the transfer data information (additional transfer data information) of the image data necessary for drawing the image according to the additional drawing content. good. As a result, it is possible to specify the drawing contents of the effect to be additionally displayed using the additional data table and the transfer data information of the image necessary for the drawing. Compared to the case of specifying the drawing content and the transfer data information respectively, the processing load required for the specification can be reduced.

In the above control example, the case where the display data table is prepared for each variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command in the display control device 114 has been described. Prepare a display data table for each element such as "variation startup", "high-speed variation", "notice effect", "normal reach", "super reach", and according to the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command After specifying the elements necessary for the variable performance, the display data tables corresponding to the paper required for the specified variable performance are combined into one to generate the final periodic display data table corresponding to the variation pattern. You may do so. "Variable start-up", "High-speed fluctuation", "Normal reach", etc. are often displayed in common with each fluctuation pattern. Therefore, the data table can be provided efficiently by dividing the variable effect into elements and preparing the display data table corresponding to each element.

In the above control example, a common pointer 233f is used in the display data table and the transfer data table, and the drawing content and transfer data information are specified from the address indicated by the pointer 233f. A pointer may be provided.

In the above control example, a case where the image controller 237 transmits the V interrupt signal to the MPU 231 at each display interval of the image for one frame at which drawing processing ends (every 20 milliseconds in the above control example) will be described. However, the image controller 237 may transmit this V interrupt signal to the MPU 231 each time the third pattern display device 81 is driven to display an image for one frame. The third pattern display device 81 is driven so that one frame of image is always displayed at equal time intervals (20 millisecond intervals). By sending a , the time interval can be kept accurate without timing.

In the above control example, the image controller 237 identifies the frame buffer in which the rendered image should be developed based on the rendering target buffer information transmitted from the MPU 231, and also determines the image information rendered earlier from the other frame buffer. is read out and sent to the third pattern display device 81, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. are alternately selected, and the previously developed image information is read out from a frame buffer different from the selected frame buffer and transmitted to the third pattern display device 81 . Also, every time the image controller 237 transmits image information for one frame to the third pattern display device 81, it outputs the image information to the frame buffer in which the drawn image should be developed and to the third pattern display device 81. You may make it replace the frame buffer which carries out.

In the above control example, after the fixed display data table corresponding to the fixed display effect is set in the display data table buffer 233d, by the time the fixed display effect ends, the main controller 110 through the sound lamp control device 113 When neither the variation pattern command (variation pattern command for display) nor the demonstration command (demonstration command for display) is received, the demonstration display data table corresponding to the demonstration effect is set in the display data table buffer 233d As explained above, the fixed display data table corresponding to the fixed display effect may be set in the display data table buffer 233d again. Also, in this case, until either the variation pattern command (variation pattern command for display) or the demonstration command (demonstration command for display) is received from the main controller 110 via the sound lamp controller 113, the fixed display effect is not performed. Each time it ends, the confirmed display data table corresponding to the confirmed display effect may be reset in the display data table buffer 233d. As a result, the third symbol display device 81 can continue to display the fixed display effect until the variation pattern command or the demonstration command is received from the main control device 110 .

In the above control example, the case where the demonstration effect is to change the back image and to stop display the third pattern composed of the main patterns to which the numbers "0" to "9" are not attached has been explained. The present invention is not limited to this, and a third pattern consisting of main patterns with numbers or main patterns without numbers may be stopped and displayed in a translucent state. Alternatively, only the rear image may be changed without displaying the third pattern. Also, a character or a back image that is completely different from the third pattern or the back image used in the variable display may be displayed.

In the above control example, after the power is turned on, the display control means 114 first transfers image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on varying image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a of the resident video RAM 235 and the power-on main image area 235a. When transferring to the time-varying image area 235b, displaying the main image at power-on on the third pattern display device 81 after the transfer is completed, and then transferring the remaining image data to be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. has been described, but it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, after the power is turned on, the display control means 114 first transfers only the image data corresponding to the power-on main image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a of the resident video RAM 235. After the main image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81, the image data to be resident including the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image may be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. As a result, the main image when the power is turned on can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 sooner after the power is turned on. It can be immediately confirmed that the operation has started without any problems when the power is turned on.

In this case, the MPU 231 may monitor completion of transfer of image data corresponding to the power-on variation image to the power-on variation image area 235b. As a result, if a display variation pattern command is received from the sound lamp control device 113 after the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image is stored in the power-on variation image area 235b, the display variation pattern command is received. Based on this, it is possible to cause the third symbol display device 81 to display a simple variable display using the image data corresponding to the power-on variable image stored in the power-on variable image area 235b. It is desirable to transfer the image data corresponding to the power-on varying image to the power-on varying image area 235b immediately after the main image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. FIG. As a result, it is possible to quickly perform the variable display using the power-on variable image.

In the above control example, the display data table and the transfer data table correspond to the time expressed in units of 20 milliseconds. Although a case has been described in which image data information (transfer data information) is defined, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, as long as the display content is defined for each predetermined time interval. This predetermined time interval may be set according to the frame rate of the third pattern display device 81 . For example, when the frame rate of the third pattern display device 81 is 30 fps, that is, when the third pattern display device 81 displays an image of 30 frames per second, the third pattern display device 81 is 1/30 Since one frame of image is displayed every second, the display data table may define display contents for every 1/30 second interval.

In addition, in the display data table, as the sprite type to be drawn which is defined for each predetermined time interval, the sprite type itself is not specified, but the address of the character ROM 234 where the image data corresponding to the sprite type is stored. may be specified. In the display control device 114, the image data corresponding to the sprite type to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 is read from the character ROM 234. Therefore, the character ROM 234 stores the image data of the sprite type in association with each sprite type. manages the addresses of Therefore, in the display data table, if the address of the character ROM 234 storing the image data corresponding to the sprite type is defined as the display content defined for each predetermined time interval, the sprite can be associated with each sprite type. Since there is no need to manage both the information specifying the character and the address of the character ROM 234, the processing load can be reduced.

In the above control example, the work RAM 233 of the display control device 114 is provided with the stored image data determination flag 233i, and whether or not the corresponding image data is stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is stored for each sprite. Although the case has been described, instead of this, the work RAM 233 may store information indicating the sprite type stored in the image storage area 236a. In this case, when instructing transfer of image data of a predetermined sprite type, the MPU 231 refers to the information indicating the sprite type stored in the image storage area 236a stored in the work RAM 233, and transfers the predetermined image data. is already stored in the image storage area 236a, and if not stored, an instruction to transfer the image data of the predetermined sprite type may be set. Further, when the MPU 231 sets an instruction to transfer image data of a predetermined sprite type, the MPU 231 stores information indicating the sprite type for which the transfer instruction is set in the work RAM 233, and the image data of the sprite type is stored. The information indicating the sprite type stored in the sub-area of the image storage area 236a may be deleted.

In the above control example, when image data of a predetermined sprite type is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal-use video RAM 236, the sprite-type image data is stored in the normal-use video RAM 236 based on the stored image data determination flag 233i. The MPU 231 determines whether or not the image data of the predetermined sprite type is stored in the normal video RAM 236, and if the image data of the predetermined sprite type is stored, the MPU 231 performs the processing of not executing the transfer processing. The processing may be performed by the image controller 237 . In this case, a flag equivalent to the stored image data determination flag 233i is prepared in the work RAM provided in the image controller 237, and whether or not the corresponding image data is stored in the normal video RAM 236 for each sprite is determined. may be stored. Also, the work RAM provided in the image controller 237 may store the sprite type stored in the image storage area 236 a of the normal video RAM 236 . In this case, if image data of a predetermined sprite type needs to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal-use video RAM 236, the MPU 231 sends the image controller 237 regardless of the image data storage state in the normal-use video RAM 236. On the other hand, transfer data information of the image data may be transmitted.

In the above control example, the case where only the image data corresponding to "back side A" among the plurality of back side images is made resident in the back side image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 has been described. Image data corresponding to two or more back images may be resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. FIG. For example, the image data of the rear image used in part of the super reach may be resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. FIG. In particular, by making the back image of Super Reach, which appears frequently or is expected to be high, resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, image data transfer processing from the character ROM 737 to the normal video RAM 536 is executed. It is possible to suppress the number of times

In the above control example, the transfer data table or the display data table defines the image data transfer command in association with the address indicated by the pointer 233f, and the MPU 231 outputs the transfer command at a predetermined time defined by the display pointer. Although the case where the image controller 237 is controlled to transfer the image data instructed by the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 has been described, the display data table is not necessarily limited to this. Information about the sprite type required in the table is described, and the MPU 231 transfers the necessary image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 based on the information described at the top of the display data table. 237 may be controlled. Alternatively, based on the command received from the sound lamp control device 113, the MPU 231 determines the sprite type to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 in response to the command, and the image data of the image type is normally displayed from the character ROM 234. The image controller 237 may be controlled to transfer to the video RAM 236 for use.

In the above control example, the case where the color tone of a part of the image on the back surface C, which is the back image of the "island stage", changes with time was explained. good. In addition, the back image is not limited to one that scrolls or changes color tone with the passage of time. It may be something that moves or changes.

In the above control example, the main control device 110 receives the information of various counters (first per random number counter C1, first per type counter C2) acquired at the time of start winning notified to the sound lamp control device 113, the number of pending balls Although the case where it is included in the command has been described, it is not necessarily limited to this, and by another command, the information of various counters (first random number counter C1, first per type counter C2) acquired at the time of starting winning is displayed with a voice lamp. The controller 113 may be notified.

In the above control example, when the variable performance is executed, the case of displaying the high-speed variation in which all the symbols Z1 to Z3 are scrolled at such a high speed that the player cannot visually recognize them has been described. , all the patterns Z1 to Z3 may be reduced to an unrecognizable degree and displayed, or all the patterns Z1 to Z3 may be displayed as snow noise-like images in which a large number of white dots are randomly displayed.

In the above control example, the case where the game board 13 is provided with one first starting port 64a for starting the lottery for the special symbol jackpot when a ball enters has been described, but this is not necessarily the case. Instead, the game board 13 may be provided with a plurality of (for example, two) first ball entrances, each of which is independently detected to start a jackpot lottery. In this case, when there is a hold at each of the first ball entrances, the number of held ball commands sent by the main controller 110 to the sound lamp controller 113 indicate which of the first ball entrances is being held. May contain information. In addition, the variation pattern command that the main controller 110 transmits to the sound ramp control device 113 when starting the variation also includes information indicating which of the first entrances is the suspended variation effect. good. As a result, in the voice lamp control device 113, a holding ball counter is prepared for each first ball entrance, and when a holding ball number command is received, the first ball entering indicated by the holding ball number command is received. When the number of held balls is set in the number of held balls counter for the mouth and a variation pattern command is received, if the number of held balls counter for the first entrance indicated by the variation pattern command is decremented by 1, the first entrance The number of held balls can be counted every time.

In the above control example, each time the value (N) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d in the main controller 110 is updated (that is, each time it increases or decreases), the main controller issues a reserved ball number command. Although the case of transmitting from the control device 110 to the audio lamp control device 113 has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, only when the value (N) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203 d in the main controller 110 increases, the main controller 110 transmits the reserved number command to the sound lamp controller 113 . Further, the voice lamp control device 113 is configured to decrease the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b by 1 when receiving the variation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110 . As a result, the number of times master controller 110 transmits a hold number command to audible lamp controller 113 and the number of times audible lamp controller 113 receives a hold number command can be reduced. The control load of the audio ramp control device 113 can be reduced.

In the above control example, winning to the first starting port 64a and passing through the through gate 67 are each suspended up to four times, but the maximum number of suspended balls is not limited to four. , 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). In addition, the number of pending balls for variable display based on the winning to the first starting port 64a is changed in part of the third pattern display device 81 by numbers or by the number of held balls in the areas divided into four. It may be displayed in a form (for example, color or lighting pattern), and a light-emitting member such as a lamp is provided separately from the first pattern display device 37, and the number of reserved balls is notified by the light-emitting member. may be configured.

Further, as shown in the above control example, the variable display, which is a type of dynamic display, is not limited to vertically scrolling the design as identification information on the display screen of the third design display device 81. It may be performed by moving and displaying a pattern along a predetermined path such as a direction or an L shape. Further, the dynamic display of the identification information is not limited to the variable display of the pattern. It also includes the production display etc. In this case, one or more characters are used as the third symbol.

<Second control example>
Next, a second control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 226 to 246. FIG. In the second control example, various production devices (the production member 700, the horizontal slide member 840, and the injection device 400 for injecting the granular member 320 (Figs. 6)) will be described in detail. Note that the pachinko machine 10 in the second control example differs from the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example in that the control details regarding the above-described various production devices are added, and the rest is the same. Identical contents are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

First, with reference to FIGS. 226 to 229, the contents of various effect devices in this second control example will be described. It should be noted that the specific configurations and operating principles of various production devices are the same as those of the first control example described above, and thus detailed description and illustration thereof will be omitted. In addition, for convenience of explanation, in the first control example described above, different reference numerals were assigned to the structures (structures having individual functions) that make up each effect device, but in this control example, each effect device , and the description will be made as if each effect device has each function described in the first control example. In addition, although the names of the effect devices assigned the same reference numerals as in the first control example described above are partially changed, the details are the same as those described in the first control example described above. is the same as the device (structure) denoted by the reference numeral .

FIG. 226(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing various devices of the pachinko machine 10 in this control example, and FIG. 226(b) is a schematic diagram showing the configuration of the injection device 400. be. The diagram shown in FIG. 226(a) is a simplified version of the diagram shown in FIG. 7 of the first control example. Detailed description is omitted.

As shown in FIG. 226( a ), in this pachinko machine 10 , an operation unit 500 is provided so as to surround the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 . The operation unit 500 is assembled to the pachinko machine 10 so that the display surface (liquid crystal display) of the third symbol display device 81 is positioned in the opening formed in the center. A production member 700 is provided on the upper side of the operation unit 500, and horizontal slide members (rotational members) 840 are provided on the left and right sides, respectively. Further, the injection device 400 is provided at the back side of the action unit 500, that is, at a position hidden behind the action unit 500 and not visible when the pachinko machine 10 is viewed from the front.

Since the detailed operation principle is the same as the first control example described above, the detailed description thereof will be omitted, but the effect member 700 is movable so as to move downward from the standby position shown in FIG. , and is configured to cover about 1/3 of the display surface of the third pattern display device 81 when positioned in the operating position moved downward (see FIG. 8). Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 9, the effect member 700 is configured so as to be able to execute a split motion. With this configuration, by moving the effect member 700 from the standby position to the operating position, the player who is gazing at the display surface of the third pattern display device 81 is interested in the effect member 700. By making it easier for the player to hold and executing the split action after positioning the effect member 700 at the operating position, the player can be made to execute an unexpected effect while the player is watching. , can enhance the performance effect.

Further, each of the rotating members 840 can move independently in the vertical direction, and the rotating member 840 itself is configured to be rotatable around the central portion of the rotating member (see FIG. 11). In this way, by rotating the rotating member 840 while moving the position of the rotating member 840, it is possible to perform a powerful performance for the player.

Next, the configuration of the injection device 400 will be described with reference to FIG. 226(b). The ejection device 400 is a device for radially ejecting the granular members 320 upward (in the direction of the display surface of the third pattern display device 81), and the ejection device 400 itself is difficult to be visually recognized by the player. Therefore, it is assembled to the pachinko machine 10 so as to be hidden behind the operation unit 500. - 特許庁The injection device 400 is formed with a storage area ra for storing the granular member 320, and the bottom member of the storage area ra is formed in an arch shape. By driving the drive mechanism 400m, the bottom surface member is configured to be movable in the vertical direction. By moving the bottom surface member sa upward, the plurality of granular materials stored in the storage area ra 320 is configured to be ejected upward. Since the specific operating principle of the injection device 400 is the same as that of the first control example described above, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In addition, in the second control example, a storage detection sensor sa is provided as detection means capable of detecting the amount (number) of the granular members 320 stored in the storage area ra. This storage detection sensor sa is formed by a weight sensor capable of detecting the load applied to the arch-shaped bottom surface, and based on the detection result of the weight sensor, it can be determined whether or not all the granular members 320 are stored in the storage area ra. configured to be identifiable. Based on the detection result of the detection means, it is possible to detect a state in which the granular member 320 injected by the injection device 400 is not stored in the storage area ra, for example, a state in which the granular material 320 is clogged without returning to the storage area ra. can.

The configuration of the detection means for detecting whether or not the granular members 320 are normally stored in the storage area ra is not limited to the configuration described above. , and the number of granular members 320 ejected in the direction of the display surface of the third pattern display device 81 beyond the detection line, and from the display surface side of the third pattern display device 81 to the storage area ra and the number of returning granular members 320 are provided, and whether or not all the granular members 320 are stored in the storage area ra can be determined based on the measurement result of the measuring device. You can Further, as in this control example, when the object to be injected that is injected from the injection device 400 has a rollable shape (spherical shape), the object to be injected that is injected by the injection device 400 moves into the storage area ra. A counting means capable of counting the number of injection target members rolling on the alignment path is provided, and all the granular members 320 are stored in the storage area ra based on the counting result of the counting means. It may be configured such that it can be determined whether or not it is stored.

In this way, by configuring the state of the granular member 320 so as to be discernible, it becomes possible to execute an appropriate effect. In other words, in a production device such as the production member 700 and the rotating member 840, the operation of which is mechanically controlled based on the driving of the driving means (motor or solenoid), the driving condition of the driving means (the number of rotations of the motor (the number of steps) ) and the energization state of the solenoid), it is possible to grasp the current state (position) of the production device. It is possible to determine the timing at which the ejected granular member 320 is stored again in the storage area ra, although it is possible to grasp the timing by determining the driving state of the drive mechanism 400m. That is, the area reached by the ejected granular members 320 is varied according to the direction of ejection and the degree of collision between the ejected granular members 320, and furthermore, the force of the ejected granular members 320 is weakened, and the force of gravity is reduced. When falling downward due to , the granular member 320 collides with each member provided in the ejection area or gets stuck in the gap between each member, resulting in a delay in the timing of returning to the storage area ra. There was fear. Furthermore, static electricity generated by collision or contact of the granular member 320 may cause the granular member 320 to be attracted, delaying the timing of returning to the storage area ra or making it impossible to return.

Although details will be described later, in the second control example, in order to solve the above-described problem, the state of the ejected granular member 320 is determined, and based on the determination result, the granular member 320 is It is configured so that the timing and content of the execution of the production using can be variably controlled. Therefore, for example, it is possible to prevent the performance effect of injecting the granular members 320 from being executed by the injection device 400 in a state in which the granular members 320 are not stored in the storage area ra, thereby reducing the performance effect.

Furthermore, in the second control example, the determination value for determining that the number (amount) of the granular members 320 stored in the storage area ra is abnormal is changed according to the operation content (purpose of operation) of the injection device 400. It consists of By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the excessive determination of abnormality by the abnormality determination, making it difficult to execute the effect of injecting the granular member 320 from the injection device 400, and reducing the effect of the effect. can.

Furthermore, in the second control example, in a part of the state in which all the granular members 320 are not stored in the storage area ra, all the granular members 320 are intentionally ejected by the injection device 400. The granular member 320 is configured to be stored in the storage area ra. In this way, it is possible to try to normalize the storage state of the granular member 320 by using the motion control used for the presentation, so that the details of the motion control for the injection device 400 can be simplified.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 227 to 229, the contents of effects using each effect device executed in the pachinko machine 10 of the second control example will be described. 227 to 229 are diagrams for simply explaining the flow of effects using the respective effect devices (effect member 700, rotating member 840, ejection device 400), and detailed configurations are omitted. However, since the specific structure and principle of operation are the same as those of the first control example described above, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 227(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a state in which the effect member 700 is positioned at the operating position, and FIG. 227(b) is a state in which the effect member 700 is positioned at the operating position. 10 is a schematic diagram schematically showing a state in which the injection device 400 is driven and the granular member 320 is injected while the dividing operation is being performed in . FIG. 228(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a state in which the production member 700 moves to the standby position and the granular member 320 returns to the storage area ra, and FIG. 228(b) is a rotating member 8 is a schematic diagram schematically showing a state in which the injection device 400 is driven and the granular member 320 is injected while the injection device 840 is being driven. FIG.

In this control example, a series of performances using the performance member 700, the rotating member 840, and the injection device 400 are configured to be executable. In this series of performance effects, first, the first effect is executed to move the effect member 700 to the operating position (see FIG. 227(a)), and then the ejection device 400 is driven while the effect member 700 is split. A second effect is executed (see FIG. 227(b)), and after a predetermined waiting period has elapsed, a third effect is executed (see FIG. 228(b)) in which the rotating member 840 is operated and the injection device 400 is driven. and are configured to be executable.

In this way, by executing an effect in which a plurality of various devices are interlocked, it is possible to execute a powerful effect with a sense of unity for the player. In addition, as shown in FIG. 227(b), by driving the injection device 400 in correspondence with the division operation of the effect member 700, it is possible to give an illusion that the granular member 320 is protruding from the interior of the effect member 700. Therefore, the production effect can be enhanced.

In addition, in this control example, the operation state of the injection device 400 (the collection state of the granular members 320) can be determined during the execution of the series of character effects. collection situation) is determined to be in a predetermined abnormal state, only the effect display executed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81 is performed without using the effect member 700, the rotating member 840, and the injection device 400. (See FIG. 29) By configuring in this way, the effect member 700, the rotating member 840, and the injection device 400 can be changed while the granular member 320 is protruding. While suppressing the occurrence of a situation in which various members are damaged due to the movement of the , it is possible to minimize the decrease in the performance effect of the series of character performances.

Here, with reference to FIG. 230, the flow of the series of character production will be described. FIG. 230 is a timing chart schematically showing the states of various devices of the pachinko machine 10 according to the passage of time when a series of performances are executed. FIG. 230(b) is the sound lamp control device 113, FIG. 230(c) is the liquid crystal display of the third pattern display device 81, FIG. ) is a timing chart schematically showing the situation of the falling accessory (effect member) 700, and FIG.

As shown in FIG. 230(a), in this control example, during the variation period of the special symbol variation (for example, variation time of 90 seconds) executed by the main controller 110, the above-described series of character effects are performed. It is configured as follows. That is, as shown in FIG. 230(c), on the display surface (liquid crystal display) of the third symbol display device 81, based on the start of the special symbol variation, the variation effect display of the third symbol is executed, After that, 45 seconds after the variable performance display is executed, a series of character performance display corresponding to the series of character performance is executed.

As shown in FIG. 230(b), when executing a series of character effects, it is necessary to cause the projectile accessory 400 to perform preparatory motions in advance, and five seconds before executing the series of character effects ( Preparatory control is executed with 5 seconds from the timing 40 seconds after the start of special symbol variation as a preparatory period. When the preparatory control is executed, the shooting accessory 400 performs a preparatory action (see FIG. 230(d)). performs the operation (see FIG. 226(b)). Then, when the first action of the firing accessory 400 is completed, a preparatory action (moving from the firing position to the standby position) is performed for the next action, and a waiting period is set until the execution timing of the second action. be.

Then, when a predetermined period of time has passed after the action of the falling accessory 700 has ended, and when 60 seconds have passed since the variable effect display was executed, the rotation member 840 starts to operate, and the shooting role is performed in accordance with the timing. A second action of the object 400 is performed. In this way, the performance effect can be enhanced by executing operation control for each rendering device so that the motion timing of the shooting accessory 400 matches the operation contents of the falling accessory 700 and the rotating member 840. .

Here, as the preparatory operation of the projectile accessory 400, there is a driving process to move the projectile accessory 400 to the standby position (see FIG. 227(a)), and it is determined whether or not the condition of the granular member 320 is normal. and a determination process are executed. Then, when it is determined that the granular member 320 is normal (normally stored in the storage area ra), the next operation of the projectile accessory 400 can be executed.

As shown in FIG. 230, in this control example, the projectile accessory 400 is configured to operate multiple times within a series of performance periods. We have a waiting period. This waiting period is provided as a period during which part of the preparatory operation can be executed again when the preparatory operation has not been completed normally. Specifically, at the end timing of the preparation period, it is determined whether or not all of the granular members 320 are stored in the storage area ra. It is configured to be able to perform the process of determining again whether all of the granular members 320 are stored in the storage area ra after an interval.

As described above, the granular member 320 fired by the firing accessory 400 moves irregularly within the firing area (ejection area), so the time it takes to return to the storage area ra varies greatly depending on the case. It will be. Therefore, the process of determining whether the granular member 320 is completely stored in the storage area ra can be executed a plurality of times at different timings, and even if a slight error occurs, the second operation of the projectile accessory 400 can be performed. is executable. By configuring in this way, it is possible to facilitate the execution of a series of character productions, and to enhance the production effect.

Although detailed explanation will be given later, in this control example, when it is determined that the storage condition of the granular member 320 is abnormal during the preparation period of the projectile accessory 400, even when the waiting period has passed, When the determination is continued, the execution of the performance for operating the projectile accessory 400 is stopped and another performance is executed. By configuring in this way, even when the performance using the projectile accessory 400 cannot be normally executed, it is possible to execute a series of performances that do not give the player a sense of discomfort.

Next, with reference to FIG. 231, the contents of the operation control when the Pachinko machine 10 is turned on among the operation controls of the shooting accessory 400 will be described. FIG. 231 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the flow of operation control of the projectile accessory 400 (at the time of start-up). In this control example, when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, it is configured to check the operation of various effect devices provided in the pachinko machine 10 . In this manner, the operation confirmation of various performance devices is executed at the time when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, that is, at the time before the opening of the game parlor where the game using the pachinko machine 10 is performed. Therefore, when an abnormality occurs in the operation of various production devices, for example, when it is determined that it is an abnormal state in which normal operation cannot be performed due to a malfunction of the drive mechanism (motor, solenoid, drive gear, etc.) , it is possible to carry out the repair without bothering the player during the game.

As shown in FIG. 231, when the operation confirmation process for the projectile accessory 400 is executed when the power is turned on, first, granular member monitoring is performed to determine whether the granular member 320 is normally stored in the storage area ra. Processing is executed (see FIG. 231(b)). In this granular member monitoring process, it is determined whether the granular member 320 is normally stored in the storage area ra based on the detection result of the storage detection sensor sa shown in FIG. 226(b). Then, based on the determination result of the particulate member monitoring process, it is determined whether or not the current storage situation is abnormal (see FIG. 231(c)).

In this control example, in the abnormality determination for determining whether the determination result of the particulate member monitoring process is abnormal, the abnormality determination rank is changed according to the timing (situation) at which the abnormality determination is executed. ing. Although the details will be described later, the storage amount of the granular member determined to be abnormal is changed according to the abnormality determination timing (situation).

In the abnormality determination that is first executed in the operation confirmation process for the projectile accessory 400 at the time of power-up, the abnormality determination with the highest determination level (high level A) is performed. In this high level A abnormality determination, it is determined as "normal" only when the determination result of the granular member monitoring process is that all the granular members 320 are stored in the storage area ra. If it is a determination result, it is configured to be determined as "abnormal". Then, when it is determined as "abnormal" by the abnormality determination, the execution of the initial operation process at the time of power-up is interrupted, and the abnormality notification process for notifying the abnormal state to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 is performed. By configuring in this way, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of secondary damage due to the continuation of the initial operation processing in a state where an abnormality has occurred in the projectile accessory 400 .

Then, when it is determined to be "normal" in the abnormality determination performed at the first timing of the initial operation process, then the preparatory operation and the firing operation are performed as drive control of the projectile accessory 400. FIG. After that, after a standby period of 3 seconds, the second abnormality determination is performed. In this second abnormality determination, the abnormality determination (high level B) having the next highest determination level after the above-described high level A abnormality determination is performed.

In this high-level B abnormality determination, when the determination result of the granular member monitoring process is that all the granular members 320 are stored in the storage area ra, it is determined as "normal", and the amount is within a predetermined amount. "Retry" if it is abnormal LV1 indicating that the error (eg, error 10%), abnormal LV2 indicating that the error is a predetermined amount or more (eg, error is greater than 10%), or If it is abnormal LV3, it is configured to be determined as "abnormal".

Next, with reference to FIG. 232, the contents of the operation control when using the shooting accessory 400 as the effect of the pachinko machine 10 (for example, when performing a series of accessory effects) will be described. FIG. 232 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the flow of operation control of the projectile accessory 400 (during a series of accessory presentations). In this control example, similar to the initial operation process described above, even when executing a series of character performances, it is configured to perform abnormality determination for various devices used for performances. And, according to the result of the abnormality determination, the contents of the series of character performances are changed. Furthermore, by varying the determination level of the abnormality determination in the abnormality determination, it is configured to facilitate the execution of the production using the shooting accessory 400 in the series of accessory production.

Next, referring to FIG. 233, a description will be given of the performance mode of the series of role productions executed according to the abnormality determination result of the shooting accessory 400 in the series of role productions. FIG. 233 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the flow of effects executed in a series of role product effects. In this control example, as shown in FIG. 232, two abnormality determinations (first abnormality determination with a medium level determination level and second abnormality determination with a low level determination level) are performed during a series of character productions. 233(a), in the first half of the target effect period of the series of character object effects, the first launch effect of the projectile object 400 and the falling object 700 are displayed. is executed. Then, after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, the second firing effect of the projectile accessory 400 and the rotation effect of the rotating member 840 are executed. Incidentally, on the liquid crystal display of the third symbol display device 81, an effect display corresponding to a predetermined series of character object effects is executed.

On the other hand, when it is determined as "abnormality (for example, abnormal LV2)" in the first abnormality determination, it means that the granular member 320 is not normally stored in the storage area ra. Even if the object 400 is moved, the rendering effect is low, so as shown in FIG. 233(b), a rendering mode different from the normal mode (see FIG. 233(a)) is set. Specifically, execution of the first shooting effect of the shooting accessory 400 is stopped, and as the effect using the falling accessory 700, a specific falling effect is set instead of the normal falling effect. Thereafter, regardless of the result of the second abnormality determination to be executed, even in the second half of the series of character performances, the execution of the second firing performance using the shooting accessory 400 is stopped, and the rotation performance using the rotating member 840 is stopped. is executed.

Since the effect period of the specific falling effect is set longer than the effect period of the normal falling effect, the interval from the end of the effect of the falling accessory 700 to the start of the effect of the rotating member 840 is normal. It is constructed so as to be shorter than the series of role productions that are executed at the beginning. In other words, in a series of performances that are normally executed, the shooting role 400 is driven in correspondence with the operations of various performance devices (the falling role 700 and the rotating member 840). In order for the object 400 to be driven normally, it was necessary to leave an interval of a predetermined period.

On the other hand, in the effect mode of the series of role effects shown in FIG. 233(b), the shooting accessory 400 is not driven, so even if the effect period of the falling accessory 700 is lengthened, the player feels uncomfortable. There is nothing In addition, since the timing of executing the effect of the rotating member 840 is the same as in the normal state (see FIG. 233(a)), it is possible to share the control processing contents between the normal state and the abnormal state. can be reduced.

In the example shown in FIG. 233(b), when the result of the first abnormality determination is determined to be "abnormal", the result of the second abnormality determination is not considered, and the Although it is configured to set an effect mode that does not use the accessory 400, it is not limited to this, and when the result of the second abnormality determination is determined to be "normal," the second shot of the shot accessory 400 is performed. It may be configured to execute production. That is, in the case where the first abnormality determination of the series of performance effects is determined as "abnormal", for example, the granular members 320 are stored biased in the storage area ra, and all the granular members 320 are stored in the storage area ra. If it is not determined normally that the falling accessory 700 is present, or if it is determined to be "abnormal" because the granular member 320 is caught in the falling accessory 700, an effect using the falling accessory 700 is executed as a series of accessory effects. By doing so, all the granular members 320 may be normally stored in the storage area ra, so the second shooting performance of the shooting accessory 400 may be executed based on the result of the second abnormality determination. As a result, it is possible to facilitate the performance using the projectile accessory 400 .

Next, a description will be given of the effect mode of the series of character productions when an abnormality is determined in the second abnormality determination performed during the series of character productions. FIG. 233(c) is a diagram schematically showing an effect mode of a series of character object effects when the second abnormality determination determines "slightly abnormal".

When the same determination as "normal" is made in the first abnormality determination, the same first launch effect and drop effect as the series of accessory effects in the normal state are executed. After that, when it is determined as "slight abnormality (for example, abnormality LV2)" in the second abnormality determination, a delay period is set, and after the delay period elapses, retry processing is executed to execute abnormality determination again. . Then, when the result of the abnormality determination executed in the retry process is "normal", the same operation control as in the normal state is performed. The second launch effect of the projectile accessory 400, the rotation effect of the rotating member 840, and the effect display executed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81 are simultaneously executed based on the delay period elapsed timing.

In other words, it is configured to delay the execution timing of the second half production in the series of character production by the period (delay period) during which the retry process is executed. During the delay period, the specific display is executed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 without executing the operation control of various effect devices. By configuring in this way, the display content of the effect display that is continuously displayed during the execution of the series of character performances and the operation contents of various effect devices whose execution timing is variable depending on the presence or absence of delay are not deviated. It is possible to suppress the deterioration of the production effect.

Although detailed description is omitted, for example, in the pattern shown in FIG. A second specific display of the contents is displayed, and a series of performances of the character is executed in which various performance devices do not operate. By configuring in this way, it is possible to end a series of character performances using a performance display that does not give a sense of incongruity with respect to the display content of the specific display. In addition, it is possible to reduce the amount of data corresponding to the contents of operation control of various dedicated effect devices corresponding to special abnormality determination results.

Next, a description will be given of an effect mode of a series of character productions when an abnormality is determined in the second abnormality determination performed during the series of character productions. FIG. 233(d) is a diagram schematically showing a production mode of a series of character productions when the second abnormality judgment is "abnormal (for example, abnormal LV3)". When the determination result of the second abnormality determination is determined to be abnormal LV3, the special operation effect is executed without executing the retry process as shown in FIG. 233(c). This special operation effect sets an operation effective period during which the player can operate the operation means (frame button 22), and based on the player's operation of the operation means within the operation effective period, various effect devices are activated. It is a production that activates something.

In other words, based on the determination as "abnormal" by the abnormality determination, the operation of various production devices as an operation scenario of a series of character production is stopped, and instead, an operation production used as another production is incorporated. Configure. By configuring in this way, it becomes possible for the player to operate various production devices by operating the frame button 22 during execution of a series of character productions in which the production devices are operated a plurality of times. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from thinking that the performance mode is set due to the abnormal judgment of the projectile accessory 400.例文帳に追加

<Regarding the electrical configuration of the second control example>
Next, the electrical configuration in this second control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 234 to 236. FIG. First, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in this second control example will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 234 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in this second control example. The electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in this second control example is different from the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example described above (see FIG. 152). and the configuration of the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113. Specifically, the decorative accessory motors for driving various production devices are different. The difference is that the group Mz is connected. Since other configurations are the same as those of the first control example described above, they are denoted by the same reference numerals and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted. The decorative accessory motor group Mz includes various motors and solenoids for driving the falling accessory 700, the rotating member 840, the shooting accessory 400, etc., and their specific configurations and operations. Since the principle is the same as that of the first control example described above, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Next, referring to FIG. 235(a), the configuration of the ROM 222 of the sound ramp control device 113 in the second control example will be described. FIG. 235(a) is a diagram schematically showing the configuration of the ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the second control example. As shown in FIG. 235(a), this second control example differs from the above-described first control example in that a role product action table 222aa and an abnormality determination table 222ab are added, and otherwise the same. is. The same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

The accessory action table 222aa contains operation contents (operation scenario ) is stored, and action scenarios are defined corresponding to the action contents to be executed for each of various decorative accessories, and action scenarios corresponding to the action contents to be executed are defined It is read and an action based on the read action scenario is performed.

Here, the contents of the scenarios defined in this role product action table 222aa will be described with reference to FIG. 236(a). FIG. 236(a) is a schematic diagram showing various scenarios defined in the role product action table 222aa. As shown in FIG. 236(a), the role product action table 222aa contains, in addition to the action scenario referred to when executing the variable effect, when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on (starting up) Operational scenarios that are referenced during initial operation are also defined.

Specifically, an initial action scenario 222aa1, a launch accessory preparation action scenario 222aa2, a launch accessory first action scenario 222aa3, a launch accessory second action scenario 222aa4, a falling accessory action scenario 222aa5, and a rotating accessory action scenario 222aa6. is stored.

Next, the abnormality determination table 222ab is referred to when determining how much the granular member 320 fired by the projectile accessory 400 has returned to the storage area ra of the projectile accessory 400. It is configured such that the determination result of the abnormality determination is changed according to the error from the normal value. In this control example, the state in which all the granular members 320 (for example, 10 pieces) are stored in the storage area ra is defined as "10", and each time the number of stored granular members 320 decreases by one, an error is generated. It is configured to be determined in increments of 10%.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 236(b), when the error (%) is "0", the determination result is "normal", and when the error is "10%", the determination result is "abnormal LV1 ”, and when the error is “20% to 30%”, the determination result is “abnormal LV2”, and when the error is “40% or more”, the determination result is “abnormal LV3”. In this way, by stepwise determining the current state with respect to the state in which all the granular members 320 (for example, 10 pieces) are stored in the storage area ra, the step of determining an abnormality according to the situation. can be easily varied.

Next, with reference to FIG. 235(b), the configuration of the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the sound ramp control device 113 in the second control example will be described. FIG. 235(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113. As shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 235(b), this second control example differs from the above-described first control example in that a character delay timer 223aa and an effect level storage area 223ab are added, and the rest is the same. is. Identical contents are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

The role delay timer 223aa is a timer for measuring the period during which the operation control of the projectile accessory 400 is delayed. ) is set (see S3909 in FIG. 243). Then, the value is updated every time the performance management process (see S2151 in FIG. 242) is executed, and when the value of the timer becomes 0, the process for re-determining the abnormality of the projectile accessory 400 is performed. is executed (see S3810 in FIG. 244). During the period in which the value of the role delay timer 223aa is greater than 0, that is, during the delay period, operation instructions to various production devices other than the shooting role 400 executed by the sound lamp control device 113 are also delayed. .

By configuring in this way, it is possible to delay the operation instruction to other various production devices by the same length as the delay period set for the operation control of the projectile accessory 400. It is possible to facilitate execution of motion control with a sense of unity for various production devices including 400 . Also, even if the processing for extending the delay period of the projectile accessory 400 in the middle is configured to be executable, until the value of the accessory delay timer 223aa becomes 0, other various production devices are operated. Since no instructions are output, it is possible to facilitate execution of motion control with a sense of unity for various production devices including the projectile accessory 400 .

In addition, in this control example, in addition to the various effect devices, the process of instructing the display control contents related to the display effect displayed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81 is also delayed. Regardless of the length of the delay period set for the projectile accessory 400, an effect device may be provided that outputs an action instruction without limitation. By providing such an effect device, by distinguishing between the operation contents of the projectile accessory 400 and the operation content of the effect device, the player can understand that the operation control of the projectile accessory 400 has been delayed. can be notified easily.

The effect level storage area 223ab is a storage area in which the effect level set according to the effect mode of the effect using the projectile accessory 400 is temporarily stored. In this control example, before executing the effect using the shooting accessory 400, that is, the firing effect of firing the granular member 320 toward the display surface side of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 227(b)) , a preparatory action must be performed to lower the bottom member of the projectile accessory 400 to the preparatory position. Since the preparatory operation is executed by driving the driving mechanism 400m (see FIG. 226(b)), when the player notices that the driving mechanism 400m has been driven, the shooting effect is executed. Since the player will know that the shooting effect will be executed before the game starts, there is a problem that it is difficult to provide the player with an unexpected effect.

Therefore, in this control example, even if the shooting effect is not executed, only the preparatory motion can be executed. As a result, even if the player notices that the drive mechanism 400m has been driven, it is difficult for the player to know whether or not the shooting performance will be executed, so that the player can easily be provided with an unexpected performance. be able to.

Then, in this control example, when setting an effect in which the preparatory action of the projectile accessory 400 is executed, the effect set this time is an effect mode in which only the preparatory action is executed, or an effect in which the firing effect is executed. It is configured such that it is possible to determine whether it is in a mode or not, and to determine the effect level according to the result of the determination. Specifically, in the case of the effect of executing only the preparatory motion, it is determined to be the effect level 1, and in the case of the effect of executing the firing effect, it is determined to be the effect level 2, and is stored in the effect level storage area 223ab (Fig. 241). (see S3705 and S3706 of ).

The effect level stored in the effect level storage area 223ab is referred to when determining the abnormality level using the abnormality determination table 222ab. In this way, the effect of executing only the preparatory action, that is, the effect of not controlling the operation of the shooting accessory 400 even if the result of the abnormality determination is "normal" is executed, and the firing effect is executed. By making the determination result of the abnormality level by the abnormality determination different between the effect to be performed, for example, because the effect of only the preparation action was executed, the firing effect was not executed, or the result of the abnormality determination was "abnormal". , it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand whether the shooting effect was not executed.

<Regarding control processing contents of the audio ramp control device in the second control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 237 to 246, control processing contents of the sound ramp control device 113 in the second control example will be described. In the second control example, in contrast to the first control example described above, the start-up process 2 (see FIG. 237) is replaced with the start-up process (see FIG. 193), and the main process (see FIG. 194) is replaced with the main process. Processing 2 (see FIG. 239) is replaced with effect mode setting process (see S2607 in FIG. 200), and effect mode setting process 2 (see S2657 in FIG. 240) is replaced with liquid crystal effect execution management process (see S2110 in FIG. 209). The difference is that the liquid crystal effect execution management process 2 (see S2160 in FIG. 245) is replaced with the operation effect management process (see S2111 in FIG. 210) and the operation effect management process 2 (see S2161 in FIG. 246) is executed. , are otherwise identical. The same reference numerals are given to the same contents, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 237, start-up processing 2 (see FIG. 237) will be described. FIG. 237 is a flowchart schematically showing the contents of start-up processing 2. FIG. As shown in FIG. 237, the start-up process 2 differs from the above-described start-up process (see FIG. 193) in that an initial operation process (S2051) is added.

Specifically, when the start-up process 2 (see FIG. 237) is executed, the processes of S2001 to S2010, which are the same as those of the above-described start-up process (see FIG. 193), are executed. When the process of S2010 is completed, the initial operation process is then executed (S2051), then interrupt permission is set (S2011), and this process ends. Details of this initial operation process will be described later with reference to FIG. ) is the process for executing the operation check. In other words, in the second control example, the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, and during the period (startup period) until the main process can be executed in a loop, it is possible to check the operation of various effect devices. . Then, when an abnormality occurs during the confirmation of the operation of various production devices, the start-up process 2 is not terminated, and the abnormality is notified to the outside.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to grasp that various devices for decoration are out of order when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, so that various devices that are out of order while the player is playing. It is possible to suppress the fact that the performance is executed using , giving the player a sense of displeasure. Further, the pachinko machine 10 in recent years is configured to control the operation of a plurality of performance devices, and the contents of the operation control are configured to differ according to the lottery result of the special symbol. Therefore, even when the pachinko machine 10 is being played, it is rare that all of the operation control contents set for the various effect devices are executed. Even if an impossible production device occurs, if the production for controlling the operation of the production device is not executed, it is not possible to grasp that the production device is out of order. There was a problem that the cable was left disconnected for several days. On the other hand, in this control example, when the start-up process 2 of the pachinko machine 10 is executed, the operation control for confirming the operation is executed for various effect devices. It is possible to prevent the failure of the device from being overlooked for a long time.

Next, the contents of the initial operation process (S2051) executed in the start-up process 2 (see FIG. 237) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 237 is a flow chart schematically showing the contents of the initial operation process (S2051). In this initial operation process (S2051), a process for confirming the operation of the decorative production device (for example, the falling accessory 700, the rotating member 840, the shooting accessory 400, etc.) provided in the pachinko machine 10 is performed. This process is looped until all operations are confirmed. Note that FIG. 238 explains in detail the processing contents related to the operation confirmation of the projectile accessory 400, which is the characteristic configuration of this control example, but the other production devices are similarly subjected to the operation confirmation processing. ing. As for the other production devices, the detailed description of the processing related to operation confirmation is omitted.

When the initial action process (S2051) is executed, first, the initial action scenario 222aa1 is read from the role product action table 222aa (S2081). Then, operation control corresponding to the initial operation scenario 222aa1 is executed (S2082). Here, in the initial operation scenario 222aa1, an operation scenario is defined so that the operation control is sequentially executed for each effect device, and it is determined that the result of the operation check of one effect device is normal. In this case, it is configured to check the operation of the next production device. By independently controlling the operation of each rendering device in this way, it is possible to prevent the rendering devices in operation from colliding with each other and being damaged.

Furthermore, when the operation confirmation of all the production devices is completed normally, it is configured to execute the operation confirmation of simultaneously operating a plurality of production devices in the combination used in the actual production. In this case, the operation scenario for production stored in the role product operation table 222aa is read out, and the operation control for each production is executed. In this way, by checking the operation using the operation control of the contents actually executed in the production, it is possible to determine whether or not the operation instructions are properly output to the plurality of production devices, or to check whether the plurality of production When the devices are driven at the same time, it is possible to check whether an excessive electric power value is output or not, and the frequency of malfunction of the performance device during the game can be suppressed.

In this control example, the initial action process is executed using the action scenario for the initial action, but the present invention is not limited to this. may be executed. By configuring in this way, it is possible to reduce the amount of action scenarios for operating the production device.

In addition, in this control example, the initial action scenario 222aa1 is defined so that the action control is sequentially executed for each effect device. The contents of the initial action scenario 222aa1 may be defined so that the action control is performed redundantly for the effect devices. As a result, the time spent on the initial operation process can be shortened.

After the processing of S2082 is completed, it is next determined whether or not the motion control of the projectile accessory 400 is completed (S2083). If the operation control of the device is being executed, or if the operation control of the projectile accessory 400 is being executed (S2083: No), it is determined whether an abnormality has occurred in a production device other than the projectile accessory 400. Then (S2084), if it is determined that no abnormality has occurred (S2084: No), the initial operation scenario 222aa1 is updated (S2085), and it is determined whether the updated initial operation scenario 222aa1 indicates termination. However, if it is determined that the contents do not indicate the end (S2085: No), the process proceeds to the above-described S2082, and the processes of S2082 to S2086 are repeatedly executed until the initial operation scenario 222aa1 ends. If it is determined in the process of S2086 that the updated initial operation scenario 222aa1 indicates the end (S2084: Yes), this process ends.

On the other hand, in the processing of S2084, if it is determined that an abnormality has occurred in the production device other than the projectile accessory 400 (S2084: Yes), the notification indicating the accessory abnormality is executed (S2091), and the processing is looped. . By configuring in this way, the initial operation process does not end in a state in which the accessory abnormality has been notified. In this case, after the hall staff confirms the notification indicating the accessory abnormality and eliminates the cause of the accessory abnormality, the pachinko machine 10 is turned on again. In other words, the pachinko machine 10, which is determined to be abnormal in the accessory, needs to be performed by the hall staff in order to operate normally, so the pachinko machine 10 can be brought into a normal state without fail.

In this control example, the initial operation process is always executed when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on. The configuration may be such that when the power is turned on in this state, the start-up process 2 can be terminated without executing the initial operation process (S2051). By configuring in this manner, for example, when the player has trouble during the game and it is necessary to turn on the power of the pachinko machine 10 again during the operation of the game hall, the initial operation process can be skipped. can be done. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can be quickly returned to a state in which the player can play.

Return to S2083 and continue the description. In the process of S2083, if it is determined that the content of the initial action scenario this time is to complete the action of the projectile accessory 400 (S2083: Yes), 3 seconds have passed since the action of the projectile accessory 400 was completed. (S2087), and if it is determined that 3 seconds have not passed (S2087: No), the process of S2087 is repeatedly executed until 3 seconds have passed. Then, in the process of S2087, when it is determined that 3 seconds have passed (S2087: Yes), the detection result of the detection sensor (storage detection sensor sa) is acquired (S2088), and the acquired detection result is used to detect the abnormality The determination table 222ab is referenced to determine the abnormality level (S2089).

Then, it is determined whether the abnormality level is 1 or more as determined in the process of S2089 (S2090), and if it is determined to be 1 or more (S2090: Yes), the notification indicating the accessory abnormality is executed (S2091 ) to loop the process. On the other hand, when it is determined that the abnormality level is not 1 or more (normal) (S2090: No), the process proceeds to S2085 described above.

Next, the contents of main processing 2 will be described with reference to FIG. 239 is a flowchart showing the control contents of main processing 2. FIG. This main processing 2 is a new addition of character effect management processing (S2151) to the main processing (see FIG. 194) of the sound lamp control device 113 described above, and liquid crystal effect execution management processing (S2110). The difference is that the liquid crystal effect execution management process 2 (S2160) is replaced with the operation effect management process (S2111) and the operation effect management process 2 (S2161) is executed. Also, the difference is that the contents of the processing executed in the command determination processing (S2114) and the variable display setting processing (S2115) are partially changed. Other than that, they are the same, and the same reference numerals are assigned to the same contents, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

When the main process 2 is executed, the processes from S2101 to S2109 which are the same as the above-described main process (see FIG. 194) are executed, then the character effect management process (S2151) is executed, and then the liquid crystal effect execution management is performed. Processing 2 (S2160) and operation effect management processing 2 (S2161) are executed. After completing the processing of S2161, the processing of S2112 to S2120, which is the same as the above-described main processing (see FIG. 194), is executed, and this processing ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 240, the contents of the effect mode setting process 2 (S2657) executed in the command determination process (see S2114) of the main process 2 (see FIG. 239) will be described. This effect mode setting process 2 (S2657) differs from the above-described effect mode setting process (see S2607 in FIG. 200) in that a process for setting the effect mode of the character effect is added. The contents other than that are the same, and the same contents are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

When the effect mode setting process 2 (S2657) is executed, first, the same processes of S2701 to S2705 and S2707 as the above-described effect mode setting process (see S2607 in FIG. 200) are executed. Then, when the processing of S2704, S2705, and S2707 is completed, it is next determined whether or not there is a character effect in the variable effect pattern selected this time (S2751). ), the role product effect setting process is executed (S2752), a display command for indicating various setting contents is set (S2706), and this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S2751, if it is determined that there is no role object effect (S2751: No), the process of S2706 is executed as it is, and this process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 241, the contents of the character object effect setting process (S2752) executed in the effect mode setting process 2 (see S2657 in FIG. 240) will be described. FIG. 241 is a flow chart showing the contents of the role product effect setting process (S2752). This character effect setting process (S2752) is for executing a process for setting the effect mode of the character effect, and sets the operation scenario of the character effect corresponding to the selected variable effect pattern. When setting the effect mode corresponding to the effect using the projectile accessory 400, the process of setting the effect level is executed. The production level set in this role production setting process (S2752) is referred to when executing the abnormality determination of the shooting accessory 400. FIG.

When the role production setting process (S2752) is executed, first, the type of the role production included in the variable production pattern selected this time is extracted (S3701), and the shooting accessory 400 is added to the type of the extracted role production. (S3702). In the process of S3702, when it is determined that the character effect using the projectile accessory 400 is included (S3702: Yes), the effect content of the projectile accessory effect is determined (S3703). Then, it is determined whether the shot accessory effect extracted this time is a shot accessory effect in which only the preparatory action is executed or a shot accessory effect in which the shot effect is executed (S3704).

In the process of S3704, when it is determined that the performance is a shooting accessory effect in which only the preparatory motion is executed (S3704: Yes), the effect level 1 is set in the effect level storage area 223ab, and the process proceeds to S3707. On the other hand, if it is determined that not only the preparatory motion, that is, the firing effect will also be executed (S3704: No), the effect level 2 is set in the effect level storage area 223ab, and the process proceeds to S3707.

In this control example, as the role production using the shooting accessory 400, it is possible to execute a shooting accessory production in which only the preparatory action is executed and a shooting accessory production in which the preparation action and the shooting action are executed. ing. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the player from knowing in advance that the shooting motion will be performed when the preparatory motion is performed.

Furthermore, in this control example, different production levels are set for the shooting accessory production for executing only the preparation motion and the shooting accessory production for executing the preparation motion and the shooting motion, and the set production It is configured to vary the degree of abnormality determination according to the level. Specifically, when the shooting accessory effect of executing the preparatory motion and the shooting motion is set, the shooting accessory 400 is more likely than the case of setting the shooting accessory effect of performing only the preparatory motion. is configured to make it difficult to determine that the situation is abnormal. By configuring in this way, it is possible to facilitate the execution of the shooting action using the shooting accessory 400 .

On the other hand, when the shooting action using the shooting accessory 400 is not performed and only the preparatory action is performed, it is likely that the situation of the shooting accessory 400 is abnormal. Because of this configuration, the abnormality determination of the projectile accessory 400 can be performed properly without lowering the frequency of execution of the shooting operation using the projectile accessory 400 .

In addition, in this control example, when it is determined that the situation of the projectile accessory 400 is abnormal, it is configured to be able to execute another character effect that does not use the projectile accessory 400 . Therefore, in the case of executing the shooting accessory presentation for executing only the preparatory motion of the shooting accessory 400, if it is determined that the situation of the shooting accessory 400 is abnormal, another accessory presentation is performed. As a result, it is possible to substantially enhance the performance effect as compared with the character performance in which only the preparatory motion is executed.

Returning to FIG. 241, the description continues. In the processing of S3707, the action scenario corresponding to the type extracted as the current role product performance is read from the role product motion table 222aa (S3707), the read motion scenario is set (S3708), and the performance corresponding to the set motion scenario is executed. The mode is stored in the effect selection information storage area 223h (S3709), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the processing of S3702, if it is determined that the type of the character product presentation does not have the firing accessory presentation (S3702: No), the processing of S3703 to S3706 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S3707. do.

Next, with reference to FIG. 242, the contents of the role product presentation management process (S2151 in FIG. 242) executed in the main process 2 (see FIG. 239) will be described. FIG. 242 is a flow chart showing the contents of the role product effect management process (S2151). In this role product performance management processing (S2151), as various management processes that are executed during the role product production, an abnormality determination process that is executed during the performance of the role product, and an error determination process when a value is set in the role product delay timer 223aa. Processing is performed.

When the role product performance management process (S2151) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the role product action scenario is set, that is, whether or not the role product action scenario is currently being performed (S3801), and the role product action scenario is set. If it is determined that it has not been done (S3801: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3801 that the role product action scenario is set (S3801: Yes), then it is determined whether the value of the role product delay timer 223aa is greater than 0 (S3802), If it is determined that it is not greater than 0 (it is 0) (S3802: No), the set role product action scenario is updated (S3803). Then, it is determined whether or not there is a role product action scenario corresponding to the given role product 400 in the currently set role product action scenario (S3804), and if it is determined that there is a role product action scenario corresponding to the given role product 400 (S3804: Yes), it is determined whether or not the content of the current action scenario is the timing for abnormality determination (S3805). (S3806), and the process ends.

On the other hand, in the processing of S3804, if it is determined that the role product action scenario of the projectile accessory 400 is not set (S3804: No), or in the processing of S3805, if it is determined that it is not the abnormality determination timing (S3805: If No), the operation control corresponding to the operation scenario is executed (S3807), and this processing ends.

Also, in the process of S3802, the value of the role delay timer 223aa is greater than 0, that is, the abnormality determination process for the projectile role 400 has already been executed, and as a result of the determination, the delay process for delaying the role performance is executed. If it is determined that a predetermined value (for example, a value corresponding to 2 seconds) is set in the role delay timer 223aa (S3802: Yes), the value of the role delay timer 223aa is updated ( Subtraction) (S3808), and it is determined whether the value of the role delay timer 223aa after the subtraction is 0 (S3809). Here, when it is determined that the value of the role delay timer 223aa is 0 (S3809: Yes), it is the timing when the delay period has passed, so the abnormality during the second effect is executed again to execute the abnormality determination. Determination processing is executed (S3810), and this processing ends.

On the other hand, in the processing of S3809, if it is determined that the value of the role product delay timer 223aa is not 0 (greater than 0) (S3809: No), this processing is terminated. If it is determined in the process of S3809 that the value of the character product delay timer 223aa is greater than 0, the processes of S3802, S3802, S3808, and S3809 are repeatedly executed, and the operation scenario regarding the currently set character product presentation is executed. The update process (S3803) is not executed. That is, in a situation where the value of the character product delay timer 223aa is greater than 0, the character product presentation does not proceed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the performance effect from being degraded due to the performance timing of a plurality of role product performances being shifted during the delay period.

Next, with reference to FIG. 243, the contents of the performance abnormality determination process (S3806) executed in the role product performance management process (see S2151 in FIG. 242) will be described. FIG. 243 is a flow chart schematically showing the content of the abnormality determination process during rendering (S3806). In this performance abnormality determination process (S3806), abnormality determination in a role performance (for example, a series of role performances) in which the shooting accessory 400 is used is executed. Specifically, as described above with reference to FIG. Abnormality determination with a determination level of "low level" performed before operating the accessory 400 and abnormality determination with a determination level of "high level" performed after the second shot accessory 400 is operated are performed. be.

When the performance abnormality determination process (S3806) is executed, first, the detection result of the detection sensor (storage detection sensor sa) is acquired (S3901), and based on the acquired detection result, the abnormality determination table 222ab is referred to and the current is determined (S3902). Next, it is determined whether or not the current abnormality determination timing is the first abnormality determination timing (the timing at which abnormality determination with a determination level of "middle level" in FIG. 232 is executed) (S3903).

In the process of S3903, if it is determined that it is the first abnormality determination timing (S3903: Yes), it is determined whether the abnormality level determined in the process of S3902 is "2" or more (S3904), (S3904: Yes), the production mode indicating the specific production without using the projectile accessory 400 is determined (S3905), the operation scenario corresponding to the projectile accessory 400 is reset (S3906), and the role A notification command indicating an object abnormality is set (S3907), and this processing ends.

In other words, at the timing of the first abnormality determination, that is, at the abnormality determination timing executed before the performance using the projectile accessory 400 is executed, the amount of the granular members 320 stored in the storage area ra is less than 80%. , it is determined that the situation of the projectile accessory 400 is abnormal. As a result, it is possible to prevent the performance effect from being lowered when the performance using the projectile accessory 400 is executed. Also, in this case, as a specific effect that does not use the projectile accessory 400, for example, as shown in FIG. Since it is configured so as to execute the specific falling performance, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the performance effect of the series of character performance itself.

On the other hand, in the processing of S3903, if it is determined that the current timing is not the first abnormality determination timing (S3903: No), then the second abnormality determination timing (the abnormality determination with the determination level of "weak level" in FIG. 232 is performed). execution timing) (S3908). If it is determined in the process of S3908 that it is the second abnormality determination timing (S3908: Yes), then it is determined whether the abnormality level determined in the process of S3902 is "2" (S3909). (S3909: Yes), a value indicating 2 seconds is set to the character delay timer 223aa (S3910), a display command indicating the display mode during the delay period is set (S3911), and this End the process.

In the process of S3909, if it is determined that it is not "2" (S3909: No), then it is determined whether the abnormality level is "3" (S3912), and if it is determined that it is "3" (S3912: Yes), determines the effect mode indicating the second specific effect without using the projectile accessory 400 (S3913), resets the operation scenario corresponding to the projectile accessory 400 (S3914), and notifies that the accessory is abnormal. A command is set (S3915), and this processing ends.

In the process of S3908, if it is determined that it is not the second abnormality determination timing (S3908: No), then the abnormality determination at the third abnormality determination timing (the determination level is "high level B" in FIG. 232) is executed. timing) (S3916). If it is determined in the process of S3916 that it is the third abnormality determination timing (S3916: Yes), then it is determined whether the abnormality level determined in the process of S3902 is greater than "1" (S3917). ” (S3909: Yes), set a notification command indicating the abnormality of the accessory (S3918), and terminate this process. Since this third abnormality determination timing corresponds to the case where the operation scenario corresponding to the projectile accessory 400 ends, even if it is determined that there is an abnormality here, the operation corresponding to the projectile accessory 400 Scenarios never reset. On the other hand, in the process of S3917, if it is determined that the abnormality level is not greater than "1" (S3917: No), this process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 244, the contents of the second effect abnormality determination process (S3810) will be described. FIG. 244 is a flow chart showing the contents of the abnormality determination process during the second effect (S3810). This second production abnormality determination process (S3810) is executed in the role product production management process (S2151) described above with reference to FIG. If it is, that is, a process that is executed at the timing after the delay period has passed, and if the result of the abnormality determination of the projectile accessory 400 is a predetermined result, an abnormality determination (retry process) is performed again after a period of time. This is the processing to be executed when performing.

In the abnormality determination process during the second effect (S3810), first, the detection result of the detection sensor (storage detection sensor sa) is obtained (S4001), and the abnormality level is determined with reference to the abnormality determination table 222ab (S4002). Then, it is determined whether the determined abnormal level is "normal" or abnormal level "1" (S4003), and if it is determined to be "normal" or abnormal level "1" (S4003: Yes), This process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined that the abnormal level is not "normal" or abnormal level "1", that is, the abnormal level is "2" or "3" (S4003: No), the second specific effect that does not use the projectile accessory is determined (S4004), the action scenario corresponding to the projectile accessory 400 is reset (S4005), the notification command indicating the accessory abnormality is set (S3918), and this process ends.

If the result of the abnormality determination process during the second effect is normal, the operation scenario for the various effect devices is updated again after the delay period has elapsed. The production of the character production will be resumed. On the other hand, if the result of the abnormality determination process during the second effect is abnormal, a new effect mode (second specific effect) is set when the delay period elapses, and the effect corresponding to the second specific effect continues. It is executed in the latter half of the production.

Next, with reference to FIG. 245, the contents of the liquid crystal effect execution management process 2 (S2160) will be described. This liquid crystal effect execution management process 2 (S2160) does not execute various processes related to the liquid crystal effect while the character object delay timer 223aa is measuring the delay period in contrast to the above-described liquid crystal effect execution management process (S2110). The difference is that a process for making it so is added, and otherwise the same process is executed. The same processing is assigned the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

When the liquid crystal effect execution management process 2 (S2160) is executed, first, it is determined whether the value of the character object delay timer 223aa is greater than 0 (S3551). Skip all the processes and end this process. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not greater than 0 (is 0) (S3551: No), the processing of S3501 to S3511, which is the same as the liquid crystal effect execution management processing (S2110) described above, is executed, and this processing ends. .

Next, with reference to FIG. 246, the contents of the operation effect management process 2 (S2161) will be described. FIG. 246 is a flow chart showing the contents of the operation effect management process 2 (S2161). In contrast to the operation effect management process (S2111) described above, this operation effect management process 2 (S2161) does not execute various processes related to the operation effect while the role delay timer 223aa is measuring the delay period. The difference is that a process for making it so is added, and otherwise the same process is executed. The same processing is assigned the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

When the operation effect management process 2 (S2161) is executed, first, it is determined whether the value of the role delay timer 223aa is greater than 0 (S3651). This process is terminated by skipping the process of . On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not greater than 0 (it is 0) (S3651: No), the processing of S3601 to S3624, which is the same as the operation effect management processing (S2111) described above, is executed, and this processing ends.

As described with reference to FIGS. 245 and 246, in this control example, when the delay period is set for re-executing the abnormality determination of the projectile accessory 400, the effect contents for other effects configured to prevent updates from running. That is, when the delay period is set, not only the effect for the projectile accessory 400 but also other effects are delayed. By configuring in this way, it is possible to suppress the deviation of the execution timing of the effects by the respective effect devices in the effect with a sense of unity using a plurality of effect devices (a series of character effects).

<First modification>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 247 to 249, a modification of the repeated button-hit effects executed by the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example described above will be described. The continuous hit effect in the first control example described above includes an operation (variable operation) for varying the effect mode, and after the effect mode is changed to the maximum variable value (a effect mode that cannot be changed any more), the continuous hit effect and an operation (shortening operation) for shortening the performance period of , and are configured to be pressing operations on the frame button 22, and for the player who has actively operated the frame button 22 multiple times, this time After displaying the effect mode corresponding to the maximum variable value of the repeated hitting effect to be executed, the repeated hitting effect can be ended (shortened) without continuing the useless effect period, so that the player can be actively encouraged. , the frame button 22 can be operated.

On the other hand, the repeated hit effect in this modified example differs from the above-described first control example in that the above-described variable operation and shortening operation can be executed with different operation contents. In other words, in the above-described first control example, since the variable operation and the shortened operation are configured to be executed with the same operation content (the operation content of pressing the frame button 22), the effect mode of the continuous hit effect is While the shortened operation can be executed only after changing to the effect mode corresponding to the maximum variable value, in this modified example, since the variable operation and the shortened operation are executed with different operation contents, The shortening operation can be executed before the effect mode of the effect is changed to the effect mode corresponding to the maximum variable value.

Therefore, it is possible to entertain the player as to when the shortening operation is to be executed during the period during which the continuous hit effect is being executed. In addition, as in the first control example described above, the maximum variable value can be set differently according to the repeated hit effect to be executed, so that the effect mode is the maximum variable value (the effect mode that does not change any more) ) can be obfuscated.

FIG. 247(a) is a schematic diagram showing the start screen of the repeated button-press effect in this modified example. Elements that are the same as those displayed in the repeated hit effect in the first control example described above are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted. FIG. 247(a) shows a display screen in which a continuous hitting effect (aura effect) that can be varied in a maximum of five stages (Lv5) is executed as the repeated hitting effect. It shows an aura effect whose value is set to the third level (Lv3). That is, in this aura effect, even if the player executes the variable operation multiple times, the aura effect can be varied only up to the third stage (Lv3) at maximum.

As shown in FIG. 247(a), when the aura effect is executed, an effect 851, which is a variable mode of the aura effect, is displayed around the character 801, and a variable information display mode showing the current variable stage is displayed in the display area HR51. "Lv1" is displayed as This variable information display mode is for showing the player the variable degree of the effect 851 based on the variable operation, and as the aura production progresses (as the effect 851 changes), a higher level is displayed. be. In this manner, not only the display mode of the effect 851 but also the current variable stage is displayed as a numerical value, thereby making it possible to execute an effect that is easy for the player to understand.

In the display area HR2, a button 803 and a time gauge 804 showing the same contents as those in the first control example are displayed, and in the sub-display area Ds, the repeated hit effect (aura effect) currently being executed is displayed. As a guidance display mode for indicating the contents, a comment "Save up energy by repeatedly hitting the button" is displayed.

Then, when the player presses the frame button 22 multiple times during execution of the aura effect and the variable mode of the effect 851 reaches the second stage, as shown in FIG. 247(b), the variable mode reaches the second stage. A display mode indicating that the operation has been performed is displayed. Furthermore, a display area HR52 is formed, and a shortened operation guidance display is displayed to the player to indicate that the shortened operation can be executed. In this display area HR52, a button 852 imitating the first button 22za is displayed as a guidance display mode for indicating the operation content of the shortened operation. An arrow indicating how to operate the button 852 is also displayed.

At this time, the valid operation period indicated by the time gauge 804 has not yet passed, so the display mode is displayed in the display area HR2 to indicate that variable operations are also acceptable. On the upper side of the main display area Dm, a notification display mode is provided for informing the player that the player is in a state where he/she can select whether to continuously execute the variable operation or to execute the shortened operation. , the comment "Choose whether to store more energy by repeatedly hitting or release it by pressing the first button" is displayed.

In this way, during the aura effect, which is a continuous hit effect, a period is provided in which both the variable operation (pressing operation on the frame button 22) and the shortening operation (pressing operation on the first button 22za) can be operated. By allowing the user to select which operation to perform, it is possible to easily increase the variations of the effect mode of the operation effect. In other words, if the shortening operation is executed in a state in which the maximum variable value has not been reached during the aura effect, the effect result of the aura effect is displayed without displaying the variable mode corresponding to the maximum variable value. , it is possible to make it difficult to suggest to the player the lottery result of the special symbol lottery referred to when setting the performance mode (maximum variable value) of the aura performance (continuous hitting performance).

In this modified example, the shortened operation is completed by performing the pressing operation once on the first button 22za. Then, when the shortening operation is executed, the effect result corresponding to the variable degree of the effect 851 by the aura effect at that time is displayed. Specifically, it is determined whether the display mode of the effect 851 displayed at the time when the shortening operation is executed is the display mode corresponding to the maximum variable value in the current aura effect, and the effect is performed according to the determination result. It is configured so that the results are displayed differently.

For example, when the display mode of the effect 851 at the time when the shortening operation is executed is the display mode corresponding to the maximum variable value, the display screen shown in FIG. 248(a) is displayed. FIG. 248(a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of display contents displayed when a shortening operation is performed after the variable mode of the aura effect (effect 851) is changed to a display mode corresponding to the maximum variable value. It is a diagram. As shown in FIG. 248(a), when the shortening operation is executed when the maximum variable value (Lv3) is reached, the player is notified in the sub-display area Ds that the shortening operation has been executed after reaching the maximum variable value. A comment "Nice timing!! Lv3 was the upper limit this time." As a result, the player can easily grasp the maximum variable value set for the aura effect executed this time, and can avoid the situation where the aura effect is continuously executed without executing the shortening operation. You can figure out what you have done.

In the main display area Dm, characters of "chance" are displayed as a result display mode 851a indicating the effect result of the current aura effect. Note that the display contents of the result display mode 851a are the same as those of the continuous hit effect of the first control example described above, and therefore detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Also, the display area HR2 is hidden, and a button 852 modeled after the first button 22za and the time gauge 804 are displayed in the display area HR52. In this modified example, as described above, when the continuous hit effect is executed, the player is made to perform operations on different operation means for the variable operation and the shortened operation. Then, when the shortening operation is executed, during the operation effective period after that (during the remaining period displayed on the time gauge 804), the operation means that can be operated by the player changes to the operation means that can execute the variable operation ( It is configured to switch from the frame button 22) to the operation means (first button 22za) that executed the shortened operation.

As shown in FIG. 248(a), by hiding the display area HR2 and displaying the time gauge 804 in the display area HR52, during the valid operation period for effectively determining the operation to the operation means in the continuous hit effect, , the operating means to be operated by the player (the type of operating means to be effectively determined) can be notified in an easy-to-understand manner. Also, in this way, by switching the operation means that the player can operate during the remaining period after the shortening operation is performed, the troublesomeness of having to operate the frame button 22 again after the shortening operation is performed is eliminated. be able to.

On the other hand, when the display mode of the effect 851 at the time when the shortening operation is executed is not the display mode corresponding to the maximum variable value, the display screen shown in FIG. 248(b) is displayed. FIG. 248(b) shows an example of the display contents displayed when the shortening operation is executed in a state where the variable mode of the aura effect (effect 851) is a display mode corresponding to a variable value different from the maximum variable value. It is a schematic diagram shown. As shown in FIG. 248(b), when the shortening operation is executed when the maximum variable value (Lv3) has not been reached, that is, when the variable value is at Lv2, the secondary display area Ds is displayed at the maximum variable value. As a notification display mode for notifying the player that the shortening operation has been executed in the state of not reaching, a comment "Insufficient power!! You should have saved more energy..." is displayed. As a result, the player can grasp that the aura effect executed this time has made the variable state more variable.

In the main display area Dm, a character "?" is displayed as a result display mode 851a indicating the effect result of the current aura effect. That is, since the effect content (display mode) preset as the effect result of the aura effect is the effect content when the maximum variable value is reached, the shortening operation is executed before the maximum variable value is reached. In this case, the effect content set in advance is configured not to be displayed as the effect result of the aura effect. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp the effect result of the aura effect.

On the other hand, it is difficult for the player to see the display screen shown in FIG. Since it is easy to understand that the maximum variable value was set to a value higher than the variable value (Lv2) at the time the shortening operation was executed, a higher value may have been set as the maximum variable value. You can enjoy the later production with a sense of anticipation. Furthermore, for a player who does not like repeated hit effects, the state in which the effect prompting the user to operate the frame button 22 a plurality of times is continuously displayed for a predetermined period can be resolved by executing the shortening operation. Any game desired by the player can be facilitated.

In the repeated hit effect (aura effect) of this modified example, as shown in FIG. It is configured so that an appropriate performance result is not displayed. Therefore, when the continuous hit effect is executed, there is a possibility that the timing of executing the shortening operation is delayed and only the variable operation is executed in order to display an appropriate effect result. In this case, although the maximum variable value has already been reached, the shortening operation is not executed, and the effective operation period elapses without changing the variable mode, resulting in a decrease in the performance effect.

On the other hand, in this modified example, when a predetermined condition is established in a state where the variable mode of the continuous hit effect reaches the maximum variable value, the guidance effect prompting the player to perform the shortening operation can be executed. there is By configuring in this way, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the player's willingness to play is lowered due to a period in which the variable mode of the repeated hit effect is not changed for a long period of time.

The effect contents of this induction effect will be described with reference to FIG. 249(a). FIG. 249(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the display screen displayed when the guidance effect is executed. In FIG. 249(a), the same aura effect as in FIG. 247(a) is executed, and the variable stage of the variable mode (effect 851) reaches the maximum variable value of "3". It shows the display screen when the remaining period of the valid operation period is 1 second.

As shown in FIG. 249(a), when the variable stage of the variable mode (effect 851) has reached the maximum variable value of "3" and the remaining period of the valid operation period becomes 1 second, the secondary In the display area Ds, a comment "Maybe you should press the first button now" is displayed as a guidance rendering mode for prompting the user to operate the first button 22za, and is also displayed in the display area HR52. button 852 is enlarged and displayed. This allows the player to understand that the currently displayed variable mode is the display mode corresponding to the maximum variable value in the current aura effect.

Therefore, it is possible to make it easier for the player to execute the shortening operation before the operation effective period elapses (before the period displayed on the time gauge 804 elapses).

In this modification, as an execution condition for executing the above-described guidance effect, a time elapsing execution condition that is established when the remaining period of the operation valid period in the aura effect reaches a predetermined period (1 second) is set. However, without being limited to this, when the number of operations of the frame button 22 reaches a predetermined number after the end condition in the above-described first control example, that is, the display mode corresponding to the maximum variable value is displayed. It is also possible to set an operation result execution condition that is satisfied at

Also, even in the state in which the guidance effect shown in FIG. The display screen shown is displayed. FIG. 249(b) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the display screen displayed when the shortening operation is not executed during the aura effect. As shown in FIG. 249(b), when the shortening operation is not executed in a state where the variable mode (effect 851) is varied by the variable operation, the comment "The stored energy has disappeared" is displayed in the secondary display area Ds. is displayed, and the result display mode 851a (see FIG. 248(a)) indicating the effect result of the aura effect is not displayed, and the result effect of ending the aura effect is executed.

By configuring in this way, when the aura effect is executed, it is possible to motivate the game to execute the shortening operation. In this modified example, the result display screen shown in FIG. 249(b) is displayed when the shortening operation is not executed. (effect 851) is displayed in a display mode corresponding to the maximum variable value, and if the effective operation period has passed without executing the shortening operation, a display screen showing an appropriate effect result (See FIG. 248(a)) is displayed, and the shortening operation is executed in a state where the variable mode of aura production (effect 851) is displayed in a display mode corresponding to a variable value different from the maximum variable value. The display screen shown in FIG. 249(b) may be displayed only when the operation valid period has passed without any operation. With this configuration, in the aura effect, the player who has operated the frame button 22 (performed the variable operation) while expecting that the variable mode will change until the operation effective period elapses will receive an appropriate Since it is possible to provide an excellent performance result, it is possible to suppress the player's desire to play from declining.

<Third control example>
Next, a third control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 250 to 259. FIG. In the first control example described above, the sound lamp control device 113 is configured to execute all the execution management of various effects for indicating the result of the special symbol lottery. Specifically, in the performance period of various variable performances executed corresponding to the variation time of the special symbol variation, when the specific timing arrives, the display control device 114, the voice output device 226 and the performance device are driven. It was configured to output a command for instructing the execution of production to various solenoids for.

In this way, the sound lamp control device 113 centrally manages the execution timings of the various performance devices, so that the various performance devices can be made to perform performances without error, thereby providing a performance with a sense of unity. be able to.

However, in recent years, the pachinko machine 10 tends to increase the number of various effect devices and to output complicated performance execution instructions to various effect devices in order to enhance the effect. In such a pachinko machine 10, if the sound ramp control device 113 manages the execution of all effects, the processing load on the sound ramp control device 113 increases. Specifically, a process of stopping and displaying the third symbol to show the result of the special symbol lottery, a process of displaying the number of winning balls during the jackpot game, and a display for notifying the player that the game state is switched. There is a risk that the processing or the like will be delayed, and that the player's motivation to play will decrease.

On the other hand, in the third control example, the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, which is a control device for displaying various effects images on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81, has a function of managing the execution effects. This is different from the above-described first control example in that the processing load of the audio ramp control device 113 is reduced by increasing the number of steps. Other technical ideas are the same as those of the first control example described above, and the same contents are given the same reference numerals and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

In the third control example, when setting the display variation pattern command by the sound lamp control device 113, the display timer management command for managing the passage of time on the display control device 114 side can be set. are doing. When the timer management command is received by the display control device 114, the continuation period of the target effect is managed by the timer, and when the continuation period managed by the timer ends, the end of the continuation period is indicated. display end command can be output to the audio lamp control device 113 .

The sound lamp control device 113 receives the display end command output from the display control device 114, determines that the duration period has ended, and sets a command for the performance to be executed based on the end of the duration period. By configuring in this way, the audio ramp control device 113 does not need to have a measuring means (timer) for measuring the lapse of the continuation period, and the audio ramp control device 113 detects whether the elapsed time has elapsed or not. It is no longer necessary to constantly execute the process of determining the . Therefore, the processing load of the audio ramp control device 113 can be reduced.

Furthermore, in the third control example, whether or not a specific display mode is displayed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81 during the period of time management by the display control device 114 (in the specific display mode (whether or not the corresponding image data is used) can be determined, and information indicating whether or not the specific display mode is to be displayed can also be set when the above-described display end command is set. .

Then, the sound lamp control device 113 determines whether or not a command indicating the display of the special display mode has been output from the display control device 114, and based on the determination result, determines the performance mode of the performance to be executed after the end of the duration period. It is configured so that it can be set variably. As a result, it is possible to set an effect command for various effect devices with content (effect mode) corresponding to the execution content (display result) executed by the display control device 114 . Therefore, the production effect can be enhanced.

In addition, in this control example, when the frame button 22 is operated (pressed) during the period in which the continuation period is set, a press command indicating that the frame button 22 has been operated is sent to the display control device 114. , and the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 is configured to be able to variably control the display mode among the various presentation modes set by the sound lamp control device 113 .

By configuring in this way, it is possible to change the mode of presentation in the presentation (for example, repeated hitting presentation) executed outside the control of the sound lamp control device 113, so that the presentation effect can be enhanced.

<Regarding the electrical configuration of the third control example>
Next, with reference to FIG. 250, the electrical configuration of the display control device 114 in this third control example will be described. FIG. 250 is a diagram schematically showing the electrical configuration of the display control device 114. As shown in FIG. It should be noted that this control example differs from the electrical configuration of the display control device 114 in the above-described first control example in that an effect mode 233ba is added to the work RAM 233, and the rest is the same. The same reference numerals are assigned to the same elements, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The production timer 233ba is a timer for measuring the elapsed time of the timer management production included in the timer management command received from the sound lamp control device 113, and measures the duration of the timer management production at the timing when the timer management production is executed. A value corresponding to is set. Then, the value of the timer is updated every time the V-interrupt process executed in units of 20 milliseconds is executed, and when the value of the timer is updated to 0, it is determined that it is time to end the timer management effect.

<Regarding control processing contents of the third control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 251 to 259, the contents of control processing in this third control example will be described. In contrast to the above-described first control example, the third control example is part of the control processing executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 and part of the control processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114. They are different in that they are partially changed, and are otherwise the same. The same reference numerals are given to the same contents, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIGS. 251 to 254, the contents of control processing of the audio ramp control device 113 in the third control example will be described. The control processing of the audio ramp control device 113 of the third control example is performed by replacing the command determination processing (see S2114 in FIG. 195) with respect to the control processing of the audio ramp control device 113 of the first control example. The difference is that the process 3 (see S2164 in FIG. 251) is replaced with the variable display setting process (see S2115 in FIG. 199) and the variable display setting process 3 (see S2165 in FIG. 253) is executed. is. The same processing contents are assigned the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof is omitted.

FIG. 251 is a flow chart showing the contents of command determination processing 3 (S2164). This command determination process 3 (S2164) adds a process when a display end command output from the display control device 114 is received to the command determination process (see S2114 in FIG. 195) of the first control example described above. The difference is that the The same reference numerals are given to the same contents, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

When the command determination process 3 (S2164) is executed, first, the same processes from S2201 to S2214 as those of the command determination process of the first control example (see S2114 in FIG. 195) are executed. Then, in the processing of S2213, if it is determined that the stop command has not been received (S2213: No), then it is determined whether or not the display end command has been received (S2251), and if it is determined that it has been received ( S2251: Yes), end command reception processing is executed (S2252), and this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the display end command has not been received (S2251: No), this processing ends.

Next, referring to FIG. 252, the contents of the end command reception process (S2251) executed in the command determination process 3 (see S2164 in FIG. 251) will be described. FIG. 252 is a flow chart showing the contents of the end command reception process (S2251). In this end command reception process, a process for setting various presentation modes based on the passage of time managed by the display control device 114 is executed.

In the end command reception process (S2251), first, the corresponding effect selection information is read out from the effect selection information storage area 223h (S4101). In the process of S4101, the information regarding the timer management effect stored in the display variation pattern command setting process (see S2651 in FIG. 254), which will be described later, is read. As a result, the end command output from the display control device 114 and the timer management effect set by the sound lamp control device 113 are associated.

Next, information included in the display end command received this time is extracted (S4102). In the process of S4102, the type of the corresponding timer management effect and a specific display indicating that specific image data (effect data) was displayed as the image data (effect data) displayed during the effect period of the timer management effect are displayed. Information and period information indicating the continuation period of the current timer management effect are extracted.

Then, it is determined whether specific display information is included in the information read in the process of S4102 (S4103). Specific information is added and updated to the effect selection information (S4104), an end effect command corresponding to the added and updated effect selection information is set (S4105), and this processing ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the specific display information is not included in the processing of S4103 (S4103: No), the processing of S4104 is skipped, and the effect command for end corresponding to the effect selection information read out in S4101 is issued. It sets (S4105) and terminates this processing.

Next, referring to FIG. 253, the contents of the variable display setting process 3 (S2165) will be described. FIG. 253 is a flowchart schematically showing the contents of the variable display setting process 3 (S2165). This variable display setting process 3 (S2165) differs from the above-described variable display setting process (see S2115 in FIG. 199) in that the process for setting the display variable pattern command is executed as a subroutine. are otherwise identical. The same reference numerals are assigned to the same processing contents, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In the variable display setting process 3 (S2165), first, the same processes of S2601 to S2607 and S2609 to S2611 as the variable display setting process described above (see S2115 in FIG. 199) are executed, and then the variable display command setting process for display is executed. (S2651). Then, when the process of S2651 is finished, the same processes of S2612 to S2616 as the variable display setting process (see S2115 in FIG. 199) are executed, and this process ends.

In the display variation pattern command setting process executed in the process of S2651, the display variation pattern command corresponding to the variation effect pattern selected this time is set, and timer management (time management) is performed on the display control device 114 side. A process to set a command for is executed.

Here, with reference to FIG. 254, the contents of the display variation pattern command setting process (S2651) executed in the variation display setting process 3 (see S2165 in FIG. 253) will be described. FIG. 254 is a flow chart showing the contents of the display variation pattern command setting process (S2651).

In the display fluctuation pattern command setting process (S2651), first, it is determined whether or not the currently selected fluctuation production pattern includes a timer management production (S4201). This timer management effect is an effect that manages the passage of time on the display control device 114 side, and corresponds to, for example, an effect that is executed for a predetermined period of a variable effect period during which a variable effect is executed. Mainly, when the timer management effect ends, another effect is executed based on the display result displayed during the timer management effect. Specific contents of this timer management effect will be described later.

In the processing of S4201, if it is determined that there is a timer management effect (S4201: Yes), a display timer management command indicating the execution timing and duration of the timer management effect is set (S4202), and the effect selection information is stored. In the area 223h, information about the timer management effect of this time is stored (S4203), a variation pattern command for display is set (S4204), and this processing ends. On the other hand, in the processing of S4201, if it is not determined that there is a timer management effect, that is, if it is determined that there is no variable effect corresponding to the timer management effect in the variable effect pattern selected this time (S4201: No), The processing of S4202 and S4203 is skipped, the processing of S4204 described above is executed, and this processing ends.

Here, regarding the flow of the variable effect using the timer management effect, for example, in the repeated hit effect (see FIGS. 130 to 132) executed in the pachinko machine 10 of the first control example, the player activates the frame button 22. A specific description will be given of a case where the effect executed during the effect period (10 seconds) in which the operation valid period is set to the timer management effect.

When setting a variable effect pattern command for executing a repeated effect, in the variable pattern command setting process for display (see S2651 in FIG. 254), the execution timing of the timer management effect (continuous effect) (after the variable effect starts 10 seconds later (see FIG. 146(c))) and the duration of the timer management effect (continuous hit effect) (10 seconds (see FIG. 146(c))). 254 S4202). At this time, the content of the performance selected this time and the performance mode of the performance (various ready-to-win performances) to be executed after the end of the timer management performance are stored in the performance selection information storage area 223h. By storing in the effect selection information storage area 223h in this way, when the sound lamp control device 113 determines that the timer management effect has ended, the control process to be executed next (the effect to be executed next) contents) can be easily read, and the processing load can be reduced.

When the display timer management command set by the sound lamp control device 113 is received on the display control device 114 side, based on the information included in the display timer management command, a continuous hit effect is performed in accordance with the execution timing of the timer management effect. Start (see FIG. 130(a)). When the player operates the frame button 22 during the continuous hitting effect, a press command indicating that the player has operated (depressed) the frame button 22 is output from the sound lamp control device 113 to the display control device 114 and displayed. The control device 114 determines a variable mode in the continuous hitting effect based on the received pressing command, creates image data (effect data) corresponding to the determined variable mode, and displays it on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81. .

In this case, as shown in the upper limit frequency selection table (see FIG. 162(b)) of the first control example, when an effect pattern defining only a predetermined range is selected as the final variable mode, the It is preferable that the display control device 114 performs control to vary the variable mode within a range that does not deviate from the predetermined range and within the range in which the currently displayed variable mode progresses.

By configuring in this way, the rule according to the result of the special symbol lottery, that is, only the range that can be displayed as the final variable mode is determined by the voice lamp control device 113, and the detailed variable mode within that range is determined. Since it can be executed by the display control device 114, the processing load of the control processing executed by the audio lamp control device 113 can be further reduced.

Then, when the effect period of the timer management effect (continuous hit effect) elapses, the display control device 114 outputs end information indicating that the timer management effect has ended, and display information indicating the display contents of the variable mode at the end of the effect period. , and is output to the audio lamp controller 113 .

In the sound lamp control device 113, based on various information contained in the display end command output from the display control device 114, based on the information stored in the effect selection information storage area 223h, various types of information to be executed after the continuous hit effect is completed. An effect mode of the effect is determined, and various commands for executing the determined effect mode are output to the display control device 114, the audio output device 226, and various effect devices.

In addition, in the display end command output from the display control device 114, specific display information indicating that a specific variable mode was displayed during the continuous hit effect period (for example, Only when information indicating that the display mode is displayed) is included, the performance mode of various performances to be executed after the completion of the continuous hitting performance is determined as a specific performance mode different from the usual, and the determined specific performance mode is executed. Various commands for this purpose are output to the display control device 114, the audio output device 226, and various effect devices.

In this way, the sound lamp control device 113 outputs a command indicating the start timing and duration of the timer management effect to the display control device 114, and the display control device 114 can execute time management of the timer management effect. , it is possible to reduce the load of the control processing related to the variation effect in the audio lamp control device 113 .

Further, information (command) indicating that the timer management effect has ended is received from the display control device 114, and based on the reception of the information (command), the effect to be executed after the timer management effect ends. Since the performance mode is determined and instructions for performance execution are issued to various devices constituting the pachinko machine 10, even if the sound lamp control device 113 does not perform time management of the timer management performance, To instruct various devices to execute a performance at proper timing without deviation, and to suppress the deterioration of the performance effect due to the deviation of the execution timing of the performance executed by the various devices. can be done.

Furthermore, in this control example, the display mode displayed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81 during the timer management effect time-managed by the display control device 114 can be determined by the display control device 114. ing. Therefore, compared to the case of determining the display mode displayed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81 during the timer management production in the audio lamp control device 113, the load of the control processing related to the variation production in the audio lamp control device 113 can be reduced.

Furthermore, information on the display mode determined by the display control device 114 (information for indicating the display mode displayed at the end of the timer management effect) is included in the display end command indicating that the timer management effect has ended. It is configured to output to the audio lamp control device 113, and the audio lamp control device 113 determines the production mode of the production to be executed after the end of the timer management production based on the information included in the display end command. Since it is configured, it is possible to set the performance mode corresponding to the performance result of the timer management performance managed by the display control device 114 by the sound lamp control device 113, and the performance effect can be enhanced.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 255 to 259, the control processing contents of the display control device 114 in this third control example will be described. The contents of the control processing of the display control device 114 in the third control example are different from the contents of the control processing of the display control device 114 in the first control example described above, instead of the V interrupt processing (see FIG. 213(b)). 255) is replaced with command determination processing (see S6302 in FIG. 214), and command determination processing 3 (see S6352 in FIG. 256) is executed. be. The same processing contents are assigned the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof is omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 255, the contents of the V interrupt process 3 will be described. FIG. 255 is a flow chart showing the contents of V-interrupt processing 3. FIG. This V interrupt process 3 differs from the above-described V interrupt process (see FIG. 213(b)) in that a process for updating the effect timer 233ba is added, and the rest is the same. . The same processing contents are assigned the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof is omitted.

In the third control example, as in the first control example described above, the V interrupt signal is transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing processing for one frame is completed. It is configured so that interrupt processing 3 is executed. That is, the V-interrupt process 3 is a control process that is periodically executed. Therefore, by updating the value of the effect timer 233ba in accordance with the execution of the V interrupt process 3, the display control device 114 can perform appropriate time management using the effect timer 233ba.

In addition, in this control example, it is configured to execute the updating process of the effect timer 233ba using the V interrupt process 3, but without being limited to this, if any time can be measured, for example, The display control device 114 may be provided with a timing means so that the elapsed time can be measured based on the timing result of the timing means. The elapsed time may be configured to be measurable.

In the V interrupt process 3, first, the processes of S6301 to S6309 which are the same as the V interrupt process (see FIG. 213(b)) of the first control example described above are executed, and then the production timer update process is executed ( S6351), this process ends. The effect timer update process executed in S6351 is a process for updating (subtracting) the value set in the effect timer 233ba. This effect timer 233ba measures the effect period (continuation period) of the timer-managed effect, and a value corresponding to the effect period of the timer-managed effect is set in accordance with the timing at which the timer-managed effect is executed. The value is updated (decremented) each time interrupt process 3 is executed (every 20 milliseconds). Then, when the value of the effect timer 233ba becomes 0, the effect period of the timer management effect ends.

Next, referring to FIG. 256, the contents of command determination processing 3 (S6352) executed in V interrupt processing 3 (FIG. 255) will be described. FIG. 256 is a flowchart showing the contents of command determination processing 3 (S6532). In this command determination process 3 (S6532), a press command process (S6452) and a timer setting process (S6454) are added to the above-described command determination process (see S6302 in FIG. 214). The same reference numerals are given to the same processing contents that are the same except that they are different, and a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In the command determination process 3 (S6532), first, the processes of S6401 to S6413, which are the same as those in the above-described command determination process (see S6302 in FIG. 214), are executed. Then, in the process of S6412, if it is determined that there is no error command (S6412), then it is determined whether there is a press command (S6451), and if it is determined that there is a press command (S6451: Yes), Press command processing is executed (S6452), and the process proceeds to S6401.

Here, the press command determined in the process of S6451 is a command for indicating that the player has operated the frame button 22 within the operation valid period in which it can be effectively determined that the frame button 22 has been operated. In the case where the voice lamp control device 113 determines that the frame button 22 has been operated within the operation valid period, the command is displayed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81 based on the operation of the frame button 22. It is a command set by the sound lamp control device 113 when the frame button 22 is operated during an effect (timer management effect) in which processing for variably determining the displayed display mode is performed by the display control device 114. be.

When the display control device 114 receives this press command, it executes a process (press command process) for varying the effect mode of the timer management effect. In this way, the press command is set only when the display control device 114 needs information that the frame button 22 has been operated, not all cases where the player has operated the frame button 22. With this configuration, the number of commands output from the audio lamp control device 113 to the display control device 114 can be reduced, and the processing load of the audio lamp control device 113 can be reduced.

In this control example, the processing for variably setting the aspect of the effect being executed based on the operation of the frame button 22 is performed by the sound lamp control device 113 and by the display control device 114. Since it has effects to be executed, it is necessary for the sound lamp control device 113 to determine whether or not to set a press command. When the display control device 114 alone executes the processing for variably setting the mode, it is preferable to set a press command each time the frame button 22 is operated. Instead of setting a press command each time the frame button 22 is operated, information indicating that the frame button 22 has been operated is accumulated for a predetermined period (for example, one second), and the predetermined period has elapsed. In this case, it is also possible to set a press command including operation count information indicating the number of times the frame button 22 has been operated based on the accumulated information.

By configuring in this way, there is a slight error in the variable timing of the presentation mode for each operation of the frame button 22 by the player, but the number of commands output from the sound lamp control device 113 to the display control device 114 is can be reduced, and the processing load of the audio ramp control device 113 can be reduced. In this configuration, for example, based on the number of times the frame button 22 (operation means) is operated within a predetermined period of time, a single operation of the frame button 22 can be performed, such as an operation effect that changes the display mode after a predetermined period of time has elapsed. It is preferable to use it when executing an operation effect that does not change the display mode based on.

In addition, when executing such an operation effect, for example, a variable mode that varies according to the operation of the frame button 22 within a predetermined period (for example, a variable gauge display that rises each time the frame button 22 is operated) mode) can be set by the audio lamp control device 113, and the display mode after the elapse of the predetermined period can be set by the display control device 114. FIG. With this configuration, it is possible to reduce the number of commands output from the audio lamp control device 113 to the display control device 114 while changing the display mode each time the frame button 22 is operated. The processing load of the audio ramp control device 113 can be reduced.

In this control example, the operation of the frame button 22 is determined by the sound lamp control device 113. Alternatively, in a pachinko machine 10 having a plurality of frame buttons 22 (operating means), the control device that performs operation discrimination may be changed according to the type of operating means.

Next, with reference to FIG. 257, the details of the press command process (S6452) executed in the command setting process 3 (see S6352 in FIG. 256) will be described. FIG. 257 is a flow chart showing the details of the press command process (S6452). In this pressing command process (S6452), a process for changing the display mode displayed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81 is executed.

In the pressing command process (S6452), first, it is determined whether or not the continuous hit effect is currently being performed (timer management effect is being performed) (S7801). Yes), then it is determined whether the display mode is in a variable state (S7802). In the process of S7802, it is determined whether or not the currently displayed display mode is at the upper limit set as the final variable mode of the continuous hit effect (situation where the display mode cannot be changed any more).

In the process of S7802, if it is determined that the state is variable (the display mode being displayed can be changed) (S7802: Yes), the variable determination is executed (S7803), and the Image data based on the determination result of the variable determination is created (S7804), the created image data is set as effect image data (S7805), and this processing ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S7801, if it is determined that it is not in the continuous hit effect (timer management effect) (S7801: No), or if it is determined in the process of S7802 that it is not in the variable state (S7802: No), This processing ends without creating new image data.

The effect image data set in the process of S7805 is stored in the resident video RAM 235, and is controlled to be displayed when the display timing in the display data table corresponding to the timer management effect is clocked. With this configuration, the display control device 114 can execute processing for varying the display mode.

Next, the contents of the timer setting process (S6454) executed in the command setting process 3 (see S6352 in FIG. 256) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 258 is a flow chart showing the contents of the timer setting process (S6454). In this timer setting process (S6454), the presence or absence of execution of the timer management effect and the process for setting the effect timer 233ba are executed.

In the timer setting process (S6454), first, the timer management command received this time is analyzed (S7901), the timer set timing included in the timer management command is set (S7902), and the timer period included in the timer management command is managed. A timer is set (S7903), and this processing ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 259, the contents of the effect timer update process (see S6351 in FIG. 259) executed in the V interrupt process 3 (see FIG. 255) will be described. FIG. 259 is a flow chart showing the contents of the effect timer update process (S6351). In this effect timer update process (S6351), a process for updating the value of the effect timer 233ba set in the timer setting process (see S6454 in FIG. 258) is executed.

When the effect timer update process (S6351) is executed, first, it is determined whether the value of the effect timer 233ba is greater than 0 (S8001), and is not greater than 0, that is, it is determined that the timer management effect is not in progress. If so (S8001; No), this process ends. In the process of S8001, the value of the effect timer 233ba is greater than 0, that is, if it is determined that the timer management effect is in progress (S8001: Yes), the value of the effect timer 233ba is updated (S8002), and after the update It is determined whether the value of the production timer 233ba is 0 (S8003). In the process of S8003, when it is determined that the value of the effect timer 233ba is not 0 (larger than 0) (S8003: No), it is during the effect period of the timer management effect, so the process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, in the process of S8003, if it is determined that the value of the effect timer 233ba is 0 (S8003: Yes), it is the end timing of the timer management effect. Execute as end processing.

First, in the process of S8004, it is determined whether or not there is a specific image display during the presentation period (S8004), and if it is determined that there is a specific image display (S8004: Yes), a specific command indicating the specific image display is created. (S8005), creating an end command (indicating the end of the production timer) indicating that the value of the production timer 233ba has become 0 (timer management production has ended) (S8006), and a display end command including each created command is set (S8007), and the process ends.

Also, in the process of S8004, if it is determined that there is no specific image display during the presentation period (S8004: No), the above-described process of S8005 is skipped. The process proceeds to S8006.

As described above, in the present third control example, by causing the display control device 114 to execute a part of the management processing related to the performance that was centrally managed by the sound lamp control device 113, the sound lamp control device 113 processing load can be reduced.

In the example described above, the object is the effect executed during the variation effect of the third symbol, but not limited to this, for example, a demonstration screen is displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81. The display control device 114 may be configured to manage the display periods for various display modes that are executed during a demonstration standby or during a jackpot game being executed.

In this case, for example, information related to the game result, such as the timing at which the variable effect is executed and the timing at which the variable effect is stopped, is displayed from the sound lamp control device 113 to the display control device 114 in order to appropriately notify the player. Information indicating a waiting period until the display control device 114 executes a specific effect at the timing of outputting a command for use, information indicating the effect period of the specific effect, information indicating the effect content of the specific effect, and information indicating the effect content of the specific effect. It is configured to output a performance management command including information indicating a performance cancellation condition not to be executed, and when the display control device 114 receives the performance management command, measurement of the waiting period is started, and until the waiting period elapses. A specific effect may be executed when the condition for discarding the effect is not satisfied during the period.

Specifically, at the timing when the variable effect of 30 seconds is executed, the waiting period is 40 seconds and the effect period is 10 seconds. set. In this case, after the 30-second fluctuation production is completed, if the next fluctuation production is immediately executed, that is, in the state of securing the special figure reservation, the production cancellation condition before the waiting period elapses is established, the specific effect is not executed. On the other hand, in a state in which the special figure reservation is not secured, the specific effect may be executed because the waiting period may elapse without the effect cancellation condition being satisfied.

In this way, when the specific performance is executed during the standby period in which the variable performance is not executed, the information regarding the specific performance is output to the display control device 114 in advance in accordance with the timing of outputting the command regarding the variable performance. , by enabling the display control device 114 to execute management processing of a specific effect, it becomes possible to aggregate the timing of outputting commands from the audio lamp control device 113 to the display control device 114, and the audio lamp control device 113 processing load can be reduced.

Furthermore, whether or not to set (output) the production management command described above can be set regardless of the variable production pattern. can be configured to be executable. By configuring in this way, for example, when the fluctuation production command corresponding to the fluctuation production pattern whose fluctuation time is longer than 40 seconds and the production management command are simultaneously output to the display control device 114, the standby period Since the variable performance is executed for a period longer than (40 seconds), the performance cancellation condition is never satisfied. Therefore, it is possible to reliably execute the specific effect.

In addition, in the above example, "start of a new variable effect" is provided as the condition for discarding the effect, but other condition for discarding the effect may be provided. It is also possible to provide an effect cancellation condition that is satisfied when the game is not started. In this case, since it is necessary to start the variable effect a plurality of times during the waiting period, for example, a large number of special reserved balls are stored, and the game is motivated to maintain a state in which a short variable time is easily selected. be able to.

As the specific effect executed in the above-described example, for example, a function (so-called setting function) that can set a plurality of stages of set values and varies the degree of advantage of the player according to the set values that have been set. In the case of the pachinko machine 10 having the specified setting value, the specific effect including the effect mode in which the player can predict the set value, or the specified effect including the effect mode in which the player can predict the currently set game state Execution of specific effects including effects and effects in which the player can predict ending conditions (the number of special symbol lotteries, the number of winning jackpots) until the end of a game state (for example, variable probability state) that is advantageous to the player. It should be configured as follows. As a result, the player plays the game while expecting that the specific effect will be executed, and the interest in the game can be improved.

Also, in this case, suggesting (notifying) means for suggesting (notifying) the length of the waiting period that has been set, and guidance means for guiding the player to a game method that does not satisfy the effect cancellation condition. It is preferable that a player can determine the conditions under which the specific effect is executed.

<Fourth control example>
Next, a fourth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 260 to 265. FIG. In the above-described first control example, the right to execute the special symbol variation (lottery right for the special symbol lottery) is reserved and stored with a predetermined number (4) as the upper limit in order to enable the execution of the special symbol variation continuously. To store the lottery right (special figure reservation) in the storage means even when the lottery right (special figure reservation) of the special pattern lottery is obtained during execution of the special pattern variation. can be done. Therefore, after the special symbol variation is stopped and displayed, it is possible to immediately execute the special symbol lottery based on the lottery right stored in the storage means, so that the special symbol variation can be continuously executed. It was possible to improve the interest of the game.

Furthermore, the fluctuation time of the special symbol variation for indicating the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is configured to vary according to the number of lottery rights (number of special symbol reservations) stored in the storage means. Specifically, the smaller the number of lottery rights (the number of reserved special symbols) stored in the storage means, the easier it is to execute the special symbol variation with a longer variation time. By constructing in this way, it is possible to reduce the period during which the special symbol variation is not executed, and to obtain a new lottery right when the number of lottery rights stored in the storage means has reached the upper limit. It was possible to suppress it from being lost.

In addition, in the above-described first control example, when the result of the special symbol lottery is a big hit, or when a variation pattern in which a variation time longer than 14 seconds is set is selected, the above-described 14 seconds It is configured so that a variable performance can be executed. In other words, even if the result of the special symbol lottery is lost and the prize is not won, by executing the above-described 14-second variable performance, the player's willingness to play who grasps that the 14-second variable performance is being executed. It was possible to suppress the decrease in

However, in the above-described first control example, the specific variation effect that is executed when the result of the special symbol lottery is a loss is performed in a pseudo manner even when the result of the special symbol lottery is a win. However, since the variation pattern is selected based on the result of the special pattern lottery, a specific variation performance is executed for the player who has been playing for a long time. There is a possibility that the degree of expectation for winning a big win in the case of winning is easily predicted, and the willingness to play the game is lowered. That is, the variation time of the special symbol variation in which the above-described specific variation effect is executed is selected in order to shorten the period in which the special symbol variation is not performed when the number of special symbol retention balls is 0, Since it is necessary to be selected at a predetermined frequency when the number of special figure reserved balls is 0, it is expected that the result of the special symbol lottery will be a big hit when the specific variation performance (pseudo specific variation performance) is executed. However, it is difficult to increase the degree, and it is impossible to increase the degree of expectation for winning the jackpot with respect to the specific variation performance, and there is a possibility that the willingness to play will decrease.

On the other hand, the fourth control example is different from the above-described first control example in that the variation pattern of the special symbol variation can be selected before executing the special symbol lottery. As a result, the player is prevented from predicting the result of the special symbol lottery by the variation performance pattern executed corresponding to the selected variation pattern, thereby suppressing the player's willingness to play. be able to.

Furthermore, in the fourth control example, the variation pattern of the special symbol variation is configured to be selectable based on the number of reserved balls of the special symbol (the number of special symbol reserved balls) when starting the special symbol variation. Specifically, when executing the first special symbol variation (special figure 1 variation), a variation pattern is selected based on the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol (number of special figure 1 reserved balls), and the second When performing special symbol variation (special figure 2 variation), it is configured to select a variation pattern based on the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol (number of special figure 2 reserved balls). And, when the number of corresponding special figure reservation balls is 0, the same technical idea as the first control example described above is configured so that a variation pattern with a variation time of 14 seconds is selected.

By configuring in this way, since the player does not predict the result of the special symbol lottery by the variation performance pattern executed corresponding to the selected variation pattern, the player's willingness to play is reduced. It is possible to shorten the period in which the special symbol variation is not executed when the number of special symbol reserved balls is 0 while suppressing the storage.

In addition, in this fourth control example, when the lottery condition is satisfied after the special symbol variation is executed with the variation pattern (variation time) selected based on the number of special figure pending balls (after a predetermined time has elapsed ), a special symbol lottery is executed, and based on the result of the lottery, the performance mode of the variable performance being executed is configured to be variable. Thereby, the variable performance executed regardless of the result of the special symbol lottery can be terminated with the performance result showing the result of the special symbol lottery. Therefore, finally, the player can be notified of the result of the special symbol lottery in an easy-to-understand manner.

Furthermore, in the fourth control example, the variation mode of the variation effect is made different based on the length of the remaining period of the special symbol variation when the special symbol lottery is executed. Specifically, when the length of the remaining period of the special symbol variation when the special symbol lottery is executed is equal to or longer than a predetermined period (10 seconds or longer), it is configured to vary the performance contents in the variable performance. When it is less than a predetermined period (less than 10 seconds), only the display mode showing the performance result of the variable performance being executed is changed without changing the performance contents of the variable performance.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to inform the player of the result of the special symbol lottery executed during the special symbol variation in an easy-to-understand manner.

<Regarding the electrical configuration in the fourth control example>
First, referring to FIG. 260, the electrical configuration in this fourth control example will be described. In this fourth control example, the variation pattern selection table 202d (see FIG. 156) is replaced with the variation pattern selection table 202cd (see FIG. 260), which is different from the above-described first control example. are identical. The same reference numerals are assigned to the same elements, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, the variation pattern selection 4 table 202cd will be described with reference to FIG. 260(a). FIG. 260(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the variation pattern selection 4 table 202cd. This variation pattern selection 4 table 202cd includes a normal 4 table 202cd1 used when the game state is set to a normal state (low probability state of special symbols, low probability state of normal symbols), and a time saving state (special symbols low probability state, high probability state of normal symbols), or 4 tables 202cd2 for time saving and probability variation used when probability variation state (high probability state of special symbols, high probability state of normal symbols) is set have.

Next, referring to FIG. 260(b), the contents defined in the normal 4-table 202cd1 will be described. FIG. 260(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the normal 4 table 202cd1, and according to the number of reserved balls of special symbols and the value of the acquired variation type counter CS1 It is configured so that different variation patterns are selected. This normal 4 table 202cd1 is different from the normal table 202d1 of the first control example described above in that it does not look at the result of the special symbol lottery when selecting the variation pattern, and regardless of the type of special symbol The major difference is that they are configured so that the same variation pattern is selected.

Specifically, the special symbol type is common, the number of corresponding special symbol reserved balls (number of reserved balls) is "0", and the value of the acquired variation type counter CS1 is in the range of "0 to 149" , a variation pattern with a variation time of 14 seconds (normal variation A) is selected, and a variation pattern with a variation time of 28 seconds (normal variation B) is selected for the range of "150 to 198".

In addition, when the number of held balls is "1, 2" and the value of the acquired variation type counter CS1 is in the range of "0 to 49", a variation pattern with a variation time of 10 seconds (normal variation C) is selected, For the range of "50 to 149", a variation pattern with a variation time of 20 seconds (normal variation D) is selected, and for the range of "150 to 198", a variation pattern with a variation time of 30 seconds (normal variation E ) is selected. Furthermore, when the number of pending balls is "3", a variation pattern with a variation time of 10 seconds (normal variation F) is selected regardless of the value of the variation type counter CS1 obtained.

As described above with reference to FIG. 260(b), in the fourth control example, when selecting the variation pattern of the special symbol variation, based on the number of reserved balls of the special symbol and the value of the variation type counter CS1, Since the variation pattern is selected by the variation pattern, it is possible to prevent the player from grasping in advance whether or not the big win is won in the special symbol lottery based on the selected variation pattern.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 configured to be able to select a variation pattern of a different variation time according to the number of reserved balls of special symbols (number of special reserved balls), when the number of special reserved balls is "0" By making it easier to select a variation pattern with a longer variation time than when the number of special figure pending balls is greater than "0", the special symbol variation ends when the number of special figure pending balls is "0". It is possible to make it easier to suppress the fact that

Next, with reference to FIG.260(c), the content of 4 table 202cd2 for time saving and probability variation is demonstrated. FIG.260(c) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content prescribed|regulated to 4 table 202cd2 for time saving and probability variation. As shown in FIG. 260 (c), even in the time-saving/positive variable 4 table 202cd2, similarly to the above-described normal 4 table 202cd1, the number of pending balls (special figure pending ball number) and the acquired variation type counter CS1 A variation pattern with different variation times is defined according to the value.

This 4 table 202cd2 for time saving and probability variation is configured to facilitate selection of a variation pattern in which a shorter variation time is set than the above 4 table 202cd1 for normal. By configuring in this way, the special symbol lottery can be executed more efficiently when the time saving state or the variable probability state is set than when the normal state is set. In addition, as described above with reference to FIG. 125, in the time-saving state and probability variable state in which the high probability state of the normal symbol is set, the ball is easily entered into the second ball entrance 640, so the normal state It becomes more difficult for the number of special figure pending balls to become 0. Therefore, even if a variation pattern with a short variation time is easily selected, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a long period in which no special symbol variation is performed.

In addition, in the present fourth control example, as described above, regardless of the type of special symbol, it is configured to select a variation pattern using the same data table. As in one control example, it may be configured such that different variation patterns can be selected according to the type of special symbol and the game state to be set.

<Regarding the control process of the main controller in the fourth control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 261 to 263, the contents of the control process executed by main controller 110 in this fourth control example will be described. This fourth control example is different from the above-described first control example in that the timing of starting the special symbol variation and the timing of executing the special symbol lottery are different. The content of control processing is made different. Other processing contents are the same, and the same processing contents are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 261, the contents of the special symbol variation process 4 (S154) will be described. FIG. 261 is a flow chart showing the contents of the special symbol variation process 4 (S154). This special symbol variation process 4 (S154) is a process that is executed instead of the special symbol variation process (see S104 in FIG. 178) of the first control example described above, and is a special symbol variation start process that is executed as a subroutine. (See S213 in FIG. 180), the special symbol variation start process 4 (see S251 in FIG. 262) is executed, and the process for executing the special symbol lottery during the variation of the special symbol is added. , and are otherwise identical. The same processing contents are assigned the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof is omitted.

In the special symbol variation process 4 (S154), first, the same S201 to S212 processes as the special symbol variation process of the first control example (see S104 in FIG. 178) are executed, and then the special symbol variation start process 4 is executed (S251), and the process ends. Details of the special symbol variation start process 4 (S251) will be described later with reference to FIG.

On the other hand, in the process of S202, when it is determined that the special symbol is changing (S202: Yes), it is determined whether the minimum time has passed (S252), and when it is determined that the minimum time has passed (S252 : Yes), the special symbol lottery process is executed (S253), and then the same S214 to S221 processes as the special symbol variation process of the first control example (see S104 in FIG. 178) are executed, and this process is executed. finish.

Here, in this control example, when the minimum time has elapsed after the special symbol variation is started, the special symbol lottery corresponding to the special symbol variation being executed is executed. That is, in this control example, before executing the special symbol lottery, the special symbol variation is executed. Therefore, the determination in the process of S252 becomes a lottery condition determination means for determining whether the lottery condition for the special symbol is satisfied, and the minimum elapsed time determined in the process of S252 becomes the lottery condition.

In this control example, a minimum time (for example, 5 seconds) is set as a lottery condition, and the same time is set as the minimum time regardless of the selected variation pattern. In other words, even the shortest variation time (5 seconds) that can be selected as the variation pattern is set as the minimum time that can be measured. By configuring in this way, there is no need to vary the lottery conditions according to the selected variation pattern, and the control processing of main controller 110 can be simplified.

In addition, in this control example, as the lottery condition for executing the special symbol lottery, the lottery condition established based on the elapsed time from the start of the special symbol variation is set, but the lottery condition during the special symbol variation is established, for example, a remaining time determination means capable of determining the remaining time of the special symbol fluctuation is provided, and the remaining time determined by the remaining time determination means is a specific condition (for example, 5 seconds ) may be set. In addition, when the ball launched into the game area during the special symbol fluctuation period enters the predetermined ball entrance, the lottery condition is established, or when the player performs any operation on the operation means. You may establish a lottery condition in .

Further, in this control example, regardless of the selected variation pattern, it is configured to set the same lottery conditions, but not limited to this, different lottery conditions depending on the type of the selected variation pattern You may provide the lottery condition setting means to set. As a result, the execution timing of the special symbol lottery can be varied according to the selected variation pattern, so that, for example, the lottery suggestion performance suggesting the timing of the execution of the special symbol lottery is displayed during the execution period of the special symbol variation. It becomes possible to go to Therefore, during the period of the special symbol variation, it is possible to execute a novel performance of suggesting to the player the timing of execution of the special symbol lottery corresponding to the special symbol variation being executed, thereby improving the amusement of the game. can do

Next, with reference to FIG. 262, the contents of the special symbol variation start process 4 (S251) will be described. FIG. 262 is a flow chart showing the contents of the special symbol variation start process 4 (S251). This special symbol variation start process 4 (S251) differs from the special symbol variation start process (see S213 in FIG. 180) in the above-described first control example in that the process of executing the special symbol lottery is omitted. Other than that, they are identical. Identical contents are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

When the special symbol variation start process 4 (S251) is executed, first, it is determined whether the special symbol variation 1 is started (whether the type of the special symbol variation executed this time is the first special symbol) (S351 ). Then, if it is determined that it is a special figure 1 fluctuation (S351: Yes), then the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223a is acquired (S352), and the acquired special figure reserved ball number ( A variation pattern is selected and determined using the variation pattern selection table 222cd1 based on the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223a) and the value of the acquired variation type counter CS1 (S353). Then, a variation pattern command indicating the determined variation pattern is set (S354), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S351, if it is determined that it is not special figure 1 variation (it is special figure 2 variation) (S351: No), then acquire the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223b Then (S355), the variation pattern is selected using the variation pattern selection table 222cd1 based on the acquired number of special symbols reserved balls (the value of the special symbol 2 reserved balls counter 223b) and the value of the acquired variation type counter CS1. , is determined (S353). Then, a variation pattern command indicating the determined variation pattern is set (S354), and this process is terminated.

As described above with reference to FIG. 260, the variation pattern selection table 222cd of this control example is defined so as not to refer to the result of the special symbol lottery. are configured to be selectable. Therefore, even if the player discriminates the variation pattern of the selected special symbol variation, the result of the special symbol lottery will not be grasped from the determination contents. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand the result of the special symbol lottery.

In this control example, the timing of executing the special symbol lottery is after the timing of selecting the variation pattern of the special symbol variation. After the special symbol lottery is executed, the variation pattern of the special symbol variation is selected, and in that case, variation is performed using the variation pattern selection 4 table 202cd1 of the fourth control example in which the result of the special symbol lottery is not referred to. It may be configured to select a pattern. In this case, for example, a special symbol variation is executed based on the selected variation pattern, and a variation pattern command indicating the selected variation pattern is output to the voice ramp control device 113, and after performing variation production, a predetermined When it is determined that the output condition is established, a lottery result command indicating the result of the special symbol lottery is output to the sound lamp control device 113, thereby achieving the same technical idea as the fourth control example. A pachinko machine 10 can be configured.

Next, with reference to FIG. 263, the contents of the special symbol lottery process (S253) will be described. FIG. 263 is a flow chart showing the contents of the special symbol lottery process (S253). This special symbol lottery process (S253) is executed when a predetermined lottery condition is satisfied (when the minimum time has passed) after the special symbol variation is executed, and the special symbol variation being executed A special symbol lottery corresponding to is executed.

In the special symbol lottery process (S253), first, it is determined whether or not the result command has been set (S371). That is, it is determined whether or not the special symbol lottery has already been executed. In the process of S371, if it is determined that the result command has been set (S371: Yes), this process ends. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the special symbol lottery from being executed a plurality of times in one special symbol variation.

On the other hand, in the process of S371, when it is determined that the result command is not set, that is, the special symbol lottery corresponding to the special symbol variation of this time is not executed (S371: No), next, the special symbol is reserved. The data of the execution area in the ball storage area is acquired (S372), and it is determined whether the value of the variable probability counter 203t is greater than 0, that is, whether the current game state is the variable probability state (high probability state of special symbols). (S373). By the process of S373, if it is determined that the value of the probability variation counter 203t is greater than 0 (S373: Yes), since the current state is a high probability state of the special symbol, for high probability corresponding to the type of special symbol A lottery result is obtained based on the first winning random number table 202a (S374). In addition, in the processing of S372, if it is determined that the value of the probability variation counter 203t is not greater than 0 (is 0) (S373: No), since the current state is a low probability state of special symbols, the type of special symbols A lottery result is acquired based on the first winning random number table 202a for low probability corresponding to (S375).

Then, it is determined whether the lottery result obtained in the process of S374 or S375 is a big hit (S376), and if it is determined to be a big hit (S376: Yes), the display mode at the time of the big hit corresponding to the special symbol is displayed. (S376), sets a result command indicating that the lottery result is a big win (S377), and terminates this process.

The result command set in the process of S377 is output in the external output process (see S901 in FIG. 187) of the main process (see FIG. 187) of main controller 110, similarly to various commands set in other processes. It is output to the audio ramp controller 113 . Then, in the sound lamp control device 113, based on the reception of the result command process, a process for varying the effect mode of the variable effect being executed is executed. Thus, the performance mode and the performance result of the variable performance corresponding to the special symbol variation executed before the special symbol lottery can be changed to the performance mode corresponding to the result of the special symbol lottery.

On the other hand, in the process of S376, when it is determined that the lottery result of this time is not a big hit (S376: No), the display mode at the time of loss corresponding to the special symbol is set (S378), and the lottery result is a loss. is set (S379), and the process ends.

<Regarding Control Contents of Audio Ramp Control Device 113 in Fourth Control Example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 264 and 265, the control processing contents of the audio ramp control device 113 in the fourth control example will be described. The control processing of the audio ramp control device 113 in the fourth control example is the control processing of the audio ramp control device 113 in the first control example described above, the command determination processing (see S2114 in FIG. 195), the command The difference is that determination processing 4 (see S2174 in FIG. 264) is executed, and the rest is the same.

The pachinko machine 10 of the fourth control example differs in the timing of the special symbol lottery executed by the main controller 110 from the pachinko machine 10 of the first control example described above, and executes special symbol variation. It is constructed so as to execute a special symbol lottery after it has been drawn. Therefore, based on various commands output from the main control device 110, the setting contents of the display mode (effect mode) of the variable display (variable effect) of the third symbol to be executed corresponding to the special symbol variation are also set in the above-described second 1 control example.

Specifically, the variation pattern (variation effect pattern) of the third symbol is determined based on the variation pattern command output at the execution timing of the special symbol variation, and the process to be executed is the same, but after that, the special symbol lottery The difference is that processing for varying (switching) the performance mode of the variable performance pattern being executed or the performance result is added when a result command for indicating the result of is received. In this way, by varying (switching) the effect mode of the variable effect pattern being executed or the effect result based on the reception of the result command, it is possible to provide the player with an easy-to-understand game. .

In addition, since the variable performance executed until the result command is received is not set based on the lottery result of the special symbol, the player will grasp the lottery result based on the performance mode. There is nothing It should be noted that, in the variation production that is executed until the result command is received, for example, it is preferable to display a suggestion mode that can suggest the length of the variation time of the special symbol variation set this time. By configuring in this way, the player can be made to predict the variation time of the special symbol variation being executed. Then, based on the prediction, it is possible to predict the timing of receiving the result command, that is, the timing of changing the effect mode of the variable effect based on the content of the received result command.

When the command determination process 4 (S2174) is executed, first, the same processes of S2201 to S2214 as the command determination process of the first control example (see S2114 in FIG. 195) are executed. If it is determined that no command has been received (S2213: No), then it is determined whether a result command has been received (S2271).

In the process of S2271, if it is determined that the result command has been received (S2271: Yes), the result command process is executed (S2272), and this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2271 that the result command has not been received (S22271: No), this process ends.

Next, the contents of the result command process (S2272) executed in the command determination process 4 (S2174) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 265 is a flow chart showing the contents of the result command processing (S2272). In the result command processing (S2272), when the sound lamp control device 113 receives the result command, determination processing of whether or not to change the effect mode of the variable effect being executed, variable processing in the case of changing, is executed.

In the result command process (S2272), first, the lottery result included in the received result command is obtained (S4301), and it is determined whether or not the obtained lottery result is a big hit (S4302). If it is determined that the jackpot has been won (S4302: Yes), then the remaining variation time is calculated (S4303), and it is determined whether the calculated remaining variation time is longer than 10 seconds (S4304). Then, when it is determined that the remaining variation time is longer than 10 seconds (S4304: Yes), a display command for switching the set variation production pattern to the winning exclusive production pattern is set (S4305), and this End the process.

On the other hand, in the processing of S4304, if it is determined that the remaining variation time is within 10 seconds (S4304: No), the result display mode of the set variation effect pattern is changed to the winning result display mode indicating winning. A display command for switching is set (S4305), and this processing ends. Also, in the process of S4302, if it is determined that the result of this special symbol lottery (lottery result included in the result command) is not a jackpot election (no) (S4302: No), this process is performed as it is. finish.

In the second control example described above, a series of character effects using the effect member 700, the rotating member 840, and the ejection device 400 are configured to be executed according to the elapsed time of the variable display effect. It is not limited. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which a series of accessory effects are executed with the operation of the frame button 22 as a trigger. That is, in the variable display effect, an operation valid period may be set in which an operation to the frame button 22 is treated as valid when a specific period elapses, and a series of accessory effects may be executed based on pressing of the frame button 22 . In this case, the delay control in the first control example described above may be applied. That is, when an operation to the frame button 22 is detected in a state where a predetermined delay condition is established, a delay period is set for the delay timer 223s, thereby delaying the start of the series of performances. You may By configuring in this way, it is possible to further diversify the mode of presentation. Also, instead of delaying the start of the entire series of performances, only a part of the action may be delayed. In other words, the configuration may be such that only the start of the first operation is delayed, or only the start of the second operation is delayed. By configuring in this way, it is possible to further diversify the production mode of the series of accessory productions, so that the player's interest in the game can be further improved. In addition, the target of the effect of delaying the action of the role is not limited to the series of role effects, but the effect involving the variable action of at least one of the various roles provided in the pachinko machine 10. If so, it can be applied to any production. In place of or in addition to the accessories, it may be possible to delay the start of part or all of the luminous mode of the presentation accompanied by luminous means such as decorative LEDs and lamps. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make the presentation mode different depending on whether the delay is made or not, so that the presentation mode can be further diversified.

<Modification of First Control Example>
Next, a modification of the first control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 266 to 272. FIG. In the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example described above, as one type of effect mode in the variable display effect, it is configured to be able to execute a group effect of a effect mode in which a plurality of characters are gathered, and the number of characters gathered is expected to result in a big win. It is configured to suggest the degree to the player.

In addition to this, in this modified example, it is possible to suggest the degree of expectation for a big win by a combination of characters that are stop-displayed in one variable display in the collective effect. In addition, in this modified example, an accompanying pattern imitating one of the numbers "1" to "9" is provided as an accompanying pattern associated with the third pattern imitating each character. In this modified example, it is possible to indicate the degree of expectation for a big win even by a combination of accompanying symbols associated with the third symbol that is stopped and displayed. Furthermore, in this modification, it is configured such that in which symbol row the third symbol corresponding to each character is to be displayed is set after the execution of the collective effect is determined, and the execution of the collective effect is also determined for each accompanying symbol. After that, it is configured to set which symbol row to display. In other words, the type of character and the type of accompanying pattern are not fixed, and each time a variable display effect involving a group effect is executed, the correspondence relationship between the third pattern and the accompanying pattern (attached to each character number) can be changed. Then, when the third symbol and the accompanying symbol are in a specific combination, the expectation of a big win is increased. By configuring in this way, not only the total number of characters acquired in the gathering effect, but also the type of the third symbol stopped and displayed in each symbol row in each variable display in the gathering effect, the type of the accompanying symbol, and the Since the game can be played while paying attention to the combination of the three symbols and the accompanying symbols, the player's interest in the game can be further improved.

First, with reference to FIGS. 266 and 267, the effect mode of the group effect in this modified example will be described. FIG. 266(a) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen on which ally characters that can be obtained in a gathering effect are displayed. As shown in FIG. 266(a), in this modified example, a third pattern imitating an animal character (or the character "?") is displayed for each of the pattern rows L1 to L3 (see FIG. 129(a)). is displayed, and at the lower right of each third pattern, a number-like accompanying pattern is displayed. The accompanying pattern is always displayed accompanying the third pattern imitating the same character during one set performance. That is, while the third pattern is being variably displayed, it is variably displayed together with the third design. In this modification, at the time when this obtainable ally character is displayed, the combination of the third symbols stopped and displayed in each symbol row, the combination of the accompanying symbols, and the combination of the third symbols, the accompanying symbols, and the stop position. By means such as this, it is configured to be able to suggest to the player the degree of expectation for a big win.

FIG. 266(b) is a diagram showing an example of a combination of stop symbols (chance-up pattern) that increases the expectation of a big win. As shown in FIG. 266(b), the display of the third symbol simulating a bear in the middle third symbol display area 901b suggests to the player that the degree of expectation for a big win is high. As for the types of accompanying symbols associated with the third bear symbol, there is no difference in expectations except for the accompanying symbols imitating the number "7". Further, there is no difference in the degree of expectation between the types of the third symbols displayed in the left third symbol display area 901a and the right third symbol display area 901c. That is, as long as the third symbol simulating a bear is stopped and displayed in the middle third symbol display area 901b, there is a high expectation of a big win regardless of the type of the third symbols stopped and displayed in the left and right symbol rows. Become. Therefore, since the player can be made to pay attention to the type of the third symbol displayed in the middle third symbol display area 901b, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, although not shown in the drawings, as a chance-up pattern different from the mode in which the third pattern imitating a bear is displayed in the middle third pattern display region 901b, one of the third pattern display regions 901a to 901c On the other hand, even when the third symbol accompanied by the accompanying symbol imitating the numeral "7" is stopped and displayed, the expectation for the big win is increased. That is, by displaying an accompanying symbol imitating the number "7" in any of the accompanying symbol display areas 901a1 to 901c1, it is possible to suggest that the degree of expectation for a big win is high. As a result, it is possible to determine whether or not the chance-up pattern has been variably displayed simply by observing whether or not the accompanying symbol resembling "7" is stop-displayed in any of the accompanying symbol display areas 901a1 to 901c1. can be easily discriminated, it is possible to realize an effect mode that is easier for the player to understand.

In addition, in this modified example, there is also provided a stop type in which a jackpot is determined at the point of appearance. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 267, a third symbol simulating a bear is stopped and displayed in the middle third symbol display area 901b, and an accompanying symbol associated with the third symbol simulating the bear is displayed. In the case of the accompanying symbol simulating "7" (when the accompanying symbol simulating "7" is displayed in the middle accompanying symbol display area 901b1), it is determined that a jackpot will be won.

Thus, in this modification, not only the total number of characters acquired in the collective effect, but also the type of the third symbol stopped and displayed in each symbol row in each variable display in the collective effect, the type of the accompanying symbol, Since it is possible to suggest the degree of expectation for a big hit even by the combination of the third pattern and the accompanying pattern, it is possible to indicate not only whether the character is acquired in the gathering performance, but also whether the character is stopped and displayed. It is possible to realize a game property that draws attention to the character (and accompanying pattern) that is stopped and displayed at that point in time. Therefore, it is possible to further enhance the player's interest in the game.

In addition, in this modification, when the third symbol imitating a bear is stopped and displayed in the middle third symbol display area 901b, or when one of the third symbol display areas 901a to 901c is displayed with an accompanying symbol imitating "7" When the third symbol accompanied by is stopped and displayed, the degree of expectation for the big win increases, and the third symbol imitating a bear accompanied by the accompanying symbol imitating "7" in the middle third symbol display area 901b is stopped and displayed. However, the combination that improves the expectation of the big win or the combination that secures the big win is not limited to this, and may be determined arbitrarily. For example, when only the third symbol attached with an accompanying symbol imitating an odd number is stopped and displayed, the expectation of a big win may be increased, or a combination of elephant, bear and rhinoceros may be stopped and displayed. It may be configured so that the degree of expectation for a big win is increased by being played.

<Electrical configuration in the modification of the first control example>
Next, referring to FIG. 268, the configuration of the character storage area 223e1 in this modified example will be described. In this modified example, a character storage area 223e1 is provided for the sound lamp control device 113 instead of the character storage area 222e1 in the first control example. That is, the character storage area 223e1 can be overwritten (updated). More specifically, the third pattern type (character type) and the accompanying pattern type to be displayed in each pattern row in the collective effect can be newly set in each collective effect. there is Then, during one set effect, the variable display of the third pattern is executed in the arrangement set in the character storage area 222e1. By adopting a configuration in which the arrangement is reset for each performance, the player can always feel novelty, so that it is possible to provide a game that is difficult to idle.

As shown in FIG. 268, the character storage area 223e1 in this modification is defined in association with the range of addresses "0000H" to "000DH" in the RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113. Either data (character data) indicating the type of pattern or data (numeric data) indicating the type of accompanying pattern is stored. As shown in FIG. 268, the address "0000H" is a storage area for storing data (character data) indicating the type of the first third symbol to be displayed in the left symbol row, and the address "0001H". ' is a storage area for storing data (numerical data) indicating the type of accompanying symbol attached to the first third symbol to be displayed in the left symbol column. Similarly, addresses "0002H" and "0003H" are data (character data) indicating the type of the second third symbol to be displayed in the left symbol row, and data indicating the type of accompanying symbols (numeric data). ), and addresses "0004H" and "0005H" are data (character data) indicating the type of the first third symbol to be displayed in the right symbol row, respectively, and an accompanying symbol. Data (numerical data) indicating the type of the second and third symbols to be displayed in the right symbol column. (character data), and a storage area for storing data (numeric data) indicating the type of accompanying pattern. Addresses "0008H" and "0009H" are data (character data) indicating the type of the first third symbol to be displayed in the middle symbol row, and data (numeric data) indicating the type of accompanying symbols. , and the addresses "000AH" and "000BH" are data (character data) indicating the type of the second third symbol to be displayed in the middle symbol row, respectively, and the accompanying symbol data. This is a storage area for storing data (numeric data) indicating the type. Addresses "000CH" and "000DH" are data indicating the type of the third third symbol to be displayed in the middle symbol row. character data), and data (numeric data) indicating the type of accompanying pattern.

At the start of the group production, character data and numeric data different from each other are stored one by one in the addresses "0000H" to "000DH" forming the character storage area 223e1. The display mode of the pattern can be set. In this modified example, 7 types of character data and 9 types of numeric data are provided, while 14 addresses (7 addresses×2) are associated with the character storage area 223e1. Therefore, although all characters are set in one of the symbol rows for the character data, two numbers are left over for the number data. That is, only seven kinds of accompanying symbols among the accompanying symbols imitating nine kinds of numbers are set as the accompanying symbols of any of the third symbols in one collective effect. In this modified example, it is easier to set the accompanying symbol imitating the number "7" in the case of winning than in the case of losing. In other words, it is configured to make it difficult to set an accompanying symbol imitating the number "7" in the case of misalignment. As a result, it is possible to improve the player's expectation for a big win when the accompanying symbol imitating "7" is stopped and displayed.

Next, referring to FIG. 269, when character data is stored in each address of character storage area 223e1 in this modification, a lottery is performed to determine which data is to be stored in which address. The character lottery table 222e11 that is referred to for the execution will be described. This character lottery table 222 e 11 is a kind of data table provided in the ROM 222 of the sound lamp control device 113 . Here, in this modified example, only the character data to be stored at the head address of the character storage area 223e1 is determined by the character lottery table 222e11. The characters are arranged in a predetermined order (the order of elephant, lion, dugong, rhinoceros, bird, bear, and boar). , character data are stored in a predetermined order. For example, when a dugong is determined as a character to be stored at the top address, rhinoceros, bird, bear, wild boar, elephant, and lion are stored in the order of addresses in the character storage area 22231 . By configuring in this way, the processing load can be reduced compared to the case where character data to be stored in all addresses is determined by lottery.

As shown in FIG. 269, in the character lottery table 222e11, the type of character to be set for the first third symbol in the left symbol column (character data to be set to the top address of the character storage area 223e1) is stored for each success/failure determination result. ) and the value range of the twelfth effect counter 223p12 are defined in association with each other. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 269, when the hit/fail determination result is a win, the elephant character (character data “00H ”) are defined in association with each other. Of the 199 possible random numbers (counter values) of the twelfth effect counter 223p12, the number of random numbers (counter values) associated with the elephant character is 35, so the character data (00H) corresponding to the elephant ) is stored at the top address of the character storage area 223e1 is about 17.6% (35/199). When character data corresponding to an elephant is set at the top address, a third pattern imitating an elephant and a lion is displayed in the left pattern row, and a third pattern imitating a dugong and a rhinoceros is displayed in the right pattern row. A third pattern representing a bird, a bear, and a wild boar is displayed in the middle pattern row. In other words, the arrangement is set so that the bear can be displayed in the medium pattern row (arrangement in which the bear can be stopped in a chance pattern or a definite pattern).

Further, as shown in FIG. 269, a lion character (character data "01H") is defined in association with the range of "35 to 69" of the value of the twelfth effect counter 223p12. Of the 199 possible random numbers (counter values) of the twelfth effect counter 223p12, the number of random numbers (counter values) associated with the lion character is 35, so the character data corresponding to the lion (01H ) is stored at the top address of the character storage area 223e1 is about 17.6% (35/199). When character data corresponding to a lion is set in the top address, a third pattern imitating a lion and a dugong is displayed in the left pattern column, and a third pattern imitating a rhinoceros and a bird is displayed in the right pattern column. In the middle pattern row, a third pattern imitating a bear, a wild boar, and an elephant is displayed. That is, the arrangement is set so that the bear can be displayed in the middle symbol row (arrangement in which the bear can be stopped by a chance pattern or a definite pattern).

Further, as shown in FIG. 269, the dugong character (character data "02H") is defined in association with the range of "70 to 92" of the value of the twelfth effect counter 223p12. Of the 199 possible random numbers (counter values) of the twelfth effect counter 223p12, the number of random numbers (counter values) associated with the dugong character is 23, so the character data (02H) corresponding to the dugong ) is stored at the top address of the character storage area 223e1 is about 11.6% (23/199). When the character data corresponding to the dugong is set at the head address, the third pattern imitating the dugong and the rhinoceros is displayed in the left pattern row, and the third pattern imitating the bird and the bear is displayed in the right pattern row. The middle pattern row displays a third pattern imitating a boar, an elephant, and a lion. In other words, the arrangement is set such that the bear cannot be displayed in the medium symbol row.

Further, as shown in FIG. 269, the value of the twelfth effect counter 223p12 ranges from "93 to 115" and is defined in association with the rhinoceros character (character data "03H"). Of the 199 possible random numbers (counter values) of the twelfth effect counter 223p12, the number of random numbers (counter values) associated with the character of rhinoceros is 23. Therefore, the character data corresponding to rhinoceros (03H ) is stored at the top address of the character storage area 223e1 is about 11.6% (23/199). When character data corresponding to a rhinoceros is set at the top address, a third pattern imitating a rhinoceros and a bird is displayed in the left pattern column, and a third pattern imitating a bear and a boar is displayed in the right pattern column. The middle pattern row displays a third pattern imitating an elephant, a lion, and a dugong. In other words, the arrangement is set such that the bear cannot be displayed in the medium symbol row.

Further, as shown in FIG. 269, the value of the twelfth effect counter 223p12 is defined in a range of "116 to 138" in association with the bird character (character data "04H"). Of the 199 possible random numbers (counter values) of the twelfth effect counter 223p12, the number of random numbers (counter values) associated with the bird character is 23. Therefore, the character data (04H) corresponding to the bird ) is stored at the top address of the character storage area 223e1 is about 11.6% (23/199). When the character data corresponding to the bird is set at the top address, the third symbol representing a bird and a bear is displayed in the left symbol row, and the third symbol representing a wild boar and an elephant is displayed in the right symbol row. In the middle pattern column, a third pattern representing a lion, a dugong, and a rhinoceros is displayed. In other words, the arrangement is set such that the bear cannot be displayed in the middle symbol row.

Further, as shown in FIG. 269, a bear character (character data "05H") is defined in association with the range of the value of the twelfth effect counter 223p12 from "139 to 162". Of the 199 possible random numbers (counter values) of the twelfth effect counter 223p12, the number of random numbers (counter values) associated with the bear character is 24. Therefore, the character data corresponding to the bear (05H ) is stored at the top address of the character storage area 223e1 is about 12.1% (24/199). When character data corresponding to a bear is set in the top address, a third pattern imitating a bear and a boar is displayed in the left pattern column, and a third pattern imitating an elephant and a lion is displayed in the right pattern column. The middle pattern row displays a third pattern imitating a dugong, a rhinoceros, and a bird. In other words, the arrangement is set such that the bear cannot be displayed in the middle symbol row.

Further, as shown in FIG. 269, a wild boar character (character data "06H") is defined in association with the range of the value of the twelfth effect counter 223p12 from "163 to 1698". Of the 199 possible random numbers (counter values) of the twelfth effect counter 223p12, the number of random numbers (counter values) associated with the boar character is 36, so the character data (06H) corresponding to the boar ) is stored at the top address of the character storage area 223e1 is about 18.1% (36/199). When character data corresponding to a wild boar is set in the top address, a third pattern imitating a boar and an elephant is displayed in the left pattern column, and a third pattern imitating a lion and a dugong is displayed in the right pattern column. The middle pattern row displays a third pattern imitating a rhinoceros, a bird, and a bear. That is, the arrangement is set so that the bear can be displayed in the middle symbol row.

In this way, when the win/loss determination result is a hit, the third pattern imitating a bear is arranged in the medium pattern at a rate of about 53.3%. In other words, it is constructed so as to be capable of becoming a stop type more than a chance pattern.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 269, when the success/failure determination result is out, the elephant character (character data "00H") is displayed in the range of "0 to 19" for the value of the twelfth effect counter 223p12. A lion character (character data “01H”) is defined in association with the range “20 to 39”, and a dugong character (character data “01H”) is defined in association with the range “40 to 74”. data "02H") is defined in association with the range of "75 to 109", the character of rhinoceros (character data "03H") is defined in association with the range of "110 to 144". , a bird character (character data “04H”) are defined in association with each other, and a bear character (character data “05H”) is defined in correspondence with the range of “145 to 179”, and “145 to 198 , a wild boar character (character data "06H") is defined in association with the range.

Therefore, the rate at which the third bear pattern is set in the medium pattern row (the rate at which character data corresponding to any one of elephant, lion, and boar is set at the leading address of the character storage area 223e1) is about 29.6%. That is, compared to the case of a big win, the third symbol imitating a bear is less likely to be arranged in the middle symbol row. As a result, the appearance rate of the chance pattern can be made higher in the case of a big win, so that the game can be played while paying attention to the stop symbols in the middle symbol row. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

Next, referring to FIG. 270, lottery is performed to determine which data is to be stored in which address when numerical data is stored in each address of character storage area 223e1 in this modification. The number lottery table 222e12 that is referred to for performing the lottery will be described. This number lottery table 222 e 12 is a kind of data table provided in the ROM 222 of the sound lamp control device 113 . Here, in this modified example, only the character data to be stored at the address "0001H" of the character storage area 223e1 is determined by the number lottery table 222e11. For other addresses, numerical data are stored in ascending numerical order starting from the number stored at the address "0001H". By configuring in this way, the processing load can be reduced compared to the case where the number data to be stored in all addresses is determined by lottery.

As shown in FIG. 270, in the number lottery table 222e12, the first third symbol in the left symbol row is displayed according to the result of the winning/failure determination and whether or not the third symbol imitating a bear is arranged in the middle symbol row. The type of accompanying symbol set in the symbol (number data set at the address "0001H" in the character storage area 223e1) and the value range of the thirteenth effect counter 223p13 are defined in association with each other. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 270, when the result of winning/failure determination is hit, the value of the thirteenth effect counter 223p13 is in the range of "0 to 24" regardless of the type of the middle symbol row. , and associated symbols (numeric data “00H”) imitating the number “1” are defined in association with each other. Of the 199 possible random numbers (counter values) of the thirteenth effect counter 223p13, the number of random numbers (counter values) associated with the accompanying symbol imitating the number "1" is 25. The ratio of number data (00H) corresponding to the accompanying symbol imitating the character "1" to the address "0001H" of the character storage area 223e1 is about 12.6%. When the number data corresponding to the accompanying symbol imitating "1" is set in the address "0001H", the accompanying symbols imitating "1" and "2" are displayed in the left symbol row, and the right symbol row is displayed. In the row, accompanying symbols imitating "3" and "4" are displayed, and in the middle symbol row, third symbols imitating "5", "6" and "7" are displayed. That is, the arrangement is set so that the third symbol attached with the accompanying symbol imitating "7" can be stop-displayed (can be stop-displayed in the chance UP pattern).

Also, as shown in FIG. 270, if the result of the winning/failure determination is a hit, the number " 2” (numerical data “01H”) is associated with and defined. Of the 199 possible random numbers (counter values) of the thirteenth effect counter 223p13, the number of random numbers (counter values) associated with the accompanying symbol imitating the number "2" is 25. The ratio of number data (01H) corresponding to the accompanying symbol imitating the character "2" to the address "0001H" of the character storage area 223e1 is about 12.6%. In addition, when numerical data corresponding to an accompanying symbol imitating "2" is set in the address "0001H", accompanying symbols imitating "2" and "3" are displayed in the left symbol row, and the right symbol row is displayed. "4" and "5" are displayed in the row, and the middle symbol row displays a third symbol in the image of "6", "7" and "8". That is, the arrangement is set so that the third symbol attached with the accompanying symbol imitating "7" can be stop-displayed (can be stop-displayed in the chance UP pattern).

Similarly, the value of the thirteenth effect counter 223p13 is defined in the range of "50 to 74" in association with an accompanying symbol (number data "01H") that imitates the number "3". ” is defined in association with an accompanying pattern imitating the number “4”, and the range of “100 to 124” is defined in association with an accompanying pattern imitating the number “5”, The range of "125 to 174" is defined in association with an accompanying pattern imitating the number "6". Therefore, the rate at which the number data corresponding to the accompanying symbols imitating the numbers "3" to "6" are stored at the address "0001H" in the character storage area 223e1 is the accompanying symbols imitating "1" and "2". are about 12.6%, respectively. Even if the number data corresponding to the accompanying symbols imitating these "3" to "6" are set to the address "0001H", the accompanying symbols imitating the number "7" are set to any of the symbol rows. It is set as an accompanying symbol of the third symbol to be executed. That is, it becomes a combination that can be stop-displayed in the chance UP pattern.

On the other hand, the value of the thirteenth effect counter 223p13 is defined to correspond to the range of "175 to 186" with an associated pattern imitating the number "8", and to the range of "187 to 198", the number An accompanying symbol imitating the "9" of is associated with and defined. Since the number of random numbers (counter values) associated with the number data corresponding to these "8" and "9" is 12 respectively, the accompanying symbols imitating the numbers "8" and "9" The rate at which the numeric data corresponding to . When these accompanying symbols simulating ``8'' or ``9'' are set as the accompanying symbols of the first third pattern of the left pattern, the accompanying symbols simulating ``7'' cannot be set. The lottery ratio of the accompanying symbols ("8", "9") that are combinations that cannot display the chance UP pattern is changed to the lottery ratio of the accompanying symbols ("1" to "7") that are combinations that can display the chance UP pattern. By setting it lower than the percentage, it is possible to increase the expectation of a big win when the chance UP pattern appears.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 270, when the result of the judgment is "no", the selection ratio of each accompanying symbol depends on whether or not the third symbol imitating a bear is set in the middle symbol row. variable. That is, the third pattern imitating a bear is not set in the medium pattern row (“05H” is stored as character data in any of the addresses “0008H”, “000AH”, and “000CH” in the character storage area 223e1). If not), 14 random numbers (counter values) are defined in association with the accompanying symbols imitating the numbers "1" to "5", and "6" and "7" 15 random numbers (counter values) are defined in association with the accompanying symbols imitating numbers, and 49 random numbers (counter values) correspond to the accompanying symbols imitating the number "8". 50 random numbers (counter values) are defined in association with an accompanying symbol imitating the number "9". That is, compared to the case of winning, the number data corresponding to the accompanying symbols imitating the numbers "8" and "9" are more likely to be set at the address "0001H" of the character storage area 223e1. That is, the ratio of setting to a combination that does not include an accompanying symbol imitating the number "7" (a combination in which the chance UP pattern cannot be displayed) increases. Therefore, when the chance UP pattern is displayed, it is possible to improve the player's expectation for the big win.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 270, the result of the judgment is wrong, and the third pattern imitating a bear is set in the medium pattern row (addresses "0008H", " 000AH" and "000CH" as character data), a random number (counter value) is set for the accompanying symbols imitating the numbers "1" to "3". Not mapped. When the number data corresponding to the accompanying symbols imitating the numbers "1" to "3" are set at the address "0001H" in the character storage area 223e1, the addresses "0009"H and "000BH" corresponding to the middle symbol row are set. , ``000DH'', the numerical data ``06H'' corresponding to the accompanying symbol imitating the number ``7'' is set. There is a possibility that an accompanying pattern imitating "7" will be set in the , so this is the purpose of avoiding this (preventing stop display with a fixed pattern (see FIG. 267) despite being out) .

Also, as shown in FIG. 270, 20 random numbers (counter values) are defined in association with the number data corresponding to the accompanying symbols imitating the numbers "4" to "7". 60 random numbers (counter values) are defined in association with the number data corresponding to the accompanying symbols imitating the number "8", and the numbers corresponding to the accompanying symbols imitating the number "9". 59 random numbers (counter values) are defined in association with the data. In other words, the lottery ratio of the accompanying symbols ("8", "9") that are combinations in which the chance-up pattern cannot be displayed is changed to the accompanying symbols ("4" to "7") that are combinations in which the chance-up pattern can be displayed. Since the lottery ratio is set lower than the lottery ratio of , it is possible to increase the expectation of a big win when the chance UP pattern appears.

As described above, in this modification, the arrangement of the third symbols to be arranged in each symbol row and the accompanying symbols to be attached to each third symbol in the collective effect are drawn separately. As a result, since the display mode can be changed for each set performance, it is possible to realize a performance mode in which the players are less likely to get bored. In addition, the degree of expectation for a big win can be suggested by the combination of the third symbols stopped and the combination of the accompanying symbols, and the combination of the third symbols and the accompanying symbols. can draw more attention to Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

<Control processing of the sound ramp control device in the modified example of the first control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 271 to 273, various control processes executed by the MPU 221 of the sound ramp control device 113 in this modified example will be described. First, with reference to FIG. 271, the details of the battle effect setting process 5 (S2755) in this modified example will be described. This battle effect setting process 5 (S2755) is a process that is executed in place of the battle effect setting process (see FIG. 204) in the first control example described above. This is a process for setting various production modes in the battle production.

In the battle effect setting process 5 (see FIG. 271), the processes of S3101 to S3110 are the same as the processes of S3101 to S3110 of the battle effect setting process (see FIG. 204) in the first control example described above. is executed. In addition, in the battle effect setting process 5 (see FIG. 271) in this modification, an arrangement setting process is executed for setting a combination (arrangement) of symbols to be displayed in each symbol row (S3151), and the process proceeds to S3101. and migrate. Details of this array setting process (S3151) will be described with reference to FIG.

FIG. 272 is a flow chart showing the arrangement setting process (S3151) described above. In this array setting process (S3151), first, the character lottery table 222e11 (see FIG. 269) is read, and the defined contents of the read character lottery table 222e11 (see FIG. Character data to be stored at the top address of the character storage area 223e1 (see FIG. 268) is determined according to the value of the effect counter 223p12 (S4402), and the determined character data is stored at the top address of the character storage area 223e1. Store (S4403).

Next, an address obtained by adding "0002H" to the setting destination address where the data is set this time is set as the next setting destination address (S4404), and the new setting destination address is stored in the previous setting destination address. Character data obtained by adding "01H" to the obtained character data is stored (S4405). In the process of S4405, if the previously set character data is the upper limit "06H" (character data corresponding to a boar), "00H" is stored.

When the process of S4405 is completed, character data is then transferred to all destination addresses ("0000H", "0002H", "0004H", "0006H", "0008H", "000AH", and "000CH"). It is determined whether or not data is stored (S4406), and if there is a setting destination address in which data is not stored (S4406: No), the process proceeds to S4404. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S4406 that character data has been stored for all destination addresses, then number setting processing for setting number data to each address in the character storage area 223e1 is executed. Execute (S4407) and terminate this process. Details of this number setting process (S4407) will be described with reference to FIG.

FIG. 273 is a flow chart showing the number setting process (S4407). In this number setting process (S4407), first, the number lottery table 222e12 (see FIG. 270) is read out, and the defined contents of the number lottery table 222e12 read out, the result of the win/loss judgment of this time, and the value of the thirteenth effect counter 223p13. , and the type of character data set in the middle pattern, determine the number data to be stored at the address "0001H" in the character storage area 223e1 (see FIG. 268) (S4502). Next, the numeric data determined in the processing of S4502 is stored in the address "0001H" (S4503), and the address obtained by adding "0002H" to the setting destination address where the data is set this time is set as the next setting destination address (S4503). S4504). Next, the numeric data obtained by adding "01H" to the numeric data stored in the previous setting destination address is stored in the new setting destination address (S4505). Note that in the process of S4505, if the previously set numeric data is the upper limit "08H" (the numeric data corresponding to the number "9"), "00H" (the number corresponding to the number "1") is set. numeric data).

After the processing of S4505 is completed, character data is then transferred to all destination addresses ("0001H", "0003H", "0005H", "0007H", "0009H", "000BH", and "000DH"). It is determined whether or not data is stored (S4506), and if there is a setting destination address in which data is not stored (S4506: No), the process proceeds to S4504. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S4506 that character data has been stored for all destination addresses, this processing ends.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 in the modification of the first control example, animal characters (or "?" characters) are simulated for each of the symbol rows L1 to L3 (see FIG. 129(a)). The third pattern is displayed, and at the lower right of each third pattern, an accompanying pattern imitating a number is also displayed. Then, when it is decided to execute the group effect, the arrangements of the characters and the accompanying symbols in each pattern row are set separately, so that the correspondence between the characters and the numbers can be varied for each effect. Configure. The degree of expectation for a big win is suggested to the player by the combination of the third symbols stop-displayed in each symbol row, the combination of the accompanying symbols, the combination of the third symbols, the accompanying symbols and the stop position. configured as possible. By constructing in this way, in each variable display in the gathering effect, not only whether or not the character is acquired but also the combination of the stop symbols can be paid more attention to the game. It is possible to further improve the interest of the player in the game.

In this modification, only the first third symbol in the left symbol row and the type of accompanying symbols associated with the third symbol are determined by lottery, and the remaining symbol types are determined by lottery. Although the symbols are arranged in a predetermined order starting from the type of symbol, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, characters and numbers to be set for all symbols may be determined by lottery. By configuring in this way, the randomness of each pattern can be further enhanced, so that the mode of presentation can be further diversified. Alternatively, the combination of selectable symbols may be defined in advance by a table or the like, and the selection ratio of each combination may be varied according to the lottery result of the special symbols. By configuring in this way, it is possible to reduce the processing load when setting the combination of symbols.

In the modified example of the first control example described above, in the variable control of the display mode of the third symbol when execution of the group effect is determined, based on the character lottery table 222e11 described above with reference to FIG. It is configured to vary the display mode of the third pattern. That is, the display mode is determined from the display modes (7 types of characters) of the types (numbers 0 to 9) of the third symbols that are variably displayed. However, without being limited to this, for example, the display mode of the third pattern to be used for the collective effect may be determined from among the display modes of the number of types larger than the number of the third symbols to be variably displayed.

Specifically, a character storage area storing 15 types of character information is provided for the 10 third symbols that are displayed in a variable manner. Therefore, the display mode used for the collective effect may be determined with respect to the ten third symbols. With this configuration, all the display modes can be configured so that they are not variably displayed, so that the player can enjoy predicting which display mode will be determined when the group effect is executed. can provide. Also, in this case, the identification information of the third symbol being displayed in a variable manner is changed to such an extent that the player can visually recognize it, or the notification (suggestion) for notifying (suggesting) the determined display mode type to the player. Suggestion) It is good to provide a means. As a result, it is possible to provide the player with the pleasure of predicting the display mode of the third symbol to be stop-displayed immediately after the start of the group effect.

Furthermore, the same display mode may be redundantly determined as the display mode of the plurality of third symbols that are variably displayed in the collective effect. By configuring in this way, even when the group effect is executed using display modes (character data) with a smaller number of types than the number of the third symbols that are variably displayed during the group effect, all the display modes are displayed. A production pattern that is not displayed in a variable manner can be executed. In addition, by determining only the specific display mode more than the other display modes, the display mode that is likely to be stop-displayed in the collective effect and the display mode that is difficult to be displayed during the variable display of the third pattern in the collective effect. It can be suggested to the player.

In the modified example of the first control example, when execution of the group effect is determined, the display mode of the third symbol is determined, and the determined display mode is used to execute the group effect to the end. However, without being limited to this, for example, when the third symbols are temporarily stopped during the collective effect and are displayed again in a variable manner, the display mode of each third symbol is again determined (updated). The mode update process may be configured to be executable.

By constructing in this way, every time the third pattern is temporarily stopped during the gathering performance, the display mode of the third pattern that can be stopped and displayed can be changed, so that the user does not get tired of the gathering performance in the middle. can be suppressed. In addition, the display mode corresponding to the character already acquired in the group effect may be continued as it is and used as the display mode of the third pattern, or the player may grasp that the display mode corresponds to the character already acquired. Acquired display modes in which the display mode is varied as much as possible (for example, a display mode in which a character is marked with "done") may be used. It may be configured so as to change to a display mode corresponding to the character.

Further, as in the modified example of the first control example described above, when executing an effect using identification information (symbols) having a plurality of information, for example, the first information (character information) given to each symbol , second information (numerical information), and third information (information indicating whether or not the effect has been successful (large set)) can be determined. After variably displaying a plurality of (three) columns, the first benefit is given based on the combination of the first information, the second benefit is given based on the combination of the second information, and the three statically displayed symbols have. In addition to imparting a third privilege based on the combination of the third information, the combination of the first information and the second information imparted to the specific symbols stopped and displayed, the combination of the first information and the third information, It is preferable that a specific privilege can be given based on a combination of the second information and the third information, or a combination of the first information, the second information and the third information. By constructing in this manner, the player is interested not only in the combination of each information given to a plurality of symbols stopped and displayed, but also in the combination of each information given to one pattern. There is an effect that the performance effect can be enhanced.

<Regarding a modified example of the icon display notice>
In the pachinko machine 10 of the first control example described above, as explained with reference to FIGS. By executing the icon display notice displayed by , the player is provided with a variety of notice contents. The icon display announcement executed in the above-described first control example is performed in the effect icon storage area 222c1 (or 164(b)), the top icon type is specified, and the icons are displayed in order from the top icon type (effect element 1).

Also, regarding the positions where the icons are displayed, one permutation is selected from the permutation storage area 222c3 (see FIG. 165) in which a plurality of specific permutation information indicating the display order is stored (effect element 2). ). Further, the number of icons to be displayed in the icon display notice is determined by lottery (effect element 3).

In this way, in the case of executing one production, by setting a plurality of production elements independently and making it possible to execute an production combining each of the set production elements, all production patterns that can be executed can be realized. Compared with the case of separately preparing separately as performance data in advance, the amount of performance data to be prepared in advance can be reduced.

Furthermore, as the permutation information indicating the display order, for example, permutation information in which the same display location is redundantly selected can also be selected. are displayed in the same display location, by setting a display rule to display only one of the icons, the number of icons different from the number of icons determined as the effect element 3 is displayed. The displayed effects can be executed, and more varied effects can be executed.

Furthermore, in the above-described first control example, when determining the content of each effect element, the content of the effect element is determined based on the result of the corresponding special symbol lottery (whether judgment result), so the icon display notice While randomly determining the effect mode, the executed icon display notice can suggest the result of the special pattern lottery, so that the player can be interested.

On the other hand, in this modified example, an effect element for executing an icon display notice with more variations will be described. In this modified example, as shown in FIG. 274, the size of the icon displayed in the icon display notice can be changed. FIG. 274 is a diagram schematically showing an example of a case where an enlarged icon is displayed in the icon display notice according to this modification. Note that the icon display notice of this modified example differs from the icon display notice of the first control example described above in that the size of the icon to be displayed can be changed, and the icon displayed at the display location 1 The difference is that display control is executed to prevent icons from being displayed at other display locations covered by , and the rest is the same. The same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

In FIG. 274, the icon 812a, which was first displayed in the area 811a, is displayed so as to cover (hide) the area 811b (see FIG. 133(a)) as the icon display notice effect. In this case, no icon is displayed in the area 811b (see FIG. 133(a)) in the current icon display announcement effect.

In this way, by configuring the enlargement ratio of the displayed icon to be selectable, the area covered by the displayed icon can be changed according to the enlargement ratio of the selected icon, the type of the icon, and the display location. becomes possible. By configuring the icons to be displayed in the order in which the already covered area (non-display area) is removed from the permutation selected as the effect element 2 described above, the icon display notice with more variations is executed. can do.

In addition, when the technique of the present modified example is used, a non-display area is set, so it becomes easy to select overlapping display locations in the display order of the icons. Therefore, by combining the technique of setting the non-display area and the technique of displaying only one icon when the display locations overlap, the number of icons set as the above-mentioned effect element 3 is significantly different from the number of icons set. Icons can be easily displayed, and more variations of icon display announcements can be executed.

Next, of the configuration of the ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the sound ramp control device 113 of this modified example, the configuration different from that of the first control example described above will be described with reference to FIG. In this modified example, as described above, when the effect of the icon display notice is executed, the enlargement ratio of the icon displayed (the icon displayed at the top) can be changed. It is different from the example.

Also, the configuration of the ROM 222 is different in that an enlargement ratio selection table 222A1 for selecting an icon enlargement ratio is provided. Since the configuration of the ROM 222 other than that is the same, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 275 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the magnification selection table 222A1. As shown in FIG. 275, the enlargement ratio selection table 222A1 defines different enlargement ratios in association with the result of special symbol lottery success/failure determination and the value of the A-th effect counter 223pA. Here, the A-th effect counter 223pA is a counter capable of updating a random value within the range of "0 to 198", similar to the various effect counters 223p used in the above-described control examples, It is a counter whose value is periodically updated in a process (for example, main process) that is periodically executed in the control process of the control device 113 . The value of this counter is configured to be updated with regularity so that the update value of the other effect counter 223p is not synchronized, and since the specific configuration is the same, a detailed description thereof will be given. omitted. As a result, it is possible to prevent the same combination of the effect modes of the various effects selected by referring to the values of the various effect counters 223 .

Specifically, the success/failure determination result is “hit (jackpot)”, and the value of the A production counter pA is in the range of “0 to 4”, the expansion rate is “50%”, and in the range of “5 to 99” is an enlargement rate of "100%", the range of "100-149" is an enlargement rate of "200%", the range of "150-179" is an enlargement rate of "500%", and the range of "180-198" defines an enlargement rate of "1000%".

In addition, if the result of the success/failure judgment is “off” and the value of the A production counter pA is in the range of “0 to 14”, the expansion rate is “50%”, and in the range of “15 to 164”, the expansion rate is “100%”. , the enlargement rate "200%" is specified for the range "165 to 184", and the enlargement rate "500%" is specified for the range "185 to 198".

As described above, the enlargement ratio selection table 223A1 is referred to when selecting the enlargement ratio for displaying the top icon. The top icon is displayed in half the size of the icon display (see FIG. 134(a)) of the size of . When "100%" is selected, the top icon is displayed in the normal size shown in FIG. If "500%" is selected, the icon will be displayed at 5 times the normal size, and if "1000%" is selected, the icon will be displayed at 10 times the normal size. Icons are displayed in size.

Here, in this modified example, as in the first control example described above, a plurality of types of icons can be displayed. The display locations covered by the display icons are configured to differ depending on the rate.

For example, referring to FIGS. 133(a) and 164(b), when the top icon is displayed in the area 811a, the enlargement rate of 500% is selected for all icon types. Then, the area 811b is covered. Further, when the top icon is displayed in the area 811b, when the enlargement ratio is 200%, the other area (area 811a) is covered and enlarged only when the "V sign shape" icon is displayed. When the rate of 500% is selected, the areas 811c and 811d are covered with the "square" icon, and only the area 811f is covered with the "round", "triangle", and "rhombus" icons. The "V-shaped" icon is configured to cover the entire area. Henceforth, even if the display location where the top icon is displayed is any of the area 811c, area 811d, area 811e, and area 811f, the other area covered will differ depending on the type of icon to be displayed and the enlargement ratio. It consists of

When an enlargement ratio of 1000% is selected, all other areas are covered regardless of the type of the top icon and the display location.

With this configuration, it is possible to change the display location where the icon can be displayed in the icon display notice based on the selection result of the location where the leading icon is displayed, the icon type, and the enlargement ratio. An icon display notice with randomness can be easily executed.

In addition, in this modification, when the icon of "V sign shape", which is an icon type that is likely to be displayed when the result of the special symbol lottery is a big win, is displayed as the leading icon, other icons are displayed as the leading icon. It is configured so that other regions are more likely to be used than when it is used. Specifically, in order to make it easier for the player to understand that an icon with a high expectation of winning a jackpot is displayed, the size of the "V sign shape" icon (size at 100% magnification) is changed to another size. Configured to be larger than the icon. In this way, different areas can be easily covered when the same enlargement ratio is selected by providing different reference sizes for the icons to be displayed.

In this modified example, the same icon type as in the first control example described above is configured to be selectable. 811b), an icon type that easily covers other areas may be used only when it is displayed as the top icon. As a result, at the timing when the icon display notice is executed and the player is notified of only the portion where the first icon is displayed (see FIG. 133(b)), the player can have the pleasure of predicting which icon will be displayed. can provide.

In this modified example and the first control example described above, as shown in FIG. Although it is configured to be notified, it is not limited to this, and the type of the leading icon may be notified first, or the enlargement rate set for the leading icon may be notified first. Alternatively, the non-display area may be notified first.

Next, the flow of control processing in the sound lamp control device 113 when setting the effect mode of the icon display notice in this modified example will be described. This modification differs from the above-described first control example in that a random display effect setting process A (see S3293 in FIG. 276) is executed instead of the random display effect setting process (see S3203 in FIG. 207). , are otherwise identical. Since the basic flow of control processing is the same as that of the first control example described above, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 276 is a flow chart showing the contents of the random display effect setting process A (S3293). In the random display effect setting process A (S3293), a process of determining the enlargement ratio of the icon displayed as the top icon and a process of changing the display order of the icons based on the determined enlargement ratio are executed. , is different from the random display effect setting process described above (see S3203 in FIG. 207). Other processing contents are the same, and the same contents are denoted by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof is omitted.

When the random display effect setting process A (S3293) is executed, first, the same processes of S3301 to S3304 as the random display effect setting process (see S3203 in FIG. 207) are executed, and then the enlargement ratio selection table 223A1. is determined by referring to (S3391), and the non-display area is extracted based on the enlargement rate, display location, and type of the top icon (S3392). Note that in the process of S3392, a non-display area (area covered by the display of the top icon) is extracted based on the contents defined in advance in a determination table (not shown) stored in the ROM 222. FIG.

Then, it is determined whether or not there is a non-display area based on the extraction result of S3392 (S3394). is set (S3394), and then the same S3305 and S3306 processes as the above-described random display effect setting process (see S3203 in FIG. 207) are executed, and this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3393 that there is no non-display area (S3394: No), the permutation determined in the process of S3303 can be used as it is, so the process of S3394 is skipped and the process proceeds to S3305. Transition.

By configuring in this way, even when the type and permutation of the top icon are determined in the same pattern, by varying the enlargement rate of the top icon, the location where the icon is displayed can be changed. Therefore, it is possible to execute an icon display notice (random display effect) rich in variations using a small amount of effect data.

In this modified example, when there is a non-display area, a removal permutation is set, and the number of icons determined in the process of S3304 is displayed based on the removal permutation. Without being limited to , it is also possible to configure such that the process of simply not displaying the icon corresponding to the non-display area is executed without setting the removal order. Even in this case, a different number of icons will be displayed than the determined number of displayed icons, so an icon display notice (random display effect) rich in variation is executed using a small amount of effect data. can do.

<Modified example of shooting accessory production>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 277 to 280, a modified example of effect control using the projectile accessory 400 will be described. In this modification, it is configured such that the accessory presentation of the projectile accessory 400 is performed in the demonstration presentation that is performed during the standby state in which the special symbol lottery (special symbol variation) is not performed. . Then, as the operation contents of the shooting accessory 400, the operation positioned in the preparation operation A state and the preparation operation B state is executed as a preparatory operation until the actual shooting operation is performed, and the timing at which the demonstration effect ends. At (the timing at which the player enters the ball into the first ball entrance 64 and the special symbol variation is started), the action status of the projectile accessory is determined, and based on the determination result, the variable performance is executed. is different from the above-described second control example in that it is configured to vary, and the rest is the same. Identical contents are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 277, the contents of the presentation in the demo screen in this modified example will be described. FIG. 277(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example in which the projectile accessory 400 operates during the demonstration effect in which the demonstration screen is displayed. As shown in FIG. 277(a), a demo screen is displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81, and the projectile accessory 400 operates to eject the granular member 320 so as to cover the display surface. .

In this way, by operating the projectile accessory 400 on the demo screen, it is possible to make the player interested in the game, and to enhance the operation of the game. Although detailed explanation is omitted, as an operation scenario for firing the shooting accessory 400 during the demonstration effect, for example, after a specific period of time has passed after the demonstration effect is executed, that is, the third symbol display device 81 An operation scenario for operating the projectile accessory 400 can be set in accordance with the timing at which the performance display having a sense of unity with the operation of the projectile accessory 400 is displayed on the display screen.

It should be noted that a plurality of production patterns during the demonstration production can be set. It is preferable to make it easy to set an effect pattern including an action scenario for operating the projectile accessory 400 . By configuring in this way, the granular member 320 can be normally housed in the projectile accessory 400 by the operation of the projectile accessory 400 executed during the demonstration effect, thereby improving the effect of presentation and the performance of the presentation device. optimization can be easily achieved at the same time. In addition, since the player is not playing the game while the demonstration effect is being executed, the shooting accessory 400 can be operated without making the player who is playing the game feel uncomfortable.

Also, when the projectile accessory 400 is to be operated during the demonstration effect, a comment (in the figure, "demonstration display") that allows the player to identify that the demonstration effect is being performed is displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81. ) is displayed. As a result, it is possible to inform the player in an easy-to-understand manner that the demonstration performance is currently being performed, so that a new player cannot perform the game by mistakenly assuming that the game is being played despite the fact that the demonstration performance is being performed. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of the state.

Next, with reference to FIG. 277(b), the contents of the effect when the special symbol variation is executed during the demonstration effect will be described. FIG. 277(b) shows a case where the shooting accessory 400 shoots the granular members 320 as a demonstration effect, and the special symbol variation starts before all the granular members 320 are stored in the shooting accessory 400. FIG. 11 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the content of the production in .

In this modified example, as the operation states of the shooting accessory 400, the preparatory operation A state for letting the player know that the granular member 320 stored in the storage area has moved downward, and the granular member 320 are made to shoot. A preparatory operation state B in which a resistance force is applied to the elastic member for this purpose, and a shooting operation state in which the resistance force to the elastic member is released and the granular member 320 is shot by the restoring force of the elastic member can be distinguished. there is

Then, when the special symbol variation is started when the shooting accessory 400 is in the shooting operation state (when the end condition of the demonstration presentation is satisfied), the shooting operation of the shooting accessory 400 executed during the demonstration presentation is completed. (Before the granular member 320 is stored in the projectile accessory 400), a situation occurs in which the special symbol variation is started, and to indicate to the player that the special symbol lottery has been lost. Even when the variation performance is executed in response to the special symbol variation, the granular member 320 is positioned on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81, giving the player a sense of unnecessary expectation. there were.

On the other hand, in this modified example, as shown in FIG. 277(b), until the firing operation of the projectile accessory 400 is completed (until the granular member 320 is stored in the storage area ra of the projectile accessory 400). During the period, it is configured to continue the demonstration production. By configuring in this way, it is possible to execute the variable performance after completing the operation of the launching accessory 400 in the demonstration performance, so that the plurality of performances (demonstration performance, variable performance) may be confused and the player may be confused. It is possible to suppress the provision of an incomprehensible presentation.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 277(b), in the state where the demonstration effect continues after the special symbol variation is started, a display area Dm2 is formed on the upper right side of the display surface of the third symbol display device 81, It is configured to be able to inform the player that the special symbol variation is being executed. That is, it is configured so that the player can be notified only that the special symbol variation is being executed without executing the variation performance. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from being misunderstood if the special symbol variation is not started even though the ball has entered the first ball entrance 64. - 特許庁Further, the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 displays a comment "demonstration effect ending process in progress". As a result, the player can be informed in an easy-to-understand manner that the special symbol variation has started.

Next, referring to FIG. 278, the operational status of the projectile accessory 400 will be described. FIG. 278(a) schematically shows a state in which the projectile accessory 400 is positioned at the standby position (reference), and FIG. 278(c) schematically shows the state in which the projectile object 400 is positioned in the preparation A), and FIG. 278(c) schematically shows the state in which the projectile object 400 is positioned in the preparation operation B state (preparation B). It is a thing.

First, the projectile accessory 400 at the reference position will be described with reference to FIG. 278(a). When positioned at this reference position, the granular member 320 stored in the storage area ra of the projectile accessory 400 is assembled to the pachinko machine 10 so that the player playing the game can visually recognize it.

Then, when the action scenario of the projectile accessory 400 is set, first, the projectile accessory 400 moves to the position of preparation A shown in FIG. 278(b). The position of the preparation A is a position where the arch-shaped bottom surface is moved downward so that the granular member 320 stored in the storage area ra of the projectile accessory 400 is difficult for the player to visually recognize. . The shooting accessory 400 in this modification has the same configuration as the ejection device (shooting accessory) 400 in the above-described first embodiment, and the arch-shaped bottom surface is formed by the operation of the drive motor 400, which is an electric drive source. moved downwards.

In the preparation A position, no drag force is applied to the elastic member. Therefore, for example, by driving the drive motor 400 in reverse, the granular member 320 is ejected from the preparation A position to the reference position. It is possible to move without moving.

The shooting accessory 400 needs to perform a preparatory motion when actually performing the firing motion. There is a problem that the player can easily grasp that the action will be executed.

On the other hand, in the above-described second control example, an effect pattern in which only the preparatory action is executed is provided so that the player cannot predict whether or not the shooting action will be executed only by executing the preparatory action. was configured to Furthermore, since the shooting accessory 400 is designed to shoot the granular member 320 by the restoring force of the elastic member, the operation state shifts to the state where the preparatory operation is completed, that is, the state where sufficient resistance is applied to the elastic member. If so, there is a problem that it becomes difficult to move the projectile accessory 400 to the reference position without performing the projecting operation.

Therefore, in this modified example, a preparatory action A for emphasizing that the preparatory action has been performed is made executable, and after the preparatory action A is completed, a preparatory action B (an action of applying a drag force to the elastic member) is performed. , and when an effect pattern for executing only the preparatory action is set, the action control for moving the projectile accessory 400 to the reference position is executed after the preparatory action A is completed. are doing.

By configuring in this way, when an effect pattern for executing only the preparatory action is set, the shooting accessory 400 moves downward and allows the player to grasp that the preparatory action has started. Moreover, the preparatory operation can be completed without applying a resistance force to the elastic member.

Also, by moving the projectile accessory 400 from the reference position (see FIG. 278(a)) to the preparation A (see FIG. 278(b)), the granular member 320 disappears from the field of vision of the player during play. Since the shooting accessory 400 is attached to the action unit 500 (see FIG. 277), it is possible to make it easier for the player to understand that the preparatory action has been executed.

Furthermore, although detailed description is omitted, when the drive motor 400m as the drive source starts to drive, a larger vibration is generated than when the drive motor 400m as the drive source continues to drive. Configure. Therefore, when the preparatory action is executed, the vibration generated from the drive motor 400m, which is the driving source, also allows the player to recognize that the preparatory action has been executed.

Next, referring to FIG. 278(c), the projectile accessory 400 positioned in the preparation operation B state (preparation B) will be described. When the state shown in FIG. 278(b) has passed for a predetermined period (for example, 2 seconds), the drive motor 400m, which is the drive source, operates again, and the projectile accessory 400 moves to the preparation B position. Since this movement from preparation A to preparation B is executed in a state where the granular member 320 is already positioned at a position that is difficult for the player to visually recognize, it can be made difficult for the player to notice. When moving to the preparation B, a resistance is applied to the elastic member of the projectile accessory 400 . In this state, when the driving motor 400m, which is the driving source, is operated to release the resistance to the elastic member (locking member (claw) that locks the elastic member), the granular member is moved by the restoring force of the elastic member. 320 is fired.

In addition, in this modification, the timing of moving from the state of preparation A to the state of preparation B in the effect of executing the shooting motion, and the state of preparation A to the reference state in the effect of only the preparation motion. The timing is configured to be the same timing. As a result, the drive motor 400m, which is the drive source, is driven at the same timing regardless of which effect is executed. It is possible to make it difficult for the player to predict.

Next, the relationship between the timing at which the condition for terminating the demonstration effect is established and the operation status of the projectile accessory 400 will be described. When the end condition of the demonstration effect is satisfied in the reference state shown in FIG. A normal variable performance is executed immediately after the end condition of the demonstration performance is satisfied.

When the end condition of the demonstration effect is satisfied in the preparation A state shown in FIG. The operation is interrupted, and the demonstration effect is extended and displayed (see FIG. 277(b)) until the projectile accessory 400 is moved to the reference state, and then the variable effect is executed. In addition, since the preparation A state is a state in which no resistance is applied to the elastic member, the variable performance may be executed while maintaining the preparation A state. In this case, when the performance using the projectile accessory 400 that is first executed as the variable performance is executed, the performance operation of the projectile accessory 400 is executed based on the action scenario from the time of being in the preparation A state. Let it be.

278(c), when the end condition of the demonstration effect is satisfied in the preparation B state shown in FIG. 400 cannot be moved to the reference state. Therefore, it is necessary to terminate the demonstration presentation while maintaining the preparation B state when the end condition of the demonstration presentation is satisfied. However, since the preparation B state is a state in which a resistance force is applied to the elastic member, if the preparation B state is maintained for a long time, an excessive resistance force is applied to the elastic member, resulting in restoration of the elastic member. There is a risk that the power will be reduced, leading to a failure of the projectile accessory 400 .

Therefore, in this modified example, when the end condition of the demonstration effect is established in the preparation B state, the effect using the projectile accessory 400 is forcibly executed in the variable effect. By configuring in this way, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the preparation B state continues for a long time and the projectile accessory 400 breaks down.

Next, among the control processing contents of the sound ramp control device 113 in this modified example, the points that are different from the above-described second control example will be described. In this modified example, in place of the character product effect management process (see S2151 in FIG. 242), the character product effect management process B (see S2191 in FIG. 279) is replaced with the effect mode setting process (see S2191 in FIG. 200) is replaced with effect mode setting process B (see S2697 in FIG. 280), and the rest is the same. The same reference numerals are given to the same contents, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 279, the content of the role product effect management process B (S2191) will be described. This performance management process B (S2191) differs from the above-described second control example in that a control process is added when an interruption signal is received in a state where the action scenario of the projectile accessory 400 is set. . Other processing contents are the same as the above-described role product effect management process (see S2191 in FIG. 279), and the same contents are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 279, when the role product performance management process B (S2191) is executed, S3801 to S3804 and S3807, which are the same as the role product performance management process (see S2151 in FIG. 242) of the second control example described above, are performed. The processing of to S3810 is executed. Then, in the process of S3804, if it is determined that there is an operation scenario for the projectile accessory 400 (S3804: Yes), then it is determined whether or not an interruption signal has been received (S3891). In the processing of S3891, when a command (variation pattern command) indicating that a new special symbol variation is started is received, it is determined that an interruption signal has been received.

Here, in this modification, similar to the second control example described above, during the waiting period (demonstration period) in which the variation performance is executed during the special symbol variation period and the special symbol variation is not performed Both the demonstration effect to be executed and the effect using the projectile accessory 400 can be executed (the operation scenario of the projectile accessory 400 can be set). In addition, in this modification, while one special symbol (for example, the first special symbol) is fluctuating in the same manner as the second control example described above, another special symbol (for example, the second special symbol) is executed. configured to prevent

That is, in the performance management process B (S2191), in the state where it is determined that the action scenario of the projectile is set (the state where it is determined as Yes in the process of S3804), the interruption signal is received (variation If it is determined that the pattern command has been received), it means that the demonstration performance using the projectile accessory 400 is being executed.

Then, in the processing of S3891, if it is determined that the interrupt signal has been received (S3891: Yes), then the current operating status of the projectile accessory 400 is preparation A (see FIG. 278(b)). It is determined (S3892), and if it is determined that it is preparation A (S3892: Yes), interruption processing is executed (S3893), and this processing ends. In the processing of S3893, in order to interrupt the effect using the projectile accessory 400 that is executed during the demonstration effect, the projectile accessory 400 positioned at the position of preparation A is moved to the reference position (FIG. 278(a)). reference) is executed. Although a detailed explanation is omitted, an action scenario for moving the projectile accessory 400 from the position of preparation A to the reference position is defined in advance in the accessory action table 222aa (see FIG. 236(a)). , when executing the interruption process, the target action scenario is read from the role product action table 222aa (see FIG. 236(a)) and executed.

In this way, by executing the processing of S3893, the preparatory motion is executed to execute the effect using the accessory 400 during the demonstration effect, and in the state where the projectile accessory 400 is positioned at the position of preparation A, Since the demonstration performance can be terminated early when the end condition of the demonstration performance is executed, the player can easily enjoy the variable performance.

Returning to FIG. 279, the description continues. In the processing of S3892, if it is determined that the preparation A is not currently in progress (S3892: No), then it is determined whether the preparation B is currently being performed (see FIG. 278(c)) (S3894). If so (S3894: Yes), the emergency standby flag 223Ba is set to ON (S3895), the action scenario for the set projectile accessory 400 is cleared (S3896), and this process ends.

Here, the emergency standby flag 223Ba is a flag for indicating that the operation of the projectile accessory 400 is temporarily stopped, and is turned on when the operation of the projectile accessory 400 is temporarily stopped. , which is stored in the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 .

The setting status of the emergency standby flag 223Ba is referred to when executing the variable effect, and when the emergency standby flag 223Ba is set to ON, the emergency standby flag 223Ba is not set to ON. It is configured so that the performance using the projectile accessory 400 can be easily executed as the performance.

By configuring in this way, the state in which the emergency standby flag 223Ba is set to ON, that is, the state in which the projectile accessory 400 is positioned in preparation B (see FIG. 278(c)) is difficult to continue for a long time. It is possible to make it easier for the projectile accessory 400 to prevent failure.

In the processing of S3891, if it is determined that the interrupt signal has not been received (S3891: No), or if it is determined that the preparation B is not in the processing of S3894 (S3894), the role of the second control example described above is performed. The processing of S3805 to S3807 (S3897), which is the same as the object effect management processing (see S2151 in FIG. 242), is executed, and this processing ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 280, the contents of the rendering mode setting process B (S2697) will be described. FIG. 280 is a flow chart showing the contents of the rendering mode setting process B (S2697). The content of this rendering mode setting process B (S2697) is that a process corresponding to the setting status of the emergency standby flag 223Ba is added to the rendering mode setting process (see S2607 in FIG. 200) of the second control example. are different, and otherwise identical. The same reference numerals are given to the same contents, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

When the effect mode setting process B (S2697) is executed, first, it is determined whether the emergency standby flag 223Ba is set to ON (S2791), and if it is determined to be set to ON (S2791: Yes) , It is determined whether or not the variation pattern of this time can execute the shooting effect using the shooting accessory 400 (S2792). In the processing of S2792, the variation time of the current variation pattern is determined, and when the length of the variation time is equal to or longer than a predetermined time (30 seconds or longer), it is determined that the shooting effect is possible.

Then, when it is determined that the shooting effect is possible in the process of S2792 (S2792: Yes), the shooting effect is set (S2793), the emergency standby flag 223Ba is set to off (S2794), and this process ends.

On the other hand, in the processing of S2791, if it is determined that the emergency standby flag 223Ba is not set to ON (S2791: No), the processing of S2701 to S2707 which is the same as the above-described production mode setting processing (see S2607 in FIG. 200) is executed to terminate this process.

In this way, when the emergency standby flag 223Ba is set to ON, regardless of the result of the special symbol lottery, when the length of the fluctuation time satisfies the predetermined condition, the performance using the projectile accessory 400 is performed. By making it executable, when the emergency standby flag 223Ba is set to ON, the production using the shooting accessory 400 is executed as a variable production than when the emergency standby flag 223Ba is not set to ON. It is designed to be easy. This makes it difficult for the state of preparation B to continue for a long time, and makes it easier for the projectile accessory 400 to prevent failure.

The techniques used in each of the control examples described above may be combined as appropriate. may be configured to be executed by the display control device 114 as in the third control example.

Specifically, when setting the variable effect pattern in the audio lamp control device 113 (when executing the delay effect setting process (see S2805 in FIG. 203) in the display setting process (see S2115 in FIG. 199)), As in the first control example described above, only the delay period for the audio output device 226 (the delay mode for the audio effect) is set by the audio lamp control device 113, and the button effect is executed without setting the delay mode for the display effect. and the operation valid period (button valid period) in the button effect.

Based on the received display command, the display control device 114 extracts and sets the execution timing of the button effect and the operation effective period of the button effect. Then, when a pressing command indicating that the frame button 22 has been operated during the operation effective period of the button effect is received, whether or not to execute the delayed effect with respect to the display effect, and when to execute the delayed effect. , and set a delay period corresponding to the determined content in the delay timer.

After that, when the value of the delay timer becomes 0, the display effect is executed (image data corresponding to the display effect is generated, and the display mode showing the effect result of the button effect is displayed in the third mode based on the generated image data). displayed on the display surface of the pattern display device 81). Then, a display completion command indicating that the display effect has been executed is output to the sound lamp control device 113 .

Upon receiving the display completion command, the audio lamp control device 113 determines the delay period of the display effect in the button effect executed in the current button effect, and determines the effect mode to be executed next based on the determination result. set.

In this case, the display control device 114 does not output a command indicating information about the delay effect to the sound lamp control device 113 until the delay period managed by the display control device 114 has passed and the display effect is executed. Alternatively, a delay generation command indicating that a delay period has been set, that is, that a predetermined value has been set in the delay timer may be output to the sound lamp control device 113. good. As a result, the audio ramp control device 113 can recognize that the delay period will occur before the delay period elapses, so that control processing corresponding to the delay period can be executed.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example described above has operation means (frame button 22, first button 22za, second button 22zb) that can be operated by the player, and effect execution means ( As a part of the effect executed by the control processing by the sound lamp control device 113), it is configured to be able to execute the operation effect based on the operation to the operation means. When the operation effect is executed, an operation effective period is set for determining whether the operation performed by the player on the operation means is effective, and the operation is being executed according to the operation contents performed within the operation effective period. Since the effect mode of the operation effect of (1) is variable, the player can be motivated to play the game.

Note that in the first control example described above, the operation effect of varying the effect mode based on the operation content (for example, the number of times of operation) to the operation means within the operation effective period that is set continuously has been described. For example, it may be possible to set a plurality of operation effective periods within the effect period in which the operation effect is executed. The effect mode is configured to be variable to the first effect mode based on the first The effect mode may be configured to be variable to a second effect mode different from the first effect mode. That is, it is sufficient that the operation effect is executed so that the effect mode is varied over a plurality of operation effective periods set within the effect period of the operation effect. Moreover, it may be configured such that the performance period of the operation performance is set so as to straddle a plurality of special symbol variations or a plurality of big winning games.

In the first control example described above, when all the effect modes set in the repeated hit effect, that is, when the effect mode is changed to the final effect mode based on the operation to the operation means, the subsequent operation to the operation means Depending on the contents, it is possible to terminate the repeated hitting performance without waiting for the lapse of a predetermined period for executing the repeated hitting performance. By constructing in this way, the player is made to execute the continuous hit effect for a long time without changing the effect mode, and the player's desire to play the game and, in turn, the desire to operate the operation means is reduced. You can prevent it from happening.

In addition, in the first control example described above, when the player intentionally operates the operation means within the operation effective period, it is configured so that the effect mode of the operation effect can be easily changed, but this is not the only option. Instead, it may be configured such that it is easier to change the presentation mode when the operating means is not operated. By configuring in this way, it is possible to provide the player with the enjoyment of selecting whether or not to operate the operation means during the valid period of operation.

Furthermore, in the above-described first control example, the operation effect result is displayed once based on the operation contents of the operation means within the operation effective period. may be configured to display the results of the operation effects a plurality of times within the window. For example, when an operation effective period of 10 seconds is set as the operation effective period, a predetermined operation condition When the operation condition that is satisfied when the operation is performed repeatedly) is satisfied, the first operation effect result is displayed, and after the first operation effect result is displayed, if there is a remaining period in the operation valid period, By establishing a predetermined operation condition, the second operation effect result may be displayed. Also, in this case, it is preferable to configure the display contents of the operation effect results displayed a plurality of times to be variable. It is preferable to provide a determining means for determining whether to display the operation effect result, and to display any operation effect result each time the operation condition is satisfied. In this way, by enabling the display of a plurality of operation effect results within one operation effective period, the player can be motivated to operate the operation means.

Further, in this case, a condition variable means for changing a predetermined operation condition each time the operation effect result is displayed, and a limiting means for limiting the number of times the operation effect result can be displayed within one operation valid period are provided. Also good. In addition, the number of times limited by the limiting means may be varied based on the operation contents of the operating means executed during the effect period of the operation effect. It may be configured so that the more the operation is performed, the more times the operation effect result can be displayed. It may be configured to increase the number of times of display. Further, the probability of displaying the true operation effect result may be varied based on the operation content of the operation means executed during the effect period of the operation effect.

In the above-described second control example, an abnormality determination process for executing an abnormality determination (abnormality determination as to whether or not the granular member 320 is accommodated) of the ejection accessory (ejection accessory) 400 is performed at a specific timing, and an abnormality determination is performed. According to the result of the processing, it is configured to execute an effect using the projectile accessory 400, execute a retry process for executing abnormality determination again, or execute a process of switching to another effect. However, without being limited to this, for example, after executing an effect using the projectile object (projectile object) 400, the projectile object (projectile object) 400 is in a normal state, that is, the granular member 320 is in a normal state. It may be configured to execute different processing depending on the length of time required for the projectile accessory 400 to be stored in the storage unit. When it is determined that the member 320 is normally housed, a predetermined effect (for example, a series of character effects) is continued, and 4 to 5 seconds after the effect using the projectile character 400 is executed. A delay period is set during this delay period, and execution of a series of performance effects can be delayed during this delay period. Alternatively, after the delay period has passed, the series of performances are resumed, and the granular member 320 is stored normally even after 5 seconds have passed since the performance using the projectile accessory 400 was executed (even after the delay period has passed). If not, it may be configured to change the production content of the series of role production to a production mode that does not use the shooting accessory 400.例文帳に追加Also, in this case, if it is determined that the granular member 320 is normally stored within 2 seconds after the performance using the projectile accessory 400 is executed, the shortened storage state is set, and the specific performance is maintained for a predetermined period (projection It may be configured to be executed for a period of four seconds after the performance using the role object 400 is executed.

By configuring in this way, different effects can be executed according to the length of the period from the execution of the effect using the projectile accessory 400 to the normal storage of the granular member 320. It is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the game early.

As described above, in the first to fourth control examples described above, the specific area (probability variable switch 65e3) provided in the variable winning device 65 during the jackpot game that is executed when the jackpot is won in the special symbol lottery. The pachinko machine 10 configured to set the high probability state (probability variable state) of the special symbol after the end of the jackpot game by passing is explained, but in this way, the privilege game that is advantageous to the player As a configuration that can provide the player with a special game different from the privilege game based on the fact that the ball has passed through the specific area while When a small win is won, a second privilege game (small win game) different from the privilege game (jackpot game) can be executed, and a variable ball entry means (variable prize winning device) opened during the second privilege game. 65, or other prize-winning devices may be separately provided), a specific area through which a ball can pass is provided, and when the ball passes through the specific area during the second bonus game, the second bonus is given. You may use the structure which can perform a privilege game (jackpot game) after the game (small hit game) is completed.

In each of the above control examples, whenever the value (N) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d in the main controller 110 is updated (that is, each time it increases or decreases), the reserved ball number command is transmitted from the main controller 110 to the audio lamp controller 113, but it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, only when the value (N) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203 d in the main controller 110 increases, the main controller 110 transmits the reserved number command to the sound lamp controller 113 . Further, the voice lamp control device 113 is configured to decrease the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223b by one when receiving the variation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110 . As a result, the number of times master controller 110 transmits a hold number command to audible lamp controller 113 and the number of times audible lamp controller 113 receives a hold number command can be reduced. The control load of the audio ramp control device 113 can be reduced.

In each of the control examples described above, it is configured such that winning through the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640 is suspended up to four times, and passage through the through gate 67 is suspended up to four times. The number of held balls is not limited to this, and may be set to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). In addition, the number of pending balls in the variable display based on the winning to the first ball entrance 64 is displayed numerically in a part of the third pattern display device 81, or the area divided into four is displayed by the number of pending balls. It may be displayed in a different manner (for example, color or lighting pattern), and a light-emitting member such as a lamp is provided separately from the first pattern display device 37, and the number of reserved balls is notified by the light-emitting member. can be configured to

Further, as shown in each of the above control examples, the variable display, which is a type of dynamic display, is not limited to vertically scrolling the pattern as identification information on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81. The pattern may be moved and displayed in the vertical direction or along a predetermined path such as an L-shape. Further, the dynamic display of the identification information is not limited to the variable display of the pattern. It also includes the production display etc. In this case, one or more characters are used as the third symbol. Further, it is difficult for the player to distinguish between the display mode of the dynamic display of the third symbol for indicating the lottery result of the special symbol and the display mode of the dynamic display of the decorative symbol for indicating the lottery result of the normal symbol. For example, each display mode may be set using common image data possessed by the display control device 114 .

In each control example described above, the third symbol display for showing the lottery result of each symbol to the player is executed by one display means (third symbol display device 81), but other configurations may be used. For example, among the third symbols, different display means may be provided for displaying the main symbol to be displayed in an emphasized manner to the player and for displaying the sub-symbols. Also, as the configuration of the display means, a configuration other than the liquid crystal display may be used.

In each control example described above, the target area (game area) of the game board 13 is configured to be different according to the game state, but the game state (time saving) that is advantageous to the player is not limited to this. state) and a game state (normal state) that is more disadvantageous to the player than the time-saving state, a left-handed game aiming at the left area of the game board 13 may be executed. . Also, a left-handed game may be executed during the time-saving state, and a right-handed game may be executed during the normal state.

In each of the control examples described above, the frame button 22 is used as the operating means that can be operated by the player. may be used, and an operation means configured in a lever shape that can determine whether the player has operated it by tilting it left or right or front and back, or can determine whether it has been operated by the player touching or approaching it. A touch sensor type operating means, or a wireless operating means that can determine that an operation has been performed by transmitting a predetermined radio wave, or the like may be used. In addition, the frame button 22 is electrically connected to the sound lamp control device 113, and the frame button 22 is used to change the performance mode of the performance executed by the pachinko machine 10 based on the player's operation. However, it is only necessary to be able to change the effect mode of various effects executed by the pachinko machine 10 based on the player's operation of the frame button 22. For example, the frame button 22 is displayed. It may be electrically connected to the control device 114, or an output signal from the operation means (the frame button 22) can be input, and the display control device 114, the sound lamp control device 113, the sound output device 226, the lamp display A controller capable of generating an effect setting signal that can be output to the device 227 may be provided. By configuring in this way, even when a plurality of operation means for effect are provided, the output signals (operation signals) output from the operation means for effect can be centrally managed. It is possible to smoothly set the effect mode for the player's operation of the means.

The present invention may be applied to a pachinko machine of a type different from the control examples described above. For example, once the jackpot hits, the expected value of the jackpot is increased until the jackpot state occurs multiple times (for example, 2 times, 3 times) including the pachinko machine (commonly known as 2 times rights product, 3 times rights product) may be implemented as Further, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game in which a predetermined game value is given to the player under the condition that the ball enters a predetermined area after the big winning pattern is displayed. Also, a pachinko machine having a prize winning device having a special area such as a V-zone and entering a special game state as a necessary condition for winning a ball in the special area may be implemented. In addition, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine in which a plurality of combinations of probabilities (commonly referred to as settings) relating to the jackpot lottery are provided, and the settings can be changed on the gaming parlor side. Furthermore, in addition to pachinko machines, various game machines such as arepachi, mammoth, slot machines, and so-called game machines in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are combined may be implemented.

In addition, as a pachinko machine with multiple stages of settings, the combination of jackpot probability (a combination of the jackpot probability in the low probability state and the jackpot probability in the variable probability state) can be set in multiple stages (for example, 6 stages) can be set as a representative example, but is not limited to this. In place of or in addition to combinations of jackpot probabilities, for example, a pachinko machine capable of varying the ratio of each jackpot pattern (each jackpot type) determined in the event of a jackpot according to settings. may That is, depending on the setting, the rate at which a jackpot type advantageous to the player is determined may be varied, or the rate at which a jackpot type disadvantageous to the player is determined may be varied. More specifically, for example, the ratio of determining the jackpot with a large number of rounds (eg, 16 rounds) is varied according to the setting, or the jackpot with a small number of rounds (eg, 2 rounds) is determined. A configuration may be adopted in which the degree of advantage for each setting can be varied by varying the ratio of each setting according to the setting. In addition, for example, the ratio of determining the jackpot with a large number of times of time reduction (for example, 100 times) after the end of the jackpot is varied according to the setting, or the jackpot with a small number of times of time reduction (for example, 0 times) may be varied according to the setting. Furthermore, after the end of the jackpot, the rate at which the jackpot that transitions to (or easily transitions to) an advantageous game state (eg, variable probability state) is determined can be varied according to settings, or a disadvantageous game state (eg, normal state) ) (or easily shifted) may be changed according to the setting. Moreover, it is good also as a structure which provides a big-hit classification in which the ratio determined only by specific setting increases significantly (almost never determined by other settings). Specifically, for example, six settings from 1 to 6 can be set, and setting 6 is the most advantageous setting. In setting 6, a 6-round jackpot is determined at a rate of 2% when a jackpot is achieved, whereas in other settings, a 6-round jackpot is determined only at a rate of 0.01%. may be configured. By constructing in this way, when the jackpot ends in 6 rounds, the possibility that the setting is the most advantageous setting 6 is extremely high, so the player is made to play the game paying attention to the number of rounds of the jackpot. be able to. Alternatively or in addition, for example, in setting 6, the ratio of the jackpot type in which 66 times of time saving is given after the jackpot ends may be higher than other settings. By configuring in this way, it is possible to play a game while paying attention to the number of times the time saving state ends. Alternatively, or in addition to these, for example, a jackpot type in which the jackpot (or accessories inside the jackpot, etc.) operates in an operation pattern different from other jackpot types during execution of the jackpot game. It may be configured such that the jackpot type is easily determined by a specific setting (the rate of determination is increased). In addition, in the case of varying the combination of the probability of the big win according to the setting, in the low probability state, the setting is more advantageous to the player, the higher the probability of the big win, while in the variable probability state, the setting is disadvantageous to the player. It is good also as a structure which makes a jackpot probability high as it is. In particular, in the variable probability state, the more the number of special symbol lotteries increases, the easier it is to increase the number of possession balls (the number of prize balls paid out tends to be greater than the number of game balls fired). Effective in game machines. More specifically, for example, it is a configuration that continues until the next big hit is won in the variable probability state, and by applying it to a game machine of the type that becomes a small hit with a high probability in the variable probability state, the high setting advantage You can increase your sexuality. That is, if the probability of winning a big win in the variable probability state is low, the number of lottery times until the next big win tends to increase, so the chances of getting a small win and winning balls also increase. Therefore, when the probability variable state occurs, it becomes easier for the player to win more prize balls until the next big win, which is advantageous for the player.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 10 that can be set in multiple stages, the type of the variation pattern selection table 202b that is referred to when selecting the variation pattern by the main controller 110 based on the set value that has been set It is made different, the type of the variation pattern selection table 222a referred to when selecting the variation pattern (variation effect) of the third symbol in the sound lamp control device 113 is different, or the detailed effect executed as the variation effect It is preferable to configure so that the types of various selection tables referred to when selecting a mode are made different. By configuring in this way, it is possible to predict the setting value set in the pachinko machine 10 according to the content of the variable performance to be executed, so that the variable performance that the player is interested in is executed. be able to.

In addition, when the data table referred to when selecting the effect mode of the operation effect is changed based on the setting value set in the pachinko machine 10, the set setting is used as the effect mode of the operation effect. The effect mode of "suggest setting" for suggesting a value is defined so that the selection ratio is the same in each data table used for each setting value, and the effect mode of "suggest setting" is executed. It is preferable to configure the content of the operation presentation to be different according to each set value, and to vary the selection ratio of other presentation modes according to the set value. By configuring in this way, when the operation effect of "setting suggestion" directly suggesting the setting value is executed, the content of the effect is displayed, and when the other operation effect is executed, each effect mode is displayed. Since it is possible to predict the setting value set in the pachinko machine 10 by comprehensively grasping the selection ratio of the pachinko machine 10, the player is interested in various operation effects to be executed. be able to.

Furthermore, as described above, since the selection ratio of each effect mode in the operation effect is configured to vary according to the set game state, In a pachinko machine 10 in which set values can be set in six stages up to setting "6" which is advantageous to a player, the first game is set to the settings "1" to "3" and is advantageous to the player. The selection ratio of the operation effect selected when the state (variable probability state) is set, the setting "4" to "6" are set, and the second game state is more disadvantageous to the player than the first game state The pachinko machine 10 having setting values disadvantageous to the player is played by making the selection ratio of the operation presentation to be selected when the 2-game state (time-saving state) is set to be the same. The player can be made to think that the setting value that is advantageous to the player is set.

In addition, as in the first control example described above, when the first game state (probability variable state) is set, and when the second game state (time saving state) is set, the same production mode By setting the "chance mode", when using a configuration that makes it difficult for the player to grasp the currently set game state, the above-mentioned effect can be made more remarkable. . Further, as in the above-described first control example, in the pachinko machine 10 in which the second game state is set after the first game state is completed, it is determined whether or not the first game state has actually been set. By making it difficult, a more remarkable effect can be obtained.

In this way, the setting value set in the pachinko machine 10 and other game situations (lottery result of jackpot, set game state, selected variation pattern (variation time)) By configuring the selection ratio to be variable, it is possible to prevent the setting values set in the pachinko machine 10 from being easily discriminated by the player.

In slot machines, for example, when a coin is inserted to determine a valid symbol line, the symbol is changed by operating an operation lever, and the symbol is stopped and fixed by operating a stop button. It is. Therefore, the basic concept of a slot machine is "provided with a display device that confirms and displays identification information after variably displaying an identification information string consisting of a plurality of pieces of identification information, The variable display of the identification information is started, and the variable display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the operation means for stopping (for example, a stop button) or after a predetermined period of time has passed, and the stop is displayed. It is a slot machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value under the condition that the combination of time identification information is a specific one. In this case, the game medium is represented by coins, medals, etc. Examples include:

Further, as a specific example of a game machine that combines a pachinko machine and a slot machine, it is equipped with a display device for displaying a symbol sequence consisting of a plurality of symbols in a variable manner and then confirming and displaying the symbols, and is equipped with a ball launching handle. There are things that are not. In this case, after throwing a predetermined amount of balls based on a predetermined operation (button operation), for example, the pattern starts to change due to the operation of the control lever, for example, due to the operation of the stop button, or a predetermined As time elapses, the fluctuation of the symbols is stopped, and a special game is generated in which a predetermined game value is given to the player under the condition that the determined symbols at the time of the stop are so-called jackpot symbols, and the player is given a special game. A lot of balls are paid out to the tray at the bottom. If such a game machine is used instead of a slot machine, only the balls can be treated as game value in the game hall. It is possible to solve the problems such as the burden on the equipment due to the separate handling of the medals and the balls and the restrictions on the installation location of the game machine.

All or part of the above-described embodiments and control examples may be combined.

In the following, concepts of various inventions included in the above-described embodiments in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention are shown.

<Production incorporating randomness>
A game machine comprising: an action means; a displacement means configured to be displaceable by receiving action from the action means; A1.

Among game machines such as pachinko machines, there is a game machine that is displaceably arranged on the front side of the liquid crystal display area and includes displacement means that is displaced according to the driving of a driving device such as a motor (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2016-153095). ). However, the above-described conventional game machine has a problem that the operation pattern of the displacement means is poor, and the effect on the front side of the liquid crystal display area becomes monotonous, and the attention of the player gradually decreases.

On the other hand, according to the game machine A1, the displacement of the displacement means can be made complicated by the function of the auxiliary means of making the displacement mode of the displacement means into a plurality of modes. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored, and to keep the player's attention at a high level.

A specific example of the auxiliary means is not limited at all. For example, it may be a box-shaped space forming means that forms a space in which the displacement means can be displaced, or a driving device different from the acting means may be used to displace and push the displacement means, thereby changing the displacement mode of the displacement means. Any means is fine. Further, the driving device for the pushing means may also be used as the driving device for driving the action means.

In the gaming machine A1, the action means can be configured to have a first state in which a first action portion can act on the displacement means, and a second state in which a second action portion can act on the displacement means. A gaming machine A2 characterized by:

According to the game machine A2, in addition to the effects of the game machine A1, it is possible to change the part when the action means acts on the displacement means. The means can be displaced differently.

In the gaming machine A1 or A2, the action means comprises contact means for contacting and applying a load to the displacement means, and is configured to be capable of generating loads in a plurality of modes via the contact means. A gaming machine A3 characterized by:

According to the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A1 or A2, there are multiple types of load modes generated via the abutting means, so that multiple types of displacement modes of the displacement means can be provided.

In the game machine A3, the abutment means includes a first abutment portion configured to be displaceable and configured to abut against the displacement means, and a first abutment portion configured to be abuttable to the displacement means. and a second contact portion different from the portion, and the angle between the displacement direction of the contact means and the first contact portion (or the tangential line of the first contact portion) when viewed in a predetermined direction is A game machine A4, characterized in that the angle between the displacement direction of the abutment means and the second abutment portion (or a tangent to the second abutment portion) is different from the angle when viewed in the predetermined direction.

According to the game machine A4, in addition to the effects of the game machine A3, the direction of the load applied to the displacement means can be varied without changing the displacement direction of the contact means. can be generated in the direction of

In the gaming machine A4, the contact means is configured such that tangent lines drawn to the first contact portion and the second contact portion and parallel to each other are orthogonal to the displacement direction of the contact means. A gaming machine A5 characterized by:

According to the game machine A5, in addition to the effects of the game machine A4, a load can be applied to the displacement means in a direction parallel to the plane along the displacement direction of the contact means, so that the displacement means can be displaced with little energy loss. can be made Thereby, a large amount of displacement of the displacement means can be ensured.

In any one of the game machines A1 to A5, load generating means configured to generate a load for displacing the action means is provided, and the load generating means generates the load at a position where the displacing means are densely arranged. A game machine A6 characterized in that it is configured to generate

According to the game machine A6, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines A1 to A5, the load can be efficiently transmitted to the displacement means.

In any one of the game machines A1 to A6, the action means is supported in a support manner that allows a change in posture, and the change in posture occurs on the side of the displacement means that facilitates maintaining a balance of arrangement with respect to the action means. A gaming machine A7 characterized by:

According to the game machine A7, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines A1 to A6, it is possible to maintain the balance of the arrangement of the displacement means by changing the posture of the action means. can be avoided from occurring.

In addition, the cause of the attitude change of the action means is not limited at all. For example, it may be caused by balancing the load from the displacement means, or a drive device may be provided to change the posture of the action means. When the attitude of the action means is caused to change by balancing the load from the displacement means, the attitude of the action means can be easily changed by providing a plurality of lengths from the portion facing the displacement means to the support position of the action means. can be produced in multiple types.

In any one of the game machines A1 to A7, the auxiliary means includes guide means configured to be able to guide displacement of the displacement means, and the guide means can guide displacement of the displacement means in one direction. and a second guide portion capable of guiding displacement of the displacement means in another direction, wherein the first guide portion and the second guide portion face the displacement means. A game machine A8 characterized in that the formation mode of is different.

According to the game machine A8, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines A1 to A7, the displacement mode of the displacement means can be varied according to the displacement direction of the displacement means.

In any one of the game machines A1 to A8, the action means is configured to be displaceable, configured to change the easiness of keeping the balance of the displacement means depending on its arrangement, and the position where the balance of the displacement means is easy to keep. A gaming machine A9 characterized by being constructed so as to be able to act on the displacement means.

According to the gaming machine A9, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines A1 to A8, it is possible to easily maintain the balance of the displacement means with respect to the action means.

A game machine A10 in any one of the game machines A1 to A9, wherein the displacement means comprises one or more members, which are configured so as not to be coupled with each other.

According to the game machine A10, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines A1 to A9, when the displacement means is composed of a plurality of members, it is possible to prevent the plurality of members from joining together to form a lump. Therefore, it is possible to easily realize a configuration in which a plurality of members scatter.

A gaming machine A11 characterized in that in the gaming machine A10, the center of gravity of the one or more members is arranged at a position different from the center of the member.

According to the gaming machine A11, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A10, it is possible to stabilize the attitude of the displacement means when the displacement means is arranged in the action means.

Note that the method of forming the center of gravity is not limited at all. For example, a method of partially changing the density of the member or a method of partially forming holes in the member may be used.

<Change due to advancing/retreating means moving forward/backward within the displacement range of the displacement means>
Arranging means configured to be arranged in a predetermined range, and advance/retreat means configured to be displaceable in a forward/retreat direction with respect to the range, the advancing/retreating means moving into a predetermined portion of the range, A game machine B1 is characterized by being configured to be able to change the width of the width of the game machine B1 so that the width can be changed in a plurality of ways.

A gaming machine such as a pachinko machine comprising a first movable member that displaces to the left and right, and a second movable member that enters a range generated between the first movable members as the first movable member displaces. There is (for example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-231434). However, in the above-described conventional game machine, there is only one type of displacement when the second movable member enters the range, and there is room for improvement in the displacement of the second movable member.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine B1, since the advance/retreat means is configured with a plurality of types of change modes of the width of the range when entering the range, it is possible to configure with a plurality of types of displacement modes of the placement means, and the placement means can can be improved.

In addition, the mode of the arrangement means is not limited at all. For example, it may be a granular performance member made of a resin material, a powdery member, a liquid, or a game ball.

In addition, the method of configuring a plurality of types of change modes of the width of the range due to the displacement of the advance/retreat means is not limited at all. For example, the entrance side portion of the advancing/retreating means may be formed with an inclined surface, and the width of the range may be changed by providing a portion with a different width to enter the range, or the displacement width of the advancing/retreating means may be changed to change the range. may be made variable.

In the gaming machine B1, the range is formed inside a box-shaped means configured to prevent entry and exit of the placement means, and is configured to be changeable, and the advancing/retreating means enters the range in a non-changing state. The game machine B2 is characterized in that the box-shaped means has an opening through which the advance/retreat means can be inserted and the arrangement means cannot be inserted.

According to the game machine B2, in addition to the effects of the game machine B1, the advance/retreat means can enter the range through the opening portion, while the arrangement means can be prevented from falling out of the range.

In addition, the arrangement of the open portion is not limited at all. For example, it may be placed in a location that is difficult for the placement means to reach. In this case, it is possible to further reduce the possibility that the arranging means will fall out of the range by mistake. Also, the open portion may be arranged at a location where the load from the arrangement means is less likely to occur (for example, the upper side opposite to the direction of gravity). In this case, it is possible to prevent a load from the arranging means from being applied to the advancing/retreating means during displacement, hindering the displacement of the advancing/retreating means, or causing damage to the advancing/retreating means or the arranging means.

A gaming machine B3 characterized in that, in the gaming machine B1 or B2, the advance/retreat means is configured such that the direction of guiding the placement means is different corresponding to the direction of contact with the placement means.

According to the gaming machine B3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine B1 or B2, it is possible to make it appear to the player that the arrangement means are guided in different directions by the same advancing/retreating means. As a result, it is possible to increase the number of types of presentations, thereby improving the presentation effect of presentations using the arrangement means and the advance/retreat means.

In any one of the game machines B1 to B3, the advance/retreat means is configured such that when it enters the range, the gap between it and the facing surface of the range becomes shorter than the width of the arrangement means. A gaming machine B4 characterized by:

According to the game machine B4, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines B1 to B3, even if the arrangement means is arranged on the far side from the advance/retreat means, the advance/retreat means can be moved to the arrangement means in the entered state. can work.

In addition, it is also possible to configure so that there is no gap between the advance/retreat means and the facing surface of the range. Also, it may be configured such that there is a gap in one part and no gap in the other part.

In any one of the game machines B1 to B4, the advance/retreat means is configured to enter the range by rotational displacement about a predetermined axis, and at the tip on the entry side, the representative tip farthest from the axis is the A gaming machine B5 characterized in that it is configured so that the gap between the range and the range is the shortest.

According to the game machine B5, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines B1 to B4, the representative tip portion, which is most likely to be displaced from the axis, enters the range first, thereby reducing the distance from the axis. Misalignment can be addressed early, and the resistance of the subsequent entry motion can be reduced.

In the game machine B5, the representative tip portion is provided with a predetermined projecting portion, and is formed so as to be inclined away from the range as the distance from the projecting portion along the axial direction increases. Game machine B6 to play.

According to the game machine B6, in addition to the effects of the game machine B5, the arrangement means can be displaced away from the predetermined projecting portion in the process of entering the advance/retreat means.

In the gaming machine B6, the advancing/retreating means has a shape in which the range side is opened at a position away from the projecting portion in the axial direction.

According to the game machine B7, in addition to the effects of the game machine B6, the shape of the advance/retreat means is a shape in which the range side is opened at a position away from the overhanging part, so that the arrangement means pushed away by the overhanging part can be secured.

Various modes are exemplified as the shape in which the range side is open. For example, it may have a shape in which the range side is opened before the advance/retreat means enters, or a shape in which the range side is opened in a state in which the advance/retreat means has entered.

In any one of the game machines B5 to B7, it comprises a drive means capable of generating a driving force, and a transmission means capable of transmitting the driving force of the driving means to the advance/retreat means, wherein the transmission means and the advance/retreat means means that a driving force is transmitted by abutment, and the contact area of the abutment surface between the transmission means and the advancing/retreating means is configured to be variable, and the contact area varies depending on whether the advancing/retreating means enters the range. A gaming machine B8 characterized in that it is configured so that it becomes maximum at the beginning and then decreases.

According to the game machine B8, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines B5 to B7, the contact area is maximized at the initial stage of entry when a large load is likely to occur due to the advance and retreat means starting to contact the arrangement means. By doing so, the load per unit area of the contact surface can be reduced.
As a result, the durability of the advance/retreat means and the transmission means can be improved.

In addition, the mode of the advance/retreat means is not limited at all. For example, means for displacing outside the game area or means for displacing inside the game area may be used.

<Synchronize two members with a transmission cam>
driving means; displacement means configured to be displaceable and composed of one or more members; and transmission means configured to be capable of transmitting the driving force of the driving means to the displacement means, wherein the transmission means In a first aspect, a first transmission portion configured to be capable of transmitting the driving force of the driving means to a first target portion of the displacement means; and in a second aspect, different from the first aspect, the displacement means. A gaming machine C1 comprising a second transmission section configured to be capable of transmitting the driving force of the driving means to the second target section.

A driving device used for displacing displacement means in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, comprising a first driving device for vertically displacing the displacing means and a second driving device for rotationally displacing the displacing means. There is a game machine (see, for example, JP-A-2016-202210). However, in the above-described conventional game machine, even if the first driving device and the second driving device are synchronized to displace a plurality of displacement means in order to execute the motion presentation of the displacement means, the driving timing is shifted. There is a problem that the possibility cannot be excluded and the displacement of the displacement means tends to be unstable.

On the other hand, according to the game machine C1, the transmission means is provided with the first transmission portion and the second transmission portion, and the driving force is transmitted to the first target portion or the second target portion of the displacement means, respectively. With this configuration, the transmission of the driving force to the first target portion and the second target portion can be automatically synchronized, and the displacement of the displacement means can be stabilized.

In addition, the timing at which the driving force is transmitted is not limited at all. For example, the driving force may be transmitted to the first target portion and the second target portion at the same time, the driving force may be transmitted at different times, or a combination thereof (partially simultaneous transmission) may be used.

Further, when the driving force is transmitted to the first target portion and the second target portion at the same time, it is preferable that the direction in which at least part of the driving force is generated is along the direction of gravity. As a result, its own weight can be used for driving force transmission.

In the game machine C1, the game machine C2 is characterized in that the transmission of the driving force to the first target part and the transmission of the driving force to the second target part occur at different times.

According to the gaming machine C2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine C1, the driving force required for the driving means can be suppressed by keeping the maximum value of the driving resistance low.

Here, the term "driving force transmission" may refer to a load in the direction of travel in which the transmission means is displaced by the driving force. Also good.

In the game machine C1 or C2, the displacement means includes a first member having the first target portion and a second member having the second target portion, and the displacement trajectory of the first member and the second member The first member is configured to partially intersect with the displacement trajectory of, the first member is configured to be able to contact the second member in a predetermined arrangement, and in the contacting state, the A gaming machine C3 characterized by being configured to be able to transmit a driving force to the second member.

According to the game machine C3, in addition to the effects of the game machine C1 or C2, it is possible to configure a plurality of types of states in which the driving force is transmitted to the displacement means. In other words, it is possible to configure a case where the driving force is directly transmitted from the transmission means to the second member and a case where the driving force is indirectly transmitted through the first member.

In the gaming machine C3, the gaming machine C4 is characterized in that, in a state in which the first member is displaced toward the predetermined arrangement, the second member is configured to be retractable to a position where it does not come into contact with the first member. .

According to the game machine C4, in addition to the effects of the game machine C3, it is possible to avoid contact between the displacing first member and the second member. As a result, the contact between the second member and the first member occurs when the first member reaches the predetermined position and stops, so that the mode of driving force transmission to the second member can be switched smoothly. can be facilitated.

A game machine C5 characterized in that, in the game machine C3 or C4, the state of the first member is associated with the arrangement of the transmission means.

According to the game machine C5, in addition to the effects of the game machine C3 or C4, the switching of the transmission mode of the driving force can be performed by changing the arrangement of the transmission means, so that the displacement of the first member and the second member can be stabilized. and avoid unintended collision or contact of each member.

In any one of the gaming machines C3 to C5, an urging means configured to urge the second member in a predetermined direction is provided, and the driving force is transmitted to the second member in a direction opposing the urging force. The game machine C6 is characterized in that the first member is arranged on the predetermined direction side with respect to the second member in the predetermined arrangement.

According to the game machine C6, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines C3 to C5, the first member is arranged in a predetermined manner while the second member is arranged on the opposite side of the first member in a predetermined direction. can be done. Thereby, it is possible to form the timing for displacing the second member against the biasing force and the timing for stopping the second member against the biasing force as the transmission means is displaced.

In the game machine C6, the game machine C7 is characterized in that the first member is displaced toward the predetermined arrangement while the first transmission portion of the transmission means is displaced in the predetermined direction. .

According to the gaming machine C7, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine C6, part of the load necessary for displacing the first member can be generated by the biasing force of the biasing means. That is, the urging force can be used in an auxiliary manner.

In any one of game machines C3 to C7, the second transmission section is capable of forming a non-contact state in which the second member is not in contact, and in the non-contact state, the second member displaces. A gaming machine C8 characterized in that the second member is configured so that the second transmission section does not interfere with the.

According to the game machine C8, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines C3 to C7, the displacement state of the second member includes a displacement state of being pushed by the second transmission section and a displacement state of being separated from the second transmission section. and can be configured.

In any one of game machines C3 to C8, a straight line extending in parallel with the predetermined direction from a point of contact between the predetermined arranged first member and the transmission means controls the displacement of the transmission means in a predetermined manner. A game machine C9 characterized by passing through a regulating part that regulates.

According to the gaming machine C9, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines C3 to C8, the urging force transmitted to the transmission means via the first member is cut off by the restricting section, so that the drive means can be reached. can be prevented (to a lesser degree).

In addition, the aspect of a regulation part is not limited at all. For example, it may be a guide portion that limits the displacement mode to sliding displacement by restricting the displacement, or a shaft support portion that limits the displacement to rotational displacement.

In any one of the game machines C1 to C9, the first target portion of the displacement means receives the driving force of the drive means and is displaced or stopped, and receives the load from the second target portion. A gaming machine C10 characterized in that it is configured to be able to change its state between a second state in which it is displaced or stopped.

According to the game machine C10, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines C1 to C9, the displacement mode of the first target part can be complicated.

<By limiting the generation of load when the user is away from the vehicle, load transmission is cut off>
A game machine comprising a drive means, a displacement means configured to be displaceable, and a transmission means configured to transmit the driving force of the drive means to the displacement means, the contact contacting the displacement means and a non-contact state in which the displacement means is not in contact with the displacement means. A gaming machine D1 characterized by:

In a game machine such as a pachinko machine, there is provided a game machine in which displacement means composed of one movable body displaced by the driving force of a drive means contacts another movable body at a displacement end position (upper end position) and receives a load. There is (for example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-028623). However, in the above-described conventional game machine, there is a risk that a load from another movable body may be transmitted to the driving means via the displacement means, and the state of the driving means (for example, the rotation angle of the motor) and the There is room for improvement from the viewpoint of stabilizing the drive state, since there is a possibility that the state of the actual drive means may differ.

Moreover, it is conceivable that the operating resistance of the driving means may increase or decrease unstably due to the load applied to the driving means, accelerating the deterioration of the driving means.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine D1, since the load transmission in the contact state can be suppressed, the driving state of the driving means can be stabilized. In addition, by suppressing unstable increases and decreases in the operating resistance of the driving means, the durability of the driving means can be improved.

Note that the method of suppressing load transmission in the contact state is not limited at all. For example, a member capable of absorbing the load may be interposed at the contact portion, and the displacement of the first means that causes the load (for example, the first means receiving an external force) may cause the first means to It may be configured so that it occurs only in the non-contact state.

In the game machine D1, the load received by the displacement means from the first means and the driving force received by the displacement means via the transmission means face the same side.

According to the gaming machine D2, the load received by the displacement means can be reduced compared to the case where the load from the first means and the driving force are directed to opposite sides.

The game machine D1 or D2 is provided with an arrangement means arranged to collide with the first means, and the collision of the arrangement means occurs when the transmission means and the displacement means are not in contact with each other. A gaming machine D3 characterized by:

According to the gaming machine D3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine D1 or D2, the collision of the arranging means occurs when the transmitting means and the displacing means are not in contact with each other. can be blocked.

Incidentally, the collision of the arranging means may occur in the contact state of the first means, or may occur in the non-contact state. If the locating means collides in a non-contact state, load transmission between the first means and the displacing means can be interrupted. ), load transmission to the driving means can be suppressed.

In any one of the game machines D1 to D3, the transmission means includes a contact portion configured to be able to contact the displacement means, and the contact portion bends in the direction of the load caused by the contact ( A gaming machine D4 characterized by being flexibly constructed to such an extent that it can be deformed.

According to the game machine D4, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines D1 to D3, the load is absorbed by the bending (deformation) of the contact portion, thereby suppressing the load transmission between the displacement means and the transmission means. can do.

In any one of the game machines D1 to D4, the first means and the displacement means are provided with a second abutment portion configured to be able to abut against the second contact portion of at least one of the first means and the displacement means. The gaming machine D5, wherein the abutting portion is made of a material capable of absorbing impact.

According to the game machine D5, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines D1 to D4, the second contact portion can absorb the impact, so that the load transmission to the driving means can be suppressed.

In any one of the game machines D1 to D5, a biasing means for biasing the displacement means is provided, and a standby position of the displacement means is set at an end of a displacement range in the biasing direction of the biasing means. A game machine D6.

According to the game machine D6, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines D1 to D5, it is possible to avoid deviation of the standby position of the displacement means (the position where the load is generated from the transmission means). It is easy to arrange the stop position (high-speed rotation start position) of the transmission means in an appropriate position for controlling the transmission means to operate at high speed until the position where the 1 means and the displacement means are separated from each other. This makes it possible to easily and appropriately control the driving means.

In addition, by reducing the degree of freedom in the arrangement of the first means and the displacement means, it is possible to avoid accidental contact between the first means and the displacement means.

In any one of game machines D3 to D6, the game machine D7 is characterized in that the first means permits a change in posture due to a collision of the arrangement means.

According to the game machine D7, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines D3 to D6, the load from the arrangement means can be used for the change in the posture of the first means, so the load transmission to the drive means is suppressed. be able to.

In the game machine D6 or D7, the first means and the displacement means are in contact with each other, and the transmission means and the displacement means are not in contact with each other, so that the first means exerts the biasing force of the biasing means. a receiving biasing state, wherein the transmission means abuts against the displacement means and displaces the displacement means in a direction opposite to the direction of the biasing force of the biasing means; A gaming machine D8 characterized in that the game machine D8 is capable of changing states between an ineffective contact state in which transmission to means is disabled and a non-contact state in which said first means and said displacement means are separated from each other.

According to the game machine D8, in addition to the effects of the game machine D6 or D7, it is possible to configure a plurality of types of states of the first means (for example, the degree of ease with which the placement means changes its posture with respect to collision).

<Conditionally regulate one of forward and reverse rotation>
Displacement means configured to be displaceable along a path including a predetermined position is provided, and the displacement means is configured to be displaceable from the predetermined position to a reference position serving as a reference point for changing the displacement mode. A gaming machine E1 characterized in that it is constructed so as to be displaceable to the predetermined position in the manner of .

2. Description of the Related Art Among gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there are gaming machines that control the same movable accessory to perform different actions in a plurality of effects (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-73517). However, in the above-described conventional game machine, different actions correspond to whether or not the driving direction of the driving device is switched. Since the player can predict about, there is a problem that there is room for improvement from the viewpoint of improving the interest of the player.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine E1, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to discriminate the performance to be executed from now on by the discriminating means. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the player.

In addition, the displacement mode of the displacement means is not limited at all. For example, the winning effect and the losing effect may be different effects involving displacement of the displacement means. In this case, if there is only one way of displacing the displacing means to a predetermined position, it will be known whether or not it is correct by the displacement from the predetermined position (for example, the generation of driving sound). On the other hand, by providing a plurality of displacement modes, it is possible to make it difficult to determine whether the displacement is correct or not even if displacement occurs (for example, driving sound occurs).

Moreover, the mode of displacement is not limited at all. For example, it may be a path, a displacement speed, or a displacement speed pattern.

The game machine E1 comprises driving means for generating a driving force for displacing the displacement means, and regulation means for regulating the displacement of the displacement means. A gaming machine E2, characterized in that the displacement of the displacement means can be regulated in a non-operating state.

According to the gaming machine E2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine E1, the driving sound of the driving means can be eliminated when the displacement means is restricted. It is possible to make it difficult to determine whether the direction is reverse.

Further, unlike the case where the driving means continues to generate driving force when performing a long performance (Long Reach, etc.) with the displacement of the displacement means restricted, it is possible to suppress heat generation by the driving means.

A gaming machine E3 in the gaming machine E1 or E2, wherein the restricting means is displaced to a position where it can act on the displacing means by the driving force of the driving means.

According to the gaming machine E3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine E1 or E2, the number of driving means can be reduced compared to the case where the driving means for driving the restricting means is provided separately.

In any one of the game machines E1 to E3, the game machine is characterized by comprising a discrimination participating means configured to have a section that makes it difficult to discriminate in which form among the plurality of types of modes the displacement is made. E4.

According to the gaming machine E4, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines E1 to E3, the determination participating means can be configured to make it difficult to determine the displacement mode of the displacement means in a predetermined section. Compared to the case where it is difficult to determine the displacement mode only in the case where it is difficult to determine the displacement mode, it is possible to facilitate the continuation of the displacement of the displacement means while it is difficult to determine the displacement mode.

A gaming machine E5 characterized in that, in the gaming machine E4, the arrangement of the displacement means can be maintained in the section.

According to the gaming machine E5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine E4, it is possible to switch the driving direction of the driving means while maintaining the displacement means. As a result, it is possible to prevent the type of displacement mode of the displacement means from being detected from the driving sound. Therefore, for example, it is possible to perform drive control such as starting the driving of the driving means before notification of acceptance or rejection.

Any one of the game machines E1 to E5 is provided with detection means capable of detecting the position of the displacement means, and the detection means determines switching of executable displacement among the displacements in the plurality of types of displacement modes. A game machine E6, which is also used as a determination means.

According to the gaming machine E6, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines E1 to E5, the sensor for detecting the position of the displacement means and the sensor for judging the switching of the displacement mode can be used together. It is possible to reduce the number of devices to be arranged.

<Sense of unity of multiple members>
A gaming machine configured such that a first member and a second member are displaceable, wherein the manner in which the first member and the second member approach each other is different between the first member and the second member. A game machine F1 characterized by being configured as follows.

In a game machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a game machine in which a first member and a second member configured to be displaceable are controlled to be vertically displaced while maintaining an adjacent state (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-231434). ). However, in the above-described conventional game machine, the first member and the second member are displaced on the same straight line, so depending on the approaching speed, the first member and the second member may return after contact. Yes, it can look bad. In other words, there is a problem that there is room for improvement from the viewpoint of maintaining the effect mode regardless of the displacement speed.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine F1, the manner in which the first member and the second member approach each other is made different. For example, the displacement mode of the first member and the second member is not made to approach on the same straight line, but after approaching on another straight line, the direction is changed and the first member and the second member approach each other. It is possible to avoid reversal and make it easier to maintain the presentation mode.

In the gaming machine F1, the displacement of the first member and the second member is divided into at least a first section for approaching each other and a second section as a preparatory section for coming into contact with each other. The game machine F2 is characterized in that the second member is configured such that the attitudes of the first section and the second section are different.

According to the gaming machine F2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine F1, the postures of the first member and the second member can be changed according to the purpose of displacement.

A gaming machine F3 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine F1 or F2, it comprises a load generating means capable of generating a load directed to the side maintaining the close arrangement of the first member and the second member.

According to the gaming machine F3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine F1 or F2, the arrangement of the first member and the second member can be maintained by the load generating means.

It should be noted that the load generated by the load generating means is not limited to a load in a fixed direction or a load of a fixed magnitude. For example, if the load that is likely to be received (eg, a performance mode that generates an external force) changes depending on the situation (eg, game state), the direction and magnitude of the load generated by the load generating means may be changed accordingly.

Moreover, the load generated by the load generating means does not need to be generated all the time. For example, it may be possible to switch between load generation and load cancellation in accordance with the above-described change in the situation. Incidentally, the load generating means may be external.

In the game machine F3, displacement generating means is configured to displace at least one of the first member and the second member, and a predetermined state can be configured by the displacement, and the load generating means is configured to displace the displacement. A game machine F4 characterized in that it is configured integrally with a generating means.

According to the gaming machine F4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine F3, it is possible to appropriately maintain the relationship between the load generation timing by the load generating means and the arrangement of the first member and the second member. It is possible to prevent the load from occurring at

Also, the action of the load generating means and the action of the displacement generating means can complement each other. For example, the load of the load generating means can be used to assist the displacement of the first member or the second member caused by the displacement generating means.

In the game machine F4, the predetermined state is a contact state in which at least part of the first member contacts the second member.

According to the game machine F5, in addition to the effects of the game machine F4, it is possible to facilitate the execution of the mode of filling the gap between the first member and the second member.

In the game machine F4 or F5, the game machine F6 is characterized in that the load generating means is configured to generate a load in the predetermined state.

According to the game machine F6, in addition to the effects of the game machine F4 or F5, it is possible to prevent the load of the load generating means from affecting the first member and the second member even in states other than the predetermined state.

The game machine F7 is characterized in that, in any one of the game machines F3 to F6, the load generating means is configured to generate loads at a plurality of locations on the first member or the second member.

According to the game machine F7, in any one of the game machines F3 to F6, since the load generating means generates a load on the first member or the second member at a plurality of locations, it is possible not only to maintain the state against displacement in one direction, but also to It is also possible to maintain the state of the first member or the second member against changes in posture. Thereby, even when the first member and the second member are configured three-dimensionally, it is possible to avoid conspicuous displacement of the arrangement.

In the game machine F7, the first member or the second member includes a plurality of loaded portions that receive a load from the load generating means, and the plurality of loaded portions are the first loaded portion and the first loaded portion. and a second loaded portion having a larger displacement amount with respect to the load generating means than the loaded portion, wherein the load generating means applies the load to the first loaded portion before the second loaded portion. A gaming machine F8 characterized by:

According to the gaming machine F8, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine F7, the load from the load generating means can be applied to the first member or the second member in stages. Also, the role of the load applied to the first load receiving portion and the second load receiving portion can be divided. For example, it is possible to use the first load receiving part for positioning at a predetermined position and the second load receiving part for attitude adjustment.

In any one of the game machines F3 to F8, the load generating means may be such that the portion that applies the load directed to the side facing gravity to the first member or the second member is greater than the other portions. Alternatively, the gaming machine F9 is characterized in that the facing surface facing the second member has a long facing length.

According to the game machine F9, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines F3 to F8, it is possible to easily cope with the sagging due to the weight of the first member or the second member. On the other hand, for other portions, the facing surface facing the first member or the second member can be formed short, so that the degree of freedom in designing the load generating means can be improved and the facing surface can be easily hidden.

A game machine F10 characterized in that, in any one of the game machines F3 to F9, the assembly of the first member and the second member is possible in a state in which the first member and the second member are separated. .

According to the game machine F10, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines F3 to F9, it is possible to easily avoid cracking or chipping of the first member or the second member due to the load caused by the assembly work. That is, compared to the case where the assembling work is performed in the abutting state, it is easier to avoid the occurrence of load transmission between the first member and the second member, so that the first member and the second member can be assembled without damage. can.

As a result, it is possible to provide the contact surfaces as designed on the first member and the second member, thereby preventing a situation in which the load generated by the load generating means, such as when there is a gap, is likely to cause misalignment. can do.

<Construction of multiple types of wobble states of the displacement means>
A gaming machine G0 comprising displacement means and action means for displacing the displacement means, wherein the action means is configured to suppress a change in posture of the displacement means in a predetermined direction.

2. Description of the Related Art Among gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there is a gaming machine that includes displacement means configured to enable displacement composed of position change and rotation (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-116782). However, in the above-described conventional game machine, although the portion supporting the displacement means disposed at the tip of the arm is formed to have a large diameter, it is necessary to provide a gap in order to ensure the displacement, so that the posture of the displacement means is limited. There is a problem that the countermeasure against the change is not sufficient and there is room for improvement from the viewpoint of suppressing the change in the attitude of the displacement means.

On the other hand, according to the game machine G0, it is possible to suppress the posture change of the displacement means by the configuration of the action means. Accordingly, even if the space in which the displacement of the displacement means is allowed is narrow, it is possible to easily avoid collision between the wall member forming the space and the displacement means.

It should be noted that the direction in which the displacement means changes its posture is not limited at all. For example, it may be tilted about a straight line along the lateral direction (horizontal direction, etc.), or may be swung laterally about a straight line along the vertical direction (vertical direction, etc.).

In the game machine G0, the action means is configured to be able to increase or decrease the action force for suppressing the posture change of the displacement means in accordance with the arrangement position of the displacement means.

According to the game machine G1, in addition to the effects of the game machine G0, it is possible to change the degree of suppression of the posture change of the displacement means according to the arrangement of the displacement means. As a result, the arrangement space of the displacement means can be narrowed while maintaining a high degree of freedom in the performance of the displacement means.

For example, when the displacement means is reciprocatingly displaced, the attitude of the displacement means tends to collapse at the displacement end where the displacement direction is switched. By increasing it, it is possible to suppress the collapse of the posture of the displacement means.

Further, for example, even when the displacement means itself is enlarged, reduced, or rotated by the driving force mounted on the displacement means, the attitude of the displacement means tends to be easily lost. By increasing the acting force generation positions in (1), it is possible to suppress collapse of the posture of the displacement means.

In game machine G0 or G1, game machine G2 is characterized in that said action means is configured to support said displacement means with a plurality of main support means arranged on a horizontal plane passing through the center of gravity of said displacement means.

According to the game machine G2, in addition to the effects of the game machine G0 or G1, the action means supports the displacement means by a plurality of main support means on the horizontal plane at the position of the center of gravity of the displacement means, thereby preventing the displacement means from tilting. can be made easier.

In the game machine G2, the action means includes auxiliary support means for supporting the displacement means at a position different from the horizontal plane on which the main support means is arranged.

According to the game machine G3, in addition to the effects of the game machine G2, the main support means and the auxiliary support means support the displacement means at three or more support points that are not arranged on a straight line, so that the displacement means Attitude change can be suppressed in all directions.

In the game machine G3, the auxiliary support means also functions as guide means for guiding the displacement of the displacement means with respect to the action means.

According to the game machine G4, in addition to the effects of the game machine G3, the auxiliary support means can be added not only as a supporting force generating position but also as a position for guiding displacement.

In the gaming machine G1, the displacement means can be displaced in such a manner that its area when viewed in a predetermined direction increases or decreases, and the action means is configured such that the acting force generation position is maximized at the end position of displacement of the displacement means. A gaming machine G5 characterized by:

According to the game machine G5, in addition to the effects of the game machine G1, it is possible to generate acting forces on the displacement means at a plurality of points at the displacement end position where the effect of increasing the area of the displacement means is most effective. , the change in posture of the displacing means can be effectively suppressed.

Furthermore, by relatively reducing the acting force generating positions during the displacement of the displacement means, the displacement resistance of the displacement means can be reduced and the displacement can be smoothed. That is, during the displacement of the displacement means, it is easy to maintain the posture due to the inertia associated with the displacement. Therefore, if the acting force generation position is increased recklessly, the acting force becomes excessive and the displacement resistance of the displacement means rises. , the problem that the driving device becomes large is assumed.

On the other hand, by reducing the acting force generation positions at positions other than the displacement end position, it is possible to avoid the displacement resistance of the displacement means from becoming excessive and to avoid an increase in the size of the driving device.

<Wiring Guide for Propeller Unit>
Displacement means, electric wiring connected to the displacement means, and electric wiring displacement means configured to be capable of displacing a predetermined portion of the electric wiring, wherein the electric wiring displacement means is such that the displacement means is the predetermined portion. The game machine H1 is characterized in that the predetermined portion can be displaced to the side avoiding the displacing means when the game machine H1 is displaced to the side approaching the .

In game machines such as pachinko machines, there is a game machine in which electrical wiring connected to the displacement means is aligned with a long member interlocking with the displacement means to limit the arrangement of the electrical wiring (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-157474). (see Gazette). However, in the above-described conventional game machine, in order to avoid contact between the displacement means and the electric wiring, it is difficult to configure the displacement means to continue to displace beyond the electric wiring. Since a space is required for arranging the electrical wiring on the outside, there is a problem that the degree of freedom in arranging the displacing means is low.

On the other hand, according to the game machine H1, the electric wire displacing means can displace a predetermined portion of the electric wiring to the side avoiding the displacing means. so that the displacement means can be arranged to displace over the electrical wiring. Therefore, it is possible to increase the degree of freedom in arranging the displacement means.

It should be noted that the case where the displacement means approaches the predetermined portion is not limited at all. For example, if the predetermined portion is stopped, there is a danger of contact between the displacement means and the predetermined portion, or the distance between the predetermined portion and the displacement means is shorter than the reference length.

In the gaming machine H1, the displacement means is configured to be displaceable in at least a first direction and a second direction, and the predetermined portion is displaceable in a third direction orthogonal to the first direction and the second direction. A gaming machine H2 characterized by comprising:

According to the game machine H2, in addition to the effects of the game machine H1, it is possible to avoid the electric wiring from restricting the amount of displacement of the displacement means in the predetermined plane defined by the first direction and the second direction.

In the game machine H2, the game machine H3 is characterized in that the first direction and the second direction are directions parallel to a plane orthogonal to a predetermined direction view.

According to the game machine H3, in addition to the effects of the game machine H2, the displacement direction of the predetermined portion can be set along the predetermined direction view. It is possible to reduce the effect on appearance.

In any one of the game machines H1 to H3, it comprises a stopping means for stopping a second predetermined portion of the electrical wiring arranged on the opposite side of the displacing means with respect to the predetermined portion, wherein the electrical wiring displacing means A gaming machine H4 characterized in that the second predetermined portion is configured to be easily displaceable with respect to the stopping means.

According to the game machine H4, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines H1 to H3, the durability of the second predetermined portion of the electrical wiring arranged in the stopping means can be improved.

In addition, the configuration in which the second predetermined portion is easily displaced with respect to the stopping means is not limited at all. For example, when the second predetermined portion is spirally arranged in the retaining means, the second predetermined portion may be pushed in along the tangential direction of the outer peripheral portion of the spiral, or the second predetermined portion may be attached to the movable member. When guided, the second predetermined portion or the movable member may be pushed so as to displace the movable member.

In the game machine H4, the game machine H5 is characterized in that the stopping means is arranged outside the displacement end of the displacement means in the first direction.

According to the game machine H5, in addition to the effects of the game machine H4, the stopping means is arranged outside the displacement terminal of the displacement means in the first direction, so that the stopping means is projected to the plane side where the displacement means is displaced. can be configured As a result, it is possible to increase the storage capacity of the electric wiring of the stopping means, so that the amount of displacement of the displacement means that compensates for the separation from the stopping means by the second predetermined portion can be increased.

In any one of the game machines H1 to H5, the electrical wiring displacing means is integrated with the displacing means, and includes correspondence changing means for changing the arrangement of the electrical wiring displacing means in accordance with the arrangement of the displacing means. A gaming machine H6 characterized by:

According to the game machine H6, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines H1 to H5, the correspondence changing means can appropriately manage the relative arrangement between the electric wiring and the displacement means.

<Flow path of sphere with electric tube>
It comprises a game area and a flow-down means for causing the game balls discharged from the game area to flow down, and the flow-down means has a section configured so that the game balls discharged from the game area can be visually recognized. gaming machine I0 to play.

2. Description of the Related Art Among gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there are gaming machines in which a base plate forming a game area is made of a plywood board (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-80178). However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, when the game ball discharged from the game area flows to the back side of the base plate, it is hidden by the base plate, and the player cannot see the game ball. Therefore, the player is likely to lose sight of the game ball, and if the player does not pay attention to the ejection timing, the player may get the impression that the game ball suddenly disappears from the game area.

Also, even if you pay attention to the ejection timing, in recent pachinko machines, the winning hole and the out hole are often arranged close to each other, and even though the ball actually entered the out hole, the ball did not reach the winning hole. There is a possibility that it may be mistaken for the one that entered the ball. In this case, there is a possibility that players will feel distrustful of the fact that no prize balls are paid out. In other words, the conventional game machine has a problem that there is room for improvement in discharging the game balls from the game area.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine I0, since the flowing-down means is configured to have a section in which the game balls discharged from the game area can be visually recognized, the player can visually observe the game balls flowing down in the section. By doing so, it is possible to confirm how the game balls are arranged from the game area. As a result, ejection of game balls from the game area can be improved.

It should be noted that the discharge of the game ball from the game area means the overall manner in which the game ball is discharged from the game area. For example, the balls may be discharged through a prize ball opening, or may be discharged through an outlet without prize balls.

In the gaming machine I0, the game ball that has flowed down in the game area is disposed so as to pass through, and the game ball is provided with a profit giving means configured to give a predetermined profit to the player based on the passage of the game ball. The means comprises a first constituent part configured to be able to guide a game ball toward the profit imparting means above the profit imparting means, and a first constituent part disposed downstream of the first constituent part. A gaming machine I1 characterized by comprising a second component configured to be able to guide a game ball to a side away from the profit giving means above the giving means.

According to the game machine I1, in addition to the effects of the game machine I0, the player can grasp how the game ball is discharged from the game area by visually recognizing the game ball flowing down the flowing-down means. It is possible to avoid the game ball from approaching the profit giving means on the lower side. As a result, game balls that have already been discharged from the game area and game balls that are still flowing down the game area can be clearly distinguished in the vicinity of the profit giving means, so that the player can comfortably play the game. We can try to make it possible.

Note that the predetermined profit is not limited at all. For example, it may be a payout of prize balls, a lottery of symbols such as a first symbol or a second symbol, or other profit.

The game machine I0 or I1 includes attention means formed inside the game area, and frame means arranged in a frame shape around the attention means, and the flow-down means is the frame when viewed from the front. A game machine I2 characterized by being constructed so as to cause game balls to flow down to the inner side of means.

According to the gaming machine I2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine I0 or I1, the flowing-down means can cause the game balls discharged from the game area to enter the visual field of the player who pays attention to the attention means. As a result, even in a situation where the player is paying attention to the attention means, it is possible to let the player know that the game ball has been ejected from the game area.

Note that the attention means is not limited at all, and various aspects are exemplified. For example, it may be a light guide plate (illumination plate), a liquid crystal display means for changing and displaying a pattern, a movable accessory configured to be displaceable by a driving means such as a motor, or a light emitting means such as an LED. good.

The game machine I3 is characterized in that in the game machine I2, the flow-down means comprises deceleration means for decelerating the game ball on the inner side of the attention means.

According to the gaming machine I3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine I2, it is possible to lengthen the period in which the game ball stays in the field of view of the player who pays attention to the attention means.

<Ingenuity around the board surface design part and light guide plate>
A predetermined substrate provided with a light emitting means, and an arranged means arranged in front of at least a part of the predetermined substrate when viewed from a predetermined direction, wherein the predetermined substrate has an area visually recognized when viewed from the predetermined direction of A gaming machine J0 characterized in that it is arranged so as to be smaller than an area where the light emitted from the light emitting means is visible.

In a game machine such as a pachinko machine, an illumination board having light emitting means such as LEDs is arranged on the back side of a base plate having a game area on the front side, and the plate surface of the illumination board and the plate surface of the base plate are arranged. There is a gaming machine in which are arranged substantially parallel (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2006-333887). However, in the above-described conventional game machine, since the area of the decorative board that is visually recognized when viewed from the front is large, when the decorative member arranged on the front side of the decorative board is irradiated with the LED light, the field of view of the decorative board is covered with electric lights. There is a possibility that the decorative board may enter and be visually recognized as if the decorative member and the decorative board are overlapped in the front and back.

On the surface of the decorative board, only functionally necessary components such as circuits and resistors are arranged, and usually the board does not have a high degree of design. Therefore, when the decorative member and the decorative board are visually superimposed in the front and rear, the appearance is poor, and there is a possibility that the interest of the player is lowered. In other words, in the conventional gaming machine, there is room for improvement in the presentation effect of the predetermined board.

On the other hand, according to the game machine J0, the predetermined substrate is arranged so that the area of the predetermined substrate that is visually recognized when viewed from the predetermined direction is smaller than the area of the irradiated light. A region in which only light can be visually recognized can be configured without overlapping with the substrate. As a result, it is possible to improve the rendering effect of the predetermined substrate.

In addition, the arrangement of the predetermined substrate is not limited at all. For example, the visible area may be reduced by partially hiding, or the visible area may be eliminated by completely shielding.

Incidentally, the optical axis of the light emitted from the light emitting means arranged on the predetermined substrate can be arbitrarily set. For example, the optical axis may be directed in the thickness direction of the predetermined substrate, the optical axis may be directed in the direction perpendicular to the thickness direction of the predetermined substrate, or the optical axis may be directed at an angle between them. Anything that can be done is fine.

The optical transparency of the arranging means is not limited at all. For example, it may be configured to have good light transmittance, may be configured to have low transmittance, or may have a different degree of light transmittance for each portion.

In the gaming machine J0, the arranged means includes a plurality of direction changing means arranged on both surface sides of the predetermined substrate for changing the traveling direction of the light emitted from the light emitting means. and a low transmission means having a lower light transmittance than the direction changing means is disposed, and when viewed from a predetermined direction, at least a part of the predetermined substrate is arranged inside the low transmission means. Gaming machine J1.

According to the gaming machine J1, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine J0, the predetermined substrate can be hidden by the low transmission means. Thereby, the range in which the predetermined substrate is visible can be narrowed.

In addition, the direction changing means is not limited at all, and various aspects are exemplified. For example, it may be a light guide plate or an illumination plate, a movable accessory that can be displaced by a driving device, a game area or flow path where game balls flow down, a case member or a decorative member that is fixedly arranged. But it's okay.

A gaming machine J2 characterized in that, in the gaming machine J1, the low-transmittance means is at least part of a shape portion forming a shape of a predetermined pattern or figure.

According to the game machine J2, in addition to the effects of the game machine J1, the low-transmittance means can be blended into the shape of a predetermined pattern or figure, so that it is possible to avoid making the player feel uncomfortable.

Note that the shape of the predetermined pattern or figure is not limited at all. For example, it may be a frame-shaped frame such as a window frame, a frame connecting the shaft of a rotating body such as a tire and the rotating outer peripheral portion, or a series of meanings and contents composed of arbitrary character strings and patterns. It may be part of the design to be expressed (for example, a title logo).

A game machine J3 characterized in that, in any one of the game machines J0 to J2, the predetermined board is arranged with the end face of the board facing the predetermined direction.

According to the gaming machine J3, it is possible to minimize the area of the predetermined substrate when viewed in a predetermined direction.

The gaming machine J3 includes display means for executing display effects that can be visually recognized when viewed from a predetermined direction, and a game area arranged in front of the display means. A game machine J4 characterized in that it is arranged at a boundary with a game area when viewed from a predetermined direction.

According to the gaming machine J4, the predetermined board is arranged at the boundary, so that the light is emitted from the back of the game area to the front side, unlike the case where the light effect is performed as a whole, only the display area side from the predetermined board. It is possible to execute an effect of irradiating light on the side of the game area or an effect of irradiating light only on the game area side.

A gaming machine J5 characterized in that, in the gaming machine J4, the predetermined substrate is fixedly arranged on a gaming board forming the gaming area on the front side.

According to the gaming machine J5, since the predetermined board is fixedly arranged on the game board, the arrangement of the light-emitting means is reduced compared to, for example, the case where it is fixedly arranged on the inner surface of the back case in which the movable accessory or the like is arranged. degree of freedom can be improved.

In addition, since the electric wiring for supplying electricity to the light emitting means can be guided along the back surface of the game board to the outside of the back case, even if the back case side is visible through the window part of the game board, Also, since it is impossible to see the back side of the game board without looking around with a particularly wide field of view, it is possible to easily prevent the electric wiring from being seen by the player.

Furthermore, when the liquid crystal display device is arranged in the center of the rear case, the space for arranging the predetermined substrate is limited to the outside of the liquid crystal display device. If so, the predetermined substrate can be arranged at an arbitrary position without being restricted by the size of the liquid crystal display device. Therefore, it is possible to improve the degree of freedom in arranging the predetermined substrate.

<Locking member to prevent misalignment of accessories during shipment>
Displacement means and limitation means capable of limiting the displacement of the displacement means are provided, and the limitation means has a first state that can act on the displacement means and a second state that cannot act on the displacement means. A gaming machine K1 characterized in that it is configured to be able to change its state in the first state, and is configured to suppress the movement of the displacement means in a predetermined direction in the first state.

2. Description of the Related Art Among game machines such as pachinko machines, there is a game machine provided with a movable accessory (displacement means) that is displaced downward from a standby position to the front of a liquid crystal display area (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-231434). However, the above-described conventional game machine has a problem that there is room for improvement in terms of fixing and releasing the displacing means.

That is, while the game machine is configured so as to be able to operate normally after being installed, it is difficult to fix movable accessories even in a situation where a large vibration or external force may be applied to the game machine such as during shipment. Not configured to work.

Therefore, as a countermeasure for fixing the movable accessory at the time of shipment, the displacement of the movable accessory is suppressed by stuffing cushioning materials in the range where the movable accessory is displaced, and the cushioning material is removed after arriving at the game hall. However, if the opening in the center of the game board is closed, the cushioning material cannot be easily removed, and the burden on the game hall may be increased.

On the other hand, according to the game machine K1, by changing the state of the restricting means, the restriction on the displacement of the displacing means can be released, so that the displacing means can be fixed and released satisfactorily.

On the other hand, unlike the case where the cushioning material is pulled out, the limiting means is not pulled out, so it is difficult to continue the game if an external force that may occur during the game causes a change in state easily. On the other hand, by configuring the restricting means to suppress unintended state changes in the first state, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of troubles during the game.

In the gaming machine K1, the gaming machine K2 is characterized in that the limiting means is configured to be able to change between the first state and the second state when the power is not supplied.

According to the gaming machine K2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine K1, the state change of the limiting means can be caused when the gaming machine is not energized, so that the occurrence of malfunction of the limiting means can be suppressed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the worker's work from becoming difficult in the state of power failure and in the restoration work from the state of power failure.

In the game machine K1 or K2, an urging means for urging the operation portion of the restriction means in a predetermined direction is provided, and the restriction means displaces the operation portion from a reference position by a predetermined amount in the opposite direction to the predetermined direction. the operating portion is displaceable away from the reference position in the predetermined direction by the biasing force of the biasing means; A game machine K3 characterized in that it is arranged at a spaced position away from.

According to the gaming machine K3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine K1 or K2, since the operation unit is arranged at the spaced position away from the reference position in the second state, opening and closing of the door, etc., are provided to the gaming machine after installation. It is possible to avoid the occurrence of a predetermined amount of displacement required for the state change of the limiter due to an external force that may be applied, and it is possible to easily prevent the state of the limiter from changing from the second state.

In any one of game machines K1 to K3, game machine K4 is characterized in that the operating portion of the restriction means is arranged outside area forming means for forming an area in which the displacement means can be displaced.

According to the game machine K4, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines K1 to K3, since the operation section is arranged outside the area forming means, even if the displacement means is displaced due to the operation of the operation means, Contact of the displacement means with the operator can be avoided.

In any one of game machines K1 to K4, biasing means for biasing the operation portion of the restriction means in a predetermined direction is provided, and the restriction means moves the operation portion from a reference position to the opposite side of the predetermined direction by a predetermined amount. The restricting means includes guiding means for guiding displacement of the operating portion in the predetermined direction, and the guiding means is configured to change the state along with the displacement. A gaming machine K5 characterized in that it is configured to ensure an allowable displacement width (orientation change width) of the part.

According to the game machine K5, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines K1 to K4, the operation means can be displaced in a direction intersecting with the predetermined direction. When an unknown load is applied, it is possible to easily prevent displacement in a predetermined direction, and it is possible to easily prevent the operation portion from being displaced by a predetermined amount. As a result, it is possible to prevent the state of the restricting means from changing due to an unintended external force caused by opening or closing the door.

In the gaming machine K5, the operating section includes an engaging section configured to be engageable with the guiding means, the biasing means is arranged at the center of the operating section, and the engaging section is connected to the operating section. A game machine K6 characterized in that it is arranged at a position away from the center of the part.

According to the gaming machine K6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine K5, even if an external force of unknown direction is applied to the limiting means in the first state of the limiting means, the operating portion is displaced about the engaging portion as a fulcrum. It is possible to prevent the occurrence of a predetermined amount of displacement required for the state change, which is limited to (posture change). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the state of the limiting means from changing from the first state to the second state due to external forces such as opening and closing of the door, vibrations during shipping, and the like.

In the game machine K6, the restricting means is arranged on the back side of the area forming means configured to be rotatable on the support shaft on the left and right side, and the engaging portion is arranged on the opposite side of the support shaft. A gaming machine K7 characterized by:

According to the gaming machine K7, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine K6, the state of the restricting means can be easily changed by pushing the engaging portion of the restricting means. It is possible to facilitate the operation when operating the control means. That is, when the front door is opened, the engaging portion is arranged on the side where the opening width is large (opposite side of the support shaft), so that the operating position of the restricting means can be further forward.

A gaming machine K8 characterized in that, in the gaming machine K7, the limiting means is arranged on the support shaft side of the area configuring means.

According to the gaming machine K8, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine K7, the restricting means is arranged on the support shaft side, so that the operator who opens the front door for work is prevented from accidentally touching the restricting means. can do.

In addition, since the load applied to the restricting means when the front door is opened and closed can be reduced compared to the case where the restricting means is arranged on the opposite side of the support shaft, the restricting means can be displaced by the impact caused by the opening and closing of the front door. change can be prevented.

A game machine K9 characterized in that, in any one of the game machines K1 to K8, the displacement means guides the displacement of the limit means in the first state.

According to the gaming machine K9, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines K1 to K8, the displacement guidance accuracy when the restriction means acts on the displacement means in a state where the displacement guidance accuracy of the restriction means alone is reduced is can be improved.

A gaming machine K10 characterized in that any one of the gaming machines K1 to K9 is provided with prevention notification means for notifying to prevent continuation of the energized state when energized in the first state.

According to the game machine K10, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines K1 to K9, the prevention notification means can notify to switch the state of the restriction means from the first state.

In addition, the mode of notification is not limited at all. For example, the error display may be notified by displaying it on a liquid crystal display device, or by outputting a notification sound from a speaker, or by illuminating a predetermined lighting means (or keeping it off). You can notify us by

<Regarding the concept of the invention with the substrate boxes A100, A2100, A3100, and A4100 as examples>
A gaming machine comprising a container for containing an object, comprising an operation means disposed on the object and formed to be operable, and an opening formed in the container at a position corresponding to the operation means. A gaming machine L0 characterized by:

2. Description of the Related Art A game machine having a substrate box (accommodating body) that accommodates a control substrate (object) is known (Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2015-205029). The board box is sealed to prevent tampering with the control board.

However, in the above-described conventional game machine, when the operating means is provided on the control board, it is necessary to open the board box in order to operate the operating means. Therefore, there was a problem that it took time and effort.

According to the game machine L0, the operation means arranged on the object and formed to be operable is provided, and the container has an opening at a position corresponding to the operation means, so that the operation means can be operated through the opening. can be manipulated. That is, it is unnecessary to open the container when operating the operating means.
Therefore, labor can be suppressed.

<Regarding the Concept of the Invention Taking the Board Boxes A100 and A2100 (Coating Parts A270 and A2270) as Examples>
In the gaming machine L0, the operation means has a first surface facing the opening of the container, and the container has a facing portion facing the first surface of the operation means. M1.

According to the game machine M1, in addition to the effects of the game machine L0, the operation means has the first surface facing the opening of the container, and the container has the facing portion facing the first surface of the operation means. Therefore, since the area of the opening can be made smaller by the facing portion, it is possible to suppress insertion of a foreign object such as a wire into the container through the opening.

In the gaming machine M1, the operating means is operated by inserting and displacing an operator, and the opposing portion is at least a range of the first surface of the operating means excluding the displacement trajectory of the operator. A gaming machine M2 characterized in that it is arranged facing a part of it.

According to the game machine M2, in addition to the effects of the game machine M1, the facing portion is arranged to face at least a part of the range excluding the displacement trajectory of the manipulator in the first surface of the manipulator. In addition, the area of the opening can be made smaller by the opposing portion while suppressing the insertion of the operating element into the operating means and the displacement of the inserted operating element. Insertion can be suppressed.

In the game machine M1 or M2, the game machine M3 is characterized in that the facing portion is formed in a plate shape with a fixed base end and a free end.

According to the game machine M3, in addition to the effects of the game machine M1 or M2, the facing portion is formed in a plate shape with a fixed base end and a free end, so that the shape is simplified and moldability is improved. can be secured. As a result, the yield can be improved and the product cost can be reduced.

A game machine M4 characterized in that, in the game machine M3, a projection is provided in the facing portion.

According to the gaming machine M4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine M3, the opposing portion is provided with a projecting portion, so that the rigidity of the opposing portion can be increased and damage thereof can be suppressed.

In addition, the protrusion may be formed as a ridge extending in a streak shape.

In the game machine M4, the game machine M5 is characterized in that the projecting portion projects from a surface of the facing portion facing the first surface of the operating means.

According to the game machine M5, in addition to the effects of the game machine M4, the protrusion is provided so as to protrude from the surface of the opposing portion facing the first surface of the operation means, so that the first surface of the operation means and the opposing portion It is possible to suppress the insertion of a foreign object such as a wire into the inside of the container through the gap by reducing the gap between the surfaces.

A gaming machine M6, wherein the protrusion is brought into contact with the first surface of the operating means in the gaming machine M5.

According to the gaming machine M6, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine M5, the protrusion abuts against the first surface of the operation means, so that the contact portion and the first surface of the operation means are in contact with each other. It is possible to prevent a foreign object such as a wire from being inserted into the container by eliminating the gap between them.

Further, since the protrusion is in contact with the first surface of the operating means, even if the facing part is pushed by the operating element in the insertion direction when the operating element is inserted into the operating means, the facing part is pushed in the insertion direction. deformation can be suppressed. Therefore, it is possible to suppress damage to the base end side of the opposing portion.

In addition, since the opposing portion is formed in a plate-like shape with a fixed base end and a free end, elastic deformation of the opposing portion is used to form and maintain the state in which the protrusion is in contact ( That is, it is possible to increase the degree of close contact and suppress the insertion of a foreign object such as a wire.

A game machine M7 characterized in that, in any one of the game machines M3 to M5, the protrusion is formed as a ridge extending in a stripe shape.

According to the game machine M7, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines M3 to M5, the protrusion is formed as a ridge extending in a stripe shape, so that the rigidity of the facing part can be further increased. At the same time, it is possible to easily suppress insertion of a foreign object such as a wire into the container.

In any one of the game machines M1 to M7, the operation means is operated by being displaced by inserting an operation element, and the edge portion of the facing portion contacts the operation element inserted into the operation means. A gaming machine M8 characterized in that it is formed in such a way that:

Here, if the manipulator inserted into the operating means is tilted (for example, an operator carelessly manipulates the manipulator in the lateral direction or carelessly opens and closes the member in which the container is arranged) , and when the manipulator collides with another member and is pushed laterally, the manipulating means is also tilted, and the load on the base of the manipulating means (the part connected to the object) increases. In addition, when the displacement (for example, rotation) of the operator inserted into the operation means becomes excessive, the operation means is also displaced in the direction of the displacement, and the load on the base of the operation means (the part connected to the object) becomes large. Become. In these cases, there is a risk that the operating means will fall off from the object (for example, a connecting portion that connects the operating means and the object will break).

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine M8, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines M1 to M7, the opposing portion is formed such that the edge portion can abut against the operator inserted into the operating means. The manipulator (that is, the position farther from the fulcrum when the manipulator tilts) is brought into contact with the edge of the facing portion, thereby suppressing tilting and excessive displacement of the manipulator. As a result, tilting and excessive displacement of the operating means can be suppressed, and falling off of the operating means from the object can be suppressed.

A game machine M9 characterized in that, in any one of the game machines M1 to M8, the container includes a covering portion covering one end side of the operation means.

According to the game machine M9, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines M1 to M8, the containing body is provided with the covering portion covering one end side of the operating means, so that the gap between the operating means and the covering portion is eliminated. It can be bent. That is, it is possible to form a wall against which the tip of a foreign object such as a wire inserted through the opening abuts. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a foreign object such as a wire from being inserted into the container.

Here, in the case where the operating means is operated by inserting and displacing an operator, if the operator inserted into the operating means is tilted (for example, an operator carelessly When the operator is pushed laterally by colliding with another member by accidentally opening or closing the member in which the container is arranged, the operating means is also tilted, and the operating means is also tilted. The load on the base of the means (the part connected to the object) increases. In this case, there is a risk that the operating means will fall off from the object (for example, a connecting portion that connects the operating means and the object will break).

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine M9, since the covering portion covers one end side of the operating means, the operating means can be brought into contact with the inner surface of the covering portion, thereby suppressing the tilting of the operating means. As a result, it is possible to prevent the operating means from falling off from the object.

A game machine M10 characterized in that in the game machine M9, the outer shape of the base end side opposite to the one end side of the operating means is larger than the inner shape of the covering portion.

According to the game machine M10, in addition to the effects of the game machine M9, the outer shape of the operation means on the base end side opposite to the one end side is made larger than the inner shape of the cover, so that the operation means on the base end side and the covering portion can be curved. That is, it is possible to form a wall against which the tip of a foreign object such as a wire inserted through the opening abuts. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a foreign object such as a wire from being inserted into the container.

In the gaming machine M9 or M10, one of the covering portion and the operation means has a bulging portion formed by swelling, and the other of the covering portion and the operation means has a receiving portion for receiving the bulging portion. A gaming machine M11 characterized by comprising:

According to the gaming machine M11, in addition to the effects of either the gaming machine M9 or M10, one of the covering portion and the operation means has a bulging portion, and the other of the covering portion and the operation means Since the receiving portion is provided for receiving the bulging portion, the gap between the bulging portion and the receiving portion can be bent. That is, it is possible to form a wall against which the tip of a foreign object such as a wire inserted through the opening abuts. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a foreign object such as a wire from being inserted into the container.

A gaming machine M12 characterized in that, in the gaming machine M11, the bulging portion and the receiving portion are partially formed in the circumferential direction.

According to the gaming machine M12, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine M11, the bulging portion and the receiving portion are partially formed in the circumferential direction. Excessive displacement (in particular, displacement (rotation) in the circumferential direction) can be suppressed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the operating means from falling off from the object.

In any one of game machines M1 to M12, game machine M13 is characterized in that the container has an erected wall erected from the inner surface thereof and whose erected end abuts against the object.

According to the game machine M13, in addition to the effects of the game machines M1 to M12, the container is provided with an erected wall erected from the inner surface of the container, the erected tip of which contacts the object. It can function as a wall against which the tip of a foreign object such as a wire inserted through the opening abuts. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a foreign object such as a wire from being inserted into the container.

A gaming machine M14 characterized in that, in the gaming machine M13, the standing wall is formed in a form surrounding the operating means.

According to the game machine M14, in addition to the effects of the game machine M13, the erected wall is formed in a form surrounding the operation means, so that it is possible to block the path for entering the container. That is, even if a foreign object such as a wire is inserted through the opening, further insertion can be restricted. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a foreign object such as a wire from being inserted into the container.

In the game machine M13 or M14, the object is formed as a control board on which electronic parts are mounted, and the side on which the electronic parts are connected to the circuit of the control board by soldering is the side on which the operation means is arranged. is set on the opposite side of the gaming machine M15.

According to the game machine M15, in addition to the effects of the game machine M13 or M14, the object is formed as a control board on which electronic parts are mounted, and the surface of the control board for connecting the electronic parts to the circuit by soldering serves as the operation means. is set on the side opposite to the side on which the is arranged, so that the erected end of the erected wall can be easily brought into close contact with the object (control board), and the object (control board) and the erected wall It is possible to suppress the formation of a gap between Therefore, the erected wall can reliably function as a wall against which the tip of a foreign object such as a wire inserted through the opening abuts, thereby suppressing the insertion of the foreign object such as a wire into the container.

A gaming machine M16 characterized in that, in any one of the gaming machines M13 to M15, the erecting wall is formed in a plate shape, and the thickness dimension of the erecting tip is reduced.

According to the game machine M16, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines M13 to M15, the standing wall is formed in a plate shape and the thickness dimension of the tip of the standing wall is reduced, so that the wall is brought into contact with the object. In addition, it is possible to suppress the insertion of a foreign object such as a wire from between the object and the erected tip by increasing the surface pressure at the erected tip. As a result, it is possible to prevent a foreign object such as a wire from being inserted into the container.

A gaming machine M17 characterized in that, in the gaming machine M16, the erected tip of the erected wall has a tapered surface formed on the surface on the operation means side, thereby reducing the thickness dimension of the erected tip.

According to the gaming machine M17, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine M16, the thickness dimension of the standing tip of the standing wall is reduced by forming a tapered surface on the surface on the operating means side of the standing wall. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the insertion of a foreign matter such as a wire into the container while improving the moldability. That is, by forming the tapered surface, it is possible to moderate the shape change and ensure the fluidity of the resin in the mold. On the other hand, when the standing tip of the standing wall is brought into contact with the object, a groove can be formed by the tapered surface and the object. Therefore, the tip of a foreign object such as a wire inserted through the opening can be moved (guided) along the groove described above. That is, it can be made difficult to pass between the standing wall and the object.
As a result, it is possible to prevent a foreign object such as a wire from being inserted into the container.

In any one of the game machines M9 to M12, the container has one outer surface formed of a first region and a second region positioned closer to the object than the first region. A gaming machine M18 characterized in that the covering portion is protruded from two areas.

According to the game machine M18, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines M9 to M12, the container is one of the first region and the second region located closer to the object than the first region. Since the side outer surface is formed and the covering portion protrudes from the second region, the protruding height of the covering portion can be increased.
Therefore, the area in which the covering portion covers the operating means (the area that suppresses the insertion of a foreign object such as a wire, and the area that contacts the operating means to suppress tilting and displacement of the operating means) can be made larger. As a result, it is possible to prevent a foreign object such as a wire from being inserted into the container and to prevent the operating means from falling off from the object.

The gaming machine M19 is characterized in that, in any one of the gaming machines M9 to M12, the covering portion protrudes from the outer surface of the container, and the opening is formed on the projecting tip side of the covering portion.

According to the gaming machine M19, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines M9 to M12, the covering portion projects from the outer surface of the container, and an opening is formed on the projecting tip side of the covering portion, so that wires and the like can be removed. It is possible to make it difficult for the tip of a foreign object to reach the opening.

For example, when the opening cannot be visually recognized due to a shield, etc., and it is difficult to directly insert the tip of a foreign object such as a wire into the opening, the tip of the foreign object such as a wire is slid on the outer surface of the container to reach the opening. method is done. On the other hand, according to the gaming machine M19, when the tip of a foreign object such as a wire is slid on the outer surface of the container, the tip of the foreign object such as the wire is caused to hit the outer surface of the covering portion, progress can be stopped. In other words, the outer surface of the covering portion can be made to function as a wall that restricts the sliding of foreign objects such as wires. As a result, it is possible to prevent a foreign object such as a wire from being inserted into the container.

<Regarding the concept of the invention with the substrate box A100 (standing walls A280, A290) as an example>
In the gaming machine L0, the operating means is operated by inserting and displacing an operator, and the containing body is formed so as to be able to abut against the operating means or the outer surface of the operator. Game machine N1 to play.

Here, if the manipulator inserted into the operating means is tilted (for example, an operator carelessly manipulates the manipulator in the lateral direction or carelessly opens and closes the member in which the container is arranged) , and when the manipulator collides with another member and is pressed laterally), the manipulator is also displaced (tilted with respect to the object). In this case, there is a risk that the displaced (tilted) operation means will be damaged (for example, the connecting part that connects the operation means and the object will come off or break).

On the other hand, according to the game machine N1, in addition to the effects of the game machine L0, the container is formed so as to be able to come into contact with the outer surface of the operation means or the operation element, so that the operation means or the operation element can be placed in the container. It is possible to receive and suppress the displacement of the operating means. As a result, damage to the operating means can be suppressed.

In game machine N1, game machine N2 is characterized in that the container has an erected wall erected from the inner surface thereof and whose erected end abuts against the object.

If the container receives the displaced (tilted) operating means, the container may be deformed and damaged.

On the other hand, according to the game machine N2, in addition to the effects of the game machine N1, the containing body is provided with an erected wall erected from the inner surface of the container and whose erected end contacts the object. serves as a support, and deformation of the container can be suppressed. As a result, damage to the container can be suppressed.

At the same time, the deformation of the container is suppressed by the support of the erected wall, so that tilting of the operation means can be suppressed more reliably. As a result, damage to the operating means can be easily suppressed.

The game machine N3 is characterized in that, in the game machine N2, the standing wall is formed in a form surrounding the operation means.

According to the game machine N3, in addition to the effects of the game machine N2, the erected wall is formed in a form surrounding the operation means, so that the erected wall is prevented from tilting in any direction of the operation means. As a support, deformation of the container can be suppressed. Therefore, breakage of the container can be suppressed.

In addition, the standing wall can block the path for entering the inside of the container. That is, even if a foreign object such as a wire is inserted through the opening, further insertion can be restricted. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a foreign object such as a wire from being inserted into the container.

In the game machine N3, the erected wall is connected to an inner surface different from the inner surface of the container on which the erected wall is erected.

According to the game machine N4, in addition to the effects of the game machine N3, the erected wall is connected to the inner surface of the container different from the inner surface of the container on which the erected wall is erected, so that the rigidity of the container is increased. can be used to increase the rigidity of the erected walls, and the connection between the inner surfaces can increase the rigidity of the entire container. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the function of the standing wall as a support portion (deformation suppressing means) for suppressing deformation of the container when the operation means is tilted. As a result, damage to the container can be suppressed.

A gaming machine N5 in any one of the gaming machines N1 to N4, wherein the containing body comprises a covering portion covering one end side of the operating means.

According to the game machine N5, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines N1 to N4, the containing body has a covering portion covering one end side of the operating means, so that the operating means is brought into contact with the inner surface of the covering portion. Therefore, tilting of the operation means can be suppressed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the operating means from falling off from the object.

Further, according to the gaming machine N5, the one end side of the operating means is covered with the covering part, so that the gap between the operating means and the covering part can be bent. That is, it is possible to form a wall against which the tip of a foreign object such as a wire inserted through the opening abuts. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a foreign object such as a wire from being inserted into the container.

In the gaming machine N5, the covering portion protrudes from the outer surface of the container, the container includes a ridge protruding from the outer surface and extending in a streak shape, and one end of the ridge extends from the outer surface of the container. A gaming machine N6, characterized by being connected to the cover.

According to the gaming machine N6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine N5, the covering portion protrudes from the outer surface of the housing body, and the housing body is provided with ridges that protrude from the outer surface and extend in a stripe shape. Since one end of the ridge is connected to the covering portion, the ridge functions as a rib and the covering portion can be supported by the ridge. Therefore, the operation means can be brought into contact with the inner surface of the covering portion, and tilting of the operation means can be suppressed, and breakage of the covering portion at that time can be suppressed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the operating means from falling off from the object.

In addition, since the covering portion protrudes from the outer surface of the container, the protruding height of the covering portion can be increased accordingly. Therefore, the area in which the covering portion covers the operating means (the area that suppresses the insertion of a foreign object such as a wire, and the area that contacts the operating means to suppress tilting and displacement of the operating means) can be made larger. As a result, it is possible to prevent a foreign object such as a wire from being inserted into the container and to prevent the operating means from falling off from the object.

In the game machine N6, the container has a display portion formed on its outer surface to display predetermined information, and the display portion is adjacent to the other end side of the protrusion.

According to the game machine N7, in addition to the effects of the game machine N6, the container has a display portion formed on its outer surface to display predetermined information, and the display portion is adjacent to the other end side of the protrusion. Therefore, the protrusion can also function as an indication line for indicating the position corresponding to the predetermined information displayed by the display unit. Therefore, the product cost can be reduced accordingly.

In the game machine N6 or N7, the operation means has a first surface facing the opening of the housing body, and the operation means is operated by inserting the operator into the first surface and displacing the housing body. A game characterized in that the body is provided with a facing portion facing the first surface of the operating means, and the facing portion is formed such that an edge portion can come into contact with the manipulator inserted into the operating means. Machine N8.

According to the game machine N8, in addition to the effects of the game machine N6 or N7, the operation means has a first surface facing the opening of the container, and the container has a facing portion facing the first surface of the operation means. Since the area of the opening can be made smaller by the facing portion, it is possible to suppress insertion of a foreign object such as a wire into the container through the opening.

In addition, since the edge of the opposing portion is formed so as to be able to abut against the operation element inserted into the operation means, the operation element (that is, the position farther from the fulcrum when the operation means tilts) can be brought into contact with the part to suppress tilting and excessive displacement of the manipulator. As a result, tilting and excessive displacement of the operating means can be suppressed, and falling off of the operating means from the object can be suppressed.

In the game machine N8, the facing portion is arranged to face at least part of a range of the first surface of the operation means excluding the displacement trajectory of the manipulator.

According to the gaming machine N9, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine N8, the opposing portion is arranged in at least a part of the range excluding the displacement trajectory of the operator in the first surface of the operator. The area of the opening can be made smaller by the opposing portion while suppressing interference with the insertion into the operation means and the displacement of the inserted operation element, so that a foreign object such as a wire can be inserted into the container through the opening. can be suppressed.

Also, by increasing the area of the facing portion that abuts the displaced manipulator, it is possible to easily suppress excessive displacement of the manipulator (in particular, displacement (rotation) in the circumferential direction). As a result, it is possible to suppress excessive displacement of the operating means and prevent the operating means from falling off from the object.

In the game machine N9, the operating means is formed to be able to displace the operator to a first position, and the position where one end of the protrusion is connected to the covering portion is displaced to the first position. A gaming machine N10 characterized in that the child and the facing portion are positioned at abutting positions.

In the game machine N9 or N10, the operation means is formed so as to be able to displace the operator to a second position different from the first position, and the position where one end of the protrusion is connected to the covering portion is the first position. A gaming machine N11 characterized in that the operating element displaced to position 2 and the facing portion are positioned to abut against each other.

According to the game machine N10 or N11, in addition to the effects of the game machine N9 or N10, the operation means is formed so that the operation element can be displaced between the first position and the second position, and one end of the protrusion is connected to the covering portion. is a position where the manipulator displaced to the first position or the second position and the facing portion abut against each other. The ridges can be used to effectively prevent the facing portion and the covering portion from being damaged when they come into contact with each other.

<Regarding the concept of the invention with the substrate boxes A100, A2100, A3100, A4100 (operation wall A210) as an example>
In the gaming machine L0, the container has one outer surface formed by a first region and a second region positioned closer to the object than the first region, and the opening is formed in the second region. is formed.

Here, since the operation means can be operated through the opening, it is unnecessary to open the container when operating the operation means. Therefore, labor can be suppressed. However, there is a risk that a foreign object such as a wire may be inserted through the opening.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine O1, the container has one outer surface formed of the first region and the second region positioned closer to the object than the first region. Since the opening is formed in the container, the opening can be arranged at a position recessed from the outer surface of the container, and a step (connection surface) connecting the first area and the second area can be arranged around the opening. As a result, the distance to the opening can be increased and the position of the opening can be made difficult to visually recognize. As a result, it is possible to prevent a foreign object such as a wire from being inserted into the container through the opening. That is, it is possible to suppress fraudulent activity.

In the gaming machine O1, at least part of a connecting surface connecting the first area and the second area is inclined downward from the first area toward the second area. O2.

Here, considering heat radiation from the object (control board), the container (board box) needs to secure a distance (internal space) between the object (control board) and the inner surface. On the other hand, if the opening is too far from the operating means, operability will deteriorate. Therefore, by forming the opening in the second region, it is possible to easily ensure the operability of the operating means, and to prevent foreign matter such as a wire from being inserted into the container through the opening as described above. . However, when operating the operating means, the operator's hand interferes with the step (connecting surface) between the first area and the second area, which interferes with the operation. Therefore, there is a possibility that the operability of operating the operating means may deteriorate.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine O2, since at least a part of the connecting surface connecting the first area and the second area is inclined downward from the first area toward the second area, the gaming machine In addition to the effect of O1, the downward slope expands the space connected to the second region, and the operability when operating the operating means can be improved.

In the gaming machine O2, the second area is formed as a generally rectangular area in a front view, the length dimension along one direction being larger than the length dimension along the other direction orthogonal to the one direction, and the operation means includes an operation A game machine O3 characterized in that the operation element is operated by being inserted and displaced, and the attitude of the operation element when the operation element is inserted into the operation means or pulled out from the operation means is the attitude along the other direction. .

According to the gaming machine O3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine O2, the second area is a generally rectangular area in a front view whose length dimension along one direction is greater than the length dimension along the other direction perpendicular to the one direction. , and the operation means is operated by inserting and displacing the operation element, and the attitude of the operation element when the operation element is inserted into or pulled out from the operation means is the attitude along the other direction. A space can be secured on the opposite side of the gripping surface by directing the surface for gripping the child in the longitudinal direction of the second region. Therefore, when the manipulator is inserted into or pulled out from the manipulator, it is possible to prevent the fingers holding the manipulator from interfering with the container. As a result, it is possible to improve the operability when operating the operating means.

In the gaming machine O3, the opening is disposed on one side of the longitudinal center of the second area, and the connection surface located on one longitudinal side of the second area extends from the first area to the second area. A gaming machine O4 characterized by being inclined downward toward an area.

According to the game machine O4, in addition to the effects of the game machine O3, the opening is arranged on one side of the longitudinal center of the second area, and the connection surface located on the one longitudinal side of the second area is the second area. Since it is inclined downward from the first region to the second region, it is possible to suppress interference of fingers other than the gripping fingers with the container when gripping and displacing the manipulator. For example, when the manipulator is gripped with the index finger and thumb and the manipulator is displaced (for example, rotated), the space formed by the downward inclination of the connection surface and the space on the other side in the longitudinal direction in the second region are A space for moving the little finger side can be secured, and interference between the little finger side and the container can be suppressed. As a result, it is possible to improve the operability when operating the operating means.

A game machine O5 characterized in that, in the game machine O4, the connection surface is formed on the other side in the longitudinal direction of the second area.

According to the gaming machine O5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine O4, the connecting surface is formed on the other side in the longitudinal direction of the second area. Means can be protected. For example, it is possible to suppress damage to the operating means by suppressing interference with other members during manufacturing. In addition, it is possible to prevent a foreign object such as a wire from being inserted into the container through the opening by making it difficult to visually recognize the position of the opening.

In addition, since the connection surface is formed on the other side in the longitudinal direction of the second region, the area of the first region can be expanded accordingly. The volume of the internal space of the container can be increased.

In any one of the game machines O3 to O5, the connection surface is formed on one side in the short direction of the second area, and the connection surface is not formed on the other side in the short direction of the second area. A gaming machine O6 characterized by:

According to the game machine O6, in any one of the game machines O3 to O5, a connection surface is formed on one side in the short direction in the second area, and no connection surface is formed on the other side in the short direction in the second area. , the other side of the second region in the short direction can be opened. Therefore, when the manipulator is gripped with fingers and operated (insertion into the operating means, withdrawal from the manipulating means, or displacement (eg, rotation) of the manipulator), the gripped fingers (eg, thumb and forefinger) The above-described open space can be used as a space for arranging or displacing a finger different from the finger. As a result, it is possible to improve the operability when operating the operating means.

In any one of game machines O3 to O6, the connecting surface located on one side in the longitudinal direction in the second area is inclined downward from the first area toward the second area, and the other connecting surfaces are inclined downward from the first area. A gaming machine O7 characterized by being substantially orthogonal to the area and the second area.

According to the game machine O7, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines O3 to O6, the connection surface located on one side in the longitudinal direction in the second area is inclined downward from the first area toward the second area, and the other Since the connection surface of is substantially perpendicular to the first region and the second region, it is possible to secure the effect of downwardly sloping the connection surface while coping with heat dissipation from the object (control board). The volume of the internal space can be secured. That is, it is possible to minimize the reduction in the volume of the internal space of the container due to the downward inclination of the connection surface.

The game machine O4 or O5 comprises a base body on which the container is disposed, and a rotating shaft that rotatably supports the base body, and the longitudinal direction of the second region is the axial direction of the rotating shaft. It is characterized by being substantially orthogonal and having a lateral direction substantially parallel to the axial direction of the rotating shaft, and one longitudinal side of the second region being arranged farther from the rotating shaft than the other longitudinal side. game machine O8.

According to the game machine O8, in addition to the effects of the game machine O4 or O5, the base body on which the container is arranged and the rotation shaft rotatably supporting the base body are provided, and the longitudinal direction in the second region is provided. The direction is substantially orthogonal to the axial direction of the rotating shaft, the lateral direction is substantially parallel to the axial direction of the rotating shaft, and one longitudinal side of the second region is arranged farther from the rotating shaft than the other longitudinal side. Therefore, when the operating means is operated in the space formed by rotating the base body around the rotation axis, the space formed by the downward inclination of the connecting surface can be effectively utilized. That is, it is possible to secure a space for allowing a worker's (operator's) hand to access the operation means by the amount of the space formed by the downward inclination of the connecting surface. As a result, it is possible to improve the operability when operating the operating means.

<Regarding the concept of the invention with the substrate boxes A100, A2100, A3100, and A4100 as examples>
A game machine having a container for containing an object, comprising: a display device arranged in a game area; A gaming machine P1 characterized in that information can be displayed on the display device.

2. Description of the Related Art A game machine having a substrate box (accommodating body) that accommodates a control substrate (object) is known (Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2015-205029). However, in the above-described conventional game machine, when the operating means are arranged on the control board (object), there is a problem that it is difficult to grasp the operating state of the operating means.

According to the gaming machine P1, it is provided with a display device arranged in a game area and operation means arranged on an object and formed to be operable, and information regarding operation of the operation means can be displayed on the display device. Therefore, it is possible to easily grasp the operation state of the operation means based on the display of the display device. In addition, by arranging the display means in the game area, the display means can also be used as a device for displaying information about the game, and the product cost can be reduced accordingly.

A game machine P2, wherein the container is formed to be displaceable in the game machine P1.

According to the gaming machine P2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine P1, since the container is formed displaceable, the container is arranged (displaced) at a position where the operation means can operate while viewing the display device. be able to. As a result, it is possible to operate while confirming the display (information), so that operability can be improved and operation errors can be suppressed. On the other hand, when the operation means is not operated, it can be arranged at a predetermined position (for example, a position that is difficult to be visually recognized from the outside), so that it is possible to suppress fraud.

In the game machine P2, the containing body can be displaced to a position where the surface of the containing body on which the operating means is arranged and the display surface of the display device can be viewed at the same time. P3.

According to the game machine P3, in addition to the effects of the game machine P2, the container can be displaced to a position where the surface on which the operating means of the container are arranged and the display surface of the display device can be viewed simultaneously. Therefore, it is possible to easily perform the work of operating the operating means while checking the display on the display device. As a result, improvement in operability and suppression of erroneous operations can be achieved more reliably.

In the game machine P3, the container is rotatably pivotally supported, and the operation means is arranged farther from the center of the container than the center of the container.

According to the gaming machine P4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine P3, the container is rotatably pivotally supported, and the operation means is arranged farther from the center of the container than the center of the container. In a state in which the container is displaced (rotated) to a position where the surface on which the operation means of the container are arranged and the display surface of the display device are visible at the same time, the operation means is moved to a position farther from the outer edge of the main body of the game machine. can be placed in Therefore, it is possible to prevent the fingers operating the operation means from interfering with the outer edge of the game machine main body.
As a result, operability can be improved.

In the gaming machine P4, the operating means is composed of a plurality of operating means, and the second operating means, which is operated more frequently than the first operating means, is farther from the pivotally supported position than the first operating means. A gaming machine P5 characterized in that it is arranged in the .

According to the game machine P5, in addition to the effects of the game machine P4, the operation means are composed of a plurality of means, and the second operation means, which has a higher frequency of operation than the first operation means, is operated more frequently than the first operation means. Since it is arranged on the far side from the pivotally supported position, the frequently operated operating means (first operating means) can be arranged at a position farther from the outer edge of the game machine main body. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the finger from interfering with the outer edge of the main body of the game machine when operating the operating means (first operating means) with high operating frequency. As a result, operability can be improved.

<Regarding the concept of the invention with the substrate boxes A100, A2100, A3100, and A4100 as examples>
A gaming machine comprising a container for containing an object, comprising an operating means disposed on the object and formed to be operable, wherein one or more electrical connection lines are connected to the object, and the A game machine Q1 characterized in that whether or not the operation means can be operated is changed according to the state of connection of an electrical connection line to the object.

2. Description of the Related Art A game machine having a substrate box (accommodating body) that accommodates a control substrate (object) is known (Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2015-205029). However, in the above-described conventional game machine, when the operation means is provided on the control board (object), there is room for improvement in terms of whether or not the operation means can be operated. That is, if operation is permitted regardless of the state of connection of one or more electrical connection lines to an object, there is a risk that the operation means will be more likely to be operated illegally. If the operation is prohibited regardless of the state, there is a risk that the workability of the operation associated with the operation of the operation means will be deteriorated.

According to the game machine Q1, an operation means is provided on an object and formed to be operable, one or more electrical connection lines are connected to the object, and the electrical connection line is connected to the object. Since whether or not the operation means can be operated is changed according to the state, fraud can be suppressed and workability can be improved.

A gaming machine Q2 characterized in that, in the gaming machine Q1, the container is formed to be displaceable.

According to the game machine Q2, in addition to the effects of the game machine Q1, the container is displaceable, so that the container can be arranged (displaced) at a position where the operation means can be easily operated.
As a result, operability can be improved. On the other hand, when the operation means is not operated, it can be arranged at a predetermined position (for example, a position that is difficult to be visually recognized from the outside), so that it is possible to suppress fraud. In this case, when displacing the container, at least one electrical connection wire is released (pulled out) from the object, so whether or not the operation means can be operated is changed according to the connection state of the electrical connection wire. This configuration is particularly effective in suppressing fraud and improving workability.

In the game machine Q1 or Q2, the operation of the operating means is permitted in a state in which at least a predetermined electrical connection line among the electrical connection lines is connected to the object. Q3.

According to the gaming machine Q3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine Q1 or Q2, the operation of the operating means is permitted in a state where at least a predetermined electrical connection line among the electrical connection lines is connected. It is possible to suppress fraud and improve workability. That is, if the predetermined electrical connection line is not connected to the object, the operation of the operating means is prohibited, so that fraud can be suppressed. On the other hand, if the connection of a predetermined electrical connection line to the object is secured and fraud can be suppressed, the operation means can be used even if other electrical connection lines are released (pulled out) from the object. By permitting the operation, it is possible to improve workability (ensuring versatility).

In particular, in a configuration in which the container is made displaceable, another electrical connection line released (unplugged) from the object in order to displace the container (i.e., arrange it for easy operation) can be connected to the container. After displacing the other electrical connection line that has been released (pulled out), for example, by interposing an extension line between the object and the other electrical connection line in order to allow the operation of the operation means avoids the trouble of reconnecting to the object.

In the game machine Q1 or Q2, when at least one of the electrical connection lines is disconnected from the object, the operation of the operating means is prohibited. Q4.

According to the game machine Q4, in addition to the effects of the game machine Q1 or Q2, when at least one of the electrical connection lines is disconnected from the object (that is, all electrical connections If the line is not connected to the object), the operation of the operating means is prohibited, so that the illegal operation of the operating means can be suppressed.

In addition, in a configuration in which the container is formed to be displaceable, another electrical connection line released (pulled out) from the object in order to displace the container (that is, to arrange it so that it is easy to operate) is connected to the container. After displacing , for example, by interposing an extension wire between the object and another electrical connection line and reconnecting the released (disconnected) other electrical connection line to the object, the operation Since it is possible to allow the operation of the means, it is possible to perform work by operating the operation means.

<Regarding the concept of the invention using the substrate boxes A3100 and A4100 as examples>
A game machine having a container for containing an object, comprising an operating means disposed on the object and formed to be operable, the container being formed to be displaceable and arranged during a game. The game machine R1 is characterized in that it can be displaced to a position where the operation means is easier to operate than the position.

2. Description of the Related Art A game machine having a substrate box (accommodating body) that accommodates a control substrate (object) is known (Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2015-205029). However, in the above-described conventional game machine, when the operating means is arranged on the control board (object), there is a problem that the operability of the operating means is insufficient.

According to the game machine R1, the operation means arranged on the object and formed to be operable is provided, and the container is formed to be displaceable, and the operation means is easier to operate than the position where it is arranged during the game. Since the position can be displaced, the operability of the operating means can be improved.

In the game machine R1, the container is rotatably pivotally supported and is displaced by rotation about the pivotally supported portion.

According to the game machine R2, in addition to the effects of the game machine R1, the container is rotatably pivotally supported and displaced by rotation about the pivotally supported portion, so that the container is displaced. Structure can be simplified. As a result, product costs can be reduced.

In the game machine R1 or R2, the game machine R3 is characterized in that, in the position where the container is disposed during the game, a separate member faces the operation means.

According to the game machine R3, in addition to the effects of the game machine R1 or R2, the container faces the operation means at the position where the container is arranged during the game, so that the operation means is illegally operated. can be suppressed.

In the gaming machine R3, the operating means is operated by inserting and displacing an operator, and in a state in which the operator is inserted, the operator is brought into contact with the separate member to operate the operating means. The game machine R4 is characterized in that the container cannot be displaced to the position where it is disposed during the game.

According to the game machine R4, in addition to the effects of the game machine R3, the operation means is operated by inserting the operator and displacing it, and when the operator is inserted, the operator contacts another member. By being in contact, the containing body cannot be displaced to the position where it is disposed during a game, so that it is possible to prevent forgetting to pull out the manipulator. Therefore, illegal use of the operator can be suppressed.

<Characteristic AA group> (Informs that the final display mode has been displayed within the effect period by repeatedly hitting the button)
It has an operating means operable by a player, an effect execution means capable of executing an effect based on the operation of the operating means within an effective period, and an effective period setting means capable of setting the effective period. In the gaming machine, the effect executing means can execute a first effect as the effect after the effective period has reached at least a first state based on the operation of the operating means during the effective period. and the valid period is variably set so as to be in the first state when it is determined that the first effect is to be executed by the effect executing means. A gaming machine AA1 characterized by:

Conventionally, when a special symbol lottery is executed, the lottery result is notified (stopped display) through a special symbol fluctuation period of a predetermined period, and after the special symbol lottery is executed, the lottery result is displayed. Many devices are devised so that the player does not get tired of the game early by executing various effects (variation effects) using the period until the stop display (special symbol fluctuation period). Among them, there is an effect (so-called continuous-hit effect) in which the player operates the operating means a plurality of times to change the display mode.

In the gaming machine configured in this manner, the presentation mode can be changed by the player's own operation, so that the interest in the game can be improved.

However, in the above-described repeated hitting effect, for example, the number of times (upper limit number of times) that the display mode can be changed in the repeated hitting effect is set in advance according to the result of the special symbol lottery. No matter how many times the player operates the operation means within the operation valid period in which the operation is set to be effective, when the display mode (upper limit display mode) changed by the preset upper limit number of times is displayed, Further, there is a problem that the display mode cannot be changed any more, and the remaining period of the operation effective period at the time when the upper limit display mode is displayed cannot be used for presentation. In addition, in general, when the result of the special symbol lottery is a big hit, the number of times (upper limit number of times) that the display mode can be changed in the continuous hit effect is larger than when it is a loss, In addition, it is configured so that the player cannot grasp the upper limit number of times set in the continuous hitting effect this time, and by making the player willingly operate the operation means, it is configured to improve the interest of the game. However, in this case, even though the upper limit display mode is displayed, the player continues to operate the operating means until the valid operation period elapses, and the operating means is operated multiple times. There is a problem that the display mode is not changed even though the operation is performed, and the player's motivation to play is lowered.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the enjoyment of a game by increasing the motivation of the player to play the game. there is

According to the gaming machine AA1, when it is determined that the first effect is to be executed by the effect executing means, the valid period is set so as to be in the first state. Willingly as determined to be carried out. There is an effect that the operation means can be operated and the amusement of the game can be improved.

Moreover, since the first performance can be executed even if the preset effective period does not pass, the performance executed by the performance execution means is delayed and the performance effect is lowered. has the effect of being able to suppress

The gaming machine AA1 has an operation determination means capable of determining the operation content of the operation means within the valid period, and the effect executing means, when the determination result of the operation determination means is a specific determination result, A gaming machine AA2 characterized by being capable of executing the first effect.

According to the gaming machine AA2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine AA1, when the determination result of the operation determination means is a specific determination result, the first effect can be executed. Therefore, it is possible to motivate the player to operate the operating means so as to obtain a specific determination result, thereby enhancing the interest in the game.

The game machine AA2 has an operation frequency measuring means capable of measuring the operation frequency of the operation means within the valid period, and the operation determination means determines that the operation frequency measured by the operation frequency measuring means is a specific operation frequency. A game machine AA3 characterized in that it is possible to determine that it is the specific determination result when it becomes.

According to the game machine AA3, in addition to the effects of the game machine AA2, when the number of times the operation means is operated reaches the specific operation number, the operation determination means determines that the result is a specific determination result. On the other hand, there is an effect that the operation means can be operated so that the specified number of operations can be performed quickly, and the interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, by intentionally operating the operating means, the number of operations becomes the specific number of operations, so that it is determined that the result of determination is a specific determination result. It is possible to suppress the fact that the determination result is not obtained and the desire to operate is lowered.

In the gaming machine AA2 or AA3, the effect execution means can execute the effect in a performance mode including at least a first mode and a second mode variable from the first mode, and the operation determination means The game machine AA4 is characterized in that it determines the content of the operation for the operation means after the performance is executed in the second mode.

According to the game machine AA4, in addition to the effects of the game machine AA2 or AA3, the operation determination means determines based on the operation contents after the effect mode of the effect executed by the effect execution means is changed to the second mode. is executed, the game can be played while expecting that the effect executed by the effect executing means will change to the second mode. Therefore, there is an effect that the production effect can be enhanced and the interest in the game can be improved.

The gaming machine AA5, wherein the gaming machine AA4 has a suggesting means capable of suggesting that the effect mode of the effect executed by the effect executing means is the second mode.

According to the gaming machine AA5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine AA4, the suggesting means suggests that the performance is being executed in the second mode, so it is possible to provide an effect that is easy for the player to understand. There is

<Characteristic AB group> (display control of random display)
Discriminating means capable of performing discrimination, display means for displaying identification information for indicating the discrimination result by the discriminating means, and benefits advantageous to the player when specific identification information of the display means is displayed a symbol display means capable of displaying a plurality of different symbols on the display means; and a plurality of displays capable of displaying the plurality of symbols. display position setting means capable of setting a position; and pattern determination means for determining types of the patterns to be displayed at the plurality of display positions by the pattern display means, wherein the pattern determination means determines the plurality of display positions. A game characterized in that the types of symbols to be displayed at predetermined display positions among the positions are determined, and the types of symbols to be displayed at the remaining display positions are determined based on the determined types of symbols. Machine AB1.

Conventionally, when a special symbol lottery is executed, the lottery result is notified (stopped display) via a special symbol fluctuation period of a predetermined period, and after the special symbol lottery is executed, the lottery result is displayed. Many devices are devised so that the player does not get tired of the game early by executing various productions (variation production) using the period until the stop display (special symbol fluctuation period). Among them, by randomly displaying a plurality of types of icons at a plurality of locations on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81, there is a configuration that enables execution of a variety of effects.

In the pachinko machine 10 capable of executing such an effect, in order to prevent the player from easily predicting the effect mode of the icon display effect, the locations where each icon is displayed in the icon display effect, A plurality of performance pattern data with different types of icons to be displayed are prepared in advance, and the performance mode of the icon display performance to be executed is determined according to the lottery result of the special pattern. However, in the case of using the method of preparing a plurality of effect pattern data in advance, there is a problem that the amount of effect data to be stored in advance increases according to the number of effect patterns.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of executing a suitable effect while suppressing an increase in the amount of effect data.

According to the gaming machine AB1, it is possible to determine the types of symbols to be displayed at the remaining display positions based on the types of symbols to be displayed at the predetermined display positions. There is an effect that it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of executing a presentation.

The gaming machine AB1 has pattern type order storage means for pre-storing the types of the plurality of patterns in a specific order, and the pattern determination means determines the specific order stored in the pattern type order storage means. The gaming machine AB2 is characterized in that the types of the symbols to be displayed at the remaining display positions are determined based on the order.

According to the gaming machine AB2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine AB1, the types of symbols to be displayed at the remaining display positions are determined based on a predetermined specific order, so the types of symbols are determined. There is an effect that it is possible to simplify the processing for

In the gaming machine AB2, the symbol type order storage means stores at least a first order and a second order different from the first order as the specific order. Game machine AB3.

According to the game machine AB3, in addition to the effects of the game machine AB2, since a plurality of orders are stored in advance in the symbol type order storage means, the order used when the symbol type is determined by the symbol determination means can be determined. By making them different, it is possible to execute a variety of presentations, and there is an effect that the presentation effect can be enhanced.

In the gaming machine AB3, the type of the symbols included in the first order and the type of at least a part of the types of the symbols included in the second order are different. .

According to the gaming machine AB4, different symbol types are determined depending on whether the symbol types are determined based on the first order or based on the second order. There is an effect that rich production can be executed and the production effect can be enhanced.

In the gaming machine AB4, the symbol determination means can determine the type of the symbol based on the second order when the determination result of the determination means is a determination result in which the specific identification information is displayed. A gaming machine AB5 characterized by:

According to the gaming machine AB5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine AB4, when the determination result is that a privilege is given by the privilege giving means, the type of symbol can be determined based on the second order. The player can play while expecting to see the types of symbols included only in the order. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from becoming bored with the game early.

<Characteristic AC group> (Button delay effect)
An operation means that can be operated by a player, a measurement means that can measure a predetermined period based on the operation of the operation means, and the length of the period measured by the measurement means satisfies a first condition. and a condition setting means capable of setting at least one of a plurality of different conditions as the first condition.

Conventionally, by changing only the execution timing without changing the contents of each effect to be executed (display effect that changes the display mode, sound effect that outputs sound), the player is given a sense of incompatibility. There is a gaming machine that executes an effect (so-called delayed effect) that enhances the effect. This delayed effect allows only the player who notices a sense of incompatibility to understand that the delayed effect has been executed, and as a benefit, benefits advantageous to the player (for example, winning a jackpot) are given with a high probability. In recent years, it has been used as a production to show that

However, as long as it is used as an effect in which a privilege that is advantageous to the player is given with a high probability, the occurrence frequency (execution frequency) is low, and even if the player plays the game all day long, it will be executed only once or twice. It was something. In contrast to the delay effects that are executed less frequently and the content of each effect does not change, conventionally, the effect data corresponding to the pattern of each delay effect, that is, the display effect is displayed after the frame button 22 is operated. Display data including display image data corresponding to the waiting period until the performance is executed, and effect data dedicated to the delay effect having audio data including the sound corresponding to the waiting period until the sound effect is performed are prepared in advance. Therefore, there is a problem that the capacity of the effect data increases with respect to the execution frequency.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION The present invention has been made to solve the problems exemplified above, and an object of the present invention is to execute the above-described delayed effect without increasing the capacity of the effect data.

According to the game machine AC1, by setting different conditions by the condition setting means, it is possible to easily change the period from the operation of the operating means to the execution of the effect, so that the effect rich in variations can be achieved. There is an effect that it can be executed without increasing the volume of performance data.

The game machine AC1 has a first display mode display means capable of displaying on the display means a first display mode indicating that the operation means has been operated based on the operation of the operation means. The game machine AC2 is characterized in that the first display mode display means is constructed so that the display is continued at least until the effect execution means executes the effect.

According to the gaming machine AC2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine AC1, even if there is an interval before the performance is executed, the first display mode is continuously displayed, so that the operation of the operating means can be performed by the gaming machine. It is possible to identify that the player is accepted by the player, so that the player can play the game with peace of mind.

The gaming machine AC1 or AC2 has valid period setting means for setting the operation of the operating means to be valid, and the effect executing means is configured to be able to execute the effect even after the valid period has passed. A gaming machine AC3 characterized by:

According to the game machine AC3, in addition to the effect of the game machine AC1 or AC2, since the effect can be executed even after the effective period has passed, there is an effect that the interest can be improved.

<Characteristic AD group> (gauge decrease control)
Determination means capable of performing determination, display means for displaying identification information for indicating the result of determination by the determination means, and when the identification information for indicating the specific result of determination is displayed on the display means , a privilege granting means capable of imparting a privilege advantageous to a player, wherein an effect executing means capable of executing a variable effect corresponding to numerical information, and subtracting or adding said numerical information. and setting means capable of determining, for each number of times, number information to be subtracted or added to one time corresponding to the number of times determined by the number of times determining means. A gaming machine AD1 characterized by:

Conventionally, when a special symbol lottery is executed, the lottery result is notified (stopped display) through a special symbol fluctuation period of a predetermined period, and after the special symbol lottery is executed, the lottery result is displayed. Many devices are devised so that the player does not get tired of the game early by executing various effects (variation effects) using the period until the stop display (special symbol fluctuation period). Among them, predetermined number information is displayed, and based on the result of adding or subtracting the number information a plurality of times, an addition/subtraction suggestion effect is executed to suggest the lottery result.

In a game machine capable of executing such an addition/subtraction suggestion performance, a predetermined lottery result is displayed by varying the number of additions or subtractions of numerical information in order to suggest the lottery result by the performance result of the addition/subtraction suggestion performance. Therefore, there is a problem that the content of the presentation of the moderation suggestive presentation becomes one-pattern, and the presentation effect is lowered. Also, if the amount of addition or subtraction is determined at random each time the numerical information is added or subtracted, the effect result cannot suggest the result of the lottery, and meaningless effect is executed. There is a problem that the effect is lowered.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine that enhances the enjoyment of games by enhancing the effect of presentation using numerical information. do.

According to the game machine AD1, after determining the number of times the number information is subtracted or added, the number information to be subtracted or added each time is set. Appropriate number information can be set. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to enhance the production effect of the production that changes the number information.

In the game machine AD1, the effect execution means is configured to be capable of executing an effect corresponding to a predetermined lower limit value or upper limit value of the numerical information when the determination result by the determination means is the specific determination result. A game machine AD2 characterized in that it is a game machine AD2.

According to the gaming machine AD2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine AD1, it is possible for the player to predict the determination result of the determination means according to the variable result of the numerical information. can be brought to attention. Therefore, there is an effect that the production effect can be enhanced.

In the gaming machine AD1 or AD2, after determining the number of times the minimum number information is subtracted or the number of times the minimum number information is added among the number information to be subtracted or added at one time, subtraction or addition is performed. The gaming machine AD3 is characterized in that the number information to be subtracted or the number information to be added to the remaining number of times is set based on the number information that can be added.

According to the game machine AD3, in addition to the effects of the game machine AD1 or AD2, since the number of times the minimum number information is subtracted or added is determined first, the number information to be subtracted or added exceeding the lower limit or upper limit is determined. is set.

<Characteristic AE group> (symbol display control)
Discriminating means capable of performing discrimination, display means for displaying identification information for indicating the discrimination result by the discriminating means, and benefits advantageous to the player when specific identification information of the display means is displayed wherein the identification information is provided with a plurality of predetermined identification symbols, and the gaming machine creates a symbol corresponding to each of the identification symbols. Determinable pattern determining means, and pattern updating means capable of displaying the pattern newly determined by the pattern determining means based on the establishment of a predetermined condition in correspondence with the corresponding identification symbol. A gaming machine AE1 characterized by having:

Conventionally, when a special symbol lottery is executed, the lottery result is notified (stopped display) through a special symbol fluctuation period of a predetermined period, and after the special symbol lottery is executed, the lottery result is displayed. Many devices are devised so that the player does not get tired of the game early by executing various effects (variation effects) using the period until the stop display (special symbol fluctuation period). Among them, identification information (for example, numbers) indicating the lottery result of the special pattern and characters identifiable by the player are associated with each other. there is something

In a game machine capable of executing such a variable effect, a plurality of characters are variably displayed, and thus the effect of the effect can be enhanced more than the effect in which only numbers are variably displayed. Since the combination with the identification information is fixed, there is a problem that when the game is played continuously, the novelty is lost and the performance effect is lowered.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a game machine which enhances the performance effect by providing a novel performance to a player.

According to the gaming machine AE1, the pattern determination means determines the pattern corresponding to the identification symbol, and the pattern update means displays the new pattern, so that the pattern display that surprises the player can be executed. , there is an effect that the production effect can be enhanced.

In the gaming machine AE1, the identification information is composed of a plurality of symbol rows for displaying the symbols corresponding to the identification symbols in a predetermined order, and the privilege imparting means includes a predetermined combination of the identification symbols. A gaming machine AE2 is characterized in that the privilege is provided when the identification information is stopped and displayed in AE2.

According to the game machine AE2, in addition to the effects of the game machine AE1, a privilege is given when a predetermined identification symbol is stopped and displayed, so it is determined which identification symbol the pattern corresponding to is displayed. By doing so, it is possible to provide the enjoyment of predicting the identification symbols that can be stopped and displayed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from becoming bored with the game during the period until the identification information is stop-displayed, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

The game machine AE3 is characterized in that the game machine AE1 or AE2 has specific effect executing means capable of executing a specific effect when the combination of the symbols stopped and displayed as the identification information is a specific combination. .

According to the gaming machine AE3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine AE1 or AE1 or 2, a specific effect is executed according to the combination of symbols. There is an effect that the game can be played while making the player interested in each of the symbols, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

<Characteristic AF group> (Pseudo-outfall fixed fluctuation)
discrimination means capable of performing discrimination; display means for displaying identification information for indicating the discrimination result of the discrimination means; and dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying the identification information on the display means. a bonus giving means capable of giving a bonus that is advantageous to a player when the identification information for indicating the specific determination result is stopped and displayed after the identification information is dynamically displayed; an effect execution means capable of executing an effect within a dynamic display period in which the identification information is dynamically displayed by the target display means, wherein the identification information is dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means. dynamic display mode determination means for determining a dynamic display mode, wherein the dynamic display mode determination means determines whether the determination result is a specific determination result or when the determination result is other than the specific determination result. A specific period dynamic display mode composed of the same dynamic display period can be determined, and in the specific period dynamic display mode, a common specific effect is executed until the execution of the dynamic display is started. A gaming machine AF1 characterized by being configured as follows.

Conventionally, there is a storage means capable of holding and storing a predetermined number (four) of the right to execute a special symbol lottery (lottery right of a special symbol lottery). Thereby, even when the lottery right (special figure reservation) of the special symbol lottery is acquired during the execution of the special pattern variation, the lottery right (special figure reservation) can be stored in the storage means. Therefore, after the special symbol variation is stopped and displayed, it is possible to immediately execute the special symbol lottery based on the lottery right stored in the storage means, so that the special symbol variation can be continuously executed. It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, the variation time of the special symbol variation for indicating the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is configured to vary according to the number of lottery rights (the number of special symbols reserved) stored in the storage means. be. Specifically, when the number of lottery rights stored in the storage means (special figure pending number) is 0 and the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is out, the long fluctuation time is performed. Some are designed to make things easier. By configuring in this way, it is possible to reduce the period in which the special symbol variation is not executed, and to suppress the decrease in the player's willingness to play due to the continuation of the state in which the special symbol variation is not performed. .

However, according to the conventional gaming machine using the above-described configuration, at the time when the long variation time lost variation is executed, the player can easily know that the lottery result of the special symbol variation being executed is lost. As a result, there is a problem that the player's willingness to play decreases during the special symbol fluctuation period.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the enjoyment of a game by increasing the motivation of the player to play the game. there is

According to the gaming machine AF1, the start of the dynamic display mode of the similar period causes the player to predict the determination result, and the player's motivation to play is reduced before the determination result is reported. There is an effect that it can be suppressed.

In the gaming machine AF1, the dynamic display mode determination means includes a first state for determining the dynamic display mode based on the determination result of the determination means, and the dynamic display mode regardless of the determination result of the determination means. A gaming machine AF2 characterized in that it is configured to be able to set a second state for determining the .

According to the gaming machine AF2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine AF1, the determination method of the dynamic display mode is switched between the first state and the second state, so that the discrimination result is identified to the player at the start of the dynamic display. There is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from making the player more likely to be discriminated against, and to make the player play the game while making the player interested in the determination result until the identification information is stopped and displayed.

In the gaming machine AF2, when the second state is set, the content of the dynamic display mode is determined by determining the determination result at a predetermined timing when the determined dynamic display mode is executed. A gaming machine AF3, characterized in that it is variable based on the determination result.

According to the game machine AF3, in addition to the effect of the game machine AF2, the content is changed based on the determination result, so that there is an effect that the game can be played in anticipation of the timing to be changed.

In the game machine AF3, a remaining period determining means capable of determining a remaining dynamic display period at the time when the determination by the determining means is executed; A gaming machine AF4 characterized by having dynamic display mode changing means for varying the target display mode.

According to the gaming machine AF4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine AF3, the dynamic display mode can be varied according to the remaining dynamic display period. There is an effect that it is possible to play the game by making the player interested in both the length of the

In any of game machines AF1 to AF4, at least a first period and a second period longer than the first period are set as dynamic display periods in which the identification information is dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means. dynamic display period setting means, wherein the dynamic display period setting means can set the first period when the determination result of the determination means is other than the specific determination result; The dynamic display mode determination means can determine the specific period dynamic display mode corresponding to the length of the first period, and the effect execution means determines the dynamic display mode in which the second period is set. A gaming machine AF5 characterized in that an effect including the dynamic display mode for the specific period can be executed as a part of the effect corresponding to the .

According to the game machine AF5, in addition to the effects of the game machines AF1 to AF4, even if a dynamic display period longer than the dynamic display period corresponding to the specific period dynamic display mode is set, the specific period Since an effect using the dynamic display mode is executed, there is an effect that the game can be played with interest in the determination result until the identification information is stopped and displayed.

In the game machine AF5, the effect executing means is capable of executing the effect in which the specific period dynamic display mode is set multiple times as the effect corresponding to the dynamic display in which the second period is set. A game machine AF6 characterized by.

According to the gaming machine AF6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine AF5, the specific period dynamic display mode can be executed multiple times for one dynamic display period, so the effect of enhancing the production effect. There is

<Characteristic AG group> (seconds management on the liquid crystal side)
In a gaming machine having a first control means for executing an effect and a second control means different from the first control means, the first control means is a first control means capable of setting the effect content of the effect. setting means; and first output means capable of outputting a first signal based on the effect set by the first setting means to the second control means, wherein the second control means 1 second effect executing means capable of executing the second effect in response to the first signal output from the output means; and a period for executing the second effect executed by the second effect executing means. and a second output means capable of outputting a second signal to the first control means when a specific condition is satisfied by the measurement means, wherein the first control means A gaming machine AG1 characterized by being capable of executing a specific effect based on the second signal output from a second output means.

Conventionally, there are gaming machines capable of executing an effect for a predetermined period in order to show the result of a special symbol lottery. In such a game machine, the player can spend a predetermined period of time until the result of the special symbol lottery is displayed while enjoying the contents of the performance to be executed, thereby preventing the player from getting tired of the game early. It was possible.

Furthermore, in recent gaming machines, as an effect for showing the result of the special symbol lottery, in addition to the liquid crystal display, it has become mainstream to execute an effect using multiple movable accessories for decoration. There is a problem that the processing content of the control device that centrally manages is increased.

The present invention has been made to solve the problems exemplified above. The purpose is to suppress concentration of processing load.

According to the game machine AG1, the first control means does not need to measure the period required for execution of the second effect, and there is an effect that the control load of the first control means can be reduced.

In the game machine AG1, the game machine AG2 is characterized in that the measuring means is configured to be able to measure the end timing of the second effect.

According to the game machine AG2, in addition to the effects of the game machine AG1, the end timing of the second effect is measured by the measuring means, so that the control for managing the end timing by the first control means becomes unnecessary. There is an effect that the control load due to can be reduced.

In the game machine AG1 or AG2, the second control means has mode variable means capable of varying the mode of the second effect when the variable condition is established, and the second output means is adapted to change the second measurement mode. When the performance period measured by the means satisfies a termination condition, an information command for indicating at least part of the performance mode of the second performance executed by the second performance execution means is also provided by the first control means. and the first control means determines the effect mode of the specific effect to be executed after the second effect based on the information command output from the second output means. A gaming machine AG3 characterized by having means.

According to the game machine AG3, in addition to the effects produced by the game machine AG1 or AG2, the first control means can determine the effect mode of the second effect that is varied by the second control means, and specified based on the result of the determination. The production mode of the production is varied. As a result, the performance effect can be enhanced.

<Characteristics AH group> (Control delay of the character by pressing the button)
Determination means capable of performing determination, display means for displaying identification information for indicating the result of determination by the determination means, and the identification information for indicating the specific result of determination by the display means is stopped and displayed. In this case, in a gaming machine having a privilege imparting means capable of imparting an advantageous privilege to a player, an operation means operable by the player and an effect can be executed based on the operation of the operation means. and a determining means capable of varying and determining the execution timing of the performance executed by the effect executing means.

Conventionally, by changing only the execution timing without changing the contents of each effect to be executed (display effect that changes the display mode, sound effect that outputs sound), the player is given a sense of incompatibility. There is a gaming machine that executes an effect (so-called delayed effect) that enhances the effect. This delayed effect allows only the player who notices a sense of incompatibility to understand that the delayed effect has been executed, and as a benefit, benefits advantageous to the player (for example, winning a jackpot) are given with a high probability. In recent years, it has been used as a production to show that

However, as long as it is used as an effect in which a privilege that is advantageous to the player is given with a high probability, the occurrence frequency (execution frequency) is low, and even if the player plays the game all day long, it will be executed only once or twice. It was something. In contrast to the delay effects that are executed less frequently and the content of each effect does not change, conventionally, the effect data corresponding to the pattern of each delay effect, that is, the display effect is displayed after the frame button 22 is operated. Display data including display image data corresponding to the waiting period until the performance is executed, and effect data dedicated to the delay effect having audio data including the sound corresponding to the waiting period until the sound effect is performed are prepared in advance. Therefore, there is a problem that the capacity of the effect data increases with respect to the execution frequency.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION The present invention has been made to solve the problems exemplified above, and an object of the present invention is to execute the above-described delayed effect without increasing the capacity of the effect data.

According to the game machine AH1, since the performance execution timing is variably determined by the determining means, there is no need to set a plurality of performance data in advance corresponding to the difference in the performance execution timing, and the data volume is increased. There is an effect that it is possible to suppress the trouble that occurs.

In the gaming machine AH1, movable means configured to be movable as the effect, and the movable means are configured to be movable in a predetermined movement pattern by the effect executing means. A gaming machine AH2 characterized by:

According to the game machine AH2, there is an effect that the interest of the player can be improved by moving the movable means.

A game machine AH3 characterized in that the game machine AH1 or AH2 has a notification mode executing means capable of executing a notification mode during a period from when the operation means is operated until the performance is started. .

According to the gaming machine AH3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine AH1 or AH2, the notification mode is executed during the period until the performance is started, so that the player can recognize that the operation of the operating means is effective. There is an effect that an easy-to-understand game can be performed.

Any one of the game machines AH1 to AH3 has timer means capable of starting time measurement based on the operation of the operation means, and the determination means determines the performance execution timing based on the time data of the timer means. A game machine AH4 characterized in that it discriminates the .

According to the game machine AH4, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines AH1 to AH3, it is possible to time the period elapsed after the operation means is operated by the time measuring means, so the period during which the operation means is operated can be counted. The execution timing of the presentation can be set according to the time, and the player can be interested in the length of the period from the operation of the operation means to the start of execution.

In the gaming machine AH4, the effect executing means comprises at least output means capable of outputting a signal instructing execution of the effect, and setting means for setting the execution of the effect based on the signal from the output means. 2. The game machine AH5, wherein the output means outputs the signal when the clock data of the clock means becomes a value corresponding to the content determined by the determination means.

According to the game machine AH5, in addition to the effects of the game machine AH4, since the signal is not output until the clock data reaches a corresponding value, the decision means determines if the execution start of the effect is executed at the timing when the signal is received. It is possible to easily execute the game at the specified timing, and there is an effect that the game can be easily controlled.

<Characteristic AI group> (crash control)
It is advantageous to a player when a discrimination means, a display means for displaying identification information for indicating a discrimination result by the discrimination means, and when the identification information for indicating a specific discrimination result is displayed on the display means. In a gaming machine having a privilege granting means capable of granting a privilege of a second setting that is executed after the first setting is executed; can be released, and the setting executing means is configured to be able to execute the first setting by the setting executing means even when the performance is not executed.

Conventionally, there are gaming machines capable of executing an effect for a predetermined period in order to show the result of a special symbol lottery. In such a game machine, the player can spend a predetermined period of time until the result of the special symbol lottery is displayed while enjoying the contents of the performance to be executed, thereby preventing the player from getting tired of the game early. It was possible.

Furthermore, in recent gaming machines, as an effect for showing the result of the special symbol lottery, in addition to the liquid crystal display, it has become mainstream to execute an effect using a plurality of movable accessories for decoration. By using the movable accessory, it is possible to provide a powerful performance to the player and enhance the performance effect.

However, in order to prevent the movable accessory from malfunctioning, if the movable accessory is not positioned at the execution position at the execution timing of the performance using the movable accessory, the movable accessory Since it is configured to prohibit the execution of the performance using the movable accessory, there is a problem that the frequency of performance of the performance using the movable accessory is lowered.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION The present invention has been made to solve the problems exemplified above, and aims to provide a game machine capable of enhancing the effect of production by suitably executing the production using movable accessories. purpose.

According to the game machine AI1, since the first setting is executed even when the performance is not executed, preparations for executing the performance can be completed early, and the performance can be executed in a short period of time. It has the effect of being able to

A game machine AI2 characterized in that the game machine AI1 is configured to be able to identify that the first setting has been executed.

According to the game machine AI2, in addition to the effect of the game machine AI1, even when the first setting is executed and the effect is not executed, the game machine AI2 makes it possible to expect the effect to be executed, thereby improving the interest. be.

The gaming machine AI1 or AI2 has movable means that can be moved as at least a part of the effect, and the first setting is to drive the driving section for moving the movable means. A gaming machine AI3 characterized by:

According to the gaming machine AI3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine AI1 or AI2, the driving unit is driven to move the movable means, but the first setting is executed even when the movable means is not moved. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the problem of early determination that the movable means is movable by the first setting.

<Characteristic AJ group> (Large set)
discrimination means capable of executing discrimination; display means for displaying an identification pattern for indicating the discrimination result of the discrimination means; and dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying the identification pattern on the display means. a benefit granting means capable of granting a benefit advantageous to a player when the identification pattern for indicating the specific determination result is displayed after the identification pattern is dynamically displayed; and the privilege granting means. and a privilege type determining means capable of determining the privilege type to be granted by the means, wherein the dynamic display means dynamically displays a pattern row composed of the plurality of identification symbols. The gaming machine comprises storage means storing identification display modes of more types than the plurality of identification patterns, and selecting the identification patterns from among the identification display modes stored in the storage means. determining means capable of determining that different identification display modes are displayed for each; A game machine AJ1 characterized by comprising an effect executing means capable of stopping and displaying the identification pattern in which the identification display mode is displayed and executing an effect corresponding to the stop-displayed identification display mode. .

Conventionally, when a special symbol lottery is executed, the lottery result is notified (stopped display) through a special symbol fluctuation period of a predetermined period, and after the special symbol lottery is executed, the lottery result is displayed. Many devices are devised so that the player does not get tired of the game early by executing various effects (variation effects) using the period until the stop display (special symbol fluctuation period). Among them, identification information (for example, numbers) indicating the lottery result of the special pattern and characters identifiable by the player are associated with each other. there is something

In a game machine capable of executing such a variable effect, a plurality of characters are variably displayed, and thus the effect of the effect can be enhanced more than the effect in which only numbers are variably displayed. Since the combination with the identification information is fixed, there is a problem that when the game is played continuously, the novelty is lost and the performance effect is lowered.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a game machine which enhances the performance effect by providing a novel performance to a player.

According to the gaming machine J1, since the presentation to be executed when the specific condition is satisfied is varied depending on the identification display mode determined by the determining means, the player is interested in the identification display mode displayed in the identification pattern. By having it held, there is an effect that the interest in the game can be improved even if the identification pattern indicating the specific determination result is not displayed.

In the game machine AJ1, when the specific condition is satisfied, the effect execution means can dynamically display the identification pattern displaying the identification display mode again after stopping and displaying the identification pattern a plurality of times. wherein the determination means is configured to be able to update the type of the identification display mode displayed in the identification pattern when the identification pattern is re-dynamically displayed by the effect execution means. A game machine AJ2 characterized in that

According to the gaming machine AJ2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine AJ1, the identification display mode is updated when the dynamic display is performed again. There is an effect that it is possible to enable the performance to be performed.

In the game machine AJ2, the effect executing means identifies, as the effect, information corresponding to the stopped identification display mode each time the identification pattern is stopped and displayed when the specific condition is satisfied. It is configured to be able to execute a possible notification effect, and is configured to be able to execute a specific effect corresponding to the identification display mode notified by the notification effect based on the establishment of the effect condition. A game machine AJ3 characterized by

According to the game machine AJ3, in addition to the effects of the game machine AJ2, the specific effect is varied depending on the identification display mode displayed each time the stop display is performed. There is an effect that the combination of aspects can be made interesting.

<Feature AK group> (Large set system derivation)
Display means for displaying a plurality of identification display modes, display control means capable of displaying a predetermined number of identification display modes on the display means, and the identification display modes of types greater than the predetermined number are stored. storage means capable of determining a predetermined number of the identification display modes to be displayed on the display means from among the identification display modes stored in the storage means; and a specific condition being established. and an effect execution means capable of executing an effect corresponding to the identification display mode displayed on the display means when the game machine AK1 is on.

Conventionally, when a special symbol lottery is executed, the lottery result is notified (stopped display) through a special symbol fluctuation period of a predetermined period, and after the special symbol lottery is executed, the lottery result is displayed. Many devices are devised so that the player does not get tired of the game early by executing various effects (variation effects) using the period until the stop display (special symbol fluctuation period). Among them, identification information (for example, numbers) indicating the lottery result of the special pattern and characters identifiable by the player are associated with each other. there is something

In a game machine capable of executing such a variable effect, a plurality of characters are variably displayed, and thus the effect of the effect can be enhanced more than the effect in which only numbers are variably displayed. Since the combination with the identification information is fixed, there is a problem that when the game is played continuously, the novelty is lost and the performance effect is lowered.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION The present invention has been made to solve the problems exemplified above, and provides a gaming machine capable of enhancing the interest of a game by providing a novel presentation to a player and enhancing the presentation effect. intended to provide.

According to the gaming machine AK1, the predetermined number of identification display modes to be displayed on the display means are determined by the determination means, and the effect corresponding to the displayed identification display modes is executed by the effect execution means, so that the display means displays the The type of identification display mode can be of interest. Therefore, there is an effect that the amusement of the game can be improved.

The game machine AK1 has dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying the predetermined number of identification display modes determined by the determination means, and the effect execution means dynamically The game machine AK2 is characterized in that it is constructed so as to be able to execute an effect corresponding to the identification display mode stopped and displayed at a predetermined position after being displayed.

According to the game machine AK2, in addition to the effects of the game machine AK1, the stop position of the identification display mode can also be made interesting, so there is an effect that the amusement of the game can be further improved.

In the game machine AK1 or AK2, the dynamic display means is configured to be able to dynamically display the identification display mode again after stopping and displaying the identification display mode. A game machine AK3 characterized in that it is constructed such that the type displayed is updated when the target display is performed.

According to the gaming machine AK3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine AK1 or AK2, when the stationary display of the identification display mode is re-displayed dynamically, the type of the identification display mode is updated. Each time, the type of identification display mode to be displayed can be aroused new interest. Therefore, there is an effect that the amusement of the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine AK2 or AK3, the effect executing means can execute, as the effect, a notification effect in which information corresponding to the stopped and displayed identification display mode can be identified each time the identification display mode is stopped and displayed. and is configured to be able to execute a specific effect corresponding to the identification display mode notified by the notification effect based on establishment of the effect condition. .

According to the gaming machine AK4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine AK2 or AK3, the stop-displayed identification display mode is notified, so that an effect that is easy for the player to understand can be executed. Therefore, there is an effect that the production effect can be enhanced.

<Feature AL group> (Large set system derivation 2)
display means for displaying a plurality of identification display modes; display control means capable of displaying a predetermined number of identification display modes on the display means; storage means for storing a plurality of types of the identification display modes; determination means capable of determining a predetermined number of the identification display modes to be displayed on the display means from among the identification display modes stored in the storage means; and display on the display means within a predetermined period of time. and effect executing means capable of executing a specific effect when the number of types of the identified display modes obtained reaches a predetermined number.

Conventionally, when a special symbol lottery is executed, the lottery result is notified (stopped display) through a special symbol fluctuation period of a predetermined period, and after the special symbol lottery is executed, the lottery result is displayed. Many devices are devised so that the player does not get tired of the game early by executing various effects (variation effects) using the period until the stop display (special symbol fluctuation period). Among them, a plurality of identification information (for example, numbers) for indicating the lottery result of special symbols are variably displayed, and the result of the special symbol lottery is notified to the player by the combination of the identification information that is stopped and displayed. The variable display of identification information is also interesting.

In a game machine capable of executing such a variable performance, while a plurality of pieces of identification information are being variably displayed, the variable performance is performed while expecting that the identification information indicating the lottery result advantageous to the player is stopped and displayed. Although it can be enjoyed, if the statically displayed identification information is a combination indicating a lottery result other than winning, interest in the statically displayed identification information is lost and the performance effect is reduced. There was a problem that

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION The present invention has been made to solve the problems exemplified above, and provides a gaming machine capable of enhancing the interest of a game by providing a novel presentation to a player and enhancing the presentation effect. intended to provide.

According to the gaming machine AL1, when the number of types of the displayed identification display modes reaches a predetermined number, the specific effect is executed. Since there is a possibility that the specific effect will be executed until the period elapses, there is an effect that the effect of the effect can be enhanced and the amusement of the game can be improved.

The game machine AL1 has dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying the predetermined number of identification display modes determined by the determination means, and the effect execution means dynamically The game machine AL2 is characterized in that it is constructed so as to be able to execute an effect corresponding to the identification display mode stopped and displayed at a predetermined position after being displayed.

According to the game machine AL2, in addition to the effects of the game machine AL1, the stop position of the identification display mode can also be made interesting, so there is an effect that the amusement of the game can be further improved.

In the gaming machine AL1 or AL2, the dynamic display means is configured to be able to dynamically display the identification display mode again after stopping and displaying the identification display mode. A game machine AL3 characterized in that it is configured such that the type displayed is updated when the target display is performed.

According to the gaming machine AL3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine AL1 or AL2, when the statically displayed identification display mode is re-dynamically displayed, the type of the identification display mode is updated. Each time, the type of identification display mode to be displayed can be aroused new interest. Therefore, there is an effect that the amusement of the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine AL2 or AL3, the effect executing means can execute, as the effect, a notification effect in which information corresponding to the stopped and displayed identification display mode can be identified each time the identification display mode is stopped and displayed. and is configured to be able to execute a specific effect corresponding to the identification display mode notified by the notification effect based on establishment of the effect condition. .

According to the gaming machine AL4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine AL2 or AL3, the stop-displayed identification display mode is notified, so that an effect that is easy for the player to understand can be executed. Therefore, there is an effect that the production effect can be enhanced.

A gaming machine Z1 characterized in that, in any one of the gaming machines described above, the gaming machine is a slot machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the slot machine is "provided with variable display means for displaying the identification information in a fixed manner after dynamically displaying an identification information string consisting of a plurality of identification information, As a result, the dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has passed, and the stop time and a special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on the condition that the definite identification information of is the specific identification information. In this case, typical examples of game media include coins and medals.

A gaming machine Z2 characterized in that the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine in any one of the gaming machines described above. Above all, the basic structure of a pachinko game machine is provided with an operating handle, and in response to the operation of the operating handle, balls are shot into a predetermined game area, and the balls are ejected into actuating openings arranged at predetermined positions in the game area. For example, the identification information dynamically displayed on the display means is determined and stopped after a predetermined period of time, with the requirement of winning a prize (or passing through an activation opening). In addition, when a special game state occurs, a variable prize winning device (specific prize winning port) arranged at a predetermined position in the game area is opened in a predetermined manner to allow the balls to win prizes, and a value corresponding to the number of prizes won Values (including not only prize balls but also data written to magnetic cards, etc.) can be given.

A gaming machine Z3 characterized in that, in any one of the gaming machines described above, the gaming machine is a combination of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the integrated game machine is "provided with variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string consisting of a plurality of identification information, and an operation means for starting (such as an operation lever) The identification information starts to change due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined period of time has passed. a special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on condition that the fixed identification information at the time of stop is the specific identification information; the ball is used as a game medium; A gaming machine configured to require a predetermined number of balls at the start of dynamic display, and to pay out a large number of balls at the occurrence of a special game state.
<Others>
2. Description of the Related Art Some gaming machines such as pachinko machines have operation means, and there are gaming machines that execute various settings based on the operation result of the operation means. In such a game machine, an attempt was made to improve interest by operating the operation means (for example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-249877).
However, further enhancement of interest is required.
The present technical idea was made in order to solve the above-described problems, and aims to provide a gaming machine capable of enhancing the interest of the player in the game.
<Means>
In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine of technical idea 1 comprises a discrimination means capable of performing discrimination, a display means for displaying identification information for indicating the discrimination result by the discrimination means, and a display means specified in the display means. an operation means that can be operated by a player, and an operation means that can be operated by a player; It has a performance executing means capable of executing a performance based on the operation of the means, and a determining means capable of varying and determining the execution timing of executing the performance by the performance executing means.
The gaming machine according to technical idea 2 is the gaming machine according to technical idea 1, wherein movable means is configured to be movable as the effect, and the movable means moves in a predetermined movable pattern by the effect executing means. It is constructed so that it can be moved by
A gaming machine according to technical idea 3 is the gaming machine according to technical idea 1 or 2, in which a notification mode can be executed in a period from when the operation means is operated until the performance is started. have the means.
<effect>
According to the gaming machine described in Technical Idea 1, a determination means capable of performing determination, a display means for displaying identification information for indicating a determination result by the determination means, and a specific determination result on the display means When the identification information for indicating is stopped and displayed, a privilege granting means capable of granting a privilege advantageous to the player is provided, and the operation means operable by the player and the operation means are operated. It has a performance executing means capable of executing a performance based on the event, and a determining means capable of varying and determining the execution timing of executing the performance by the performance executing means.
As a result, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.
According to the gaming machine described in technical idea 2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine described in technical idea 1, the following effects are achieved. That is, the movable means configured to be movable as the performance, and the movable means are configured to be movable in a predetermined movement pattern by the performance executing means.
As a result, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.
According to the gaming machine described in technical idea 3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine described in technical idea 1 or 2, the following effects are achieved. That is, it has a notification mode executing means capable of executing the notification mode during a period from when the operation means is operated until the performance is started.
As a result, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

10 Pachinko machines (game machines)
22 frame button (operation means)
81 Third pattern display device (display means)
S2755 Design updating means
S3151 Design determining means

Claims (3)

a determination means capable of performing determination;
display means for displaying identification information for indicating the result of discrimination by the discrimination means;
a game machine having privilege giving means capable of giving a privilege advantageous to a player when the identification information for indicating the specific determination result is stopped and displayed on the display means,
an operation means that can be operated by a player;
an effect executing means capable of executing an effect based on the operation of the operating means;
and determining means capable of varying and determining execution timing for executing the effect by the effect executing means. a movable means configured to be movable as the performance;
2. A game machine according to claim 1, wherein said movable means is configured to be movable in a predetermined movable pattern by said effect execution means. 3. The gaming machine according to claim 1, further comprising notification mode executing means capable of executing a notification mode during a period from when said operating means is operated until said performance is started.

Images